JP6934495B2 - Pachinko machine - Google Patents

Description

The present invention relates to a gaming machine such as a pachinko gaming machine (generally also referred to as a “pachinko machine”) or a rotating cylinder type gaming machine (generally also referred to as a “slot machine”).

Conventionally, as seen in Patent Document 1, for example, there is known a gaming machine in which a special game is performed in which a large number of prizes can be obtained when a winning prize is won.

That is, in the gaming machine described in Patent Document 1, first, it is determined whether or not the gaming ball has won a prize at the starting port. Then, when a game ball wins a prize at the starting port, a determination process for determining whether or not a hit is won is performed. At this time, the special symbol is fluctuated and displayed for a predetermined fluctuating time on a predetermined display. Then, when a predetermined fluctuation time elapses, the above special symbol is stopped and displayed in a display mode indicating that the player has won the prize, and the opening / closing member of the large winning opening is operated to increase the number of players. We will provide a special game in which the award can be obtained.

Japanese Unexamined Patent Publication No. 2010-187791

With such conventional gaming machines, there is a concern that the interest in gaming will decline.

The present invention has been made in view of such circumstances, and an object of the present invention is to provide a gaming machine capable of suppressing a decline in gaming interest.

Means 1: Judgment means for making a judgment and
A privilege granting means capable of granting a privilege to a player based on a predetermined result obtained by the determination by the determination means, and a privilege granting means.
It is equipped with a reception production execution means that generates a reception production that allows production reception.
As the reception effect, at least the first reception effect and the second reception effect are prepared.
The first reception production is
If the operation in a set time that effect accepted is permitted is not detected, which do not generate the same effect as the reception after effect that appears when there is said detection,
The second reception production is
Even if the operation is not detected within the set time allowed for the production reception , the same effect as the post-reception effect that appears when the effect is detected is generated.
Of the first reception effect and the second reception effect, in the first reception effect, a message is not displayed as character information indicating that the operation should be performed, but the second reception effect is performed. In, a message is displayed as text information to the effect that the operation should be performed.
When the effect reception is performed based on the fact that the operation is detected within the set time, the message display is not displayed at the stage where the set time has not yet elapsed based on the effect reception. Although it can be displayed, if the post-acceptance effect is started without the operation being detected within the set time, the effect reception is not allowed and the post-acceptance effect is started. Is not hidden and is displayed without causing any display change triggered by the elapse of the set time.
Moreover,
When the reception effect occurs, an allowable sound output means capable of outputting a reception allowable sound suggesting that the effect reception is in an acceptable state or the effect reception is in an acceptable state is provided.
As the reception allowable sound, a message sound that utters a word to the player to operate and a non-message sound that does not utter any word are prepared.
When the first reception effect occurs, the message sound may not be audibly output and the non-message sound may be audibly output as the reception allowable sound corresponding to the first reception effect, but the second reception When an effect occurs, not only the message sound but also the non-message sound can be audibly output as the reception allowable sound corresponding to the second reception effect.
Moreover,
It is possible to display a simulated image display that imitates the target of the operation, and at least the first mode and the second mode are prepared as modes for displaying the simulated image display.
When the image display is displayed in the first aspect within the set time that allows the reception of the effect, the post-acceptance effect that appears when the operation is detected even if the operation is not detected as the reception effect. There is always a type of reception effect that produces the same effect as
When the pachinko image display is displayed in the second aspect within the set time in which the effect reception is allowed, the post-reception effect that appears when the operation is detected even if the operation is not detected as the reception effect. There are cases where a reception effect of the type that generates the same effect as is occurring, and a type of reception effect that does not generate the same effect as the post-reception effect that appears when the operation is not detected. A gaming machine characterized by both being in a situation where it is occurring.

According to the present invention, the deterioration of the game entertainment can be suppressed.

It is a front view of the pachinko machine which is one Embodiment of this invention. It is a right side view of a pachinko machine. It is a left side view of a pachinko machine. It is a rear view of a pachinko machine. It is a perspective view of a pachinko machine seen from the front right. It is a perspective view of a pachinko machine seen from the front left. It is a perspective view which looked at the pachinko machine from the back. It is a perspective view of a pachinko machine seen from the front in a state where the door frame is opened from the main body frame and the main body frame is opened from the outer frame. It is an exploded perspective view which disassembled the pachinko machine into a door frame, a game board, a main body frame, and an outer frame and looked at from the front. It is an exploded perspective view of a pachinko machine disassembled into a door frame, a game board, a main body frame, and an outer frame and viewed from behind. It is a front view of the outer frame in a pachinko machine. It is a right side view of the outer frame. It is a perspective view which looked at the outer frame from the front. It is a perspective view which looked at the outer frame from the back. It is an exploded perspective view which disassembled the outer frame and looked at from the front. (A) is a perspective view of a portion of the outer frame side upper hinge member in the outer frame as viewed from below with the left frame member omitted, and (b) is an exploded perspective view showing (a) in an exploded manner. be. (A) is an enlarged perspective view showing a state in which the main body frame side upper hinge member of the main body frame is removed with respect to the outer frame side upper hinge member of the outer frame, and (b) is an enlarged perspective view showing the outer upper hinge member. It is an enlarged perspective view which shows the state which the upper hinge member on the main body side is attached to. It is explanatory drawing which shows the action of the lock member in the outer frame. It is a front view of the door frame in a pachinko machine. It is a right side view of a door frame. It is a left side view of a door frame. It is a rear view of a door frame. It is a perspective view which looked at the door frame from the right front. It is a perspective view which looked at the door frame from the left front. It is a perspective view which looked at the door frame from the back. 19 is a cross-sectional view taken along the line AA in FIG. 19 is a cross-sectional view taken along the line BB in FIG. 19 is a cross-sectional view taken along the line CC in FIG. It is an exploded perspective view which disassembled the door frame for each main member and looked at from the front. It is an exploded perspective view which disassembled the door frame for each main member and looked at from the back. (A) is a perspective view of the door frame base unit in the door frame as viewed from the front, and (b) is a perspective view of the door frame base unit as viewed from the back. It is an exploded perspective view which disassembled the door frame base unit for each main member and looked at from the front. It is an exploded perspective view which disassembled the door frame base unit for each main member and looked at from the back. (A) is a front view of the effect operation unit in the door frame, and (b) is a right side view of the effect operation unit. (A) is a perspective view of the effect operation unit viewed from the front, and (b) is a perspective view of the effect operation unit viewed from the back. It is explanatory drawing which saw the effect operation unit from the direction which the central axis of the operation button extends. FIG. 3 is a cross-sectional view taken along the line DD in FIG. 34 (a). It is sectional drawing cut along the line EE in FIG. 34 (b). (A) is a cross-sectional view taken along the line FF in FIG. 34 (b), and (b) is an enlarged view of part A in (a). It is an exploded perspective view of the effect operation unit disassembled for each main member and viewed from the front. It is an exploded perspective view which disassembled each main member of an effect operation unit and looked at from the back. (A) is an exploded perspective view of the operation button disassembled and viewed from the front, and (b) is an exploded perspective view of the operation button disassembled and viewed from the rear. It is an exploded perspective view of the decorative board unit of the production operation unit disassembled and viewed from the front. It is explanatory drawing which shows the state which pressed the operation button in the cross-sectional view of the effect operation unit of FIG. 37. In (a), in the view of the effect operation unit viewed from the extending direction of the central axis of the operation button, a part of the operation button is cut out and the part to be hidden by the first button decoration part of the operation button, the button frame, or the like is shown. It is explanatory drawing which shows, (b) is explanatory drawing which shows the part to be concealed by the 1st button decoration part of the operation button, the button frame, etc. in the cross-sectional view of the effect operation unit. (A) is an explanatory view showing the appearance of the effect operation unit as a perspective view seen from the front, and (b) is an explanatory view showing the appearance of the effect operation unit from the direction in which the central axis of the operation button extends. .. (A) is a front view of the door frame left side unit in the door frame, (b) is a perspective view of the door frame left side unit as viewed from the front, and (c) is a perspective view of the door frame left side unit as viewed from the back. It is a perspective view. It is an exploded perspective view of the door frame left side unit disassembled and viewed from the front. It is an exploded perspective view of the door frame left side unit disassembled and viewed from behind. FIG. 4 is a cross-sectional view taken along the line LL in FIG. 47 (a). (A) is a front view of the door frame right side unit in the door frame, (b) is a perspective view of the door frame right side unit as viewed from the front, and (c) is a perspective view of the door frame right side unit as viewed from the back. It is a perspective view. It is an exploded perspective view of the door frame right side unit disassembled and viewed from the front. It is an exploded perspective view of the door frame right side unit disassembled and viewed from behind. FIG. 5 is a cross-sectional view taken along the line MM in FIG. 51 (a). (A) is a cross-sectional view taken along the line NN in FIG. 51 (a), and (b) is a cross-sectional view taken along the line OO in FIG. 51 (a). (A) is a front view of the door frame top unit in the door frame, (b) is a perspective view of the door frame top unit as viewed from the front, and (c) is a perspective view of the door frame top unit as viewed from the back. Is. It is an exploded perspective view which disassembled the door frame top unit and looked at from the front. It is an exploded perspective view which disassembled the door frame top unit and looked at from the back. FIG. 5 is a cross-sectional view taken along the line PP in FIG. 56. It is a front view of a game board. It is an exploded perspective view of the game board disassembled for each main configuration and viewed from the front. It is an exploded perspective view of the game board disassembled for each main configuration and viewed from behind. It is a front view of the game board excluding the front unit and the back unit. FIG. 6 is an exploded perspective view of the game board of FIG. 63 as viewed from the front by disassembling. FIG. 6 is an exploded perspective view of the game board of FIG. 63 as viewed from behind by disassembling. It is explanatory drawing which enlarges and shows the part of the function display unit from the front with the game board attached to the pachinko machine. FIG. 6 is an exploded perspective view of a game panel having a form different from that of FIG. 63, viewed from the front together with a front component, a substrate holder, and a main control unit. FIG. 67 is an exploded perspective view of FIG. 67 viewed from behind. It is a block diagram of a main control board, a payout control board, and a peripheral control board. It is a block diagram which shows the continuation of FIG. 69. It is a schematic diagram of various detection signals input / output to a game ball rental device connection terminal board which relays an electrical connection between a payout control board which constitutes a main board, a CR unit, and a frequency display board. It is a block diagram which shows the continuation of FIG. 69. It is a block diagram which shows the outline of the peripheral control MPU. It is a block diagram around the sound source built-in VDP in a liquid crystal display and a sound control unit. It is a block diagram which shows the power-source system of a pachinko machine. It is a block diagram which shows the continuation of FIG. 75. It is a circuit diagram which shows the circuit of a main control board. It is a circuit diagram which shows the power failure monitoring circuit. It is a circuit diagram which shows the communication interface circuit between the main control board and the peripheral control board. It is a circuit diagram which shows the circuit of the payout control unit and the like. It is a circuit diagram which shows the payout control input circuit. It is a circuit diagram which shows the continuation of FIG. 81. It is a circuit diagram which shows the payout motor drive circuit. It is a circuit diagram which shows the CR unit input / output circuit. It is an input / output diagram which shows various input / output signals with a main control board, and various output signals to an external terminal board. It is a figure which shows the arrangement of the output terminal of an external terminal board. It is a circuit diagram which shows the liquid crystal module circuit which draws the display area of the liquid crystal display device on the upper plate side. This is a table showing an example of various commands transmitted from the main control board to the payout control board. This is a table showing an example of various commands transmitted from the main control board to the peripheral control board. It is a table which shows the continuation of various commands transmitted from the main control board of FIG. 89 to the peripheral control board. It is a table which shows an example of various commands from a payout control board received by a main control board. It is a flowchart which shows an example of the processing at the time of power-on of the main control side. It is a flowchart which shows the continuation of the process at the time of power-on of the main control side of FIG. It is a flowchart which shows an example of the timer interrupt processing on the main control side. It is a flowchart which shows an example of the processing at the time of power-on of a peripheral control unit. It is a flowchart which shows an example of peripheral control part V blank interrupt processing. It is a flowchart which shows an example of the peripheral control part 1ms timer interrupt processing. It is a flowchart which shows an example of the peripheral control part command reception interrupt processing. It is a flowchart which shows an example of the peripheral control part power failure advance notice signal interrupt processing. It is a flowchart which shows an example of the LOCKN signal history creation process. It is a flowchart which shows an example of connection failure determination processing. It is a flowchart which shows an example of the connection recovery processing. It is a timing chart explaining the timing of outputting the connection confirmation signal to the INIT terminal of the upper plate side liquid crystal transmitter IC. It is a flowchart which shows the procedure about the special symbol and special electric accessory control processing (step S114). It is a flowchart which shows the procedure about the 1st start port passing process (step S5232). It is a flowchart which shows the procedure about the 2nd start port passing process (step S5234). It is a flowchart which shows the procedure about the 1st special symbol process process (step S5238). It is a flowchart which shows the procedure about the 1st special symbol normal process (step S5280). It is a flowchart which shows the procedure about the jackpot determination process (step S5305). (A) is a diagram showing a jackpot determination table, and (B) and (C) are diagrams showing a symbol determination table. It is a flowchart which shows the procedure about the 1st special symbol stop symbol setting process (step S5281). It is a flowchart which shows the procedure about the 1st variation pattern setting process (step S5282). It is a flowchart which shows the procedure about the 1st special symbol variation processing (step S5283). It is a flowchart which shows the procedure about the 1st special symbol stop process (step S5284). It is a flowchart which shows the procedure about the ordinary symbol and ordinary electric accessory control processing (step S116). It is a flowchart which shows the procedure about the gate part passing process (step S5402). It is a flowchart which shows the procedure about the ordinary symbol ordinary processing (step S5403). It is a figure which shows the determination table T1 of the effect pattern (variation effect) which is referred to in the said effect symbol variation start processing in a normal game state. It is a figure which shows an example of the sound control by the fixed channel system as a comparison target with respect to this embodiment. It is a figure which shows an example of the sound definition table for realizing the sound control by a fixed channel system. It shows the relationship between the game state, the reproduced sound, and the reproduced channel. It is a timing chart which shows an example of the production time chart. It is a figure which shows an example of the sound control by the automatic channel system as this embodiment. It is a figure which shows an example of the sound definition table for realizing the sound control by an automatic channel system. It is a figure which shows the relationship with the game state, the reproduced sound, and the priority. It is a timing chart which shows an example of the production time chart. It is a figure which shows an example of the work information for automatic channel control stored in the work area for AUTO group channel control provided in the peripheral control RAM. It is a flowchart which shows an example of the search process of an empty channel at the time of performing sound control when only one AUTO group is defined in the automatic channel system. It is a figure which shows an example of the specific content of a free channel search process. It is a figure which shows an example of the specific content of a free channel search process. It is a figure which shows an example of the specific content of a free channel search process. It is a figure which shows an example of the specific content of a free channel search process. It is a figure which shows an example of the specific content of a free channel search process. It is a figure which shows an example of the specific content of a free channel search process. It is a figure which shows an example of the specific content of a free channel search process. It is a figure which shows an example of the specific content of a free channel search process. It is a figure which shows an example of the specific content of a free channel search process. It is a figure which shows an example of the specific content of a free channel search process. It is a figure which shows an example of the variation pattern of the sound control by each channel system or a combination thereof. It is a figure which shows an example of the composition table of the reproduction channel in the sound source control in this embodiment. It is a flowchart which shows an example of the procedure of the free channel search processing in the case of executing the control which outputs the sound of this embodiment. It is a figure which shows an example of the condition which selects the channel which exchanges a sound output (stops a sound reproduction) when a channel is not vacant at the time of output of a new sound in this embodiment. It is a timing chart which shows the production example for explaining the sound control of this embodiment, (A) shows the timing when a sound effect is reproduced, (B) shows the channel which each sound effect is output. It is a figure which shows an example of the priority order of the sound effect in the production example of this embodiment. It is a timing chart which shows an example of the volume change of the sound effect in the first half variation of this embodiment, (A) shows the output timing of the effect sound effect, and (B) shows the volume change of each effect sound effect. It is a figure which shows the screen composition example of the effect in the modification of this embodiment. It is a figure which shows an example of the composition table of the reproduction channel in the sound source control in the modification of this embodiment. It is a timing chart showing an example of the volume change of the sound effect in the latter half of the variation of the modification of the present embodiment, (A) shows the output timing of the effect sound effect, and (B) shows the volume change of each effect sound effect. It is a figure which shows an example of the volume control table for each channel group which shows the priority of volume (volume) control for each group in this embodiment. It is a flowchart which shows the procedure of the group volume control processing which performs sound control corresponding to the group to which the output sound of this embodiment belongs. It is a timing chart for explaining the procedure for controlling the volume in this embodiment in chronological order, (A) shows the execution timing of an effect, and (B) shows the volume of each effect. It is a figure which shows an example of the volume control table for each sound effect which shows the volume (volume) control for every total reproduction time (output time) of a sound in this embodiment. This is the first half of the flowchart showing the procedure of the volume control process for performing sound control based on the parameters set for each sound effect of the present embodiment. This is the latter half of the flowchart showing the procedure of the volume control process for performing sound control based on the parameters set for each sound effect of the present embodiment. It is a timing chart for explaining the procedure for controlling the volume in this embodiment in chronological order, (A) shows the execution timing of an effect, and (B) shows the volume of each effect. It is a figure which shows an example of a sound definition table. It is a figure which shows the notification content, the notification mode, the notification time, and the condition (cancellation condition) at which the notification is terminated for each type of the notification sound illustrated in FIG. 155. (A) is an example of processing when one notification sound belonging to the first notification group is being played and the output condition (abnormality detection) of another notification sound belonging to the first notification group is satisfied. Is a diagram. (B) is an example of processing when one notification sound belonging to the second notification group is being played and the output condition (state detection) of another notification sound belonging to the second notification group is satisfied. It is a figure which shows. (C) is an example of processing when one notification sound belonging to the third notification group is being played and the output condition (state detection) of another notification sound belonging to the third notification group is satisfied. It is a figure which shows. (A) is a diagram showing an example of processing when the output condition (state detection) of the notification sound belonging to the second notification group is satisfied while one notification sound belonging to the first notification group is being played. Is. (B) is a diagram showing an example of processing when the output condition (state detection) of the notification sound belonging to the third notification group is satisfied while one notification sound belonging to the second notification group is being played. Is. (C) is a diagram showing an example of processing when the output condition (state detection) of the notification sound belonging to the first notification group is satisfied while one notification sound belonging to the second notification group is being played. Is. (D) is a diagram showing an example of processing when the output condition (state detection) of the notification sound belonging to the second notification group is satisfied while one notification sound belonging to the third notification group is being played. Is. It is a time chart which shows an example as a mode of notifying the state of a gaming machine. It is a time chart which shows an example as a mode of notifying the state of a gaming machine. It is a time chart which shows an example as a mode of notifying the state of a gaming machine. It is a time chart which shows an example as a mode of notifying the state of a gaming machine. It is a time chart which shows an example as a mode of notifying the state of a gaming machine. It is a time chart which shows an example as a mode of notifying the state of a gaming machine. It is a figure explaining the content of the notification process under the progress of production separately for the notification state of the pachinko machine 1. It is a figure explaining the content about the process about volume adjustment. It is a figure explaining the content about the process about volume adjustment. It is a figure explaining the content about the process about volume adjustment. It is a time chart which shows an example about a channel reservation process. It is a time chart which shows an example about a channel reservation process. It is a time chart which shows an example about a channel reservation process. It is a time chart which shows an example about a channel reservation process. It is a time chart which shows an example about a channel reservation process. It is a flowchart which shows an example of the procedure about the process related to the setting of a channel restriction level. It is a figure which shows an example about the restriction content which is determined separately of a channel restriction level. It is a figure which shows another example about the restriction content which is determined separately for each channel restriction level. It is a time chart which shows an example of the allocation situation of each channel when a channel special opening process is performed. It is a time chart which shows an example of the allocation situation of each channel when the operation sound output processing under suppression is performed. It is a time chart which shows an example of the allocation status of each channel when the processing related to the channel allocation cancellation operation is performed. An example of the allocation status of each channel when a movable body abnormality is detected in the process of operating the movable decoration body according to the fluctuation pattern (effect pattern) according to the jackpot judgment, and the situation on the movable decoration body side. It is a time chart which shows. The allocation status of each channel when a movable body abnormality is detected in a process other than this process, not in the process of operating the movable decorative body according to the fluctuation pattern (effect pattern) according to the jackpot judgment, and the movable body. It is a time chart which shows an example of the situation on the decoration side. It is a time chart showing an example of the allocation status of each channel and the situation on the movable decoration side when a movable body abnormality occurs simultaneously in a plurality of movable decorations at a specific timing during the period in which the design changes. .. A time chart showing an example of the allocation status of each channel and the status on the movable decoration side when a movable body abnormality occurs in a plurality of movable decorations at two different timings during the period in which the design changes. be. It is a time chart which shows an example about the control content for realizing the automatic multiple operation function (auto continuous hit function). It is a time chart which shows an example about the display content when the operation is performed a plurality of times. It is a time chart which shows an example about the control content for realizing the automatic multiple operation function (auto continuous hit function). It is a time chart which shows the production example using the automatic multiple operation function (auto continuous hit function). It is a time chart which shows the production example using the automatic multiple operation function (auto continuous hit function). It is a front view of a gaming machine equipped with a sword production operation unit. It is a right side view of a gaming machine equipped with a sword production operation unit. It is a figure which shows an example of the effect pattern selection table in the effect mode which can execute the sword withdrawal effect, (A) is shown an example of the selection table which selects the presence or absence of the sword withdrawal preparation transition effect according to the type of a variation pattern, (B ) An example of a selection table for selecting the presence or absence of the sword-drawing effect is shown. It is a state transition diagram explaining the sword pulling operation of the sword decoration body when the aura member is provided in the sword part (sword blade part) itself, and is (A) the sword delivery state, (B) the first sword pulling state, (C) the second. Indicates the state of sword withdrawal. It is a vertical cross-sectional view explaining the operation of the aura member. It is a state transition diagram explaining the sword pulling operation of a sword decoration body when an aura member is provided in a sheath part, and shows (A) a sword delivery state, (B) a first sword pulling state, and (C) a second sword pulling state. It is a vertical cross-sectional view explaining the operation of the aura member. It is a production transition diagram of a sword-drawing production. It is a production transition diagram of a sword-drawing production. It is a production transition diagram of a sword-drawing production. It is a production transition diagram of a sword-drawing production. It is a production transition diagram of a sword-drawing production. It is a timing chart which shows the relationship between the state change timing of a sword decoration body and the operation validity period related to the operation means. This is an example of the effect transition diagram of the sword-drawing effect of the modified example 1. This is an example of the effect transition diagram of the sword-drawing effect of the modified example 1. This is an example of the effect transition diagram of the sword-drawing effect of the modified example 1. It is a timing chart which shows the relationship between the state change timing of the sword decoration body of the modification 1 and the operation timing of the operation means. It is an example of the production transition diagram of the sword pulling effect of the modification 2. It is an example of the production transition diagram of the sword pulling effect of the modification 2. It is an example of the production transition diagram of the sword pulling effect of the modification 2. It is an example of the production transition diagram of the sword pulling effect of the modification 2. It is an example of the production transition diagram of the sword pulling effect of the modification 2. It is a figure explaining the screen transition of the production display device and the operation transition of the sword decoration body in the princess reach production. It is a figure explaining the screen transition of the production display device and the operation transition of the sword decoration body in the princess reach production. It is a figure explaining the screen transition of the production display device and the operation transition of the sword decoration body in the princess reach production. It is a figure explaining the screen transition of the effect display device, the state transition of the operation button, and the operation transition of the sword decoration body in the reach effect including the operation effect of the operation button used in many ways. It is a figure explaining the screen transition of the effect display device, the state transition of the operation button, and the operation transition of the sword decoration body in the reach effect including the operation effect of the operation button used in many ways. It is a figure explaining the screen transition of the effect display device, the state transition of the operation button, and the operation transition of the sword decoration body in the reach effect including the operation effect of the operation button used in many ways. It is a figure explaining the screen transition of the effect display device, the state transition of the operation button, and the operation transition of the sword decoration body in the reach effect. It is a figure explaining the screen transition of the effect display device, the state transition of the operation button, and the operation transition of the sword decoration body in the reach effect. It is a figure explaining the screen transition of the effect display device, the state transition of the operation button, and the operation transition of the sword decoration body in the reach effect. It is a figure explaining the screen transition of the effect display device, the state transition of the operation button, and the operation transition of the sword decoration body in the reach effect. It is a figure explaining the screen transition of the effect display device, the state transition of the operation button, and the operation transition of the sword decoration body in the reach effect. It is a figure explaining the form of the sword decoration body used for the pseudo-continuous production. It is a figure which shows the production transition example of the pseudo continuous production common to all production patterns. It is a figure which shows the transition example of the effect of whether or not the operation opportunity of a sword ornament is given while the pseudo-continuous variation (re-variation) is performed. It is a figure which shows the transition example of the effect of whether or not the operation opportunity of a sword ornament is given while the pseudo-continuous variation (re-variation) is performed. It is a figure which shows the transition example of the effect of whether or not the operation opportunity of a sword ornament is given while the pseudo-continuous variation (re-variation) is performed. It is a figure which shows the transition example of the post-operation effect (drop effect of a specific decorative member SDY (sudare)) of the sword decoration body during the pseudo-continuous variation (re-variation) common to all the effect patterns. It is a figure which shows the effect transition example which is characteristic of the pseudo sword LV1 weak effect pattern and the pseudo sword LV1 strong effect pattern. It is a figure which shows the effect transition example which is characteristic of the pseudo sword LV1 weak effect pattern and the pseudo sword LV1 strong effect pattern. It is a figure which shows the production transition example which becomes a feature of the pseudo resurrection sword LV1 production pattern. It is a figure explaining the kind of production pattern which can be selected based on a variation pattern. It is an operation execution timing chart of a sword decorative body and a specific decorative member SDY (sudare accessory) in a pseudo continuous production, and shows a sword LV1 weak production pattern (sword LV1 strong production pattern). It is an operation execution timing chart of a sword decorative body and a specific decorative member SDY (sudare accessory) in a pseudo continuous production, and shows a sword LV2 weak production pattern (sword LV2 strong production pattern). It is an operation execution timing chart of a sword decorative body and a specific decorative member SDY (sudare accessory) in a pseudo continuous production, and shows a sword LV3 weak production pattern (sword LV3 strong production pattern). It is an operation execution timing chart of a sword decoration body and a specific decoration member SDY (sudare accessory) in a pseudo continuous production, and shows a pseudo sword LV1 weak production pattern (pseudo sword LV1 strong production pattern). It is an operation execution timing chart of a sword decoration body and a specific decoration member SDY (sudare accessory) in a pseudo continuous production, and shows a pseudo resurrection sword LV1 production pattern. When it is determined that either the operation button or the sword decoration is valid during the reach effect by the lottery by the peripheral control board based on the variation effect (reach effect) of the variation pattern drawn by the main control board. , It is a figure which shows the transition example of the reach effect in which the pre-operation suggestion effect of the 1st suggestion pattern is executed. When it is determined that either the operation button or the sword decoration is valid during the reach effect by the lottery by the peripheral control board based on the variation effect (reach effect) of the variation pattern drawn by the main control board. , It is a figure which shows the transition example of the reach effect in which the pre-operation suggestion effect of the 1st suggestion pattern is executed. Similar to the first suggestion pattern described above, when it is determined that either the operation button or the sword decoration is valid during the reach effect, the pre-operation suggestion effect of the second suggestion pattern is executed. It is a figure which shows the transition example. Despite the fact that the second suggestion pattern was performed as a pre-operation suggestion effect, the operation button was once enabled without the sword decoration being effective, and then the sword decoration was activated. It is a figure which shows the suggestion effect before operation of a pattern. It is a figure which shows the 1st effect mode with respect to a specific operation-related effect. It is a figure which shows the 1st effect mode with respect to a specific operation-related effect. It is a figure which shows the 2nd effect mode with respect to a specific operation-related effect. It is a figure which shows the 2nd effect mode with respect to a specific operation-related effect. It is a figure which shows the 2nd effect mode with respect to a specific operation-related effect. It is a figure which shows the 2nd effect mode with respect to a specific operation-related effect. It is a figure which shows the 3rd effect mode with respect to a specific operation-related effect. It is a figure which shows the 3rd effect mode with respect to a specific operation-related effect. It is a figure which shows the 3rd effect mode with respect to a specific operation-related effect. It is a figure which shows the 3rd effect mode with respect to a specific operation-related effect. It is a figure which shows another example of a specific operation-related effect. It is a figure explaining an example of the effect when "specific operation-related effect" is set as the effect target of the timer effect. It is a time chart explaining an example of the effect content for each type about the effect when a plurality of types (precursor effect A, B1, B2, C) are prepared as the precursor effect. It is a figure which shows the production example about the effect content when the precursor effect which is not a specific operation-related effect is performed, and the effect content when the precursor effect as a specific operation-related effect is performed. It is a figure which shows another example of the effect content when a specific operation-related effect is performed as a precursor effect. It is a figure which shows the effect example in which the button image BTG is displayed in the mode (a specific effect mode) in which a princess character is added. It is a figure which shows the effect example when the operation error occurs between the 1st operation mode and the 2nd operation mode on the player side in the effect pattern in which a specific operation-related effect is performed. It is a figure which shows the effect example when the operation error occurs between the 1st operation mode and the 2nd operation mode on the player side in the effect pattern in which a specific operation-related effect is performed. It is a figure which shows the production example when the sword decoration image SYG is displayed in a special mode. It is a figure which shows the production example when the first precursor effect is performed. It is a time chart which shows the production example when the first precursor production is performed. It is a figure which shows the specific example of the production which the degree of expectation is shown by the automatic production function. It is a figure which shows the specific example of the production which the degree of expectation is shown by the automatic production function. It is a figure which shows the specific example of the production which the degree of expectation is shown by the automatic production function. It is a figure for demonstrating the operation unification control in the state of an automatic button effect. It is a figure for demonstrating the operation unification control in the state of an automatic button effect. It is a figure for demonstrating the operation unification control in the state of an automatic button effect. It is a figure for demonstrating the stable side automatic effect processing at the time of the automatic button effect state. It is a figure for demonstrating the stable side automatic effect processing at the time of the automatic button effect state. It is a figure for demonstrating the stable side automatic effect processing at the time of the automatic button effect state. It is a figure for demonstrating the effect reception process according to the display type in the automatic button effect state. It is a figure for demonstrating the effect reception process according to the display type in the automatic button effect state. It is a figure for demonstrating the effect reception process according to the display type in the automatic button effect state. It is a figure for demonstrating the effect reception process according to the display type in the automatic button effect state. It is a figure for demonstrating the effect reception process according to the display type in the automatic button effect state. (A) is a time chart showing an effect example when the operation is performed a plurality of times in the mode of one-shot operation when it is not controlled to the automatic button effect state, and (b) is controlled to the automatic button effect state. It is a time chart which shows the production example when it is operated in the mode of long-pressing when it is not done. (A) is a time chart showing an effect example when the automatic effect function is functioning in the automatic button effect state, and (b) is a long press while the automatic effect function is functioning in the automatic button effect state. It is a time chart which shows the effect example when the operation is started in an aspect. When the automatic button effect state is controlled and the number of holdings is three, the symbol variation is started in the "first effect pattern in which the specific effect reception period in which the instruction display prompting the operation appears can be set". It is a time chart which shows the processing example when the operation (release operation) for canceling the automatic button effect state and the operation (setting operation) for setting are performed within the execution period of the symbol variation. When the automatic button effect state is controlled and the number of holdings is three, the symbol is set to "the second effect pattern (loss fluctuation) in which the specific effect reception period in which the instruction display prompting the operation appears cannot be set". A time chart showing a processing example when the fluctuation is started and an operation for canceling the automatic button effect state (release operation) or an operation for setting (setting operation) is performed within the execution period of the symbol fluctuation. be. When the automatic button effect state is not controlled, the symbol variation is started in the "third effect pattern in which the instruction display prompting the operation appears and the specific effect reception period (specific valid period) can be set", and the execution period of the symbol variation is It is a time chart which shows the processing example when the operation for setting to the automatic button effect state is performed in. It is a figure which shows the production example when the production progresses in the 3rd production pattern. It is a figure which shows the modification about the prohibition period to take "specific process which concerns production such as production setting". It is a figure which shows the modification about the prohibition period to take "specific process which concerns production such as production setting". It is a time chart which shows an example about the production process about the special production reception period. It is a time chart which shows an example about the progress of the production when the production is started after the operation while the "image suggesting the type of the operation target" is maintained as the display state. It is a figure which shows the effect display example which appears in the effect display apparatus 1600 when the effect pattern which the effect progresses in the mode shown in FIG. 285 is executed. It is a figure which shows the effect display example which appears in the effect display apparatus 1600 when the effect pattern which the effect progresses in the mode shown in FIG. 285 is executed. It is a figure which shows the example of displaying the copy image as a moving image by sequentially displaying a plurality of copy images when a specific reception effect occurs. It is a figure which shows the example of the production which appears when the operation by a player is not in time until the timing when the production reception is automatically generated arrives. It is a figure which shows the example of the production which appears when the operation by a player is not in time until the timing when the production reception is automatically generated arrives. It is a figure which shows the example of the production which appears when the operation by a player is not in time until the timing when the production reception is automatically generated arrives. It is a figure which shows the example of the 1st reception production and the 2nd reception production in which the time from the occurrence of the permissible period of production reception to the automatic generation of production reception is different. It is a figure which shows the example of the 1st reception production and the 2nd reception production in which the time from the occurrence of the permissible period of production reception to the automatic generation of production reception is different. It is a figure which shows the production example which suggests whether or not the reception production in which the "automatic production function" is enabled occurs depending on the mode of the precursor effect. It is a figure which shows the production example which suggests whether or not the reception production in which the "automatic production function" is enabled occurs depending on the mode of the precursor effect. It is a figure which shows the production example which suggests whether or not the reception production in which the "automatic production function" is enabled occurs depending on the mode of the precursor effect. It is a figure which shows the effect example which makes it possible to recognize that the "automatic effect function" is enabled only in the reception effect among the precursor effect and the reception effect. It is a figure which shows the effect example which makes it possible to recognize that the "automatic effect function" is enabled only in the reception effect among the precursor effect and the reception effect. It is a figure which shows the effect example which makes it possible to recognize that the "automatic effect function" is enabled only in the reception effect among the precursor effect and the reception effect. It is a figure for demonstrating a novel directing property using an automatic directing function. It is a time chart which shows an example of the channel allocation status. It is a time chart which shows an example of the channel allocation status. It is a time chart which shows an example of the channel allocation status. It is a time chart which shows the processing content when operating a movable decorative body when a specific condition is satisfied. It is a time chart which shows the modification example with respect to the example shown in FIG. 304. It is a time chart which shows the processing content when the timing tm1 which starts a new symbol variation comes in the situation where a specific movable ornament is in an abnormal state. It is a time chart which shows the processing content when the timing tm11 which a special effect pattern is started arrives in the situation where a specific movable decorative body is in an abnormal state. It is a time chart for demonstrating the mode when a new restoration operation time (start timing, end timing, etc. of symbol variation) arrives during execution of a restoration operation. It is a time chart for demonstrating the mode when a new restoration operation time (start timing, end timing, etc. of symbol variation) arrives during execution of a restoration operation. It is a time chart which shows an example about the process until the sword decoration body 5001 is returned to the original position. It is a time chart which shows an example about the limitation on the volume setting and the brightness setting when a penalty is generated for the operation with respect to the sword part 5010. It is a time chart which shows an example about the light emitting mode of the production lamp during the abnormality notification period corresponding to the specific abnormality detection. It is a functional block diagram explaining the structure and outline of the function for executing the effect control in this embodiment. It is a figure which shows an example of the module structure in the peripheral control part of the gaming machine of this embodiment. It is explanatory drawing which shows the basic concept of production control in the gaming machine of this embodiment. It is a figure explaining the structure until the data necessary for the production control of the gaming machine of this embodiment is acquired. It is a figure explaining the liquid crystal drawing effect of the step-up notice of this embodiment. It is a figure explaining the flow at the time of execution of the scheduler data of this embodiment. It is explanatory drawing which shows the function of the sound module of this embodiment. It is explanatory drawing which shows the function of the lamp module of this embodiment. It is a figure which shows an example of the function of the sequence control in the effect control of the gaming machine of this embodiment. It is a figure which shows an example of the function of the lamp and sound in the production control of the gaming machine of this embodiment. It is a figure which shows an example of the function such as a sound and a motor in the production control of the gaming machine of this embodiment. It is a figure which shows an example of the scheduler definition of this embodiment. It is a figure which shows an example of the operation of the accessory controlled by using the scheduler data of this embodiment. It is a figure which shows the execution timing of the advance notice effect which is executed in the series of fluctuation display from the fluctuation start to stop of the special symbol in this embodiment, and shows an example of the scheduler and the scheduler data used. It is a figure explaining the content of the scheduler data "SCH_LMP_YKK_STP" which controls the lighting / blinking of a lamp in the step-up notice of this embodiment. It is a figure explaining the content of the scheduler data "SCH_LMP_YKK_CUT" which controls a lamp in the button cut-in notice of this embodiment. It is a figure explaining the overall flow in the star character advance notice of this embodiment, and the scheduler data "SCH_MOT_YKK_HYA1" which controls a left star character. It is a figure explaining the scheduler data "SCH_MOT_YKK_HYA2" which controls the right star accessory in the star accessory notice of this embodiment. It is a figure explaining the scheduler data "SCH_MOT_YKK_HYA3" which controls the middle star accessory in the star accessory notice of this embodiment. It is a figure explaining the content of the scheduler data "SCH_MOT_YKK_LGO" which performs the motor control in the logo accessory fall notice of this embodiment. It is a drawing explaining the scheduler data which is executed when the power of the gaming machine of this embodiment is turned on. It is a figure explaining the structure for processing a command and a scheduler data in the peripheral control board of the gaming machine of this embodiment, and the relationship of these structure. It is a figure explaining the process of executing the scheduler data at the time of power-on of this embodiment. It is a figure which shows an example of the advance notice effect in a series of variation display from the change start to stop of a special symbol in this embodiment, (A) is the effect executed from the change start to the end, and executes the effect. The scheduler data for this purpose and the scheduler to be executed are shown, and (B) is a diagram for explaining the position of the hatchet accessory in the hatchet accessory fall notice. It is a figure explaining the content of the button hatchet first half fall notice scheduler data "SCH_MOT_YKK_NTA1" which controls a motor in the button hatchet first half fall notice which is the first half part of the hatchet accessory fall notice of this embodiment. It is a figure explaining the first half of the hatchet character second half fall notice scheduler data "SCH_MOT_YKK_NTA2" which controls a motor in the hatchet character second half fall notice which is the latter half part of the hatchet character fall notice of this embodiment. It is a figure explaining the latter half of the hatchet accessory latter half fall notice scheduler data "SCH_MOT_YKK_NTA2" which controls a motor in the hatchet accessory latter half fall notice which is the latter half part of the hatchet accessory fall notice of this embodiment. It is a figure explaining the liquid crystal display block data combination number table (LCD_CTL_BLOCKDATA_NO) for each variation pattern storing the combination of the liquid crystal effect block data corresponding to the variation pattern command in this embodiment. It is a figure explaining the liquid crystal symbol block data combination number table (ZUG_CTL_BLOCKDATA_NO) for each variation pattern storing the combination of the liquid crystal symbol block data corresponding to the variation pattern command in this embodiment. It is a figure explaining the sub-effect block data combination number table (SCH_CTL_BLOCKDATA_NO) for each variation pattern which stores the combination of the sub-effect block data corresponding to the variation pattern command in this embodiment. It is a figure explaining the outline of the effect control of the first half variation (normal variation 12 seconds) of the variation pattern "10H03H" in this embodiment. It is a flowchart which shows the procedure of the sub-effect block data control start processing of this embodiment. It is a flowchart which shows the procedure of the sub-effect block data control activation processing of this embodiment. It is a flowchart which shows the procedure of the sub-effect block data control update processing of this embodiment. It is a figure explaining the procedure of executing the advance notice effect in the variation display corresponding to the variation pattern "10H03H" of this embodiment, (A) is the timing to execute the advance notice effect and execution time of the advance notice effect, (B) is The scheduler data driven by each scheduler for executing the advance notice effect is shown. It is a figure explaining the relationship between the liquid crystal display block data for each variation pattern and the liquid crystal symbol block data for each variation pattern of this embodiment. It is a figure which shows the image which creates the drawing data file in the step-up effect unit (step-up 1 effect to 4 effect) by the image composition / motion creation graphic tool of the step-up notice for liquid crystal display of this embodiment. It is a figure explaining the structure of the effect block data of a step-up notice of this embodiment, (A) shows the structure of the step-up notice liquid crystal display block data, and (B) shows the structure of a step-up notice sub-effect block data. show. It is a figure which shows an example of the scheduler function for liquid crystal display of this embodiment. It is a figure which shows an example of the parameter for the scheduler function for liquid crystal display in this embodiment. It is a figure which shows an example of the parameter for the scheduler function for liquid crystal display in this embodiment. It is a figure explaining the structure of the effect switch in this embodiment. It is a figure which shows an example of the structure of the effect SW group of this embodiment. It is a figure which shows an example of the effect SW activation command table of this embodiment. It is a figure which shows an example of the step-up notice in this embodiment, (A) shows the stage where a step-up notice effect is executed, (B) shows an example of the screen displayed on the liquid crystal display device at each stage. .. It is a figure explaining the execution procedure of the step-up notice using the effect SW in this embodiment. It is a figure explaining the execution procedure of the step-up notice using the effect SW in this embodiment, (A) is the liquid crystal display effect scheduler data for executing step-up notice 1, and (B) is the step-up notice 1 liquid crystal display. A drawing image using scheduler data is shown. It is a figure explaining the master data defined on the liquid crystal effect scheduler data for each drawing division in this embodiment, and the effect SW corresponding to the replacement data to be replaced with the master data. It is a figure explaining the control procedure by the effect switch of this embodiment, and in particular, shows the evaluation procedure of setting an effect SW to ON. It is a figure explaining an example of the function defined in the effect SW command analysis module of this embodiment. It is a figure explaining the details of the structure of the effect SW information table of this embodiment, (A) is an example of the program code which defines the effect SW information table, (B) is bit assignment of effect SW control information, (C) Is a diagram showing an example of a production SW group. It is a figure which shows an example of the program code which defines the effect SW number corresponding to the effect SW in this embodiment. It is a figure which shows an example of the program data code which defines the effect SW flag and effect SW information table of this embodiment, (A) shows effect SW flag, (B) shows effect SW information table. It is a figure which shows an example of the effect SW replacement table information and the program data which defines the effect SW replacement table included in the effect SW information table of this embodiment, (A) is effect SW replacement table information, (B) is effect SW. Shows the replacement table. It is a figure which shows an example of the program data which defines the layer information table of this embodiment, (A) is a list which stores the address which stores each layer information table, (B) is the content of the layer information table (for background). Is shown. It is a figure which shows an example of the program data which defines the layer information table of this embodiment, (A) is the content of the layer information table (the first half of the notice 1), (B) is the content of the layer information table (the first half of the notice 2). show. It is a figure which shows an example of the program data which defines the liquid crystal layer table and the liquid crystal effect common block in this embodiment, (A) shows the liquid crystal layer table of the step-up notice effect, (B) shows the structure of the liquid crystal effect common block. .. It is a figure which shows an example of the program data which defines the liquid crystal display block (LCD_YKK_STEPUP_SU1-4) of each step of the step-up notice of this embodiment. It is a figure explaining the outline of the button mini character production of this embodiment. It is a figure which shows an example of the program data which defines the liquid crystal layer table corresponding to the button mini character effect in this embodiment. It is a figure which shows an example of the program data which defines the individual common block of the button mini character effect in this embodiment. It is a figure which shows an example of the program data which defines the liquid crystal display effect block data for executing the button mini character effect in this embodiment. It is a figure which shows an example of the drawing division which can be determined in the callback function at the time of the callback execution by the effect SW of this embodiment. It is a figure which shows an example of the drawing result of each layer and the drawing result of all layers at the time of executing the advance notice effect of this embodiment. It is a figure explaining an example of the common block which spans a plurality of periods of this embodiment, (A) is the execution timing of a symbol display and notice effect, (B) is the composition of the liquid crystal notice effect block by a common block, (C). Shows the configuration of the liquid crystal notice effect block by the common block spanning a plurality of periods. It is a figure explaining the conventional structure which writes an image to a frame buffer by writing the image written in each layer respectively. It is a figure explaining the procedure of converting an image file stored in an off-screen buffer in this embodiment and then writing it into a frame buffer. It is a figure explaining the procedure of temporarily storing a display list command group in this embodiment in a peripheral control RAM, and then transferring it to a sound source built-in VDP. It is a figure explaining the procedure of transferring a display list command group in this embodiment to a sound source built-in VDP without storing in a peripheral control RAM. It is a figure which shows the display example at the time of the state transition between a non-game state and a game execution state. It is a figure which shows the display example at the time of performing the expected effect that a princess character is displayed large as a background image during execution of a specific effect pattern. It is a figure which shows the display example when the help image is displayed in the state which the expectation effect shown in FIG. 378 is performed. It is a figure which shows the display example when the character image PG is displayed so that the display position is changed by the operation by a player. It is a time chart for demonstrating an example of the process when the production restriction period is generated in a non-gaming state. It is a time chart for explaining an example of the processing when the production restriction period ends early. It is a time chart showing an example of the processing related to the special period (opening-only period). It is a time chart which shows an example about the processing when a game is started when a store opening exclusive period (special period) is set. It is a time chart which shows an example about the 1st operation reception production. It is a time chart which shows an example about the 2nd operation reception production. It is a time chart which shows an example about the special operation reception production. It is a time chart which shows the mode of the channel allocation of the sound data including the acceptance allowable sound. It is a time chart which shows the mode of the channel allocation of the sound data including the acceptance allowable sound. It is a time chart which shows an example about the effect content when the low expectation suppression reception effect is executed in the automatic reception mode. It is a time chart which shows an example about the effect content when the high expectation suppression reception effect is executed in the automatic reception mode. It is a time chart which shows an example about the effect content when the high expectation suppression reception effect is executed in the automatic reception mode. It is a time chart which shows an example of the modification when the high expectation suppression reception effect is executed in the automatic reception mode. It is a time chart which shows the production example which the 1st permissible sound is output in a specific mode at the time of occurrence of "non-suppression operation reception effect (here, non-suppression / non-automatic reception effect)". It is a time chart which shows the production example in the case where the "weak suppression mode" and the "strong suppression mode" are sequentially generated in the production corresponding to the high expectation fluctuation pattern. It is a time chart which shows the production example in the case where the "weak suppression mode" and the "strong suppression mode" are sequentially generated in the production corresponding to the high expectation fluctuation pattern. It is a time chart which shows the production example in the case where the "weak suppression mode" and the "strong suppression mode" are sequentially generated in the production corresponding to the high expectation fluctuation pattern. It is a time chart which shows the effect example (movement reception effect under suppression) which appears in "when the sword decoration body 5001 is selected as an operation target" in the suppression / automatic reception effect. It is a time chart which shows the effect content which appears when the variation pattern 1 is selected in the variation pattern determination. It is a time chart which shows the effect content which appears when the variation pattern 2 is selected in the variation pattern determination. It is a time chart which shows the effect content which appears when the variation pattern 3 is selected in the variation pattern determination. It is a time chart which shows the effect content which appears when "intrinsic reception effect" is generated while the effect sound of "BGM reproduction" is set to "non-suppressed mode". It is a time chart which shows an example of the processing procedure when realizing various display effects using scenario data and blocks as a concept. It is a flowchart which shows an example about the process when the operation is not detected before and after the effect reception period (valid period). It is a flowchart which shows an example about the process when the operation is started in the "m + 1" th frame in the effect acceptance period (valid period) shown in FIG. 404. It is a flowchart which shows an example about the process when the operation is started in the "m-2" th frame in the effect reception period (valid period) shown in FIG. 404. It is a flowchart which shows an example about the process when the operation is started in the "m-2" th frame in the effect reception period (valid period) shown in FIG. 404. It is a flowchart which shows an example about the process when the operation is started from the "m-3" th frame in the effect acceptance period (valid period) shown in FIG. 404. About the effect reception period (valid period) when the timing of performing the "process of operating (setting) the operation state flag to the on state" in the frame is performed after the "judgment process related to the effect reception". It is a flowchart which shows an example. It is a figure which shows an example of the integrated image. It is a figure which shows the display example about the integrated image from the start to the end of the validity period. It is a figure which shows the display example about the integrated image from the start to the end of the validity period. It is a figure which shows an example about the production progress when the 1st validity period occurs. It is a figure which shows the modification about the production progress when the 1st validity period occurs. It is a figure which shows the modification about the production progress when the 1st validity period occurs. It is a figure which shows the modification about the production progress when the 1st validity period occurs. It is a figure which shows an example about the production progress when the 2nd validity period occurs. It is a figure which shows the modification about the production progress when the 2nd validity period occurs. It is a figure which shows the modification about the production progress when the 2nd validity period occurs. It is a figure which shows the modification about the production progress when the 2nd validity period occurs. It is a figure which shows the modification about the production progress when the 2nd validity period occurs. It is a figure explaining the modification of the effect which suggests the degree of expectation of an integrated image step by step.

[1. Overall structure of pachinko machine]
The pachinko machine 1 according to the embodiment of the present invention will be described in detail with reference to the drawings. First, the overall configuration of the pachinko machine 1 of the present embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS. 1 to 10. FIG. 1 is a front view of a pachinko machine according to an embodiment of the present invention. FIG. 2 is a right side view of the pachinko machine, FIG. 3 is a left side view of the pachinko machine, and FIG. 4 is a rear view of the pachinko machine. FIG. 5 is a perspective view of the pachinko machine viewed from the front right, FIG. 6 is a perspective view of the pachinko machine viewed from the front left, and FIG. 7 is a perspective view of the pachinko machine viewed from the back. Further, FIG. 8 is a perspective view of the pachinko machine viewed from the front with the door frame opened from the main body frame and the main body frame opened from the outer frame. FIG. 9 is an exploded perspective view of the pachinko machine disassembled into a door frame, a game board, a main body frame, and an outer frame, and FIG. 10 is an exploded perspective view of the pachinko machine as a door frame, a game board, a main body frame, and an outer frame. It is an exploded perspective view seen from the back after being disassembled into.

The pachinko machine 1 of the present embodiment includes a frame-shaped outer frame 2 installed in an island facility (not shown) of a game hall, a door frame 3 for opening and closing the front surface of the outer frame 2, and a door frame 3. The main body frame 4 which is supported so as to be openable and closable and is attached to the outer frame 2 so as to be openable and closable, and the main body frame 4 which is detachably attached from the front side and can be visually recognized from the player side through the door frame 3. It is provided with a game board 5 having a game area 5a into which a game ball is hit.

As shown in FIGS. 9 and 10, the outer frame 2 of the pachinko machine 1 includes an upper frame member 10 and a lower frame member 20 which are vertically separated and extend to the left and right, and an upper frame member 10 and a lower frame member. The left frame member 30 and the right frame member 40, which are connected to each other at both ends of the 20 and extend vertically, are provided. The upper frame member 10, the lower frame member 20, the left frame member 30, and the right frame member 40 are formed to have the same width in the front and rear. Further, the vertical lengths of the left frame member 30 and the right frame member 40 are formed longer than the left and right lengths of the upper frame member 10 and the lower frame member 20.

Further, the outer frame 2 is attached to the curtain plate member 50 which connects the lower ends of the left frame member 30 and the right frame member 40 and is attached to the front side of the lower frame member 20 and to the left end side of the upper frame member 10 in the front view. The outer frame side upper hinge member 60 and the outer frame side lower hinge member 70 attached to the upper left end side of the curtain plate member 50 and the left frame member 30 are provided. The main body frame 4 and the door frame 3 are attached to the outer frame 2 so as to be openable and closable by the outer frame side upper hinge member 60 and the outer frame side lower hinge member 70.

The door frame 3 of the pachinko machine 1 has a frame-shaped door frame base unit 100 having a through-hole 111 having a front-view outer shape extending vertically and penetrating back and forth, and a through-hole of the door frame base unit 100. A handle unit 300 that is attached to the lower right corner of the front surface below 111 and can be operated by the player to drive the game ball into the game area 5a of the game board 5, and a through hole 111 of the door frame base unit 100. The dish unit 320, which is attached to the lower part of the front surface below the door, and the player, which is attached to the center of the dish unit 320 and is attached to the center of the dish unit 320, according to the game state that changes when the game ball is driven into the game area 5a. A production operation unit 400 capable of presenting a participatory effect, and a door frame left side unit 530 attached to the front left portion on the upper side of the dish unit 320 and on the left side of the through hole 111 in the door frame base unit 100. And, the door frame right side unit 550 attached to the front right part on the upper side of the dish unit 320 and on the right side of the through hole 111 in the door frame base unit 100, the door frame left side unit 530, and the door frame right side unit 550. The door frame top unit 570 is attached to the upper part of the front surface of the door frame base unit 100 on the upper side of the door frame base unit 100.

The main body frame 4 of the pachinko machine 1 has a frame-shaped main body frame base 600 and a main body frame base 600 that can be partially inserted into the frame of the outer frame 2 and can support the outer periphery of the game board 5. It is attached to both the upper and lower ends on the left side of the front view and is rotatably attached to the outer frame side upper hinge member 60 and the outer frame side lower hinge member 70, respectively, and the door frame side upper hinge member 140 and the door frame of the door frame 3 are attached. The main body frame side upper hinge member 620 and the main body frame side lower hinge member 640 to which the lower side hinge member 150 is rotatably attached, the reinforcing frame 660 attached to the front left side surface of the main body frame base 600, and the main body frame base 600. A ball launcher 680 for driving a game ball into the game area 5a of the game board 5 and an outer frame 2 and a main body frame attached to the right side surface of the main body frame base 600 when viewed from the front. 4. And the locking unit 700 that locks between the door frame 3 and the main body frame 4, and the reverse side that is attached to the rear side along the front view upper side and the left side of the main body frame base 600 and pays out the game ball to the player side. The L-shaped payout unit 800, the board unit 900 attached to the lower part of the rear surface of the main body frame base 600, and the game board 5 attached to the rear side of the main body frame base 600 so as to be openable and closable. It includes a back cover 980 that covers the rear side.

The payout unit 800 of the main body frame 4 is attached to the upper part of the inverted L-shaped payout unit base 801 attached to the rear side of the main body frame base 600 and the payout unit base 801 and extends to the left and right open upward. A ball tank 802 that stores game balls supplied from island equipment that is not shown in a box shape, and a game ball that is attached to the payout unit base 801 under the ball tank 802 and the game balls in the ball tank 802 are viewed to the left in the front view. A tank rail 803 extending to the left and right to guide, a ball guiding unit 820 attached to the rear surface of the upper left side of the front view of the payout unit base 801 and guiding the game ball from the tank rail 803 downward in a serpentine manner, and a ball guiding unit 820. The game balls that are detachably attached from the payout unit base 801 on the lower side and are guided by the ball guide unit 820 are paid out one by one based on the instruction from the payout control board 951 housed in the payout control board box 950. The payout device 830 and the game ball attached to the rear surface of the payout unit base 801 and paid out by the payout device 830 are guided downward, and the game ball is moved according to the storage state of the game ball in the upper plate 321 in the plate unit 320. It was discharged from the upper full tank path unit 850 to be discharged from either the normal discharge port 850d or the full tank discharge port 850e, and the normal discharge port 850d of the upper full tank path unit 850 attached to the lower end of the payout unit base 801. The normal guide path 861 that guides the game ball forward and guides it from the front end to the through ball passage 273 of the door frame 3 and the game ball released from the full tank discharge port 850e are guided forward and the door frame 3 is full from the front end. It is provided with a lower full tank path unit 860 having a full tank guide path 862 for guiding to the tongue ball receiving port 274.

The board unit 900 of the main body frame 4 is attached to the rear side of the main body frame base 600 on the left side of the front view of the board unit base 910 attached to the rear side of the main body frame base 600 and the lower part for bass inside. It is mounted on the rear side of the speaker unit 920 having the speaker 921, the power supply board box 930 which is mounted on the right side of the front view on the rear side of the board unit base 910 and houses the power supply board inside, and the rear side of the speaker unit 920. The interface control board box 940 in which the interface control board is housed, and the payout control board 951 which is mounted across the power supply board box 930 and the interface control board box 940 and controls the payout of the game ball are housed inside. The payout control board box 950 and the like are provided.

As shown in FIGS. 9 and 10, the game board 5 of the pachinko machine 1 divides the outer circumference of the game area 5a into which the game ball is hit, and divides the game ball launched from the ball launcher 680 into the upper part of the game area 5a. A front component 1000 having an outer rail 1001 and an inner rail 1002 to guide the player, and a flat plate-shaped game panel 1100 attached to the rear side of the front component 1000 and partitioning the rear end of the game area 5a. There is.

In the pachinko machine 1 of the present embodiment, when the player rotates the handle 302 with the game ball stored in the upper plate 321, the ball launching device 680 causes the game ball to have a strength corresponding to the rotation angle of the handle 302. It is driven into the game area 5a of the game board 5. Then, when the game balls driven into the game area 5a are received in the winning opening, a predetermined number of game balls are paid out to the upper plate 321 by the payout device 830 according to the received winning opening. Since the player's interest can be enhanced by paying out the game ball, the game ball in the upper plate 321 can be driven into the game area 5a, and the player can enjoy the game.

[2. Overall composition of the outer frame]
The outer frame 2 of the pachinko machine 1 will be described with reference to FIGS. 11 to 16. FIG. 11 is a front view of the outer frame of the pachinko machine, and FIG. 12 is a right side view of the outer frame. Further, FIG. 13 is a perspective view of the outer frame viewed from the front, and FIG. 14 is a perspective view of the outer frame viewed from the back. FIG. 15 is an exploded perspective view of the outer frame viewed from the front by disassembling the outer frame. FIG. 16A is a perspective view of a portion of the outer frame side upper hinge member in the outer frame as viewed from below with the left frame member omitted, and FIG. 16B is an exploded perspective view showing (a) in an exploded manner. It is a figure. The outer frame 2 is attached to an island facility (not shown) in which a pachinko machine 1 is installed, such as a game hall.

As shown in the figure, the outer frame 2 connects the upper frame member 10 and the lower frame member 20 which are vertically separated and extend to the left and right, and both ends of the upper frame member 10 and the lower frame member 20. A left frame member 30 and a right frame member 40 extending to the left frame member 30 are provided. The upper frame member 10, the lower frame member 20, the left frame member 30, and the right frame member 40 are formed to have the same width in the front and rear. Further, the vertical lengths of the left frame member 30 and the right frame member 40 are formed longer than the left and right lengths of the upper frame member 10 and the lower frame member 20. Further, the outer frame 2 is assembled so that the left and right end surfaces of the upper frame member 10 and the lower frame member 20 and the side surfaces of the left frame member 30 and the right frame member 40 facing outward in the left-right direction are flush with each other. Has been done.

Further, the outer frame 2 includes an outer frame side upper hinge member 60 attached to the front left end side of the upper frame member 10, a lock member 66 attached to the lower surface of the outer frame side upper hinge member 60, and the like. The curtain plate member 50 includes an upper portion on the left end side of the front view and an outer frame side lower hinge member 70 attached to the left frame member 30. The main body frame 4 and the door frame 3 can be opened and closed by the outer frame side upper hinge member 60 and the outer frame side lower hinge member 70 of the outer frame 2.

Further, the outer frame 2 is attached to the curtain plate member 50 which connects the lower ends of the left frame member 30 and the right frame member 40 to each other and is attached to the front side of the lower frame member 20, and is attached to the rear side of the curtain plate member 50. A curtain plate reinforcing member 80 whose both ends are attached to the left frame member 30 and the right frame member 40, respectively, a flat plate-shaped left sliding member 81 attached to a position on the upper surface of the curtain plate member 50 to the left from the center of the left and right, and a curtain. A flat plate-shaped right-sliding member 82 attached to a position near the right end on the upper surface of the plate member 50 is provided. The curtain plate reinforcing member 80 is formed of a solid member (for example, wood, plywood, etc.) and is attached to the lower frame member 20, the left frame member 30, and the right frame member 40.

Further, the outer frame 2 includes an upper frame member 10 and a left frame member 30, an upper frame member 10 and a right frame member 40, a lower frame member 20 and a left frame member 30, and a lower frame member 20 and a right frame member 40, respectively. It includes a connecting member 85 that is connected. Further, the outer frame 2 is attached to the inside (left side surface side) of the right frame member 40, and the upper hook hook member 90 and the lower hook hook member 91 to which the hook 703 for the outer frame of the locking unit 700, which will be described later, is locked. , Prepared.

[2-1. Upper frame member]
The upper frame member 10 of the outer frame 2 is formed of a solid (solid) material (for example, wood, plywood, etc.) having a predetermined thickness. The upper frame member 10 is provided with an engaging notch 11 that penetrates vertically and is recessed toward the center side in the left-right direction at the center in the front-rear direction at both left and right ends. The upper left connecting member 85A and the upper right connecting member 85B of the connecting member 85, which will be described later, are mounted in the engaging notch 11. Further, the upper frame member 10 is provided with mounting steps 12 recessed from the general surface on the upper surface and the front surface of the left end portion in the front view. An outer frame side upper hinge member 60 is attached to the attachment step portion 12.

[2-2. Lower frame member]
The lower frame member 20 of the outer frame 2 is made of a solid (solid) material (for example, wood, plywood, etc.) having a predetermined thickness. The lower frame member 20 is formed so that the left and right lengths and the upper and lower thicknesses are the same as the left and right lengths and the upper and lower thicknesses of the upper frame member 10, and the front and rear widths of the upper frame member 10 are the same. It is formed longer than the width before and after. The lower frame member 20 is provided with an engaging notch 21 that penetrates vertically and is recessed toward the center side in the left-right direction at a position closer to the rear side than the center in the front-rear direction at both left and right ends. The lower left connecting member 85C and the lower right connecting member 85D of the connecting member 85, which will be described later, are mounted in the engaging notch 21.

Further, the lower frame member 20 includes front end notches 22 recessed rearward from the front surfaces of both left and right ends. In the lower frame member 20, the width in the front-rear direction from the rear end of the front end notch portion 22 to the rear surface of the lower frame member 20 is formed to have the same dimensions as the width in the front-rear direction of the upper frame member 10. In the state where the lower frame member 20 is assembled to the outer frame 2, a portion between the left and right front end notches 22 is inserted into the curtain plate member 50.

[2-3. Left frame member and right frame member]
The left frame member 30 and the right frame member 40 of the outer frame 2 extend vertically with a constant cross-sectional shape, and are formed of an extruded metal material such as an aluminum alloy. The left frame member 30 and the right frame member 40 are formed in a shape symmetrical to each other in a plan view. When the left frame member 30 and the right frame member 40 are assembled as the outer frame 2, the left frame member 30 and the right frame member 40 are recessed inward from a position rearward to the center in the front-rear direction to the vicinity of the rear end on the outer side surface in the left-right direction. It is provided with recesses 31 and 41 and protrusions 32 and 42 that bulge from the opposite side surfaces of the recesses 31 and 41 and have a hollow inside. The strength and rigidity of the left frame member 30 and the right frame member 40 are increased by the protrusions 32 and 42. Further, in the protruding portions 32 and 42, the lower left lateral fixing portion 88 on the rear side of the upper left connecting member 85A and the upper right connecting member 85B described later of the connecting member 85 is inserted and attached.

Further, the left frame member 30 and the right frame member 40 are formed with a plurality of grooves extending vertically on the surface thereof. With these plurality of grooves, when the pachinko machine 1 is installed or transported in an island facility such as a game hall, the pachinko machine 1 can be easily held by a worker and the pachinko machine 1 can be easily held. It is possible to enhance the design of the appearance of the machine 1.

[2-4. Curtain board member]
The curtain plate member 50 of the outer frame 2 is formed in a box shape with the rear side open. The curtain plate member 50 has a rear extending portion 51 extending rearward in a flat plate shape near the left end of the front view on the upper surface, and a U-shape having a size that allows a game ball to pass from the left end of the rear extending portion 51. A left discharge hole 52 that is notched and penetrates vertically, and a right discharge hole 53 that penetrates vertically on the right side of the left discharge hole 52 in the rear extension portion 51 so that the game ball can pass through. A standing wall portion 54 extending upward from the rear end of the upper surface of the curtain plate member 50 including the rear end of the rear extending portion 51 in a flat plate shape, and a standing wall portion 54 protruding forward from the vicinity of the upper end of the standing wall portion 54 so that the front surface is upward. It is provided with a return portion 55, which is inclined toward the rear toward the rear.

The curtain plate member 50 is a lower hinge member 70 on the outer frame side so that the lower hinge member 70 on the outer frame side is placed on the upper surface of the front side of the rear extension portion 51 and the upper surface of the rear extension portion 51. A horizontal portion 71, which will be described later, is attached. Further, the left discharge hole 52 of the curtain plate member 50 is formed at a position corresponding to the discharge hole 74 described later of the outer frame side lower hinge member 70 in a state of being assembled to the outer frame 2. Further, the right discharge hole 53 is formed at a position on the right side of the outer frame side lower hinge member 70 in a state of being assembled to the outer frame 2. The right discharge hole 53 is formed larger than the left discharge hole 52.

Further, the curtain plate member 50 is inclined so that the upper surface on the right side of the rear extending portion 51 is lower on the front end side. Further, the curtain plate member 50 has a left mounting portion 56 for mounting the left sliding member 81 on a portion on the right side of the rear extending portion 51 on the upper surface and a right mounting portion for mounting the right sliding member 82 near the right end on the upper surface. A unit 57 and a unit 57 are provided. The lower surface of the main body frame 4 is placed on the upper surface of the curtain plate member 50 via the left sliding member 81 and the right sliding member 82.

As shown in the figure, the curtain plate member 50 has a shallow relief-like decoration formed on the front surface. Further, although not shown, the curtain plate member 50 has a box-shaped interior partitioned by a plurality of ribs in a grid pattern to increase the strength and rigidity. Further, the curtain plate member 50 is formed so that the front half of the curtain plate reinforcing member 80 can be accommodated inside.

[2-5. Upper hinge member on the outer frame side]
As shown in the figure, the outer frame side upper hinge member 60 of the outer frame 2 has a horizontally extending flat plate-shaped upper fixing portion 61 having a quadrangular outer shape and a flat plate shape extending forward from the front end of the upper fixing portion 61. A plan view of the front extension portion 62, the bearing groove 63 extending vertically from the right end of the front extension portion 62 to the left and right center of the front extension portion 62 and penetrating vertically, and the upper fixing portion 61. A flat plate-shaped horizontal fixing portion 64 extending downward from the left side and a horizontal fixing portion extending downward from the end side extending from the left end to the front end of the front extending portion 62 to the portion where the bearing groove 63 is opened. A flat plate-shaped hanging portion 65 continuous with the portion 64 is provided (see FIG. 16B and the like).

In the outer frame side upper hinge member 60, the upper fixing portion 61 is placed on the upper surface of the mounting step portion 12 of the upper frame member 10 in a state where the outer frame 2 is assembled, and is fixed by a screw (not shown). There is. Further, the front extending portion 62 extends forward from the front end of the upper frame member 10. Further, the lateral fixing portion 64 is fixed to the left frame member 30 by screws in a state of being inserted from above into the recess 31 on the outer side surface of the left frame member 30.

The outer frame side upper hinge member 60 cooperates with the outer frame side lower hinge member 70 by inserting the main body frame upper hinge pin 622 of the main body frame side upper hinge member 620 into the bearing groove 63 to form the main body frame 4. It can be opened and closed and supported. The outer frame side upper hinge member 60 is formed by bending a metal plate by press molding.

[2-6. Lock member]
As shown in FIG. 16, the lock member 66 of the outer frame 2 has a strip-shaped lock body 66a whose left and right sides extend back and forth with a predetermined width, and an operation unit protruding to the right from the rear end of the lock body 66a. 66b, an elastically deformable rod-shaped elastic portion 66c extending diagonally to the left front after extending to the left from the rear end of the lock main body 66a, and a mounting hole penetrating up and down near the rear end of the lock main body 66a. It is equipped with 66d. The lock member 66 is made of synthetic resin. The lock member 66 is rotatably attached to the lower surface of the front extension portion 62 of the outer frame side upper hinge member 60 by the attachment screw 67.

The lock member 66 is mounted at a position where the rear end of the lock body 66a is rearward of the bearing groove 63 in the front extending portion 62 of the outer frame side upper hinge member 60 through the mounting hole 66d. Further, in a state where the lock member 66 is attached to the outer frame side upper hinge member 60, the lock body 66a can block the bearing groove 63 in a plan view, and the right side surface near the front end is the outer frame side upper hinge member. It extends forward so that it can come into contact with a portion of the hanging portion 65 of 60 that extends to the opening of the bearing groove 63 (see FIG. 18).

Further, the tip of the elastic portion 66c extending to the left from the rear end of the lock body 66a is in contact with the inner peripheral surface of the hanging portion 65 of the outer frame side upper hinge member 60. The lock member 66 is urged by the urging force of the elastic portion 66c in a direction in which the front end rotates to the left around the mounting hole 66d. Therefore, in a normal state, the right side surface of the lock member 66 near the front end of the lock body 66a is in contact with the hanging portion 65 (see FIG. 18). In this state, a space in the bearing groove 63 on the front side of the lock main body 66a is formed so as to accommodate the hinge pin 622 on the main body frame, which will be described later, of the hinge member 620 on the main body frame side.

By operating the operation portion 66b, the lock member 66 can rotate the lock body 66a against the urging force of the elastic portion 66c. Then, by operating the operation unit 66b, the lock body 66a is rotated in the direction in which the front end thereof moves to the left, so that the lock body 66a can be retracted from the bearing groove 63 in a plan view, and the bearing groove 63 can be retracted. Can be in a state of being fully passed. As a result, the hinge pin 622 on the main body frame can be inserted into the bearing groove 63, and the hinge pin 622 on the main body frame can be removed from the bearing groove 63.

[2-7. Outer frame side lower hinge member]
As shown in the figure, the outer frame side lower hinge member 70 of the outer frame 2 stands upward from a horizontally extending flat plate-shaped horizontal portion 71 and a portion on the left side of the horizontal portion 71 that is rearward from the center in the front-rear direction. Only one game ball can pass through the rising flat rising portion 72, the hinge pin 73 under the outer frame protruding upward from the vicinity of the front end of the horizontal portion 71, and the horizontal portion 71 up and down. It is provided with a discharge hole 74 having a size. The outer frame side lower hinge member 70 is formed by bending a metal plate by press molding.

The horizontal portion 71 of the outer frame side lower hinge member 70 is formed in a trapezoidal shape with the left side as the base in a plan view. The lower hinge pin 73 of the outer frame has a columnar shape, and is formed in a truncated cone shape in which the upper end is narrowed above the center in the vertical direction. The lower hinge pin 73 of the outer frame is attached to a position on the left side near the front end of the horizontal portion 71. The discharge hole 74 is formed in the horizontal portion 71 so as to be in contact with the central portion of the rising portion 72 in the front-rear direction and extend from the left side of the horizontal portion 71 to the right in an inverted U shape. The discharge hole 74 is formed to have substantially the same size as the left discharge hole 52 of the curtain plate member 50.

In the outer frame side lower hinge member 70, when the outer frame 2 is assembled, the horizontal portion 71 is placed on the upper surface near the left end of the curtain plate member 50 and on the rear extending portion 51, and the horizontal portion 71. Is fixed to the curtain plate reinforcing member 80 by a screw (not shown) penetrating the upper surface of the curtain plate member 50. Further, in the state where the outer frame 2 is assembled, the rising portion 72 is attached to a portion of the inner side surface of the left frame member 30 on the inner side surface of the left frame member 30 on the front side of the protruding portion 32 by a screw (not shown). The outer frame side lower hinge member 70 is formed by inserting the outer frame lower hinge pin 73 into the main body frame lower hinge hole (not shown) in the main body frame side lower hinge member 640 of the main body frame 4. The main body frame 4 can be attached so as to be openable and closable in cooperation with the hinge member 60.

Further, in the state where the outer frame 2 is assembled, the discharge hole 74 coincides with the left discharge hole 52 of the curtain plate member 50. As a result, the game ball on the horizontal portion 71 can be dropped (discharged) to the rear side of the curtain plate member 50 through the discharge hole 74 and the left discharge hole 52. More specifically, when the main body frame 4 is closed with respect to the outer frame 2, the game ball that has fallen between the outer frame 2 and the main body frame 4 is closed, and the outer frame 2 and the main body frame 4 are closed. Since the space between the two is gradually narrowed, the ball is rolled to the rear side where the interval is wide, and the ball can be discharged from the discharge hole 74. At this time, since the discharge hole 74 is formed at a position substantially the same as the rear end of the main body frame 4 when the main body frame 4 is closed with respect to the outer frame 2 in the state of being assembled in the pachinko machine 1. By discharging the game ball that has fallen between the outer frame 2 and the main body frame 4 from the discharge hole 74, it is possible to easily prevent the game ball from rolling to the rear side of the main body frame 4, and the outer frame side. It is possible to make it difficult for the game ball to stay at the portion of the lower hinge member 70.

[2-8. Connecting member]
The connecting member 85 of the outer frame 2 includes an upper left connecting member 85A that connects the upper frame member 10 and the left frame member 30, an upper right connecting member 85B that connects the upper frame member 10 and the right frame member 40, and a lower frame member. There is a lower left connecting member 85C that connects 20 and the left frame member 30, and a lower right connecting member 85D that connects the lower frame member 20 and the right frame member 40.

The connecting member 85 includes a flat plate-shaped horizontal fixing portion 86 extending horizontally, a flat plate-shaped upper-horizontal fixing portion 87 extending upward from either the left or right side of the horizontal fixing portion 86, and a horizontal fixing portion. The upper horizontal fixing portion 87 in 86 includes a flat plate-shaped lower horizontal fixing portion 88 extending downward from the same side as the extending portion. The connecting member 85 is formed by bending a flat metal plate.

In the upper left connecting member 85A and the upper right connecting member 85B, the upper horizontal fixing portion 87 extends upward from the center of the horizontal fixing portion 86 in the front-rear direction, and the lower horizontal fixing portion 88 extends from both front and rear sides of the upper horizontal fixing portion 87. It extends downward. That is, in the upper left connecting member 85A and the upper right connecting member 85B, two lower horizontal fixing portions 88 are provided so as to be separated from each other in the front-rear direction. The horizontal fixing portion 86 of the upper left connecting member 85A and the upper right connecting member 85B is fixed to the upper frame member 10 in a state of being in contact with the lower surface of the upper frame member 10. Further, the upper horizontal fixing portion 87 of the upper left connecting member 85A and the upper right connecting member 85B is inserted into the engaging notch 21 of the upper frame member 10 and fixed to the end portion of the upper frame member 10 in the left-right direction. Further, the lower lateral fixing portion 88 on the front side of the upper left connecting member 85A and the upper right connecting member 85B is fixed to the inner side surfaces on the front side of the left frame member 30 and the right frame member 40, respectively. Further, the lower lateral fixing portion 88 on the rear side of the upper left connecting member 85A and the upper right connecting member 85B is a screw inserted into the protruding portions 32 and 42 of the left frame member 30 and the right frame member 40 and screwed from the outer side surface. Is fixed to the left frame member 30 and the right frame member 40, respectively.

In the lower left connecting member 85C and the lower right connecting member 85D, the rear end of the upper horizontal fixing portion 87 protrudes rearward from the rear end of the horizontal fixing portion 86 and more than the horizontal fixing portion 86 of the upper horizontal fixing portion 87. The lower lateral fixing portion 88 extends downward from the horizontal fixing portion 86 from the lower end of the portion protruding rearward. Further, the lower left connecting member 85C and the lower right connecting member 85D further include a bent portion 89 projecting from the rear end of the upper horizontal fixing portion 87 to the same side as the horizontal fixing portion 86. The horizontal fixing portion 86 of the lower left connecting member 85C and the lower right connecting member 85D is fixed in a state of being in contact with the upper surface of the lower frame member 20. Further, the upper and horizontal fixing portions 87 of the lower left connecting member 85C and the lower right connecting member 85D are fixed to the inner side surfaces of the left frame member 30 and the right frame member 40 on the front side of the protruding portions 32 and 42, respectively. Further, the lower horizontal fixing portion 88 of the lower left connecting member 85C and the lower right connecting member 85D is inserted into the engaging notch 21 of the lower frame member 20 and fixed to the end surface of the lower frame member 20 in the left-right direction, respectively. NS.

[2-9. Lock mechanism for upper hinge member on the outer frame side]
Next, in the outer frame 2 of the pachinko machine 1 of the present embodiment, FIGS. 17 and 18 are shown with respect to the locking mechanism of the main body frame 4 with respect to the main body frame side upper hinge member 620 by the lock member 66 in the outer frame side upper hinge member 60. It will be explained with reference to. FIG. 17 (a) is an enlarged perspective view showing a state in which the main body frame side upper hinge member of the main body frame is removed with respect to the outer frame side upper hinge member of the outer frame, and FIG. It is an enlarged perspective view which shows the state in which the upper hinge member on the main body side is attached to the hinge member. FIG. 18 is an explanatory view showing the action of the lock member on the outer frame.

When the lock member 66 in the outer frame 2 is attached to the front extending portion 62 of the outer frame side upper hinge member 60 (normal state), the tip of the elastic portion 66c comes into contact with the inner peripheral surface of the hanging portion 65. The lock body 66a does not block a part of the bearing groove 63 bent in a dogleg shape, and the tip portion of the lock body 66a does not block the deepest part of the bearing groove 63. A space is formed in the deepest portion of the bearing groove 63 into which the hinge pin 622 on the main body frame of the main body frame side upper hinge member 620 of the main body frame 4 can be inserted.

In the support mechanism of the hinge pin 622 on the main body frame using the outer frame side upper hinge member 60 and the lock member 66 in the present embodiment, the hinge pin 622 on the main body frame is inserted into the deepest portion of the bearing groove 63 and the front end of the lock main body 66a. The right side surface of the lock body 66a is in close contact with the right side hanging portion 65 (in this state, there is a slight gap between the right side surface of the front end of the lock body 66a and the right side hanging portion 65, and they are in contact with each other. In the normal shaft support state, the centers of the hinge pin 622 on the main body frame located at the deepest part of the bent bearing groove 63 and the front end surface of the lock main body 66a are obliquely opposed to each other. It is in a state.

In this normal axial support state, the hinge pin 622 on the main body frame that pivotally supports the heavy main body frame 4 is in contact with the front end portion of the bearing groove 63, so that the hinge pin on the main body frame is in contact with the front end portion. Almost no load is applied from 622 to the front end surface of the lock body 66a. That is, no load is applied to the elastic portion 66c of the lock member 66. Since the front end surface of the lock body 66a is formed in an arc shape, the lock member 66 rotates smoothly when the operation portion 66b is rotated to rotate the lock member 66. There is. Further, in the figure, the arc center of the front end surface of the lock body 66a is the center of the mounting hole 66d (the center of rotation of the lock member 66).

Therefore, when the acting force F is applied in the direction in which the hinge pin 622 on the main body frame comes out along the inclination of the bearing groove 63 formed in a dogleg shape and comes into contact with the arcuate front end surface of the lock main body 66a, the acting force is applied. F is a component force F1 (in the normal direction of the arc of the front end surface of the lock body 66a) acting on the contact portion between the hinge pin 622 on the main body frame and the arc-shaped front end surface, and the hinge pin 622 on the main body frame and the bearing groove 63. When divided into a component force F2 that acts on the contact portion with the inner surface on one side, the direction of the component force F1 faces the center of the mounting hole 66d (mounting screw 67) (the center of rotation of the lock member 66). , The front end of the lock body 66a of the lock member 66 does not have a moment to rotate in the direction away from the hanging portion 65 on the right side, and the hinge pin 622 on the body frame is one of the front end of the lock body 66a of the lock member 66 and the bearing groove 63. The state of being sandwiched between the side inner surface is maintained.

Therefore, even in a normal bearing state or in a state where the acting force of the hinge pin 622 on the main body frame is applied to the lock member 66, the elastic portion 66c of the lock member 66 is not constantly loaded and is integrally formed of synthetic resin. It is possible to prevent the elastic portion 66c from being plastically deformed due to creep, and to prevent the hinge pin 622 on the main body frame from falling off from the bearing groove 63 for a long period of time. Even if an unreasonable force is applied and the front end portion of the lock body 66a of the lock member 66 is rotated in the direction of moving to the right, the right side surface of the front end of the lock body 66a abuts on the hanging portion 65 and further. Since it does not rotate, the lock member 66 does not protrude to the outside of the forward extending portion 62.

Even if the shape of the front end surface of the lock body 66a is not arcuate, the position where the rotational moment is not generated by the action of the above-mentioned component force F1 or the front end portion of the lock member 66 faces the outside of the front extending portion 62. By locating the rotation center of the lock member 66 (the shaft fixed by the mounting screw 67) at a position where a rotational moment is generated, no load is always applied to the elastic portion 66c of the lock member 66. Even if the lock member 66 rotates, the right side surface of the front end of the lock body 66a only abuts on the hanging portion 65, so that the lock member 66 does not protrude to the outside of the front extending portion 62.

When the bearing groove 63 of the outer frame side upper hinge member 60 supports the hinge pin 622 on the main body frame of the main body frame side upper hinge member 620, the bearing groove 63 is placed in the bearing groove 63 from the open side on the main body frame. Insert the hinge pin 622. When the hinge pin 622 on the main body frame is inserted into the bearing groove 63, the hinge pin 622 on the main body frame comes into contact with the right side surface of the lock main body 66a of the lock member 66, and the front end of the lock main body 66a resists the urging force of the elastic portion 66c. The lock member 66 rotates about the mounting screw 67 so as to move to the left. As a result, the lock main body 66a that has closed the bearing groove 63 is retracted to open the bearing groove 63, and the hinge pin 622 on the main body frame can be moved to the deepest portion (front end) of the bearing groove 63.

Then, when the hinge pin 622 on the main body frame is moved to the deepest portion of the bearing groove 63, the contact between the hinge pin 622 on the main body frame and the lock main body 66a of the lock member 66 is released, and the locking main body 66a is released by the urging force of the elastic portion 66c. The lock member 66 rotates so that the front end of the lock member 66 moves to the right, and the lock member 66 returns to the normal state. As a result, the hinge pin 622 on the main body frame is housed in the space on the front side of the lock main body 66a in the bearing groove 63, and the hinge pin 622 on the main body frame can rotate in the deepest portion of the bearing groove 63. It becomes a held (locked) state in the state.

When removing the hinge pin 622 on the main body frame from the bearing groove 63, the operation portion 66b of the lock member 66 is operated to rotate the lock member 66 so that the front end of the lock main body 66a moves to the left, and the elastic portion The lock body 66a is retracted from the bearing groove 63 against the urging force of 66c. As a result, the deepest portion of the bearing groove 63 and the opening are in communication with each other, and the hinge pin 622 on the main body frame can be removed from the bearing groove 63.

[2-10. Security mechanism and ball biting prevention mechanism at the lower hinge member on the outer frame side]
Prevention of ball biting to prevent the game ball from being pinched between the security mechanism and the outer frame 2 and the main body frame 4 at the portion of the outer frame side lower hinge member 70 of the outer frame 2 in the pachinko machine 1 of the present embodiment. The mechanism will be described.

In the assembled state of the outer frame 2, the outer frame side lower hinge member 70 is attached to the left end portion in the front view on the upper surface of the curtain plate member 50. The horizontal portion 71 of the outer frame side lower hinge member 70 is mounted in a state of being placed near the left end of the upper surface of the curtain plate member 50 and the upper surface of the rear extending portion 51. The curtain plate member 50 includes a standing wall portion 54 that rises upward from the rear end of the upper surface. As a result, even if an unauthorized tool such as a piano wire is attempted to enter the rear side of the main body frame 4 (pachinko machine 1) through the gap between the outer frame side lower hinge member 70 and the main body frame side lower hinge member 640. Since the tip of the illegal tool comes into contact with the vertical wall portion 54 extending upward from the rear end of the upper surface of the curtain plate member 50, it is possible to prevent the illegal tool from being inserted further to the rear side. , It is possible to prevent fraudulent acts from being performed through the portion of the outer frame side lower hinge member 70.

Further, since the return portion 55 extending forward is provided at the upper end of the standing wall portion 54, when an illegal tool in contact with the standing wall portion 54 bends upward, the tip of the illegal tool is provided by the return portion 55. Can be further turned forward, so that it is possible to prevent an unauthorized tool from entering the rear side of the main body frame 4, and an illegal act is performed through the portion of the outer frame side lower hinge member 70. Can be reliably prevented.

By the way, when the vertical wall portion 54 extending upward is provided at the rear end of the upper surface of the curtain plate member 50, the game ball is on the outer frame side with the main body frame 4 open with respect to the outer frame 2. When the game ball falls on the lower hinge member 70 (horizontal portion 71), the game ball on the horizontal portion 71 is not discharged rearward from the rear end of the horizontal portion 71 due to the presence of the vertical wall portion 54, so that the outer frame 2 and the main body frame 4 There is a risk of being caught between. On the other hand, in the present embodiment, the horizontal portion 71 of the outer frame side lower hinge member 70 and the rear extending portion 51 of the curtain plate member 50 have a discharge hole 74 and a left discharge hole 52 through which the game ball can pass. And, since the right discharge hole 53 is provided, the game ball on the horizontal portion 71 of the outer frame side lower hinge member 70 can be discharged downward from the discharge hole 74 or the like, and the outer frame 2 and the main body frame 4 can be discharged. It is possible to reduce the possibility that the game ball is pinched between the two.

Therefore, when the game ball is sandwiched between the outer frame 2 and the main body frame 4, the circumference of the lower hinge member 70 on the outer frame side is damaged, or the main body frame 4 is not closed in a normal state and is not closed with the outer frame 2. A gap is created between the main body frame 4 and the gap, and it is possible to prevent fraudulent acts from being performed using the gap.

[3. Overall configuration of door frame]
The door frame 3 of the pachinko machine 1 will be described with reference to FIGS. 19 to 30. 19 is a front view of the door frame in the pachinko machine, FIG. 20 is a right side view of the door frame, FIG. 21 is a left side view of the door frame, and FIG. 22 is a rear view of the door frame. FIG. 23 is a perspective view of the door frame viewed from the front right, FIG. 24 is a perspective view of the door frame viewed from the front left, and FIG. 25 is a perspective view of the door frame viewed from the back. 26 is a cross-sectional view cut along the line AA in FIG. 19, FIG. 27 is a cross-sectional view cut along the line BB in FIG. 19, and FIG. 28 is a cross-sectional view cut along the line CC in FIG. It is a figure. FIG. 29 is an exploded perspective view of the door frame disassembled for each main member and viewed from the front, and FIG. 30 is an exploded perspective view of the door frame disassembled for each main member and viewed from the rear.

As shown in FIGS. 29 and 30, the door frame 3 is attached to a square and frame-shaped door frame base unit 100 whose outer shape in front view extends vertically, and to the lower right corner of the front surface of the door frame base unit 100. The handle unit 300, the plate unit 320 attached to the lower part of the front surface of the door frame base unit 100, the effect operation unit 400 installed in the center of the plate unit 320, and the door frame base unit above the plate unit 320. The door frame left side unit 530 attached to the front left side of the 100, the door frame right side unit 550 attached to the front right part of the door frame base unit 100 on the upper side of the dish unit 320, and the door frame left side. The door frame top unit 570 is attached to the upper part of the front surface of the door frame base unit 100 on the upper side of the unit 530 and the door frame right side unit 550.

Although the details of the door frame base unit 100 of the door frame 3 will be described later, the plate-shaped door frame base 110 having a through-hole 111 having a front-view outer shape extending vertically and penetrating in the front-rear direction is a rectangular shape (square). The frame-shaped reinforcing unit 130 attached to the rear side of the door frame base 110 and the upper and lower ends of the reinforcing unit 130 on the left end side in the front view are attached to the main body frame 4 so as to be hinge rotatable. A door frame side upper hinge member 140, a door frame side lower hinge member 150, a glass unit 190 attached to the rear surface of the door frame base 110 to close the through hole 111, and a security cover 200 covering the lower rear surface of the glass unit 190. Locks between the door frame 3 and the main body frame 4, and between the main body frame 4 and the outer frame 2 which are attached to the rear surface of the door frame base 110 so as to penetrate the door frame base 110 and project forward so as to be openable and closable. The opening / closing cylinder unit 210 for opening and closing, the ball feed unit 250 attached to the lower rear surface of the door frame base 110 to send the game ball to the ball launcher 680, and the ball launcher 680 attached to the lower rear surface of the door frame base 110. It is provided with a foul cover unit 270 that receives a game ball that has not reached the game area 5a and is discharged to the lower plate 322.

The handle unit 300 of the door frame 3 will be described in detail later, but when the player rotates the rotatable handle 302, the game ball stored in the upper plate 321 can be rotated according to the rotation angle of the handle 302. It can be driven into the game area 5a of the game board 5 with a strong strength.

The dish unit 320 of the door frame 3 will be described in detail later, but it is attached to a portion of the door frame base unit 100 on the front surface of the door frame base 110 below the through-hole 111, and the front surface bulges forward. The effect operation unit 400 is attached to the front end at the center in the left-right direction. The plate unit 320 contains an upper plate 321 for storing game balls for driving into the game area 5a, and a game ball arranged below the upper plate 321 and supplied from the upper plate 321 and the foul cover unit 270. Within the range of the lower plate 322 that can be stored, the upper plate ball removal button 327 for pulling out the game ball stored in the upper plate 321 to the lower plate 322, and the balance of cash and prepaid card put into the ball lending machine. A ball lending button 328 for lending a game ball to a player, a return button 329 for returning cash or a prepaid card after deducting the amount of the game ball lent from the ball lending machine, and cash put into the ball lending machine. The ball rental display unit 330 that displays the remaining number of prepaid cards, etc., the effect selection left button 331 and the effect selection right button 332 that can accept the player's operation when presenting the effect, and the lower plate 322. It is provided with a lower plate ball removal button 333 for discharging the game ball below the plate unit 320.

The effect operation unit 400 of the door frame 3 is attached to the front portion of the plate unit 320 in the center in the left-right direction in the front view, and can be pressed by the player and presents the effect image to the player. It is something that can be done. The effect operation unit 400 will be described in detail later, but has a large operation button 410 that can be operated by the player, and a door frame side effect that is visibly arranged in the operation button 410 from the player side and can display an effect image. It includes a display device 460.

The door frame left side unit 530 of the door frame 3 is attached to the front left portion on the upper side of the dish unit 320 and on the left side of the through hole 111 in the door frame base unit 100, and the through port 111 ( It decorates the left outer side of the game area 5a). The door frame left side unit 530 includes a left unit decorative lens member (not shown) capable of emitting and decorating.

The door frame right side unit 550 of the door frame 3 is attached to the front right portion on the upper side of the dish unit 320 and on the right side of the through hole 111 in the door frame base unit 100, and the through port 111 ( It decorates the right outer side of the game area 5a). The door frame right side unit 550 projects far forward from the door frame left side unit 530, and is provided with a right unit left decorative member 554 and a right unit right decorative member 557 provided on both the left and right sides, and at the front end. The right unit decorative lens member 561 and the door are provided. The door frame right side unit 550 can illuminate the right unit left decorative member 554, the right unit right decorative member 557, and the right unit decorative lens member 561.

The door frame top unit 570 of the door frame 3 is attached to the upper side of the door frame left side unit 530 and the door frame right side unit 550 and above the through hole 111 on the front surface of the door frame base 110 of the door frame base unit 100. It decorates the upper part of the frame 3. The details of the door frame top unit 570 will be described later, but the pair of upper speakers 573 separated to the left and right, the top middle decoration member 576 protruding forward at the center of the front surface, and the left and right sides of the top middle decoration member 576 are It includes a top left decorative lens member 579 and a top right decorative lens member 580 that are decorated. The door frame top unit 570 can illuminate the top middle decorative member 576, the top left decorative lens member 579, and the top right decorative lens member 580.

[3-1. Overall configuration of door frame base unit]
The door frame base unit 100 of the door frame 3 will be described in detail with reference to FIGS. 31 to 33. FIG. 31 (a) is a perspective view of the door frame base unit in the door frame as viewed from the front, and FIG. 31 (b) is a perspective view of the door frame base unit as viewed from the rear. FIG. 32 is an exploded perspective view of the door frame base unit disassembled for each main member and viewed from the front, and FIG. 33 is an exploded perspective view of the door frame base unit disassembled for each main member and viewed from the rear. be.

The door frame base unit 100 is attached so as to be openable / closable (hinge rotatable) with respect to the main body frame 4 so that the left side side of the front view closes the front surface of the main body frame 4. The door frame base unit 100 has a handle unit 300 in the lower front corner, a dish unit 320 in which the effect operation unit 400 is attached to the lower front surface of the through hole 111, and a door frame left side unit 530 in the left outer front surface of the through port 111. The door frame right side unit 550 is attached to the right outer front surface of the through opening 111, and the door frame top unit 570 is attached to the upper outer front surface of the through opening 111, respectively.

As shown in FIGS. 32 and 33, the door frame base unit 100 includes a plate-shaped door frame base 110 having a rectangular outer shape extending vertically and having a through hole 111 penetrating back and forth. , The frame-shaped reinforcing unit 130 attached to the rear side of the door frame base 110, and the main body frame 4 which is attached to the upper and lower ends of the reinforcing unit 130 on the left end side of the front view and protrudes forward from the door frame base 110. The door frame side upper hinge member 140 and the door frame side lower hinge member 150 rotatably attached to the main body frame side upper hinge member 620 and the main body frame side lower hinge member 640, and the front surface of the through hole 111 on the front surface of the door frame base 110. The door frame left side decorative board 160, which is mounted on the left side of the door and has a plurality of LEDs mounted on the front surface, and the glass unit 190, which is rotatably mounted on the rear side of the door frame base 110, are detachably attached. A glass unit mounting member 170 for the door is provided.

Further, the door frame base unit 100 is attached to the lower right corner of the front view on the front surface of the door frame base 110, and is attached to the cylindrical handle attachment member 180 for attaching the handle unit 300 and the rear surface of the door frame base 110. A glass unit 190 that closes the through hole 111, a security cover 200 that covers the lower part of the rear surface of the glass unit 190, and an opening / closing cylinder unit that is attached to the rear surface of the door frame base 110 so as to penetrate the door frame base 110 and project forward. It includes 210, a ball feed unit 250 attached to the lower rear surface of the door frame base 110, and a foul cover unit 270 attached to the lower rear surface of the door frame base 110.

Further, although not shown, the door frame base unit 100 includes various decorative substrates provided in the door frame 3, a ball feed solenoid 255, a handle rotation detection sensor 307, a handle touch sensor 310, a single-shot button operation sensor 312, and the like. Ball rental button 328, return button 329, ball rental display unit 330, effect selection left button 331, effect selection right button 332, vibration motor 424, pressure detection sensor 440, door frame side effect display device 460 (liquid crystal display device 461) , The upper speaker 573, and the like are provided with a door main body relay board for relaying the connection between the main body frame 4 and the door frame relay board 911 of the board unit 900.

[3-1a. Door frame base]
The door frame base 110 of the door frame base unit 100 in the door frame 3 will be described in detail mainly with reference to FIGS. 31 to 33. The door frame base 110 is formed in a rectangular shape whose outer shape in front view extends vertically. The door frame base 110 penetrates in the front-rear direction, and includes a through-hole 111 formed in a substantially quadrangular shape having an inner peripheral shape extending vertically in a front view. In the through hole 111, the upper side and the left and right sides forming the inner circumference are close to the outer periphery of the door frame base 110, respectively, and the lower side forming the inner circumference is up and down from the lower end of the door frame base 110. It is located at a height of about 1/3 in the direction. Therefore, the door frame base 110 is entirely formed in a frame shape by the through openings 111 penetrating the front and rear. The door frame base 110 is integrally molded with a synthetic resin.

The door frame base 110 is formed in the lower right corner of the front view and is inclined so that the left end side slightly protrudes forward from the right end side, the handle mounting seat surface 112, the handle mounting seat surface 112, and the through hole 111. The opening / closing cylinder unit 210 is recessed from the rear surface to the front near the right end of the front view, and penetrates back and forth between the cylinder mounting portion 113 to which the cylinder mounting plate metal 213 of the opening / closing cylinder unit 210 is mounted and the cylinder mounting portion 113. The cylinder insertion hole 114 into which the cylinder lock 211 of the above is inserted, and the cylinder insertion hole 114 and the handle mounting seat surface 112 penetrate the front and rear on the left side of the front view, and the entry entrance 251a and the ball outlet 251b of the ball feed unit 250 are forward. It is equipped with a ball feed opening 115 for facing the cylinder.

Further, the door frame base 110 is to the left of the center of the door frame base 110 in the left-right direction and penetrates back and forth at substantially the same height as the handle mounting seat surface 112, and faces the ball discharge port 276 of the foul cover unit 270 forward. It penetrates back and forth between the lower plate passage port 116 and the door frame base 110 near the left end of the front view so as to be adjacent to the lower side of the through hole 111, so that the through ball passage 273 of the foul cover unit 270 faces forward. The dish passage port 117, the glass unit mounting portion 118 into which the glass frame 191 of the glass unit 190 is inserted, and the door frame base 110 on both the left and right sides, which are recessed from the rear surface to the front along the inner circumference of the through port 111. It is provided with a speaker insertion port 119 that penetrates back and forth in the corner and through which the rear end of the upper speaker 573 of the door frame top unit 570 is inserted.

[3-1b. Reinforcement unit]
The reinforcing unit 130 of the door frame base unit 100 will be described in detail with reference to FIGS. 31 and 33 and the like. The reinforcing unit 130 is attached to the rear side of the door frame base 110 to reinforce the door frame base 110 and increase the strength and rigidity of the door frame base 110 (door frame 3). The reinforcing unit 130 includes a left-right extending upper reinforcing sheet metal 131 attached along the upper side of the rear surface of the door frame base 110 and a left-right extending middle reinforcement attached to the lower side of the through hole 111 on the rear surface of the door frame base 110. The sheet metal 132, the vertically extending left reinforcing sheet metal 133 attached along the left side of the front view on the rear surface of the door frame base 110, and the vertically extending right reinforcement attached along the right side of the front view on the rear surface of the door frame base 110. It includes a sheet metal 134 and a locking locking portion 135 that is attached to the rear surface of the right reinforcing sheet metal 134 and locks the door frame hook 702 of the locking unit 700.

In the reinforcing unit 130, the left and right ends of the upper reinforcing sheet metal 131 are connected and fixed to the upper ends of the left reinforcing sheet metal 133 and the right reinforcing sheet metal 134 by screws, and the left end of the middle reinforcing sheet metal 132 is connected to the left reinforcing sheet metal 133 by screws. It is fixed. The right end of the middle reinforcing sheet metal 132 is connected and fixed to the right reinforcing sheet metal 134 via the cylinder mounting sheet metal 213 of the opening / closing cylinder unit 210 described later. Therefore, the reinforcing unit 130 is formed in a frame shape by the upper reinforcing sheet metal 131, the middle reinforcing sheet metal 132, the left reinforcing sheet metal 133, the right reinforcing sheet metal 134, and the like.

The upper reinforcing sheet metal 131, the middle reinforcing sheet metal 132, the left reinforcing sheet metal 133, the right reinforcing sheet metal 134, and the locking locking portion 135 of the reinforcing unit 130 are each formed by appropriately bending a metal plate. The middle reinforcing sheet metal 132 has a cutout portion 132a penetrating in the front-rear direction at a position corresponding to the upper plate passage port 117 of the door frame base 110.

Although detailed illustration is omitted, the reinforcing unit 130 has a portion bent in the front-rear direction in each of the upper reinforcing sheet metal 131, the middle reinforcing sheet metal 132, the left reinforcing sheet metal 133, and the right reinforcing sheet metal 134. The strength and rigidity are enhanced by the part, and the intrusion of an illegal tool such as a piano wire or a flat-blade screwdriver from the outside is prevented.

[3-1c. Door frame side upper hinge member]
The door frame side upper hinge member 140 of the door frame base unit 100 will be described in detail mainly with reference to FIGS. 31 to 33 and the like. The door frame side upper hinge member 140 is a pair of protrusions of the door frame upper hinge shaft bracket 141 having a pair of projecting pieces 141a attached to the door frame base 110 and separated vertically, and the door frame upper hinge shaft bracket 141. A pair of projecting pieces 141a in the columnar door frame upper hinge pin 142 and the door frame upper hinge pin 142 that penetrate the piece 141a and whose upper end is inserted into the door frame upper hinge hole 623 of the main body frame side upper hinge member 620. A disk-shaped flange member 143 attached at a position between the door frame and a hinge pin 142 on the door frame while being interposed between the flange member 143 and the lower protruding piece 141a of the pair of protruding pieces 141a. Is inserted, and is provided with a lock spring 144 that urges the hinge pin 142 on the door frame upward.

Although not shown, the hinge shaft bracket 141 on the door frame has a flat plate-shaped mounting piece that connects the rear ends of the pair of projecting pieces 141a, and the shape of the side view is open to the front. It is formed in a character shape. In the door frame upper hinge shaft bracket 141, a mounting piece connecting a pair of projecting pieces 141a to each other is mounted on the rear surface of the door frame base 110 by a screw.

In the door frame upper hinge pin 142, a portion (upper end) protruding upward from the upper protruding piece 141a is rotatably inserted into the door frame upper hinge hole 623 of the main body frame side upper hinge member 620. Further, although not shown, the hinge pin 142 on the door frame has a portion protruding downward from the lower protruding piece 141a bent in the horizontal direction. The bent portion abuts on the lower surface of the lower protruding piece 141a to restrict the upward movement of the hinge pin 142 on the door frame.

The collar member 143 is an E-ring, and is inserted and held in a groove formed on the outer periphery of the hinge pin 142 on the door frame. The lock spring 144 is a coil spring through which the hinge pin 142 on the door frame can be inserted, and the upper end is in contact with the flange member 143 and the lower end is in contact with the lower protruding piece 141a. The lock spring 144 is interposed between the collar member 143 and the lower protruding piece 141a in a compressed state, and urges the hinge pin 142 on the door frame upward via the collar member 143. ..

The door frame upper hinge member 140 is in a state in which the door frame upper hinge pin 142 is urged upward by the lock spring 144, and the horizontally bent portion of the lower end of the door frame upper hinge pin 142 protrudes downward. Further upward movement is restricted by abutting on the lower surface of the piece 141a. In this state, the upper end of the hinge pin 142 on the door frame protrudes above the upper surface of the upper protruding piece 141a by a predetermined amount.

The door frame side upper hinge member 140 has a horizontally bent portion of the lower end of the door frame upper hinge pin 142 when the operator holds the portion and pulls the portion downward against the urging force of the lock spring 144. The upper hinge pin 142 can be moved downward as a whole, and the upper end of the hinge pin 142 on the door frame can be immersed below the upper surface of the upper protruding piece 141a. Therefore, in the door frame side upper hinge member 140, the upper end of the door frame upper hinge pin 142 is inserted into the door frame upper hinge hole 623 of the main body frame side upper hinge member 620 from below or pulled out downward. Can be done. As a result, the upper end of the door frame upper hinge pin 142 of the door frame side upper hinge member 140 is inserted into the door frame upper hinge hole 623 of the main body frame side upper hinge member 620, so that the upper left end of the door frame 3 in front view can be inserted. , The hinge can be rotatably supported with respect to the main body frame 4.

Further, in the door frame side upper hinge member 140, the portion of the door frame upper hinge pin 142 supported by the pair of protruding pieces 141a of the door frame upper hinge shaft bracket 141 is the door frame of the door frame side lower hinge member 150, which will be described later. It is supported coaxially with the lower hinge pin 152. As a result, the door frame side upper hinge member 140 and the door frame side lower hinge member 150 can rotate the door frame 3 with respect to the main body frame 4 in a good state.

[3-1d. Door frame side lower hinge member]
The door frame side lower hinge member 150 of the door frame base unit 100 will be described in detail mainly with reference to FIGS. 31 and 32. The door frame side lower hinge member 150 is in the door frame lower hinge shaft bracket 151 having a flat plate-shaped extension piece 151a attached to the door frame base 110 and extending forward, and the door frame lower hinge shaft bracket. A cylindrical door frame lower hinge pin 152 (see FIGS. 21 and 22) projecting downward from the vicinity of the front end portion of the extension piece 151a is provided.

The hinge shaft bracket 151 under the door frame has a flat plate-shaped mounting piece (not shown) extending upward from the rear end of the horizontally extending flat plate-shaped extending piece 151a, and has an overall shape in a side view. Is formed in a substantially L shape. A mounting piece (not shown) is attached to the rear surface of the door frame base 110 by screws in the door frame lower hinge shaft bracket 151.

The lower end of the door frame lower hinge pin 152 is formed in a truncated cone shape in which the lower end thereof narrows toward the bottom. The door frame lower hinge pin 152 is rotatably inserted from above into the door frame hinge hole 644 of the main body frame side lower hinge member 640 in the main body frame 4, which will be described later. The door frame lower hinge pin 152 is arranged coaxially with the door frame upper hinge pin 142 of the door frame side upper hinge member 140.

In the door frame side lower hinge member 150, the door frame 3 can be hinged with respect to the main body frame 4 by inserting the door frame lower hinge pin 152 into the door frame hinge hole 644 of the main body frame side lower hinge member 640. Can be supported by.

[3-1e. Door frame left side decorative board]
The door frame left side decorative substrate 160 of the door frame base unit 100 will be described in detail mainly with reference to FIGS. 31 and 32. The door frame left side decorative substrate 160 is attached to the front surface of the door frame base 110 on the left side of the through hole 111 when viewed from the front. The door frame left side decorative substrate 160 extends vertically from the height of the door frame base 110 below the speaker insertion port 119 on the left side of the front view to the height near the center of the through port 111 in the vertical direction. The lower decoration on the left side of the door frame extends vertically from the height of the lower side of the upper decorative board 161 on the left side of the frame and the upper decorative board 161 on the left side of the door frame to approximately the same height as the lower end of the passage port 117 for the upper plate. The board 162 and the like are provided.

The door frame left side upper decorative substrate 161 and the door frame left side lower decorative substrate 162 of the door frame left side decorative substrate 160 are each provided with a plurality of LEDs 161a and 162a capable of irradiating light forward on the front surface. These LEDs 161a and 162a are full-color LEDs.

The door frame left side decorative substrate 160 is located behind the door frame left side unit 530, which will be described later, in a state where the door frame 3 is assembled, and has a plurality of (mounted) LEDs 161a and 162a provided on the front surface. The left unit decorative lens member of the door frame left side unit 530 can be light-emitting and decorated by appropriately emitting light.

[3-1f. Glass unit mounting member]
The glass unit mounting member 170 of the door frame base unit 100 will be described in detail mainly with reference to FIG. 31 (b) and the like. The glass unit mounting member 170 is rotatably mounted on the rear side of the door frame base 110, and is for mounting the glass unit 190 detachably. The glass unit mounting member 170 has a disk-shaped base 171 that is rotatably mounted around an axis extending back and forth on the rear side of the door frame base 110, and a rod-shaped protrusion from the base 171 in a direction perpendicular to the rotation axis. It has a protruding portion 172 and a protruding portion 172.

The glass unit mounting member 170 is rotatably mounted on the rear surface of the door frame base 110 at a portion outside the pair of speaker insertion ports 119 and outside the glass unit mounting portion 118, respectively.

The glass unit mounting member 170 is in a state in which the protruding portion 172 is rotated so as to project upward from the base portion 171 so that the protruding portion 172 is outside the glass unit mounting portion 118 of the door frame base 110 when viewed from the rear. In the positioned state, the glass unit 190 can be inserted into the glass unit mounting portion 118 of the door frame base 110, or the glass unit 190 can be removed from the glass unit mounting portion 118.

When the glass unit mounting member 170 is rotated so that the protruding portion 172 protrudes downward from the base 171 in a state where the glass unit 190 is inserted into the glass unit mounting portion 118 of the door frame base 110, the protruding portion 172 becomes glass. The glass unit 190 can be attached to the door frame base 110 in a state where it comes into contact with the rear side of the attachment piece 191a of the unit 190 and the rearward movement of the upper portion of the glass unit 190 is restricted.

Since the protruding portion 172 of the glass unit mounting member 170 protrudes from the disk-shaped base 171 that is rotatably mounted on the door frame base 110, the center of gravity of the glass unit mounting member 170 is located in the protruding portion 172. .. From this, in a state where the glass unit mounting member 170 can rotate freely, the protruding portion 172 is stable in a state of protruding downward from the base portion 171. Then, in the glass unit mounting member 170, when the protruding portion 172 is in the rotational position protruding downward from the base portion 171, the protruding portion 172 regulates the backward movement of the glass unit 190, so that the glass unit is mounted. Even if vibration or the like acts on the member 170, the entire protrusion 172 does not rotate upward from the base 171 and the restriction on the rearward movement of the glass unit 190 is naturally lifted. No.

When removing the glass unit 190 from the door frame base 110, the glass unit mounting member 170 is rotated so that the protruding portion 172 projects upward from the base 171 so that the protruding portion 172 is mounted on the glass unit 190 mounting piece 191a. By moving the glass unit 190 to the outside, the upper side of the glass unit 190 can be moved to the rear, and the glass unit 190 can be removed from the door frame base 110.

[3-1 g. Handle mounting member]
The handle mounting member 180 of the door frame base unit 100 will be described in detail with reference to FIGS. 31 to 33 and the like. The handle mounting member 180 is for mounting the handle unit 300 on the front surface of the door frame base 110. As shown in FIGS. 32 and 33, the handle mounting member 180 has a cylindrical tubular portion 181 extending in the front-rear direction and outward in a direction perpendicular to the axis of the tubular portion 181 from the rear end of the tubular portion 181. An annular flange portion 182 that extends, and a plurality of flange portions 182 that project into the tubular portion 181 and extend over the entire axial length of the tubular portion 181 and are arranged at unequal intervals with respect to the circumferential direction of the tubular portion 181. In this example, it is provided with three) ridges 183, and a plurality of reinforcing ribs 184 arranged in the circumferential direction of the cylinder portion 181 by connecting the outer peripheral surface of the cylinder portion 181 and the front surface of the flange portion 182. ..

The handle mounting member 180 is mounted on the handle mounting seat surface 112 with screws in a state where the rear surface of the flange portion 182 is in contact with the front surface of the handle mounting seat surface 112 on the door frame base 110.

The inner diameter of the tubular portion 181 is formed to be slightly larger than the outer diameter of the base portion 301a of the handle base 301 in the handle unit 300. One of the three ridges 183 is provided on the upper side in the tubular portion 181 and the other two are provided on the lower side in the tubular portion 181. These three ridges 183 are formed at positions corresponding to the three grooves 301c in the handle base 301. Therefore, the handle mounting member 180 can insert the base portion 301a of the handle base 301 into the tubular portion 181 only when the three ridges 183 and the three groove portions 301c of the handle base 301 are aligned with each other. The rotation position of the handle base 301 (handle unit 300) can be regulated with respect to the door frame base 110.

Since the axis of the cylinder portion 181 extends vertically to the rear surface of the flange portion 182, the handle mounting member 180 can be attached to the inclined handle mounting seat surface 112 of the door frame base 110 to form the cylinder portion. The axis of 181 is tilted so as to extend to the front right, and the handle unit 300 can be attached to the door frame base 110 in the same tilted state.

[3-1h. Glass unit]
The glass unit 190 of the door frame base unit 100 will be described in detail mainly with reference to FIGS. 31 to 33 and the like. The glass unit 190 closes the through-hole 111 of the door frame base 110 so that the rear can be seen from the front. The glass unit 190 has a frame-shaped glass frame 191 that is larger than the inner peripheral shape of the through hole 111 of the door frame base 110 and can be attached to the glass unit mounting portion 118, and the glass frame 191 is closed and the outer periphery is a glass frame. It comprises two transparent glass plates 192 attached to 191. The two glass plates 192 are attached to the front end side and the rear end side of the glass frame 191 respectively, and are separated from each other in the front-rear direction so as to form a space between them (see FIG. 26 and the like).

The glass frame 191 includes a pair of mounting pieces 191a extending outward in a flat plate shape from a position below the upper left and right corners in the front view, and a band extending downward from the lower end and extending along the lower side. It has a plate-shaped locking piece 191b and. The mounting piece 191a of the glass frame 191 can be brought into contact with the protruding portion 172 of the glass unit mounting member 170. The locking piece 191b can be inserted into the space between the door frame base 110 and the intermediate reinforcing sheet metal 132 of the reinforcing unit 130 (see FIG. 26).

In the glass unit 190, the locking piece 191b of the glass frame 191 is inserted from above into the gap between the door frame base 110 and the middle reinforcing sheet metal 132 of the reinforcing unit 130 from the rear side of the door frame base 110. , The front end of the glass frame 191 is brought into contact with the rear surface of the glass unit mounting portion 118 of the door frame base 110, the glass unit mounting member 170 is rotated, and the protruding portion 172 of the glass unit mounting member 170 is brought into contact with the mounting piece 191a of the glass frame 191. It is attached to the door frame base 110 by being brought into contact with the rear surface.

When the glass unit 190 is removed from the door frame base 110, it can be removed by the reverse procedure of the above. As a result, the glass unit 190 can be attached to and detached from the door frame base 110.

[3-1i. Security cover]
The security cover 200 of the door frame base unit 100 will be described in detail with reference to FIGS. 31 to 33 and the like. The security cover 200 is attached to the rear side of the door frame base 110 so as to cover the lower portion of the rear surface of the glass unit 190, and is made of a transparent synthetic resin. The security cover 200 is arranged so as to be separated from each other to the left and right by a flat plate-shaped main body 201 having an outer periphery formed in a predetermined shape and a flat plate-shaped rear projecting piece 202 protruding rearward along the outer peripheral edge of the main body 201. It is provided with a pair of locking pieces 203 that protrude forward from the main body 201 and are lockable on the rear side of the door frame base 110.

The main body 201 of the security cover 200 is formed so that the lower end thereof protrudes downward from the lower end of the glass unit 190 when attached to the door frame base 110. Further, the upper end of the main body 201 is formed in a shape along the lower end of the game area 5a in the game board 5 in a state where the upper end is assembled to the pachinko machine 1. More specifically, the upper end of the main body 201 is formed in a shape along a part of the inner rail 1002 of the front component 1000 described later, an out guide part 1003, a part of the lower right rail 1004, and the right rail 1005. The rails are formed so as not to protrude into the game area 5a when assembled in the pachinko machine 1.

The rear projecting piece 202 is formed over substantially the entire circumference of the outer peripheral edge of the main body portion 201. Therefore, the crime prevention cover 200 is formed in a shallow box shape that is opened rearward by the main body portion 201 and the rear projecting piece 202, and has high strength and rigidity. Further, as shown in FIG. 33, the rear projecting piece 202 projects rearward from a part of the rear surface of the main body 201, which is different from the outer peripheral edge of the main body 201. The rear projecting piece 202 projecting rearward from a part of the rear surface of the main body 201 is formed along a part of the outer rail 1001 in the front component 1000 of the game board 5 in a state of being assembled in the pachinko machine 1. ing.

The rear projecting piece 202 is not formed at a portion of the game board 5 located between the outer rail 1001 and the inner rail 1002 in a state of being assembled on the pachinko machine 1. As a result, the game ball (the game ball launched by the ball launching device 680) passing between the outer rail 1001 and the inner rail 1002 does not come into contact with the rear projecting piece 202 of the security cover 200, and is inside the game area 5a. It does not hinder the driving of the game ball into the ball.

The pair of locking pieces 203 are elastically locked to the rear side of the door frame base 110. As a result, the security cover 200 can be easily attached to and detached from the door frame base 110.

When the security cover 200 is assembled in the pachinko machine 1, the front surface of the main body 201 is in contact with the rear surface of the glass unit 190 (the rear end of the glass frame 191), and the portion protruding rearward from the lower side of the main body 201 is formed. The removed rear projecting piece 202 is in a state of being inserted into the security recess 10008 of the front component 1000, which will be described later. Further, the security cover 200 is in a state in which the rear projecting piece 202 projecting rearward from the lower side of the main body 201 projects rearward from the front surface of the front component 1000 so as to come into contact with the lower surface of the front component 1000. .. As a result, the space between the security cover 200 and the game board 5 (front component 1000) is complicatedly bent by the rear projecting piece 202 of the security cover 200 and the security recess 1008 of the front component 1000. Even if an unauthorized tool such as a piano wire is attempted to enter the game area 5a from below the front surface of the board 5 through between the security cover 200 and the front component 1000, it will be blocked by the rear projecting piece 202 and the security recess 1008. , It is possible to prevent an unauthorized tool from entering the game area 5a.

[3-1j. Open / close cylinder unit]
The opening / closing cylinder unit 210 of the door frame base unit 100 will be described mainly with reference to FIGS. 31 to 33 and the like. The opening / closing cylinder unit 210 is attached from the rear side to the cylinder mounting portion 113 located between the through hole 111 and the handle mounting seat surface 112 near the right end of the door frame base 110 in the front view, and cooperates with the locking unit 700 described later. It works and is used for opening and closing the door frame 3 and the main body frame 4, and opening and closing the outer frame 2 and the main body frame 4.

The opening / closing cylinder unit 210 has a cylindrical cylinder lock 211 having a key hole 211a on the front surface and extending forward and backward, and a locking unit for rotating a key attached to the rear end of the cylinder lock 211 and inserted into the key hole 211a. It includes a rotation transmission member 212 that transmits to the key cylinder 710 of 700, and a cylinder mounting sheet metal 213 that mounts the cylinder lock 211 to the door frame base 110 (reinforcing unit 130).

The cylinder lock 211 can rotate the key by inserting the corresponding key (not shown) into the key hole 211a, and the corresponding key can be either clockwise or counterclockwise when viewed from the front. It can also be rotated by a predetermined angle in the direction of.

The rotation transmission member 212 is formed in a cylindrical shape with an open rear (specifically, a conical cylinder whose diameter increases toward the rear), and faces forward from the rear end to positions facing each other across the central axis. It has a pair of notched portions 212a that are notched. The rotation transmission member 212 is formed so that the key cylinder 710 of the locking unit 700 in the main body frame 4 is inserted from behind, and the protrusion of the key cylinder 710 of the locking unit 700 is inserted into the pair of notches 212a. As a result, the rotation of the rotation transmission member 212 (the key inserted into the key hole 211a of the cylinder lock 211) can be transmitted to the key cylinder 710 of the locking unit 700 to rotate the key cylinder 710.

The cylinder mounting sheet metal 213 is formed by bending a single metal plate, and is formed in a convex shape in which the shape in a plan view protrudes forward. More specifically, the cylinder mounting sheet metal 213 has a rectangular flat plate-shaped front plate portion 213a extending vertically when viewed from the front, and a pair of side plate portions 213b extending rearward from both the left and right sides of the front plate portion 213a. And a pair of mounting plate portions 213c extending in a rectangular shape in a direction away from each other from the rear side of each of the pair of side plate portions 213b. The front plate portion 213a of the cylinder mounting sheet metal 213 is penetrated by the cylinder lock 211 from the rear at a position substantially central in the vertical direction, and the rear end of the cylinder lock 211 is attached to the rear surface of the front plate portion 213a. In the pair of mounting plate portions 213c of the cylinder mounting sheet metal 213, the mounting plate portion 213c on the left side in the front view is attached to the right end portion of the middle reinforcing sheet metal 132 in the reinforcing unit 130, and the mounting plate portion 213c on the right side in the front view is the reinforcing unit 130. It is attached to the right reinforcing sheet metal 134. As a result, the cylinder mounting sheet metal 213 connects the middle reinforcing sheet metal 132 and the right reinforcing sheet metal 134 of the reinforcing unit 130.

When the opening / closing cylinder unit 210 is assembled to the door frame base unit 100, the front end of the cylinder lock 211 protruding forward from the front plate portion 213a of the cylinder mounting sheet metal 213 is a cylinder insertion hole from the rear side of the door frame base 110. It is inserted through 114 and protrudes forward of the door frame base 110, and the front plate portion 213a and the pair of side plate portions 213b of the cylinder mounting plate metal 213 are housed in the box-shaped cylinder mounting portion 113 which is open to the rear. ing.

[3-4. Overall configuration of the production operation unit]
The overall configuration of the effect operation unit 400 in the door frame 3 will be described in detail with reference to FIGS. 34 to 41 and the like. FIG. 34A is a front view of the effect operation unit in the door frame, and FIG. 34B is a right side view of the effect operation unit. Further, FIG. 35A is a perspective view of the effect operation unit viewed from the front, and FIG. 35B is a perspective view of the effect operation unit viewed from the back. FIG. 36 is an explanatory view of the effect operation unit as viewed from the direction in which the central axis of the operation button extends. FIG. 37 is a cross-sectional view taken along the line DD in FIG. 34 (a), and FIG. 38 is a cross-sectional view taken along the line EE in FIG. 34 (b). 39 (a) is a cross-sectional view taken along the line FF in FIG. 34 (b), and FIG. 39 (b) is an enlarged view of part A in (a). FIG. 40 is an exploded perspective view of the effect operation unit disassembled for each main member and viewed from the front, and FIG. 41 is an exploded perspective view of the effect operation unit disassembled for each main member and viewed from the rear. The effect operation unit 400 is attached to the front portion of the plate unit 320 in the center in the left-right direction in the front view, and can be pressed by the player and can present the effect image to the player. Is.

The effect operation unit 400 has a circular outer shape and a transparent central side excluding the outer peripheral edge, and the operation button 410 that can be pressed and operated by the player, and the effect operation unit of the plate unit cover 326 that surrounds the outer periphery of the operation button 410. A frame-shaped frame unit 415 attached to the mounting portion 326a, a decorative substrate unit 420 arranged behind the operation button 410 and capable of emitting and decorating the outer peripheral edge of the operation button 410 and the frame unit 415, and a frame. The base unit 430, which is attached to the rear side of the unit 415 and the operation button 410 and the decorative board unit 420 are attached to the front side, and the base unit 430, which is visible from the player side through the operation button 410, are attached to the effect. It is equipped with a door frame side effect display device 460 capable of displaying an image.

[3-4a. Manual operation button]
The operation buttons 410 of the effect operation unit 400 will be described in detail with reference to FIGS. 39 to 42 and the like. FIG. 42A is an exploded perspective view of the operation button disassembled and viewed from the front, and FIG. 42B is an exploded perspective view of the operation button disassembled and viewed from the rear. The operation button 410 is formed in a circular shape having an outer shape slightly smaller than the height of the dish unit 320 in the vertical direction, and the central side excluding the outer peripheral edge is transparently formed. The operation button 410 is formed on a transparent button lens 411 having a circular outer circumference and a curved surface shape (a part of a spherical surface) so that the central side bulges forward, and on the front side of the outer peripheral edge of the button lens 411. It includes an annular button frame 412 that is attached, and a cylindrical button base 413 that is attached to the rear side of the button frame 412 so as to sandwich the outer peripheral edge of the button lens 411. The button frame 412 and the button base 413 are formed of members that do not allow light to pass through.

The button lens 411 is formed to have a substantially constant thickness as a whole. Further, the button lens 411 is formed on the surface side in a smooth curved surface shape without unevenness. The button lens 411 extends from the back surface to the center side (inside) with a predetermined length at a position on the inner peripheral side of the button frame 412 in a W-shaped cross section, and is arranged in a row in the circumferential direction. The one-button decorative portion 411a and the first button decorative portion 411a extend along the axis toward the center in a state of being recessed from the back surface in an arc shape at a position on the outer peripheral side, and are lined up within a predetermined angle range in the circumferential direction. It is provided with a plurality of (six) second button decoration portions 411b provided.

As shown in the figure, the first button decorative portion 411a of the button lens 411 extends from the inner circumference of the button frame 412 to the center side when assembled to the operation button 410, and a group on both the left and right sides is a group on both the upper and lower sides. It extends longer to the center than.

The plurality of second button decorative portions 411b of the button lens 411 extend in an arc shape on the same circumference, and are formed three on each of the left and right sides. These second button decoration portions 411b are formed so as to face the frame opening 412a of the button frame 412, and project forward so that the front side thereof is substantially flush with the front surface of the button frame 412.

The button lens 411 exhibits a lens effect in which light is refracted due to irregularities having a W-shaped cross section or an arc-shaped cross section formed on the back surface of the first button decoration portion 411a and the second button decoration portion 411b. Therefore, the rear side is not clearly visible.

The button frame 412 is formed in an annular shape, and includes a plurality (six) frame openings 412a that penetrate in the front-rear direction and extend in an arc shape with a predetermined length in the circumferential direction. The six frame openings 412a are provided on each of the left and right sides, respectively, and correspond to the six second button decorative portions 411b of the button lens 411. The button frame 412 has a plating layer having a metallic luster on its surface.

The button base 413 has a substantially cylindrical main body 413a extending shortly in the front-rear direction, an annular flange 413b protruding outward from the front end of the main body 413a, and a main body 413a from the rear side of the flange 413b. Along the outer circumference of the main body 413a from the rear side of the guide boss portions 413c and the flange portions 413b, which project rearward in a columnar shape along the outer circumference of the flange portion 413b and are arranged in a plurality (four) at substantially equal intervals in the circumferential direction. The detection pieces 413d, which project rearward in a strip shape and are arranged in a plurality (three) in the circumferential direction, penetrate the flange portion 413b in the front-rear direction on the outside of the main body portion 413a and have a predetermined length along the outer circumference. A plurality (six) base openings 413e extending in the circumferential direction and a cylindrical shape extending forward from the front end of the main body 413a, and the front end side is inside along the inner surface of the button lens 411. It is provided with an inner extension portion 413f that is narrowed to (center side).

The outer peripheral edge of the button lens 411 and the button frame 412 are attached to the outer peripheral surface of the inner extending portion 413f of the button base 413 and the front surface of the flange portion 413b. The four guide boss portions 413c are arranged at portions corresponding to the four corners of the upper, lower, left, and right sides with respect to the circumferential direction of the main body portion 413a. These four guide boss portions 413c are slidably inserted into the holding holes 431b of the unit base 431 in the base unit 430. The three detection pieces 413d are arranged at substantially equal intervals in the circumferential direction so that two detection pieces 413d are arranged on the upper side and one on the lower side with respect to the circumferential direction of the main body portion 413a. When the operation button 410 is pressed, these three detection pieces 413d are detected by the push detection sensor 440 of the base unit 430.

The six base openings 413e are provided on each of the left and right sides, respectively, and correspond to the second button decoration portion 411b of the button lens 411 and the frame opening 412a of the button frame 412. At the portion of the base opening 413e in the button base 413, a part of the main body portion 413a and the inner extending portion 413f is recessed from the outer peripheral side to the inner side. The inner diameter of the front end of the inner extending portion 413f, which is narrowed inward, substantially coincides with the inner diameter of the button frame 412.

The front surface of the operation button 410 bulges forward in a curved surface shape (a part of a substantially spherical surface) and is transparently formed. The door frame side effect display device 460 is arranged on the rear side. The display screen of is visible from the front. The operation button 410 has four guide boss portions 413c slidably inserted into the holding hole 431b of the unit base 431 in the base unit 430, and the operation button spring 438 inserted into the holding hole 431b of the unit base 431. Is being urged forward by. The operation button 410 is restricted from moving further forward by the urging force of the operation button spring 438 of the base unit 430, which causes the front side of the outer peripheral edge to abut against the frame unit 415, and the urging force of the operation button spring 438. By pressing against the above, the rear end moves rearward until it comes into contact with the front surface of the base unit 430. When the operation button 410 is pressed and moved backward, at least one of the three detection pieces 413d is detected by the pressure detection sensor 440 of the base unit 430. The operation button 410 is operated by the detection of the detection piece 413d by the push detection sensor 440.

Further, the operation button 410 is a first button decoration formed over the entire circumference so as to extend from the inner peripheral end to the central side of the button frame 412 in the transparent button lens 411 in a state where the effect operation unit 400 is assembled. The portion 411a makes it difficult for the player to see the gap between the inner peripheral surface of the button base 413 and the decorative member 432 inside the operation button of the base unit 430.

Further, the operation button 410 closes the front end opening of the cylindrical button base 413 with the button lens 411 and the button frame 412, and the operation button is provided by the button frame 412 attached to the outer peripheral edge of the button lens 411. With respect to the outer diameter of 410, a transparent portion whose rear is visible is formed so as to be narrowed from the outer circumference to the inside. The presence of the button frame 412 also makes it difficult for the player to see the gap between the inner peripheral surface of the button base 413 and the decorative member 432 inside the operation button of the base unit 430.

Further, when the operation button 410 is assembled to the effect operation unit 400, the rear end of the cylindrical button base 413 (main body portion 413a) passes through the inner peripheral side of the decorative board unit 420 and is closer to the front surface of the decorative board unit 420. It will be in a state of protruding backward. As a result, the light radiated forward from the first LEDs 422a, 423a and the second LEDs 422b, 423b mounted on the operation button left outer decorative board 422 and the operation button right outer decorative board 423 of the decorative board unit 420, respectively, is a button. It is possible to prevent leakage from the outside to the inside of the base 413, and the operation button left inner decorative board 433, the operation button right inner decorative board 434, the operation button upper inner decorative board 435, and the operation button lower inner of the base unit 430. It is possible to prevent the light emitted forward from the LED mounted on the decorative substrate 436 from leaking from the inside to the outside of the button base 413. Therefore, the first LEDs 422a, 423a and the second LEDs 422b, 423b of the decorative board unit 420, the operation button left inner decorative board 433 of the base unit 430, the operation button right inner decorative board 434, the operation button upper inner decorative board 435, and the operation button It is possible to prevent the LED mounted on the lower inner decorative substrate 436 from being luminescently decorated except for the portion targeted for luminescent decoration, and it is possible to perform luminescent decoration with good appearance.

[3-4b. Frame unit]
The frame unit 415 of the effect operation unit 400 will be described in detail with reference to FIGS. 39 to 41 and the like. The frame unit 415 is attached from the front side to the effect operation unit mounting portion 326a of the plate unit cover 326 of the plate unit 320 so as to surround the outer circumference from the front side of the operation button 410, and decorates the outside of the operation button 410. The outer shape of the frame unit 415 is formed so as to match the front end side of the effect operation unit mounting portion 326a.

The frame unit 415 is a frame-shaped frame main body 416 which is attached to the effect operation unit mounting portion 326a of the dish unit cover 326 of the dish unit 320 and has a circular central opening 416a, and the frame main body 416 on both the left and right sides of the central opening 416a. A pair of translucent frame side lenses 417 attached from the rear side, and a translucent frame top lens 418 attached to the frame body 416 above the central opening 416a from the front side. There is.

The frame body 416 has a circular central opening 416a having a diameter smaller than the outer diameter of the operation button 410 and penetrating back and forth, and the center opening 416a penetrating back and forth on both the left and right sides of the center opening 416a. A plurality of (six) outer peripheral openings 416b extending in an arc shape along the peripheral edge of the central opening 416a and notched portions 416c having a predetermined width on the upper front surface of the central opening 416a. , Is equipped. The central opening 416a is formed to have substantially the same size as the diameter on the outer peripheral side of the frame opening 412a of the button frame 412 in the operation button 410. As a result, the front end side of the flange portion 413b of the button base 413 of the operation button 410 can come into contact with the outer peripheral rear side of the frame opening 412a.

The six outer peripheral openings 416b are provided on both the left and right outer sides of the central opening 416a, and are closed by a frame side lens 417 from the rear side. The notch 416c also penetrates in the front-rear direction, and the frame top lens 418 is fitted from the front side.

Further, the frame main body 416 includes a substantially cylindrical inner cylindrical portion 416d extending rearward from a position slightly outside the peripheral edge of the central opening 416a. The inner tubular portion 416d extends rearward from a position between the central opening 416a and the outer peripheral opening 416b, and a portion corresponding to the notch 416c is notched. In the state where the effect operation unit 400 is assembled, the inner cylinder portion 416d has the first LEDs 422a, 423a and the second LEDs 422b, 423b of the operation button left outer decorative board 422 and the operation button right outer decorative board 423 of the decorative board unit 420, respectively. It is located between the first LED 422a and 423a and the second LED 422b and 423b (see FIG. 38).

Further, the frame main body 416 extends outward on each of the upper left and right sides of the outer circumference, and includes a pair of mounting portions 416e to be mounted on the effect operation unit mounting portion 326a of the dish unit cover 326 of the dish unit 320. In the frame body 416 (effect operation unit 400), the pair of mounting portions 416e and the left and right side portions of the cutout portion 416c are mounted on the effect operation unit mounting portion 326a of the dish unit cover 326 of the dish unit 320.

The frame body 416 is made of metal on substantially the entire surface except for a portion having the same width as the notch 416c on the side opposite to the notch 416c side (the side where the frame top lens 418 is attached) with the central opening 416a in between. A glossy plating layer is formed.

The frame side lens 417 closes the outer peripheral opening 416b formed on each of the left and right sides of the frame body 416 from the rear side. The front surface of the frame side lens 417 is formed on a smooth surface without unevenness, and a plurality of irregularities along the peripheral edge of the central opening 416a are formed on the rear surface side (see FIGS. 39 and 46). Light is refracted by these plurality of irregularities so that the rear side of the frame side lens 417 cannot be seen.

The frame top lens 418 is formed in a substantially quadrangular outer shape so as to be fitted into the notch 416c of the frame body 416 from the front side. The front side of the frame top lens 418 is smoothly formed. Further, in the frame top lens 418, a plurality of irregularities extending in a zigzag shape along the peripheral edge of the central opening 416a are arranged in a plurality of rows in the radial direction of the central opening 416a on the rear surface side (FIGS. 37 and 46). reference). Light is refracted by these plurality of irregularities so that the rear side of the frame top lens 418 cannot be seen.

In the frame unit 415, with the effect operation unit 400 assembled, the pair of frame side lenses 417 are the second LEDs 422b and 423b of the operation button left outer decorative board 422 and the operation button right outer decorative board 423 of the decorative board unit 420, respectively. The frame top lens 418 is located in front of the frame top lens decorative substrate 437 of the base unit 430, and the second LEDs 422b, 423b, etc. mounted on them enable light emission decoration. ..

[3-4c. Decorative board unit]
The decorative substrate unit 420 of the effect operation unit 400 will be described in detail with reference to FIGS. 39 to 43 and the like. FIG. 43 is an exploded perspective view of the decorative substrate unit of the effect operation unit as viewed from the front by disassembling it. The decorative substrate unit 420 is attached to the front surface of the base unit 430 below the frame unit 415, and can illuminate and decorate the second button decorative portion 411b of the operation button 410 and the frame side lens 417 of the frame unit 415. Vibration can be applied to the operation unit 400.

The decorative board unit 420 includes a C-shaped board base 421 with an open upper side, an operation button left outer decorative board 422 and an operation button right outer decorative board 423 attached to the front surfaces of the left and right sides of the board base 421, respectively. A vibration motor 424 attached to the lower part of the front surface of the board base 421 and a motor cover 425 attached to the front surface of the board base 421 so as to cover the front side of the vibration motor 424 are provided.

The inner peripheral side of the board base 421 is formed to be slightly larger than the outer diameter of the tubular main body 413a of the button base 413 of the operation button 410, and the outer peripheral side is larger than the outer diameter of the flange portion 413b of the button base 413. Moreover, it is formed to be smaller than the outer diameter of the frame unit 415.

The left outer decorative substrate 422 of the operation button extends in an arc shape along the front surface of the substrate base 421. The operation button left outer decorative board 422 has a plurality of first LEDs 422a mounted along the inner circumference of the board base 421 on the front side, and a plurality of first LEDs 422a mounted on the inner circumference of the board base 421 radially outside the plurality of first LEDs 422a. It includes a plurality of second LEDs 422b mounted along the line. The right outer decorative substrate 423 of the operation button extends in an arc shape along the front surface of the substrate base 421. The right outer decorative board 423 of the operation button is mounted on the front side along the inner circumference of the board base 421 on the inner circumference of the board base 421 on the inner circumference of the board base 421 on the outer side in the radial direction from the plurality of first LEDs 423a. It includes a plurality of second LEDs 423b mounted along the line. The front and rear sides of the operation button left outer decorative board 422 and the operation button right outer decorative board 423 are white.

A weight 424a eccentric to the rotation shaft is attached to the vibration motor 424, and vibration can be generated by rotating the weight 424a.

When the decorative board unit 420 is assembled to the effect operation unit 400, the rear end side of the cylindrical main body 413a of the button base 413 of the operation button 410 is inserted inside the board base 421. Further, in the decorative substrate unit 420, the first LEDs 422a and 423a of the operation button left outer decorative substrate 422 and the operation button right outer decorative substrate 423 are located behind the second button decorative portion 411b of the operation button 410, respectively. The second LEDs 422b and 423b are located behind the frame side lens 417 of the frame unit 415. Further, in the state of being assembled to the effect operation unit 400, a frame is placed between the first LEDs 422a and 423a of the operation button left outer decorative board 422 and the operation button right outer decorative board 423 and the second LEDs 422b and 423b, respectively. The inner cylinder portion 416d of the unit 415 is located (see FIG. 38).

Therefore, the decorative board unit 420 emits and decorates only the second button decorative portion 411b of the operation button 410 by the light from the first LEDs 422a and 423a of the operation button left outer decorative board 422 and the operation button right outer decorative board 423, respectively. At the same time, only the frame side lens 417 of the frame unit 415 can be light-emitting and decorated by the light from the second LEDs 422b and 423b, respectively.

Further, the decorative substrate unit 420 can generate vibration by rotating the weight 424a of the vibration motor 424 to vibrate the entire effect operation unit 400.

[3-4f. Effect of production operation unit]
The operation and effect of the effect operation unit 400 will be described in detail mainly with reference to FIGS. 44 to 46 and the like. FIG. 44 is an explanatory view showing a state in which the operation button is pressed in the cross-sectional view of the effect operation unit of FIG. 37. FIG. 45A shows a production operation unit viewed from the direction in which the central axis of the operation button extends, and a part of the operation button is cut out to be hidden by a first button decoration part of the operation button, a button frame, or the like. It is explanatory drawing which shows the part, (b) is explanatory drawing which shows the part to hide by the 1st button decoration part of the operation button, the button frame, etc. in the cross-sectional view of the effect operation unit. FIG. 46A is an explanatory view showing the appearance of the effect operation unit as a perspective view seen from the front, and FIG. 46B is an explanatory view showing the appearance of the effect operation unit from the direction in which the central axis of the operation button extends. Is.

The effect operation unit 400 of the present embodiment can show the effect image to the player according to the game state that changes when the game ball is driven into the game area 5a of the game board 5, and is operated by the player. It is possible to entertain the player by having the player participate in the effect presented to the player by operating the button 410.

The overall height of the effect operation unit 400 is formed to be substantially the same as the height of the portion below the through-hole 111 of the door frame base 110 in the door frame base unit 100 of the door frame 3. Further, the total width of the effect operation unit 400 is formed to be slightly larger than 1/3 of the total width of the door frame 3. The effect operation unit 400 is arranged in the center in the left-right direction on the lower side of the game area 5a (the through hole 111 of the door frame base 110) in the front view.

In the effect operation unit 400, the upper portion of the frame body 416 of the frame unit 415 is attached to the effect operation unit mounting portion 326a of the plate unit cover 326 of the plate unit 320. When the effect operation unit 400 is attached to the plate unit 320, a gap is provided between the lower surface of the leg portion 442a of the relay board cover 442, which is the bottom surface, and the upper surface of the bottom plate portion 326i of the plate unit cover 326 of the plate unit 320. Is formed. That is, the effect operation unit 400 is attached only to the upper part of the dish unit 320, and is attached in a suspended state.

Further, in the effect operation unit 400, the front surface of the frame unit 415 (the surface formed by the inner circumference of the front end of the central opening 416a of the frame body 416) is parallel to the inclined surface of the front end opening of the effect operation unit mounting portion 326a. It is installed like this. As a result, in the effect operation unit 400, the central axis CL of the transparent operation button 410 that bulges forward in a curved surface shape (a shape of a part of a substantially spherical surface) is at an angle of 63 degrees with respect to the vertical line. It is tilted so that it moves upward as it goes forward. As a result, when the player sits in front of the pachinko machine 1 in order to play a game using the pachinko machine 1, the player's head is arranged above the plate unit 320 (directing operation unit 400). Since it is located in front of the center of the game area 5a on the game board 5, the central axis CL of the operation button 410 passes near the player's head. Therefore, when the player looks down from the game area 5a to the effect operation unit 400 (operation button 410), the operation button 410 is as close as possible to the front view (projected view from a direction parallel to the central axis CL). It can be seen in a state, and the operation button 410, the door frame side effect display device 460 in the operation button 410, and the like can be visually recognized in a good state.

In the effect operation unit 400, the four guide boss portions 413c of the operation button 410 are slidably inserted into the four holding holes 431b of the base unit 430, and are urged forward by the operation button spring 438. In the normal state (when the operation button 410 is not pressed), the effect operation unit 400 causes the front end of the flange portion 413b of the button base 413 of the operation button 410 to be the frame unit 415 due to the urging force of the operation button spring 438. It is in contact with a portion of the rear surface of the frame body 416 near the central opening 416a.

In a normal state, the effect operation unit 400 projects forward from the vicinity of the inner circumference of the button frame 412 of the operation button 410 to the center side (center axis CL side) from the central opening 416a of the frame body 416 of the frame unit 415. There is. In other words, in the transparent button lens 411 that bulges forward in the shape of a curved surface (a part of a substantially spherical surface) of the operation button 410, the portion that protrudes forward from the inner circumference (inside) of the button frame 412 is , The frame unit 415 projects forward from the central opening 416a of the frame body 416 (see FIG. 37 and the like).

Incidentally, in the present embodiment, the diameter of the central opening 416a of the frame body 416 in the frame unit 415 is about 15 cm, and the button lens 411 (front end) is the frame unit with respect to the central axis CL direction of the operation button 410. It protrudes about 4 cm forward from the front surface of the 415.

In a normal state, when the player presses the operation button 410 of the effect operation unit 400, the operation button 410 moves backward along the central axis CL against the urging force of the operation button spring 438. Then, when the rear end of the operation button 410 comes into contact with the front surface of the unit base 431 of the base unit 430, the rearward movement is restricted and the rearward movement of the operation button 410 is stopped. When the player presses the operation button 410, he presses the button lens 411 that bulges forward in a curved surface shape (a shape of a part of a substantially spherical surface).

Since the outer diameter of the operation button 410 is formed to be much larger than that of the operation button for production provided in the conventional pachinko machine, the vicinity of the peripheral edge away from the central portion of the button lens 411 is pressed. It is likely to be done. More specifically, the operation buttons for effect in the conventional pachinko machine are attached so that the central axis extends substantially parallel to the vertical line, whereas the operation buttons 410 of the effect operation unit 400 of the present embodiment. Since the central axis CL is attached at an angle with respect to the vertical line, when the player presses the operation button 410 from above as in the conventional pachinko machine, as shown by the white arrow in FIG. 44, The portion of the operation button 410 away from the central axis CL is pressed.

By the way, in the operation buttons for directing in the conventional pachinko machine, since the surface to be pressed by the player is formed on a flat surface, when the operation button is enlarged while the part to be pressed is a flat surface. , If you press a part that is off the center of the operation button, the surface to be pressed will tilt so that the pressed part will retract first, and the operation button will not be able to retract straight, so you can press the operation button. There is a risk that the pressing operation will not be possible.

On the other hand, the operation button 410 of the effect operation unit 400 of the present embodiment has a curved surface shape (a part of a substantially spherical surface) in which a portion (button lens 411) to be pressed by the player is bulged forward. Therefore, when a position away from the center of the operation button 410 is pressed, the force is distributed to the entire operation button 410 to make it difficult for the operation button 410 to tilt, and the operation button 410 moves straight backward. Can be done. Therefore, no matter which position on the front side of the operation button 410 is pressed, the operation button 410 can be smoothly retracted without tilting, so that the pressing operation can be reliably detected and the operation button 410 is pressed. You can fully enjoy the production of operation.

Further, in the effect operation unit 400, the vibration motor 424 is attached to the lower part of the front surface of the substrate base 421 of the decorative substrate unit 420, and as described above, only the upper part is a plate so that the effect operation unit 400 can be hung. Since it is attached to the effect operation unit mounting portion 326a of the unit cover 326, when the weight 424a is rotated by the vibration motor 424 to generate vibration, the vibration is generated at the part farthest from the mounted part. , The entire effect operation unit 400 can be vibrated greatly (strongly), and the vibration can be transmitted to the player who is in contact with the effect operation unit 400. Further, since the vibration motor 424 is arranged directly under the position (the position of the white arrow in FIG. 44) where the player is relatively easy to press, the operation button 410 is pressed against the player. It is possible to transmit strong vibrations, which can surprise the player and entertain the production.

Further, the effect operation unit 400 is attached to the dish unit cover 326 in a suspended state, and the lower surface of the leg portion 442a of the relay board cover 442 forming the lower surface and the bottom plate of the dish unit cover 326. Since a gap is formed between the upper surface of the portion 326i and the upper surface of the bottom plate portion 326i, the frame is formed until the lower surface of the leg portion 442a abuts on the upper surface of the bottom plate portion 326i when the operation button 410 is strongly pressed or hit. The impact can be absorbed by bending the mounting portion 416e of the unit 415, the effect operation unit mounting portion 326a of the dish unit cover 326, and the like downward. Further, after the lower surface of the leg portion 442a abuts on the upper surface of the bottom plate portion 326i, the downward movement of the effect operation unit 400 is restricted, and the effect operation unit attachment of the frame unit 415 attachment portion 416e and the dish unit cover 326 is restricted. It is possible to prevent an unreasonable force from acting on the portion 326a or the like, and it is possible to prevent damage to the effect operation unit 400 or the like. Therefore, even if the operation button 410 is pressed or hit with a strong force when the player is presented with an effect of pressing the operation button 410 of the effect operation unit 400, the operation button 410 or the effect operation unit Since the 400 etc. are not damaged, it is possible to avoid interruption of the game due to the damage, suppress the deterioration of the player's interest, and increase the burden on the game hall side by making it hard to be damaged. It can be suppressed.

As described above, since the button lens 411 of the operation button 410 that the player presses and operates is formed in a curved surface shape (a part of a substantially spherical surface) protruding forward, it is made into a flat plate shape. The strength and rigidity are higher than in the case, and even if the lens is hit strongly, the impact can be dispersed over the entire button lens 411, and the lens is less likely to be damaged.

Further, as shown in FIG. 46, in the effect operation unit 400, the button lens 411, the frame side lens 417, the frame top lens 418, and the operation button interior decorative member 432 are made of transparent members. The front side (player side) is decorated with irregularities such as the first button decoration portion 411a, the second button decoration portion 411b, the first button inner decoration portion 432f, and the second button inner decoration portion 432g formed on the back surface side. ) Can be visually recognized. In addition, in the part where the uneven decoration is formed, the light is refracted in a complicated manner due to the change in the plate thickness, so that it is difficult to see the rear side through the part where the uneven decoration is formed. ..

Since the effect operation unit 400 includes a first button decoration portion 411a extending from the inner circumference of the button frame 412 in the button lens 411 of the operation button 410 toward the center side, the uneven decoration of the first button decoration portion 411a is provided. This makes it difficult to see the rear part of the outer peripheral edge of the part inside the button lens 411. Behind the portion where the first button decoration portion 411a is formed (rear in the central axis CL direction), the inner peripheral surface of the main body portion 413a of the button base 413 of the operation button 410 and the peripheral wall portion of the operation button inner decoration member 432. A gap is located between the outer peripheral surface of the 432a, but the first button decorative portion 411a located in front of the gap allows the outer peripheral gap of the decorative member 432 inside the operation button to be opened from the front side (player side). It can be difficult to see. As a result, even if the operation button internal decoration member 432 having a fixed position is provided in the operation button 410 that can be pressed, it is possible to prevent the operation button 410 from deteriorating in appearance, and the operation button 410 is seen. It is possible to prevent the player from feeling uncomfortable, and the decorative member 432 inside the operation button can be arranged without any problem in the transparent operation button 410, so that the appearance of the operation button 410 can be improved.

More specifically, the effect operation unit 400 is formed by the first button decoration portion 411a, the second button decoration portion 411b, and the button frame 412 of the button lens 411 in the operation button 410, thereby forming the outer periphery of the operation button inner decoration member 432 of the base unit 430. The unit base 431, the decorative substrate unit 420, and the like, which are on the outer side and on the rear side (back side), are formed so as not to be seen from the player side through the transparent button lens 411. Specifically, in FIG. 45, the portion of the cross hatch surrounded by the alternate long and short dash line is hidden from the player side. As described above, since the operation button 410 is provided with the first button decoration portion 411a, the second button decoration portion 411b, the button frame 412, and the like, the outside and the back side of the operation button interior decoration member 432 are obscured and hidden. This makes it possible to improve the appearance of the operation button 410 and, by extension, the effect operation unit 400 as a whole.

Further, in the effect operation unit 400, the first button decoration portion 411a of the button lens 411 of the operation button 410 extends toward the central axis CL of the operation button 410 and is arranged in a row in the circumferential direction. The second button inner decoration portion 432g formed on the front plate portion 432b of the operation button inner decoration member 432 arranged behind the inside of the operation button 410 extends into a variable octagonal shape centered on the central axis CL. As shown in FIG. 46, the uneven line of the first button decorative portion 411a and the concave-convex line of the second button inner decorative portion 432g intersect with each other and are geometrically arranged. The decoration can be shown to the player.

Further, in the effect operation unit 400, since the first button decoration portion 411a and the second button inner decoration portion 432g are separated from each other in the front-rear direction (the direction in which the central axis CL extends), the effect operation unit 400 is separated from the first button decoration portion 411a. With the decoration portion 432g inside the second button, it is possible to show the player a geometric pattern having a three-dimensional feeling with depth, and it is possible to enjoy the decoration including the inside of the operation button 410.

Further, in the effect operation unit 400, since the first button decoration portion 411a and the second button inner decoration portion 432g are separated in the front-rear direction, when the position of the player's eyes moves, the unevenness of the first button decoration portion 411a Since the degree of overlap between the line and the uneven line of the decorative portion 432 g in the second button changes, the moving decoration can be shown to the player, and the player can be entertained.

In this way, the effect operation unit 400 gives the player a moving and three-dimensional decoration by the first button decoration part 411a of the operation button 410 and the second button inner decoration part 432g of the operation button inner decoration member 432. Since it can be shown, it is possible to strongly attract the interest of the player, and it is possible to make the pachinko machine 1 with high appealing power.

Further, the effect operation unit 400 is inside the operation button 410 (inside the button frame 412), and behind the operation button inner decoration member 432, the operation button left inner decoration board 433, the operation button right inner decoration board 434, and the operation button. The upper inner decorative board 435 and the lower inner decorative board 436 are arranged, and by making a plurality of LEDs mounted on the front surface of them emit light, the operation button inner decorative member 432 in the operation button 410 emits light. Can be decorated. That is, the inside of the operation button 410 can be light-emitting decorated by the operation button left inner decoration board 433, the operation button right inner decoration board 434, the operation button upper inner decoration board 435, and the operation button lower inner decoration board 436. As shown in FIG. 38, the LEDs mounted on the front surfaces of the operation button left inner decorative board 433, the operation button right inner decorative board 434, the operation button upper inner decorative board 435, and the operation button lower inner decorative board 436 are as shown in FIG. When viewed from the extending direction of the central axis CL, since they are arranged inside the cylindrical main body 413a of the button base 413 of the operation button 410, the light from them does not leak to the outside of the main body 413a. , Only the inside of the operation button 410 can be luminescent and decorated satisfactorily.

Further, the effect operation unit 400 is located behind the second button decorative portion 411b facing from the frame opening 412a of the button frame 412 located near the outer periphery of the operation button 410, and the operation button left outer decorative substrate 422 of the decorative substrate unit 420. The first LED 422a and the first LED 423a of the operation button right outer decorative board 423 are arranged, and by causing the first LEDs 422a and 423a to emit light, the six second button decoration portions 411b of the operation button 410 are light-emitting and decorated. Can be done. As shown in FIG. 38, the first LED 422a of the operation button left outer decorative board 422 and the first LED 423a of the operation button right outer decorative board 423 are a cylindrical main body 413a of the button base 413 of the operation button 410 and a frame unit. It is located between the cylindrical inner cylinder portion 416d of the frame body 416 of the 415, and the light from the first LEDs 422a and 423a does not leak to the inside of the main body portion 413a or the outside of the inner cylinder portion 416d, and the operation is performed. Only the second button decoration portion 411b of the button 410 can be satisfactorily luminescent and decorated.

Further, the effect operation unit 400 has a second LED 422b of the operation button left outer decoration board 422 and an operation button right outer decoration board behind the frame side lens 417 facing from the six outer peripheral openings 416b of the frame body 416 in the frame unit 415. The second LED 423b of the 423 is arranged, and the frame side lens 417 can be light-emitting and decorated by causing the second LEDs 422b and 423b to emit light. The second LED 422b of the operation button left outer decorative board 422 and the second LED 423b of the operation button right outer decorative board 423 are located between the cylindrical inner tubular portion 416d of the frame body 416 of the frame unit 415 and the outer periphery of the frame body 416. It is located so that the light from the second LEDs 422b and 423b does not leak to the inside of the inner cylinder portion 416d or the outside of the frame body 416, and only the frame side lens 417 of the frame unit 415 can be luminescently decorated satisfactorily. ..

Further, the effect operation unit 400 has a plurality of frame top lens decorative substrates 437 in the base unit 430 arranged behind the frame top lens 418 of the frame unit 415 and mounted on the front surface of the frame top lens decorative substrate 437. The frame top lens 418 can be light-emitting and decorated by emitting light from the LED. From the lower side of the portion of the base unit 430 where the frame top lens decorative substrate 437 of the unit base 431 is attached, a flat plate-shaped light-shielding wall portion 431c projects forward to the vicinity of the lower end rear of the frame top lens 418, and the frame. The light from the LED of the top lens decoration substrate 437 does not leak to the operation button 410 or the frame side lens 417 side, and only the frame top lens 418 of the frame unit 415 can be satisfactorily luminescent and decorated.

[3-5. Door frame left side unit]
The door frame left side unit 530 of the door frame 3 will be described in detail mainly with reference to FIGS. 47 to 50. FIG. 47A is a front view of the door frame left side unit in the door frame, FIG. 47B is a perspective view of the door frame left side unit as viewed from the front, and FIG. 47C is a rear view of the door frame left side unit. It is a perspective view seen from. FIG. 48 is an exploded perspective view of the door frame left side unit disassembled and viewed from the front, and FIG. 49 is an exploded perspective view of the door frame left side unit disassembled and viewed from the rear. FIG. 50 is a cross-sectional view taken along the line LL in FIG. 47 (a). The door frame left side unit 530 is a door frame base unit that covers the front side of the door frame left side upper decorative board 161 and the door frame left side lower decorative board 162 (door frame left side decorative board 160) on the upper side of the dish unit 320. It is attached to the front left portion on the left side of the through hole 111 in 100. The door frame left side unit 530 is for decorating the front left side of the through hole 111 of the door frame base 110.

The door frame left side unit 530 is a strip-shaped left unit base 531 extending vertically and attached to the front surface of the door frame base 110 in the door frame base unit 100 on the left side of the front view of the through hole 111, and the left unit base 531. It has a transparent strip-shaped left unit diffuser lens member 532 attached to the front surface and a translucent one that is arranged in front of the left unit diffuser lens member 532 and has a polyhedron-like decoration at the front end. On the left unit decorative lens member (not shown) and on the left unit which is attached to the upper front surface of the left unit base 531 from the front side of the left unit decorative lens member and protrudes forward in a tubular frame shape and extends vertically. The decorative base 534, the left unit lower decorative base 535, which is attached to the lower part of the front surface of the left unit base 531 from the front side of the left unit decorative lens member, and is shorter than the left unit upper decorative base 534 and protrudes forward in a frame shape. A transparent left unit decorative cover 536 attached to the front side of the left unit base 531 so as to cover the front end side of the left unit decorative lens member from the front side of the left unit upper decorative base 534 and the left unit lower decorative base 535, and the left unit. It includes a plurality of decorative members 537 attached to the front side of the decorative cover 536.

The left unit base 531 of the door frame left side unit 530 is formed in a shallow box shape with the rear side open, and has a plurality of openings 531a penetrating the front and rear in the front surface. As shown in the figure, the plurality of openings 531a have a circular hole and a quadrangular hole extending vertically. In the left unit base 531, LEDs 161a and 162a mounted on the front surface of the door frame left side decorative substrate 160 (door frame left side upper decorative substrate 161 and door frame left side lower decorative substrate 162) are formed from a plurality of openings 531a. It is attached to the front left side of the door frame base 110 so as to face forward. Each opening 531a of the left unit base 531 is formed so that the LEDs 161a and 162a of the door frame left side decorative substrate 160 are located substantially in the center in the vertical direction when assembled into the door frame 3. The left unit base 531 is formed of a translucent member.

Further, the left unit base 531 has a left reflective vertical wall portion 538 (see FIGS. 5 and 23) erected toward the front side from the glass plate 192 arranged so as to close the through port 111. ing. In the left-side reflective vertical wall portion 538, an inner surface having a flat surface shape and being provided so as to face the through-hole 111 is provided as a reflective surface capable of reflecting light. The reflective surface may be provided by providing the inner surface of the left reflective vertical wall portion 538 itself from a reflective material such as metal or resin, or by attaching a reflective sticker to the inner surface. It is possible. As will be described later, the left reflective standing wall portion 538 is formed by the left unit base 531 and serves as a part (left side portion) of the above-mentioned reflective standing wall portion 33.

The left unit diffusing lens member 532 is formed of a transparent member, and is vertically divided into an upper diffusing lens member 532A and a lower diffusing lens member 532B. The left unit diffuser lens member 532 has a circular lens portion 532a with a circular front view corresponding to the circular opening 531a in the left unit base 531 and a square front view quadrangle corresponding to the rectangular opening 531a. It includes a lens unit 532b. When the door frame left side unit 530 is assembled to the door frame 3, the LEDs 161a and 162a of the door frame left side decorative substrate 160 are located immediately after the center of the circular lens portion 532a and the square lens portion 532b. It is formed.

The circular lens portion 532a of the left unit diffusion lens member 532 is formed in a convex lens shape with smooth front and rear surfaces. The circular lens portion 532a can irradiate the light from the LEDs 161a and 162a arranged at the rear to the front in the form of dots. The circular decorative portion of the left unit decorative lens member can be luminescently decorated by the light radiated forward from the circular lens portion 532a.

The square lens portion 532b of the left unit diffuser lens member 532 includes a central diffuser reflection portion 532c that is recessed rearward in a conical shape at the center of the front surface, and a front diffuser lens portion 532d formed outside the central diffuser reflection portion 532c on the front surface. , The input lens portion 532e that bulges rearward in a curved surface shape at the center of the rear surface (immediately after the central diffusion reflection portion 532c), and the input lens portion 532e on the rear surface as a whole, moving forward as it moves away from the input lens portion 532e. It is provided with a front reflecting portion 532f that is inclined so as to move.

The front diffusion lens portion 532d of the square lens portion 532b is formed by a plurality of concentric arc-shaped grooves divided in the circumferential direction by a line extending radially around the central diffusion reflection portion 532c. More specifically, in the front diffusion lens portion 532d, the groove portion is recessed rearward in an arc shape in the cross-sectional shape when cut along the radial direction, and the mountain portion between the grooves is forward. It bulges in an arc shape, and the front surface is formed in a smooth wavy shape. Further, the front diffusion lens portion 532d is formed so that the groove portion and the mountain portion are alternately positioned in the circumferential direction with the line extending radially extending in the circumferential direction as a boundary.

The front reflection portion 532f of the square lens portion 532b is formed by a plurality of concentric arc-shaped grooves divided in the circumferential direction by a line extending radially around the input lens portion 532e. These plurality of grooves are recessed in a V shape from the rear to the front, and the deepest portion is formed in an arc shape. The front reflecting portion 532f has a cross-sectional shape when cut along the radial direction, in which the mountain portion between the grooves is formed in a triangular shape with a pointed rearward portion, and is formed in a saw shape. The front reflecting portion 532f is formed so that the groove and the mountain portion move forward as the distance from the center increases. Further, the front reflecting portion 532f is formed so that the groove portion and the mountain portion are alternately positioned in the circumferential direction with the line extending radially extending in the circumferential direction as a boundary. The line extending radially extending in the circumferential direction coincides with the dividing line extending radially in the front diffusion lens portion 532d.

The square lens portion 532b is assembled on the door frame 3, and the corresponding LEDs 161a and 162a of the door frame left side decorative substrate 160 are located immediately after the input lens portion 532e.

In the square lens unit 532b, the light radiated forward from the LEDs 161a and 162a is input from the input lens unit 532e into the square lens unit 532b. Since the input lens unit 532e bulges rearward in a curved surface shape (convex lens shape), the light spreading forward from the LEDs 161a and 162a is refracted so as to travel parallel to the front, and the input light is transmitted. Almost everything can be guided to the conical central diffuse reflector 532c. Then, the light guided to the central diffuse reflector 532c is perpendicular to the axis extending in the front-rear direction (parallel to the front surface of the door frame left side decorative substrate 160) due to the inclined conical surface of the central diffuse reflector 532c. It is reflected so as to be diffused in the above direction), and travels in the square lens portion 532b from the center side to the outside along the front surface thereof. Further, the light reflected by the central diffuse reflection unit 532c travels from the central side to the outside (direction away from the center line of the central diffuse reflection unit 532c) over the entire thickness of the square lens unit 532b in the front-rear direction.

When the light reflected from the center side to the outside in the square lens portion 532b substantially parallel to the front surface of the door frame left side decorative substrate 160 reaches the saw-shaped front reflecting portion 532f, it is forward by the surface of the front reflecting portion 532f. It reflects to the side. At this time, since the rear surface of the front reflecting portion 532f is inclined so as to move forward as the distance from the central diffuse reflection portion 532c increases, the thickness of the square lens portion 532b in the front-rear direction becomes thinner as the distance from the center increases. (See FIG. 50). As a result, the light reflected outward by the central diffuse reflection unit 532c over the entire thickness of the square lens unit 532b in the front-rear direction is sequentially forwarded by the front reflection unit 532f from the center side to the outside. Can be reflected.

Then, the light reflected forward by the front reflecting portion 532f is emitted forward from the square lens portion 532b through the front diffusion lens portion 532d. At this time, since the front diffusing lens portion 532d has a wavy cross section, the light reflected forward by the front reflecting portion 532f can be diffused in various directions, and the square lens portion 532b It is possible to irradiate the front surface (the rear surface of the left unit decorative lens member) substantially uniformly from the front surface of the lens.

In the front diffuser lens portion 532d and the front reflection portion 532f, the square lens portion 532b is formed by dividing a plurality of concentric grooves by a plurality of radially extending lines, and then dividing a plurality of concentric arcuate grooves with the dividing line as a boundary. Is arranged in the radial direction so that the concentric arcuate grooves are alternately arranged in the circumferential direction. Therefore, the light emitted from the front surface to the front of the square lens portion 532b has a concentric striped pattern. It is possible to prevent the light from becoming light, and it is possible to irradiate the light with a more uniform shade forward. As a result, the multi-faceted decorative portion in front of the square lens portion 532b in the left unit decorative lens member can be luminescent and decorated substantially uniformly.

The left unit decorative lens member (not shown) is formed along the front surface of the left unit decorative cover 536. The left unit decorative lens member is located in front of the circular decorative portion formed in the front position of the circular lens portion 532a of the left unit diffuser lens member 532 and the square lens portion 532b of the left unit diffuser lens member 532. It is equipped with a multi-faceted decorative part formed on the part. The circular decorative portion is formed in a shape in which a plurality of triangular ribs are provided in the circumferential direction on the outer periphery of a columnar portion whose front surface is recessed and extends shortly in the front-rear direction. In the polyhedral decoration part, a plurality of square pyramid-shaped parts are arranged in the vertical direction on the front surface of the rectangular parallelepiped extending vertically, and a polyhedron consisting of a plurality of triangles is arranged in the vertical direction on both the left and right sides of the rectangular parallelepiped part. It is formed in a shape like that. The circular decorative portion and the multifaceted decorative portion are formed in the same shape as the circular decorative portion 561a and the multifaceted decorative portion 561b of the right unit decorative lens member 561 in the door frame right side unit 550.

The left unit decorative lens member can be visually recognized from the front side (player side) through the transparent left unit decorative cover 536. Further, in the left unit decorative lens member, the multifaceted decorative portion is forward from the square lens portion 532b of the left unit diffuser lens member 532 by the light radiated forward from the circular lens portion 532a of the left unit diffuser lens member 532. Each lens is decorated with light emitted from the lens.

The decorative base 534 on the left unit is a quadrangle whose front view shape extends vertically, and is formed in a square cylinder shape extending back and forth. The upper decorative base 534 of the left unit is inclined so that a portion forming the lower surface on the outer periphery protrudes downward from the front end side to the rear end side, and the lower portion of the portion penetrates back and forth. The decorative base 534 on the left unit is formed of a translucent member.

The front view of the decorative base 535 under the left unit is formed in a U shape that is open upward. The lower decorative base 535 of the left unit is inclined from substantially the center in the vertical direction at the front end to the rear end so that the upper side moves rearward as it goes upward. The decorative base 535 under the left unit is formed of a translucent member.

The left unit decorative cover 536 extends up and down over the entire height of the door frame left side unit 530. The left unit decorative cover 536 is bent so that the middle portion in the vertical direction is recessed rearward, and the lower portion is bent rearward along the front end of the upper decorative base 534 of the left unit, and the left It connects the dogleg-shaped part whose upper part is bent backward along the front end of the lower decorative base 535 of the unit, the lower end of the upper doglegged part, and the upper end of the lower doglegged part. It is composed of a linear part.

The upper and lower ends of the left unit decorative cover 536 are attached to the front surface of the left unit upper decorative base 534 and the front surface of the left unit lower decorative base 535, respectively. The left unit decorative cover 536 is formed of a transparent member, and the left unit decorative lens member arranged on the rear side can be visually recognized from the front side.

The decorative member 537 extends vertically and shortly, and is attached to the front surface of the left unit decorative cover 536 at predetermined intervals in the vertical direction. The decorative member 537 is formed of a translucent member.

[3-6. Door frame right side unit]
The door frame right side unit 550 of the door frame 3 will be described in detail with reference to FIGS. 51 to 55 and the like. 51 (a) is a front view of the door frame right side unit in the door frame, (b) is a perspective view of the door frame right side unit as viewed from the front, and (c) is a rear view of the door frame right side unit. It is a perspective view seen from. FIG. 52 is an exploded perspective view of the door frame right side unit disassembled and viewed from the front, and FIG. 53 is an exploded perspective view of the door frame right side unit disassembled and viewed from the rear. FIG. 54 is a cross-sectional view taken along the line MM in FIG. 51 (a). FIG. 55 (a) is a cross-sectional view taken along the line NN in FIG. 51 (a), and FIG. 55 (b) is a cross-sectional view taken along the line OO in FIG. 51 (a). The door frame right side unit 550 is attached to the upper side of the dish unit 320 and to the right side of the through hole 111 on the front surface of the door frame base 110 of the door frame base unit 100.

The door frame right side unit 550 includes a vertically extending box-shaped right unit base 551 attached to the front surface of the door frame base 110 in the door frame base unit 100 and attached to the right side of the front view of the through hole 111, and the front surface of the right unit base 551. The door frame right side decorative board 552 and the door frame right side decorative board 552 are attached to the left side from the center of the front view on the front side of the right unit base 551 and extend in the vertical direction and the front-rear direction. A transparent flat plate-shaped right unit left diffusing lens member 553, a sheet-shaped right unit left decorative member 554 attached to the left side surface of the right unit left diffusing lens member 553 and decorated, and a right unit left decorative member. It includes a transparent flat plate-shaped right unit left cover 555 attached to the right unit left diffusion lens member 553 so as to cover the left side of the 554.

Further, the door frame right side unit 550 is located on the front side of the door frame right side decorative substrate 552 and on the right side of the front view of the right unit left diffuser lens member 553. It is attached to the member 553 and is attached to the right side surface of the transparent flat plate-shaped right unit right diffusion lens member 556 extending in the vertical direction and the front-rear direction and the right unit right diffusion lens member 556 and is decorated. It is provided with a sheet-shaped right unit right decorative member 557 and a transparent flat plate-shaped right unit right cover and 558 attached to the right unit right diffuser lens member 556 so as to cover the right side of the right unit right decorative member 557. There is.

Further, the door frame right side unit 550 is arranged between the right unit left diffusion lens member 553 and the right unit right diffusion lens member 556, and is shallow extending in the vertical direction and the front-rear direction in which the front and right sides are open. A box-shaped, opaque right unit left light-shielding member 559 and a right-hand unit right diffuser lens member 556 left side of the right unit left light-shielding member 559 are attached so as to close the open right side. It is provided with a flat plate-shaped right unit right light-shielding member 560.

Further, the door frame right side unit 550 is attached to the front end of the right unit left diffusion lens member 553 and the right unit right diffusion lens member 556, and has a translucent right having a polyhedron-like decoration at the front end. It is attached to the front surface of the right unit base 551 so as to cover the left and right sides of the unit decorative lens member 561, the right unit decorative lens member 561, the right unit left diffuser lens member 553, and the front end side of the right unit right diffuser lens member 556. A frame-shaped right unit decorative base 562 that penetrates back and forth, a transparent right unit cover 563 that is attached to the front side of the right unit decorative base 562 so as to close the front end opening of the right unit decorative base 562, and a right unit cover. It includes a plurality of decorative members 564 attached to the front side of the 563. Although not shown, the door frame right side unit 550 is attached so as to penetrate the right unit base 551 vertically, and the door body relay board of the door frame base unit 100 and the door frame of the door frame top unit 570. A connection cable for connecting to the top unit relay board 589 is provided.

The right unit base 551 of the door frame right side unit 550 is a quadrangle whose front view is elongated vertically, is short in the front-rear direction and extends in a square cylinder shape, and is formed in a box shape in which the vicinity of the center in the front-rear direction is closed. Has been done. The right unit base 551 is formed of a translucent member.

Further, the right unit base 551 has a right reflective vertical wall portion 568 (see FIGS. 6 and 24) erected toward the front side from the glass plate 192 arranged so as to close the through port 111. ing. In the right-side reflective vertical wall portion 568, an inner surface having a flat surface shape and being provided so as to face the through-hole 111 is provided as a reflective surface capable of reflecting light. As with the inner surface of the left reflective vertical wall portion 538, the reflective surface itself is provided from a reflective material such as metal or resin on the inner surface of the right reflective vertical wall portion 568, and is also reflected on the inner surface. It can also be provided by attaching a seal for use. As will be described later, the right reflective vertical wall portion 568 is formed by the right unit base 551 and is a portion that bears a part (right side portion) of the above-mentioned reflective vertical wall portion 33.

The decorative substrate 552 on the right side of the door frame is formed in the shape of a strip extending vertically. The door frame right side decorative substrate 552 is mounted on a plurality of left LEDs 552a mounted on the left side of the center in the left-right direction on the front surface, a right LED 552b mounted on the right side of the center in the left-right direction on the front surface, and a center in the left-right direction on the front surface. It is provided with a plurality of medium LEDs 552c and the like. The left LED 552a of the door frame right side decorative substrate 552 is for causing the right unit left decorative member 554 to emit light and decorate via the right unit left diffusion lens member 553. Further, the right LED 552b is for causing the right unit right decorative member 557 to emit light and decorate via the right unit right diffusion lens member 556. The middle LED 552c is for illuminating and decorating the right unit decorative lens member 561.

The front and rear sides of the door frame right side decorative substrate 552 are formed in white. The door frame right side decorative substrate 552 is vertically divided into an upper door frame right side upper decorative substrate 552A and a lower door frame right side lower decorative substrate 552B. Although not shown, the door frame right side lower decorative board 552B is connected to the door body relay board of the door frame base unit 100, and the door frame right side upper decorative board 552A is the door frame right side lower decorative board 552B. It is connected to the.

The right unit left diffuser lens member 553 includes a flat plate-shaped main body portion 553a extending in the vertical and front-rear directions, and a rear wall portion 553b protruding shortly from the rear side of the main body portion 553a to the right in the front view. The rear wall portion 553b is cut out in a quadrangular shape from the right end side in the front view to the left, and a plurality of cutout portions 553c are formed in the vertical direction at predetermined intervals, and the right unit left decorative member on the left surface side in the front view of the main body portion 553a. A housing recess 553d that is shallowly recessed to accommodate 554, an input lens portion 553e that protrudes rearward from the rear end surface of the main body 553a and is provided in a plurality of vertical directions, and a front view right side of the main body 553a, respectively. A plurality of side reflecting portions 553f arranged in the vertical direction so that the input lens portions 553e are centered in the vertical direction are provided.

The main body portion 553a of the right unit left diffusion lens member 553 has a side view shape in which the upper corner on the front end side of a quadrangle extending vertically is notched diagonally in a C chamfer shape, and the lower side is upward as it goes forward. It is formed in a shape that is inclined so as to move to. Further, as shown in FIG. 55, the main body portion 553a is entirely moved to the right in the front view from the rear end side to the front with respect to the vertical line on the front surface of the door frame right side decorative substrate 552. It is slightly tilted. The front end of the main body portion 553a protrudes forward more than the front end of the door frame left side unit 530 in a state of being assembled to the door frame 3.

The rear wall portion 553b is assembled to the door frame right side unit 550, and its right end extends to substantially the center in the left-right direction of the right unit base 551. The left end of the rear wall portion 556b of the right unit right diffusion lens member 556 abuts on the right end of the rear wall portion 553b.

A plurality of the plurality of cutout portions 553c are formed at predetermined intervals in the vertical direction, and a part thereof corresponds to the LED 552c in the decorative substrate 552 on the right side of the door frame. In the state of being assembled to the door frame right side unit 550, the middle LED 552c of the door frame right side decorative substrate 552 faces forward from the plurality of notches 553c, and the right unit decorative lens member 561 is satisfactorily emitted by the plurality of middle LEDs 552c. Can be decorated.

The bottom surface of the accommodating recess 553d is formed on a flat surface, and the outer peripheral shape substantially matches the outer shape of the right unit left decorative member 554. Thereby, the right unit left decorative member 554 can be accommodated.

The plurality of input lens portions 553e project rearward at predetermined intervals in the vertical direction from the rear end surface of the main body portion 553a. Specifically, when the right unit left diffusion lens member 553 is divided into six equal parts in the vertical direction, they are formed substantially in the center of each vertical direction. Although detailed illustration is omitted, the input lens portion 553e is recessed forward so as to be curved in a spherical shape from a rectangular parallelepiped portion in which a vertically extending quadrangle protrudes rearward and the rear surface of the rectangular parallelepiped portion. Has a site and. These input lens portions 553e are respectively located immediately before the left LED 552a of the door frame right side decorative substrate 552 in a state of being assembled to the door frame right side unit 550. As a result, the light from the left LED 552a can be input so as to be widely diffused in the main body portion 553a.

A plurality (six) of side reflecting portions 553f are provided in the vertical direction. Each side reflection portion 553f is formed by a plurality of concentric arc-shaped grooves divided in the circumferential direction by a line extending radially around the input lens portion 553e. In each of these concentric arcuate grooves, the surface on the side closer to the input lens portion 553e is inclined with respect to the surface on the main body portion 553a, and the surface on the side far from the input lens portion 553e is the main body portion. It extends perpendicular to the surface of 553a, and the deepest part is formed in an arc shape. The side reflecting portion 553f has a cross-sectional shape formed into a sharp triangular shape such that the mountain portion between the grooves faces the center side when cut in the radial direction about the input lens portion 553e. , The whole is formed in a saw shape. Further, the side reflecting portion 553f is formed so that the groove portion and the mountain portion are alternately arranged in the circumferential direction with the radial line dividing the plurality of concentric arc-shaped grooves in the circumferential direction as a boundary. ing.

In the right unit left diffusion lens member 553, the light radiated forward from the left LED 552a of the door frame right side decorative substrate 552 flows from the rear surface of the input lens portion 553e into the main body portion 553a of the right unit left diffusion lens member 553. Being incident. Since the rear end of the input lens portion 553e is recessed in a curved shape toward the front, the curved surface refracts the light from the left LED 552a so as to spread, and in the main body portion 553a, each input lens portion 553e It will diffuse radially forward around the center.

Since the main body portion 553a is slightly inclined with respect to the line extending vertically from the front surface of the door frame right side decorative substrate 552 so that the whole body moves to the right in the front view toward the front, the door frame The light emitted from the left LED 552a mounted on the front surface of the right side decorative substrate 552 and incident from the input lens portion 553e into the main body portion 553a hits the flat left surface in the main body portion 553a. However, the direct light from the left LED 552a is not radiated from the left surface of the main body 553a to the outside due to the angle of incidence with respect to the left surface of the main body 553a, but is reflected to the side reflecting portion 553f side on the inner surface of the left surface. It becomes.

Then, the light incident forward from the input lens portion 553e into the main body portion 553a is reflected to the left in the front view by hitting the saw-shaped side reflecting portion 553f, and is reflected outward from the left surface of the main body portion 553a. It will be irradiated. Light is also emitted from the right surface (side reflection portion 553f) of the main body portion 553a to the outside (right side when viewed from the front), but the right unit left light shielding member 559 arranged on the right side of the main body portion 553a is white. Since it is a member, the left surface of the right unit left light-shielding member 559 is brightly illuminated, and the indirect light reflected by the right unit left light-shielding member 559 is emitted to the left side through the main body portion 553a. .. Therefore, from the left surface of the main body portion 553a, the light reflected to the left by the side reflecting portion 553f in the main body portion 553a and the light reflected to the right from the side reflecting portion 553f are emitted to the right and left on the left surface of the right unit left shading member 559. Since the light that reflects toward the main body and passes through the main body 553a is emitted to the left, the right unit left decorative member 554 attached to the left side of the main body 553a can be light-emitting and decorated with good brightness. can.

Further, in the side reflecting portion 553f, a plurality of concentric grooves are divided by a plurality of radially extending lines, and then the plurality of concentric arc-shaped grooves are shifted in the radial direction with the dividing line as a boundary to form a concentric arc-shaped groove. Are arranged alternately in the circumferential direction, so that the light radiated from the left surface of the main body 553a to the outside (left side) is prevented from becoming light having concentric striped shades. It is possible to irradiate more uniform light to the left. As a result, the left decorative member 554 of the right unit housed in the storage recess 553d on the left side of the main body 553a can be lightly decorated substantially uniformly.

Since the right unit left diffusion lens member 553 is formed of a transparent member, side reflections formed on the opposite side from the front left side (the side where the accommodating recess 553d is formed) of the main body portion 553a. A pattern composed of a plurality of concentric arcuate grooves and radially extending lines of the portion 553f can be visually recognized. Therefore, when a transparent portion is formed in the right unit left decorative member 554, the pattern of the side reflecting portion 553f of the right unit left diffusion lens member 553 can be visually recognized through the transparent portion, and the transparent portion in the right unit left decorative member 554 becomes transparent. Can be decorated by the side reflecting portion 553f.

The right unit left decorative member 554 is formed in the shape of a thin sheet, and decorations such as the maker logo of the pachinko machine 1 and the logo in line with the production concept presented to the player on the game board 5 are translucent. It is given to have. The right unit left cover 555 protects the outer surface of the right unit left decorative member 554 in a state of being assembled to the door frame right side unit 550.

The right unit right diffusion lens member 556 is formed substantially symmetrically with the right unit left diffusion lens member 553, and has a similar configuration. More specifically, the right unit right diffusion lens member 556 includes a flat plate-shaped main body portion 556a extending in the vertical and front-rear directions, and a rear wall protruding shortly from the rear side of the main body portion 556a to the left in the front view. The portion 556b and the rear wall portion 556b are notched from the left end side in the front view to the right in a quadrangular shape, and a plurality of cutout portions 556c are formed at predetermined intervals in the vertical direction, and the right side of the main body portion 556a in the front view. Front view of the housing recess 556d, which is shallowly recessed to accommodate the unit right decorative member 557, the input lens portion 556e, which protrudes rearward from the rear end surface of the main body portion 556a and is provided in the vertical direction, and the main body portion 556a. On the left side, each input lens unit 556e is provided with a plurality of side reflection units 556f arranged in the vertical direction so as to be centered in the vertical direction.

Right unit The main body of the right diffusion lens member 556a has a side view shape in which the upper corner of the front end side of a quadrangle extending vertically is notched diagonally in a C chamfer shape, and the lower side is upward as it goes forward. It is formed in a shape that is inclined so as to move to, and has substantially the same outer shape as the main body portion 553a of the right unit left diffusion lens member 553. Further, as shown in FIG. 55, the main body portion 556a is entirely moved to the left in the front view from the rear end side to the front with respect to the vertical line on the front surface of the door frame right side decorative substrate 552. It is slightly tilted. The front end of the main body portion 556a protrudes forward more than the front end of the door frame left side unit 530 in a state of being assembled to the door frame 3.

The rear wall portion 556b is assembled to the door frame right side unit 550, and its left end extends to substantially the center in the left-right direction of the right unit base 551. The right end of the rear wall portion 553b of the right unit left diffusion lens member 553 comes into contact with the left end of the rear wall portion 556b.

A plurality of the plurality of notches 556c are formed at predetermined intervals in the vertical direction, and a part thereof corresponds to the LED 552c in the decorative substrate 552 on the right side of the door frame. These plurality of notch portions 556c are formed at positions corresponding to the plurality of notch portions 553c of the right unit left diffusion lens member 553. Therefore, in the state of being assembled to the door frame right side unit 550, the cutout portion 553c of the right unit left diffusion lens member 553 and the notch portion 556c of the right unit right diffusion lens member 556 have a square opening penetrating back and forth. Is formed, the middle LED 552c of the door frame right side decorative substrate 552 faces forward from the opening, and the right unit decorative lens member 561 can be satisfactorily luminescent and decorated by the plurality of middle LEDs 552c.

The bottom surface of the accommodating recess 556d is formed on a flat surface, and the shape of the outer periphery substantially matches the outer shape of the right decorative member 557 of the right unit. As a result, the right unit right decorative member 557 can be accommodated.

The plurality of input lens portions 556e project rearward at predetermined intervals in the vertical direction from the rear end surface of the main body portion 556a. Specifically, the right unit right diffusion lens member 556 is formed substantially in the center of each of the vertical directions when the right diffusion lens member 556 is divided into six equal parts in the vertical direction. Although detailed illustration is omitted, the input lens portion 556e is recessed forward so as to be curved in a spherical shape from a rectangular parallelepiped portion in which a vertically extending quadrangle protrudes rearward and the rear surface of the rectangular parallelepiped portion. Has a site and. These input lens portions 556e are respectively located immediately before the right LED 552b of the door frame right side decorative substrate 552 in a state of being assembled to the door frame right side unit 550. As a result, the light from the right LED 552b can be input so as to be widely diffused in the main body portion 556a.

A plurality (six) of side reflecting portions 556f are provided in the vertical direction. Each side reflection portion 556f is formed by a plurality of concentric arcuate grooves divided in the circumferential direction by a line extending radially around the input lens portion 556e. In each of these concentric arcuate grooves, the surface on the side closer to the input lens portion 556e is inclined with respect to the surface on the main body portion 556a, and the surface on the side far from the input lens portion 556e is the main body portion. It extends perpendicular to the surface of 556a, and the deepest part is formed in an arc shape. The side reflecting portion 556f has a cross-sectional shape formed into a sharp triangular shape such that the mountain portion between the grooves faces the center side when cut in the radial direction about the input lens portion 556e. , The whole is formed in a saw shape. Further, the side reflecting portion 556f is formed so that the groove portion and the mountain portion are alternately arranged in the circumferential direction with the radial line dividing the plurality of concentric arc-shaped grooves in the circumferential direction as a boundary. ing.

In the right unit right diffusion lens member 556, the light radiated forward from the right LED 552b of the door frame right side decorative substrate 552 flows from the rear surface of the input lens portion 556e into the main body portion 556a of the right unit right diffusion lens member 556. Being incident. Since the rear end of the input lens portion 556e is recessed in a curved shape toward the front, the curved surface refracts the light from the right LED 552b so as to spread, and in the main body portion 556a, each input lens portion 556e It will diffuse radially forward around the center.

Since the main body portion 556a is slightly inclined with respect to the line extending vertically from the front surface of the door frame right side decorative substrate 552 so that the whole body moves to the left in the front view as the whole moves forward, the door frame The light emitted from the right LED 552b mounted on the front surface of the right side decorative substrate 552 and incident from the input lens portion 556e into the main body portion 556a hits the flat right surface in the main body portion 556a. However, the direct light from the right LED 552b is not radiated from the left surface of the main body 556a to the outside due to the angle of incidence with respect to the right surface of the main body 556a, but is reflected to the side reflecting portion 556f side on the inner surface of the right surface. It becomes.

Then, the light incident forward from the input lens portion 556e into the main body portion 556a is reflected to the right in the front view by hitting the saw-shaped side reflecting portion 556f, and is reflected outward from the right surface of the main body portion 556a. It will be irradiated. Light is also emitted from the right surface (side reflection portion 556f) of the main body portion 556a to the outside (left side when viewed from the front), but the right unit right shading member 560 arranged on the left side of the main body portion 556a is white. Since it is a member, the right surface of the right light-shielding member 560 of the right unit is brightly illuminated, and the indirect light reflected by the right light-shielding member 560 of the right unit is emitted to the right side through the main body portion 556a. .. Therefore, from the right side of the main body portion 556a, the light reflected to the right by the side reflecting portion 556f in the main body portion 556a and the light emitted to the left from the side reflecting portion 556f are emitted to the left on the right side of the right light shielding member 560 of the right unit. Since the light that reflects toward the body and passes through the main body 556a is emitted to the right, the right unit right decorative member 557 attached to the right side of the main body 556a can be light-emitting and decorated with good brightness. can.

Further, in the side reflecting portion 556f, a plurality of concentric grooves are divided by a plurality of radially extending lines, and then the plurality of concentric arc-shaped grooves are shifted in the radial direction with the dividing line as a boundary to form a concentric arc-shaped groove. Are arranged alternately in the circumferential direction, so that the light radiated from the right surface of the main body portion 556a to the outside (right side) is prevented from becoming light having concentric striped shades. It is possible to irradiate more uniform light to the right. As a result, the right unit right decorative member 557 housed in the storage recess 556d on the right side of the main body 556a can be lightly and uniformly decorated.

Since the right unit right diffusion lens member 556 is formed of a transparent member, the side reflection formed on the opposite side from the front view right side (the side where the accommodating recess 556d is formed) of the main body portion 556a. A pattern composed of a plurality of concentric arcuate grooves and radially extending lines of the portion 556f can be visually recognized. Therefore, when a transparent portion is formed in the right decorative member 557 of the right unit, the pattern of the side reflecting portion 556f of the right diffuser lens member 556 of the right unit can be visually recognized through the transparent portion, and the transparent portion of the right decorative member 557 of the right unit is transparent. Can be decorated by the side reflecting portion 556f.

The right unit right decorative member 557 is formed in the shape of a thin sheet, and decorations such as the maker logo of the pachinko machine 1 and the logo in line with the production concept presented to the player on the game board 5 are translucent. It is given to have. The right unit right cover 558 protects the outer surface of the right unit right decorative member 557 in a state of being assembled to the door frame right side unit 550. The right unit right decorative member 557 and the right unit right cover 558 are formed substantially symmetrically with the right unit left decorative member 554 and the right unit left cover 555. Further, the decorations applied to the right unit left decorative member 554 and the right unit right decorative member 557 may be the same decoration or different decorations.

The right unit left light-shielding member 559 is formed so that the side view shape is substantially the same as the side view shape of the right unit left diffusion lens member 553 and the right unit right diffusion lens member 556. The right unit left light-shielding member 559 is formed in a shallow box shape with the front and right sides open. The right unit left light-shielding member 559 includes a flat plate-shaped main body portion 559a extending in the vertical and front-rear directions, a rear wall portion 559b protruding from the rear side of the main body portion 559a to the right in the front view in a short flat plate shape, and rear. The wall portion 559b is cut out in a square shape from the right end side to the left in the front view, and a plurality of cutout portions 559c are formed in the vertical direction at predetermined intervals, and the main body portion 559a extends from the right side to the right and is rearward. It includes a plurality of flat plate-shaped reinforcing portions 559d extending from the wall portion 559b to the front end of the main body portion 559a.

The main body 559a of the right unit left light-shielding member 559 has a side view shape in which the upper corner on the front end side of a quadrangle extending vertically is notched diagonally in a C chamfer shape, and the lower side is upward as it goes forward. It is formed in a shape that is inclined so as to move, and has substantially the same outer shape as the main bodies 553a and 556a of the right unit left diffusion lens member 553 and the right unit right diffusion lens member 556.

The rear wall portion 559b is assembled to the door frame right side unit 550, and its left end extends to the right side of the right unit base 551 substantially in the left-right direction. The left surface of the right unit right shading member 560 abuts on the right end of the rear wall portion 559b.

A plurality of notches 559c are formed at predetermined intervals in the vertical direction, and a part thereof corresponds to the LED 552c in the decorative substrate 552 on the right side of the door frame. These plurality of notched portions 559c are formed at positions corresponding to the plurality of notched portions 553c and 556c of the right unit left diffusion lens member 553 and the right unit right diffusion lens member 556. Therefore, in the state of being assembled to the door frame right side unit 550, the middle LED 552c of the door frame right side decorative substrate 552 faces forward from the plurality of notches 559c, and the right unit decorative lens member 561 is satisfactorily emitted by the plurality of middle LEDs 552c. Can be decorated.

The plurality of reinforcing portions 559d are provided as a set of a pair of reinforcing portions 559d separated in the vertical direction at substantially the same height as the left and right widths, and three sets separated in the vertical direction by a predetermined distance. The reinforcing portion 559d of each set is formed at a position behind the decorative member 564 attached to the right unit cover 563, respectively. These plurality of reinforcing portions 559d enhance the overall strength and rigidity of the door frame right side unit 550.

The right light-shielding member 560 has a side view shape such that the upper corner on the front end side of a quadrangle extending vertically is notched diagonally in a C-chamfer shape, and the lower side moves upward as it moves forward. It is formed in an inclined shape, and is formed in substantially the same shape as the main body portion 559a in the right unit left light shielding member 559. The right unit right light-shielding member 560 closes the right opening opened to the right of the right unit left light-shielding member 559 formed in a shallow box shape in a state of being assembled to the door frame right side unit 550.

The right unit left light-shielding member 559 and the right unit right light-shielding member 560 are each formed of white members. As shown in FIG. 55, the right unit left light-shielding member 559 and the right unit right light-shielding member 560 are assembled into the door frame right side unit 550, and the main body 559a and the right unit right light-shielding member 560 are the right units. The left diffusion lens member 553 and the right unit right diffusion lens member 556 are arranged so as to be close to the main bodies 553a and 556a. As a result, the main body portion 559a of the right unit left shading member 559 and the right unit right shading member 560 are separated from each other in the left-right direction, forming a space extending in the up-down direction and the front-back direction with a predetermined width in the left-right direction. .. The light radiated forward from the LED 552c in the door frame right side decorative substrate 552 through the space formed between the main body portion 559a of the right unit left shading member 559 and the right unit right shading member 560 is used to decorate the right unit. The rear side of the lens member 561 is irradiated.

Further, the right unit left light-shielding member 559 and the right unit right light-shielding member 560 are formed of a translucent member, and illuminate forward from the left LED 552a, the middle LED 552c, and the right LED 552b on the door frame right side decorative substrate 552, respectively. The left LED 552a, the right LED 552b, and the right LED 552b corresponding to the right unit left decorative member 554, the right unit right decorative member 557, and the right unit decorative lens member 561 are prevented from interfering with each other. The light emitting decoration can be made only by the medium LED 552c.

Further, the right unit left light-shielding member 559 and the right unit right light-shielding member 560 are arranged behind each of the divided spaces because the internal space is divided into four in the vertical direction by three sets of reinforcing portions 559d. The LED 552c in the right side decorative substrate 552 of the door frame can prevent light from interfering with each other, and the portion of the right unit decorative lens member 561 located in front of each space can be prevented. , Each can be independently luminescent and decorated. That is, on the front end side of the door frame right side unit 550, it is possible to divide the door frame into a plurality of (four) regions in the vertical direction and independently illuminate each region.

The right unit decorative lens member 561 is formed in a shape that follows the front end shape of the right unit left diffusion lens member 553 and the right unit right diffusion lens member 556. The right unit decorative lens member 561 includes a circular decorative portion 561a formed in a circular shape in a front view, and a polyhedral decorative portion 561b extending vertically and forming a plurality of polyhedra. The circular decorative portion 561a is formed in a shape in which a plurality of triangular ribs are provided in the circumferential direction on the outer periphery of a columnar portion whose front surface is recessed and extends shortly in the front-rear direction. In the polyhedral decorative portion 561b, a plurality of square pyramid-shaped portions are arranged in the vertical direction on the front surface of the rectangular parallelepiped extending vertically, and a plurality of rows of polyhedrons composed of a plurality of triangles are vertically arranged on both left and right sides of the rectangular parallelepiped portion. It is formed in a shape as if it were installed.

More specifically, the right unit decorative lens member 561 is a space in which a plurality of circular decorative portions 561a and a multifaceted decorative portion 561b are divided into four by three sets of reinforcing portions 559d in the right unit left light shielding member 559. Among the parts located in the front, one multi-faceted decorative portion 561b is arranged on each of the upper and lower sides of the circular decorative portion 561a arranged in the center in the vertical direction in the three parts from the top, and one multi-faceted decorative portion 561b is arranged in the lowermost part. It is formed so that only the portion 561b is arranged.

The right unit decorative lens member 561 is attached to the front end of the right unit left diffusion lens member 553 and the right unit right diffusion lens member 556. The right unit decorative lens member 561 can be visually recognized from the front side (player side) through the transparent right unit cover 563. The right unit decorative lens member 561 is light-emitting decorated by the LED 552c in the door frame right side decorative substrate 552 arranged at the rear.

The right unit decorative base 562 is formed in a tubular frame shape penetrating in the front-rear direction. The right unit decorative base 562 is formed in a shape that follows the shapes of the front end and the upper end of the right unit left diffusion lens member 553 and the right unit right diffusion lens member 556. The right unit decorative base 562 is formed so as to cover both the left and right outer sides of the right unit left diffuser lens member 553 and the right unit right diffuser lens member 556 near the front end and the left and right sides of the right unit decorative lens member 561. In the state of being assembled to the door frame right side unit 550, the front end of the right unit decorative lens member 561 protrudes slightly forward from the front end of the right unit decorative base 562. The right unit decorative base 562 is formed of a translucent member.

The right unit cover 563 is formed so that the front end opening of the right unit decorative base 562 can be closed. The right unit cover 563 is formed of a transparent member, and the right unit decorative lens member 561 arranged on the rear side can be visually recognized from the front side.

The decorative member 564 extends shortly in the vertical direction and is attached to the front surface of the right unit cover 563 at predetermined intervals in the vertical direction. The decorative member 564 is formed of a translucent member. The three decorative members 564 divide the right unit cover 563 (right unit decorative lens member 561) into four in the vertical direction.

The door frame right side unit 550, in the state of being assembled to the door frame 3, protrudes forward in a large plate shape from the door frame left side unit 530, and slightly protrudes forward from the front end of the upper plate 321 of the plate unit 320. There is. The door frame right side unit 550 is independent of the right unit left decorative member 554 and the right unit right decorative member 557 provided on both the left and right protruding sides, and the right unit decorative lens member 561 provided at the front end. It can be luminescent and decorated.

Since the door frame right side unit 550 is plate-shaped and protrudes greatly forward, when this pachinko machine 1 is installed in the island equipment of the game hall, the door frame right side unit 550 is adjacent to the pachinko machine on the right side. It can exert an action effect like a partition between them. As a result, the player playing with this pachinko machine 1 can be made to have the illusion of playing in a private room, and other players around him can play the game in a relaxed atmosphere without hesitation. Can be done.

Further, since the door frame right side unit 550 protrudes greatly forward, in the game hall where the pachinko machines 1 are installed side by side, even if the pachinko machines 1 are not located in front of the pachinko machines 1, the island equipment It can be visually recognized even from the lateral direction along the line, and the pachinko machine 1 can be made to stand out in the game hall where a large number of pachinko machines are lined up. Therefore, if the right unit left decorative member 554 and the right unit right decorative member 557 on both the left and right sides of the door frame right side unit 550 are light-emitting decorated, the book can be viewed from a distance even if it is not located near the front of the pachinko machine 1. It is possible to notify the existence of the pachinko machine 1 and to make the pachinko machine 1 highly appealing to the player.

Further, in the door frame right side unit 550, when a problem such as a ball jam or an error occurs in the pachinko machine 1, the right unit left decorative member 554, the right unit right decorative member 557, and the right unit decorative lens on both the left and right sides are used. By illuminating and decorating the member 561 and the like in a peculiar manner, it is possible to immediately notify the staff of the game hall of the occurrence of the defect and recognize the occurrence of the defect, and it becomes possible to quickly respond to the defect. Therefore, the interruption of the game of the player can be resolved at an early stage, and the player can be frustrated and suppress the decline in the interest in the game.

[3-7. Door frame top unit]
The door frame top unit 570 of the door frame 3 will be described in detail with reference to FIGS. 56 to 59 and the like. FIG. 56A is a front view of the door frame top unit in the door frame, FIG. 56B is a perspective view of the door frame top unit as viewed from the front, and FIG. 56C is a perspective view of the door frame top unit as viewed from the back. It is a perspective view. FIG. 57 is an exploded perspective view of the door frame top unit disassembled and viewed from the front, and FIG. 58 is an exploded perspective view of the door frame top unit disassembled and viewed from the rear. FIG. 59 is a cross-sectional view taken along the line PP in FIG. 56. The door frame top unit 570 is attached to the upper side of the door frame left side unit 530 and the door frame right side unit 550 and above the through hole 111 on the front surface of the door frame base 110 of the door frame base unit 100.

The door frame top unit 570 is attached to the central base 571 which is attached to the center in the left-right direction on the upper side of the through hole 111 on the front surface of the door frame base 110 of the door frame base unit 100, and is attached to both the left and right sides of the central base 571. A pair of side bases 572 attached to the front surface of the door frame base 110, a pair of upper speakers 573 attached to the front surfaces of the pair of side bases 572, and a pair of upper speakers 573 extending to the left and right and the center in the left-right direction protruding forward. From the position closer to the center in the left-right direction to the vicinity of the center than the pair of openings 574a and the pair of openings 574a, which are box-shaped with the rear part open and penetrate the front and rear of the pair of upper speakers 573. It has a plurality of (three left and right) slits 574b that extend and penetrate each other in the front-rear direction and are separated from each other in the vertical direction, and are attached to the front side of the central base 571 and the pair of side bases 572. It includes a unit main body 271 and a speaker cover 575 made of punching metal, which is arranged on the front side of the pair of upper speakers 573 and attached to the rear side of the unit main body 271 so as to close the pair of openings 574a. ing.

Although not shown here, the pair of side bases 572 (left side base 572a, right side base 572b) each have an internal space that is open only toward the side where the opening window is provided. In the internal space of the above-mentioned outer peripheral light emitting portion 34 (left outer outer peripheral light emitting portion 34a, right outer outer outer light emitting portion 34b) provided so as to emit light from the outer outer periphery into the outer periphery of the opening window, and from the inner periphery of the opening window. The structure is such that an outer peripheral light detection unit 35 (left outer peripheral light detection unit 35a, right outer outer light detection unit 35b) for detecting the light outside the outer periphery thereof is provided.

Further, the door frame top unit 570 is attached to the front surface of the center of the unit body 271 in the left-right direction and has translucency, and is attached to the rear side of the top middle decoration member 576 and the top middle decoration member 576. The door frame top middle decoration board 577 on which multiple LEDs are mounted on the front of the cage, and the left and right ends of the top middle decoration member 576, which are attached to the front of the unit body 271 and close the plurality of slits 574b respectively. A plurality of transparent flat plate-shaped light guide members (three on each side) extending from the vicinity to the vicinity of both left and right ends of the unit body 271 straddling the opening 574a, and a top middle decoration member 576 on the front surface of the unit body 271. Top left decorative lens member 579 and top right decorative lens member 580, top left decorative lens member 579 and top right decoration, which are attached to both the left and right sides and cover the front surfaces of a plurality (three) light guide members 578, respectively. The top middle left decorative member 581 and the top middle left decorative member 581, which are attached to the front surface of the unit body 271 from the front side of each of the lens members 580 and extend from the left and right sides of the top middle decorative member 576 to the vicinity of the central side end of the opening 574a, respectively. It is provided with a top middle right decorative member 582.

Further, the door frame top unit 570 is attached to the inside of each of the left and right side surfaces of the unit body 271, and LEDs are mounted on the portions of the plurality (three) light guide members 578 facing the outer ends in the left and right directions. The door frame top left decorative substrate 583 and the door frame top right decorative substrate 584, and a plurality (three) slits 574b formed on the left and right sides of the center in the left-right direction on the rear side of the unit body 271 penetrate through each other. A pair of board bases 585 that are attached to each part, and a door that is attached to the front of the pair of board bases 585 and has a plurality of LEDs 586a and 587a mounted at positions behind the slit 574b of the unit main body 271. The frame top middle left decorative board 586 and the door frame top middle right decorative board 587, and the door frame top middle left decorative board 586 and the door frame top middle right decorative board 587 are attached to the rear side of the unit body 271 on the front side, respectively. It includes a pair of light-shielding members 588.

Further, the door frame top unit 570 is attached to the door frame top unit relay board 589 mounted on the front surface of the central base 571 in the unit main body 271 and the central base 571 so as to cover the front surface of the door frame top unit relay board 589. The unit so as to close the attached relay board cover 590, the upper cover 591 attached to the unit main body 271 so as to close the upper opening 574c of the unit main body 271, and the lower opening 574d of the unit main body 271. It includes a lower cover 592 attached to the main body 271.

The central base 571 of the door frame top unit 570 is formed in a quadrangle whose front view shape extends to the left and right. The central base 571 is formed in a box shape that is open to the rear, and has a plurality of irregularities on the front surface. The pair of side bases 572 are attached to the left and right ends of the central base 571, respectively. The pair of upper speakers 573 are attached to the front surface of each side base 572, respectively. The pair of upper speakers 573 are attached obliquely so that the front surfaces of the door frame top unit 570 move rearward on the side closer to the center in the left-right direction in the state of being assembled to the door frame top unit 570. The pair of upper speakers 573 are full-range cone-type speakers capable of outputting sound in a wide frequency band.

The unit main body 271 is formed so that the shape of the front view is such that the lower portion of the quadrangle extending to the left and right near both left and right ends bulges downward. In other words, the unit main body 271 is formed so that the shape of the front view is such that a quadrangle extending to the left and right is cut out in a trapezoidal shape narrowed upward from the lower end side. The unit body 271 has a quadrangle whose shape in a plan view extends to the left and right, and a portion having about 1/2 of the total width (length in the left and right direction) centered on the center in the left and right direction on the front end side of the quadrangle as the base. It is formed in a shape that combines a trapezoid that protrudes forward and a quadrangle that protrudes forward shortly with the front end side of the trapezoid as the long side. Therefore, in the unit main body 271, both sides of the portion protruding forward in the center in the left-right direction on the front surface connect the left-right end portion of the unit main body 271 and the left-right end portion of the front end of the portion protruding forward. It is located behind (recessed).

The unit main body 271 is formed with openings 574a penetrating back and forth, respectively, at a portion on the front surface from both ends in the left-right direction to a position outside the portion protruding forward. Further, the unit main body 271 has a plurality of slits extending in the vertical direction at a predetermined height to the left and right and penetrating in the front-rear direction in a portion extending diagonally in a portion protruding forward in a trapezoidal shape on the front surface. 574b is formed. The plurality of slits 574b extend left and right from the vicinity of the front end of the portion of the front surface of the unit main body 271 that extends diagonally forward to the vicinity of the opening 574a. Further, the plurality of slits 574b are formed on both sides of the center of the unit main body 271 in the left-right direction, three each vertically separated from each other.

Further, the unit main body 271 has an upper opening 574c notched from the rear end to the front in the center in the left-right direction on the upper surface, and a lower opening 574d notched from the rear end to the front in the left-right direction on the lower surface. , Is equipped. The upper opening 574c of the unit body 271 is closed by the upper cover 591. Further, the lower opening 574d is closed by the lower cover 592.

Further, the unit main body 271 includes a top left decorative portion 574e and a top right decorative portion 574f extending vertically at both left and right ends. The front surface of the top left decorative portion 574e is formed at a position substantially the same in the front-rear direction as the front surface of the portion where the opening 574a is formed. The top right decorative portion 574f is formed so that the front surface thereof is located in front of the front surface of the portion where the opening 574a is formed. The unit body 271 is formed of a translucent member.

The top middle decorative member 576 is attached to the front end of a portion of the front surface of the unit body 271 that projects forward in the center in the left-right direction. The top middle decorative member 576 has a deformed pentagon whose front view shape is bent so that the central part in the left-right direction of the lower side of the substantially square is located downward, and the deformed pentagon extends outward in the left-right direction from the upper ends of the left and right sides of the deformed pentagon. It is formed in a shape that looks like a combination of a substantially right triangle connecting the tip of the side and the lower ends of the left and right sides of the pentagon. The top middle decorative member 576 is inclined so that the variable pentagonal portion on the front surface moves backward as it goes downward. The top middle decorative member 576 is formed in a three-dimensional shape as a whole, and has translucency.

The front surface of the door frame top interior decorative substrate 577 is tilted so as to move backward as it goes downward so as to be along the front surface of the modified pentagonal portion of the top interior decorative member 576. Attached to the side. A plurality of LEDs are mounted on the front surface of the door frame top middle decoration substrate 577, and by making these LEDs emit light, the top middle decoration member 576 can be light-emittingly decorated.

The light guide member 578 is formed of a transparent member. The light guide member 578 is formed in a shape that follows the shape of both the left and right sides of the front end of the portion of the front surface of the unit main body 271 that protrudes forward. Explaining that the side of the unit body 271 close to both ends in the left-right direction is the end side and the side close to the center is the center side, the light guide member 578 is a straight portion extending straight to the left and right from the end side toward the center side. It is composed of 578a and an arc portion 578b extending in an arc shape having a large radius so as to move forward from the end side on the center side of the straight portion 578a toward the center side. The light guide member 578 is formed so that the depth in the front-rear direction is smaller than the height in the vertical direction in the straight portion 578a, and the depth in the front-rear direction is formed to be larger than the height in the vertical direction in the arc portion 578b. Further, the light guide member 578 is formed so that the height in the vertical direction is constant in the straight portion 578a and the height in the vertical direction becomes smaller in the arc portion 578b toward the center side. In the state where the light guide member 578 is assembled to the door frame top unit 570, the straight portion 578a is located immediately before the opening 574a of the unit main body 271, and the arc portion 578b closes the slit 574b of the unit main body 271 from the front. There is.

The light guide member 578 includes a diffuse reflection portion 578c formed on the rear surface of the straight portion 578a and a diffusion input portion 578d composed of a plurality of irregularities formed on the rear surface side of the arc portion 578b. It has.

When the light guide member 578 is assembled to the door frame top unit 570, both outer ends in the left-right direction face the LEDs 583a and 584a of the door frame top left decorative substrate 583 or the door frame top right decorative substrate 584. At the same time, the diffusion input unit 578d faces the LEDs 586a and 587a of the door frame top middle left decorative substrate 586 or the door frame top middle right decorative substrate 587. When light from the LEDs 583a and 584a of the door frame top left decorative substrate 583 or the door frame top right decorative substrate 584 is incident on the light guide member 578 from both outer ends in the left-right direction, the light is emitted from the straight portion 578a. As it advances toward the center side, it is sequentially reflected forward from the end side by the diffuse reflection portion 578c formed on the rear surface of the straight portion 578a, and light is emitted forward from the entire front surface of the straight portion 578a. A top left decorative lens member 579 or a top right decorative lens member 580 is arranged in front of the light guide member 578, and a portion of them in front of the straight portion 578a is light-emitting decorated.

Further, the light guide member 578 receives light from the LEDs 586a and 587a of the door frame top middle left decorative substrate 586 or the door frame top middle right decorative substrate 587 from the diffusion input portion 578d formed on the rear surface of the arc portion 578b. Then, the light is widely diffused into the arc portion 578b due to the unevenness of the diffusion input portion 578d, and the light is radiated forward from the entire front surface of the arc portion 578b. As a result, the portion of the top left decorative lens member 579 or the top right decorative lens member 580 located in front of the arc portion 578b can be light-emitting decorated.

As described above, the light guide member 578 is the LED 583a, 586a of the door frame top left decorative substrate 583 and the door frame top middle left decorative substrate 586, or the door frame top right decorative substrate 584 and the door frame top middle right decorative substrate 587. Light from the LEDs 584a and 587a can be guided to illuminate and decorate the entire top left decorative lens member 579 or top right decorative lens member 580 arranged in front in a good (uniform) state.

The top left decorative lens member 579 is attached to the front surface of the unit body 271 so as to cover the front of the three light guide members 578 arranged on the left side of the center in the left-right direction on the front surface of the unit body 271. The top left decorative lens member 579 has three decorative lens portions 579a that independently accommodate the three light guide members 578 from the front. The decorative lens portion 579a of the top left decorative lens member 579 is formed in a shape that resembles the light guide member 578, and covers the front surface and both the upper and lower surfaces of the light guide member 578. On the front surface of each decorative lens portion 579a, the unevenness of the square pyramid protruding forward is arranged in rows on the left and right.

The top left decorative lens member 579 extends from the left end of the top middle decorative member 576 of the door frame top unit 570 to the right end of the top left decorative portion 574e of the unit body 271. That is, the top left decorative lens member 579 decorates substantially the entire left side of the top middle decorative member 576 in the door frame top unit 570. The top left decorative lens member 579 is light-emittingly decorated by the LEDs 583a and 586a of the door frame top left decorative substrate 583 and the door frame top middle left decorative substrate 586 via three light guide members 578.

The top right decorative lens member 580 is attached to the front surface of the unit body 271 so as to cover the front of the three light guide members 578 arranged on the right side of the center in the left-right direction on the front surface of the unit body 271. The top right decorative lens member 580 has three decorative lens portions 580a that independently accommodate the three light guide members 578 from the front. The decorative lens portion 580a of the top right decorative lens member 580 is formed in a shape that resembles the light guide member 578, and covers the front surface and both the upper and lower surfaces of the light guide member 578. On the front surface of each decorative lens portion 580a, irregularities of a square weight stand protruding forward are arranged in rows on the left and right.

The top right decorative lens member 580 extends from the right end of the top middle decorative member 576 in the door frame top unit 570 to the left end of the top right decorative portion 574f of the unit main body 271. That is, the top right decorative lens member 580 decorates substantially the entire right side of the top middle decorative member 576 in the door frame top unit 570. The top right decorative lens member 580 is light-emittingly decorated by the LEDs 584a and 587a of the door frame top right decorative substrate 584 and the door frame top middle right decorative substrate 587 via three light guide members 578.

The top middle left decorative member 581 is attached to the front surface of the unit main body 271 from the front of the top left decorative lens member 579 between the left opening 574a on the front surface of the unit main body 271 and the top middle decorative member 576. The top middle left decorative member 581 is attached so as to fill the space between the three decorative lens portions 579a of the top left decorative lens member 579 in a state of being assembled to the door frame top unit 570, and the front center side is the top left. It protrudes forward from the front surface of the decorative lens member 579. The top middle left decorative member 581 is formed of a translucent member.

The top middle right decorative member 582 is attached to the front surface of the unit main body 271 from the front of the top right decorative lens member 580 between the right opening 574a on the front surface of the unit main body 271 and the top middle right decorative member 576. The top middle right decorative member 582 is attached so as to fill the space between the three decorative lens portions 580a of the top right decorative lens member 580 in a state of being assembled to the door frame top unit 570, and the front center side is the top right. It protrudes forward from the front surface of the decorative lens member 580. The top middle right decorative member 582 is formed of a translucent member.

The door frame top left decorative substrate 583 is attached to the inside of the left side surface (top left decorative portion 574e) in the unit main body 271 with the surface on which the LED 583a is mounted facing to the right. In the door frame top left decorative substrate 583, the LED 583a is mounted at a position facing the left end surface of the three light guide members 578 attached to the front surface on the left side from the center in the left-right direction of the unit body 271 (see FIG. 59). ). Each of the three LEDs 583a can emit light independently. The LED 583a of the door frame top left decorative substrate 583 allows a portion of the top left decorative lens member 579 located in front of the left opening 574a of the unit body 271 via the straight portion 578a of the three light guide members 578. It can be luminescent and decorated.

The door frame top right decorative substrate 584 is attached to the inside of the right side surface (top right decorative portion 574f) in the unit main body 271 with the surface on which the LED 584a is mounted facing left. In the door frame top right decorative substrate 584, the LED 584a is mounted at a position facing the right end surface of the three light guide members 578 attached to the front surface on the right side of the center in the left-right direction of the unit body 271 (see FIG. 59). ). Each of the three LEDs 584a can emit light independently. The LED 584a of the door frame top right decorative substrate 584 allows a portion of the top right decorative lens member 580 located in front of the right opening 574a of the unit body 271 via the straight portion 578a of the three light guide members 578. It can be luminescent and decorated.

The pair of substrate bases 585 are attached to the rear side of the portion where the plurality of slits 574b are formed in the unit main body 271. The pair of substrate bases 585 are formed substantially symmetrically with each other. The substrate base 585 is formed from a side wall having a substantially square side view having sides extending vertically and front and back, a rear wall of a front view square extending outward at right angles from the rear side of the side wall, and the front end of the upper side of the side wall. An approximately right-angled triangular upper wall that connects the side wall and the upper side of the rear wall with a line connecting halfway up the upper side of the side wall as a hypotenuse, and an abbreviation that connects the side wall and the lower side of the rear wall on the opposite side of the upper wall. It is formed in the shape of a triangular columnar box with a right-angled lower wall and an open space between the upper and lower hypotenuses. The substrate base 585 is attached to the unit body 271 so that the open portion is closed by the unit body 271. The door frame top middle left decorative board 586 or the door frame top middle right decorative board 587 is attached to the board base 585 so that the open portion is closed.

The door frame top middle left decorative substrate 586 is attached to the substrate base 585 attached to the rear side on the left side from the left and right center of the unit main body 271 so as to close the box-shaped open portion from the front. Be done. The door frame top middle left decorative board 586 is attached to the front surface of the board base 585 so that the front surface moves forward toward the center side in the left-right direction of the unit body 271 with respect to the surface extending to the left and right. It will be in a tilted state. As a result, the door frame top middle left decorative substrate 586 is assembled on the door frame top unit 570, and the front surface thereof is the surface of the portion where the three slits 574b on the left side of the center of the unit body 271 in the left-right direction are formed. It becomes a state almost parallel to.

A plurality of LEDs 586a are mounted on the door frame top middle left decorative substrate 586 at positions corresponding to the three slits 574b of the unit main body 271. As a result, the door frame top middle left decorative substrate 586 is in a state in which a plurality of LEDs 586a face forward from the three slits 574b on the left side of the center of the unit main body 271 in a state of being assembled to the door frame top unit 570. The door frame top middle left decorative substrate 586 emits light from a plurality of LEDs 586a to illuminate and decorate a portion of the top left decorative lens member 579 close to the top middle decorative member 576 via the arc portion 578b of the light guide member 578. be able to.

The door frame top middle right decorative substrate 587 is attached to the substrate base 585 attached to the rear side on the right side of the center of the left and right in the unit main body 271 so as to close the box-shaped open portion from the front. Be done. The door frame top middle right decorative board 587 is attached to the front surface of the board base 585 so that the front surface moves forward toward the center side in the left-right direction of the unit body 271 with respect to the surface extending to the left and right. It will be in a tilted state. As a result, the door frame top middle right decorative substrate 587 is assembled on the door frame top unit 570, and the front surface thereof is the surface of the portion where the three slits 574b on the right side of the center of the unit body 271 in the left-right direction are formed. It becomes a state almost parallel to.

A plurality of LEDs 587a are mounted on the door frame top middle right decorative substrate 587 at positions corresponding to the three slits 574b of the unit main body 271. As a result, the door frame top middle right decorative substrate 587 is in a state in which a plurality of LEDs 587a face forward from the three slits 574b on the right side of the center of the unit main body 271 in a state of being assembled to the door frame top unit 570. The door frame top middle right decorative substrate 587 emits light from a plurality of LEDs 587a to illuminate and decorate a portion of the top right decorative lens member 580 close to the top middle decorative member 576 via the arc portion 578b of the light guide member 578. be able to.

The pair of light-shielding members 588 are attached to the front rear side of the unit main body 271 at a position between the door frame top middle left decorative board 586 and the door frame top middle right decorative board 587 and the unit main body 271. The pair of light-shielding members 588 are formed substantially symmetrically with each other by a translucent member. The light-shielding member 588 is placed between the upper and lower sides of the plurality of LEDs 586a and 587a of the door frame top middle left decorative substrate 586 and the door frame top middle right decorative substrate 587 arranged in a row corresponding to the three slits 574b in the unit main body 271. It is partitioning. With this light-shielding member 588, light can be guided forward by the light guide member 578 only by the LEDs 586a and 587 located immediately after each light guide member 578, and the top left decorative lens member 579 and the top right decoration The decorative lens portions 579a and 580a of the lens member 580 can be satisfactorily luminescent and decorated in an independent state.

The door frame top unit relay board 589 is attached to the front surface of the central base 571. The door frame top unit relay board 589 includes a pair of upper speakers 573, a door frame top middle decorative board 577, a door frame top left decorative board 583, a door frame top right decorative board 584, a door frame top middle left decorative board 586, and a door. The connection between the right decorative board 587 on the top of the frame and the door body relay board of the door frame base unit 100 is relayed. The door frame top unit relay board 589 is connected to the door body relay board via a connection cable (not shown) provided on the door frame right side unit 550. The front side of the door frame top unit relay board 589 is covered with a relay board cover 590.

The door frame top unit 570 includes a top middle decoration member 576 that protrudes forward in the center in the left-right direction, and is curved so that the front surfaces of the top middle decoration member 576 on both the left and right sides are hollowed out rearward. Therefore, the player can be illusioned that only the decorative member 576 in the top protrudes greatly forward, and the player's interest can be strongly attracted to the pachinko machine 1.

Further, the door frame top unit 570 includes a top left decorative lens member 579 and a top right decorative lens member 580 that decorate the left and right sides of the top middle decorative member 576 arranged in the center, and left and right of the top middle decorative member 576. It is formed so as to extend from both sides to the top left decorative portion 574e and the top right decorative portion 574f formed on the left and right ends of the unit main body 271. Thereby, the upper part of the front surface of the door frame 3 can be totally decorated by the door frame top unit 570.

At this time, in the door frame top unit 570, the front surface is protected by a speaker cover 575 made of punching metal behind each of the top left decorative lens member 579 and the top right decorative lens member 580 near both ends in the left-right direction. Since the upper speaker 573 is provided and the speaker cover 575 faces forward from between the three decorative lens portions 579a and 580a that are separated from each other above and below the top left decorative lens member 579 and the top right decorative lens member 580. The sound output from the left and right upper speakers 573 can be heard by the player in good condition, and a high-quality stereo sound can be enjoyed.

Further, the door frame top unit 570 includes a door frame top left decorative substrate 583 and a door frame top right decoration by a plurality of light guide members 578 provided on the rear side of the top left decorative lens member 579 and the top right decorative lens member 580. Light from the substrate 584, the door frame top middle left decorative substrate 586, and the door frame top middle right decorative substrate 587 can be guided to the top left decorative lens member 579 and the top right decorative lens member 580, and the top left decorative lens member. The entire front surface of the 579 and the top right decorative lens member 580 can be luminescently decorated satisfactorily. Therefore, the door frame top unit 570 can illuminate and decorate the entire front surface of the upper part of the door frame 3 including the front of the left and right upper speakers 573.

[3-8. Door frame action effect]
The operation and effect of the door frame 3 will be described. In the door frame 3 of the pachinko machine 1 of the present embodiment, the through holes 111 penetrating the front and rear of the door frame base 110 of the door frame base unit 100 are made larger in the vertical and horizontal directions than those of the conventional pachinko machine. The height of the dish unit 320 and the door frame top unit 570 in the vertical direction is reduced in accordance with the expansion of the through hole 111, and the width of the door frame left side unit 530 and the door frame right side unit 550 in the horizontal direction. Is made smaller. As a result, the front surface of the game board 5 (game area 5a) attached to the main body frame 4 can be seen as widely as possible from the player (front) through the through hole 111 (glass unit 190). , Corresponds to the game board 5 having a wide game area 5a.

The door frame 3 is an effect operation unit 400 (second effect operation unit 400A) having a large hemispherical operation button 410 in the center in the left-right direction of the dish unit 320 that bulges forward under the through-hole 111. The front surface (front surface of the front and lower decorative portion 326c of the plate) of the lower half (the part below the upper plate 321) on both the left and right sides of the effect operation unit 400 is recessed so as to be recessed rearward (dish unit). It is formed in a concavely curved shape so that the front surfaces of the left and right sides of the effect operation unit 400 are located rearward from the straight line connecting the front ends of the left and right ends of the 320 and the front ends of the left and right ends of the effect operation unit 400). ing. As a result, the effect operation unit 400 attached to the front surface of the dish unit 320 in the center in the left-right direction appears to protrude greatly forward, so that the player is made to stand out and emphasize the effect operation unit 400. It is possible to draw a strong attention to the effect operation unit 400.

The door frame 3 tilts the effect operation unit 400 arranged in front of the dish unit 320 below the through hole 111 so that the large hemispherical transparent operation button 410 faces diagonally upward and forward. Since it is installed in the state, when the player sits in front of the pachinko machine 1, the operation button 410 is in a state of facing the player's head (face), and the player drops his / her line of sight to operate the production operation unit 400. When you look at it, you can see the operation button 410 in a state close to the front, and you can see the large and round operation button 410 intensely, and you can raise the expectation for the production using the operation button 410. At the same time, the effect image displayed on the door frame side effect display device 460 arranged in the transparent operation button 410 can be visually recognized in a good state, and the effect image can be fully enjoyed.

Further, since the door frame 3 is provided with an operation button 410 having a diameter substantially the same as the total height of the plate unit 320 and bulging forward in a round shape, when operating the operation button 410, a short distance of hand movement is required. Any part of the operation button 410 can be touched, and the "quick press" of the operation button 410 can be performed relatively easily. In addition, since the operation button 410, which has a large diameter and bulges forward in a round shape, is attached in an inclined state, it can be pressed from above like the operation buttons of a conventional pachinko machine, and it can be pressed to the left or right. It can be operated satisfactorily from the front or the front, and the operation button 410 having good operability makes it possible to further enjoy the production using the operation button 410.

Further, since the door frame 3 is attached with the effect operation unit 400 in a suspended state by the plate unit 320 and is provided with a vibration motor 424 that generates vibration at the lower part of the effect operation unit 400, the game is played. When the vibration motor 424 is rotated according to the state to generate vibration, strong vibration can be transmitted to the player's hand touching the upper part of the operation button 410, which surprises the player and operates the operation button. The production using 410 can be further enjoyed.

Further, since the door frame 3 is provided with a large operation button 410 (directing operation unit 400) over the entire height of the plate unit 320 in the center of the front surface of the plate unit 320, the upper plate 321 is compared with the conventional pachinko machine. Since the lower plate 322 underneath is less noticeable, it is possible to make it easier for a player who is accustomed to seeing a conventional pachinko machine to recognize that it is clearly different, and an appeal that strongly attracts the player's attention. It can be a powerful pachinko machine 1.

Further, the door frame 3 is formed so that the lower plate 322 wraps around to the rear side of the effect operation unit 400 with respect to the lower plate opening 326d which is opened on the left side of the effect operation unit 400 on the front surface of the plate unit 320. Therefore, the volume of the lower plate 322 can be increased with respect to the size of the lower plate opening 326d, and a sufficient number of game balls stored in the lower plate 322 can be secured. Further, since the rear part of the lower plate 322 wraps around to the rear side of the effect operation unit 400, when the player puts his left hand in the lower plate 322 or puts his left hand finger on the lower plate opening 326d. Since it is difficult for the fingertips to touch the wall behind the lower plate 322, it is possible to make it difficult for the player to feel uncomfortable, it is possible to suppress a decrease in interest in the game, and the size of the lower plate opening 326d is large. It is possible to recognize by touch that the volume of the lower plate 322 is larger than that of the lower plate 322.

Further, the door frame 3 is a lower portion for pulling out the lower plate ball supply port 323c at which the game balls from the upper plate 321 are discharged to the lower plate 322 and the game balls of the lower plate 322 into a dollar box or the like below the plate unit 320. The countersunk ball extraction holes 322a are arranged in a straight line in the front-rear direction, and are arranged on the right outer side of the lower plate opening 326d (on the right side of the left end of the frame unit 415 of the effect operation unit 400) in the front view. That is, the lower plate ball supply port 323c and the lower plate ball extraction hole 322a are provided with the effect operation unit 400, the effect operation unit mounting portion 326a (right outside of the lower plate opening 326d) in the plate unit cover 326, and the front end of the lower plate cover 340. Since it is arranged behind the side, etc., the lower plate ball supply port 323c and the lower plate ball extraction hole 322a cannot be seen from the player side, and the appearance of the plate unit 320 (pachinko machine 1) can be refreshed. The appearance of the pachinko machine 1 can be improved.

Further, since the door frame 3 has the lower plate ball extraction hole 322a arranged below the front (direct front) of the lower plate ball supply port 323c in the lower plate 322, the lower plate ball extraction hole 322a is opened. Then, the game ball discharged from the upper plate 321 or the like to the lower plate 322 is immediately discharged from the lower plate ball extraction hole 322a to the lower dollar box or the like as soon as it enters the lower plate 322. At this time, since the lower plate ball supply port 323c and the lower plate ball extraction hole 322a cannot be seen from the player side, the flow of the game ball discharged from the upper plate 321 or the like through the lower plate 322 to the dollar box also I can't see it. As a result, it is possible to give the player the illusion that the game ball of the upper plate 321 and the game ball paid out from the payout device 830 in a state where the upper plate 321 is full are directly discharged to the dollar box. Therefore, it is possible to make it difficult for the game ball to feel the annoyance of passing through the lower plate 322, and it is possible to concentrate the player on the game (driving operation of the game ball, directing image, etc.) and suppress the deterioration of the interest. can.

Further, in the door frame 3, the lower plate ball supply port 323c has the lower plate ball extraction hole 322a arranged at a position on the front left side of the lower plate 322, and the lower plate 322 stands on the right side of the lower plate ball extraction hole 322a. Since the raised wall portion is curved diagonally so as to face the direction of the lower plate ball extraction hole 322a, the game ball supplied from the lower plate ball supply port 323c to the lower plate 322 can be directly fed to the lower plate ball. It can be guided to the punching hole 322a, or can be reflected on the right wall portion and indirectly guided to the lower plate ball punching hole 322a. As a result, in the state where the lower plate ball extraction hole 322a remains open, the game ball supplied to the lower plate 322 from the lower plate ball supply port 323c is in the area on the left side of the lower plate ball extraction hole 322a in the lower plate 322. Since the ball can be discharged downward from the lower plate ball extraction hole 322a without invading (lower plate first region A1), the lower plate 322 does not show the game ball circulating in the lower plate 322 to the player. The game ball can be discharged downward (dollar box), and the same effect as described above can be obtained.

Further, the door frame 3 is provided with a lower plate opening 326d of the plate unit cover 326 with the lower plate 322 facing forward between the effect operation unit mounting portion 326a (effect operation unit 400) and the lower speaker port 326e. Therefore, even if the player puts his / her hand on the lower plate opening 326d or puts his / her hand on the lower plate 322, the front of the lower speaker opening 326e is not blocked by the player's hand. The sound from the lower speaker 921 in the board unit 900 can be satisfactorily output forward, and the sound produced by the pachinko machine 1 can be enjoyed. Further, when the player puts his / her hand in or approaches the lower plate 322, the player can feel the vibration due to the deep bass from the lower speaker 921 output forward from the lower speaker port 326e to the touch. It is possible to entertain the player and suppress the decline in interest.

Further, since the door frame 3 is provided with a door frame right side unit 550 which is plate-shaped and greatly protrudes forward from the right side of the through hole 111, when the pachinko machine 1 is installed in the island facility of the game hall, the door is opened. Since the right side unit 550 of the frame can exert an action effect like a partition between the pachinko machine adjacent to the right side, the player playing with the pachinko machine 1 can play in a private room. You can make the player feel as if you are there, and you can let other players around you play the game in a relaxed atmosphere without hesitation.

Further, since the door frame 3 can be light-emittingly decorated on the front end and both left and right sides of the door frame right side unit 550, which is plate-shaped and protrudes greatly forward, a game hall in which the pachinko machines 1 are installed side by side. Even if the pachinko machine 1 is not located in front of the pachinko machine 1, the presence of the pachinko machine 1 can be notified even from a distance such as from the lateral direction along the island equipment, and the pachinko machine has a high appeal to the player. It can be machine 1.

Further, the door frame 3 includes a top middle decoration member 576 that protrudes forward in the center in the left-right direction in the door frame top unit 570 on the upper side of the through opening 111, and fronts on both left and right sides of the top middle decoration member 576. The shape is recessed so as to be hollowed out to the rear (the top middle decoration member of the door frame top unit 570 is more than the straight line connecting the front ends of the left and right ends of the door frame top unit 570 and the front ends of the left and right ends of the top middle decoration member 576. The front surface of both the left and right sides of the 576 is formed in a concavely curved shape so as to be located rearward. As a result, only the top middle decoration member 576 of the door frame top unit 570 seems to protrude greatly forward, so that the top middle decoration member 576 can be highlighted and emphasized to the player. The interior decorative member 576 can be strongly noticed.

By the way, in the upper part of the door frame in the conventional pachinko machine, a pair of upper speakers separated to the left and right are provided, and the two upper speakers are conspicuous. On the other hand, the door frame 3 of the present embodiment is a pair of upper parts of the door frame top unit 570 attached to the upper side of the through hole 111, whose front surfaces are protected by speaker covers 575 made of punching metal on both left and right ends. A top with a speaker 573, a top left decorative lens member 579 and a top right decorative lens member 580 extending from both left and right sides of the central top middle decorative member 576 to both ends in the left-right direction through the front of the speaker cover 575, and a top. The entire front surface of the left decorative lens member 579 and the top right decorative lens member 580 can be luminescently decorated. As a result, the upper part of the front surface of the door frame 3 can be decorated as a whole, so that the pair of upper speakers 573 becomes inconspicuous at the upper part of the door frame 3, and the decoration is clearly different from that of the conventional pachinko machine. At first glance, the player can be made aware of the fact that the pachinko machine 1 has a high appeal to the player, and the pair of upper speakers 573 can entertain the player with a high-quality stereo sound. can.

As described above, in the door frame 3 of the present embodiment, the effect operation unit 400 attached to the dish unit 320 and the top interior decorative member 576 of the door frame top unit 570 are formed below and above the through hole 111. Since each of them protrudes greatly forward at the center in the left-right direction, it is possible to show the player a unified decoration in the upper and lower parts where the virtual line passing through the center in the left-right direction stands out, and the decoration has a sophisticated feel. The pachinko machine 1 can be made more prominent than other pachinko machines and has high appeal.

Further, in the door frame 3, since the top middle decoration member 576 of the door frame top unit 570 and the effect operation unit 400, which are arranged vertically in the center in the left-right direction, are projected forward, the top middle decoration member 576. And when the effect operation unit 400 is light-emittingly decorated, it is possible to show the player a light-emitting line extending vertically at the center of the front surface of the door frame 3 in the left-right direction, and the line of sight of the player is arranged in the center of the left-right direction. It can be guided to the operation button 410 or the like of the effect operation unit 400.

[5. Overall configuration of the game board]
Next, the overall configuration of the game board 5 of the pachinko machine 1 will be described in detail with reference to FIGS. 60 to 66 and the like. FIG. 60 is a front view of the game board. FIG. 61 is an exploded perspective view of the game board disassembled for each main configuration and viewed from the front, and FIG. 62 is an exploded perspective view of the game board disassembled for each main configuration and viewed from the rear. FIG. 63 is a front view of the game board excluding the front unit and the back unit, FIG. 64 is an exploded perspective view of the game board of FIG. 63 disassembled and viewed from the front, and FIG. 65 is an exploded perspective view of the game board of FIG. 63. It is an exploded perspective view which was disassembled and seen from the back. FIG. 66 is an explanatory view showing a portion of the function display unit enlarged from the front with the game board attached to the pachinko machine.

The game board 5 has a game area 5a in which a game ball is hit by a player operating the handle 302 of the handle unit 300. Further, the game board 5 is attached to the front component 1000, which divides the outer periphery of the game area 5a and has a substantially square outer shape in front view, and the rear end of the game area 5a, which is attached to the rear side of the front component 1000. A plate-shaped game panel 1100 to be partitioned, a board holder 1200 attached to the lower rear side of the game panel 1100, and a game ball attached to the rear surface of the board holder 1200 by driving the game ball into the game area 5a. It includes a main control unit 1300 having a main control board 1310 for controlling the game content. A plurality of obstacle nails that come into contact with the game ball are planted in a predetermined gauge arrangement in a portion of the front surface of the game panel 1100 that is within the game area 5a (not shown).

Further, the game board 5 displays a game status based on a control signal from the main control board 1310, and has a function display unit 1400 and a game panel visibly attached to the player side in the lower left corner of the front component 1000. The peripheral control unit 1500 mounted on the rear side of the 1100, the game board side effect display device 1600 arranged in the center of the game area 5a in front view and capable of displaying a predetermined effect image, and the front surface of the game panel 1100. The front unit 2000 attached to the game panel 1100 and the back unit 3000 attached to the rear surface of the game panel 1100 are further provided. The game board side effect display device 1600 is attached to the rear surface of the back unit 3000, and the peripheral control unit 1500 is attached to the rear surface of the game board side effect display device 1600.

The game panel 1100 holds the transparent flat plate-shaped panel plate 1110 and the outer circumference of the panel plate 1110, which are formed to be slightly larger than the inner circumference of the frame-shaped front component 1000, and the front component 1000. It is provided with a frame-shaped panel holder 1120 that is attached to the rear side and to which the back unit 3000 is attached to the rear surface.

The table unit 2000 has a plurality of general winning openings 2001 that are always open so that game balls driven into the game area 5a can be received, and the plurality of general winning openings 2001 are played at different positions in the game area 5a. The first starting port 2002, which is always open so that the ball can be received, the gate portion 2003, which is attached at a predetermined position in the game area 5a and detects the passage of the game ball, and the game ball passes through the gate portion 2003. The second start port 2004, which enables the acceptance of game balls according to the result of the ordinary lottery, and the first special, which is drawn by accepting the game balls to the first start port 2002 or the second start port 2004. It is provided with a large winning opening 2005 in which game balls can be accepted depending on the lottery result or the second special lottery result.

Further, the front unit 2000 is a start port unit 2100 which is mounted directly above the out port 1126 in the center of the game area 5a in the left-right direction and has a first start port 2002 and a grand prize opening 2005, and a start port unit. The side unit lower 2200 mounted along the inner rail 1002 on the left side of the front view of the 2100 and having a plurality of general winning openings 2001, and the side unit mounted above the left end of the front view of the side unit lower 2200. It includes an upper 2300, a gate portion 2003 attached substantially in the center of the game area 5a, and a frame-shaped center accessory 2500 having a second starting port 2004.

The back unit 3000 is attached to the rear surface of the panel holder 1120 and is attached to the rear surface of the back box 3010 which is box-shaped and has a square opening 3010a in the rear wall and is attached to the rear surface of the back box 3010. It is provided with a lock mechanism 3020 for detachably attaching the board-side effect display device 1600.

Further, the back unit 3000 has a back left middle decorative unit 3050 attached upward from the center in the vertical direction on the left side side of the front view at the front end in the back box 3010, and a back unit below the opening 3010a in the back box 3010. The back bottom rear movable production unit 3100 mounted near the rear wall of the box 3010, the back top left movable production unit 3200 mounted above the opening 3010a in the back box 3010 and on the left side of the front view, and the back box. The back left movable effect unit 3300 installed on the left side of the front view of the opening 3010a in 3010, and the back top middle mounted from the center in the left-right direction to the right end of the front view above the opening 3010a in the back box 3010. It includes a movable effect unit 3400 and a back lower front movable effect unit 3500 attached below the opening 3010a in the back box 3010 and in front of the back lower rear movable effect unit 3100.

[5-1. Front component]
Next, the front component 1000 will be described mainly with reference to FIGS. 64 and 65 and the like. The front component 1000 has a substantially square outer shape when viewed from the front, and has a substantially circular inner shape penetrating in the front-rear direction, and the outer circumference of the game area 5a is divided by the inner circumference of the inner shape. The front component 1000 includes an outer rail 1001 that extends in an arc shape from the lower end to the left from the center in the left-right direction in the front view in an arc shape along the circumferential direction in the clockwise direction, passes through the upper end in the center in the left-right direction in the front view, and extends diagonally to the upper right. The game is played on the inner rail 1002, which is arranged inside the front component 1000 substantially along the outer rail 1001 and extends in an arc shape from the lower center in the left-right direction in the front view to the diagonally upper left side in the front view, and the right side in the front view of the lower end of the inner rail 1002. It includes an out-guide portion 1003, which is formed at the lowest position of the region 5a and is inclined so as to be lowered toward the rear.

Further, the front component 1000 has a lower right rail 1004 and a lower right rail 1004 that are linearly inclined so that the right end side is slightly higher from the right end of the out guide portion 1003 in the front view to the vicinity of the right side of the front component 1000. Right rail 1005 extending from the right end of the front component 1000 to the lower side of the upper end of the outer rail 1001 along the right side of the front component 1000, and the upper end curved inward of the front component 1000, and the upper end and outer rail of the right rail 1005. It is provided with an abutting portion 1006 that is connected to the upper end of the 1001 and is in contact with a game ball that has rolled along the outer rail 1001.

Further, the front component 1000 is rotatably supported by the upper end of the inner rail 1002, and extends upward from the upper end of the inner rail 1002 so as to close between the front constituent member 1000 and the front view clock. A backflow prevention member urged by a spring (not shown) so that it can rotate only with the open position that rotates in the circumferential direction and opens between the outer rail 1001 and returns to the closed position side. It is equipped with 1007.

Further, the front component 1000 is formed on the outside of the portion of the outer rail 1001 and the inner rail 1002 that extends substantially vertically from the lower end, the lower side of the out guide portion 1003 and the lower right rail 1004, and the outer side of the right rail 1005. Each portion is provided with a security recess 1008 recessed from the front end to the rear. When the game board 5 is attached to the main body frame 4 and the door frame 3 is closed with respect to the main body frame 4, the security recess 1008 has a rear projecting piece 202 protruding rearward of the security cover 200 in the door frame 3. It will be in the inserted state. As a result, the space between the security cover 200 and the game board 5 (front component 1000) is complicatedly bent by the rear projecting piece 202 of the security cover 200 and the security recess 1008 of the front component 1000. Even if an unauthorized tool such as a piano wire is attempted to enter the game area 5a from below the front surface of the board 5 through between the security cover 200 and the front component 1000, it will be blocked by the rear projecting piece 202 and the security recess 1008. , It is possible to prevent an unauthorized tool from entering the game area 5a.

Further, the front component 1000 includes a plurality of positioning protrusions 1009 protruding rearward from the rear end of the inner rail 1002. By inserting these positioning protrusions 1009 into the inner rail fixing holes 1116 formed in the panel plate 1110 of the game panel 1100, the inner rail 1002 can be positioned and fixed to the front surface of the panel plate 1110.

Further, the front component 1000 includes a plurality of mounting bosses 1010 projecting rearward from the rear surface. By inserting the plurality of mounting bosses 1010 into the mounting holes 1128 of the panel holder 1120 in the game panel 1100, the plurality of mounting bosses 1010 can be positioned between the mounting bosses 1010 and the panel holder 1120 (game panel 1100).

Further, the front component 1000 includes a notch portion 1011 notched upward from the lower end in the lower left corner of the front view. This notch 1011 coincides with the notch 1127 of the panel holder 1120 in the game panel 1100, and when the game board 5 is attached to the main body frame 4, it penetrates these notches 1011 and 1127 and is a lower full tank path. The front end openings of the normal guide path 861 and the full tank guide path 862 of the unit 860 face forward.

[5-2. Game panel]
Next, the game panel 1100 will be described mainly with reference to FIGS. 61 and 62, FIG. 64, FIG. 65, and the like. The game panel 1100 holds a flat plate-shaped panel plate 1110 whose outer circumference is slightly larger than the inner circumference of the frame-shaped front component 1000 and is made of a transparent synthetic resin, and the outer circumference of the panel plate 1110. It is provided with a frame-shaped panel holder 1120 which is attached to the rear side of the front component 1000 and to which the back unit 3000 is attached to the rear surface.

The panel plate 1110 of the game panel 1100 is formed of a synthetic resin plate such as an acrylic resin, a polycarbonate resin, a polyarylate resin, or a methacrylic resin, or an inorganic plate such as glass or metal. The plate thickness of this panel plate 1110 is thinner than that of the panel holder 1120 (game panel 1150), and is the minimum necessary thickness that can be sufficiently held even if an obstacle nail is planted on the front surface or the front unit 2000 is attached. It is said to be (8 to 10 mm). In this example, the panel plate 1110 is formed of a transparent synthetic resin plate.

The panel plate 1110 is formed with an out recess 1111 recessed upward from the lower end at the lowest position in the game area 5a. Further, the panel plate 1110 is formed with a plurality of openings 1112 that penetrate the panel plate 1110 in the front-rear direction and for mounting the table unit 2000.

Further, the panel plate 1110 has a plurality of fitting holes 1113 arranged in the vicinity of the outer periphery and formed of round holes penetrating in the front-rear direction, and elongated holes 1114 arranged in the vicinity of the outer periphery of the lower left portion and penetrating in the front-rear direction and extending in the vertical direction. , Is equipped. These fitting holes 1113 and elongated holes 1114 are arranged outside the game area 5a and are positioned with the panel holder 1120. Further, the panel plate 1110 is provided with stepped engaging step portions 1115 having a recessed front side at both ends of the upper side and both ends of the lower side, respectively. These engaging step portions 1115 are formed so as to be cut out to approximately half the thickness of the panel plate 1110, and are arranged outside the game area 5a like the fitting holes 1113 and the elongated holes 1114. This is for engaging and fixing the panel plate 1110 to the panel holder 1120.

Further, the panel plate 1110 is provided with a plurality of inner rail fixing holes 1116 at predetermined positions. The inner rail 1002 can be fixed at a predetermined position by fitting and fixing the positioning protrusion 1009 protruding from the rear side of the inner rail 1002 to the inner rail fixing hole 1116.

The panel holder 1120 of the game panel 1100 has a size including the panel plate 1110 and has a substantially quadrangular outer shape, and is formed to be thicker than the panel plate 1110 (about 20 mm in this example). The panel holder 1120 is made of a synthetic resin (for example, a thermoplastic synthetic resin). The panel holder 1120 has a holding step portion 1121 that holds the panel plate 1110 detachably and is recessed from the front side to the rear side, and the inside of the holding step portion 1121 having a size substantially equal to that of the game area 5a in the front-rear direction. It is provided with a through-hole 1122 that penetrates into the.

The depth from the front surface of the holding step portion 1121 of the panel holder 1120 is substantially the same as the thickness of the panel plate 1110, and the front surface of the panel plate 1110 held in the holding step portion 1121 is the panel holder 1120. It is almost the same surface as the front surface. Further, the holding step portion 1121 is formed so that the front inner peripheral surface thereof has a size such that a predetermined amount of clearance is formed with respect to the outer peripheral surface of the panel plate 1110. Due to this clearance, even if the panel plate 1110 expands and contracts relatively due to changes in temperature and aging, the expansion and contraction can be absorbed.

Further, the panel holder 1120 is arranged at a position corresponding to the fitting hole 1113 and the elongated hole 1114 formed in the panel plate 1110 held by the holding step portion 1121, and is arranged from the front surface of the holding step portion 1121 toward the front. It extends and includes a plurality of protruding pins 1123 that can be fitted and inserted into the fitting holes 1113 and the elongated holes 1114 of the panel plate 1110. By fitting and inserting these protruding pins 1123 into the fitting holes 1113 and the elongated holes 1114 of the panel plate 1110, the panel holder 1120 and the panel plate 1110 can be positioned with each other.

Further, the panel holder 1120 is provided with an engaging claw 1124 and an engaging piece 1125 that engage with the engaging step portion 1115 at a position corresponding to the engaging step portion 1115 of the panel plate 1110. More specifically, the engaging claw 1124 is arranged above the holding step 1121 of the panel holder 1120, corresponds to the upper engaging step 1115 of the panel plate 1110, and is forward from the front of the holding step 1121. It projects toward and elastically engages with the engaging step portion 1115. The engaging claw 1124 has a size such that the tip does not protrude from the front surface of the panel holder 1120.

The engaging piece 1125 of the panel holder 1120 is arranged below the holding step portion 1121 of the panel holder 1120 and corresponds to the lower engaging step portion 1115 of the panel plate 1110. The engaging piece 1125 is on the upper side along the front surface of the panel holder 1120 in a state where a gap of a size that allows the engaging step portion 1115 of the panel plate 1110 to be inserted is formed between the engaging piece 1125 and the front surface of the holding step portion 1121. It extends by a predetermined amount toward the center side). By engaging the engaging step portion 1115 of the panel plate 1110 with the engaging claw 1124 and the engaging piece 1125, the panel plate 1110 is detachably held with respect to the panel holder 1120.

Further, the panel holder 1120 is provided with an out port 1126 that penetrates back and forth at the lowest position in the game area 5a. In the panel holder 1120, the lower side of the rear surface of the out port 1126 is recessed forward to the lower end with the same width as the out port 1126.

Further, the panel holder 1120 includes a notch 1127 that is notched upward from the lower end in the lower left corner of the front view. The notch 1127 coincides with the notch 1011 of the front component 1000, and when the game board 5 is attached to the main body frame 4, the notch 1127 penetrates the notch 1011, 1127 and the lower full tank path unit 860 The front end openings of the normal guide path 861 and the full tank guide path 862 face forward.

Further, the panel holder 1120 is provided with a plurality of mounting holes 1128 penetrating in the front-rear direction at positions corresponding to the plurality of mounting bosses 1010 in the front component 1000. By inserting the mounting boss 1010 of the front component 1000 into these plurality of mounting holes 1128, the panel holder 1120 can be mounted on the rear side of the front component 1000, and the panel holder is connected to the front component 1000. The 1120 (game panel 1100) can be positioned.

Further, the panel holder 1120 is provided with a square insertion hole 1129 that penetrates in the front-rear direction on the upper side of the notch 1127. The rear end of the function display unit 1400 is inserted through the insertion hole 1129.

When the game panel 1100 is attached to the rear side of the front component 1000, the out port 1126 of the panel holder 1120 is opened on the rear side of the out guide portion 1003 of the front component 1000. As a result, the game ball that has flowed down to the lower end of the game area 5a is guided to the rear out port 1126 by the out guidance unit 1003, and is discharged to the rear side of the game panel 1100 through the out port 1126.

[5-2a. Second Embodiment of the game panel]
Next, the game panel 1150 of the embodiment different from the above game panel 1100 will be described in detail mainly with reference to FIGS. 67 and 68. FIG. 67 is an exploded perspective view of a game panel having a form different from that of FIG. 63, viewed from the front together with a front component, a substrate holder, and a main control unit. FIG. 68 is an exploded perspective view of FIG. 67 as viewed from behind. The game panel 1150 is made of a wood board material such as veneer plywood having a predetermined thickness (for example, 18 mm to 21 mm). The game panel 1150 is formed to have the same thickness as the panel holder 1120 of the game panel 1100.

The outer shape of the game panel 1150 is formed to have substantially the same shape as the outer shape of the front component 1000. The game panel 1150 is provided with an out port 1151 that penetrates in the front-rear direction at a position corresponding to the out-guide portion 1003 of the front component 1000 at a lower portion substantially in the center in the left-right direction in the front view. In the game panel 1150, the lower side of the rear surface of the out port 1151 is recessed forward to the lower end with the same width as the out port 1151.

Further, the game panel 1150 penetrates horizontally to the left side of the lower end in the front-rear direction and is opened downward, and has a notch 1152 having the same shape as the notch 1011 of the front component 1000 and a notch 1152 above the notch 1152 in the vertical direction. It is provided with a square insertion hole 1153 through which the rear end of the function display unit 1400 is inserted.

Further, the game panel 1150 has a plurality of inner rails penetrating the front and rear positions where the positioning protrusions 1009 can be fitted at positions corresponding to the plurality of positioning protrusions 1009 protruding rearward from the inner rails 1002 of the front component 1000. It is provided with a fixing hole 1154. Further, the game panel 1150 is provided with a plurality of mounting holes 1155 penetrating in the front-rear direction at positions corresponding to the plurality of mounting bosses 1010 in the front component 1000. By inserting the mounting boss 1010 of the front component 1000 into these plurality of mounting holes 1155, the game panel 1150 can be mounted on the rear side of the front component 1000, and the game panel is connected to the front component 1000. The 1150 can be positioned.

Further, although not shown, the game panel 1150 is provided with a plurality of openings penetrating the front and rear for mounting the table unit 2000, similarly to the opening 1112 of the panel plate 1110 in the game panel 1100. ing.

The game panel 1150 is attached to the rear side of the front component 1000, and the out port 1151 is opened to the rear side of the out guide portion 1003 of the front component 1000. As a result, the game ball that has flowed down to the lower end of the game area 5a is guided to the rear out port 1151 by the out guide unit 1003, and is discharged to the rear side of the game panel 1150 through the out port 1151.

[5-3. Board holder]
Next, the substrate holder 1200 will be described mainly with reference to FIGS. 64 to 65 and the like. The substrate holder 1200 is formed in a horizontally long box shape with the upper side and the front side open, and the bottom surface is inclined so as to be lowered toward the center in the left-right direction. The board holder 1200 can cover the lower part of the back unit 3000 attached to the rear side of the game panel 1100 from the lower side in a state of being assembled on the game board 5. As a result, all the game balls discharged to the rear side of the game panel 1100 through the out port 1126 and the game balls discharged downward from the front unit 2000 and the back unit 3000 can be received and formed on the bottom surface. It can be discharged downward from the discharged unit 1201.

[5-4. Main control board unit]
Next, the main control unit 1300 will be described mainly with reference to FIGS. 64 to 65 and the like. The main control unit 1300 is detachably attached to the rear surface of the board holder 1200. The main control unit 1300 includes a main control board 1310 that controls game contents, payout of game balls, and the like, and a main control board box 1320 that houses the main control board 1310 and is attached to the board holder 1200. ..

The main control board box 1320 is provided with a plurality of sealing mechanisms, and when the main control board box 1320 is closed by using one sealing mechanism, the sealing mechanism is destroyed in order to open the main control board box 1320. It is necessary to leave a trace of opening and closing of the main control board box 1320. Therefore, by looking at the traces of opening and closing, it is possible to detect unauthorized opening and closing of the main control board box 1320, and the deterrent force against illegal acts on the main control board 1310 is enhanced.

The various board boxes 930, 950, 1320, 1520, and 3042 including the main control board box 1320 are all provided as transparent members so that they can be visually confirmed from the outside. There is. That is, as will be described later, in the pachinko machine 1 according to this embodiment, the surface of the payout control board 951 in the payout control board box 950 and the main control board 1310 in the main control board box 1320 is inferior in fraud suppression performance. Since a mounting area is provided, it is important to ensure such transparency in order to obtain various effects related to fraud countermeasures described later.

[5-5. Function display unit]
Next, the function display unit 1400 will be described mainly with reference to FIGS. 64 to 66 and the like. As shown in the figure, the function display unit 1400 is attached to the lower left corner of the front component 1000 on the outside of the game area 5a. The function display unit 1400 can be visually recognized from the front (player side) through the through-hole 111 of the door frame 3 in a state where the game board 5 is assembled in the pachinko machine 1 (see FIG. 66). The function display unit 1400 uses a plurality of LEDs based on control signals from the main control board 1310 to display a game state (game status), a normal lottery result, a special lottery result, and the like.

As shown in FIG. 66, the function display unit 1400 includes a status indicator 1401 composed of one LED for displaying the game status, and four LEDs for displaying the normal lottery result drawn by the passage of the game ball to the gate portion 2003. A lottery is made by accepting a normal symbol display 1402 consisting of a normal symbol display 1402, a normal hold display 1408 consisting of two LEDs for displaying the number of holdings related to the passage of the game ball to the gate portion 2003, and the first starting port 2002. The first special symbol display 1403 consisting of eight LEDs displaying the result of the first special lottery, and the first special holding consisting of two LEDs displaying the number of holdings related to the acceptance of the game ball to the first starting port 2002. To the number display 1404, the second special symbol display 1405 consisting of eight LEDs displaying the result of the second special lottery drawn by accepting the game ball to the second starting port 2004, and the second starting port 2004. When the second special hold number indicator 1406 consisting of two LEDs indicating the number of holds related to the acceptance of the game ball and the first special lottery result or the second special lottery result is a "big hit" or the like, the big winning opening 2005 It mainly includes a round indicator 1407 composed of three LEDs for displaying the number of repetitions (number of rounds) of the opening / closing pattern.

In this function display unit 1400, the number of holds, symbols, etc. can be displayed by appropriately turning on, turning off, blinking, and the like the provided LEDs.

[5-6. Peripheral control unit]
Next, the peripheral control unit 1500 will be described with reference to FIG. 62. The peripheral control unit 1500 is attached to the rear side of the game board side effect display device 1600 attached to the rear surface of the back box 3010 of the back unit 3000. The peripheral control unit 1500 includes a peripheral control board 1510 that controls an effect presented to the player based on a control signal from the main control board 1310, and a peripheral control board box 1520 that houses the peripheral control board 1510. ing. Although not shown, the peripheral control board 1510 includes a peripheral control unit for controlling light emission effect, sound effect, movable effect, etc., and an effect display control unit for controlling an effect image. ..

[5-7. Game board side production display device]
Next, the game board side effect display device 1600 will be described with reference to FIGS. 61 to 62. The game board side effect display device 1600 is arranged in the center of the game area 5a in the front view, and is attached to the rear side of the game panel 1100 via the back box 3010 of the back unit 3000. More specifically, the game board side effect display device 1600 is detachably attached to the rear surface at the substantially center of the rear wall of the back box 3010. The game board side effect display device 1600 can be visually recognized from the front side (player side) through the frame of the frame-shaped center accessory 2500 in a state where the game board 5 is assembled. The game board side effect display device 1600 is a full-color liquid crystal display device backed by a white LED, and can display a still image or a moving image.

The game board side effect display device 1600 includes two left fixed pieces 1601 protruding outward from the left side surface in front view, and a right fixed piece 1602 protruding outward from the right side surface in front view. The game board side effect display device 1600 has two fixing grooves opened on the left inner peripheral surface of the front view in the frame-shaped liquid crystal mounting portion 3010b of the back box 3010, which will be described later, with the liquid crystal screen facing forward. After inserting the two left fixing pieces 1601 into the 3010c diagonally from the rear of the back box 3010, the right fixing piece 1602 side is moved forward, and the right fixing piece 1602 is inserted into the opening of the lock mechanism 3020 to lock. The mechanism 3020 is attached to the back box 3010 by sliding it downward.

[5-8. Table unit]
Next, the table unit 2000 will be described with reference to FIGS. 60 to 62. The front unit 2000 of the game board 5 is attached to the panel plate 1110 of the game panel 1100 from the front, the front end protrudes forward from the front surface of the panel plate 1110, and the rear end penetrates the opening 1112. It protrudes rearward from the rear surface of the panel plate 1110.

The table unit 2000 of the present embodiment has a plurality of general winning openings 2001 that are always open and can accept game balls driven into the game area 5a, and the plurality of general winning openings 2001 are in the game area 5a. The first start port 2002, which is always open so that the game ball can be received at different positions, the gate portion 2003, which is installed at a predetermined position in the game area 5a and detects the passage of the game ball, and the game ball is a gate. A lottery is made by accepting game balls into the second starting port 2004 and the first starting port 2002 or the second starting port 2004, which enables the acceptance of game balls according to the result of the ordinary lottery drawn by passing through the section 2003. It is provided with a large winning opening 2005 that enables acceptance of game balls according to the result of the first special lottery or the result of the second special lottery.

The plurality of general winning openings 2001 are arranged at the lower part in the game area 5a. The first starting port 2002 is arranged at the center in the left-right direction in the game area 5a and directly above the out port 1126. The gate portion 2003 is arranged in the game area 5a at the upper right of the front view and substantially directly below the abutment portion 1006. The second starting port 2004 is arranged on the right side of the front view from directly below the gate portion 2003. The big winning opening 2005 is arranged between the first starting opening 2002 and the out opening 1126.

Further, the front unit 2000 is a start port unit 2100 which is mounted directly above the out port 1126 in the center of the game area 5a in the left-right direction and has a first start port 2002 and a grand prize opening 2005, and a start port unit. The side unit lower 2200 mounted along the inner rail 1002 on the left side of the front view of the 2100 and having a plurality of general winning openings 2001, and the side unit mounted above the left end of the front view of the side unit lower 2200. It is provided with an upper 2300, a frame-shaped center accessory 2500 which is attached substantially in the center of the game area 5a and has a gate portion 2003 and a second starting port 2004.

The start port unit 2100 is arranged in the game area 5a near the lower end portion in the center in the left-right direction and directly above the out port 1126, and is attached to the panel plate 1110 from the front. In this starting port unit 2100, the first starting port 2002 opens upward with a size capable of accepting only one game ball at a time, and the large winning opening 2005 opens a plurality of game balls at a time ( (For example, 4 to 6) It extends to the left and right with a size that can be accepted, and is formed so that it can be opened and closed according to the game state.

The side unit lower 2200 extends in an arc shape along the inner rail 1002 on the left side of the starting port unit 2100 in the game area 5a, and is attached to the panel plate 1110 from the front. The side unit lower 2200 has a plurality of general winning openings 2001 capable of always accepting a game ball.

The side unit upper 2300 is attached to the panel plate 1110 from the front slightly downward from the center in the vertical direction in the upper left of the front view of the side unit lower 2200 in the game area 5a. The 2300 on the side unit is attached to the front surface of the panel plate 1110, and the left end of the shelf is close to the inner rail 1002. Can be guided to the center in the left-right direction of.

The center accessory 2500 is arranged in the game area 5a above the start port unit 2100 and the side unit lower 2200, slightly above the center of the front view, and is located in front of the panel plate 1110 of the game panel 1100. It is installed. The center accessory 2500 is formed in a frame shape, and the effect unit and the like provided on the game board side effect display device 1600 and the back unit 3000 arranged behind the game panel 1100 are visually recognized from the front through the frame. be able to. The center accessory 2500 has a gate portion 2003 and a second starting port 2004.

The entire circumference of the frame-shaped center accessory 2500 except for the lower side protrudes forward from the front surface of the panel plate 1110 of the game panel 1100, and the game ball driven into the game area 5a is inside the frame. It cannot be invaded.

The center accessory 2500 has a warp entrance 2520 that is open so that the game ball in the game area 5a can enter and a game ball that has entered the warp entrance 2520 on the outer peripheral surface on the left side of the front view. It includes an open warp outlet 2522 and a stage 2530 that rolls the game ball discharged from the warp outlet 2522 in the left-right direction and then discharges it into the game area 5a. The start port unit 2100 is arranged directly under the stage 2530, and when the game ball is discharged downward from the center of the stage 2530, the game ball is received by the first start port 2002 with an extremely high probability.

[5-9. Back unit]
Next, the back unit 3000 in the game board 5 will be described with reference to FIGS. 60 to 62. The back unit 3000 is attached to the rear surface of the panel holder 1120 in the game panel 1100. Further, a game board side effect display device 1600 and a peripheral control unit 1500 are attached to the rear side of the back unit 3000.

The back unit 3000 is a box-shaped back box 3010 attached to the rear surface of the panel holder 1120 and having a square opening 3010a on the rear wall, and a lower side of the opening 3010a on the rear surface of the back box 3010. It is provided with a box-shaped effect drive board box 3042 that is rotatably attached around an axis extending to the left and right along the above and houses the effect drive board.

Further, the back unit 3000 is a back left middle decorative unit 3050 attached upward from the center in the vertical direction on the left side side of the front view at the front end in the back box 3010, and the back unit 3000 below the opening 3010a in the back box 3010. The back bottom rear movable production unit 3100 mounted near the rear wall of the box 3010, the back top left movable production unit 3200 mounted above the opening 3010a in the back box 3010 and on the left side of the front view, and the back box. The back left movable effect unit 3300 installed on the left side of the front view of the opening 3010a in 3010, and the back top middle mounted from the center in the left-right direction to the right end of the front view above the opening 3010a in the back box 3010. It includes a movable effect unit 3400 and a back lower front movable effect unit 3500 attached below the opening 3010a in the back box 3010 and in front of the back lower rear movable effect unit 3100.

The back box 3010 of the back unit 3000 has a box-shaped opening 3010a having an open front and a square penetrating rear wall, and a flat plate frame-shaped opening protruding rearward at a distance from the peripheral edge of the opening 3010a. The liquid crystal mounting portion 3010b and the two fixing grooves 3010c that are recessed from the inside to the outside in the frame on the left side of the liquid crystal mounting portion 3010b and into which the left fixing piece 1601 of the game board side effect display device 1600 is inserted. The liquid crystal display mounting portion 3010b is provided with a cutout portion 3010d in which a lock mechanism 3020 is mounted by being cut out from the rear end to the rear wall of the back box 3010 at the center in the vertical direction on the right side of the rear view.

The opening 3010a is formed to have substantially the same size as the display screen of the game board side effect display device 1600. Further, the liquid crystal mounting portion 3010b is formed in a size capable of fitting the game board side effect display device 1600 into the frame. The lock mechanism 3020 is slidably attached to the back box 3010 on the left side of the notch 3010d on the rear surface when viewed from the rear.

Further, the back box 3010 includes a flat plate-shaped fixed piece portion 3010e extending outward from the front end. The fixed piece portion 3010e is attached to the panel holder 1120 with the front surface in contact with the rear surface of the panel holder 1120 of the game panel 1100. The back box 3010 is formed with bosses, mounting holes, and the like for mounting the movable effect units and the like at appropriate positions.

As the back unit 3000, the back bottom rear movable production unit 3100, the back top left movable production unit 3200, the back left movable production unit 3300, the back top middle movable production unit 3400, the back bottom front movable production unit 3500, and the like are appropriately used. , Light emission effect, movable effect, display effect, etc. can be performed, and the player can be entertained by various effects, and it is possible to suppress the player's interest in the game from being lowered.

[6. Game content]
Next, the content of the game by the pachinko machine 1 of the present embodiment will be described with reference to FIG. 60 and the like. In the pachinko machine 1 of the present embodiment, the game ball stored in the upper plate 321 of the plate unit 320 is generated by the player rotating the handle 302 of the handle unit 300 arranged in the lower right corner of the front surface of the door frame 3. , The game is driven into the upper part of the game area 5a through between the outer rail 1001 and the inner rail 1002 on the game board 5, and the game by the game ball is started. The game ball driven into the upper part in the game area 5a flows down either the left side or the right side of the center accessory 2500 depending on the driving strength. The driving strength of the game ball can be adjusted by the amount of rotation of the handle 302, and the stronger the ball can be driven by rotating it in the clockwise direction, that is, a maximum of 100 game balls per minute in a row, that is, , You can hit the game ball at intervals of 0.6 seconds.

Further, in the game area 5a, a plurality of obstacle nails (not shown) are planted in front of the game panel 1100 (panel plate 1110) in a predetermined gauge arrangement at appropriate positions, and the game ball becomes an obstacle nail. By abutting, the flow speed of the game ball is suppressed, and various movements are given to the game ball so that the movement can be enjoyed. Further, in the game area 5a, in addition to the obstacle nail, a windmill (not shown) that rotates due to the contact of the game ball is provided at an appropriate position.

When the game ball driven into the upper part of the center accessory 2500 enters the left side of the front view from the highest portion of the outer peripheral surface of the center accessory 2500, it comes into contact with a plurality of obstacle nails (not shown). It will flow down the area on the left side of the center accessory 2500. Then, when the game ball flowing down the area on the left side of the center accessory 2500 enters the warp inlet 2520 opened on the outer peripheral surface of the center accessory 2500, it is supplied from the warp outlet 2522 to the stage 2530.

The game ball supplied to the stage 2530 rolls on the stage 2530, moves back and forth from side to side, and is released forward. When the game ball is released into the game area 5a from the center of the stage 2530, it is located directly above the first start port 2002, so that it is accepted by the first start port 2002 with high probability. When the game balls are received in the first starting port 2002, a predetermined number (for example, three) of game balls are paid out to the upper plate 321 from the payout device 830 via the main control board 1310 and the payout control board 951. ..

When the game ball rolling on the stage 2530 is released into the game area 5a from other than the center, it flows down toward the start port unit 2100. The game ball released from the stage 2530 of the center accessory 2500 into the game area 5a may be accepted by the first start port 2002 of the start port unit 2100, the large winning opening 2005 in the open state, or the like.

By the way, when the game ball that has flowed down to the left side of the center accessory 2500 does not enter the warp entrance 2520, it is moved to the center side in the left-right direction by the side unit upper 2300, and the general winning opening 2001 or the first of the side unit lower 2200. There is a possibility that it will be accepted at the start port 2002 or the like. Then, when the game balls are received in the general winning opening 2001, a predetermined number (for example, 10) of game balls are paid out to the upper plate 321 from the payout device 830 via the main control board 1310 and the payout control board 951. ..

On the other hand, when the game ball driven into the upper part of the center accessory 2500 in the game area 5a enters the right side of the highest portion of the outer peripheral surface of the center accessory 2500 (so-called right-handed strike), On the downstream side thereof, the area provided with the gate portion 2003 and the second starting port 2004 will flow down.

Then, when the right-handed game ball passes through the gate portion 2003, a normal lottery is performed on the main control board 1310, and when the lottery normal lottery result is "normal hit", the second starting port 2004 is set for a predetermined time ( For example, it will be in the open state for 0.3 to 10 seconds), and the game ball can be accepted into the second starting port 2004. Then, when the game balls are received in the second starting port 2004, a predetermined number (for example, four) of game balls are paid out to the upper plate 321 from the payout device 830 via the main control board 1310 and the payout control board 951. NS.

In the present embodiment, in the ordinary lottery performed by passing the game ball through the gate portion 2003, a certain amount of time is set from the start of the ordinary lottery until the result of the ordinary lottery is suggested (for example, 0. 01 to 60 seconds, also called normal fluctuation time). The suggestion of the normal lottery result is displayed on the function display unit 1400 of the game board 5. The second starting port 2004 is normally opened after the lapse of the fluctuation time.

Further, if the game ball passes through the gate portion 2003 between the time when the game ball passes through the gate portion 2003 and the time when the normal lottery result is suggested, the suggestion of the normal lottery result cannot be started, so that the normal lottery result cannot be started. The start of the suggestion of the result is suspended until the suggestion of the previous ordinary lottery result is completed. In addition, the maximum number of pending lottery results is four, and more than that, even if the game ball passes through the gate portion 2003, it is discarded without being reserved. As a result, the increase in the burden on the game hall side is suppressed by accumulating the hold.

In the pachinko machine 1 of the present embodiment, when the game balls are received in the first start port 2002 and the second start port 2004, the main control board 1310 has an advantageous gaming state (for example, "big hit", "big hit", " A lottery of special lottery results that generate "medium hits", "small hits", "probability fluctuation hits", "time reduction hits", etc.) is performed. Then, the lottery special lottery result is suggested to the player over a predetermined time (for example, 0.1 to 360 seconds, also referred to as a special fluctuation time). In addition, the special lottery results drawn by accepting the game balls in the first starting port 2002 and the second starting port 2004 include "loss", "small hit", "2R big hit", "5R big hit", and "5R big hit". There are "15R big hit", "probability change (probability change) hit", "time reduction (time reduction) hit", "probability change time reduction hit", "probability change time reduction no hit", and the like.

When the special lottery result (first special lottery result and second special lottery result) drawn by accepting the game balls to the first starting port 2002 and the second starting port 2004 is a special lottery result that causes an advantageous gaming state. After the lapse of the special fluctuation time, the large winning opening 2005 is in a state where the game ball can be accepted in a predetermined opening / closing pattern. When a game ball is received in the large prize opening 2005 when the large prize opening 2005 is open, a predetermined number (for example, 10 or 13) of game balls are received from the payout device 830 by the main control board 1310 and the payout board. Is paid out to the upper plate 321. Therefore, when the large winning opening 2005 is capable of accepting the game balls, by accepting the game balls in the large winning opening 2005, a large number of game balls can be paid out and the player can be entertained.

When the special lottery result is "small hit", after the big winning opening 2005 is in an open state where a game ball can be accepted for a predetermined short time (for example, between 0.2 seconds and 0.6 seconds). The closing opening / closing pattern is repeated a plurality of times (for example, twice). On the other hand, when the special lottery result is "big hit", a predetermined time (for example, about 30 seconds) has passed after the big winning opening 2005 is in an open state where the game ball can be accepted, or the big winning opening 2005 is entered. When any of the conditions of accepting a predetermined number (for example, 10) of game balls is satisfied, an opening / closing pattern (one opening / closing pattern is referred to as one round) that makes the game balls unacceptable in a closed state is specified. Repeat the number of times (predetermined number of rounds). For example, "2R jackpot" is repeated for 2 rounds, "5R jackpot" is for 5 rounds, and "15R jackpot" is for 15 rounds, respectively, to generate an advantageous gaming state advantageous to the player.

In "big hit", after the big hit game is finished, the probability that a special lottery result such as "big hit" will be drawn is changed ("probability change hit"), or the display time of the production image suggesting the special lottery result is changed. ("Time saving hit") There is a "hit".

In the present embodiment, the first starting port 2002 and the first starting port 2002 and the first starting port 2002 and the first starting port 2002 and the second starting port 2002 are between the start of the special lottery and the suggestion of the lottery special lottery result by accepting the game balls to the first starting port 2002 and the second starting port 2004. (Ii) When the game ball is accepted in the starting port 2004, the suggestion of the special lottery result cannot be started. Therefore, the start of the suggestion of the special lottery result is suspended until the suggestion of the special lottery result previously drawn is completed. NS. The number of reserved special lottery results is limited to four for each of the first starting port 2002 and the second starting port 2004, and for more than that, the first starting port 2002 and the second starting port 2004. Even if the game ball is accepted in 2004, the special lottery result is not reserved and is discarded. As a result, the increase in the burden on the game hall side is suppressed by accumulating the hold.

The suggestion of the special lottery result is made by the function display unit 1400 and the game board side effect display device 1600. In the function display unit 1400, the special lottery result is suggested by being directly controlled by the main control board 1310. The suggestion of the special lottery result in the function display unit 1400 suggests the special lottery result by repeatedly turning on and off the plurality of LEDs to blink for a predetermined time and then by combining the lit LEDs.

On the other hand, in the game board side effect display device 1600, based on the control signal from the main control board 1310, it is indirectly controlled by the peripheral control board 1510, and the special lottery result is suggested as the effect image. The effect image suggesting the result of the special lottery on the game board side effect display device 1600 is displayed in a variable manner by changing each symbol sequence in a state where three symbol rows consisting of a plurality of symbols are displayed side by side in the left-right direction. The existing symbol rows are sequentially stopped and displayed, and each of the three symbol rows that are stopped and displayed is stopped and displayed so that the symbols correspond to the special lottery result. If the special lottery result is other than "missing", after the three symbol rows are stopped and each symbol is stopped and displayed, a definite image suggesting the special lottery result is displayed on the game board side effect display device 1600. An advantageous gaming state (for example, a small hit game, a big hit game, etc.) occurs according to the result of the special lottery.

The time suggesting the special lottery result in the function display unit 1400 (LED blinking time (variable time)) and the time suggesting the special lottery result in the game board side effect display device 1600 (the symbol sequence fluctuates). It is different from the time until the confirmed image is displayed), and the function display unit 1400 is set to a longer time.

Further, in the peripheral control board 1510, in addition to displaying the effect image for suggesting the special lottery result by the game board side effect display device 1600, the effect operation unit 400 in the door frame 3 according to the lottery special lottery result. Operation button 410, door frame side effect display device 460, various decorations of center accessory 2500, various decorations of back unit 3000, back bottom rear movable production unit 3100, back top left movable production unit 3200, back left movable production It is possible to perform light emission effect, movable effect, display effect, etc. by appropriately using the unit 3300, the back upper middle movable effect unit 3400, the back lower front movable effect unit 3500, etc. It is possible to entertain the person and suppress the decrease in the player's interest in the game.

[Relationship between the present embodiment and the present invention]
The door frame 3 in the present embodiment is the door unit of the present invention, the main body frame 4 in the present embodiment is the main body unit of the present invention, and the through hole 111 of the door frame base unit 100 in the door frame 3 of the present embodiment is the present invention. The plate unit cover 326 of the plate unit 320 in the door frame 3 of the present embodiment is attached to the bulging portion of the present invention of the operation button 410 of the effect operation unit 400 and the second effect operation unit 400A of the present embodiment. The button lens 411 corresponds to the first decorative body of the present invention, and the first button decorative portion 411a of the button lens 411 in the present embodiment corresponds to the first decorative portion of the present invention, respectively.

Further, the decorative member inside the operation button of the base unit in the present embodiment, the main screen 471 and the sub screen 472 of the screen unit 470 in the door frame side second effect display device 460A are used as the second decorative body of the present invention in the present embodiment. The second button inner decoration portion 432g of the operation button inner decoration member 432, the peripheral decoration portion 472a of the screen unit 470, the sub-screen decoration member 476, and the peripheral decoration member 478 correspond to the second decoration portion of the present invention, respectively. ..

Further, each LED and subscreen decorative board mounted on the operation button left inner decorative board 433, the operation button right inner decorative board 434, the operation button upper inner decorative board 435, and the operation button lower inner decorative board 436 in the present embodiment. The LED 477a of 477 is used as a light emitting body of the present invention, and the door frame side effect display device 460 of the present invention is used as a back decoration means of the present invention. The unit base 451 of the second base unit 450 corresponds to the base portion of the present invention, respectively.

[8. Characteristic effects of this embodiment]
As described above, according to the pachinko machine 1 of the present embodiment, the operation of the effect operation unit 400 (or the second effect operation unit 400A) attached to the front surface of the dish unit 320 that bulges forward in the door frame 3 When the button lens 411 of the button 410 is viewed from the outside, the screen unit 470 in the first button decoration portion 411a and the second button interior decoration portion 432g of the operation button interior decoration member 432 (or the door frame side second effect display device 460A). 472a, sub-screen decoration member 476, peripheral decoration member 478, etc.), and the first button decoration part 411a and the door frame side effect display device 460 overlap. Since it is possible to show the player a decorative decoration with a sense of perspective, it is possible to strongly attract the attention of the player and to differentiate it from other pachinko machines. It can be a high pachinko machine 1.

Further, the operation button interior decorative member 432 (or the door frame side second effect display device 460A (screen unit 470)), the door frame side effect display device 460, etc. are arranged in the moving direction of the button lens 411 (operation button 410). At the same time, since the unit base 431 (unit base 451) supports the button lens 411 so that it can be moved by the operation of the player, the player operates (presses) the button lens 411 to move the button lens 411. Then, the first button decorative portion 411a and the second button inner decorative portion 432 g (or the peripheral decorative portion 472a, the sub-screen decorative member 476, the peripheral decorative member 478, etc.) come close to each other or separate from each other. The first button decoration part 411a and the second button decoration part 411a and the second button decoration part 411a due to a change in the distance between the first button decoration part 411a and the second button inner decoration part 432g (or the peripheral decoration part 472a, the sub-screen decoration member 476, the peripheral decoration member 478, etc.). It is possible to change the perspective of the decoration that appears to overlap with the decorative portion 432 g inside the button (or the peripheral decorative portion 472a, the sub-screen decorative member 476, the peripheral decorative member 478, etc.), and the first button decorative portion 411a The decoration (intersection mode) with the decoration portion 432g inside the second button (or the peripheral decoration portion 472a, the sub-screen decorative member 476, the peripheral decoration member 478, etc.) can be changed by the player himself, and the player can be changed. It can be entertained and the decline in interest can be suppressed.

Further, since the center of the button lens 411 is bulged outward on the side opposite to the operation button internal decorative member 432 (or the door frame side second effect display device 460A), it is referred to as the first decorative body. Since a space is formed between the second decorative body and the second decorative body, the distance to the first button decorative portion 411a of the button lens 411 and the second button of the decorative member 432 inside the operation button when viewed from the player. The distance to the inner decoration part 432g (or the peripheral decoration part 472a of the screen unit 470, the sub-screen decoration member 476, the peripheral decoration member 478, etc.) will be significantly different, and the button lens 411 is operated to move the button lens 411. When the position of the player's eyes moves even when the player is not in the state, when the position of the player's eyes moves, the first button decoration part 411a and the second button inner decoration part 432g (or the peripheral decoration part 472a, the sub-screen decoration member 476, the peripheral decoration member 478, etc.) Since the crossing mode (overlapping condition) with and is changed, the moving decoration can be shown to the player, and the player's interest can be strongly attracted.

Further, since the first button decoration portion 411a having a radial decoration toward the center is provided on the outer peripheral edge of the transparent button lens 411, the central side of the button lens 411 not provided with the first button decoration portion 411a. The decorative member 432 inside the operation button on the back side (or the second effect display device 460A on the door frame side) and the effect display device 460 on the door frame side can be visually recognized well, and the first button decoration portion 411a is radial. The decoration of the player can direct the player's line of sight to the center of the button lens 411, and the decorative member 432 (or the second effect display device 460A on the door frame side) or the door frame inside the operation button is passed through the center of the transparent button lens 411. It is possible to strongly direct the player's attention to the side effect display device 460.

Further, since the operation button interior decoration member 432 is provided with a second button interior decoration portion 432 g having a plurality of concentric polygonal decorations centered on the center, the button lens 411 is viewed from the outside. The decoration of the first button decoration part 411a and the decoration of the second button inner decoration part 432g of the operation button inner decoration member 432 intersect with each other, and the first button decoration part 411a and the second button inner decoration part 432g The perspective of the decoration can be surely exhibited, and the decoration by the first button decoration part 411a and the second button inner decoration part 432g can be made conspicuous to make the pachinko machine 1 highly appealing to the player. can.

Further, since the decoration of the second button inner decoration portion 432 g of the operation button inner decoration member 432 is provided with a plurality of concentric polygonal decorations centered on the center, the second button inner decoration portion 432 g. By decoration, the player's line of sight and interest can be directed to the door frame side effect display device 460 that can be seen in the center of the decoration member 432 inside the operation button, and the decoration (effect image) of the door frame side effect display device can be enjoyed. can.

Further, each LED (or subscreen decorative board 477) mounted on the operation button left inner decorative board 433, the operation button right inner decorative board 434, the operation button upper inner decorative board 435, and the operation button lower inner decorative board 436. When the LED 477a) is made to emit light, the decorative member 432 (or the sub-screen decorative member 476) inside the operation button can be made to emit light by the light, and the button lens 411 can also be made to emit light. In addition to the decoration of the button decoration portion 411a and the decoration portion 432g inside the second button (or the sub-screen decoration member 476), the light emitting decoration can also entertain the player. At this time, the operation button left inner decoration board 433, the operation button right inner decoration board 434, the operation button upper inner decoration board 435, and the operation button lower inside by the second button inner decoration portion 432 g (or the sub-screen decoration member 476). Since the light from each LED (or LED477a) of the decorative board 436 can be diffused, in the decoration portion 432g inside the second button, the operation button left inner decorative board 433, the operation button right inner decorative board 434, and the operation button are on. The inner decoration board 435 and the inner decoration board 436 under the operation button are light-emitting and decorated by direct light, whereas the first button decoration portion 411a is decorated with the second button inside. The indirect light diffused by the portion 432 g (or the sub-screen decorative member 476) is used for light emission decoration, whereas the second button inner decoration portion 432 g (sub-screen decorative member 476) is strongly luminescent and decorated. Since the first button decoration portion 411a is weakly light-emittingly decorated, each LED of the operation button left inner decoration board 433, the operation button right inner decoration board 434, the operation button upper inner decoration board 435, and the operation button lower inner decoration board 436. (Or, when the first button decorative portion 411a and the second button inner decorative portion 432 g (or the sub-screen decorative member 476) are viewed from the outside with the LED 477a emitted, the perspective is further emphasized. The decoration can be shown to the player, and the pachinko machine 1 having a high appealing power that strongly attracts the player's attention can be obtained.

Further, since the operation button interior decoration member 432 (or the door frame side second effect display device 460A) is arranged in the moving direction of the button lens 411, the button lens 411 and the operation button interior decoration member 432 (or the door) are arranged. It is not necessary to secure a space for the button lens 411 to move outside the outer periphery of the frame side second effect display device 460A), and the button lens 411 and the decorative member 432 (or the door frame) inside the operation button do not need to be secured. The second effect display device on the side (460A) can be expanded outward to make it as large as possible, and by making it larger, the button lens 411 and the decorative member 432 inside the operation button (or the second effect display device on the door frame side) can be enlarged. 460A) can be made to stand out. Further, as described above, since it is not necessary to secure a space for moving the button lens 411 outside, by arranging the frame unit 415 on the outside portion of the button lens 411, the pachinko machine 1 as a whole can be arranged. It is possible to make the pachinko machine 1 with high appeal, which can enhance the decorativeness, improve the appearance, and strongly attract the attention of the player.

Further, since the center of the button lens 411 is bulged outward, when the player hits the button lens 411 to give an impact to a part of the surface, the button lens 411 has a flat shape. As compared with the case, the applied impact force is easily dispersed over the entire button lens 411, so that the button lens 411 can be made hard to break (hard to break). Therefore, if the button lens 411 is damaged during the game, the game is interrupted, and it is possible to prevent some players from becoming frustrated and deteriorating their interest, and the button lens 411 is damaged. By making it difficult, it is possible to suppress an increase in the burden on the game hall side where the pachinko machine 1 is installed.

Further, according to the pachinko machine 1 of the present embodiment, in the door frame 3 in which the game area 5a of the game board 5 arranged in the main body frame 4 is visible from the front through the through hole 111, below the through hole 111. The outer diameter is 10 cm on the unit base 431 (second base unit 450) of the effect operation unit 400 (second effect operation unit 400A) attached to the plate unit cover 326 of the plate unit 320 that bulges forward on the side. The operation button 410, which is movable (advance / retreat) by the player's operation in a circular shape of about 15 cm, which is within the range of ~ 30 cm, and the operation button interior decoration that can be seen from the front through the transparent button lens 411 of the operation button 410. Since the member 432, the door frame side effect display device 460 (door frame side second effect display device 460A), and the frame-shaped frame unit 415 in which the operation button 410 is arranged in the frame are attached, it is conventional. In the pachinko machine, the production operation unit 400 (second production operation unit 400A) having the largest possible operation button 410 can be seen at a position where the storage plate of the game ball stands out, so the player can see it at a glance. It is possible to recognize that the pachinko machine is different from the conventional pachinko machine, and the pachinko machine 1 has a high appealing power. The frame unit 415 is provided with a translucent frame side lens 417, and the outer edge of the operation button 410 (button lens 411) is provided with a translucent second button decoration so as to be adjacent to the frame side lens 417. The operation button left outer decorative board 422 and the operation button right outer decorative board 423, which are provided with the part 411b and are attached to the unit base 431 (second base unit 450) behind the frame side lens 417 and the second button decorative part 411b. The frame side lens 417 and the second button are provided with the first LEDs 422a and 423a for luminescent decoration of the second button decoration portion 411b and the second LEDs 422b and 423b for luminescent decoration of the frame side lens 417. It includes an inner tubular portion 416d of the frame main body 416 that partitions the decorative portion 411b, and a main body portion 413a and an inner extending portion 413f of the button base 413 that separates the second button decorative portion 411b and the central side of the button lens 411. Therefore, the light from the first LEDs 422a and 423a illuminates the center side of the frame side lens 417 and the button lens 411 by the inner cylinder portion 416d, the main body portion 413a, and the inner extending portion 413f, or the second LED 422b. , 423b can prevent the light from illuminating the second button decoration portion 411b, and the adjacent frame side lens 417 and the second button decoration portion 411b can be independently emitted and decorated. can. Therefore, the frame side lens 417 and the second button decoration portion 411b can be clearly luminescent and decorated, respectively, and a good-looking luminescent effect can be produced. In addition, various patterns of light emission can be produced by appropriately combining extinguishing, lighting, blinking, brightness, color, etc. with respect to the adjacent frame side lens 417 and the second button decorative portion 411b. It is possible to make the player less likely to get bored, to entertain the player, and to suppress a decrease in the player's interest in the game.

Further, the first LEDs 422a and 423a for emitting and decorating the second button decoration portion 411b of the operation button 410 and the second LEDs 422b and 423b for emitting and decorating the frame side lens 417 of the frame unit 415 are decorated on the left outside of one operation button. Since the operation button left outer decorative board 422 and the operation button right outer decorative board 423 are attached to the unit base 431 (second base unit 450) in preparation for the board 422 and the operation button right outer decorative board 423, the second button decorative part Compared with the case where the substrate is provided on the 411b (operation button 410), the first LEDs 422a and 423a can be kept as far away as possible from the second button decoration portion 411b, and the light from the first LEDs 422a and 423a can be sufficiently diverted. The second button decorative portion 411b can be irradiated in a diffused state. Therefore, since the second button decoration portion 411b can be uniformly luminescent and decorated, the appearance of the luminescent decoration of the second button decoration portion 411b and the frame side lens 417 can be improved, and the interest of the player is strongly attracted. At the same time, it is possible to entertain the player and suppress the deterioration of the player's interest.

Further, since the operation button left outer decorative board 422 and the operation button right outer decorative board 423 are attached to the unit base 431 (second base unit 450), the operation button left outer decorative board 422 is attached as the operation button 410 moves forward and backward. And the wiring connected to the operation button right outer decorative substrate 423 does not bend or extend, and the disconnection of the wiring due to fatigue can be eliminated. Therefore, even if the operation button 410 (second button decoration portion 411b) is moved, the wiring is not broken. Therefore, the operation button 410 can be moved (operation), and the frame side lens 417 and the second button decoration portion 411b can be moved. The luminous decoration can be entertained by the player without any problem, and the deterioration of the player's interest can be suppressed.

Further, since the second button decoration portion 411b is provided on the outer edge of the transparent button lens 411 of the operation button 410, the rear operation button inner decoration member 432 and the door frame side effect display device 460 are provided through the transparent button lens 411. When looking at (door frame side second effect display device 460A), the outer edge of the operation button inner decoration member 432 and the door frame side effect display device 460 (door frame side second effect display device 460A) is set to the second button decoration portion 411b. Is in a decorated state, and the appearance of the pachinko machine 1 can be improved. Then, by appropriately emitting the first LED 422a, 423a and the second LED 422b, 423b, the decorative member 432 inside the operation button and the door frame side effect display device 460 (door frame side second effect display device 460A) can be seen transparently. As described above, the second button decoration portion 411b and the frame side lens 417 that decorate the outer edge of the button lens 411 can be light-emitting and decorated in various patterns. It can be strongly attracted to the door frame side effect display device 460 (door frame side second effect display device 460A), and can be used for light emission effect, operation of the operation button 410, and door frame side effect display device 460 (door frame side second effect display device 460A). It is possible to entertain the effect image or the like by the effect display device 460A) and suppress the deterioration of the interest.

Further, since the button lens 411 (operation button 410) provided with the second button decoration portion 411b on the outer edge can be operated by the player, the operation button 410 is used by the player during the execution of the player participation type production. By allowing the player to operate the operation button 410, it is possible to entertain the player with the operation of the operation button 410 (player participation type production), and it is possible to suppress a decrease in the interest of the player in the game. Then, when the player participation type production is executed, the player's interest can be attracted to the operation button 410 by illuminating the second button decoration portion 411b of the operation button 410 and the frame side lens 417 of the frame unit 415. Therefore, it is possible to urge the player to operate the operation button 410, and the player can be entertained by participating in the player participation type production.

Further, since it is provided with a translucent main body portion 413a and an inner extension portion 413f that allow only the second button decoration portion 411b of the operation button 410 to be light-emitting and decorated by the first LEDs 422a and 423a, the second button decoration portion 413f of the operation button 410 is provided. The portion on the center side of the button decoration portion 411b is not illuminated (illuminated) by the first LEDs 422a and 423a, and is arranged behind by brightening the center side of the operation button 410 (button lens 411). It is possible to prevent the decorative member 432 inside the operation button and the door frame side effect display device 460 (door frame side second effect display device 460A) from becoming difficult to see from the front. Therefore, the second button decoration portion 411b can be light-emitting decorated in a good state, and the rear operation button interior decoration member 432 and the door frame side effect display device 460 (door frame side second effect) can be decorated by emitting light through the transparent button lens 411. The display device 460A) can be visually recognized in a good state, and the player can sufficiently enjoy the decoration, the light emitting effect, and the like, and can suppress the deterioration of the interest in the game.

Further, since the inner cylinder portion 416d extends from the rear side of the frame unit 415 provided with the frame side lens 417, the second button decoration of the frame side lens 417 and the operation button 410 is provided on the rear side of the frame unit 415. It can be completely separated from the portion 411b by the inner tubular portion 416d. On the other hand, at the end (rear end) near the operation button left outer decorative board 422 and the operation button right outer decorative board 423 in the inner cylinder portion 416d, light from the first LEDs 422a, 423a and the second LEDs 422b, 423b is emitted. Since the rear end of the inner cylinder portion 416d is located closer to the operation button left outer decorative board 422 and the operation button right outer decorative board 423 than the diffusion range, the operation button left outer decorative board 422 and the operation button right outer Even if a gap is formed between the decorative substrate 423 and the front surface, the light from the first LEDs 422a and 423a illuminates the frame side lens 417, and the light from the second LED 422b423b illuminates the second button decorative portion 411b. There is nothing to do. Therefore, the pachinko machine 1 can be realized in which the light can be reliably blocked by the inner cylinder portion 416d and the above-mentioned effects can be reliably achieved.

Further, since the main body portion 413a and the inner extending portion 413f of the button base 413 are extended from the rear side of the operation button 410 (button lens 411), the second button decoration portion 411b is on the rear side of the operation button 410. And the center side of the button lens 411 can be completely partitioned by the main body portion 413a and the inner extending portion 413f. On the other hand, at the end (rear end) near the operation button left outer decorative board 422 and the operation button right outer decorative board 423 in the main body 413a, the operation button left outer decorative board 422 and the operation button right outer decorative board 423 The light from the first LEDs 422a and 423a does not go under the rear end of the main body 413a, and the light from the operation button 410 is completely blocked from entering the center side of the button lens 411. Can be done. Therefore, the first LED 422a and 423a can illuminate and decorate the second button decoration portion 411b in a good state, and through the transparent button lens 411, the rear operation button interior decoration member 432 and the door frame side effect display device 460 ( The door frame side second effect display device 460A) can be visually recognized in a good state, and the player can sufficiently enjoy the decoration, the light emitting effect, and the like, and can suppress the deterioration of the interest in the game.

Further, when viewed from the front, the second button is decorated in front of the outer portion of the operation button internal decoration member 432 (door frame side second effect display device 460A) arranged behind the operation button 410 (button lens 411). Since the portion 411b is located, the operation button interior decorative member 432 (door frame side second) is provided through the gap between the button lens 411 and the operation button interior decoration member 432 (door frame side second effect display device 460A). The members on the outside of the effect display device 460A) and the rear side (back side) can be made difficult to see by the second button decorative portion 411b, and the appearance of the operation button 410 can be prevented from deteriorating. Further, at this time, when the second button decoration portion 411b is light-emitting decorated by the first LEDs 422a and 423a, the decoration member 432 inside the operation button (the second effect on the door frame side) is compared with the brightness of the second button decoration portion 411b. Since the outside and the rear side of the display device 460A) are relatively dark, it is possible to make it difficult to see the members on the outside and the rear side of the operation button internal decoration member 432 (door frame side second effect display device 460A). Therefore, the appearance of the operation button 410, the frame unit 415, the decorative member 432 inside the operation button, the door frame side effect display device 460 (door frame side second effect display device 460A), etc. can be further improved, and the appearance of the player can be further improved. It is possible to suppress the decline in interest.

Further, since the outer peripheral shape of the operation button 410 is circular, the second button decoration portion 411b provided on the outer edge of the operation button 410 (button lens 411) and the frame adjacent to the second button decoration portion 411b The side lens 417 has an arcuate shape. Therefore, by appropriately causing the first LEDs 422a and 423a and the second LEDs 422b and 423b to emit light, a light emission effect in which the light circulates around the outer edge of the operation button 410 and light emission in which the light spreads from the inside to the outside of the operation button 410. Since it is possible to show the player a production, a light emission production in which the light converges from the outside to the inside of the operation button 410, etc., the various light emission productions can make the player less bored and entertain the player. However, it is possible to suppress the decline in interest.

Further, according to the pachinko machine 1 of the present embodiment, the upper plate 321 used for the game is driven into the game area 5a by the stored game ball in the plate unit cover 326 of the plate unit 320 in the door frame 3. Along with mounting, the effect operation unit 400 (second effect operation unit 400A) is detachably attached to the front side and the lower side of the upper plate 321 to attach a predetermined size of installation space behind the effect operation unit 400 (second effect operation unit 400A). The remaining space of 326j is formed, and the portion corresponding to the lower plate first region A1 in the lower plate main body 325 is arranged on the left side of the remaining space of the mounting space 326j, and the remaining space of the mounting space 326j is arranged from that portion. Since the lower plate 322 that can store the game ball is attached by extending the portion of the lower plate main body 325 corresponding to the lower plate second region A2, the lower plate 322 looks small when viewed from the front. Therefore, the lower plate 322 can be made inconspicuous, and the effect operation unit 400 (second effect operation unit 400A) can be made relatively inconspicuous. Therefore, when the pachinko machine 1 is viewed from the front, the effect operation unit 400 (second effect operation unit 400A) can be seen at a position where the upper plate and the lower plate can be seen side by side in the conventional pachinko machine. It is possible to make the pachinko machine 1 with high appeal that can make the player recognize that it is different from the conventional pachinko machine at first glance and can strongly attract the attention of the player. can.

Further, at the portion of the lower plate second region A2 in the lower plate main body 325 of the lower plate 322, the lower plate second region A2 extends upward from the upper end of the main body standing wall portion 325b extending upward from the outer periphery, and extends upward from the upper end of the mounting space 326j toward the remaining space side. Since the lower plate covers 340 and 340A that regulate the movement of the game balls are provided, the game balls in the lower plate 322 are prevented from coming into contact with the rear side of the effect operation unit 400 (second effect operation unit 400A). The game ball supplied in the lower plate 322 and the game ball stored in the lower plate 322 come into contact with or press the rear side of the effect operation unit 400 (second effect operation unit 400A). Can be prevented. Therefore, the game ball does not come into contact with the rear side of the effect operation unit 400 (second effect operation unit 400A), and the game ball does not damage the rear side of the effect operation unit 400 (second effect operation unit 400A). Therefore, it is possible to prevent the player's interest from being lowered due to the interruption of the game due to the damage of the effect operation unit 400 (second effect operation unit 400A), and the pachinko machine 1 is installed. It is possible to suppress an increase in the burden on the game hall side.

Further, the lower plate covers 340 and 340A that regulate the movement of the game ball to the portion of the lower plate second region A2 in the lower plate main body 325 of the lower plate 322 to the remaining space side of the main body standing wall portion 325b and the mounting space 326j. It is possible to prevent the game ball from invading (spilling) from the lower plate main body 325 into the remaining space of the mounting space 326j. Therefore, it is possible to prevent the player from feeling lost or uncomfortable when the game ball invades the remaining space of the mounting space 326j, and the player's interest in the game can be prevented. Can be suppressed.

Further, since the lower plate covers 340 and 340A cover the portion of the lower plate second region A2 of the lower plate main body 325 in the lower plate 322, the game ball supplied into the lower plate 322 bounces in the lower plate 322. Even if it jumps up, it can be surely prevented from invading the remaining space side of the mounting space 326j, and the above-mentioned action and effect can be surely achieved. Further, since the lower plate cover 340, 340A covers the portion of the lower plate second region A2 of the lower plate main body 325, the player can perform the lower plate first region A1 side (lower plate opening) of the lower plate main body 325. When a hand is put into the portion of the lower plate second region A2 from 326d), the lower plate covers 340 and 340A can prevent the fingertips and the like from invading the remaining space side of the mounting space 326j. It is possible to prevent the player from being injured by touching the lower surface of the upper plate 321 or the rear side of the effect operation unit 400 (second effect operation unit 400A), and allowing the player to play in a safe state. Can be done.

Further, since there is a gap between the lower plate covers 340 and 340A and the effect operation unit 400 (second effect operation unit 400A), the impact and pressure due to the contact of the game ball with the lower plate covers 340 and 340A, etc. Is not transmitted from the lower plate covers 340 and 340A to the effect operation unit 400 (second effect operation unit 400A), and the effect operation unit 400 (second effect operation unit 400A) is surely damaged. Can be prevented.

Further, since the lower plate ball extraction hole 322a is provided in front of the lower plate ball supply port 323c at the portion of the lower plate second region A2 in the lower plate main body 325 of the lower plate 322, the lower plate ball extraction hole 322a is opened. In this state, the game ball released from the lower plate ball supply port 323c can be directly entered into the lower plate ball extraction hole 322a and discharged downward (dollar box), and the game ball can be discharged downward (dollar box). It is possible to make it difficult to reach the front end side of the vertical wall portion 325b. Even if the game ball jumps over the lower plate ball extraction hole 322a, since the lower plate covers 340 and 340A are provided as described above, the game ball is the effect operation unit 400 (second effect operation unit 400A). Since it is possible to prevent the player from coming into contact with the rear side, it is possible to prevent the effect operation unit 400 (second effect operation unit 400A) from being damaged, reduce the interruption of the game, and reduce the player's interest in the game. Can be suppressed.

Further, since the bottom wall portion 325a of the lower plate main body 325 near the front end of the lower plate 322 becomes higher toward the front, the game ball toward the front end side of the main body standing wall portion 325b of the lower plate main body 325 is inclined. By climbing the bottom surface, the moving speed of the game ball can be attenuated. Therefore, since the speed of the game ball in contact with the lower plate covers 340 and 340A can be slowed down, the lower plate covers 340 and 340A reliably restrict the movement of the game ball to the remaining space side of the mounting space 326j. At the same time, the impact when the game ball comes into contact with the lower plate covers 340, 340A and the main body standing wall portion 325b can be reduced to prevent them from being damaged.

Further, since at least the lower plate covers 340 and 340A are used as separate members, when the lower plate covers 340 and 340A are damaged, they can be easily repaired by simply replacing the lower plate covers 340 and 340A. It is possible to reduce the increase in the burden on the game hall side in which 1 is installed.

Further, according to the pachinko machine 1 of the present embodiment, the center in the left-right direction of the front surface bulges most forward below the game area 5a of the game board 5 in which the game is performed so as to accept the game ball into the general winning opening 2001 or the like. The plate unit cover 326 of the plate unit 320 is provided, and the effect operation unit 400 and the second effect operation unit 400A are detachably attached to the most forwardly bulging part, and the upper plate 321 is attached to the plate unit cover 326. A storage plate capable of storing a game ball composed of a lower plate 322 and a lower plate 322 is provided, and the storage plates (upper plate 321 and lower plate 322) are placed outside the effect operation unit 400 (second effect operation unit 400A) when viewed from the front. It has a lower plate first area A1 located and a lower plate second area A2 located in the space behind the mounting space 326j which is behind the effect operation unit 400 (second effect operation unit 400A) in the front view. Therefore, when viewed from the front, the effect operation unit 400 (second effect operation unit 400A) can be made to stand out, and the storage dishes (upper plate 321 and lower plate 322) can be made small to be inconspicuous. can. Therefore, in the conventional pachinko machine, the effect operation unit 400 (second effect operation unit 400A) that stands out can be seen in the part where the upper plate and the lower plate are visible, so that the player can see the game machine different from the conventional pachinko machine. It is possible to make the pachinko machine 1 having a high appealing power, which can be recognized at a glance and can strongly attract the attention of the player.

Further, since the effect operation unit 400 (second effect operation unit 400A) is attached to the center of the front surface of the plate unit cover 326 in the left-right direction, the portion of the surface of the plate unit cover 326 where the lower plate 322 is open is open. Although it becomes smaller, the first of the lower plate main body 325 having the lower plate second region A2 located in the space behind the mounting space 326j which is behind the effect operation unit 400 (second effect operation unit 400A) in the front view. Since the extension unit 325B, the second extension unit 325C, and the lower plate covers 340 and 340A are provided, the game balls can be stored in the lower plate 322 in a range that cannot be seen from the front (lower plate second area A2). can. Therefore, it is possible to secure a sufficient amount of storage of the game ball contrary to the appearance from the front, so that the player can concentrate on the game without worrying about the remaining amount of the game ball in the lower plate 322. It is possible to entertain the game and suppress the decline in interest.

Further, the lower plate main body 325 and the main body portion 325A having the lower plate first region A1, the lower plate covers 340 and 340A having the lower plate second region A2, the first extension portion 325B, and the second extension Since the lower plate 322 is configured by attaching (combining) the parts 325C, a plurality of lower plate covers 340, 340A, the first extension part 325B, the second extension part 325C, etc. having different sizes are prepared in advance. By installing the lower plate covers 340, 340A, the first extension part 325B, and the second extension part 325C, which are sized according to the concept of the pachinko machine 1 and the size of the mounting space 326j in the dish unit cover 326, etc. The volume of the dish 322 can be optimized. Further, as described above, by rearranging (replacing) the lower plate covers 340, 340A, the first extension portion 325B, and the second extension portion 325C, it is possible to correspond to the size of the rear space of the mounting space 326j. Since the size of the space at the rear depends on the amount of protrusion of the effect operation unit 400 (second effect operation unit 400A) to the rear, various effect operation units 400 (second) having different amounts of protrusion to the rear. The lower plate 322 that can be used for the effect operation unit 400A) can be used, and the versatility of the pachinko machine 1 can be enhanced.

Further, since the lower plate 322 is provided with the bottom wall portion 325a and the main body standing wall portion 325b rising from the outer peripheral end of the bottom wall portion 325a, the lower plate 322 becomes a container shape recessed downward and is a game ball. Can be reliably stored. Further, since the lower plate covers 340 and 340A have the cover standing wall portion 340a rising from the upper end of the main body standing wall portion 325b of the lower plate main body 325, various shapes of lower plate covers 340 and 340A are prepared in advance. By combining (mounting) the lower plate covers 340 and 340A, which have shapes according to the concept of the pachinko machine 1 and the size (shape) of the space behind the mounting space 326j, various forms can be supported. It is possible to obtain the same effects as described above.

Further, in the lower plate 322 composed of the lower plate main body 325 and the lower plate covers 340 and 340A, the lower plate covers 340 and 340A are combined (attached) to the upper end of the main body standing wall portion 325b of the lower plate main body 325. Therefore, since the portion of the lower plate 322 on which the game ball is placed is the lower plate main body 325, the lower plate main body 325 and the lower plate covers 340 and 340A are placed on the portion where more game balls are loaded due to storage. Boundaries (joints, dividing lines PL) are never located. Therefore, since the load of the stored game balls is received only by the lower plate main body 325, even if many game balls are stored, the lower plate covers 340 and 340A are separated from the lower plate main body 325. It does not act, and it is possible to prevent the lower plate covers 340 and 340A from coming off from the lower plate main body 325.

Further, according to the pachinko machine 1 of the present embodiment, an upper plate capable of storing game balls is located below and in front of the game area 5a of the game board 5 in which a game in which a game ball is received in a general winning opening 2001 or the like is performed. The lower plate ball supply port 323c and the lower plate ball extraction hole 322a in the lower plate 322 are provided by the effect operation unit 400 (second effect operation unit 400A) arranged in the center in the left-right direction while having 321 and the lower plate 322. Since more than half of the lower plate 322 including and is difficult to see (make it difficult to see) from the front (player), the appearance of the pachinko machine 1 can be made clear and the appearance can be improved, which is of interest to the player. It can be a pachinko machine 1 with high appeal that can strongly attract. Further, since it is difficult for the effect operation unit 400 (second effect operation unit 400A) to visually recognize the game ball from the lower plate ball supply port 323c to the lower plate ball extraction hole 322a, the player can play the game in the lower plate 322. It is possible to prevent the flow of the ball from being noticed and distracted, and it is possible to suppress a decrease in the interest in the game.

Further, the lower plate ball supply port 323c and the lower plate on the bottom surface of the lower plate 322 that guide the game ball from the lower plate ball supply port 323c to the lower plate ball extraction hole 322a by the effect operation unit 400 (second effect operation unit 400A). Since it is difficult to see the game ball guided by the guiding means such as the ball guiding portion 322c and the buffering portion 322d, the portion between the ball pulling hole 322a, the lower plate ball pulling hole 322a is left open. , The game ball supplied from the lower plate ball supply port 323c to the lower plate 322 is guided by the guiding means and smoothly (immediately) discharged downward from the lower plate ball extraction hole 322a. It is possible to make the illusion that the game ball is discharged to the lower side (dollar box) of the lower plate 322 without passing through the lower plate 322. As a result, it is possible to make it difficult for the player to feel the annoyance of the game ball passing through the lower plate 322, and it is possible to concentrate the player on the game and suppress the deterioration of the interest.

Further, since the effect operation unit 400 (second effect operation unit 400A) makes it difficult to see more than half of the lower plate 322 including the lower plate ball supply port 323c and the lower plate ball extraction hole 322a from the front, it is probable. In addition, the lower plate ball supply port 323c, the lower plate ball extraction hole 322a, and the like are located behind the effect operation unit 400 (second effect operation unit 400A). That is, since more than half of the lower plate 322 is made to wrap around to the rear of the effect operation unit 400 (second effect operation unit 400A), the actual lower plate is larger than the size of the lower plate 322 that can be seen from the front. Since the size (capacity) of the 322 is large, it is possible to sufficiently secure the storage amount of the game balls in the lower plate 322 as compared with the appearance.

Further, in the state where the lower plate ball extraction hole 322a is open, the game balls discharged from the lower plate ball supply port 323c into the lower plate 322 are brought into the lower plate ball supply port 323c and the lower plate ball on the bottom surface of the lower plate 322. Because it can be smoothly guided to the lower plate ball extraction hole 322a by the guiding means such as the portion between the extraction hole 322a, the ball guide portion 322c and the buffer portion 322d, and discharged below the lower plate 322 (dollar box). , It is possible to prevent the game ball from circulating in the lower plate 322, and it is possible to make sure that the game ball circulating in the lower plate 322 is in a state where it is difficult to see from the front (player). Therefore, it is possible to make it difficult for the player to notice the flow of the game ball in the lower plate 322, prevent the player from being distracted, and suppress the deterioration of the interest in the game.

Further, if the lower plate ball extraction hole 322a is left open, the game ball supplied from the lower plate ball supply port 323c to the lower plate 322 is immediately noticed by the ball guide portion 322c or the like without being noticed by the player. Since the ball can be discharged downward from the lower plate ball extraction hole 322a, the player is made to think that the game ball is discharged downward (dollar box) of the lower plate 322 without passing through the lower plate 322. Can be done. As a result, it is possible to make it difficult for the player to feel the annoyance of the game ball passing through the lower plate 322, and it is possible to concentrate the player on the game and suppress the deterioration of the interest.

Further, since the effect operation unit 400 (second effect operation unit 400A) makes it difficult to see more than half of the storage area (storage area) of the game ball in the plan view of the lower plate 322 from the front, the lower plate can be seen from the front. Since the actual lower plate 322 is more than twice the visible size with respect to the size of 322, it is possible to secure a sufficient storage amount of game balls as in the lower plate of a conventional pachinko machine.

Further, according to the pachinko machine 1 of the present embodiment, the door frame 3 that bulges forward below the front view of the game area 5a of the game board 5 in which a game in which a game ball is received by a general winning opening 2001 or the like is performed. A large-scale production operation unit 400 (second production operation unit 400A) having the same height as the total height of the plate unit cover 326 is attached to the center of the front surface of the plate unit cover 326 in the plate unit 320 in the left-right direction. In addition to being provided with a portion 326a, the plate front lower decorative portion 326c below the center in the vertical direction on both the left and right sides of the effect operation unit mounting portion 326a on the front surface of the plate unit cover 326 is recessed so as to be scooped backward. Due to the shape, the effect operation unit 400 (second effect operation unit 400A) attached to the effect operation unit mounting portion 326a can be made to appear as if it protrudes greatly forward, and the effect operation unit 400 (second effect) can be made to appear. The operation unit 400A) can be made to stand out. Therefore, in the conventional pachinko machine, the upper plate and the lower plate can be seen side by side, and the large production operation unit 400 (second production operation unit 400A) can be seen in an emphasized state, so that the player can see it. On the other hand, at first glance, it is possible to recognize that the pachinko machine is different from the conventional pachinko machine, and the pachinko machine 1 with high appeal can be obtained. Then, the lower plate 322 is recessed rearward from the plate front lower decorative portion 326c which is recessed rearward on both the left and right outer sides of the effect operation unit 400 (second effect operation unit 400A) on the front surface of the plate unit cover 326. A part of the game ball is wrapped around the rear of the effect operation unit 400 (second effect operation unit 400A), and a sufficient amount of game balls stored in the lower plate 322 (volume of the lower plate 322) can be sufficiently secured. It is not necessary to play while worrying that the lower plate 322 is full of game balls, and the player can concentrate on the game, entertain the game, and suppress the decline in interest.

Further, since a part of the lower plate 322 wraps around behind the effect operation unit 400 (second effect operation unit 400A), when the player puts his / her hand into the lower plate 322 from the front, his / her fingertips are on the lower plate. It is possible to make it difficult to touch the rear wall of 322 (the front surface of the plate unit base 323), the lower plate cover 340, and the like. As a result, the player can be made to recognize that the stored amount of the game ball is sufficiently secured even by touch, and when the game ball is stored in the lower plate 322, the inside of the lower plate 322 is stored. Since it is possible to recognize that a large number of game balls are stored in the player, it is possible to give the player a sense of satisfaction, to entertain the game, and to suppress a decline in interest. Further, since the fingertips of the hands placed in the lower plate 322 do not easily touch the rear wall of the lower plate 322, the lower plate cover 340, etc., the player is given the same feeling as the lower plate in the conventional pachinko machine. Therefore, it is possible to reduce the feeling of discomfort to the player who is accustomed to the conventional pachinko machine, and it is possible to reassure the player and suppress the decline in the interest in the game.

Further, since the lower plate 322 is formed so as to become wider toward the back side (rear side), a sufficient storage amount of the game ball can be secured even if the front side is small. In other words, since the portion on the front end side of the lower plate 322 is made smaller, the lower plate 322 is made inconspicuous on the front surface of the plate unit cover 326 (the plate front lower decorative portion 326c) where the lower plate 322 is open. This makes it possible to make the effect operation unit 400 (second effect operation unit 400A) relatively conspicuous. Therefore, the effect operation unit 400 (second effect operation unit 400A) can be provided while sufficiently securing the storage amount of the game ball in the lower plate 322, and the appealing power to the player can be enhanced, and the player can be provided. It can be entertained and the decline in interest can be suppressed.

Further, since the side and the upper side of the portion of the lower plate 322 that wraps around behind the effect operation unit 400 (second effect operation unit 400A) is covered with the lower plate cover 340, the player can enter the lower plate 322. It is possible to prevent the fingertips and the like from touching the inner surface of the plate unit cover 326 and the rear surface of the effect operation unit 400 (second effect operation unit 400A) and injuring the player when the hand is put in. You can play in a safe state. Further, the lower plate cover 340 can prevent the game ball from entering (spilling) from the lower plate 322 into the plate unit cover 326.

Further, since the effect operation unit 400 (second effect operation unit 400A) is arranged in the center of the front surface of the plate unit cover 326 in the left-right direction, the effect operation unit 400 (second effect operation unit 400A) can be moved from the player side. It can be a pachinko machine 1 with high appeal that can make it stand out more and attract the attention of the player, and the decoration by the production operation unit 400 (second production operation unit 400A) is easy to see. Then, it is possible to entertain the decoration and production of the production operation unit 400 (second production operation unit 400A) and suppress the deterioration of the player's interest.

Further, since the lower plate 322 is provided with a lower plate ball supply port 323c that can communicate with the upper plate 321 and a lower plate ball extraction hole 322a that can be opened and closed and penetrates up and down, it is a conventional pachinko machine. Since it has the same function as the lower plate in the above, a player who is accustomed to the conventional pachinko machine will not be confused about the function of the lower plate 322 when playing with this pachinko machine 1, and is the same as the conventional one. You can play the game with a sense of humor, and you can dedicate the player to the game and enjoy the game. Further, since the lower plate ball supply port 323c and the lower plate ball extraction hole 322a are arranged behind the effect operation unit 400 (second effect operation unit 400A), respectively, the lower plate ball supply port 323c and the lower plate ball supply port 323c are arranged when viewed from the front. The lower plate ball punching hole 322a is not visible from the player side, and the appearance of the pachinko machine 1 can be made clearer to improve the appearance, and the pachinko machine with high appeal that can strongly attract the attention of the player. It can be machine 1.

Further, according to the pachinko machine 1 of the present embodiment, the dish unit 320 that bulges forward under the through hole 111 of the door frame base 110 of the door frame base unit 100 facing the game area 5a in the door frame 3. Door frame side effect display device 460 that can present the effect to the player on the base unit 430 (second base unit 450) of the effect operation unit 400 (second effect operation unit 400A) attached to the plate unit cover 326. The operation button interior decoration member 432 (screen unit 470 of the door frame side second effect display device 460A) that decorates the outside of the operation button is attached, and the outside is surrounded by the outer periphery of the operation button interior decoration member 432 (screen unit 470). An operation button 410 having a transparent button lens 411 having a diameter of about 15 cm and a center bulging away from the base unit 430 (second base unit 450) (outward) is attached to the outer peripheral edge of the button lens 411. A tubular button base 413 that includes a first button decoration portion 411a, a second button decoration portion 411b, and a button frame 412, and projects from the button lens 411 side to the base unit 430 (second base unit 450) side. The operation button interior decoration member 432 (door frame side first) is provided through the gap between the button lens 411 and the operation button interior decoration member 432 (screen unit 470) by the first button decoration portion 411a, the button base 413, or the like. (Ii) It is possible to reduce the visibility of the outer edge and the back side (rear side) of the screen unit 470) of the effect display device 460A, and it is possible to improve the appearance of the operation button 410. Therefore, the appearance of the operation button 410, the decorative member 432 provided inside the operation button, the door frame side effect display device 460 (door frame side second effect display device 460A), and the like can be further improved, and the player's appearance can be further improved. It is possible to suppress the decline in interest.

Further, from the gap between the button lens 411 and the operation button internal decoration member 432 (screen unit 470) by the first button decoration portion 411a, the second button decoration portion 411b, the button frame 412, and the button base 413 of the operation button 410. Since it is possible to make it difficult to see the outer edge and the back side of the operation button interior decoration member 432 (screen unit 470), the button lens 411 and the operation button interior decoration member 432 (screen unit) can be increased by increasing the outer diameter of the operation button 410. Even if the gap between the lens and the 470) becomes relatively large, it can be well hidden by the first button decorative portion 411a or the like, so that the appearance of the large operation button with an outer diameter of about 15 cm can be prevented. The 410 (button lens 411) can be embodied without any problem. Therefore, since the operation button 410 and the door frame side effect display device 460 (door frame side second effect display device 460A) can be enlarged, the pachinko machine 1 can be made to stand out, and the player's interest is strong. It can be a pachinko machine 1 that attracts and has high appeal.

Further, since the button base 413 (main body portion 413a) protruding from the button lens 411 side to the base unit 430 (second base unit 450) side in a cylindrical shape is provided, the button lens 411 and the decorative member 432 inside the operation button ( When the gap between the screen units 470) is viewed from an angle, the inner wall of the button base 413 can shield the outer side of the operation button interior decorative member 432 (screen unit 470) to make it invisible. The appearance of the button 410 can be further improved.

Further, since the transparent button lens 411 has a three-dimensional shape (hemispherical shape) that bulges in the direction away from the base unit 430 (second base unit 450) (outward), it is near the outer peripheral edge of the button lens 411. The surface is a plane formed by the opening on the front end side of the button base 413 (a plane orthogonal to the direction in which the base unit 430 (second base unit 450) and the button lens 411 are lined up, that is, the advancing / retreating direction of the operation button 410. Since it is in a state of being inclined with respect to (a plane orthogonal to), the light is easily refracted when viewed from the player side. Therefore, the button lens 411 and the operation button inner decoration member 432 (screen unit 470) are combined with the first button decoration portion 411a, the second button decoration portion 411b, the button frame 412, and the button base 413 provided on the outer peripheral edge. ), The outer edge and the back side of the operation button inner decorative member 432 (screen unit 470) can be made difficult to see, and the above-mentioned action and effect can be surely achieved.

Further, since the button lens 411 is formed in a three-dimensional shape that bulges outward, the volume inside the operation button 410 becomes large, so that the operation button interior decorative member 432 and the door frame arranged inside the operation button 410 are formed. The side effect display device 460 (door frame side second effect display device 460A) can be made larger or easier to move, and the door frame side effect display device can entertain the player with the operation button 410. The 460 (door frame side second effect display device 460A) can be easily provided, and the pachinko machine 1 that can further entertain the player can be realized.

Further, since the button lens 411 is formed in a three-dimensional shape, the operation button 410 is given a design (decorative property). Therefore, the operation button 410 is made to stand out in the pachinko machine 1 and is of interest to the player. This pachinko machine 1 can be easily selected as the pachinko machine to be played.

Further, since the button frame 412 is opaque in the first button decoration portion 411a, the second button decoration portion 411b, and the button frame 412 provided on the outer peripheral edge of the button lens 411, the button is formed at the portion of the button frame 412. It is possible to reliably hide the back side of the operation button 410 and the operation button interior decoration member 432 (screen unit 470) from the gap between the lens 411 and the operation button interior decoration member 432 (screen unit 470). It is possible to improve the appearance by reducing the deterioration of the appearance of the button 410 and the like.

Further, a button frame 412 that is opaque from the outer peripheral end to the inside of the button lens 411 with a predetermined width over the entire circumference is provided, and the player cooperates with the first button decoration portion 411a and the second button decoration portion 411b. Since the gap between the main body 413a of the button base 413 and the decorative member 432 (screen unit 470) inside the operation button on the operation button 410 can be made difficult to see from the side, the gap between the main body 413a and the decorative member 432 inside the operation button (screen unit 470) can be made difficult to see. It is possible to increase the gap between the screen unit 470) and the screen unit 470 of the operation button 410 and the door frame side second effect display device 460A. Can be moved well.

Further, since the outer circumference of the button lens 411 is cylindrical, the operation button 410 can be easily moved smoothly because there is no directionality on the outer circumference as compared with the case where the button lens 411 has a polygonal shape. Therefore, even if the operation button 410 is enlarged, the pressing operation can be performed without any problem, and the player can surely enjoy the player participation type production using the operation button 410 and suppress the deterioration of the interest.

Further, since the operation button 410 is enlarged, it is easy to operate the operation button 410 without checking the position of the operation button 410 when the player participates in the operation. Since it is possible to easily touch and press the operation button 410, it is possible to make it easier for the player to participate in the player participation type production using the operation button 410, which entertains the player and reduces the interest. Can be suppressed.

Further, since the door frame side effect display device 460 (door frame side second effect display device 460A) is provided in the operation button 410, the player's interest can be operated by presenting the effect image according to the game state. It can be strongly attracted to the door frame side effect display device 460 (door frame side second effect display device 460A) in the button 410, by the door frame side effect display device 460 (door frame side second effect display device 460A). In addition to being able to entertain the production, it is possible to encourage the player to operate the operation button 410 by the production image and the light emission effect by the door frame side effect display device 460 (door frame side second effect display device 460A). , By actively participating the player in the player participation type production and entertaining it, it is possible to suppress the deterioration of the interest. In addition, by executing the production in the operation button 410, it is possible to make the player think that there is something good, and to raise the expectation for the game and suppress the decline in the interest. Can be done.

In addition, the door frame side effect display device 460 (door frame side second effect display device 460A) can be visually recognized through the transparent button lens 411 (the part inside the first button decoration portion 411a) of the large operation button 410. Therefore, it is possible to immediately make the player recognize that the operation button 410 of the pachinko machine 1 is clearly different from the operation button of the conventional pachinko machine, and the appeal to the player is high. The pachinko machine 1 can be used, and the player's operation button 410 and the door frame side effect display device 460 (door frame side second effect display device 460A) in the operation button 410 raise expectations for the effect. It is possible to suppress the deterioration of the player's interest.

Although the present invention has been described above with reference to preferred embodiments, the present invention is not limited to these embodiments, and as shown below, various improvements are made without departing from the gist of the present invention. And the design can be changed.

That is, in the above embodiment, the one applied to the pachinko machine 1 as a gaming machine is shown, but the present invention is not limited to this, and the pachinko machine or a gaming machine obtained by fusing a pachinko machine and a pachislot machine can be used. It may be applied, and even in this case, the same action and effect as described above can be obtained.

Further, in the above embodiment, in the button lens 411 of the operation button 410, the first button decoration portion 411a is formed on the inner peripheral side of the button frame 412, but the present invention is not limited to this. , The button lens 411 in which the first button decorative portion 411a is not formed may be used.

Further, in the above embodiment, an opaque button frame 412 is attached to the outer peripheral edge of the button lens 411 of the operation button 410, but the present invention is not limited to this, and the button is not attached to the button frame 412. A decorative portion for hiding the rear side may be formed on the portion of the lens 411 corresponding to the button frame 412 over the entire circumference.

Further, in the above embodiment, in the operation button 410, the base unit 430 (the first) so as to surround the entire outer periphery of the operation button inner decorative member 432 and the door frame side second effect display device 460A from the outer peripheral edge of the button lens 411. (2) A button base 413 (main body 413a) that protrudes in a cylindrical shape toward the base unit 450) is shown, but the present invention is not limited to this, and the decorative member 432 inside the operation button and the second effect on the door frame side are shown. At least one of the display devices 460A may project toward the base unit 430 (second base unit 450) so as to partially surround the entire circumference of the outer circumference of the display device 460A. The shape of the button base 413 may be a shape along the outer circumference of the button lens 411 or a shape not along the outer circumference of the button lens 411. The button base 413 may have at least decoration (flat decoration by sticking a sticker, printing, etc., three-dimensional decoration by unevenness such as relief) on the inner wall side. Further, the button base 413 may be translucent or opaque. Further, the button base 413 may be colored or may be colorless and transparent. When the button base 413 is transparent, it is desirable to perform light diffusion processing such as grain, slit, prism, etc. on at least one of the inner wall side and the outer wall side.

Further, in the above embodiment, an example is shown in which the lower plate 322 is recessed rearward only from the left outer portion of the effect operation unit 400 (second effect operation unit 400A) on the front surface of the plate unit cover 326. The lower plate is not limited to the above, but is recessed from the left and right sides of the production operation unit 400 (second production operation unit 400A) to the rear, and is connected to each other behind the production operation unit 400 (second production operation unit 400A). It may be set to 322, or it may be recessed rearward only from the right outer part of the production operation unit 400 (second production operation unit 400A), and a part of it wraps around behind the production operation unit 400 (second production operation unit 400A). You may want to be there.

Further, in the above embodiment, the shape (shape of the front end of the lower plate 322) of the portion (the shape of the front end of the lower plate 322) in which the lower plate 322 is recessed rearward on the front surface of the plate unit cover 326 is curved rearward. Although an example of denting in a shape is shown, the present invention is not limited to this, and the front surface may be dented in a polygonal prismatic shape or a polyhedron shape.

Further, in the above embodiment, an example in which the effect operation unit 400 (second effect operation unit 400A) is attached to the front surface of the plate unit cover 326 is shown, but the present invention is not limited to this, and "operation dial, touch panel, etc." "Equipped with an operating device", "Equipped with a rotating body with decoration on the surface", "Equipped with a decorative body with decoration and a movable device for moving the decorative body", "Game Characters, items, logos, and scenes (dioramas) that are three-dimensionally imitated with decorations that follow the concept of the machine "," Characters, items, logos that follow the concept of the game machine, and predetermined types A member such as a unit or a panel equipped with a "designed by a sticker, printing, etc.", etc. may be attached. Further, the member to be attached to the attachment space 326j (effect operation unit attachment portion 326a) does not have to be one, and a plurality (two or more) members may be attached. For example, separate members may be attached, such as a member attached to the upper half of the attachment space 326j and a member attached to the lower half of the attachment space 326j.

Further, in the above embodiment, the dish unit cover 326 is provided with the effect operation unit mounting portion 326a which is open forward for mounting the effect operation unit 400 (second effect operation unit 400A). A dish unit cover (for example, a panel-shaped cover portion) that does not have an opening (effect operation unit mounting portion 326a) for mounting the effect operation unit 400 (second effect operation unit 400A) is used. A space corresponding to the mounting space 326j (or the remaining space of the mounting space 326j) may be formed behind the dish unit cover. The front surface of such a dish unit cover may be decorated with characters, items, logos, predetermined patterns, etc. according to the concept of the gaming machine by stickers, printing, attachment of decorative members, etc. desirable.

Further, in the above embodiment, the effect operation unit 400 (second effect operation unit 400A) as the covering portion covers an area slightly larger than half of the storage area (storage area) of the game ball in the plan view of the lower plate 322. An example of covering the lower plate with difficulty in seeing from the front is shown, but the present invention is not limited to this, and an area of less than half of the storage area of the game ball in the lower plate 322 may be made difficult to see from the front. The entire plate 322 may be difficult to see from the front.

Further, in the above embodiment, the arc-shaped one in which the second button decorative portion 411b of the operation button 410 and the frame side lens 417 of the frame unit 415 are partially provided in the circumferential direction is shown. The second button decorative portion 411b and the frame side lens 417 may be an annular shape extending over the entire circumference.

Further, in the above embodiment, as the second button inner decoration portion 432g of the operation button inner decoration member 432 in the effect operation unit 400, a decoration having a plurality of concentric polygons centered on the center is shown. The present invention is not limited to this, and the decoration portion 432g inside the second button may be a decoration having a plurality of concentric circles (including an ellipse) centered on the center.

Further, in the above embodiment, the decorative member 432 inside the operation button, the door frame side effect display device 460, and the door frame side second effect arranged on the rear side through the transparent button lens 411 (front member) of the operation button 410. Although the rear member of the display device 460A or the like is shown so as to be always visible, the present invention is not limited to this, and at least one of the front member and the rear member arranged in the front and rear (or up and down) is subject to predetermined conditions. A configuration may be provided in which a variable light transmitting means is provided so that the rear side can be visually recognized by satisfying the above. Here, as the variable light transmitting means, "a magic mirror that makes the rear side visible due to the difference in brightness between the front side and the rear side" and "a liquid crystal film that is transparent by turning the power on / off". The rear side becomes visible because it becomes opaque or becomes opaque. " The front member and the rear member may be relatively movable or may not be relatively movable.

By providing the variable light transmitting means on at least one of the front member and the rear member, only the front member or the front member and the rear member can be visually recognized in a normal state. The decoration of the visible member can be shown to the player. Then, in a special state, by satisfying a predetermined condition, a rear member (a rear member or a member arranged behind the rear member) that cannot be seen in the normal state can be seen, and thus the front member can be seen. The member and the rear member, or the front member, the rear member, and the rear member of the rear member can show an overlapping decoration. Therefore, various decorations (decorative effects) can be shown to the player by using the front member and the rear member, the player can be less likely to get bored, and the player can be entertained. It is possible to suppress the decline in the interest of the.

More specifically, for example, when the front member is provided with a variable light transmitting means such as a magic mirror, in a normal state, the rear side of the front member is darkened to decorate only the front member. It can be visually recognized by the player. Then, when the space between the front member and the rear member or the rear side of the rear member is brightened by the light of a light emitting portion such as an LED, the satisfaction condition of the variable light transmitting means in the front member is satisfied, and the rear member is passed through the front member. The members can be visually recognized, and the player can see the decoration in which the decoration of the front member and the decoration of the rear member overlap.

Alternatively, when the front member is transparent and the rear member has a variable light transmitting means such as a magic mirror, the surface of the rear member can be seen through the front member under normal conditions, so that the decoration of the front member and the rear member can be seen. The decoration by the surface of the can be shown to the player. Then, when the rear side of the rear member is brightened by the light of a light emitting portion such as an LED, the condition for satisfying the variable light transmitting means in the rear member is satisfied, and the rear side can be visually recognized through the rear member, and the front member and the rear member can be visually recognized. Through the member, the member on the rear side of the rear member (for example, a display device, a decorative body such as a character) can be shown to the player.

Furthermore, when both the front member and the rear member are provided with variable light transmitting means such as a magic mirror, under normal conditions, only the decoration of the front member can be shown to the player, and the front member and the rear member When the space between the rear member and the rear member is brightened by the light of a light emitting portion such as an LED, the condition for satisfying the variable light transmitting means in the front member is satisfied, and the surface of the rear member can be visually recognized through the front member. The decoration with the rear member can be shown to the player. On the other hand, the rear side of the rear member is brightened by the light of the light emitting portion of the LED or the like (or, the space between the front member and the rear member and the rear side of the rear member are simultaneously brightened by the light of the light emitting portion of the LED or the like. ) And the conditions for satisfying the variable light transmitting means in the front member and the rear member, respectively, and the member on the rear side of the rear member (for example, a decorative body such as a display device or a character) is passed through the front member and the rear member. Can be shown to the player. As a result, the visible range can be changed in multiple stages by appropriately selecting the portion to be brightened by the light of the light emitting portion, and various decorations can be enjoyed by the player.

In the above specific example, since the variable light transmitting means is like a magic mirror, it looks like a mirror when the rear side is darkened. Therefore, on the surface of the front member or the rear member. The glittering decoration can be shown to the player.

Further, in the above specific example, the variable light transmitting means has been described as something like a magic mirror, but even if it is made like a liquid crystal film, the same effect can be obtained. Further, when a variable light transmitting means such as a liquid crystal film is used, light can be transmitted even in an opaque state (it has translucency), so that it can be transmitted between the front member and the rear member or after. If the rear side of the member can be brightened (or luminescent and decorated) by the light of a light emitting portion such as an LED, it is possible to show the player a wider variety of luminescent effects and decorative effects. ..

[7. Main control board, payout control board and peripheral control board]
Next, the control board that performs various controls of the pachinko machine 1 will be described with reference to FIGS. 69 to 74. FIG. 69 is a block diagram of a main control board, a payout control board, and a peripheral control board, FIG. 70 is a block diagram showing a continuation of FIG. 69, and FIG. 71 is a payout control board, a CR unit, and a frequency constituting the main board. FIG. 72 is a schematic diagram of various detection signals input / output to / from a game ball rental device connection terminal board that relays an electrical connection with a display board, FIG. 72 is a block diagram showing a continuation of FIG. 69, and FIG. 73 is a block diagram. It is a block diagram which shows the outline of a peripheral control MPU, and FIG. 74 is a block diagram around a VDP with a built-in sound source in a liquid crystal display control unit.

As its control configuration, the pachinko machine 1 includes a first control unit MCG that controls the game including the payout of prize balls in addition to the generation processing of the control power supply (for example, + 5V) as shown in FIG. A second control unit SCG that produces an effect related to the game being advanced by the first control unit MCG is provided.

More specifically, the pachinko machine 1 according to this embodiment employs a structure in which various controls are shared by preparing a plurality of substrates, and the main control substrate 1310 is used as the first control unit MCG. , The payout control board 951 and the power supply board 931 are provided, and the peripheral control board 1510 is provided as the second control unit SCG. Hereinafter, in explaining the control configuration of the pachinko machine 1 according to this embodiment, first, the first control unit MCG will be described in the order of the main control board 1310, the payout control board 951, and the power supply board 931. 2 The control unit SCG (peripheral control board 1510) will be described.

[7-1. Main control board]
Of the first control unit MCG, the main control board 1310 that controls the progress of the game controls the power-on processing executed at the time of power-on and a predetermined time elapses from the time of power-on, as shown in FIG. 69. Main control MPU1310a, which is a microprocessor with built-in various control programs such as the main control program that is executed after the game is executed and controls the game operation, a ROM that stores various commands, and a RAM that temporarily stores data, and various types. A main control input circuit 1310b for inputting a detection signal from a detection switch, a main control output circuit 1310c for outputting various signals to an external board, and a main control solenoid drive circuit 1310d for driving various solenoids. The program mainly includes a power failure monitoring circuit 1310e for monitoring signs of a power failure or momentary power failure of a predetermined voltage.

In addition to the built-in RAM (hereinafter, referred to as "main control built-in RAM") and the built-in ROM (hereinafter, referred to as "main control built-in ROM") of the main control MPU 1310a. It also has a built-in watchdog timer 1310af (hereinafter referred to as "main control built-in WDT 1310af") for monitoring its operation (system) and a function for preventing fraud.

Further, the main control MPU 1310a has a built-in non-volatile RAM. In this non-volatile RAM, a unique ID code with a unique code (a code that exists only once in the world) for identifying an individual by the manufacturer of the main control MPU 1310a is stored in advance. Since the ID code once attached is stored in the non-volatile RAM, it cannot be rewritten even by using an external device. The main control MPU 1310a can take out the ID code from the non-volatile RAM and refer to it.

Further, the main control MPU 1310a is a hard random number circuit 1310an (hereinafter, "built-in main control") that updates a big hit determination random number to be used for determining whether or not to generate a big hit game state among various random numbers related to the game by hardware. It is described as "hard random number circuit 1310an"). The main control built-in hard random number circuit 1310an generates a random number within a predetermined numerical range (in the present embodiment, a numerical range of a value 0 to a maximum value of 32767 is preset as a minimum value). The circuit is configured so that a predetermined value is not fixed as an initial value (that is, the initial value is not fixed), and a different value is set each time the main control MPU 1310a is reset. Specifically, when the main control MPU 1310a is reset, the main control built-in hard random number circuit 1310an first sets a clock signal (1 value within a predetermined numerical range) as an initial value and is input to the main control MPU 1310a. Based on the clock signal output from the main control crystal oscillator, which will be described later, other values within the predetermined numerical range are extracted one after another at high speed without duplication, and all the values within the predetermined numerical range are extracted. When this is completed, one value within the predetermined numerical range is extracted again, and the other values within the predetermined numerical range are extracted at high speed based on the clock signal input to the main control MPU 1310a without duplication. Extract one after another. The main control built-in hard random number circuit 1310an repeatedly performs such a high-speed lottery, and the main control MPU 1310a hits the value extracted by the main control built-in hard random number circuit 1310an at the time of acquiring the value from the main control built-in hard random number circuit 1310an. It is designed to be set as a random number for judgment.

The main control input circuit 1310b is not provided with a reset terminal for forcibly resetting the information in which the detection signals from the various detection switches are input to the various input terminals, and does not have a reset function. Therefore, the main control input circuit 1310b is configured as a circuit in which the system reset signal from the main control system reset described later is not input. That is, in the main control input circuit 1310b, the information based on the detection signals from the various detection switches input to the various input terminals is not reset by the main control system reset described later, so that the various signals based on the information are various. It is configured as a circuit that is output from the output terminal.

The main control output circuit 1310c is configured as an open collector output type in which the emitter terminal is grounded to ground (GND), and various signals for outputting various signals to an external board or the like are input to the various input terminals. The main control output circuit 1310ca with a reset function having a reset function provided with a reset terminal for forcibly resetting the provided information, and the main control output circuit 1310cc without a reset function having no reset function without a reset terminal. It is composed of and. The main control output circuit 1310ca with a reset function is configured as a circuit to which a system reset signal from the main control system reset described later is input. That is, the main control output circuit 1310ca with a reset function is reset by the main control system reset described later, so that the information for outputting various signals input to the various input terminals to an external board or the like is reset. It is configured as a circuit in which signals based on the above are not output at all from the various output terminals. On the other hand, the main control output circuit 1310cc without a reset function is configured as a circuit in which a system reset signal from a main control system reset, which will be described later, is not input. That is, the main control output circuit 1310cc without a reset function is converted to the information because the information for outputting various signals input to the various input terminals to an external board or the like is not reset by the main control system reset described later. It is configured as a circuit in which the based signal is output from its various output terminals.

The first start port sensor 4002 for detecting the game ball that has entered the first start port 2002, the second start port sensor 4004 for detecting the game ball that has entered the second start port 2004, and the general, as shown in FIG. The detection signal from the general winning opening sensor 4020 for detecting the game ball that has entered the winning opening 2001 and the signal from the power failure monitoring circuit 1310e are input terminals of the predetermined input port of the main control MPU 1310a via the main control input circuit 1310b. Is entered in. Further, the gate sensor 4003 for detecting the game ball that has passed through the gate portion 2003, the count sensor 4005 for detecting the game ball that has entered the large winning opening 2005, and the back unit 3000 shown in FIG. 9 The detection signal from the magnetic detection sensor 4024, which is attached and detects fraudulent activity using a magnet, is a predetermined input of the main control MPU 1310a via the panel relay board 4161 attached to the game board 5 and the main control input circuit 1310b. It is input to the input terminal of the port.

The main control MPU 1310a is a main control output circuit with a reset function by outputting a drive signal from the output terminal of the predetermined output port to the main control output circuit 1310ca with a reset function based on the detection signals from each of these switches. A control signal is output from 1310ca to the main control solenoid drive circuit 1310d, and a drive signal is output from the main control solenoid drive circuit 1310d to the start port solenoid 2107 and the attacker solenoid 2108 via the panel relay board 4161, or a predetermined output port thereof. By outputting a drive signal from the output terminal of the main control output circuit 1310ca with a reset function, the first special symbol display 1403 is transmitted from the main control output circuit 1310ca with a reset function to the panel relay board 4161 and the function display unit 1400. , 2nd special symbol indicator 1405, 1st special hold number indicator 1404, 2nd special hold number indicator 1406, normal symbol indicator 1402, status indicator 1401, and round indicator 1407. do.

Further, the main control MPU 1310a outputs various information (game information) related to the game from the output terminal of the predetermined output port to the main control output circuit 1310ca with a reset function, thereby controlling the payout from the main control output circuit 1310ca with a reset function. By outputting various information (game information) related to the game to the board 951 and outputting a signal (power failure clear signal) to the main control output circuit 1310ca with a reset function from the output terminal of the predetermined output port, the main with a reset function. A signal (power failure clear signal) is output from the control output circuit 1310ca to the power failure monitoring circuit 1310e.

In the present embodiment, the first start port sensor 4002, the second start port sensor 4004, the gate sensor 4003, and the count sensor 4005 use a non-contact type electromagnetic proximity switch. A contact type ON / OFF operation type mechanical switch is used for the general winning opening sensors 4020 and 4020. This is because the game ball frequently enters the first start port 2002 and the second start port 2004 and frequently passes through the gate portion 2003, so that the first start port sensor 4002, the second start port sensor 4004, and The detection of the game ball by the gate sensor 4003 also frequently occurs. Therefore, a proximity switch having a long life is used for the first start port sensor 4002, the second start port sensor 4004, and the gate sensor 4003. Further, when a big hit game state that is advantageous for the player occurs, the big winning opening 2005 is opened and the game ball frequently enters, so that the count sensor 4005 also frequently detects the game ball. Therefore, the count sensor 4005 also uses a proximity switch having a long life. On the other hand, the general winning opening sensors 4020 and 4020 do not frequently detect the general winning openings 2001 and 2,201 in which the game ball does not enter frequently. For this reason, mechanical switches having a shorter life than proximity switches are used for the general winning opening sensors 4020 and 4020.

Further, the main control MPU 1310a sends various commands related to payout as serial data from the output terminal of the predetermined serial output port to the main control output circuit 1310 cab without a reset function, thereby controlling the payout from the main control output circuit 1310 cc without a reset function. Various commands are transmitted as serial data to the board 951. When the payout control board 951 normally completes receiving various commands from the main control board 1310 as serial data, the payout control board 951 outputs a signal (payer ACK signal) to that effect to the main control board 1310. This signal (payer ACK signal) is input to the input terminal of a predetermined input port of the main control MPU 1310a via the main control input circuit 1310b.

Further, the main control MPU 1310a receives various commands related to the state of the pachinko machine 1 from the payout control board 951 as serial data in the main control input circuit 1310b, so that the main control input circuit 1310b inputs the predetermined serial input port. Receive various commands as serial data at the terminal. When the main control MPU 1310a normally receives various commands from the payout control board 951 as serial data, the main control MPU 1310a sends a signal (main payment ACK signal) to that effect from the output terminal of the predetermined output port to the main control output with a reset function. It is output to the circuit 1310ca, and a signal (main payment ACK signal) is output from the main control output circuit 1310ca with a reset function to the payout control board 951.

Further, the main control MPU 1310a transmits various commands related to the control of the game effect and various commands related to the state of the pachinko machine 1 as serial data from the output terminal of the predetermined serial output port to the main control output circuit 1310 bb without the reset function. , No reset function Various commands are transmitted as serial data from the main control output circuit 1310cc to the peripheral control board 1510.

Here, the main peripheral serial transmission port that transmits various commands as serial data to the peripheral control board 1510 will be briefly described. The main control MPU 1310a is configured around the main control CPU core 1310aa, and in addition to the main control built-in RAM, the main peripheral serial transmission port 1310ae, which is one of the main control various serial I / O ports, provides a bus 1310ah. The circuit is connected via (see FIG. 79). The main peripheral serial transmission port 1310ae transmits various commands to the peripheral control board 1510 as main peripheral serial data, and is mainly composed of a transmission shift register 1310aea, a transmission buffer register 1310aeb, a serial management unit 1310aec, and the like (FIG. FIG. 79). When the main control CPU core 1310aa sets a command in the transmission buffer register 1310aeb and outputs a transmission start signal to the serial management unit 1310aec, the serial management unit 1310aec outputs a command set in the transmission buffer register 1310aeb from the transmission buffer register 1310aeb. The data is transferred to the transmission shift register 1310aea and transmitted to the peripheral control board 1510 as main peripheral serial data. In the present embodiment, the transmission buffer register 1310aeb has 32 bytes as a storage capacity. The main control CPU core 1310aa continuously transmits a plurality of commands to the peripheral control board 1510 by outputting a transmission start signal to the serial management unit 1310aec after setting a plurality of commands in the transmission buffer register 1310aeb.

The power supply board 931 that supplies various voltages to the main control board 1310 is an electric double layer capacitor (hereinafter, simply "capacitor") as a backup power source for supplying power to the main control board 1310 for a predetermined time even when the power is cut off. BC0 (see FIG. 75) is provided. The capacitor BC0 allows the main control MPU 1310a to store various information in the main control built-in RAM in the power off processing even when the power is cut off. Various information stored in the main control built-in RAM is an operation signal (RAM clear signal) from the operation switch 954 when the operation switch 954 of the payout control board 951 described later is operated within a predetermined period from the time when the power is turned on. Is output from the payout control board 951 and is input to the input terminal of the predetermined input port of the main control MPU 1310a via the main control input circuit 1310b. It is supposed to be (cleared).

[7-2. Payout control board]
Of the first control unit MCG, the payout control board 951 that controls the payout of the game ball is, as shown in FIG. 70, the payout control unit 952 that performs various controls related to the payout, and the operation switch 954 that also has various functions. And an error LED display 860b that displays the status of the pachinko machine 1. Further, the operation switch 954 having a function as a RAM clear switch is described as a RAM built in the main control MPU 1310a (hereinafter, referred to as "main control built-in RAM") based on a detection signal output by the operation. .) Outputs a RAM clear signal for completely erasing the information stored in.

[7-2-1. Payout control unit]
As shown in FIG. 70, the payout control unit 952, which performs various controls related to payout, controls the power-on processing executed when the power is turned on, and pays out the game medium executed after a predetermined time has elapsed from the time when the power is turned on. Detection from the payout control MPU952a, which is a microprocessor with built-in various control programs including a payout control program that controls operation, a ROM that stores various commands, a RAM that temporarily stores data, and various detection switches related to payout. A payout control input circuit 952b to which signals are input, a payout control output circuit 952c for outputting various signals to an external board, etc., and a payout motor drive circuit for outputting a drive signal to the payout motor 834 of the payout device 830. It includes a CR unit input / output circuit 952e for exchanging various signals with the CR unit 6 and the 952d. The payout control MPU952a includes a built-in RAM (hereinafter, referred to as "payout control built-in RAM"), a built-in ROM thereof (hereinafter, referred to as "payout control built-in ROM"), and the like. It also has a built-in watchdog timer that monitors its operation (system) and a function to prevent fraud.

Under the control of the payout control MPU952a, the payout control program serializes various information (game information) related to the game from the main control board 1310 and various commands related to the payout as main payout serial data reception signals via the payout control input circuit 952b. Receive serial data with. Further, the payout control program generates a frame state 1 command (corresponding to the first error occurrence command) when an error occurs in the payout operation of the game ball, or operates the operation switch 954 as an error canceling unit. A 16-bit (2-byte) error release navigation command (corresponding to the first error release command) is created based on the signal (detection signal), and these error occurrence commands and error release navigation commands are transmitted to the payer serial data, respectively. As a signal, serial data is output to the receiving port of the main control board 1310 via the payout control I / O port 952b (command transmission means). Further, this payout control program pays out after a predetermined time has elapsed from the time when the power is turned on, that is, after the payout control unit main process is executed or the payout control unit timer interrupt process is executed and the payout control is started. When an error occurs in operation, the error is canceled based on the detection signal generated by the operation of the operation switch 954, and the output of warning information corresponding to the error is stopped (error cancellation control means).

Further, this payout control program outputs a door frame opening command (first door opening command) when a detection signal (door frame opening detection signal) accompanying the opening operation is input from the door frame opening switch 618. When the detection signal (main body frame opening detection signal) accompanying the opening operation is input from the main body frame opening switch 619, the main body frame opening command (first main body frame opening command) is output. On the other hand, this payout control program also issues a door frame closing command (first door frame closing command) when a detection signal (door frame closing detection signal) accompanying the closing operation is input from the door frame opening switch 618. At the same time, when the detection signal (main body frame closing detection signal) accompanying the closing operation is input from the main body frame opening switch 619, the main body frame closing command (first main body frame closing command) is output.

The payout control input circuit 952b is not provided with a reset terminal for forcibly resetting the information in which the detection signals from the various detection switches are input to the various input terminals, and does not have a reset function. Therefore, the payout control input circuit 952b is configured as a circuit in which the system reset signal from the payout control system reset described later is not input. That is, in the payout control input circuit 952b, the information based on the detection signals from the various detection switches input to the various input terminals is not reset by the payout control system reset described later, so that the various signals based on the information are various. It is configured as a circuit that is output from the output terminal.

The payout control output circuit 952c is configured as an open collector output type in which the emitter terminal is grounded to ground (GND), and various signals for outputting various signals to an external board or the like are input to the various input terminals. A payout control output circuit 952ca with a reset function having a reset function provided with a reset terminal for forcibly resetting the provided information, and a payout control output circuit 952cc without a reset function having no reset function without a reset terminal. It is composed of and. The payout control output circuit 952ca with a reset function is configured as a circuit to which a system reset signal from the payout control system reset described later is input. That is, the payout control output circuit 952ca with a reset function is reset by the payout control system reset described later, so that the information for outputting various signals input to the various input terminals to an external board or the like is reset. It is configured as a circuit in which signals based on the above are not output at all from the various output terminals. On the other hand, the payout control output circuit 952 kb without the reset function is configured as a circuit in which the system reset signal from the payout control system reset described later is not input. That is, the payout control output circuit 952 kb without the reset function is converted to the information because the information for outputting the various signals input to the various input terminals to the external board or the like is not reset by the payout control system reset described later. It is configured as a circuit in which the based signal is output from its various output terminals.

The ball-out detection sensor 827 that detects the ball-out of the game ball in the supply passage of the ball guidance unit 820 of the payout unit 800, and the payout detection sensor 842 that detects the game ball discharged from the payout ports 831b and 832b of the payout device 830. The detection signal from the blade rotation detection sensor 840 that detects the rotation of the payout blade 839 is input to the input terminal of the predetermined input port of the payout control MPU952a via the payout control input circuit 952b. In the description described later, the blade rotation detection sensor 840 will be simply referred to as a rotation detection sensor 840 in this specification.

Further, the detection signal from the door frame opening switch 618 for detecting the opening of the door frame 3 with respect to the main body frame 4 and the main body frame opening switch 619 for detecting the opening of the main body frame 4 with respect to the outer frame 2 is a payout control input circuit 952b. It is input to the input terminal of a predetermined input port of the payout control MPU952a via the payout control MPU952a.

Further, the detection signal from the full tank detection sensor 279 that detects whether or not the game ball in which the accommodation space of the foul cover unit 270 shown in FIG. 1 is full is full is first the handle relay terminal plate 315 and the power supply. It is input to the input terminal of a predetermined input port of the payout control MPU952a via the board 931 and the payout control input circuit 952b.

The payout control MPU952a receives various commands related to payout from the main control board 1310 via the payout control input circuit 952b at the input terminal of the serial input port in a serial data manner, or receives an operation signal (detection) of the operation switch 954. The signal) is output to the main control board 1310 via the payout control input circuit 952b. When the payout control MPU952a normally receives various commands from the main control board 1310 as serial data, the payout control MPU952a outputs a signal (payer ACK signal) to that effect from the output terminal of the predetermined output port with a reset function. By outputting to the circuit 952ca, a signal (payer ACK signal) is output from the payout control output circuit 952ca with a reset function to the main control board 1310.

Further, the payout control MPU952a transmits various commands for indicating the state of the pachinko machine 1 as serial data from the output terminal of the serial output port to the payout control output circuit 952 kb without a reset function, thereby performing payout control without a reset function. Various commands are transmitted as serial data from the output circuit 952 kb to the main control board 1310.
When the main control board 1310 normally completes receiving various commands from the payout control board 951 as serial data, the main control board 1310 outputs a signal (main payout ACK signal) to that effect to the payout control board 951. This signal (main payment ACK signal) is input to the input terminal of a predetermined input port of the payout control MPU952a via the payout control input circuit 952b.

Further, the payout control MPU952a outputs a drive signal for driving the payout motor 834 from the output terminal of the predetermined output port to the payout control output circuit 952ca with a reset function, whereby the payout control output circuit 952ca with a reset function is output. Outputs the drive signal from the payout motor drive circuit 952d to the payout motor drive circuit 952d, outputs the drive signal from the payout motor drive circuit 952d to the payout motor 834, and outputs the status of the pachinko machine 1 to the payout motor 834 from the output terminal of the predetermined output port. By outputting the drive signal to be displayed on the 860b to the payout control output circuit 952ca with the reset function, the drive signal is output from the payout control output circuit 952ca with the reset function to the error LED display 860b.

The error LED display 860b is a segment display, and displays alphanumeric characters, figures, and the like to display the status of the pachinko machine 1. The contents displayed and notified by the error LED display 860b are as follows. For example, when the figure "-" is displayed, it is notified that it is "normal", and when the number "0" is displayed, it means that it is "connection abnormality" (specifically, with the main control board 1310). Notifies that there is an abnormality in the electrical connection between the payout control board 951 and the board, and when the number "1" is displayed, it means that the ball is out (specifically, the ball is out). Based on the detection signal from the detection sensor 827, it notifies that there is no game ball in the supply passage of the payout device 830), and when the number "2" is displayed, it means that it is a "ball" (specifically). In When the number "3" is displayed, it means that there is a "payout detection sensor error" (specifically, there is a problem with the payout detection sensor 842 based on the detection signal from the payout detection sensor 842). Is occurring), and when the number "5" is displayed, it means that there is a "retry error" (specifically, the number of retries for the payout operation has reached a preset upper limit). When the number "6" is displayed, it means that the tank is "full" (specifically, the accommodation space of the foul cover unit 270 is stored based on the detection signal from the full tank detection sensor 279. Notifies that the game ball is full), and when the number "7" is displayed, it means that "CR is not connected" (electrical connection in any of the payout control board 951 to CR unit 6). Is disconnected), and when the number "9" is displayed, it means "in stock (there is a prize ball stock (unpaid))" (specifically, a game ball that has not been paid out yet). The number of balls has reached a predetermined number).

Further, the payout control MPU952a outputs the number of balls of the game ball actually paid out from the output terminal of the predetermined output port to the payout control output circuit 952ca with a reset function, whereby the payout control output circuit 952ca with a reset function is output. The number of game balls actually paid out is output to the external terminal plate 784 via a resistor (not shown).

Further, the payout control board 951 outputs various information (game information) related to the game from the main control board 1310 to the external terminal board 784 via a resistor (not shown). The external terminal plate 784 is provided with a plurality of photocouplers (which are configured by incorporating an infrared LED and a photo IC) (not shown), and the amusement park (hall) is provided through the plurality of photocouplers. ), The number of game balls and various other information (game information, error details related to the payout operation of the game balls, or the fact that there was an error) are transmitted to the hall computer installed in).
The external terminal plate 784 and the hall computer are electrically insulated by a plurality of photocouplers, and an abnormal voltage is applied to the hall computer via the external terminal plate 784 of the pachinko machine 1 to perform a hall. The computer does not malfunction or break down, and the main control board 1310 that advances the game from the hall computer via the external terminal plate 784 of the pachinko machine 1 and the payout control board 951 that controls the payout, etc. An abnormal voltage is applied to prevent malfunction or failure. The hall computer monitors the player's game by grasping the number of game balls paid out by the pachinko machine 1 and the game information of the pachinko machine 1.

The ball lending request signal for the game ball from the ball lending button 328 and the return request signal for the prepaid card from the return button 329 are, first, the frequency display board 365, the main door relay terminal board 880, and the game ball lending device connection terminal board. It is designed to be input to the CR unit 6 via 869. The CR unit 6 serially transmits a signal specifying the number of game balls to be rented according to the ball lending request signal to the payout control board 951 via the game ball lending device connection terminal plate 869, and this signal is the CR unit. It is input to the input terminal of a predetermined input port of the payout control MPU952a via the input / output circuit 952e. Further, the CR unit 6 updates the remaining amount of the prepaid card inserted according to the number of balls of the rented game ball, and sends a signal for displaying the remaining amount on the ball lending display unit 330. It is output to the equal rental device connection terminal board 869, the main door relay terminal board 880, and the frequency display board 365, and this signal is input to the ball rental device return display unit 330. Further, in the CR unit lamp 365d adjacent to the ball rental display unit 330, the supply voltage from the CR unit 6 is input via the game ball rental device connection terminal plate 869 and the main door relay terminal plate 880. ing.

The power supply board 931 that supplies various voltages to the payout control board 951 includes a capacitor BC1 (see FIG. 75) as a backup power source for supplying power to the payout control board 951 for a predetermined time even when the power supply is cut off. There is. With the capacitor BC1, the payout control MPU952a can store various information in the payout control built-in RAM (payout storage unit) in the power off processing even when the power is cut off. When the operation switch 954 is operated within a predetermined period from the time when the power is turned on, the various information stored in the payout control built-in RAM is sent to the predetermined payout control MPU952a via the payout control input circuit 952b. The payout control MPU952a, which is input to the input terminal of the input port, determines as a RAM clear signal for completely erasing the information stored in the payout control built-in RAM, and with this as an opportunity, the payout control MPU952a uses the payout control built-in RAM. It is designed to be completely erased (cleared). This operation signal (RAM clear signal) is also output to the payout control output circuit 952 kb without the reset function, and is also output to the main control board 1310 from the payout control output circuit 952 cc without the reset function.

[7-2-2. Exchange of various signals with the terminal board for renting game balls, etc.]
Here, the exchange of various signals between the payout control unit 952 and the CR unit 6 and the exchange of various signals between the CR unit 6 and the frequency display board 365 will be described with reference to FIG. 71. As shown in FIG. 71, the game ball rental device connection terminal board 869 relays the electrical connection between the CR unit 6 and the payout control board 951 as well as the CR unit 6 and the frequency display board 365. (To be exact, the game ball rental device connection terminal board 869 is electrically connected to the frequency display board 365 via the main door relay terminal board 880. , The CR unit 6 and the game ball rental device connection terminal plate 869 are electrically connected, the game ball rental device connection terminal plate 869 and the main door relay terminal plate 880 are electrically connected, and the main door relay. The terminal board 880 and the frequency display board 365 are electrically connected). Between the boards of the CR unit 6 and the game ball rental device connection terminal board 869, between the boards of the game ball rental device connection terminal board 869 and the payout control board 951, the game ball rental device connection terminal board 869 and the main door relay The boards of the terminal board 880 and the boards of the game ball rental device connection terminal board 869 and the frequency display board 365 are electrically connected by each wiring (harness). Further, AC24V, which will be described later, from the power supply board 931 is supplied to the CR unit 6 via a game ball or the like rental device connection terminal plate 869. The CR unit 6 creates a predetermined voltage VL (in this embodiment, DC + 12V (hereinafter referred to as “+ 12V”)) from the supplied AC24V by a built-in voltage creation circuit (not shown) together with the ground LG. , The game ball rental device connection terminal board 869 is supplied to the payout control board 951, while the game ball rental device connection terminal board 869 and the main door relay terminal board 880 are supplied to the frequency display board 365. ..

The frequency display board 365 has a push button switch 328 mounted on the component surface at a position corresponding to the ball lending button 328, and a push button switch at a position corresponding to the return button 329 of the ball lending unit 360. The return button 329 is mounted, and the ball lending display unit 330, which is a segment display, is mounted at a position corresponding to the lending balance display unit 363 of the ball lending unit 360.

In the ball rental button 328 and the return button 329, the ground LG from the CR unit 6 is electrically connected via the game ball rental device connection terminal plate 869 and the main door relay terminal plate 880. When the ball lending button 328 is pressed, the ball lending button 328 is switched on (ON), and the ball lending operation signal TDS from the ball lending button 328 is the main door relay terminal board 880 and the game. It is designed to be input to the CR unit 6 via the ball rental device connection terminal plate 869. When the return button 329 is pressed, the return button 329 is switched on (ON), and the return operation signal RES from the return button 329 is connected to the main door relay terminal board 880 and the game ball rental device. It is designed to be input to the CR unit 6 via the terminal plate 869.

The ball return display unit 330 has three segment indicators arranged side by side in a row, and one of these three-digit segment indicators is sequentially driven by one digit segment indicator, which is a so-called dynamic lighting method. The digit segment display is controlled to light up. By such lighting control, the ball lending / returning display unit 330 displays the remaining amount of the prepaid card inserted in the CR unit 6 or displays the error of the CR unit 6. The ball return display unit 330 includes digit signals DG0 to DG2 (three signals in total) for designating a one-digit segment display among the three-digit segment display, and the designated one-digit segment display. Segment drive signals SEG-A to SEG-G (7 signals in total) for designating the contents to be displayed by turning on the CR unit 6 are connected to the game ball rental device connection terminal plate 869 and the main door relay terminal. When input is made via the board 880, the 1-digit segment display is sequentially emitted according to the input digit signals DG0 to DG2 and the segment drive signals SEG-A to SEG-G, and these 3-digit segment display is displayed. The contents of the light emitted from the vessel can be visually recognized through the loan balance display unit 363.

A CR unit lamp 365d is mounted on the frequency display board 365 adjacent to the ball return display unit 330. In this CR unit lamp 365d, a predetermined voltage VL from the CR unit 6 is input via the game ball rental device connection terminal plate 869 and the main door relay terminal plate 880. The predetermined voltage VL is input to the CR unit 6 as a ball lending signal TDL through a current limiting resistor mounted on the game ball lending device connection terminal plate 869 via the CR unit lamp 365d. The CR unit 6 creates a predetermined voltage VL from AC24V supplied from the power supply board 931 by the built-in voltage creation circuit, and the ball lending button 328 and the return button 329 are in a valid ball lending state. Controls the logic of the ball lending signal TDL to make the CR unit lamp 365d emit light, and this light emission can be visually recognized through the loan remaining display unit 363. Further, the segment drive signals SEG-A to SEG-G are input to the ball rental display unit 330 through the current limiting resistor mounted on the game ball rental device connection terminal plate 869.

In the CR unit 6, the ball lending button 328 is pressed and the ball lending operation signal TDS from the ball lending button 328 is transmitted from the frequency display board 365 via the main door relay terminal board 880 and the game ball lending device connection terminal board 869. When input, BRDY, which is a ball lending request signal, is output to the payout control board 951 (payout control MPU952a) via the game ball or the like lending device connection terminal board 869. Then, the CR unit 6 is a one-time payout operation start request signal for paying out a predetermined number of loaned balls (in this embodiment, 25 balls, which corresponds to an amount of 100 yen) in one payout operation. The BRQ is output to the payout control board 951 (payout control MPU952a) via the game ball or the like rental device connection terminal board 869. The payout control board 951 (payout control MPU952a) into which BRDY and BRQ are input sends an EXS, which is a signal for notifying that one payout operation has started or ended, to a game ball or the like rental device connection terminal board 869. PRDY, which is a signal for outputting to the CR unit 6 or for notifying that the payout operation for paying out the ball rental is possible or impossible, is transmitted to the game ball rental device connection terminal board. It is output to the CR unit 6 via 869. For example, if the hall clerk or the like presets the CR unit 6 so that 200 yen worth of game balls are paid out when the ball lending button 328 is pressed, one payout operation is performed. Is to be performed twice in a row, and if 25 balls for 100 yen are paid out, 25 balls for 100 yen will be paid out in succession, and 50 balls for a total of 200 yen will be paid out. Become.

In the CR unit 6, the return button 329 is pressed and the return operation signal RES from the return button 329 is input from the frequency display board 365 via the main door relay terminal board 880 and the game ball rental device connection terminal board 869. The prepaid card is ejected from an insertion slot (not shown) and returned. The returned prepaid card stores the remaining amount obtained by subtracting the amount corresponding to the number of balls of the game ball paid out as a result of pressing the ball lending button 328.

[7-3. Power supply board 931]
Next, among the first control unit MCG, the power supply board 931 will be briefly described. The power supply board 931 includes a power supply switch 934 supplied from the pachinko island equipment and capable of electrically connecting or electrically shutting off AC 24 volts (AC24V), and a power supply control unit 935 that generates various power sources. A launch control unit 953 that controls launch by the launch solenoid 682 of the ball launching device 650 shown in FIG. 5 and ball feed control by the ball feed solenoid 255 of the ball feed unit 250 shown in FIG. 1 is provided.

[7-3-1. Power control unit]
The power supply control unit 935 improves the power factor of the power factor rectified by the synchronous rectifier circuit 935a and the synchronous rectifier circuit 935a in which the power switch 934 is operated to rectify the AC 24 volt (AC24V) supplied from the Pachinko Island facility. The power factor improvement circuit 935b, the smoothing circuit 935c for smoothing the power with the power factor improved by the power factor improvement circuit 935b, and various direct currents for supplying the power smoothed by the smoothing circuit 935c to various substrates. It includes a power supply creation circuit 935d for creating a power source.

[7-3-2. Launch control unit]
The launch control unit 953 that performs launch control by the launch solenoid 682 and ball feed control by the ball feed solenoid 255 mainly includes a launch control circuit 953a. The launch control circuit 953a includes an operation signal from the handle rotation detection sensor 307 that electrically adjusts the strength (launch intensity) of launching the game ball toward the game area 5a according to the rotation position of the handle 302, and a palm on the handle 302. A detection signal from the handle touch sensor 310 that detects whether or not the player is touching or a finger, and a single-shot button operation sensor 312 that detects whether or not the launch (launch) of the game ball is forcibly stopped by the player's will. Is input via the handle relay terminal plate 315. Further, in the launch control circuit 953a, when the CR unit 6 and the game ball rental device connection terminal plate 869 are electrically connected, a CR connection signal to that effect is input via the payout control board 951. ..

The launch control circuit 953a adjusts the drive current for launching (launching) the game ball toward the game area 5a based on the operation signal from the handle rotation detection sensor 307, and controls the output to the launch solenoid 682. On the other hand, by outputting a constant current to the ball feed solenoid 255 via the handle relay terminal plate 315, the ball feed member of the ball feed unit 250 receives one game ball stored in the upper plate 321 of the plate unit 320. The game ball received by the ball feeding member is controlled to be sent to the hitting ball launching device 650 side.

[7-4. Peripheral control board]
As shown in FIG. 72, the peripheral control board 1510 of the second control unit SCG performs effect control on the first control unit MCG based on various commands from the main control board 1310, and is shown in FIG. Peripheral control unit 1511 that exchanges control commands and various information (various data) with the effect display drive board 4450 that draws the display area of the door frame side effect display device 460 shown in 19, the game board side effect display device 1600 and the door. The liquid crystal display control unit 1512 that controls the drawing of the frame-side effect display device 460 while controlling the sounds such as music and sound effects flowing from the lower speaker 921 and the upper speaker 573, and the calendar information and hour / minute that specify the date. A real-time clock (hereinafter referred to as "RTC") control unit 4165 that holds time information that specifies seconds, and a knob that rotates the volume of music, sound effects, etc. that flow from the lower speaker 921 and upper speaker 573. It includes a volume adjusting volume 1510a that can be adjusted by operating it.

[7-4-1. Peripheral control unit]
As shown in FIG. 72, the peripheral control unit 1511 that performs the effect control controls the peripheral control MPU 1511a as a microprocessor and the power-on processing executed at the time of power-on, and after a predetermined time has elapsed from the time of power-on. Peripheral control ROM 1511b that stores various control programs such as sub-control programs that are executed and controls the production operation, various data, various control data, and various schedule data, and V from the sound source built-in VDP 1512a of the liquid crystal display control unit 1512 described later. Various information (for example, schedule data that defines a screen to be drawn on the game board side effect display device 1600, various LEDs, and other light emitting modes) that are continued across the peripheral control unit steady processing that is executed each time a blank signal is input. Peripheral control RAM 1511c that stores information for managing schedule data, etc., and various information that continues over days (for example, information for managing the history of jackpot game states, and special information). Peripheral control SRAM 1511d that stores information for managing production flags, and peripheral control external watch dock timer 1511e (hereinafter, "peripheral control external WDT1511e") for monitoring whether peripheral control MPU1511a is operating normally. ”) And.

The peripheral control RAM 1511c can hold the stored contents only for a time when a momentary power failure occurs and the power is immediately restored, and the power is cut off for a long time (when a long-time power interruption occurs). ), The peripheral control SRAM 1511d is supplied with backup power by a large-capacity electrolytic capacitor (hereinafter, referred to as "electrolytic capacitor for SRAM") provided on the power supply board 931. As a result, the stored contents can be retained for about 50 hours. Since the power supply board 931 is provided with the electrolytic capacitor for SRAM, when the game board 5 is removed from the pachinko machine 1, backup power is not supplied to the peripheral control SRAM 1511d. Therefore, the peripheral control SRAM 1511d stores the stored contents. You can no longer hold it and lose its contents.

The peripheral control external WDT1511e is a timer for monitoring whether the system of the peripheral control MPU1511a is out of control, and when the timer is up, it is reset by hardware. That is, when the peripheral control MPU1511a does not output a clear signal for clearing the timer of the peripheral control external WDT1511e to the peripheral control external WDT1511e within a certain period of time (until the timer starts up), the peripheral control MPU1511a is reset. When the peripheral control MPU1511a outputs a clear signal to the peripheral control external WDT1511e within a certain period of time, the timer count of the peripheral control external WDT1511e can be restarted, so that the reset is not applied.

The peripheral control MPU1511a has a plurality of parallel I / O ports, serial I / O ports, etc. built-in, and when various commands from the main control board 1310 are received, each decorative board of the game board 5 is based on these various commands. The game board side light emission data for outputting a lighting signal, a blinking signal, or a gradation lighting signal to a plurality of LEDs provided in the lamp is transmitted from a serial I / O port for a lamp drive board via a peripheral control output circuit (not shown). Serial for motor drive board to transmit to drive board 4170 and output drive signals to electric drive sources such as motors and solenoids that operate various movable bodies provided on game board 5. Door-side motor drive for transmitting from the I / O port to the motor drive board 4180 via the peripheral control output circuit, or for outputting a drive signal to an electrical drive source such as the dial drive motor 414 provided on the door frame 3. Data can be transmitted from the serial I / O port for the frame decoration drive amplifier board motor to the frame decoration drive amplifier board 194 via the peripheral control output circuit, the frame peripheral relay terminal board 868, and the peripheral door relay terminal board 882, or the door frame. Peripheral control output of light emission data on the door side for outputting lighting signals, blinking signals, or gradation lighting signals to a plurality of LEDs provided on each decorative board of 3 from the serial I / O port for frame decoration drive amplifier board LED. It is transmitted to the frame decoration drive amplifier board 194 via the circuit, the frame peripheral relay terminal plate 868, and the peripheral door relay terminal plate 882.

Various commands from the main control board 1310 are input to the main control board serial I / O port of the peripheral control MPU 1511a via a peripheral control input circuit (not shown). Further, from the detection signal from the rotation detection switch for detecting the rotation (rotation direction) of the dial operation unit 401 and the press detection switch for detecting the operation of the press operation unit 405 provided in the effect operation unit 400. The detection signal is serialized by a door-side serial transmission circuit (not shown) provided on the frame decoration drive amplifier board 194, and the serialized effect operation unit detection data is transmitted from the door-side serial transmission circuit to the peripheral door relay terminal board 882. , The frame peripheral relay terminal plate 868, and the peripheral control MPU 1511a are input to the serial I / O port for detecting the effect operation unit via the peripheral control input circuit.

Detection signals from various detection switches (for example, a photo sensor) for detecting the original position, movable position, etc. of various movable bodies provided on the game board 5 are on the game board side (not shown) provided on the motor drive board 4180. It is serialized by the serial transmission circuit, and this serialized movable body detection data is input from the game board side serial transmission circuit to the serial I / O port for the motor drive board of the peripheral control MPU1511a via the peripheral control input circuit. There is. The peripheral control MPU 1511a exchanges various data between the peripheral control board 1510 and the motor drive board 4180 by switching the input / output of the serial I / O port for the motor drive board.

The peripheral control MPU1511a has a built-in watchdog timer (hereinafter referred to as "peripheral control built-in WDT"), and its own system runs out of control by using the peripheral control built-in WDT and the peripheral control external WDT1511e together. I am diagnosing whether or not it is.

[7-4-1a. Peripheral control MPU]
Next, the peripheral control MPU1511a, which is a microcomputer, will be described. As shown in FIG. 73, the peripheral control MPU 1511a is centered on the peripheral control CPU core 1511aa, and has a peripheral control built-in RAM 1511ab, a peripheral control DMA (abbreviation of Direct Memory Access) controller 1511ac, a peripheral control bus controller 1511ad, and various peripheral control serial I. It is composed of a / O port 1511ae, a WDT1511af with built-in peripheral control, various parallel I / O ports for peripheral control 1511ag, a peripheral control analog / digital converter (hereinafter referred to as a peripheral control A / D converter) 1511ak, and the like.

Peripheral control CPU core 1511aa reads and writes various data to peripheral control built-in RAM 1511ab and peripheral control DMA controller 1511ac via the internal bus 1511ah, while peripheral control various serial I / O ports 1511ae, peripheral control built-in WDT1511af, Peripheral control Various data are read and written to the various parallel I / O ports 1511ag and the peripheral control A / D converter 1511ak via the internal bus 1511ah, the peripheral control bus controller 1511ad, and the peripheral bus 1511ai.

Further, the peripheral control CPU core 1511aa reads various data to the peripheral control ROM 1511b via the internal bus 1511ah, the peripheral control bus controller 1511ad, and the external bus 1511h, while reading the peripheral control RAM 1511c and the peripheral control SRAM 1511d. Then, various data are read and written via the internal bus 1511ah, the peripheral control bus controller 1511ad, and the external bus 1511h.

The peripheral control DMA controller 1511ac includes storage devices such as peripheral control built-in RAM 1511ab, peripheral control ROM 1511b, peripheral control RAM 1511c, and peripheral control SRAM 1511d, peripheral control various serial I / O ports 1511ae, peripheral control built-in WDT1511af, and peripheral control parallel I. It is a dedicated controller that independently transfers data between the / O port 1511ag and the input / output devices such as the peripheral control A / D converter 1511ak without going through the peripheral control CPU core 1511aa, and is DMA0. It has four channels, ~ DMA3.

Specifically, the peripheral control DMA controller 1511ac includes a storage device of the peripheral control built-in RAM 1511ab built in the peripheral control MPU 1511a, various peripheral control serial I / O ports 1511ae built in the peripheral control MPU 1511a, and a peripheral control built-in WDT1511af. , Peripheral control Various parallel I / O ports 1511ag, and input / output devices such as peripheral control A / D converter 1511ak, to perform data transfer independently without going through the peripheral control CPU core 1511aa. In addition, while reading and writing to the storage device of the RAM 1511ab with built-in peripheral control via the internal bus 1511ah, various serial I / O ports 1511ae for peripheral control, WDT1511af with built-in peripheral control, various parallel I / O ports 1511ag for peripheral control, and Reads and outputs to / from an input / output device such as a peripheral control A / D converter 1511ak via the peripheral control bus controller 1511ad and the peripheral bus 1511ai.

Further, the peripheral control DMA controller 1511ac includes a storage device such as a peripheral control ROM 1511b, a peripheral control RAM 1511c, and a peripheral control SRAM 1511d externally attached to the peripheral control MPU 1511a, and various peripheral control serial I / Os built in the peripheral control MPU 1511a. Between the O port 1511ae, the WDT1511af with built-in peripheral control, the various parallel I / O ports 1511ag for peripheral control, and the input / output devices such as the peripheral control A / D converter 1511ak, without going through the peripheral control CPU core 1511aa. In order to perform data transfer independently, while reading and outputting to storage devices such as the peripheral control ROM 1511b, the peripheral control RAM 1511c, and the peripheral control SRAM 1511d via the peripheral control bus controller 1511ad and the external bus 1511h, various peripheral controls are performed. For input / output devices such as serial I / O port 1511ae, WDT1511af with built-in peripheral control, various parallel I / O ports 1511ag for peripheral control, and peripheral control A / D converter 1511ak, via peripheral control bus controller 1511ad and peripheral bus 1511ai. Read and write.

The peripheral control bus controller 1511ad controls the internal bus 1511ah, the peripheral bus 1511ai, and the external bus 1511h to control the central processing device of the peripheral control MPU core 1511aa, the peripheral control built-in RAM 1511ab, the peripheral control ROM 1511b, the peripheral control RAM 1511c, and the peripheral control. Various devices such as a storage device such as SRAM 1511d, various peripheral control serial I / O ports 1511ae, WDT1511af with built-in peripheral control, various parallel I / O ports 1511ag for peripheral control, and input / output devices such as peripheral control A / D converter 1511ak. It is a dedicated controller that exchanges various data between them.

Peripheral control Various serial I / O ports 1511ae are a serial I / O port for a lamp drive board, a serial I / O port for a motor drive board, a serial I / O port for a frame decoration drive amplifier board motor, and a frame decoration drive amplifier board LED. It has a serial I / O port for, a serial I / O port for a frame decoration drive amplifier board motor, a serial I / O port for a main control board, and a serial I / O port for acquiring information on an effect operation unit.

The peripheral control built-in watchdog timer (WDT with built-in peripheral control) 1511af is a timer for monitoring whether the system of the peripheral control MPU 1511a is out of control. It has become. That is, the peripheral control CPU core 1511aa resets when the watchdog timer is started and does not output a clear signal for clearing the timer within a certain period of time (until the timer is up) to the peripheral control built-in WDT1511af. Will be required. When the peripheral control CPU core 1511aa starts the watchdog timer and outputs a clear signal to the peripheral control built-in WDT1511af within a certain period of time, the timer count can be restarted, so that the reset is not applied.

Peripheral control Various parallel I / O ports 1511ag output various latch signals such as game board side motor drive latch signal and door side motor drive light emission latch signal, as well as output clear signal to peripheral control external WDT1511e, and play games. Detection signals from various detection switches for detecting the original position, movable position, etc. of various movable bodies provided on the board 5 are serialized by a game board side serial transmission circuit provided on the motor drive board 4180, and this serialization is performed. A movable body information acquisition latch signal for receiving the converted movable body detection data from the game board side serial transmission circuit at the serial I / O port for the motor drive board of the peripheral control MPU1511a is output. This LED is a high-brightness white LED, and is a confirmation lamp for notifying that the occurrence of the big hit game state is confirmed. In the present embodiment, the path between the LED and the peripheral control parallel I / O ports 1511ag is shortened by adopting a configuration in which the LED and the peripheral control various parallel I / O ports 1511ag are directly connected electrically. It is possible to take noise countermeasures for LED lighting control, which has a heavy meaning in terms of games. The LED lighting control is executed in the peripheral control unit 1 ms timer interrupt process described later, and other LEDs and the like other than this LED are executed in the peripheral control unit steady process described later. It has become.

The peripheral control A / D converter 1511ak is electrically connected to the volume adjustment volume 1510a, and the resistance value is changed by rotating the knob portion of the volume adjustment volume 1510a, and the resistance at the rotation position of the knob portion is changed. The voltage divided by the value is converted from an analog value to a digital value and converted into a value in 1024 steps from a value to a value of 1023. In the present embodiment, the value of 1024 steps is divided into seven and managed as the substrate volumes 0 to 6. The board volume 0 is set to mute, the board volume 6 is set to the maximum volume, and the volume is set so as to increase from the board volume 0 to the board volume 6. The liquid crystal display control unit 1512 (VDP1512a with a built-in sound source, which will be described later) is controlled so that the volume is set to the board volumes 0 to 6, and music and sound effects are played from the lower speaker 921 and the upper speaker 573. In this way, music and sound effects are played from the lower speaker 921 and the upper speaker 573 by adjusting the volume based on the rotation operation of the knob portion.

In the present embodiment, in addition to music and sound effects, notification sounds for notifying the clerk of the hall of the occurrence of a malfunction of the pachinko machine 1 or fraudulent acts against the pachinko machine 1 and contents related to the game production are announced. (For example, the screen unfolded on the game board side effect display device 1600 is produced as more powerful, or it is announced that there is a high possibility that the game state will be favorable to the player). The notification sound also flows from the lower speaker 921 and the upper speaker 573, but the notification sound and the notification sound flow without depending on the volume adjustment based on the rotation operation of the knob part, from mute to the maximum volume. The volume of the sound effect can be adjusted by controlling the liquid crystal display control unit 1512 (VDP1512a with a built-in sound source, which will be described later) by a program. The volume adjusted by this program is different from the above-mentioned seven-stage board volume, and can smoothly change from mute to maximum volume. As a result, for example, even when a hall clerk or the like rotates the knob portion of the volume adjustment volume 1510a to set the volume low, the production of music, sound effects, etc. flowing from the lower speaker 921 and the upper speaker 573 is produced. Although the sound is reduced, the notification sound set to a high volume (maximum volume in the present embodiment) can be played when a problem occurs in the pachinko machine 1 or when the player is cheating. Therefore, even if the volume of the effect sound is reduced, it is possible to prevent the hall clerk and the like from being less likely to notice the occurrence of a problem or the cheating of the player due to the notification sound. In addition, based on the current board volume set by adjusting the volume based on the rotation operation of the knob, the volume at which the advertisement sound is played is reduced so as not to interfere with music and sound effects, while the advertisement sound is played. In addition to music and sound effects, there is a possibility that the screen unfolded by the game board side effect display device 1600 will be produced as more powerful, or the game will shift to a game state that is advantageous to the player. You can also announce that it is expensive.

[7-4-1b. Peripheral control ROM]
The peripheral control ROM 1511b stores in advance various control programs, various data, various control data, and various schedule data for controlling the peripheral control unit 1511, the liquid crystal display control unit 1512, the RTC control unit 4165, and the like. The various schedule data include screen generation schedule data for generating screens to be drawn on the game board side effect display device 1600 and door frame side effect display device 460, light emission mode generation schedule data for generating light emission modes of various LEDs, and music. There are sound generation schedule data for generating sound effects and sound effects, and electrical drive source schedule data for generating drive modes of electric drive sources such as motors and solenoids. The screen generation schedule data is configured by arranging screen data that defines the screen configuration in chronological order, and defines the order of screens to be drawn on the game board side effect display device 1600 and the door frame side effect display device 460. Has been done. The light emission mode generation schedule data is configured by arranging light emission data defining the light emission modes of various LEDs in a time series. The sound generation schedule data is composed of sound command data arranged in chronological order, and the order in which music and sound effects are played is defined. The sound command data includes an output channel number for instructing which output channel to use among a plurality of output channels in the built-in sound source of the sound source built-in VDP1512a of the liquid crystal display control unit 1512, which will be described later, and the sound source built-in VDP1512a. Of the plurality of tracks in the built-in sound source, a track number for instructing which track to incorporate sound data such as music and sound effects is specified. The electric drive source schedule data is composed of drive data of electric drive sources such as motors and solenoids arranged in chronological order, and the operation of electric drive sources such as motors and solenoids is specified.

Some of the control programs stored in the peripheral control ROM 1511b are directly read from the peripheral control ROM 1511b and executed, and some are copied to the various control program copy areas of the peripheral control RAM 1511c, which will be described later, when the power is turned on. Some of them are read out and executed. Further, various data, various control data, and various schedule data stored in the peripheral control ROM 1511b may be directly read from the peripheral control ROM 1511b, or when the power is turned on in the various control data copy areas of the peripheral control RAM 1511c described later. In some cases, the copy is read out.

Further, the peripheral control ROM 1511b is used as one of various control programs for controlling the RTC control unit 4165 to correct the brightness of the game board side effect display device 1600 according to the usage time of the game board side effect display device 1600. A brightness correction program is included. This brightness correction program corrects the decrease in brightness due to aging of the game board side effect display device 1600 when the backlight of the game board side effect display device 1600 is equipped with an LED type. , The date and time when the game board side effect display device 1600 was first turned on, the current date and time, the brightness setting information, etc. are acquired from the built-in RAM of the RTC control unit 4165, which will be described later, and the acquired brightness setting information is based on the correction information. To correct. This correction information is stored in advance in the peripheral control ROM 1511b. As will be described later, the brightness setting information includes brightness adjustment information for adjusting the brightness of the LED, which is the backlight of the game board side effect display device 1600, in 5% increments, and the current brightness setting information. The brightness of the LED that is the backlight of the game board side effect display device 1600 that has been set is included. For example, the date and time when the game board side effect display device 1600 is first turned on and the current date and time. Therefore, if six months have already passed since the date and time when the game board side effect display device 1600 was first turned on, the corresponding correction information (for example, 5%) is acquired from the peripheral control ROM 1511b, and the brightness is increased. When the brightness of the LED included in the setting information is 75% and the backlight of the game board side effect display device 1600 is turned on, the brightness is 80%, which is an additional 5% of the correction information acquired for this 75%. The brightness of the backlight of the game board side effect display device 1600 is adjusted and turned on based on the brightness adjustment information included in the brightness setting information, and the power is turned on from the date and time when the game board side effect display device 1600 is first turned on. If December has already passed, the corresponding correction information (for example, 10%) is acquired from the peripheral control ROM 1511b, and the brightness of the LED included in the brightness setting information is 75%, which is the effect display device on the game board side. When the 1600 backlight is turned on, the game board is based on the brightness adjustment information included in the brightness setting information so that the brightness is 85%, which is an additional 10% of the correction information acquired for this 75%. The brightness of the backlight of the side effect display device 1600 is adjusted and turned on.

[7-4-1c. Peripheral control RAM]
As shown in FIG. 73, the peripheral control RAM 1511c externally attached to the peripheral control MPU 1511a is a backup that exclusively stores various information that is updated by executing various control programs and is to be backed up. It is stored in the management target work area 1511ca, the backup first area 1511cc and the backup second area 1511cc, and the peripheral control ROM 1511b, which exclusively store a copy of various information stored in the backup management target work area 1511ca. Various control program copy areas 1511cd that exclusively store copies of various control programs, and various data, various control data, various schedule data, etc. stored in the peripheral control ROM 1511b are copied. Various control data copy areas 1511ce that are exclusively stored, and backup unmanaged work area 1511cf that exclusively stores information that is not backed up among various information that is updated when various control programs are executed. Is provided.

When the pachinko machine 1 is turned on (including when the power is restored due to a momentary power failure or power failure), a value of 0 is forcibly written to the backup unmanaged work area 1511cf and cleared to zero, while backup is performed. For the work area 1511ca to be managed, the first backup area 1511cc, and the second backup area 1511cc, when the power of the pachinko machine 1 is turned on, the power-on state command (see FIG. 89) from the main control board 1310 starts the RAM clear effect. (For example, it instructs the start of the effect when the operation switch 954 shown in FIG. 69 is operated within a predetermined period from the time when the power is turned on). Sometimes it is cleared to zero.

The backup management target work area 1511ca is a production information (1fr) which is various information updated in the peripheral control unit steady processing executed every time a V blank signal is input from the sound source built-in VDP 1512a of the liquid crystal display control unit 1512, which will be described later. ) Is backed up as Bank0 (1fr), which is exclusively stored as a backup target, and production information (1ms), which is various information updated in the peripheral control unit 1ms timer interrupt processing that is executed every time a 1ms timer interrupt, which will be described later, occurs. It is composed of Bank0 (1 ms), which is exclusively stored as an object. Here, to briefly explain the names of Bank0 (1fr) and Bank0 (1ms), "Bank" is a minimum management unit representing the size of a storage area for storing various information, and is referred to as "Bank". The following "0" means that it is a normally used storage area for storing various information updated by executing various control programs. That is, "Bank 0" means that the size of the storage area normally used is set as the minimum management unit. The "Bank1", "Bank2", "Bank3", and "Bank4" provided in the area extending from the backup first area 1511cc to the backup second area 1511cc, which will be described later, are the same storage areas as the "Bank0". It means that it has a size. As will be described later, when the sound source built-in VDP1512a outputs the drawing data for one screen (one frame) to the game board side effect display device 1600 and the door frame side effect display device 460, the peripheral control MPU1511a Since the V-blank signal indicating that the screen data from the above can be accepted is output to the peripheral control MPU1511a, in other words, one frame (1 frame) each time the V-blank signal is input. Since the peripheral control unit routine processing is executed for each, it is added to "Bank0", "Bank1", "Bank2", "Bank3", and "Bank4", respectively (effect information (1fr) and effects described later). The backup information (1fr) is also used with the same meaning). As described later, "(1ms)" is defined as "Bank0", "Bank1", "Bank2", "Bank3", since the peripheral control unit 1ms timer interrupt processing is executed every time a 1ms timer interrupt is generated. And "Bank 4", respectively (the effect information (1 ms) and the effect backup information (1 ms) described later are also used with the same meaning).

Bank0 (1fr) includes a lamp drive board side transmission data storage area 1511caa, a frame decoration drive amplifier board side LED transmission data storage area 1511cab, a reception command storage area 1511cac, an RTC information acquisition storage area 1511cad, and a schedule data storage area 1511cae. Etc. are provided. In the lamp drive board side transmission data storage area 1511caa, the game board side light emission data SL-DAT for outputting a lighting signal, a blinking signal, or a gradation lighting signal to a plurality of LEDs provided on each decorative board of the game board 5. Is a storage area in which is set, and in the transmission data storage area 1511cab for the LED on the frame decoration drive amplifier board side, a lighting signal, a blinking signal, or a gradation lighting for a plurality of LEDs provided on each decoration board of the door frame 3 is lit. It is a storage area in which the door-side light emission data STL-DAT for outputting a signal is set, and in the reception command storage area 1511cc, various commands transmitted from the main control board 1310 are received and the received various commands are stored. It is a storage area to be set, and the RTC information acquisition storage area 1511cad is a storage area in which various information acquired from the RTC control unit 4165 (RTC built-in RAM4165aa of RTC4165a described later) is set, and is stored in the schedule data storage area 1511cae. Is a storage area in which various schedule data corresponding to the received command is set based on the command received from the main control board 1310 (main control MPU 1310a). In the schedule data storage area 1511cae, various schedule data copied from the peripheral control ROM 1511b to the various control data copy areas 1511ce are read and set, and various schedule data are directly read from the peripheral control ROM 1511b. Some are set.

Bank0 (1 ms) includes a frame decoration drive amplifier board side motor transmission data storage area 1511 caf, a motor drive board side transmission data storage area 1511 cag, a movable body information acquisition storage area 1511 cah, and an effect operation unit information acquisition storage area 1511 cai, and A drawing state information acquisition storage area 1511 cap and the like are provided. In the transmission data storage area 1511 caf for the frame decoration drive amplifier board side motor, the door side motor drive data STM-DAT for outputting a drive signal to an electric drive source such as the dial drive motor 414 provided in the door frame 3 is provided. It is a storage area to be set, and is for outputting a drive signal to an electric drive source such as a motor or a solenoid for operating various movable bodies provided on the game board 5 in the transmission data storage area 1511bag on the motor drive board side. It is a storage area in which the motor drive data SM-DAT on the game board side is set, and the movable body information acquisition storage area 1511cah is provided in the game board 5 based on the detection signals from various detection switches provided in the game board 5. It is a storage area in which various information acquired such as the original position and the movable position of various movable bodies is set. In the effect operation unit information acquisition storage area 1511 kai, detection signals from various detection switches provided in the effect operation unit 400 are set. Dial created based on various information acquired based on the rotation (rotation direction) of the dial operation unit 401, the operation of the pressing operation unit 405, etc. (for example, detection signals from various detection switches provided in the effect operation unit 400). A storage area in which rotation (rotation direction) history information of the operation unit 401, operation history information of the pressing operation unit 405, etc.) is set. When drawing data from the sound source built-in VDP1512a of the control board 1510 is received and it is determined that the received drawing data is abnormal data, the peripheral control board 1510 and the peripheral control board 1510 are output based on the LOCKN signal to be output to convey that fact. This is a storage area in which various information obtained by acquiring the frequency of defects and the state of occurrence of defects during connection with the effect display drive board 4450 is set.

The lamp drive board side transmission data storage area 1511ca of Bank0 (1fr), the frame decoration drive amplifier board side LED transmission data storage area 1511cab, and the Bank0 (1ms) frame decoration drive amplifier board side motor transmission data storage area 1511caf. The transmission data storage area 1511bag on the motor drive board side is divided into two areas, a first area and a second area, respectively.

In the lamp drive board side transmission data storage area 1511caa, when the peripheral control unit steady processing described later is executed, the game board side light emission data SL-DAT is set in the first area of the lamp drive board side transmission data storage area 1511caa. When the next peripheral control unit steady processing is executed, the game board side light emission data SL-DAT is set in the second area of the lamp drive board side transmission data storage area 1511caa, and the peripheral control unit steady processing. Each time the process is executed, the game board side light emitting data SL-DAT is alternately set in the first area and the second area of the lamp drive board side transmission data storage area 1511caa. Peripheral control unit steady processing is executed. For example, when the game board side light emission data SL-DAT is set in the second area of the lamp drive board side transmission data storage area 1511caa in the current peripheral control unit steady processing, the previous peripheral area is executed. When the control unit steady-state processing is executed, the processing proceeds based on the game board side light emission data SL-DAT set in the first area of the lamp drive board side transmission data storage area 1511caa.

When the peripheral control unit steady processing is executed, the frame decoration drive amplifier board side LED transmission data storage area 1511cab is stored in the first area of the frame decoration drive amplifier board side LED transmission data storage area 1511cab. When -DAT is set and the next peripheral control unit steady processing is executed, the door side light emission data STL-DAT is set in the second area of the transmission data storage area 1511cab for the frame decoration drive amplifier board side LED. The door side emission data STL-DAT is alternately set in the first area and the second area of the frame decoration drive amplifier board side LED transmission data storage area 1511cab every time the peripheral control unit steady processing is executed. NS. Peripheral control unit steady processing is executed, for example, when the door side light emission data STL-DAT is set in the second area of the frame decoration drive amplifier board side LED transmission data storage area 1511cab in the peripheral control unit steady processing this time. When the previous peripheral control unit steady processing is executed, the processing proceeds based on the door side emission data STL-DAT set in the first area of the transmission data storage area 1511cab for the frame decoration drive amplifier board side LED. It has become.

The frame decoration drive amplifier board side motor transmission data storage area 1511caf is opened to the first area of the frame decoration drive amplifier board side motor transmission data storage area 1511caf when the peripheral control unit 1ms timer interrupt processing described later is executed. When the side motor drive data STM-DAT is set and the next peripheral control unit 1 ms timer interrupt process is executed, the door side motor drive data STM is stored in the second area of the frame decoration drive amplifier board side motor transmission data storage area 1511 caf. -DAT is set, and each time the peripheral control unit 1ms timer interrupt processing is executed, the door side is set in the first area and the second area of the transmission data storage area 1511caf for the motor on the frame decoration drive amplifier board side. Motor drive data STM-DAT is set alternately. Peripheral control unit 1ms timer interrupt processing is executed. For example, in the peripheral control unit 1ms timer interrupt processing this time, the door side motor drive data STM-DAT is stored in the second area of the frame decoration drive amplifier board side motor transmission data storage area 1511 caf. When set, the door side motor drive data STM-DAT set in the first area of the frame decoration drive amplifier board side motor transmission data storage area 1511 caf when the previous peripheral control unit 1 ms timer interrupt process was executed. The process is to proceed based on this.

When the peripheral control unit 1 ms timer interrupt process is executed, the motor drive board side transmission data storage area 1511 cag sets the game board side motor drive data SM-DAT in the first area of the motor drive board side transmission data storage area 1511 cag. Then, when the next peripheral control unit 1 ms timer interrupt process is executed, the game board side motor drive data SM-DAT is set in the second area of the motor drive board side transmission data storage area 1511 cag. Every time the peripheral control unit 1ms timer interrupt process is executed, the game board side motor drive data SM-DAT is alternately set in the first area and the second area of the motor drive board side transmission data storage area 1511 cag. Peripheral control unit 1ms timer interrupt processing is executed. For example, in the peripheral control unit 1ms timer interrupt processing this time, the game board side motor drive data SM-DAT is set in the second area of the motor drive board side transmission data storage area 1511 cag. Occasionally, when the previous peripheral control unit 1 ms timer interrupt process is executed, the process proceeds based on the game board side motor drive data SM-DAT set in the first area of the motor drive board side transmission data storage area 1511 cag. It has become like.

Next, the backup first area 1511cc and the backup second area 1511cc, which exclusively store the copy of the effect information which is various information stored in the backup management target work area 1511ca, will be described. In the backup first area 1511cc and the backup second area 1511cc, two pairs with two banks as one pair are managed as one page. The effect information (1fr), which is the content stored in Bank0 (1fr), which is a normally used storage area, is used as the effect backup information (1fr) every time the peripheral control unit steady processing is executed for each frame (1frame). The effect information (1 ms) is copied to the backup first area 1511 cc and the backup second area 1511 cc by the peripheral control DMA controller 1511ac at high speed and is stored in the normally used storage area Bank0 (1 ms). Is used as the effect backup information (1 ms) by the peripheral control DMA controller 1511ac in the backup first area 1511 cc and the backup second area 1511 cc each time the peripheral control unit 1 ms timer interrupt process is executed every time a 1 ms timer interrupt is generated. It is copied at high speed. Consistency of one page is determined by whether or not the contents of the two banks constituting the page match.

Specifically, in the backup first area 1511cc, Bank1 (1fr) and Bank2 (1fr) are set as one pair, and Bank1 (1ms) and Bank2 (1ms) are set as one pair, for a total of two pairs managed as one page. ing. The content stored in Bank0 (1fr), which is a normally used storage area, is stored in Bank1 (1fr) and Bank2 (1fr) every time the peripheral control unit routine processing is executed every frame (1frame). The memory that is copied at high speed by the controller 1511ac and stored in Bank0 (1ms), which is a normally used storage area, is stored every time a 1ms timer interrupt is generated and every time the peripheral control unit 1ms timer interrupt processing is executed. It is copied to Bank1 (1ms) and Bank2 (1ms) at high speed by the peripheral control DMA controller 1511ac, and the consistency of this page is determined by whether or not the contents of Bank1 (1fr) and Bank2 (1fr) match. This is performed depending on whether or not the contents of Bank 1 (1 ms) and Bank 2 (1 ms) match.

Further, in the backup second area 1511cc, Bank3 (1fr) and Bank4 (1fr) are set as one pair, and Bank3 (1ms) and Bank4 (1ms) are set as one pair, so that a total of two pairs are managed as one page. The content stored in Bank0 (1fr), which is a normally used storage area, is stored in Bank3 (1fr) and Bank4 (1fr) every time the peripheral control unit routine processing is executed every frame (1frame). The memory that is copied at high speed by the controller 1511ac and stored in Bank0 (1ms), which is a normally used storage area, is stored every time a 1ms timer interrupt is generated and every time the peripheral control unit 1ms timer interrupt processing is executed. It is copied to Bank3 (1ms) and Bank4 (1ms) at high speed by the peripheral control DMA controller 1511ac, and the consistency of this page is determined by whether or not the contents of Bank3 (1fr) and Bank4 (1fr) match. This is performed depending on whether or not the contents of Bank 3 (1 ms) and Bank 4 (1 ms) match.

As described above, in the present embodiment, the backup first area 1511cc has Bank1 (1fr) and Bank2 (1fr) as one pair, and Bank1 (1ms) and Bank2 (1ms) as one pair, for a total of two pairs. This is an area for managing as a page, and the backup second area 1511cc has a total of two pairs, with Bank3 (1fr) and Bank4 (1fr) as one pair, and Bank3 (1ms) and Bank4 (1ms) as one pair. This is an area for managing as one page. Different ID coats are stored at the beginning and end of each page, that is, at the beginning and end of the backup first area 1511cc and the backup second area 1511cc.

Further, in the present embodiment, the effect information (1fr), which is the content stored in the normally used storage area Bank0 (1fr), is used as the effect backup information (1fr) in the peripheral control unit for each frame (1frame). Every time the steady processing is executed, the contents are copied to the backup first area 1511cc and the backup second area 1511cc at high speed by the peripheral control DMA controller 1511ac, and are stored in Bank0 (1ms), which is a normally used storage area. The effect information (1 ms) is the effect backup information (1 ms), and each time a 1 ms timer interrupt is generated and each time the peripheral control unit 1 ms timer interrupt process is executed, the backup first area 1511 cc and the backup second area 1511 cc The peripheral control DMA controller 1511ac makes a high-speed copy, but the programs that execute the high-speed copy by these peripheral control DMA controllers 1511ac are standardized. That is, in the present embodiment, the effect information (1fr) and the effect information (1 ms) are managed by a common management method (execution of a common program).

[7-4-1d. Peripheral control SRAM]
The peripheral control SRAM 1511d externally attached to the peripheral control MPU 1511a includes a backup management target work area 1511da that exclusively stores the information to be backed up among various information updated by executing various control programs. A backup first area 1511db and a backup second area 1511dc are provided for exclusively storing a copy of various information stored in the backup management target work area 1511da. The content stored in the peripheral control SRAM 1511d is a power-on state command from the main control board 1310 when the pachinko machine 1 is turned on (including when the power is restored due to a momentary power failure or a power failure) (see FIG. 89). Indicates the start of the RAM clear effect and the gaming state (for example, the start of the effect when the operation switch 954 shown in FIG. 69 is operated within a predetermined period from the time when the power is turned on. Even at that time, it is not cleared to zero. This point is completely different from the above-mentioned point that the backup management target work area 1511ca, the backup first area 1511cc, and the backup second area 1511cc of the peripheral control RAM 1511c are cleared to zero. Further, when the dial operation unit 401 or the pressing operation unit 405 of the effect operation unit 400 is operated within a predetermined time after the power of the pachinko machine 1 is turned on, a screen for performing the setting mode is displayed on the game board side effect display device 1600. It is supposed to be done. By operating the dial operation unit 401 and the pressing operation unit 405 of the effect operation unit 400 according to the screen of this setting mode, the history of the occurrence of the jackpot game state for each content (item) stored in the peripheral control SRAM 1511d (for example, the history of the occurrence of the jackpot game state). Etc.) On the other hand, the contents (items) stored in the peripheral control RAM 1511c are not displayed at all and cannot be cleared in the setting mode. This point is also completely different between the peripheral control RAM 1511c and the peripheral control SRAM 1511d.

The backup management target work area 1511da is used for managing various information such as effect information (SRAM) (for example, information for managing the history of occurrence of a jackpot game state and a special effect flag), which is various information that is continued over days. It is composed of Bank0 (SRAM) that exclusively stores information) as a backup target. Here, briefly explaining the name of Bank0 (SRAM), as described above, "Bank" is a minimum management unit representing the size of a storage area for storing various information, and is referred to as "Bank". The following "0" means that it is a normally used storage area for storing various information updated by executing various control programs. That is, "Bank 0" means that the size of the storage area normally used is set as the minimum management unit. The "Bank1", "Bank2", "Bank3", and "Bank4" provided in the area extending from the backup first area 1511db to the backup second area 1511dc, which will be described later, are the same storage areas as the "Bank0". It means that it has a size. Since various information stored in the peripheral control SRAM 1511d externally attached to the peripheral control SRAM 1511a is backed up in "(SRAM)", "Bank0", "Bank1", "Bank2", and "Bank3" , And "Bank 4", respectively (the effect information (SRAM) and the effect backup information (SRAM) described later are also used with the same meaning).

Next, the backup first area 1511db and the backup second area 1511dc, which exclusively store the copy of the effect information (SRAM) which is various information stored in the backup management target work area 1511da, will be described. The backup first area 1511db and the backup second area 1511dc have two banks as one pair, and this one pair is managed as one page. The effect information (SRAM), which is the content stored in Bank0 (SRAM), which is a normally used storage area, is used as the effect backup information (SRAM) every time the peripheral control unit steady processing is executed for each frame (1 frame). In addition, it is copied to the backup first area 1511db and the backup second area 1511dc at high speed by the peripheral control DMA controller 1511ac. Consistency of one page is determined by whether or not the contents of the two banks constituting the page match.

Specifically, the backup first area 1511db has Bank1 (SRAM) and Bank2 (SRAM) as one pair, and this one pair is managed as one page. The contents stored in Bank0 (SRAM), which is a normally used storage area, are stored in Bank1 (SRAM) and Bank2 (SRAM) every time the peripheral control unit routine processing is executed for each frame (1 frame). It is copied at high speed by the controller 1511ac, and the consistency of this page is determined by whether or not the contents of Bank1 (SRAM) and Bank2 (SRAM) match.

Further, in the backup second area 1511dc, Bank3 (SRAM) and Bank4 (SRAM) are set as one pair, and this one pair is managed as one page. The contents stored in Bank0 (SRAM), which is a normally used storage area, are stored in Bank3 (SRAM) and Bank4 (SRAM) every time the peripheral control unit routine processing is executed for each frame (1 frame). It is copied at high speed by the controller 1511ac, and the consistency of this page is determined by whether or not the contents of Bank3 (SRAM) and Bank4 (SRAM) match.

As described above, in the present embodiment, the backup first area 1511db is an area for managing Bank1 (SRAM) and Bank2 (SRAM) as one pair, and managing this one pair as one page, and the backup second area. 1511dc is an area for managing Bank3 (SRAM) and Bank4 (SRAM) as one pair, and managing this one pair as one page. Different ID coats are stored at the beginning and end of each page, that is, at the beginning and end of the backup first area 1511db and the backup second area 1511dc.

[7-4-2. Liquid crystal display control unit]
The liquid crystal display control unit 1512 that controls the drawing of the game board side effect display device 1600 and the door frame side effect display device 460 and controls the sounds such as music and sound effects flowing from the lower speaker 921 and the upper speaker 573 is shown in FIG. 72. As described above, a sound source for controlling sounds such as music and sound effects is built-in (hereinafter, referred to as "built-in sound source"), and drawing of the game board side effect display device 1600 and the door frame side effect display device 460. VDP (abbreviation of Video Display Processor) 1512a with built-in sound source for control, various character data on the screen displayed on the game board side effect display device 1600 and door frame side effect display device 460, as well as various types of music, sound effects, etc. To the liquid crystal and sound control ROM 1512b that stores sound data, the audio data transmission IC 1512c that transmits serialized music, sound effects, etc. as audio data toward the frame decoration drive amplifier board 194, and the door frame side effect display device 460. The serialized drawing data is arranged near the lower side of the door frame side effect display device 460 attached to the right side of the plate unit 320 of the door frame 3 and heads toward the effect display drive board 4450 stored in the plate unit 320. LOCKN signal output request data, which is serial data output from the door frame side effect transmitter IC 1512d and the peripheral control MPU 1511a of the peripheral control unit 1511, is differentiated into a positive signal and a negative signal. And, in addition to the signal output from the door frame side effect transmitter IC 1512d, when the signal from the differential circuit 1512e is input and the signal from the differential circuit 1512e is input, this signal is input. On the other hand, when the signal from the differential circuit 1512e is not input, the forced switching circuit 1512f is connected so as to transmit the signal output from the door frame side effect transmitter IC 1512d. It has. In the liquid crystal and sound control ROM 1512b, as sprite data used for displaying a screen or an image described later, for example, ring-shaped image data used for displaying a ring-shaped display object (annular display object), and an operation menu background image described later can be displayed. Operation menu background image data to be used, selected display image data used to display at least one selected display object described later, tone adjustment background image data used to display a volume adjustment screen including a volume scale described later, volume adjustment icon described later. Volume setting icon used for display In addition to image data, etc., the position of each part on the back of the main body frame 4 can be visually recognized from the player's point of view. The service mode screen image data used for the above, the break timer setting screen image data used for displaying the break timer setting screen, and the break screen image data used for displaying the break screen are stored. The liquid crystal display and the sound control ROM 1512b also store the suggestion display object image data used for displaying the suggestion display object for prompting that the pressing operation unit 405 (operation unit) of the effect operation unit 400 should be operated.

Peripheral control MPU 1511a of peripheral control unit 1511 extracts screen generation schedule data corresponding to commands from the main control board 1310 from peripheral control ROM 1511b of peripheral control unit 1511 or various control data copy areas 1511ce of peripheral control RAM 1511c. The schedule data storage area of the peripheral control RAM 1511c is set to 1511cae, and the screen data at the beginning of the screen generation schedule data set in the schedule data storage area 1511cae is set to the peripheral control ROM 1511b of the peripheral control unit 1511 or various types of the peripheral control RAM 1511c. After extracting from the control data copy area 1511ce and outputting it to the sound source built-in VDP1512a, the first screen data according to the screen generation schedule data set in the schedule data storage area 1511cae triggered by the input of the V blank signal described later. The next screen data following is extracted from the peripheral control ROM 1511b of the peripheral control unit 1511 or various control data copy areas 1511ce of the peripheral control RAM 1511c and output to the sound source built-in VDP1512a. In this way, the peripheral control MPU 1511a displays the screen data arranged in time series in the screen generation schedule data according to the screen generation schedule data set in the schedule data storage area 1511cae, each time a V blank signal is input. The first screen data is output to the built-in sound source VDP1512a one by one.

Further, the peripheral control MPU 1511a transfers the sound command data at the head of the sound generation schedule data corresponding to the command from the main control board 1310 from the peripheral control ROM 1511b of the peripheral control unit 1511 or various control data copy areas 1511ce of the peripheral control RAM 1511c. The sound command data at the beginning of the sound generation schedule data extracted and set in the schedule data storage area of the peripheral control RAM 1511c is set to 1511cae, and the sound command data at the beginning of the sound generation schedule data set in the schedule data storage area 1511cae is set to the peripheral control ROM 1511b or the periphery of the peripheral control unit 1511. After extracting from various control data copy areas 1511ce of the control RAM 1511c and outputting to the sound source built-in VDP1512a, when a V blank signal is input, the head is headed according to the sound generation schedule data set in the schedule data storage area 1511cae. The next sound command data following the sound command data is extracted from the peripheral control ROM 1511b of the peripheral control unit 1511 or various control data copy areas 1511ce of the peripheral control RAM 1511c and output to the sound source built-in VDP 1512a. In this way, the peripheral control MPU 1511a inputs the sound command data arranged in time series into the sound generation schedule data according to the sound generation schedule data set in the schedule data storage area 1511cae, and the V blank signal is input. Each time, the first sound command data is output to the built-in sound source VDP1512a one by one.

[7-4-2a. VDP with built-in sound source]
When screen data is input from the peripheral control MPU1511a in addition to the above-mentioned built-in sound source, the sound source built-in VDP1512a is a game board from the liquid crystal and the sound control ROM 1512b as shown in FIG. 74 based on the input screen data. The side character data and the upper plate side character data are extracted to create sprite data, and drawing data for one screen (one frame) to be displayed on the game board side effect display device 1600 and the door frame side effect display device 460 is generated. It also has a built-in VRAM (hereinafter referred to as "built-in VRAM"). The sound source built-in VDP1512a outputs the drawing data for the game board side effect display device 1600 from the channel CH1 to the game board side effect display device 1600 among the drawing data generated on the built-in VRAM, and also for the door frame side effect display device 460. Drawing data is transmitted from channel CH2 via a peripheral control output circuit (not shown), a frame peripheral relay terminal plate 868, a peripheral door relay terminal plate 882, and an effect display drive board 4450 housed in the plate unit 320 of the door frame 3. By outputting (transmitting) to the door frame side effect display device 460, the game board side effect display device 1600 and the door frame side effect display device 460 are synchronized.

The drawing data output from the channel CH1 is output from the peripheral control board 1510 to the game board side effect display device 1600, whereas the drawing data output from the channel CH2 is relayed from the peripheral control board 1510 to the periphery of the frame. The effect display arranged in the terminal plate 868, the peripheral door relay terminal plate 882, and the lower side of the door frame side effect display device 460 attached to the right side of the plate unit 320 of the door frame 3 and stored in the plate unit 320. It is output (transmitted) to the door frame side effect display device 460 via the drive board 4450. As described above, the drawing data output from the channel CH1 is output from the peripheral control board 1510 to the game board side effect display device 1600, so that the peripheral control board 1510 and the game board side effect display device 1600 Although the length of the wiring required for the route from the channel CH1 to the game board side effect display device 1600 is short because they are attached to the game board 5, the drawing data output from the channel CH2 is peripheral as described above. Since the control board 1510 outputs the output to the door frame side effect display device 460 via the effect display drive board 4450 housed in the dish unit 320 of the door frame 3, the peripheral control board 1510 is attached to the game board 5. On the other hand, since the effect display drive board 4450 is housed in the dish unit 320 of the door frame 3, from the channel CH2 to the frame peripheral relay terminal board 868, the peripheral door relay terminal board 882, and the effect display drive board 4450. Since the length of the wiring required for the path is extremely longer than that of the channel CH1, it becomes extremely susceptible to noise. For this reason, for channel CH2 in which the length of the wiring for sending drawing data is extremely longer than that of channel CH1, "V-by-One (V-by-One) of THine Electronics Inc. is used in the door frame side effect transmitter IC1512d. By adopting a differential communication system called "registered trademark)", the system is less susceptible to noise.

The channel CH1 uses a serial interface called LVDS (Low Voltage Differential Signaling), whereas the channel CH2 uses an interface based on a parallel system. The drawing data output from channel CH2 is composed of three video signals, a red video signal, a green video signal, and a blue video signal, and three synchronization signals, a horizontal synchronization signal, a vertical synchronization signal, and a clock signal. It is serialized by the door frame side directing transmitter IC4610d, and is housed in a peripheral control output circuit (not shown), a frame peripheral relay terminal plate 868, a peripheral door relay terminal plate 882, and a dish unit 320 of the door frame 3. It is transmitted to the effect display drive board 4450. Then, the various serialized signals are restored to parallel signals on the effect display drive board 4450 and output to the door frame side effect display device 460.

In this way, when the peripheral control MPU1511a outputs the screen data for one screen (one frame) displayed on the game board side effect display device 1600 and the door frame side effect display device 460 to the sound source built-in VDP1512a, the sound source built-in VDP1512a becomes Character data is extracted from the liquid crystal and sound control ROM 1512b based on the input screen data, sprite data is created, and one screen is displayed on the game board side effect display device 1600 and the door frame side effect display device 460 (1). The drawing data for the frame) is generated on the built-in VRAM, and among the generated drawing data, the image data for the game board side effect display device 1600 is output from the channel CH1 to the game board side effect display device 1600, and the door frame side. Peripheral control output circuit (not shown), frame peripheral relay terminal board 868, peripheral door relay terminal board 882, and effect display drive board 4450 housed in the dish unit 320 of the door frame 3 from the channel CH2 to the image data for the effect display device 460. Is output (transmitted) to the door frame side effect display device 460 via. That is, the "screen data for one screen (one frame)" is the built-in VRAM containing the drawing data for one screen (one frame) to be displayed on the game board side effect display device 1600 and the door frame side effect display device 460. It is the data to be generated above.

Further, the VDP1512a with a built-in sound source outputs drawing data for one screen (one frame) from channel CH1 to the game board side effect display device 1600, and displays image data for the door frame side effect display device 460 from channel CH2. Output to the door frame side effect display device 460 via the peripheral control output circuit, the frame peripheral relay terminal plate 868, the peripheral door relay terminal plate 882, and the effect display drive board 4450 housed in the plate unit 320 of the door frame 3. When (transmitted), a V blank signal indicating that the screen data from the peripheral control MPU1511a can be accepted is output to the peripheral control MPU1511a. In the present embodiment, since the frame frequency (the number of screen updates per second) of the game board side effect display device 1600 and the door frame side effect display device 460 is set to approximately 30 fps per second, a V blank signal is output. The interval is about 33.3 ms (= 1000 ms ÷ 30 fps). Peripheral control MPU1511a executes peripheral control unit V blank signal interrupt processing, which will be described later, when the V blank signal is input. Here, the interval at which the V blank signal is output varies slightly depending on the liquid crystal size of the game board side effect display device 1600 and the door frame side effect display device 460. Further, even in the manufacturing lot of the peripheral control board 1510 on which the peripheral control MPU 1511a and the sound source built-in VDP1512a are mounted, the interval at which the V blank signal is output may change slightly.

The sound source built-in VDP1512a employs a frame buffer method. This "frame buffer method" means that the drawing data for one screen (one frame) to be drawn on the screens of the game board side effect display device 1600 and the door frame side effect display device 460 is held in the frame buffer (built-in VRAM). This is a method of outputting the drawing data for one screen (one frame) held in the frame buffer (built-in VRAM) to the game board side effect display device 1600 and the door frame side effect display device 460.

Further, in the sound source built-in VDP1512a, when the above-mentioned sound command data is input from the peripheral control MPU1511a based on the command from the main control board 1310, as shown in FIG. 74, the music stored in the liquid crystal and the sound control ROM 1512b. By extracting sound data such as and sound effects and controlling the built-in sound source, sound data such as music and sound effects are incorporated into the track according to the track number specified in the sound command data, and used according to the output channel number. The output channel is set, and the music, sound source, etc. flowing from the lower speaker 921 and the upper speaker 573 are serialized and output as audio data to the audio data transmission IC 1512c.

The sound command data also includes a sub-volume value for adjusting the volume of the track that incorporates the sound data, and multiple tracks in the built-in sound source of the built-in sound source VDP1512a include directing sounds such as music and sound effects. In addition to the sound data of the sound source and the sub-volume value that adjusts the volume, the sound data of the notification sound and its volume are adjusted to notify the clerk of the hall of the occurrence of a malfunction of the pachinko machine 1 or an illegal act against the pachinko machine 1. Subvolume value to be included. Specifically, for the production sound, the substrate volume adjusted by rotating the knob portion of the volume adjustment volume 1510a described above is set as the sub-volume value, and for the notification sound, the volume is adjusted. The maximum volume is set as the sub-volume value without being completely dependent on the volume adjustment based on the rotation operation of the knob portion of the volume 1510a. The sub-volume value of the effect sound can be adjusted by operating the dial operation unit 401 or the press operation unit 405 of the effect operation unit 400 to shift to the setting mode described later.

In addition, the sound designation data also includes a master volume value for adjusting the volume of the output channel, and the plurality of output channels in the built-in sound source of the sound source built-in VDP1512a include a plurality of sound source built-in VDP1512a built-in sound sources. Of the tracks, the sound data of the production sound incorporated in the track to be used and the sub-volume value for adjusting the volume of the production sound incorporated in the track to be used are combined, and the volume of the combined production sound is calculated. Actually, the sound is amplified to the master volume value which is the volume flowing from the lower speaker 921 and the upper speaker 573, and the amplified production sound is serialized and output as audio data to the audio data transmission IC 1512c.

In the present embodiment, the master volume value is set to a constant value, and when the volume of the combined effect sound is the maximum volume, it flows from the lower speaker 921 and the upper speaker 573 by being amplified to the master volume value. The volume is set to the maximum allowable volume. Specifically, for the effect sound, as a sub-volume value for adjusting the volume of the effect sound incorporated in the track to be used and the volume of the effect sound incorporated in the track to be used among a plurality of tracks. By synthesizing the board volume adjusted by rotating the knob of the set volume adjustment volume 1510a, the volume of the combined production sound is actually the volume that flows from the lower speaker 921 and the upper speaker 573. Amplifies to the master volume value, and serializes this amplified production sound and outputs it as audio data to the audio data transmission IC1512c. The maximum volume, which is completely independent of the volume adjustment based on the rotation operation of the knob of the volume adjustment volume 1510a set as the sub-volume value for adjusting the volume of the notification sound incorporated in the track to be used, is combined. The volume of the synthesized notification sound is actually amplified to the master volume value which is the volume flowing from the lower speaker 921 and the upper speaker 573, and the amplified notification sound is serialized and output to the audio data transmission IC 1512c as audio data. ..

Here, when the production sound is flowing from the lower speaker 921 and the upper speaker 573, it is easy to control the notification sound to be played in order to notify the clerk of the hall of the occurrence of a malfunction of the pachinko machine 1 or an illegal act against the pachinko machine 1. First, the sub-volume value of the track in which the effect sound is incorporated is forcibly set to mute, the sound data of the track in which this effect sound is incorporated, the sub-volume value set for the mute, and the notification. The sound data of the track in which the sound is incorporated and the sub-volume value in which the volume of the notification sound is set to the maximum volume are combined, and the volume of the combined production sound and the volume of the notification sound are actually displayed at the bottom. It is amplified to the master volume value that is the volume that flows from the speaker 921 and the upper speaker 573, and the amplified production sound and notification sound are serialized and output as audio data to the audio data transmission IC 1512c.

That is, as for the sound actually flowing from the lower speaker 921 and the upper speaker 573, only the maximum volume notification sound is played. At this time, since the effect sound is muted, the effect sound does not flow from the lower speaker 921 and the upper speaker 573, but the effect sound proceeds according to the above-mentioned sound generation schedule data. In the present embodiment, the notification sound flows from the lower speaker 921 and the upper speaker 573 for a predetermined period (for example, 90 seconds), and after the predetermined period elapses, the sound generation that has been forcibly set to mute is generated. The volume of the effect sound progressing according to the schedule data is set again as the sub-volume value of the board volume adjusted by rotating the knob portion of the volume adjustment volume 1510a (at this time, the dial of the effect operation unit 400). When the operation unit 401 or the pressing operation unit 405 is operated to shift to the setting mode and adjusted, the sub-volume value of the adjusted production sound is set), from the lower speaker 921 and the upper speaker 573. It is supposed to flow.

In this way, when the production sound is flowing from the lower speaker 921 and the upper speaker 573, and the notification sound is played to notify the clerk of the hall of the occurrence of a malfunction of the pachinko machine 1 or an illegal act against the pachinko machine 1, the notification sound is played. Although the volume of the production sound is muted and the notification sound flows from the lower speaker 921 and the upper speaker 573, the notification sound has elapsed for a predetermined period because the muted production sound is proceeding according to the sound generation schedule data. Then, when the lower speaker 921 and the upper speaker 573 stop flowing, the production sound does not start flowing again from the place where the notification sound starts to flow, but follows the sound generation schedule data until the time when the notification sound starts to flow and a predetermined period elapses. It starts to flow again from where it progressed.

[7-4-2b. LCD and sound control ROM]
As shown in FIG. 74, the liquid crystal and the sound control ROM 1512b are for drawing on the game board side character data for drawing in the display area of the game board side effect display device 1600 and in the display area of the door frame side effect display device 460. The upper plate side character data is stored in advance, and various sound data such as music, sound effects, notification sounds, and notification sounds are also stored in advance.

[7-4-2c. Audio data transmission IC]
When the serialized audio data from the VDP1512a with a built-in sound source is input, the audio data transmission IC 1512c uses the right side audio data as a positive signal and a negative signal as differential serial data, which is not shown in the peripheral control output circuit and relays around the frame. Peripheral control output circuit (not shown) that is transmitted to the frame decoration drive amplifier board 194 via the terminal plate 868 and the peripheral door relay terminal plate 882, and the left side audio data is used as a positive signal and a negative signal as differential serial data. , The frame peripheral relay terminal plate 868, and the peripheral door relay terminal plate 882 are transmitted to the frame decoration drive amplifier board 194. As a result, music, sound effects, and the like that match various effects are reproduced in stereo from the lower speaker 921 and the upper speaker 573.

The audio data transmission IC 1512c outputs audio data as serial data of a difference method between the left and right sides of the board extending from the peripheral control board 1510 to the frame decoration drive amplifier board 194, so that, for example, a positive signal of the left side audio data can be obtained. Even if the negative signal is affected by noise, when the noise component on the positive signal and the noise component on the negative signal are combined by the frame decoration drive amplifier board 194 into one left side audio data, Since the noise components are removed by canceling each other, noise countermeasures can be taken.

[7-4-2d. Door frame side production transmitter IC]
As shown in FIG. 74, drawing data output from channel CH2 of the sound source built-in VDP1512a is input to the door frame side effect transmitter IC1512d. As described above, the channel CH2 uses a parallel interface. The drawing data is composed of three video signals, a red video signal, a green video signal, and a blue video signal, and three synchronization signals, a horizontal synchronization signal, a vertical synchronization signal, and a clock signal, and is a red video signal. , The green video signal, and the blue video signal are each composed of 8 bits, for a total of 24 bits. In the present embodiment, the red video signal, the green video signal, and the blue video signal that can be input to the door frame side effect transmitter IC1512d are 6 bits each, for a total of 18 bits, so that the upper 6 bits of each video signal are the door frame. It is input to the side effect transmitter IC1512d. Since the lower 2 bits are extremely weak color information that is difficult for the human eye to distinguish, the lower 2 bits including the weak color information are invalidated although they are output from the sound source built-in VDP1512a.

Three video signals, red video signal, green video signal, and blue video signal, which are drawing data output from channel CH2 of VDP1512a with built-in sound source, and three sync signals, horizontal sync signal, vertical sync signal, and clock signal. When is input to the door frame side effect transmitter IC1512d, the door frame side effect transmitter IC1512d has three image signals, a red image signal, a green image signal, and a blue image signal, and a horizontal synchronization signal and a vertical synchronization signal. Three synchronous signals, a signal and a clock signal, are serialized into a differential serial signal (serial data) called "V-by-One (registered trademark)" of Zain Electronics Co., Ltd. with only a differential 1-pair cable. These various signals are transmitted from the peripheral control board 1510 to the frame peripheral relay terminal board 868, the peripheral door relay terminal board 882, and the effect display drive board 4450 housed in the dish unit 320 of the door frame 3.

As described above, since the drawing data output from the channel CH1 of the sound source built-in VDP1512a is output from the peripheral control board 1510 to the game board side effect display device 1600, the route from the channel CH1 to the game board side effect display device 1600. Although the wiring length required for (first path) is short, the drawing data output from the channel CH2 of the VDP1512a with a built-in sound source is obtained from the peripheral control board 1510, the frame peripheral relay terminal board 868, the peripheral door relay terminal board 882, and the door. Since it is output (transmitted) to the door frame side effect display device 460 via the effect display drive board 4450 housed in the plate unit 320 of the frame 3, the route from channel CH2 to the door frame side effect display device 460 (No. 1). Since the length of the wiring required for the second path) is extremely longer than the length of the wiring required for the first path, it becomes extremely susceptible to noise.

Specifically, since the door frame 3 is pivotally supported with respect to the main body frame 4 shown in FIG. 1, the opposite of the locking unit 700 shown in FIG. 5 along the open side of the main body frame 4. On the closed side, which is the side, for example, from the peripheral control board 1510 provided on the game board 5 mounted on the main body frame 4 to the effect display drive board 4450 housed in the dish unit 320 provided on the door frame 3, the main body frame 4 side. It is necessary to pass various wirings that electrically connect the various substrates provided and the various substrates provided on the door frame 3 side. However, on the closed side of the main body frame 4, in addition to the payout device 830, the game ball paid out by the payout device 830 can be guided to the upper plate 321 of the plate unit 320, and the upper plate 321 is the game ball. A full tank branch unit 770 that can branch and guide the paid-out game ball to the lower plate 322 side when the tank is full is arranged.
Further, on the lower side of the main body frame 4, the payout unit 800 shown in FIG. 5 in which the power supply board 931 and the like shown in FIG. 6 to which power is supplied from the pachinko island facility is unitized is arranged. In this way, the various wirings that electrically connect the various boards provided on the main body frame 4 side and the various boards provided on the door frame 3 side are drawn in the vicinity of the payout device 830, the full tank branch unit 770, the power supply board 931 and the like. In addition to the noise caused by driving the payout motor 834 provided in the payout device 830, the noise caused by electrostatic discharge from the game ball and the power supply line supplied from the pachinko island facility where the pachinko machine 1 is installed. It is in an environment that receives noise that has invaded the machine.

For this reason, for channel CH2 in which the length of the wiring for sending drawing data is extremely longer than that of channel CH1, the door frame side directing transmitter IC1512d provided in the peripheral control board 1510 is described by THine Electronics Inc. By adopting a differential type communication called "V-by-One (registered trademark)", the mechanism is less susceptible to noise. In the present embodiment, the door frame side effect transmitter IC1512d provided in the peripheral control board 1510, and the door frame side effect receiver ICSDIC0 described later in the effect display drive board 4450 housed in the dish unit 320 of the door frame 3 are used. As described above, a differential 1-pair cable is used as wiring for electrically connecting between the connections of the above, that is, between the transmitter and the receiver. However, this differential 1-pair cable has two wirings. Is not just a parallel wire provided in parallel, but a twisted pair cable. This twisted pair cable is a cable in which two wires are twisted together, and is also called a twisted pair wire.

Here, a case where a parallel wire is adopted as a differential paired cable that electrically connects the transmitter and the receiver will be briefly described. For channel CH2 of VDP1512a with built-in sound source, the length of the wiring for sending drawing data is extremely longer than that of channel CH1 of VDP1512a with built-in sound source. Even if the mechanism is less susceptible to noise by adopting the differential communication method called "V-by-One (registered trademark)" of Co., Ltd., the configuration with such hardware alone is due to the electrostatic discharge of the game ball. When the serial data on the parallel lines is affected by noise, noise that has entered the power supply line supplied from the Pachinko Island facility where the pachinko machine 1 is installed, etc., the effect display is stored in the dish unit 320 of the door frame 3. Since the noise is not canceled (removed) when the noise is received by the door frame side effect receiver ICSDIC0 provided in the drive board 4450, the serial data is received by the door frame side effect receiver ICSDIC0 while being affected. , The drawing data output from the channel CH2 of the VDP1512a with built-in sound source is received by the door frame side effect receiver ICSDIC0 as a disordered one different from the normal one, and in the display area of the door frame side effect display device 460, it looks like a so-called sandstorm. There is a problem that various images are displayed and it becomes impossible to recognize what kind of image it is.

Therefore, in the present embodiment, the door frame side provided in the peripheral control board 1510 is provided with respect to the channel CH2 of the sound source built-in VDP1512a in which the length of the wiring for sending the drawing data is extremely longer than the channel CH1 of the sound source built-in VDP1512a. The production transmitter IC1512d adopts a differential type communication called "V-by-One (registered trademark)" of Zain Electronics Co., Ltd. to make it less susceptible to noise, and in addition to such a hardware configuration. Therefore, even if the serial data by the differential method is affected by the noise that has entered the wiring, a twisted pair cable that can cancel (remove) the noise on the receiving side is electrically connected between the transmitter and the receiver. It was adopted as a differential 1-pair cable. As a result, even if the serial data in the twisted pair cable is affected by noise due to electrostatic discharge of the game ball, noise invading the power supply line supplied from the pachinko island facility where the pachinko machine 1 is installed, etc., the door frame Since the noise is canceled (removed) when the noise is received by the door frame side effect receiver ICSDIC0 provided in the effect display drive board 4450 housed in the plate unit 320 of 3, the channel of the sound source built-in VDP1512a The drawing data output from CH2 is reliably received by the door frame side effect receiver ICSDIC0 provided in the effect display drive board 4450 stored in the dish unit 320 of the door frame 3, and is output to the door frame side effect display device 460. By doing so, the door frame side effect display device 460 can reliably display the image generated by the sound source built-in VDP1512a of the liquid crystal display control unit 1512. By canceling (removing) the noise, it is possible to prevent an image such as a sandstorm that cannot be recognized at all from being displayed on the door frame side effect display device 460. Therefore, it is possible to suppress a decrease in the player's motivation to play. Therefore, it is possible to suppress a decrease in the player's willingness to play due to the influence of noise.

In the present embodiment, the door frame side effect transmitter IC1512d provided in the peripheral control board 1510 and the door frame side effect receiver ICSDIC0 provided in the effect display drive board 4450 housed in the dish unit 320 of the door frame 3 will be described later. And, that is, between the transmitter and the receiver, the frame peripheral relay terminal plate 868 and the peripheral door relay terminal plate 882 are interposed. This is because the main body frame 4 and the door frame 3 are not integrally configured, but a structure in which the door frame 3 is attached to the main body frame 4 after being assembled separately is adopted. After the work of attaching the door frame 3 to the door frame 3, various wirings such as harnesses and twist cables from various boards provided on the door frame 3 side are electrically connected to the peripheral door relay terminal plate 882 provided on the main body frame 4 side. As a result, various substrates provided on the main body frame 4 side and various substrates provided on the door frame 3 side can be electrically connected. With such a configuration, the door frame 3 is opened from the main body frame 4 to remove various wirings, and then the door frame 3 is removed from the main body frame 4, so that the main body frame 4 and the door frame 3 can be maintained. If the problem that has occurred in the door frame 3 cannot be resolved, another door frame 3'is attached to the main body frame 4 in place of the door frame 3 having the problem, and the door frame 3 is used. By electrically connecting various wirings from various boards provided on the'side to the peripheral door relay terminal plate 882 provided on the main body frame 4 side, various boards provided on the main body frame 4 side and various types provided on the door frame 3'side. It can be electrically connected to the substrate.

Further, in the present embodiment, as described above, the door frame side directing transmitter IC1512d provided in the peripheral control board 1510 employs differential communication called "V-by-One (registered trademark)" of Zain Electronics Co., Ltd. In addition to the hardware configuration, even if the serial data by the differential method is affected by the noise that has entered the wiring, the noise is canceled (removed) on the receiving side. A twisted pair cable that can be used is used as a differential 1-pair cable that electrically connects the transmitter and receiver. Specifically, between the boards of the peripheral control board 1510 and the frame peripheral relay terminal board 868, between the boards of the frame peripheral relay terminal board 868 and the peripheral door relay terminal board 882, and between the peripheral door relay terminal board 882 and the effect display drive. The boards with the board 4450 are electrically connected by twisted pair cables, whereas the power supply wiring and other wirings that transmit various signals are electrically connected by harnesses. As a result, in addition to the video transmission wiring pattern for transmitting the serial data by the differential method transmitted by the door frame side directing transmitter IC1512d, the frame peripheral relay terminal plate 868 and the peripheral door relay terminal plate 882 are added to the wiring pattern for video transmission. Wiring patterns for power supplies and other wiring patterns for various signals for transmitting various signals are mixed. Therefore, the above-mentioned video transmission wiring pattern is formed on the frame peripheral relay terminal plate 868 and the peripheral door relay terminal plate 882, respectively, separated by a predetermined dimension from the power supply wiring pattern and various signal wiring patterns. Since the path from the transmitter to the receiver straddles a plurality of relay terminal plates such as a frame peripheral relay terminal plate 868 and a peripheral door relay terminal plate 882, it is used for video transmission formed on these plurality of relay terminal plates. Between the input and output of the wiring pattern, there is a problem that a part of the signal for transmitting the serial data by the differential method transmitted by the door frame side effect transmitter IC1512d is reflected and becomes noise, or the output level of the signal is lowered. Occurs. Therefore, in the present embodiment, impedance matching is applied to the video transmission wiring patterns formed on these plurality of relay terminal plates.

Further, in the present embodiment, as described above, between the boards of the peripheral control board 1510 and the frame peripheral relay terminal board 868, between the boards of the frame peripheral relay terminal board 868 and the peripheral door relay terminal board 882, and the peripheral door relay. The terminal board 882 and the effect display drive board 4450 are electrically connected by a twist pair cable, whereas the power supply wiring and other wiring that transmits various signals are electrically connected by a harness. One of the twisted pair cables is red and the other is gray, and the harness that supplies power is red and the other wires are gray. .. The wiring for supplying power may be yellow instead of red.

[7-4-2e. Forced switching circuit, differential circuit]
The signal output from the door frame side effect transmitter IC 1512d is in the forced switching circuit 1512f, the peripheral control output circuit (not shown), the frame peripheral relay terminal plate 868, the peripheral door relay terminal plate 882, and the dish unit 320 of the door frame 3. It is designed to be transmitted to the effect display drive board 4450 to be housed. In this forced switching circuit 1512f, in addition to the signal output from the door frame side effect transmitter IC 1512d, the LOCKN signal output request data which is serial data output from the peripheral control MPU 1511a of the peripheral control unit 1511 of the peripheral control board 1510. Is input as a positive signal and a negative signal in the differential circuit 1512e. In this differential circuit 1512e, the LOCKN signal output request data is serialized into a differential type serial signal (serial data). This LOCKN signal output request data is used for a period during which the startup screen when the power of the pachinko machine 1 is turned on is displayed on the game board side effect display device 1600, and a demonstration by the game board side effect display device 1600 in a customer waiting state. During this period, the door frame side effect transmitter IC1512d provided in the peripheral control board 1510 and the door frame side effect receiver ICSDIC0 provided in the effect display drive board 4450 housed in the plate unit 320 of the door frame 3 , That is, it is transmitted as an operation confirmation request of the door frame side effect display device 460 in order to confirm whether or not a problem has occurred in the connection between the transmitter and the receiver. When two signals differentiated into a plus signal and a minus signal are input in the differential circuit 1512e, the forced switching circuit 1512f is circuit-connected so as to transmit these two signals, while being differential. When two signals differentiated into a plus signal and a minus signal are not input in the conversion circuit 1512e, the circuit is configured so as to transmit the signal output from the door frame side effect transmitter IC 1512d. Has been done. As a result, when two signals differentiated into a plus signal and a minus signal are input in the differential circuit 1512e, the two signals are connected in a circuit so as to transmit the two signals, so that the two signals are connected. , It is transmitted from the peripheral control board 1510 to the frame peripheral relay terminal board 868, the peripheral door relay terminal board 882, and the effect display drive board 4450 housed in the dish unit 320 of the door frame 3, while in the differential circuit 1512e. When two differential signals, a plus signal and a minus signal, are not input, the door frame side effect transmitter is connected so as to transmit the signal output from the door frame side effect transmitter IC1512d. The signal output from the IC 1512d is transmitted from the peripheral control board 1510 to the frame peripheral relay terminal board 868, the peripheral door relay terminal board 882, and the effect display drive board 4450 housed in the dish unit 320 of the door frame 3. Peripheral control MPU1511a is demonstrating by the game board side effect display device 1600 during the period when the start screen when the power of the pachinko machine 1 is turned on is displayed on the game board side effect display device 1600 and in the customer waiting state. During the period, the LOCKN signal output request data is transmitted toward the effect display drive board 4450 (actually, the differential circuit 1512e provided in the peripheral control board 1510) housed in the dish unit 320 of the door frame 3.

When the effect display drive board 4450 housed in the dish unit 320 of the door frame 3 receives the serial signal (serial data) from the peripheral control board 1510 by the door frame side effect receiver ICSDIC0 described later, various serialized effects are generated. It is mainly composed of a liquid crystal module circuit 4450V that restores a signal to a parallel signal and outputs it to the door frame side effect display device 460.

The door frame side effect receiver ICSDIC0 receives drawing data from the VDP1512a with a built-in sound source, and if it determines that the received drawing data is abnormal data, it transmits a LOCKN signal to that effect, which will be described later, to the peripheral door relay terminal board 882. , And output to the peripheral control board 1510 via the frame peripheral relay terminal plate 868. This LOCKN signal is input to the peripheral control MPU 1511a of the peripheral control unit 1511 of the peripheral control board 1510 via a peripheral control input circuit (not shown) of the peripheral control board 1510. Peripheral control MPU1511a controls the sound source built-in VDP1512a to generate an image for notifying that a predetermined condition is satisfied based on the input LOCKN signal, and outputs the image to the game board side effect display device 1600. It is displayed in the display area of the game board side effect display device 1600 and notified.

Further, when the door frame side effect receiver ICSDIC0 determines that the two received signals are the LOCKN signal output request data, the LOCKN signal described later is transmitted to the peripheral door relay terminal plate 882 and the frame peripheral relay terminal plate 868. It is output to the peripheral control board 1510 via. This LOCKN signal is input to the peripheral control MPU 1511a of the peripheral control unit 1511 of the peripheral control board 1510 via a peripheral control input circuit (not shown) of the peripheral control board 1510. As a result, the peripheral control MPU1511a considers that there is no problem in the connection between the transmitter and the receiver when the LOCKN signal is input as a response signal to the transmission of the LOCKN signal output request data, and the dish unit of the door frame 3 It can be determined that there is no problem with the effect display drive board 4450 housed in the 320, but when the LOCKN signal is not input, it is assumed that there is a problem with the connection between the transmitter and the receiver. It is determined that a problem has occurred in the effect display drive board 4450 housed in the plate unit 320 of the door frame 3, and a notification image (for example, "a problem has occurred in the upper plate side liquid crystal display device") is transmitted to that effect. (Please call a clerk. ”) Is output to the game board side production display device 1600 by controlling the VDP1512a with a built-in sound source, and a notification sound to that effect (for example,“ a problem has occurred in the upper plate side liquid crystal display device. ” By controlling the VDP1512a with a built-in sound source and outputting it to the audio data transmission IC1512c, a notification sound flows from the speaker provided in the door frame 3. As a result, the notification image displayed in the display area of the game board side effect display device 1600 and the notification sound repeatedly flowing from the speaker or the like provided on the door frame 3 can be used for notification. At this time, all the LEDs for light emitting decoration provided in the door frame 3 and the various LEDs mounted on the various decorative substrates provided in the game board 5 may be turned on.

[7-4-3. RTC control unit]
As shown in FIG. 72, the RTC control unit 4165 that holds the calendar information that specifies the date and the time information that specifies the hour, minute, and second is configured around the RTC4165a. The RTC4165a has a built-in RAM4165aa that holds calendar information and time information (hereinafter, referred to as "RTC built-in RAM4165aa"). The RTC4165a is supplied with power from a battery 4165b (a button battery is adopted in this embodiment) as a drive power source and a backup power source for the RTC built-in RAM4165aa. That is, the RTC4165a is not supplied with power from the peripheral control board 1510 (pachinko machine 1) at all, but is supplied with power from the battery 4165b independently of the peripheral control board 1510 (pachinko machine 1). As a result, even if the power of the pachinko machine 1 is cut off, the RTC4165a can update and hold the calendar information and the time information by the power supply from the battery 4165b.

The peripheral control MPU 1511a of the peripheral control unit 1511 acquires calendar information and time information from the RTC built-in RAM4165aa of the RTC4165a, sets them in the RTC information acquisition storage area 1511cad of the peripheral control RAM 1511c described above, and uses the acquired calendar information and time information as the peripheral control MPU1511a. Based on the effect, the game board side effect display device 1600 and the door frame side effect display device 460 can be used to develop the effect. As such an effect, for example, on December 25, the screen of the Christmas tree or reindeer is unfolded by the game board side effect display device 1600 and the door frame side effect display device 460, or on New Year's Day, the New Year countdown is performed. It can be mentioned that the screen to be executed is unfolded by the game board side effect display device 1600 and the door frame side effect display device 460. Calendar information and time information are set at the time of shipment from the factory.

In addition to the calendar information and the time information, the RTC built-in RAM4165aa stores and holds the LED brightness setting information when the backlight of the game board side effect display device 1600 is an LED type. There is. When the backlight of the game board side effect display device 1600 is an LED type, the peripheral control MPU1511a acquires the brightness setting information from the RTC built-in RAM4165aa and adjusts the brightness of the backlight by PWM control. .. The brightness setting information includes brightness adjustment information for adjusting the brightness of the LED, which is the backlight of the game board side effect display device 1600, in 5% increments, and the game currently set. The brightness of the LED, which is the backlight of the board-side effect display device 1600 and the door frame-side effect display device 460, is included.

Further, in addition to the calendar information, the time information and the brightness setting information, the RTC built-in RAM4165aa also stores the calendar information, the time information and the brightness setting information as the date and hour, minute and second information first stored in the RTC built-in RAM4165aa. The input date and time information is also stored.

When the backlight of the game board side effect display device 1600 and the door frame side effect display device 460 is a cold cathode tube type, the peripheral control MPU1511a can be turned on / off or only turned on. It is designed to do.

Various information such as calendar information, time information, brightness setting information, and input date / time information stored in the RTC built-in RAM4165aa are set in the manufacturing line of the game machine manufacturer. In the production line, for example, in order to perform various tests such as a display test of the game board side effect display device 1600, the year when the input date and time information was input on the production line as the date and time when the game board side effect display device 1600 was first turned on. It is set to the manufacturing date and time, which is the month, day, hour, minute, and second.

In this way, in addition to the calendar information and time information, the RTC built-in RAM4165aa has brightness setting information, input date and time information, etc. when the backlight of the game board side effect display device 1600 is an LED type. , Information that needs to be maintained can be stored and retained independently of the model information of the pachinko machine 1 (for example, the probability that a big hit game state occurs at a low probability or a high probability).

Further, the brightness setting information and the like stored and stored in the RTC built-in RAM4165aa may be too bright with the brightness of the backlight of the game board side effect display device 1600 set at the manufacturing date and time depending on the environment of the hall where the pachinko machine 1 is installed. , It may be too dark. Therefore, by operating the dial operation unit 401 and the pressing operation unit 405 of the effect operation unit 400, it is possible to shift to the setting mode and adjust the brightness of the backlight to a predetermined brightness. When the dial operation unit 401 or the pressing operation unit 405 of the effect operation unit 400 is operated within a predetermined time after the power of the pachinko machine 1 is turned on, the screen for performing the setting mode is displayed on the game board side effect display device 1600. In addition, if the dial operation unit 401 or the pressing operation unit 405 of the effect operation unit 400 is operated during the period during which the customer is waiting and the demonstration by the game board side effect display device 1600 is being performed, the setting mode is performed. Screen is displayed on the game board side effect display device 1600. By operating the dial operation unit 401 and the pressing operation unit 405 of the effect operation unit 400 according to the screen of this setting mode, the calendar information and the time information can be reset, and the brightness of the backlight of the game board side effect display device 1600 is desired. It can be adjusted to the brightness of. The desired brightness of the backlight of the adjusted game board side effect display device 1600 is overwritten (updated and stored) as the brightness of the LED stored in the brightness setting information.

In the setting mode, the peripheral control MPU1511a executes the above-mentioned luminance correction program to produce the game board side effect when the backlight of the game board side effect display device 1600 is an LED type. The decrease in brightness due to the aging of the display device 1600 is corrected. The peripheral control MPU1511a acquires input date and time information from the RTC built-in RAM4165aa of the RTC control unit 4165, specifies the date and time when the game board side effect display device 1600 is first turned on, and specifies the date and time as calendar information and time. The current date and time is specified by acquiring the time information that specifies the minutes and seconds, and the brightness of the LED that is the backlight of the game board side effect display device 1600 is adjusted in 5% increments from 100% to 70%. The brightness setting information having the brightness adjustment information for the purpose and the brightness of the LED which is the backlight of the game board side effect display device 1600 which is currently set is acquired. The acquired luminance setting information is corrected based on the correction information stored in advance in the peripheral control ROM 1511b.

For example, if six months have already passed from the date and time when the game board side effect display device 1600 was first turned on and the current date and time, and from the date and time when the game board side effect display device 1600 was first turned on. When the corresponding correction information (for example, 5%) is acquired from the peripheral control ROM 1511b and the brightness of the LED included in the brightness setting information is 75% and the backlight of the game board side effect display device 1600 is turned on, this 75%. The brightness of the backlight of the game board side effect display device 1600 is adjusted based on the brightness adjustment information included in the brightness setting information so that the brightness is 80%, which is an additional 5% of the correction information acquired for the above. When 12 months have already passed since the date and time when the power of the game board side effect display device 1600 was first turned on, the corresponding correction information (for example, 10%) is acquired from the peripheral control ROM 1511b. When the brightness of the LED included in the brightness setting information is 75% and the backlight of the game board side effect display device 1600 is turned on, the correction information acquired for this 75% is added by 10% to 85%. The brightness of the backlight of the game board side effect display device 1600 is adjusted and turned on based on the brightness adjustment information included in the brightness setting information so as to be the brightness.

The current date and time may be specified by directly acquiring the calendar information for specifying the date and the time information for specifying the hour, minute, and second from the RTC built-in RAM4165aa of the RTC control unit 4165. Current calendar information set in the calendar information storage unit and updated by the system of the peripheral control board 1510 in the RTC information acquisition storage area 1511cad of the peripheral control RAM 1511c in the current time information acquisition process of step S1002 in the control unit power-on processing. The current time information set in the time information storage unit and updated by the system of the peripheral control board 1510 may be acquired to specify the current date and time.

[834. Volume adjustment volume]
As described above, the volume adjusting volume 1510a can adjust the volume of music, sound effects, etc. flowing from the lower speaker 921 and the upper speaker 573 by rotating the knob portion. As described above, the volume adjustment volume 1510a has a variable resistance value when the knob portion is rotated, and an electrically connected peripheral control A / D converter 1511ak is used as the knob portion. The voltage divided by the resistance value at the rotation position is converted from an analog value to a digital value and converted into a value in 1024 steps from a value to a value of 1023. In the present embodiment, as described above, the value of 1024 steps is divided into seven and managed as the substrate volumes 0 to 6. The board volume 0 is set to mute, the board volume 6 is set to the maximum volume, and the volume is set so as to increase from the board volume 0 to the board volume 6. The liquid crystal display control unit 1512 (VDP1512a with a built-in sound source) is controlled so that the volume is set to the board volumes 0 to 6, and music and sound effects are played from the lower speaker 921 and the upper speaker 573.

In this way, music and sound effects are played from the lower speaker 921 and the upper speaker 573 by adjusting the volume based on the rotation operation of the knob portion. Further, in the present embodiment, as described above, in addition to the music and sound effects, a notification sound for notifying the clerk of the hall of the occurrence of a malfunction of the pachinko machine 1 or an illegal act against the pachinko machine 1 and a game production (For example, the screen unfolded on the game board side effect display device 1600 is produced as more powerful, or there is a high possibility that the game state will be favorable to the player. The notification sound for, etc.) also flows from the lower speaker 921 and the upper speaker 573, but the notification sound and the notification sound flow without depending on the volume adjustment based on the rotation operation of the knob, and the sound is muted. The volume from to the maximum volume can be adjusted by controlling the liquid crystal display control unit 1512 (VDP1512a with built-in sound source) by a program.

The volume adjusted by this program is different from the above-mentioned seven-stage board volume, and can smoothly change from mute to maximum volume. As a result, for example, even when a hall clerk or the like rotates the knob portion of the volume adjustment volume 1510a to set the volume low, the production of music, sound effects, etc. flowing from the lower speaker 921 and the upper speaker 573 is produced. Although the sound is reduced, the notification sound set to a high volume (maximum volume in the present embodiment) can be played when a problem occurs in the pachinko machine 1 or when the player is cheating. Therefore, even if the volume of the effect sound is reduced, it is possible to prevent the hall clerk and the like from being less likely to notice the occurrence of a problem or the cheating of the player due to the notification sound.

In addition, based on the current board volume set by adjusting the volume based on the rotation operation of the knob, the volume at which the advertising sound is played is reduced so as not to interfere with music and sound effects, while the advertising sound is played. In addition to music and sound effects, the screen unfolded by the game board side effect display device 1600 and the door frame side effect display device 460 can be produced as more powerful, which is advantageous for the player. It is also possible to announce that there is a high possibility of shifting to the gaming state.

In the present embodiment, in addition to adjusting the volume of music and sound effects by rotating the knob portion of the volume adjustment volume 1510a, the dial operation portion 401 of the production operation unit 400 and the dial operation unit 401 By operating the pressing operation unit 405, it is possible to shift to the setting mode and adjust the volume of music and sound effects. When the dial operation unit 401 or the pressing operation unit 405 of the effect operation unit 400 is operated within a predetermined time after the power of the pachinko machine 1 is turned on, the screen for performing the setting mode is displayed on the game board side effect display device 1600. In addition, if the dial operation unit 401 or the pressing operation unit 405 of the effect operation unit 400 is operated during the period during which the customer is waiting and the demonstration by the game board side effect display device 1600 is being performed, the setting mode is performed. Screen is displayed on the game board side effect display device 1600. The volume of music and sound effects can be adjusted to a desired volume by operating the dial operation unit 401 and the pressing operation unit 405 of the effect operation unit 400 according to the screen of this setting mode. Specifically, the peripheral control A / D converter 1511ak converts the voltage divided by the resistance value at the rotation position of the knob portion of the volume adjustment volume 1510a from an analog value to a digital value, and the converted value is obtained. Therefore, the value of the board volume can be increased or decreased by adding or subtracting a predetermined value according to the operation of the dial operation unit 401 or the pressing operation unit 405 of the effect operation unit 400. There is. This adjusted volume is set and updated as a sub-volume value for the track in which the sound data of the production sound such as music or sound effect is incorporated among the plurality of tracks in the built-in sound source of the built-in sound source VDP1512a. Although it is reflected in the adjustment of the volume of the above-mentioned notification sound and the notification sound, it is not reflected in the adjustment.

As described above, in the present embodiment, there are cases where the volume of music and sound effects is adjusted by directly rotating the knob portion of the volume adjusting volume 1510a, and cases where the dial operation unit 401 and the pressing operation unit 405 of the effect operation unit 400 are operated. There are two methods, one is to adjust the volume of music and sound effects by increasing or decreasing the value of the substrate volume by adding or subtracting a predetermined value according to the operation of. Since the volume adjusting volume 1510a is mounted on the peripheral control board 1510, it is necessary to make sure that the main body frame 4 is opened from the outer frame 2. Then, it is the clerk in the hall who can rotate the knob portion of the volume adjusting volume 1510a. However, at the volume adjusted by the clerk in the hall, the player may feel small and it may be difficult to hear the music or sound effect, or the player may feel loud and the music or sound effect may be noisy. Therefore, after the power of the pachinko machine 1 is turned on, within a predetermined time, the dial operation unit 401 and the pressing operation unit 405 of the effect operation unit 400 are operated, or the pachinko machine 1 is in a waiting state and a demonstration is performed by the game board side effect display device 1600. When the dial operation unit 401 or the pressing operation unit 405 of the effect operation unit 400 is operated within the period during which the effect is being performed, a screen for performing the setting mode is displayed on the game board side effect display device 1600. By operating the dial operation unit 401 and the pressing operation unit 405 of the effect operation unit 400 according to the screen of this setting mode, the volume of music and sound effects can be adjusted to a desired volume. As a result, the player can adjust the volume of the music or sound effect to a desired volume. Therefore, if the volume adjusted by the hall clerk feels low and it is difficult to hear the music or sound effect, the production operation unit 400 You can operate the dial operation unit 401 and the pressing operation unit 405 to increase the volume to the desired level, and if you feel the volume adjusted by the hall clerk is loud and the music or sound effects are noisy, the production operation unit The dial operation unit 401 and the pressing operation unit 405 of the 400 can be operated to reduce the volume to a desired level.

Further, in the present embodiment, when the state in which the pachinko machine 1 is not playing is continued for a predetermined time, the pachinko machine 1 is in the waiting state for customers, and the demonstration by the game board side effect display device 1600 is repeatedly performed (for example, 10 times). , The volume adjusted by the player who was sitting in front of the pachinko machine 1 and playing the game last time is canceled and the volume is initialized. In this volume initialization, the volume is adjusted by the hall clerk, that is, the volume adjusted by the hall clerk by directly rotating the knob portion of the volume adjusting volume 1510a. As a result, if the player who was sitting in front of the pachinko machine 1 last time feels that the volume adjusted is low and it is difficult to hear music or sound effects, he / she will be seated in the front of the pachinko machine 1 this time. The player who plays the game can operate the dial operation unit 401 and the pressing operation unit 405 of the effect operation unit 400 to increase the volume to a desired level, and last time, the player sits on the front of the pachinko machine 1 and plays the game. If the player who was playing the game feels loud and the music and sound effects are noisy, the player who sits in front of the pachinko machine 1 and plays the game will use the dial operation unit 401 of the production operation unit 400 or The pressing operation unit 405 can be operated to reduce the volume to a desired level.

[8. Power system]
Next, the power supply system of the pachinko machine 1 will be described with reference to FIGS. 75 and 76. FIG. 75 is a block diagram showing a power supply system of a pachinko machine, and FIG. 76 is a block diagram showing a continuation of FIG. 75. First, the power supply board 931 will be described, and then the power supply supplied to each control board and the like will be described. The ground (GND) of various boards and the ground (GND) of various terminal boards are electrically connected to the ground (GND) of the power supply board 931 and are the same ground (GND).

[8-1. Power supply board 931]
The power supply board 931 is electrically connected to the power supply cord, and the plug of the power supply cord is plugged into the power outlet of the pachinko island equipment. When the power switch 934 is operated, the electric power supplied from the pachinko island equipment is supplied to the power supply board 931, and the pachinko machine 1 can be turned on.

As shown in FIG. 75, the power supply board 931 includes a power supply control unit 935 and a launch control unit 953. The power supply control unit 935 is a circuit that creates various DC voltages from AC 24 volts (AC24V) supplied from the Pachinko Island facility and supplies backup power to the main control board 1310 and the payout control board 951. Section 953 is a circuit that drives and controls the launch solenoid 682 of the ball launching device 650 shown in FIG. 5 and the ball feed solenoid 255 of the ball feed unit 250 shown in FIG.

The power supply control unit 935 includes a synchronous rectifier circuit 935a, a power factor improvement circuit 935b, a smoothing circuit 935c, a power supply creation circuit 935d, and capacitors BC0 and BC1. The AC24V supplied from the pachinko island facility is supplied to the game ball rental device connection terminal plate 869 via the power supply board 931 and also to the synchronous rectifier circuit 935a. The synchronous commutator circuit 935a is supplied from the pachinko island facility, rectifies AC 24 volts (AC24V), and supplies the power factor improvement circuit 935b. The power factor improving circuit 935b improves the power factor of the rectified electric power to create DC + 37V (DC + 37V, hereinafter referred to as “+ 37V”) and supplies it to the smoothing circuit 935c. The smoothing circuit 935c removes the supplied + 37V ripple, smoothes the + 37V, and supplies the + 37V to the launch control circuit 953a and the power supply creation circuit 935d of the launch control unit 953, respectively.

The capacitor BC0 supplies backup power to the RAM (main control built-in RAM) built in the main control MPU 1310a of the main control board 1310, and the capacitor BC1 is built in the payout control MPU 952a of the payout control unit 952 in the payout control board 951. It supplies backup power to the RAM (RAM with built-in payout control).

The launch control circuit 953a of the launch control unit 953 uses + 37 V supplied from the smoothing circuit 935c as a drive power source, and has a launch strength (launch strength) commensurate with the rotation position of the handle 302. While controlling the drive current for launching (launching) toward the launching solenoid 682 and outputting it to the launching solenoid 682, the ball of the ball feed unit 250 is output by outputting a constant current to the ball feed solenoid 255 of the ball feed unit 250. The feeding member receives one game ball stored in the upper plate 321 of the plate unit 320, and controls to send the game ball received by the ball feeding member to the hitting ball launching device 650 side.

The power supply creation circuit 935d is supplied from the smoothing circuit 935c from + 37V to DC + 5V (DC + 5V, hereinafter referred to as “+ 5V”), DC + 12V (DC + 12V, hereinafter referred to as “+ 12V”), and DC. + 24V (DC + 24V, hereinafter referred to as “+ 24V”) is created and supplied to the payout control board 951 and the frame peripheral relay terminal board 868, respectively. The power supply system to which + 5V is applied and supplied is the + 5V power supply line, the power supply system to which + 12V is applied and supplied is the + 12V power supply line, and the power supply system to which + 24V is applied and supplied is the + 24V power supply line.

The + 5V created by the power supply creation circuit 935d is supplied to the payout control board 951 as described later. The + 5V supplied to the payout control board 951 is applied to the power supply terminal of the payout control MPU952a via the payout control filter circuit 951a, and is also applied to the power supply terminal of the payout control built-in RAM via the diode PD0. ing. The + 12V created by the power supply creation circuit 935d is supplied to the + 5V creation circuit 1310g of the main control board 1310 via the payout control board 951. The + 5V creation circuit 1310g creates + 5V, which is the control reference voltage of the main control MPU 1310a, from + 12V from the payout control board 951. The + 5V created by the + 5V creation circuit 1310g is supplied to the power supply terminal of the main control MPU 1310a via the main control filter circuit 1310h, and is also supplied to the power supply terminal of the main control built-in RAM via the diode MD0. ing.

The negative terminal of the capacitor BC1 of the power supply board 931 is grounded to the ground (GND), while the positive terminal of the capacitor BC1 is electrically connected to the power supply terminal of the payout control built-in RAM of the payout control board 951 and is paid out. It is also electrically connected to the cathode terminal of the diode PD0 of the control board 951. That is, the + 5V created by the power supply creation circuit 935d of the power supply board 931 causes a current to flow toward the power supply terminal of the payout control MPU952a, and is forwarded by the diode PD0. A current flows toward the positive terminal. In this way, the capacitor BC1 is + 5V by an electrical connection method in which + 5V created by the power supply creation circuit 935d of the power supply board 931 is returned from the payout control board 951 and the power supply board 931 again. Is supplied and can be charged. As a result, when the + 5V created by the power supply creation circuit 935d is no longer supplied to the payout control board 951, the electric charge charged in the capacitor BC1 is supplied to the payout control board 951 as the payout VBB. Therefore, although the current is blocked by the diode PD0 and does not flow to the power supply terminal of the payout control MPU952a and the payout control MPU952a does not operate, the stored contents are retained by supplying the payout VBB to the power supply terminal of the payout control built-in RAM. It has become so.

The negative terminal of the capacitor BC0 of the power supply board 931 is grounded to the ground (GND), while the positive terminal of the capacitor BC0 is electrically connected to the power supply terminal of the main control built-in RAM of the main control board 1310 via the payout control board 951. It is also electrically connected to the cathode terminal of the diode MD0 of the main control board 1310. That is, in the + 5V created by the + 5V creation circuit 1310g, a current flows toward the power supply terminal of the main control MPU 1310a, and the power supply terminal of the main control built-in RAM in the forward direction by the diode MD0, the positive terminal of the capacitor BC0, and the positive terminal of the capacitor BC0. The current is flowing toward. In this way, the capacitor BC0 is charged with + 5V supplied by the electrical connection method in which + 5V created by the + 5V creation circuit 1310g is supplied from the main control board 1310 and the payout control board 951 to the power supply board 931. You can do it. As a result, + 12V created by the power supply creation circuit 935d of the power supply board 931 is not supplied to the + 5V creation circuit 1310g of the main control board 1310 via the payout control board 951, and the + 5V creation circuit 1310g can create + 5V. When it disappears, the electric charge charged in the capacitor BC0 is supplied to the main control board 1310 as the main VBB via the payout control board 951. Therefore, a diode is connected to the power supply terminal of the main control MPU 1310a. Although the main control MPU1310a does not operate because the current is obstructed by MD0 and does not flow, the stored contents are retained by supplying the main VBB to the power supply terminal of the main control built-in RAM. As described above, in the pachinko machine 1 according to this embodiment, the backup power supply circuit that supplies the backup power supply to the main control built-in RAM is composed of the diode MD0 and the capacitor BC0.

[8-2. Voltage supplied to each control board, etc.]
Next, the outline of the voltage supplied to each control board and the like will be described, and then the voltage mainly supplied to the payout control board and the voltage supplied to the main control board will be described.

As shown in FIG. 75, three types of voltages of + 5V, + 12V, and + 24V created by the power supply creation circuit 935d of the power supply board 931 are supplied to the payout control board 951, and of these three types of voltages, + 12V and Two types of voltages, + 24V, are supplied to the main control board 1310 via the payout control board 951. Further, three types of voltages, + 5V, + 12V, and + 24V, created by the power supply creation circuit 935d of the power supply board 931 are supplied to the frame peripheral relay terminal plate 868, and are peripheral through the frame peripheral relay terminal plate 868. It is supplied to the control board 1510 and the peripheral door relay terminal board 882, respectively.

As shown in FIG. 76A, the three types of voltages of + 5V, + 12V, and + 24V supplied to the peripheral control board 1510 are the lamp drive circuit 4170a of the lamp drive board 4170 and the drive source drive circuit of the motor drive board 4180. It is supplied to each of the 4180a. The lamp drive circuit 4170a of the lamp drive board 4170 outputs various signals such as a lighting signal, a blinking signal, and a gradation lighting signal to various decorative boards of the game board 5, and the drive source drive circuit 4180a of the motor drive board 4180 is a game. A drive signal is output to an electric drive source such as a motor or a solenoid of the panel 5.

The peripheral control board 1510 includes a + 3.3V creation circuit 1510b that creates a direct current 3.3V (DC + 3.3V, hereinafter referred to as "+ 3.3V") from + 5V supplied from the frame peripheral relay terminal plate 868. ing. The + 3.3V created by the + 3.3V creation circuit 1510b is supplied to the liquid crystal module 1600a of the game board side effect display device 1600. Further, + 12V supplied to the peripheral control board 1510 is supplied to the backlight power supply 1600b of the game board side effect display device 1600.

On the other hand, three types of voltages, + 5V, + 12V, and + 24V, which are supplied to the peripheral door relay terminal plate 882, are supplied to the frame decoration drive amplifier board 194 as shown in FIG. 76 (b). The frame decoration drive amplifier board 194 includes a + 9V creation circuit 194a that creates a direct current + 9V (DC + 9V, hereinafter referred to as “+ 9V”) from + 12V supplied from the peripheral door relay terminal board 882. Along with + 9V created by the + 9V creation circuit 194a, a total of four types of voltages of + 5V, + 12V, and + 24V supplied from the peripheral door relay terminal plate 882 are supplied to various decorative substrates of the door frame 3.

Further, + 12V supplied to the peripheral door relay terminal plate 882 is supplied to the upper plate side liquid crystal module power supply circuit 4450x. The upper plate side liquid crystal module power supply circuit 4450x creates + 13.V from + 12V. The + 3.3V created by the upper plate side liquid crystal module power supply circuit 4450x is supplied to each of the various electronic components constituting the liquid crystal module circuit 4450V shown in FIG. 74, and the upper plate side liquid crystal module backlight power supply circuit 4450y. And the door frame side effect display device 460, respectively. The voltage created by the upper plate side liquid crystal module backlight power supply circuit 4450y is supplied to the door frame side effect display device 460.

[8-2-1. Voltage supplied to the payout control board]
As shown in FIG. 75, the payout control board 951 includes a payout control filter circuit 951a and the like in addition to the payout control MPU952a and the like. The payout control filter circuit 951a is supplied with + 5V from the power supply board 931 and removes noise from the + 5V. This + 5V is supplied to the capacitor BC1 of the power supply board 931 via the diode PD0, and is also supplied to, for example, the payout control MPU952a of the payout control unit 952. The + 12V from the power supply board 931 is supplied to, for example, the payout control input circuit 952b of the payout control unit 952, and is also supplied to the external communication circuit 784a of the external terminal board 784 via the payout control board 951. The external communication circuit 784a of the external terminal board 784 is a circuit that outputs a signal for transmitting the number of game balls paid out by the pachinko machine 1 and the game information of the pachinko machine 1 to a hall computer installed in the game hall. Is. The hall computer monitors the player's game by grasping the number of game balls paid out by the pachinko machine 1 and the game information of the pachinko machine 1 from the signal output from the external communication circuit 784a. The +24 from the power supply board 931 is supplied to the main control board 1310 via the payout control board 951 without being used in the payout control board 951 at all.

[8-2-2. Voltage supplied to the main control board]
As shown in FIG. 75, the main control board 1310 includes a + 5V creation circuit 1310g, a main control filter circuit 1310h, a power failure monitoring circuit 1310e, and the like, in addition to the main control MPU 1310a and the like. In the + 5V creation circuit 1310g, + 12V from the power supply board 931 is supplied via the payout control board 951, and + 5V, which is the control reference voltage of the main control MPU 1310a, is created from this + 12V. In the main control board 1310, the power supply system to which + 5V created by the + 5V creation circuit 1310g is applied and supplied becomes the + 5V power supply line. In the present embodiment, the + 5V power supply line created by the power supply creation circuit 935d of the power supply board 931 and the + 5V power supply line created by the + 5V creation circuit 1310g of the main control board 1310 are not electrically connected. Since the circuit is configured as described above, the + 5V power supply line created by the power supply creation circuit 935d of the power supply board 931 is not electrically connected to various electronic components of the main control board 1310, and + 5V of the main control board 1310. The + 5V power supply line created by the creation circuit 1310g is not electrically connected to various electronic components such as other substrates other than the main control substrate 1310.

The main control filter circuit 1310h is supplied with + 5V created by the + 5V creation circuit 1310g, and noise is removed from this + 5V. This + 5V is supplied to the capacitor BC0 of the power supply board 931 via the diode MD0, and is also supplied to, for example, the main control MPU1310a. The + 12V from the payout control board 951 is supplied to, for example, the main control input circuit 1310b, and the + 24V from the payout control board 951 is supplied to, for example, the main control solenoid drive circuit 1310d.

In the power failure monitoring circuit 1310e, + 12V and + 24V from the power supply board 931 are supplied via the payout control board 951, and the signs of a power failure or momentary power failure of these + 12V and + 24V are monitored. When the power failure monitoring circuit 1310e detects a sign of a power failure or momentary power failure of + 12V and + 24V, it outputs a power failure warning signal to the main control MPU 1310a as a power failure warning. The power failure warning signal is input to the payout control MPU 952a via the payout control input circuit 952b of the main control board 1310 and the payout control board 951. Further, the power failure warning signal is input to the peripheral control board 1510 via the main control board 1310. Further, the power failure warning signal is input to the frame decoration drive amplifier board 194 as shown in FIG. 76B via the peripheral control board 1510, the frame peripheral relay terminal board 868, and the peripheral door relay terminal board 882. At the same time, the input is input to the decorative substrate of the door frame or the like via the frame decorative drive amplifier substrate 194.

In the present embodiment, the power failure monitoring circuit 1310e applies to one of the + 12V power supply line or the + 24V power supply line by monitoring the voltage applied to each of the two power supply lines, the + 12V power supply line and the + 24V power supply line. Compared with the case of monitoring the voltage to be output, it is possible to more accurately grasp the signs of power failure such as power failure or momentary power failure.

[9. Main control board circuit]
Next, the circuit and the like of the main control board 1310 shown in FIG. 69 will be described with reference to FIGS. 77 to 79. 77 is a circuit diagram showing a circuit of the main control board, FIG. 78 is a circuit diagram showing a power failure monitoring circuit, and FIG. 79 is a circuit showing a communication interface circuit between the main control board and the peripheral control board. It is a figure. First, the main control filter circuit 1310h shown in FIG. 75 will be described, and then the power supply, main control system reset, main control crystal oscillator, main control input circuit, power failure monitoring circuit, and main control MPU created by the main control board 1310 will be described. Various input / output signals to and from the main control board 1310 and a communication interface circuit between the boards of the main control board 1310 and the peripheral control board 1510 will be described.

The main control board 1310 includes the main control MPU 1310a, the main control input circuit 1310b, the main control output circuit 1310c, the main control solenoid drive circuit 1310d, the power failure monitoring circuit 1310e, the + 5V creation circuit 1310g, and the main control board 1310g shown in FIGS. 69 and 75. In addition to the control filter circuit 1310h, as peripheral circuits, as shown in FIG. 77, a main control system reset MIC1 that outputs a reset signal and a main control crystal oscillator MX0 that outputs a clock signal (24 megahertz (MHz in this embodiment)). )) Is mainly composed.

[9-1. Main control filter circuit]
As shown in FIG. 77, the main control filter circuit 1310h mainly comprises the main control 3-terminal filter MIC0. This main control 3-terminal filter MIC0 is a T-type filter circuit, which is magnetically shielded with ferrite and has excellent attenuation characteristics. In the main control 3-terminal filter MIC0, + 5V created by the + 5V creation circuit 1310g was applied to the 1st terminal, the 2nd terminal was grounded to the ground (GND), and the noise component was removed from the 3rd terminal. + 5V is output. The + 5V applied to the 1st terminal is first electrically removed from the ripple (AC component folded by the voltage) by being electrically connected to the other end of the capacitor MC0 whose one end is grounded to ground (GND). Is smoothed.

The + 5V output from the 3rd terminal is electrically connected to the other end of the capacitor MC1 and the electrolytic capacitor MC2 (capacitance: 470 microfarad (μF) in this embodiment), one end of which is grounded to ground (GND). By connecting to, the ripple is further removed and smoothed. This smoothed + 5V is applied to the power supply terminal of the main control system reset MIC1, the VDD terminal which is the power supply terminal of the main control crystal oscillator MX0, the VDD terminal which is the power supply terminal of the main control MPU 1310a, and the like. When a power failure or momentary power failure occurs at the VDD terminal, which is the power supply terminal of the main control MPU 1310a, and the power supply from the pachinko island equipment is cut off, the electric charge charged in the electrolytic capacitor MC2 causes a power failure or momentary power failure. It is applied as + 5V over a period of about 7 milliseconds (ms) after it is generated.

The VDD terminal of the main control MPU 1310a is electrically connected to the other end of the capacitor MC3 whose one end is grounded to ground (GND), and the + 5V applied to the VDD terminal is further stripped of ripples and smoothed. The VSS terminal, which is the ground terminal of the main control MPU 1310a, is grounded to the ground (GND).

Further, the VDD terminal of the main control MPU 1310a is electrically connected to the anode terminal of the diode MD0 in addition to being electrically connected to the capacitor MC3. The cathode terminal of the diode MD0 is electrically connected to the VBB terminal, which is the power supply terminal of the RAM (main control built-in RAM) built in the main control MPU1310a, and one end of the capacitor MC4 is grounded to ground (GND). It is electrically connected to the other end of the. The VBB terminal of the main control built-in RAM is electrically connected to the cathode terminal of the diode MD0 and the other end of the capacitor MC4, and is also the plus of the capacitor BC0 of the power supply board 931 shown in FIG. 75 via the resistor MR0. It is electrically connected to the terminal. That is, + 5V smoothed by removing the noise component by the main control filter circuit 1310h is applied to the VDD terminal of the main control MPU 1310a, and is applied to the VBB terminal of the main control built-in RAM and the capacitor BC0 via the diode MD0. It is designed to be applied to the positive terminal of. As a result, as described above, + 12V created by the power supply creation circuit 935d of the power supply board 931 shown in FIG. 75 is not supplied to the + 5V creation circuit 1310g of the main control board 1310 via the payout control board 951 and + 5V is created. When the circuit 1310g cannot create + 5V, the charge charged in the capacitor BC0 is supplied to the main control board 1310 as the main VBB, so that the VDD terminal of the main control MPU 1310a Although the main control MPU 1310a does not operate because the current is obstructed by the diode MD0 and does not flow, the stored contents are retained by applying the main VBB to the VBB terminal of the main control built-in RAM.

[9-2. Main control system reset]
As shown in FIG. 77, + 5V smoothed by removing the noise component by the main control filter circuit 1310h is applied to the power supply terminal of the main control system reset MIC1. The main control system reset MIC1 resets the main control MPU 1310a and the main control output circuit 1310ca with a reset function, respectively, and has a built-in delay circuit. The delay capacitance terminal of the main control system reset MIC1 is electrically connected to the other end of the capacitor MC5 whose one end is grounded to ground (GND), and the delay time by the delay circuit is set by the capacitance of this capacitor MC5. You can do it. Specifically, when the + 5V input to the power supply terminal reaches the threshold value (for example, 4.25V), the main control system reset MIC1 outputs a system reset signal from the output terminal after the delay time elapses.

The output terminal of the main control system reset MIC1 is electrically connected to the SRST terminal, which is the reset terminal of the main control MPU 1310a, and the reset terminal of the main control output circuit 1310ca with a reset function. The output terminal is an open collector output type, and is a capacitor whose one end is electrically connected to the other end of the pull-up resistor MR1 which is electrically connected to the + 5V power supply line and one end is grounded to ground (GND). It is electrically connected to the other end of the MC6. Ripple is removed and smoothed by this capacitor MC6. When the voltage input to the power supply terminal is larger than the threshold value, the output terminal is pulled up to the + 5V side by the pull-up resistor MR1 and the logic becomes HI. While each is input to the reset terminal of the circuit 1310ca, when the voltage input to the power supply terminal is smaller than the threshold value, the logic becomes LOW, and this logic is the SRST terminal of the main control MPU 1310a and the main control output circuit 1310ca with a reset function. It is input to each reset terminal. Since the SRST terminal of the main control MPU 1310a and the reset terminal of the main control output circuit 1310ca with a reset function are negative logic inputs, respectively, when the voltage input to the power supply terminal becomes smaller than the threshold value, the main control MPU 1310a and the reset function The main control output circuit 1310ca is reset. The power supply terminal is electrically connected to the other end of the capacitor MC7 whose one end is grounded to ground (GND), and the + 5V input to the power supply terminal is smoothed by removing ripples. Further, the ground terminal is grounded to the grant (GND), and the NC terminal is in a state of being electrically unconnected to the outside.

[9-3. Main control crystal oscillator]
As shown in FIG. 77, + 5V smoothed by removing the noise component by the main control filter circuit 1310h is applied to the VDD terminal which is the power supply terminal of the main control crystal oscillator MX0. This VDD terminal is electrically connected to the other end of the capacitor MC8 whose one end is grounded to ground (GND), and the + 5V input to the VDD terminal is further stripped of ripples and smoothed. Further, this smoothed + 5V is applied not only to the VDD terminal but also to the A terminal, the B terminal, the C terminal, and the ST terminal, which are output frequency selection terminals, respectively. The main control crystal oscillator MX0 outputs a 24 MHz clock signal from the F terminal, which is an output terminal, by applying + 5 V to each of these A terminal, B terminal, C terminal, and ST terminal.

The F terminal of the main control crystal oscillator MX0 is electrically connected to the CLK terminal, which is the clock terminal of the main control MPU 1310a, and a 24 MHz clock signal is input. The GND terminal, which is the ground terminal of the main control crystal oscillator MX0, is grounded to ground (GND), and the D terminal, which outputs the frequency division of the F terminal of the main control crystal oscillator MX0, is not electrically connected to the outside. It is in a state.

[9-4. Main control input circuit]
The main control input circuit 1310b detects from the general winning opening sensors 4020 and 4020, the first starting port sensor 4002, the second starting port sensor 4004, the magnetic detection sensor 4024, the count sensor 4005, and the gate sensor 4003 shown in FIG. 69. In addition to the signal, this is a circuit in which an operation signal (RAM clear signal) or the like from the operation switch 954 provided in the payout control board 951 shown in FIG. 70 is input. Since the circuit configuration in which the detection signal from each switch is input is the same, a circuit in which the operation signal (RAM clear signal) from the operation switch 954 is input will be described here.

[9-4-1. Circuit to which the operation signal (RAM clear signal) from the operation switch is input]
First, as described above, the operation switch 954 is the RAM (RAM with built-in payout control) built into the payout control MPU952a of the payout control board 951 and the main control of the main control board 1310 within a predetermined period from the time when the power is turned on. It is operated when clearing the RAM (main control built-in RAM) built in the MPU 1310a, or when an error is notified after the power is turned on, it is operated to clear the error. A function to clear the RAM within a predetermined period from the time the power is turned on, and an error cancellation after the power is turned on (after the period during which the function as RAM clear is performed, that is, after the predetermined period has passed from the time the power is turned on). It has a function to perform. Since the main control board 1310 does not have the function of canceling the error of the payout control board 951, the main control is performed when the operation signal from the operation switch 954 is input within a predetermined period from the time when the power is turned on. A process of clearing the main control built-in RAM is performed by judging as a RAM clear signal for clearing the built-in RAM.

When the operation switch 954 is not operated, the operation signal whose logic is LOW is input to the main control board 1310, while when the operation switch 954 is operated, the logic is input from the payout control board 951. The operation signal in which is HI is input from the payout control board 951 (a detailed description of this point will be described later).

As shown in FIG. 77, the transmission line for transmitting the operation signal from the operation switch 954 provided on the payout control board 951 within a predetermined period from the time when the power is turned on is a pull-up in which one end is electrically connected to the + 12V power supply line. It is electrically connected to the other end of the resistor MR2 and is also electrically connected to the base terminal of the transistor MTR0 via the resistor MR3. In addition to being electrically connected to the resistor MR3, the base terminal of the transistor MTR0 is electrically connected to the other end of the resistor MR4 whose one end is grounded to ground (GND). The emitter terminal of the transistor MTR0 is grounded to ground (GND), and the collector terminal of the transistor MTR0 is electrically connected to the other end of the resistor MR5, one end of which is electrically connected to the + 5V power supply line, and a non-inverting buffer. Main control via ICMIC10 (non-inverting buffer ICMIC10 includes eight non-inverting buffer circuits, and formats and outputs the logic of the signal waveform input to one of them (MIC10A) without inverting it). It is electrically connected to the input terminal PA0 of the input port PA of the MPU 1310a.

The circuit that outputs the operation signal from the operation switch 954 on the payout control board 951 is configured as an open collector output type in which the emitter terminal is grounded to ground (GND), and the transmission that transmits the operation signal from the operation switch 954. The line is pulled up to the + 12V side by the pull-up resistor MR2. In the main control board 1310, when the operation switch 954 is not operated, the operation signal from the payout control board 951 is pulled down to the ground (GND) side and the logic is input as LOW, while the operation switch 954 is operated. At this time, the operation signal from the payout control board 951 is pulled up to the + 12V side by the pull-up resistor MR2, and the logic is input as HI.

The circuit composed of the resistors MR3 and MR4 and the transistor MTR0 is a switch circuit that is turned ON / OFF by an operation signal from the operation switch 954.

When the operation switch 954 is not operated, the operation signal whose logic is LOW is input to the base terminal of the transistor MTR0, so that the transistor MTR0 is turned off and the switch circuit is also turned off. As a result, the voltage applied to the collector terminal of the transistor MTR0 is pulled up to the + 5V side by the resistor MR5, and the operation signal from the operation switch 954 whose logic becomes HI is input to the input terminal PA0 of the input port PA of the main control MPU1310a. Will be done. The main control MPU 1310a must instruct to clear the RAM that erases the information stored in the main control built-in RAM when the logical value of the operation signal from the operation switch 954 input to the input terminal PA0 is HI. to decide.

On the other hand, when the operation switch 954 is operated, the transistor MTR0 is turned on by inputting the operation signal whose logic is HI by being pulled up to the + 12V side by the pull-up resistor MR2 to the base terminal of the transistor MTR0, and the switch is switched. The circuit will also be turned on. As a result, the voltage applied to the collector terminal of the transistor MTR0 is lowered to the ground (GND) side, and the operation signal from the operation switch 954 whose logic is LOW is input to the input terminal PA0 of the input port PA of the main control MPU1310a. Will be done. The main control MPU 1310a instructs to clear the RAM that erases the information stored in the main control built-in RAM when the logical value of the operation signal from the operation switch 954 input to the input terminal PA0 is LOW. Judge.

The operation signal from the operation switch 954 is pulled up to the + 12V side by the pull-up resistor MR2. This is because the operation signal from the operation switch 954 is input via the payout control board 951. That is, the voltage between the main control board 1310 and the payout control board 951 is higher than the control reference voltage of + 5V in order to suppress the influence of noise invading the wiring (harness) that electrically connects the boards. The reliability of the signal is enhanced by using + 12V, which is a voltage. Therefore, in the present embodiment, the detection signals from the general winning port sensor 4020, the first starting port sensor 4002, and the second starting port sensor 4004, which are directly input to the main control board 1310, are moved to the + 5V side by the pull-up resistance. While being pulled up, the detection signals from the magnetic detection sensor 4024, the count sensor 4005, the general winning opening sensor 4020, and the gate sensor 4003, which are input via the panel relay board 4161 shown in FIG. 69, are sent to the main control board 1310. Since it is not directly input, it is pulled up to the + 12V side by the pull-up resistance like the operation signal from the operation switch 954.

[9-5. Power failure monitoring circuit]
As shown in FIG. 75, the main control board 1310 is supplied with two types of voltages, + 12V and + 24V, from the power supply board 931 via the payout control board 951, and + 12V and + 24V are input to the power failure monitoring circuit 1310e. ing. The power failure monitoring circuit 1310e monitors signs of a power failure or momentary power failure of + 12V and + 24V, and when it detects a sign of power failure or momentary power failure, it sends a power failure warning signal as a power failure warning, in addition to the main control MPU 1310a, a payout control board. It is output to the payout control MPU952a of 951 and the peripheral control board 1510. Here, the configuration of the power failure monitoring circuit will be described first, followed by the monitoring of + 24V power failure or momentary power failure, the monitoring of + 12V power failure or momentary power failure, and the output of the power failure warning signal.

[9-5-1. Power failure monitoring circuit configuration]
As shown in FIG. 78, the power failure monitoring circuit 1310e mainly includes a shunt type stabilized power supply circuit MIC20, an open collector output type comparator MIC21, a D type flip-flop MIC22, and transistors MTR20 to MTR23.

The REF terminal, which is the reference voltage input terminal of the shunt-type regulated power supply circuit MIC20, and the K terminal, which is the cathode terminal, are electrically connected to the other end of the resistor MR20, one end of which is electrically connected to the + 5V power supply line. + 5V is applied, and the current input to the REF terminal is limited by the resistor MR20. The K terminal outputs a reference voltage Vref (2.495V is set in this embodiment) which is a comparison reference voltage of the comparator MIC21. The K terminal is electrically connected to the other end of the capacitor MC20 whose one end is grounded to ground (GND), and the reference voltage Vref output from the K terminal is rippled (folded by the voltage) by the capacitor MC20. The AC component) has been removed and smoothed. The A terminal, which is the anode terminal of the shunt-type regulated power supply circuit MIC20, is grounded to ground (GND).

The comparator MIC21 includes two voltage comparison circuits, one of which (MIC21A) is used to compare the + 24V monitoring voltage V1 with the reference voltage Vref, and the remaining one (MIC21B). , + 12V monitoring voltage V2 and reference voltage Vref are used for comparison. A monitoring voltage V1 of + 24 V is applied to the positive terminal 3 of the MIC 21A, and a reference voltage Vref is applied to the negative terminal 2 of the MIC 21A. A monitoring voltage V2 of + 12V is applied to the 5th terminal which is a positive terminal of the MIC21B, and a reference voltage Vref is applied to the 6th terminal which is a negative terminal of the MIC21B. The results of these comparisons are input to the D-type flip-flop MIC22. This D-type flip-flop MIC 22 includes two D-type flip-flop circuits, one of which (MIC 22A) is used in the present embodiment. The Vcc terminal, which is the power supply terminal of the comparator MIC21, is electrically connected to the other end of the capacitor MC21 whose one end is grounded to ground (GND), and + 5V applied to the Vcc terminal which is the power supply terminal of the comparator MIC21 is Ripple is removed and smoothed by the capacitor MC21, and the GND terminal, which is the ground terminal of the comparator MIC21, is grounded to ground (GND).

[9-5-2. + 24V power outage or momentary power failure monitoring]
As described above, the monitoring of the + 24V power failure or momentary power failure is performed by comparing the monitoring voltage V1 of + 24V with the reference voltage Vref by the MIC21A of the comparator MIC21. As shown in FIG. 78, the third terminal, which is the positive terminal of the MIC21A of the comparator MIC21 to which the monitoring voltage V1 of + 24V is applied, has the other end and one end of the resistor MR21 whose one end is electrically connected to the + 24V power supply line. Is electrically connected to the other end of the resistor MR22 which is grounded to the ground (GND), the other end of the resistors MR21 and MR22, and the other end of the capacitor MC23 whose one end is grounded to the ground (GND). Are electrically connected. The + 24V monitoring voltage V1 applied to the 3rd terminal, which is the positive terminal of the MIC21A of the comparator MIC21, is divided by + 24V by the resistance ratio of the resistors MR21 and MR22, and the ripple is removed by the capacitor MC23 and smoothed. .. The values of the resistors MR21 and MR22 are the power failure detection voltage V1pf (set to 21.40V in this embodiment) set in advance when the voltage starts to drop from + 24V when + 24V has a power failure or momentary power failure. At that time, the monitoring voltage V1 of + 24V is set to be the same value as the reference voltage Vref.

The first terminal, which is the output terminal of the MIC21A of the comparator MIC21, has an open collector output, and one end is electrically connected to the other end of the pull-up resistor MR23 which is electrically connected to the + 5V power supply line. One end is electrically connected to the other end of the capacitor MC24 which is grounded to the ground (GND), and is electrically connected to the PR terminal which is a preset terminal of the D type flip flop MIC22. The capacitor MC24 plays a role as a low-pass filter.

When the + 24V voltage is larger than the power failure detection voltage V1pf, the + 24V monitoring voltage V1 becomes larger than the reference voltage Vref, and the voltage applied to the first terminal, which is the output terminal of the MIC21A of the comparator MIC21, is + 5V due to the pull-up resistor MR23. The signal pulled up to the side and the logic becomes HI is input to the PR terminal which is the preset terminal of the D type flip-flop MIC22.

On the other hand, when the voltage of + 24V is smaller than the power failure detection voltage V1pf, the monitoring voltage V1 of + 24V becomes smaller than the reference voltage Vref, and the voltage applied to the first terminal which is the output terminal of the MIC21A of the comparator MIC21 is ground (GND). The signal pulled down to the side and the logic becomes LOW is input to the PR terminal which is the preset terminal of the D type flip-flop MIC22.

[9-5-3. + 12V power outage or momentary power failure monitoring]
Monitoring of a + 12V power failure or momentary power failure is performed by comparing the monitoring voltage V2 of + 12V with the reference voltage Vref by the MIC21B of the comparator MIC21, as described above. As shown in FIG. 78, the 5th terminal, which is the positive terminal of the MIC21B of the comparator MIC21 to which the monitoring voltage V2 of + 12V is applied, has one end and the other end of the resistor MR24 electrically connected to the + 12V power supply line. Is electrically connected to the other end of the resistor MR25 which is grounded to the ground (GND), the other end of the resistors MR24 and MR25, and the other end of the capacitor MC25 whose one end is grounded to the ground (GND). Are electrically connected. The + 12V monitoring voltage V2 applied to the 5th terminal, which is the positive terminal of the MIC21B of the comparator MIC21, is divided by + 12V by the resistance ratio of the resistors MR24 and MR25, and the ripple is removed by the capacitor MC25 and smoothed. .. The values of the resistors MR24 and MR25 become the power failure detection voltage V2pf (set to 10.47V in this embodiment) set in advance when the voltage starts to drop from + 12V when + 12V has a power failure or momentary power failure. At that time, the monitoring voltage V2 of + 12V is set to be the same value as the reference voltage Vref.

The 7th terminal, which is the output terminal of the MIC21B of the comparator MIC21, has an open collector output and is electrically connected to the 1st terminal, which is the output terminal of the MIC21A described above. The preset of the D type flip flop MIC22 is electrically connected to the other end of the pull-up resistor MR23 and is electrically connected to the other end of the capacitor MC24 whose one end is grounded to the ground (GND). It is electrically connected to the PR terminal, which is a terminal. As described above, the capacitor MC24 plays a role as a low-pass filter.

When the + 12V voltage is larger than the power failure detection voltage V2pf, the + 12V monitoring voltage V2 becomes larger than the reference voltage Vref, and the voltage applied to the 7th terminal, which is the output terminal of the MIC21B of the comparator MIC21, is + 5V due to the pull-up resistor MR23. The signal pulled up to the side and the logic becomes HI is input to the PR terminal which is the preset terminal of the D type flip-flop MIC22.

On the other hand, when the voltage of + 12V is smaller than the power failure detection voltage V2pf, the monitoring voltage V2 of + 12V becomes smaller than the reference voltage Vref, and the voltage applied to the 7th terminal which is the output terminal of the MIC21B of the comparator MIC21 is ground (GND). The signal pulled down to the side and the logic becomes LOW is input to the PR terminal which is the preset terminal of the D type flip-flop MIC22.

[9-5-4. Output of power failure warning signal]
The D-type flip-flop MIC22 stores the value (logic) of the signal input to the 1D terminal, which is the D input terminal, due to the change in the edge of the clock signal input to the 1CK terminal, which is the clock input terminal, and this stored value. (Logic) is output from the 1Q terminal which is an output terminal, and the value obtained by inverting the stored value (logic) is output from the negative logic 1Q terminal which is an output terminal. Further, the D type flip flop MIC22 releases the latch state when a signal whose logic is LOW is input to the CLR terminal which is a clear terminal, and performs the logic of the signal input to the PR terminal which is a preset terminal. The inverted signal is output from the 1Q terminal which is the output terminal (at this time, the logic of the signal output from 1Q is inverted, that is, the logic of the signal input to the PR terminal which is the preset terminal is the same. (The logical signal is output from the negative logic 1Q terminal) On the other hand, when the signal whose logic is HI is input to the CLR terminal which is the clear terminal, the latch state is set. Further, in the D type flip flop MIC22, when a signal whose logic is HI is input to the CLR terminal which is a clear terminal and the latch state is set, the logic is LOW to the PR terminal which is a preset terminal. When the signal becomes Maintain the state of output from the 1Q terminal).

In the D type flip-flop MIC22, in the present embodiment, the 1D terminal which is the D input terminal and the 1CK terminal which is the clock input terminal are grounded to the ground (GND), respectively, so that the 1CK terminal which is the clock input terminal can be used. The circuit is configured so that the edge of the input clock signal does not change, and the value (logic) of the signal input to the 1D terminal, which is the D input terminal, is not stored and output from the 1Q terminal, which is the output terminal. ing. As described above, the D-type flip-flop MIC22 has a signal from the output terminal 1 of the MIC21A of the comparator MIC21 that monitors a + 24V power failure or a momentary power failure and a + 12V power failure at the PR terminal which is a preset terminal. Alternatively, signals from the 7th terminal, which is the output terminal of the MIC21B of the comparator MIC21 that monitors the momentary power failure, are input, and based on these signals, a signal is output from the 1Q terminal, which is the output terminal. The Vcc terminal, which is a power supply terminal, is electrically connected to the other end of the capacitor MC22 whose one end is grounded to ground (GND), and is applied to the Vcc terminal which is the power supply terminal of the D type flip flop MIC22. + 5V is smoothed by removing ripples by the capacitor MC22, the GND terminal, which is the ground terminal, is grounded to ground (GND), and the negative logic 1Q terminal, which inverts the logic of the 1Q terminal, which is the output terminal, is electrical to the outside. It is in an unconnected state.

In the D-type flip-flop MIC22, in the present embodiment, a power failure clear signal from the main control MPU 1310a is input to the CLR terminal, which is a clear terminal, via the main control output circuit 1310ca with a reset function. This power failure clear signal is output started and stopped after a predetermined time has elapsed in the main control side power-on processing described later performed by the main control MPU 1310a. Since the CLR terminal is a negative logic input, the power failure clear signal from the main control MPU 1310a is input to the CLR terminal with its logic set to LOW via the main control output circuit 1310ca with a reset function. The D-type flip-flop MIC22 is designed to release the latch state when a power failure clear signal is input to the CLR terminal. At this time, the logic input to the PR terminal, which is a preset terminal, is inverted and the output terminal is output. Output from the 1Q terminal.

On the other hand, when the output of the power failure clear signal from the main control MPU 1310a is stopped, the logic becomes HI and is input to the CLR terminal via the main control output circuit 1310ca with a reset function. The D-type flip-flop MIC 22 is designed to set a latch state when a power failure clear signal is not input to the CLR terminal, and latches the state in which the logic is LOW and is input to the PR terminal.

The 1Q terminal, which is the output terminal of the D-type flip flop MIC 22, is electrically connected to the input terminal PA1 of the input port PA of the main control MPU 1310a via the main control input circuit 1310b, and is an output terminal of the D-type flip flop MIC 22. The signal output from the 1Q terminal is input to the input terminal PA1 of the input port PA of the main control MPU 1310a as a power failure warning signal. Further, the 1Q terminal, which is the output terminal of the D-type flip-flop MIC22, is electrically connected to the main control output circuit 1310cc without a reset function, and resets the signal output from the 1Q terminal, which is the output terminal of the D-type flip-flop MIC22. No function It is output from the main control output circuit 1310cc to the payout control board 951 as a payout power failure warning signal, and is also output to the peripheral control board 1510 as a peripheral power failure warning signal.

As shown in FIG. 78, the main control input circuit 1310b that electrically connects the 1Q terminal which is the output terminal of the D type flip-flop MIC22 and the input terminal PA1 of the input port PA of the main control MPU 1310a is a D type flip-flop. The 1Q terminal, which is the output terminal of the MIC22, is electrically connected to the other end of the resistor MR26, one end of which is electrically connected to the + 5V power supply line, and electrically to the base terminal of the transistor MTR20 via the resistor MR27. It is connected. In addition to being electrically connected to the resistor MR27, the base terminal of the transistor MTR20 is electrically connected to the other end of the resistor MR28, one end of which is grounded to ground (GND). The emitter terminal of the transistor MTR20 is grounded to ground (GND), and the collector terminal of the transistor MTR20 is electrically connected to the other end of the resistor MR29, one end of which is electrically connected to the + 5V power supply line, and a non-inverting buffer. Main control via ICMIC23 (non-inverting buffer ICMIC23 includes eight non-inverting buffer circuits, and formats and outputs the logic of the signal waveform input to one of them (MIC23A) without inverting it). It is electrically connected to the input terminal PA1 of the input port PA of the MPU 1310a.

The circuit composed of the resistors MR27, MR28, and the transistor MTR20 is a switch circuit that turns ON / OFF by a signal output from the 1Q terminal which is the output terminal of the D type flip-flop MIC22.

When the logic of the signal output from the 1Q terminal, which is the output terminal of the D-type flip-flop MIC22, is LOW, the voltage applied to the base terminal of the transistor MTR20 is lowered to the ground (GND) side, and the transistor MTR20 is turned off. , The switch circuit will also be turned off. On the other hand, when the logic of the signal output from the 1Q terminal, which is the output terminal of the D type flip-flop MIC22, is HI, the voltage applied to the base terminal of the transistor MTR20 is raised to the + 5V side, and the transistor MTR20 is turned on. The switch circuit will also be turned on.

When both the condition that the voltage of + 24V is larger than the power failure detection voltage V1pf and the condition that the voltage of + 12V is larger than the power failure detection voltage V2pf are satisfied, the signal whose logic is HI is the preset of the D type flip-flop MIC22. Since it is input to the PR terminal, which is a terminal, the signal output from the 1Q terminal, which is the output terminal of the D-type flip-flop MIC22, has its logic as LOW and is input to the base terminal of the transistor MTR20, so that the transistor MTR20 is Turn off. As a result, the voltage applied to the collector terminal of the transistor MTR20 is pulled up to the + 5V side by the resistor MR29, and the power failure warning signal whose logic becomes HI via the non-inverting buffer ICMIC23 is the input terminal of the input port PA of the main control MPU1310a. It is input to PA1.

On the other hand, when either of the condition that the voltage of + 24V is smaller than the power failure detection voltage V1pf and the condition that the voltage of + 12V is smaller than the power failure detection voltage V2pf is satisfied, the signal whose logic is LOW is D. Since it is input to the PR terminal which is the preset terminal of the type flip-flop MIC22, the signal output from the 1Q terminal which is the output terminal of the D type flip-flop MIC22 becomes HI and is input to the base terminal of the transistor MTR20. As a result, the transistor MTR20 is turned on. As a result, the voltage applied to the collector terminal of the transistor MTR20 is lowered to the ground (GND) side, and the power failure warning signal whose logic becomes LOW via the non-inverting buffer ICMIC23 is the input terminal of the input port PA of the main control MPU1310a. It is input to PA1.

Further, the main control output circuit 1310cc without a reset function that outputs a signal output from the 1Q terminal, which is the output terminal of the D-type flip-flop MIC22, to the payout control board 951 as a payout failure warning signal is open as shown in FIG. 78. The circuit is configured as a collector output type, and the 1Q terminal, which is the output terminal of the D type flip-flop MIC22, is electrically connected to the resistor MR26 of the main control input circuit 1310b described above, and the transistor MTR21 in the previous stage is connected via the resistor MR30. It is electrically connected to the base terminal. The base terminal of the transistor MTR21 in the previous stage is electrically connected to the resistor MR30, and is also electrically connected to the other end of the resistor MR31 whose one end is grounded to ground (GND). The emitter terminal of the transistor MTR21 in the previous stage is grounded to ground (GND), and the collector terminal of the transistor MTR21 in the previous stage is electrically connected to the other end of the resistor MR32 whose one end is electrically connected to the + 5V power supply line. At the same time, it is electrically connected to the base terminal of the transistor MTR22 in the subsequent stage via the resistor MR33. The base terminal of the transistor MTR22 in the subsequent stage is electrically connected to the resistor MR33, and is also electrically connected to the other end of the resistor MR34 whose one end is grounded to ground (GND). The emitter terminal of the latter transistor MTR22 is grounded to ground (GND), and the collector terminal of the latter transistor MTR22 is electrically connected to the other end of the capacitor MC26, one end of which is grounded to ground (GND), and wiring. It is electrically connected to the payout control board 951 via (harness). When the collector terminal of the transistor MTR22 in the subsequent stage is electrically connected to the payout control board 951 via wiring (harness), the payout control input of the payout control unit 952 shown in FIG. 70 on the payout control board 951. In circuit 952b, one end is electrically connected to the other end of a pull-up resistor (not shown) that is electrically connected to the + 12V power supply line, and the input terminal and electricity of a predetermined input port of the payout control MPU952a shown in FIG. Is connected.

The circuit composed of the resistors MR30, MR31, and the transistor MTR21 in the front stage is the switch circuit in the front stage, and the circuit composed of the resistors MR33, MR34, and the transistor MTR22 in the rear stage is the switch circuit in the rear stage, and is a D type flip-flop. It is turned ON / OFF by the signal output from the 1Q terminal which is the output terminal of the MIC 22.

When the logic of the signal output from the 1Q terminal, which is the output terminal of the D-type flip flop MIC22, is LOW, the voltage applied to the base terminal of the transistor MTR21 in the previous stage is lowered to the ground (GND) side, and the transistor in the previous stage The MTR21 is turned off, the switch circuit in the front stage is also turned off, and the voltage applied to the collector terminal of the transistor MTR21 in the front stage, which is the voltage applied to the base terminal of the transistor MTR22 in the rear stage, is raised to the + 5V side by the resistor MR32. As a result, the transistor MTR22 in the subsequent stage is turned on, and the switch circuit in the subsequent stage is also turned on. On the other hand, when the logic of the signal output from the 1Q terminal, which is the output terminal of the D type flip flop MIC22, is HI, the voltage applied to the base terminal of the transistor MTR21 is raised to the + 5V side, and the transistor MTR21 is turned on. The switch circuit in the front stage is also turned on, and the voltage applied to the collector terminal of the transistor MTR21 in the front stage, which is the voltage applied to the base terminal of the transistor MTR22 in the rear stage, is lowered to the ground (GND) side, so that the switch circuit in the rear stage is also turned on. The transistor MTR22 is turned off, and the switch circuit in the subsequent stage is also turned off.

When both the condition that the voltage of + 24V is larger than the power failure detection voltage V1pf and the condition that the voltage of + 12V is larger than the power failure detection voltage V2pf are satisfied, the signal whose logic is HI is the preset of the D type flip-flop MIC22. Since it is input to the PR terminal, which is a terminal, the signal output from the 1Q terminal, which is the output terminal of the D-type flip-flop MIC22, has its logic set to LOW and is input to the base terminal of the transistor MTR21 in the previous stage. Transistor MTR21 is turned off. As a result, the voltage applied to the collector terminal of the transistor MTR21 in the front stage is pulled up to the + 5V side by the resistor MR32 and applied to the base terminal of the transistor MTR22 in the rear stage, so that the transistor MTR22 in the rear stage is turned on. As a result, the voltage applied to the collector terminal of the transistor MTR22 in the subsequent stage is lowered to the ground (GND) side in the payout control board 951 via the wiring (harness), so that the payout power failure warning signal whose logic is LOW is paid out. It is input to the control board 951.

On the other hand, when either of the condition that the voltage of + 24V is smaller than the power failure detection voltage V1pf and the condition that the voltage of + 12V is smaller than the power failure detection voltage V2pf is satisfied, the signal whose logic is LOW is D. Since it is input to the PR terminal, which is the preset terminal of the type flip-flop MIC22, the signal output from the 1Q terminal, which is the output terminal of the D-type flip-flop MIC22, has its logic as HI and becomes the base terminal of the transistor MTR21 in the previous stage. Upon input, the transistor MTR21 in the previous stage is turned on. As a result, the voltage applied to the collector terminal of the transistor MTR 21 in the previous stage is lowered to ground (GND) and applied to the base terminal of the transistor MTR 22 in the subsequent stage, so that the transistor MTR 22 in the subsequent stage is turned off. As a result, the voltage applied to the collector terminal of the transistor MTR22 in the subsequent stage is pulled up to the + 12V side by the pull-up resistor in the payout control input circuit 952b of the payout control unit 952 in the payout control board 951 via the wiring (harness). A payout power failure warning signal whose logic is HI is input to the payout control board 951.

Further, the main control output circuit 1310cc without a reset function that outputs a signal output from the 1Q terminal, which is the output terminal of the D-type flip-flop MIC22, to the peripheral control board 1510 as a peripheral power failure warning signal is open as shown in FIG. 78. The circuit is configured as a collector output type, and the 1Q terminal, which is the output terminal of the D type flip-flop MIC22, is electrically connected to the resistor MR26 of the main control input circuit 1310b described above, and is the base terminal of the transistor MTR23 via the resistor MR35. Is electrically connected to. In addition to being electrically connected to the resistor MR35, the base terminal of the transistor MTR23 is electrically connected to the other end of the resistor MR36 whose one end is grounded to ground (GND). The emitter terminal of the transistor MTR23 is grounded to ground (GND), and the collector terminal of the transistor MTR23 is electrically connected to the peripheral control board 1510 via wiring (harness). When the collector terminal of the transistor MTR23 is electrically connected to the peripheral control board 1510 via wiring (harness), a peripheral control input circuit (not shown) of the peripheral control unit 1511 in the peripheral control board 1510 shown in FIG. 72. In the above, one end is electrically connected to the other end of a pull-up resistor (not shown) which is electrically connected to the + 12V power supply line, and is electrically connected to the input terminal of the predetermined input port of the peripheral control MPU 1511a shown in FIG. 72. Be connected.

The circuit composed of the resistors MR35, MR36, and the transistor MTR23 is a switch circuit that turns ON / OFF by a signal output from the 1Q terminal which is the output terminal of the D type flip-flop MIC22.

When the logic of the signal output from the 1Q terminal, which is the output terminal of the D-type flip-flop MIC22, is LOW, the voltage applied to the base terminal of the transistor MTR23 is lowered to the ground (GND) side, and the transistor MTR23 is turned off. , The switch circuit will also be turned off. On the other hand, when the logic of the signal output from the 1Q terminal, which is the output terminal of the D type flip-flop MIC22, is HI, the voltage applied to the base terminal of the transistor MTR23 is raised to the + 5V side, and the transistor MTR23 is turned on. The switch circuit will also be turned on.

When both the condition that the voltage of + 24V is larger than the power failure detection voltage V1pf and the condition that the voltage of + 12V is larger than the power failure detection voltage V2pf are satisfied, the signal whose logic is HI is the preset of the D type flip-flop MIC22. Since it is input to the PR terminal, which is a terminal, the signal output from the 1Q terminal, which is the output terminal of the D-type flip-flop MIC22, has its logic as LOW and is input to the base terminal of the transistor MTR23, so that the transistor MTR23 becomes Turn off. As a result, the voltage applied to the collector terminal of the transistor MTR23 is pulled up to the + 12V side by the pull-up resistor in the payout control input circuit of the peripheral control unit 1511 in the peripheral control board 1510 via the wiring (harness), so that the logic is HI. The peripheral power failure warning signal is input to the peripheral control board 1510.

On the other hand, when either of the condition that the voltage of + 24V is smaller than the power failure detection voltage V1pf and the condition that the voltage of + 12V is smaller than the power failure detection voltage V2pf is satisfied, the signal whose logic is LOW is D. Since it is input to the PR terminal which is the preset terminal of the type flip-flop MIC22, the signal output from the 1Q terminal which is the output terminal of the D type flip-flop MIC22 becomes HI and is input to the base terminal of the transistor MTR23. As a result, the transistor MTR23 is turned on. As a result, the voltage applied to the collector terminal of the transistor MTR23 is lowered to the ground (GND) side in the peripheral control board 1510 via the wiring (harness), so that the peripheral power failure warning signal whose logic is LOW is sent to the peripheral control board. It is input to 1510.

In this way, the main control input circuit 1310b that transmits the signal output from the 1Q terminal, which is the output terminal of the D type flip flop MIC22, to the main control MPU 1310a as a power failure warning signal, and the 1Q terminal, which is the output terminal of the D type flip flop MIC22. There is no reset function that outputs the signal output from the peripheral control board 1510 as a peripheral power failure warning signal. The main control output circuit 1310cc has one transistor each, and the power failure warning signal and the peripherals input to the main control MPU 1310a. While the logic is the same as the peripheral power failure warning signal input to the control board 1510, the signal output from the 1Q terminal, which is the output terminal of the D type flip flop MIC 22, is paid out to the payout control board 951. There is no reset function to output as a power failure warning signal. The main control output circuit 1310cc has two transistors, the front stage and the rear stage, and the logic of the payout power failure warning signal is the logic of the power failure warning signal input to the main control MPU 1310a and its surroundings. The logic is the reverse of the logic of the peripheral power failure warning signal input to the control board 1510, which is different from the logic of the power failure warning signal and the logic of the peripheral power failure warning signal.

Further, the collector terminal of the transistor MTR20 of the main control input circuit 1310b is electrically connected to the other end of the resistor MR29 whose one end is electrically connected to the + 5V power supply line, and the main control MPU 1310a is electrically connected via the non-inverting buffer ICMIC23. While being electrically connected to the input terminal PA1 of the input port PA of the above, the collector terminal of the transistor MTR22 in the subsequent stage of the main control output circuit 1310cc without the reset function is a payout control board via a wiring (harness). In the payout control input circuit 952b of the payout control unit 952 in 951, one end is electrically connected to the other end of the pull-up resistor electrically connected to the + 12V power supply line, and the main control output circuit 1310cc without a reset function. The collector terminal of the transistor MTR23 is a pull-up resistor and an electrical one end of which is electrically connected to a + 12V power supply line in the payout control input circuit of the peripheral control unit 1511 on the peripheral control board 1510 via a wiring (harness). It is connected to the. This is because the transistor MTR20 of the main control input circuit 1310b and the main control MPU 1310a are the main control boards between the collector terminal of the transistor MTR20 of the main control input circuit 1310b and the input terminal PA1 of the input port PA of the main control MPU 1310a. Since it is mounted on the 1310, the power failure warning is given by the logic (ON / OFF signal) of the power failure warning signal using + 5V, which is the control reference voltage of the main control MPU 1310a, whereas the main control board 1310 and the payout control board are used. In order to suppress the influence of noise invading the wiring (harness) that electrically connects the boards between the boards of the 951 and the boards of the main control board 1310 and the peripheral control board 1510, the main control MPU 1310a, A power failure warning is given by the logic (ON / OFF signal) of the power failure warning signal using + 12V, which is a voltage higher than the control reference voltage of + 5V, which is the control reference voltage of the payout control MPU952a and the peripheral control MPU1511a.

[9-6. Various input / output signals to the main control MPU]
Next, various input / output signals to the main control MPU 1310a will be described with reference to FIG. 77. The RXA terminal, which is the serial data input terminal of the serial input port of the main control MPU 1310a, receives the serial data from the payout control board 951 shown in FIG. 69 as the payer serial data reception signal via the main control input circuit 1310b. .. On the other hand, the TXA terminal and the TXB terminal, which are the serial data output terminals of the serial output port of the main control MPU1310a, use the serial data transmitted from the TXA terminal to the payout control board 951 as the main payment serial data transmission signal without the reset function. No reset function by transmitting to circuit 1310cc The main control output circuit 1310cc transmits the main payment serial data transmission signal to the payout control board 951, and the TXB terminal mainly transmits the serial data to be transmitted to the peripheral control board 1510 shown in FIG. As a peripheral serial data transmission signal, it is transmitted to the main control output circuit 1310cc without a reset function, and a main control output circuit 1310cc without a reset function transmits a main peripheral serial data transmission signal to the peripheral control board 1510.

In addition to the above-mentioned operation signal (RAM clear signal) being input to each input terminal of the predetermined input port of the main control MPU 1310a, for example, payout notifying that the above-mentioned main payment serial data reception signal has been normally received. The payer ACK signal from the control board 951 is input via the main control input circuit 1310b, and the detection signals from various switches such as the first start port sensor 4002 shown in FIG. 69 are input via the main control input circuit 1310b. Each is entered, etc.

On the other hand, from each output terminal of the predetermined output port of the main control MPU 1310a, for example, the main payment ACK signal for notifying the completion of normal reception of the above-mentioned payer serial data reception signal is output to the main control output circuit 1310ca with a reset function. Then, the main control output circuit 1310ca with a reset function outputs a main payment ACK signal to the payout control board 951, or the drive signal to the main control output circuit 1310ca with a reset function is provided to the start port solenoid 2107 shown in FIG. 69. Is output and a drive signal is output from the main control output circuit 1310ca with a reset function to the start port solenoid 2107 via the main control solenoid drive circuit 1310d, and various displays such as the first special symbol display 1403 shown in FIG. 69 are displayed. Drive signals are output to the main control output circuit 1310ca with a reset function, and drive signals are output from the main control output circuit 1310ca with a reset function to various indicators, and various information related to the game (game information). Is output to the main control output circuit 1310ca with a reset function, and various information (game information) related to the game is output from the main control output circuit 1310ca with a reset function to the payout control board 951.

[9-7. Interface circuit for communication between the main control board and the peripheral control board]
Next, the communication interface circuit between the main control board 1310 and the peripheral control board 1510 will be described with reference to FIG. 79. In the main control board 1310, + 12V from the power supply board 931 shown in FIG. 75 is supplied via the payout control board 951, and the + 5V creation circuit 1310g creates + 5V, which is the control reference voltage of the main control MPU 1310a, from this + 12V. ing. The main peripheral serial data transmission signal transmitted from the main control board 1310 to the peripheral control board 1510 is affected by noise that invades the wiring (harness) that electrically connects the main control board 1310 and the peripheral control board 1510. In order to suppress the above, the reliability is enhanced by transmitting using + 12V, which is a voltage higher than the control reference voltage of the main control MPU 1310a, which is + 5V.

Specifically, the main control board 1310 makes the main control output circuit 1310cc without a reset function function as a communication interface circuit, and the communication interface circuit mainly comprises resistors MR50, resistors MR51, MR52, and transistors MTR50. Has been done. On the other hand, the peripheral control board 1510 includes a diode AD10, an electrolytic capacitor AC10 (capacitance: 47 μF in this embodiment), and a photocoupler AIC10 (infrared LED and photoIC) as communication interface circuits. It is mainly composed of.).

+ 12V supplied from the power supply board 931 is applied to the anode terminal of the diode MD50 of the main control board 1310 via the payout control board 951, and the negative terminal is grounded to the ground (GND) to the cathode terminal of the diode MD50. It is electrically connected to the positive terminal of the electrolytic capacitor MC50 (capacitance: 220 microfarad (μF) in this embodiment). The cathode terminal of the diode MD50 is electrically connected to the positive terminal of the electrolytic capacitor MC50, and is also electrically connected to the anode terminal (terminal 1) of the photocoupler AIC10 of the peripheral control board 1510 via wiring (harness). It is connected to the.
As a result, when the power from the power supply board 931 is not supplied to the main control board 1310 via the payout control board 951 due to, for example, a power failure or a momentary power failure, the charge charged in the electrolytic capacitor MC50 is charged. As + 12V, it can be continuously applied from the main control board 1310 to the anode terminal of the photocoupler AIC10 of the peripheral control board 1510.

As described above, the VDD terminal, which is the power supply terminal of the main control MPU 1310a, is charged to the electrolytic capacitor MC2 (capacity: 470 μF in this embodiment) shown in FIG. 77 when a power failure or a momentary power failure occurs. Since the charged charge is applied as + 5V, the main peripheral serial transmission port 1310ae built in the main control MPU 1310a serially manages at least the command set by the main control CPU core 1310aa in the transmission buffer register 1310aeb. The unit 1310aec can transfer the data to the transmission shift register 41aea and complete the transmission as main peripheral serial data from the transmission shift register 1310aea.

As described above, the main peripheral serial data transmission signal transmitted from the main control board 1310 to the peripheral control board 1510 is connected to the wiring (harness) that electrically connects the boards between the main control board 1310 and the peripheral control board 1510. In order to suppress the influence of invading noise, the reliability is enhanced by transmitting using + 12V, which is a voltage higher than the control reference voltage of the main control MPU 1310a, which is + 5V.

Therefore, in the present embodiment, when a power failure or a momentary power failure occurs, the charge charged in the electrolytic capacitor MC50 is applied as + 12V from the main control board 1310 to the anode terminal of the photocoupler AIC10 of the peripheral control board 1510. Therefore, the main peripheral serial transmission port 1310ae built in the main control MPU 1310a transfers the command set by the main control CPU core 1310aa to the transmission buffer register 1310aeb to the transmission shift register 41aea by the serial management unit 1310aec and transmits the command. When transmitted as main-circle serial data from the shift register 1310aea, a main-circle serial data transmission signal whose logic is HI can be transmitted from the collector terminal of the transistor MTR50 by + 12V.

In the present embodiment, the storage capacity of the transmission buffer register 1310aeb of the main peripheral serial transmission port 1310ae built in the main control MPU 1310a has 32 bytes, and one packet is composed of 3 bytes of data. Therefore, a maximum of 10 packets of data are stored in the transmission buffer register 1310aeb. Further, in the present embodiment, the transfer bit rate of the main peripheral serial data transmitted from the main control MPU 1310a is set to 19200 bps.

The cathode terminal (terminal No. 3) of the photocoupler AIC10 is electrically connected to the collector terminal of the transistor MTR50 of the main control board 1310 via the resistor AR10 and its wiring (harness). The resistor AR10 of the peripheral control board 1510 is a limiting resistor for limiting the current flowing through the built-in infrared LED of the photocoupler AIC10.

The TXB terminal that outputs the main peripheral serial data transmission signal from the main control MPU 1310a shown in FIG. 77 is electrically connected to the other end of the resistor MR50, one end of which is electrically connected to the + 5V power supply line, and the resistor MR51. It is electrically connected to the base terminal of the transistor MTR50 via. In addition to being electrically connected to the resistor MR51, the base terminal of the transistor MTR50 is electrically connected to the other end of the resistor MR52 whose one end is grounded to ground (GND). The emitter terminal of the transistor MTR50 is grounded to ground (GND).

The circuit composed of the resistors MR51, MR52, and the transistor MTR50 is a switch circuit, and when the logic of the main peripheral serial data transmission signal is HI, the voltage applied to the base terminal of the transistor MTR50 is on the ground (GND) side. When it is pulled down, the transistor MTR50 is turned off, and the switch circuit is also turned off. As a result, no forward current flows through the built-in infrared LED of the photocoupler AIC10 of the peripheral control board 1510, so that the photocoupler AIC10 is turned off. On the other hand, when the logic of the main peripheral serial data transmission signal is LOW, the voltage applied to the base terminal of the transistor MTR50 is pulled up to the + 5V side by the resistor MR50, the transistor MTR50 is turned on, and the switch circuit is also turned on. .. As a result, a forward current flows through the built-in infrared LED of the photocoupler AIC10 of the peripheral control board 1510, so that the photocoupler AIC10 is turned on.

+ 5V supplied from the power supply board 931 is applied to the anode terminal of the diode AD10 of the peripheral control board 1510 via the frame peripheral relay terminal plate 868, and the cathode terminal of the diode AD10 and the negative terminal are grounded (GND). It is electrically connected to the positive terminal of the grounded electrolytic capacitor AC10. The cathode terminal of the diode AD10 is electrically connected to the positive terminal of the electrolytic capacitor AC10, and is also electrically connected to the Vcc terminal (terminal 6) which is the power supply terminal of the photocoupler AIC10. The emitter terminal (terminal 4) of the photocoupler AIC10 is grounded to ground (GND), and the collector terminal (terminal 5) of the photocoupler AIC10 is a pull-up resistor that is electrically connected to the positive terminal of the electrolytic capacitor AC10. It is pulled up to the + 5V side by AR11 and is electrically connected to the input terminal of the serial I / O port for the main control board of the peripheral control MPU1511a. When the photocoupler AIC10 is turned ON / OFF, the logic of the signal output from the collector terminal of the photocoupler AIC10 changes, and that signal is used as the main peripheral serial data transmission signal for the serial I / O port for the main control board of the peripheral control MPU1511a. It is input to the input terminal of.

As a result, as described above, when + 5V supplied from the power supply board 931 is no longer supplied to the peripheral control board 1510 via the frame peripheral relay terminal board 868 due to, for example, a power failure or a momentary power failure. The electric charge charged in the electrolytic capacitor AC10 can be continuously applied to the Vcc terminal of the photocoupler AIC10 as + 5V. When + 5V is applied from the electrolytic capacitor AC10 when an electric power or momentary power failure occurs, the main peripheral serial data transmission signal transmitted from the TXB terminal of the main control MPU 1310a to the peripheral control board 1510 is sent to the main control MPU 1310a. The data set in the transmission buffer register 1310aeb of the built-in main-circle serial transmission port 1310ae can be completed, and the main-circle serial data transmission signal during transmission, that is, the main-circle serial data is cut off. The peripheral control board 1510 ensures that the data is received without any omission or omission.

When the logic of the main peripheral serial data transmission signal transmitted from the TXB terminal of the main control MPU 1310a to the peripheral control board 1510 is HI, the voltage applied to the base terminal of the transistor MTR50 is lowered to the ground (GND) side and the transistor. Since the photocoupler AIC10 is turned off when the MTR50 is turned off, the voltage applied to the collector terminal of the photocoupler AIC10 is pulled up to the + 5V side by the pull-up resistor AR11, and the logic becomes HI. The logic of the main peripheral serial data transmission signal transmitted from the TXB terminal of the main control MPU 1310a to the peripheral control board 1510 while the serial data transmission signal is input to the input terminal of the serial I / O port for the main control board of the peripheral control MPU 1511a. When is LOW, the voltage applied to the base terminal of the transistor MTR50 is pulled up to the + 5V side by the resistor MR50, and when the transistor MTR50 is turned on, the photocoupler AIC10 is turned on, so that the photocoupler AIC10 is turned on. The main peripheral serial data transmission signal whose logic is LOW when the voltage applied to the collector terminal is lowered to the ground (GND) side is input to the input terminal of the serial I / O port for the main control board of the peripheral control MPU1511a. .. As described above, the logic of the main peripheral serial data transmission signal output from the collector terminal of the photocoupler AIC10 is the same as the logic of the main peripheral serial data transmission signal transmitted from the TXB terminal of the main control MPU 1310a to the peripheral control board 1510. It is the logic of.

As described above, in the present embodiment, the + 5V power supply line to which the control reference voltage of the main control MPU 1310a is applied and the + 12V power supply line to which the communication voltage of + 12V applied via the diode MD50 is applied. However, measures are taken when a power failure or momentary power failure occurs and the control reference voltage and communication voltage drop. That is, for the main peripheral serial transmission port 1310ae built in the main control MPU 1310a, a + 5V power supply line, a positive terminal of the electrolytic capacitor MC2 using the electrolytic capacitor MC2 of the main control filter circuit 1310h as the first auxiliary power supply, and Even if the control reference voltage applied from the + 5V power supply line drops due to a power failure or momentary power failure due to the electrical parallel connection, the electrolytic capacitor of the main control filter circuit 1310h, which is the first auxiliary power supply. By applying the control reference voltage from the positive terminal of the MC2, the state in which the control reference voltage is applied can be maintained, and it is composed of the resistors MR50, the resistors MR51, MR52, and the transistor MTR50. No reset function to function as a communication interface circuit For the main control output circuit 1310cc, + 12V applied to the + 12V power supply line is applied to the anode terminal of the diode MD50 as a communication voltage, and the cathode terminal of this diode MD50. And the positive terminal of the electrolytic capacitor MC50, which is the second auxiliary power supply, are electrically connected in parallel, so that a power failure or momentary power failure occurs and the voltage is applied from the + 12V power supply line via the diode MD50. Even if the voltage drops, the communication voltage from the positive terminal of the electrolytic capacitor MC50, which is the second auxiliary power supply, is applied, so that the state in which the communication voltage is applied can be maintained. There is. As a result, it is possible to prevent the command being transmitted from the main control board 1310 to the peripheral control board 1510 to be interrupted, and it is possible to prevent the command from being missing. Therefore, the peripheral control board 1510 reliably receives the command being transmitted. can do. Therefore, it is possible to eliminate the missing command immediately after the occurrence of a power failure or at the time of a momentary power failure.

Further, a plurality of commands set in the transmission buffer register 1310aeb of the main peripheral serial transmission port 1310ae built in the main control MPU 1310a are all composed of the resistor MR50, the resistors MR51, MR52, and the transistor MTR50 as the main peripheral serial data. No reset function to function as a communication interface circuit 470 μF is set as the capacitance of the electrolytic capacitor MC2 of the main control filter circuit 1310h so that transmission to the peripheral control board 1510 can be completed via the main control output circuit 1310 cc. Therefore, 220 μF is set as the capacitance of the electrolytic capacitor MC50. As a result, even if a power failure or a momentary power failure occurs during transmission from the main control board 1310 to the peripheral control board 1510, all the commands set in the transmission buffer register 1310aeb are reset to function as an interface circuit as main peripheral serial data. Since transmission to the peripheral control board 1510 can be completed via the main control output circuit 1310 cc without a function, the peripheral control board 1510 does not interrupt a plurality of commands set in the transmission buffer register 1310aeb and is missing. It can be received reliably without any problems.

[10. Payout control board circuit]
Next, the circuit and the like of the payout control board 951 shown in FIG. 70 will be described with reference to FIGS. 80 to 85. 80 is a circuit diagram showing a circuit of a payout control unit and the like, FIG. 81 is a circuit diagram showing a payout control input circuit, FIG. 82 is a circuit diagram showing a continuation of FIG. 81, and FIG. 83 is a payout motor drive. FIG. 84 is a circuit diagram showing a circuit, FIG. 84 is a circuit diagram showing a CR unit input / output circuit, and FIG. 85 is an input / output diagram showing various input / output signals to and from the main control board and various output signals to an external terminal board. Is. First, the payout control filter circuit will be described, and then the payout control unit circuit, various input / output signals with the main control board, and various output signals to the external terminal board will be described.

[10-1. Payout control filter circuit]
As shown in FIG. 80, the payout control filter circuit 951a mainly includes a payout control 3-terminal filter PIC0. The payout control 3-terminal filter PIC0 is a T-type filter circuit, which is magnetically shielded with ferrite and has excellent attenuation characteristics. + 5V from the power supply board 931 shown in FIG. 75 is applied to the 1st terminal of the payout control 3-terminal filter PIC0, and one end is electrically connected to the other end of the capacitor PC0 grounded to ground (GND). + 5V from the power supply board 931 is first smoothed by removing ripples (AC components folded by the voltage) by the capacitor PC0. The 2nd terminal of the payout control 3 terminal filter PIC0 is grounded to ground (GND), and the 3rd terminal of the payout control 3 terminal filter PIC0 outputs + 5V from which the noise component is removed.

The third terminal of the payout control three-terminal filter PIC0 is the other end of the capacitor PC1 and the electrolytic capacitor PC2 (capacitance: 180 microfarad (μF) in this embodiment) whose one end is grounded to ground (GND). By being electrically connected to each of them, ripples are further removed from + 5V output from the 3rd terminal of the payout control 3 terminal filter PIC0 and smoothed. This smoothed + 5V is applied to the power supply terminal of the payout control system reset PIC1, the VCS terminal which is the power supply terminal of the payout control crystal oscillator PX0, the VDD terminal which is the power supply terminal of the payout control MPU952a, and the like, which will be described later. .. If a power failure or momentary power failure occurs at the VDD terminal, which is the power supply terminal of the payout control MPU952a, and the power supply from the pachinko island facility is cut off, the electric charge charged in the electrolytic capacitor PC2 will cause a power failure or momentary power failure. It is applied as + 5V over a period of about 7 milliseconds (ms) after it is generated.

The VDD terminal of the payout control MPU952a is electrically connected to the other end of the capacitor PC3 whose one end is grounded to ground (GND), and the + 5V applied to the VDD terminal is further stripped of ripples by the capacitor PC3 and smoothed. ing. The VSS terminal, which is the ground terminal of the payout control MPU952a, is grounded to the ground (GND).

Further, the DDR terminal of the payout control MPU952a is electrically connected to the anode terminal of the diode PD0 in addition to being electrically connected to the capacitor PC3. The cathode terminal of the diode PD0 is electrically connected to the VBB terminal, which is the power supply terminal of the RAM (RAM with built-in payout control) built in the payout control MPU952a, and one end of the capacitor PC4 is grounded to ground (GND). It is electrically connected to the other end of the. The VBB terminal of the RAM with built-in payout control is electrically connected to the cathode terminal of the diode PD0 and the other end of the capacitor PC4, and is also connected to the plus of the capacitor BC1 of the power supply board 931 shown in FIG. 75 via the resistor PR0. It is electrically connected to the terminal. That is, + 5V smoothed by removing the noise component by the payout control filter circuit 951a is applied to the VDD terminal of the payout control MPU952a, and is applied to the VBB terminal of the payout control built-in RAM and the capacitor BC1 via the diode PD0. It is designed to be applied to the positive terminal of. As a result, as described above, when the + 5V created by the power supply creation circuit 935d of the power supply board 931 shown in FIG. 75 is no longer supplied to the payout control board 951, the charge charged in the capacitor BC1 is paid VBB. Since the electric charge is supplied to the payout control board 951 as a result, the current is blocked by the diode PD0 and does not flow to the VDD terminal of the payout control MPU952a, and the payout control MPU952a does not operate. The stored contents are retained by applying the pay VBB. As described above, in the pachinko machine 1 according to this embodiment, the backup power supply circuit that supplies the backup power supply to the payout control built-in RAM is composed of the diode PD0 and the capacitor BC1.

[10-2. Payout control unit circuit]
In addition to the payout control MPU952a, the payout control input circuit 952b, the payout control output circuit 952c, the payout motor drive circuit 952d, and the CR unit input / output circuit 952e, the payout control unit 952 resets as peripheral circuits as shown in FIG. It mainly consists of a payout control system reset PIC1 that outputs a signal and a payout control crystal oscillator PX0 (8 megahertz (MHz) in this embodiment) that outputs a clock signal. Here, the payout control system reset will be described first, and then the payout control crystal oscillator, the payout control input circuit, the payout motor drive circuit, the CR unit input / output circuit, and various input / output signals to the payout control MPU will be described.

[10-2-1. Payout control system reset]
As shown in FIG. 80, + 5V smoothed by removing the noise component by the payout control filter circuit 951a is applied to the power supply terminal of the payout control system reset PIC1. The payout control system reset PIC1 resets the payout control MPU952a and the payout control output circuit 952ca with a reset function, respectively, and has a built-in delay circuit. The delay capacitance terminal of the payout control system reset PIC1 is electrically connected to the other end of the capacitor PC5 whose one end is grounded to ground (GND), and the delay time by the delay circuit is set by the capacitance of this capacitor PC5. You can do it. Specifically, the payout control system reset PIC1 outputs a system reset signal from the output terminal after the delay time elapses when the + 5V input to the power supply terminal reaches a threshold value (for example, 4.25V).

The output terminal of the payout control system reset PIC1 is electrically connected to the SRT0 terminal, which is the reset terminal of the payout control MPU952a, and the reset terminal of the payout control output circuit 952ca with a reset function. The output terminal is an open collector output type, and is a capacitor whose one end is electrically connected to the other end of the pull-up resistor PR1 which is electrically connected to the + 5V power supply line, and one end is grounded to ground (GND). It is electrically connected to the other end of the PC 6. This capacitor PC6 plays a role as a low-pass filter. When the voltage input to the power supply terminal is larger than the threshold value, the output terminal is pulled up to the + 5V side by the pull-up resistor PR1 and the logic becomes HI, and this logic becomes the SRT0 terminal of the payout control MPU952a and the payout control output with a reset function. While each is input to the reset terminal of the circuit 952ca, when the voltage input to the power supply terminal is smaller than the threshold value, the logic becomes LOW, and this logic becomes the SRT0 terminal of the payout control MPU952a and the payout control output circuit 952ca with a reset function. It is input to each reset terminal. Since the SRT0 terminal of the payout control MPU952a and the reset terminal of the payout control output circuit 952ca with a reset function are negative logic inputs, respectively, when the voltage input to the power supply terminal becomes smaller than the threshold value, the payout control MPU952a and the reset function The payout control output circuit 952ca is reset. The power supply terminal is electrically connected to the other end of the capacitor PC7 whose one end is grounded to ground (GND), and the + 5V input to the power supply terminal is smoothed by removing ripples. Further, the ground terminal is grounded to the grant (GND), and the NC terminal is in a state of being electrically unconnected to the outside.

[10-2-2. Payout control crystal oscillator]
As shown in FIG. 80, the + 5V smoothed by removing the noise component by the payout control filter circuit 951a is input to the VCS terminal which is the power supply terminal of the payout control crystal oscillator PX0. This VCS terminal is electrically connected to the other end of the capacitor PC8 whose one end is grounded to ground (GND), and the + 5V input to the VCS terminal is further stripped of ripples and smoothed. Further, this smoothed + 5V is applied not only to the VCS terminal but also to the OE terminal which is the output enable terminal of the payout control crystal oscillator PX0. The payout control crystal oscillator PX0 outputs an 8 MHz clock signal from the OUT terminal, which is an output terminal, by applying + 5 V to its OE terminal.

The OUT terminal of the payout control crystal oscillator PX0 is electrically connected to the MCLK terminal, which is the clock terminal of the payout control MPU952a, and an 8 MHz clock signal is input to the payout control MPU952a. The GND terminal, which is the ground terminal of the payout control crystal oscillator PX0, is grounded to the grant (GND).

[10-2-3. Payout control input circuit]
In the payout control input circuit 952b, the payout power failure warning signal from the power failure monitoring circuit 1310e provided in the door frame opening switch 618, the main body frame opening switch 619, and the main control board 1310 shown in FIG. 75 is input. The circuit, the handle relay terminal plate 315 shown in FIG. 70, the circuit in which the detection signal from the full tank detection sensor 279 is input via the power supply board 931, the circuit in which the operation signal from the operation switch 954 is input, and the like. .. First, the circuit in which the detection signal from the door frame opening switch is input will be described, followed by the circuit in which the detection signal from the main body frame opening switch is input, the circuit in which the payout power failure warning signal from the power failure monitoring circuit is input, and the circuit in which the payout power failure warning signal from the power failure monitoring circuit is input. A circuit in which a detection signal from a full tank detection sensor is input and a circuit in which an operation signal from an operation switch is input will be described. Since the output terminals of various detection switches such as the full tank detection sensor 279, the ball burnout detection sensor 827, the payout detection sensor 842, and the rotation detection sensor 840 shown in FIG. 70 are open collector output types, various detections are made. Since the circuit configuration in which the detection signal from the switch is input is almost the same, a circuit in which the detection signal from the full tank detection sensor is input will be described here.

[10-2-3 (a). Circuit to which the detection signal from the door frame open switch is input]
The door frame opening switch 618 uses a normally closed type (normally closed (NC)), and the switch is turned on (conducting) with the door frame 3 released from the main body frame 4 as shown in FIG. 1, and the door frame is turned on. The switch is turned off (disconnected) when 3 is closed to the main body frame 4. The 2nd terminal of the door frame opening switch 618 is grounded to the ground (GND), while the 1st terminal of the door frame opening switch 618 has a pull-up resistor PR20 whose one end is electrically connected to the + 5V power supply line. It is electrically connected to the end and is also electrically connected to the base terminal of the transistor PTR 20 via a resistor PR21. In addition to being electrically connected to the resistor PR21, the base terminal of the transistor PTR20 is electrically connected to the other end of the resistor PR22 whose one end is grounded to ground (GND). Further, the first terminal of the door frame opening switch 618 is electrically connected to the pull-up resistor PR20, and is also electrically connected to the other end of the capacitor PC20 whose one end is grounded to ground (GND). .. The emitter terminal of the transistor PTR20 is grounded to ground (GND), and the collector terminal of the transistor PTR20 is electrically connected to the other end of the resistor PR23, one end of which is electrically connected to the + 5V power supply line, and a non-inverting buffer. Payout control via ICPIC20 (non-inverting buffer ICPIC20 includes eight non-inverting buffer circuits, and formats and outputs the logic of the signal waveform input to one of them (PIC20A) without inverting it). It is electrically connected to the input terminal PA0 of the input port PA of the MPU952a. When the transistor PTR 20 is turned ON / OFF, the logic of the signal output from the collector terminal of the transistor PTR 20 changes, and the signal is input to the input terminal PA0 of the input port PA of the payout control MPU952a as a door opening signal.

Further, the first terminal of the door frame opening switch 618 is pulled up to the + 5V side by the pull-up resistor PR20 and electrically connected to the base terminal of the transistor PTR20 via the resistor PR21, and is also connected to the base terminal of the transistor PTR20 by the pull-up resistor PR20 on the + 5V side. It is pulled up to and electrically connected to the base terminal of the transistor PTR21 via a resistor PR24. In addition to being electrically connected to the resistor PR24, the base terminal of the transistor PTR21 is electrically connected to the other end of the resistor PR25, one end of which is grounded to ground (GND). The emitter terminal of the transistor PTR21 is grounded to ground (GND), and the collector terminal of the transistor PTR21 is electrically connected to the external terminal plate 784 via wiring (harness). When the collector terminal of the transistor PTR21 is electrically connected to the external terminal plate 784 via wiring (harness), one end of the external terminal plate 784 is electrically connected to the + 12V power supply line, which is not shown. It is electrically connected to the other end of the up resistor. When the transistor PTR21 is turned ON / OFF, the logic of the signal output from the collector terminal of the transistor PTR21 is changed, and the signal is input to the external terminal plate 784 as the outer end frame door opening information output signal.

Further, the first terminal of the door frame opening switch 618 is pulled up to the + 5V side by the pull-up resistor PR20 and electrically connected to the base terminal of the transistor PTR20 via the resistor PR21, and is also electrically connected to the + 5V side by the pull-up resistor PR20. In addition to being pulled up to the base terminal of the transistor PTR21 via the resistor PR24, it is pulled up to the + 5V side by the pull-up resistor PR20 and electrically connected to the base terminal of the transistor PTR22 via the resistor PR26. ing. The base terminal of the transistor PTR22 is electrically connected to the resistor PR26, and is also electrically connected to the other end of the resistor PR27 whose one end is grounded to ground (GND). The emitter terminal of the transistor PTR22 is grounded to ground (GND), and the collector terminal of the transistor PTR22 is electrically connected to the main control board 1310 shown in FIG. 69 via wiring (harness). When the collector terminal of the transistor PTR22 is electrically connected to the main control board 1310 via wiring (harness), one end of the main control input circuit 1310b of the main control board 1310 shown in FIG. 69 is a + 12V power supply. It is electrically connected to the other end of a pull-up resistor (not shown) that is electrically connected to the line. When the transistor PTR22 is turned ON / OFF, the logic of the signal output from the collector terminal of the transistor PTR22 changes, and the signal is input to the main control board 1310 as a main frame door opening signal.

The circuit composed of the pull-up resistor PR20 and the capacitor PC20 is a switch signal generation circuit, and when the door frame 3 is opened from the main body frame 4 or when the door frame 3 is closed by the main body frame 4. It is configured as a circuit having a function of absorbing voltage fluctuations from the door frame opening switch 618 due to a fluttering phenomenon in which the contacts constituting the door frame opening switch 618 are repeatedly turned on and off for a short time.

The circuit composed of the resistors PR21, PR22 and the transistor PTR20, the circuit composed of the resistors PR24, PR25 and the transistor PTR21, and the circuit composed of the resistors PR26, PR27 and the transistor PTR22 are door frame opening switches. It is a switch circuit that turns ON / OFF according to the detection signal from 618.

When the door frame 3 is opened from the main body frame 4, the door frame opening switch 618 is ON, so that the voltage applied to the base terminal of the transistor PTR 20 is lowered to the ground (GND) side, so that the transistor PTR 20 is opened. It turns off, and the switch circuit also turns off. As a result, the voltage applied to the collector terminal of the transistor PTR20 is pulled up to the + 5V side by the pull-up resistor PR23, and the door frame opening signal whose logic is HI is input to the input terminal PA0 of the input port PA of the payout control MPU952a. NS. Further, in the state where the door frame 3 is opened from the main body frame 4, since the door frame opening switch 618 is ON, the voltage applied to the base terminal of the transistor PTR21 is lowered to the ground (GND) side, so that the transistor The PTR21 is turned off, and the switch circuit is also turned off.
As a result, the voltage applied to the collector terminal of the transistor PTR21 is pulled up to the + 12V side by the pull-up resistor of the external terminal plate 784 via the wiring (harness), and the logic becomes HI. Is input to the external terminal board 784. Further, in the state where the door frame 3 is opened from the main body frame 4, since the door frame opening switch 618 is ON, the voltage applied to the base terminal of the transistor PTR22 is lowered to the ground (GND) side, so that the transistor The PTR 22 is turned off, and the switch circuit is also turned off. As a result, the voltage applied to the collector terminal of the transistor PTR22 is pulled up to the + 12V side by the pull-up resistance of the main control input circuit 1310b of the main control board 1310 via the wiring (harness), and the logic becomes HI. The door opening signal is input to the main control board 1310.

On the other hand, when the door frame 3 is closed from the main body frame 4, the door frame opening switch 618 is turned off, so that the voltage applied to the base terminal of the transistor PTR 20 is pulled up to the + 5V side by the pull-up resistor PR20. Then, the transistor PTR20 is turned on, and the switch circuit is also turned on. As a result, the voltage applied to the collector terminal of the transistor PTR 20 is lowered to the ground (GND) side, and the door frame opening signal whose logic is LOW is input to the input terminal PA0 of the input port PA of the payout control MPU952a. Further, when the door frame 3 is closed from the main body frame 4, the door frame opening switch 618 is turned off, so that the voltage applied to the base terminal of the transistor PTR 21 is raised to the + 5 V side, so that the transistor PTR 21 is turned on. However, the switch circuit will also be turned on. As a result, the voltage applied to the collector terminal of the transistor PTR21 is lowered to the ground (GND) side, and the outer end frame door opening information output signal whose logic is LOW is input to the external terminal plate 784. Further, when the door frame 3 is closed from the main body frame 4, the door frame opening switch 618 is turned off, so that the voltage applied to the base terminal of the transistor PTR 22 is raised to the + 5 V side, so that the transistor PTR 22 is turned on. However, the switch circuit will also be turned on. As a result, the voltage applied to the collector terminal of the transistor PTR 22 is lowered to the ground (GND) side, and the main frame door opening signal whose logic is LOW is input to the main control board 1310.

In this way, when the door frame 3 is opened from the main body frame 4, when the door frame opening switch 618 is turned on, the door frame opening signal whose logic is HI is the input terminal of the input port PA of the payout control MPU952a. The outer end frame door opening information output signal input to PA0 and whose logic is HI is input to the external terminal board 784, and the main frame door opening signal whose logic is HI is input to the main control board 1310. When the door frame 3 is closed to the main body frame 4, the door frame opening switch 618 is turned off, so that the door frame opening signal whose logic is LOW is input to the input terminal PA0 of the input port PA of the payout control MPU952a. , The outer end frame door opening information output signal whose logic is LOW is input to the external terminal board 784, and the main frame door opening signal whose logic is LOW is input to the main control board 1310.

[10-2-3 (b). Circuit to which the detection signal from the main body frame release switch is input]
The main body frame release switch 619 uses a normally closed type (normally closed (NC)), and the switch is turned on (conducting) with the main body frame 4 released from the outer frame 2 as shown in FIG. 1, and the main body frame is turned on. The switch is turned off (disconnected) when 4 is closed to the outer frame 2. The 2nd terminal of the main body frame opening switch 619 is grounded to the ground (GND), while the 1st terminal of the main body frame opening switch 619 has a pull-up resistor PR28 whose one end is electrically connected to the + 5V power supply line. It is electrically connected to the end and is also electrically connected to the base terminal of the transistor PTR23 via a resistor PR29. The base terminal of the transistor PTR23 is electrically connected to the resistor PR29, and is also electrically connected to the other end of the resistor PR30 whose one end is grounded to ground (GND). In addition to being electrically connected to the pull-up resistor PR28, the first terminal of the main body frame release switch 619 is electrically connected to the other end of the capacitor PC21 whose one end is grounded to ground (GND). .. The emitter terminal of the transistor PTR23 is grounded to ground (GND), and the collector terminal of the transistor PTR23 is electrically connected to the collector terminal of the transistor PTR21 described above, and is connected to the external terminal plate 784 via wiring (harness). It is electrically connected. When the collector terminal of the transistor PTR23 is electrically connected to the external terminal plate 784 via wiring (harness), one end of the external terminal plate 784 is electrically connected to the + 12V power supply line, which is not shown. It is electrically connected to the other end of the up resistor. When the transistor PTR23 is turned ON / OFF, the logic of the signal output from the collector terminal of the transistor PTR23 is changed, and the signal is input to the external terminal plate 784 as the outer end frame door opening information output signal.

Further, the first terminal of the main body frame opening switch 619 is pulled up to the + 5V side by the pull-up resistor PR28 and electrically connected to the base terminal of the transistor PTR23 via the resistor PR29, and is also connected to the base terminal of the transistor PTR23 by the pull-up resistor PR28 on the + 5V side. It is pulled up to and electrically connected to the base terminal of the transistor PTR24 via a resistor PR31. In addition to being electrically connected to the resistor PR31, the base terminal of the transistor PTR24 is electrically connected to the other end of the resistor PR32 whose one end is grounded to ground (GND). The emitter terminal of the transistor PTR24 is grounded to ground (GND), and the collector terminal of the transistor PTR24 is electrically connected to the collector terminal of the transistor PTR22 described above, and is shown in FIG. 69 via wiring (harness). It is electrically connected to the main control board 1310. When the collector terminal of the transistor PTR24 is electrically connected to the main control board 1310 via wiring (harness), one end of the main control input circuit 1310b of the main control board 1310 shown in FIG. 69 is a + 12V power supply. It is electrically connected to the other end of a pull-up resistor (not shown) that is electrically connected to the line. When the transistor PTR24 is turned ON / OFF, the logic of the signal output from the collector terminal of the transistor PTR24 changes, and the signal is input to the main control board 1310 as a main frame door opening signal.

The circuit composed of the pull-up resistor PR28 and the capacitor PC21 is a switch signal generation circuit, and when the main body frame 4 is released from the outer frame 2 or when the main body frame 4 is closed by the outer frame 2. It is configured as a circuit having a function of absorbing voltage fluctuations from the main body frame opening switch 619 due to a fluttering phenomenon in which the contacts constituting the main body frame opening switch 619 are repeatedly turned on and off for a short time.

The circuit composed of the resistors PR29 and PR30 and the transistor PTR23 and the circuit composed of the resistors PR31, PR32 and the transistor PTR24 are switch circuits that are turned ON / OFF by a detection signal from the main body frame opening switch 619.

When the main body frame 4 is opened from the outer frame 2, since the main body frame release switch 619 is ON, the voltage applied to the base terminal of the transistor PTR23 is lowered to the ground (GND) side, so that the transistor PTR23 is opened. It turns off, and the switch circuit also turns off. As a result, the voltage applied to the collector terminal of the transistor PTR23 is pulled up to the + 12V side by the pull-up resistor of the external terminal plate 784 via the wiring (harness), and the logic becomes HI. Is input to the external terminal board 784. Further, in the state where the main body frame 4 is opened from the outer frame 2, since the main body frame opening switch 619 is ON, the voltage applied to the base terminal of the transistor PTR24 is lowered to the ground (GND) side, so that the transistor The PTR24 is turned off, and the switch circuit is also turned off. As a result, the voltage applied to the collector terminal of the transistor PTR24 is pulled up to the + 12V side by the pull-up resistance of the main control input circuit 1310b of the main control board 1310 via the wiring (harness), and the logic becomes HI. The door opening signal is input to the main control board 1310.

On the other hand, when the main body frame 4 is closed to the outer frame 2, since the main body frame opening switch 619 is OFF, the voltage applied to the base terminal of the transistor PTR23 is pulled up to the + 5V side by the pull-up resistor PR28. Then, the transistor PTR23 is turned on, and the switch circuit is also turned on. As a result, the voltage applied to the collector terminal of the transistor PTR23 is lowered to the ground (GND) side in the external terminal plate 784 via the wiring (harness), and the logic becomes LOW. It is input to the external terminal board 784. Further, in the state where the main body frame 4 is closed to the outer frame 2, since the main body frame opening switch 619 is OFF, the voltage applied to the base terminal of the transistor PTR24 is pulled up to the + 5V side by the pull-up resistor PR28. Then, the transistor PTR24 is turned on, and the switch circuit is also turned on. As a result, the voltage applied to the collector terminal of the transistor PTR24 is lowered to the ground (GND) side in the main control board 1310 via the wiring (harness), and the main frame door opening signal whose logic becomes LOW is the main control board. It is input to 1310.

In this way, when the main body frame 4 is released from the outer frame 2, the main body frame opening switch 619 is turned on, so that the outer end frame door opening information output signal whose logic is HI is input to the external terminal board 784. The main frame door opening signal whose logic is HI is input to the main control board 1310, while when the main body frame 4 is closed to the outer frame 2, the main frame opening switch 619 is turned off to perform logic. The outer end frame door opening information output signal whose logic is LOW is input to the external terminal board 784, and the main frame door opening signal whose logic is LOW is input to the main control board 1310.

In the present embodiment, as described above, one or both of the state in which the door frame 3 is closed to the main body frame 4 and the state in which the main body frame 4 is opened from the outer frame 2 are in the present embodiment. Even in the case of, since the main frame door opening signal is input to the main control board 1310, the main control MPU 1310a of the main control board 1310 shown in FIG. 69 is the main frame door opening signal. Although it is not possible to determine whether the door frame 3 is open from the main body frame 4 or the main body frame 4 is open from the outer frame 2, the door frame 3 and / or The player can determine that the main body frame 4 is open, which does not occur during the normal game, and the outer end frame door opening information output signal is sent to the external terminal plate 784. Since it is input, this outer end frame door opening information output signal is transmitted to the hall computer via the external terminal plate 784, and the hall computer uses the outer end frame door opening information output signal to transmit the door frame. Although it is not possible to determine whether 3 is in the state of being released from the main body frame 4 or the main body frame 4 is in the state of being released from the outer frame 2, the door frame 3 and / or the main body frame 4 is opened. It is possible to determine that the player who is playing the door has a state that does not occur during the normal game.

Further, in the present embodiment, as described above, by adopting the normally closed switch for the door frame opening switch 618 and the main body frame opening switch 619, the door frame opening switch 618 is short-circuited for some reason and the switch is turned on ( Even if the door frame 3 is released from the main body frame 4 and the main body frame opening switch 619 is short-circuited for some reason and the switch is turned on (conducting), the main body frame is turned on. 4 is released from the outer frame 2. In this way, by adopting the normally closed switch for the door frame opening switch 618 and the main body frame opening switch 619, the main frame door opening signal can be output to the main control board 1310 even at the time of a short circuit, and the outer end can be output. The frame door opening information output signal can be transmitted to the hall computer via the external terminal board 784.

If the door frame opening switch 618 and the main body frame opening switch 619 are changed from the normally closed switch to the normally open type (normally open (NO)) switch (door frame opening switch 618'and main body frame opening switch 619'), , The door frame opening switch 618'turns on (conducts) when the door frame 3 is closed from the main body frame 4, and turns off (disconnects) when the door frame 3 is opened to the main body frame 4. .. The main body frame opening switch 619'turns on (conducts) when the main body frame 4 is closed from the outer frame 2, and turns off (disconnects) when the main body frame 4 is opened to the outer frame 2. Then, even if the door frame opening switch 618'is disconnected for some reason and the switch is turned off (disconnected), the door frame 3 is released from the main body frame 4, and the main body is released for some reason. Even if the frame opening switch 619'is disconnected and the switch is turned off (disconnected), the main body frame 4 is released from the outer frame 2. In this way, even if the door frame opening switch 618'and the main body frame opening switch 619'are adopted as normally open switches, the main frame door opening signal can be output to the main control board 1310 even when the wire is broken. The outer end frame door opening information output signal can be transmitted to the hall computer via the external terminal plate 784.

[10-2-3 (c). A circuit to which a power outage warning signal is input from the power outage monitoring circuit]
The transmission line for transmitting the payout power failure warning signal from the power failure monitoring circuit 1310e provided in the main control board 1310 is electrically connected to and resists the other end of the pull-up resistor PR40 whose one end is electrically connected to the + 12V power supply line. It is electrically connected to the base terminal of the transistor PTR40 via PR41. In addition to being electrically connected to the resistor PR41, the base terminal of the transistor PTR40 is electrically connected to the other end of the resistor PR42, one end of which is grounded to ground (GND). The emitter terminal of the transistor PTR40 is grounded to ground (GND), and the collector terminal of the transistor PTR40 is electrically connected to the other end of the resistor PR43, one end of which is electrically connected to the + 5V power supply line, and a non-inverting buffer. Payout control via ICPIC40 (non-inverting buffer ICPIC40 includes eight non-inverting buffer circuits, and shapes and outputs the logic of the signal waveform input to one of them (PIC40A) without inverting it). It is electrically connected to the input terminal PA1 of the input port PA of the MPU952a. When the transistor PTR40 is turned ON / OFF, the logic of the signal output from the collector terminal of the transistor PTR40 changes, and the signal is input to the input terminal PA1 of the input port PA of the payout control MPU952a as a payout power failure warning signal.

The circuit composed of the resistors PR41 and PR42 and the transistor PTR40 is a switch circuit that is turned ON / OFF by a payout power failure warning signal from the power failure monitoring circuit 1310e provided in the main control board 1310.

As described above, the power failure monitoring circuit 1310e monitors signs of power failure or momentary power failure of two types of voltages, + 12V and + 24V, from the power supply board 931. When the power failure or momentary power failure sign is detected, there is no reset function. A payout power failure warning signal is output to the payout control board 951 as a power failure notice via the main control output circuit 1310 cc. The power failure monitoring circuit 1310e monitors signs of power failure or momentary power failure of + 12V and + 24V voltages, and as described above, the condition that the voltage of + 24V is larger than the power failure detection voltage V1pf, and the voltage of + 12V is higher than the power failure detection voltage V2pf. When both of the conditions of being large are satisfied, the voltage applied to the collector terminal of the transistor MTR22 in the subsequent stage is lowered to the ground (GND) side on the payout control board 951 via the wiring (harness), and the logic becomes LOW. While the payout power failure warning signal is input to the payout control board 951, one of the conditions that the + 24V voltage is smaller than the power failure detection voltage V1pf and the + 12V voltage is smaller than the power failure detection voltage V2pf. When the condition is satisfied, the voltage applied to the collector terminal of the transistor MTR22 in the subsequent stage is pulled up to the + 12V side by the pull-up resistor PR40 described above via the wiring (harness), and the logic becomes HI. Is input to the payout control board 951.

When both the condition that the voltage of + 24V is larger than the power failure detection voltage V1pf and the condition that the voltage of + 12V is larger than the power failure detection voltage V2pf are satisfied, that is, there is no sign of power failure or momentary power failure of the + 12V and + 24V voltages. Occasionally, since the payout power failure warning signal whose logic is LOW is input to the payout control board 951, the voltage applied to the base terminal of the transistor PTR40 is lowered to the ground (GND) side, so that the transistor PTR40 is turned off. The voltage applied to the collector terminal of the transistor PTR40 is raised to the + 5V side by the resistor PR43. As a result, the payout power failure warning signal whose logic is HI is input from the collector terminal of the transistor PTR40 to the input terminal PA1 of the input port PA of the payout control MPU952a.

On the other hand, when either of the condition that the voltage of + 24V is smaller than the power failure detection voltage V1pf and the condition that the voltage of + 12V is smaller than the power failure detection voltage V2pf is satisfied, that is, the voltage of + 12V and / or + 24V When there is a sign of power failure or momentary power failure, the payout power failure warning signal whose logic is HI is input to the payout control board 951, so that the payout power failure warning signal from the power failure monitoring circuit 1310e is applied to the base terminal of the transistor PTR40. When the voltage is pulled up to the + 12V side by the pull-up resistor PR40, the transistor PTR40 is turned on, and the voltage applied to the collector terminal of the transistor PTR40 is lowered to the ground (GND) side. As a result, the payout power failure warning signal in which the logic of the collector terminal of the transistor PTR40 is LOW is input to the input terminal PA1 of the input port PA of the payout control MPU952a.

In this way, when there is a sign of power failure or momentary power failure of + 12V and / or + 24V voltage, the payout power failure warning signal whose logic is HI is input to the input terminal PA1 of the input port PA of the payout control MPU952a, while When there is no sign of a power failure or momentary power failure of the + 12V and + 24V voltages, the payout power failure warning signal whose logic is LOW is input to the input terminal PA1 of the input port PA of the payout control MPU952a. As described above, when there is a sign of a power failure or momentary power failure of + 12V and / or + 24V, a power failure warning signal whose logic is HI is input to the input terminal PA1 of the input port PA of the main control MPU 1310a. On the other hand, when there is no sign of power failure or momentary power failure of + 12V and + 24V voltage, the power failure warning signal is input to the input terminal PA1 of the input port PA of the main control MPU 1310a, so that the power failure monitoring circuit 1310e The logic of the payout power failure warning signal input to the payout control MPU952a and the logic of the power failure warning signal input to the main control MPU1310a are the same logic.

[10-2-3 (d). Circuit to which the detection signal from the full tank detection sensor is input]
The detection signal from the full tank detection sensor 279 provided in the foul cover unit 270 shown in FIG. 1 is passed through the handle relay terminal plate 315 shown in FIG. 1 and the power supply board 931 shown in FIG. Is entered in. The output terminal of the full tank detection sensor 279 is configured as an open collector output type in which the emitter terminal is grounded to ground (GND), and one end of the payout control board 951 is electrically connected to the + 12V power supply line. It is electrically connected to the other end of the pull-up resistor PR44a and is also electrically connected to the first terminal of the 3-terminal filter PIC50 for a full tank detection sensor. The 3-terminal filter PIC50 for a full tank detection sensor is a T-type filter circuit, which is magnetically shielded with ferrite and has excellent attenuation characteristics.

The 2nd terminal of the 3-terminal filter PIC50 for the full tank detection sensor is grounded to ground (GND), and the 3rd terminal of the 3-terminal filter PIC50 for the full tank detection sensor is 3 for the full tank detection sensor via the resistor PR44b. It is electrically connected to the first terminal of the terminal filter PIC50 and is also electrically connected to the base terminal of the transistor PTR41 via the resistor PR45. As a result, the detection signal of the full tank detection sensor 279 is input to the base terminal of the transistor PTR41 after removing the noise component in the 3-terminal filter PIC50 for the full tank detection sensor. In addition to being electrically connected to the resistor PR45, the base terminal of the transistor PTR41 is electrically connected to the other end of the resistor PR46 whose one end is grounded to ground (GND) and one end to ground (GND). It is electrically connected to the other end of the electrically connected capacitor PC40. The capacitor PC 40 plays a role as a low-pass filter. The emitter terminal of the transistor PTR41 is grounded to ground (GND), and the collector terminal of the transistor PTR41 is electrically connected to the other end of the resistor PR47, one end of which is electrically connected to the + 5V power supply line, and a non-inverting buffer. Payout control via ICPIC40 (non-inverting buffer ICPIC40 includes eight non-inverting buffer circuits, and shapes and outputs the logic of the signal waveform input to one of them (PIC40B) without inverting it). It is electrically connected to the input terminal PA2 of the input port PA of the MPU952a. When the transistor PTR41 is turned ON / OFF, the logic of the signal output from the collector terminal of the transistor PTR41 changes, and the signal is input to the input terminal PA2 of the input port PA of the payout control MPU952a as a full tank signal.

The circuit composed of the resistors PR45 and PR46 and the transistor PTR41 is a switch circuit that is turned ON / OFF by a detection signal from the full tank detection sensor 279.

As described above, the full tank detection sensor 279 detects whether or not the game ball in which the accommodation space in the second ball passage of the foul cover unit 270 is stored is full. In the present embodiment, when the accommodation space is not full in the stored game ball, the voltage applied to the output terminal of the full tank detection sensor 279 is applied to the output terminal of the full tank detection sensor 279 via the handle relay terminal plate 315 and the power supply board 931. When the payout control board 951 is pulled up to the + 12V side by the pull-up resistor 44a and the signal whose logic is HI is input to the payout control board 951, the accommodation space is filled with the stored game balls. , The voltage applied to the output terminal of the full tank detection sensor 279 is lowered to the ground (GND) side on the payout control board 951 via the handle relay terminal board 315 and the power supply board 931, and the logic becomes LOW. Is input to the payout control board 951.

When the accommodation space is not full in the stored game ball, the voltage applied to the output terminal of the full tank detection sensor 279 is applied to the payout control board 951 via the handle relay terminal board 315 and the power supply board 931. When the signal pulled up to the + 12V side by the pull-up resistor 44a and the logic becomes HI is input to the base terminal of the above-mentioned transistor PTR41, the transistor PTR41 is turned on and the switch circuit is also turned on. As a result, the voltage applied to the collector terminal of the transistor PTR41 is lowered to the ground (GND) side, and the full tank signal whose logic is LOW is input to the input terminal PA2 of the input port PA of the payout control MPU952a.

On the other hand, when the game ball in which the accommodation space is stored is full, the voltage applied to the output terminal of the full tank detection sensor 279 is passed through the handle relay terminal plate 315 and the power supply board 931 to the payout control board. In 951, when the signal pulled down to the ground (GND) side and the logic becomes LOW is input to the base terminal of the transistor PTR41 described above, the transistor PTR41 is turned off and the switch circuit is also turned off. As a result, the voltage applied to the collector terminal of the transistor PTR41 is pulled up to the + 5V side by the resistor PR47, and the full tank signal whose logic is HI is input to the input terminal PA2 of the input port PA of the payout control MPU952a.

In the present embodiment, the detection signal from the full tank detection sensor 279 is input to the switch circuit composed of the resistor PR45, the resistor PR46, and the transistor PTR41 via the 3-terminal filter PIC50 for the full tank detection sensor. Although the circuit configuration was used, the detection signals from various detection switches such as the ball burnout detection sensor 827 and the payout detection sensor 842 shown in FIG. 70 are T-type filter circuits such as the 3-terminal filter PIC50 for the full tank detection sensor. The circuit configuration is such that it is directly input to each switch circuit without going through it. Since the full tank detection sensor 279 is provided in the foul cover unit 270 attached to the door frame 3, it is compared with the ball-out detection sensor 827, the payout detection sensor 842, etc. provided in the payout device 830 attached to the main body frame 4. , The path for transmitting the detection signal becomes extremely long, and it is extremely susceptible to noise.

The full tank detection sensor 279 detects whether or not the game ball in which the accommodation space in the second ball passage of the foul cover unit 270 is stored is full, and the payout control MPU952a is a full tank detection sensor. When it is determined that the game ball in which the accommodation space is stored is full based on the detection signal from 279, the drive control of the payout motor 834 is forcibly stopped to stop the payout of the game ball by the payout rotating body. It is designed to control. That is, when noise invades the transmission path (transmission line) that transmits the detection signal from the full tank detection sensor 279, the payout control MPU952a is a game ball in which the accommodation space is stored and is not full, but the payout motor 834 In some cases, the drive control is forcibly stopped to stop the payout of the game ball by the payout rotating body, and even though the game ball in which the accommodation space is stored is full, the payout motor 834 is driven. When the game ball is filled up to the upstream side of the prize ball passage described above by controlling and rotating the payout rotating body to continue paying out the game ball, the payout rotating body itself cannot rotate and the payout motor 834 In some cases, the load is abnormally applied to the payout motor 834, causing abnormal heat generation and failure, or the mechanism for transmitting the rotating shaft of the payout motor 834 to the rotational movement of the payout rotating body breaks down. be. Therefore, in the present embodiment, in order to prevent such a problem from occurring, the circuit configuration is configured so that the detection signal from the full tank detection sensor 279 is first removed by the noise component in the 3-terminal filter PIC50 for the full tank detection sensor. Adopted.

[10-2-3 (e). Circuit to which the operation signal from the operation switch is input]
The 1st and 2nd terminals, which are the output terminals of the operation switch 954, are grounded to the ground (GND), and the 3rd and 4th terminals, which are the output terminals of the operation switch 954, are moved to the + 5V side by the pull-up resistor PR48. It is pulled up and connected to the base terminal of the transistor PTR42 in the previous stage via a resistor PR49 and electrically. The base terminal of the transistor PTR 42 in the previous stage is electrically connected to the resistor PR49, and is also electrically connected to the other end of the resistor PR50 whose one end is grounded to ground (GND). In addition to being electrically connected to the pull-up resistor PR48, the fourth terminal, which is the output terminal of the operation switch 954, is electrically connected to the other end of the capacitor PC41 whose one end is grounded to ground (GND). ing. The emitter terminal of the transistor PTR42 in the previous stage is grounded to ground (GND), and the collector terminal of the transistor PTR42 in the previous stage is electrically connected to the other end of the resistor PR51 whose one end is electrically connected to the + 5V power supply line. At the same time, it is electrically connected to the base terminal of the transistor PTR43 in the subsequent stage via the resistor PR52. The base terminal of the transistor PTR43 in the subsequent stage is electrically connected to the resistor PR52, and is also electrically connected to the other end of the resistor PR53 whose one end is grounded to ground (GND). The emitter terminal of the latter transistor PTR43 is grounded to ground (GND), and the collector terminal of the latter transistor PTR43 is electrically connected to the other end of the resistor PR54, one end of which is electrically connected to the + 5V power supply line. The non-inverting buffer ICPIC40 (the non-inverting buffer ICPIC40 includes eight non-inverting buffer circuits, and formats and outputs the logic of the signal waveform input to one of them (PIC40C) without inverting it). It is electrically connected to the input terminal PA3 of the input port PA of the payout control MPU952a via. When the first-stage and second-stage transistors PTR42 and PTR43 are turned ON / OFF, the logic of the signal output from the collector terminal of the second-stage transistor PTR43 changes, and the signal becomes the RWMCLR signal as the input terminal PA3 of the input port PA of the payout control MPU952a. Is entered in.

In addition, the 3rd and 4th terminals, which are the output terminals of the operation switch 954, are pulled up to the + 5V side by the pull-up resistor PR48 and are electrically connected to the base terminal of the transistor PTR42 in the previous stage via the resistor PR49. It is pulled up to the + 5V side by the pull-up resistor PR48 and is electrically connected to the base terminal of the transistor PTR44 via the resistor PR55. In addition to being electrically connected to the resistor PR55, the base terminal of the transistor PTR44 is electrically connected to the other end of the resistor PR56, one end of which is grounded to ground (GND). The emitter terminal of the transistor PTR44 is grounded to ground (GND), and the collector terminal of the transistor PTR44 is electrically connected to the main control board 1310 via wiring (harness). When the collector terminal of the transistor PTR44 is electrically connected to the main control board 1310 via wiring (harness), one end of the main control input circuit 1310b of the main control board 1310 shown in FIG. 77 is + 12V. It is electrically connected to the other end of the pull-up resistor MR2 that is electrically connected to the power supply line. When the transistor PTR44 is turned ON / OFF, the logic of the signal output from the collector terminal of the transistor PTR44 changes, and the signal is input to the input terminal PA0 of the input port PA of the main control MPU1310a as a RAM clear signal.

The circuit composed of the pull-up resistor PR48 and the capacitor PC41 is a switch signal generation circuit, and when the operation switch 954 is pressed, the contacts constituting the operation switch 954 repeatedly turn on and off for a short time. It is configured as a circuit having a function of absorbing the fluctuation of the voltage from the operation switch 954 by the above.

The circuit composed of the resistors PR49, PR50, and the transistor PTR42 is the switch circuit in the front stage, and the circuit composed of the resistors PR52, PR53, and the transistor PTR43 is the switch circuit in the rear stage, and the resistors PR55, PR56, and the transistor PTR44. The circuit composed of is a switch circuit, which is turned on / off by an operation signal from the operation switch 954.

As described above, the operation switch 954 is used in the RAM (RAM with built-in payout control) built in the payout control MPU 952a of the payout control board 951 and the main control MPU 1310a of the main control board 1310 within a predetermined period from the time when the power is turned on. It is operated to clear the built-in RAM (main control built-in RAM), or when an error is notified after the power is turned on, it is operated to clear the error, and the power is turned on. The function to clear the RAM within a predetermined period from time and the error cancellation after the power is turned on (after the period during which the function as RAM clear is performed, that is, after the predetermined period has elapsed from the time when the power is turned on). It has a function. The operation signal from the operation switch 954 becomes a RAM clear signal in the function of clearing the RAM within a predetermined period from the time when the power is turned on, while after the power is turned on (after a predetermined period has elapsed from the time when the power is turned on). In the function of canceling the error in), it becomes an error canceling signal.

When the operation switch 954 is not operated, the operation signal whose logic is HI is the transistor in the previous stage because the 3rd and 4th terminals, which are the output terminals of the operation switch 954, are pulled up to the + 5V side by the pull-up resistor PR48. It is input to the base terminal of the PTR42 to turn on the transistor PTR42 in the previous stage, and the switch circuit in the previous stage is also turned on. When the voltage is lowered to the ground (GND) side, the transistor PTR43 in the subsequent stage is turned off, and the switch circuit in the subsequent stage is also turned off. As a result, the voltage applied to the collector terminal of the transistor PTR43 in the subsequent stage is pulled up to the + 5V side by the resistor PR54, and the RWMCLR signal whose logic is HI is input to the input terminal PA3 of the input port PA of the payout control MPU952a. The payout control MPU952a clears the RAM by erasing the information stored in the payout control built-in RAM when the logic of the RWMCLR signal input to the input terminal PA3 is HI within a predetermined period from the time when the power is turned on. It is judged that it is not an instruction, and after the power is turned on (after a predetermined period has passed since the power was turned on), if the logic of the RWMCLR signal input to the input terminal PA3 is HI, the error is cleared. Judge that it is not an instruction.

When the operation switch 954 is not operated, the operation signal whose logic is HI is the transistor PTR44 when the output terminals of the operation switch 954, the 3rd terminal and the 4th terminal, are pulled up to the + 5V side by the pull-up resistor PR48. The transistor PTR44 is turned on by being input to the base terminal of the above, and the switch circuit is also turned on. As a result, the voltage applied to the collector terminal of the transistor PTR44 is lowered to the ground (GND) side in the main control board 1310 via the wiring (harness), and the RAM clear signal whose logic is LOW is sent to the main control board 1310. Entered. When the RAM clear signal whose logic is LOW is input to the main control MPU 1310a of the main control board 1310 within a predetermined period from the time when the power is turned on, as described above, this logic is LOW. When the RAM clear signal is input to the base terminal of the transistor MTR0, the transistor MTR0 is turned off and the switch circuit is also turned off. As a result, the voltage applied to the collector terminal of the transistor MTR0 is pulled up to the + 5V side by the resistor MR5, and the RAM clear signal whose logic is HI is input to the input terminal PA0 of the input port PA of the main control MPU1310a. The main control MPU 1310a determines that when the logic of the RAM clear signal input to the input terminal PA0 is HI, it does not instruct to perform RAM clear for erasing the information stored in the main control built-in RAM.

On the other hand, when the operation switch 954 is being operated, the operation signal whose logic is LOW is the transistor in the previous stage because the 3rd and 4th terminals, which are the output terminals of the operation switch 954, are pulled down to the ground (GND) side. It is input to the base terminal of the PTR 42, the transistor PTR 42 in the previous stage is turned off, the switch circuit in the previous stage is also turned off, and it is applied to the collector terminal of the transistor PTR 42 in the previous stage, which is the voltage applied to the base of the transistor PTR 43 in the rear stage. When the voltage is raised to the + 5V side by the resistor PR51, the transistor PTR43 in the subsequent stage is turned on, and the switch circuit in the subsequent stage is also turned on. As a result, the voltage applied to the collector terminal of the transistor PTR43 in the subsequent stage is lowered to the ground (GND) side, and the RWMCLR signal whose logic is LOW is input to the input terminal PA3 of the input port PA of the payout control MPU952a. The payout control MPU952a clears the RAM by erasing the information stored in the payout control built-in RAM when the logic of the RWMCLR signal input to the input terminal PA3 is LOW within a predetermined period from the time when the power is turned on. It is determined that the signal is to be instructed, and after the power is turned on (after a predetermined period has elapsed since the power was turned on), if the logic of the RWMCLR signal input to the input terminal PA3 is LOW, the error is cleared. Judge that it is an instruction.

Further, when the operation switch 954 is being operated, the operation switch 954's output terminals, the 3rd terminal and the 4th terminal, are pulled down to the ground (GND) side by the pull-up resistor PR48, so that the logic becomes LOW. A signal is input to the base terminal of the transistor PTR44, the transistor PTR44 is turned off, and the switch circuit is also turned off. As a result, the voltage applied to the collector terminal of the transistor PTR44 is pulled up to the + 12V side by the pull-up resistor MR2 of the main control input circuit 1310b of the main control board 1310 via the wiring (harness), and the logic becomes HI. The clear signal is input to the main control board 1310. When the RAM clear signal whose logic is HI is input to the main control MPU 1310a of the main control board 1310 within a predetermined period from the time when the power is turned on, as described above, this logic is HI. When the RAM clear signal is input to the base terminal of the transistor MTR0, the transistor MTR0 is turned on and the switch circuit is also turned on. As a result, the voltage applied to the collector terminal of the transistor MTR0 is lowered to the ground (GND) side, and the RAM clear signal whose logic is LOW is input to the input terminal PA0 of the input port PA of the main control MPU1310a. It is determined that the main control MPU 1310a instructs the RAM clear to erase the information stored in the main control built-in RAM when the logic of the RAM clear signal input to the input terminal PA0 is LOW.

[10-2-4. Payout motor drive circuit]
Next, a payout motor drive circuit 952d for outputting a drive signal to the payout motor 834 of the payout device 830 shown in FIG. 5 will be described. As shown in FIG. 83, the payout motor drive circuit 952d mainly includes a voltage switching circuit 952da and a drive ICPIC60. The power input terminals 1 and 2 of the voltage switching circuit 952da are electrically connected to the + 12V power supply line and the + 5V power supply line, respectively, and +12 and + 5V are applied, respectively. It is grounded. A voltage switching signal is input to the power switching input terminal of the voltage switching circuit 952da. This voltage switching signal is output from the output terminal of the predetermined output port of the payout control MPU952a to the payout control output circuit 952ca with a reset function, and is output from the payout control output circuit 952ca with a reset function to the power supply switching input terminal of the voltage switching circuit 952da. It is supposed to be done. The power output terminal of the voltage switching circuit 952da is electrically connected to the cathode terminals of the drive ICPIC60, the 3rd terminal and the 10th terminal, respectively, via the Zener diode PZD60, and is also electrically connected to the power supply terminal of the payout motor 834. Based on the voltage switching signal connected to the voltage switching circuit 952da and input to the voltage switching input terminal, + 12V or + 5V is used as the motor drive voltage via the Zener diode PZD60, and is the cathode terminal of the drive ICPIC60. It is supplied to the terminal and the 10th terminal, respectively, and is also supplied to the payout motor 834.

The drive ICPIC60 includes four Darlington power transistors. In this embodiment, the emitter terminals 6 and 7 of the drive ICPIC60 are grounded to ground (GND), respectively, and are the base terminals of the drive ICPIC60. At the 1st terminal, the 5th terminal, the 8th terminal, and the 12th terminal, the payout motor drive signal is input via the resistors PR60 to PR63, respectively. The 2nd terminal, 4th terminal, 9th terminal, and 11th terminal, which are the collector terminals of the drive ICPIC60, are the 1st terminal, the 5th terminal, the 8th terminal, and the 12th terminal, which are the base terminals of the drive ICPIC60, respectively. When the payout motor drive signal is input to the 1st terminal, 5th terminal, 8th terminal, and 12th terminal, which are the base terminals of the drive ICPIC60, via the resistors PR60 to PR63, it is an excitation signal. A certain drive pulse is output to each phase (/ B phase, B phase, A phase, / A phase) corresponding to the payout motor 834. This payout motor drive signal is output from the output terminal of the predetermined output port of the payout control MPU952a to the payout control output circuit 952ca with a reset function, and from the payout control output circuit 952ca with a reset function to the drive ICPIC60 via resistors PR60 to PR63. It is designed to be output to the 1st terminal, 5th terminal, 8th terminal, and 12th terminal, which are the base terminals, respectively. These drive pulses are performed by switching the exciting current flowing through each phase (/ B phase, B phase, A phase, / A phase) of the payout motor 834 to rotate the payout motor 834. When the drive pulse (excitation signal) of each phase (/ B phase, B phase, A phase, / A phase) is cut off by this switching, a counter electromotive force is generated. If this counter electromotive force exceeds the withstand voltage of the drive ICPIC60, the drive ICPIC60 will be damaged. Therefore, as protection, the Zener diode PZD0 described above is electrically connected to the front stages of the 3rd and 10th terminals which are the cathode terminals of the drive ICPIC60. The circuit configuration is adopted.

[10-2-5. CR unit input / output circuit]
Next, the CR unit input / output circuit 952e for inputting / outputting various signals with the CR unit 6 shown in FIG. 71 will be described. As described above, the payout control board 951 includes the BRDY, which is a ball lending request signal, and the BRQ, which is a one-time payout operation start request signal, via the game ball lending device connection terminal plate 869. , And the predetermined voltage VL (+ 12V) and ground LG created from AC24V supplied from the power supply board 931 shown in FIG. 71 are supplied, while the payout control board 951 connects to the rental device such as a game ball. An EXS signal indicating that one payout operation has started or ended, and a PRDY signal indicating that the payout operation for paying out the rental ball is possible or impossible via the terminal plate 869. And output. As shown in FIG. 84, the input / output circuits for inputting / outputting these various signals and the like are mainly composed of photocouplers PIC70 to PIC74 (infrared LED and phototransistor are built-in).

The predetermined voltage VL from the CR unit 6 is applied to the anode terminal of the photocoupler PIC70 via the resistor PR70. The cathode terminal of the photocoupler PIC70 is electrically connected to the ground LG from the CR unit 6. The resistor PR60 is a limiting resistor for limiting the current flowing through the built-in infrared LED of the photocoupler PIC70. When the predetermined voltage VL from the CR unit 6 is applied to the anode terminal of the photocoupler PIC70, the photocoupler PIC70 is turned on, while the predetermined voltage VL from the CR unit 6 is not applied to the anode terminal of the photocoupler PIC70. Occasionally, the photocoupler PIC 70 is turned off. The emitter terminal of the photocoupler PIC70 is grounded to ground (GND), and the collector terminal of the photocoupler PIC70 is electrically connected to the base terminal of the transistor PTR70 via the resistor PR71, and is also connected to the transistor via the resistor PR72. It is electrically connected to the base terminal of the PTR71. In addition to being electrically connected to the resistor PR71, the collector terminal of the photocoupler PIC70 is electrically connected to the other end of the pull-up resistor PR73, one end of which is electrically connected to the + 5V power supply line.

In addition to being electrically connected to the resistor PR71, the base terminal of the transistor PTR70 is electrically connected to the other end of the resistor PR74, one end of which is grounded to ground (GND). The emitter terminal of the transistor PTR70 is grounded to ground (GND), and the collector terminal of the transistor PTR70 is electrically connected to the other end of the resistor PR75, one end of which is electrically connected to the + 5V power supply line, and a non-inverting buffer. FIG. 80 via ICPIC80 (the non-inverting buffer ICPIC80 includes eight non-inverting buffer circuits, and shapes and outputs the logic of the signal waveform input to one of them (PIC80A) without inverting it). It is electrically connected to the input terminal of the predetermined input port of the payout control MPU952a shown in 1. When the transistor PTR 70 is turned ON / OFF, the logic of the signal output from the collector terminal of the transistor PTR 70 is changed, and the signal is input as the CR connection signal 1 to the input terminal of the predetermined input port of the payout control MPU952a.

On the other hand, the base terminal of the transistor PTR71 is electrically connected to the resistor PR72 and also electrically connected to the other end of the resistor PR76 whose one end is grounded to ground (GND). The emitter terminal of the transistor PTR71 is grounded to ground (GND), and the collector terminal of the transistor PTR71 is electrically connected to the power supply board 931 via wiring (harness). When the collector terminal of the transistor PTR71 is electrically connected to the power supply board 931 via wiring (harness), one end of the power supply board 931 is electrically connected to the + 12V power supply line. It is electrically connected to the other end of the. When the transistor PTR71 is turned ON / OFF, the logic of the signal output from the collector terminal of the transistor PTR71 changes, and the signal is input to the power supply board 931 as a CR connection signal.

The circuit composed of the resistors PR71 and PR74 and the transistor PTR70 is a switch circuit that is turned ON / OFF by ON / OFF of the photocoupler PIC70.

When the predetermined voltage VL from the CR unit 6 is not applied to the anode terminal of the photocoupler PIC70, the photocoupler PIC70 is turned off, and the transistor PTR70 is turned on by being pulled up to the + 5V side by the pull-up resistor PR73, and the switch circuit is also turned on. It will be turned on. As a result, the voltage applied to the collector terminal of the transistor PTR70 is lowered to the ground (GND) side, and the CR connection signal 1 whose logic is LOW is input to the input terminal of the predetermined input port of the payout control MPU952a.

On the other hand, when the predetermined voltage VL from the CR unit 6 is applied to the anode terminal of the photocoupler PIC70, the photocoupler PIC70 is turned on and the voltage applied to the base terminal of the transistor PTR70 is lowered to the ground (GND) side. As a result, the transistor PTR70 is turned off, and the switch circuit is also turned off. As a result, the voltage applied to the collector terminal of the transistor PTR70 is pulled up to the + 5V side by the pull-up resistor PTR75, and the CR connection signal 1 whose logic is HI is input to the input terminal of the predetermined input port of the payout control MPU952a. NS.

The circuit composed of the resistors PR72 and PR76 and the transistor PTR71 is also a switch circuit that is turned ON / OFF by ON / OFF of the photocoupler PIC70.

When the predetermined voltage VL from the CR unit 6 is not applied to the anode terminal of the photocoupler PIC70, the photocoupler PIC70 is turned off, and the transistor PTR71 is turned on by being pulled up to the + 5V side by the pull-up resistor PR73, and the switch circuit is also turned on. It will be turned on. As a result, the voltage applied to the collector terminal of the transistor PTR71 is lowered to the ground (GND) side of the power supply board 931 via the wiring (harness), and the CR connection signal whose logic is LOW is input to the power supply board 931. NS.

On the other hand, when the predetermined voltage VL from the CR unit 6 is applied to the anode terminal of the photocoupler PIC70, the photocoupler PIC70 is turned on and the voltage applied to the base terminal of the transistor PTR71 is lowered to the ground (GND) side. As a result, the transistor PTR71 is turned off, and the switch circuit is also turned off. As a result, the voltage applied to the collector terminal of the transistor PTR71 is pulled up to the + 12V side by the pull-up resistor of the power supply board 931 via the wiring (harness), and the CR connection signal whose logic is HI is input to the power supply board 931. Will be done.

The predetermined voltage VL from the CR unit 6 is applied not only to the anode terminal of the photocoupler PIC70 but also to the anode terminal of the photocoupler PIC71 via the resistor PR77. BRDY from the CR unit 6 is input to the cathode terminal of the photocoupler PIC71. The resistor PR77 is a limiting resistor for limiting the current flowing through the built-in infrared LED of the photocoupler PIC71. When the predetermined voltage VL from the CR unit 6 is applied to the anode terminal of the photocoupler PIC71 and the logic of BRDY from the CR unit 6 is LOW, the photocoupler PIC71 is turned on while the photo When the predetermined voltage VL from the CR unit 6 is applied to the anode terminal of the coupler PIC71 and the logic of BRDY from the CR unit 6 is HI, the photocoupler PIC71 is turned off. There is. The emitter terminal of the photocoupler PIC71 is grounded to ground (GND), and the collector terminal of the photocoupler PIC71 is electrically connected to the other end of the pull-up resistor PR78, one end of which is electrically connected to the + 5V power supply line. The non-inverting buffer ICPIC80 (the non-inverting buffer ICPIC80 includes eight non-inverting buffer circuits, and the logic of the signal waveform input to one of them (PIC80B) is formatted and output without being inverted). It is electrically connected to the input terminal of a predetermined input port of the payout control MPU952a via. When the photocoupler PIC71 is turned ON / OFF, the logic of the signal output from the collector terminal of the photocoupler PIC71 is changed, and the signal is input as a BRDY signal to the input terminal of the predetermined input port of the payout control MPU952a.

When a predetermined voltage VL from the CR unit 6 is applied to the anode terminal of the photocoupler PIC71 and the logic of BRDY from the CR unit 6 is LOW, the photocoupler PIC71 is turned on and therefore the photo The voltage applied to the collector terminal of the coupler PIC71 is lowered to the ground (GND) side, and the BRDY signal whose logic is LOW is input to the input terminal of the predetermined input port of the payout control MPU952a. On the other hand, when a predetermined voltage VL from the CR unit 6 is applied to the anode terminal of the photocoupler PIC71 and the logic of BRDY from the CR unit 6 is HI, the photocoupler PIC71 is turned off. , The voltage applied to the collector terminal of the photocoupler PIC71 is pulled up to the + 5V side by the pull-up resistor PR78, and the BRDY signal whose logic is HI is input to the input terminal of the predetermined input port of the payout control MPU952a. As described above, the logic of the BRDY signal output from the collector terminal of the photocoupler PIC71 is the same as the logic of the BRDY from the CR unit 6.

The predetermined voltage VL from the CR unit 6 is applied not only to the anode terminal of the photocoupler PIC70 and the anode terminal of the photocoupler PIC71, but also to the anode terminal of the photocoupler PIC72 via the resistor PR79. The BRQ from the CR unit 6 is input to the cathode terminal of the photocoupler PIC72. The resistor PR79 is a limiting resistor for limiting the current flowing through the built-in infrared LED of the photocoupler PIC72. When a predetermined voltage VL from the CR unit 6 is applied to the anode terminal of the photocoupler PIC72 and the logic of the BRQ from the CR unit 6 is LOW, the photocoupler PIC72 is turned on while the photo is taken. When the predetermined voltage VL from the CR unit 6 is applied to the anode terminal of the coupler PIC72 and the logic of the BRQ from the CR unit 6 is HI, the photocoupler PIC72 is turned off. There is. The emitter terminal of the optocoupler PIC72 is grounded to ground (GND), and the collector terminal of the optocoupler PIC72 is electrically connected to the other end of the pull-up resistor PR80, one end of which is electrically connected to the + 5V power supply line. The non-inverting buffer ICPIC80 (the non-inverting buffer ICPIC80 includes eight non-inverting buffer circuits, and the logic of the signal waveform input to one of them (PIC80C) is formatted and output without being inverted). It is electrically connected to the input terminal of a predetermined input port of the payout control MPU952a via. When the photocoupler PIC72 is turned ON / OFF, the logic of the signal output from the collector terminal of the photocoupler PIC72 is changed, and the signal is input as a BRQ signal to the input terminal of the predetermined input port of the payout control MPU952a.

When a predetermined voltage VL from the CR unit 6 is applied to the anode terminal of the photocoupler PIC72 and the logic of the BRQ from the CR unit 6 is LOW, the photocoupler PIC72 is turned on, so that the photocoupler PIC72 is turned on. The voltage applied to the collector terminal of the coupler PIC72 is lowered to the ground (GND) side, and the BRQ signal whose logic is LOW is input to the input terminal of the predetermined input port of the payout control MPU952a. On the other hand, when a predetermined voltage VL from the CR unit 6 is applied to the anode terminal of the photocoupler PIC72 and the logic of the BRQ from the CR unit 6 is HI, the photocoupler PIC72 is turned off. The voltage applied to the collector terminal of the photocoupler PIC72 is pulled up to the + 5V side by the pull-up resistor PR80, and the BRQ signal whose logic is HI is input to the input terminal of the predetermined input port of the payout control MPU952a. As described above, the logic of the BRQ signal output from the collector terminal of the photocoupler PIC72 is the same as the logic of the BRQ from the CR unit 6.

The XS signal indicating that one payout operation has started or ended from the output terminal of the predetermined output port of the payout control MPU952a is output to the payout control output circuit 952 kb without the reset function, and the payout control output circuit without the reset function. It is input from 952 bc to the cathode terminal of the photocoupler PIC73 via the resistor PR81. The anode terminal of the photocoupler PIC73 is electrically connected to the other end of the resistor PR82, one end of which is electrically connected to the + 12V power supply line. The resistor PR82 is a limiting resistor for limiting the current flowing through the built-in infrared LED of the photocoupler PIC73. When + 12V is applied to the anode terminal of the photocoupler PIC73 via the resistor PR82, the EXS is output from the output terminal of the predetermined output port of the payout control MPU952a via the payout control output circuit 952cc without a reset function. When the signal logic is LOW, the photocoupler PIC73 is turned on, while + 12V is applied to the anode terminal of the photocoupler PIC73 via the resistor PR82, and the predetermined output port of the payout control MPU952a. When the logic of the EXS signal output from the output terminal of the output terminal without the reset function via the payout control output circuit 952 cc is HI, the photocoupler PIC73 is turned off. The emitter terminal of the photocoupler PIC73 is grounded to the ground LG from the CR unit 6, and the collector terminal of the photocoupler PIC73 is inside the CR unit 6 via a pull-up resistor PR83 via a game ball rental device connection terminal plate 869. The voltage is raised to a predetermined voltage VL and is electrically connected to the built-in control device. When the photocoupler PIC73 is turned ON / OFF, the logic of the signal output from the collector terminal of the photocoupler PIC73 is changed, and the signal is input to the built-in control device of the CR unit 6 as EXS.

When + 12V is applied to the anode terminal of the photocoupler PIC73 via the resistor PR82, the EXS is output from the output terminal of the predetermined output port of the payout control MPU952a via the payout control output circuit 952cc without a reset function. When the signal logic is LOW, the photocoupler PIC73 is turned on, so the voltage applied to the collector terminal of the photocoupler PIC73 is lowered to the ground (GND) side, and the EXS whose logic is LOW is the CR unit. It is input to the built-in control device of 6. On the other hand, when + 12V is applied to the anode terminal of the photocoupler PIC73 via the resistor PR82, it is output from the output terminal of the predetermined output port of the payout control MPU952a via the payout control output circuit 952cc without a reset function. When the logic of the EXS signal is HI, the photocoupler PIC73 is turned off, so that the voltage applied to the collector terminal of the photocoupler PIC73 is raised to a predetermined voltage VL by the pull-up resistor PR83, and the logic becomes HI. The EXS is input to the built-in control device of the CR unit 6. As described above, the logic of the EXE output from the collector terminal of the photocoupler PIC73 is the logic of the EXS signal output from the output terminal of the predetermined output port of the payout control MPU952a via the payout control output circuit 952cc without the reset function. It has the same logic.

The PRDY signal for notifying that the payout operation for paying out the rental ball from the output terminal of the predetermined output port of the payout control MPU952a is possible or impossible is the cathode terminal of the photocoupler PIC74 via the resistor PR84. Is entered in. The anode terminal of the photocoupler PIC74 is electrically connected to the other end of the resistor PR85, one end of which is electrically connected to the + 12V power supply line. The resistor PR85 is a limiting resistor for limiting the current flowing through the built-in infrared LED of the photocoupler PIC74. When + 12V is applied to the anode terminal of the photocoupler PIC74 via the resistor PR85, the PRDY is output from the output terminal of the predetermined output port of the payout control MPU952a via the payout control output circuit 952cc without a reset function. When the signal logic is LOW, the photocoupler PIC74 is turned on, while + 12V is applied to the anode terminal of the photocoupler PIC74 via the resistor PR85, and the predetermined output port of the payout control MPU952a. When the logic of the PRDY signal output from the output terminal of the output terminal without the reset function via the payout control output circuit 952 cc is HI, the photocoupler PIC74 is turned off. The emitter terminal of the photocoupler PIC74 is grounded to the ground LG from the CR unit 6, and the collector terminal of the photocoupler PIC74 is inside the CR unit 6 via a pull-up resistor PR86 via a game ball rental device connection terminal plate 869. The voltage is raised to a predetermined voltage VL and is electrically connected to the built-in control device. When the photocoupler PIC74 is turned ON / OFF, the logic of the signal output from the collector terminal of the photocoupler PIC74 changes, and the signal is input to the built-in control device of the CR unit 6 as a PRDY.

When + 12V is applied to the anode terminal of the photocoupler PIC74 via the resistor PR85, the PRDY is output from the output terminal of the predetermined output port of the payout control MPU952a via the payout control output circuit 952cc without a reset function. When the signal logic is LOW, the photocoupler PIC74 is turned on, so the voltage applied to the collector terminal of the photocoupler PIC74 is lowered to the ground (GND) side, and the PRDY whose logic is LOW is the CR unit. It is input to the built-in control device of 6. On the other hand, when + 12V is applied to the anode terminal of the photocoupler PIC74 via the resistor PR85, it is output from the output terminal of the predetermined output port of the payout control MPU952a via the payout control output circuit 952cc without a reset function. When the logic of the PRDY signal is HI, the photocoupler PIC74 is turned off, so that the voltage applied to the collector terminal of the photocoupler PIC74 is raised to a predetermined voltage VL by the pull-up resistor PR86, and the logic becomes HI. The PRDY is input to the built-in control device of the CR unit 6. As described above, the logic of the PRDY output from the collector terminal of the photocoupler PIC74 is the logic of the PRDY signal output from the output terminal of the predetermined output port of the payout control MPU952a via the payout control output circuit 952cc without the reset function. It has the same logic.

[10-2-6. Various input / output signals to the payout control MPU]
Next, various input / output signals input / output from the input / output terminals of the various input / output ports of the payout control MPU952a will be described.

As shown in FIG. 80, the RXD terminal, which is the serial data input terminal of the serial input port of the payout control MPU952a, receives the serial data from the main control board 1310 as the main payout serial data reception signal via the payout control input circuit 952b. Will be done. On the other hand, from the TXD terminal, which is the serial data output terminal of the serial output port of the payout control MPU952a, the serial data to be transmitted to the main control board 1310 is transmitted as the payer serial data transmission signal to the payout control output circuit 952 kb without a reset function. No reset function The payer serial data transmission signal is transmitted from the payout control output circuit 952 kb to the main control board 1310.

Each input terminal of the predetermined input port of the payout control MPU952a has the above-mentioned RWMCLR signal, payout power failure warning signal, door open signal, full tank signal, and various signals from the CR unit 6 (BRQ signal, BRDY signal, CR connection). In addition to the signals 1 and the like being input, for example, the main payment ACK signal from the main control board 1310 that conveys the completion of normal reception of the above-mentioned payer serial data reception signal is transmitted via the payout control input circuit 952b. The signals are input, or the detection signals from the ball-out detection sensor 827, the payout detection sensor 842, the rotation detection sensor 840, and the like shown in FIG. 70 are input via the payout control input circuit 952b, respectively.

On the other hand, from each output terminal of the predetermined output port of the payout control MPU952a, the above-mentioned EXS signal and PRDY signal are output to the payout control output circuit 952 kb without the reset function, respectively, and the EXS signal and the EXS signal from the payout control output circuit 952 cc without the reset function. The PRDY signal is output to the CR unit input / output circuit 952e, or the above-mentioned voltage switching signal is output to the payout control output circuit 952ca with a reset function, and the voltage switching signal is output from the payout control output circuit 952ca with a reset function to the voltage switching circuit 952da. Output or output the payout motor drive signal to the payout control output circuit 952ca with a reset function and output the payout motor drive signal from the payout control output circuit 952ca with the reset function to the payout motor 834 via the payout motor drive circuit 952d. In addition, for example, the payer ACK signal for notifying the completion of normal reception of the above-mentioned main pay serial data reception signal is output to the payout control output circuit 952ca with a reset function, and the payer is output from the payout control output circuit 952ca with a reset function. The ACK signal is output to the main control board 1310, or the drive signal of the error LED display 860b shown in FIG. 70 is output to the payout control output circuit 952ca with a reset function, and the drive signal is output from the payout control output circuit 952ca with a reset function. Output to the error LED display 860b, etc.

[10-3. Various input / output signals with the main control board and various output signals to the external terminal board]
Next, various input / output signals between the payout control board 951 and the main control board 1310 and various output signals from the payout control board 951 to the external terminal board 784 will be described with reference to FIG. 85.

[10-3-1. Various input / output signals with the main control board]
The payout control board 951 exchanges various input / output signals with the main control board 1310. Specifically, as shown in FIG. 85A, the payout control board 951 has the payer serial data transmission signal, payer ACK signal, operation signal (RAM clear signal), main frame door open signal, and the like described above. Is output to the main control board 1310. These output signals are pulled up to the + 12V side by the pull-up resistor of the main control input circuit 1310b of the main control board 1310.

On the other hand, the payout control board 951 has a main prize ball number information output signal, a 15-round jackpot information output signal, in addition to the main pay serial data reception signal, main pay ACK signal, and operation signal (RAM clear signal) described above. And 2 rounds big hit information output signal such as big hit information output signal, probability fluctuation information output signal, special symbol display information output signal, normal symbol display information output signal, time saving medium information output signal, start opening winning information output signal, etc. A game information signal related to the above, a payout power failure warning signal, and the like are input from the main control board 1310. These input signals are pulled up to the + 12V side by the pull-up resistance of the payout control input circuit 952b of the payout control unit 952 of the payout control board 951.

[10-3-2. Various output signals to the external terminal board]
The payout control board 951 outputs various signals to the external terminal board 784. Specifically, as shown in FIG. 85 (b), in addition to the above-mentioned outer end frame door opening information output signal, the number of game balls actually paid out by the payout motor 834 as prize balls reaches 10 balls. The prize ball number information output signal output for each, the main prize ball number information output signal from the main control board 1310 via the payout control board 951, the jackpot information of the 15 round jackpot information output signal and the 2 round jackpot information output signal. A game information signal such as an output signal, a probability fluctuation information output signal, a special symbol display information output signal, a normal symbol display information output signal, a time saving medium information output signal, and a start opening winning information output signal is output to the external terminal board 784. do. These output signals are pulled up to the + 12V side by the pull-up resistor of the external terminal plate 784. That is, two signals, an outer end frame door opening information output signal from the payout control board 951 side and a prize ball number information output signal, are output to the external terminal board 784, and the number of main prize balls from the main control board 1310 side. Information output signal, 15 round jackpot information output signal, 2 round jackpot information output signal, probability fluctuation information output signal, special symbol display information output signal, normal symbol display information output signal, time saving medium information output signal, and start opening winning information Eight signals called output signals are output via (passing through) the payout control board 951.

The signal output from the external terminal board 784 is transmitted to a hall computer installed in a game hall (hall) (not shown), and the hall computer monitors the player's game or the like. When the 15-round jackpot information output signal or the 2-round jackpot information output signal is output to the hall computer as one jackpot information output signal, the hall computer has the number of jackpots in which the round is 2 times (2 round jackpot). The number of jackpots in the pachinko machine 1 is the sum of the number of jackpots in which 15 rounds have occurred (the number of jackpots in 15 rounds). For this reason, the hall computer cannot grasp the number of occurrences of 2-round jackpots and the number of occurrences of 15-land jackpots from the total number of jackpots, so the number of jackpots actually generated by the pachinko machine 1 is large. It is not possible to know whether it is a 2-round jackpot or a 15-round jackpot. In addition, a data counter (not shown) is arranged above the pachinko machine 1, and some players select whether or not to play the game by referring to the number of occurrences of the jackpot game state displayed on the data counter. Some people do.

However, the number of occurrences of the jackpot game state displayed on the data counter may actually be biased to the number of occurrences of the two-round jackpot, so even if the player starts the game, only two rounds of jackpots occur. In some cases, the 15-round jackpot does not occur easily. In this way, the number of occurrences of the jackpot gaming state displayed on the data counter can give the player a sense of expectation, but may unnecessarily arouse the player's gambling spirit.

Therefore, in the present embodiment, as the jackpot information output signal, the 15-round jackpot information output signal and the 2-round jackpot information output signal are separately output to the hall computer, so that the hall computer can determine the number of occurrences of the 2-round jackpot and the number of occurrences of the 2-round jackpot. It is possible to accurately grasp the number of big hits in 15 rounds. Therefore, the hall computer can grasp whether the number of big hits actually generated in the pachinko machine 1 is 2 rounds or 15 rounds, and the data counter has 15 rounds. Since the number of big hits and the number of 2 round big hits can be displayed separately or only the number of 15 round big hits can be displayed as the number of big hit gaming states, it is possible to arouse the player's gambling spirit more than necessary. No.

In the present embodiment, the 2-round jackpot information output signal is in a state of being output to the hall computer during the period from the occurrence of the 2-round jackpot to the end, and the 15-round jackpot information output signal is also the 15-round jackpot. It is in the state of being output to the hall computer during the period from the occurrence to the end. In addition to the method of outputting the 2-round jackpot information output signal and the 15-round jackpot information output signal to the hall computer as in the present embodiment, for example, when a 2-round jackpot occurs, the 2-round jackpot information output signal is output only for a predetermined period. Such a 2-round jackpot information output signal and 15-round jackpot information are output to the hall computer, and when a 15-round jackpot occurs, the 15-round jackpot information output signal is output to the hall computer for a predetermined period. A method of outputting the output signal to the hall computer for the same predetermined period can also be mentioned.

[11. Arrangement of output terminals on the external terminal board]
Next, the arrangement of the output terminals of the external terminal board 784 that outputs various signals to the hall computer installed in the amusement park (hall) will be described with reference to FIG. 86. The external terminal plate 784 is attached to the rear surface of the prize ball base attached to the rear surface of the main body frame base 600, and the rear side thereof is covered with the external terminal plate cover 786. FIG. 86 is a diagram showing an arrangement of output terminals of the external terminal plate.

As described above, the external terminal plate 784 comprises an outer end frame door opening information output signal, a prize ball number information output signal, a main prize ball number information output signal, a 15-round jackpot information output signal, and a 2-round jackpot information output signal. When the jackpot information output signal, the information output signal during probability fluctuation, the special symbol display information output signal, the normal symbol display information output signal, the time saving medium information output signal, and the start opening winning information output signal are input from the payout control board 951, It outputs to the outside of the pachinko machine 1.

Briefly explaining these various signals, the outer end frame door opening information output signal does not occur during a normal game by a player in which the door frame 3 and / or the main body frame 4 shown in FIG. 1 is open. It is a signal that conveys that a state has occurred, and the prize ball number information output signal is obtained every time the number of game balls actually paid out as prize balls by the payout motor 834 shown in FIG. 5 reaches 10. The main prize ball number information output signal is a signal to that effect, and the main prize ball number information output signals are various winning ports such as the first starting port 2002, the second starting port 2004, the general winning ports 2001 and 2,201, and the large winning opening 2005. It is a signal to notify each time the number of game balls to be paid out as prize balls based on the game balls entered in is 10 balls, and the 15-round jackpot information output signal is a 15-round jackpot. The 2-round jackpot information output signal is a signal that conveys that a 2-round jackpot has occurred, and the information output signal during probability fluctuation has a probability fluctuation. The special symbol display information output signal is a signal indicating that the signal is being displayed, and the special symbol display information output signal is a special symbol on the first special symbol display 1403 and the second special symbol display 1405 of the function display unit 1400 shown in FIG. It is a signal indicating that the variation display has been completed (stopped), and the normal symbol display information output signal ends the variation display of the normal symbol on the normal symbol display 1402 of the function display unit 1400 shown in FIG. The signal indicating that the time saving state has occurred, the time saving medium information output signal is a signal indicating that the time saving state has occurred, and the starting opening winning information output signal is the first start shown in FIG. This is a signal for notifying each time a game ball enters the port 2002 or the second starting port 2004.

As shown in FIG. 86, the output terminals PT1 to PT10 are arranged horizontally in a row on the external terminal plate 784. The output terminal PT1 is white and outputs a prize ball number information output signal. As described above, the prize ball number information output signal is a signal for notifying each time the number of game balls actually paid out as prize balls by the payout motor 834 shown in FIG. 5 reaches 10. In the embodiment, the output is output from the output terminal PT1 for 0.105 seconds. When the prize ball number information output signal from the external terminal board 784 is input to the hall computer, the hall computer uses the payout motor 834 of the pachinko machine 1 as a prize ball 10 each time the prize ball number information output signal is input. It is possible to grasp that the game balls of the balls have been paid out as prize balls, and it is possible to count the number of the paid out game balls and grasp the total number of the game balls paid out by the pachinko machine 1.

The output terminal PT2 is provided in green to output an outer end frame door opening information output signal. As described above, the outer end frame door opening information output signal is in a state in which the player that the door frame 3 and / or the main body frame 4 shown in FIG. 1 is open does not occur during the normal game. This is a signal to convey that, and in the present embodiment, it is output from the output terminal PT2 while the door frame 3 and / or the main body frame 4 is open. When the outer end frame door opening information output signal from the external terminal plate 784 is input to the hall computer, the hall computer performs the door frame 3 of the pachinko machine 1 and the door frame 3 while the outer end frame door opening information output signal is input. / Or it can be grasped that the main body frame 4 is open.

The output terminal PT3 is grayed out to output a special symbol display information output signal. As described above, the special symbol display information output signal ends (stops) the variable display of the special symbol on the first special symbol display 1403 and the second special symbol display 1405 of the function display unit 1400 shown in FIG. It is a signal to convey that it is in a state, and in the present embodiment, the end (stop) of the variation display of the special symbol in the first special symbol display 1403 and the second special symbol display 1405 of the function display unit 1400 from the output terminal PT3. It is designed to be output for 0.128 seconds at times. When the special symbol display information output signal from the external terminal board 784 is input to the hall computer, the hall computer receives the special symbol display information output signal and receives the first special symbol of the function display unit 1400 of the pachinko machine 1. It is possible to grasp that the variable display of the special symbol has ended (stopped) on the display 1403 and the second special symbol display 1405, and count the number of times to count the number of times to count the number of times to perform the first special of the function display unit 1400 of the pachinko machine 1. It is possible to grasp the total number of times that the special symbol is variablely displayed on the symbol display 1403 and the second special symbol display 1405.

The output terminal PT4 is provided in yellow and outputs a start opening winning information output signal. As described above, the start port winning information output signal is a signal for notifying each time a game ball enters the first start port 2002 or the second start port 2004 shown in FIG. 8, and in the present embodiment, it is a signal to that effect. , Every time a game ball enters the first start port 2002 or the second start port 2004 from the output terminal PT4, it is output for 0.128 seconds. When the starting port winning information output signal from the external terminal plate 784 is input to the hall computer, the hall computer performs the first starting port 2002 or the second starting port 2002 of the pachinko machine 1 each time the starting port winning information output signal is input. It is possible to grasp that the game ball has entered the start port 2004, and count the number of times the start port winning information output signal is input to the first start port 2002 or the second start port 2004 of the pachinko machine 1. It is possible to grasp the total number of game balls that have entered.

The output terminal PT5 is black and outputs a 15-round jackpot information output signal. As described above, the 15-round jackpot information output signal is a signal indicating that a 15-round jackpot has occurred, and in the present embodiment, while the 15-round jackpot is occurring from the output terminal PT5, It is designed to be output. When the 15-round jackpot information output signal from the external terminal board 784 is input to the hall computer, the hall computer generates a 15-round jackpot in the pachinko machine 1 while the 15-round jackpot information output signal is input. It is possible to grasp the state, and it is possible to count the number of times the 15-round jackpot information output signal is input to grasp the total number of times the 15-round jackpot has occurred in the pachinko machine 1.

The output terminal PT6 is colored pink and outputs a 2-round jackpot information output signal. As described above, the two-round jackpot information output signal is a signal indicating that a two-round jackpot is occurring, and in the present embodiment, while the two-round jackpot is occurring from the output terminal PT6, It is designed to be output. When the 2-round jackpot information output signal from the external terminal board 784 is input to the hall computer, the hall computer generates a 2-round jackpot in the pachinko machine 1 while the 2-round jackpot information output signal is input. It is possible to grasp the state, and it is possible to count the number of times the two-round jackpot information output signal is input to grasp the total number of times the two-round jackpot has occurred in the pachinko machine 1.

The output terminal PT7 is provided in blue to output a normal symbol display information output signal. As described above, the normal symbol display information output signal is a signal indicating that the normal symbol display 1402 of the function display unit 1400 shown in FIG. 10 has finished (stopped) the variation display of the normal symbol. In the present embodiment, the output is output from the output terminal PT7 for 0.128 seconds at the end (stop) of the variation display of the normal symbol on the normal symbol display 1402 of the function display unit 1400. When the normal symbol display information output signal from the external terminal board 784 is input to the hall computer, the hall computer receives the normal symbol display information output signal, and when the normal symbol display information output signal is input, the hall computer is the normal symbol display of the function display unit 1400 of the pachinko machine 1. It is possible to grasp that the variation display of the normal symbol has ended (stopped) in 1402, and the number of times is counted to display the variation of the normal symbol on the normal symbol display 1402 of the function display unit 1400 of the pachinko machine 1. You can know the number of times.

The output terminal PT8 is provided in red to output a time-saving and medium-time information output signal. As described above, the time saving medium information output signal is a signal indicating that the time saving state is occurring, and in the present embodiment, it is output from the output terminal PT8 while the time saving state is occurring. ing. When the time saving / medium information output signal from the external terminal board 784 is input to the hall computer, the hall computer grasps that the pachinko machine 1 is in the time saving state when the time saving / medium information output signal is input. In addition to being able to count the number of times the information output signal is input during the time saving, it is possible to grasp the total number of times the time saving state has occurred in the pachinko machine 1.

The output terminal PT9 is colored orange and outputs an information output signal during probability fluctuation. As described above, the information output signal during the probability fluctuation is a signal indicating that the probability fluctuation is occurring, and is output from the output terminal PT9 while the probability fluctuation is occurring in the present embodiment. It has become so. When the information output signal during probability fluctuation from the external terminal board 784 is input to the hall computer, the hall computer is in a state where the probability fluctuation occurs in the pachinko machine 1 when the information output signal during probability fluctuation is input. In addition to being able to grasp that there is, it is possible to count the number of times the information output signal is input during the probability fluctuation and to grasp the total number of times the probability fluctuation has occurred in the pachinko machine 1.

The output terminal PT10 is light blue and outputs a main prize ball number information output signal. As described above, the main prize ball number information output signal enters various winning openings such as the first starting opening 2002, the second starting opening 2004, the general winning openings 2001 and 2,201, and the large winning opening 2005 as shown in FIG. It is a signal to notify each time the number of game balls to be paid out as a prize ball based on the ball has reached 10, and is output from the output terminal PT10 for 0.128 seconds in the present embodiment. It has become so. When the main prize ball number information output signal from the external terminal board 784 is input to the hall computer, the hall computer receives 10 balls as prize balls from the pachinko machine 1 each time the main prize ball number information output signal is input. It is possible to grasp that the game balls are to be paid out as prize balls, and to count the number of game balls to be paid out to grasp the total number of game balls to be paid out by the pachinko machine 1. can do. It should be noted that, for example, a game ball scheduled to be paid out as a prize ball based on a game ball entered in various winning ports such as the first starting port 2002, the second starting port 2004, the general winning opening 2001, 2,201, and the large winning opening 2005. When the number of balls reaches 20 or more and the main prize ball number information output signal is output multiple times, the main prize ball number information output signal is 0.256 (= 0.128 seconds x 2 times) seconds. It is designed to be output at intervals of 0.128 seconds, as if it were one continuous signal.

Of the output terminals PT1 to PT10 of the external terminal board 784, the output terminals PT1 and PT2 output various signals output on the payout control board 951 side, whereas the output terminals PT3 to PT10 are the main control boards. Various signals output on the 1310 side are arranged so as to be output via (passing through) the payout control board 951. The output terminals PT1 to PT10 are each colored, and by electrically connecting the wiring having a connector that is colored in the same color to the output terminals PT1 to PT10, the other wiring is erroneously electrically connected. It is possible to prevent the connection from being targeted. Then, the various signals output on the payout control board 951 side are transmitted to the hall computer so as not to mix the various signals output on the payout control board 951 side and the various signals output on the main control board 1310 side. The output terminals PT1 and PT2 for this purpose are arranged in a row on the left side of the external terminal board 784, and the output terminals PT3 to PT10 for transmitting various signals output on the main control board 1310 side to the hall computer are provided on the external terminal board 784. By arranging them in a row from the left side of the center to the right side, in this respect as well, the wiring for transmitting various signals output on the payout control board 951 side to the hall computer and various outputs on the main control board 1310 side. It is possible to prevent accidental electrical connection with the wiring for transmitting signals to the hall computer.

In the present embodiment, the prize ball number information output signal output on the payout control board 951 side and the main prize ball number information output signal output on the main control board 1310 side are holed from the external terminal board 784, respectively. It is configured to tell the computer. This is because, for example, the game balls stored in the prize ball tank 720 are stored in the prize ball tank 720 in a state where the game balls from the pachinko island equipment side are not supplied to the prize ball tank 720 shown in FIG. 1 due to some trouble in the pachinko island equipment. If a 15-round jackpot happens to occur in the pachinko machine 1 when the remaining number is low, the number of game balls stored in the prize ball tank 720 for paying out the game balls as prize balls will be insufficient. (Also, if ball clogging or ball clogging occurs in the payout device 830, the game ball cannot be paid out unless this can be resolved). Then, in the prize ball number information output signal output on the payout control board 951 side, as described above, the number of game balls actually paid out by the payout motor 834 shown in FIG. 5 reaches 10 balls. Since it is a signal to convey that fact for each case, the payout control board 951 can output a prize ball number information output signal and transmit it to the hall computer via the external terminal board 784 because the game ball cannot be paid out. become unable. When the game ball is not paid out, the player calls a clerk in the hall. The clerk in the hall, for example, checks the hose-shaped replenishment nozzle for supplying the game ball from the pachinko island facility to the prize ball tank 720 and identifies the position of the ball clogging (also, it occurs in the payout device 830, for example). By identifying the position of the ball jam and the position of the ball hose) and eliminating the problem, the game ball will be returned to the state of being paid out.

However, even if the clerk in the hall is working, the game by the main control board 1310 is in progress, so after the 15 rounds of big hits are completed, the game ball is paid out by the clerk in the hall. When the game returns to the above state, the payout control board 951 pays out the unpaid game balls one after another, and the payout control board 951 is in the period when the 15-round big hit is completed and the 15-round big hit is not generated. Outputs a prize ball number information output signal to notify each time the number of game balls actually paid out by the payout motor 834 as prize balls reaches 10 balls, and transmits the signal to the hall computer via the external terminal plate 784. It will be. Then, even though the 15-round jackpot has not occurred, an extremely large number of game balls will be paid out. Therefore, the gaming state of the pachinko machine 1 and the number of game balls paid out by the pachinko machine 1 The problem arises that the hall computer cannot accurately grasp the relationship between.

Therefore, in the present embodiment, regardless of whether or not the payout motor 834 is driven and controlled by the payout control board 951 and actually paid out as a prize ball, that is, it is different from the prize ball number information output signal output by the payout control board 951. As a signal of, the main control board 1310 is a game ball that has entered various winning openings such as the first starting opening 2002, the second starting opening 2004, the general winning openings 2001 and 2,201, and the large winning opening 2005 shown in FIG. When the number of game balls to be paid out as prize balls reaches 10, the main prize ball number information output signal is output as a signal to that effect, and the payout control board 951 and the external terminal board 784 are displayed. Through this, we adopted a mechanism to convey information to the hall computer. As a result, even if the above-mentioned troubles (trouble such as ball clogging in the replenishment nozzle or the like, ball clogging in the payout device 830, ball clogging, etc.) occur, the gaming state of the pachinko machine 1 and the payment in this gaming state. It is possible to accurately convey the relationship between the number of game balls to be released and the number of game balls to be released to the hall computer. Therefore, the hall computer can accurately grasp the relationship between the gaming state of the pachinko machine 1 and the number of gaming balls paid out in the gaming state.

[12. Production display drive board circuit]
Next, the circuit of the effect display drive board 4450 that draws the display area of the door frame side effect display device 460 will be described with reference to FIG. 87. As described above, the effect display drive board 4450 is arranged near the lower side of the door frame side effect display device 460 attached to the right side of the plate unit 320 of the door frame 3 and is housed in the plate unit 320. The liquid crystal module circuit 450V that draws the display area of the door frame side effect display device 460 is mainly configured. FIG. 87 is a circuit diagram showing a liquid crystal module circuit that draws a display area of the upper plate side liquid crystal display device.

[12-1. LCD module circuit]
As shown in FIG. 87, the liquid crystal module circuit 450V of the effect display drive board 4450 mainly comprises the door frame side effect receiver ICSDIC0.

The liquid crystal module circuit 450V is a serial signal (serial data) from the door frame side directing transmitter IC1512d of the peripheral control board 1510 shown in FIG. 74 by a differential method called "V-by-One (registered trademark)" of Zain Electronics Co., Ltd. Is transmitted as a positive signal and a negative signal, and is input to the common mode choke coil SDL0 via the frame peripheral relay terminal plate 868 and the peripheral door relay terminal plate 882, respectively. Noise can be separated from the negative signal. The positive signal and the negative signal from which noise is separated are input to the RXIN + terminal and the RXIN− terminal of the door frame side effect receiver ICSDIC0, respectively. A resistor SDR0 is electrically connected between the RXIN + terminal and the RXIN− terminal. This resistor SDR0 is a terminating resistor (terminator), and prevents the plus signal and the minus signal from being reflected at the RXIN + terminal and the RXIN− terminal, respectively, and prevents the serial signal from being disturbed.

The door frame side effect receiver ICSDIC0 has three video signals, a red video signal, a green video signal, and a blue video signal, based on the serial signals (serial data) input at the RXIN + terminal and the RXIN- terminal, respectively. It restores to three synchronization signals, a horizontal synchronization signal, a vertical synchronization signal, and a clock signal (that is, restores to a parallel signal before serialization). As for the red video signal, the green video signal, and the blue video signal, as described above, the red video signal, the green video signal, and the blue video signal output from the channel CH2 of the sound source built-in VDP1512a are 8 bits each. Since the red video signal, the green video signal, and the blue video signal that can be input to the door frame side effect transmitter IC1512d are each 6 bits, a total of 18 bits, they are the upper 6 bits of each video signal.

The liquid crystal module circuit 450V is the serial data output from the peripheral control MPU 1511a of the peripheral control unit 1511 of the peripheral control board 1510 as described above, in addition to the signal from the door frame side effect transmitter IC 1512d of the peripheral control board 1510. Two signals in which a certain LOCKN signal output request data is differentiated into a positive signal and a negative signal are also input in the differential circuit 1512e of the peripheral control board 1510. As described above, the forced switching circuit 1512f of the peripheral control board 1510 transmits these two signals when the two signals differentiated into the plus signal and the minus signal are input in the differential circuit 1512e. On the other hand, when the two differential signals, the positive signal and the negative signal, are not input in the differential circuit 1512e, the signal output from the door frame side effect transmitter IC 1512d is transmitted. The circuit is configured to connect the circuit so as to do so. As a result, when two signals differentiated into a plus signal and a minus signal are input in the differential circuit 1512e, the two signals are connected in a circuit so as to transmit the two signals, so that the two signals are connected. , The peripheral control board 1510 transmits to the frame peripheral relay terminal board 868, the peripheral door relay terminal board 882, and the liquid crystal module circuit 450V of the effect display drive board 4450 housed in the dish unit 320 of the door frame 3, while the difference. When the two signals differentiated into the plus signal and the minus signal are not input in the activation circuit 1512e, the circuit is connected so as to transmit the signal output from the door frame side effect transmitter IC 1512d. The signal output from the frame-side effect transmitter IC 1512d is stored in the peripheral control board 1510, the frame peripheral relay terminal plate 868, the peripheral door relay terminal plate 882, and the plate unit 320 of the door frame 3, and the effect display drive board 4450. It is transmitted to the liquid crystal module circuit 450V of.

The forced switching circuit 1512f is a signal output from the door frame side effect transmitter IC 1512d, that is, a door frame when two signals differentiated into a plus signal and a minus signal are not input in the differential circuit 1512e. From the side effect transmitter IC1512d, the serial signal (serial data) by the differential method called "V-by-One (registered trademark)" of Zain Electronics Co., Ltd. is used as a positive signal and a negative signal from the peripheral control board 1510 to the frame peripheral relay terminal board. It is input to the common mode choke coil SDL0 via the 868 and the peripheral door relay terminal plate 882, and is input to the RXIN + terminal and the RXIN- terminal of the door frame side effect receiver ICSDIC0, respectively, while the differential circuit 1512e. When two signals differentiated into a positive signal and a negative signal are input from the peripheral control board 1510 via the frame peripheral relay terminal plate 868 and the peripheral door relay terminal plate 882, these two signals are input. It is input to the common mode choke coil SDL0, and is input to the RXIN + terminal and the RXIN- terminal of the door frame side effect receiver ICSDIC0, respectively. The door frame side effect receiver ICSDIC0 determines that it is a LOCKN signal output request when two signals differentiated into a plus signal and a minus signal are input in the differential circuit 1512e. A LOCKN signal is output from the LOCKN terminal, which will be described later, to the peripheral control board 1510 via the peripheral door relay terminal plate 882 and the frame peripheral relay terminal plate 868. This LOCKN signal is input to the peripheral control MPU 1511a of the peripheral control unit 1511 of the peripheral control board 1510 via a peripheral control input circuit (not shown) of the peripheral control board 1510.

As described above, the LOCKN signal output request data, which is the serial data output from the peripheral control MPU 1511a of the peripheral control unit 1511 of the peripheral control board 1510, displays the startup screen when the power of the pachinko machine 1 is turned on on the game board side. During the period of display on the display device 1600 and the period of demonstrating by the game board side effect display device 1600 while waiting for customers, the door frame side effect transmitter IC1512d provided on the peripheral control board 1510 and the effect display. In order to confirm whether or not there is a problem in the connection between the door frame side effect receiver ICSDIC0 provided on the drive board 4450, that is, the connection between the transmitter and the receiver, the door frame side effect display device 460 It is sent as an operation check request. Although the LOCKN signal output request data in the present embodiment is differentiated into a positive signal and a negative signal in the differential circuit 1512e, the signal output from the door frame side effect transmitter IC 1512d, that is, the above-mentioned Zain Electronics stock. The data format is completely different from that of the company's "V-by-One (registered trademark)" differential serial signal (serial data). Therefore, when the LOCKN signal output request data is received by the door frame side effect receiver ICSDIC0, it is determined that the door frame side effect receiver ICSDIC0 is not a signal output from the door frame side effect transmitter IC1512d, which is abnormal. Assuming that it is data, a LOCKN signal will be output from the LOCKN terminal described later. In other words, in the present embodiment, the LOCKN signal is output from the LOCKN terminal described later by utilizing the function of the door frame side effect receiver ICSDIC0 that outputs the LOCKN signal when it is determined that the received data is abnormal data. In order to forcibly output the LOCKN signal output request data having a structure different from the signal output from the door frame side effect transmitter IC1512d, from the peripheral control MPU1511a of the peripheral control unit 1511 of the peripheral control board 1510. By outputting the data, it is possible to confirm whether or not the device called the door frame side effect receiver ICSDIC0 is operating normally. This makes it possible to check whether or not there is a problem with the connection between the transmitter and the receiver.

+ 3.3V created by the upper plate side liquid crystal module power supply circuit 4450x shown in FIG. 76 is supplied to the VDD terminal, VDDO terminal, LVDS VDD terminal, PLL VDD terminal, and PDWN terminal of the door frame side effect receiver ICSDIC0, respectively, and the door. The GND terminal, GNDO terminal, LVDSGND application sheet, PLLGND terminal, EDGE terminal, OE terminal, MODE0, and MODE1 terminal of the frame-side effect receiver ICSDIC0 are grounded to the ground, respectively.

The VDD terminal is a power supply terminal for a digital circuit, and a capacitor SDC0 is electrically connected between the terminal and the GND terminal which is the ground for the digital circuit, and a + 3.3V power supply supplied to the VDD terminal. High frequency noise is removed from the line.

The VDDO terminal is a power supply terminal for TTL (Transistor-Transistor Logical) output, and a capacitor SDC1 is electrically connected between the terminal and the GNDO terminal which is the ground for this TTL output, and is supplied to the VDDO terminal. High frequency noise is removed from the + 3.3V power supply line.

The LVDS VDD terminal is a power supply terminal for LVDS (Low Voltage Differential Signaling) input, and a capacitor SDC2 is electrically connected between the terminal and the LVDSGND terminal which is the ground for this LVDS input, and is supplied to the LVDS VDD terminal. High frequency noise is removed from the + 3.3V power supply line.

The PLL VDD terminal is a power supply terminal for a PLL (Phase Locked Loop) circuit, and a capacitor SDC3 is electrically connected between the terminal and the PLLGND terminal that serves as a ground for the PLL circuit, and is supplied to the PLL VDD terminal. High frequency noise is removed from the + 3.3V power line.

The PDWN terminal tells that when + 3.3V is supplied (applied), the logic becomes HI and operates normally, while the supply of +3.3 is stopped and the logic becomes LOW and powers down. It is a terminal to transmit. The PDWN terminal is supplied with +3.3 V via the resistor SDR1 and is electrically connected to the other end of the varistor SDZ0 whose one end is grounded to the ground. This varistor SDZ0 suppresses noise and overvoltage of the + 3.3 V electric line supplied via the resistor SDR1.

The EDGE terminal transmits various signals output from various output terminals (DE terminal, SYNC0 terminal to SYNC2 terminal, and D0 terminal to D17 terminal) based on the clock signal DCLK output from the CLKOUT terminal, which will be described later, at the rising edge. It is a terminal for designating either (the logic transitions from LOW to HI) or the falling edge (the logic transitions from HI to LOW), and is described above in the present embodiment. As described above, the falling edge is specified by grounding the EDGE terminal to the ground. By the way, if the EDGE terminal is connected to + 3.3V, the rising edge can be specified.

The OE terminal indicates whether or not to allow output of various output terminals (DE terminal, SYNC0 terminal to SYNC2 terminal, D0 terminal to D17 terminal, and CLKOUT terminal) described later. As described above, by grounding the OE terminal to the ground, the output is always possible. By the way, if the OE terminal is connected to + 3.3V, it will not be possible to output.

The MODE0 terminal and the MODE1 terminal are terminals for selecting an operation mode, and the operation mode can be selected by grounding both of them to the ground. The operation mode includes a normal mode and a shake hand mode. In the normal mode, three video signals (18-bit video signals), a red video signal, a green video signal, and a blue video signal, are based on the serial signals (serial data) input at the RXIN + terminal and the RXIN- terminal, respectively. In the normal operation mode, the door frame side effect receiver ICSDIC0 restores to a parallel signal composed of three synchronization signals (3-bit synchronization signal), a horizontal synchronization signal, a vertical synchronization signal, and a clock signal. be. In the shake hand mode, the connection between the door frame side effect transmitter IC1512d provided on the peripheral control board 1510 and the door frame side effect receiver ICSDIC0 provided on the effect display drive board 4450, that is, the connection between the transmitter and the receiver is established. This mode outputs a LOCKN signal from the LOCKN terminal to the effect that a predetermined data pattern (SYNC pattern) for confirmation (recovery) is requested to be transmitted. This shake hand mode is designed to switch automatically.

For example, based on the serial signals (serial data) input at the RXIN + terminal and the RXIN- terminal, three video signals (18-bit video signals), a red video signal, a green video signal, and a blue video signal, The door frame side effect receiver ICSDIC0 restored to a parallel signal composed of three synchronization signals (3-bit synchronization signal), a horizontal synchronization signal, a vertical synchronization signal, and a clock signal, but for some reason, it is abnormal. When it is difficult to draw on the door frame side effect display device 460 with such data, the normal mode is automatically switched to the shake hand mode and the LOCKN signal is output from the LOCKN terminal. This LOCKN signal is input to the peripheral control board 1510 via the resistor SDR2 which is a damping resistor, the peripheral door relay terminal board 882, and the frame peripheral relay terminal board 868, and the peripheral control input circuit (not shown) of the peripheral control board 1510 is used. It is input to the peripheral control MPU 1511a of the peripheral control unit 1511 of the peripheral control board 1510 via the peripheral control board 1510. Peripheral control MPU1511a is a connection confirmation signal to the INIT terminal of the door frame side effect transmitter IC1512d in order to notify the door frame side effect transmitter IC1512d that a predetermined condition is satisfied based on the input LOCKN signal. Is output. When this connection confirmation signal is input to the INIT terminal, the door frame side effect transmitter IC1512d is connected between the door frame side effect receiver ICSDIC0 provided on the effect display drive board 4450, that is, the connection between the transmitter and the receiver. For the door frame side effect provided on the effect display drive board 4450 via the peripheral control board 1510, the frame peripheral relay terminal plate 868, and the peripheral door relay terminal plate 882, a predetermined data pattern (SYNC pattern) for recovering the It is transmitted to the receiver ICSDIC0. By receiving such a predetermined data pattern (SYNC pattern) by the door frame side effect receiver ICSDIC0, the connection between the transmitter and the receiver can be easily restored. The predetermined data pattern (SYNC pattern) is stored in advance in the door frame side effect transmitter IC1512d. The INIT terminal of the door frame side effect transmitter IC1512d provided on the peripheral control board 1510 and the LOCKN terminal of the door frame side effect receiver ICSDIC0 provided on the effect display drive board 4450 are connected to the frame peripheral relay terminal plate 868 and the peripheral door. It may be directly connected electrically via the relay terminal plate 882.

As described above, the LOCKN terminal is connected between the door frame side effect transmitter IC1512d provided on the peripheral control board 1510 and the door frame side effect receiver ICSDIC0 provided on the effect display drive board 4450, that is, between the transmitter and the receiver. It is a terminal that outputs a request for transmission of a predetermined data pattern (SYNC pattern) for confirming (recovering) the connection between the two. The LOCKN signal output from the LOCKN terminal is input to the peripheral control board 1510 via the resistor SDR2 which is the damping resistance of the effect display drive board 4450, the peripheral door relay terminal board 882, and the frame peripheral relay terminal board 868, and is input to the peripheral control board 1510. It is input to the peripheral control MPU 1511a of the peripheral control unit 1511 of the peripheral control board 1510 via a peripheral control input circuit (not shown) of the control board 1510.

The SYNC0 terminal to the SYNC2 terminal output three synchronization signals, a horizontal synchronization signal, a vertical synchronization signal, and a clock signal, which are restored based on the serial signals (serial data) input at the RXIN + terminal and the RXIN- terminal, respectively. It is a terminal. In this embodiment, since the restored horizontal synchronization signal, vertical synchronization signal, and clock signal are not used, the SYNC0 terminal to the SYNC2 terminal are unconnected terminals.

The DE terminal is a terminal that outputs a clock signal output from the CLKOUT terminal and a DE signal that conveys that the data output from the D0 terminals to the D17 terminals, which are data output terminals, is valid or invalid, which will be described later. The DE signal output from the DE terminal is input to the door frame side effect display device 460 via the resistor SDR3 which is a damping resistor.

The CLKOUT terminal is a terminal that outputs the clock signal DCLK generated by the PLL circuit built in the door frame side effect receiver ICSDIC0. The clock signal DCLK output from the CLKOUT terminal is input to the door frame side effect display device 460 via the resistor SDR4 which is a damping resistor.

The D0 terminal to D17 terminal are three video signals (18) of a red video signal, a green video signal, and a blue video signal restored based on the serial signals (serial data) input at the RXIN + terminal and the RXIN- terminal, respectively. It is a data output terminal that outputs a bit video signal). Blue video signals B0 to B5 (6 bits) are output in synchronization with the clock signal DCLK from the 6-bit data output terminals D0 terminal to D5 terminal, and each signal line of the blue video signals B0 to B5 is a damping resistor. It is input to the door frame side effect display device 460 via the ladder resistor SDRA0. The green video signals G0 to G5 (6 bits) are output in synchronization with the clock signal DCLK from the 6-bit data output terminals D6 terminal to D11 terminal, and each signal line of the green video signals G0 to G5 is a damping resistor. It is input to the door frame side effect display device 460 via the ladder resistor SDRA1. The red video signals R0 to R5 (6 bits) are output in synchronization with the clock signal DCLK from the 6-bit data output terminals D12 terminal to D17 terminal, and each signal line of the red video signals R0 to R5 is a damping resistor. It is input to the door frame side effect display device 460 via the ladder resistor SDRA2.

The grounds of the peripheral control board 1510, the frame peripheral relay terminal board 868, the peripheral door relay terminal board 882, the effect display drive board 4450, and the door frame side effect display device 460 are electrically connected to each other and are the same ground. It has become.

[13. Various commands related to transmission and reception of the main control board]
Next, various commands transmitted from the main control board 1310 to the payout control board 951 and various commands transmitted from the main control board 1310 to the peripheral control board 1510 will be described with reference to FIGS. 88 to 91. FIG. 88 is a table showing an example of various commands transmitted from the main control board to the payout control board, and FIG. 89 is a table showing an example of various commands transmitted from the main control board to the peripheral control board. Is a table showing the continuation of various commands transmitted from the main control board to the peripheral control board of FIG. 89, and FIG. 91 is a table showing an example of various commands received from the payout control board received by the main control board. First, the prize ball command, which is a command related to payout transmitted from the main control board to the payout control board, is described, then various commands transmitted from the main control board to the peripheral control board are described, and the main control board receives the command. Various commands from the payout control board will be described.

[13-1. Various commands sent from the main control board to the payout control board]
The main control MPU 1310a of the main control board 1310 is detected from various winning switches such as the general winning opening sensors 4020 and 4020, the first starting opening sensor 4002, the second starting opening sensor 4004, and the count sensor 4005 shown in FIG. 69. When the signal is input, a prize ball command for paying out a predetermined number of game balls as a prize ball is transmitted to the payout control board based on these detection signals. This prize ball command is a command having a storage capacity of 1 byte (8 bits). In the present embodiment, the pachinko machine 1 and the CR unit 6 (communicate with the pachinko machine 1 and drive the payout motor 834 of the pachinko machine 1 (payout device 830) to the upper plate 321 and the lower plate 322 which are storage plates. When a device that pays out game balls as a rental ball) is electrically connected (such a pachinko machine is called a "CR machine"), as shown in FIG. 88 (a), a main control board. The prize ball commands transmitted from 1310 to the payout control board 951 include commands 10H to 1EH (“H” represents a hexadecimal number). Command 10H specifies one prize ball, and command 11H. In, two prize balls are specified, ..., In command 1EH, 15 prize balls are specified. The payout control board 951 drives the payout motor 834 to control the payout of the game balls by the designated number of prize balls.

In addition, a pachinko machine 1 and a ball lending machine (a device that directly pays out game balls to the upper plate 321 and the lower plate 322 as storage plates) are installed adjacent to the game hall (hall), and the pachinko machine is installed. When 1 and the ball lending machine are electrically connected (such a pachinko machine is referred to as a "general machine"), as shown in FIG. 88 (b), the payout control board 951 is connected from the main control board 1310. Command 20H to Command 2EH are prepared for the prize ball command to be sent to, command 20H specifies one prize ball, command 21H specifies two prize balls, ..., Command 2EH gives a prize. Fifteen spheres are designated. The payout control board 951 drives the payout motor 834 to control the payout of the game balls by the designated number of prize balls.

As shown in FIG. 88 (c), a command 30H is prepared as a common command for the CR machine and the general machine, and a self-check is specified in this command 30H. After the command is transmitted, the transmitting side transmits the command 30H and checks whether or not the ACK signal is input when the ACK signal to be output as confirmation of receipt of the command is not input from the receiving side for a predetermined period. Check the connection status. In the case of the CR machine in the present embodiment, the payout control board 951 confirms the connection state with the CR unit 6.

[13-2. Various commands sent from the main control board to the peripheral control board]
Next, various commands transmitted from the main control board 1310 to the peripheral control board 1510 will be described. The main control MPU 1310a of the main control board 1310 transmits various commands to the peripheral control board 1510 based on the progress of the game. These various commands are commands having a storage capacity of 2 bytes (16 bits), and as shown in FIGS. 89 and 90, a status indicating the type of the command having a storage capacity of 1 byte (8 bits) and a status indicating the type of the command have a storage capacity of 1 byte (8 bits). It is composed of a mode showing a variation of an effect having a storage capacity of 1 byte (8 bits).

As shown in FIGS. 89 and 90, the various commands are related to the special figure 1 synchronization effect, the special figure 2 synchronization effect, the jackpot, the power on, the normal electric role effect, the notification display, and the state. It is divided into display and others.

[13-2-1. Special figure 1 Synchronized production related]
The special drawing 1 tuning effect-related is based on the detection signal from the first start port sensor 4002 shown in FIG. 69, and the classification is divided into the function display unit 1400 shown in FIG. 69 as shown in FIG. It is composed of commands named special figure 1 synchronization effect start, special symbol 1 designation, special figure 1 synchronization effect end, and change state designation regarding the first special symbol display 1403. These various commands are assigned "A * H" as the status and "** H" as the mode ("H" represents a hexadecimal number) ("*" is a specific hexadecimal number. This is indicated in advance according to the specifications of the pachinko machine 1).

The special figure 1 synchronization effect start command instructs the start of the special figure synchronization effect with the effect pattern specified in the mode, and the special symbol 1 designation command specifies the loss, the specific jackpot, and the non-specific jackpot. The special figure 1 synchronization effect end command instructs the end of the special figure 1 synchronization effect, and the variable time state designation command indicates the probability and the time saving state. The probabilities and time-saving states include a low-probability time-saving state that indicates a low-probability state and a time-saving state, a high-probability time-saving state that indicates a high-probability state and a time-saving state, and a low-probability state. It is composed of a low-probability non-time-saving state that indicates that it is a state and not a time-saving state, and a high-probability non-time-saving state that indicates that it is a high-probability state and not a time-saving state. Low probability non-time saving state is set). Here, the high probability state is a state in which the probability of a big hit is set higher than that in the low probability state (normal game state), and the time saving state is, for example, the normal symbol display 1402 shown in FIG. By shortening the time for variable display of the symbol compared to the non-time saving state (normal game state) and stopping and displaying the light emission pattern corresponding to the normal lottery result, the result of the normal lottery by the normal lottery described later at a predetermined time can be obtained. The number of stops displayed is increased as compared with the non-time saving state, and the period for opening and closing the pair of movable pieces shown in FIG. 8 is lengthened as compared with the non-time saving state (normal game state), as shown in FIG. By increasing the acceptance rate (entry rate) of game balls to the second starting port 2004 shown, it is possible to obtain a lottery opportunity for a special symbol without reducing the number of balls held (in other words, compared to the non-time saving state). The second starting port 2004 It is a state of increasing the acceptance rate (entry rate) of game balls to.

As the transmission timing of these various commands, the special symbol 1 synchronization effect start command is transmitted at the start of the special symbol 1 fluctuation, and the special symbol 1 designation command is transmitted immediately after the start of the special diagram 1 synchronization effect. The effect end command is transmitted when the special symbol 1 variation time elapses (when the special symbol 1 is confirmed), and the variation state specification command is transmitted immediately after the special symbol winning information is specified. It should be noted that these various commands are actually transmitted in the peripheral control board command transmission process in step S120 in the main control side timer interrupt process described later.

[13-2-2. Special Figure 2 Synchronized production related]
The special figure 2 tuning effect-related is based on the detection signal from the second start port sensor 4004 shown in FIG. 69, and the classification is divided into the function display unit 1400 shown in FIG. 69 as shown in FIG. It is composed of commands named Special Figure 2 Synchronized Effect Start, Special Symbol 2 Designation, and Special Figure 2 Synchronized Effect End related to the second special symbol display 1405. These various commands are assigned a status of "B * H" and a mode of "** H"("H" represents a hexadecimal number) ("*" is a specific hexadecimal number). This is indicated in advance according to the specifications of the pachinko machine 1).

The special figure 2 synchronization effect start command instructs the start of the special figure synchronization effect with the effect pattern specified in the mode, and the special symbol 2 designation command specifies the loss, the specific jackpot, and the non-specific jackpot. , The end of the special figure 2 synchronization effect indicates the end of the special figure 2 synchronization effect.

As the transmission timing of these various commands, the special symbol 2 synchronization effect start command is transmitted at the start of the special symbol 2 fluctuation, and the special symbol 2 designation command is transmitted immediately after the start of the special diagram 2 synchronization effect. The effect end command is transmitted when the special symbol 2 variation time elapses (when the special symbol 2 is confirmed). It should be noted that these various commands are actually transmitted in the peripheral control board command transmission process in step S120 in the main control side timer interrupt process.

[13-2-3. Big hit related]
As shown in Fig. 89, the categories related to jackpots include jackpot opening, jackpot 1 open Nth display, jackpot 1 closed display, jackpot 1 count display, jackpot ending, jackpot symbol display, and jackpot opening. , Small hit open display, small hit count display, and small hit ending commands. These various commands are assigned "C * H" as the status and "** H" as the mode ("H" represents a hexadecimal number) ("*" is a specific hexadecimal number. This is indicated in advance according to the specifications of the pachinko machine 1).

The jackpot opening command indicates the start of the jackpot opening, and the Nth display command for opening the jackpot 1 is the start during the opening of the jackpot 1 in the 1st to 16th rounds (starting port unit 2100 shown in FIG. 8). (Opening or opening start of the Nth round of the large winning opening 2005) is instructed, and the large winning opening 1 closing display command between the rounds starts during the closing of the large winning opening 1 (large starting port unit 2100). It indicates that the winning opening 2005 is being closed or the closing is started), and the large winning opening 1 count display command counts the number of game balls with a count of 0 to 10 (shown in FIG. 69). The number of game balls that have entered the jackpot 2005 detected by the count sensor 4005) is transmitted, the jackpot ending command indicates the start of the jackpot ending, and the jackpot symbol display command is the jackpot symbol display command. It instructs the display of symbol information.

Further, the small hit opening command indicates the start of the small hit opening, and the small hit open display command starts during the small hit opening (during the opening of the large winning opening 2005 of the starting port unit 2100 at the time of the small hit, or The small hit count display command is used to indicate the start of opening), and the small hit medium / large winning opening winning effect (when the game ball that has entered the large winning opening 2005 during the small hit is detected by the count sensor 4005). The small hit ending command is instructed to start the small hit ending.

As the transmission timing of these various commands, the jackpot opening command is transmitted at the start of the jackpot opening, and the Nth display command for opening the jackpot 1 is when the jackpot 1 is opened in the 1st to 16th rounds (starting port unit 2100). It is transmitted at the time of opening the Nth round of the big winning opening 2005), and the command for displaying the closing of the big winning opening 1 is sent at the time of closing the big winning opening 1 (starting closing of the big winning opening 2005 of the starting port unit 2100). The large winning opening 1 count display command is used when the large winning opening 1 is opened and when the count changes to the large winning opening 1 (when the large winning opening 2005 of the starting port unit 2100 is opened, and the game ball entered in the large winning opening 2005. Is transmitted by the count sensor 4005), the jackpot ending command is transmitted at the start of the jackpot ending, and the jackpot symbol display command is sent when the jackpot unit 2100 opens the jackpot 2005. ) Is sent.

Further, the small hit opening command is transmitted at the start of the small hit opening, and the small hit open display command is transmitted at the time of opening the small hit (at the time of opening the large winning opening 2005 of the starting port unit 2100 at the time of the small hit). The small hit count display command is transmitted at the time of winning the small hit medium large winning opening (when the game ball entered in the large winning opening 2005 is detected by the count sensor 4005 during the small hit), and the small hit ending command is , Sent at the start of the small hit ending. It should be noted that these various commands are actually transmitted in the peripheral control board command transmission process in step S120 in the main control side timer interrupt process.

[13-2-4. Power on]
As shown in FIG. 89, the power-on category is composed of a command named a power-on state and a power-on main control return destination. These various commands are assigned "D * H" as the status and "** H" as the mode ("H" represents a hexadecimal number) ("*" is a specific hexadecimal number. This is indicated in advance according to the specifications of the pachinko machine 1).

The power-on state command indicates the start of the RAM clear effect and the game state. The power-on state command is used for the payout control board 951 shown in FIG. 70 when the power is turned on (including not only when the power is turned on but also when the power is restored due to a power failure or a momentary power failure). Includes information instructing that when the operation switch 954 is operated to clear the RAM, and when the power is turned on (in addition to when the power is turned on, when the power is restored due to a power failure or momentary power failure. ) With information indicating which of the above-mentioned low-probability time-saving state, high-probability time-saving state, low-probability non-time-saving state, and high-probability non-time-saving state (probability and time-saving state) is to be restored. , Information indicating the model code of the pachinko machine, and. When creating so-called max type, middle type, and Amadeji type, for example, the model code of this pachinko machine is for the copyright of which work, and what kind of game specifications (for example, probability fluctuations occur). In addition to the game specification that the state is continued until the next big hit game state occurs, the game specification that the probability fluctuation occurs when the number of fluctuations of the special symbol is limited (for example, 30 times or 70 times). (So-called ST machine), etc.). In other words, the information on the model code of the pachinko machine is to specify the series code to identify which type is the max type, middle type, or Amadeji type indicating the model type, and to specify the copyright of the work. In addition to the copyright code of the game specification and the game specification (for example, when a probability change occurs, the state is continued until the next big hit game state occurs, the probability change in a state where the number of changes of the special symbol is limited. It is mainly composed of a game specification code for specifying a game specification (ST machine, etc.) in which

The main control return destination command at power-on indicates the return destination of the main control board 1310 itself. The main control return destination command at power-on is mainly composed of information indicating the drive state of the start port solenoid 2107 shown in FIG. 69 and information indicating the drive state of the attacker solenoid 2108 shown in FIG. 69. ing.

The transmission timing of the power-on status command and the power-on main control return destination command is when the main control board is powered on (in addition to when the power is turned on, when power is restored due to a power failure or momentary power failure. Is also sent to.). Specifically, when the pachinko machine 1 is turned on, when the pachinko machine 1 recovers from a power failure or momentary power failure, the main control side power on time process described later is executed, and the peripheral control board command in step S120 in the main control side timer interrupt process is executed. In the transmission process, the power-on status command and the power-on main control return destination command are transmitted.

[13-2-5. Fuzu-tuned production-related]
The normal symbol tuning effect-related is based on the detection signal from the gate sensor 4003 shown in FIG. 69, and the division is divided into the normal symbol display of the function display unit 1400 shown in FIG. 69 as shown in FIG. It is composed of commands related to the vessel 1402, which are named as the start of the normal figure synchronization effect, the designation of the normal symbol, the end of the normal figure synchronization effect, and the specification of the state at the time of fluctuation. These various commands are assigned "E * H" as the status and "** H" as the mode ("H" represents a hexadecimal number) ("*" is a specific hexadecimal number. This is indicated in advance according to the specifications of the pachinko machine 1).

The normal figure synchronization effect start command is for instructing the start of the normal figure synchronization effect with the effect pattern specified in the mode, and the normal symbol designation command is for designating the miss, the specific jackpot, and the non-specific jackpot. The figure synchronization effect end command instructs the end of the normal figure synchronization effect, and the variable time state designation command indicates the probability and the time saving state. As described above, the probability and time saving states include a low probability time saving state indicating that the time saving state is a low probability state and a high probability time saving state indicating that the time saving state is a high probability state. It is composed of a state, a low-probability non-time-saving state that indicates that it is a low-probability state and not a time-saving state, and a high-probability non-time-saving state that indicates that it is a high-probability state and not a time-saving state (usually). As the game state, a low probability non-time saving state is set).

As the transmission timing of these various commands, the normal symbol synchronization effect start command is transmitted at the start of the normal symbol 1 fluctuation, the normal symbol designation command is transmitted immediately after the start of the normal symbol synchronization effect, and the normal symbol synchronization effect end command is transmitted. , Ordinary symbol is transmitted when the fluctuation time elapses (when the ordinary symbol is confirmed), and the change state specification command is transmitted immediately after the normal symbol winning information is specified. It should be noted that these various commands are actually transmitted in the peripheral control board command transmission process in step S120 in the main control side timer interrupt process.

[13-2-6. Ordinary electric role production related]
The ordinary electric service effect is related to the pair of movable pieces shown in FIG. 8 which are opened and closed by the drive of the start port solenoid 2107 shown in FIG. 69, and the division thereof is as shown in FIG. It consists of commands named Hit Opening, Solenoid Open Display, and Solenoid Ending. These various commands are assigned "F * H" as the status and "** H" as the mode ("H" represents a hexadecimal number) ("*" is a specific hexadecimal number. This is indicated in advance according to the specifications of the pachinko machine 1).

The opening command per normal figure indicates the start of the opening per normal figure, and the open normal power display command starts while the normal power is open (a pair of movable pieces are expanded in the left-right direction by driving the starting port solenoid 2107). The state or the time of expansion) is instructed, and the ending command per normal figure indicates the start of the ending per normal figure.

As the transmission timing of these various commands, the opening command per normal figure is transmitted at the start of the opening per normal figure, and the open power display command is left and right when the normal power is opened (a pair of movable pieces are driven by the start port solenoid 2107). It is transmitted at the time of expanding in the direction), and the ending command per normal figure is transmitted at the start of the ending per normal figure. It should be noted that these various commands are actually transmitted in the peripheral control board command transmission process in step S120 in the main control side timer interrupt process.

[13-2-7. Notification display]
As shown in FIG. 90, the notification display category is composed of commands named winning abnormality display, connection abnormality display, disconnection / short circuit abnormality display, magnetic detection switch abnormality display, door opening, and door closing. These various commands are assigned a status of "6 * H" and a mode of "** H"("H" represents a hexadecimal number) ("*" is a specific hexadecimal number). It is determined in advance by the specifications of the pachinko machine 1).

The winning abnormality display command is used when a game ball enters the big winning opening 2005 other than during the big hit (when the condition device is operating) (even though it is not a big hit, the game ball enters the big winning opening 2005 of the starting port unit 2100). Is detected by the count sensor 4005) to indicate the start of the winning abnormality notification, and the connection abnormality display command is, for example, electrical in the path between the main control board 1310 and the payout control board 951. When there is a connection abnormality, it is instructed to start the connection abnormality notification, and the disconnection / short circuit abnormality display command is, for example, the main control board 1310, the first start port sensor 4002, the second start port sensor 4004, and the count sensor. When an electrical connection with 4005 or the like is broken or short-circuited, the start of the disconnection / short-circuit abnormality display is instructed, and the magnetic detection switch abnormality display command causes an abnormality in the magnetic detection sensor 4024 shown in FIG. 69. When this occurs, the magnetic detection switch is instructed to start the abnormality notification.

Further, in the door opening command, the door frame 3 is directed to the main body frame 4 based on the detection signal (opening signal) from the door frame opening switch 618 input via the payout control board 951 shown in FIG. 70. When the door is in the opened state, the door opening notification is instructed, and the door frame closing command closes the door frame 3 with respect to the main body frame 4 based on the detection signal from the door frame opening switch 618. This is to instruct the end of the door opening notification when the state is set. On the other hand, in the main body frame opening command, the main body frame 4 refers to the outer frame 2 based on the detection signal (opening signal) from the main body frame opening switch 619 input via the payout control board 951 shown in FIG. In the open state, the main body frame opening notification is instructed, and the main body frame closing command is issued to the main body frame 4 with respect to the outer frame 2 based on the detection signal from the main body frame opening switch 619. When it is in the closed state, it instructs the end of the main body frame opening notification.

As the transmission timing of these various commands, the winning abnormality display command is transmitted when a prize is won in the big winning opening other than during the big hit (condition device is operating), and the connection abnormality display command is sent from the main control board 1310 to the payout control board 951. When there is no ACK reply (ACK signal) from the payout control board 951 when the command is transmitted to, the disconnection / short circuit abnormality display command is sent to the first start port sensor 4002, the second start port sensor 4004, the count sensor 4005, etc. Of these, it is transmitted when any of them becomes disconnected or short-circuited, and the magnetic detection switch abnormality display command is transmitted when an abnormality of the magnetic detection sensor 4024 is detected. Further, the door opening command is transmitted when the door opening is detected (when the door frame 3 is in the open state with respect to the main body frame 4 based on the detection signal from the door frame opening switch 618), and the door is opened. The frame closing command is transmitted when the door closing is detected (when the door frame 3 is closed with respect to the main body frame 4 based on the detection signal from the door frame opening switch 618). The main body frame open command is transmitted when the main body frame open is detected (when the main body frame 4 is open to the outer frame 2 based on the detection signal from the main body frame open switch 619), and the main body is sent. The frame closing command is transmitted when the main body frame closing is detected (when the main body frame 4 is closed with respect to the outer frame 2 based on the detection signal from the main body frame opening switch 619). It should be noted that these various commands are actually transmitted in the peripheral control board command transmission process in step S120 in the main control side timer interrupt process.

[13-2-8. Status display]
As shown in FIG. 90, the status display division consists of commands named frame status 1 command (corresponding to an error occurrence command), error canceling navigation command (corresponding to an error canceling command), and frame status 2 command. There is. These various commands are assigned a status of "7 * H" and a mode of "** H"("H" represents a hexadecimal number) ("*" is a specific hexadecimal number). It is determined in advance by the specifications of the pachinko machine 1).

The frame state 1 command, the error release navigation command, and the frame state 2 command are commands having a storage capacity of 1 byte (8 bits) transmitted from the payout control board 951, respectively, and detailed description thereof will be described later. .. When the main control MPU 1310a of the main control board 1310 receives the frame state 1 command, the error release navigation command, and the frame state 2 command from the payout control board 951, "7 * H" is displayed as shown in FIG. Along with setting it as a status, the received command is set as it is as a mode. That is, when the main control MPU 1310a receives the frame state 1 command, the error release navigation command, and the frame state 2 command from the payout control board 951, it adds "7 * H" which is additional information to these received commands. Formats the command into a command having a storage capacity of 2 bytes (16 bits).

The formatted frame state 1 command is sent when the power is restored, when the frame state changes, and when the error release navigation is performed, the error release navigation command is sent when the error release navigation is performed, and the frame state 2 command is sent when the power is restored. , And when the frame state changes. The shaped frame state 1 command, error release navigation command, and frame state 2 command are actually transmitted by the peripheral control board command transmission process in step S120 in the main control side timer interrupt process.

[13-2-9. Test related]
As shown in FIG. 90, the test-related division is composed of various commands named tests. This test command is assigned a status of "8 * H" and a mode of "** H"("H" represents a hexadecimal number) ("*" is a specific hexadecimal number). Is determined in advance according to the specifications of the pachinko machine 1).

The test command instructs various inspections of the peripheral control board 1510 (for example, the peripheral control unit 1511, the liquid crystal display control unit 1512, the lamp drive board 4170, the motor drive board 4180, and the frame decoration shown in FIG. 72). It inspects various boards such as the drive amplifier board 194).

As the transmission timing of the test command, it is transmitted at a time other than RAM clear and RAM clear when the main control board power is turned on. Specifically, when the power of the pachinko machine 1 is turned on, when the power is restored from a power failure or a momentary power failure, and when the operation switch 954 of the payout control board 951 is operated, the main control side power-on processing described later is performed. It is executed and a test command is transmitted in the peripheral control board command transmission process in step S120 in the main control side timer interrupt process.

[13-2-10. others]
In other categories, as shown in FIG. 90, start opening winning, fluctuation shortening operation end designation, high probability end designation, special symbol 1 memory, special symbol 2 memory, normal symbol memory, special symbol 1 memory look-ahead effect, and Special symbol 2 Consists of a command named memory look-ahead effect. These various commands are assigned a status of "9 * H" and a mode of "** H"("H" represents a hexadecimal number) ("*" is a specific hexadecimal number). This is indicated in advance according to the specifications of the pachinko machine 1).

The start port winning command instructs the start of the start port winning effect, and is the start of the effect when the game ball enters the first start port 2002 based on the detection signal from the first start port sensor 4002. , The start of the effect when the game ball enters the second start port 2004 based on the detection signal from the second start port sensor 4004, respectively, and the variation shortening operation end designation command is variable. The state transition from the shortened operating state to the variable shortened non-operating state is instructed, and the high-probability end designation command is instructed to shift the state from the high-probability state to the low-probability state. Is still used for the variable display of the special symbol on the first special symbol display 1403 of the function display unit 1400 when the game ball enters the first starting port 2002 shown in FIG. The number of balls that have not been held (number of holds) is transmitted, and the special symbol 2 storage command is to hold 0 to 4 special symbols 2 (the game ball enters the second starting port 2004 shown in FIG. 8). The second special symbol display 1405 of the function display unit 1400 conveys the number of balls (holding number) that have not yet been used for the variable display of the special symbol, and the normal symbol storage command is the normal symbol 1 hold 0 to 4 The number of balls (the number of balls (holding number) that the game ball has passed through the gate portion 2003 shown in FIG. 8 and has not yet been used for the variable display of the normal symbol on the normal symbol display 1402 of the function display unit 1400) is transmitted. Yes, the special symbol 1 storage look-ahead effect command pre-reads the special symbol 1 hold before the special symbol 1 hold is used for the variable display of the special symbol on the first special symbol display 1403 of the function display unit 1400. Based on this, the first special symbol display 1403 indicates the start of the look-ahead effect for notifying the notice of the display result, and the special symbol 2 storage look-ahead effect command has the function of holding the special symbol 2 to display the second special symbol of the display unit 1400. Before being used for the variable display of the special symbol in the device 1405, it is instructed to start the look-ahead effect of pre-reading and notifying the notice of the display result by the second special symbol display 1405 based on the special symbol 2 hold.

As the transmission timing of these various commands, the start port winning command is used at the time of starting port winning (when the game ball enters the first starting port 2002 based on the detection signal from the first starting port sensor 4002, or the second. When the game ball enters the second start port 2004 based on the detection signal from the start port sensor 4004), the lower speaker 921 shown in FIG. 5 and the upper speaker 573 shown in FIG. The command to specify the end of the fluctuation shortening operation is sent to notify the effect, and is sent at the end of the stop period after the fluctuation is confirmed after the specified number of fluctuation reductions have been completed (after the out-of-order stop period has elapsed), and the high-probability end designation command is sent. , The special symbol 1 storage command is sent at the end of the stop period (after the out-of-order stop period has elapsed) after the fluctuation is confirmed after the high probability number of times is exhausted in the case of "high probability N times", and the special symbol 1 operation hold ball number change. Time (when a game ball enters the first start port 2002 and there is a hold number that has not yet been used for the variable display of the special symbol on the first special symbol display 1403 of the function display unit 1400, the first start is further performed. It is transmitted when a game ball enters the mouth 2002 and the number of holdings increases, or when the number of holdings is used for variable display of a special symbol on the first special symbol display 1403 and the number of holdings decreases). , The special symbol 2 storage command is used when the number of balls on hold for operation of the special symbol 2 changes (a game ball enters the second starting port 2004 and the second special symbol display 1405 of the function display unit 1400 displays the fluctuation of the special symbol. When there is a hold number that has not been used yet, when a game ball enters the second start port 2004 and the hold number increases, or when the hold number increases, the special symbol changes on the second special symbol display 1405. It is sent when it is used for display and the number of reserved balls decreases), and the normal symbol memory command is sent when the number of reserved balls for normal symbol 1 operation changes (when the game ball passes through the gate 2003 and the number of reserved balls passes through the gate unit 2003), the normal symbol of the function display unit 1400 is sent. When there is a hold number that has not yet been used for the variable display of the normal symbol on the display 1402, and when the game ball passes through the gate portion 2003 and the hold number increases, or from the hold number, the normal symbol display 1402 When the number of reserved balls is reduced by using it to display the fluctuation of the normal symbol), the special symbol 1 memory look-ahead effect command is sent when the number of special symbol 1 operation reserved balls is increased (the game ball is at the first start port 2002). When the number of reserved balls is increased after entering the ball), the special symbol 2 memory look-ahead effect command is sent when the number of reserved balls for special symbol 2 operation is increased (when the game ball enters the second starting port 2004 and the number of reserved balls is increased). When it increases), it will be sent. It should be noted that these various commands are actually transmitted in the peripheral control board command transmission process in step S120 in the main control side timer interrupt process.

By the way, as described above, the start port winning command is used when the start port is won (when a game ball enters the first start port 2002 based on the detection signal from the first start port sensor 4002, or when the game ball enters the first start port 2002, or the second start port. When the game ball enters the second starting port 2004 based on the detection signal from the sensor 4004), it is transmitted from the lower speaker 921 and the upper speaker 573 mainly to notify the fact by voice. How the peripheral control board 1510 shown in 72 uses the start opening winning command may differ depending on the specifications of the pachinko machine. For example, the pachinko machine 1 in the present embodiment is designed to be used not only for voice notification from the lower speaker 921 and the upper speaker 573 but also for monitoring the presence or absence of fraudulent activity. On the other hand, in other pachinko machines, the peripheral control board 1510 merely receives the start opening winning command, and the lower speaker 921 and the upper speaker 573 do not notify by voice.

[13-3. Various commands from the payout control board received by the main control board]
Next, various commands from the payout control board 951 received by the main control board 1310 will be described.

As shown in FIG. 91, the classification of various commands from the payout control board 951 is composed of commands named frame state 1, error release navigation, and frame state 2, frame state 1, error release navigation, and The order of priority is set in the order of frame state 2.

The frame state 1 command (corresponding to the error occurrence command) includes out-of-ball, full tank, stock of 50 or more, connection abnormality and CR not connected, and bit 0 (B0, "B") when the ball is out. Represents a bit.) Is set to a value 1, bit 1 (B1) is set to a value 1 when the tank is full, bit 2 (B2) is set to a value 1 when 50 or more stocks are in stock, and a connection error occurs. The value 1 is set in the bit 3 (B3), and the value 1 is set in the bit 4 (B4) when the CR is not connected. Bits 5 (B5) to 7 (B7) of the frame state 1 command are set to have a value of 1 in B5, a value of 0 in B6, and a value of 0 in B7.

The error release navigation command (corresponding to the error release command) includes a ball-shaped, payout detection sensor error, and a retry error. In the ball-shaped ball, bit 2 (B2) is set to a value of 1, and the payout detection sensor. In the case of an error, the value 1 is set in the bit 3 (B3), and in the retry error, the value 1 is set in the bit 4 (B4). Here, the “payout detection sensor error” indicates whether or not the payout detection sensor 842 shown in FIG. 70 is defective. The "retry error" indicates that the inconsistent game ball is repeatedly paid out by the retry operation. Bits (B0), bits (B1), and bits 5 (B5) to 7 (B7) of the error release navigation command have a value of 0 for B0, a value of 0 for B1, a value of 0 for B5, and a value of 1 for B6. And the value 0 is set in B7.

The frame state 2 command is prepared during ball removal, and the value 1 is set to bit 0 (B0) during ball removal. Bits 1 (B1) to 7 (B7) of the frame state 2 command have a value of 0 for B1, a value of 0 for B2, a value of 0 for B3, a value of 0 for B4, a value of 1 for B5, a value of 1 for B6, and so on. The value 0 is set in B7.

As the transmission timing of these various commands, the frame state 1 command is transmitted at the time of power restoration, the frame state change, and the error release navigation, and the error release navigation command is transmitted at the time of error release navigation, and the frame state 2 command is transmitted. Is transmitted when the power is restored and when the frame state changes. It should be noted that these various commands are actually transmitted in the command transmission process of step S558 in the payout control unit main process of the payout control unit power-on processing described later.

[14. Various control processes on the main control board]
Next, various control processes performed by the main control board 1310 shown in FIG. 69 according to the progress of the game of the pachinko machine 1 will be described with reference to FIGS. 92 to 94. FIG. 92 is a flowchart showing an example of the main control side power-on processing, FIG. 93 is a flowchart showing the continuation of the main control-side power-on processing of FIG. 92, and FIG. 94 is an example of the main control side timer interrupt processing. It is a flowchart which shows. First, various random numbers used for game control will be described, and then the operation of the initial value update type counter, the main control side power-on processing, and the main control side timer interrupt processing will be described.

[14-1. Various random numbers]
As various random numbers used for game control, a random number for determining a big hit to be used for determining whether or not to generate a big hit game state, and whether or not to generate a reach (out of reach) when the big hit game state is not generated. Random number for reach determination to be used for determination, and variation for use in determining the variation display pattern of the special symbol shown in FIG. 69, which is variablely displayed by the first special symbol display 1403 and the second special symbol display 1405. A random number for the display pattern, a random number for the jackpot symbol to be used for determining the jackpot symbol derived and displayed by the first special symbol display 1403 and the second special symbol display 1405 when the jackpot game state is generated, and this jackpot. A random number for determining the initial value for a big hit symbol to be used for determining the initial value of a random number for a symbol, and a random number for determining a small hit game state, which is derived and displayed by the first special symbol display 1403 and the second special symbol display 1405 when generating a small hit game state. A random number for a small hit symbol to be used for determining a small hit symbol, a random number for determining an initial value for a small hit symbol to be used for determining an initial value of the random number for the small hit symbol, and the like are prepared. Further, in addition to these random numbers, a random number for determining whether to open and close the movable piece shown in FIG. 8 is used to determine a random number for determining whether or not to open and close the movable piece, and a random number for determining whether or not to open and close the movable piece is used. The random number for determining the initial value for determining the hit of the ordinary symbol, and the random number for the ordinary symbol variation display pattern used for determining the variation display pattern of the ordinary symbol that is variablely displayed on the ordinary symbol display 1402 shown in FIG. 69. It is prepared.

Of the various random numbers used for such game control, the big hit determination random numbers are updated by the hardware, while the other various random numbers are updated by the software.

For example, the big hit determination random number is directly updated by the hardware by the main control built-in hard random number circuit 1310an built in the main control MPU 1310a shown in FIG. 69. As described above, in the main control built-in hard random number circuit 1310an, when the main control MPU 1310a is reset, first, the clock signal input to the main control MPU 1310a is set to one value within a predetermined numerical range as an initial value. Based on (the clock signal output from the main control crystal oscillator MX0 shown in FIG. 77), other values within the predetermined numerical range are extracted one after another at high speed, and all the values within the predetermined numerical range are extracted. When the extraction is completed, one value within the predetermined numerical range is extracted again, and other values within the predetermined numerical range are extracted one after another at high speed based on the clock signal input to the main control MPU1310a. do. The main control built-in hard random number circuit 1310an repeatedly performs such a high-speed lottery, and the main control MPU 1310a hits the value extracted by the main control built-in hard random number circuit 1310an at the time of acquiring the value from the main control built-in hard random number circuit 1310an. It is designed to be set as a random number for judgment.

On the other hand, the counter that updates the random number for normal symbol hit determination is updated within a predetermined fixed numerical value range from the minimum value to the maximum value, and the range from the minimum value to the maximum value will be described later. Each time the main control side timer interrupt process is performed, the value is incremented by 1 to count up. This counter counts up from the random number for determining the initial value for determining the normal symbol hit to the maximum value, and then counts up from the minimum value toward the random number for determining the initial value for determining the normal symbol hit. When the counter finishes counting up the range from the minimum value to the maximum value of the normal symbol hit judgment random number, the normal symbol hit judgment initial value determination random number is updated. Such a counter update method is called an "initial value update type counter". The random number for determining the initial value for determining the normal symbol hit can be obtained by executing the initial value lottery process for drawing one value from the fixed numerical value range of the counter that updates the random number for determining the normal symbol hit. ..

In the present embodiment, when the operation switch 954 of the payout control board 951 shown in FIG. 70 is operated at the time of turning on the power, or in the processing at the time of turning on the power on the main control side, which will be described later, the main control MPU 1310a shown in FIG. The checksum value (sum value) obtained by calculating the total of the game information stored in the main control built-in RAM as a numerical value is stored in the main control side power off processing (power off). When clearing the entire area of the main control built-in RAM, such as when the checksum value (sum value) does not match, the random number for determining the initial value for normal symbol hit determination is the main control MPU1310a shown in FIG. Extracts the ID code from the built-in non-volatile RAM, and based on the extracted ID code, performs the initial value derivation process that always derives the same fixed value from the fixed numerical range of the counter that updates the normal symbol hit judgment random number. It is a mechanism to execute and set this derived fixed value. That is, the random number for determining the initial value for determining the normal symbol hit is constantly overwritten and updated with the same fixed value derived based on the ID code by executing the initial value derivation process. In this way, the value set in the random number for determining the initial value for normal symbol hit determination is derived using the ID code, and the non-volatile RAM built in the main control MPU 1310a by the manufacturer of the main control MPU 1310a. The ID code is stored by storing the ID code in the first security measure that the ID code cannot be rewritten even if an external device is used, and by executing the initial value derivation process when clearing the entire area of the main control built-in RAM. It is prevented from being analyzed by taking a second security measure of deriving the same fixed value based on the above and a two-step security measure by.

Here, an advantage of extracting an ID code from the non-volatile RAM built in the main control MPU 1310a and using the extracted ID code as a random number for determining an initial value for determining a normal symbol hit will be described. For example, a person who illegally obtains a game ball to be paid out as a prize ball obtains the game board 5 by some method, disassembles it, and inputs an ID code stored in advance in a non-volatile RAM built in the main control MPU 1310a. Even if it is possible to grasp the timing when the value of the counter that illegally acquires and updates the random number for normal symbol hit judgment and the normal symbol hit judgment value match, the ID code is unique for identifying the individual. Since the code is attached, the ID code is completely different from the ID code stored in advance in the non-volatile RAM built in the main control MPU 1310a'provided in the other game board 5'. That is, in the other game board 5', the timing at which the value of the counter for updating the random number for the normal symbol hit determination and the normal symbol hit determination value match is also completely different from that of the obtained game board 5. In other words, the ID code obtained by disassembling and analyzing the obtained game board 5 is completely useless in another game board 5', that is, another pachinko machine 1', so it was disassembled and analyzed. Even if a momentary power failure is generated at each predetermined interval obtained and the game ball is passed through the gate portion 2003 shown in FIG. 8 at each predetermined interval, the movable piece shown in FIG. 8 is opened and closed to perform a second operation. It is not possible to generate a gaming state in which the gaming ball can be accepted into the starting port 2004.

[14-2. Main control side power-on processing]
First, when the power is turned on to the pachinko machine 1, the main control MPU 1310a is configured so that the stack pointer is set at a predetermined address as a default.
This stack pointer indicates, for example, the address loaded on the stack for temporarily storing the contents of the storage element (register) in use, or the return address of this routine when the subroutine is terminated and returned to this routine. It indicates the address stacked on the stack for temporary storage, and the stack pointer advances each time the stack is stacked.

Then, the above-mentioned main control program performs the main control side power-on processing as shown in FIGS. 92 and 93 under the control of the main control MPU 1310a of the main control board 1310. When the main control side power-on processing is started, the main control program sets the RAM access permission under the control of the main control MPU 1310a (step S10). By setting this RAM access permission, the main control built-in RAM (game storage unit) can be updated.

Following step S10, the main control program sets the initial value and the start setting of the main control built-in WDT1310af shown in FIG. 69 (step S12). Here, the watchdog timer control register built in the main control MPU 1310a (hereinafter, "" The timer setting value is set in the WDT control register), the main control built-in WDT1310af is started, and the time counting until the main control MPU1310a is reset is started. When the main control built-in WDT1310af is started, the time counting by the main control built-in WDT1310af is started, and the watchdog timer clear register built in the main control MPU 1310a is reached by the time when the timed time reaches the time set by the timer set value. Hereinafter, if the timer clear setting value is not set in the “WDT clear register”), the main control MPU 1310a is forcibly reset by the main control built-in WDT1310af. On the other hand, when the WDT1310af with built-in main control is activated and the time is started, if the timer clear setting value is set in the WDT clear register before the time is reached by the time set by the timer setting value, the timer clear setting value is set. The timekeeping by the main control built-in WDT1310af is cleared, and the timekeeping is started again. In this way, the operation (system) of the main control MPU 1310a operates normally by repeating the process of clearing the time measurement by the main control built-in WDT1310af until the time set by the timer set value is reached and restarting the time measurement. It is possible to monitor whether or not it is.

Following step S12, the main control program performs a power failure clearing process (step S14). In this electric power clearing process, first, the power failure clear signal is started to be output to the power failure monitoring circuit 1310e shown in FIG. 78. The power failure monitoring circuit 1310e is composed of a comparator MIC21 which is a voltage comparison circuit and a D type flip-flop MIC22. The comparator MIC21, which is a voltage comparison circuit, outputs the comparison result by comparing the voltage between + 24V and the reference voltage or comparing the voltage between + 12V and the reference voltage. This comparison result becomes HI when no power failure or momentary power failure occurs and is input to the PR terminal which is a preset terminal of the D type flip-flop MIC22, while when a power failure or momentary power failure occurs. The logic becomes LOW and is input to the PR terminal which is a preset terminal of the D type flip-flop MIC22.

In the electric power clearing process, the power failure clear signal is first output to the power failure monitoring circuit 1310e to start the output of the power failure clear signal to the CLR terminal which is the clear terminal of the D type flip-flop MIC22. This power failure clear signal is input from the output terminal of the predetermined output port of the main control MPU 1310a to the CLR terminal which is the clear terminal of the D type flip-flop IC via the main control output circuit 1310ca with a reset function with its logic as LOW. Will be done. As a result, the main control MPU 1310a can release the latch state of the D-type flip-flop MIC22, and until the latch state is set, the logic input to the PR terminal which is the preset terminal of the D-type flip-flop MIC22 is input. It can be inverted and output from the 1Q terminal, which is an output terminal, and the signal from the 1Q terminal can be monitored.

Subsequently, in the electric power clearing process, a wait timer process is performed to determine whether or not a power failure warning signal is input. The voltage does not rise immediately from the time the power is turned on until the specified voltage is reached. On the other hand, in the event of a power failure or momentary power failure (a phenomenon in which the power supply is temporarily stopped), the voltage drops, and when the voltage becomes smaller than the power failure warning voltage, a power failure warning signal is input from the power failure monitoring circuit 1310e as a power failure warning. Similarly, when the voltage becomes smaller than the power failure warning voltage between the time when the power is turned on and the voltage rises to a predetermined voltage, a power failure warning signal is input from the power failure monitoring circuit 1310e. Therefore, the wait timer process is a process for waiting until the voltage becomes higher than the power failure warning voltage and stabilizes after the power is turned on. In the present embodiment, 200 milliseconds (ms) is set as the waiting time (wait timer). Has been done. The determination of whether or not the power failure warning signal is input is performed based on the signal output from the 1Q terminal, which is the output terminal of the above-mentioned D type flip-flop MIC 22, as the power failure warning signal.

If there is no power failure warning signal input even after waiting until the voltage becomes higher than the power failure warning voltage and stabilizes after the power is turned on, the main control program sends a power failure clear signal to the CLR terminal, which is the clear terminal of the D-type flip-flop MIC22. Stop the output. Here, the power failure clear signal is a CLR terminal which is a clear terminal of the D type flip-flop IC via the main control output circuit 1310ca with a reset function from the output terminal of the predetermined output port of the main control MPU 1310a with its logic as HI. Is entered in. Thereby, the main control MPU 1310a can set the D type flip-flop MIC 22 in the latch state. When the D-type flip-flop MIC 22 latches the state in which the logic is LOW and is input to the PR terminal which is the preset terminal, the power failure warning signal is output from the 1Q terminal which is the output terminal.

Following step S14, the main control program is in a state in which the RAM clear process for initializing the main control built-in RAM (game storage unit) can be executed for a predetermined time from the time when the power is turned on (when the power is turned on on the game side). Operation control means). Specifically, the main control program first determines whether or not the operation switch 954 of the payout control board 951 shown in FIG. 70 is operated (step S16). In this determination, the main control program inputs an error release navigation command (first error release command) based on the operation signal (detection signal) associated with the operation of the operation switch 954 of the payout control board 951 to the main control MPU 1310a. It depends on whether or not it is done. Based on the logical value of the operation signal, the main control program determines that the operation switch 954 does not instruct to clear the RAM when the logical value of the operation signal from the operation switch 954 is HI, and the operation switch 954 operates. On the other hand, when the logical value of the operation signal from the operation switch 954 is LOW, it is determined that the operation switch 954 is operated by determining that the RAM is cleared.

In step S16, the main control program sets the value 1 in the RAM clear notification flag RCL-FLG when the operation switch 954 is being operated (step S18). On the other hand, when the operation switch 954 is not operated in step S16, the main control program sets the value 0 in the RAM clear notification flag RCL-FLG (step S20). That is, the main control program can execute the RAM clear process that initializes the RAM (that is, the main control built-in RAM (game storage unit)) built in the main control MPU 1310a for a predetermined time from the time when the power is turned on. Set to the state (operation control means when the power is turned on on the game control side). The above-mentioned RAM clear notification flag RCL-FLG determines whether or not to erase the game information related to the game such as the probability fluctuation and the unpaid prize ball stored in the main control built-in RAM (game storage unit) of the main control MPU 1310a. This flag is set to a value of 1 when the game information is deleted and a value of 0 when the game information is not deleted. The value of the RAM clear notification flag RCL-FLG set in steps S18 and S20 is stored in the general-purpose storage element (general-purpose register) of the main control MPU 1310a.

Following step S18 or step S20, the main control program performs a wait time wait process (step S22). In this wait time standby process, the system that controls the drawing of the game board side effect display device 1600 and the door frame side effect display device 460 by the liquid crystal display control unit 1512 of the peripheral control board 1510, which is shown in FIG. 72, is activated (boot). I'm waiting until you do). In this embodiment, 2.5 seconds (s) is set as a waiting time (boot timer) until booting.

Following step S22, the main control program determines whether or not a power failure warning signal has been input (step S24). As described above, when the power supply of the pachinko machine 1 is cut off, a power failure or a momentary power failure occurs, when the voltage becomes equal to or lower than the power failure warning voltage, a power failure warning signal is input from the power failure monitoring circuit 1310e as a power failure warning. The determination in step S24 is performed based on this power failure warning signal. When the power failure warning signal is input in the determination in step S24, the main control program returns to the determination in step S24 again, and repeats the determination in step S24 as long as the power failure warning signal is continuously input. As a result, the timer clear setting value is set in the WDT clear register built in the main control MPU 1310a for the main control built-in WDT1310af started in step S12, the time counting by the main control built-in WDT1310af is cleared, and the time counting is started again. The main control MPU 1310a is forcibly reset by the main control built-in WDT1310af. After that, the main control program again performs this main control side power-on processing under the control of the main control MPU 1310a of the main control board 1310. A detailed description of the point that the determination in step S24 is performed following the wait time waiting process in step S22 will be described later.

When the power failure warning signal is not input in the determination in step S24, the main control program determines whether or not the RAM clear notification flag RCL-FLG has a value of 0 (step S26). As described above, the RAM clear notification flag RCL-FLG is set to a value of 1 when the game information is erased and a value of 0 when the game information is not erased. When the RAM clear notification flag RCL-FLG has a value of 0 in step S26, that is, when the game information is not erased, the checksum is calculated (step S28). This checksum regards the game information stored in the main control built-in RAM as a numerical value and calculates the total.

Following step S28, the main control program sets the calculated checksum value (sum value) as the checksum value (sum value) stored in the main control side power off processing (power off) described later. It is determined whether or not they match (step S30). When they match, the main control program determines whether or not the backup flag BK-FLG has a value of 1 (step S32). The backup flag BK-FLG stores game information, checksum value (sum value), backup flag BK-FLG value, and other game backup information in the main control built-in RAM in the main control side power off processing, which will be described later. This flag indicates whether or not the operation has been performed, and is set to a value of 1 when the main control side power off processing is normally completed, and a value of 0 when the main control side power off processing is not normally completed. In the inspection process of the production line of the main control board 1310, the checksum of step S28 is calculated and the determination of step S30 is performed when the main control board 1310 is first turned on after being manufactured for inspection. , Will be described in detail later.

When the backup flag BK-FLG has a value of 1 in step S32, that is, when the main control side power off processing is normally completed, the main control program sets the work area of the main control built-in RAM as the time of power recovery ( Step S34). In this setting, the power recovery information is read from the ROM (that is, the main control built-in ROM) built in the main control MPU 1310a, and the power recovery information is set in the work area of the main control built-in RAM. As a result, the game information is read from the game backup information, and various commands corresponding to the game information are stored in a predetermined storage area of the main control built-in RAM. In addition to the state where the power is turned on from the state where the power is cut off, the "recovery" is the state where the power is restored after the power failure or momentary power failure, and the fraudulent means (for example, the cheating person is on the hem of the arm). The state in which the main control board 1310 is irradiated with the high frequency from the hidden high frequency output device), the main control MPU 1310a itself is reset, and then returned is also included.

Following step S34, the main control program sets the backup flag BK-FLG to a value of 0 (step S36). As a result, the game information, checksum value (sum value), etc. are changed as various processes are performed thereafter. Therefore, the main control side power off processing described later is normally completed and the backup flag BK- If the value 1 is not set in FLG, the entire area of the main control built-in RAM will be cleared, as will be described later.

On the other hand, when the RAM clear notification flag RCL-FLG is not a value 0 (value 1) in step S26, that is, when the game information is erased, or when the checksum values (sum values) do not match in step S30. Or, when the backup flag BK-FLG is not a value 1 (value 0) in step S32, that is, when the main control side power off processing is not normally completed, the main control program is used for all of the main control internal RAM. Clear the area (step S38). That is, the main control program executes the game control side RAM clear process triggered by the input of the detection signal accompanying the operation of the operation switch 954 described above (the payout control side power-on operation control means). Specifically, the main control program performs by writing the value 0 to the main control built-in RAM. Instead, the main control program may read a predetermined value from the main control built-in ROM as an initial value and set it. Further, the main control MPU 1310a performs processing when the logical value of the operation signal from the operation switch 954 indicates RAM clear and the game information is erased, when the sum values do not match, or when the main control side power is turned off. When it is not completed normally, the unique ID code stored in advance in the non-volatile RAM of the main control MPU1310a is taken out, and the fixed numerical range of the counter that updates the random number for normal symbol hit judgment based on the taken out ID code. The initial value derivation process that always derives the same fixed value from is performed, and this fixed value is set as the random number for determining the initial value for determining the normal symbol hit to be used for determining the initial value of the above-mentioned random number for determining the normal symbol hit. do.

Following step S38, the main control program sets the work area of the main control built-in RAM as an initial setting (step S40). This setting is performed by reading the initial information from the main control built-in ROM and setting this initial information in the work area of the main control built-in RAM.

Following step S36 or step S40, the main control program performs interrupt initial setting (step S42). This setting sets the interrupt cycle when the main control side timer interrupt process, which will be described later, is performed. In this embodiment, it is set to 4 milliseconds (ms).

Following step S42, the main control program performs serial communication initial setting (step S44). Here, various serial input / output ports (for example, serial input / output ports (reception channel and transmission channel) for the payout control board 951 and serial input / output ports (reception channel and transmission channel) for the peripheral control board 1510) built in the main control MPU 1310a. ), The communication speed is set and the presence / absence of parity is set in the transmission serial port prescaler, and the initialization of the transmission circuit and the transmission permission are set in the transmission serial port control register.

Following step S44, the main control program sets the test signal output port initialization (step S46). Here, in a gaming machine testing institution, a test signal output port (not shown) for outputting various inspection information is initialized (set to OFF data output) when the power is turned on.

Following step S46, the main control program sets the activation of the main control built-in hard random number circuit 1310an shown in FIG. 69 (step S48). Here, among various random numbers related to the game, a hard random number control register built in the main control MPU1310a to update the big hit determination random number used for determining whether or not to generate the big hit game state by hardware. In addition to making settings such as latching and acquiring random numbers, the hardware random number setting register is set to start the main control built-in hard random number circuit 1310an. When the main control built-in hard random number circuit 1310an is activated by these settings, it is determined in advance at high speed based on the clock signal input to the main control MPU 1310a (the clock signal output from the main control crystal oscillator MX0 shown in FIG. 77). Other values in the numerical range are extracted one after another without duplication, and when all the values in the predetermined numerical range have been extracted, one value in the predetermined numerical range is extracted again. Based on the clock signal input to the main control MPU 1310a, other values within a predetermined numerical range are extracted one after another at high speed without duplication. When the main control MPU 1310a acquires a random number (random number value) from the main control built-in hard random number circuit 1310an, the main control MPU 1310a outputs a latch signal to the main control built-in hard random number circuit 1310an, and the main control when this latch signal is input. The random number (random number value) extracted by the built-in hard random number circuit 1310an is acquired from the hard random number latch register built in the main control built-in main control MPU 1310a. The main control MPU 1310a sets the acquired random number value as a random number for jackpot determination.

Following step S48, the main control program makes reservation settings for commands to be transmitted when the power is turned on (step S50). Here, in order to convey that the power has been turned on (restored) based on the power recovery information set in the main control built-in RAM work area in the setting of the work area of the main control built-in RAM in step S34, FIG. 89 The power-on state command and the power-on main control return destination command, which are classified as power-on, are created and stored in the transmission information storage area of the main control built-in RAM as transmission information. In the transmission information storage area of the main control built-in RAM, in the setting of the work area of the main control built-in RAM in step S34, game information may be read from the game backup information and various commands corresponding to the game information may be stored. be. In such a case, first, after the transmission of various commands according to the game information is completed, the power-on state command and the power-on main control return destination command are transmitted. These commands are transmitted in the timer interrupt processing on the main control side, which will be described later. A detailed description of the fact that the reservation setting of the command to be transmitted when the power is turned on is set in step S50 will be described later.

Following step S50, the main control program sets interrupt enable setting (step S52). With this setting, the interrupt cycle set in step S42, that is, the main control side timer interrupt process described later is repeatedly performed every 4 ms.

Following step S52, the main control program receives an error release navigation command associated with the operation of the operation switch 954 (operation switch) when a predetermined time elapses from the power-on, that is, when the main control side main process is started. Execution of the game control side RAM clear process triggered by receipt is restricted (normal operation control means). As described above, the main control program uses the concept of time sharing to input the detection signal input by the operation of the operation switch 954 to the error release navigation command for a predetermined time from the time when the power is turned on as described above. The RAM clear process is executed with the input as an opportunity (operation control means when the power is turned on on the game control side), and the execution of the RAM clear process is restricted even if the error release navigation command is input after the predetermined time has elapsed (the execution of the RAM clear process is restricted). Game control side normal operation control means), it is treated as a release switch for canceling the error notification associated with the generated error. That is, the operation switch 954 (error release unit), which was originally supposed to be used to release the error that occurred in the payout operation, is used as a game storage unit instead of the operation switch 954 (error release unit) for a predetermined time from the time when the power is turned on. It functions as an operation unit for executing RAM clear processing for starting initialization of the main control built-in RAM (and the payout control built-in RAM as a payout storage unit described later), or after a predetermined time has elapsed, a game It can function as an operation unit for canceling an error that occurs in the ball payout operation.

Next, the main control program determines whether or not a power failure warning signal has been input (step S54). As described above, when the power supply of the pachinko machine 1 is cut off, a power failure or a momentary power failure occurs, when the voltage becomes equal to or lower than the power failure warning voltage, a power failure warning signal is input from the power failure monitoring circuit 1310e as a power failure warning. The determination in step S54 is performed based on this power failure warning signal.

When there is no input of the power failure warning signal in step S54, the main control program performs the non-winning random number update process (step S56). In this non-winning random number update process, the above-mentioned random number for reach determination, random number for variable display pattern, random number for determining initial value for big hit symbol, random number for determining initial value for small hit symbol, and the like are updated. In this way, in the non-winning random number update process, the random numbers that are not related to the winning determination (big hit determination) are updated by the software. It should be noted that the above-mentioned random number for determining the normal symbol hit, the random number for determining the initial value for determining the normal symbol hit, the random number for the normal symbol variation display pattern, and the like are also updated by this non-winning random number update process.

Following step S56, the process returns to step S54 again, the main control program determines whether or not there is a power failure warning signal input, and if there is no power failure warning signal input, the non-winning random number update process is performed in step S56. Then, steps S54 to S56 are repeated. The processes of steps S54 to S56 are referred to as "main control side main process".

On the other hand, when the power failure warning signal is input in step S54, the main control program sets interrupt prohibition (step S58). With this setting, the timer interrupt process on the main control side, which will be described later, is not performed, writing to the main control built-in RAM is prevented, and rewriting of game information is protected.

Following step S58, the main control program starts outputting a power failure clear signal (step S60). Here, the same process as the process of starting the output of the power failure clear signal in the power failure clear process of step S14 is performed. As a result, the main control program can release the latch state of the D-type flip-flop MIC 22 under the control of the main control MPU 1310a.

Following step S60, the main control program includes a start port solenoid 2107, an attacker solenoid 2108, a first special symbol indicator 1403, a second special symbol indicator 1405, and a first special hold number indicator 1404 shown in FIG. 69. , The second special hold number indicator 1406, the ordinary symbol indicator 1402, the ordinary symbol storage indicator 1188, the status indicator 1401, the round indicator 1407, and the like are stopped (step S62).

Following step S62, the main control program calculates the checksum and stores the calculated value (step S64). This checksum calculates the total of the game information of the work area of the main control built-in RAM, excluding the storage area of the checksum value (sum value) and the backup flag BK-FLG value described above, as numerical values.

Following step S64, the main control program sets the backup flag BK-FLG to a value of 1 (step S66). As a result, the storage of the game backup information is completed.

Following step S66, the main control program sets RAM access prohibition (step S68). This RAM access prohibition setting makes it impossible to access the main control built-in RAM (game storage unit), so that it is possible to prevent the contents of the main control built-in RAM (game storage unit) from being updated.

Following step S68, an infinite loop is entered. In this infinite loop, the timer clear setting value is set in the WDT clear register built in the main control MPU 1310a for the main control built-in WDT1310af started in step S12, the time counting by the main control built-in WDT1310af is cleared, and the timekeeping is started again. The main control MPU 1310a is forcibly reset by the main control built-in WDT1310af. After that, the main control program again performs this main control side power-on processing under the control of the main control MPU 1310a of the main control board 1310. The processing of steps S58 to S68 and the infinite loop are referred to as "main control side power off processing".

The pachinko machine 1 (main control MPU 1310a) is reset when there is a power failure or when there is a momentary power failure, and when the power is restored thereafter, the main control side power-on processing is performed.

In step S30, it is inspected whether or not the game backup information stored in the main control built-in RAM is normal, and then in step S32, whether or not the main control side power off processing is normally completed. Is inspecting. In this way, by double-checking the game backup information stored in the main control built-in RAM, it is inspected whether or not the game backup information is stored by fraudulent activity.

Here, a point will be described in which the presence / absence of the power failure warning signal in step S24 is determined following the wait time standby process in step S22. First, regarding the problem in the case where the presence / absence of the power failure warning signal in step S24 is not determined, that is, the case where the value of the RAM clear flag in step S26 is determined following the wait time standby process in step S22 and the subsequent processing is proceeded. The problem in is explained.

As described above, the VDD terminal, which is the power supply terminal of the main control MPU 1310a, is charged to the electrolytic capacitor MC2 shown in FIG. 77 when the power supply from the pachinko island facility is cut off due to a power failure or a momentary power failure. The charged charge is applied as + 5V over a period of about 7 milliseconds (ms) after the occurrence of a power failure or momentary power failure. In other words, even if the power supply from the pachinko island equipment is cut off due to a momentary power failure or power outage, the electric charge charged to the hardware called the electrolytic capacitor MC2 is applied as + 5V, so that the power supply from the pachinko island equipment is supplied. The main control side power off processing can be completed within a period of about 7 ms from the time when the power is cut off. This is because a power failure or a momentary power failure occurs when the player is playing a game, that is, when the main control side main process or the main control side timer interrupt process described later is performed, and the pachinko island equipment is used. When the power is cut off, the main control side power off processing can be reliably completed.

However, as an extremely rare phenomenon, in the wait time standby process in step S22 at the time of power recovery, the game board side effect display device 1600 and the door frame side effect display by the liquid crystal display control unit 1512 of the peripheral control board 1510 shown in FIG. 72. The waiting time (boot timer: 2.5 seconds is set in this embodiment) until the system that controls the drawing of the device 460 starts (boots) is started by timing, and immediately before the waiting time is reached. If a momentary power failure or power failure occurs, the charge charged to the hardware called the electrolytic capacitor MC2 is applied as + 5V to the VDD terminal, which is the power supply terminal of the main control MPU1310a, but within a period of about 7 ms, step S42. The interrupt initial setting is performed in step S52, and then the interrupt permission setting is performed in step S52. Therefore, even if the main control side timer interrupt processing described later is performed and the contents of the main control built-in RAM are updated, the main control side It may not be possible to complete the main control side power off processing in the power on processing. Therefore, the calculated value of the checksum based on the contents of the main control built-in RAM is not stored, and the main control side power-on processing is started again at the time of power recovery.

Then, at the time of this power recovery, the main control side power-on processing is started, the wait time standby processing in step S22 is completed without causing a momentary power failure or a power failure, and then in step S28, the main control built-in RAM is completed. When the value calculated based on the contents of the above and the value stored in the main control built-in RAM immediately before the momentary power failure or power failure occurs are compared and judged in step S30, the checksum values should match. Instead, the entire area of the main control built-in RAM is cleared in step S38. In other words, even if the operation switch 954 is operated by the hall clerk at the time of power recovery and there is no manifestation of intention by the hall clerk to clear the RAM, the information stored in the main control built-in RAM is forcibly erased (cleared). ) There is a problem that it will be.

Therefore, in the present embodiment, immediately after the wait time standby process in step S22, a process for determining whether or not a power failure warning signal is input is provided as step 24, and when the power failure warning signal is input, The determination in step S24 is returned again, and the determination in step S24 is repeated as long as the power failure warning signal is continuously input. As a result, the timer clear setting value is set in the WDT clear register built in the main control MPU 1310a for the main control built-in WDT1310af started in step S12, the time counting by the main control built-in WDT1310af is cleared, and the time counting is started again. The main control MPU 1310a can be forcibly reset by the main control built-in WDT1310af. Although the value of the RAM clear notification flag RCL-FLG is set in step S18 or step S20 before the wait time standby process of step S22 is performed, the value of the RAM clear notification flag RCL-FLG is mainly as described above. Since it is stored in the general-purpose storage element (general-purpose register) of the control MPU 1310a, the contents (game information) of the main control built-in RAM are not changed at all even if the RAM access permission is set in step S10.

In this way, immediately after the wait time standby process in step S22, a process for determining whether or not a power failure warning signal is input is provided as step 24, and when the power failure warning signal is input (that is, step). When it is determined by the determination in step S24 that the power to the pachinko machine 1 is cut off after waiting in the wait time standby process in S22), the determination in step S24 is returned again, and as long as the power failure warning signal continues to be input. By repeating the determination in step S24, the main control MPU 1310a of the main control board 1310 can be forcibly reset and the main control board 1310 can be restarted. Therefore, the game can be advanced. It is not possible to prevent the game information from being updated, and the check sum calculation result does not fluctuate. As a result, when the main control MPU 1310a of the main control board 1310 is restarted, it is determined that the calculation result of the checksum in step S28 and the calculated and stored value of the checksum in step S64 match. Therefore, the game information immediately before the momentary power failure or power failure that is stored in the main control built-in RAM is not initialized. Therefore, it is possible to prevent the game information immediately before the occurrence of a momentary power failure or a power failure from being initialized at the time of power recovery.

Further, immediately after the wait time standby process in step S22, a process for determining whether or not a power failure warning signal is input is provided as step 24, and when the power failure warning signal is not input (that is, in step S22). When it is determined by the determination in step S24 that the power supply to the pachinko machine 1 is not shut off after waiting in the wait time standby process), the pachinko machine is being played while the main control MPU 1310a of the main control board 1310 is proceeding with the game. Even if the power supply to 1 is cut off, the backup process for storing the game information due to the progress of this game by supplying the power supply from the electrolytic capacitor MC2 shown in FIG. 77 to the VDD terminal which is the power supply terminal of the main control MPU 1310a. Since the main control MPU 1310a of the main control board 1310 can complete the process of steps S58 to S68 and the process of power failure on the main control side composed of the infinite loop, the main control MPU 1310a is main. When the control MPU 1310a is restarted, the checksum calculation result in step S28 and the checksum calculation result in the backup process (that is, the value calculated and stored in the checksum in step S64) match. Since the determination is made, the game information immediately before the momentary power failure or power failure that is stored and held in the main control built-in RAM is not initialized. That is, the main control board 1310 can be started by being restored to the game information immediately before the momentary power failure or power failure occurs.

Further, immediately after the wait time standby process in step S22, when it is determined in step S24 that the power failure warning signal is input, the main control built-in RAM is forcibly reset by the main control built-in WDT1310af to reset the contents of the main control built-in RAM. While the main control side power cutoff process can be started again without updating at all, when it is determined in step S24 that the power failure warning signal has not been input immediately after the wait time standby process in step S22, so far. As you can see, it is possible to reliably complete the power cutoff process on the main control side within the "power supply securing period in the event of a momentary power failure or power failure" of about 7 ms by the hardware. That is, in the present embodiment, the power supply from the Pachinko Island facility is cut off due to a momentary power failure or a power failure during the processing when the main control side power is turned on at the time of power recovery, and the main control MPU 1310a The charge charged in the electrolytic capacitor MC2 shown in FIG. 77 is applied to the VDD terminal, which is a power supply terminal, as + 5V over a period of about 7 milliseconds (ms) after a power failure or momentary power failure occurs. Therefore, if the main control side power cutoff process cannot be completed within the "instantaneous power failure or power supply securing period" of about 7 ms by the hardware of the electrolytic capacitor MC2, the wait time standby process of step S22 is performed. Immediately after, in step 24, it is determined whether or not the power failure warning signal has been input. If the power failure warning signal has been input, the determination returns to step S24 again, and as long as the power failure warning signal continues to be input, step S24 By repeating the determination of, the timer clear setting value is set in the WDT clear register built in the main control MPU 1310a for the main control built-in WDT1310af activated in step S12, the time measurement by the main control built-in WDT1310af is cleared again. Since the time measurement cannot be started, the main control MPU 1310a can be forcibly reset by the main control built-in WDT1310af. The main control MPU 1310a is forcibly reset by the main control built-in WDT1310af by such software, so that the steps after step S24 (specifically, the interrupt initial setting is performed in step S42, and then in step S52. It is possible to prevent the contents (game information) of the main control built-in RAM from being updated by blocking the progress to the main control side timer interrupt process (control flow) in which interrupt permission is set and the timer interrupt processing on the main control side is started, which will be described later. I adopted the mechanism. When the power supply from the pachinko island equipment is cut off due to a power outage or momentary power failure in this way, the part covered by software so that the contents (game information) of the main control built-in RAM is not changed at all, and the main control side power supply The contents of the main control built-in RAM (game information) can be divided into two parts, one that is covered by hardware so that the power failure processing is surely completed and the contents of the main control built-in RAM (game information) are not changed at all. It is possible to reliably prevent the game information) from being changed.

Next, the point that the reservation setting of the command to be transmitted when the power is turned on is set in step S50 will be described. In step S50, as described above, in the setting of the work area of the main control built-in RAM in step S34, the power is turned on (recovered) based on the power recovery information set in the work area of the main control built-in RAM. In order to convey the information, a power-on state command and a power-on main control return destination command, which are classified into power-on, are created and stored as transmission information in the transmission information storage area of the main control built-in RAM. As described above, the power-on main control return destination command is mainly composed of information indicating the driving state of the starting port solenoid 2107 and information indicating the driving state of the attacker solenoid 2108 shown in FIG. 69. There is. Here, first, when the main control return destination command at power-on does not include the information indicating the driving state of the starting port solenoid 2107 and the information indicating the driving state of the attacker solenoid 2108 shown in FIG. 69. In other words, the problem in the case where the reservation setting of the command to be transmitted at the time of power-on of the main control return destination command at power-on is not performed in step S50 will be described.

For example, when the peripheral control board 1510 controls the display of the screen of the jackpot game state (for example, the screen of the jackpot game effect) in the display area of the game board side effect display device 1600 shown in FIG. 8, the main control board 1310 Drives the attacker solenoid 2108 to cause a momentary power failure or power failure when the large winning opening 2005 shown in FIG. 8 is opened by the opening / closing member 2107, and when the power is restored thereafter, the main control board 1310 steps. In the setting of the work area of the main control built-in RAM in S34, the attacker is restored to the gaming state immediately before the momentary power failure or power failure based on the power recovery information set in the work area of the main control built-in RAM. The driving of the solenoid 2108 is started, and the large winning opening 2005 shifts from the state of being closed by the opening / closing member 2107 to the state of being opened.

However, when a momentary power failure or power failure occurs, the peripheral control board 1510 receives various commands from the main control board 1310 and recovers when the power is restored, so that a momentary power failure or power failure occurs. After that, when the power is restored, the peripheral control board 1510 can be restored based on the probability and the time saving state indicated by the power-on state command received from the main control board 1310 at the time of power restoration. However, when a momentary power failure or a power failure occurs while the main control board 1310 is generating a big hit gaming state as a gaming state, and then power is restored, the peripheral control board 1510 will be subjected to the main control board 1310 at the time of power recovery. Even if the screen can be displayed in the display area of the game board side effect display device 1600 and restored according to the probability and the time saving state based on the probability and the time saving state indicated by the power-on state command received from It is not possible to display at all which round of the jackpot game state. That is, for example, a game ball enters the large winning opening 2005 and is detected by the count sensor 4005 shown in FIG. 69, and a large winning opening 1 count display command that conveys the number of balls of the game ball entering the large winning opening 2005 is issued. Even if the main control board 1310 transmits to the peripheral control board 1510 and the peripheral control board 1510 receives it, the peripheral control board 1510 is a ball of a game ball that has entered the grand prize opening 2005 on the screen according to the probability and the time saving state. Even if the number can be displayed in the display area of the game board side effect display device 1600, it is not possible to display at all which round (that is, the number of rounds) of the jackpot game state.

In such a situation, when the main control board 1310 finishes, for example, the fourth round (fourth round) of the big hit game state, the drive of the attacker solenoid 2108 is stopped and the big winning opening 2005 is opened by the opening / closing member 2107. Peripheral control from the main control board 1310 to indicate the transition from the closed state to the closed state (that is, the start of closing of the large winning opening 2005 of the starting opening unit 2100). When transmitting to the board 1510 and the main control board 1310 starts the 5th round (fifth round) of the big hit game state, the attacker solenoid 2108 is started to be driven and the big winning opening 2005 is closed by the opening / closing member 2107. A command to display the fifth round of opening the large winning opening is transmitted from the main control board 1310 to the peripheral control board 1510 instructing the transition from the state to the released state (that is, the opening of the fifth round of the large winning opening 2005 is started). do. As a result, the peripheral control board 1510 finally switches the screen of starting 5 rounds of the jackpot game state from the screen according to the above-mentioned probability and time saving state and displays it in the display area of the game board side effect display device 1600. It becomes.

Further, for example, a screen for notifying the player that the game ball is in a game state in which the game ball can be accepted and the game state is advantageous to the player (for example, that the movable piece is expanded) is displayed to the second start port 2004. The main control board 1310 drives the start port solenoid 2107 while the peripheral control board 1510 controls the display in the display area of the game board side effect display device 1600 (screen to be transmitted to the player), and the pair shown in FIG. When a momentary power failure or a power failure occurs when the movable piece of the above is expanded in the left-right direction, and then the power is restored, the main control board 1310 is in the work area of the main control built-in RAM in step S34. Based on the power recovery information set in the work area of the main control built-in RAM in the setting, the start port solenoid 2107 is started to be driven by restoring the game state immediately before the momentary power failure or power failure occurs. The movable piece of the

However, when a momentary power failure or power failure occurs, the peripheral control board 1510 receives various commands from the main control board 1310 and recovers when the power is restored, so that a momentary power failure or power failure occurs. After that, when the power is restored, the peripheral control board 1510 can be restored based on the power-on state command received from the main control board 1310 at the time of power restoration. However, when the main control board 1310 is in a gaming state in which the gaming ball can be accepted into the second starting port 2004 and a gaming state advantageous to the player is generated, a momentary power failure or a power failure occurs. After that, when the power is restored, the peripheral control board 1510 displays the screen according to the probability and the time saving state based on the probability and the time saving state indicated by the power-on state command received from the main control board 1310 at the time of power recovery. Even if it can be displayed in the display area of the effect display device 1600 on the game board side and returned, the game state becomes a game state in which the game ball can be accepted to the second start port 2004, and the game state is advantageous to the player. The peripheral control board 1510 cannot display the screen indicating the presence in the display area of the game board side effect display device 1600 at all. For this reason, the player sitting in front of the pachinko machine is surprised that a momentary power failure or power failure has occurred, and the game ball is received at the second starting port 2004 immediately before the momentary power failure or power failure occurs at the time of power restoration. In some cases, it may be forgotten that the gaming state is possible, and in such a case, the gaming state is returned to the gaming state in which the gaming ball can be accepted to the second starting port 2004 as the gaming state at the time of power recovery. Nevertheless, the screen instructing the game (that is, the screen instructing the game to put the game ball into the second starting port 2004) is not displayed in the display area of the game board side effect display device 1600 at the time of power recovery. Therefore, there is also a problem that the player cannot know what kind of game to play.

As described above, in the above-mentioned two examples, there is a problem that the gaming state immediately before the momentary power failure or the power failure cannot be quickly restored after the power is restored. In other words, a player who sits in front of a pachinko machine misunderstands that the pachinko machine's system seems to be in a frozen state and has failed when a momentary power failure or power outage occurs and then the power is restored. There was a problem.

Therefore, in the present embodiment, when the main control board 1310 is turned on (including not only when the power is turned on but also when the power is restored due to a power failure or a momentary power failure), a power-on state command is used. And the power-on main control return destination command to the peripheral control board 1510, in step S50, the power-on state command and the power-on main control return destination command classified into the power-on shown in FIG. And are created and stored as transmission information in the transmission information storage area of the main control built-in RAM. Then, these commands are transmitted in the timer interrupt processing on the main control side, which will be described later.

As a result, the peripheral control board 1510 is based on the power-on state command and the power-on main control return destination command received from the main control board 1310. When a momentary power failure or power failure occurs and then the power is restored, the attacker solenoid 2108 is started to be driven as the return destination of the main control board 1310, and the grand prize opening 2005 is released from the state of being closed by the opening / closing member 2107. Since it is possible to convey to the peripheral control board 1510 that the state shifts to the current state, the peripheral control board 1510 is a screen that specifies that it is the 4th round of the jackpot game state (that is, a screen indicating how many rounds it is). ) Cannot be displayed in the display area of the game board side effect display device 1600, but in a big hit game state, the attacker solenoid 2108 is started to be driven and the big winning opening 2005 is opened by the opening / closing member 2107. A screen that tells you that there is a message (for example, a screen that tells the player that "It is a big hit. The big winning opening is open. Please play the game so that the game ball enters the big winning opening.") It is possible to instruct a player who sits in front of the pachinko machine by displaying it in the display area of the game board side effect display device 1600 to insert the game ball into the grand prize opening 2005 after the power is restored. For example, in the above-described example, in a state in which the game ball can be accepted into the second starting port 2004 and the game state is favorable to the player, a momentary power failure or a power failure occurs, and then the game returns. When electricity is turned on, a screen telling that the start port solenoid 2107 is started to be driven and the pair of movable pieces are expanded in the left-right direction as the return destination of the main control board 1310 (for example, "Movable pieces" The peripheral control board 1510 displays the display area of the game board side effect display device 1600 on the screen that conveys the message "The game is being expanded. Please play the game so that the game ball enters the lower start port." It is possible to instruct the player sitting in front of the pachinko machine to play the game by inserting the game ball into the second starting port 2004 after the power is restored. As a result, when a momentary power failure or a power failure occurs and the power is restored after that, the return destination of the peripheral control board 1510 can be finely instructed on the main control board 1310 side. Therefore, it is possible to quickly return to the gaming state immediately before the momentary power failure or power failure after the power is restored. In other words, a player who sits in front of a pachinko machine misunderstands that the pachinko machine's system seems to be in a frozen state and has failed when a momentary power failure or power outage occurs and then the power is restored. Can be prevented.

Next, in the main control board inspection step, which is the inspection step of the production line of the main control board 1310, the checksum of step S28 when the main control board 1310 is first turned on after being manufactured for inspection. The calculation and the determination in step S30 will be described. In the main control board inspection step, when the main control board 1310 is first turned on after being manufactured for inspection, the main control board is composed of the above-mentioned backup processes of steps S58 to S68 and an infinite loop. Since the main control MPU 1310a of the main control board 1310 has never executed the control side power off processing, even if the checksum based on the contents of the main control built-in RAM is calculated in step S28, in step S30. In the comparison determination, the checksum values cannot match, and the entire area of the main control built-in RAM is always cleared in step S38. As a result, when the reservation setting of the command to be transmitted at the time of power-on is made in step S50, the power-on state command classified into the power-on and the power-on main control return destination command shown in FIG. 89 are created. By storing the transmission information in the transmission information storage area of the main control built-in RAM, only two commands, the power-on state command and the power-on main control return destination command, are stored as transmission information in the transmission information storage area of the main control built-in RAM. It will be in a state of being memorized in. Then, in these commands, in the timer interrupt process on the main control side, which will be described later, the power-on state command is first transmitted, and then the power-on main control return destination command is transmitted. Utilizing this, in the main control board inspection process, when the main control board 1310 is first powered on after being manufactured for inspection, the power-on state command is issued as the first command from the main control board 1310. It will be transmitted to the inspection device in the main control board inspection process.

By the way, as described above, the power-on state command is shown in FIG. 70 when the power is turned on (including not only when the power is turned on but also when the power is restored due to a power failure or a momentary power failure). Information instructing that when the operation switch 954 of the payout control board 951 shown is operated to clear the RAM, and when the power is turned on (in addition to the case where the power is turned on, a power failure or a momentary power failure occurs and the power is generated. (Including the time of power recovery to recover), any of the above-mentioned low-probability time-saving state, high-probability time-saving state, low-probability non-time-saving state, and high-probability non-time-saving state (probability and time-saving state) is restored. It is composed of information instructing whether to do so and information indicating the model code of the pachinko machine. Here, a problem will be described when the power-on state command does not include information indicating the model code of the pachinko machine.

As described above, the model code of the pachinko machine is the copyright of which work when creating the so-called max type, middle type, and amadeji type as the pachinko machine 1 (to be exact, the main control board 1310). What kind of game specifications (for example, when a probability fluctuation occurs, that state is continued until the next big hit game state occurs), and the number of changes of the special symbol is limited (for example, It is possible to specify whether or not the game specification (so-called ST machine), etc., in which the probability fluctuation occurs after 30 times or 70 times).

In the production line of the manufacturer that manufactures the pachinko machine 1, when the main control board 1310 is manufactured, the main control board 1310 for the copyright of a plurality of types of works may coexist.
Then, the worker of the production line is responsible for the copyright of any of the copyrights of a plurality of types of works (for example, the copyrights of the works of movie A, movie B, drama C, movie D, cartoon E, and cartoon F). It is difficult to know whether the main control board 1310 is flowing to the production line in order to manufacture the control board 1310, or the main control board for one copyright (for example, the copyright of the work called movie D) among the copyrights of multiple types of works. Although the main control board 1310 is flowing to the production line to manufacture the 1310, the main control board 1310 is used to manufacture the main control board 1310 for other copyrights (for example, the copyright of the work called Manga F). There are also beliefs and misunderstandings that it is flowing to the production line. For this reason, when the main control board 1310 is manufactured in the manufacturing line of the manufacturer that manufactures the pachinko machine 1, if the main control board 1310 for the copyrights of a plurality of types of works is mixed, the worker of the manufacturing line can move the main control board 1310 to the manufacturing line. It is not possible to confirm which work the manufactured main control board 1310 is for the copyright of which work, and for the copyright of the same work, any model type (max type, middle type, or Amadeji type). It is also not possible to confirm whether it is a type) and what kind of game specification (a game specification or ST machine that, when a probability fluctuation occurs, the state is continued until the next big hit game state occurs). As a result, when the main control board 1310 is manufactured on the production line of the manufacturer that manufactures the pachinko machine 1, if the main control board 1310 for the copyrights of a plurality of types of works is mixed, the main control board for the copyrights of a plurality of types of works is mixed. The 1310 will be sent to the game board assembly line for attaching the main control board 1310 to the game board 5 while being mixed. For this reason, the operator of the game board assembly line may attach the main control board 1310, which does not correspond to the game board 5 for the copyright of the work, to the game board 5. As a result, there is a problem that the production efficiency of the game board 5 is lowered.

Therefore, in the present embodiment, the model code of the pachinko machine is used when the main control board 1310 is turned on (including not only when the power is turned on but also when the power is restored due to a power failure or a momentary power failure). In order to transmit the power-on state command including the information indicating the above to the peripheral control board 1510, in step S50, the power-on state command classified into the power-on and the power-on main control return destination command shown in FIG. And are created and stored as transmission information in the transmission information storage area of the main control built-in RAM. Then, these commands are transmitted in the timer interrupt processing on the main control side, which will be described later.

As a result, the workers on the production line of the manufacturer that manufactures the pachinko machine 1 turn on the main control board 1310 in the main control board inspection process, which is the inspection process of the production line, so that the inspection device can perform the main control board 1310. Based on the information indicating the model code of the pachinko machine included in the power-on state command received from, that is, the above-mentioned max type, middle type, indicating the model type, which constitutes the information indicating the model code of the pachinko machine. And the series code for specifying which type of Amadeji type, the copyright code for specifying the copyright of the work, and the game specifications (for example, when the probability fluctuates, the next big hit game state In addition to the game specification that the state is continued until it occurs, the game specification code for specifying the game specification (ST machine) that the probability fluctuation occurs when the number of fluctuations of the special symbol is limited, and the game specification code. By visually observing the detailed model information displayed on the inspection monitor based on the above, it is possible to determine which work the main control board 1310 is for the copyright of which work, and which of the same work is for the copyright. What type of machine (max type, middle type, and Amadeji type), and what kind of game specifications (when probability fluctuations occur, that state will continue until the next big hit game state occurs. It is also possible to determine whether it is a game specification or ST machine). As a result, when the main control board 1310 is manufactured in the manufacturing line of the manufacturer that manufactures the pachinko machine 1, even if the main control board 1310 for the copyright of a plurality of types of works is mixed, the main control board inspection process of the manufacturing line is performed. By visually observing the inspection monitor and accurately determining the model type of the main control board 1310, the copyright of the work, and the game specifications, the worker can sort each of the main control boards 1310 for the copyright of the work and succeed. It can be sent to the game board assembly line. Then, the worker of the game board assembly line can surely attach the main control board 1310 corresponding to the game board 5 to the copyright of the work to the game board 5, and the main control board not corresponding to the game board 5 to the copyright of the work. It is possible to prevent a decrease in the production efficiency of the game board 5 caused by the work of attaching the 1310 to the game board 5. Therefore, it is possible to contribute to the improvement of the production efficiency of the game board 5.

[14-3. Main control side timer interrupt processing]
Next, the timer interrupt processing on the main control side will be described. This main control side timer interrupt process is repeatedly performed every interrupt cycle (4 ms in this embodiment) set in the main control side power-on process shown in FIGS. 92 and 93.

When the main control side timer interrupt process is started, on the main control board 1310, the main control program switches the register bank under the control of the main control MPU 1310a as shown in FIG. 94 (step S100). The general-purpose storage element (general-purpose register) of the main control MPU 1310a has two register banks composed of a first register bank and a second register bank. The first register bank is used in the main control main processing in the main control side power-on processing described above, while the first register bank is used in the main control side timer interrupt processing which is this routine. In step S100, since the second register bank is used in the main control side timer interrupt processing which is the main control side, the first register bank used in the main control main processing in the main control side power-on processing is the second to the second register bank. Switch the register bank to the register tank of. In this embodiment, it is not necessary to save each register on the stack when the main control side timer interrupt process, which is the routine, is started.

Following step S100, the main control program performs timer subtraction processing (step S102). In this timer subtraction process, for example, the time during which the first special symbol display 1403 and the second special symbol display 1405 are lit according to the variable display pattern determined by the special symbol and the special electric accessory control process described later is the normal time described later. In addition to the time when the normal symbol display 1402 lights up according to the normal symbol variation display pattern determined by the symbol and the normal electric accessory control process, various commands transmitted by the main control board 1310 (main control MPU 1310a) are issued to the payout control board 951. When determining whether or not a payer ACK signal for informing that has been normally received is input, time management such as the ACK signal input determination time set as the determination condition is performed. Specifically, when the fluctuation time of the fluctuation display pattern or the normal symbol fluctuation display pattern is 5 seconds, the timer interrupt cycle is set to 4 ms, so that the fluctuation time is subtracted by 4 ms each time the timer subtraction process is performed. Then, when the subtraction result becomes a value of 0, the fluctuation time of the fluctuation display pattern or the normal symbol fluctuation display pattern is accurately measured.

In this embodiment, the ACK signal input determination time is set to 100 ms. Each time this timer subtraction process is performed, the ACK signal input determination time is subtracted by 4 ms, and the subtraction result becomes a value of 0, so that the ACK signal input determination time is accurately measured. These various times and the ACK signal input determination time are stored in the time management information storage area of the main control built-in RAM as time management information.

Following step S102, the main control program performs switch input processing (step S104). In this switch input process, various signals input to the input terminals of the various input ports of the main control MPU 1310a are read and stored as input information in the input information storage area of the main control built-in RAM. Specifically, this main control program is, for example, a detection signal from the general winning opening sensors 4020, 4020 shown in FIG. 69, which detects a game ball that has entered the general winning opening 2001,2201 shown in FIG. Detecting the game ball that has entered the large winning opening 2005 shown in FIG. 8 Detects the detection signal from the count sensor 4005 shown in FIG. 69 and the game ball that has entered the first starting port 2002 shown in FIG. Detection signal from the first start port sensor 4002 shown in FIG. 69, detection signal from the second start port sensor 4004 shown in FIG. 69 to detect a game ball entering the second start port 2004 shown in FIG. , The detection signal from the gate sensor 4003 shown in FIG. 69 for detecting the game ball passing through the gate portion 2003 shown in FIG. 8, and the magnetic detection sensor 4024 for detecting fraudulent activity using the magnet shown in FIG. 69. The detection signal and the payer ACK signal from the payout control board 951 indicating that the payout control board 951 shown in FIG. 69 has normally received the prize ball command transmitted in the prize ball control process described later are read and input information. Is stored in the input information storage area. Further, a detection signal from the first start port sensor 4002 that detects the game ball that has entered the first start port 2002, and a detection signal from the second start port sensor 4004 that detects the game ball that has entered the second start port 2004. When each signal is read, the corresponding start port winning command shown in FIG. 90 and other categories is stored in the above-mentioned transmission information storage area as transmission information. That is, when there is a detection signal from the first start port sensor 4002, the corresponding start port winning command is stored in the transmission information storage area as transmission information, and there is a detection signal from the second start port sensor 4004. And the corresponding start opening winning command is stored in the transmission information storage area as transmission information.

In this embodiment, the detection signals from the general winning opening sensors 4020 and 4020 that detect the game balls that have entered the general winning openings 2001 and 2,201, and the count sensor 4005 that detects the game balls that have entered the large winning openings 2005. Detection signal from, detection signal from the first start port sensor 4002 that detects the game ball that entered the first start port 2002, second start port sensor 4004 that detects the game ball that entered the second start port 2004 The detection signal from the gate sensor 4003 and the detection signal from the gate sensor 4003 that detects the game ball that has passed through the gate unit 2003 are first read as the first time when the switch input process is started, and are read for a predetermined time (for example, 10 μs). ) After that, it is read again as the second time. Then, the result read for the second time and the result read for the first time are compared. It is determined whether or not any of the comparison results has the same result. If the result is not the same, it is read again as the third time, and the result read in the third time is compared with the result read in the second time. It is determined again whether or not any of the comparison results has the same result. If the result is not the same, it is read again as the fourth time, and the result read at the fourth time is compared with the result read at the third time. It is determined again whether or not any of the comparison results has the same result. If the result is the same, it is treated as if there is no entry of the game ball.

As described above, in the switch input process, the main control program transmits the detection signals from the general winning opening sensors 4020 and 4020, the count sensor 4005, the first starting port sensor 4002, the second starting port sensor 4004, and the gate sensor 4003. By performing a total of two readings, one for the first to third readings to be compared and the other for the second to fourth readings, a total of two readings, due to the effects of chattering, noise, etc. Since erroneous detection can be avoided, the detection signals from the general winning opening sensors 4020 and 4020, the count sensor 4005, the first starting port sensor 4002, the second starting port sensor 4004, and the gate sensor 4003 Reliability can be increased.

Following step S104, the main control program performs the winning random number update process (step S106). In this winning random number update process, the above-mentioned random number for the big hit symbol and the random number for the small hit symbol are updated. Further, in addition to these random numbers, the random number for determining the initial value for the jackpot symbol, which is updated by the non-winning random number update process in step S56 in the main control side power-on processing (main control side main process) shown in FIG. 93, And the random number for determining the initial value for the small hit symbol is also updated. These random numbers for determining the initial value for the big hit symbol and the random numbers for determining the initial value for the small hit symbol are updated in the main control side main process and the main control side timer interrupt process, respectively, to further enhance the randomness. .. On the other hand, since the big hit symbol random number and the small hit symbol random number are random numbers related to the winning determination (big hit determination), each counter counts up only every time the winning random number update process is performed. The above-mentioned random number for determining the hit of the normal symbol and the random number for determining the initial value for determining the hit of the normal symbol are also updated by this winning random number update process.

For example, the counter that updates the random number for normal symbol hit determination is an initial value update type counter as described above, and is updated within a predetermined fixed numerical value range from the minimum value to the maximum value, and this minimum value. The range from to the maximum value is counted up by adding a value of 1 each time the main control side timer interrupt process is performed. The random number for determining the initial value for determining the normal symbol hit is counted up toward the maximum value, and then the random number for determining the initial value for determining the normal symbol hit is counted up from the minimum value. When the counter finishes counting up the range from the minimum value to the maximum value of the normal symbol hit judgment random number, the big hit judgment initial value determination random number is updated by this winning random number update process. The random number for determining the initial value for determining the normal symbol hit can be obtained by executing the initial value lottery process for drawing one value from the fixed numerical value range of the counter that updates the random number for determining the normal symbol hit. ..

In the present embodiment, the random number for determining the initial value for the big hit symbol and the random number for determining the initial value for the small hit symbol are not used in step S56 in the main control side power-on processing (main control side main process) shown in FIG. 93. The winning random number is updated in the winning random number update processing and the winning random number update processing in step S106 in the main control side timer interrupt processing of this routine, but the processing time of this routine becomes uneven every time the interrupt timer occurs, and the next If the number of executions of the non-winning random number update process in step S56 becomes random by repeatedly executing the main control side main process within the remaining time until the interrupt timer is generated, the random number for determining the initial value for the jackpot symbol , And the random number for determining the initial value for the small hit symbol may be updated only in the non-winning random number update process in step S56.

Following step S106, the main control program performs the prize ball control process (step S108). In this prize ball control process, the prize ball command shown in FIG. 88 for reading the input information from the above-mentioned input information storage area and paying out the game ball based on the input information is created and paid out as the prize ball. When the number of planned game balls has reached 10, the output of the main prize ball number information output signal is set to convey that fact, and it is stored in the output information storage area as output information, or mainly. The self-check command shown in FIG. 88 for confirming the connection state between the control board 1310 and the payout control board 951 is created. Then, the created prize ball command and self-check command are transmitted to the payout control board 951 as main payment serial data. For example, when one game ball enters the large prize opening 2005 shown in FIG. 8, a prize ball command is created to pay out 15 balls as a prize ball, and the number of game balls to be paid out as a prize ball. Has reached 10 balls, so in order to convey that fact, the output of the main prize ball number information output signal is set, stored as output information in the output information storage area, and the prize ball command is transmitted to the payout control board 951. Or, when the payer ACK signal indicating that the payout control board 951 has normally received this prize ball command is not input within a predetermined time, the connection state between the main control board 1310 and the payout control board 951 is confirmed. Create a self-check command to send to the payout control board 951. If the number of game balls to be paid out exceeds 10 as in the case of creating a prize ball command to pay out 15 balls as prize balls, the number of balls to be paid out will be added to the next number of balls. In the prize ball control process, the input information is read from the above-mentioned input information storage area, and the number of game balls to be paid out as a prize ball is added based on this input information, and the number of added game balls is added. When has reached, the output of the main prize ball number information output signal is set in order to convey that fact, and the output information is stored in the output information storage area.

Following step S108, the main control program performs frame command reception processing (step S110). On the payout control board 951, the payout control program has various 1-byte (8-bit) commands (for example, a frame state 1 command, an error release navigation command, and a frame state 2 command) classified into the status display shown in FIG. To send. On the other hand, as will be described later, the payout control program outputs an error occurrence command when an error occurs in the payout operation, or outputs an error release navigation command based on the detection signal of the operation switch 954.
In the frame command reception process described above, when the main control program normally receives these various commands as payer serial data, the information that conveys that fact to the payout control board 951 is stored as output information in the main control built-in RAM. Store in the area. In addition, the main control program formats the command normally received as the payer serial data into a 2-byte (16-bit) command (various commands classified into the status display in FIG. 90 (frame status 1 command, error cancellation). Navi command and frame state 2 command)) are stored in the transmission information storage area described above as transmission information. The frame state 1 command referred to here corresponds to the first error occurrence command, and the error release navigation command corresponds to the first error release command.

Following step S110, the main control program performs fraud detection processing (step S112). In this fraud detection process, an abnormal state related to the prize ball is confirmed. For example, when the input information is read from the above-mentioned input information storage area and the detection signal from the count sensor 4005 is input when the game is not in the big hit game state (when the game ball enters the big winning opening 2005). , A winning abnormality display command classified into the notification display shown in FIG. 90 as an abnormal state is created, and stored as transmission information in the transmission information storage area described above.

Following step S112, the main control program performs special symbol and special electric accessory control processing (step S114). In this special symbol and special electric accessory control process, a latch signal is output to the main control built-in hard random number circuit 1310an shown in FIG. 69, and the random number extracted by the main control built-in hard random number circuit 1310an when the latch signal is input. (Random number value) is acquired from the hard random number latch register built in the main control built-in main control MPU1310a, and the acquired random number value is set as a random number for jackpot determination. Then, whether or not the random number for jackpot determination (that is, the random number value acquired from the hard random number latch register built in the main control built-in main control MPU1310a) and the jackpot determination value stored in advance in the main control built-in ROM match. (Determining whether or not to generate a jackpot game state (referred to as "special lottery")), or taking out the value of the counter that updates the random number for the jackpot symbol and storing it in the main control built-in ROM in advance. It is determined whether or not it matches the probability variation hit determination value (determination of whether or not a probability fluctuation is generated). Here, the "probability fluctuation" means that the probability of a big hit changes to a high probability (probability change) set higher than that in the normal time (low probability). In the present embodiment, the value 32668 to the value 32767 are set as the above-mentioned jackpot determination value range (big hit determination range) with a low probability, and are read from the normal judgment table, whereas the value 31768 with a high probability. ~ Value 32767 is set and is read from the probability change determination table. As described above, in the special symbol and special electric accessory control process in step S114, the big hit determination random number (that is, the random number value acquired from the hard random number latch register built in the main control built-in main control MPU1310a) and the main control built-in. When determining whether or not the jackpot determination value stored in the ROM matches, the random number for jackpot determination (that is, the random number value acquired from the hard random number latch register built in the main control built-in main control MPU 1310a). Is included in the jackpot judgment range.

When these determination results are based on the first start port sensor 4002, various commands related to the special figure 1 synchronization effect shown in FIG. 89 are created, while the lottery results are based on the second start port sensor 4004. In some cases, various commands related to the special figure 2 synchronization effect shown in FIG. 89 are created and stored as transmission information in the transmission information storage area, and the first special symbol is displayed according to the determined variation display pattern of the special symbol. The output of the lighting signal to the first special symbol display 1403 or the second special symbol display 1405 is set so as to light the device 1403 or the second special symbol display 1405, and the output information is stored in the above-mentioned output information storage area. do. Further, depending on the game state to be generated, for example, when a big hit game state is reached, various commands classified as related to the big hit shown in FIG. 89 (big hit opening command, big winning opening 1 opening Nth display command, big winning opening 1). A closing display command, a big winning opening 1 count display command, a big hit ending command, and a big hit symbol display command) are created and stored in the transmission information storage area as transmission information, or the opening / closing member 2107 shown in FIG. 8 is opened / closed. When the output of the drive signal to the attacker solenoid 2108 is set and stored as output information in the output information storage area, or when the number of times (round) that the grand prize opening 2005 is changed from the closed state to the open state is 2, the figure is shown in the figure. The output of the lighting signal to the 2-round indicator lamp 1407a is set so as to turn on the 2-round indicator lamp 1407a of the round indicator 1407 shown in 10. At one time, the output of the lighting signal to the 15-round indicator lamp 1407b is set so as to turn on the 15-round indicator lamp 1407b of the round indicator 1407 shown in FIG. The output of the lighting signal to the status indicator 1401 is set so that the presence or absence of fluctuation is lit in a predetermined color, and is stored in the output information storage area as output information.

Following step S114, the main control program performs a normal symbol and a normal electric accessory control process (step S116). In this ordinary symbol and ordinary electric accessory control process, input information is read from the above-mentioned input information storage area, and gate winning processing is performed based on this input information. In this gate winning process, it is determined from the input information whether or not the detection signal from the gate sensor 4003 has been input to the input terminal. Based on this determination result, when the detection signal is input to the input terminal, the value of the counter that updates the above-mentioned normal symbol hit determination random number is extracted and used as the gate information in the gate information storage area of the main control built-in RAM. Remember in.

The gate information storage area is provided with 0th to 3rd sections (4 sections), and gate information is stored in the order of 0th section, 1st section, 2nd section, and 3rd section. It has become like. For example, when the gate information is stored in the 0th to 2nd sections of the gate information storage, the gate information is stored in the 3rd section of the gate information storage when the detection signal from the gate sensor 4003 is input to the input terminal. do.

The gate information stored in the 0th section of the gate information storage is set in the work area of the main control built-in RAM. When this gate information is set, the gate information of the first section of the gate information storage is in the 0th section of the gate information storage, and the gate information of the second section of the gate information storage is in the first section of the gate information storage. The gate information of the third section of the information storage is shifted to the second section of the gate information storage, and the third section of the gate information storage becomes an empty area. For example, when the gate information is stored in the first to second sections of the gate information storage, the gate information of the first section of the gate information storage is stored in the 0th section of the gate information storage, and the gate information is stored in the 0th section. The gate information of the two sections is shifted to the first section of the gate information storage, and the second section of the gate information storage and the third section of the gate information storage become free areas. Here, when the gate information is stored in the first to third sections of the gate information storage, the above-mentioned gate information is set so that the normal symbol storage display 1188 is turned on with the total number of the stored gate information as the holding ball. The output of the lighting signal of the normal symbol storage display 1188 is set based on the above, and is stored in the output information storage area described above as output information.

Following the gate winning process, the gate information set in the work area of the main control built-in RAM is read, and the value of the random number for normal symbol hit determination is taken out from the read gate information and stored in advance in the main control built-in ROM. It is judged whether or not it matches the judgment value per normal symbol (referred to as "normal lottery"). Whether or not to open and close the movable piece is determined based on this determination result (lottery result by ordinary lottery). When the opening / closing operation is performed by this determination, the pair of movable pieces are expanded in the left-right direction, so that the game ball can be accepted into the second starting port 2004, which is advantageous for the player. It becomes a game state. The variation display pattern of the normal symbol corresponding to this determination is determined based on the above-mentioned random number for the normal symbol variation display pattern, and various commands classified in relation to the normal symbol synchronization effect shown in FIG. 89 are created and used as transmission information. While storing in the transmission information storage area described above, the output of the lighting signal to the normal symbol display 1402 is set so as to light the normal symbol display 1402 according to the determined variation display pattern of the normal symbol, and the output information is described above. It is stored in the output information storage area. Further, for example, when the value of the extracted normal symbol hit determination random number matches the normal symbol hit determination value stored in advance in the main control built-in ROM, various commands related to the normal electric service effect shown in FIG. Is created and stored in the transmission information storage area as transmission information, and the output of the drive signal to the start port solenoid 2107 is set so as to open and close the movable piece, and is stored in the output information storage area described above as output information. , When the value of the extracted normal symbol hit judgment random number does not match the normal symbol hit judgment value stored in advance in the main control built-in ROM, the normal symbol variation is based on the above-mentioned normal symbol variation display pattern random number. The display pattern is determined, various commands classified in relation to the normal symbol synchronization effect shown in FIG. 89 are created, stored as transmission information in the above-mentioned transmission information storage area, and normally according to the determined normal symbol variation display pattern. The output of the lighting signal to the normal symbol display 1402 is set so as to light the symbol display 1402, and the output information is stored in the output information storage area described above.

Following step S116, the main control program performs port output processing (step S118). In this port output process, output information is read from the output information storage area described above from the output terminals of the various output ports of the main control MPU 1310a, and various signals are output based on the output information. This main control program, for example, outputs a main payment ACK signal when various commands from the payout control board 951 are normally received from the output terminal of a predetermined output port of the main control MPU 1310a based on the output information. A drive signal is output to the attacker solenoid 2108 that opens and closes the opening and closing member 2107 of the big winning opening 2005, and a drive signal is sent to the starting port solenoid 2107 that opens and closes the movable piece. In addition to outputting, main prize ball number information output signal, 15 round jackpot information output signal, 2 round jackpot information output signal, probability fluctuation information output signal, special symbol display information output signal, normal symbol display information output signal, Various information (game information) signals related to the game, such as time-saving and medium-time information output information and start port winning information output signals, are output to the payout control board 951.

Following step S118, the main control program performs peripheral control board command transmission processing (step S120). In this peripheral control board command transmission process, the main control program reads transmission information from the transmission information storage area described above and transmits this transmission information as main peripheral serial data to the peripheral control board 1510. This transmission information includes various commands classified in the special figure 1 synchronization effect-related and various types classified in the special figure 2 synchronization effect-related, as shown in FIG. 89, created by the main control side timer interrupt process of this routine. A big prize is won based on the detection signal from the count sensor 4005 (see FIG. 69) when a game ball that has entered the big prize opening 2005 (see FIG. 8) is detected by various commands classified into commands and big hits. Large prize opening 1 count display command equivalent to the mouth count command), various commands classified as power-on, various commands classified as related to normal electric power production, various commands classified as related to ordinary electric service production, Fig. 90 Various commands classified into the notification display (door open command, door frame close command, main body frame open command, main body frame close command, etc.) and various commands classified into the status display (frame state 1 command, error cancellation) shown in Navi commands and frame state 2 commands), various commands classified as test-related, and various commands classified as others are stored. One packet of the main peripheral serial data is composed of 3 bytes. Specifically, the main peripheral serial data has a status indicating the type of command having a storage capacity of 1 byte (8 bits), a mode indicating a variation of an effect having a storage capacity of 1 byte (8 bits), and a status. It is composed of a sum value obtained by regarding the mode as a numerical value and the sum of the sum values, and this sum value is created at the time of transmission.

In this peripheral control board command transmission process, the main control program transmits various commands as main peripheral serial data to the peripheral control board 1510 in the order of status, mode, and sum value. As described above, the charge charged in the electrolytic capacitor MC2 shown in FIG. 77 is applied as + 5V to the VDD terminal, which is the power supply terminal of the main control MPU 1310a, in the event of a power failure or a momentary power failure. Therefore, the main peripheral serial transmission port 1310ae built in the main control MPU 1310a shown in FIG. 79 shifts at least the command set by the main control CPU core 1310aa in the transmission buffer register 1310aeb by the serial management unit 1310aec. It can be transferred to the register 41aea and transmitted from the transmission shift register 1310aea as main peripheral serial data. When the power is restored due to a power failure or momentary power failure, in order to notify that the power has been restored in the reservation setting of the command to be transmitted when the power is turned on in step S50 in the main control side power-on processing shown in FIG. In addition, the power-on state command and the power-on main control return destination command, which are classified as power-on, are created and stored in the transmission information storage area of the main control built-in RAM as transmission information. , Status, status, which configures the power-on state command, sends to the peripheral control board 1510 in the order of status, mode, and sum value, and then configures the main control return destination command when power-on. The mode and the sum value are transmitted to the peripheral control board 1510 in this order. In the transmission information storage area of the main control built-in RAM, the game information is read from the game backup information in the setting of the work area of the main control built-in RAM in step S34 in the process when the power is turned on on the main control side, and the game information is accommodated. Various commands may be stored. In such a case, first, after the transmission of various commands according to the game information is completed, the power-on state command and the power-on main control return destination command are transmitted.

In this peripheral control board command transmission process, when the main control program receives the frame state 1 command (first error occurrence command) from the payout control board 951 by the receiving port of the RXA terminal, the peripheral control board 1510 (effect control unit) ) Is sent a frame state 1 command (second error occurrence command) (error command sending means). In this case, the main control program transfers the frame state 1 command in the form shown in FIG. 91 received from the payout control board 951 to the peripheral control board 1510 as the frame state 1 command in the form shown in FIG. 90.

On the other hand, in this peripheral control board command transmission process, when the main control program receives an error release navigation command (first error release command) from the payout control board 951 by the receiving port of the RXA terminal, the peripheral control board 1510 The error release navigation command (second error release command) is transmitted to (error command transmission means). In this case, the main control program transfers the error release navigation command in the form shown in FIG. 91 received from the payout control board 951 to the peripheral control board 1510 as the error release navigation command in the form shown in FIG. 90.

Furthermore, in this peripheral control board command transmission process, when the main control program receives the main body frame opening command (first main body frame opening command) from the payout control board 951 by the receiving port of the RXA terminal, the peripheral control board 1510 A main body frame opening command (second main body frame opening command) is transmitted to (effect control unit) (main body frame command sending means, second main body frame sending means). In this case, the main control program transfers the main body frame opening command in the form shown in FIG. 91 received from the payout control board 951 to the peripheral control board 1510 as the main body frame opening command in the form shown in FIG. 90. On the other hand, in this peripheral control board command transmission process, when the main control program receives the main body frame closing command (first main body frame closing command) from the payout control board 951 by the receiving port of the RXA terminal, the peripheral control board 1510 (1st main body frame closing command) A main body frame closing command (second main body frame closing command) is transmitted to the effect control unit) (main body frame command sending means, second main body frame command sending means). In this case, the main control program transfers the main body frame closing command in the form shown in FIG. 91 received from the payout control board 951 to the peripheral control board 1510 as the main body frame closing command in the form shown in FIG. 90.

Further, in this peripheral control board command transmission process, when the main control program receives a door opening command (first door opening command) from the payout control board 951 by the receiving port of the RXA terminal, the peripheral control board 1510 (effect control) A door opening command (second door frame opening command) is transmitted to (part) (door frame command sending means, second door frame command sending means). In this case, the main control program transfers the door frame closing command in the form shown in FIG. 91 received from the payout control board 951 to the peripheral control board 1510 as the door closing command in the form shown in FIG. 90. On the other hand, in this peripheral control board command transmission process, when the main control program receives a door closing command (first door closing command) from the payout control board 951 by the receiving port of the RXA terminal, the peripheral control board 1510 (effect control) A door closing command (second door closing command) is transmitted to (part) (door frame command sending means, second door frame command sending means). In this case, the main control program transfers the door closing command in the form shown in FIG. 91 received from the payout control board 951 to the peripheral control board 1510 as the door closing command in the form shown in FIG. 90.

Following step S120, the main control program clears the main control built-in WDT1310af shown in FIG. 69 (step S122), and ends this routine. The main control built-in WDT1310af in step S22 is cleared by setting the timer clear set value in the WDT clear register built in the main control MPU1310a. As a result, the timekeeping by the main control built-in WDT1310af is cleared. Then, by restarting the time counting by the main control built-in WDT1310af, the main control MPU1310a is not forcibly reset by the main control built-in WDT1310af.

As described above, the main control board 1310 is used as the backup for storing the game information due to the progress of the game before the power to the pachinko machine 1 is cut off during the progress of the game. The process can be executed and completed, and at the time of power recovery, the power to the pachinko machine 1 is cut off based on the game information in which the backup process is executed as the return destination of the game progress by the main control board 1310. When the power is turned on, the peripheral control board 1510 issues the main control return destination command in FIG. It can be output to. That is, the main control board 1310 is mainly used in setting the work area of the main control built-in RAM in step S34 in the reserved setting of the command to be transmitted when the power is turned on in step S50 in the main control side power-on processing in FIG. 93. Based on the power-on recovery information set in the work area of the control built-in RAM, the power-on state command and the power-on main A control return destination command is created and stored as transmission information in the transmission information storage area of the main control built-in RAM, and in the peripheral control board command transmission process in step S120 in this routine, the power-on state command is used as the main peripheral serial data. Is transmitted to the peripheral control board 1510 in the order of status, mode, and sum value, and then the peripheral control board 1510 is configured in the order of status, mode, and sum value, which constitutes the main control return destination command when the power is turned on. Send to. Therefore, the peripheral control board 1510 sets the return destination of the progress of the game by the main control board 1310 at the time of power restoration to the game board side effect display device 1600 based on the main control return destination command when the power is turned on from the main control board 1310. The effect can be displayed in the display area of. As a result, when a momentary power failure or power failure occurs while the player is playing a game and then the power is restored, the game state immediately before the momentary power failure or power failure is quickly restored after the power is restored. In addition, the return destination of the progress of the game by the main control board 1310 can be displayed and notified in the display area of the game board side effect display device 1600, so that the system of the pachinko machine 1 is in a solid state, so-called freeze. It is possible to prevent the player from being mistaken for a failure by being seen by the player in such a state. Therefore, it is possible to prevent the player from being mistaken for a failure by promptly returning to the gaming state immediately before the momentary power failure or power failure after the power is restored.

Further, in the main control board inspection step, which is the inspection step of the production line of the main control board 1310, when the main control board 1310 is turned on for the first time after being manufactured for inspection, as described above, FIG. In step S38 in the process when the power is turned on on the main control side, the entire area of the main control built-in RAM is surely cleared. As a result, when the reservation setting of the command to be transmitted at the time of power-on is made in the reservation setting of the command to be transmitted at the time of power-on in step S50 in the same process, the power-on state command classified into the power-on shown in FIG. And the main control return destination command at power-on are created and stored as transmission information in the transmission information storage area of the main control built-in RAM. Only the transmission information is stored in the transmission information storage area of the main control built-in RAM, and in the peripheral control board command transmission process in step S120 in this routine, the power-on state command is configured as the main peripheral serial data. The status, mode, and sum value are sent to the inspection device in the main control board inspection process in that order, and then the main control board inspection is performed in the order of status, mode, and sum value, which configures the main control return destination command when the power is turned on. Send to the process inspection device. The inspection device in the main control board inspection process configures information indicating the model code of the pachinko machine based on the information indicating the model code of the pachinko machine included in the power-on state command received from the main control board 1310. , The series code for specifying which of the above-mentioned max type, middle type, and Amadeji type indicating the model type, the copyright code for specifying the copyright of the work, and the game specifications. (For example, when a probability fluctuation occurs, in addition to the game specification that the state is continued until the next big hit game state occurs, the game specification that the probability fluctuation occurs in a state where the number of fluctuations of the special symbol is limited (ST). Based on the game specification code for specifying the machine), etc.), detailed model information is displayed on the inspection monitor of the main control board inspection process.

[16-1. Various control processes of the peripheral control unit]
[16-1-1. Peripheral control unit power-on processing]
First, the peripheral control unit power-on processing will be described with reference to FIG. 95. When the power is turned on to the pachinko machine 1, the peripheral control MPU 1511a of the peripheral control unit 1511 shown in FIG. 72 performs the peripheral control unit power-on processing as shown in FIG. 95. When the peripheral control unit power-on processing is started, the effect control program performs the initial setting processing under the control of the peripheral control MPU1511a (step S1000). In this initial setting process, the effect control program performs a process of initializing the peripheral control MPU1511a itself, a process of determining hot start / cold start, a process of setting a wait timer after reset, and the like. The peripheral control MPU1511a first performs a process of initializing itself, and the time required for the process of initializing the peripheral control MPU1511a is on the order of microseconds (μs), and the peripheral control MPU1511a is initialized in an extremely short time. be able to. As a result, the peripheral control MPU 1511a is output from the main control board 1310 in the peripheral control unit command reception interrupt processing, which will be described later, by setting the interrupt enable, as shown in FIGS. 89 and 90. , It becomes possible to receive various commands such as a command related to the control of the game effect and a command related to the state of the pachinko machine 1.

In the hot start / cold start determination process, the peripheral control RAM 1511c shown in FIG. 73 has the effect backup information (1fr) that is backed up in Bank1 (1fr) and Bank2 (1fr) in the backup first area 1511cc. ), And the production backup information (1 ms), which is the content backed up in Bank 1 (1 ms) and Bank 2 (1 ms), are compared, and Bank 3 (1 fr) and Bank 4 (1 fr) in the backup second area 1511 cc. The production backup information (1fr), which is the content backed up in, is compared, and the production backup information (1ms), which is the content backed up in Bank3 (1ms) and Bank4 (1ms), is compared. When they match, the effect backup information (1fr), which is the content stored in Bank1 (1fr) with respect to Bank0 (1fr), which is the normally used storage area of the peripheral control RAM 1511c shown in FIG. 73, and When the production backup information (1 ms), which is the content stored in Bank 1 (1 ms), is copied back to Bank 0 (1 ms) to make a hot start, but the compared contents do not match (that is,). , When there is a discrepancy), the value 0 is forcibly written to Bank0 (1fr) and Bank0 (1ms), which are the normally used storage areas of the peripheral control RAM 1511c, and cold start is performed.

Further, in the hot start / cold start determination process, the peripheral control SRAM 1511d shown in FIG. 73 is also backed up in Bank1 (SRAM) and Bank2 (SRAM) in the backup first area 1511db. (SRAM) are compared, and the effect backup information (SRAM), which is the content backed up in Bank 3 (SRAM) and Bank 4 (SRAM), in the backup second area 1511dc is compared. When the compared contents match, the effect backup information (SRAM) which is the contents stored in Bank0 (SRAM) with respect to Bank0 (SRAM) which is a normally used storage area of the peripheral control SRAM 1511d shown in FIG. 73. ) Is copied back to make a hot start, while when the compared contents do not match (that is, when they do not match), the value is set with respect to Bank0 (SRAM), which is a normally used storage area of the peripheral control SRAM 1511d. Forcibly write 0 to make a cold start. Following such a hot start or cold start, a value 0 is forcibly written to the backup unmanaged work area 1511cf of the peripheral control RAM 1511c shown in FIG. 73 to clear zero. After performing this initialization setting process, the peripheral control MPU1511a outputs a clear signal to the peripheral control built-in WDT1511af shown in FIG. 73 and the peripheral control external WDT1511e shown in FIG. 72 and resets to the peripheral control MPU1511a. I try not to take it.

Following step S1000, the effect control program performs the current time information acquisition process (step S1002). In this current time information acquisition process, the calendar information for specifying the date and the time information for specifying the hour, minute, and second are acquired from the RTC built-in RAM4165aa of the RTC41654a of the RTC control unit 4165 shown in FIG. 72, and FIG. 73 In the RTC information acquisition storage area 1511cad of the peripheral control RAM 1511c shown in the above, the current calendar information is set in the calendar information storage unit, and the current time information is set in the time information storage unit. Further, in the current time information acquisition process, the brightness setting process of the liquid crystal display device is also performed. In the brightness setting process of the liquid crystal display device, the peripheral control MPU1511a acquires the brightness setting information from the RTC built-in RAM4165aa of the RTC control unit 4165 so that the brightness of the LED is included in the acquired brightness setting information. The processing of adjusting the brightness of the backlight of the side effect display device 1600 to turn it on is performed. As described above, the brightness setting information includes the brightness adjustment information for adjusting the brightness of the LED, which is the backlight of the game board side effect display device 1600, in 5% increments, and the current brightness setting information. The brightness of the LED, which is the backlight of the game board side effect display device 1600, which is set, is included.

In the brightness setting process of the liquid crystal display device, specifically, the brightness of the LED included in the brightness setting information stored in the RTC built-in RAM4165aa of the RTC control unit 4165 is 75%, and the backlight of the game board side effect display device 1600. Is turned on by adjusting the brightness of the backlight of the game board side effect display device 1600 based on the brightness adjustment information included in the brightness setting information, and the brightness stored in the RTC built-in RAM 4165aa of the RTC control unit 4165. When the brightness of the LED included in the setting information is 80% and the backlight of the game board side effect display device 1600 is turned on, the backlight of the game board side effect display device 1600 is turned on based on the brightness adjustment information included in the brightness setting information. Adjust the brightness to turn on. In the brightness setting process of the liquid crystal display device, the same correction as the brightness correction program for correcting the brightness of the game board side effect display device 1600 according to the usage time of the game board side effect display device 1600 described above is performed. It is not done at all. This is because a correction program similar to the brightness correction program is incorporated in the brightness setting process of the liquid crystal display device, so that the brightness of the LED is corrected toward 100% each time the brightness setting process of the liquid crystal display device is executed. This is to prevent it from being done.

In the present embodiment, the peripheral control MPU1511a acquires the calendar information and the time information from the RTC built-in RAM4165aa of the RTC4165a only once when the power is turned on. Further, the peripheral control MPU1511a outputs a clear signal to the peripheral control built-in WDT1511af and the peripheral control external WDT1511e after performing the current time information acquisition process so that the peripheral control MPU1511a is not reset.

Following step S1002, the effect control program sets the value 0 in the V blank signal detection flag VB-FLG (step S1006). This V blank signal detection flag VB-FLG is a flag for determining whether or not to execute the peripheral control unit steady processing described later, and has a value of 1 when the peripheral control unit steady processing is executed, and the peripheral control unit steady processing. Is set to a value of 0 when is not executed. The V-blank signal detection flag VB-FLG is executed when a V-blank signal indicating that the screen data from the peripheral control MPU1511a can be accepted is input from the sound source built-in VDP1512a, which will be described later. The value 1 is set in the part V blank signal interrupt processing. In this step S1006, the V blank signal detection flag VB-FLG is initialized once by setting the value 0 in the V blank signal detection flag VB-FLG. Further, the peripheral control MPU1511a outputs a clear signal to the peripheral control built-in WDT1511af and the peripheral control external WDT1511e after setting the value 0 in the V blank signal detection flag VB-FLG so that the peripheral control MPU1511a is not reset. There is.

Following step S1006, the effect control program determines whether or not the V blank signal detection flag VB-FLG has a value of 1 (step S1008). When the V blank signal detection flag VB-FLG is not a value 1 (value is 0), the process returns to step S1008 again to repeatedly determine whether or not the V blank signal detection flag VB-FLG is a value 1. By repeating such a determination, the state waits until the peripheral control unit routine processing is executed. Further, the peripheral control MPU1511a outputs a clear signal to the peripheral control built-in WDT1511af and the peripheral control external WDT1511e after determining whether or not the V blank signal detection flag VB-FLG has a value of 1, and resets the peripheral control MPU1511a. I try not to take it.

When the V blank signal detection flag VB-FLG has a value of 1 in step S1008, that is, when the peripheral control unit steady processing is executed, the value 1 is first set in the steady processing flag SP-FLG (step S1009). The steady-state processing flag SP-FLG is set to a value of 1 when the peripheral control unit steady-state processing is being executed, and to a value of 0 when the peripheral control unit steady-state processing is completed.

Following step S1009, the effect control program performs a 1 ms interrupt timer activation process (step S1010). In this 1 ms interrupt timer activation process, the 1 ms interrupt timer for executing the peripheral control unit 1 ms timer interrupt process, which will be described later, is activated, and the number of times the 1 ms interrupt timer is activated and the peripheral control unit 1 ms timer interrupt process is executed. The 1ms timer interrupt execution count STN for counting is set to a value of 1, and the 1ms timer interrupt execution count STN is also initialized. The 1ms timer interrupt execution count STN is updated by the peripheral control unit 1ms timer interrupt processing.

Following step S1010, the effect control program performs lamp data output processing (step S1012). In this lamp data output process, the effect control program performs DMA serial continuous transmission to the lamp drive board 4170 shown in FIG. 72. Here, the peripheral control DMA controller 1511ac of the peripheral control MPU 1511a shown in FIG. 73 is used to continuously transmit the serial I / O port for the lamp drive board. When the continuous transmission of the serial I / O port for the lamp drive board is started, the transmission data storage area 1511caa on the lamp drive board side of the peripheral control RAM 1511c externally attached to the peripheral control MPU 1511a shown in FIG. 73 is shown in FIG. The game board side light emission data SL-DAT for outputting lighting signals, blinking signals, or gradation lighting signals to a plurality of LEDs of various decorative boards provided on the game board 5 is created by the lamp data creation process described later. It is in the set state.

The peripheral control CPU core 1511aa of the peripheral control MPU 1511a shown in FIG. 73 specifies the transmission of the serial I / O port for the lamp drive board as a requirement factor of the peripheral control DMA controller 1511ac, and the transmission data storage area 1511caa on the lamp drive board side. The first byte of the game board side light emission data SL-DAT stored at the start address is sent to the serial I / O port for the lamp drive board via the external bus 1511h, the peripheral control bus controller 1511ad, and the peripheral bus 1511ai. Transfer to and write to the transmit buffer register of. As a result, the serial I / O port for the lamp drive board transfers the written data of the transmission buffer register to the transmission shift register, and synchronizes with the game board side emission clock signal SL-CLK to 1 byte of the transmission shift register. Data is started to be transmitted bit by bit.

The peripheral control DMA controller 1511ac triggers each time a transmission interrupt request for the serial I / O port for the lamp drive board is generated (in the present embodiment, the transmission buffer register for the serial I / O port for the lamp drive board is used). The written 1-byte data is transferred to the transmission shift register, and the transmission buffer register runs out of 1-byte data and becomes empty.) The peripheral control CPU core 1511aa is using the bus. If not, the remaining game board side light emission data SL-DAT stored in the lamp drive board side transmission data storage area 1511caa is sent byte by byte via the external bus 1511h, the peripheral control bus controller 1511ad, and the peripheral bus 1511ai. By transferring and writing to the transmission buffer register of the serial I / O port for the lamp drive board, the serial I / O port for the lamp drive board transfers the data of the written transmission buffer register to the transmission shift register and plays a game. In synchronization with the board-side emission clock signal SL-CLK, 1-byte data of the transmission shift register is started to be transmitted bit by bit, and continuous transmission is performed by the serial I / O port for the lamp drive board.

Further, in the lamp data output processing, the effect control program performs the DMA serial continuous transmission processing to the frame decoration drive amplifier board 194 shown in FIG. 72. Here, too, the peripheral control DMA controller 1511ac of the peripheral control MPU 1511a is used to continuously transmit the serial I / O port for the frame decoration drive amplifier board LED. When the continuous transmission of the serial I / O port for the frame decoration drive amplifier board LED is started, the transmission data storage area for the frame decoration drive amplifier board side LED of the peripheral control RAM 1511c externally attached to the peripheral control MPU 1511a shown in FIG. 73. Door-side light emission data STL-DAT for outputting lighting signals, blinking signals, or gradation lighting signals to a plurality of LEDs of various decorative substrates provided on the door frame 3 is created in 1511cab by a lamp data creation process described later. It is in the set state.

The peripheral control CPU core 1511aa of the peripheral control MPU 1511a specifies the transmission of the serial I / O port for the frame decoration drive amplifier board LED as a requirement factor of the peripheral control DMA controller 1511ac, and the transmission data storage area for the frame decoration drive amplifier board side LED. The first byte of the door-side emission data STL-DAT stored at the start address of 1511cab is serialized for the frame decoration drive amplifier board LED via the external bus 1511h, the peripheral control bus controller 1511ad, and the peripheral bus 1511ai. Transfer to the transmit buffer register of the I / O port and write. As a result, the serial I / O port for the frame decoration drive amplifier board LED transfers the written transmission buffer register data to the transmission shift register, and synchronizes with the door-side emission clock signal STL-CLK of the transmission shift register. Transmission of 1 byte of data is started bit by bit.

The peripheral control DMA controller 1511ac triggers each time a transmission interrupt request for the frame decoration drive amplifier board LED serial I / O port is generated (in this embodiment, the frame decoration drive amplifier board LED serial I / O). The 1-byte data written in the transmission buffer register of the port is transferred to the transmission shift register, and the transmission buffer register is empty when the 1-byte data is exhausted.), Peripheral control CPU core 1511aa When the bus is not used, the remaining door-side emission data STL-DAT stored in the transmission data storage area 1511cab for the frame decoration drive amplifier board side LED is stored in the external bus 1511h and the peripheral control bus controller 1511ad one byte at a time. Then, the serial I / O port for the frame decoration drive amplifier board LED is written by transferring to the transmission buffer register of the serial I / O port for the frame decoration drive amplifier board LED via the peripheral bus 1511ai. The data of the transmission buffer register is transferred to the transmission shift register, and the 1-byte data of the transmission shift register is started to be transmitted bit by bit in synchronization with the door-side emission clock signal STL-CLK, for the frame decoration drive amplifier board LED. Continuous transmission is performed by the serial I / O port.

Following step S1012, the effect control program performs the effect operation unit monitoring process (step S1014). In this effect operation unit monitoring process, in the effect operation unit information acquisition process in the peripheral control unit 1 ms timer interrupt process described later, the operation of the operation button 410 based on the detection signals from various detection switches provided in the effect operation unit 400, etc. Based on the effect operation unit information acquisition storage area 1511kai of the peripheral control RAM 1511c shown in FIG. It is decided as appropriate whether or not it is reflected in.

Following step S1014, the effect control program performs display data output processing (step S1016). In this display data output process, the drawing data for one screen (one frame) generated on the built-in VRAM of the sound source built-in VDP1512a in the display data creation process described later is transmitted from the channels CH1 and 2 shown in FIG. 74 by the sound source built-in VDP1512a. Output to the game board side effect display device 1600 and the door frame side effect display device 460. As a result, various screens are drawn on the game board side effect display device 1600 and the door frame side effect display device 460. In the display data output processing, when drawing exceeding the drawing capacity of the sound source built-in VDP1512a is performed, the generated drawing data for one screen (one frame) is displayed on the game board side effect display device 1600 and the door frame side effect. The output to the display device 460 is canceled. As a result, it is possible to prevent a delay in the processing time, but so-called frame dropping occurs, but the various decorative substrates provided on the game board 5 shown in FIG. 8 by the lamp data output processing in step S1012. Various effects from the lower speaker 921 shown in FIG. 5 and the upper speaker 573 shown in FIG. 2 by the effect of the plurality of LEDs and the plurality of LEDs of the various decorative substrates provided on the door frame 3 and the sound data output processing described later. It is a mechanism that can prioritize the synchronization with the production by music and sound effects according to.

Following step S1016, the effect control program performs sound data output processing (step S1018). In this sound data output process, the effect control program outputs sound data such as music and sound effects set in the sound source built-in VDP1512a in the sound data creation process described later to the audio data transmission IC 1512c as serialized audio data. In addition to music and sound effects, sound data of notification sounds and notification sounds are output to the audio data transmission IC 1512c as serialized audio data. When the serialized audio data from the VDP1512a with a built-in sound source is input, the audio data transmission IC 1512c faces the frame decoration drive amplifier board 194 as differential serial data in which the right audio data is a positive signal and a negative signal. At the same time, the left side audio data is transmitted to the frame decoration drive amplifier board 194 as differential serial data having a positive signal and a negative signal. As a result, music, sound effects, and the like that match various effects are reproduced in stereo from the lower speaker 921 and the upper speaker 573, and notification sounds and notification sounds are also reproduced in stereo.

Following step S1018, the effect control program performs scheduler update processing (step S1020). In this scheduler update process, the effect control program updates various schedule data set in the schedule data storage area 1511cae of the peripheral control RAM 1511c shown in FIG. 73. For example, in the scheduler update process, among the screen data arranged in the time series constituting the screen generation schedule data set in the schedule data storage area 1511cae, the number of screen data from the first screen data is sent to the sound source built-in VDP1512a. Update the pointer to indicate whether to output.

Further, in the scheduler update process, among the light emission data arranged in the time series constituting the light emission mode generation schedule data set in the schedule data storage area 1511 cage, the light emission data at which number from the first light emission data is emitted from various LEDs. Update the pointer to indicate which aspect to use.

Further, in the scheduler update process, sound data such as music and sound effects, and sound data of notification sound and notification sound arranged in a time series constituting the sound generation schedule data set in the schedule data storage area 1511cae are instructed. The pointer is updated in order to indicate which sound command data is to be output to the sound source built-in VDP1512a from the first sound command data among the sound command data.

Further, in the scheduler update process, from the first drive data among the drive data of the electric drive sources such as motors and solenoids arranged in the time series constituting the electric drive source schedule data set in the schedule data storage area 1511 cage. Update the pointer to indicate which drive data to output. Electrical drive source The drive data of electric drive sources such as motors and solenoids arranged in time series that compose the schedule data is repeatedly executed every time a 1 ms timer interrupt occurs, which will be described later. Peripheral control unit 1 ms timer interrupt. Updated with motor and solenoid drive processing in processing. In the motor and solenoid drive processing that is repeatedly executed each time this 1 ms timer interrupt occurs, the electric drive source such as the motor or solenoid is driven according to the drive data indicated by the pointer, and the next drive specified in time series is performed. It updates the pointer to the data and updates the pointer each time it executes its own processing. That is, since the drive data indicated by the pointer updated in the motor and solenoid drive processing is forcibly updated in the scheduler update processing, the pointer is originally instructed in the motor and solenoid drive processing for some reason. Even if another drive data is instructed from the drive data that should be used, the drive data that should be originally instructed is forcibly updated in the scheduler update process.

Following step S1020, the effect control program performs reception command analysis processing (step S1022). In this reception command analysis process, the effect control program receives information transmitted from the effect display drive board 4450 via the peripheral door relay terminal board 882 and the frame peripheral relay terminal board 868, and various types transmitted from the main control board 1310. The command is analyzed for various commands received in the peripheral control unit command reception interrupt processing (command reception means) described later (command analysis means). The effect control program includes screen generation schedule data, light emission mode generation schedule data, and sound based on information transmitted from the effect display drive board 4450 via the peripheral door relay terminal board 882 and the frame peripheral relay terminal board 868. The generation schedule data, the electrical drive source schedule data, etc. are extracted from the peripheral control ROM 1511b of the peripheral control unit 1511 or various control data copy areas 1511ce of the peripheral control RAM 1511c, and set in the schedule data storage area of the peripheral control RAM 1511c in 1511cae. do. Further, in the effect control program, the command from the main control board 1310 received in the peripheral control unit command interrupt process is, for example, a start port winning command for instructing the start of the start port winning effect, and the number of reserved symbols. Ordinary symbol memory command for identifying (0 to 4), symbol synchronization effect start command for instructing the start of symbol synchronization effect, symbol memory command output when the number of start hold changes, grand prize opening 2005 The large winning opening 1 count display command (large winning opening count command) output each time the game ball is accepted, or the frame state 1 command (second error occurrence command,) indicating the content of full tank shown in FIG. It analyzes whether or not it is a full tank error occurrence command (command analysis means), and recognizes which game state it is currently in. Further, in this effect control program, after a predetermined time has elapsed from the time when the power is turned on, the commands received by the peripheral control unit command reception interrupt processing are the main body frame open command, the main body frame close command, the door open command, or the door frame close. Analyze whether it is a command or not. Various commands from the main control board 1310 are received by the peripheral control unit command reception interrupt processing and stored in the reception command storage area 1511cc of the peripheral control RAM 1511c shown in FIG. 73, and are stored in the reception command storage area 1511cc in the reception command analysis processing. , The effect control program analyzes various commands stored in the received command storage area 1511cc. The various commands are classified into, as shown in FIG. Various commands to be executed, various commands classified to be related to the normal electric service production, various commands classified to be related to the normal electric service production, various commands classified to the notification display shown in FIG. 90, and the above-mentioned door frame opening command. , Door frame closing command, main body frame opening command, main body frame closing command, error cancellation navigation command (corresponding to the second error canceling command), frame status 1 command (corresponding to the second error occurrence command), etc. There are various commands that are classified, various commands that are classified as related to testing, and various commands that are classified as others.

Following step S1022, the effect control program performs warning processing (step S1024). In this warning process, further, when the command analyzed by the effect control program in the received command analysis process in step S1022 includes various commands classified into the notification display shown in FIG. 90, various commands are included. Peripheral control unit 1511 sets the screen generation schedule data, the light emission mode generation schedule data, the sound generation schedule data, the electrical drive source schedule data, etc., which are set in the abnormality display mode for executing the abnormality notification. It is extracted from various control data copy areas 1511ce of the peripheral control ROM 1511b or the peripheral control RAM 1511c and set in the schedule data storage area of the peripheral control RAM 1511c in 1511cae. In the warning process, when a plurality of abnormalities occur at the same time, the abnormality notification is performed in descending order of priority registered in advance, and the abnormality is automatically resolved and the remaining abnormality notification is automatically transitioned to. It is designed to do. This allows multiple anomalies to be monitored simultaneously without losing information that another anomaly has occurred and one anomaly has occurred after one anomaly has occurred but before the anomaly has been resolved. Can be done.

Further, in this warning process, after a predetermined time has elapsed from the time when the power is turned on, the command analyzed by the effect control program in the received command analysis process (step S1022) described above is classified into the state display shown in FIG. 90. In the case of various commands such as an error release navigation command (second error release command), for example, by controlling the liquid crystal display control unit 1512 in a mode different from the normal effect mode associated with the effect operation, for example, the game board side. The effect display device 1600 (effect device), the door frame side effect display device 460 (effect device), and the lamp (effect device) are used to visually warn the outside, and the speaker is used to audibly warn the outside (the effect device). Error notification means). In this way, when a malicious player attempts to input an error release navigation command to the main control board 1310 by operating the operation switch 954 of the payout control board 951 even though the player is in the gaming state. Since the pachinko machine 1 is configured to give a warning to the outside, fraudulent acts on the main control board 1310 that may affect the progress of the game are suppressed.

Next, following step S1024 described above, the effect control program performs RCT acquisition information update processing (step S1026). In this RTC acquisition information update process, the effect control program acquires the current time information in step S1002 and sets it in the RTC information acquisition storage area 1511cad of the peripheral control RAM 1511c shown in FIG. 73, and stores the information in the calendar information storage unit. The stored calendar information and the time information stored in the time information storage unit are updated. By this RCT acquisition information update process, the hour, minute, and second, which is the time information stored in the time information storage unit, is updated, and the year and month, which is the calendar information stored in the calendar information storage unit based on the updated time information. The day is updated.

Following step S1026, the effect control program performs a lamp data creation process (step S1028). In this lamp data creation process, the effect control program updates the pointer in the scheduler update process of step S1020, and the pointer indicates the light emission data arranged in time series that constitutes the schedule data for generating the light emission mode. Based on the light emission data to be output, the game board side light emission data SL- for outputting a lighting signal, a blinking signal, or a gradation lighting signal to a plurality of LEDs of various decorative boards provided on the game board 5 shown in FIG. The DAT is created by extracting from the peripheral control ROM 1511b of the peripheral control unit 1511 or various control data copy areas 1511ce of the peripheral control RAM 1511c, and is set in the lamp drive board side transmission data storage area 1511caa of the peripheral control RAM 1511c shown in FIG. 73. At the same time, the door-side light emission data STL-DAT for outputting lighting signals, blinking signals or gradation lighting signals to a plurality of LEDs of various decorative substrates provided on the door frame 3 is provided to the peripheral control ROM 1511b of the peripheral control unit 1511. Alternatively, it is created by extracting from various control data copy areas 1511ce of the peripheral control RAM 1511c, and set in the frame decoration drive amplifier board side LED transmission data storage area 1511cab of the peripheral control RAM 1511c shown in FIG. 73.

Following step S1028, the effect control program performs display data creation processing (step S1030). In this display data creation process, the effect control program updates the pointer in the scheduler update process of step S1020, and among the screen data arranged in time series constituting the screen generation schedule data, the screen data indicated by the pointer. Is extracted from the peripheral control ROM 1511b of the peripheral control unit 1511 or various control data copy areas 1511ce of the peripheral control RAM 1511c and output to the sound source built-in VDP1512a. When screen data is input from the peripheral control MPU1511a, the sound source built-in VDP1512a extracts character data from the liquid crystal and sound control ROM 1512b based on the input screen data to create sprite data, and creates a sprite data on the game board side effect display device. Drawing data for one screen (one frame) to be displayed on the 1600 and the door frame side effect display device 460 is generated on the built-in VRAM.

Following step S1030, the effect control program performs sound data creation processing (step S1032). In this sound data creation process, the effect control program updates the pointer in the scheduler update process of step S1020, and the pointer indicates among the sound command data arranged in time series that constitutes the sound generation schedule data. Sound command data is extracted from the peripheral control ROM 1511b of the peripheral control unit 1511 or various control data copy areas 1511ce of the peripheral control RAM 1511c and output to the sound source built-in VDP1512a. When sound command data is input from the peripheral control MPU1511a, the sound source built-in VDP1512a extracts sound data such as music and sound effects stored in the liquid crystal and sound control ROM 1512b to control the built-in sound source to control the sound command. Sound data such as music and sound effects are incorporated according to the track number specified in the data, and the output channel to be used is set according to the output channel number.

In the sound data creation process, each time the sound data creation process is performed (that is, each time the peripheral control unit routine process is performed), the peripheral control A / D converter 1511ak shown in FIG. 73 is started to adjust the volume. The voltage divided by the resistance value at the rotation position of the knob portion of 1510a is converted into a value of 1024 steps from the value 0 to the value 1023. In the present embodiment, the value of 1024 steps is divided into seven and managed as the board volumes 0 to 6, the board volume 0 is set to mute, the board volume 6 is set to the maximum volume, and the board volume 0 to the board. The volume is set so as to increase toward the volume 6. The VDP1512a with a built-in sound source of the liquid crystal display control unit 1512 is controlled so that the volume is set to the board volumes 0 to 6, and the sound data is transmitted as audio data serialized by the sound data output process in step S1018 described above. By outputting to the IC1512c, music and sound effects can be played from the lower speaker 921 and the upper speaker 573.

In addition, the notification sound and notification sound flow without depending on the volume adjustment based on the rotation operation of the knob, and the sound source of the liquid crystal display control unit 1512 is built in by programming the volume from mute to the maximum volume. The VDP1512a can be controlled and adjusted. The volume adjusted by this program is different from the above-mentioned seven-stage board volume, and can smoothly change from mute to maximum volume. For example, even when a hall clerk or the like rotates the knob portion of the volume adjustment volume 1510a to set the volume low, the production sound such as music or sound effect flowing from the lower speaker 921 and the upper speaker 573 is small. However, when a problem occurs in the pachinko machine 1 or when the player is cheating, a notification sound set to a loud volume (maximum volume in the present embodiment) can be played. Therefore, even if the volume of the effect sound is reduced, it is possible to prevent the hall clerk and the like from being less likely to notice the occurrence of a problem or the cheating of the player due to the notification sound. In addition, based on the current board volume set by adjusting the volume based on the rotation operation of the knob, the volume at which the advertising sound is played is reduced so as not to interfere with music and sound effects, while the advertising sound is played. In addition to music and sound effects, the screen unfolded by the game board side effect display device 1600 and the door frame side effect display device 460 can be produced as more powerful, which is advantageous for the player. It is also possible to announce that there is a high possibility of shifting to the gaming state.

Following step S1032, the effect control program performs backup processing (step S1034). In this backup process, the effect control program converts the contents stored in the peripheral control MPU 1511a and the external peripheral control RAM 1511c shown in FIG. 73 into the backup first area 1511cc and the backup second area 1511cc. In addition to copying and backing up each, the contents stored in the peripheral control MPU 1511a and the external peripheral control SRAM 1511d are copied and backed up in the backup first area 1511db and the backup second area 1511dc, respectively.

Specifically, in the backup process, the peripheral control RAM 1511c is backed up for each frame (1 frame) in the backup target work area 1511ca shown in FIG. 73, that is, every time the peripheral control unit routine processing is executed. The lamp drive board side transmission data storage area 1511caa, the frame decoration drive amplifier board side LED transmission data storage area 1511cab, the reception command storage area 1511cac, the RTC information acquisition storage area 1511cad, and the RTC information acquisition storage area 1511ca, which are included in Bank0 (1fr). Peripheral control DMA controller 1511ac is set in Bank1 (1fr) and Bank2 (1fr) of the backup first area 1511cc by using the effect information (1fr) stored in the schedule data storage area 1511cae as the effect backup information (1fr). Copy at high speed, and the peripheral control DMA controller 1511ac copies at high speed to Bank 3 (1fr) and Bank 4 (1fr) in the backup second area 1511cc.

To briefly explain the high-speed copy of the contents stored in Bank0 (1fr) by the peripheral control DMA controller 1511ac, the peripheral control MPU core 1511aa of the peripheral control MPU 1511a shown in FIG. 73 is a requirement factor of the peripheral control DMA controller 1511ac. Specify a copy of the contents stored in Bank0 (1fr) to Bank1 (1fr) of the backup first area 1511cc, and change the contents stored in the start address of Bank0 (1fr) to the end address of Bank0 (1fr). Up to the stored contents are continuously copied in order from the start address of Bank1 (1fr) of the backup first area 1511cc by a predetermined byte (for example, 1 byte), and the peripheral control MPU core 1511aa is the peripheral control DMA controller. Specify the copy of the contents stored in Bank0 (1fr) as the request factor of 1511ac to Bank2 (1fr) of the backup first area 1511cc, and from the contents stored in the start address of Bank0 (1fr), Bank0 (1fr). ) Is continuously copied by a predetermined byte (for example, 1 byte) from the start address of Bank 2 (1fr) in the backup first area 1511 kb up to the contents stored in the end address.

Subsequently, the peripheral control MPU core 1511aa specifies a copy of the contents stored in Bank0 (1fr) as a requirement factor of the peripheral control DMA controller 1511ac to Bank3 (1fr) of the backup second area 1511cc, and specifies Bank0 (1fr). ), The contents stored in the end address of Bank0 (1fr) are continuously backed up by predetermined bytes (for example, 1 byte). The start address of Bank3 (1fr) in the second area 1511cc. All the contents are copied in order from, and the peripheral control MPU core 1511aa specifies the copy of the contents stored in Bank0 (1fr) as the requirement factor of the peripheral control DMA controller 1511ac to Bank4 (1fr) of the backup second area 1511cc. Then, from the content stored in the start address of Bank0 (1fr) to the content stored in the end address of Bank0 (1fr), a predetermined byte (for example, 1 byte) is continuously backed up in Bank4 (Bunk4) of the second area 1511cc. Copy everything in order from the start address of 1fr).

Further, in the backup process, the peripheral control SRAM 1511d is backed up every frame (1 frame) in the work area 1511da to be backed up shown in FIG. 73, that is, every time the peripheral control unit routine process is executed. Peripheral control DMA controller 1511ac is high-speed in Bank1 (SRAM) and Bank2 (SRAM) of the backup first area 1511db using the effect information (SRAM) stored in Bank0 (SRAM) as the effect backup information (SRAM). And the peripheral control DMA controller 1511ac copies to Bank3 (SRAM) and Bank4 (SRAM) in the backup second area 1511dc at high speed.

To briefly explain the high-speed copy of the contents stored in Bank0 (SRAM) by the peripheral control DMA controller 1511ac, the peripheral control MPU core 1511aa of the peripheral control MPU 1511a shown in FIG. 73 is a requirement factor of the peripheral control DMA controller 1511ac. Specify the copy of the contents stored in Bank0 (SRAM) to Bank1 (SRAM) of the backup first area 1511db, and change the contents stored in the start address of Bank0 (SRAM) to the end address of Bank0 (SRAM). Up to the stored contents are continuously copied in order from the start address of Bank1 (SRAM) in the backup first area 1511db by a predetermined byte (for example, 1 byte), and the peripheral control MPU core 1511aa is the peripheral control DMA controller. Specify the copy of the contents stored in Bank0 (SRAM) as the request factor of 1511ac to Bank2 (SRAM) of the backup first area 1511db, and from the contents stored in the start address of Bank0 (SRAM), Bank0 (SRAM). ) Is continuously copied by a predetermined byte (for example, 1 byte) from the start address of Bank 2 (SRAM) in the backup first area 1511db.

Subsequently, the peripheral control MPU core 1511aa specifies a copy of the contents stored in Bank0 (SRAM) as a requirement factor of the peripheral control DMA controller 1511ac to Bank3 (SRAM) of the backup second area 1511dc, and specifies Bank0 (SRAM). ) Is continuously backed up from the contents stored in the start address of Bank0 (SRAM) to the contents stored in the end address of Bank0 (SRAM) by predetermined bytes (for example, 1 byte). All are copied in order from, and the peripheral control MPU core 1511aa specifies the copy of the contents stored in Bank0 (SRAM) as the request factor of the peripheral control DMA controller 1511ac to Bank4 (SRAM) of the backup second area 1511dc. Then, from the contents stored in the start address of Bank0 (SRAM) to the contents stored in the end address of Bank0 (SRAM), predetermined bytes (for example, 1 byte) are continuously backed up in Bank4 of the second area 1511dc (Bunk4). Copy everything in order from the start address of SRAM).

Following step S1034, the WDT clear process is performed (step S1036). In this WDT clear processing, a clear signal is output to the peripheral control built-in WDT1511af and the peripheral control external WDT1511e so that the peripheral control MPU1511a is not reset.

Following step S1036, the effect control program sets the value 0 in the steady processing flag SP-FLG as the execution of the peripheral control unit steady processing is completed (step S1038), returns to step S1006 again, and returns to the V blank signal detection flag VB. The value 0 is set in −FLG for initialization, and the determination in step S1008 is repeated until the value 1 is set in the V blank signal detection flag VB—FLG in the peripheral control unit V blank signal interrupt processing described later. That is, in step S1008, it waits until the value 1 is set in the V blank signal detection flag VB-FLG, and when it is determined in step S1008 that the V blank signal detection flag VB-FLG has a value 1, steps S1009 to step S1009. The process of S1038 is performed, and the process returns to step S1006 again. As described above, when it is determined in step S1008 that the V blank signal detection flag VB-FLG has a value of 1, the processes of steps S1009 to S1038 are performed. The processing of steps S1009 to S1038 is referred to as "peripheral control unit steady processing".

This peripheral control unit steady processing starts from the effect control program first setting a value 1 in the steady processing flag SP-FLG assuming that the peripheral control unit steady processing is being executed in step S1009, and 1 ms in step S1010. The interrupt timer start processing is performed, each processing of step S1012, step S1014, ..., And step S1036 is performed, and finally, in step S1038, the value 0 is set to the steady processing flag SP-FLG as the execution of the peripheral control unit steady processing is completed. If you set, it will be completed. Peripheral control unit steady processing is executed when the V blank signal detection flag VB-FLG has a value of 1 in step S1008. As described above, the V blank signal detection flag VB-FLG is executed when a V blank signal indicating that the screen data from the peripheral control MPU1511a can be accepted is input from the sound source built-in VDP1512a. The value 1 is set in the peripheral control unit V blank signal interrupt processing described later. In the present embodiment, as described above, the frame frequency (the number of screen updates per second) of the game board side effect display device 1600 and the door frame side effect display device 460 is set to approximately 30 fps per second. The interval at which the blank signal is input is about 33.3 ms (= 1000 ms ÷ 30 fps). That is, the peripheral control unit steady processing is repeatedly executed about every 33.3 ms.

[16-1-2. Peripheral control unit V blank signal interrupt processing]
Next, a V blank signal indicating that the screen data from the peripheral control MPU 1511a of the peripheral control unit 1511 can be accepted, which is shown in FIG. 72, is input from the sound source built-in VDP1512a of the liquid crystal display control unit 1512. The peripheral control unit V blank signal interrupt processing executed with the above as an opportunity will be described. When the peripheral control unit V blank signal interrupt processing is started, the peripheral control MPU 1511a of the peripheral control unit 1511 determines whether the steady-state processing flag SP-FLG has a value of 0, as shown in FIG. 96 (step). S1045). As described above, the steady-state processing flag SP-FLG has a value of 1 when the peripheral control unit steady-state processing in steps S1009 to S1038 in the peripheral control unit power-on processing in FIG. 95 is being executed, and the peripheral control unit steady-state. The value is set to 0 when the processing is completed.

When the steady-state processing flag SP-FLG is not a value 0 (value 1) in step S1045, that is, when the peripheral control unit steady-state processing is being executed, this routine is terminated as it is. On the other hand, when the steady processing flag SP-FLG is a value 0 in step S1045, that is, when the execution of the peripheral control unit steady processing is completed, the value 1 is set in the V blank signal detection flag VB-FLG (step S1050). Exit this routine. As described above, this V blank signal detection flag VB-FLG is a flag for determining whether or not to execute the peripheral control unit steady processing, and has a value of 1 when the peripheral control unit steady processing is executed, and peripheral control. The value is set to 0 when the steady processing is not executed.

In the present embodiment, in step S1045, it is determined whether or not the constant processing flag SP-FLG has a value of 0, that is, whether or not the peripheral control unit steady processing has been executed, and the peripheral control unit steady processing has been executed. Occasionally, in step S1050, the value 1 is set in the V blank signal detection flag VB-FLG, but this is because the V blank signal is input and the V blank is input while the peripheral control unit steady processing is being executed. When the value 1 is set in the signal detection flag VB-FLG, the peripheral control unit steady processing currently being executed is assumed to be executed in the determination of step S1008 in the peripheral control unit power-on processing in FIG. 95. Since the peripheral control unit steady processing is forcibly canceled in the middle and the execution is started from the beginning, in order to prevent this, the peripheral control unit power-on processing (peripheral control unit steady processing) in FIG. 95 is steady in step S1009. By setting the value 1 to the processing flag SP-FLG, it is notified to the peripheral control unit V blank signal interrupt processing, which is this routine, that the peripheral control unit steady processing is being executed, and the peripheral control unit power supply in FIG. 95. Peripheral control unit V blank, which is this routine, indicates that the peripheral control unit steady processing has been executed by setting the value 0 to the flag SP-FLG during steady processing in step S1038 in the on-time processing (peripheral control unit steady processing). By transmitting to the signal interrupt processing, whether or not the constant processing flag SP-FLG has a value of 0 in the determination of step S1045 in the peripheral control unit V blank signal interrupt processing, which is this routine, that is, the peripheral control unit steady processing is executed. It is designed to determine whether or not it has been completed. In other words, it is a measure when the peripheral control unit steady processing cannot be completed by the time the V blank signal is input and the next V blank signal is input, so-called processing failure.

As a result, in the peripheral control unit steady processing this time, if the processing cannot be completed in about 33.3 ms and the processing fails, the next time is determined in step S1008 in the peripheral control unit power-on processing in FIG. It is in a state of waiting until the V blank signal of is input. That is, the time for executing the current peripheral control unit steady processing that has failed the processing is about 66.6 ms. Normally, the peripheral control unit 1ms timer interrupt processing, which will be described later, is repeatedly executed every time the 1ms interrupt timer is activated by starting the 1ms interrupt timer in step S1010 in the peripheral control unit power-on processing (peripheral control unit steady processing) in FIG. 95. Is executed only 32 times for one peripheral control unit steady processing, but if the above-mentioned processing failure this time peripheral control unit steady processing exists, the peripheral control unit 1ms timer interrupt processing is 64 times. It is designed to be executed only 32 times. That is, even if the peripheral control unit steady processing fails, the consistency between the production progress state by the peripheral control unit steady processing and the production progress state by the peripheral control unit 1ms timer interrupt processing, which is the timer interrupt control, is consistent. It is designed not to collapse. Therefore, even if the peripheral control unit steady processing fails, the progress state of the effect can be reliably matched.

[16-1-3. Peripheral control unit 1ms timer interrupt processing]
Next, the peripheral control unit 1ms timer interrupt processing that is repeatedly executed every time the 1ms interrupt timer is activated due to the activation of the 1ms interrupt timer in step S1010 in the peripheral control unit steady processing of the peripheral control unit power-on processing of FIG. 95 will be described. .. When the peripheral control unit 1ms timer interrupt processing is started, the peripheral control MPU1511a of the peripheral control unit 1511 shown in FIG. 72 has whether or not the 1ms timer interrupt execution count STN is smaller than 33 times, as shown in FIG. 97. Is determined (step S1100). As described above, the 1 ms timer interrupt execution count STN is determined by the 1 ms interrupt timer activation process in step S1010 in the peripheral control unit steady process of the peripheral control unit power-on processing in FIG. 95, in which the 1 ms interrupt timer is activated in this routine. A peripheral control unit 1ms timer A counter that counts the number of times interrupt processing is executed. In the present embodiment, as described above, the frame frequency (the number of screen updates per second) of the game board side effect display device 1600 and the door frame side effect display device 460 is set to approximately 30 fps per second. The interval at which the blank signal is input is about 33.3 ms (= 1000 ms ÷ 30 fps). That is, since the peripheral control unit steady processing is repeatedly executed about every 33.3 ms, after the 1 ms interrupt timer is started in step S1010 in the peripheral control unit steady process, the next peripheral control unit steady process is executed. Is executed, the peripheral control unit 1ms timer interrupt processing is executed only 32 times. Specifically, when the 1 ms interrupt timer is activated in step S1010 in the peripheral control unit steady processing, the first 1 ms timer interrupt is generated first, the second, ..., And the 32nd 1 ms timer interrupt is sequentially performed. It will occur.

When the 1ms timer interrupt execution count STN is not smaller than 33 times in step S1100, that is, when the 33rd 1ms timer interrupt occurs and the peripheral control unit 1ms timer interrupt processing is started, this routine is terminated as it is. When the occurrence of the 33rd 1ms timer interrupt happens to precede the generation of the next V blank signal, in the present embodiment, the peripheral control unit 1ms timer interrupt processing has the peripheral control unit V as the priority of the interrupt processing. Although it is set higher than the blank interrupt processing, the start of the peripheral control unit 1ms timer interrupt processing by the 33rd 1ms timer interrupt is forcibly canceled. In other words, in the present embodiment, since the V blank signal is a signal that controls the entire system of the peripheral control board 1510, when the occurrence of the 33rd 1 ms timer interrupt happens to precede the generation of the next V blank signal, , The start of the peripheral control unit 1ms timer interrupt processing by the 33rd 1ms timer interrupt is forcibly canceled in order to execute the peripheral control unit V blank interrupt processing. Then, after the 1ms interrupt timer is restarted in step S1010 in the peripheral control unit steady processing due to the generation of the V blank signal, the peripheral control unit 1ms timer interrupt processing due to the generation of the first 1ms timer interrupt is newly started. ing.

On the other hand, when the 1 ms timer interrupt execution count STN is smaller than 33 in step S1100, a value 1 is added (incremented, step S1102) to the 1 ms timer interrupt execution count STN. By adding the value 1 to the 1ms timer interrupt execution count STN, the 1ms interrupt timer is activated in the 1ms interrupt timer activation processing of step S1010 in the peripheral control unit steady processing of the peripheral control unit power-on processing in FIG. 95. The number of times the peripheral control unit 1ms timer interrupt processing, which is this routine, is executed is increased by one time.

Following step S1102, a motor and solenoid drive process is performed (step S1104). In this motor and solenoid drive process, they are arranged in a time series constituting the electrical drive source schedule data set in the schedule data storage area 1511cae of the peripheral control MPU 1511a and the external peripheral control RAM 1511c shown in FIG. 73. Among the drive data of the electric drive sources such as the motor and the solenoid, the electric drive sources such as the motor and the solenoid of the frame decoration drive amplifier board 194 and the motor drive board 4180 shown in FIG. 72 according to the drive data indicated by the pointer. The pointer is updated to the next drive data specified in time series, and the pointer is updated each time the motor and solenoid drive process is executed.

Specifically, in the motor and solenoid drive processing, the DMA serial continuous transmission process to the frame decoration drive amplifier board 194 is performed. Here, the peripheral control DMA controller 1511ac of the peripheral control MPU 1511a shown in FIG. 73 is used to continuously transmit the serial I / O port for the frame decoration drive amplifier board motor. When continuous transmission of the serial I / O port for the frame decoration drive amplifier board motor is started, first, the electrical drive source schedule data set in the schedule data storage area 1511cae of the peripheral control MPU 1511a and the external peripheral control RAM 1511c is input. To output a drive signal to the dial drive motor 414 of the effect operation unit 400 based on the drive data indicated by the pointer among the drive data of the electric drive sources such as motors and solenoids arranged in the constituent time series. The door-side motor drive data STM-DAT is created by extracting from the peripheral control ROM 1511b of the peripheral control unit 1511 or various control data copy areas 1511ce of the peripheral control RAM 1511c, and the frame decoration drive of the peripheral control RAM 1511c shown in FIG. 73. It is set in the transmission data storage area 1511 caf for the motor on the amplifier board side. The peripheral control CPU core 1511aa of the peripheral control MPU 1511a specifies the transmission of the serial I / O port for the frame decoration drive amplifier board motor as a requirement factor of the peripheral control DMA controller 1511ac, and stores the transmission data for the frame decoration drive amplifier board side motor. The first byte of the door-side motor drive data STM-DAT stored at the start address of the region 1511caf is sent to the frame decoration drive amplifier board motor via the external bus 1511h, the peripheral control bus controller 1511ad, and the peripheral bus 1511ai. Transfer to the transmission buffer register of the serial I / O port for writing. As a result, the serial I / O port for the frame decoration drive amplifier board motor transfers the written transmission buffer register data to the transmission shift register, and synchronizes with the door side motor drive clock signal STM-CLK to transmit the transmission shift register. 1 byte of data is started to be transmitted bit by bit.

The peripheral control DMA controller 1511ac triggers each time a transmission interrupt request for the frame decoration drive amplifier board motor serial I / O port is generated (in this embodiment, the frame decoration drive amplifier board motor serial I / O). The 1-byte data written in the transmission buffer register of the port is transferred to the transmission shift register, and the transmission buffer register is empty when the 1-byte data is exhausted.), Peripheral control CPU core 1511aa When the bus is not used, the remaining door-side motor drive data STM-DAT stored in the transmission data storage area 1511 caf for the frame decoration drive amplifier board side motor is stored in byte by byte, external bus 1511h, peripheral control bus controller. The serial I / O port for the frame decoration drive amplifier board motor is written by transferring to the transmission buffer register of the serial I / O port for the frame decoration drive amplifier board motor via 1511ad and the peripheral bus 1511ai. The data of the transmitted buffer register is transferred to the transmission shift register, and the 1-byte data of the transmission shift register is started to be transmitted bit by bit in synchronization with the door-side motor drive clock signal STM-CLK, and the frame decoration drive amplifier board is used. Continuous transmission is performed by the serial I / O port for the motor.

Further, in the motor and solenoid drive processing, the DMA serial continuous transmission process to the motor drive board 4180 is performed. Here, too, the peripheral control DMA controller 1511ac of the peripheral control MPU 1511a shown in FIG. 73 is used to continuously transmit the serial I / O port for the motor drive board. When the continuous transmission of the serial I / O port for the motor drive board is started, first, when the peripheral control MPU 1511a and the electrical drive source schedule data set in the schedule data storage area 1511cae of the external peripheral control RAM 1511c are configured. Of the drive data of electrical drive sources such as motors and solenoids arranged in series, motors for moving various movable bodies provided on the game board 5 shown in FIG. 8 based on the drive data indicated by the pointer. The game board side motor drive data SM-DAT for outputting the drive signal to the or solenoid is extracted from the peripheral control ROM 1511b of the peripheral control unit 1511 or various control data copy areas 1511ce of the peripheral control RAM 1511c, and is also shown in the figure. It is set in the transmission data storage area 1511bag on the motor drive board side of the peripheral control RAM 1511c shown in 73. Then, the peripheral control CPU core 1511aa of the peripheral control MPU 1511a specifies the transmission of the serial I / O port for the motor drive board as the required factor of the peripheral control DMA controller 1511ac, and stores it in the start address of the transmission data storage area 1511ca on the motor drive board side. The first byte of the game board side motor drive data SM-DAT is transmitted to the transmission buffer of the serial I / O port for the motor drive board via the external bus 1511h, the peripheral control bus controller 1511ad, and the peripheral bus 1511ai. Transfer to register and write. As a result, the serial I / O port for the motor drive board transfers the written data of the transmission buffer register to the transmission shift register, and synchronizes with the game board side motor drive clock signal SM-CLK to be one of the transmission shift registers. Transmission of byte data is started bit by bit.

The peripheral control DMA controller 1511ac triggers each time a transmission interrupt request for the serial I / O port for the motor drive board is generated (in the present embodiment, the transmission buffer register for the serial I / O port for the motor drive board is used). The written 1-byte data is transferred to the transmission shift register, and the transmission buffer register runs out of 1-byte data and becomes empty.) The peripheral control CPU core 1511aa is using the bus. If not, the remaining game board side motor drive data SM-DAT stored in the motor drive board side transmission data storage area 1511 cag is sent byte by byte via the external bus 1511h, the peripheral control bus controller 1511ad, and the peripheral bus 1511ai. By transferring and writing to the transmission buffer register of the serial I / O port for the motor drive board, the serial I / O port for the motor drive board transfers the data of the written transmission buffer register to the transmission shift register. In synchronization with the game board side motor drive clock signal SM-CLK, 1-byte data of the transmission shift register is started to be transmitted bit by bit, and continuous transmission is performed by the serial I / O port for the motor drive board.

Following step S1104, the movable body information acquisition process is performed (step S1106). In this movable body information acquisition process, history information of detection signals from various detection switches (for example, in-situ history information) is determined by determining whether or not detection signals from various detection switches provided on the game board 5 are input. , Movable position history information, etc.) is created and set in the movable body information acquisition storage area 1511cah of the peripheral control MPU 1511a and the external peripheral control RAM 1511c shown in FIG. 73. From the history information of the detection signals from the various detection switches set in the movable body information acquisition storage area 1511cah, the original position, the movable position, and the like of the various movable bodies provided on the game board 5 can be acquired.

Following step S1106, the effect operation unit information acquisition process is performed (step S1108). In this effect operation unit information acquisition process, history information of detection signals from various detection switches (for example, operation) is determined by determining whether or not detection signals from various detection switches provided in the effect operation unit 400 are input. (The operation history information of the button 410, etc.) is created and set in the effect operation unit information acquisition storage area 1511kai of the peripheral control MPU 1511a and the external peripheral control RAM 1511c shown in FIG. 73. Whether or not the operation button 410 is operated can be acquired from the history information of the detection signals from the various detection switches set in the effect operation unit information acquisition storage area 1511 kai.

Following step S1108, drawing state information acquisition processing is performed (step S1110). In this drawing state information acquisition process, history information of the LOCKN signal output from the LOCKN terminal of the door frame side effect receiver ICSDIC0 provided in the effect display drive board 4450 shown in FIG. 87 is created, and the peripherals shown in FIG. 73 are created. The control MPU 1511a and the external peripheral control RAM 1511c are set in the drawing state information acquisition storage area 1511cak. As for the LOCKN signal, as described above, the drawing data received from the door frame side effect receiver ICSDIC0 provided on the effect display drive board 4450 from the door frame side effect transmitter IC1512d provided on the peripheral control board 1510 is abnormal data. When it is determined, it is a signal to be output to convey that fact. Specifically, the door frame side effect transmitter IC1512d provided on the peripheral control board 1510 and the door frame side effect receiver ICSDIC0 provided on the effect display drive board 4450. , That is, a signal output to request transmission of a predetermined data pattern (SYNC pattern) for confirming (recovering) the connection between the transmitter and the receiver. Drawing state information acquisition From the history information of the LOCKN signal set in the storage area 1511cak, the frequency of defects and the occurrence state of defects between the connection between the peripheral control board 1510 and the effect display drive board 4450 are acquired, and the effect display device on the door frame side. The drawing state of 460 can be acquired.

Following step S1110, a backup process is performed (step S1112), and this routine is terminated. In this backup process, the contents stored in the peripheral control MPU 1511a and the external peripheral control RAM 1511c shown in FIG. 73 are copied to the backup first area 1511cc and the backup second area 1511cc, respectively, and backed up. At the same time, the contents stored in the peripheral control MPU 1511a and the external peripheral control SRAM 1511d are copied and backed up in the backup first area 1511db and the backup second area 1511dc, respectively.

Specifically, in the backup process, the peripheral control RAM 1511c is executed every time the 1 ms interrupt timer is generated in the backup target work area 1511ca shown in FIG. 73, that is, the peripheral control unit 1 ms timer interrupt process, which is this routine, is executed. Each time it is backed up, the frame decoration drive amplifier board side motor transmission data storage area 1511 caf, motor drive board side transmission data storage area 1511 cag, and movable body information acquisition storage area 1511 cah included in the backup target Bank0 (1 ms). , And the effect information (1 ms), which is the content stored in the effect operation unit information acquisition storage area 1511 kai, is used as the effect backup information (1 ms) around Bank 1 (1 ms) and Bank 2 (1 ms) of the backup first area 1511 cc. The control DMA controller 1511ac copies at high speed, and the peripheral control DMA controller 1511ac copies to Bank 3 (1 ms) and Bank 4 (1 ms) in the backup second area 1511 cc at high speed.

To briefly explain the high-speed copy of the contents stored in Bank 0 (1 ms) by the peripheral control DMA controller 1511ac, the peripheral control MPU core 1511aa of the peripheral control MPU 1511a shown in FIG. 73 is a requirement factor of the peripheral control DMA controller 1511ac. Specify a copy of the contents stored in Bank0 (1ms) to Bank1 (1ms) of the backup first area 1511cc, and change the contents stored in the start address of Bank0 (1ms) to the end address of Bank0 (1ms). All the stored contents are continuously copied in order from the start address of Bank 1 (1 ms) in the backup first area 1511 cc by a predetermined byte (for example, 1 byte), and the peripheral control MPU core 1511aa is the peripheral control DMA controller. Specify the copy of the contents stored in Bank0 (1ms) as the request factor of 1511ac to Bank2 (1ms) of the backup first area 1511cc, and Bank0 (1ms) from the contents stored in the start address of Bank0 (1ms). ) Is continuously copied by a predetermined byte (for example, 1 byte) from the start address of Bank 2 (1 ms) in the backup first area 1511 cc.

Subsequently, the peripheral control MPU core 1511aa specifies a copy of the contents stored in Bank 0 (1 ms) as a requirement factor of the peripheral control DMA controller 1511ac to Bank 3 (1 ms) of the backup second area 1511 cc, and Bank 0 (1 ms) is specified. ), The contents stored in the end address of Bank0 (1 ms) are continuously backed up by predetermined bytes (for example, 1 byte). The start address of Bank3 (1 ms) in the second area 1511 cc. Copy everything in order from, and specify that the peripheral control MPU core 1511aa copies the contents stored in Bank0 (1ms) as the requirement factor of the peripheral control DMA controller 1511ac to Bank4 (1ms) in the backup second area 1511cc. Then, from the contents stored in the start address of Bank0 (1 ms) to the contents stored in the end address of Bank0 (1 ms), a predetermined byte (for example, 1 byte) is continuously backed up in Bank 4 of the second area 1511 cc. Copy everything in order from the start address of 1ms).

As described above, in the peripheral control unit 1 ms timer interrupt process, various processes related to the effect of steps S1104 to S1108 described above are executed as the progress of the effect within the period of 1 ms. On the other hand, in the peripheral control unit steady processing in the peripheral control unit power-on processing of FIG. 95, various processes related to the production of steps S1012 to S1032 described above are executed as the progress of the production within a period of about 33.3 ms. doing. In the peripheral control unit 1ms timer interrupt processing, when the 1ms timer interrupt execution count STN is not smaller than the value 33 in step S1100, that is, when the 33rd 1ms timer interrupt occurs and the peripheral control unit 1ms timer interrupt processing is started. Since this routine is terminated as it is, even if the occurrence of the 33rd 1ms timer interrupt happens to precede the generation of the next V blank signal, the peripheral control unit due to this 33rd 1ms timer interrupt Peripheral control by forcibly canceling the start of the 1 ms timer interrupt process, restarting the 1 ms interrupt timer in step S1010 in the peripheral control unit steady process due to the generation of the V blank signal, and then newly generating the 1 ms timer interrupt. Part 1ms timer interrupt processing is started. That is, the consistency between the progress state of the effect by the peripheral control unit steady processing and the progress state of the effect by the peripheral control unit 1 ms timer interrupt process, which is the timer interrupt control, is not broken. Therefore, it is possible to surely match the progress state of the production.

Further, as described above, the interval at which the V blank signal is output varies slightly depending on the liquid crystal size of the game board side effect display device 1600 and the door frame side effect display device 460, and the peripheral control MPU1511a and the sound source built-in VDP1512a Even in the production lot of the mounted peripheral control board 1510, the interval at which the V blank signal is output may change slightly. In the present embodiment, since the V blank signal is a signal that controls the entire system of the peripheral control board 1510, if the occurrence of the 33rd 1 ms timer interrupt happens to precede the generation of the next V blank signal, peripheral control is performed. The start of the peripheral control unit 1ms timer interrupt processing by the 33rd 1ms timer interrupt is forcibly canceled in order to execute the unit V blank interrupt processing. That is, in the present embodiment, even if the interval at which the V blank signal is output changes slightly, the start of the peripheral control unit 1ms timer interrupt processing by the 33rd 1ms timer interrupt is forcibly canceled. It is possible to absorb the time lag due to a slight change in the interval at which the V-blank signal is output.

[16-1-4. Peripheral control unit command reception interrupt processing]
Next, peripheral control unit command reception interrupt processing for receiving various commands from the main control board 1310 will be described. When various commands from the main control board 1310 are started to be transmitted as serial data, the peripheral control MPU 1511a of the peripheral control unit 1511 shown in FIG. 72 triggers the main control to incorporate the main peripheral serial data into the peripheral control MPU 1511a. 1 byte (8 bits) of information is fetched into the reception buffer by the serial I / O port for the board, and when this fetching is completed, an interrupt is generated with this as a trigger, and peripheral control unit command reception interrupt processing is performed. In the main peripheral serial data, one packet is composed of 3 bytes, the status is assigned as the 1st byte, the mode is assigned as the 2nd byte, and the status and mode are regarded as numerical values as the 3rd byte, and the total thereof. The calculated sum value is assigned.

When the peripheral control unit command reception interrupt process is started, the peripheral control MPU 1511a of the peripheral control unit 1511 determines whether or not the 1-byte reception period timer has timed out (step S1200). This 1-byte reception period timer sets a period during which 1-byte (8-bit) information of the main peripheral serial data transmitted from the main control board 1310 can be received.

When the 1-byte reception period timer has not timed out in step S1200, that is, within the period during which 1-byte (8-bit) information of the main peripheral serial data transmitted from the main control board 1310 can be received, the periphery 1 byte of information received from the receive buffer of the serial I / O port for the main control board built in the control MPU 1511a is taken in (step S1202), and a value 1 is added to the reception counter SRXC (increment, step S1204). This reception counter SRXC is a counter indicating the number of times the data has been fetched from the receive buffer, and when the status which is the first byte of the main cycle serial data is fetched from the receive buffer, the value is 1, and the mode which is the second byte of the main cycle serial data is set. When it is taken out from the receive buffer, it becomes a value 2, and when the sum value which is the third byte of the main peripheral serial data is taken out from the receive buffer, it becomes a value 3. The initial value 0 of the reception counter SRXC is set when the power is turned on or the like.

Following step S1204, it is determined whether or not the reception counter SRXC has a value of 3, that is, whether or not the sum value, which is the third byte of the main peripheral serial data, has been fetched from the reception buffer (step S1206). In this determination, following the status that is the first byte of the main peripheral serial data, the mode that is the second byte of the main circumference serial data, and the sum value that is the third byte of the main circumference serial data are sequentially input from the receive buffer. It is determined whether or not it has been taken out.

When the reception counter SRXC is not a value 3 in step S1206, that is, the mode which is the second byte of the main frequency serial data following the status which is the first byte of the main frequency serial data, and the third byte of the main frequency serial data. When the sum values are not sequentially fetched from the receive buffer, the 1-byte reception period timer is set (step S1208), and this routine is terminated. By setting the 1-byte reception period timer in step S1208, the mode in which the second byte of the main cycle serial data or the sum value which is the third byte of the main cycle serial data can be received is set.

On the other hand, when the reception counter SRXC has a value of 3 in step S1206, that is, the status which is the first byte of the main circumference serial data, the mode which is the second byte of the main circumference serial data, and 3 of the main circumference serial data. When the sum value, which is the byte th, is sequentially taken out from the reception buffer, the initial value 0 is set in the reception counter SRXC (step S1210), and the sum value is calculated (step S1212). In this calculation, the status which is the first byte of the main peripheral serial data and the mode which is the second byte of the main peripheral serial data already taken out from the receive buffer in step S1202 are regarded as numerical values, and the total (sum value). ) Is calculated.

Following step S1212, it is determined whether or not the sum value, which is the third byte of the main peripheral serial data already fetched from the receive buffer in step S1202, and the sum value calculated in step S1212 match (step). S1214). The thumb value, which is the third byte of the main peripheral serial data already taken out from the receive buffer in step S1202, is the sum value allocated as the third byte of the main peripheral serial data among the main peripheral serial data from the main control board 1310. Therefore, it should match the sum value calculated in step S1212. However, in the pachinko machine 1, game balls are supplied from the pachinko island equipment, and when the game balls rub against each other and become charged, they are electrostatically discharged and generate noise. Therefore, the pachinko machine 1 is affected by the noise. It is in a shaving environment. Therefore, in the present embodiment, on the peripheral control unit 1511 side, the status allocated as the first byte of the received main peripheral serial data and the mode allocated as the second byte of the main peripheral serial data are regarded as numerical values. The total (sum value) is calculated, and whether the calculated sum value matches the sum value allocated as the third byte of the main circumference serial data in the main circumference serial data from the main control board 1310. It is judged whether or not. As a result, the peripheral control MPU 1511a determines whether or not the main peripheral serial data has changed to the main peripheral serial data different from the normal one due to the influence of noise between the main control board 1310 and the peripheral control board 1510. be able to.

In step S1214, when the sum value which is the third byte of the main circumference serial data already taken out from the reception buffer in step S1202 and the sum value calculated in step S1212 match, the received main circumference serial data is received. The status allocated as the first byte of the above and the mode allocated as the second byte of the main peripheral serial data are shown in FIG. 73, and the reception command storage area 1511cc of the peripheral control MPU 1511a and the external peripheral control RAM 1511c shown in FIG. (Step S1216), and the routine ends. This received command storage area 1511cc is used as a ring buffer, and the status allocated as the first byte of the main peripheral serial data and the mode allocated as the second byte of the main peripheral serial data are the received command storage areas. It is stored in the peripheral control unit reception ring buffer of 1511cc. This "peripheral control unit receive ring buffer" is a buffer that is used so that the end and the beginning of the buffer are connected. Data is stored sequentially from the beginning of the buffer, and when the end of the buffer is reached, it returns to the beginning. Remember. The peripheral control MPU1511a is allocated as the status allocated as the first byte of the main peripheral serial data received when stored in the peripheral control unit reception ring buffer in step S1216, and as the second byte of the main peripheral serial data. The mode is stored in association with the specified mode, and the sum value allocated as the third byte is discarded.

On the other hand, when the 1-byte reception period timer has not timed out in step S1200, that is, the period during which 1 byte (8 bits) of information of the main peripheral serial data transmitted from the main control board 1310 can be received has been exceeded. Occasionally, or in step S1214, if the sum value, which is the third byte of the main peripheral serial data already fetched from the receive buffer in step S1202, and the sum value calculated in step S1212 do not match, this routine is used as it is. finish.

[16-1-5. Peripheral control unit power failure warning signal interrupt processing]
Next, the peripheral control unit power failure warning signal executed when the power failure warning signal (peripheral power failure warning signal) from the power failure monitoring circuit 1310e of the main control board 1310, which is shown in FIG. 75, is input from the main control board 1310. Interrupt processing will be described. When the peripheral control unit power failure warning signal interrupt process is started, the peripheral control MPU1511a of the peripheral control unit 1511 shown in FIG. 72 first activates a 2-microsecond timer (step S1320), and then starts a power failure warning signal (peripheral power failure warning). It is determined whether or not the signal) is input (step S1302). If the power failure warning signal (peripheral power failure warning signal) is not input in this determination, this routine is terminated as it is.

On the other hand, when the power failure warning signal is input in step S1302, it is determined whether or not 2 microseconds have elapsed (step S1304). In this determination, it is determined whether or not the timer started in step S1320 has elapsed 2 microseconds. When 2 macroseconds have not elapsed in step S1304, the process returns to step S1302 to determine whether or not the power failure warning signal has been input, and when the power failure warning signal has not been input, this routine is terminated as it is, while the power failure warning is terminated. When the signal is input, it is determined again in step S1304 whether or not 2 microseconds have elapsed. That is, in the determination in step S1304, it is determined whether or not the power failure warning signal is continuously input for 2 microseconds after the peripheral control unit power failure warning signal interrupt processing, which is the routine, is started.

When the peripheral control unit power failure warning signal interrupt process, which is the routine, is started in step S1304 and the power failure warning signal is continuously input for 2 microseconds, power saving processing is performed (step S1306). In this power saving process, the backlights of the game board side effect display device 1600 and the door frame side effect display device 460 are turned off, the motors and solenoids provided on the game board 5 are turned off, and various LEDs are turned off in sequence. By suppressing the power consumption of the entire system of the pachinko machine 1, stable operation is ensured for a period of 20 milliseconds, which is the time during which the peripheral control MPU1511a can operate even if the power of the pachinko machine 1 is cut off.

Following step S1306, command reception standby processing is performed (step S1308). In this command reception standby process, assuming that there are various commands being transmitted by the main control board 1310, the peripheral control MPU1511a can receive the commands being transmitted for a period of at least 17 milliseconds. It is supposed to wait. When the command is received, the above-mentioned peripheral control unit command reception interrupt processing is started, and the reception command storage area 1511cc of the peripheral control MPU 1511a and the external peripheral control RAM 1511c shown in FIG. 73 (peripheral control unit reception ring buffer). The received command is stored in).

Following step S1308, command backup processing is performed (step S1310). In the backup process of this command, the contents stored in the reception command storage area 1511ca included in the Bank0 (1fr) in the backup target work area 1511ca shown in FIG. The peripheral control DMA controller 1511ac copies to Bank2 (1fr) at high speed, and the peripheral control DMA controller 1511ac copies to Bank3 (1fr) and Bank4 (1fr) of the backup second area 1511cc at high speed.

The high-speed copy of the contents stored in the received command storage area 1511cc included in Bank0 (1fr) by the peripheral control DMA controller 1511ac will be briefly described. The peripheral control MPU core 1511aa of the peripheral control MPU 1511a shown in FIG. 73 is peripheral. Specify the copy of the contents stored in the received command storage area 1511cc included in Bank0 (1fr) to the received command storage area included in Bank1 (1fr) of the backup first area 1511cc as the request factor of the control DMA controller 1511ac. Then, from the content stored in the start address of the receive command storage area 1511cc included in Bank0 (1fr) to the content stored in the end address of the reception command storage area 1511cc included in Bank0 (1fr), a predetermined byte (for example, , 1 byte) in succession Copy all in order from the start address of the received command storage area included in Bank 1 (1fr) of the first area 1511 kb, and the peripheral control MPU core 1511aa is a requirement factor of the peripheral control DMA controller 1511ac. Specify a copy of the contents stored in the reception command storage area 1511cc included in Bank0 (1fr) to the reception command storage area included in Bank2 (1fr) of the backup first area 1511cc, and set it to Bank0 (1fr). From the content stored in the start address of the received command storage area 1511cc included to the content stored in the end address of the received command storage area 1511cc included in Bank0 (1fr), a predetermined byte (for example, 1 byte) is consecutive. Then, all copies are made in order from the start address of the received command storage area included in Bank2 (1fr) of the backup first area 1511cc.

Subsequently, the peripheral control MPU core 1511aa includes the contents stored in the reception command storage area 1511cc included in the Bank0 (1fr) as a request factor of the peripheral control DMA controller 1511ac in the Bank3 (1fr) of the backup second area 1511cc. Specify the copy to the received command storage area to be stored, and store the contents stored in the start address of the received command storage area 1511cc included in Bank0 (1fr) in the terminal address of the received command storage area 1511cc included in Bank0 (1fr). The contents are copied continuously by a predetermined byte (for example, 1 byte) in order from the start address of the received command storage area included in Bank 3 (1fr) of the second area 1511 cc, and the peripheral control MPU core. 1511aa is a requirement factor of the peripheral control DMA controller 1511ac, and the contents stored in the reception command storage area 1511cc included in Bank0 (1fr) are transferred to the reception command storage area included in Bank4 (1fr) of the backup second area 1511cc. Specify a copy, and specify the contents stored in the start address of the receive command storage area 1511cc included in Bank0 (1fr) to the contents stored in the end address of the reception command storage area 1511cc included in Bank0 (1fr). All bytes (for example, 1 byte) are continuously copied in order from the start address of the received command storage area included in Bank 4 (1fr) of the second area 1511 cc.

Following step S1310, it is determined whether or not a power failure warning signal (peripheral power failure warning signal) has been input (step S1312). When the power failure warning signal is input in this determination, the WDT clear process is performed (step S1314). In this WDT clear process, the peripheral control MPU1511a outputs a clear signal to the peripheral control built-in WDT1511af shown in FIG. 73 and the peripheral control external WDT1511e shown in FIG. 72 so that the peripheral control MPU1511a is not reset. ..

On the other hand, when the power failure warning signal is not input in step S1312, or after step S1314, the process returns to step S1312 again to determine whether or not the power failure warning signal is input. That is, it is infinitely determined whether or not the power failure warning signal (peripheral power failure warning signal) is input. By continuing the determination indefinitely in this way, when the power failure warning signal (peripheral power failure warning signal) is not input in step S1312, the peripheral control MPU1511a gives a clear signal to the peripheral control built-in WDT1511af and the peripheral control external WDT1511e. Is not output, and the peripheral control MPU1511a is reset. On the other hand, when the power failure warning signal is input in step S1312, the WDT clear process is performed in step S1314, and the peripheral control MPU1511a is not reset. When the peripheral control MPU 1511a is reset, the peripheral control unit power-on processing shown in FIG. 95 is restarted.

In this way, when the input of the power failure warning signal (peripheral power failure warning signal) continues in the infinite loop according to the determination in step S1312, the WDT clear processing is executed in step S1314 to perform peripheral control immediately before the power failure state occurs. The MPU1511a is not reset. On the other hand, if the input of the power failure warning signal is not continued and is canceled in the infinite loop by the determination in step S1312, the WDT clear process is not executed, so that the peripheral control built-in WDT1511af and the peripheral control external WDT1511e are The output of the clear signal is interrupted. As a result, even if the peripheral control unit power failure warning signal interrupt process, which is this routine, is erroneously started due to noise or the like, and the noise is generated for more than a period of 2 microseconds, the determination in step S1302 is passed. If the input of the power failure warning signal (peripheral power failure warning signal) is not continued and is canceled in the infinite loop by the determination by S1312, the peripheral control MPU1511a is reset because the WDT clear processing in step S1314 is not executed. Therefore, it is possible to deal with such noise by automatically resetting and returning.

[16-1-6. LOCKN signal history creation process]
Next, the LOCKN signal history creation process executed as one of the drawing state information acquisition processes in step S1110 in the peripheral control unit 1 ms timer interrupt process shown in FIG. 97 will be described. In this LOCKN signal history creation process, the history of the LOCKN signal output from the LOCKN terminal of the door frame side effect receiver ICSDIC0 provided in the effect display drive board 4450 shown in FIG. 87 is created. As described above, the LOCKN signal is the drawing data received by the door frame side effect receiver ICSDIC0 provided on the effect display drive board 4450 from the door frame side effect transmitter IC1512d provided on the peripheral control board 1510 shown in FIG. 74. When it is determined that the data is abnormal, it is a signal to be output to convey that fact. Specifically, the door frame side effect transmitter IC1512d provided in the peripheral control board 1510 and the door frame provided in the effect display drive board 4450. This is a signal output to request transmission of a predetermined data pattern (SYNC pattern) for confirming (recovering) the connection between the side effect receiver ICSDIC0 and the connection, that is, the connection between the transmitter and the receiver.

When the LOCKN signal history creation process is started, the peripheral control MPU 1511a of the peripheral control unit 1511 shown in FIG. 72 has the peripheral control RAM 1511c externally attached to the peripheral control MPU 1511a shown in FIG. 73, as shown in FIG. The LOCKN signal detection history information LOCKN-HIST is read from the drawing state information acquisition storage area 1511ca (step S1500). This LOCKN signal detection history information LOCKN-HIST stores 1 byte (8 bits: most significant bit B7, B6, B5, B4, B3, B2, B1, least significant bit B0, "B" represents a bit). The history of the LOCKN signal output from the LOCKN terminal of the door frame side effect receiver ICSDIC0 provided in the effect display drive board 4450 has a capacity, and the history of the LOCKN signal is stored in the drawing state information acquisition storage area 1511 cap as the LOCKN signal detection history information LOCKN-HIST. It is remembered.

Following step S1500, it is determined whether or not there is a LOCKN signal output from the LOCKN terminal of the door frame side effect receiver ICSDIC0 provided on the effect display drive board 4450 (step S1502). In this determination, when there is a LOCKN signal from the door frame side effect receiver ICSDIC0, the door frame side effect receiver ICSDIC0 determines that the drawing data received from the door frame side effect transmitter IC1512d is abnormal data. , Requests transmission of a predetermined data pattern (SYNC pattern) for confirming (recovering) the connection between the door frame side effect transmitter IC1512d and the door frame side effect receiver ICSDIC0, that is, the connection between the transmitter and the receiver. On the other hand, when there is no LOCKN signal from the door frame side effect receiver ICSDIC0, the drawing data received by the door frame side effect receiver ICSDIC0 from the door frame side effect transmitter IC1512d is not abnormal data (normal). Data), and predetermined data for confirming (recovering) the connection between the door frame side effect transmitter IC1512d and the door frame side effect receiver ICSDIC0, that is, the connection between the transmitter and the receiver. It is determined that the pattern (SYNC pattern) is not requested to be transmitted.

When there is a LOCKN signal from the door frame side effect receiver ICSDIC0 in step S1502, the LOCKN signal detection history information is shifted (step S1504). In this shift processing of the LOCKN signal detection history information, when there is a LOCKN signal from the door frame side effect receiver ICSDIC0, the LOCKN signal detection history information LOCKN-HIST read in step S1500 is set to the most significant bit B7 ← B6, B6 ←. B5, B5 ← B4, B4 ← B3, B3 ← B2, B2 ← B1, B1 ← least significant bit B0, and so on, shifting from the least significant bit B0 to the most significant bit B7 one bit at a time.

When the LOCKN signal detection history information LOCKN-HIST is shifted in step S1504, the value 1 is set in the least significant bit B0 of the LOCKN signal detection history information LOCKN-HIST (step S1506), and this routine is terminated.

On the other hand, when there is no LOCKN signal from the door frame side effect receiver ICSDIC0 in step S1502, the LOCKN signal detection history information is shifted (step S1508). In this shift processing of the LOCKN signal detection history information, the same processing as the shift processing of the LOCKN signal detection history information in step S1504 is performed, and when there is no LOCKN signal from the door frame side effect receiver ICSDIC0, the LOCKN read in step S1500 is performed. The signal detection history information LOCKN-HIST is set to the most significant bit B7 ← B6, B6 ← B5, B5 ← B4, B4 ← B3, B3 ← B2, B2 ← B1, B1 ← least significant bit B0, and so on. Shifts bit by bit from to the most significant bit B7.

When the LOCKN signal detection history information LOCKN-HIST is shifted in step S1508, the value 0 is set in the least significant bit B0 of the LOCKN signal detection history information LOCKN-HIST (step S1510), and this routine is terminated.

In this way, each time this LOCKN signal history creation process is executed, the LOCKN signal detection history information LOCKN-HIST is shifted by one bit from the least significant bit B0 toward the most significant bit B7, and then to the least significant bit B0. Since the value 1 or the value 0 is set, the history of the LOCKN signal from the door frame side effect receiver ICSDIC0 can be created.

[16-1-7. Connection failure judgment processing]
Next, a connection failure determination process to be executed as one of the warning processes in step S1024 in the peripheral control unit steady process of the peripheral control unit power-on processing shown in FIG. 95 will be described. In this connection failure determination process, the door frame side provided on the peripheral control board 1510 is based on the history of the LOCKN signal output from the LOCKN terminal of the effect receiver ICSDIC0 provided on the effect display drive board 4450 shown in FIG. It is determined whether or not there is a problem between the connection between the effect transmitter IC1512d and the door frame side effect receiver ICSDIC0 provided on the effect display drive board 4450, that is, the connection between the transmitter and the receiver.

When the connection failure determination process is started, the peripheral control MPU 1511a of the peripheral control unit 1511 shown in FIG. 72 is the peripheral control RAM 1511c externally attached to the peripheral control MPU 1511a shown in FIG. 73, as shown in FIG. The LOCKN signal detection history information LOCKN-HIST is read from the drawing state information acquisition storage area 1511cak (step S1520). As described above, the LOCKN signal detection history information LOCKN-HIST stores the history of the LOCKN signal output from the LOCKN terminal of the door frame side effect receiver ICSDIC0 provided on the effect display drive board 4450. As described above, in this LOCKN signal, the drawing data received by the door frame side effect receiver ICSDIC0 provided on the effect display drive board 4450 from the door frame side effect transmitter IC1512d provided on the peripheral control board 1510 is abnormal data. If it is determined that the signal is output to that effect, specifically, the door frame side effect transmitter IC1512d provided on the peripheral control board 1510 and the door frame side effect receiver ICSDIC0 provided on the effect display drive board 4450. It is a signal to be output to request transmission of a predetermined data pattern (SYNC pattern) for confirming (recovering) the connection between the and, that is, the connection between the transmitter and the receiver.

Following step S1520, it is determined whether or not there is a LOCKN signal from the door frame side effect receiver ICSDIC0 (step S1522). This determination determines whether or not the LOCKN signal detection history information LOCKN-HIST read in step S1520 matches the connection confirmation determination value. This connection confirmation determination value is stored in advance in the peripheral control ROM 1511b shown in FIG. 72, and in the present embodiment, it is "00001111B (" B "represents a bit)", and the upper 4 bits B7 to B4. Is a value 0, and B3 to B0 of the lower 4 bits are a value 1. In the determination in step S1522, it is determined whether or not the lower 4 bits B3 to B0 of the LOCKN signal detection history information LOCKN-HIST and the lower 4 bits B3 to B0 of the connection confirmation determination value match.

In step S1522, when the lower 4 bits B3 to B0 of the LOCKN signal detection history information LOCKN-HIST read in step S1520 and the lower 4 bits B3 to B0 of the connection confirmation determination value do not match, the peripheral control board 1510 is provided. It is determined that there is no problem in the connection between the door frame side effect transmitter IC1512d and the door frame side effect receiver ICSDIC0 provided in the effect display drive board 4450, that is, the connection between the transmitter and the receiver. Then, the routine ends as it is.

On the other hand, in step S1522, when the lower 4 bits B3 to B0 of the LOCKN signal detection history information LOCKN-HIST read in step S1520 and the lower 4 bits B3 to B0 of the connection confirmation determination value match, the peripheral control board 1510 There is a problem in the connection between the door frame side effect transmitter IC1512d provided in the above and the door frame side effect receiver ICSDIC0 provided in the effect display drive board 4450, that is, the connection between the transmitter and the receiver. Is determined and the value 1 is added to the communication check counter CC-CNT (increment, step S1524). The communication check counter CC-CNT counts up the number of times it is determined in step S1522 that the connection between the transmitter and the receiver is defective each time this routine is executed. (Counting the cumulative number of times). The communication check counter CC-CNT is set to a value of 0 and reset when the power of the pachinko machine 1 is turned on, but it is not reset due to a momentary power failure or a power failure, and the power is restored. It is designed to be restored to the value of the communication check counter CC-CNT immediately before the moment or power failure.

Following step S1524, it is determined whether or not the value of the communication check counter CC-CNT is smaller than the cumulative number upper limit value CC-LMT (step S1526). In this determination, when the value of the communication check counter CC-CNT is smaller than the cumulative number upper limit value CC-LMT, the cumulative number of times it is determined that the connection between the transmitter and the receiver is defective is the cumulative number of times. When it is determined that the upper limit value CC-LMT has not been reached, but the value of the communication check counter CC-CNT is not smaller (larger) than the cumulative number upper limit value CC-LMT, a problem occurs in the connection between the transmitter and the receiver. It is determined that the cumulative number of times determined to be in this state has reached the cumulative number upper limit value CC-LMT.

When the value of the communication check counter CC-CNT is smaller than the cumulative number upper limit value CC-LMT in step S1526, that is, the cumulative number of times it is determined that the connection between the transmitter and the receiver is defective is the cumulative number of times. When the upper limit value CC-LMT has not been reached, the communication error flag CC-FLG is set to a value 0 (step S1528), and this routine is terminated. On the other hand, in step S1526, it is determined that the value of the communication check counter CC-CNT is not smaller (larger) than the cumulative number upper limit value CC-LMT, that is, a problem has occurred in the connection between the transmitter and the receiver. When the cumulative number of times has reached the cumulative number upper limit value CC-LMT, the communication error flag CC-FLG is set to a value of 1 (step S1530), and this routine is terminated. The communication error flag CC-FLG is the connection between the transmitter and the receiver when the cumulative number of times it is determined that the connection between the transmitter and the receiver is defective reaches the cumulative number upper limit CC-LMT. It is a flag indicating whether or not a problem has definitely occurred. When the connection between the transmitter and the receiver is definitely defective, the value is 1, and the connection between the transmitter and the receiver has a problem. When the cumulative number of times determined to be in the state of being in the state does not reach the cumulative number upper limit value CC-LMT, the value is set to 0, respectively. The communication error flag CC-FLG is set to a value of 0 and reset when the pachinko machine 1 is turned on, but it is not reset due to a momentary power failure or a power failure, and the power is restored. At times, it is restored to the value of the communication abnormality flag CC-FLG immediately before the moment or power failure.

[16-1-8. Connection recovery process]
Next, a connection recovery process to be executed as one process of the warning process in step S1024 in the peripheral control unit steady process of the peripheral control unit power-on processing shown in FIG. 95 will be described. This connection recovery process is executed following the connection failure determination process shown in FIG. 101, and includes the door frame side effect transmitter IC1512d provided on the peripheral control board 1510 and the door frame side effect receiver ICSDIC0 provided on the effect display drive board 4450. When a predetermined data pattern (SYNC pattern) is output to confirm (recover) the connection between the transmitter and the receiver, that is, when the connection between the transmitter and the receiver is abnormal. Notify that fact.

When the connection recovery process is started, the peripheral control MPU 1511a of the peripheral control unit 1511 shown in FIG. 72 is in the peripheral control unit steady processing of the peripheral control unit power-on processing shown in FIG. 95, as shown in FIG. In the scheduler update process of step S1020, it is determined whether or not the screen generation schedule data is being activated among the various schedule data set in the schedule data storage area 1511cae of the peripheral control RAM 1511c shown in FIG. 73 (step). S1540). In this determination, in the scheduler update process, among the screen data arranged in the time series constituting the screen generation schedule data, the number of the screen data from the first screen data is to be output to the sound source built-in VDP1512a. To determine if the pointer has been updated. In other words, in the scheduler update process, when the pointer is being updated, the effect is proceeding along the screen generation schedule data, so it is determined that the screen generation schedule data is running, while the screen generation schedule is being started. When the effect is completed according to the data and all the pointer updates are completed, it is determined that the screen generation schedule data has not been started. In this determination, a period during which the start-up screen when the power of the pachinko machine 1 is turned on is displayed on the game board side effect display device 1600, or a customer waiting state is performed and a demonstration is performed by the game board side effect display device 1600. It is possible to determine whether or not the pachinko machine is in the period based on the screen generation schedule data, and the start-up screen when the pachinko machine 1 is turned on is displayed on the game board side effect display device 1600. During the period during which the pachinko machine is waiting for customers or during the period during which the game board side effect display device 1600 is demonstrating, the process proceeds to step S1542, which will be described later, while the start-up screen when the pachinko machine 1 is turned on is displayed on the game board side. When it is not the period displayed on the effect display device 1600 or the period when the pachinko / pachislot machine side effect display device 1600 is in the waiting state for customers to perform the demonstration (simply in the waiting state for customers). This routine is terminated as it is.

When the production is proceeding according to the screen generation schedule data in step S1540, that is, when the screen generation schedule data is running, this routine is terminated as it is, while the screen generation schedule data is followed in step S1540. When the production is completed and all the pointer updates are completed, that is, when the screen generation schedule data is not started, it is determined whether or not the value of the communication check counter CC-CNT is not 0 (step). S1542). As described above, the communication check counter CC-CNT is used for the door frame side effect provided in the peripheral control board 1510 in the determination of step S1522 in each time the connection failure determination process shown in FIG. 101 is executed. The number of times it is determined that there is a problem in the connection between the transmitter IC 1512d and the door frame side effect receiver ICSDIC0 provided on the effect display drive board 4450, that is, the connection between the transmitter and the receiver is counted up. (Count the cumulative number of times). In this determination, it is determined whether or not the number of times it is determined that the connection between the transmitter and the receiver has a problem has occurred even once.

When the value of the communication check counter CC-CNT is 0 in step S1542, that is, when it is determined that there is a problem in the connection between the transmitter and the receiver, this is the case as it is. While terminating the routine, even once it is determined in step S1542 that the value of the communication check counter CC-CNT is not 0, that is, the connection between the transmitter and the receiver has a problem. If so, it is determined whether or not the value of the communication abnormality flag CC-FLG is 0 (step S1544). As described above, the communication abnormality flag CC-FLG reaches the cumulative number upper limit CC-LMT when the cumulative number of times it is determined that the connection between the transmitter and the receiver has a problem has reached the transmitter and the transmitter. It is a flag indicating whether or not the connection between the receiver and the receiver is definitely defective. When the connection between the transmitter and the receiver is definitely defective, the value is 1, between the transmitter and the receiver. When the cumulative number of times it is determined that a problem has occurred in the connection of the above has not reached the cumulative number upper limit value CC-LMT, the value is set to 0, respectively.

When the value of the communication error flag CC-FLG is 0 in step S1544, that is, the cumulative number of times it is determined that a problem has occurred in the connection between the transmitter and the receiver is the cumulative number upper limit value CC-LMT. When the value has not been reached, the SYNC pattern output process is performed (step S1546), and this routine is terminated. In this SYNC pattern output process, the peripheral control MPU 1511a outputs a connection confirmation signal to the INIT terminal of the door frame side effect transmitter IC1512d provided on the peripheral control board 1510, so that the peripheral control board 1510 is provided for the door frame side effect. The transmitter IC 1512d outputs a predetermined data pattern (SYNC pattern) to the door frame side effect receiver ICSDIC0 provided on the effect display drive board 4450. This predetermined data pattern (SYNC pattern) is stored in advance in the door frame side effect transmitter IC1512d and is output to the door frame side effect receiver ICSDIC0, and is used for the door frame side effect. It restores the connection between the transmitter IC 1512d and the door frame side effect receiver ICSDIC0, that is, the connection between the transmitter and the receiver.

On the other hand, when the value of the communication error flag CC-FLG is not 0 (value 1) in step S1544, that is, when there is a certain problem in the connection between the transmitter and the receiver, the communication error display process is performed. Perform (step S1548) and end this routine. In this communication error display process, in order to convey that a problem has definitely occurred in the connection between the transmitter and the receiver, the display area of the game board side effect display device 1600 provided in the game board 5 shown in FIG. Performs the process of drawing to. For example, the message "There was a problem with the liquid crystal display on the upper plate side. Please call a clerk." Is displayed in the display area of the effect display device 1600 on the game board side. Further, in the communication error display processing, a period during which the start-up screen when the power of the pachinko machine 1 is turned on is displayed on the game board side effect display device 1600, or a demonstration by the game board side effect display device 1600 in a customer waiting state is performed. During this period, the connection between the door frame side effect transmitter IC1512d provided on the peripheral control board 1510 and the door frame side effect receiver ICSDIC0 provided on the effect display drive board 4450, that is, the connection between the transmitter and the receiver. The peripheral control MPU1511a transmits LOCKN signal output request data as an operation confirmation request of the door frame side effect display device 460 in order to confirm whether or not a problem has occurred in the door frame side effect receiver ICSDIC0. A LOCKN signal is output from the LOCKN terminal to the peripheral control MPU1511a as a response signal to the transmission of the signal output request data, and when this LOCKN signal is not input, it is assumed that a problem has occurred in the connection between the transmitter and the receiver. It is determined that a problem has occurred in the door frame side effect display device 460, and a notification image (for example, "A problem has occurred in the upper plate side liquid crystal display device. Please call a clerk.") Is used for the game. Along with performing processing to display in the display area of the board-side effect display device 1600, a notification sound (for example, "a problem has occurred in the upper plate side liquid crystal display device") is repeatedly emitted from a speaker or the like provided on the door frame 3. Perform the flow process. At this time, the process of turning on all the LEDs for light emitting decoration provided in the door frame 3 and the various LEDs mounted on the various decorative substrates provided in the game board 5 may be performed.

Next, the timing at which the peripheral control MPU 1511a outputs a connection confirmation signal to the INIT terminal of the door frame side effect transmitter IC 1512d provided in the peripheral control board 1510 shown in FIG. 74 will be described with reference to the timing chart of FIG. 103.

First, a decorative symbol that is variablely displayed in the display area of the game board side effect display device 1600 provided in the game board 5 shown in FIG. 8 will be briefly described. The variable display of the decorative symbol is executed by the stationary processing or the like, and the main control side of the main control board 1310 shown in FIG. 69 is the main control side of the main control side shown in FIG. 93 by the main control MPU 1310a. The result of the first special lottery drawn by accepting the game ball into the first starting port 2002 shown in FIG. 8 by the main process, the timer interrupt process on the main control side shown in FIG. 94, or the second shown in FIG. When the result of the second special lottery drawn by accepting the game ball into the starting port 2004 is a "big hit", the number of repetitions (number of rounds) of the opening and closing operation of the big winning opening 2005 shown in FIG. 8 is 1 to 15 rounds. In each round, a game ball enters the large winning opening 2005 within a predetermined time (for example, 30 seconds), and the number of balls reaches a predetermined number (for example, 9 balls). The round is digested, and a predetermined number (for example, 15 balls) of game balls are paid out every time one game ball enters the large winning opening 2005.

The result of the first special lottery drawn by accepting the game ball to the first starting port 2002 or the result of the second special lottery drawn by accepting the game ball to the second starting port 2004 is from the main control board 1310. By controlling the liquid crystal display control unit 1512 by the peripheral control unit 1511 of the peripheral control board 1510 based on the command, the left decorative symbol is on the left side of the display area of the game board side effect display device 1600, and the central decorative symbol is in the center. , And the variable display of the right decorative symbol is started on the right side, and after a predetermined time has passed, the variable display of the left decorative symbol, the central decorative symbol, and the right decorative symbol is stopped, and the first special lottery result or the second special lottery result is stopped. At this time, the player can recognize the first special symbol displayed on the first special symbol display 1403 or the second special symbol display 1405 of the function display unit 1400 shown in FIG. The result of the first special lottery or the result of the second special lottery can be confirmed also in the symbol or the second special symbol. When the left decorative symbol, the central decorative symbol, and the right decorative symbol are displayed in a variable manner, the left decorative symbol, the central decorative symbol, and the right decorative symbol are translucent so that the background image can be visually recognized, and the left decorative symbol is displayed. The reels rotate from the upper left side to the lower left side of the area, the central decorative symbol from the upper center to the lower center of the display area, and the right decorative symbol from the upper right side to the lower right side of the display area. When the left decorative symbol, the central decorative symbol, and the right decorative symbol are stopped and displayed, they correspond to the left decorative symbol, the central decorative symbol, and the right decorative symbol that are stopped and displayed. The left decorative symbol, the central decorative symbol, and the right decorative symbol are opaque so that the background image at the position is difficult to see. As described above, the first special symbol or the second special symbol which is started and stopped by the variable display on the first special symbol display 1403 or the second special symbol display 1405 of the function display unit 1400 shown in FIG. The left decorative symbol, the central decorative symbol, and the right decorative symbol, which are displayed in a variable display start and stop display in the display area of the game board side effect display device 1600, are synchronized.

The peripheral control unit 1511 of the peripheral control board 1510 is the first special lottery result drawn by accepting the game ball to the first starting port 2002, or the second lottery drawn by accepting the game ball to the second starting port 2004. When a command from the main control board 1310 for transmitting the special lottery result is received, the liquid crystal display control unit 1512 is controlled based on the received command, so that the game board side shown in FIG. 8 is shown as shown in FIG. When the variable display of the left decorative symbol, the central decorative symbol, and the right decorative symbol is started in the display area of the effect display device 1600 (timing K0), the peripheral control unit of the peripheral control unit power-on processing shown in FIG. 95 is steady. In the scheduler update process of step S1020 in the process, the first screen among the screen data arranged in time series constituting the screen generation schedule data set in the schedule data storage area 1511cae of the peripheral control RAM 1511c shown in FIG. 73. Because the pointer is updated to indicate the number of screen data to be output to the VDP1512a with built-in sound source from the data, that is, in the scheduler update process, when the pointer is updated, it follows the screen generation schedule data. Since the production is in progress, the screen generation schedule data is being activated, and while the screen generation schedule data is being activated, that is, the left decorative symbol, the central decorative symbol, and the right decorative symbol are variablely displayed. Even if the connection recovery process shown in FIG. 102 is executed in the warning process of step S1024 in the peripheral control unit steady process of the peripheral control unit power-on processing shown in FIG. In the determination of step S1540 in this connection recovery process, the routine is forcibly terminated as it is.

As a result, the communication check counter CC-CNT can be used until the variable display of the left decorative symbol, the central decorative symbol, and the right decorative symbol is started and stopped in the display area of the game board side effect display device 1600. Even when the value is not 0, that is, between the connection between the door frame side effect transmitter IC1512d provided on the peripheral control board 1510 and the door frame side effect receiver ICSDIC0 provided on the effect display drive board 4450 (that is, with the transmitter). Even if it is determined that a problem has occurred in the connection between the receiver and the receiver even once, the SYNC pattern output process in step S1546 in the connection recovery process is not performed, and the transmitter and the receiver are not performed. The process of recovering the connection with the player is not performed, and the communication error display process of step S1548 in the connection recovery process is not performed. Since the message "There was a problem with the side liquid crystal display device. Please call the clerk." Is not displayed, tell that the drawing data received from the door frame side production transmitter IC1512d is abnormal data. The LOCKN signal from the door frame side effect receiver ICSDIC0 is invalidated, and the door frame side effect display device 460 displays an image based on the drawing data received by the door frame side effect receiver ICSDIC0 from the door frame side effect transmitter IC1512d. Is displayed.

When the variable display of the left decorative symbol, the central decorative symbol, and the right decorative symbol is started and stopped in the display area of the game board side effect display device 1600 (timing K1), the peripheral control unit power is turned on as shown in FIG. 95. Peripheral control unit of time processing In the scheduler update process of step S1020 in the steady processing, the effect is completed according to the screen generation schedule data set in the schedule data storage area 1511cae of the peripheral control RAM 1511c shown in FIG. 73, and the pointer Since all the updates have been completed, that is, while the screen generation schedule data has not been started and the screen generation schedule data has not been started in the scheduler update process, the power of the peripheral control unit shown in FIG. 95 is turned on. Peripheral control unit of time processing In the determination of step S1540 in the connection recovery process shown in FIG. 102 executed as one process of the warning process of step S1024 in the steady process, the process proceeds to the process of step S1542 in the same process, and the communication check counter CC- When the CNT value is 0, that is, when it has not been determined that the connection between the transmitter and the receiver has a problem even once, the routine is terminated as it is, while the communication check counter is used. When the value of CC-CNT is not 0, that is, when it is determined that the connection between the transmitter and the receiver has a problem even once, the process of step S1544 in the same process is performed. When the value of the communication error flag CC-FLG is 0, that is, the cumulative number of times it is determined that there is a problem in the connection between the transmitter and the receiver is set to the cumulative number upper limit value CC-LMT. If it has not reached, the process proceeds to step S1546 in the same process, the above-described SYNC pattern output process is performed, and the routine is terminated. On the other hand, when the value of the communication error flag CC-FLG is not 0 (value 1), That is, when there is a certain problem in the connection between the transmitter and the receiver, the process proceeds to the process of step S1548 in the same process, the above-mentioned communication error display process is performed, and the routine is terminated. In other words, while the left decorative symbol, the central decorative symbol, and the right decorative symbol are stopped and displayed in the display area of the game board side effect display device 1600, the door frame side effect transmitter IC1512d and the door frame side effect receiver are displayed. When there is a problem with the connection between ICSDIC0, that is, between the transmitter and the receiver even once, and there is a problem with the connection between the transmitter and the receiver. When the cumulative number of times determined to be present does not reach the cumulative number upper limit value CC-LMT, the SYNC pattern output processing is always performed to connect the door frame side effect transmitter IC1512d and the door frame side effect receiver ICSDIC0. That is, while the process of recovering the connection between the transmitter and the receiver is performed, the cumulative number of times it is determined that the connection between the transmitter and the receiver is defective reaches the cumulative number upper limit CC-LMT. When (that is, there is definitely a problem in the connection between the transmitter and the receiver), the communication error display process is always performed, so that, for example, the display area of the game board side effect display device 1600 is displayed. A problem has occurred in the LCD display device on the upper plate side. Please call a clerk. ”Is displayed and notified, and the drawing data received from the door frame side directing transmitter IC1512d is abnormal. The LOCKN signal from the door frame side effect receiver ICSDIC0 that conveys that the data is data is enabled.

In the display area of the game board side effect display device 1600, the variable display of the left decorative symbol, the central decorative symbol, and the right decorative symbol is started and stopped, and the variable display of the left decorative symbol, the central decorative symbol, and the right decorative symbol is displayed again. During the interval period until the start of, the left decorative symbol, the central decorative symbol, and the right decorative symbol are stopped and displayed in the display area of the game board side effect display device 1600. Therefore, as described above, The LOCKN signal from the door frame side effect receiver ICSDIC0, which conveys that the drawing data received from the door frame side effect transmitter IC1512d is abnormal data, is enabled, and the door frame side effect transmitter IC1512d and the door frame side effect are used. A state in which there is a problem in the connection between the receiver ICSDIC0, that is, a state in which the connection between the transmitter and the receiver has occurred even once, and a state in which the connection between the transmitter and the receiver has a problem. When the cumulative number of times determined to be is not reaching the cumulative number upper limit value CC-LMT, the SYNC pattern output processing is always performed to connect the door frame side effect transmitter IC1512d and the door frame side effect receiver ICSDIC0. That is, while the process of recovering the connection between the transmitter and the receiver is performed, the cumulative number of times it is determined that the connection between the transmitter and the receiver is defective is set to the cumulative number upper limit CC-LMT. When it has reached (that is, there is definitely a problem in the connection between the transmitter and the receiver), the communication error display process is always performed so that, for example, the display area of the game board side effect display device 1600 is displayed. The message "There was a problem with the LCD display device on the upper plate side. Please call a clerk." Is displayed and notified.

When the variable display of the left decorative symbol, the central decorative symbol, and the right decorative symbol is started again (timing K2), as described above, since the screen generation schedule data is activated, the left decorative symbol and the central decorative symbol are activated. , And until the right decorative symbol is stopped and displayed (timing K3), even when the value of the communication check counter CC-CNT is not 0, that is, for the door frame side effect provided in the peripheral control board 1510. The number of times it is determined that a problem has occurred between the connection between the transmitter IC 1512d and the door frame side effect receiver ICSDIC0 provided on the effect display drive board 4450 (that is, the connection between the transmitter and the receiver) is 1. Even if it is the number of times, the SYNC pattern output process of step S1546 in the connection recovery process is not performed, the process of recovering the connection between the transmitter and the receiver is not performed, and the connection recovery process is performed. The communication error display process in step S1548 is not performed, and for example, the message "A problem has occurred in the upper plate side liquid crystal display device. Please call a clerk." Is not displayed in the display area of the game board side effect display device 1600. Therefore, the LOCKN signal from the door frame side effect receiver ICSDIC0 that conveys that the drawing data received from the door frame side effect transmitter IC1512d is abnormal data is invalidated, and the door frame side effect display device is displayed. The 460 displays an image based on the drawing data received by the door frame side effect receiver ICSDIC0 from the door frame side effect transmitter IC1512d.

In this way, the variable display of the left decorative symbol, the central decorative symbol, and the right decorative symbol is started and stopped in the display area of the game board side effect display device 1600, and the left decorative symbol, the central decorative symbol, and the right decorative symbol are displayed again. During the interval period until the variable display of the symbol is started, the LOCKN signal from the door frame side effect receiver ICSDIC0 that conveys that the drawing data received from the door frame side effect transmitter IC1512d is abnormal data is enabled. On the other hand, the door frame side effect transmitter is displayed in the display area of the game board side effect display device 1600 from the start to the stop display of the left decorative symbol, the central decorative symbol, and the right decorative symbol. The LOCKN signal from the door frame side effect receiver ICSDIC0 that conveys that the drawing data received from the IC1512d is abnormal data is invalidated. This is because the combination result of the left decorative symbol, the central decorative symbol, and the right decorative symbol stopped and displayed in the display area of the game board side effect display device 1600 is the information most of interest to the player, and is beneficial to the player. Since the player can determine whether or not a jackpot game state in which is given is generated, the left decorative symbol, the central decorative symbol, and the right decorative symbol are variablely displayed in the display area of the game board side effect display device 1600. Then, until the left decorative symbol, the center decorative symbol, and the right decorative symbol are stopped and displayed, the effect image drawn in the display area of the door frame side effect display device 460 is disturbed correctly due to the influence of noise or the like. Even if it becomes impossible to draw, the left decorative symbol, the central decorative symbol, and the central decorative symbol are displayed in the display area of the game board side effect display device 1600, instead of interrupting the effect in the middle and recovering to the state where the drawing can be performed correctly. By stopping and displaying the decoration pattern on the right side, the drawing of the information most of interest to the player is completed.

In this respect, the period during which the peripheral control MPU 1511a of the peripheral control unit 1511 of the peripheral control board 1510 displays the start-up screen when the power of the pachinko machine 1 is turned on on the game board side effect display device 1600, and the customer waiting state. During the period of the demonstration by the game board side effect display device 1600, the LOCKN signal output request data is significantly different from the case of transmitting the LOCKN signal output request data to the differential circuit 1512e provided in the peripheral control board 1510. This LOCKN signal output request data is used for a period during which the start-up screen when the power of the pachinko machine 1 is turned on is displayed on the game board side effect display device 1600, and a demonstration by the game board side effect display device 1600 in a customer waiting state. During this period, the peripheral control MPU 1511a transmits the door frame side effect transmitter IC1512d provided on the peripheral control board 1510 and the door frame side effect receiver ICSDIC0 provided on the effect display drive board 4450. It is transmitted as an operation confirmation request of the door frame side effect display device 460 in order to confirm whether or not there is a problem in the connection between the connections, that is, between the transmitter and the receiver.

When the LOCKN signal output request data, which is the serial data output from the peripheral control MPU 1511a, is differentiated into a positive signal and a negative signal in the differential circuit 1512e provided in the peripheral control board 1510, it is differential as described above. Two signals differentiated into a plus signal and a minus signal in the conversion circuit 1512e are input to the forced switching circuit 1512f provided in the peripheral control board 1510. When two signals differentiated into a plus signal and a minus signal are input in the differential circuit 1512e, the forced switching circuit 1512f connects the circuits so as to transmit the two signals. Two signals are transmitted from the peripheral control board 1510 to the effect display drive board 4450 housed in the dish unit 320 of the door frame 3. Then, when the door frame side effect receiver ICSDIC0 of the liquid crystal module circuit 4450V provided in the effect display drive board 4450 determines that the two received signals are the LOCKN signal output request data, the LOCKN signal output request data is, in the first place, the LOCKN signal output request data. As described above, since the data format is different from the signal output from the door frame side effect transmitter IC 1512d, it is determined that the data is abnormal, and the LOCKN signal is transmitted to the periphery of the peripheral control unit 1511 of the peripheral control board 1510. Output to control MPU1511a. As a result, the peripheral control MPU1511a tells the effect display drive board 4450 that there is no problem in the connection between the transmitter and the receiver when the LOCKN signal is input as a response signal to the transmission of the LOCKN signal output request data. While it can be determined that no problem has occurred, when the LOCKN signal is not input, it is assumed that there is a problem with the connection between the transmitter and the receiver, and the effect display drive board 4450 has a problem. (For example, "A problem has occurred in the liquid crystal display device on the upper plate side. Please call a clerk.") By controlling the VDP1512a with a built-in sound source to display the effect display device on the game board side. By outputting to 1600 and outputting a notification sound (for example, "There is a problem with the liquid crystal display device on the upper plate side") to the audio data transmission IC1512c by controlling the VDP1512a with a built-in sound source. A notification sound is emitted from a speaker or the like provided on the door frame 3. As a result, the notification image displayed in the display area of the game board side effect display device 1600 and the notification sound repeatedly flowing from the speaker or the like provided on the door frame 3 can be used for notification. At this time, all the LEDs for light emitting decoration provided in the door frame 3 and the various LEDs mounted on the various decorative substrates provided in the game board 5 may be turned on.

In this way, when the peripheral control MPU 1511a of the peripheral control unit 1511 transmits the LOCKN signal output request data which is serial data, the forced switching circuit 1512f may receive the LOCKN signal output request data at the door frame side effect receiver ICSDIC0. The circuit is connected so that the LOCKN signal output request data is received, and the door frame side effect receiver ICSDIC0 outputs the LOCKN signal as a response signal from the LOCKN terminal of the door frame side effect receiver ICSDIC0 to the peripheral control MPU1511a. Therefore, when the LOCKN signal is input, it can be determined that there is no problem in the connection between the transmitter and the receiver and that there is no problem in the door frame side effect display device 460, while LOCKN. When no signal is input, it can be determined that the door frame side effect display device 460 has a problem because the connection between the transmitter and the receiver has a problem. Then, when it is determined that the door frame side effect display device 460 has a problem, the peripheral control MPU 1511a can execute the communication error display process of step S1548 in the connection recovery process of FIG. 102 as a notification process. It has become. In other words, when the peripheral control MPU1511a discovers a defect in the door frame side effect display device 460, it can notify the clerk of the hall or the like by executing the notification process. The clerk in the hall can extremely easily check whether or not the door frame side effect display device 460 has a problem before the player plays the game, and the check can be done without any trouble. ing. Therefore, it is possible to find a defect of the door frame side effect display device 460 without any trouble.

Further, as described above, the LOCKN signal is that the drawing data received from the door frame side effect receiver ICSDIC0 provided on the effect display drive board 4450 from the door frame side effect transmitter IC1512d provided on the peripheral control board 1510 is abnormal data. If it is determined that there is, it is a signal to be output to convey that fact. Specifically, the door frame side effect transmitter IC1512d provided on the peripheral control board 1510 and the door frame side effect receiver provided on the effect display drive board 4450. Since it is a signal output to request transmission of a predetermined data pattern (SYNC pattern) for confirming (recovering) the connection between the ICSDIC0 and the connection, that is, between the transmitter and the receiver, it is used for the door frame side effect. When the receiver ICSDIC0 cannot normally receive the image transmitted from the door frame side effect transmitter IC1512d, a communication problem occurs between the image communication between the door frame side effect receiver ICSDIC0 and the door frame side effect transmitter IC1512d and the receiver ICSDIC0 receives the image. The LOCKN signal can be output to the peripheral control MPU 1511a of the peripheral control unit 1511 in order to convey that the drawn drawing data becomes abnormal data. As a result, the peripheral control MPU1511a to which the LOCKN signal is input transmits a connection confirmation signal for transmitting a predetermined data pattern (SYNC pattern) from the door frame side effect transmitter IC1512d to the door frame side effect receiver ICSDIC0. By outputting to the frame-side effect transmitter IC1512d, it is possible to eliminate communication problems between image communications. In other words, the peripheral control MPU1511a can detect a defect of the door frame side effect display device 460 due to a communication defect between image communications at an early stage, and work on the door frame side effect transmitter IC1512d to eliminate the defect. It has become like. Therefore, it is possible to suppress a decrease in the player's motivation to play by discovering and eliminating the defect of the door frame side effect display device 460.

Further, the door frame side effect receiver ICSDIC0 that receives the image transmitted from the door frame side effect transmitter IC1512d and outputs it to the door frame side effect display device 460 receives the image transmitted from the door frame side effect transmitter IC1512d. When it cannot be received normally, the effect control microprocessor outputs the LOCKN signal, which is a communication failure occurrence signal, which informs that a communication failure has occurred between the image communication between the door frame side effect receiver ICSDIC0 and the door frame side effect transmitter IC1512d. Since it is possible to output to the peripheral control MPU 1511a of a certain peripheral control unit 1511, the peripheral control MPU 1511a to which the LOCKN signal is input controls the sound source built-in VDP1512a of the liquid crystal display control unit 1512 to cause a communication failure. A message "There was a problem with the liquid crystal display device on the upper plate side. Please call a clerk." It can be displayed and notified. In other words, the peripheral control MPU1511a detects a defect in the door frame side effect display device 460 due to a communication defect between image communications at an early stage, and notifies the player seated in front of the pachinko machine 1 to that effect. Since the player can inform the clerk of the hall or directly notify the clerk of the hall who happened to pass in front of the pachinko machine 1, the clerk of the hall has a problem. Work can be started at an early stage to resolve the problem. Therefore, it is possible to suppress a decrease in the player's motivation to play by early detecting and eliminating the defect of the door frame side effect display device 460.

Furthermore, the peripheral control MPU 1511a of the peripheral control unit 1511 includes the door frame side effect transmitter IC1512d provided on the peripheral control board 1510 and the door frame provided on the effect display drive board 4450 during the period (interval period) of timing K1 to timing K2. There is a problem in the connection between the side effect receiver ICSDIC0 and the receiver, that is, the connection between the transmitter and the receiver even once, and the connection between the transmitter and the receiver has a problem. When the cumulative number of times determined to be in this state does not reach the cumulative number upper limit CC-LMT, a predetermined data pattern (SYNC pattern) for enabling the LOCKN signal and eliminating a communication problem between image communications. Is transmitted from the door frame side effect transmitter IC1512d to the door frame side effect receiver ICSDIC0 to the door frame side effect transmitter IC1512d until the cumulative number of times reaches the cumulative number upper limit CC-LMT. , It is possible to keep outputting repeatedly. As a result, in the peripheral control MPU 1511a of the peripheral control unit 1511, the main control MPU 1310a of the main control board 1310 changes the first special symbol or the second special symbol game on the first special symbol display 1403 or the second special symbol display 1405. Since the connection confirmation signal can be repeatedly output only during the period when the game is not started and stopped and the progress of the game is not executed, it is possible to move toward the direction in which the communication problem is solved.

The peripheral control MPU 1511a of the peripheral control unit 1511 is provided with the door frame side effect transmitter IC1512d provided on the peripheral control board 1510 and the door frame side provided on the effect display drive board 4450 during the period (interval period) of timing K1 to timing K2. There is a case where the connection between the effect receiver ICSDIC0 and the connection, that is, the connection between the transmitter and the receiver has occurred even once, and the connection between the transmitter and the receiver has a problem. When the cumulative number of times determined to be in the above state has not reached the cumulative number upper limit value CC-LMT, a predetermined data pattern (SYNC pattern) for enabling the LOCKN signal and solving a communication problem between image communications is performed. A connection confirmation signal for transmitting from the door frame side effect transmitter IC1512d to the door frame side effect receiver ICSDIC0 is sent to the door frame side effect transmitter IC1512d until the cumulative number of times reaches the cumulative number upper limit CC-LMT. While the output is being repeated, the main control MPU 1310a of the main control board 1310 starts changing the first special symbol or the second special symbol game on the first special symbol display 1403 or the second special symbol display 1405, and the game is played. When the progress of the above is started again, the output of the connection confirmation signal is stopped, and when the connection confirmation signal output from the peripheral control MPU1511a is stopped and the connection confirmation signal is not input, the door frame side effect transmitter IC1512d is predetermined. Data pattern (SYNC pattern) can be stopped to be transmitted to the door frame side effect receiver ICSDIC0, and the image generated by the sound source built-in VDP1512a of the liquid crystal display control unit 1512 can be output to the door frame side effect receiver ICSDIC0. It has become like. As a result, in the peripheral control MPU 1511a of the peripheral control unit 1511, the main control MPU 1310a of the main control board 1310 changes the first special symbol or the second special symbol game on the first special symbol display 1403 or the second special symbol display 1405. By continuing to output the connection confirmation signal, which is a defect resolution signal, only during the period when the game is not progressing by displaying the start and stop, it is possible to move toward the direction in which the communication defect is resolved. Therefore, the main control MPU 1310a of the main control board 1310 starts and stops the first special symbol or the second special symbol game on the first special symbol display 1403 or the second special symbol display 1405. The main control MPU 1310a of the main control board 1310 is the first special symbol display 1403 or the second special symbol display 1405 when the connection confirmation signal is repeatedly output only during the period when the progress of the game is not executed. Even if the first special symbol or the second special symbol game is started to fluctuate and the progress of the game is started again, the distortion (distortion of the image) of the effect progressing on the display screen of the door frame side effect display device 460 is still present. Every time the main control MPU 1310a of the main control board 1310 starts and ends the progress of the game again (every time the period (interval period) of the timing K1 to the timing K2 is reached), it can be directed to be resolved.

According to the above embodiment, the pachinko machine 1 includes the main control board 1310 of FIG. 69 and the payout control board 951 of FIG. 70. The main control board 1310 has a first start port 2002 and a second start, which is a start area in which a game ball launched by a ball launching device 650 toward a game area 5a partitioned on the game board 5 is provided in the game area 5a. The main control MPU 1310a of FIG. 69, which is a game control microprocessor that controls the progress of the game based on the ball entering the mouth 2004, is mounted. The payout control board 951 is a payout control microprocessor that controls the payout of game balls by the payout device 830 based on the prize ball commands of FIGS. 88 (a) and 88 (b), which are payout commands from the main control board 1310. The payout control MPU952a of 70 is implemented.

The main control MPU 1310a, which is a game control microprocessor, includes at least a RAM (main control built-in RAM) built in the main control MPU 1310a. The main control built-in RAM can store information about the game even after the power is cut off.

The payout control MPU952a, which is a payout control microprocessor, includes at least a RAM (a payout control built-in RAM) built in the payout control MPU952a. The payout control built-in RAM can store information related to payout even after the power is cut off.

The pachinko machine 1 of the present embodiment further includes an operation switch 954 of FIG. 70. When the operation switch 954 is operated within the period from the time when the power is turned on to the time when the determination process of step S16 in the main control side power-on processing in FIG. 92 is performed, the information about the game stored in the main control built-in RAM is erased. When the RAM clear signal of FIG. 77 is output to the main control MPU1310a which is a game control microprocessor and is operated within the period from the time when the power is turned on to the time when the payout control unit is turned on, the payout control built-in RAM is used. A RAM clear function that outputs the RWMCLR signal of FIG. 82 to the payout control MPU952a, which is a payout control microprocessor, as a RAM clear signal for erasing the stored information related to payout, and a main control side power supply of FIG. 92 from the time the power is turned on. If the operation is performed after the period during which the determination process of step S16 in the turn-on process is performed (or the period during which the payout control unit power-on process is performed from the time when the power is turned on) elapses, the error generated for the payout device 830 is cleared. It also has an error canceling function of outputting the RWMCLR signal of FIG. 82 to the payout control microprocessor 952a without outputting it to the main control MPU1310a which is a game control microprocessor as an error canceling signal for the operation. ..

As described above, when the operation switch 954 is operated within the period from the time when the power is turned on to the time when the determination process of step S16 in the process when the main control side power is turned on in FIG. 92 is performed, the game stored in the main control built-in RAM is stored. When the RAM clear signal of FIG. 77 for erasing the information regarding the above is output to the main control MPU1310a which is a game control microprocessor and is operated within the period from the time when the power is turned on to the time when the payout control unit power is turned on. A RAM clear function that outputs the RWMCLR signal of FIG. 82 to the payout control MPU952a, which is a payout control microprocessor, as a RAM clear signal for erasing information about payout stored in the payout control built-in RAM, and a RAM clear function of FIG. 92 from the time the power is turned on. When the operation is performed after the period in which the determination process of step S16 in the main control side power-on process (or the period in which the payout control unit power-on process is performed from the time the power is turned on) has elapsed, the payout device 830 An error canceling function that outputs the RWMCLR signal of FIG. 82 to the payout control microprocessor MPU952a without outputting it to the main control MPU1310a, which is a game control microprocessor, as an error clearing signal for clearing the generated error. Since it is provided in combination, the pachinko machine 1 can be provided with two different functions, a RAM clear function and an error clear function, by operating one operation switch 954. Therefore, the RAM clear function and the error release function can be provided while contributing to cost reduction.

[Sensor signal input section of panel relay board 4161]
The sensor signal input unit of the panel relay board 4161 includes various detection sensors arranged on the game board, for example, a general winning opening sensor 4020, a first starting port sensor 4002, a second starting port sensor 4004, a count sensor 4005, and a vibration detection sensor. , This is a circuit in which a detection signal from a magnetic detection sensor 4024 or the like is input. Since the circuit configuration in which the detection signal from each detection sensor is input is the same, here, the magnetic detection sensor 4024 is given as an example of the detection sensor, and the circuit in which the detection signal from the magnetic detection sensor 4024 is input will be described. do.

In a gaming machine, a magnet (for example, a permanent magnet or an electromagnet) is brought closer to a gaming ball driven into the gaming area to manipulate the flowing state of the gaming ball as desired to obtain an unfair profit. There is no end to illegal gaming.

In order to detect such an illegal game act and suppress the illegal act by a light emitting means, a voice alarm, or the like, a magnetic detection sensor 4024 capable of detecting magnetism is provided corresponding to a predetermined position in the game area. There is.

Hereinafter, in the pachinko machine 1 according to this embodiment, the control related to the game progress and the production will be summarized.

As described above, the main control board 1310 executes various processes for controlling the entire pachinko machine 1 and outputs various control signals (control commands) according to the process results. Further, the peripheral control board 1510 has a display mode (design, various background images, characters, characters, etc.) of the effect display device 1600 based on the control signal (control command) output by the main control board 1310. It controls the display mode and operation mode of various members (such as the effect operation unit 400 and the movable member) that contribute to the effect.

In particular, the main control board 1310 performs a special symbol process process each time an interrupt process is performed. In this special control process, first, the first and second starting port winning processes are performed. In the first and second starting port winning processes, it is determined whether or not a game ball has won a prize at the starting port, and when it is determined that a winning ball has been won, the number of holdings on the corresponding special symbol side is increased by one. Will be done.

If the processing flag is 0 when the first / second start opening winning process is completed, the variation start process is executed. In this fluctuation start processing, on the condition that the number of pending hits is 1 or more, the jackpot determination in the pending state is digested and executed, and the result of this jackpot determination (winning, its type, etc.) is stored. , Update the processing flag to "1".

On the other hand, when the processing flag is 1 when the first and second starting port winning processes are completed, the variation pattern setting process is executed. In this variation pattern setting process, the variation pattern (identification symbol) of the special symbol (identification symbol) displayed on the first special symbol display or the second special symbol display based on the result of the jackpot determination memorized above and the current game state, etc. After determining and setting the variable time from the start of the variable display of the special symbol to the stop display) and the stop symbol (big hit symbol, lost symbol, etc.), the processing flag is updated to "2".

On the other hand, when the first and second start port winning processes are completed and the processing flag is 2, the variable processing is executed. In this variable processing, the fluctuation time determined and set in the fluctuation pattern setting process is monitored by a timer, and the fluctuation display of the special symbol on the first special symbol display or the second special symbol display is based on the time-out. To stop. After that, when the result of the jackpot determination stored in the fluctuation start processing is a jackpot, the process selection flag is updated to "3", and when the result of the jackpot determination stored in the fluctuation start processing is not a jackpot (loss). The process selection flag is updated to "0". That is, in this case, in the next interrupt processing, the fluctuation start processing is restarted.

On the other hand, when the first and second start opening winning processes are completed and the processing flag is 3, the jackpot game process is executed. In this jackpot game process, a condition device, which is one of the conditions for executing the jackpot game, is operated to set the mode (for example, the number of rounds) of the jackpot game determined based on the type of the winning jackpot. Based on this, the opening / closing operation of the opening / closing member 2106 is controlled. In addition, when the jackpot game ends, processing is performed to stop the operation of the condition device, and when the winning jackpot type is a special type, it is controlled to an advantageous state such as a time saving state or a probability change state. After updating the game status flag as shown, the processing flag is updated to "0". That is, in this case, in the next interrupt processing, the fluctuation start processing is restarted.

As the fluctuation pattern, a plurality of types of fluctuation patterns are stored. The variation pattern determines the time from the start to the end of the symbol variation of the special symbol, and the effect that appears on the effect display device 1600 by transmitting the information to the peripheral control board 1510. It can determine the type of pattern. In the present embodiment, a plurality of types of fluctuation patterns can be classified into a jackpot fluctuation fluctuation pattern, a missed reach fluctuation fluctuation pattern, and a missed fluctuation fluctuation pattern. The jackpot fluctuation is a fluctuation performed when the result of the jackpot determination is a jackpot, and in the effect display device 1600, the variation display of the decorative symbol is developed so as to finally stop and display the jackpot symbol after the reach effect. The production to be performed is executed. The out-of-reach variation is a variation that occurs when the result of the jackpot determination is a loss and it is determined that the reach is to be performed by the reach determination based on the reach random number. An effect is executed in which the variable display of the symbol is finally disengaged and the symbol is fixedly stopped and displayed. The out-of-order fluctuation is a fluctuation that occurs when the result of the jackpot determination is a loss and the reach determination based on the reach random number does not determine that the reach is to be performed. , The effect that the variable display of the decorative symbol is finally removed and the symbol is fixedly stopped and displayed is executed. Further, the fluctuation pattern is defined so that it is possible to specify which of the first special symbol side and the second special symbol side is the fluctuation pattern.

That is, in the peripheral control board 1510, by acquiring game information such as the result of the jackpot determination from the main control board 1310 and referring to the game information, such a variation pattern of the decorative pattern can appear. Further, in the peripheral control board 1510, the effect display device 1600 makes the effect display device 1600 appear a variation pattern of the decorative pattern based on the acquired game information, and also changes the effect display (background or reserved image) related to the degree of expectation. Controls such as changing the mode (display and movement) of the operation unit 400 and operating a movable member such as the movable effect unit 3100 after the backside are executed.

Next, the game control of the pachinko machine 1 in this embodiment will be described in detail. FIG. 104 is a flowchart showing the procedure for the special symbol and the special electric accessory control process (FIG. 94: step S114).

Now, assuming that the main control program is shifted to the special symbol and special electric accessory control process (FIG. 94: step S114), the main control MPU 1310a of the main control board 1310 first has the above-mentioned first as shown in FIG. 104. On condition that the detection signal by the start port sensor 4002 is in the ON state (the ball has entered the first start port 2002) (YES in step S5231), the first big hit determination random number is acquired from the above random number counter. The first start port passing process such as storing this in the first special symbol hold storage area of the main control built-in RAM is executed (step S5232). Further, on condition that the detection signal by the second start port sensor 4004 is in the ON state (there is a ball entering the second start port 2004) (YES in step S5233), the second special random number of the second special symbol (YES in step S5233). A second start port passage process such as acquiring a second big hit determination random number) from the random number counter and storing it in the second special symbol hold storage area of the main control built-in RAM is executed (step S5234).

Next, it is determined whether or not the jackpot executing flag indicating that the jackpot gaming state is controlled is set (step S5235), and if the jackpot executing flag is set, the jackpot gaming state is controlled. The jackpot control process (step S5240a) is executed.

In the jackpot control process according to this embodiment, as shown in FIG. 110,
-When the result of the judgment processing regarding the display mode when the variable display of the first special symbol is stopped is a mode suggesting either "8R probability variation jackpot A" or "8R normal jackpot", the big prize opening 2005 The opening / closing pattern (round game) that closes the game after opening the game for a long time (for example, 28.5 seconds) or when it is detected by the count sensor 4005 that nine game balls have won in the big winning opening 2005 is repeated eight times. Control to 8R jackpot game state,
-When the result of the judgment processing regarding the display mode when the variation display of the second special symbol is stopped is a mode suggesting "16R probability variation jackpot", the grand prize opening 2005 is opened for a long time (for example, 28.5 seconds). After that, or when it is detected by the count sensor 4005 that nine game balls have won in the big winning opening 2005, the opening / closing pattern (round game) is repeated 16 times to control the 16R big hit game state.
-When the result of the judgment processing regarding the display mode when the variation display of the second special symbol is stopped is a mode suggesting "8R probability variation jackpot B", the grand prize opening 2005 is opened for a long time (for example, 28.5 seconds). ) Or when it is detected by the count sensor 4005 that nine game balls have won in the big winning opening 2005, the opening / closing pattern (round game) is repeated eight times to control the 8R big hit game state.
-When the result of the judgment processing regarding the display mode when the variation display of the second special symbol is stopped is a mode suggesting "2R normal jackpot", the jackpot 2005 is opened for a short time (for example, 0.6 seconds). It is controlled to a 2R jackpot game state in which the opening / closing pattern (round game) that closes after the game is repeated twice.

That is, in the pachinko machine 1 according to this embodiment, right-handed is more advantageous to the player than left-handed in the situation where the time-saving control is executed, and right-handed is more advantageous than right-handed in the situation where the time-saving control is not executed. As mentioned above, left-handed hitting is advantageous for the player. In this regard, in the left-handed state, even if a jackpot is won as a result of a lottery for the first special symbol corresponding to the acceptance of the game ball to the first starting port 2002, a jackpot game that is open for a long time of up to 8 rounds. Only the state (approximately 1000 game balls can be acquired) occurs.

On the other hand, in the right-handed state, if a big hit is won in the lottery for the second special symbol corresponding to the acceptance of the game ball to the second starting port 2004, there is a probability of approximately 50% (allocation rate of winning species). ), The expected value of the prize balls that can be obtained when the jackpot is won, such as the 16-round long-open jackpot game state (approximately 2000 game balls can be obtained) is executed. Therefore, when the transition to the right-handed state is controlled, a larger amount of prize balls can be expected than when the player is in the left-handed state.

In the big hit control process, in starting such open control of the big winning opening 2005, first, a process of starting the operation of the condition device, a process of resetting the fluctuation number counter described later, and the like are performed.

Further, in the jackpot control process, after performing such opening control of the jackpot 2005, as shown in FIG. 110, there is a high probability according to the winning species of the jackpot that triggered the jackpot game. Executes each set process of flag and time saving flag.

The high-probability flag is a flag indicating that the state is in a high-probability state, and is used in the big-hit determination process shown in FIG. 109, which will be described later. Probability change big hit, 8R Probability change big hit B) is set when the game state is finished, and when the next big hit is made, the first special symbol stop process shown in FIG. 114 or the second special symbol stop process (not shown) will be described later. Will be reset with.

The time saving flag is a flag indicating that the time saving control is being executed (low probability time saving state, high probability time saving state), and as shown in FIG. 110, the time saving control (high probability time saving state) after the end of the jackpot game state. The first special symbol stop processing shown in FIG. 114, which will be described later, is set when the jackpot game state based on the jackpot (8R probability variation jackpot A, 16R probability variation jackpot, 8R probability variation jackpot B) is ended, and when the next jackpot is reached. Alternatively, it is reset by the second special symbol stop process (not shown). Alternatively, when the special symbol (first special symbol, second special symbol) is digested 100 times without winning the jackpot after the low probability time saving state occurs, the first special symbol stop processing shown in FIG. 114, which will be described later, is performed. Alternatively, it is reset by the second special symbol stop process (not shown).

The fluctuation count counter is a counter that indicates the number of fluctuations of the special symbol after the fluctuation count counter is reset, and is used in the first fluctuation pattern setting process (second fluctuation pattern setting process) shown in FIG. 112, which will be described later. It is a thing, and it is updated (for example, count-up) when the special symbol (first special symbol, second special symbol) is changed, and at least a specific type of jackpot (16R probability variation jackpot, 8R probability variation jackpot B). It is reset when starting the jackpot game state based on.

If the big hit executing flag is not set (NO in step S5235), then whether or not the small hit executing flag indicating that the small hit gaming state is controlled is set as the process of step S5236. To determine. As a result, if the small hit execution flag is set, the small hit control process (step S5240b) for controlling the small hit game state is executed. In the small hit control process, a process of opening the large winning opening 2005 for a specific opening time (for example, 1.8 seconds) is performed.

Here, in the small hit control process (step S5240b), unlike the case of the big hit control process (step S5240a), after such opening control of the big winning opening 2005 is performed, the high probability flag, the time saving flag, and the time saving are performed. Each set process such as the number of times counter is not performed. However, in the pachinko machine 1 according to this embodiment, as shown in FIG. 110 (a), the small hit is not won in the big hit determination.

If the small hit execution flag is not set (NO in step S5236), the value of the second special hold number counter indicating the number of second big hit determination random numbers stored in the second special symbol hold storage area is On condition that it is "0" (step S5237), the first special symbol process process including the lottery process related to the display mode when the variable display of the first special symbol is stopped is executed (step S5238).

On the other hand, when the value of the second special hold number counter indicating the number of random numbers for the second jackpot determination stored in the second special symbol hold storage area is not "0" (step S5237), the second special symbol The second special symbol process process including the lottery process related to the display mode when the variable display is stopped is executed (step S5239). As a result, as long as the game is played so that the lottery for the second special symbol that is in the pending state is not lost (unless the value of the second special reserved number counter is "0"), the first special symbol Regardless of the hold status of the lottery, only the lottery for the second big hit judgment random number will be performed continuously without interruption (priority execution).

Therefore, in the pachinko machine 1 according to this embodiment, the player only maintains the driving of the game ball (right-handed) to the right side of the center accessory 2500 in the time-saving state (high probability time-saving state). Only the lottery (judgment processing) for the two big hit judgment random numbers can be continuously performed without interruption.

In addition, the special symbol game (symbol variation) using the second special symbol (second special symbol) is limited to the one that is executed with priority over the special symbol game using the first special symbol (first special symbol). Instead, for example, the execution of the special figure game may be started in the order in which the game ball enters (passes) the first start port 2002 or the second start port 2004 and the start prize is generated. In this case, a table for storing data that can specify the order in which the start winnings are generated is provided, and the execution of the special figure game using either the first special figure or the second special figure is started from the stored data. I just need to be able to decide.

FIG. 105 is a flowchart showing the procedure for the first starting port passing process (step S5232).

Now, if it is determined in the process of step S5231 that the first start port sensor 4002 is in the ON state and the game ball has entered the first start port 2002, as shown in FIG. 105. In addition, the main control MPU 1310a of the main control board 1310 first, as the process of step S5421, first, each random number on the first special symbol side (random number for jackpot determination, random number for reach determination, random number for jackpot symbol, random number for variable display pattern). ) Is obtained from the above random number counter.

Next, the main control MPU 1310a of the main control board 1310 acquires the counter value by the first special hold number counter from the main control built-in RAM, and the hold number of the first special symbol is the maximum value based on this counter value. It is determined whether or not it is "4" which is (upper limit value) (step S5242). In the process of step S5242, when it is determined that the number of reserved first special symbols is not the maximum value, the variable display of the first special symbol (determination process for the first special symbol) is newly suspended. In order to bring the state to the above state, the following steps S5243 to S5245 are performed.

That is, first, as the process of step S5243, the first special hold number counter is counted up (1 addition). Next, as the process of step S5244, each random number acquired in step S5241 is stored in the first special symbol hold storage area corresponding to the counter value by the first special hold number counter in the storage area of the main control built-in RAM. Store in.

Then, the first special figure look-ahead process for executing the look-ahead effect on the first special figure side is executed, and the process ends (step S5245). As will be described later, the look-ahead effect on the first special symbol side is an effect that suggests the determination result (or the degree of expectation thereof) of the first special symbol in advance before starting the variable display of the first special symbol. In this first special figure pre-reading process, information required for determining whether or not the pre-reading effect is executed and the content of the effect on the peripheral control board 1510 side (information on winning for pre-reading determination, symbol type for pre-reading determination). Information, information on the variation pattern number for pre-reading determination, etc.) is generated and stored in the corresponding storage area as transmission information for the peripheral control board 1510. At this time, instead of the determination result itself of the first special symbol, the command may include information about the stop symbol of the special symbol as information suggesting the type of the jackpot game. For example, information on the stage before the final determination, such as the SP reach group, the normal reach group, the latent hit group among the symbol types, and the small hit group among the fluctuation patterns, may be transmitted as a look-ahead command.

On the other hand, in the process of step S5242, when it is determined that the number of reserved first special symbols is the maximum value, the variable display of the first special symbol is not newly suspended. That is, by terminating the processing without executing the processing of steps S5243 to S5245, the variable display of the first special symbol is not newly put on hold.

FIG. 106 is a flowchart showing the procedure for the second starting port passing process (step S5234).

Now, if it is determined in the process of step S5233 that the second start port sensor 4004 is in the ON state and the game ball has entered the second start port 2004, as shown in FIG. 106. In addition, the main control MPU 1310a of the main control board 1310 first, as the process of step S5251, first, each random number on the second special symbol side (random number for second jackpot determination, random number for second reach determination, for second jackpot symbol). Random numbers, random numbers for the second variation display pattern) are acquired from the above random number counter.

Next, the main control MPU 1310a of the main control board 1310 acquires the counter value by the second special hold number counter from the main control built-in RAM, and the hold number of the second special symbol is the maximum value based on this counter value. It is determined whether or not the value is "4" (step S5252). In the process of step S5252, when it is determined that the number of reserved second special symbols is not the maximum value, the variable display control of the second special symbol (lottery for the second special symbol) is newly suspended. In order to bring the state to the above state, the following steps S5253 to S5255 are performed.

That is, first, as the process of step S5253, the second special hold number counter is counted up (added by 1). Next, as the process of step S5254, each random number acquired in step S5251 is stored in the second special symbol hold storage area corresponding to the counter value by the second special hold number counter in the storage area of the main control built-in RAM. Store in.

Then, the second special figure look-ahead process for executing the look-ahead effect on the second special figure side is executed, and the process ends (step S5255). As will be described later, the pre-reading effect on the second special symbol side is an effect that suggests the determination result (or the degree of expectation thereof) of the second special symbol in advance before starting the variable display of the second special symbol. In this second special figure pre-reading process, the peripheral control board 1510 generates information (winning information, symbol type, variation pattern number, etc.) required for determining whether or not the pre-reading effect is executed and the content of the effect. It is stored in the corresponding storage area as transmission information for the peripheral control board 1510. At this time, instead of the determination result itself of the second special symbol, the command may include information on the stop symbol of the special symbol as information suggesting the type of the jackpot game. For example, information on the stage before the final determination, such as the SP reach group, the normal reach group, the latent hit group among the symbol types, and the small hit group among the fluctuation patterns, may be transmitted as a look-ahead command.

On the other hand, in the process of step S5252, when it is determined that the number of reserved second special symbols is the maximum value, the variable display control of the second special symbol is not newly suspended. That is, by terminating the processing without executing the processing of steps S5253 to S5255, the variation display control of the second special symbol is not newly put on hold.

When the number of reserved first special symbols changes based on the entry of a game ball into the first starting port 2002, a command for instructing the number of reserved first special symbols in the peripheral control board command transmission process (step S120). (First hold number designation command 0 to 4) is set and transmitted to the peripheral control board 1510. Further, when the number of reserved second special symbols changes based on the entry of the game ball into the second starting port 2004, the number of reserved second special symbols is instructed in the peripheral control board command transmission process (step S120). The command to be executed (second hold number designation command 0 to 4) is set and transmitted to the peripheral control board 1510.

FIG. 107 is a flowchart showing the procedure for the first special symbol process process (step S5238). The first special symbol process process executed in step S5238 of the special symbol and special electric accessory control process and the second special symbol process process executed in step S5239 of the special symbol and special electric accessory control process are the same. Since it is a program module of the above and only the random numbers and tables used for the determination are different, only the first special symbol process process executed in step S5238 of the special symbol and special electric accessory control process will be described here. In the first special symbol process process, one of the following five process processes is selectively executed according to the first special symbol process flag.

1. 1. The big hit judgment random number corresponding to the first special symbol stored in the main control built-in RAM is read, and based on the read big hit judgment random number, lottery processing for the display mode when the fluctuation control of the first special symbol is stopped, etc. First special symbol normal processing (step S5280)

2. First special symbol stop symbol setting process (step S5281) in which the process of determining the mode when the variation control of the first special symbol is stopped is performed based on the result of the determination process of the display mode when the variation control of the first special symbol is stopped. )

3. 3. It is executed corresponding to the variation mode of the first special symbol displayed on the first special symbol display 1403 based on the random number for the variation display pattern and the special symbol on the effect display device (game board side effect display device) 1600. First variation pattern setting process (step S5282) in which a lottery process or the like is performed for the variation mode of the effect display to be performed.

4. First special symbol variation processing (step S5283) that waits until the variation display of the first special symbol on the first special symbol display 1403 is stopped.

5. The mode when the fluctuation control of the first special symbol is stopped, which is determined based on the result of the determination processing regarding the display mode when the fluctuation control of the first special symbol is stopped, is displayed on the first special symbol display 1403. First special symbol stop processing (step S5284) for stopping the variable display of the first special symbol

The initial value of the first special symbol process flag is operated so as to indicate that the first special symbol normal process (step S5280) should be performed.

FIG. 108 is a flowchart showing the procedure for the first special symbol normal processing (step S5280).

When the first special symbol process flag indicates that the first special symbol normal processing should be performed, the main control MPU 1310a of the main control board 1310 first, as shown in FIG. 108, first steps S5301. As the process of, it is determined whether or not there is a variation display of the first special symbol in the hold state based on the counter value by the first special hold number counter. As a result, when it is determined that there is a variation display of the first special symbol in the hold state, it is then stored in the first special symbol hold storage area of the main control built-in RAM as the process of step S5302. The earliest memory of the random numbers related to the display mode of the first special symbol (for example, the random number for the first jackpot determination, the random number for the first reach determination, the random number for the first jackpot symbol, the random number for the first variation display pattern). The random number stored in the area is read from the RAM of the same main control. Next, as the processing of steps S5303 and S304, the first special hold number counter is counted down, and the first special is stored in each storage area of the first special symbol hold storage area of the main control built-in RAM. First-in first-out (First-In) random numbers related to the display mode when the variable display of the symbol is stopped (for example, the random number for the first jackpot determination, the random number for the first reach determination, the random number for the first jackpot symbol, the random number for the first variation display pattern). The shift operation is performed in the mode of First-Out).

Specifically, the first special symbol reservation storage area has four storage areas (first special symbol reservation storage area a to first special symbol reservation storage area d), and a start winning prize for the first start port 2002. Random numbers extracted according to the occurrence are stored in order from the first (earliest) area. Then, when a start winning prize occurs when a random number is stored in the nth (n = 1-3) storage area, the extracted random number is stored in the n + 1th (n = 1-3) storage area, and the first prize is stored. When the start condition of the variable display based on the random number stored in the storage area of is satisfied, various random numbers stored in the first storage area are read and stored in the Nth (N = 2 to 4) storage area. Various random numbers are moved to the N-1st (N = 2-4) th storage area. As a result, the order in which the variable display of the first special symbol is held can be identifiable and stored, and the hold of the variable display is released in order from the earliest hold (hold that occurred first). .. Similarly, the second special symbol reservation storage area has four storage areas (second special symbol reservation storage area a to second special symbol reservation storage area d), and responds to the occurrence of a start winning prize in the second start port 2004. The random numbers extracted by the above are stored in order from the first (earliest) area. Then, when a start winning prize occurs when a random number is stored in the nth (n = 1-3) storage area, the extracted random number is stored in the n + 1th (n = 1-3) storage area, and the first prize is stored. When the start condition of the variable display based on the random number stored in the storage area of is satisfied, various random numbers stored in the first storage area are read and stored in the Nth (N = 2 to 4) storage area. Various random numbers are moved to the N-1st (N = 2-4) th storage area. As a result, the order in which the variable display of the second special symbol is held can be identifiable and stored, and the hold of the variable display is released in order from the earliest hold (hold that occurred first). ..

After that, as the process of step S5305, the jackpot determination process, which is the determination process for the winning of the jackpot, is performed based on the read out random number for determining the first jackpot. After that, when the first special symbol process flag is updated so that the process shifts to the first special symbol stop symbol setting process (step S5281) (step S5306), this process ends.

FIG. 109 is a flowchart showing the procedure for the jackpot determination process (step S5305).

If the current gaming state is a high-probability state (high-probability time-saving state, high-probability non-time-saving state) (step S5311), the main control MPU 1310a of the main control board 1310 will be in the high-probability time shown in FIG. 110 (A). If the jackpot determination table is selected (step S5312) and the current gaming state is a low probability state (step S5311), the jackpot determination table at the time of low probability shown in FIG. 110 (A) is selected (step S5313) and selected. The jackpot determination table is compared with the jackpot determination random number read in step S5302 of the first special symbol normal processing (step S5314).

As shown in FIG. 110A, the jackpot determination table is stored in the main control built-in ROM, and when the game state is low probability for each type of special random number (first jackpot determination random number, second jackpot determination random number). The jackpot judgment table at the time of low probability used in the case of (low probability non-time saving state, low probability time saving state) and the high used when the game state is high probability (high probability non-time saving state, high probability time saving state). It is equipped with a jackpot judgment table at the time of probability. Then, in the low-probability jackpot determination table referred to for comparison with the first jackpot determination random number, 204 types of first jackpot determination random numbers match the jackpot determination value indicating that the jackpot has been won, and 65332. The first big hit judgment random numbers (65536 types) are associated with each other so as to match the deviation judgment value indicating that the first big hit judgment random number of the type is the above loss (big hit probability at low probability; generally "1/321"). On the other hand, in order to compare with the big hit determination random number (second big hit determination random number) of the second special symbol in the second special symbol process process executed in step S5239 of the special symbol and special electric accessory control process. In the jackpot determination table at the time of low probability referred to, 204 types of second jackpot determination random numbers match the jackpot determination value indicating that the jackpot has been won, and 65332 types of second jackpot determination random numbers are the above-mentioned loss. The above-mentioned second jackpot determination random numbers are associated with each other so as to match the deviation determination value indicating that (the jackpot probability at the time of low probability; approximately 1/321).

Further, in the high-probability jackpot determination table referred to for comparison with the first jackpot determination random number, 2040 types of first jackpot determination random numbers match the jackpot determination value, and 63496 types of first jackpot determination random numbers are used. The above-mentioned first jackpot determination random numbers are associated with each other so that the random numbers match the outlier determination value (big hit probability at high probability; approximately 1/32). On the other hand, in the jackpot determination table at the time of high probability, which is referred to for comparison with the second jackpot determination random number in the second special symbol process process executed in step S5239 of the special symbol and special electric accessory control process. , 2040 types of second jackpot judgment random numbers match the jackpot judgment value indicating that the jackpot has been won, and 63496 types of second jackpot judgment random numbers match the deviation judgment value indicating that the above is lost. The above-mentioned second big hit determination random numbers are associated with each other (big hit probability at high probability; approximately 1/32). The jackpot judgment value (of the jackpot judgment value) set in the jackpot judgment table referred to for comparison with the first jackpot judgment random number and the jackpot judgment table referred to for comparison with the second jackpot judgment random number. The number of jackpots may be the same and the jackpot judgment values may be different (the jackpot probability is the same), or the number of jackpot judgment values may be different (the jackpot probability is different)). In this case, at least one of the big hit judgment table at the low probability and the big hit judgment table at the high probability may be different (both may be different). ..

When the main control MPU 1310a of the main control board 1310 is determined to be a big hit as a result of comparison between the selected big hit determination table and the random number for big hit determination read out in step S5302 of the first special symbol normal processing (step S5315). ), Set the jackpot flag indicating that the fluctuation has won the jackpot (step S5316), and end the jackpot determination process.

Further, when it is determined in step S5315 that the jackpot has been lost, the read jackpot determination random number matches the small hit determination value indicating that the jackpot has been won based on the selected jackpot determination table. Whether or not it is determined (step S5317). However, as described above, in step S5302 of the first special symbol normal processing (second special symbol process processing) of this example, the big hit determination random number that matches the small hit determination value is not read out (small hit probability; 0/65536), in this step S5317, it is determined that the small hit has not been won (a loss determination is made).

On the other hand, when it is determined in step S5317 that the result is lost, the reach determination table is compared with the reach determination random number read in step S5302 (step S5319).

The reach determination table (not shown) is stored in the built-in ROM of the main control, and is used when the gaming state is in the high-probability non-time-saving state. It is provided with a reach determination table in a high-probability time-saving state used in the case of, and a reach determination table in a low-probability state used when the gaming state is in a low-probability state (low-probability non-time-saving state).

Here, in the reach determination table in the high probability time saving state, it matches the reach determination value indicating that one type of reach determination random number reaches, and the reach determination value indicating that 71 types of reach determination random numbers do not reach. The above reach determination random numbers are associated with each other so as to match with. However, in the reach judgment table in the high probability time saving state, in order to maximize the progress speed of the game in the time saving state, it matches the reach judgment value indicating that all 72 types of reach judgment random numbers do not reach. This may be done so that it does not match the reach determination value indicating reach.

Further, in the reach judgment table in the low probability state, five types of reach judgment random numbers including the same reach judgment random number as the reach judgment random number set in the reach judgment table in the high probability time saving state reach. The reach determination random numbers are associated with each other so as to match the reach determination values shown and to match the reach determination values indicating that the 67 types of reach determination random numbers do not reach. As described above, in this embodiment, the reach determination value indicating reach is higher in the low probability state than in the high probability time saving state, and can be obtained with a predetermined probability.

Further, in the reach judgment table in the high-probability non-time-saving state, five types of reach judgment including the same reach judgment random number as the reach judgment random number set in the reach judgment table in the high-probability time-saving state and the low-probability state. The reach determination random numbers are associated with each other so as to match the reach determination value indicating that the random number for reach is reached and the reach determination value indicating that the 67 types of reach determination random numbers are not reachable. As described above, in this embodiment, in the high-probability non-time-saving state, the reach determination value indicating reach is the same as in the low-probability non-time-saving state.

When the main control MPU 1310a of the main control board 1310 determines that the reach is lost as a result of comparison between the selected reach determination table and the reach determination random number read in step S5302 (step S5319) (YES in step S5120). , The reach flag indicating that the fluctuation becomes reach is set, and the process ends (step S5121).

FIG. 111 is a flowchart showing the procedure for the first special symbol stop symbol setting process (step S5281).

When the first special symbol process flag indicates that the first special symbol stop symbol setting process should be performed, the main control MPU 1310a of the main control board 1310 first, as shown in FIG. 111, first. The result of the lottery process of the display mode when the variable display of the first special symbol is stopped, that is, the result of the jackpot determination process (step S5305) is determined. The lottery processing result is determined by determining whether or not the jackpot flag is set (step S5331).

If the jackpot flag is set in step S5331, the main control MPU 1310a selects the symbol determination table shown in FIG. 110 (B) and reads out the random number for the first jackpot symbol in step S5302 of the first special symbol normal processing. And the selected symbol determination table are compared with each other to determine the jackpot symbol as the mode (stop symbol of the first special symbol) when the fluctuation control of the first special symbol is stopped (step S5332).

As shown in FIG. 110 (B), in the symbol determination table on the first special symbol side, random numbers for the first jackpot symbol (here, a total of 200 random numbers) are displayed for the judgment result (8R probability variation jackpot A, 8R normal jackpot). Random numbers for the first big hit symbol) are stored in the form of being associated with each other. As shown in FIG. 110 (C), in the symbol determination table on the second special symbol side, a random number for the second jackpot symbol (16R probability variation jackpot, 8R probability variation jackpot B, 2R normal jackpot) is displayed. Here, a total of 200 random numbers for the second big hit symbol) are stored in a form associated with each other.

In the main control MPU 1310a of the main control board 1310, the type of the big hit is determined by specifying the determination result associated with the acquired random number for the big hit symbol. In the symbol determination table of this example, the type of jackpot determined based on the random number for the first jackpot symbol and the type of jackpot determined based on the random number for the second jackpot symbol are set to be different. .. More specifically, the distribution rate (allocation) between the probabilistic jackpot that triggers the transition to the high-probability state and the normal jackpot that does not trigger the transition to the high-probability state is the same, but for the first jackpot symbol. The expected value of the game ball that can be obtained by the big hit determined based on the random number for the second big hit symbol is larger than the expected value of the game ball that can be obtained by the big hit determined based on the random number. ing.

The following is a brief summary of the specific game and production contents for each type of jackpot.
1. 1. After the big hit symbol combination appears in the effect display device 1600, after the big winning opening 2103 is opened for a long time (for example, 28.5 seconds), or 9 game balls are won in the big winning opening 2103, the above count sensor 4005 By repeating the opening / closing pattern (round game) that closes when detected in, the game ball is controlled to the 8R jackpot game state in which the ball can enter the jackpot 2103 (easy), and after this 8R jackpot game state. Controls the high-probability time-saving state until the next big hit game state occurs, and also performs a battle effect (battle victory effect) in which a specific character wins during the execution period of the 8R big-hit game state. 8R probability variation jackpot A controlled by the effect mode indicated in the effect display device 1600 that is in a relatively advantageous state.

2. After the big hit symbol combination appears in the effect display device 1600, after the big winning opening 2103 is opened for a long time (for example, 28.5 seconds), or 9 game balls are won in the big winning opening 2103, the above count sensor 4005 By repeating the opening / closing pattern (round game) that closes when detected in, the game ball is controlled to the 8R jackpot game state in which the ball can enter the jackpot 2103 (easy), and after this 8R jackpot game state. Controls the variable display of the special symbol to a low probability time saving state until it is digested 100 times (or wins a jackpot within the period until it is digested 100 times), and during the execution period of the 8R jackpot game state An 8R normal jackpot that performs a battle effect in which a specific character is defeated (battle defeat effect) and is controlled by the effect mode indicated by the effect display device 1600 that it is in a relatively disadvantageous state in a low probability time saving state.

3. 3. After the big hit symbol combination appears in the effect display device 1600, after the big winning opening 2103 is opened for a long time (for example, 28.5 seconds), or 9 game balls are won in the big winning opening 2103, the above count sensor 4005 By repeating the opening / closing pattern (round game) that closes when detected in, the game ball is controlled to the 16R jackpot game state in which the ball can enter the jackpot 2103 (easy), and after this 16R jackpot game state. Controls to a high-probability time-saving state until the next big hit game state occurs, and also directs whether the number of rounds exceeds 8 rounds (16 rounds) during the execution period of the 16R big hit game state (success production). ) Is performed, and after a predetermined period of time has passed since the time was controlled to the high probability time saving state, it is controlled to the effect mode shown in the effect display device 1600 that the state is relatively advantageous. 16R probability change jackpot

4. After the big hit symbol combination appears on the effect display device 1600, after the big winning opening 2103 is opened for a long time (for example, 28.5 seconds), or 9 game balls are won in the big winning opening 2103, the count sensor 4005 By repeating the opening / closing pattern (round game) that closes when detected in, the game ball is controlled to the 8R jackpot game state in which the ball can enter the jackpot 2103 (easy), and after this 8R jackpot game state. Controls to a high-probability time-saving state until the next big hit game state occurs, and also directs whether the number of rounds exceeds 8 rounds (16 rounds) during the execution period of the 8R big hit game state (failure effect). ) Is performed, and after a predetermined period of time has passed since the time was controlled to the high probability time saving state, it is controlled to the effect mode shown in the effect display device 1600 that the state is relatively advantageous. 8R Probability change jackpot B

5. After the big hit symbol combination appears on the effect display device 1600, after the big winning opening 2103 is opened for a short time (for example, 0.6 seconds), or 9 game balls are won in the big winning opening 2103, the count sensor 4005 By repeating the opening / closing pattern (round game) that closes when detected in, the game ball is controlled to the 2R jackpot game state in which it is difficult for the game ball to enter the big winning opening 2103, and after this 2R jackpot game state, it is special. While controlling the variable display of the symbol to a low probability time saving state until it is digested 100 times (or winning a jackpot within the period until it is digested 100 times), a specific character is in the execution period of the 2R jackpot game state. Performs a battle effect (battle defeat effect) in which the player is defeated, and in a low-probability time-saving state, the 2R normal jackpot is controlled by the effect mode indicating that the effect display device 1600 is in a relatively disadvantageous state.

In the left-handed state, the game ball does not pass through the gate portion 2003, and the movable piece (not shown) that opens the second starting port 2004 is not driven. Therefore, in the left-handed state, the winning of the game ball to the second starting port 2004 does not occur, only the winning of the game ball to the first starting port 2002 occurs, and there is a reserved ball with the second special symbol. Except for the case, only the variable display of the first special symbol on the first special symbol display 1403 is executed, and the jackpot (8R probability variation jackpot A, 8R normal jackpot) related to the first special symbol is generated. Similarly, in the right-handed state, the game ball does not win a prize at the first starting port 2002. Therefore, in the right-handed state, only the winning of the game ball to the second starting port 2004 will occur, and unless there is a reserved ball of the first special symbol, the second special symbol on the second special symbol display 1186 Only the variation display is executed, and the jackpot related to the second special symbol (16R probability variation jackpot, 8R probability variation jackpot B, 2R normal jackpot) is generated.

In addition, in the big hit related to the first special symbol, the opening and closing pattern of opening the big winning opening 2103 for a long time (for example, 28.5 seconds) is repeated eight times, and only about 1000 game balls are paid out. In the big hit related to the second special symbol, it is possible to pay out approximately 2000 game balls by repeating the opening / closing pattern of opening the big winning opening 2103 for a long time (for example, 28.5 seconds) 16 times.

If the 8R probability variation jackpot A is determined in the first special symbol stop symbol setting process, the 8R probability variation jackpot A symbol is determined as the jackpot symbol, and if the 8R normal jackpot is determined, the 8R normal jackpot symbol is selected as the jackpot symbol. decide. Although not shown, when the 16R probability variation jackpot is determined in the second special symbol stop symbol setting process, the 16R probability variation jackpot symbol is determined as the jackpot symbol, and when the 8R probability variation jackpot B is determined, the 8R probability variation jackpot is determined as the jackpot symbol. If the B symbol is determined and the 2R normal jackpot is determined, the 2R normal jackpot symbol is determined as the jackpot symbol.

Further, if the big hit flag is not set in step S5331, the main control MPU 1310a of the main control board 1310 next determines whether or not the small hit flag is set as the process of step S5333. As a result, if the small hit flag is set in the process corresponding to the step S5333 in the second special symbol process process (step S5239), the small hit symbol (the mode when the fluctuation of the second special symbol is stopped) is set. After determining the specific symbol stop mode) (step S5334), the process proceeds to step S5337.

Furthermore, if the small hit flag is not set in step S5333, the main control MPU 1310a of the main control board 1310 determines to be a lost symbol as an mode when the fluctuation of the special symbol is stopped (step S5336), and then proceeds to step S5337. do.

Then, after the determination process for the stop symbol is performed in this way, the main control MPU 1310a of the main control board 1310 performs any of the above lottery results (big hit type, small hit, reach loss, and loss) as the process of step S5337. (It may be the one that indicates the mode of the stop symbol of the first special symbol)) is set to the determination result notification command corresponding to each of the lottery results so that the instruction (may indicate the mode of the stop symbol of the first special symbol) is transmitted to the peripheral control board 1510. After that, as the process of step S5338, this process ends when the first special symbol process flag is updated so that the process shifts to the first variation pattern setting process (step S5282).

The peripheral control MPU1511a displays and controls the effect display device 1600 based on the received determination result notification command and the variation pattern command (the left, middle, and right decorative symbols are variablely displayed, and the left decorative symbol → the right decorative symbol → Stop and display in the order of the middle decorative symbols (Note that the left, middle, and right decorative symbols may be displayed in a variable manner in synchronization with the same symbol and stopped and displayed at the same time). For example, the peripheral control MPU1511a is determined to be a combination in which three left, middle, and right decorative symbols are aligned when a type other than the 2R normal jackpot is won as a jackpot. On the other hand, when a 2R normal jackpot is obtained, a specific symbol combination (a combination in which at least one of the left, middle, and right decorative symbols is not the same as the other symbols) is determined. In addition, when the reach loss is specified, the missed symbol with reach (the combination of the same symbols with the left and right decorative symbols "0" to "9" but different intermediate decorative symbols; reach loss. (Symbol), and if the outlier is specified, it is decided to be the outlier symbol without reach (a combination in which at least the left and right decorative symbols are different symbols among the left, middle, and right decorative symbols). The stop symbol determined in this way is displayed on the effect display device 1600 when the variation time specified from the variation pattern command elapses (at the end of the game effect).

In any case, when a hit is obtained as a result of the progress of the game, the peripheral control MPU1511a causes the hit effect display (special display mode) to appear before the big hit game is started, and the big hit game. Is designed to appear during the jackpot game after the start of.

FIG. 112 is a flowchart showing the procedure for the first fluctuation pattern setting process (step S5282).

When the first special symbol process flag indicates that the first fluctuation pattern setting process should be performed, the jackpot flag is set in the main control MPU 1310a of the main control board 1310 as shown in FIG. 112. If this is done (step S5341), a variable pattern table (not shown) at the time of big hit according to the type of big hit determined in step S5332 of the first special symbol stop symbol setting process is selected (step S5342), and a small hit flag is selected. If is set (step S5343), the variation pattern table at the time of small hit (not shown) is selected (step S5344), and if the reach flag is set (step S5345), the variation pattern table at the time of reach (step S5345). When (not shown) is selected (step S5346) and none of the big hit flag, the small hit flag, and the reach flag is set, that is, when the normal loss (the loss without performing the reach effect) occurs, the time of the loss occurs. (Not shown) is selected (step S5347).

Then, the variation pattern to be executed is determined by comparing the selected variation pattern table with the random number for the variation display pattern read in step S5302 of the first special symbol normal processing (step S5348), and the determined variation pattern is started. A variation pattern command for notifying the peripheral control board 1510 is set, and variation display of the first special symbol displayed on the first special symbol display 1403 is started (step S5349). Further, the main control MPU 1310a sets the fluctuation time set corresponding to the fluctuation pattern determined to determine the fluctuation pattern in the fluctuation timer (step S5350). Then, when the first special symbol process flag is updated so that the process shifts to the first special symbol variation process (step S5283) (step S5355), this process ends. As a result, the variation display control of the first special symbol is performed by the first special symbol display 1403 for the variation time determined in this way, and the effect control is performed by the effect display device 1600 in synchronization with the variation display of the special symbol. Will be done.

The variation pattern table of this example is used as a random number for jackpot determination (random number for first jackpot determination, random number for second jackpot determination) and a random number for jackpot symbol (random number for first jackpot symbol, random number for second jackpot symbol). Multiple types are provided for each judgment result based on the results. Further, in the fluctuation pattern set in each fluctuation pattern table, a plurality of fluctuation time information indicating a predetermined time (variation time) required for the fluctuation display control of the special symbol (first special symbol, second special symbol) is described above. It is stored in a form associated with each random number for the first variable display pattern. Therefore, the main control MPU 1310a reads out the selected variation pattern table and the first special symbol normal processing step S5302 from among a plurality of types of variation pattern tables according to the determination result based on the jackpot determination random number and the jackpot symbol random number. By comparing with the random numbers for the variable display pattern and acquiring the variable time information associated with the random numbers for the variable display pattern read out from this table, the above special symbols (first special symbol, second special symbol) Determine the fluctuation pattern of. As a result, the determination process for the variation pattern of the special symbol (first special symbol, second special symbol) is performed. The fluctuation pattern table is stored in the main control built-in ROM.

However, as described above, in this example, since the small hit is not won, the fluctuation pattern table at the time of the small hit is not used. In this example, the small hit is not won, but the small hit may be won.

Further, in the variation pattern table at the time of reach of this example, it is set to determine the mode type of the reach effect to be executed by comparing the judgment value indicating which reach effect is to be executed with the random number for the variation display pattern. Has been done. For example, in the non-time saving state, 164 types of random numbers for variable display patterns out of 241 types of random numbers for variable display patterns are set as determination values (0 to 163) indicating that any of the normal reach effects is executed, and 59. Random numbers for different types of variable display patterns are set as judgment values (164 to 222) indicating that one of the super reach effects with low jackpot expectation is executed, and 18 types of random numbers for variable display patterns have high jackpot expectations. It is set as a determination value (223 to 240) indicating that any one of the super reach effects is executed.

The super reach effect (SP effect) has a higher expectation of a big hit than the normal reach effect, and for a player who wants to generate a big hit game state, the player for the big hit game state when the super reach effect is executed. Expectations are rising. That is, such a super reach effect has the highest selection rate in the fluctuation pattern table at the time of a big hit, and the player's expectation for the big hit gaming state even if a loss is finally displayed. Will be able to increase. However, in reality, in order to sufficiently raise the player's expectation for the jackpot game state, a high-expected notice production, which is a lottery separate from the fluctuation pattern, appears during the period when the super reach production is being executed. It is required to do (combine).

In addition, in the variation pattern table at the time of loss, which is provided corresponding to the random number for determining the first jackpot and the random number for the first jackpot symbol and is used when determining the variation time of the first special symbol, the non-time saving state and the time saving state In common with, a fluctuation time of 12 seconds is set. On the other hand, in the fluctuation pattern table at the time of loss, which is provided corresponding to the second big hit judgment random number and the second symbol random number and is used when determining the fluctuation time of the second special symbol, the time reduction state is 0.1 seconds to A fluctuation time of 12 seconds can be set, and a fluctuation time of 12 seconds is set as a non-time saving state. In this way, the fluctuation time of the first special symbol is the same in the time saving state and the non-time saving state, and the game ball is awarded to the second starting port 2004 during the fluctuation of the first special symbol in the time saving state. At the same time as urging, the player has secured time for winning the game ball to the second starting port 2004.

In addition, when 0.1 seconds is selected from the fluctuation time when the second special symbol is lost, each game ball that is driven into the game area 5a at intervals of 0.6 seconds in a time saving state (high probability time saving state, etc.) is selected. It will be possible to prevent the waste from being discharged without being subjected to the lottery process.

That is, the right-handed game ball is supplied to the region directly above the gate portion 2003. Then, when the game ball is accepted from this area into the gate portion 2003 in a time saving state (high probability time saving state, etc.), a hit as a normal symbol is obtained (for example, the winning probability is 100%). The movable piece involved in opening and closing the second starting port 2004 is maintained in the open state for a long period of time (5.5 seconds in this example). As a result, in a situation where the second starting port 2004 can be continuously accepted (a time saving state in which almost all the game balls driven to the right side of the center accessory 2500 can be accepted by the second starting port 2004). Even if there is, every time those game balls are accepted, control is executed so that the lottery on the second special symbol side can be digested one after another with a high jackpot probability (probability in a high probability state) of around "about 1/32". It will be possible.

In this example, when the player is operating the handle 302, the game ball is fired at intervals of 0.6 seconds. Therefore, in the time saving state (high probability time saving state, etc.), the second Game balls are often accepted at the starting port 2004 at intervals of 0.6 seconds. In this respect, in this example, as described above, the fluctuation pattern table at the time of the second special symbol coming off based on the winning of the game ball to the second starting port 2004 shows the fluctuation time of the time saving state (high probability time saving state, etc.) extremely. It is said that it can be set to a short 0.1 second. That is, in this case, when a loss is obtained, the symbol variation is completed in a time (0.1 seconds) less than the firing interval (0.6 seconds) of the game ball, and thus 0.6 seconds. Even in a situation where the game balls launched at intervals are accepted into the second starting port 2004 one after another, it is possible to prevent the game balls from being ejected without being subjected to the lottery process. ..

FIG. 113 is a flowchart showing the procedure for the first special symbol variation processing (step S5283).

When the first special symbol process flag indicates that the first special symbol variation processing should be performed, the main control MPU 1310a of the main control board 1310 first, as shown in FIG. 113, first steps S5371. As the process of, the fluctuation timer in which the fluctuation time is set according to the fluctuation pattern determined in the lottery process (step S5282) for the fluctuation pattern is subtracted by 1. As a result, when it is determined that the fluctuation time timer is 0, that is, the lottery fluctuation time has elapsed (step S5372), the process proceeds to step S5373. That is, in the process of step S5373, this process ends when the first special symbol process flag is updated so that the process shifts to the first special symbol stop process (step S5284).

If the fluctuation time timer is not 0 even though the fluctuation timer is subtracted by 1 (step S5371), until the fluctuation time timer becomes 0 (until the time when the symbol should be fixedly stopped). Each time the timer interrupt process is performed, the process of steps S5371 and S5372 is performed.

FIG. 114 is a flowchart showing the procedure for the first special symbol stop processing (step S5284).

When the first special symbol process flag indicates that the first special symbol stop processing should be performed, the main control MPU 1310a of the main control board 1310 first, as shown in FIG. 114, first steps S5381. As the process of, the display control for displaying the stop symbol determined in the first special symbol stop symbol setting process on the first special symbol display 1403 is performed, and the first special symbol is displayed on the effect display device 1600. A stop display command for instructing the derivation display of the display result of the decorative symbol corresponding to the stop symbol of is set as a command to the peripheral control board 1510 (step S5382).

Further, when the jackpot flag is set (YES in step S5386), the main control MPU 1310a of the main control board 1310 sets a jackpot start command indicating to start the jackpot gaming state (step S5387). The waiting time until the start of the big hit game state (the time for displaying the start of the big hit game state, etc.) is set in the interval timer (step S5388). Then, a jackpot executing flag indicating that the jackpot game state is being executed is set, and if the high probability flag is set, the high probability flag is reset, and if the time saving flag is set, the high probability flag is reset. When the time saving flag is reset (step S5389), the fluctuation count counter is reset, and the first special symbol process flag is updated so that the process shifts to the first special symbol normal process, which is the initial value (step). S5394), this process is terminated. That is, in this case, when the next interrupt control is performed, it is determined that the jackpot executing flag is set in the process of step S5235, and the jackpot game in the above-mentioned jackpot control process (step S5240a). The state will be executed.

The jackpot start command is a command transmitted to the peripheral control board 1510, and is individually prepared according to the type of jackpot. In step S5387, the jackpot start command (8R probability variation jackpot A command, 8R normal jackpot command, 16R probability variation) according to the type of jackpot (8R probability variation jackpot A, 8R normal jackpot, 16R probability variation jackpot, 8R probability variation jackpot B, 2R normal jackpot) Set the jackpot command, 8R probability variation jackpot B command, 2R normal jackpot command). As a result, the effect of the jackpot game state (battle effect or additional challenge effect) according to the type of jackpot instructed by the jackpot start command is executed by the effect display device 1600, each lamp / LED, each speaker, and the like.

On the other hand, in the process of step S5386, when it is determined that the jackpot flag is not set (NO in step S5386), it is first determined whether or not the time is shortened with a low probability (step S5390). Then, when it is in the low-probability time-saving state, it is determined whether or not the number of fluctuations of the special symbol digested after being controlled in the low-probability time-saving state has reached a predetermined upper limit value (here, 100 times) (here). Step S5391). That is, when the number of fluctuations of the special symbol digested after being controlled to the low-probability time-saving state reaches a predetermined upper limit value (100 times), it is assumed that the condition for ending the low-probability time-saving state is satisfied. The function is stopped to shift to the normal gaming state (low-probability non-time-saving gaming state) (step S5392).

Then, after the processing related to the time saving function is performed in this way, it is determined whether or not the small hit flag is set (step S5393). As a result, when it is determined that the small hit flag is set (YES in step S5393), a small hit start command indicating to start the small hit game state is set (step S5394), and the small hit game is started. The waiting time until the start of the state (the time for displaying the start of the small hit game state, etc.) is set in the interval timer (step S5395). Then, the small hit executing flag indicating that the small hit game state is being executed is set (step S5396), and the process shifts the first special symbol process flag to the first special symbol normal process which is the initial value. At the time of updating to (step S5394), this process ends. That is, in this case, when the next interrupt control is performed, it is determined that the small hit execution flag is set in the process of step S5236, and the small hit control process (step S5240b) described above determines that the small hit execution flag is set. The small hit game state will be executed. By the way, unlike the case where the big hit is won, the game state is not changed when the small hit game state is executed.

On the other hand, when it is determined that neither the big hit flag nor the small hit flag is set (NO in step S5383), it is regarded as a loss, and the first special symbol process without performing the processing related to the big hit or the small hit. This process ends when the flag is updated so that the process shifts to the first special symbol normal process, which is the initial value (step S5394). That is, in this case, when the next interrupt control is performed, it is determined that the big hit executing flag and the small hit executing flag are not set (steps S5235 and S236), and a new game is played according to the hold status. Processing related to the progress of (lottery and symbol control) will be performed (steps S5237 to S5239).

FIG. 115 is a flowchart showing the procedure for the ordinary symbol and the ordinary electric accessory control process (step S116).

Now, if it is determined in the process of step S5401 that the detection signal by the gate sensor 4003 is on and the game ball has passed through the gate portion 2003, as shown in FIG. 115, the main As the process of step S5402, the main control MPU 1310a of the control board 1310 first executes a gate passage process such as acquiring a normal random number of a normal symbol from the random number counter and storing it in the normal symbol hold storage area of the RAM. do.

Next, in the normal symbol process process, one of the following five process processes is selectively executed according to the normal symbol process flag.

1. 1. A normal symbol normal process (step S5403) in which a normal random number stored in the RAM of the main control MPU 1310a is read, and a lottery process for displaying the display mode when the fluctuation control of the normal symbol is stopped is performed based on the read normal random number.
2. Normal symbol fluctuation time determination process (step S5404) in which a lottery process or the like is performed for the fluctuation mode (variation time) of the normal symbol displayed on the normal symbol display 1402 based on the normal symbol fluctuation random number.
3. 3. Normal symbol variation processing (step S5405) that waits until the variation display of the normal symbol on the ordinary symbol display 1402 is stopped.
4. The variation display of the normal symbol so that the mode when the variation control of the normal symbol is stopped, which is determined based on the result of the lottery process for the display mode when the variation control of the normal symbol is stopped, is displayed on the normal symbol display 1402. Normal symbol stop processing (step S5406)
5. When the result of the lottery process for the mode when the fluctuation control of the normal symbol is stopped is a mode suggesting "hit a normal figure", the movable piece is opened and the game ball is accepted into the second starting port 2004. Ordinary electric accessory opening process (step S5407)

The initial value of the normal symbol process flag is operated so as to indicate that the normal symbol normal process (step S5403) should be performed.

FIG. 116 is a flowchart showing the procedure for the gate portion passing process (step S5402).

Now, if it is determined in the process of step S5401 that the detection signal by the gate sensor 4003 is on and the game ball has passed through the gate portion 2003, as shown in FIG. 116, the above As the process of step S5411, the main control MPU 1310a of the main control board 1310 first acquires the counter value by the normal hold number counter from the RAM of the main control MPU 1310a. Then, based on this counter value, it is determined whether or not the number of reserved symbols is "4", which is the maximum value.

In the process of step S5411, when it is determined that the number of reserved symbols is not the maximum value, the following steps S5412 to S5414 are performed in order to put the variable display control of the ordinary symbols into a new pending state. Processing will be performed. That is, first, as the process of step S5412, the normal hold number counter is counted up (1 addition). Next, as the process of step S5413, the ordinary random number and the normal figure variation random number are acquired from the random number counter. Next, as the process of step S5414, each random number thus acquired is stored in the normal symbol hold storage area corresponding to the counter value by the normal hold number counter in the RAM storage area of the main control MPU 1310a.

However, in the process of step S5411, when it is determined that the number of reserved normal symbols is the maximum value, the variable display control of the ordinary symbols is not newly suspended. That is, by not executing the processes of steps S5412 to S5414, the fluctuation display control of the normal symbol is not newly put on hold.

FIG. 117 is a flowchart showing the procedure for the normal symbol normal processing (step S5403).

When the normal symbol process flag indicates that the normal symbol normal process should be performed, the main control MPU 1310a of the main control board 1310 first, as the process of step S5421, as shown in FIG. 117. Based on the counter value of the normal hold number counter, it is determined whether or not there is variable display control of the normal symbol in the hold state. As a result, when it is determined that there is a variable display control of the normal symbol in the hold state, then, as the process of step S5422, the normal symbol stored in the normal symbol hold storage area of the RAM of the main control MPU 1310a is stored. The random number stored in the earliest storage area among the random numbers (for example, ordinary random numbers and ordinary random numbers) related to the display mode of the symbol is read from the RAM. Next, as the processing of steps S5423 and S5424, when the normal hold number counter is counted down and the variation display of the normal symbol stored in each storage area of the RAM of the main control FIFO 1310a is stopped. Random numbers (ordinary random numbers, random numbers that fluctuate in the normal map) related to the display mode in the above are shifted in the first-in first-out (First-In First-Out) mode.

Specifically, the normal symbol reservation storage area has four storage areas 1 to 4, and random numbers extracted according to the passage of the game ball to the gate portion 2003 are sequentially extracted from the first (first) area. Remember. Then, when the game ball passes through the gate portion 2003 when the random number is stored in the nth (n = 1 to 3) storage area, the random number extracted in the n + 1th (n = 1 to 3) storage area is stored. When the start condition of the variation display based on the random number stored in the first storage area is satisfied, various random numbers stored in the first storage area are read and the Nth (N = 2 to 4) storage area is stored. The various random numbers stored in are moved to the N-1st (N = 2-4) th storage area. As a result, the order in which the fluctuation display control hold of the normal symbol occurs can be identifiable and stored, and the hold of the fluctuation display control is released in order from the earliest hold (hold that occurred first). ..

Next, if the current gaming state is the time saving state (high probability time saving state) (step S5426), the main control MPU 1310a of the main control board 1310 selects a normal drawing hit determination table (not shown) during the time saving (not shown). In step S5426), if the current gaming state is a non-time saving state (low probability non-time saving state, high probability non-time saving state) (step S5425), a non-time saving hit determination table (not shown) is selected (not shown). Step S5427), the selected normal symbol hit determination table is compared with the ordinary random number read in step S5422 of the normal symbol normal processing (step S5428).

The normal figure hit determination table is stored in the ROM of the main control MPU1310a, and is used when the game state is a time saving time (high probability time saving state). It is equipped with a non-time-saving normal map hit determination table used in the case of time (low-probability non-time-saving state, high-probability non-time-saving state). Then, in the time-saving normal figure hit judgment table referred to for comparison with the normal random numbers, all the 255 kinds of normal random numbers match the normal figure hit judgment value indicating that the normal random numbers were won, and the normal figure hit. The above-mentioned ordinary random numbers are associated with each other so as not to match the out-of-order judgment value indicating that the outlier is obtained. In this way, in the short time, when the game ball passes through the gate portion 2003, the game ball is always won by hitting the normal drawing, the movable piece is opened, and the game ball is opened to the second starting port 2004. It controls acceptance as much as possible. Not all of the 255 types, but more ordinary random numbers than in the non-time saving state may be made to match the judgment value per normal figure indicating that the normal random number is won per normal figure.

In addition, in the non-time saving normal figure hit judgment table referred to for comparison with the normal random numbers, it is possible that all 255 types of normal random numbers match the normal figure hit judgment value indicating that the normal random numbers have been won. The above ordinary random numbers are associated with each other so as to match the deviation determination value of the normal figure, which indicates that the normal figure is out of order. As described above, in the non-time saving time, even if the game ball passes through the gate portion 2003, it is not won in the normal drawing, so that the movable piece 2106 is opened and the second starting port is opened. There is no control over the acceptance of game balls into 2004. However, as described above, the winning of the normal symbol may be obtained even in the non-time saving state. In this case, the winning probability (for example, 50%) is lower than that in the time saving state, and the lottery result of the normal symbol is the winning. At that time, the movable piece of the second starting port 2004 is opened for a shorter time than the time saving state, for example, for 2 seconds so that the game ball can be accepted into the second starting port 2004, and then moved forward again. (Ii) The acceptance of the game ball into the starting port 2004 may be disabled.

When the main control MPU 1310a of the main control board 1310 is determined to be a normal figure hit as a result of comparison between the selected normal figure hit determination table and the ordinary random number read in step S5422 of the normal symbol normal processing (step S5429). ), After setting the normal symbol hit flag indicating that the fluctuation is won per normal symbol (step S5430), the normal symbol hit as the mode (normal symbol stop symbol) when the fluctuation control of the normal symbol is stopped. The symbol is determined (step S5431). On the other hand, when the result of comparison between the selected ordinary symbol hit determination table and the ordinary random number read in step S5422 of the ordinary symbol normal processing is determined to be out of order, the variation of the ordinary symbol is determined. The out-of-ordinary symbol is determined as the mode (stop symbol of the normal symbol) when the control is stopped (step S5432). After that, when the above-mentioned ordinary symbol process flag is updated so that the process shifts to the above-mentioned ordinary symbol fluctuation time determination process (step S5404) (step S5433), this process is terminated.

Then, while the control by the main control MPU 1310a is performed, the peripheral control MPU 1511a acquires the above-mentioned various commands transmitted from the main control MPU 1310a to obtain the peripheral control unit steady processing (received command analysis processing (received command analysis processing (received command analysis processing)). In step S1022)), the game situation is grasped each time, and the effect according to the game situation can be executed.

More specifically, the peripheral control MPU1511a first determines whether or not a start-up prize has occurred, and when in that situation, controls the hold display and the look-ahead effect according to the start-up prize. After that, by updating the process flag based on the grasped game situation, the following fluctuation pattern specification command reception waiting process, effect symbol change start process, effect symbol change process, effect symbol change stop process, jackpot display process , The jackpot game in-process, and the jackpot end effect processing are executed.

Fluctuation pattern specification command reception wait process: During the period from the main control MPU1310a to the reception of the variation pattern command related to the variation pattern, the effect (demo effect, etc.) is applied when the symbol is not in the variation state and the control related to the jackpot is not performed. When the control is performed and a fluctuation pattern command related to the fluctuation pattern is received from the main control MPU1310a, the process flag is changed to a value corresponding to the effect symbol fluctuation start processing.

Effect symbol variation start processing: Various effect contents (effect pattern, notice effect, etc.) in the symbol variation period are determined based on the variation pattern command, etc., and the decorative symbol variation is started based on the determined effect content. To control. Then, after that, the value of the process flag is updated to the value corresponding to the processing during the effect symbol change. Of the fluctuation patterns (effect patterns), most of the "variation patterns stopped by the jackpot symbol (effect pattern)" are prepared in the form of being paired with the "variation pattern stopped by the lost symbol (effect pattern)". By functioning as the same fluctuation pattern (effect pattern), it becomes possible to provide an effect as to whether a jackpot symbol appears or a lost symbol appears. Therefore, when the fluctuation pattern (effect pattern) is described below, when the description is described as "predetermined fluctuation pattern" or "specific fluctuation pattern", unless otherwise specified, it is stopped by the "big hit symbol". It means both a "predetermined fluctuation pattern (specific fluctuation pattern)" and a "predetermined fluctuation pattern stopped by a lost pattern (specific fluctuation pattern)", and as a result of the progress of the production content in the same manner. You will reach a turning point where either the jackpot symbol or the lost symbol appears.

Processing during effect symbol change: Controls to start various effect contents determined in the effect symbol change start process at each timing during the symbol change period, and when the fluctuation time ends, the value of the process flag is set to the effect symbol. Update to the value corresponding to the fluctuation stop processing.
Effect symbol fluctuation stop processing: Controls to stop the fluctuation of decorative symbols based on the reception of a command (symbol confirmation command) instructing to stop all symbols, and to derive and display the display result (stop symbol). Then, when the decorative symbol is stopped at the jackpot symbol, the value of the process flag is updated to the value corresponding to the jackpot display process, and when the decorative symbol is stopped at the lost symbol, the value of the process flag is changed to the variable pattern specification command reception waiting process. Update to the value corresponding to.

Big hit display processing: Controls an effect (such as a display effect for notifying the effect display device 1600 of the occurrence of a big hit) during the period from when the decorative symbol stops at the big hit symbol to when the big hit game is started. After that, the value of the process flag is updated to the value corresponding to the processing during the big hit game.

Process during big hit game: Controls various effects during the period when the big hit game state occurs. When the jackpot game state ends, the value of the process flag is updated to the value corresponding to the jackpot end effect processing.

Jackpot end effect processing: The effect display device 1600 controls the effect (display effect for notifying the player that the jackpot game state has ended) during the period from the end of the jackpot game state to the variable permissible state. .. Then, the value of the process flag is updated to the value corresponding to the process of waiting for the variable pattern specification command reception.

FIG. 118 is a diagram showing a determination table T1 of an effect pattern (variation effect) referred to in the effect symbol variation start process when in the normal gaming state.
As shown in FIG. 118, in the determination table T1, an effect pattern (variation effect) is associated with each of the variation numbers 1 to 22 indicated by the variation pattern command. Therefore, in the peripheral control MPU 1511a, when the variation pattern command is acquired from the main control MPU 1310a, the effect pattern (variation effect) associated with the variation pattern command is determined based on the determination table T1, and the determined effect pattern is determined. It is controlled so that the variation of the decorative pattern is started based on (variation effect).

The effect pattern (variation effect) does not necessarily have to correspond one-to-one with the variation number indicated by the variation pattern command. For example, a plurality of effect patterns (variable effects) are associated with one variation number indicated by a variation pattern command, and one of these effect patterns (variable effects) is determined based on an effect lottery or a game situation. You may try to do so. As will be described later, the peripheral control MPU 1511a according to this embodiment also has a plurality of effect patterns associated with some of the variation numbers 1 to 22.

Further, as will be described later, in the peripheral control MPU1511a, after the effect pattern (variation effect) is determined in this way, a notice lottery (determination process of the notice effect) is performed based on the result of the jackpot determination, the symbol type, and the variation pattern. By controlling the advance notice effect won in the advance notice lottery to appear at a predetermined timing while the above-determined effect pattern (variation effect) is performed (processing during the change of the effect symbol), a plurality of effect contents can be displayed. It is designed to suggest the degree of expectation that the jackpot symbol will appear depending on the appearance mode of them as a compoundable property.

Conventionally, in such a composite effect, a plurality of the same specific advance notice effect (for example, timer effect) may appear and be executed while one effect pattern (variable effect) is being executed. By doing this, it is expected that the game will be maintained. However, since the advance notice effect can be combined only when the expectation that the jackpot symbol appears is high, the frequency of executing multiple timer effects while one effect pattern (variable effect) is being executed is naturally low. , It was considered difficult to fully improve the game entertainment.

As will be described later, the "timer effect" is intended for a predetermined effect that appears during the execution of the effect pattern (variable effect), and the count display toward the timing at which the predetermined effect is performed is the first predetermined numerical value. It is executed as a count effect display from (for example, "60 seconds") to a second predetermined value (for example, "0 seconds"), or as a standby display (preparing, etc.) before starting the count display. Is. That is, in this case, when the count display (for example, countdown) from the first predetermined value is started as the timer effect, it is guaranteed that some effect will always occur when the second predetermined value is reached. Become. Alternatively, an effect (for example, conversation notice or cut-in A) that causes either a relatively unfavorable effect (low expectation) or an advantageous effect (high expectation) for the player appears. , B, etc.) is the target of the timer effect, and it is guaranteed that an advantageous effect result is always generated when the second predetermined value is reached. However, in the timer effect (particularly, the timer effect on the advance notice side executed as a result of the advance notice lottery), it is kept secret as to which effect is the target of the effect at least when the count display is started. It is desirable to do so. Further, the "timer effect effect target" is an effect that appears when the count display (for example, countdown) from the first predetermined value becomes the second predetermined value (for example, "0 seconds") as the timer effect. That is, in the timer effect, the count display is performed toward the timing when the effect target is generated.

In the "timer effect" according to this embodiment, the passage of time from the start of counting is displayed to the second decimal place to accurately display the number of seconds and the like. However, it does not necessarily have to be executed as such a timer effect, and if it is executed as a count effect in which a count display such as count-up or count-down is performed, the time has elapsed since the start of counting ( It does not have to be an accurate indication of the number of seconds, etc.).

Therefore, in the peripheral control MPU1511a according to this embodiment, in addition to the timer effect (timer effect on the advance notice side) as the effect content that appears only when the user wins the advance notice lottery, the above effect pattern determined based on the determination table T1 ( It is possible to execute a timer effect (variable side timer effect) that is built in in advance as the effect content of the variable effect). That is, in this case, if only the timer effect on the advance notice side is executed as the count effect display as "the effect content of the advance notice effect that functions so that the jackpot expectation is added to the effect pattern determined based on the fluctuation pattern command". Instead, by executing it as "the production content of the production pattern itself determined based on the fluctuation pattern command", the degree of expectation from the jackpot expectation indicated by the production pattern determined based on the fluctuation pattern command It will be possible to make the count effect display (timer effect) appear without unnecessary addition (addition of expectation by satisfying the condition of "winning in the advance notice lottery"). For example, if the jackpot expectation when a specific effect pattern determined based on the fluctuation pattern command appears is "20%", the jackpot expectation is increased by the combined effect function when the advance timer effect is further executed. For example, it becomes "40%" and the appearance frequency has to be reduced by that amount, but when the variable side timer effect is executed as the effect content of the specific effect pattern itself, a big hit is expected. It is possible to execute the timer effect with the degree set to "20%" (it can appear only by selecting a specific fluctuation pattern), and the appearance frequency can be preferably maintained.

The degree of expectation of a big hit when an effect pattern (variable effect) appears in the determination table T1 differs depending on the variation number (further, the effect pattern). Basically, the expectation of a big hit as the variation number increases. There is a tendency for the degree to increase. For example, in the effect patterns corresponding to the variation numbers 5 (6), 9 (10), and 17 (18), the variable side timer effect in which the "conversation notice" is the effect target is executed as the effect content. The appearance ratio is variation number 5 (6)> variation number 9 (10)> variation number 17 (18), whereas the jackpot expectation at the time of appearance is variation number 5 (6) <variation number 9 (variation number 9). 10) <Variation number 17 (18) is set. Further, for convenience of explanation, only the determination table referred to in the normal gaming state will be described in detail here, but even in the determination table referred to in the low-probability time-saving state and the high-probability time-saving state, the effect content of the effect pattern itself itself. As a result, an effect pattern (count variation pattern) in which the variable side timer effect can be executed is included, and it is possible to appear with a probability different from that in the normal gaming state.

Further, in the determination table T1, the variation numbers 3 to 6 are the same in that the same normal reach effect is performed, but the variation numbers 5 and 6 can execute the variation side timer effect for the conversation notice. It differs from variable numbers 3 and 4 in that. Further, the variable numbers 7 to 14 are the same in that the same character reach effect is performed, but the variable numbers 9 and 10 are executed by the variable side timer effect targeting the conversation notice, and the variable numbers 11 and 10. In No. 12, the variable side timer effect is executed with the cut-in A as the effect target, and in the variation numbers 13 and 14, the conversation notice and the cut-in A are executed and the variable side timer effect with the cut-in A as the effect target is executed. It differs in that it can be done. Further, the variable numbers 15 to 22 are the same in that the same SP reach effect is performed, but the variable numbers 17 and 18 are executed by the variable side timer effect targeting the conversation notice, and the variable numbers 19 and 18. In No. 20, the variable side timer effect targeting the cut-in B is executed, and in the variable numbers 21 and 22, the conversation notice and the cut-in B are executed, and the variable side timer effect targeting them is executed. It differs in that it can be done. It should be noted that the jackpot expectation is higher when the variable side timer effect targeting the cut-ins A and B is executed than when the variable side timer effect targeting the conversation notice is executed. Is set so that the jackpot expectation tends to be higher when the variable side timer effect for both the conversation notice and the cut-ins A and B is executed.

The "conversation notice" is an effect that can appear at a relatively early stage after the effect pattern (variable effect of the decorative pattern) is executed, and is often added with a relatively low degree of expectation. On the other hand, the cut-ins A and B can appear at a relatively late stage after the effect pattern (variable effect of the decorative pattern) is executed, and a relatively high degree of expectation is added. It is a production that often occurs (or a production that always has a relatively high degree of expectation). Therefore, the "conversation notice" is set so that the appearance rate (execution probability) is higher than other effects (cut-in A, B, the character A action, B, etc., which will be described later) with higher expectations. It is supposed to be done. Further, the "cut-in" that appears as the content of the variable effect is executed so as to correspond to the cut-in A that appears as the content of the advance notice effect in the character reach, whereas in the SP reach, the advance notice is given. It is executed so as to correspond to the cut-in B instead of the cut-in A that appears as the effect content of the effect.

Moreover, in the determination table T1 according to this embodiment, as shown in FIG. 118, the effect content (effect pattern) is obtained for a plurality of fluctuation patterns (variation numbers 5, 6, 9 to 14, 17 to 22). ) Is assigned as the variable side timer effect. On top of this, if the fluctuation pattern is a "predetermined type (for example, fluctuation numbers 1 to 6) such as shortened fluctuation or normal reach effect with low expectation", the count effect display as the timer effect on the notice side is displayed. While the effect is not won (increasing the premium degree) and the expectation level UP when the notice side timer effect appears is appropriately secured, the variation pattern is "a variation pattern for executing the effect side timer effect (increasing the premium degree). In the case of "variation numbers 5, 6, 9 to 14, 17 to 22 and the like count fluctuation patterns)", the fluctuation pattern is of the above-mentioned predetermined type (for example, fluctuation) as compared with the case where it is not such a count fluctuation pattern. The ratio corresponding to (numbers 1 to 6, etc.) is set to be low.

Here, 14 fluctuation patterns (variation numbers 5, 6, 9 to 14, 17 to 22) are prepared as count fluctuation patterns in which the fluctuation side timer effect is executed, and two of them (0) are prepared. Since only the variation patterns (variation numbers 5 and 6) (variation numbers 5 and 6) that may be set to the individual correspond to the above-mentioned predetermined types (variation numbers 1 to 6 and the like), the corresponding ratio is "2/14". On the other hand, eight fluctuation patterns (variation numbers 1 to 4, 7, 8, 15, 16) are prepared as fluctuation patterns in which the fluctuation side timer effect is not executed, and four fluctuation patterns (variations) are prepared. Since the numbers 1 to 4) correspond to the predetermined types (variation numbers 1 to 6 and the like), the corresponding ratio is "4/8".

In such a configuration, when the effect content of the variation pattern is one that can perform the count effect display (variation side timer effect) (count variation pattern), it is more noticeable than the case where the variation pattern does not perform the variation side timer effect. The rate at which it is judged that the count effect display (timer effect on the notice side) cannot be executed as the effect content of the effect is reduced. Therefore, it is possible to encourage the appearance of a plurality of count displays within one effect pattern (variable effect) without unnecessarily increasing the degree of expectation and lowering the appearance frequency.

Further, as will be described later, in the peripheral control MPU 1511a according to this embodiment, the effect pattern (variation effect) determined in the effect symbol variation start process is the count variation pattern (variation numbers 5, 6, 9 to 14, 17 to 22). ), The rate at which the advance notice side timer effect appears differs depending on which count fluctuation pattern the count fluctuation pattern is. For example, as shown in FIG. 118, when the effect patterns corresponding to the variation numbers 5 and 6 are executed, the advance timer effect does not appear at all, and the effect patterns corresponding to the variation numbers 9 to 14 are executed. At that time, the advance notice side timer effect can appear with a medium lottery probability, and when the effect pattern corresponding to the variation numbers 17 to 22 is executed, the advance notice side timer effect can appear with a high lottery probability. ing.

Even when the effect patterns corresponding to the variation numbers 5 and 6 are executed, the advance notice side timer effect may appear with a low probability. Further, even if any of the effect patterns corresponding to the variation numbers 15 to 22 in which the advance notice side timer effect can appear with a high lottery probability is executed, the actual hit is larger than in the case of loss. The effect pattern that has been won in the above can appear with a higher lottery probability, and the variable number 22 can appear with a higher lottery probability than the variable number 16. ing.

In such a configuration, the count effect display is announced depending on whether the variation pattern is the first count variation pattern (for example, variation number 10) or the second count variation pattern (for example, variation number 22). The ratio of execution as the effect content (timer effect on the notice side) will be different. Therefore, among the above-mentioned count fluctuation patterns (variation numbers 5, 6, 9 to 14, 17 to 22) in which the ratio of appearance of a plurality of count displays in one effect pattern (variation effect) is high, the type thereof. Depending on the situation, the rate at which a plurality of count displays appear can be further increased, and it is expected that the game entertainment will be maintained in a suitable manner.

In particular, as will be described later, in the peripheral control MPU1511a according to this embodiment, even if the effect pattern (for example, character reach, SP reach) in which the effect content of the same reach type appears, the variable side timer effect is included as the effect content. In the effect pattern (for example, variation numbers 17 to 22), the advance timer is within the execution period of the effect pattern as compared with the effect pattern (for example, variation numbers 15 and 16) in which the variation side timer effect is not included as the effect content. The rate at which the effect appears (the rate at which the timer effect on the advance notice side is determined by the advance notice lottery) is set to be high. That is, in this case, two timer effects (variable side timer effect and notice side timer effect) appear in one effect pattern only by requiring a jackpot expectation that one advance notice side timer effect is won in the advance notice lottery. It will be possible to make it possible, and by extension, it will be possible to realize the production opportunity of the double timer without unnecessary addition of the jackpot expectation.

Further, in the peripheral control MPU 1511a according to this embodiment, the effect pattern (variation effect) determined in the effect symbol variation start process is the count variation pattern (variation numbers 5, 6, 9 to 14, 17 to 22). Even in the case, the variable side timer effect (variable side count effect display) for which "conversation notice" is the effect target and the variable side timer effect (variable side count effect display) for which "cut-in" is the effect target. The mode of the count display (form, color, etc. of the count number) is different. That is, in this case, even when an effect pattern (for example, variation numbers 9 and 11) having the same reach effect as the effect content is executed, the mode of the count display of the variable side timer effect (variable side count effect display) is confirmed. By doing so, in combination with "the rate at which the advance notice side timer effect appears differs depending on which count fluctuation pattern is used", the ease of appearance of the notice side timer effect is recognized. You will be able to expect.

Regarding the mode of the count display that appears in the notice side timer effect (notice side count effect display), the variable side timer effect (variable side) regardless of whether or not the effect target is the same (conversation notice, cut-in). The mode of the count display (conversation notice, cut-in) that appears in the count effect display) may be different (or at least different from any one), or may be the same (or at least the same as any one). ..

However, it is relatively expected that the count display executed as the advance notice side timer effect (notice side count effect display) will be executed in a common manner regardless of the type of effect that is the target of the effect. It is useful for making the player recognize that the timer effect on the warning side, which is set to a high degree, is appearing, and to improve the sense of expectation. In this sense, it is more desirable that the notice-side timer effect is different from any of the count display modes (conversation notice, cut-in) that appear in the variable-side timer effect (variable-side count effect display). Regarding the above-mentioned common mode as the notice side timer effect (notice side count effect display), a plurality of modes having different expectations (for example, blue count, red count, etc.) are prepared, and one of them is executed. You may do so.

Further, in order to make it possible to more preferably recognize that the advance notice side timer effect is executed, the count display when the advance notice side timer effect is executed and the count display when the variable side timer effect is executed are displayed. It is desirable to make the count speeds (for example, the speed at which the numbers change during count-up and count-down) differ. In such a configuration, even during the period in which the count display is in progress after the timer effect is started, the count speed of the timer effect is closely watched, and it is relative to the variable side timer effect having a relatively low expectation. It becomes possible to make people interested in which of the timer effects on the advance notice side, which has a high degree of expectation, is being executed, and it becomes possible to suitably maintain the game entertainment during the timer digestion period.

At this time, in the variable side timer effect, the count is displayed at a speed (or the same speed) relatively close to the count speed of the notice side timer effect according to the effect target (conversation notice, cut-in). If the count is displayed in the cut-in) and the mode in which the count is displayed at a speed that is not relatively close to the count speed of the timer effect on the notice side (conversation notice), whether or not the timer effect on the notice side is executed. It will be possible to add fun by making the difficulty of judgment different. Further, in the variable side timer effect (or the variable side timer effect), the count is displayed by repeating the appearance and erasure of the count number, whereas in the notice side timer effect (or the variable side timer effect), the count number is continuously displayed. The count may be displayed by displaying the count.

According to such a configuration, when a situation occurs in which the count display of the variable side timer effect and the count display of the notice side timer effect are executed at the same time, it is easy to grasp whether or not the notice side timer effect is executed. It is expected that the game will be able to be played and the interest of the game will be improved.

In this regard, in the peripheral control MPU1511a according to this embodiment, a count is displayed for the fluctuation pattern (count fluctuation pattern such as fluctuation numbers 5, 6, 9 to 14, 17 to 22) corresponding to the variable side timer effect. A plurality of effect patterns having different start timings or end timings (total number of counts or time required for digesting all counts) are set as selectable effect patterns. Then, when the fluctuation pattern corresponding to the fluctuation side timer effect is acquired, one of the above-mentioned plurality of effect patterns is determined based on a random number for the effect, etc., so that the count display of the variation side timer effect and the advance notice side timer By making the ease of simultaneous execution with the count display of the effect different (for example, the larger the total number of counts, the easier it is to overlap), the ease of determining whether or not the timer effect on the notice side is executed is different. I try to give it fun

In this embodiment, a plurality of effect patterns (timer effect effect target and reach) in which the start timing or end timing (total number of counts or time required for total count digestion) of the count display is different for one fluctuation pattern. We decided to prepare the same production content), but multiple production patterns (however, the timer production is targeted) with different start timing or end timing (total number of counts or time required to digest all counts). The type of effect and the type of reach effect executed as the effect content of the variation pattern may be the same for each effect pattern), and a plurality of different variation patterns may be prepared so as to have a one-to-one correspondence.

In addition, the number of counts displayed (total number of counts) when they appear between the variable side timer effect and the notice side timer effect can be made different, or even if the same specific count display number can be selected, the variable side timer effect and the notice By making the selection rate of the specific count display number different from that of the side timer effect, it becomes possible to give fun by making it difficult to judge whether or not the advance notice side timer effect is executed. ..

Further, while the notice side timer effect is executed in the countdown display, if the variable side timer effect is executed in the countup display, it is deterministically grasped whether or not the notice side timer effect is executed. It is expected that the game will be able to be played and that the game will be greatly improved. Further, while the timer effect on the notice side is executed in the countdown display, the timer effect on the variable side targeting the specific effect (for example, conversation notice) is executed in the countup display, and the effect different from the specific effect (for example). If the variable side timer effect for cut-in) is executed in the countdown display, it will be interesting to make it difficult to judge whether or not the notice side timer effect is executed depending on the effect target. You will be able to grant it.

Further, as will be described later, in the peripheral control MPU1511a according to this embodiment, there are cases where the same effect is set as the effect target for the variable side timer effect and the notice side timer effect, and there are cases where different effects are set as the effect target. To control. When the same effect (for example, conversation notice) is targeted for the variable side timer effect and the notice side timer effect, the effect is different from that of the variable side timer effect and the notice side timer effect. Even if the rate at which the jackpot expectation is low is set to be high and the same effect (for example, conversation notice) is set for the variable side timer effect and the notice side timer effect, each count display is displayed. I try to make the end timing different.

That is, in this case, even if the same effect (for example, conversation notice) is set for the variable side timer effect and the notice side timer effect, one of the variable side timer effect and the notice side timer effect has a predetermined value first. At this point, it is as if a different effect is being produced (the timer effect is executed in a manner with a relatively high degree of expectation) because the count display of the other is continued while the end is reached. It looks like it is. After that, the other count display that has been continued also reaches a predetermined value and ends in a manner that makes it clear that the same effect (for example, conversation notice) is the object of the effect. Even if it is clarified by the timer production on the finished side that a conversation notice with a relatively low expectation is targeted for production, a different production that can appear after that is targeted for production ( It is expected that the timer effect is executed in a manner with a relatively high degree of expectation) to maintain the expectation and improve the interest of the game.

Further, when the same effect (for example, conversation notice) is targeted for the variable side timer effect and the notice side timer effect in this way, the timing at which the variable side timer effect reaches a predetermined value and the notice side timer effect are predetermined. It is desirable to make a display corresponding to the end of counting (for example, "count successful!", "Chance UP!", Etc.) appear separately at the timing when the numerical value is reached.

More specifically, the variable side timer effect and the notice side timer effect, which target the "conversation notice" executed as the effect on the variable side or the advance notice side, appear in one effect pattern, respectively. In this case, the count display of the variable side timer effect and the count display of the notice side timer effect are simultaneously advanced, but in the variable side timer effect, as the variable side effect in relation to the "conversation notice". While the count display is advanced according to the variable side specific effect ("count success!", Effect according to the appearance of the conversation notice, etc.) that occurs, in the notice side timer effect, it is related to "conversation notice". The count display is displayed according to the notice side specific effect ("Chance UP!"" That occurs as the effect on the notice side, or the timer end display that appears at the start timing of the conversation notice (or a predetermined few seconds before the start of the effect). By advancing, different count end corresponding displays will appear at different timings.

By the way, it is required that each of the conversation notice and the cut-in effect is always executed when it is targeted for the effect of the variable side timer effect (when the count fluctuation pattern is determined). In particular, conversation notices and cut-ins are effects that can be executed in multiple modes with different expectations. Therefore, when the target is the effect of the variable side timer effect, it is relative when the count display reaches a predetermined value. It is required to appear in a mode with a high degree of expectation. Therefore, the effect to be the effect target of the variable side timer effect is incorporated in advance as the effect content of the above effect pattern (variable effect), and the variable side timer effect and the effect target are simply executed when the effect pattern is executed. It is desirable to make it possible for each of the effects to be performed (a mode with a relatively high degree of expectation) to appear. However, instead of this, it is also possible to control so that when the variable side timer effect is executed, the effect (a mode having a relatively high degree of expectation) to be the target of the effect is always selected in the advance notice lottery. ..

If each of the conversation notice and the cut-in effect is not targeted for the effect of the variable side timer effect, it is determined whether or not to appear as the effect content of the notice side in the advance notice lottery described later, as well as the advance notice. A determination is made as to what mode (a mode having a relatively high degree of expectation or a mode having a relatively low expectation) is to appear as the effect content on the side, and the appearance is controlled based on the result of the determination. ..

The following is a summary of the effect pattern determination process using FIG. 118.
That is, in the peripheral control MPU 1511a, when a variation pattern command, a symbol type command, or the like is acquired from the main control MPU 1310a, first, the current game is based on the variation number indicated by the variation pattern command or the symbol type indicated by the symbol type command. Refer to the judgment table according to the state. For example, if the effect pattern is determined based on the symbol type, it is possible to give a bias (expectation degree) to the probability variation expectation when a specific effect pattern appears and the number of rounds in the jackpot game state. become.

Next, as the effect patterns associated with the variation numbers, a plurality of effect patterns (such as a plurality of effect patterns with different start timings or end timings of the count display appearing in the variable side timer effect) are prepared so as to be selectable. If so, one of a plurality of effect patterns having different start timings or end timings of the count display is selected based on the winning of the jackpot determination. At this time, if the jackpot judgment is won, the effect pattern is set so that the rate at which the start timing or the end timing of the count display is delayed is high, and thereby the start timing or the end timing of the count display is set. The slower the number, the more likely it is that a jackpot symbol will appear.

Further, as will be described later, in the peripheral control MPU1511a according to this embodiment, the count fluctuation pattern (variation numbers 5, 6, 9 to 14, 17 to 22) is acquired when the special effect condition is satisfied. Even in this case, the effect pattern set so that the variable side timer effect does not appear is selected from the plurality of effect patterns.

Then, in the peripheral control MPU1511a, after the effect pattern (the effect from the start of the change of the decorative symbol to the stop of the change) that appears during the symbol change is selected in this way, what kind of advance notice effect is given within the execution period of the effect pattern. It will be decided whether to additionally execute (combine) in any manner (notice lottery).

[12. Sound control by automatic channel method]
By the way, in the sound data creation process (step S1032 in FIG. 95) which has already been described, a description of automatic channel sound control, which is a part thereof, will be described later. Therefore, next, the automatic channel sound control according to the present embodiment will be described. First, the background will be briefly explained.

In a general pachinko machine, various sounds are output from a speaker in each scene according to the progress of the game to realize an effect that attracts the player's interest. For example, even if the reach is supposed to improve the expectations of the player, there are some that output various sounds according to the type and some that do not. In such a general pachinko machine, each channel is pre-assigned to each sound to be output in each scene, including each such reach, and each such sound is a corresponding default each. It is reproduced using a channel (see Japanese Patent No. 5627044). However, in a general pachinko machine, even if there is a vacant channel, the sound to be reproduced may not be assigned to the vacant channel due to channel allocation, and the sound to be reproduced is reproduced. There was a problem that it was difficult to realize a variety of sound effects.

Therefore, in the present embodiment, for the purpose of effectively utilizing the vacant channels to realize various sound effects and enhance the interest of the player, the peripheral control MPU 1511a of the peripheral control board 1510 is provided with a pair of upper speakers 573 (sound). Each channel is dynamically assigned and managed for each sound to be output from the output means) and the pair of lower speakers 921 (sound output means), while the number of combinations of sounds scheduled to be output is the number of combinations of each channel. When the maximum number of channels (16 channels are illustrated in this embodiment) is exceeded, each channel is dynamically assigned to the combination of sounds to be output within the range of the maximum number of channels according to a predetermined priority. (Channel control means). Further, the peripheral control MPU 1511a simultaneously reproduces the combination of sounds to be output via each channel dynamically assigned within the range of the maximum number of channels according to the predetermined priority (sound output control means). .. Hereinafter, a specific description will be given.

[12-1. Sound control by fixed channel method]
119 (A) and 119 (B) show an example of sound control by a fixed channel system as a comparison target with respect to the present embodiment, respectively. FIG. 119 (A) shows an example of a sound reproduction channel. In the sound control by the fixed channel method, for example, all 16 channels of the reproduction channel 00 to the reproduction channel 15 are used as in the sound control by the automatic channel method according to the present embodiment described later. The "reproduction channel" shown in the figure is an omission of the reproduction channel.

On the other hand, FIG. 119 (B) shows an example of assigning a reproduction channel to each sound. In the sound control by this fixed channel method, as shown in the figure, each sound is assigned in advance to each reproduction channel to be used. Here, touching on the basic sound reproduction rules, one sound requires two channels when it is output in stereo, while one channel is required when it is output in monaural.

The illustrated "notification sound 1" to "button pressing sound" shall not be muted in the middle of the sound that started the reproduction under any circumstances until the end of the reproduction. As a channel allocation method, a pair of a playback channel and a sound is assigned exclusively to prevent the sound from being overwritten. On the other hand, in the illustrated "normal BGM" to "holding winning sound", there is no problem even if the sound at which playback is started is overwritten with another sound during playback and muted. As a channel allocation method, the same channel is assigned so that the playback timing is not affected as much as possible.

In the sound control by the fixed channel method, when a new sound is output to the same channel being output, the sound being output is muted and a new sound is output. For sounds that hinder overwriting, independent channels are assigned, or sounds that do not overlap in playback timing are assigned to the same channel.

FIG. 120 shows an example of a sound definition table for realizing sound control by the fixed channel method. In this sound definition table, the definitions of playback channel number, left / right pan initial value, top / bottom pan initial value, volume initial value, sound number, playback type setting, and output type setting are managed for each sound classification and sound name. There is. Since the reproduction channel number is described above, the description thereof will be omitted.

The left and right pan initial values represent the initial positions of sound image localization by the left and right speakers, which are a combination of the upper left speaker 573L and the lower left speaker 921L and the upper right speaker 573R and the lower right speaker 921R. By dynamically changing the left and right pan settings during sound reproduction, a difference is created in the volume output individually from the left and right speakers, and the sound image can be localized in any space between the left and right speakers. For example, when "0x00" is set, it indicates that the output is output from only the left speaker (upper left speaker 573L and lower left speaker 921L). For example, when "0x80" is set, the upper left speaker 573L and lower left speaker are output. The volume difference output individually from the left and right speakers, which is a combination of the 921L, the upper right speaker 573R, and the lower right speaker 921R, becomes 0, and the sound image is localized in the center of the left and right speakers. For example, when "0xFF" is set, it indicates that the output is output only from the right speaker (upper right speaker 573R and lower right speaker 921R).

The initial value of the upper and lower pan is the sound image localization of the sound by the upper and lower speakers such as a pair of upper speakers 573 (upper left speaker 573L and upper right speaker 573R) and a pair of lower speakers 921 (lower left speaker 921L and lower right speaker 921R). It represents the initial position. By dynamically changing the upper and lower pan settings during sound playback, the volume output from the upper and lower speakers differs, and the sound image can be localized in any space between the upper and lower speakers. .. For example, when it is set to "0x00", it indicates that it is output from only a pair of upper speakers 573, and when it is set to "0x80", for example, the volume difference which is individually output from the upper and lower speakers which are a combination of these. Is 0, and the sound image is localized in the center of the upper and lower speakers. For example, when "0xFF" is set, it indicates that the output is output from only the pair of lower speakers 921.

The initial volume value represents the volume setting at the start of playback, and can be determined, for example, in the setting range of "0x00" to "0xFF". The sound number is an identifier for distinguishing each of the above-mentioned sounds. The playback type setting is either loop playback (corresponding to "LOOP" in the figure) that repeatedly plays the target sound, or 1SHOT playback (corresponding to "1SHOT" in the figure) that plays the target sound once. It represents whether it is. The output type setting indicates whether to reproduce the target sound in monaural or stereo.

FIG. 121 shows the relationship between the game state, the reproduced sound, and the reproduced channel. The time axis, which is the horizontal axis, indicates the gaming state, and the gaming states are, for example, "first half of fluctuation", "second half of fluctuation", "left symbol stop", "right symbol stop", "middle symbol stop", and "big hit". Can be mentioned. On the other hand, the vertical axis represents the (regeneration) priority, and the (regeneration) priority increases from the bottom to the top.

FIG. 122A shows an example of an effect time chart, FIG. 122B shows an example of a channel reproduction time chart, and FIG. 122C shows that each sound cannot be reproduced when it is attempted to be reproduced. An example of the problem is shown. In FIGS. 122 (A) to 122 (C), the horizontal axis is a common time axis.

In FIG. 122 (A), "first half of fluctuation", "second half of fluctuation", "left symbol stop", "right symbol stop", "middle symbol stop" and "big hit" are sequentially arranged along the time axis, which is the horizontal axis. It can be mentioned that the game is controlled so as to be "medium".

In the "first half of fluctuation" shown in FIG. 122 (A), for example, as shown in problem 1 of FIG. 122 (C), a start opening prize is won during the playback time of "first half notice A" as a new sound ("hold" in the figure). If there is a "winning"), as shown in FIG. 119 (B), the "holding winning sound" is pre-assigned to the same playback channels 14 and 15 as the "first half notice A", so that the "first half notice A" The playback sound of "" is overwritten by the hold winning sound, and the output of the "first half notice A" sound is stopped (in the case of sound control by a fixed channel).

In the "second half of fluctuation" shown in FIG. 122 (A), for example, as shown in problem 2 of FIG. 122 (C), a start opening prize is won during the playback time of "full screen notice" as a new sound ("hold" in the figure). If there is a "winning"), as shown in FIG. 119 (B), the "holding winning sound" is pre-assigned to the same playback channels 14 and 15 as the "full-screen notice", so that the "full-screen notice" is given. The playback sound of "" is overwritten by the hold winning sound, and the output of the "full screen notice" sound is stopped (in the case of sound control by a fixed channel).

[12-2. Sound control by automatic channel method]
Next, an example of sound control by the automatic channel method according to the present embodiment will be described. FIGS. 123 (A) and 123 (B) show an example of sound control by the automatic channel method as the present embodiment, respectively.

FIG. 123 (A) shows an example of a sound reproduction channel, and the above-mentioned sound control by a fixed channel means that the channel division as an attribute of the reproduction channel is an automatic channel (corresponding to “AUTOch” in the figure). The point is different. Here, the fact that the channel division is an automatic channel means that each reproduction channel for each sound is not fixed but variable, and is controlled so as to be automatically assigned according to a rule described later (described above). Equivalent to "sound control by automatic channel method").

In the sound control by the automatic channel method according to the present embodiment, as in the sound control by the fixed channel method described above, for example, all 16 channels of the reproduction channel 00 to the reproduction channel 15 are used. The "reproduction channel" shown in the figure is an omission of the reproduction channel.

On the other hand, FIG. 123 (B) shows an example of assigning a reproduction channel to each sound. In the sound control by this automatic channel method, priority is assigned to each sound individually as shown in the figure. Here, touching on the basic sound reproduction rules, as described above, one sound requires two channels when it is output in stereo, while one channel is required when it is output in monaural. Become.

The illustrated "notification sound 1" to "button pressing sound" must not be muted in the middle of the sound at which the reproduction is started under any circumstances until the end of the reproduction. On the other hand, in the illustrated "normal BGM" to "holding winning sound", there is no problem even if the sound at which playback is started is overwritten with another sound during playback and muted.

In the sound control by the automatic channel method, each playback channel is defined as an AUTO group channel (hereinafter abbreviated as "AUTO group"). While a plurality of AUTO groups can be defined, a plurality of playback channels can be defined within the AUTO group. Each AUTO group is used to reproduce the sound for the AUTO group. When assigning a sound to an AUTO group, an identifier and a priority for designating a specific AUTO group can be specified in each AUTO group. If a sound is defined in the AUTO group when a new sound is reproduced, if there is an empty channel (unused channel) in the specified AUTO group, the sound is immediately reproduced.

In the above case, if there is no free channel, the effect control program searches all the channels currently being played in the AUTO group based on the priority of the sound to be newly played. If there is a channel having a lower priority or the same as the sound being reproduced, the effect control program ends the use of the AUTO channel and reproduces a new sound. On the other hand, if there is no empty channel in the AUTO group that has a lower priority than the sound being reproduced or is not the same, the effect control program does not reproduce the new sound.

FIG. 124 shows an example of a sound definition table for realizing sound control by the automatic channel method. In the sound definition table in this automatic channel system, the playback channel number, left / right pan initial value, up / down pan initial value, volume initial value, such as the sound control by the fixed channel already explained, are used for each sound division and sound name. Instead of the sound number, playback type setting and output type setting, the identifier and priority for specifying the AUTO group (also called "playback priority"), left and right pan initial value, upper and lower pan initial value, volume initial value, sound It manages the definitions of numbers, seekpoints, playback type settings, and output type settings.

First, the identifier for designating each specific AUTO group indicates which AUTO group in which each sound is reproduced in a plurality of AUTO groups. Further, the priority order is an index indicating which sound should be reproduced with priority when each sound is reproduced at the same time. In this priority order, the larger the numerical value, the more preferentially the sound should be reproduced, while the smaller the numerical value, the less preferentially the sound should be reproduced. In the present embodiment, the order of the types of sounds to be reproduced with priority is, for example, a notification sound having a priority of "25" ("notification sound 1", "notification sound 2", and "notification sound 3"). , A sound effect with a priority of "20" ("big hit confirmation sound" and "button press sound"), a BGM with a priority of "15" (such as "normal BGM"), and a priority of "10". Sounds (such as "full-screen notice sound"), sound with priority "05" ("first half notice sound" to "second half notice sound"), hold winning sound with priority "01" It is said. As a result, when an attempt is made to reproduce a notification sound in a state where there is no free channel, for example, it is not necessary to reproduce using a predetermined reproduction channel, and the sound having a lower priority (for example, a pending winning sound) is not required to be reproduced. ) Is being played back, and the notification sound is played with priority.

As described above, the left and right pan initial values represent the initial positions of sound image localization by the left and right speakers, which are a combination of the upper left speaker 573L and the lower left speaker 921L and the upper right speaker 573R and the lower right speaker 921R. By dynamically changing the left and right pan settings during sound reproduction, a difference is created in the volume output individually from the left and right speakers, and the sound image can be localized in any space between the left and right speakers. This left and right pan initial value is managed as pan information. For example, when "0x00" is set, it indicates that the output is output from only the left speaker (upper left speaker 573L and lower left speaker 921L). For example, when "0x80" is set, the upper left speaker 573L and lower left speaker 921L The volume difference output from the left and right speakers, which is a combination of the upper right speaker 573R and the lower right speaker 921R, is 0, and the sound image is localized in the center of the left and right speakers. For example, when "0xFF" is set, it indicates that the output is output only from the right speaker (upper right speaker 573R and lower right speaker 921R).

Further, as already explained, the upper and lower pan initial values are, for example, the upper and lower speakers such as a pair of upper speakers 573 (upper left speaker 573L and upper right speaker 573R) and a pair of lower speakers 921 (lower left speaker 921L and lower right speaker 921R). It shows the initial position of sound image localization of the sound by the speaker of. By dynamically changing the left and right pan settings during sound playback, the volume output from the upper and lower speakers differs, and the sound image can be localized in any space between the upper and lower speakers. .. This upper and lower bread initial value is managed as bread information. For example, when it is set to "0x00", it indicates that it is output from only a pair of upper speakers 573, and when it is set to "0x80", for example, the volume difference which is individually output from the upper and lower speakers which are a combination of these. Is 0, and the sound image is localized in the center of the upper and lower speakers. For example, when "0xFF" is set, it indicates that the output is output from only the pair of lower speakers 921.

Similarly, the initial volume value represents the volume setting at the start of playback, and can be set in the setting range from "0x00" to "0xFF", for example, and in addition, "1" (0x1FF for 0xFF) in the third byte. By setting), it will not be affected by the volume change caused by operating one or more volume control devices provided in the gaming machine, and it will always be played at the volume set by the initial value. Represents. The sound number is an identifier for distinguishing each of the above-mentioned sounds.

The seek point represents the playback start position number in the same phrase in the sound data corresponding to each sound. In the present embodiment, as this seek point, for example, "0" is set for each of the "upper right speaker confirmation sound" to the "first half notice A sound effect", while the "second half notice A sound effect" and the "second half notice B effect" are set. [1] is set for each of "sound". With such a seek point, it is possible to register sounds in excess of the maximum number that can be registered in the sound source when the maximum number of sounds that can be registered is exceeded.

The playback type setting is either loop playback (corresponding to "LOOP" in the figure) that repeatedly plays the target sound, or 1SHOT playback (corresponding to "1SHOT" in the figure) that plays the target sound once. It represents whether it is. The output type setting indicates whether to reproduce the target sound in monaural or stereo.

FIG. 125 shows the relationship between the game state, the reproduced sound, and the priority. The time axis, which is the horizontal axis, indicates the gaming state, and the gaming states are, for example, "first half of fluctuation", "second half of fluctuation", "left symbol stop", "right symbol stop", "middle symbol stop", and "big hit". Can be mentioned. On the other hand, the vertical axis represents the (regeneration) priority, and the (regeneration) priority increases from the bottom to the top.

FIG. 126 (A) shows an example of an effect time chart, and FIG. 126 (B) shows an example of an AUTO channel reproduction time chart. In FIGS. 126 (A) and 126 (B), the horizontal axis is a common time axis. In FIG. 126 (A), "first half of fluctuation", "second half of fluctuation", "left symbol stop", "right symbol stop", "middle symbol stop" and "middle symbol stop" are sequentially arranged along the time axis, which is the horizontal axis. It can be mentioned that the game is controlled so as to be "during a big hit".

In the "first half of fluctuation" shown in FIG. 126 (A), as a part thereof, for example, the sound of "normal BGM reproduction" is reproduced from beginning to end on the reproduction channels 00 to 01 (as shown in FIG. 126 (B)). Corresponds to range A). Here, when an attempt is made to reproduce the hold prize sound as a new sound because there is a start opening prize (corresponding to the “hold prize” in the figure), the playback channels 12 to 13 exist as empty channels at the start timing. Since this hold winning sound can be played back using the playback channels 12 to 13, none of the playing sounds is overwritten by the hold winning sound (corresponding to "holding sound playback" in the figure), and other sounds are not overwritten. The output of all kinds of sounds continues.

In the "second half of fluctuation" shown in FIG. 126 (A), as shown in FIG. 126 (B), the sound of "reach BGM reproduction" is reproduced from beginning to end on, for example, reproduction channels 00 to 01 (as shown in FIG. 126 (B)). Corresponds to range B). Here, for example, if a start prize (corresponding to the “hold prize” in the figure) is to be played and the hold prize sound is to be reproduced as a new sound, the playback channels 02 to 03 exist as empty channels at the start timing. , The output of all other types of sounds continues without any of the sounds being played being overwritten by the hold winning sound (corresponding to the "hold sound play" in the figure).

In the "second half of the fluctuation" shown in FIG. 126 (A), for example, since a notification (corresponding to the "notification 2 occurrence" in the figure) is generated after that, the notification sound having the highest priority of "25" as a new sound (corresponding to the "notification 2 occurrence" in the figure). When an attempt is made to reproduce (corresponding to the illustrated "notification 2"), as a result of searching for a free channel, it is found that there is no free channel at the start timing as shown in FIG. 126 (B). Therefore, the sound having the lowest priority among the sounds being played at the start timing is searched, and the playback channels 04 to 05 are found as the channels playing the reserved winning sound having the lowest priority of "01". In these reproduction channels 04 to 05, the hold winning sound is reproduced as described above, but the priority (25) of the notification sound (corresponding to the “notification sound 2” in the figure) to be reproduced next is set. Since the priority is higher than the priority (01) of the reserved winning sounds, the reserved winning sounds being reproduced on the reproduction channels 04 to 05 are overwritten by the notification sound.

FIG. 127 shows an example of automatic channel control work information stored in the AUTO group channel control work area provided in the peripheral control RAM. This work information for automatic channel control is used as the work name for each channel, such as setting reservation flag, required sound number, playing sound number, automatic allocation group, priority at the time of automatic allocation, elapsed time from registration, and volume control. It includes a work for pan and a work for pan control, and has each information corresponding to these.

If the setting reservation flag has a value other than "0", it indicates that the setting reservation has been made. The requested sound number represents a sound data index number as an identifier for identifying a sound to be reproduced, if "-1" is stopped and other than "-1". The playing sound number represents a sound data index number as an identifier for identifying the sound being played, if "-1" is stopped and other than "-1".

In the automatic allocation group, the channel is fixedly assigned when it is "0", while the channel is automatically assigned when it is "1" ("Sound control by the automatic channel method" described later. Equivalent to). Here, for the automatic allocation group, for example, if it is "1", it indicates that it is AUTO group 1, and if it is "2", it indicates AUTO group 2. On the other hand, the priority at the time of automatic allocation represents the priority when sound control is performed by the automatic channel method described later.

The elapsed time from registration represents the elapsed time from the time of registration, with the time of registration of the desired reproduced sound as "0". The elapsed time from the registration is the elapsed time among the plurality of playing sounds when trying to play a new sound in a situation where a plurality of sounds having the same priority at the time of automatic allocation are being played. It is used to determine which sound should be overwritten and erased. For example, a sound that has been reproduced for a longer period of time is determined, and this sound is overwritten with the new sound to be erased.

The volume control work stores the volume value (volume value) of the sound to be reproduced. The pan control work stores pan information including the above-mentioned left and right pan and upper and lower pan set values.

FIG. 128 shows an example of a free channel search process when performing sound control when only one AUTO group is defined in the automatic channel system. In addition, in FIG. 128, the channel is abbreviated as “ch”.

When there is a request for reproducing a new sound (step S1100A), the effect control program confirms the automatic allocation group for the new sound (step S1102A), and when this automatic allocation group is "0", the fixed allocation is performed. Is determined, and playback of a new sound is started on the specified channel.

On the other hand, when the automatic allocation group is other than "0", the effect control program determines that the automatic allocation is automatic, and determines whether or not the new sound corresponds to the monaural channel (step S1106A). ..

When the new sound is monaural, the effect control program determines whether or not there is a vacant (monaural) channel (1 channel) (step S1108A), and if it exists, the vacant (monaural) channel. ) While starting the reproduction of the new sound on the channel (step S1109A), if it does not exist, the reproduced sound having the same or lower priority as the new sound in the (monaural) channel being reproduced. It is determined whether or not the channel exists (step S1110A).

The effect control program terminates the process if there is no channel of the reproduced sound having the same or lower priority than the new sound in the (monaural) channel being reproduced, and if it exists, the effect control program terminates the process. Determines whether or not a plurality of corresponding channels exist (step S1112A).

When a plurality of the corresponding channels exist, the effect control program is playing the sound having the longest playback time from the registration among the corresponding channels based on the elapsed time from the registration described above. The reproduction of the new sound is started on the (monaural) channel of (step S1114A). On the other hand, when the corresponding channel does not exist but is one, the effect control program starts the reproduction of the new sound on the (monaural) channel satisfying the desired condition (step S1116A).

On the other hand, in step S1106A described above, when the effect control program determines that the new sound is not monaural, it determines whether or not there are vacant (stereo) channels (2 channels) (step). S1120A). When the effect control program determines that an empty channel exists, it selects a (stereo) channel that satisfies a desired condition and starts reproducing the new sound (step S1122A).

On the other hand, when it is determined that there is no free channel, the effect control program determines whether or not there is a new sound having the same or lower priority in the (stereo) channel of the sound being played (step). S1124A), since the process is terminated if it does not exist, the sound being reproduced is not overwritten by the new sound to be reproduced. On the other hand, if it exists, the effect control program determines whether or not there are a plurality of corresponding channels (step S1126A).

The production control program starts the output of the new sound on the (stereo) channel that satisfies the desired condition when there are not a plurality of corresponding channels, while the effect control program is described above when there are a plurality of corresponding channels. Based on the elapsed time from registration, the reproduction of the new sound is started on the (stereo) channel having the longest reproduction time from registration among the corresponding channels (step S1130A).

As described above, the effect control program searches for an empty channel in order to reproduce a new sound. Such a search process for free channels will be described in a more visually easy-to-understand manner.

129 (A) and 129 (B) to 132 (A) and 132 (B) show specific examples of the contents of the free channel search process, respectively. As shown in FIG. 129 (A), the effect control program searches for vacant channels when a playback request for normal BGM having a priority of 15 occurs, and the playback channels 00 to 01 are vacant. Therefore, normal BGM reproduction is started in stereo using these reproduction channels 00 to 01.

As shown in FIG. 129 (B), the effect control program searches for vacant channels when a request for reproduction of the sound effect of the first half notice_A having a priority of 05 occurs, and reproduce channels 02 to 03. Since there is a vacancy in, the reproduction of the sound effect of the first half notice_A is started in stereo using these reproduction channels 02 to 03.

Next, as shown in FIG. 130 (A), the effect control program searches for vacant channels when a request for reproduction of the hotan pressing sound having a priority of 20 occurs, and sets the reproduction channels 04 to 05. Since there is a vacancy, the reproduction of the button pressing sound is started in stereo using these reproduction channels 04 to 05.

Next, as shown in FIG. 130 (B), the effect control program searches for an empty channel when a request for reproduction of the sound effect of the first half notice_B having the priority of 05 occurs, and the reproduction channel 06 is performed. Since there is a vacancy in ~ 07, the reproduction of the sound effect of the first half notice_B is started in stereo using these playback channels 06 to 07.

Next, as shown in FIG. 131 (A), the effect control program searches for vacant channels when a request for reproduction of the jackpot confirmed sound having a priority of 20 occurs, and sets the reproduction channels 08 to 09. Since there is a vacancy, the reproduction of the jackpot confirmed sound is started in stereo using these reproduction channels 08 to 09.

Next, as shown in FIG. 131 (B), the effect control program searches for an empty channel when a request for reproduction of the sound effect of the first half notice_C having the priority of 05 occurs, and the reproduction channel 10 is performed. Since there is a vacancy in ~ 11, the reproduction of the sound effect of the first half notice_C is started in stereo using these reproduction channels 10 to 11.

Next, as shown in FIG. 132 (A), the effect control program searches for vacant channels when a request for reproduction of the hold winning sound having a priority of 01 occurs, and selects the reproduction channels 12 to 13. Since there is a vacancy, the reproduction of the hold winning sound is started in stereo using these reproduction channels 12 to 13.

Next, as shown in FIG. 132 (B), the effect control program searches for vacant channels when a playback request for the notification sound 3 having a priority of 25 occurs, and sets the playback channels 14 to 15. Since there is a vacancy, the reproduction of the notification sound 3 is started in stereo using these reproduction channels 14 to 15.

133 (A) and 133 (B) to 136 (A) and 136 (B) each show an example of specific contents of the free channel search process. As shown in FIG. 133 (A), the effect control program searches for vacant channels when a playback request for reach BGM having a priority of 15 occurs, and the playback channels 00 to 01 are vacant. Therefore, the reach BGM is started to be reproduced in stereo using these reproduction channels 00 to 01.

As shown in FIG. 133 (B), the effect control program searches for vacant channels when a playback request for the notification sound 1 having a priority of 25 occurs, and the playback channels 02 to 03 have vacancy. Since it exists, the reproduction of the notification sound 1 is started in stereo using these reproduction channels 02 to 03.

After repeating the above processing, the production control program then, as shown in FIG. 134 (A), triggers a playback request for the full-screen warning sound having a priority of 10 to generate an empty channel. Since there is a vacancy in the reproduction channels 10 to 11, the reproduction of the full-screen warning sound is started in stereo using these reproduction channels 10 to 11.

Next, as shown in FIG. 134 (B), the effect control program searches for vacant channels when a playback request for the notification sound 1 having a priority of 25 occurs, and shows FIG. 134 (A). As shown, since there is a vacancy in the reproduction channels 02 to 03 (corresponding to "non-reproduction (empty)" in the figure), the reproduction of the sound effect of the notification sound 1 is started in stereo using these reproduction channels 02 to 03. ..

Next, as shown in FIG. 135 (A), the effect control program searches for vacant channels when a reproduction request for the notification sound 3 having a priority of 25 occurs, and reproduces channels 04 to 05 (reproduction channels 04 to 05). Since there is a vacancy in (corresponding to the "non-reproduction (vacant)" shown in the figure), the reproduction of the notification sound 3 is started in stereo using these reproduction channels 04 to 05.

Next, as shown in FIG. 135 (B), the effect control program searches for vacant channels when a request for reproduction of the accessory warning sound having a priority of 10 occurs, and the reproduction channels 12 to 13 are performed. Since there is a vacancy in the space, the reproduction of the accessory warning sound is started in stereo using these reproduction channels 12 to 13.

Next, as shown in FIG. 136 (A), the effect control program searches for vacant channels when a request for reproduction of the hold winning sound having a priority of 01 occurs, and reproduces channels 14 to 15 (reproduction channels 14 to 15 (A). Since there was a vacancy in (corresponding to the "non-reproduction (vacant)" shown in the figure), the reproduction of the hold winning sound is started in stereo using these reproduction channels 14 to 15.

Next, as shown in FIG. 136 (B), the effect control program searches for a free channel when a playback request for the notification sound 2 having a priority of 25 occurs, but the free channel does not exist. Therefore, the use of the playback channels 14 to 15 that are playing the "holding winning sound" having the lowest priority in each channel corresponding to the sound being played is stopped, and the playback channels 14 to 15 are used in stereo. Reproduction of the notification sound 2 which is a desired sound is started.

In this way, each sound to be output is not fixedly assigned to a specific channel in advance, and a playback channel having a lower priority is searched according to the priority of the sound, and the output schedule having a higher priority is obtained. Each sound of is played on the playback channel found by the search. Therefore, according to the present embodiment, not only can the free channels be effectively utilized as described above, but also as many sounds as possible to be output can be produced by using each channel including the free channels. Since it can be played back, it is possible to realize a variety of sound effects and enhance the interest of the player.

137 (A) and 137 (B) to 138 (A) and 138 (B) show specific examples of the contents of the free channel search process, respectively. As shown in FIG. 137 (A), the effect control program searches for vacant channels when a request for reproduction of the left symbol stop sound having a priority of 15 occurs, and the reproduction channels 00 to 01 are vacant. Therefore, the reproduction of the left symbol stop sound is started in stereo using these reproduction channels 00 to 01.

As shown in FIG. 137 (B), the effect control program searches for vacant channels when a request for reproduction of the right symbol stop sound having a priority of 15 occurs, and vacates the reproduction channels 00 to 01. Therefore, the reproduction of the right symbol stop sound is started in stereo using these reproduction channels 00 to 01.

Next, as shown in FIG. 138 (A), the effect control program searches for vacant channels when a request for reproduction of the middle symbol stop sound having a priority of 15 occurs, and reproduces channels 00 to 01. Since there is a vacancy in, the reproduction of the middle symbol stop sound is started in stereo using these reproduction channels 00 to 01.

Next, as shown in FIG. 138 (B), the effect control program searches for free channels when a playback request for the jackpot BGM having a priority of 15 occurs, and the playback channels 00 to 01 are free. Therefore, the jackpot BGM is started to be reproduced in stereo using these reproduction channels 00 to 01.

In addition, when the replacement playback of the sound according to the priority occurs using a certain playback channel, the effect control program restores the previous sound played on the playback channel before the replacement after the completion of the playback. It goes without saying that it is okay to do so.

[12-3. Variations of sound control]
In the above embodiment, the automatic channel method for sound control using all the playback channels for the maximum number of channels has been described as an example, but the present invention is not limited to this, and the above-mentioned fixed channel sound control is used. Sound control may be performed as follows depending on the combination or the like.

FIGS. 139 (A) to 139 (F) are diagrams showing variations of channel allocation in sound control by the two types of channel methods described above or a combination thereof, respectively.

FIG. 139 (A) shows an example of channel allocation in sound control by the maximum number of channels (16 channels) fixed channel method described so far as a comparative example with the above-described embodiment, and FIG. 139 (B) shows this. Corresponding to the embodiment of the present invention described above, an example of channel allocation in the case of performing sound control by the automatic channel method for the maximum number of channels is shown. Since the sound control by assigning these two channels has already been described, detailed description thereof will be omitted.

FIG. 139 (C) shows an embodiment in which channels are assigned to the maximum number of playback channels while using a plurality of automatic channel groups, and sound control is performed by the automatic channel method (corresponding to “PTN2” in the figure). .. FIG. 139 (D) shows an embodiment in which one automatic channel group is used, channels are assigned to the maximum number of playback channels, and some playback channels are sound-controlled by the fixed channel method described above. (Corresponds to "PTN3" in the figure).

FIG. 139 (E) shows an embodiment in which channel allocation is performed for the maximum number of playback channels while using a plurality of automatic channel groups, and sound control is performed for some playback channels by the fixed channel method described above. (Corresponds to "PTN4" in the figure). A specific example of the channel system shown in FIG. 139 (E) will be described in detail later with reference to the drawings of FIGS. 140 and later.

In FIG. 139 (F), one automatic channel group is used, channels are assigned to the maximum number of playback channels, sound control is performed by the automatic channel method, and some playback channels are sounded by the fixed channel method described above. Control is performed, but the difference from the above example is that the number of channels is secured so that the number of each reproduction channel is variable. A specific example of the channel system shown in FIG. 139 (F) will be described in detail later with reference to the drawings of FIGS. 146 and after.

As shown in this embodiment, by adopting an automatic channel system in which all channels are grouped into one group, free channels are assigned or channels being output are replaced based on a predetermined standard, so that sound is produced. Sound can be output simply by determining the priority of. Therefore, unlike the conventional control method that outputs sound by specifying a channel, channel management is not required, so it is possible to simplify control related to sound output and improve development efficiency. It becomes.

Further, by adopting the automatic channel method, it is possible to minimize the number of channels. For example, it is possible to adopt a low-priced sound source IC having a small number of channels, and the manufacturing cost of the gaming machine is reduced. be able to.

[15. Another form of sound control by the automatic channel method]
Subsequently, the details of another form of the above-mentioned sound control method will be described. In the sound control method described above, as an automatic channel method, the sound assignment to each channel is dynamically changed so that many sounds can be reproduced by effectively utilizing the empty channels. In recent diversified gaming machines, hundreds or thousands of types of sounds are selected and output, which may complicate the management of sound sources.

In addition, by outputting a plurality of sounds in an overlapping manner, it is possible to execute a preliminary announcement effect in duplicate, or to enable a variety of sound effects with a small number of sound sources. Therefore, as shown in FIG. 139 (C), by dividing the sound into a plurality of groups and dynamically allocating the plurality of sounds to the reproduction channel for each group, the sounds are surely duplicated and output. can do. It also has the advantage of facilitating management by dividing the sound by type.

Further, the sound includes a sound that should be output with priority over the production sound such as a notification sound and a sound that is continuously output such as BGM. For these sounds, it is more convenient to fix the output channel than to dynamically assign the channel. Therefore, as shown in FIG. 139 (D), the sound that is output with priority and the sound that is always output are output by the fixed channel method, and the sound that changes according to the result of the start prize or the variable display is output. Output using the automatic channel method.

With the above configuration, it is possible to effectively utilize the vacant channels by the automatic channel method and prevent unnecessary channel switching control from occurring by the fixed channel method. Further, since it is possible to classify by the type of sound such as BGM, effect sound, and notification sound, it becomes easy to manage the effect data.

The sound control method shown in FIG. 139 (E) is a combination of the sound control methods shown in FIGS. 139 (C) and 139 (D), and has the advantages of each method. Hereinafter, the sound control method shown in FIG. 139 (E) will be specifically described.

[15-1. Sound control in which fixed channel system and multiple automatic channel system are mixed]
In the present embodiment, unlike the above-described example, the number of channels in the sound source control is 32 channels (ch), and includes a channel for reproducing sound by the fixed channel method and a channel for reproducing sound by the automatic channel method. .. In addition, the channels that reproduce the sound by the automatic channel method are divided into two groups. Hereinafter, a specific description will be given with reference to FIG. 140.

[15-1-1. Playback channel configuration]
FIG. 140 is a diagram showing an example of a playback channel configuration table in sound source control according to the present embodiment. As described above, in the sound source control of the present embodiment, 32 channels are used, and a unique identifier (channel number) is assigned to each channel.

The channel configuration table includes "automatic allocation" indicating whether or not automatic allocation is performed for the channel number, "classification" indicating the group to which each channel belongs, and "purpose of use" of each channel. A "remark" is added as a supplement to the configuration table shown in FIG. 140.

As shown in FIG. 140, the configuration of each channel of the present embodiment is as follows: channel numbers 0 to 7 are fixed channel systems, 8 to 19 are automatic channel systems, 20 to 23 are fixed channel systems, and 24 to 29. Is an automatic channel system, and 30 and 31 are fixed channel systems.

Further, the channels of the automatic channel system of channel numbers 8 to 19 are "AUTO group 1", and the channels of the automatic channel system of channel numbers 24 to 29 are "AUTO group 2".

In the gaming machine of the present embodiment, sound can be output in stereo, and in the case of stereo output, one pair (two) of channels is used. On the other hand, in the case of monaural output, one channel is used.

The channel of channel number 0 (hereinafter, referred to as "channel 0" and each channel is represented by "channel" + "channel number") is a channel used for the system. For example, it is a channel for outputting sound that is commonly used by manufacturers regardless of a specific model. Specifically, it is a sound that is output while displaying the manufacturer's logo when the gaming machine is started. Further, channel 1 is a channel that is paired with channel 0 when sound is output in stereo.

Channel 2 is a channel used to output BGM during a game or in a customer waiting state. Channel 3 is a channel that is paired with channel 2 when BGM is output in stereo. Similarly, channel 4 and channel 6 are channels used to output BGM, and channel 5 and channel 7 are channels that are paired with channel 4 and channel 6 when BGM is output in stereo. be.

Further, in the present embodiment, not only the stereo output is performed, but also the sound quality of the BGM is improved by simultaneously outputting a plurality of sounds. Therefore, a plurality of (paired) channels can be used to output BGM, and BGM1 to BGM3 can be output at the same time. Furthermore, as will be described later, since it is possible to output BGM also on channel 20 (and channel 21), it is possible to output four BGMs at the same time using a maximum of eight channels (4 pairs). It has become.

While the gaming machine is operating normally, the BGM is continuously output, and a predetermined sound source is repeatedly played back. Therefore, the channel for reproducing the BGM is continuously occupied, and it is more efficient to fix the channel in advance than to dynamically allocate the channel. Therefore, in the sound source control in the gaming machine of the present embodiment, the channel for reproducing the BGM is a fixed channel system, and only the BGM is output. As a result, it is possible to simplify the control as compared with reproducing the sound only by the automatic channel method while preventing the generation of empty channels.

Channels 8 to 19 are channels for reproducing the sound output when the advance notice effect is executed. In the advance notice production, the sound selected by lottery is output each time according to the result of the variable display, the degree of expectation, the progress of the game, and the like. In this way, the channel can be effectively used by applying the automatic channel method to the sound that is output each time based on a predetermined condition.

In the present embodiment, unlike the above-described example, the channels to which the automatic channel method is applied are grouped. The group of channels that output the sound at the time of the advance notice production is AUTO group 1.

When outputting a sound when the advance notice effect is executed, the peripheral control MPU1511a first searches for an empty channel among the channels assigned to the AUTO group 1. In the case of stereo, free channels for two channels are searched, and in principle, continuous channels are set as output channels. At this time, if there is a free channel, the sound specified from the free channel is set to be output. On the other hand, when there is no free channel, the channel in use is opened to output a new sound or the output of the specified sound is stopped based on a predetermined condition. The detailed procedure for channel selection will be described later with reference to FIG. 141.

Channels 20 and 21 are channels to which the fixed channel method is applied. The channel 21 is a channel that is paired with the channel 20 at the time of stereo output. Channels 20 and 21 are channels for outputting BGM output or effect sound. It is used when the BGM is output by superimposing four sounds or when a specific effect sound is output. The specific effect sound is, for example, a sound output by an effect other than the advance notice effect output by the automatic channel method.

The channels 22 and 23 are channels to which the fixed channel method is applied, similarly to the channels 20 and 21. The channel 23 is a channel that is paired with the channel 22 at the time of stereo output. Channels 22 and 23 are channels to which the reserved sound is output. The hold sound output on the channels 22 and 23 may be, for example, a sound output regardless of the lottery result at the time of starting winning, or a sound output with priority when a big hit is confirmed. The sound based on the lottery result at the time of starting winning is output from channels 24 to 29 as described later.

Channels 24 to 29 are channels to which the automatic channel method is applied. Channels 24 to 29 reproduce sounds that are output based on the degree of expectation according to the lottery result at the start winning prize and sounds that are output when the hold display changes at the start of fluctuation. By outputting channels 22 and 23 in a fixed channel system, it is possible to reliably output the sound at the time of jackpot confirmation even when there are no empty channels in channels 24 to 29, which attracts the player's attention. Can be done.

Channels 30 and 31 are channels to which the fixed channel method is applied. Channels 30 and 31 are channels used for the system. The channel 30 outputs a change sound when the volume is changed and a notification sound when the game medium is paid out. Further, the channel 31 outputs a notification sound when an abnormality occurs in the gaming machine. In this way, a fixed channel system in which an output destination is secured in advance is applied so that the notification sound related to the operation of the gaming machine and the notification sound when an abnormality occurs are surely transmitted to the outside.

As described above, in the present embodiment, a fixed channel type channel is assigned when the output is constantly continued like BGM or when it is necessary to reliably output like an abnormality notification sound. On the other hand, by applying the automatic channel method to the sound that is output flexibly according to the game state, it is possible to prevent the sound from being output even though there are empty channels, and to create a finite number of channels. It can be used effectively.

[15-1-2. Free channel search process]
Subsequently, a procedure for searching for an empty channel for sound source control according to the present embodiment will be described. FIG. 141 is a flowchart showing an example of the procedure of the free channel search process in the case of executing the control for outputting the sound of the present embodiment. Although the case where there is one AUTO group is described in FIG. 128, it is different in FIG. 141 in that it has a plurality of AUTO groups. The description of common processing will be omitted.

In the free channel search process shown in FIG. 141, in the processes of step S1108B and step S1120B, when the new sound is the automatic channel method, it is determined whether or not there is a free channel in the same group of channels. That is, even if the channels of different groups are vacant, if there is no vacancy in the group of the same channel, the result of step S1108B and step S1120B is "No".

Further, in the free channel search process shown in FIG. 141, when there is no free channel, the reproduction of the sound output from the channel selected based on a predetermined condition is stopped, and a new sound is output from the channel (step). S1118B, step S1132B). Hereinafter, the selection conditions of the channel for stopping the sound reproduction will be described with reference to FIG. 142. It should be noted that the effect in which the sound output is stopped is continuously executed without stopping the image display and the operation of the accessory.

FIG. 142 is a diagram showing an example of a condition for selecting a channel for replacing the sound output (stopping or opening the sound reproduction) when the channel is not available at the time of outputting the new sound in the present embodiment. .. As a specific selection condition, the attributes of the sound being played and the new sound are compared, and the sound having a higher importance is prioritized. As will be described later, the attributes include the playback time, whether the output is stereo or monaural, the volume level, the amount of change in the sound during playback, and the sound playback time at the time of channel selection. Includes remaining playback time. Hereinafter, each condition will be specifically described.

Condition 1 selects a channel based on the playback time (elapsed time) from the start of playback. For example, as shown in steps S1114A and S1130A of FIG. 128, a channel having a long reproduction time is selected. By selecting a channel having a long elapsed time from the start of reproduction in this way, the output of the sufficiently executed effect sound is ended, and it becomes easier for the player to recognize that the new effect has been executed.

Condition 2 selects a channel based on the playback time of the entire effect. For example, a production with a long playback time can have a high degree of expectation, so a production with a short playback time is selected. On the other hand, by canceling the effect having a long reproduction time, the influence on the effect to be executed thereafter may be minimized. In this case, the determination is made based on the total playback time set in advance, regardless of the playback time from the start of playback.

Condition 1 and condition 2 are conditions related to the reproduction time, but in addition to this, for example, the sound output of the effect having a short (or long) remaining effect time may be stopped. Further, the channel may be selected according to the elapsed time from the start of reproduction, that is, the progress ratio of the effect with respect to the total time of the effect. By setting the conditions in this way, the sound output can be stopped at the initial stage or the final stage of the production.

Condition 3 selects a channel based on the volume of the sound being reproduced. For example, an effect in which a loud sound is output can be a more important effect, so a channel having a low volume in the output sound is preferentially selected. On the contrary, a channel having a large volume of the output sound may be preferentially selected so that the player can recognize that a new effect is executed.

Condition 4 selects a channel based on a change in the volume of the sound being reproduced. For example, it is assumed that an effect in which a fade-in or fade-out sound is output can be an effect of higher importance, and a channel having a small amount of change in volume is preferentially selected. On the contrary, the channel with a large change in volume may be preferentially selected to reduce the load of sound control.

Condition 5 selects a channel based on a dynamic change in the sound image localization position (panpot). For example, as a production that brings about a more three-dimensional sound effect by changing the output of the left and right sounds of the stereo speaker can be a more important production, a channel with little change in the dynamic sound image localization position is used. Select with priority. On the other hand, a channel with a large change in the dynamic sound image localization position may be preferentially selected to reduce the load of sound control.

Condition 6 selects a channel based on the sound number (index). For example, select a number with a higher (smaller) note number. At this time, the priority may be associated with the sound number.

Condition 7 selects a channel depending on whether the sound is monaural or stereo. For example, assuming that a production that outputs a stereo sound with good sound quality has a higher degree of expectation, a channel that outputs a monaural sound is selected. On the other hand, since only one channel is used for monaural sound, if the number of free channels is insufficient even if the channel that outputs monaural sound is opened, select the channel that outputs stereo sound to increase the number of free channels. It may be.

Condition 8 selects a channel depending on whether or not volume adjustment is permitted. For example, an effect set so that the volume cannot be adjusted may be more important, or an effect set so as to be able to adjust the volume may be more important.

In addition to the conditions shown above, for example, in the case of the same priority, a new sound reproduction request may be discarded without switching channels. Further, by assigning a unique priority to all the sounds, the effect data may be set so as not to have the same priority.

In the table shown in FIG. 142, the conditions 1 to 8 are shown as an example, but these conditions may be applied individually or in combination of a plurality of conditions. For example, a threshold value may be set for each condition and a channel satisfying more conditions may be selected, or a priority may be set for each condition and the conditions may be applied sequentially.

[15-1-3. Volume control]
Next, an example of controlling channel allocation based on the priority assigned to the newly output sound will be described. Here, an example in which three types of notices (first half notices A to C) are executed in the first half of the fluctuation will be described. FIG. 143 is a timing chart showing an effect example for explaining the sound control of the present embodiment, (A) shows the timing at which the sound effect is reproduced, and (B) shows the channel where each sound effect is output. ing. FIG. 144 is a diagram showing an example of the priority order of sound effects in the production example of the present embodiment.

In the effect example shown in FIG. 143, the first half notice_A occurs when a predetermined time elapses from the start of the variable display. At this time, an operation instruction of the effect button is displayed on the display screen, and when the player operates the effect button, the first half notice_B is generated. Further, the first half notice C occurs while the first half notice_A and the first half notice_B are being executed.

Further, as shown in FIG. 144, the priority of the first half notice_A is 03, the priority of the first half notice_B is 05, and the priority of the first half notice_C is 20. Further, since the volume suppression flag is set for the first half notice_B and the first half notice_C, when the lower priority notice effects are duplicated in the same group, the volume is increased based on the suppression volume value. It will be reduced.

Explaining the contents of each notice, the first half notice_A is, for example, an effect in which a character appears, and the character appears on the display screen and sound effects are output in stereo from channels 08 and 09.

The first half notice_B is an effect executed by the operation of the effect button, and the button press sound is reproduced at the time of button operation (channels 18 and 19), the first half notice_B is started, and the effect is stereo from channels 10 and 11. Sound is output.

In the first half notice_C, along with the output of the sound effect (channels 12 and 13), the screen display is stopped for a predetermined time, and the sound having a lower priority than the first half notice_C, specifically, other notice effects and BGM are temporarily The sound is muted (blackout production). After that, when the effect screen is displayed, the output of sound effects other than the first half notice_C is resumed.

Here, the volume change of the sound effect of each notice effect will be described in more detail with reference to FIG. 145. FIG. 145 is a timing chart showing an example of the volume change of the sound effect in the first half variation of the present embodiment, (A) shows the output timing of the effect sound effect, and (B) shows the volume change of each effect sound effect. The horizontal axis represents the time axis, and the vertical axis of (B) represents the volume.

As described above, in the present embodiment, the variation display is started from the time t0, and the first half notice_A is started at the time t1. At this time, it is output at the preset volume V_A of the effect sound effect of the first half notice_A.

After that, the operation instruction of the effect button is displayed on the effect screen, and the first half notice_B is executed by pressing the effect button (time t2). At this time, the button pressing sound of the effect button is reproduced at the volume V_T, and the effect sound effect of the first half notice_B is output at the volume V_B. Further, since the priority of the first half notice_B is higher than the priority of the first half notice_A, the volume of the sound effect of the first half notice_A is suppressed to 50%.

If the priority of the advance notice effect executed later is lower than or the same as the priority of the advance notice effect being executed, it is not necessary to lower the volume, and even if the sound effects output at the same time are small. You do not have to lower the volume. Further, the volume may be lowered only in the case of a specific combination of advance notice effects.

Further, when the first half notice C is executed at the time t3, the screen is dimmed until the time t5, and the sound effects other than the first half notice_C are muted. At this time, the sound effect of the first half notice_C is output at the volume V_C.

Further, the output of the first half notice_A and the first half notice_B effect sound effects muted from the time t3 is resumed at the time t5. Originally, the button pressing sound is output until the time t4, but since t5> t4, the reproduction ends at the time t3.

After that, the first half notice_A and the first half notice_B continue to be produced until the preset end time (time t6, t7). Further, at time t8, the first half notice_C ends, and the first half of the fluctuation ends.

During the period when the effect sound effect is muted, the output of the effect sound effect may be continued with the volume set to 0, or the output of the effect sound effect may be stopped. When the volume is set to 0, the volume (sub volume) for each channel may be set to 0, or the main volume that controls the volume of the entire staging sound effect is set to 0, and the output of the sound effect of the first half notice_C. May be bypassed and output so as not to be affected by the control by the main volume. Further, even if the output of other sound effects is suppressed by the first half notice_C, the sound effects, warning sounds, and notification sounds having higher priority are output.

As described above, when outputting a new sound and lowering the volume of the sound being played, instead of lowering the volume of the sound specified by the volume suppression flag etc., the volume of the sound being played on all channels is lowered. It may be lowered, or the volume of the sound being played on the same channel (fixed channel method, automatic channel method) may be lowered. Further, the volume of the sound being played on the channels in the same group (AUTO group) may be lowered.

[15-1-4. effect]
With the above configuration, in the present embodiment, the sound having a high priority can be preferentially output. High-priority sounds are, for example, sounds such as notification sounds and warning sounds that are surely transmitted to players and employees of the amusement park, and there is a high expectation that the result of variable display will be a big hit. It may be a sound effect to raise the expectation of the game, or it may be a sound effect that has a high directing effect and can improve the interest of the game.

Further, in the present embodiment, by classifying each channel used in the sound source control into a plurality of groups, it is possible to facilitate the management of the staging data related to the staging sound effect. As a result, it is possible to improve development efficiency, such as suppressing the occurrence of bugs by conducting systematic tests. In addition, by enabling stable games, it is possible to improve the interest of the games.

In particular, in the present embodiment, the channels of the automatic channel system are classified into a plurality of groups. Specifically, there are a group that outputs the sound effect of the advance notice effect (AUTO group 1) and a group that outputs the hold-related sound effect (AUTO group 2). The number of sound effects for the advance notice effect is enormous compared to the number of channels, and a plurality of effect sound effects can be reproduced at the same time. In particular, in the first half of the fluctuation, it may be required to output a staging sound effect exceeding the number of allocated channels, such as executing a pre-reading notice of the pending fluctuation together with the notice of the fluctuation. In such a case, the interest of the game can be maximized by outputting the low-priority effect sound effect while exchanging the high-priority effect sound effect in the channel assigned to the AUTO group 1. ..

Further, the change of the hold display of the variable display and the effect of notifying the degree of expectation by outputting the effect sound effect along with the change can greatly increase the expectation of the player, and it is desirable that the effect is surely executed. .. In the present embodiment, by outputting the effect sound effect related to the hold display (hold sound) from the channel belonging to the AUTO group 2, it is possible to more reliably reproduce the effect sound independently of the advance notice effect related to the variable display. can. In addition, unlike the case of the advance notice effect in the variable display, the number of effect sound effects output at the same time does not greatly exceed the number of channels assigned to AUTO group 2, so the output of the effect sound effect is stopped. It is less likely to be done. Moreover, even if it is canceled, the output of the low-priority effect sound effect is only canceled. Therefore, it is possible to enhance the interest of the game by surely executing the highly effective production that raises the expectation of the player.

Further, in the present embodiment, the channel to which the automatic channel method is applied and the channel to which the fixed channel method is applied are mixed. As mentioned above, in the automatic channel method, a finite number of channels are effectively utilized by searching for vacant channels, and by setting priorities, directing effects and sounds with high importance are given priority and output. Is possible. On the other hand, the fixed channel method is applied when the sound is continuously output like BGM, or when the sound is preferentially output in order to notify a game machine failure or fraudulent activity. In this way, by applying a channel method suitable for the characteristics and application of the sound, it is possible to effectively use each channel and further perform appropriate control according to the sound output condition. For example, in the control of outputting BGM, the sound may be output to a pre-assigned channel regardless of the gaming state, and in the control of outputting an alarm sound, the designated channel is not searched for an empty channel. The sound may be output directly to. On the other hand, in the automatic channel system, as described above, it is possible to make the best use of the vacant channels and to preferentially output the sound having a high effect.

Further, in the present embodiment, by controlling the volume of each effect sound effect (channel), it is possible to emphasize and execute the effect having a high priority. In addition, it is possible to continue the effect while being executed while lowering the volume without interruption. At this time, it is possible to return the volume to the original volume as long as the previously executed low-priority effect continues even after the high-priority effect is completed. Further, as described in the embodiment, the effect of the specific effect can be emphasized by stopping the other effects and executing the specific effect independently. In this way, in the present embodiment, it is possible to increase the variation of the production and improve the enjoyment of the game.

[15-2. Modification example of sound control in which fixed channel method and automatic channel method are mixed]
In the sound control method described above, the number of channels for which the automatic channel method is set and the number of channels for which the fixed channel method is set are preset numbers, but in this modification, the automatic channel method is used. A modified example in which the number of set channels and the number of channels for which the fixed channel method is set is variable will be described.

[15-2-1. Production example]
When the number of channels is variable, for example, there is a case where it is desired to temporarily output more sounds of the same type than the number of channels to which the same type of sound can be assigned. For example, in the case of a gaming machine capable of performing an effect including a plurality of scenes, the screen is divided into a plurality of screens (for example, divided into 9), and different scenes are displayed on each of the divided screens. At that time, it is conceivable to output BGM corresponding to each scene. FIG. 146 is a diagram showing a screen configuration example of the effect in the modified example of the present embodiment. The effect example shown in FIG. 146 is a notice effect in the latter half fluctuation after the reach occurs.

In this modification, the display screen is divided into nine, and an effect of displaying a different scene on each screen (multi-screen effect) is executed. Then, any one of the scenes is selected, and the effect corresponding to the selected scene is executed. At this time, BGM (9 types) of each scene is output at the same time. The scene may be selected by lottery or by the player.

The gaming machine of this modified example uses 32 channels in sound source control, as in the above-described embodiment. Also, the default channel allocation is similar to the arrangement shown in FIG. Therefore, it is possible to output four types (8 channels) of BGM at the maximum at the same time. However, in the multi-screen effect in this modified example, it is necessary to output nine types of BGM at the same time. Therefore, in this modification, the channels for outputting BGM are reassigned, and the arrangement of the channels is reorganized.

[15-2-2. Channel layout]
FIG. 147 is a diagram showing an example of a playback channel configuration table in sound source control in a modified example of the present embodiment, (A) shows a default configuration, and (B) shows a configuration at the time of executing a multi-screen effect. The default configuration of FIG. 147 (A) is similar to the arrangement shown in FIG. 140, as described above.

In this modification, when the multi-screen effect is started, the arrangement of the channels shown in FIG. 147 (A) is changed to the arrangement shown in FIG. 147 (B). Specifically, fixed channel type channels for outputting BGM are added (channels 8 to 17), and the number of channels assigned to AUTO group 1 and adopting the automatic channel type is reduced. This is because it is difficult for the player to recognize even if a different advance notice effect is executed during the execution of the multi-screen effect.

After the start of the multi-screen effect, all the BGM corresponding to each scene is played while all the scenes are displayed. At this time, if all the BGM is output at a normal volume, the volume becomes too loud, so the volume is output in a state where the volume is lower than usual. Then, when a scene is selected, a notice effect (second half notice) based on the selected scene is executed, the BGM volume of the selected scene is set to the normal volume, and the playback of other BGM is ended. .. When the player selects a scene, for example, the BGM of the selected scene is set to another BGM until the screen divided by the operation unit provided in the gaming machine is selected and the scene is determined. The volume may be made larger than the BGM of the scene, or the volume of the BGM of other scenes may be made smaller.

[15-2-3. Volume control]
FIG. 148 is a timing chart showing an example of the volume change of the sound effect in the latter half of the variation of the modified example of the present embodiment, (A) is the output timing of the effect sound effect, and (B) is the volume change of each effect sound effect. Is shown.

In the effect example shown in FIG. 148, at the timing when the execution of the multi-screen effect is determined (for example, at the start of fluctuation), the channel arrangement changes from the default state (FIG. 147 (A)) to the arrangement for the multi-screen effect (FIG. 147 (B). )) Is changed to. After the end of the first half fluctuation (time t11), a reach occurs and the second half fluctuation is started. After the start of the latter half fluctuation, the multi-screen effect is started (time t12). At this time, as shown in FIG. 146, the display screen is divided, different scenes are displayed in the divided display area, and BGM corresponding to each scene is output.

When the multi-screen effect is started, the BGM corresponding to the purpose of use of each channel after the change is output to the arrangement for the multi-screen effect (FIG. 147 (B)). At this time, the volume V_1, which is smaller than the normal volume V_1, is output.

After that, when a scene for continuing the production is selected (time t13), the volume of the BGM corresponding to the selected scene is set to the normal volume V_1, and the output of the other BGM is stopped. In the effect example shown in FIG. 148, scene 5 is selected and the volume of BGM_0-5 is set to the normal volume V_1. At this time, the display area corresponding to the scene 5 is displayed on the entire display screen, and the latter half notice_5 corresponding to the scene 5 is executed.

After the multi-screen effect is completed, the channel for outputting BGM_0-5 may be changed from channels 10 and 11 to channels 2 and 3, and the channel arrangement may be returned to the default. When the output of BGM from channels 10 and 11 is continued as in this modification, the channels may be returned to the default arrangement at the start of the next fluctuation.

Further, the channel arrangement may be changed at the required timing. For example, in this modification, the arrangement of the channels may be changed immediately before the execution of the multi-screen effect is started, or may be changed at the start of the latter half variation.

Further, instead of changing the arrangement of the channels according to the content of the effect, the channel arrangement may be changed when the game state (for example, the effect mode such as the jackpot state, the time saving state, the background change, etc.) changes.

[15-2-4. effect]
With the above configuration, the number of fixed channels (corresponding to "variable fixed channels" in FIG. 139 (F)) that perform sound control by the fixed channel method and the automatic channels that perform sound control by the automatic channel method (FIG. The number (corresponding to the "variable AUTOch" of 139 (F)) can be flexibly changed according to the type and number of sounds to be reproduced. This makes it possible to make more notification sounds, BGM or sound effects playable depending on the situation, for example, to output more types of notification sounds in a situation where the game is not played. It is possible to take flexible measures such as increasing the number of BGM and sound effects that should be reproduced in the production by suppressing the number of reproducible notification sounds.

[16. Control for sound being output on other channels]
In the embodiment described above, an example of grouping channels and managing the output sounds by associating them with each group has been described. In addition, when the number of sounds that can be assigned at the same time in the same group is exceeded, the output of the sound being sounded is stopped and a new sound is output based on a predetermined condition, or the output of a new sound is stopped. Then, the control for the sound in the output belonging to the same group was explained. Here, when a sound is newly assigned to a channel and output, a case where control such as changing the volume of the sound being output by another channel is performed will be described.

After the start of the fluctuation of the special symbol, in the state before the reach occurs (during the first half fluctuation), the output of the sound effect by the predetermined sound effect and the sound output by the playing BGM or other effects are regulated (silenced) for a predetermined time. A typical effect of performing such control is a blackout effect that regulates the output of sound effects and darkens the screen. In the blackout effect, after a predetermined time has passed after restricting the output of the sound effect, the darkening of the screen is canceled and the output of the sound by BGM or another effect is resumed, so that the newly output sound (the sound concerned). It is possible to draw the player's attention by highlighting the effect including the output of the above, and to increase the player's expectation for the fluctuation.

In the present embodiment, a case will be described in which a new sound is assigned to an empty channel and output instead of canceling the assignment of the channel on which the sound effect is output and assigning a new sound. In this case, in order to return the output of the BGM or the like to the state before the regulation, the volume may be returned without considering the processing such as reassigning the sound to the channel. Hereinafter, specific embodiments will be described.

[16-1. Control when different groups of sounds are being output]
In the present embodiment, the channels are grouped and the priority is set for each group. Then, when the sound is output on the channel belonging to the low priority group, the case where the sound is newly output on the channel belonging to the high priority group will be described.

[16-1-1. Volume control table by channel group]
FIG. 149 is a diagram showing an example of a volume control table for each channel group showing the priority of volume control for each group in the present embodiment. In the present embodiment, each channel is divided into a fixed channel (fixed channel) 1, a fixed channel (fixed channel) 2, an automatic channel group (AUTO group) 1, an automatic channel group (AUTO group) 2, and an automatic channel group (AUTO group). It is divided into 5 groups of 3.

Group volume priority and suppression volume value are set for each group. The group volume priority indicates the priority between groups, and the smaller the value, the higher the priority. In the present embodiment, a numerical value of 1 or more is set, and "1" has the highest priority.

The suppression volume value is a numerical value indicating an mode in which the volume of other sounds being reproduced is changed when the sound is reproduced in a channel belonging to a group having a low priority. Specifically, when "-1" is set, the sound reproduction is continued as it is without changing other sounds being reproduced. When "0" is set, it is controlled to mute other sounds being played. When a numerical value other than "0" is set, for example, when "50" is set, the volume of other sounds being reproduced is suppressed to 50%. That is, when a numerical value from 1 to 100 is set, the volume is changed with the unit as%. A numerical value of 100 or more may be set to control the volume to be larger than usual.

Further, when each set value is described with reference to FIG. 149, the fixed channel system and the automatic channel system channels are mixed in the present embodiment as in the above-described embodiment. In the fixed channel, sounds such as notification sounds and BGM that are preferentially output or are always output are assigned. In the automatic channel, effect sound effects grouped according to the type and importance of the effect are assigned.

In the fixed ch1, the group volume priority is set to "1", which is the highest. Further, since the suppression volume value is set to "0", when the sound is reproduced on the fixed ch1, all the other sounds being reproduced are muted. The sound reproduced on the fixed ch1 is a notification sound for notifying the outside such as a player or an employee of the amusement park as shown as a reference reproduction sound. It may be an alarm sound to notify that a failure has occurred in the game machine, or a notification sound such as a ball jam. That is, when the sound is output from the fixed channel 1, since the occurrence of fraudulent activity or failure is a factor, the output of the staging sound effect or the like is stopped and only the notification sound is output. Further, while the notification sound is output from the fixed channel 1 having the highest priority, the output of other sounds having a relatively low priority is restricted.

In the fixed ch2, the group volume priority is set to "4", which is the lowest in FIG. 149. Further, since the suppression volume value is set to "-1", even if the sound reproduction is started on the fixed ch2, it does not affect other sounds being reproduced. The sound reproduced on the fixed ch2 is mainly the BGM in the game, and in the normal game, the effect sound effect that attracts the player's attention in response to the execution of the variable display of the special symbol while the BGM is output, etc. Is output.

In AUTO group 1, the group volume priority is set to "2". Further, since the suppression volume value is set to "0", when the sound is reproduced in the AUTO group 1, all the sounds being reproduced other than the notification sound output from the fixed ch1 are muted. That is, the sound output by the AUTO group 1 is output with the highest priority in the production, and the other sounds are muted and output independently.

Specific sounds output by AUTO Group 1 include a jackpot confirmation sound, a blackout sound effect, and a V winning sound, as shown in the reference reproduced sound. The jackpot confirmation sound is a sound that notifies that the result of the variable display becomes a jackpot at a predetermined timing such as when the start prize is won, and is a production sound effect that maximizes the expectation for the player. The V winning sound is a sound for notifying that the game ball has won a prize in the V zone and, for example, it is confirmed that the game ball will shift to the high probability state, and like the jackpot confirmation sound, the expectation of the player is greatly improved. Can be made to.

The blackout sound effect is a sound effect that suppresses the output of other effect sound effects when the above-mentioned blackout effect is executed and is output in a silent state. At this time, the display on the effect screen is also dimmed. At this time, an effect of emitting a flash on the screen may be executed together with the output of the blackout sound effect. The jackpot confirmation sound and V winning sound are suppressed in a short time after the sound is output in order to suppress the output of other sounds so that the player does not miss the output of these sounds. Is restarted. On the other hand, in the blackout sound effect, the player's attention is focused on the blackout effect by setting the state in which the sound effect by another effect is not output for a predetermined time even after the blackout sound effect is output. Further, after the blackout effect is executed, the effect linked to the blackout effect may be executed with the fluctuation. For example, the blackout effect is executed with the first half variation and the corresponding effect is executed with the second half variation. You may do it.

In AUTO group 2, the group volume priority is set to "3". Further, since the suppression volume value is set to "50", when the sound is reproduced in the AUTO group 2, all the playing sounds of the group having the priority "4" or less are halved (50%). It is suppressed by the output). For example, the volume of the BGM output from the fixed channel 2 is halved because the group volume priority is "4" as described above, and the sound of the AUTO group 2 is output at a normal volume. As a result, it is possible to perform an effect that attracts the player's attention while continuing the flow of the game without completely muting the BGM. Specific sounds output by AUTO Group 2 include, for example, a first half warning sound effect and a second half warning sound effect.

In AUTO group 3, the group volume priority is set to "2". Further, since the suppression volume value is set to "50" as in the case of the AUTO group 2, when the sound is reproduced in the AUTO group 3, the group having the priority of "3" or less is being reproduced. All sounds are halved. For example, when the warning sound effect is output from AUTO group 2, the volume of the warning sound effect is halved. At this time, if the volume of the BGM output from the fixed channel 2 has already been halved, the volume may be continued without being changed, or the volume may be halved (1/4 of the initial volume). You may.

Specific sounds output by AUTO Group 3 include, for example, a hold winning sound at the time of starting winning, a holding change sound indicating that the hold display has changed, and a button pressing sound notifying that the effect button has been pressed. be. In the present embodiment, when the group volume priority is the same, the sound is output as it is at the normal volume. Therefore, even if the blackout effect of the AUTO group 2 is executed and the output of the BGM or the like is restricted, the sound belonging to the AUTO group 3 is output. For example, when the game ball enters the starting winning opening, the holding winning sound is output even while the blackout effect is being executed.

[16-1-2. Group volume control processing]
Subsequently, the procedure of volume control in this embodiment will be described. FIG. 150 is a flowchart showing a procedure of a group volume control process for performing sound control corresponding to a group to which the output sound of the present embodiment belongs. The group volume control process is executed in the sound data creation process (step S1032) in the peripheral control unit steady process (FIG. 95) of the peripheral control unit power-on process. The group volume control process will be described below.

When the group volume control process is started, the peripheral control MPU1511a first determines whether or not there is a request for reproducing a new sound (step S1401). If there is no request to reproduce the new sound (the result of step S1401 is "No"), the processes of step S1420 and subsequent steps are executed.

On the other hand, the peripheral control MPU1511a specifies a channel group from the sound number of the sound for which the reproduction request is made when there is a reproduction request for a new sound (the result of step S1401 is "Yes"), and the volume control table for each channel group. From (FIG. 149), the suppressed volume value and the group volume priority corresponding to the channel group are acquired (step S1402).

Next, the peripheral control MPU1511a determines whether or not the acquired suppressed volume value is “-1” (no suppression control) (step S1403). When the acquired suppressed volume value is "-1" (the result of step S1403 is "Yes"), that is, when the control for the sound being reproduced is not performed, the processes after step S1406 are executed.

When the acquired suppressed volume value is not "-1" (the result of step S1403 is "No"), that is, when controlling the sound being reproduced, the peripheral control MPU1511a further controls the sound requested to be reproduced. It is determined whether or not the sound number, the suppressed volume value, and the group volume priority have been registered in the work area (step S1404). If the sound number, the suppressed volume value, and the group volume priority have already been registered (the result of step S1404 is "Yes"), the processes of step S1406 and subsequent steps are executed.

If the sound number, suppression volume value, and group volume priority have not been registered (the result of step S1404 is "No"), the peripheral control MPU1511a has the sound number, suppression volume value, and group volume priority of the sound requested to be reproduced. The rank is held in the work area (step S1405). In this work area, the parameters (sound number, suppression volume value, and group volume priority) of the sound having the highest priority during current playback are recorded.

Subsequently, the peripheral control MPU1511a determines whether or not there is a sound already being reproduced (step S1406). When there is no sound being reproduced (the result of step S1406 is "No"), a predetermined volume value is set in the volume of the sound for which a new reproduction request has been made (step S1407). On the other hand, when there is already a sound being reproduced (the result of step S1406 is "Yes"), sound control is performed based on the parameters stored in the work area and the parameters of the new sound in the processes after step S1410.

Explaining the control for the sound being reproduced, the peripheral control MPU1511a first determines whether or not a sound parameter for suppressing the output of the sound being reproduced is registered in the work area (step S1410). If the sound parameter for suppressing the output of the sound being reproduced is not registered (the result of step S1410 is "No"), the output of the sound for which a new reproduction request has been made is set (step S1407).

Explaining the sound control executed in step S1410 or later, if a sound that suppresses the output of the sound being played is registered (the result of step S1410 is “Yes”), the peripheral control MPU1511a is a new playback request. The group volume priority of the existing sound is compared with the group volume priority held in the work area (step S1411).

If the group volume priority of the sound for which a new playback request has been made is lower than the group volume priority already held in the work area (the result of step S1411 is "<"), the peripheral control MPU1511a requests new playback. The volume of the sound is reduced based on the suppressed volume value of the work area (step S1414).

Further, when the group volume priority of the sound for which a new reproduction request is made is higher than the group volume priority held in the work area (the result of step S1411 is “>”), the peripheral control MPU1511a newly reproduces the sound. The work area is overwritten with the sound number, suppression volume value, and group volume priority of the requested sound (step S1412), and the volume of the newly requested sound is set to a predetermined volume value (step S1413). ).

Further, when the group volume priority of the sound for which a new reproduction request has been made is equal to the group volume priority held in the work area (the result of step S1411 is “=”), the peripheral control MPU1511a is set to the work area. While maintaining the content, the volume of the sound for which a new reproduction request has been made is set to a predetermined volume value (step S1413).

Subsequently, the peripheral control MPU1511a determines whether or not the group volume priority of the sound already being reproduced is lower than the group volume priority recorded in the work area (step S1415). When the group volume priority of the sound being played is lower than the group volume priority recorded in the work area (the result of step S1415 is "Yes"), the volume of the sound being played is recorded in the work area. It is reduced based on the suppression volume value (step S1416).

When the processing of step S1415 and step S1416 is executed for all the sounds being reproduced (step S1417), or after the processing of step S1407 is completed, the peripheral control MPU1511a has the suppression volume value and the group volume priority work. It is determined whether or not it has been registered in the area (step S1420). If the suppressed volume value and the group volume priority have not been registered in the work area (the result of step S1420 is “No”), this process ends.

When the suppressed volume value and the group volume priority are registered in the work area (the result of step S1420 is “Yes”), the peripheral control MPU1511a reproduces the sound corresponding to the sound number registered in the work area. It is determined whether or not the process is completed (step S1421). If the reproduction of the sound corresponding to the sound number registered in the work area is not completed (the result of step S1421 is “No”), this processing is terminated.

When the reproduction of the sound corresponding to the sound number registered in the work area is completed (the result of step S1421 is “Yes”), the peripheral control MPU1511a sets the sound number, the suppressed volume value, and the group volume priority in the work area. (Step S1422). Finally, all the sounds being reproduced are returned to the original volume values set in advance (step S1423, step S1424), and this process is terminated.

The above is the process of controlling the volume of the sound being reproduced when the reproduction of the new sound in the present embodiment is requested. Next, sound volume control will be described in chronological order. FIG. 151 is a timing chart for explaining the procedure for controlling the volume in the present embodiment in chronological order. FIG. 151 shows the execution timing of the effect, and FIG. 151 shows the volume of each effect. FIG. 151 describes an example of executing the advance notice effect and the blackout effect.

When the power of the gaming machine is turned on, the gaming is started, and normally BGM is output on a fixed channel (fixed channel 2). As shown in FIG. 149, the fixed ch2 has a group volume priority of "4" and a suppressed volume value of "-1". Since the suppression volume value of the normal BGM is "-1", the sound is reproduced without recording the sound number, group volume priority, and suppression volume value of the normal BGM in the work area.

When the game ball wins the start winning opening (here, the sound output at the time of the hold winning is omitted), the variable display (dynamic display) of the special symbol is started, and the first half notice A is started (time t21). The effect sound effect of the first half notice A is output on the channel belonging to AUTO group 2, the group volume priority is "3", and the suppression volume value is "50" (the result of step S1402 and step S1403 is "No"). .. Since the parameters were not recorded in the work area at the start of the first half notice (the result of step S1404 is "No"), the parameters of the effect sound effect of the first half notice are recorded in the work area (step S1405).

At the start of the first half notice A, a normal BGM is output (the result of step S1406 is "Yes"), and the sound number of the effect sound effect of the first half notice A is registered in the work area (the result of step S1410 is). "Yes"). At this time, since the group priority of the sound for which the new reproduction request has been made and the group priority of the work area are the same (the result of step S1411 is "="), the volume of the sound for which the new reproduction request has been made is set in advance. The defined volume value is set (step S1413).

At this time, since the BGM is normally playing and the group volume priority is lower than the effect sound effect of the first half fluctuation (the result of step S1415 is "Yes"), the sound is based on the parameters of the effect sound effect of the first half notice A. Output is suppressed (step S1416). Specifically, the volume of BGM is usually reduced (suppressed) to 50% output.

After that, when the predetermined condition is satisfied, the blackout effect is executed (time t22). The sound effect of the blackout effect is output on the channel belonging to AUTO group 1, the group volume priority is "2", and the suppression volume value is "0" (step S1402). At this time, the parameter of the first half notice A is recorded in the work area, but since the group volume priority is higher in the blackout effect (the result of step S1411 is “>”), the content of the work area is blacked out. (Step S1412), and a predetermined volume value is set in the volume of the sound for which a new reproduction request has been made (step S1413).

Further, since the group priority of the normal BGM and the effect sound effect of the first half notice A during playback is lower than that of the blackout effect sound effect (the result of step S1415 is "Yes"), these The volume of the sound effect is reduced (step S1416). In the blackout effect, the sound is muted because the suppression volume value is 0.

Further, the second half notice B is started during the execution of the blackout effect (time t23). At this time, since the group volume priority of the second half notice B is lower than the group volume priority of the blackout effect (the result of step S1411 is "<"), the second half notice B is started in a mute state, and the blackout effect is produced. Continue until is finished.

After that, when the game ball wins the start winning opening, the hold winning sound is output (time t24). The hold winning sound is output on the channel belonging to the AUTO group 3, the group volume priority is "2", and the suppression volume value is "50". In the present embodiment, when the group volume priorities are the same (the result of step S1411 is “=”), the parameters recorded in the work area are maintained, while the output is performed with a predetermined volume. Therefore, the hold winning sound is output as usual even during the execution of the blackout effect.

Then, when the blackout effect is completed (time t26), the parameter of the blackout effect recorded in the work area is erased (step S1422), and the regulated volume is returned to the predetermined volume (step S1423). .. Specifically, the volumes of the normal BGM, the first half notice A, and the second half notice B are returned to the predetermined volumes. After that, the sound output of the first half notice A and the second half notice B ends (time t27, t28).

As described above, in the present embodiment, while the sound effect having a high group priority is output, the output of the sound effect having a low group priority can be suppressed to make a specific effect stand out. Furthermore, by volume control by the suppression volume value, the player can be made to recognize that multiple effects are progressing at the same time, and the group of effect sound effects that greatly increase the player's expectation, such as the jackpot confirmation sound. By setting a high priority, it is possible to execute without impairing the effect of the effect.

Further, when a new high-priority sound is output and the output of the effect sound effect during reproduction is suppressed, in the above-described embodiment, the volume of the effect sound effect during reproduction is immediately output based on the suppression volume value. Was controlled to decrease, but from the timing when the sound with high priority is output, the volume of other production sound effects is gradually lowered to the target value (volume based on the suppression volume value) and faded out. May be good. In this case, the start value (volume currently being played), the time to reach the target value, and the amount of change may be specified, or up to the target value based on the production content such as the length of the playback time of the effect sound effect. The time to reach and the amount of change may be set. For example, if the output of the new production sound effect is short, the time to reach the target value may be set short to make the production sound effect stand out, or if the output of the new production sound effect is relatively long, the target. It is also possible to set a long time to reach the value to reduce the discomfort that may occur when the effect sound effect is switched.

For example, if the newly output sound effect is a short-time output such as a big hit confirmation sound or a V winning sound, the output of the production sound effect during playback such as BGM is faded out in a relatively short time. It is possible to make the newly output production sound effect stand out more without breaking the tempo of the game.

Furthermore, when the output of the new effect sound effect ends and the output of the other effect sound effect is resumed, the volume of the other effect sound effect is immediately returned to the target value (predetermined volume value). Instead, the start value (volume under regulation), the time to reach the target value, and the amount of change may be specified and controlled to fade in. For example, the output of the normal BGM is suppressed to 50% when the sound effect of the first half notice A is played, but when the output of the normal BGM is restarted, the normal volume is set as the target value and the start value (the volume currently being played. Here. Then, the volume is suppressed to 50%), and the fade-in is controlled based on the specified time and the amount of change. With such a configuration, it is possible to suppress the discomfort of the player while making the switching of the effect sound effect stand out, and it is possible to improve the interest of the game.

Further, although the present embodiment has been described by taking the staging sound effect as an example, it can be similarly applied to the case of the alarm sound and the notification sound. As an example, when outputting a notification sound with high importance (priority) (for example, an alarm sound due to fraudulent activity), not only the effect sound effect but also the notification sound with relatively low importance (priority) (for example, For example, the output of the ball jam notification sound) may be restricted. On the other hand, if a fraudulent act is performed while the notification sound of low importance (priority) is being output, the output of the notification sound is interrupted and the notification sound (alarm) of high importance (priority) is interrupted. Sound) may be given priority for output.

Note that the alarm sound and the notification sound are not set in the sound output time as in the staging sound effect, but the sound output is continued until the cause of the alarm or notification is eliminated. Therefore, when multiple types of alarm sounds and notification sounds are output, the sound with the highest priority is output, and after the cause of outputting the sound is eliminated, other notification sounds are output. .. At this time, the sound having the next highest priority may be output to regulate the output of the remaining sounds, or all the remaining sounds may be output at the same time.

[16-2. Volume control by sound output time (long and short)]
The control of the sound that is output in duplicate according to the priority between the groups has been explained above. Next, a control example for controlling the volume of the sound based on the output time (long or short) of the sound will be described.

[16-2-1. Volume control table by sound effect]
FIG. 152 is a diagram showing an example of a volume control table for each sound effect that shows volume control for each total playback time (output time) of the sound in the present embodiment. The playback channel (ch) used, the total playback time, and the suppression volume value are set for each sound effect.

Similar to the example shown in FIG. 149, the used reproduction channel is divided into five groups of fixed ch1, fixed ch2, AUTO group 1, AUTO group 2, and AUTO group 3.

The total playback time is the time from the start to the stop of the sound effect output. When -1 is set for the total playback time, the sound effect is output at a preset volume without being affected by the suppression control by other output sound effects. At this time, the volume of the sound effect is controlled so as not to be suppressed.

When 0 is set for the total playback time, the loop playback is repeated and the output is continued until another sound effect is assigned to the same channel. When the numerical value set for the total playback time is a number other than this (positive number), it is the playback time of the sound effect. The unit of total playback time is milliseconds (ms).

The suppression volume value is a numerical value indicating an mode in which the volume of other sound effects output at the same time is changed, as in the example shown in FIG. 149. Specifically, in the case of "-1", the sound being played is continued as it is without changing the sound being played, and in the case of "0", the sound effect being played (in the total playing time- Suppress (silence) the output of (excluding the sound effect for which 1 is set). In the case of a numerical value other than "0", for example, when "50" is set, the volume of the sound being reproduced is suppressed to 50%.

Subsequently, when each sound effect is described with reference to FIG. 152, in the present embodiment as well as in the above-described embodiment, the fixed channel system and the automatic channel system channels are mixed, and the assigned sound effect is also the same. Is. Further, in the example shown in FIG. 152, the suppression volume value is set for each channel group, but it may be set for each sound effect.

Since the total playback time is set to "-1" and the suppression volume value is set to "0" for the sound effects assigned to the fixed ch1, when these sound effects are played, other sound effects being played are set. All sounds are muted. The sound reproduced on the fixed ch1 is a notification sound for notifying the outside such as a player or an employee of the amusement park, and is a sound effect that is output because it is caused by a fraudulent act or a failure. The volume of the sound effect cannot be suppressed, and the output of other sound effects during playback is forcibly suppressed (stopped or muted).

Since the total playback time is set to "0" and the suppression volume value is set to "-1" for the sound effect assigned to the fixed ch2, the sound effect is repeatedly output from the start of output. These sound effects are designed so that they do not affect other sounds being played. The sound effect assigned to the fixed ch2 is mainly BGM in the game.

For the sound effects assigned to AUTO group 1, the total playback time is set for each sound effect (playback time), and the suppression volume value is set to "0", so the notification sound output from the fixed ch1. All other sounds being played are muted. That is, the sound output by the AUTO group 1 is output with the highest priority in the production, and the other sounds are muted and output independently. Specific sounds output by the AUTO group 1 include a jackpot confirmation sound, a blackout sound effect, and a V winning sound, as shown in FIG. 149.

For the sound effects assigned to AUTO group 2 and AUTO group 3, the total playback time is set to a value (playback time) set for each sound effect, and the suppression volume value is set to "50", so that in AUTO group 2. When a sound is reproduced, the output of all other sounds being reproduced is halved (suppressed to 50% output). As a result, for example, the specific sounds output by the AUTO Group 2, which can halve the output of the BGM and make the production stand out while continuing the flow of the game, include, for example, the first half notice sound effect and the second half notice effect. Specific sounds output by AUTO Group 3 include, for example, a hold winning sound at the time of starting winning, a holding change sound indicating that the hold display has changed, and pressing the effect button. It is a button press sound to notify.

[16-2-2. Volume control processing]
In the present embodiment, the output of the sound effects to be reproduced in duplicate is controlled by the reproduction time of the sound effects. FIGS. 153A and 153B are flowcharts showing a procedure of volume control processing for performing sound control based on parameters set for each sound effect of the present embodiment. Hereinafter, the procedure for controlling the output of the sound effect in this embodiment will be described.

When the volume control process is started, the peripheral control MPU1511a first determines whether or not there is a request for reproducing a new sound (step S1501A). If there is no request to reproduce the new sound (the result of step S1501A is "No"), the processes after step S1530A are executed.

On the other hand, the peripheral control MPU1511a specifies the sound effect name based on the sound number of the sound for which the reproduction request is made when there is a reproduction request for a new sound (the result of step S1501A is "Yes"), and the volume for each sound effect. The suppression volume value and the total reproduction time are acquired from the control table (FIG. 152) (step S1502A).

Next, the peripheral control MPU1511a determines whether or not the acquired suppressed volume value is “-1” (without suppression control) (step S1503A). When the acquired suppressed volume value is "-1" (the result of step S1503A is "Yes"), that is, when the control for the sound being reproduced is not performed, the processes after step S1506A are executed.

When the acquired suppressed volume value is not "-1" (the result of step S1503A is "No"), that is, when controlling the sound being reproduced, the peripheral control MPU1511a further controls the sound requested to be reproduced. It is determined whether or not the sound number, the suppressed volume value, and the total playback time have been registered in the work area (step S1504A). If the sound number, the suppressed volume value, and the total playback time are already registered in the work area (the result of step S1504A is "Yes"), the processes after step S1506A are executed.

If the sound number, suppression volume value, and group volume priority have not been registered (the result of step S1504A is "No"), the peripheral control MPU1511a determines the sound number, suppression volume value, and total reproduction time of the sound requested to be reproduced. Is held in the work area (step S1505A).

Subsequently, the peripheral control MPU1511a determines whether or not there is a sound already being reproduced (step S1506A). When there is no sound being reproduced (the result of step S1506A is "No"), a predetermined volume value is set in the volume of the sound for which a new reproduction request has been made (step S1507A). On the other hand, when there is already a sound being reproduced (the result of step S1506A is "Yes"), sound control is performed based on the parameters stored in the work area and the parameters of the new sound in the processes after step S1510A.

Explaining the sound control based on the parameters stored in the work area and the parameters of the new sound, the peripheral control MPU1511a first determines whether or not the total playback time of the sound for which the new playback request has been made is "-1". (Step S1510A). When the total playback time of the sound for which a new playback request is made is "-1" (the result of step S1510A is "Yes"), as described above, an alarm sound is output when an abnormality occurs, and the new sound is output. Suppression of the volume of the reproduced sound is prohibited, and the output of other sound effects during reproduction is forcibly suppressed.

The peripheral control MPU1511a sets a predetermined volume value for the sound for which a new reproduction request has been made (step S1511A). Further, the sound number, the suppressed volume value, and the total playback time for which a new playback request has been made are overwritten in the work area (step S1512A).

Then, the peripheral control MPU1511a suppresses the volume of the sound effect being reproduced based on the suppression volume value of the sound for which a new reproduction request has been made (step S1513A). When the volume of all the sound effects during reproduction is suppressed, the processes after step S1530A are executed (step S1514A).

On the other hand, in the peripheral control MPU1511a, when the total reproduction time of the sound for which a new reproduction request is made is not "-1" (the result of step S1510A is "No"), the total reproduction time of the sound held in the work area is not "-1". It is determined whether or not "-1" or a sound number is set in the work area (step S1520A). If the total reproduction time of the sound held in the work area is "-1" or the sound number is not set in the work area (the result of step S1520A is "Yes"), the processes after step S1530A are executed.

When the total reproduction time of the sound held in the work area is not "-1" and the sound number is set in the work area (the result of step S1520A is "No"), the peripheral control MPU1511a It is determined whether or not the suppressed volume value of the sound for which a new reproduction request has been made is smaller than the suppressed volume value held in the work area (step S1521A).

When the suppression volume value of the sound for which a new reproduction request has been made is smaller than the suppression volume value held in the work area (the result of step S1521A is “Yes”), the peripheral control MPU1511a is set to the sound for which a new reproduction request has been made. The work area is overwritten with the number, the suppressed volume value, and the total playback time (step S1522A).

Subsequently, the peripheral control MPU1511a determines whether or not the total reproduction time of the sound for which a new reproduction request has been made is shorter than the total reproduction time held in the work area (step S1523A). If the total playback time of the sound for which a new playback request is made is shorter than or the same as the total playback time held in the work area (the result of step S1521A is "Yes"), the volume of the sound for which a new playback request has been made is set. A predetermined volume value is set (step S1524A). On the other hand, when the total playback time of the sound for which a new playback request has been made is longer than the total playback time held in the work area (the result of step S1521A is "No"), the volume of the sound for which the new playback request has been made. Is set to a reduced volume value based on the suppressed volume value of the work area (step S1525A).

Subsequently, the peripheral control MPU1511a determines whether or not the suppression volume value is smaller or the same as the suppression volume value recorded in the work area for all the sounds being reproduced (step S1526A). Then, when the suppressed volume value of the sound being reproduced is larger than the suppressed volume value recorded in the work area (the result of step S1526A is “No”), the volume of the sound being reproduced is recorded in the work area. It is reduced based on the suppression volume value (step S1527A).

When the peripheral control MPU1511a performs the processes of step S1526A and step S1527A on all the sounds being reproduced, the peripheral control MPU1511a executes the processes after step S1530A (step S1528A).

When the volume control for the newly requested sound and the sound being reproduced is completed (step S1507A, step S1514A, step S1524A, step S1525A, step S1528A), the peripheral control MPU1511a sets the sound number, the suppressed volume value, and the total reproduction time. Determines whether or not has been registered in the work area (step S1530A). If the sound number, the suppressed volume value, and the total playback time are not registered in the work area (the result of step S1530A is "No"), this process ends.

When the sound number, the suppressed volume value, and the total playback time are registered in the work area (the result of step S1530A is “Yes”), the peripheral control MPU1511a reproduces the sound corresponding to the sound number registered in the work area. Is determined (step S1531A). If the reproduction of the sound corresponding to the sound number registered in the work area is not completed (the result of step S1531A is “No”), this processing is terminated.

When the reproduction of the sound corresponding to the sound number registered in the work area is completed (the result of step S1531A is “Yes”), the peripheral control MPU1511a transfers the sound number, the suppression volume value, and the total reproduction time from the work area. Erase (step S1532A). Finally, all the sounds being reproduced are returned to the original volume values set in advance (step S1533A, step S1534A), and this process is terminated.

The above is the process of controlling the volume of the sound based on the total reproduction time of the sound effect in the present embodiment. Subsequently, the volume control of the sound will be specifically described in chronological order. FIG. 154 is a timing chart for explaining the procedure for controlling the volume in the present embodiment in chronological order. FIG. 154 shows the execution timing of the effect, and FIG. 154 shows the volume of each effect. FIG. 154 describes an example of executing the first half notice effect and the blackout effect.

When the power of the gaming machine is turned on, the gaming starts and normally BGM is output. Normally, the BGM is output on the fixed channel 2, and the suppression volume value is set to "-1" as shown in FIG. 152. Further, the normal BGM is a loop reproduction in which the reproduction is repeated until the BGM is switched, and 0 is set for the total reproduction time. Since the suppressed volume value is "-1" (the result of step S1503A is "Yes"), the BGM parameter is not normally registered in the work area. Then, a preset volume value is set, and a normal BGM is output (step S1507A).

After that, when the game ball wins the start winning opening and the variable display (dynamic display) of the special symbol is started, the output of the sound effect of the first half notice A is newly requested in order to execute the first half notice A. (Time t31). The sound effect of the first half notice A is output on a channel belonging to AUTO group 2, the total playback time is set to 15000 ms, and the suppression volume value is set to 50 (the result of step S1503A is "No").

Further, since the parameter is not registered in the work area at this point (the result of step S1504A is "No"), the sound number, total playback time, and suppression volume value of the sound effect of the first half notice A are held in the work area ( Step S1505A).

Further, at the start timing of the first half notice A, the BGM is normally playing (the result of step S1506A is "Yes"), the total playback time of the first half notice A is 15,000 ms (the result of step S1510A is "No"), and the new The parameters of the sound effect of the first half notice A for which the reproduction request was made are already registered in the work area (the result of step S1520A is "No", the result of step S1521A is "No", and the result of step S1523A is "Yes". ). Therefore, the volume of the sound effect of the first half notice A for which a new reproduction request has been made is set to a predetermined volume value (step S1524A).

Subsequently, since the normal BGM is playing at this point and the volume has not been suppressed yet, the suppressed volume value is "100", which is larger than the suppressed volume value "50" of the first half notice A recorded in the work area. (The result of step S1526A is "No"), and the volume of the normal BGM is reduced to 50% based on the suppression volume value "50" of the first half notice A (step S1527A).

Subsequently, since the parameter of the sound effect of the first half notice A is already registered in the work area (the result of step S1530A is "Yes"), the first half notice A is continued (the result of step S1531A is "No"). , This process ends.

After that, when the predetermined condition is satisfied, the blackout effect is executed, and a new sound reproduction request for the blackout effect sound effect is received (time t32). The blackout effect sound effect is output on a channel belonging to AUTO group 1, the total playback time is "8000", and the suppression volume value is "0" (the result of step S1503A is "No"). At this time, the parameters of the sound effect of the first half notice A are already registered in the work area (the result of step S1504A is "Yes"), and the normal BGM and the sound effect of the first half notice A are being output (step S1506A). The result is "Yes").

Further, the blackout effect sound effect for which a new reproduction request has been made has a total reproduction time of "8000" (the result of step S1510A is "No"), and the total reproduction time of the sound effect of the first half notice A held in the work area. Is "15000" (the result of step S1520A is "No").

Next, since the suppressed volume value of the sound effect of the first half notice A held in the work area is "50", and the suppressed volume value of the blackout effect sound effect for which a new reproduction request has been made is "0" (step). The result of S1521A is "Yes"), the sound number of the blackout effect sound effect for which a new reproduction request has been made, the suppression volume value "0", and the total reproduction time "8000" are overwritten in the work area (step S1522A).

Further, since the total playback time (8000 ms; a1) of the sound effect of the blackout notice effect is shorter than the total playback time (15000 ms) of the sound effect of the first half notice A (the result of step S1523A is “Yes”), the blackout A predetermined volume value is set in the volume of the warning effect sound effect (step S1524A).

Subsequently, the suppression volume value of the sound being played is usually "50" for BGM, "100" for the sound effect of the first half notice A, and the suppression volume value "0" for the blackout notice effect sound effect recorded in the work area. (The result of step S1526A is "No"), so that the volume of the sound effect of the normal BGM and the first half notice A is set to "0" (step S1527A).

After that, when the game ball wins a prize in the start winning opening during the execution of the blackout effect, a new sound reproduction request for the pending winning sound is received (time t33). The hold winning sound is output on a channel belonging to AUTO group 3, the total playback time is "2000", and the suppression volume value is "50" (the result of step S1503A is "No"). At this time, the parameters of the blackout effect sound effect are already registered in the work area (the result of step S1504A is "Yes"), and the blackout effect sound effect, the normal BGM, and the sound effect of the first half notice A are being output. Yes (the result of step S1506A is "Yes"). At this time, the output of the normal BGM and the sound effect of the first half notice A is suppressed.

Further, the pending winning sound for which a new reproduction request has been made has a total reproduction time of "2000" (the result of step S1510A is "No"), and the total reproduction time of the blackout effect sound effect held in the work area is "8000". (The result of step S1520A is "No").

Next, since the suppression volume value of the blackout effect sound effect held in the work area is "0" and the suppression volume value of the pending winning sound for which a new reproduction request has been made is "50" (the result of step S1521A is). Since “No”), the work area is not overwritten, but the total playback time (2000 ms; a2) of the pending winning sound is shorter than the total playback time (8000 ms; a1) of the blackout effect sound effect (the result of step S1523A is). “Yes”), a predetermined volume value is set in the volume of the pending winning sound (step S1524A). Further, since the work area has not been updated, the suppressed volume value of the sound being reproduced is the same as the suppressed volume value recorded in the work area (the result of step S1526A is "Yes"). Then, even if the output of the hold winning sound is completed (time t34), since the parameters of the blackout effect sound effect are recorded in the work area, the output of the blackout effect sound effect is continued.

After that, when the blackout effect is completed (time t35), the reproduction of the sound corresponding to the sound number registered in the work area is completed (the result of step S1531A is “Yes”), so that the blackout stored in the work area is completed. The parameter of the effect sound effect is erased (step S1532A). Then, the volume of the sound effect of the normal BGM whose sound reproduction is suppressed (the volume is reduced) and the sound effect of the first half notice A is returned to a predetermined volume value (step S1533A). At this time, the normal BGM was suppressed during the reproduction of the sound effect of the first half notice A, but the normal volume is restored.

As described above, in the present embodiment, it is possible to mute the volume of other sound effects during playback to make a specific effect (for example, a blackout effect) stand out, and at the same time, the effect sound effect is produced during the mute period. Even when the output ends, it is possible to provide the player with a production opportunity. Specifically, when the output of the sound effect is completed during the muffling period, the sound effect is output even while the output of the sound effect of another effect is suppressed by executing a specific effect. While notifying the player, if the output of the sound effect is continued until the end of the mute period, the output of the sound effect of the effect during the mute period is suppressed to emphasize the execution of a specific effect. be able to.

By the way, as described above, in the pachinko machine 1 in which the number of channels is finite, a new sound is produced when there is no vacancy in the channel to which the sound data is assigned (the number of vacant channels is 0). When the data allocation condition is satisfied, one of the sound outputs must be discarded, and there is a concern that the game interest may be deteriorated due to the appearance of an unintended sound output mode in the production design.

Therefore, in the pachinko machine 1 according to this embodiment, as described above, when a new sound data allocation condition is satisfied when there is no free channel (the number of free channels is 0), the setting is made in advance. By controlling the less important sound output to be selectively discarded based on the priority, it is possible to avoid the appearance of an unintended sound output mode in the production design and reduce the interest of the game. Proposed to be suppressed. However, it can be said that it is also important to devise technical measures in terms of how to make it difficult for the channel itself to appear when there is no vacancy in the channel (the number of vacant channels is 0).

In this regard, in the pachinko machine 1 according to this embodiment, various types that are not output as long as an appropriate game is performed in order to enable allocation of more channel resources to the effect sound effect (effect sound). As for the notification sound of, it is possible to adopt a channel-saving control structure that enables appropriate notification of abnormal contents with only a single channel. Hereinafter, an example of a case where a channel-saving control structure is adopted for the output of various notification sounds will be described.

FIG. 155 shows a specific channel (hereinafter referred to as channel X) among a finite number of channels prepared as sound control by a fixed channel method for various notification sounds (payout notification sound and abnormality notification sound) excluding the production sound. An example of a sound definition table is shown when the process of outputting only in (say) is realized. In this sound definition table, the definitions of priority for playback, left / right pan initial value, top / bottom pan initial value, volume initial value, sound number, seek point, playback type setting, and output type setting are managed for each sound name. doing. Here, for convenience of explanation, only the definitions of the notification sounds 1 to 7 are shown, and the definitions of the other notification sounds and the effect sounds are omitted. Regarding the production sound, in addition to the definition by the fixed channel method illustrated in FIG. 120, the definition by the automatic channel method illustrated in FIG. 124 is defined for each channel except the channel X to which the notification sound is assigned. It is also possible to use it.

The priority is a parameter used to determine which of the notification sounds is assigned to the channel X to be output when a plurality of notification sounds satisfy the output conditions, and the numerical value of the priority is the numerical value of the priority. The high notification sound is assigned and output to the channel X regardless of the allocation state of the notification sound having a low priority value to the channel X. As will be described later, if the priorities are the same, the notification sound assigned to the channel X first is given priority, and the notification sound is assigned to the channel X and output after the output of the notification sound is completed. Will be done.

The left and right pan initial values represent the initial positions of sound image localization by the left and right speakers, which are a combination of the upper left speaker 573L and the lower left speaker 921L and the upper right speaker 573R and the lower right speaker 921R. By dynamically changing the left and right pan settings during sound reproduction, a difference is created in the volume output individually from the left and right speakers, and the sound image can be localized in any space between the left and right speakers. For example, when "0x00" is set, it indicates that the output is output from only the left speaker (upper left speaker 573L and lower left speaker 921L). For example, when "0x80" is set, the upper left speaker 573L and lower left speaker are output. The volume difference output individually from the left and right speakers, which is a combination of the 921L, the upper right speaker 573R, and the lower right speaker 921R, becomes 0, and the sound image is localized in the center of the left and right speakers. For example, when "0xFF" is set, it indicates that the output is output only from the right speaker (upper right speaker 573R and lower right speaker 921R).

The initial value of the upper and lower pan is the sound image localization of the sound by the upper and lower speakers such as a pair of upper speakers 573 (upper left speaker 573L and upper right speaker 573R) and a pair of lower speakers 921 (lower left speaker 921L and lower right speaker 921R). It represents the initial position. By dynamically changing the upper and lower pan settings during sound playback, the volume output from the upper and lower speakers differs, and the sound image can be localized in any space between the upper and lower speakers. .. For example, when it is set to "0x00", it indicates that it is output from only a pair of upper speakers 573, and when it is set to "0x80", for example, the volume difference which is individually output from the upper and lower speakers which are a combination of these. Is 0, and the sound image is localized in the center of the upper and lower speakers. For example, when "0xFF" is set, it indicates that the output is output from only the pair of lower speakers 921.

The initial volume value represents the volume setting at the start of playback, and can be determined, for example, in the setting range of "0x00" to "0xFF". The sound number is an identifier for distinguishing each of the above-mentioned sounds. The playback type setting is either loop playback (corresponding to "LOOP" in the figure) that repeatedly plays the target sound, or 1SHOT playback (corresponding to "1SHOT" in the figure) that plays the target sound once. It represents whether it is. The output type setting indicates whether to reproduce the target sound in monaural or stereo.

FIG. 156 is a table showing, for each of the notification sounds illustrated in FIG. 155, the notification content, the notification mode, the notification time, and the conditions (cancellation conditions) for ending the notification, for each type of the notification sound. In the pachinko machine 1 according to this embodiment, a finite notification time is set for each notification sound, but this is a free channel as much as possible in order to effectively utilize a single channel X. This is a measure to maintain the state and refrain from the subsequent output of the notification sound.

As shown in FIG. 156, the notification sound 1 (magnetic anomaly) is in a state in which magnetism is detected by the magnetic detection sensor 4024 (a state in which there is a high possibility that a fraudulent act using a magnet is being performed). It informs that there is. Then, as the notification mode, a loop process for repeatedly outputting a notification sound such as "Boo-boo magnetism has been detected" and a display in the display area of the game board side effect display device 1600 (for example, "Magnetism has been detected"". ) And lighting by various lamps (light emitting devices) arranged on the door frame 3 and the game board 5, respectively. In addition, the notification time is 60 seconds (corresponding to 6 repetitions of notification sound) from the time when the magnetic detection sensor 4024 detects the loop processing that repeatedly outputs the notification sound such as "Boo-boo magnetism has been detected". On the other hand, regarding the display in the display area of the game board side effect display device 1600 and the lighting by various lamps, the execution is continued until the release condition "power cycle" is satisfied. It has become.

In this regard, in the pachinko machine 1 according to this embodiment, in addition to the notification sound 1 (magnetic abnormality), there is a high possibility that vibration is detected by the vibration sensor 2405 (a fraudulent act due to a slapstick act is performed). Notification sound 2 (vibration abnormality) that notifies that it is in the state), and count sensor 4005 (first big winning opening sensor or second big winning opening sensor) even though it is not in the big hit game state (the state where the big winning opening is open) Notification sound for notifying that the detection by the winning opening sensor) has been performed (the state where there is a high possibility that a fraudulent act of forcibly opening the closed large winning opening to win the game ball) has been performed. 3 (abnormal grand prize) is regarded as belonging to the first notification group when there is a high possibility that some kind of fraudulent activity has been performed, and the notification sounds belonging to the first notification group are those. The notification mode, notification time, and cancellation conditions are all set to be common.

For example, in the notification sound 2 (vibration abnormality), as the notification mode, a loop process for repeatedly outputting a notification sound such as "a boo-boo vibration has been detected" and a display in the display area of the game board side effect display device 1600 (for example). , "Vibration detected") and lighting by various lamps (light emitting devices) arranged on the door frame 3 and the game board 5, respectively, and detected by the vibration sensor 2405 as the notification time. While the loop process of repeatedly outputting the notification sound in 60 seconds (corresponding to the repetition of the notification sound for 6 times) is terminated, the display in the display area of the game board side effect display device 1600 and various lamps are used. With regard to lighting by, the execution will be continued until the release condition "returning the power" is satisfied. Further, in the notification sound 3 (large prize abnormality), as the notification mode, a loop process for repeatedly outputting a notification sound such as "a boo-boo large prize abnormality has been detected" and a loop process in the display area of the game board side effect display device 1600. The display (for example, "a large prize abnormality has been detected") and the lighting by various lamps (light emitting devices) arranged on the door frame 3 and the game board 5 are executed, and the notification time is set. While the loop process for repeatedly outputting the notification sound is terminated in 60 seconds (corresponding to the repetition of the notification sound for 6 times) from the time when the count sensor 4005 detects it, it is within the display area of the game board side effect display device 1600. The display and lighting by various lamps will continue to be executed until the release condition "power cycle" is satisfied.

In the pachinko machine 1 according to this embodiment, different display modes are adopted for the notification sounds 1 to 3 belonging to the first notification group for the display in the display area of the game board side effect display device 1600. Regarding lighting by various lamps (light emitting devices) arranged in the frame 3 and the game board 5, the same lighting mode (all of the various lamps are necessarily lit) by the notification sounds 1 to 3 belonging to the first notification group. It does not have to be an embodiment). Further, regarding the notification sound that is the target of the loop processing, a notification sound such as "boo-boo" that plays a role of notifying that the notification sound belongs to the first notification group (a state in which there is a high possibility that a fraudulent act has been performed) 1 A combination of the alarm sound used in any of the above 3 and the message sound (unique sound) that plays a role of notifying the individual identification of which content of the notification is adopted is adopted. The alarm sound consists of a monotonous sound to give a warning meaning under a tense fraudulent situation, and the message sound is composed of various sounds to clarify the distinction from other alarm sounds. It is desirable to be done.

That is, when notifying an item belonging to the first notification group (a state in which there is a high possibility that a fraudulent activity has been performed), the hall side responds to the fraudulent activity rather than specifying which notification type it is. It is important to speed up the initial action of. In this regard, according to the above configuration, only the notification sound of "boo-boo" and the lighting mode unique to the first notification group by various lamps (light emitting devices) are output, and those belonging to the first notification group (cheating). Since it is possible to recognize that the situation has been performed), it is expected that the initial response to the fraudulent activity on the hall side will be expedited. Furthermore, a message sound for notifying which notification type is to be output following the notification sound of "boo-boo", and display within the display area of the game board side effect display device 1600 is performed. Therefore, it is expected that the treatment after the initial movement for the hall side will be performed smoothly.

On the other hand, the notification sound 4 (door opening) is a state in which the door frame opening switch 618 detects that the door frame 3 is open to the main body frame 4 (there is a possibility that a fraudulent act is performed by opening the door). However, there is a possibility that the door has been opened due to the abnormal response measures taken by the hall side). Then, as the notification mode, a loop process for repeatedly outputting a notification sound such as "door is open ping pong ping pong" and display in the display area of the game board side effect display device 1600 (for example, "door is open"). ”) And lighting by various lamps (light emitting devices) arranged on the door frame 3 and the game board 5 are executed respectively. In addition, the notification time is 30 seconds (equivalent to repeating the notification sound for 3 times) from the time when the door frame open switch 618 detects the loop processing that repeatedly outputs the notification sound such as "the door is open ping pong ping pong". ), But the display in the display area of the game board side effect display device 1600 and the lighting by various lamps are the release conditions of "door closure detection (door frame open switch 618 to the main body frame 4). On the other hand, the execution is continued until the "detection that the door frame 3 is closed)" is satisfied.

In this respect, in the pachinko machine 1 according to this embodiment, in addition to the notification sound 4 (door opening), it is detected that the main body frame 4 is open to the outer frame 2 by the main body frame opening switch 619 (a state in which the main body frame 4 is open to the outer frame 2 ( Although there is a possibility that fraudulent activity has been performed by opening the main body frame, there is a possibility that the main body frame has been opened due to an abnormality response measure by the hall side). , It is regarded as belonging to the second notification group when there is a moderate possibility that some kind of fraudulent activity has been performed and this cannot be denied, and the notification sounds belonging to the second notification group are notified of them. The mode, notification time, and cancellation conditions are all set to be common.

For example, in the notification sound 5 (frame open), as the notification mode, a loop process for repeatedly outputting a notification sound such as "frame is open ping-pong ping-pong" and display in the display area of the game board side effect display device 1600 ( For example, "the frame is open") and lighting by various lamps (light emitting devices) arranged on the door frame 3 and the game board 5 are executed, and the main body frame open switch is used as the notification time. While the loop process for repeatedly outputting the notification sound is terminated in 30 seconds (corresponding to the repetition of the notification sound for three times) from the time when the detection by 619 is detected, the display in the display area of the game board side effect display device 1600, And the lighting by various lamps is continued until the release condition "frame closing detection (detection that the main body frame 4 is closed with respect to the outer frame 2 by the main body frame opening switch 619)" is satisfied. It will be.

In the pachinko machine 1 according to this embodiment, different display modes are adopted for the notification sounds 4 and 5 belonging to the second notification group for the display in the display area of the game board side effect display device 1600. Regarding lighting by various lamps (light emitting devices) arranged in the frame 3 and the game board 5, the same lighting mode (all of the various lamps are necessarily lit) by the notification sounds 4 and 5 belonging to the second notification group. It does not have to be an embodiment). However, the lighting mode by the lamp (light emitting device) when belonging to the second notification group is different from the lighting mode by the lamp (light emitting device) when belonging to the first notification group. In addition, regarding the notification sound that is the target of loop processing, a message sound (unique sound) that plays a role of notifying individual identification of which content of the notification is, and a sound that belongs to the second notification group (cheating). (There is a moderate possibility that There is.

In other words, when notifying those who belong to the second notification group (a state in which there is a moderate possibility that cheating has been performed), while not making the person who is playing the proper game feel disgusted. It is important to be able to take corrective action on the hall side as quickly as possible. In this regard, according to the above configuration, as the notification sound, first, a message sound for notifying which notification type is used is output as in the case of belonging to the third notification group described later. Therefore, it is expected that those who play proper games will not feel disgust. On the other hand, in order to make it difficult for those who are playing proper games to feel disgust, an alarm sound such as "ping pong ping pong" follows the message sound, although it is a different alarm sound from the case of belonging to the first notification group. It is output when it belongs to the third notification group although it has a different lighting mode from the case where it belongs to the first notification group in order to make it difficult for a person who is playing a proper game to feel disgust. It is expected that the measures for dealing with abnormalities on the hall side will be expedited to some extent by notifying by lighting various lamps that are not displayed.

On the other hand, the notification sound 6 (left-handed guidance) is generated by the game ball at the gate portion 2003 provided in the area on the right side of the center accessory 2500 in the game area 5a even though the time is not shortened. It is in a state where the passage is detected by the gate sensor 4003 (the game is performed in a mode that is disadvantageous to the player, and it should be corrected to the game in the proper mode (left-handed)). It informs that. Then, as the notification mode, a loop process for repeatedly outputting a notification sound such as "Please return to left-handed" and a display in the display area of the game board side effect display device 1600 (for example, "Please return to left-handed"). ") And are to be executed respectively. In addition, as the notification time, both the loop processing for repeatedly outputting the notification sound such as "Please return to left-handed" and the display in the display area of the game board side effect display device 1600 are in a non-time saving state. It is designed to be completed in 20 seconds (corresponding to the repetition of two notification sounds) from the time when the detection by the gate sensor 4003 is performed.

In this regard, in the pachinko machine 1 according to this embodiment, in addition to the notification sound 6 (left-handed guidance), the lower plate 322 is detected by the full tank detection sensor 279 to be full in the game ball (lower plate). A notification sound 7 (ball removal guidance) for notifying that the game ball in 322 is in a state where the ball should be removed) is provided to guide the game to proceed properly, although the possibility of fraud is low. It is considered that it belongs to the third notification group when it is in the power state, and for the notification sounds belonging to the third notification group, the notification mode, notification time, and cancellation condition should be set to the same ones. It is said.

For example, in the notification sound 7 (ball removal guidance), as the notification mode, a loop process for repeatedly outputting a notification sound such as "please pull out the ball of the lower plate" and a loop process in the display area of the game board side effect display device 1600. The display (for example, "Please pull out the ball of the lower plate") is executed, and the notification sound such as "Please pull out the ball of the lower plate" is repeatedly output as the notification time, and the game board. Both of the displays in the display area of the side effect display device 1600 are finished in 20 seconds (corresponding to the repetition of two notification sounds) from the time when the full tank detection sensor 279 detects the display. ..

However, the notification sound 6 (left-handed guidance) and the notification sound 7 (ball removal guidance) are detected by the gate sensor 4003 or the full tank detection sensor 279 when they are completed in 20 seconds. When the 279 is still in the detection state, the notification process (notification sound 6 (left-handed guidance) and notification sound 7 (ball removal guidance)) is executed again from the beginning.

In the third notification group according to this embodiment, only the message sound is output as the notification sounds 6 and 7, but more strictly speaking, for example, after the message sound for 5 seconds is output, there is no sound for 5 seconds. The data is assigned to channel X and the corresponding sound is output (silence output), and a loop process that repeats the notification sound for 10 seconds with the message sound and silence data as a set is performed. It has become. Since the notification sounds 6 and 7 are designed to output silent data for the same amount of time, they function as a unique notification mode different from the first notification group and the second notification group. Even on the hall side, it becomes possible to properly recognize that the notification belongs to the third notification group simply by checking the silent data part instead of the message sound part that is difficult to hear in the noisy hall. It is desirable that the silent data is prepared in advance as one sound data (sound data for 10 seconds) including the message sound, and the loop processing is performed with this assigned to the channel X.

By the way, there may be silence in the notification sound used in the first notification group and the second notification group (between the alarm sound and the message sound, etc.), but these are very short to have a "pause". It is clear that it is time-based and is fundamentally different from the above-mentioned silent portion having a relatively long time (third notification group) having a group identification function.

According to such a configuration, alarm sounds such as "boo-boo" and "ping-pong ping-pong" are not output, and only the message sound is repeatedly output with a predetermined silence time in between. It becomes possible to notify the game guidance without causing disgust.

In the examples shown in FIGS. 155 and 156, the same priority is set for the notification sounds belonging to the same notification group, but the priority is different among the notification sounds belonging to the same notification group. You may do so. Further, as the reproduction type setting, it is decided to adopt loop reproduction in which the target sound is repeatedly reproduced, but the present invention is not necessarily limited to this, and 1SHOT reproduction in which the target sound is reproduced once may be adopted. .. In addition, "Boo Boo", which is commonly used for the notification sounds belonging to the first notification group, and "Ping Pong Ping Pong", which is commonly used for the notification sounds belonging to the second notification group, have a connection with the message sound. The sound data may be prepared separately for each notification sound, or may be prepared as sound data separate from the message sound, and sound data in which the message sound and the alarm sound are combined is created at the time of output. You may then assign it to a channel.

FIG. 157 (a) shows a process when one notification sound belonging to the first notification group is being played and the output condition (abnormality detection) of another notification sound belonging to the first notification group is satisfied. An example is shown.

As shown in FIG. 157 (a), if there is magnetic detection by the magnetic detection sensor 4024 in the process of step S112 (FIG. 94) at the timing tα1 where no notification sound is output at present, it is mainly In the control MPU 1310a, first, the state of the notification flag is updated so that it is indicated that the magnetic detection has occurred. Next, the information indicating that the magnetic detection has occurred is set as a command for the peripheral control board 1510. As a result, in the process of step S118 (FIG. 94), the information indicating that the magnetic detection has occurred based on the state of the updated notification flag is output externally and managed in the hall computer, and the step. In the process of S120 (FIG. 94), a command is transmitted to the peripheral control board 1510, and the information (magnetic detection) is used for the process related to the notification in the peripheral control MPU 1511a.

On the other hand, in the peripheral control MPU1511a, as a result of analyzing the command in the received command analysis process of step S1022 (FIG. 95) at the timing tα1 (or immediately after that) when no notification sound is output, the magnetic detection information. In the warning process of step S1024 (FIG. 95), the notification sound 1 (magnetic anomaly) shown in FIG. 156 is assigned (set) to the channel X, and the notification mode thereof is determined. (Here, the loop of "Boo Boo magnetism detected") is started, and a timer (60 seconds) for measuring the notification time of the notification sound 1 (magnetic anomaly) is set.

When assigning the notification sound 1 (magnetic anomaly) to the channel X, the sound generation schedule data corresponding to the magnetic detection is extracted from the various control data copy areas of the peripheral control ROM 1511b or the peripheral control RAM 1511c for peripheral control. It will be set in the schedule data storage area 1511cae of the RAM 1511c. Then, by assigning the notification sound 1 (magnetic anomaly) to the channel X, the notification sound such as "Boo-boo magnetism has been detected" is reproduced in a predetermined processing mode (loop). become.

At this time, the peripheral control MPU 1511a extracts the screen generation schedule data according to the magnetic detection and the light emission mode generation schedule data according to the magnetic detection from the peripheral control ROM 1511b or the various control data copy areas of the peripheral control RAM 1511c. By setting the peripheral control RAM 1511c in the schedule data storage area 1511cae, the above-mentioned in-liquid crystal display and lamp lighting are also executed. The liquid crystal display and the lamp lighting are continuously executed until the power is turned on again, which is a condition for canceling the magnetic anomaly.

Through such processing, a notification sound such as "Boo-boo magnetism has been detected" is repeatedly executed from the timing tα1 for 60 seconds, and a display in the display area of the game board side effect display device 1600 (for example, "magnetism is detected"). ”) And lighting by various lamps arranged on the door frame 3 and the game board 5 (lighting mode of the first notification group) will be executed respectively.

However, in the example shown in FIG. 157 (a), step S112 ( It is assumed that vibration is detected by the vibration sensor 2405 in the process of FIG. 94). In this respect, in the main control MPU 1310a, as in the case of the timing tα1 in which the magnetic detection was performed, first, the state of the notification flag is updated so as to indicate that the vibration detection was performed. Next, the information indicating that the vibration has been detected is set as a command for the peripheral control board 1510. As a result, in the process of step S118 (FIG. 94), the information indicating that the vibration has been detected based on the state of the updated notification flag is output externally and managed in the hall computer, and the step. In the process of S120 (FIG. 94), a command is transmitted to the peripheral control board 1510, and the information (vibration detection) is used for the process related to the notification in the peripheral control MPU 1511a.

On the other hand, in the peripheral control MPU1511a, the command is analyzed by the received command analysis process in step S1022 (FIG. 95) at the timing tα2 (or immediately after that) when the notification sound 1 (magnetic abnormality) is in the output state (reproduction state). As a result, even if it is grasped that the vibration detection information is included, the notification sound 2 (vibration abnormality) shown in FIG. 156 is assigned to the channel X in the warning process of step S1024 (FIG. 95). I don't do that. That is, since the notification sound 1 (magnetic anomaly) having the same priority is already assigned to the channel X, the notification sound 2 (vibration abnormality) is not newly assigned to the channel X. As a result, the reproduction of the notification sound 1 (magnetic anomaly) on the side already assigned is preferentially executed and continued.

Further, in the peripheral control MPU1511a according to this embodiment, the sound generation schedule data itself according to the vibration detection is not set at the timing tα2. Therefore, the sound generation schedule data corresponding to the notification sound 2 (vibration abnormality) is not processed in the state of not being assigned to the channel X.

However, on the other hand, in the peripheral control MPU1511a according to this embodiment, at the timing tα2 (or immediately after that), a timer (60 seconds) for measuring the notification time of the notification sound 2 (vibration abnormality) that has not been set yet. ) Is set, and when the output state (reproduction state) of the notification sound 1 (magnetic abnormality) is completed and the timer (60 seconds) is not timed up, the sound corresponding to the vibration detection is performed. The generation schedule data is set, and the notification sound 2 (vibration abnormality) is assigned to the channel X for the remaining time, and the notification sound in the notification mode (here, the loop of "Boo-boo vibration detected"). It is supposed to perform playback.

Further, in the peripheral control MPU1511a, although the sound generation schedule data corresponding to the vibration detection is not set at the timing tα2 (or immediately after that), the screen generation schedule data corresponding to the vibration detection and the vibration detection are not set. By extracting the schedule data for generating the light emitting mode according to the above from the peripheral control ROM 1511b or the various control data copy areas of the peripheral control RAM 1511c and setting it in the schedule data storage area 1511cae of the peripheral control RAM 1511c, the above-mentioned in-liquid crystal display and lamp These are executed for lighting.

In the liquid crystal display, the display corresponding to the vibration abnormality appears separately at a position different from the position where the display corresponding to the magnetic abnormality is performed in the display area of the game board side effect display device 1600. There is. When the lamp is lit, the schedule data for generating the light emitting mode according to the vibration detection is set, but the schedule data for generating the light emitting mode according to the magnetic detection is already set and the priority order is the same. The lighting mode of the light emission mode generation schedule data according to the magnetic detection that has already been set will be reflected in each of the various lamps, and the lighting mode of the light emission mode generation schedule data according to the vibration detection will be various. It is not reflected by the lamp emission. Similar to the sound generation schedule data, the light emission mode generation schedule data corresponding to the vibration detection may not be set at the timing tα2 (or immediately after that).

However, as described above, in this embodiment, since the schedule data for generating the light emitting mode according to the magnetic detection and the schedule data for generating the light emitting mode according to the vibration detection have the same data contents, any of them can be used. Even if it is reflected, the lamp lighting does not change.

After that, at the timing tα3 where 60 seconds have passed from the timing tα1, the notification sound such as “Boo-boo magnetism has been detected” is repeated based on the time-up of the timer (60 seconds) of the notification sound 1 (magnetic anomaly). The loop processing to be executed will be terminated. Here, since the time required to reproduce the notification sound such as "Boo-boo magnetism has been detected" once is set to 10 seconds, the timer (60 seconds) of the notification sound 1 (magnetic anomaly) is set to time. At the up timing tα3, the loop processing is finished at a good timing when the notification sound such as “Boo-boo magnetism has been detected” has been played 6 times.

At this time, since the timer (60 seconds) of the notification sound 2 (vibration abnormality) is not in the time-up state, the peripheral control MPU1511a sets the sound generation schedule data according to the vibration detection, and the rest. By allocating the notification sound 2 (vibration abnormality) to the channel X for the time (the time obtained by subtracting the time (α) from the timing tα2 to the timing tα3 from 60 seconds), the notification mode (here, “boo-boo vibration”). The notification sound is played back in the loop of "Detected".

That is, while the timer for the notification sound 2 (vibration abnormality) is set at the timing tα2, the schedule data for sound generation corresponding to the vibration detection is not set and is set when the timing tα3 is reached. Therefore, at the timing tα3, the notification sound of “Boo-boo vibration has been detected” can be reproduced from the head, and when the timer of notification sound 2 (vibration abnormality) is timed up, “Boo-boo vibration is detected”. It is possible to urge the loop processing to be terminated and not to be played back at a halfway timing (for example, a timing such as "boo-boo vibration") among the notification sounds such as "was done".

According to such a configuration, when the output condition (abnormality detection) of another notification sound belonging to the first notification group is satisfied while one notification sound belonging to the first notification group is being reproduced (Fig. 157 (a)), the 6th alarm sound (here, "boo-boo") and the 6th message sound (here, "magnetic detection") have finished playing, and the 7th alarm sound (here) Then, it becomes possible to realize smooth notification sound switching as if "boo-boo") was reproduced. As a result, "Boo Boo magnetism was detected" and "Boo Boo vibration was detected" are connected at strange points, making it impossible to recognize fraudulent notifications in a tense situation (for example,). If the notification sound 1 ends with "boo-boo magnetism" and the notification sound 2 starts with "movement detected", a meaningless notification such as "boo-boo magnetism has been detected" It becomes a content, and it becomes possible to suitably suppress the occurrence of (which may confuse the site).

Further, according to the above configuration, at the timing tα3, the remaining time of the timer corresponding to the vibration detection is shortened, and the notification sound 2 time-ups at the warning sound of “boo-boo” and ends, resulting in a message sound. Even if it is not played back, it is possible to recognize that some kind of abnormality detection has occurred at the same time because the loop processing is terminated at a halfway timing and it is no longer played back (only magnetic anomaly). If it is a notification, the notification sound will end at a good point). As a result, when the notification sound is cut off at a halfway timing, it is prompted to check the display on the liquid crystal display, and the display on the liquid crystal display says "magnetism detected" and "vibration detected", respectively. By displaying the display, it becomes possible to properly recognize that the magnetic detection and the vibration detection have been performed.

FIG. 157 (b) shows processing when one notification sound belonging to the second notification group is being played and the output condition (state detection) of another notification sound belonging to the second notification group is satisfied. An example is shown.

Here, the process when the output condition (state detection) of another notification sound belonging to the second notification group is satisfied while one notification sound belonging to the second notification group is being reproduced is shown in FIG. 157 (a). ) And the above-mentioned processing (processing when one notification sound belonging to the first notification group is being played and the output condition (state detection) of another notification sound belonging to the first notification group is satisfied. ) Is almost the same.

For example, as shown in FIG. 157 (b), at the timing tβ1 in which no notification sound is currently output, the frame opening detection by the main body frame opening switch 619 in the process of step S110 or S112 (FIG. 94). If there is, the main control MPU 1310a first updates the state of the notification flag so that it is indicated that the frame opening detection has occurred. Next, the information indicating that the frame opening has been detected is set as a command for the peripheral control board 1510. As a result, in the process of step S118 (FIG. 94), the information that the frame opening detection has been detected is output externally based on the state of the updated notification flag, and is managed in the hall computer. In the process of step S120 (FIG. 94), a command is transmitted to the peripheral control board 1510, and the information (frame opening detection) is used for the process related to the notification in the peripheral control MPU 1511a.

On the other hand, in the peripheral control MPU1511a, as a result of analyzing the command in the received command analysis process of step S1022 (FIG. 95) at the timing tβ1 (or immediately after that) when no notification sound is output, the frame opening detection is detected. When it is grasped that the information is included, in the warning process of step S1024 (FIG. 95), the notification sound 5 (frame opening) shown in FIG. 156 is assigned (set) to the channel X and the notification is made. A timer (30 seconds) is set to start the notification sound reproduction in the mode (here, the loop of "the frame is open ping pong ping pong") and to measure the notification time of the notification sound 5 (frame open). ..

When assigning the notification sound 5 (frame open) to the channel X, the sound generation schedule data corresponding to the frame open detection is extracted from the peripheral control ROM 1511b or the various control data copy areas of the peripheral control RAM 1511c and is peripheral. It will be set in the schedule data storage area 1511cae of the control RAM 1511c. Then, by assigning the notification sound 5 (frame open) to the channel X, the notification sound such as "the frame is open ping-pong ping-pong" is reproduced in a predetermined processing mode (loop). Will be.

At this time, in the peripheral control MPU 1511a, the screen generation schedule data corresponding to the frame opening detection and the light emission mode generation schedule data corresponding to the frame opening detection are transferred from the peripheral control ROM 1511b or the various control data copy areas of the peripheral control RAM 1511c. By extracting and setting it in the schedule data storage area 1511cae of the peripheral control RAM 1511c, the above-mentioned in-liquid crystal display and lamp lighting are also executed. The execution of the display in the liquid crystal display and the lighting of the lamp is continuously executed until the frame closing detection, which is the release condition of the frame opening detection, is performed.

Through such processing, a notification sound such as "frame is open ping-pong ping-pong" is repeatedly executed from timing tβ1 for 30 seconds, and a display in the display area of the game board side effect display device 1600 (for example, "frame is open"). "It is open") and lighting by various lamps arranged on the door frame 3 and the game board 5 (lighting mode of the second notification group) are executed respectively.

However, in the example shown in FIG. 157 (b), in the timing tβ2 in which 30 seconds have not passed from the timing tβ1 and the notification sound such as "the frame is open ping-pong ping-pong" is in the loop playback state, step S110. Alternatively, it is assumed that the door opening is detected by the door frame opening switch 618 within the process of S112 (FIG. 94). In this respect, in the main control MPU 1310a, the state of the notification flag is first updated so as to indicate that the door opening detection has been performed, as in the case of the timing tβ1 in which the frame opening detection has been performed. Next, the information indicating that the door opening has been detected is set as a command for the peripheral control board 1510. As a result, in the process of step S118 (FIG. 94), the information that the door open detection has been detected is output externally based on the state of the updated notification flag, and is managed in the hall computer. In the process of step S120 (FIG. 94), a command is transmitted to the peripheral control board 1510, and the information (door open detection) is used for the process related to the notification in the peripheral control MPU 1511a.

On the other hand, in the peripheral control MPU1511a, the command is analyzed by the received command analysis process in step S1022 (FIG. 95) at the timing tβ2 (or immediately after that) when the notification sound 5 (frame open) is in the output state (reproduction state). As a result, even if it is grasped that the information of the door opening detection is included, the notification sound 4 (door opening) shown in FIG. 156 is transmitted to the channel X in the warning process of step S1024 (FIG. 95). Not assigned. That is, since the notification sound 5 (frame open) having the same priority is already assigned to the channel X, the notification sound 4 (door open) is not newly assigned to the channel X. As a result, the notification sound 5 (frame open) on the side already assigned is preferentially reproduced and continued.

Further, in the peripheral control MPU1511a according to this embodiment, the sound generation schedule data itself according to the door opening detection is not set at the timing tβ2. Therefore, the sound generation schedule data corresponding to the notification sound 4 (door opening) is not processed in the state of not being assigned to the channel X.

However, on the other hand, in the peripheral control MPU1511a according to this embodiment, at the timing tβ2 (or immediately after that), a timer (30 seconds) for measuring the notification time of the notification sound 4 (door opening) that has not been set yet. ) Is set, and when the time-up of the timer (30 seconds) is not reached when the output state (playback state) of the notification sound 5 (frame open) ends, the door open detection is performed. Schedule data for sound generation is set, and notification sound 4 (door open) is assigned to channel X for the remaining time, and in that notification mode (here, the loop of "door is open ping pong ping pong"). The notification sound is played back.

Further, in the peripheral control MPU1511a, at the timing tβ2 (or immediately after that), the sound generation schedule data corresponding to the door opening detection is not set, but the screen generation schedule data corresponding to the door opening detection and the screen generation schedule data are set. By extracting the schedule data for generating the light emitting mode according to the door opening detection from the various control data copy areas of the peripheral control ROM 1511b or the peripheral control RAM 1511c and setting it in the schedule data storage area 1511cae of the peripheral control RAM 1511c, the inside of the liquid crystal described above These are executed for the display and the lighting of the lamp.

In the liquid crystal display, the display corresponding to the door opening appears separately at a position different from the position where the display corresponding to the frame opening is performed in the display area of the game board side effect display device 1600. There is. When the lamp is lit, the schedule data for generating the light emitting mode according to the door opening detection is set, but the schedule data for generating the light emitting mode according to the frame opening detection is already set and the priority order is the same. Therefore, the lighting mode of the schedule data for generating the light emitting mode according to the frame opening detection that has already been set is reflected in each of the various lamps, and the lighting mode of the schedule data for generating the light emitting mode according to the door opening detection is lit. The mode is not reflected in each of the various lamp emissions. Similar to the sound generation schedule data, the light emission mode generation schedule data corresponding to the door opening detection may not be set at the timing tβ2 (or immediately after that).

However, as described above, in this embodiment, the schedule data for generating the light emitting mode according to the detection of opening the frame and the schedule data for generating the light emitting mode according to the detection of opening the door have the same data contents. No matter which one is reflected, the lamp lighting does not change.

After that, at the timing tβ3 where 30 seconds have passed from the timing tβ1, a notification sound such as "the frame is open ping pong ping pong" is emitted based on the time-up of the timer (30 seconds) of the notification sound 5 (frame open). The loop processing to be repeatedly executed will be terminated. Here, since the time required to play the notification sound such as "the frame is open ping-pong ping-pong" once is set to 10 seconds, the timer (30 seconds) of the notification sound 5 (frame open) is set. At the timing tβ3 when the time is up, the loop processing is finished at a good timing when the notification sound such as "the frame is open ping pong ping pong" has been played three times.

At this time, since the timer (30 seconds) of the notification sound 4 (door opening) is not in the time-up state, the peripheral control MPU1511a sets the sound generation schedule data corresponding to the door opening detection, and the time is set. By allocating the notification sound 4 (door open) to the channel X for the remaining time (the time obtained by subtracting the time (β) from the timing tβ2 to the timing tβ3 from 30 seconds), the notification mode (here, “door” is used. Is open Ping Pong Ping Pong "loop) will be used to play the notification sound.

That is, while the timer for the notification sound 4 (door opening) is set at the timing tβ2, the schedule data for sound generation corresponding to the door opening detection is not set and is set when the timing tβ3 is reached. Therefore, at timing tβ3, the notification sound of "door is open ping pong ping pong" can be reproduced from the head, and when the timer of notification sound 4 (door open) is timed up, "door is open". It will be possible to urge the loop processing to end and stop playing at halfway timing (for example, timing such as "door is open") among the notification sounds such as "ping pong ping pong".

According to such a configuration, even when the output condition (state detection) of another notification sound belonging to the second notification group is satisfied while one notification sound belonging to the second notification group is being reproduced (FIG. FIG. 157 (b)) When the third message sound (here, "the frame is open") and the third alarm sound (here, "ping pong ping pong") have finished playing, the fourth message sound (here, "ping pong ping pong") Here, it becomes possible to realize smooth notification sound switching as if "the door is open") was played. As a result, "the frame is open ping-pong ping-pong" and "the door is open ping-pong ping-pong" are connected at strange places, and it becomes impossible to recognize the notification content in a tense situation. The occurrence can be suppressed suitably.

Further, according to the above configuration, at the timing tβ3, the remaining time of the timer corresponding to the door open detection is shortened, and even if the notification sound 4 is interrupted halfway, the message sound is reproduced first. Therefore, it becomes possible to surely grasp that the door is open.

FIG. 157 (c) shows a process when one notification sound belonging to the third notification group is being played and the output condition (state detection) of another notification sound belonging to the third notification group is satisfied. An example is shown.

As shown in FIG. 157 (c), at the timing tγ1 in which no notification sound is output, the game is played in spite of being in a non-time saving state in the processing of steps S112 or S116 (FIG. 94). Assuming that the gate sensor 4003 detects that the game ball has passed through the gate portion 2003 provided in the region on the right side of the center accessory 2500 in the region 5a (right-handed detection in a non-time saving state), it is mainly In the control MPU 1310a, the information that the right-handed hit is detected in the non-time saving state is set as a command for the peripheral control board 1510. As a result, in the process of step S120 (FIG. 94), a command is transmitted to the peripheral control board 1510, and the information (right-handed detection in the time saving state) is used for the process related to the notification in the peripheral control MPU 1511a. Will be. Regarding the processing of the third notification group, the notification flag is not updated in the main control MPU1310a, and the information is not output to the hall computer externally.

On the other hand, in the peripheral control MPU1511a, as a result of analyzing the command in the received command analysis process of step S1022 (FIG. 95) at the timing tγ1 (or immediately after that) in which no notification sound is output, the result is in a non-time saving state. When it is grasped that the right-handed detection information is included, the notification sound 6 (left-handed guidance) shown in FIG. 156 is assigned to the channel X in the warning process of step S1024 (FIG. 95) ( A timer (set) for starting the notification sound reproduction in the notification mode (here, the loop of "Please return to left-handed") and timing the notification time of the notification sound 6 (left-handed guidance) (set). 20 seconds) is set.

Regarding the right-handed detection in the non-time saving state, in this embodiment, the information to that effect is output as a command from the main control MPU 1310a, but instead of this, the gate unit 2003 is played from the main control MPU 1310a. Only the information that the sphere has passed is detected by the gate sensor 4003 is output as a command, and the peripheral control MPU1511a determines whether or not the detection by the gate sensor 4003 is performed in a non-time saving state. Is performed, and processing related to the notification sound 6 (left-handed guidance) may be performed based on the detection by the gate sensor 4003 in the non-time saving state.

When assigning the notification sound 6 (left-handed guidance) to the channel X, the sound generation schedule data corresponding to the right-handed detection in the non-time saving state is copied to various control data of the peripheral control ROM 1511b or the peripheral control RAM 1511c. It is extracted from the area and set in the schedule data storage area 1511cae of the peripheral control RAM 1511c. Then, by assigning the notification sound 6 (left-handed guidance) to the channel X, the notification sound such as "Please return to left-handed" is reproduced in a predetermined processing mode (loop). Will be.

At this time, the peripheral control MPU 1511a extracts the screen generation schedule data corresponding to the right-handed detection in the non-time saving state from the peripheral control ROM 1511b or the various control data copy areas of the peripheral control RAM 1511c, and schedule data of the peripheral control RAM 1511c. By setting the storage area 1511 cage, the above-mentioned in-liquid crystal display is also executed. Execution of the display on the liquid crystal display is the end of notification, which is a condition for canceling the notification sound 6 (left-handed guidance) (the timer (20 seconds) for timing the notification time of the notification sound 6 (left-handed guidance) is timed up). It will continue to run until. Regarding the processing of the third notification group, which has a low possibility of fraud, it is important to avoid hindering the progress of the production, and the schedule data for generating the light emission mode according to the right-handed detection in the non-time saving state is set. Will not be done.

Through such processing, a notification sound such as "Please return to left-handed" is repeatedly executed from the timing tγ1 for 20 seconds, and the display of the game board side effect display device 1600 is displayed until the notification sound ends. Display within the area (for example, "Please return to left-handed") will be executed.

However, in the example shown in FIG. 157 (c), at the timing tγ2 in which 20 seconds have not passed from the timing tγ1 and the notification sound such as "Please return to left-handed" is in the loop playback state, step S110 or It is assumed that the lower plate full tank is detected by the full tank detection sensor 279 in the process of S112 (FIG. 94). In this regard, in the main control MPU 1310a, information indicating that the lower plate full tank has been detected is set as a command for the peripheral control board 1510, as in the case of the timing tγ1 in which the right-handed hit is detected in the non-time saving state. As a result, in the process of step S120 (FIG. 94), a command is transmitted to the peripheral control board 1510 and the information (detection of full lower plate) is used for the process related to the notification in the peripheral control MPU 1511a. Become.

On the other hand, in the peripheral control MPU1511a, at the timing tγ2 (or immediately after that) when the notification sound 6 (left-handed guidance) is in the output state (reproduction state), a command is issued in the reception command analysis process in step S1022 (FIG. 95). As a result of the analysis, even if it is found that the information of the lower plate full tank detection is included, the notification sound 7 (ball removal guidance) shown in FIG. 156 is channeled in the warning process of step S1024 (FIG. 95). It is not assigned to X. That is, since the notification sound 6 (left-handed guidance) having the same priority is already assigned to the channel X, the notification sound 7 (ball removal guidance) should not be newly assigned to the channel X. By setting the setting, the playback of the notification sound 6 (left-handed guidance) on the side already assigned is preferentially executed and continued.

Further, in the peripheral control MPU1511a according to this embodiment, the schedule data itself for sound generation corresponding to the detection of the lower plate full tank is not set at the timing tγ2. Therefore, the sound generation schedule data corresponding to the notification sound 7 (ball removal guidance) is not processed in the state of not being assigned to the channel X.

However, on the other hand, in the peripheral control MPU1511a according to this embodiment, at the timing tγ2 (or immediately after that), a timer (20) for measuring the notification time of the notification sound 7 (ball removal guidance) that has not yet been set. Set this for (seconds), and when the timer (20 seconds) is not timed up when the output state (playback state) of the notification sound 6 (left-handed guidance) ends, the lower plate is full. Set the schedule data for sound generation according to the detection, assign the notification sound 7 (ball removal guidance) to the channel X for the remaining time, and the notification mode (here, "Pull out the ball in the lower plate". The notification sound is reproduced in the loop).

Further, in the peripheral control MPU1511a, at the timing tγ2 (or immediately after that), although the schedule data for sound generation corresponding to the detection of the full tank of the lower plate is not set, the screen is generated according to the detection of the full tank of the lower plate. By extracting the schedule data from the peripheral control ROM 1511b or various control data copy areas of the peripheral control RAM 1511c and setting it in the schedule data storage area 1511cae of the peripheral control RAM 1511c, the above-mentioned in-liquid crystal display is executed. There is.

In the liquid crystal display, the display corresponding to the ball removal guidance appears separately at a position different from the position where the display corresponding to the left-handed guidance is performed in the display area of the game board side effect display device 1600. It has become.

After that, at the timing tγ3 where 20 seconds have passed from the timing tγ1, a notification sound such as "Please return to the left-handed" is emitted based on the time-up of the timer (20 seconds) of the notification sound 6 (left-handed guidance). The loop processing to be repeatedly executed will be terminated. Here, since the time required to play the notification sound such as "Please return to left-handed" once is set to 10 seconds, the timer (30 seconds) of the notification sound 6 (left-handed guidance) is set. At the timing tγ3 when the time is up, the loop processing is finished at a good timing when the notification sound such as "Please return to left-handed" has been played twice.

At this time, since the timer (20 seconds) of the notification sound 7 (ball removal guidance) is not in the time-up state, the peripheral control MPU1511a sets the sound generation schedule data according to the detection of the lower plate full tank. Then, by allocating the notification sound 7 (ball removal guidance) to the channel X for the remaining time (the time obtained by subtracting the time (γ) from the timing tγ2 to the timing tγ3 from 20 seconds), the notification mode (here). Then, the notification sound is reproduced in the loop of "Please pull out the ball of the lower plate").

That is, while the timer for the notification sound 7 (ball removal guidance) is set at the timing tγ2, the schedule data for sound generation corresponding to the detection of the full tank of the lower plate is not set and is set when the timing tγ3 is reached. Therefore, at the timing tγ3, the notification sound of "Please pull out the ball of the lower plate" can be reproduced from the head, and when the timer of the notification sound 7 (ball removal guidance) is timed up. , "Please pull out the ball of the lower plate", the loop processing is terminated at the halfway timing (for example, the timing of "Pull out the ball of the lower plate") and it is not played. You will be able to encourage.

According to such a configuration, even when the output condition (state detection) of another notification sound belonging to the third notification group is satisfied while one notification sound belonging to the third notification group is being reproduced (FIG. FIG. 157 (c)) When the second message sound (here, "Please return to left-handed") has finished playing, the third message sound (here, "Please pull out the ball on the lower plate") is heard. It becomes possible to realize smooth notification sound switching as if it was reproduced. As a result, "Please return to left-handed" and "Please pull out the ball on the lower plate" are connected at strange points, and it is possible to suppress the occurrence of a situation in which the notification content cannot be recognized. You will be able to do it.

Further, in the third notification group according to this embodiment, as described above, after the message sound has been output, silence data for 5 seconds is assigned to the channel X, and the corresponding sound is output (silence output). It has become like. Therefore, when the output condition (state detection) of another notification sound belonging to the third notification group is satisfied while one notification sound belonging to the third notification group is being played, silence data for 5 seconds is inserted. Since the message sound of another notification sound is reproduced in, it is preferable to generate a situation in which two different message sounds are connected due to the absence of the alarm sound and the notification content cannot be recognized. You will be able to avoid it.

FIG. 158 (a) shows an example of processing when the output condition (state detection) of the notification sound belonging to the second notification group is satisfied while one notification sound belonging to the first notification group is being played. It shows.

As shown in FIG. 158 (a), if there is magnetic detection by the magnetic detection sensor 4024 in the process of step S112 (FIG. 94) at the timing t-1 when no notification sound is output, the said. Regarding the processing according to the magnetic detection (magnetic anomaly processing), the same processing as in the case described with reference to FIG. 157 (a) is performed. Therefore, at the timing t-1, the loop process for repeatedly executing the notification sound such as "Boo-boo magnetism has been detected" is started, and the timing when the timer (60 seconds) of the notification sound 1 (magnetic anomaly) is timed up. In t-3, the loop processing is terminated at a good timing when the notification sound such as "Boo-boo magnetism has been detected" has been reproduced for 6 times. Further, the liquid crystal display and the lamp lighting are continuously executed until the power is turned on again, which is a condition for canceling the magnetic anomaly.

Here, in the example shown in FIG. 158 (a), 60 seconds have not passed from the timing t-1, and the notification sound such as "boo-boo magnetism has been detected" is in the loop playback state at the timing t-2. In step S110 or S112 (FIG. 94), it is assumed that the door opening is detected by the door frame opening switch 618. In this respect, the processing of the notification sound 1 (magnetic anomaly) in response to the magnetic detection has a higher priority than the processing of the notification sound 4 (door opening) in response to the door opening detection (see FIG. 155). ), Even if the door open detection occurs, the processing of the notification sound 1 (magnetic abnormality) is continuously performed.

Then, normally, for the processing on the lower priority side, as in the case where the processing of the same priority side described with reference to FIGS. 157 (a) and 157 (c) overlaps, the notification sound on the lower priority side A process is performed in which only the timer is set and the schedule data for sound generation itself is not set.

However, the situation where the door is opened immediately after a magnetic anomaly occurs is different from the case where only the door is opened, and there is a high possibility that some kind of fraudulent activity is being carried out. It can be said that it is difficult to say that the notification belongs to the "second notification group" with a medium possibility of fraud. Therefore, in the example shown in FIG. 158 (a), at the timing t-2, neither the timer of the notification sound 4 (door opening) corresponding to the door opening detection and the sound generation schedule data are set. , Only set the flag according to the door open detection. Then, at the timing t-3, based on the setting of the flag, the timer of the notification sound 4 (door opening) corresponding to the door opening detection and the sound generation schedule data corresponding to the door opening detection are set, respectively. At the same time as setting, the notification sound 4 (door open) is assigned to the channel X to start the notification sound reproduction in the notification mode (here, the loop of "the door is open ping pong ping pong"). .. The execution of the liquid crystal display and the lamp lighting in response to the door opening detection is started from the timing t-2.

According to such a configuration, even though the door frame opening switch 618 detected the door opening while the notification sound such as "Boo Boo magnetism was detected" was playing in the loop, "Boo Boo magnetism was detected." From the timing t-3 when the loop playback of the notification sound such as "Door is open", the notification sound 4 (door open) corresponding to the door open detection is played in full for 30 seconds, and "Door is open Ping Pong Ping Pong". The loop processing is terminated at a good timing when the notification sound such as is played three times. In this way, the notification sound 4 (door opening) corresponding to the door opening detection is reproduced in a more polite notification mode different from the processing based on the normal priority, so that the notification belonging to the second notification group is reproduced. Although it is the content (here, the loop of "door is open ping pong ping pong"), it is expected to raise awareness that the situation is highly likely to be fraudulent.

In addition, after the notification sound such as "Boo Boo magnetism has been detected", the notification content will start from the message sound (the door is open), so that the first notification group is in the most tense situation. It will be possible to recognize at an early stage that the notification to which it belongs has been completed. On the other hand, by reproducing the alarm sound of "ping-pong ping-pong" after the message sound, it becomes possible to easily recognize that the notification does not belong to the third notification group.

FIG. 158 (b) shows an example of processing when the output condition (state detection) of the notification sound belonging to the third notification group is satisfied while the notification sound belonging to the second notification group is being played. It shows.

As shown in FIG. 158 (b), it is assumed that the door opening detection by the door frame opening switch 618 is performed in the process of step S110 or S112 (FIG. 94) at the timing tδ1 in which no notification sound is output. As for the process corresponding to the door open detection (door open process), the same process as the "frame open detection process (frame open process)" described with reference to FIG. 157 (b) is performed. Will be. Therefore, at the timing tδ1, the loop process for repeatedly executing the notification sound such as “the door is open ping-pong ping-pong” is started, and the timing tδ3 when the timer (30 seconds) of the notification sound 4 (door open) is timed up. Then, the loop processing is finished at a good timing when the notification sound such as "The door is open ping pong ping pong" has been played three times. Further, the liquid crystal display and the lamp lighting are continuously executed until the door closing, which is the condition for releasing the door opening, is detected.

Here, in the example shown in FIG. 158 (b), at the timing tδ2 in which 30 seconds have not passed from the timing tδ1 and the notification sound such as “door is open ping-pong ping-pong” is in the loop playback state, the step is taken. It is assumed that the gate sensor 4003 detects a right-handed hit in a non-time saving state in the process of S112 or S116 (FIG. 94). In this respect, the processing of the notification sound 4 (door opening) in response to the door open detection has a higher priority than the processing of the notification sound 6 (left-handed guidance) in response to the right-handed detection in the non-time saving state. Therefore (see FIG. 155), the processing of the notification sound 4 (door opening) is continuously performed even when the right-handed detection occurs in the non-time saving state.

That is, as described above, for the processing on the lower priority side, the notification sound on the lower priority side is the same as in the case where the processing of the same priority described with reference to FIGS. 157 (a) to 157 (c) overlaps. The process is performed so that only the timer of the above is set and the schedule data for sound generation itself is not set.

Therefore, in the example shown in FIG. 158 (b), at the timing tδ2, the timer (20 seconds) of the notification sound 6 (left-handed guidance) is set, while the sound is generated in response to the right-handed detection in the non-time saving state. Schedule data is not set. Then, at the timing tδ3, when the timer (20 seconds) of the notification sound 6 (left-handed guidance) is not timed up, the sound generation schedule data corresponding to the right-handed detection in the non-time saving state is set, and the remaining time is set. The notification sound 6 (left-handed guidance) is assigned to the channel X for the number of minutes, and the notification sound is reproduced in the notification mode (here, the loop of "return to left-handed").

According to such a configuration, the notification sound such as "The door is open ping-pong ping-pong" has been played three times, and the notification sound such as "Please return to left-handed" is not included at a good timing. Will be reproduced, so that it becomes possible to easily recognize that the possibility of fraud has decreased while continuing the notification state. Further, in the third notification group according to this embodiment, as described above, after the message sound has been output, silence data for 5 seconds is assigned to the channel X, and the corresponding sound is output (silence output). It has become like. Therefore, even with such silent data, the notification sound of the type that has been reproduced up to that point has ended, and it is possible to easily recognize that the notification sound belonging to the third notification group is being reproduced. Will be.

FIG. 158 (c) shows an example of processing when the output condition (state detection) of the notification sound belonging to the first notification group is satisfied while one notification sound belonging to the second notification group is being played. It shows.

As shown in FIG. 158 (c), it is assumed that the door opening detection by the door frame opening switch 618 is performed in the process of step S110 or S112 (FIG. 94) at the timing tε1 in which no notification sound is output. As for the process corresponding to the door open detection (door open process), the same process as the "frame open detection process (frame open process)" described with reference to FIG. 157 (b) is performed. Will be. Therefore, at the timing tε1, the loop process for repeatedly executing the notification sound such as “the door is open ping-pong ping-pong” is started, and the timing tε3 when the timer (30 seconds) of the notification sound 4 (door open) is timed up. Then, the loop processing is finished at a good timing when the notification sound such as "The door is open ping pong ping pong" has been played three times. Further, the liquid crystal display and the lamp lighting are continuously executed until the door closing, which is the condition for releasing the door opening, is detected.

However, in the example shown in FIG. 158 (c), at the timing tε2 in which 30 seconds have not passed from the timing tε1 and the notification sound such as “the door is open ping-pong ping-pong” is in the loop playback state, step S112 It is assumed that there is magnetic detection by the magnetic detection sensor 4024 in the process of FIG. 94 (FIG. 94). In this respect, the processing of the notification sound 4 (door opening) in response to the door open detection has a lower priority than the processing of the notification sound 1 (magnetic abnormality) in response to the magnetic detection by the magnetic detection sensor 4024. (See FIG. 155), priority is given to the processing of the notification sound 1 (magnetic abnormality) according to the magnetic detection by the magnetic detection sensor 4024, and the processing of the notification sound 4 (door opening) is performed in both the sound and the lamp lighting. The output content will not be reflected as the operation of each actuator. As for the display in the liquid crystal display, since each notification is displayed at a different position in the display area of the game board side effect display device 1600, priority is given during execution of the notification having a low priority. Even when a high-ranked notification occurs, the display in the liquid crystal display on the low-priority side is maintained.

Here, regarding the processing of the notification sound 4 (door opening), as a method of preventing the output content from being reflected as the operation of each actuator in both the sound and the lamp lighting, the timing tε2 has been set up to that point. The process of canceling the sound generation schedule data and the light emission mode generation schedule data corresponding to the door opening detection from the set state may be performed.

In this regard, in this embodiment, at the timing tε2, not only the screen generation schedule data corresponding to the door open detection but also the sound generation schedule data and the light emission mode generation schedule data corresponding to the door open detection are obtained. Is kept in the set state, and the schedule data for sound generation, the schedule data for screen generation, and the schedule data for light emission mode generation according to the magnetic detection, which have higher priorities than the respective data, are set respectively. Put it in a state. Then, the allocation for the channel X and various lamp operations is assigned based on the sound generation schedule data according to the door open detection and the light emission mode generation schedule data, and the sound generation schedule data and light emission mode generation according to the magnetic detection. By switching to the content based on the schedule data for use, the processing of the notification sound 1 (magnetic abnormality) according to the magnetic detection by the magnetic detection sensor 4024 can be output in any of the sound, the display in the liquid crystal, and the lamp lighting. The contents are reflected as the operation of each actuator.

According to such a configuration, as shown in FIG. 158 (c), at the timing tε2, no operation is performed on the process on the lower priority side in the execution state (door open process). It becomes possible to change the notification content based on the priority between two different processes (door opening process, magnetic anomaly process).

Therefore, in the example shown in FIG. 158 (c), at the timing tδ2, the loop process for repeatedly executing the notification sound such as “boo-boo magnetism has been detected” is started, and the timer for the notification sound 1 (magnetic anomaly) is started. The loop processing will be completed at a good timing when the notification sound such as "Boo-boo magnetism has been detected" has been played 6 times in accordance with the time-up of (60 seconds). Further, the liquid crystal display and the lamp lighting are continuously executed until the power is turned on again, which is a condition for canceling the magnetic anomaly.

According to such a configuration, immediately after the magnetic detection that is likely to be fraudulent occurs, the notification sound 1 (magnetic anomaly) is processed in any of the sound, the liquid crystal display, and the lamp lighting. The output content will be reflected as the operation of each actuator. Moreover, since an alarm sound such as "boo-boo" is first reproduced as the notification sound, the notification belonging to the first notification group is performed, and the fact that the situation has been changed to a tense situation is promptly transmitted to the hall side. Will be expected.

FIG. 158 (d) shows an example of processing when the output condition (state detection) of the notification sound belonging to the second notification group is satisfied while the notification sound belonging to the third notification group is being played. It shows.

As shown in FIG. 158 (d), at the timing tζ1 where no notification sound is output, right-handed detection by the gate sensor 4003 in the non-time saving state is detected in the process of step S112 or S116 (FIG. 94). If so, the process corresponding to the right-handed strike detection in the non-time saving state (left-handed strike guidance process) is the same as the process described with reference to FIG. 157 (c). Therefore, at the timing tζ1, the loop process for repeatedly executing the notification sound such as “Please return to the left-handed” is started, and the timer (20 seconds) of the notification sound 6 (left-handed guidance) is timed up at the timing tζ3. Then, the loop processing is finished at a good timing when the notification sound such as "Please return to left-handed" has been played twice. In addition, the liquid crystal display and the lamp lighting are continuously executed until the timer of the notification sound, which is a condition for canceling the left-handed guidance.

However, in the example shown in FIG. 158 (d), at the timing tζ2 in which 20 seconds have not passed from the timing tζ1 and the notification sound such as “Please return to left-handed” is in the loop playback state, step S110 or It is assumed that the door opening is detected by the door frame opening switch 618 in the process of S112 (FIG. 94). In this respect, the processing of the notification sound 6 (left-handed guidance) in response to the right-handed detection in the non-time saving state has a lower priority than the processing of the notification sound 4 (door opening) in response to the door opening detection. Therefore (see FIG. 155), priority is given to the processing of the notification sound 4 (door opening) in response to the door opening detection, and the output content of the notification sound 6 (left-handed guidance) processing is reflected as the actuator operation. It will be prevented from being done. As for the display in the liquid crystal display, since each notification is displayed at a different position in the display area of the game board side effect display device 1600, priority is given during execution of the notification having a low priority. Even when a high-ranked notification occurs, the display in the liquid crystal display on the low-priority side is maintained.

Here, as a method of preventing the output content of the processing of the notification sound 6 (left-handed guidance) from being reflected as the operation of the actuator, right-handed detection in the non-time saving state set up to that point at timing tζ2. It is also possible to perform a process of canceling the sound generation schedule data according to the set state from the set state.

In this regard, in this embodiment, at the timing tζ2, not only the screen generation schedule data corresponding to the right-handed detection in the non-time-saving state but also the sound generation schedule data corresponding to the right-handed detection in the non-time-saving state. In addition to the sound generation schedule data according to the door open detection, which has a higher priority than this, the screen generation schedule data and the light emission mode according to the door open detection are also maintained in the set state. Set each generation schedule data. Then, the allocation to the channel X is switched from the content based on the sound generation schedule data corresponding to the right-handed detection in the non-time saving state to the content based on the sound generation schedule data corresponding to the door opening detection. Therefore, the processing of the notification sound 4 (door opening) in response to the door opening detection is made so that the output content is reflected as the operation of each actuator in any of the sound, the display in the liquid crystal, and the lamp lighting.

According to such a configuration, as shown in FIG. 158 (d), at the timing tζ2, no operation is performed for the processing on the lower priority side (left-handed guidance processing) in the execution state. It becomes possible to change the notification content based on the priority between two different processes (left-handed guidance process and door opening process).

Therefore, in the example shown in FIG. 158 (d), at the timing tζ2, the loop process for repeatedly executing the notification sound such as “the door is open ping-pong ping-pong” is started, and the notification sound 4 (door open) is started. The loop processing will be completed at a good timing when the notification sound such as "The door is open ping pong ping pong" has been played three times in accordance with the time-up of the timer (30 seconds). Further, the liquid crystal display and the lamp lighting are continuously executed until the door closing detection, which is the condition for releasing the door opening, is performed.

According to such a configuration, immediately after the door opening detection with a medium possibility of fraudulent activity occurs, the notification sound 4 (door opening) is processed by the sound, the liquid crystal display, and the lamp lighting. In any of the above, the output content is reflected as the operation of each actuator. Moreover, as the notification sound, the message sound (the door is open) is played first, so that the person who is playing the proper game does not feel disgusted, but after that. Notifications belonging to the second notification group are being performed by the alarm sound of "Ping Pong Ping Pong", and it is expected that the hall side will be promptly notified that the situation has changed to the situation where there is a possibility of fraud. ..

It is possible to change the volume setting value and the brightness setting value even in the situation where such an abnormal notification sound is output, but even if the volume setting value is changed, the changed volume setting value is used. Is not reflected as the volume. However, when the brightness setting value is changed, it is desirable that some of the effect lamps among the plurality of effect lamps reflect the changed brightness.

In the pachinko machine 1 according to this embodiment, when a plurality of each notification sound shown in FIG. 155 should be output, various above-mentioned processes are performed according to the priority order. Although only a single channel (channel X) is used for the notification sound, it is possible to appropriately notify abnormal contents and game guidance (channel-saving control structure). However, as described above, even if the notification sound belongs to the second notification group having a medium possibility of fraud, the possibility of fraud may be higher than the medium depending on other detection situations. It is hard to say that the current state of the gaming machine is properly notified only by the control based on the priority of.

In addition, the notification sound is output not only when there is an abnormality detection with a high possibility of fraudulent activity, but also when there is an abnormality detection with a low possibility of fraudulent activity. be. That is, if an abnormality is detected with a high possibility of fraudulent activity, it is required to output a notification sound as long as the detection state is continued. If there is, there is a possibility that such a detection state is maintained due to the convenience of the hall side (recovery of various errors, etc.), so even if the detection state is continued, the output of the notification sound is not necessarily output. It is important to be able to execute more flexible notification processing according to the situation of the pachinko machine 1, such as not being required to continue.

Therefore, in the pachinko machine 1 according to this embodiment, in each of the situations illustrated in FIGS. 159 to 164, in addition to the control based on the above-mentioned priorities, special conditions are also taken into consideration to further change the state of the gaming machine. It is intended to realize the notification in a form that can be appropriately expressed. Hereinafter, the special notification process will be described separately for each situation with reference to FIGS. 159 to 164.

In the example shown in FIG. 159, the door opening detection by the door frame opening switch 618 occurs at the timing tα11 when no notification sound is output. Then, the sound generation schedule data corresponding to the door opening detection is set and the notification sound is assigned to the channel X, and the screen generation schedule data and the light emission mode generation schedule data corresponding to the door opening detection are also generated. It is set. At this time, a timer (30 seconds) for measuring the notification time of the notification sound 4 (door opening) is set, so that the notification sound corresponding to the door opening detection is 30 until the timing tα12 arrives. It will play for a second.

On the other hand, regarding the display in the liquid crystal display in response to the door opening detection, the display is maintained until the timing tα16 when the door opening is not detected by the door frame opening switch 618 arrives.

However, in the example shown in FIG. 159, at the timing tα13 when the notification sound reproduction corresponding to the door open detection is completed and the channel X is in the vacant state, the magnetic detection in which the priority regarding the notification is relatively high. Magnetic detection by the sensor 4024 occurs. Therefore, regarding the lamp light emission corresponding to the door open detection started from the timing tα11, the schedule data for generating the light emission mode is maintained in the set state until the timing tα16 arrives, but the allocation for various lamp operations is At the timing tα13, the mode of lamp light emission corresponding to the magnetic detection is switched.

That is, at the timing tα13, the sound generation schedule data corresponding to the magnetic detection is set and the notification sound is assigned to the channel X, and the screen generation schedule data and the light emission mode generation schedule data according to the magnetic detection are also set. They are put into a set state. At this time, a timer (60 seconds) for measuring the notification time of the notification sound 1 (magnetic abnormality) is set, so that the notification sound corresponding to the magnetic detection is 60 seconds until the timing tα14 arrives. Will be played over.

On the other hand, as for the liquid crystal display and the lamp light emission according to the magnetic detection, the display and the light emission are maintained unless the power is turned off.

By the way, in the example shown in FIG. 159, the magnetic detection sensor is in a situation where the notification sound reproduction corresponding to the door opening detection is completed and the door opening detection by the door frame opening switch 618 is still continuing. Magnetic detection by 4024 is occurring. In such a situation, a person who intends to perform some kind of illegal work opens the door frame 3 to open it, and then waits for the notification sound reproduction corresponding to the door open detection to end. It is assumed that the magnet may have entered the detection range of the magnetic detector 4024 momentarily when trying to secretly place a magnet for fraudulent purpose inside the door frame 3 in a cold state, which is extremely malicious. Since it is such an act, there is a concern that it is not sufficient as a countermeasure only by performing the notification sound processing according to the magnetic detection. On the other hand, since the state of magnetic detection by the magnetic detection sensor 4024 is already turned off, magnetic detection cannot be used as an opportunity to take some measures.

Therefore, in the pachinko machine 1 according to this embodiment, when the timing tα14 at which the notification sound reproduction corresponding to the magnetic detection ends is reached, the door opening detection by the door frame opening switch 618 is still continued. Based on this, the "sound generation schedule data corresponding to the door open detection" in which the notification sound reproduction has already been notified for the notification time (30 seconds) is set again, and the notification sound is set to channel X. Special processing will be performed to reassign to. Also at this time, by setting a timer (30 seconds) for measuring the notification time of the notification sound 4 (door opening), the notification sound corresponding to the door opening detection for 30 seconds until the timing tα15 arrives. Is played.

In such a configuration, the notification sound corresponding to the door open detection that has already been terminated is reproduced in a form connected to "reproduction of the notification sound according to the magnetic detection", which causes a great sense of discomfort in the hall. It is expected that it will be generated and attract everyone's attention. Also, as a person who commits fraud, he is already relieved that "when the magnetic notification is finished, all the notification sound reproduction is finished, and it is finally possible to make the fraudulent act inconspicuous." Since the notification sound corresponding to the door opening detection that should have ended is played, the notification situation becomes unexpected, so it is expected that further fraudulent activities will be recognized as being too risky. Will be.

As will be described later, in this embodiment, during the period during which the notification process belonging to the first notification group is being performed and during the period during which the notification processing belonging to the second notification group is being performed, other channels are used. It is decided to perform a process of suppressing the volume of the assigned effect sound during the symbol change and other game sounds (process of reducing the volume to a specific value). The specific value may be a volume of 0. During the period during which the notification processing belonging to the third notification group is being performed, the volume of the effect sound during the symbol change and the other game sounds assigned to the other channels is not suppressed.

Here, the period during which the notification process is performed (the period during which the volume is suppressed) is whether any of the sensors used in the first notification group or the second notification group is in a specific detection state (abnormality). It is a period during which the condition of whether the notification sound belonging to the first notification group or the second notification group is being played (whether the notification sound is being played) is satisfied. Therefore, in the example shown in FIG. 159, the symbol variation is based on the fact that the period of timing tα11 to tα13 and the period of timing tα14 to tα16 are during the period in which the notification process by the first notification group is being performed. Processing to suppress the volume of the production sound inside and other game sounds (processing to reduce the volume to a specific value) is performed, and during the period from timing tα13 to tα14, notification by the first notification group and the second notification group is performed. Based on the period during which the processing is being performed, processing for suppressing the volume of the effect sound during the symbol fluctuation and other game sounds (processing for reducing the volume to a specific value) is performed.

In this embodiment, both the first notification group and the second notification group perform notification processing during the period (timing tα11 to tα13, tα14 to tα16) in which only the notification processing by the first notification group is performed. It was decided to reduce the volume of the effect sound during the symbol fluctuation and the other game sounds to the same value during the period, but both the first notification group and the second notification group perform notification processing. During the period, the process may be performed to reduce the value to a lower value than during the period during which only the notification process by the first notification group is performed. That is, in this case, it becomes possible to recognize that there are a plurality of notification states just by checking the effect sounds other than the notification, and it is expected that the initial movement on the hall side will be made faster.

Further, in the example shown in FIG. 159, when the timing tα16 at which the door opening detection is terminated is reached, the process of suppressing the volume of the effect sound during the symbol variation and other game sounds is terminated. However, if the notification sound corresponding to the door open detection that was already in the terminated state is played in a form connected to "reproduction of the notification sound according to magnetic detection", it is possible that an extremely malicious act was performed. In view of this, even when the timing tα16 at which the door opening detection ends is reached, the volume of the effect sound during the symbol variation and the volume of other game sounds may be continued without being suppressed.

Further, in the example shown in FIG. 159, as is clear from the processing corresponding to the door opening detection, the liquid crystal display corresponding to the door opening detection is displayed during the period during which the notification sound corresponding to the door opening detection is reproduced. The period during which the lamp is emitted and the period during which the lamp emits light in a manner corresponding to the door opening detection are the same at the start time, but the end times are all different. In this way, by operating them so that the notification sound, the liquid crystal display, and the lamp emission have different roles, only a single channel (channel X) is used for various notification sounds. In spite of this, it will be possible to appropriately notify the contents of abnormalities and game guidance.

On the other hand, in the example shown in FIG. 160, after the notification sound (timing tα21 to tα22) corresponding to the door opening detection is completed, right-handed detection by the gate sensor 4003 occurs at the timing tα23 in a non-time saving state. I'm assuming a case. However, in this example, unlike the case shown in FIG. 159, since it is unlikely that an extremely malicious act is being performed, the notification sound reproduction corresponding to the right-handed detection in the non-time saving state is terminated. At the timing tα24, the notification sound corresponding to the door opening detection that has already been terminated is not reproduced again. Further, in the period from the timing tα22 to the timing tα23, the mode of suppressing the volume of the effect sound during the symbol variation and the other game sounds is not changed. By the way, after the notification sound (timing tα21 to tα22) corresponding to the door opening detection is finished, even if the frame opening detection occurs instead of the right-handed detection in the non-time saving state by the gate sensor 4003, it is extremely malicious. Since it is unlikely that such an act has been performed, the notification sound corresponding to the door opening detection that has already been terminated will not be reproduced again when the notification sound corresponding to this is completed.

On the other hand, in the example shown in FIG. 161, the magnetic detection by the magnetic detection sensor 4024 occurs at the timing tα33 after the notification sound (timing tα31 to tα32) corresponding to the door opening detection is completed, which is shown in FIG. 159. Same as the example. However, in the example shown in FIG. 161, it is assumed that the door frame 3 is closed and the door open detection is completed at the timing tα34 within the period during which the notification sound corresponding to the magnetic detection is reproduced. There is.

In the example shown in FIG. 161 at the timing tα35 at which the notification sound reproduction corresponding to the magnetic detection is ended, the notification sound corresponding to the door open detection already in the terminated state is referred to as “notification sound reproduction corresponding to the magnetic detection”. It will not be played in a connected manner. That is, even in the example shown in FIG. 161, as in the case of the example shown in FIG. Waiting for the corresponding notification sound to finish playing, the magnet momentarily falls within the detection range of the magnetic detection sensor 4024 when trying to secretly place a magnet for fraudulent purpose inside the door frame 3 while the squirt is cold. It is assumed that there is a possibility that the situation has entered. However, after the timing tα34, considering that the door frame 3 is closed and the magnetic detection is not generated in a non-illegal state, the magnetic detection is performed even though the door frame 3 is in such a non-illegal state. It is considered that the notification sound plays a sufficient role as the notification sound processing only by continuously playing the notification sound until the timing tα35 arrives, and the channel X is vacated in case further notification sound processing is required. It can be said that it is more beneficial to keep it in a state. Therefore, in the example shown in FIG. 161, although only a single channel (channel X) is used for various notification sounds, it becomes possible to appropriately notify abnormal contents, game guidance, and the like.

On the other hand, in the example shown in FIG. 162, the magnetic detection by the magnetic detection sensor 4024 occurs at the timing tα43 after the notification sound (timing tα41 to tα42) corresponding to the door opening detection is completed, which is shown in FIG. 159. It is the same as the example. However, in the example shown in FIG. 162, it is assumed that the magnetic detection by the magnetic detection sensor 4024 occurs again at the timing tα44 within the period during which the notification sound corresponding to the magnetic detection is reproduced.

That is, in the example shown in FIG. 162, after waiting for the notification sound reproduction corresponding to the door open detection to be completed, an attempt was made to secretly place a magnet for fraudulent purpose inside the door frame 3 in a state where the squirt was cooled. Occasionally, a magnet momentarily enters the detection range of the magnetic detection sensor 4024, and despite the fact that a magnetic abnormality notification sound is reproduced in response to this, the detection range of the magnetic detection sensor 4024 is maintained without being distracted by such a situation. It is assumed that the magnet is being repositioned, and more malicious fraud may have been committed. Therefore, in this example, when the magnetic detection by the magnetic detection sensor 4024 occurs again at the timing tα44, the sound generation schedule data corresponding to the magnetic detection is kept in the set state, while the notification sound 1 The process of resetting the timer (60 seconds) for measuring the notification time of (magnetic abnormality) is performed.

According to such a configuration, the notification sound corresponding to the magnetic detection for a longer time from the time when the first magnetic detection is made to the time when 60 seconds from the timing tα44 where the second magnetic detection is made elapses. Will be able to be played continuously. Further, in this case, the notification sound such as "Boo-boo magnetism has been detected" is continuously reproduced without interruption during the period from the timing tα43 to the timing tα45. And finally, the notification sound such as "Boo Boo magnetism is detected" does not end the loop processing at a good timing, for example, the loop processing ends at a halfway timing such as "Boo Boo magnetism is detected". It is expected that everyone's attention will be gathered by causing a big sense of discomfort in the hall.

Furthermore, at the timing tα44 where 60 seconds have passed from the timing tα44 where the second magnetic detection was performed, the notification sound reproduction has already been notified for the notification time (30 seconds). The special process of resetting the "sound generation schedule data according to the detection" and reassigning the notification sound to the channel X is performed. Also at this time, by setting a timer (30 seconds) for measuring the notification time of the notification sound 4 (door opening), the notification sound corresponding to the door opening detection for 30 seconds until the timing tα15 arrives. Is played.

In such a configuration, the notification sound corresponding to the door open detection that has already been terminated is reproduced in a form connected to the "notification sound reproduction according to the magnetic detection", and also in the middle such as "inspecting the boo-boo magnetism". It will be reproduced in a form connected to "reproduction of notification sound according to magnetic detection" in which the loop processing is completed at an odd timing. Therefore, the priority state of the notification sound corresponding to the door open detection that has already been completed becomes high, and the notification mode appears as if the notification sound of the magnetic detection was stopped in the middle, and the notification mode appears in the hall. It is expected that everyone's attention will be gathered by causing a greater sense of discomfort.

On the other hand, in the example shown in FIG. 163, the magnetic detection by the magnetic detection sensor 4024 occurs at the timing tα53 after the notification sound (timing tα51 to tα52) corresponding to the door opening detection is completed, which is shown in FIG. 159. It is the same as the example. However, in the example shown in FIG. 163, it is assumed that the vibration detection by the vibration sensor 2405 occurs at the timing tα54 within the period during which the notification sound corresponding to the magnetic detection is reproduced.

Even in the example shown in FIG. 163, when waiting for the notification sound reproduction corresponding to the door open detection to end and trying to secretly place a magnet for fraudulent purpose inside the door frame 3 in a state where the squirt is cold. Even though the magnet momentarily entered the detection range of the magnetic detection sensor 4024 and the notification sound of the magnetic abnormality was reproduced in response to this, the pachinko machine 1 was shaken greatly without being distracted by such a situation. It is assumed that more malicious fraud is being carried out. Therefore, in this example, at the timing tα55 at which the notification sound reproduction corresponding to the magnetic detection is completed, the notification sound corresponding to the vibration detection is reproduced in a form connected to the “notification sound reproduction according to the magnetic detection”, and then the notification sound is reproduced. At the timing tα56 at which the notification sound reproduction corresponding to the vibration detection is terminated, the notification sound corresponding to the door open detection that has already been terminated is reproduced in a form that is further connected to the "notification sound reproduction according to the vibration detection". ing.

Moreover, at the timing tα54 when the vibration detection by the vibration sensor 2405 occurs, the timer (60) for measuring the notification time of the notification sound 2 (vibration abnormality) without setting the sound generation schedule data corresponding to the vibration detection. Seconds) are set, and at the timing tα55 when the notification sound reproduction corresponding to the magnetic detection is completed, the schedule data for sound generation corresponding to the vibration detection is set and the notification sound is assigned to the channel X. ..

According to such a configuration, the notification sound such as "Boo Boo vibration has been detected" does not end its loop processing at a good timing. For example, the loop is performed at a halfway timing such as "Boo Boo vibration is detected". Since the processing will be completed, it is expected that everyone's attention will be gathered by causing a great sense of discomfort in the hall.

Furthermore, at the timing tα56 at which the notification sound reproduction corresponding to the vibration detection is completed, the notification sound reproduction has already been notified for the notification time (30 seconds) for the “sound generation according to the door open detection”. The special process of setting the "schedule data" again and reassigning the notification sound to the channel X is performed. Also at this time, by setting a timer (30 seconds) for measuring the notification time of the notification sound 4 (door opening), the notification sound corresponding to the door opening detection for 30 seconds until the timing tα15 arrives. Is played.

In such a configuration, the notification sound corresponding to the door open detection that has already been terminated is further connected to the "notification sound reproduction according to the vibration detection" that is connected to the "notification sound reproduction according to the magnetic detection". In addition to being reproduced in, it will be reproduced in a form connected to "reproduction of notification sound according to vibration detection" in which the loop processing is completed at a halfway timing such as "inspecting boo-boo vibration". Therefore, the priority state of the notification sound corresponding to the door opening detection that has already been completed becomes high, and the notification mode appears as if the notification sound of vibration detection was stopped in the middle, and the notification mode appeared in the hall. It is expected that everyone's attention will be gathered by causing a greater sense of discomfort.

On the other hand, in the example shown in FIG. 164, the case where the magnetic detection by the magnetic detection sensor 4024 occurs at the timing tα63 after the notification sound (timing tα61 to tα62) corresponding to the frame opening detection is completed instead of the door opening detection. I'm assuming.

Even in the example shown in FIG. 164, it can be said that the situation in which the magnetic detection further occurs immediately after the frame opening detection is performed is a situation in which there is a high possibility that some kind of fraudulent activity is being performed. However, on the other hand, if the magnet is used for the purpose of fraudulent activity, the door frame 3 should be in the open state, and even if the main body frame 4 is in the open state, it is beneficial to arrange the magnet. Since there is no such thing, it can be assumed that the hole side may have mistakenly detected the magnetic detection sensor 4024 when using a magnet to clear the ball clogging in the ball tank or the payout passage.

Therefore, also in the example shown in FIG. 164, at the timing tα64 at which the notification sound reproduction corresponding to the magnetic detection is ended, the notification sound corresponding to the frame opening detection already in the end state is "notification sound corresponding to the magnetic detection". By regenerating in a form connected to "regeneration" (timing tα64 to tα65), it is expected that everyone's attention will be gathered by causing a great sense of discomfort in the hall. However, after that, at the timing tα66 when the main body frame 4 is closed and the frame opening detection is completed, not only each notification process (notification sound, liquid crystal display, lamp) corresponding to the frame opening detection but also magnetic detection is performed. For each notification process (notification sound, liquid crystal display, lamp), special processing for terminating them is also performed.

According to such a configuration, while the function for fraudulent activity is appropriately performed, when the hall side is erroneously detected, the notification process corresponding to the frame opening detection and the magnetic detection is performed by simply closing the main body frame 4. Since it will be possible to terminate all of the notification sound, liquid crystal display, and lamp), it is expected that the hall side will respond quickly to false detections and maintain a suitable atmosphere in the hall. Become.

In the example shown in FIG. 164, even when the main body frame 4 is closed and the frame opening detection is completed while the notification sound corresponding to the magnetic detection is being reproduced, the frame opening detection is performed. At the end timing, not only each notification process (notification sound, in-liquid crystal display, lamp) according to the frame open detection, but also each notification process (notification sound, in-liquid crystal display, lamp) according to the magnetic detection. You may want to perform a special process to end.

By the way, as described above, the pachinko machine 1 according to this embodiment is equipped with a player-side volume adjusting function.

For example, in the peripheral control MPU 1511a, in the process of step S1108 (see FIG. 128), it is monitored whether or not the effect selection left button 331 and the effect selection right button 332 are operated, and the effect selection left button 331 is operated. When it is determined that the speaker volume is reduced, the player sets the speaker volume (player set value), and when it is determined that the effect selection right button 332 is operated, the speaker volume is set by the player. Performs processing to increase the value (player set value). In addition, when the player setting value is lowered and the actually lowered volume is output from the speaker, the volume adjustment completion sound (for example, "Pi!") Is output at the lowered volume value. On the other hand, when the player setting value is increased and the actually increased volume is output from the speaker, the volume adjustment completion sound (for example, "Pip!") Is output at the increased volume value. , It is possible to grasp how much the volume has changed after the volume adjustment is completed. As for the volume adjustment completed sound, the same sound may be output depending on whether the volume value is lowered or raised. By the way, the volume adjustment completion sound has a relatively high priority as described above when there are no empty channels (for example, "20" which is the same as the button press sound), and the output volume of the production sound (for example, the output volume of the production sound ("20"). It is possible to more reliably convey that the change in the volume of the audible sound).

Then, in the peripheral control MPU1511a according to this embodiment, such a volume adjustment process is performed during a period (demo display, etc.) before the game is started because the symbol variation according to the jackpot determination has not yet been performed. Not only during the period when the game can be performed), but also during the period when the game is started and the symbol change according to the jackpot judgment is executed, the reception by the player is allowed, and a more important effect has appeared. By making it possible to change the volume value flexibly at times, we are trying to maintain the interest of the game.

On the other hand, in the pachinko machine 1 according to this embodiment, as described above, in a situation where channels of various production sounds are assigned according to the progress of the display effect during the execution period of the symbol variation, the pachinko machine is concerned. When it is detected that 1 is in a specific state such as a magnetic abnormality or a door is opened, a process of assigning a specific notification sound according to the detected content among a plurality of types of notification sounds to a channel and outputting it is performed. Further, at this time, it is possible to execute the effect progress notification process for reducing the output volume to a specific value without stopping the channel allocation itself of various effect sounds according to the progress of the display effect. That is, in this case, even if a specific notification sound among a plurality of types of notification sounds is assigned to a channel and output, the channel allocation of various production sounds according to the progress of the display effect itself is not stopped. Therefore, as long as the channel allocation of the specific notification sound or the abnormal state is completed, the effect can be enjoyed again by appropriately restoring the output volume of the effect sound according to the progress of the effect display.

However, in the above-mentioned notification process under the progress of the production, since the channel allocation of various production sounds according to the progress of the display production itself is not stopped, the amount of the specific notification sound assigned to the channel is the normal time (normal time). More channels will be used than in the non-notification state), and there will be no empty channels to which sound data is not assigned before the end of the channel allocation (notification state) of a specific notification sound. The risk tends to be high. Then, if there is no free channel to which sound data is not assigned before the end of channel allocation (notification state) of a specific notification sound, one of the sound data at that time. Since one channel allocation has to be discarded, even if the channel allocation (notification state) of a specific notification sound is completed after that, the discarded sound data that cannot be assigned to the channel is reproduced. It is not possible, and there is a concern that the interest in games will decline.

Regarding the concern about empty channels related to the production sound, there is no direct adverse effect when the fixed channel method is adopted for the channel allocation of the notification sound, but the fixed channel method is adopted for the channel allocation of the notification sound. Whether or not to adopt the automatic channel method should be decided from the viewpoint of the design of the game and the production. Therefore, regardless of which channel method is adopted, as the above-mentioned effect progress notification process. It is important to prepare a processing structure that allows a common processing program to be adopted in order to reduce the cost and improve the reliability of the development of the pachinko machine 1. Therefore, in the example described below, either the fixed channel method or the automatic channel method may be adopted for both the notification sound and the effect sound.

Therefore, in the pachinko machine 1 according to this embodiment, even if the operation of the effect selection left button 331 or the effect selection right button 332 is performed while the effect progress notification process is being executed, the value is reduced to a specific value. The output volume of the production sound is not variable and is maintained. That is, in this case, it is not necessary to generate the above-mentioned volume adjustment completion sound (“pi!” Or “pipi!”) Even if there is an operation by the player while the effect progress notification process is being executed. Therefore, it is expected that the channel will have a margin to reduce the risk of running out of free channels.

However, despite the fact that the pachinko machine 1 is capable of flexibly changing the volume value when a more important effect appears, the output volume is set while the effect progress notification process is being executed. If the change is not possible, when the notification process under the production progress is executed due to false detection or notification due to the hall side convenience (door opening, etc.), the appropriate volume value is set according to the content of the production progress. It is inevitable that the game interest will decline due to the fact that the setting cannot be changed to. In addition, as a result of the progress of the production during the period during which the notification processing under the progress of the production is performed, if a large deviation occurs between the appropriate volume value and the actual set value according to the content of the production, the output volume (possible). Since it became possible to change the setting of (listening sound volume), it is necessary to accept multiple operations in order to change the volume to an appropriate value, but in this case, the channel is occupied by the above-mentioned volume adjustment completion sound. As a result, even though the notification process under the progress of the production is finally completed, there is a concern that the entertainment interest of the game may be lowered due to the lack of free channels and the inability to properly output the production sound.

In this respect, in the pachinko machine 1 according to this embodiment, first, when the operation for the effect selection left button 331 and the effect selection right button 332 is performed while the effect progress notification process is being executed, the value drops to a specific value. The output volume of the produced sound (volume of the audible sound) is not variable and is maintained, while the player's setting value (player setting value) itself is allowed to be changed, and the above When the notification process (the process of lowering the output volume to a specific value) is completed, the output volume is changed to the output volume (audible sound volume) that reflects all the operations up to that point.

According to such a configuration, if the player accepts the change of the set value (player set value) according to the progress of the effect while the notification process under the progress of the effect is being executed, a new operation is performed. When the effect progress notification process is completed, the output volume (audible sound volume) can be changed all at once to reflect all the operations up to that point. In this way, by allowing the player to accept changes in the set value (player set value) even during the period during which the effect progress notification process is being executed, the effect progress notification process ends. It will be expected to suppress the decline in the interest in games until the game is played. In addition, the volume value (the volume of the audible sound) is changed in a plurality of stages immediately after the notification process under the progress of the production is completed, and a situation occurs in which a vacant channel is insufficient due to the volume adjustment completion sound each time. Will also be preferably avoided.

According to the above configuration, when the batch change of the output volume to the player set value is executed when the effect progress notification process is completed, the game during the period during which the effect progress notification process is executed. Regardless of the number of times the user setting value is changed or the number of operations by the player, the volume adjustment completion sound will be played only once at the volume after the batch change. The sound may be output in a special mode different from that of the above (for example, "Bee!").

Furthermore, in order to more preferably solve the shortage of free channels when the effect progress notification process is completed, it depends on the number of changes of the player set value and the player during the period during which the effect progress notification process is executed. Regardless of the number of operations, it is desirable not to play the volume adjustment completion sound itself when changing the output volume (audible sound volume) all at once as the production progress notification process ends. .. According to such a configuration, in particular, even though the notification process under the production progress due to false detection or notification due to the hall side convenience (door opening, etc.) is finally completed, an appropriate production is performed due to a shortage of free channels. It becomes possible to suitably suppress the occurrence of a situation in which the user cannot enjoy the program.

In the above explanatory example, when the notification sound corresponding to the door open detection ends while the door open state is maintained, and then a magnetic abnormality occurs and the corresponding notification sound ends, the door open detection is performed. The notification sound is output again (see FIG. 159). However, if a magnetic abnormality occurs while the notification sound corresponding to the door open detection is in the output state and the notification sound corresponding to this occurs, the door open detection is performed even if the door open state is maintained. It is desirable not to output the corresponding notification sound (or to output only the remaining time as the output time of the interrupted "notification sound corresponding to the door opening detection").

When the door is open, the lamp emits light according to the door open detection, but this lamp emission will continue even after the notification sound corresponding to the door open detection ends when the door is open. It is desirable to. Furthermore, it is desirable that the door frame 3 be continued for a predetermined time even after the door frame 3 is closed and the door open state is completed.

If there is a specific error that does not output a notification sound even if an abnormality is detected, and the specific error occurs in a situation where the notification sound corresponding to the door opening detection is terminated while the door open state is maintained, the specific error occurs. It is desirable to output the notification sound again in response to the door opening detection based on the occurrence of. According to such a configuration, it becomes possible to recognize that some abnormality has occurred by re-outputting the notification sound in response to the door opening detection.

Alternatively, if there is a specific error that does not output a notification sound even if an abnormality is detected, and the specific error occurs in a situation where the notification sound corresponding to the door opening detection is terminated while the door open state is maintained, the specific error occurs. The notification sound corresponding to the door opening detection may not be output again based on the occurrence of a specific error, but the state in which re-notification is possible may be maintained.

It is possible to change the volume setting value and the brightness setting value even in the situation where such an abnormal notification sound is output, but even if the volume setting value is changed, the changed volume setting value is used. Is not reflected as the volume. However, when the brightness setting value is changed, it is desirable that some of the effect lamps among the plurality of effect lamps reflect the changed brightness.

Hereinafter, an example of the process from the execution of such an effect progress notification process to the batch change of the output volume (audible sound volume) will be described.

FIG. 165 is a diagram for explaining the content of the notification process under the progress of the production separately for the notification state of the pachinko machine 1.

First, prior to explaining the process from the execution of the effect progress notification process to the batch change of the output volume (audible sound volume), the content of the effect progress notification process is referred to with reference to FIG. 165. Will be briefly explained. Here, for convenience of explanation, only the notification sounds 1 to 7 illustrated in FIG. 155 are shown, and the description of the other notification sounds is omitted.

As shown in FIG. 165, in this explanatory example, first, two types of suppression modes (first volume suppression mode and second volume suppression mode) are prepared as volume suppression modes of the effect sound. For example, in the first volume suppression mode, when the player changes the set value (player set value) regarding the volume, the output volume (audible sound volume) of the effect sound in the range of "20" to "50" is changed. Among the possibilities, the output volume of the production sound (volume of the audible sound) is set to "10". On the other hand, in the second volume suppression mode, the output volume of the effect sound (volume of the audible sound) is set to "0". Therefore, the second volume suppression mode has a higher degree of suppression than the first volume suppression mode. In particular, in this explanatory example, although the processing itself related to the output is performed, the production sound is silenced. It is illustrated as a thing to make.

In this regard, in the pachinko machine 1 according to this embodiment, among the notification sounds 1 to 7, the notification sounds 1 to 3 (magnetic abnormality, vibration abnormality, grand prize abnormality) belonging to the first notification group having a high possibility of fraud When the notification process relating to any of the above is executed, the process of suppressing the output volume of the effect sound (volume of the audible sound) is performed in the second volume suppression mode, which is the side with the higher degree of suppression. Moreover, when the notification process for any of the notification sounds 1 to 3 (magnetic abnormality, vibration abnormality, grand prize abnormality) belonging to the first notification group is executed, even if the abnormality detection is turned off, Until a predetermined time (60 seconds in this case) elapses after the abnormality is detected, the output volume of the production sound (volume of the audible sound) is performed in the second volume suppression mode, which is the side with the higher degree of suppression. ) Is not terminated, but is continued.

In this explanatory example, when the notification processing for any of the notification sounds 1 to 3 (magnetic abnormality, vibration abnormality, grand prize abnormality) belonging to the first notification group is executed, the output volume of the effect sound (audible sound). The period during which the process of suppressing the volume) is continued is the same as the period from the playback of the notification sound (magnetic anomaly, vibration anomaly, grand prize anomaly) corresponding to the abnormality detection to the end of this. Is set to.

On the other hand, when the notification processing for any of the notification sounds 4 and 5 (door opening, frame opening) belonging to the second notification group having a medium possibility of fraud is executed among the notification sounds 1 to 7, the degree of suppression is high. The process of suppressing the output volume of the effect sound (volume of the audible sound) is performed in the first volume suppression mode, which is the lower side of the sound. However, when the notification process for any of the notification sounds 4 and 5 (door open, frame open) belonging to the second notification group is executed, if the abnormality detection is turned off immediately after the abnormality detection occurs, that time point. Then, the process of suppressing the output volume (volume of the audible sound) of the effect sound is terminated in the first volume suppression mode on the side where the degree of suppression is low.

On the other hand, when the notification processing for any of the notification sounds 6 and 7 (left-handed guidance, ball removal guidance) belonging to the third notification group related to the game guidance is executed among the notification sounds 1 to 7, the effectability The emphasis is on maintaining the sound, and no processing is performed to suppress the output volume of the production sound (volume of the audible sound).

In this explanatory example, the suppression mode is different depending on whether the notification sound belonging to the first notification group is executed or the notification sound belonging to the second notification group is executed. It is not always necessary to make the difference, and the output volume of the effect sound is produced in one suppression mode depending on whether the notification sound belonging to the first notification group is executed or the notification sound belonging to the second notification group is executed. A process for suppressing (volume of audible sound) may be performed. However, the termination condition of the process to be suppressed is different in the case where the notification sound belonging to the first notification group is executed is stricter than the case where the notification sound belonging to the second notification group is executed. It is important to be able to do it.

FIG. 166 shows the contents of the process related to the volume adjustment accompanying the operation of the effect selection left button 331 or the effect selection right button 332 while the abnormality detection has not occurred and the process related to the notification sound has not been executed. It is a figure explaining.

In this explanatory example, the player setting value is changed by "1" within the range of "1" to "5" by the operation of the effect selection left button 331 or the effect selection right button 332. The smaller the value, the lower the volume of the effect sound. Further, the output volume of the effect sound (volume of the audible sound) is set by the player when the above-mentioned suppression mode (first volume suppression mode, second volume suppression mode) is not set for the production sound. It is set as a value 20 times the value. Therefore, in this explanatory example, the output volume of the effect sound (volume of the audible sound) is made variable in the range of "20" to "100" by the operation by the player.

Now, as shown in FIG. 166 (A), the player setting value regarding the volume of the effect sound is "3" out of "1" to "5", and no notification flag is set. , It is assumed that the output volume of the production sound (volume of the audible sound) is set to "60", which is 20 times that volume. Further, assuming that the decorative symbol SZ is in the stopped state and the jackpot determination is not performed and the start winning prize is awaited, the effect selection left button 331 is pressed in the display area of the game board side effect display device 1600. The displayed display image 331a and the display image 332a that imitates the effect selection right button 332 are displayed, and the volume adjustment guidance display OAH indicating that the volume can be adjusted through these operations is performed. At this time, in the display area of the game board side effect display device 1600, the first volume value display OH1 that makes it possible to recognize which of the current player setting values "1" to "5" is is also executed. NS. The volume adjustment guidance display OAH and the first volume value display OH1 may be displayed at all times, or during a specific period such as a super reach effect which is a reach effect executed in a state where the background image is changed. At least one of the first volume value display OH1 and the second volume value display OH2 described later may appear when the player operates the image. Further, regarding the volume adjustment guidance display OAH and the first volume value display OH1, it is not always necessary to display both of them, and one of them may be omitted and only the other may be displayed.

In such a situation shown in FIG. 166 (A), when an operation is performed by the effect selection left button 331 or the effect selection right button 332, the player setting value is set to "1" each time the operation is performed. The output volume of the production sound (volume of the audible sound) is changed by "20" accordingly. In addition, each time the output volume of the effect sound (volume of the audible sound) changes, the volume adjustment completion sound (for example, "Pi!") Is reproduced at the volume after the change.

At this time, in the display area of the game board side effect display device 1600, a gauge display indicates which of the current set values is in the range of the player set values "1" to "5". The volume value display OH2 (see FIG. 166 (C)) will be executed in place of the volume adjustment guidance display OAH, which will be described later.

If the effect selection left button 331 is operated when the player set value is "1", neither the player set value nor the output volume of the effect sound (volume of the audible sound) is lowered, and the game is played. The person setting value remains "1" (the output volume of the production sound (volume of the audible sound) remains "20"). Therefore, even if the effect selection left button 331 is operated when the player setting value is "1", the volume adjustment completion sound is not assigned to the channel itself, or even if it is assigned to the channel, the volume is set to "1". It is desirable to prevent audible output by setting it to "0". This also applies when the effect selection right button 332 is operated when the player set value is “5”.

On the other hand, when a start winning prize is generated and a big hit judgment is made, as shown in FIG. 166 (B), the decorative symbol SZ fluctuates in a predetermined effect pattern based on the result of the big hit judgment and the type of the fluctuation pattern. Is displayed. Further, while the decorative symbol SZ is variablely displayed, the predetermined effect is advanced, and the effect sound corresponding to the progress of the predetermined effect is output.

In this regard, in the volume adjustment process according to this embodiment, not only the period shown in FIG. 166 (A) (the period during which the demo display or the like can be performed) but also the symbol variation according to the jackpot determination after the game is started. The reception by the player is allowed even during the execution period, and the volume value is agile when a more important effect such as the reach effect shown in FIG. 166 (C) appears. As described above, the configuration is such that the setting can be changed.

That is, FIG. 166 (C) shows a state after the player has performed the operation by the effect selection right button 332 twice as the reach effect is executed in the state shown in FIG. 166 (B). In the first operation, the player setting value is changed from "3" to "4", and the output volume of the production sound (volume of the audible sound) is 20 times that of "60" →. Under the setting change to "80", the volume adjustment completion sound is assigned to a predetermined channel and played at the changed volume "80", and in the second operation, the player setting is performed. The value has been changed from "4" to "5", and the output volume of the production sound (volume of the audible sound) has been changed from "80" to "100", which is 20 times higher than that. At "100", which is the volume after the change, the volume adjustment completion sound is assigned to a predetermined channel and played.

Further, in the display area of the game board side effect display device 1600 according to this embodiment, when the player set value is changed by such an operation, it is within the range of "1" to "5" of the player set value. The second volume value display OH2, which indicates which is the current set value by the gauge display, is executed in place of the volume adjustment guidance display OAH. By clarifying which of the current setting values is for the range of player setting values "1" to "5", even in a tense situation where a more important effect appears. The purpose is to prevent an operation error such as the operation for the effect selection right button 332 being repeatedly executed even though the player setting value is the maximum value "5". In the gauge display, the numerical range of "1" to "5" is constantly displayed as blocks, and the number of filled blocks among these blocks is increased or decreased according to the change of the player set value. Is displayed to indicate the current player setting value.

The second volume value display OH2 is displayed from the time when the effect selection left button 331 or the effect selection right button 332 is operated in the state shown in FIG. 166 (C) as shown in FIG. 166 (D). It is hidden after a predetermined time (for example, 5 seconds) has elapsed, and then the volume adjustment guidance display OAH is executed again. Therefore, even if the operation is performed in such a manner that the player set value does not change (the operation for the effect selection right button 332 when the player set value is the maximum value "5"), the effect selection left button 331 Alternatively, as long as the operation for the effect selection right button 332 is repeated, the display of the second volume value display OH2 is maintained. That is, in the pachinko machine 1 according to this embodiment, the operation is performed in such a manner that the player set value does not change (the operation for the effect selection right button 332 when the player set value is the maximum value "5"). When is performed, the volume adjustment completion sound is not audibly output each time the operation is performed, but the timer value for measuring the time until the second volume value display OH2 is hidden is reset. As a result, it is more preferably promoted to prevent an operation error such as the operation for the effect selection right button 332 being repeatedly executed even though the player setting value is the maximum value "5". become.

On the other hand, in FIG. 167, the effect selection left button 331 or the effect selection right button 332 is operated while the door opening detection is generated during the execution period of the symbol variation and the processing related to the notification sound corresponding to the detection is executed. It is a figure explaining the content about the process about volume adjustment accompanying this.

The situation shown in FIG. 167 (A) is a situation before the symbol change is started, and is the same as the situation described with reference to FIG. 166 (A). When a start winning prize is generated and a jackpot determination is made in such a situation, as shown in FIG. 167 (B), the result and variation of the jackpot determination are the same as in the situation described with reference to FIG. 166 (B). The decorative symbol SZ is variablely displayed in a predetermined effect pattern based on the type of the pattern. Further, while the decorative symbol SZ is variablely displayed, the predetermined effect is advanced, and the effect sound corresponding to the progress of the predetermined effect is output.

However, in the situation shown in FIG. 167 (B), the door opening detection belonging to the second notification group occurs during the execution period of the symbol variation, and the processing related to the notification sound 4 (door opening) is executed accordingly. More specifically, loop processing (30 seconds) that repeatedly outputs a notification sound such as "the door is open ping pong ping pong" and display within the display area of the game board side effect display device 1600 (here, "" "The door is open") and lighting by various lamps (light emitting devices) arranged on the door frame 3 and the game board 5 are executed respectively.

Further, as described above, when the door opening detection belonging to the second notification group is generated and the processing related to the notification sound 4 (door opening) is executed during the fluctuation period of the symbol, the first volume suppression mode is used. The effect progress notification process that suppresses the output volume of the effect sound (volume of the audible sound) is performed. Therefore, in the situation shown in FIG. 167 (B), the player setting value is maintained at “3”, which is the same as in the situation shown in FIG. 167 (A), but the effect is produced. The sound output volume (audible sound volume) is set to a predetermined first specific value (here, "10"), which is lower than the original value (20 times the player's set value). The content of the production will be developed based on the volume value.

In this respect, in the pachinko machine 1 according to this embodiment, when the operation for the effect selection left button 331 and the effect selection right button 332 is performed while such the effect progress notification process is being executed, the first identification is performed. The output volume (audible sound volume) of the production sound, which has been lowered to the value (here, "10"), is not variable and is maintained, while the player's setting value (player setting value) regarding the volume is this. Accepting the change of itself is allowed, and when the above-mentioned production progress notification process (process of lowering the output volume to a specific value) is completed, the output volume (audible sound volume) that reflects all the operations up to that point is reached. As mentioned above, it is changed all at once.

That is, FIG. 167 (C) shows a state after the player has performed the operation with the effect selection right button 332 twice as the reach effect is executed in the state shown in FIG. 167 (B). Even though the player setting value has been changed from "3" to "5" by operating the effect selection right button 332, the output volume of the effect sound (volume of the audible sound) is the original value (game). It can be seen that the predetermined first specific value (here, "10"), which is lower than the value set by the person (20 times), is maintained. Therefore, even if the player performs the operation by the effect selection right button 332 twice, the volume of the effect sound is until the above-mentioned effect progress notification process (process of reducing the output volume to a specific value) is completed. Is not changed, and the production content is advanced with the volume of the first specific value.

At this time, in the first operation among the operations by the player, the player setting value is changed from "3" to "4", but the output volume of the production sound (volume of the audible sound) is first specified. Since the value (here, "10") is maintained, the volume adjustment completion sound is not audibly output, and the player setting value is changed from "4" to "5" even in the second operation. However, since the output volume of the effect sound (volume of the audible sound) is maintained at the first specific value (here, "10"), the volume adjustment completed sound is not audibly output.

However, in the first operation, the player setting value itself has changed from "3" to "4", and the player operation for adjusting the volume has been accepted. In the display area of the device 1600, the second volume value display OH2 indicating by the gauge display that the current set value is “4” in the range of “1” to “5” of the player set value is The volume adjustment guidance display is executed in place of the OAH, and the value is changed from "3" to "4" and displayed on the first volume value display OH1 as well.

Also, in the second operation, the player setting value itself has changed from "4" to "5", and the player operation for adjusting the volume has been accepted, so that the second volume value has been received. In the display OH2, the gauge display indicates that the current set value has changed from "4" to "5" in the range of "1" to "5" of the player set value, and the first volume value. Even in the display OH1, the numerical value is changed from "4" to "5" and displayed.

After that, the door frame 3 is closed while the volume adjustment guidance display OAH is returned to the state of being executed again, and the processing related to the notification sound 4 (door opening) and the notification processing under the production progress (output volume up to a specific value). When each of the lowering processes) is completed, as shown in FIG. 167 (D), the output volume (audible sound volume) that reflects all the operations up to that point is reached according to the completion of the process. Change all at once. That is, in this case, the player set value is gradually changed from "3" to "4" corresponding to the first operation and "5" corresponding to the second operation during the execution period of the effect progress notification process. Since it has changed, the output volume (volume of audible sound) should be "80" according to the first operation from the first specific value (here, "10"), and the second operation. Where it should be gradually changed to "100" according to the above, the first specific value (here, "10") will be changed to "100" in which all the operations up to that point are reflected.

In this way, by allowing the player to accept changes in the set value (player set value) even during the period during which the effect progress notification process is being executed, the effect progress notification process ends. It will be expected to suppress the decline in the interest in games until the game is played. In addition, the volume value (the volume of the audible sound) is changed in multiple stages immediately after the notification process under the progress of the production is completed, and the volume adjustment completion sound each time causes a shortage or no margin in the vacant channel. The occurrence of such a situation will also be suitably avoided.

Moreover, in this explanatory example, when the output volume (volume of audible sound) is changed all at once (“10” → “100”) as the notification process under the progress of production is completed, the output volume changes. Nevertheless, the channel allocation of the volume adjustment completed sound itself is not performed. According to such a configuration, in particular, even though the notification process under the production progress due to false detection or notification due to the hall side convenience (door opening, etc.) is finally completed, an appropriate production is performed due to a shortage of free channels. It becomes possible to suitably suppress the occurrence of a situation in which the user cannot enjoy the program.

Further, in the pachinko machine 1 according to this embodiment, as described above, the magnetic anomaly and the door opening are illustrated as specific states, but the effect progress notification process and the door opening occur in the state where the magnetic anomaly occurs. The end conditions may be different from those of the effect progress notification process in this state.

For example, first, regarding the effect progress notification process in the state where the door is opened, when the door is closed or when a predetermined time has passed since the door was opened (the door was continued to be opened). Even if) it will be terminated. However, in any case, when the output volume (audible sound volume) is changed all at once (for example, "10" → "100"), the volume adjustment completed sound channel despite the change in the output volume. It is desirable not to do the allocation itself.

On the other hand, the notification processing under the effect progress in the state where the magnetic anomaly has occurred should not be terminated only when the magnetic anomaly state ends, but should be continuously executed until the RAM is cleared or the power is cut off. Is desirable. In this case, the output volume (audible sound volume) is changed all at once (for example, "10" → "100") when the RAM is cleared or the power is restored from the power cutoff. Even if there is, it is desirable not to assign the channel of the volume adjustment completed sound itself even though the output volume changes.

Further, in the effect progress notification process in the state where the door is opened, a display indicating that is displayed when the player set value is changed is displayed, whereas in the effect progress notification process in the state where the magnetic abnormality has occurred. , When the player setting value is changed, the display indicating that fact may not be displayed. According to such a configuration, it can be suggested that the end conditions are different between the effect progress notification process in the state where the door is opened and the effect progress notification process in the state where the magnetic anomaly occurs. become.

Further, as described above, in the pachinko machine 1 according to this embodiment, the volume can be adjusted by rotating the knob portion of the volume adjusting volume 1510a. However, since it is assumed that the volume adjustment by the knob portion is mainly performed by the hall side, the output (channel allocation) of the volume adjustment completion sound triggered by the volume adjustment by the knob portion cannot be performed. It is more desirable to allow free channels to have a margin.

Further, in the pachinko machine 1 according to this embodiment, although not shown, various effects included in the pachinko machine 1 are provided separately from the volume adjustment buttons (effect selection left button 331 and effect selection right button 332). Lamps for games (lamps that are controlled by the peripheral control board 1510 and used for production, etc., and game lamps such as special-figure LEDs that are controlled by the main control board 1310 are excluded from the brightness setting target. ) Is provided with a brightness adjustment button (brightness increase button, brightness decrease button, etc.), and when it is determined that the brightness adjustment button has been operated, the player determines the brightness applied to the various production lamps. It is possible to execute the process of changing the set value (player set value). In addition, when the player setting value related to brightness is lowered or raised, the brightness adjustment confirmation sound (for example, the same as the volume adjustment confirmation sound) is output at a volume value corresponding to the setting value applied to the volume at that time. I have to. Further, the brightness of the effect lamp can be changed by the operation by the player in both the state where the symbol does not change and the state where the symbol changes.

Further, it is desirable that the brightness adjustment completed sound is channel-assigned under the same conditions as the volume adjustment completed sound described above. In this case, even if the set value related to the brightness is changed, the brightness adjustment is confirmed. There will be situations where the sound channel allocation itself is not performed, or where the brightness adjustment confirmation sound is suppressed and output. According to such a configuration, it is necessary to grasp the current situation (whether the above-mentioned notification process under the progress of production is being executed, etc.) when the set value related to the brightness is changed instead of the volume. Will be possible. The brightness adjustment confirmation sound may be a sound different from the volume adjustment completion sound.

The player setting value related to the volume is set to a specific value (for example, "3") without any operation by the player when a predetermined condition (for example, when a predetermined time has elapsed after being controlled by the demo screen) is satisfied. It may be changed. However, when the setting is changed to a specific value (for example, "3") without any operation by the player, a display indicating which is the current set value (first volume value display OH1 or second volume). To a third party that the operating rate of the pachinko machine 1 is decreasing by preventing both the value display OH2) and the output (channel allocation) related to the volume adjustment completion sound. More desirable to make it harder to recognize.

Also, if a new volume adjustment is made while the volume adjustment completion sound corresponding to the volume adjustment is in the output state, the volume adjustment sound that is in the output state even if there is a free channel Assigning a new volume adjustment completion sound to the same channel in the form of ending halfway and outputting (overwriting and outputting) is more important for allowing a margin in the number of free channels. desirable.

Also, when an operation is further performed to the side where the volume is increased even though the player set value is at the maximum value, or to the side where the volume is decreased even though the player set value is at the minimum value. When the operation of is performed further, even if there is a free channel, the volume adjustment completion sound is not assigned to the channel and it is not output so that the number of free channels can be increased. More desirable on. At this time, the volume adjustment completion sound is not output, but the display indicating which of the current set values (first volume value display OH1 and second volume value display OH2) is displayed. May be good.

Volume adjustment by rotating the knob portion of the volume adjustment volume 1510a is permitted, but it may be possible to generate a period during which this is not permitted for the volume adjustment performed by the operation by the player.

On the other hand, in FIG. 168, when the state detection generated in FIG. 167 is a magnetic anomaly instead of opening the door, the effect selection left button 331 or the effect selection is performed while the processing related to the notification sound corresponding to the magnetic abnormality is being executed. It is a figure explaining the content about the process related to the volume adjustment accompanying the operation of the right button 332.

The situation shown in FIG. 168 (A) is a situation before the symbol change is started, and is the same as the situation described with reference to FIG. 167 (A). When a start winning prize is generated and a jackpot determination is made in such a situation, as shown in FIG. 168 (B), the result and variation of the jackpot determination are the same as in the situation described with reference to FIG. 167 (B). The decorative symbol SZ is variablely displayed in a predetermined effect pattern based on the type of the pattern. Further, while the decorative symbol SZ is variablely displayed, the predetermined effect is advanced, and the effect sound corresponding to the progress of the predetermined effect is output.

In the situation shown in FIG. 168 (B), the magnetic detection belonging to the first notification group is generated during the execution period of the symbol variation, and the processing related to the notification sound 1 (magnetic abnormality) corresponding to the magnetic detection is executed. Specifically, a loop process (60 seconds) that repeatedly outputs a notification sound such as "Boo Boo magnetism has been detected" and a display within the display area of the game board side effect display device 1600 (here, "magnetic detection"). And lighting by various lamps (light emitting devices) arranged on the door frame 3 and the game board 5 are executed respectively.

Further, as described above, when the magnetic detection belonging to the first notification group is generated during the fluctuation period of the symbol and the processing related to the notification sound 1 (magnetic anomaly) is executed in response to the magnetic detection, the effect is produced in the second volume suppression mode. The effect progress notification process that suppresses the sound output volume (audible sound volume) will be performed. Therefore, in the situation shown in FIG. 168 (B), the player setting value is maintained at "3", which is the same as in the situation shown in FIG. 168 (A), but the effect is produced. The sound output volume (audible sound volume) is set to a predetermined second specific value (here, "0"), which is lower than the original value (20 times the player's set value). The content of the production will be developed based on the volume value (here, mute).

In this regard, even when the effect progress notification process is executed in response to such a magnetic anomaly, when the operation for the effect selection left button 331 or the effect selection right button 332 is performed, the second specific value (here, "0") is performed. The output volume of the production sound (volume of the audible sound (mute in this case)) that has been lowered to () is not variable and is maintained, while the player's setting value (player setting value) itself regarding the volume. The change reception is allowed, and when the above-mentioned production progress notification process (process to reduce the output volume to a specific value) is completed, the output volume (audible sound volume) that reflects all the operations up to that point is displayed. As mentioned above, the batch change is performed.

That is, FIG. 168 (C) shows a state after the player has performed the operation with the effect selection right button 332 twice as the reach effect is executed in the state shown in FIG. 168 (B). Even though the player setting value has been changed from "3" to "5" by operating the effect selection right button 332, the output volume of the effect sound (volume of the audible sound) is the original value (game). It can be seen that the second specific value (here, "0 (silence)"), which is lower than the value set by the person, is maintained. Therefore, even if the player performs the operation by the effect selection right button 332 twice, the volume of the effect sound is until the above-mentioned effect progress notification process (process of reducing the output volume to a specific value) is completed. Is not changed, and the production content is advanced with the volume of the second specific value.

At this time, in the first operation among the operations by the player, the player setting value is changed from "3" to "4", but the output volume of the production sound (volume of the audible sound) is specified second. Since the value (here, "0") is maintained, the volume adjustment completion sound is not audibly output, and the player setting value is changed from "4" to "5" even in the second operation. However, since the output volume of the effect sound (volume of the audible sound) is maintained at the second specific value (here, "0"), the volume adjustment completed sound is not audibly output.

However, in the first operation, the player setting value itself has changed from "3" to "4", and the player operation for adjusting the volume has been accepted. In the display area of the device 1600, the second volume value display OH2 indicating by the gauge display that the current set value is “4” in the range of “1” to “5” of the player set value is The volume adjustment guidance display is executed in place of the OAH, and the value is changed from "3" to "4" and displayed on the first volume value display OH1 as well.

Also, in the second operation, the player setting value itself has changed from "4" to "5", and the player operation for adjusting the volume has been accepted, so that the second volume value has been received. In the display OH2, the gauge display indicates that the current set value has changed from "4" to "5" in the range of "1" to "5" of the player set value, and the first volume value. Even in the display OH1, the numerical value is changed from "4" to "5" and displayed.

Incidentally, in this explanatory example, in the situation shown in FIG. 168 (C), the magnetic detection itself is already in a non-detection state. However, unlike the case of door detection, the output volume of the production sound (volume of the audible sound) in the second volume suppression mode until a predetermined time (60 seconds in this case) elapses after the magnetic detection occurs. The notification process under the progress of the production is continuously executed.

After that, a predetermined time (60 seconds in this case) has elapsed since the magnetic detection was performed while the volume adjustment guidance display OAH was returned to the state of being executed again, and the effect progress notification process (output volume was specified). When the process of lowering to the value) is completed, as shown in FIG. 168 (D), the output volume (audible sound volume) that reflects all the operations up to that point is reached according to the completion of the process. Change all at once. That is, in this case, the player set value is gradually changed from "3" to "4" corresponding to the first operation and "5" corresponding to the second operation during the execution period of the effect progress notification process. Since it has changed, the output volume (audible sound volume) should normally be "80" from the second specific value (here, "0") according to the first operation, and the second operation. Where it should be gradually changed to "100" according to the above, the second specific value (here, "0") will be changed to "100" in which all the operations up to that point are reflected.

When the notification process corresponding to the magnetic abnormality is executed, unlike the case where the notification process corresponding to the door opening is executed, even in the situation shown in FIG. 168 (D), the game board side effect display device. The display in the display area of 1600 (here, "magnetic detection") and the lighting by various lamps (light emitting devices) arranged on the door frame 3 and the game board 5 are still executed. There is. That is, in the notification processing according to the magnetic abnormality, when the notification sound is finished, the notification by the display in the liquid crystal and the notification by the lamp are continued, and the production sound is excluded from the suppression target and corresponds to the player set value. On the other hand, in the notification process according to the opening of the door, even if the notification sound ends, the production sound remains the suppression target while the notification by the display in the liquid crystal and the notification by the lamp are continued. It is supposed to be.

In this way, even if a magnetic anomaly occurs, the player is allowed to change the set value (player set value) even during the period when the effect progress notification process is being executed. , It will be expected to suppress the deterioration of the game entertainment until the notification processing under the progress of the production is completed. In addition, the volume value (the volume of the audible sound) is changed in multiple stages immediately after the notification process under the progress of the production is completed, and the volume adjustment completion sound each time causes a shortage or no margin in the vacant channel. The occurrence of such a situation will also be suitably avoided.

Moreover, in this explanatory example, the output volume (audible sound volume) is also output when the output volume (audible sound volume) is changed all at once (“0” → “100”) when the effect progress notification process due to the magnetic anomaly is completed. Even though the volume changes, the channel allocation of the volume adjustment completed sound itself is not performed. According to such a configuration, in particular, a situation in which an appropriate production cannot be enjoyed due to a shortage of free channels even though the notification processing under the production progress due to the notification due to the false detection is finally completed. Can be suitably suppressed.

As shown in FIG. 155, the initial volume of the notification sound corresponding to the door opening such as "the door is open ping-pong ping-pong" and the notification sound corresponding to the magnetic abnormality such as "boo-boo magnetism was detected". Since "1" (0x1FF) is set in the third byte of the value, the sound is always played at the volume set by the initial value regardless of the player set value.

Further, when the notification sound 6 (left-handed guidance) or the notification sound 7 (ball removal guidance) is executed, the notification process under the progress of the effect is not executed. Therefore, the player is set during the execution of these notifications. It is possible to appropriately change both the value and the output volume of the effect sound (volume of the audible sound). However, as shown in FIG. 155, these notification sounds 6 and 7 also have "1" (0x1FF) set in the third byte of the initial volume value, regardless of the player set value. It will always be played at the volume set by the initial value.

Of the notification sounds 1 to 7, for the notification sound 6 (left-handed guidance) and the notification sound 7 (ball removal guidance) belonging to the third notification group, "1" is not set in the third byte of the initial volume value, and "1" is not set. It may be included in the target of volume adjustment by the player.

Further, for each process described with reference to FIGS. 167 and 168, the state is detected not only during the execution period of the symbol change but also before the start of the symbol change and in a form straddling the start and end timings of the symbol change. Even when the notification process according to the above is executed, it may be executed in the same manner.

Further, in each of the processes described with reference to FIGS. 167 and 168, after the effect progress notification process is completed, the effect selection left button 331 or the effect selection right button is the same as before the effect progress notification process is started. When the player setting value is changed by the operation by 332, the output volume of the effect sound (volume of the audible sound) is changed accordingly. Then, each time the output volume of the effect sound (volume of the audible sound) changes, the volume adjustment completion sound (for example, "Pi!") Is reproduced at the volume after the change.

Further, the processing described with reference to FIG. 167 and the processing described with reference to FIG. 168 are made to have different suppression modes of the production sound during the period during which the production progress notification processing is being performed. It is not necessary to make them different, and the output volume (audible sound) of the effect sound is produced in one suppression mode depending on whether the notification sound belonging to the first notification group is executed or the notification sound belonging to the second notification group is executed. As described above, the process of suppressing the volume of the sound) may be performed.

Further, in the effect progress notification process, the output volume (volume of audible sound) of various game sounds is suppressed, and among these game sounds, the game ball is placed at the first start port 2002 or the second start port 2004. Some game sounds, such as the sound played according to the winning (winning sound), may be played at the default volume without being affected by the volume suppression. That is, in this case, it becomes possible for the hall side to easily grasp whether or not the game is being continued even though the abnormal state of the pachinko machine 1 has occurred. In this sense, some sounds (winning sounds), such as sounds played in response to a game ball winning in the first starting port 2002 or the second starting port 2004 when the effect progress notification process is being executed. It is desirable that the game sound be reproduced as a special sound that cannot be output when the effect progress notification process is not executed.

As described above, in FIGS. 155 to 168, there is no vacancy in the channel by adopting a channel saving type control structure that can appropriately notify the abnormal content etc. with only a single channel for various notification sounds. (Situation where the number of free channels is 0) It was proposed to make technical ingenuity in terms of how to make it difficult to appear. However, even when such a control structure is adopted, there is a situation where there is no vacancy in the channel to which the effect sound effect (effect sound) is assigned (the situation where the number of vacant channels is 0), and the effect design is performed. Concerns remain about the emergence of the above unintended mode of sound output.

In this regard, in the pachinko machine 1 according to this embodiment, various technical techniques are required regarding the channel allocation of the production sound at a stage before the situation where there is no vacancy in the channel (the situation where the number of vacant channels is 0) occurs. I try to devise it. Hereinafter, various technical measures made regarding the output of the production sound will be described in sequence. In adopting these technical devices as the pachinko machine 1, the above-mentioned channel-saving control structure that enables appropriate notification of abnormal contents and the like with only a single channel for various notification sounds is not necessarily adopted. You don't have to. Further, in each of the examples described below, either the fixed channel method or the automatic channel method may be adopted for both the notification sound and the effect sound. Further, when the automatic channel method is adopted, it is not always necessary to adopt the control based on the above-mentioned priority, and when all the channels are in use, a process of discarding a new sound may be performed. good. In addition, the examples described below can be implemented in appropriate combinations.

[Channel reservation processing]
As described above, in a gaming machine in which the number of channels is finite, even if a special result is obtained by the judgment by the judgment means according to the winning, there is no vacancy in the channel to which the sound data is assigned. In (the situation where the number of free channels is 0), it is not possible to assign a special sound corresponding to the special result obtained to the channel, and there is a concern that the game interest may be deteriorated due to the inability to output this.

In this regard, in the pachinko machine 1 according to this embodiment, first, it is determined whether or not a specific action such as "an act of holding a hand over the pachinko machine 1 to pray" or "a button operation" has been performed. It can be detected by the detection means. When it is detected that such a specific action has been performed, for example, a predetermined sound that does not show any expectation, such as a sound corresponding to silent data composed of only silent sound (output sound with a volume of 0). By executing a process of assigning a sound to a channel for a predetermined time (channel reservation process), the channel is kept from being used by another sound. On the other hand, while the channel reservation process is being performed in this way, even if special production conditions such as a jackpot confirmation effect and a look-ahead effect are satisfied as a result of the game ball being accepted in the specific winning opening, the effect is satisfied. At this point, the special sound corresponding to the effect is not assigned to the channel. Then, after waiting for the channel reservation process to be completed, it is possible to execute an effect of assigning a special sound to a channel and playing it (post-announcement effect).

That is, in this case, at least one of the channels that can be assigned the special sound is reserved in advance (channel reservation) by a predetermined sound that does not show any expectation due to the specific action by the player. Therefore, it is possible to avoid the occurrence of a situation in which a special sound cannot be output due to a lack of channels even though a special result is obtained in the judgment according to the winning.

Regarding the special sound, for example, in addition to the big hit confirmation sound that is executed only when the big hit is won by the big hit judgment according to the prize, the production mode based on the big hit judgment according to the prize is highly expected (for example). , High-expected advance notice effect performed during execution of reach effect) is selected, and pre-reading is performed when a predetermined judgment result is obtained by pre-reading judgment according to winning. It is possible to exemplify a look-ahead notification sound that is executed as an effect, but the point is that it is assigned to a channel and output when a special judgment result is obtained by a judgment by a predetermined judgment means according to a prize. Anything that can be done will do.

FIG. 169 shows, prior to outputting a special sound (for example, a cure) that matches the so-called look-ahead effect as a “special sound” when the game ball wins a prize at the first start port 2002 or the second start port 2004. A channel to which a special sound can be assigned is in a state in which the special sound has not been output (more accurately, a determination to output a special sound (a determination to perform a look-ahead effect) has not yet been made). It is a time chart which shows an example about a channel reservation process which is reserved in advance from time to time.

First, prior to explaining an example of the channel reservation process, first, a general pre-reading effect, which is a well-known technique, will be briefly described.
That is, as described above, in the pachinko machine 1 according to this embodiment, when a prize is generated in the first start port 2002 or the second start port 2004, a predetermined number of game balls are paid out based on the prize. , The first and second starting port winning processes (steps S5231 to S5234) shown in FIG. 104 are performed. In the first and second starting port winning processes (FIG. 104: steps S5231 to S5234), it is determined whether or not the game ball has won a prize in the starting port (first starting port 2002 or second starting port 2004). As described above, when it is determined that a prize has been won, a process of increasing the number of reservations on the corresponding special symbol side by 1 is performed.

Further, as described above, in the first and second starting port winning processes (FIG. 104: steps S5231 to S5234), a look-ahead process for executing the look-ahead effect on the winning starting port side is also executed (FIG. FIG. 105: Step S5245, FIG. 106: Step S5255).

Here, as described above, the look-ahead effect on the first special symbol side is an effect that suggests the determination result (or the degree of expectation) of the first special symbol in advance before starting the variable display of the first special symbol. be. In this first special figure pre-reading process, information required for determining whether or not the pre-reading effect is executed and the content of the effect on the peripheral control board 1510 side (information on winning for pre-reading determination, symbol type for pre-reading determination). Information, information on the variation pattern number for pre-reading determination, etc.) is generated and stored in the corresponding storage area as transmission information for the peripheral control board 1510. At this time, instead of the determination result itself of the first special symbol, the command may include information about the stop symbol of the special symbol as information suggesting the type of the jackpot game. For example, information on the stage before the final determination, such as the SP reach group, the normal reach group, the latent hit group among the symbol types, and the small hit group among the fluctuation patterns, may be transmitted as a look-ahead command.

On the other hand, the look-ahead effect on the second special symbol side suggests the judgment result (or the degree of expectation) of the second special symbol in advance before starting the variable display of the second special symbol, as described above. It is a production to do. In this second special figure pre-reading process, the peripheral control board 1510 generates information (winning information, symbol type, variation pattern number, etc.) required for determining whether or not the pre-reading effect is executed and the content of the effect. It is stored in the corresponding storage area as transmission information for the peripheral control board 1510. At this time, instead of the determination result itself of the second special symbol, the command may include information on the stop symbol of the special symbol as information suggesting the type of the jackpot game. For example, information on the stage before the final determination, such as the SP reach group, the normal reach group, the latent hit group among the symbol types, and the small hit group among the fluctuation patterns, may be transmitted as a look-ahead command.

That is, in the peripheral control board 1510, the information (pre-reading command) obtained from the read-ahead command when the determination process for whether or not a jackpot has been won and the symbol variation thereof have not been digested and they are in the hold state ( Expectations for whether the jackpot judgment that has been put on hold will obtain a special result based on the information related to the look-ahead effect on the first special figure side and the information related to the look-ahead effect on the second special figure side). It is possible to execute a look-ahead effect that suggests the degree in advance.

More specifically, the peripheral control MPU1511a first determines whether or not a start-up prize has occurred, and when in that situation, controls the hold display and the look-ahead effect according to the start-up prize. After that, by updating the processing flag of the special symbol based on the grasped game situation, the above-mentioned fluctuation start processing, fluctuation pattern setting processing, fluctuation processing, big hit game processing, and small hit establishment time shown in FIG. 167 are performed. Perform one of the processes. Among these, in the control related to the look-ahead effect, for example, a new hold display according to the start winning prize is displayed in any of a plurality of modes (for example, blue with relatively low expectation and red with relatively high expectation). When it is determined whether or not to perform a specific look-ahead effect that suggests the expectation of look-ahead depending on whether it is displayed, and when it is determined that the mode (for example, blue, red, or not to perform the look-ahead effect) according to the result of the determination is performed. The process of performing the hold display is performed in the normal display mode). As a result, until the jackpot determination corresponding to the hold display is digested, the look-ahead effect in which the jackpot expectation degree is previously suggested by the display mode is executed.

By the way, in such a look-ahead effect, when a hold display (including a hold display for confirming a big hit) appears in a highly expected manner, a special sound (for example, a cure) may be output in accordance with the look-ahead execution. many. However, since such a special sound (pre-reading effect) is played at the timing of winning the game ball that occurs irregularly, the winning of the game ball occurs at the timing when there is no space in the channel, and the pre-reading judgment is made. If there is a chance of winning, the player can recognize that the special sound is not played even though the look-ahead judgment is won, and the hold display appears in a mode with high expectation (blue or red). There is a concern that the game entertainment will decline without it.

Therefore, in the example shown in FIG. 169, as described above, the special sound is output before the first starting port 2002 or the second starting port 2004 is made to win the game ball and the special sound (look-ahead effect) is output. The channel that can be assigned is prior to the time when the special sound is not output (more accurately, the judgment to output the special sound (the judgment to perform the look-ahead effect) has not been made yet). It is possible to execute the channel reservation process reserved in.

For example, at the timing tY10 shown in FIG. 169, the number of jackpot determinations (number of holds) currently in the hold state is 0, and the normal background display appears in the display area of the game board side effect display device 1600. Assuming that the decorative symbol is displayed in a variable manner, the player usually wins a game ball in the first starting port 2002 or the second starting port 2004 in order to increase the number of holdings. The game (handle operation) is performed so as to be performed. As a result, when a game ball is won in the first starting port 2002 or the second starting port 2004, a maximum of four jackpot determinations are put on hold according to the winning, and the jackpot determinations are made. Each time it is put on hold, processing related to hold display and look-ahead effect according to the winning is performed.

Here, as a look-ahead effect when the channel reservation process is not executed, for example, the first prize (first hold) and the second prize (first prize) in the order of winning the first start port 2002 or the second start port 2004. If the third prize (third hold) and the fourth prize (fourth hold) occur, the process related to the look-ahead effect is performed at each timing when the hold occurs. Then, when the look-ahead determination is won and the look-ahead effect is performed, a special sound (for example, a cure) is output at the timing when the corresponding hold occurs (each timing when the prize is won and the look-ahead judgment is made), and a specific mode is used. The hold display with will appear.

On the other hand, the look-ahead effect when the channel reservation process is executed is also, for example, the first prize (first hold) and the second prize (first prize) in the order of winning the first start port 2002 or the second start port 2004. If the third prize (third hold) and the fourth prize (fourth hold) occur, the process related to the look-ahead effect is performed at each timing when the hold occurs. However, when the look-ahead judgment is won and the look-ahead effect is performed, a special sound (for example, a cure) is not output at the timing when the corresponding hold occurs (the timing when the prize is won), but this is maintained in the state of waiting for execution. The special sound (for example, cure) is output after waiting for the channel targeted for the channel reservation process to become free. The hold display having a specific mode may be made to appear at the timing when a special sound (for example, a cure) is output, or may be made to appear at the timing when the hold that wins the look-ahead determination occurs. good. However, when the hold display with a specific mode appears at the timing when the hold that wins the look-ahead judgment occurs, the look-ahead effect when the channel reservation process is executed and the look-ahead effect when the channel reservation process is not executed are not executed. In any of the look-ahead effects, it is desirable that only one mode (for example, only red) can appear as a specific mode.

That is, in the pachinko machine 1 according to this embodiment, when a hand is held near the front of the display area of the game board side effect display device 1600, a non-contact type sensor (for example, an ultrasonic sensor or an infrared sensor) (for example, an ultrasonic sensor or an infrared sensor) (not shown) is used. Detects this as an object and triggers the channel reservation process to start.

For example, at the timing tY11 shown in FIG. 169, the player holds his / her hand near the front of the display area of the game board side effect display device 1600, and this is detected as an object. Then, the peripheral control board 1510 generates a prayer effect mode based on the detection. In this prayer mode, first, the prayer mode background display in which the "Torii of the shrine" is displayed as a background image in the display area of the game board side effect display device 1600 is performed, and the "countdown" is performed for a predetermined time (30 seconds). A process of assigning "audio" to a predetermined channel and playing it is performed. The countdown voice starts from "30", counts down every second, and ends when the countdown reaches "0". Further, even during the period in which the prayer mode background display is displayed in this way, in the display area of the game board side effect display device 1600, the effect in which the decorative design is variablely displayed in a predetermined effect pattern is continuously executed.

However, the player holds his hand over the front of the display area of the game board side effect display device 1600 for the "shrine torii (pray mode background display)" in such a display area and the "countdown sound" in the predetermined channel. This can be generated as an opportunity (detection by the sensor) only by itself, and it is not related to the production content (production that suggests the degree of expectation) that is progressing within the ongoing symbol fluctuation. It does not depend on the result of the jackpot judgment. Therefore, the display and sound generated when the player holds his hand may be changed to different contents as appropriate, but by performing such processing, a predetermined time (30 seconds) is determined. It is now possible to keep the channel in use (here, the state of use by "countdown voice" that does not show any expectation), and until this predetermined time (30 seconds) elapses. It becomes possible to avoid the occurrence of a situation in which another sound that does not know when it ends is assigned to a predetermined channel (channel reservation processing).

Then, until the predetermined time (30 seconds) in which the channel reservation process is executed elapses, the player plays a game so that the game ball is won in the first start port 2002 or the second start port 2004. (Handle operation) will be performed. As a result, as shown in FIG. 169, the first prize (first hold), the second prize (second hold), the third prize (third hold), and the fourth prize (fourth hold) occurred. Then, the process related to the look-ahead effect is performed at each timing when the hold occurs. However, as described above, while the "countdown sound" is being played (while the channel reservation process is being executed), the judgment result (look-ahead winning) that the look-ahead effect is performed as the result of the judgment according to the winning is Even if it is obtained, a special sound (for example, a cure) is not assigned to the channel at the time of winning, and this is stored as a state of waiting for execution. The special sound (for example, cure) that is in the waiting state in this way is output as a post-notification sound that is output after the winning time at the timing tY12 when a predetermined time (30 seconds) has passed from the timing tY11. Become.

On the other hand, a prize is generated between the time when the player holds his hand and starts the playback of the "countdown sound" (channel reservation processing) by his own will and the time when this is finished (timing tY11 to tY12). If there is no prize, or if a special judgment result is not obtained although a prize is generated (the pre-reading effect is not won), it is special even if the timing tY12 at which the playback of the "countdown sound" ends is reached. No sound is played.

According to such a configuration, between the time when the player holds his hand and starts the playback of the "countdown sound" (channel reservation processing) by his own will and the time when this is finished (timing tY11 to tY12). If a prize is generated and a special judgment result (look-ahead winning) is obtained by the judgment according to the prize, the special sound (cue) is not output at that time and the "countdown voice" is output. It will be executed as a post-notification effect to output at the timing when the channel is finished and a vacancy occurs in the channel. Therefore, even though a special determination result (pre-reading winning) is obtained, it is possible to preferably avoid the occurrence of a situation in which the special sound cannot be output due to the absence of a free channel. Further, no matter which timing between the timings tY11 to tY12, a special determination result (pre-reading winning) is obtained, a special sound (cuein) corresponding to the special sound (cuein) is provided at one timing at which at least one channel has a vacancy. Since the playback is aimed at tY12, a special judgment result (pre-reading) within a relatively long time of timings tY11 to tY12 is required as long as it is confirmed whether or not a special sound (cure) is generated at timing tY12. You will be able to easily recognize whether you have won).

When the special sound (cuein) is output as such a post-notification sound, it may be assigned to any of the channels that are vacant at the timing tY12 and played. However, if the special sound (cuein) is selectively assigned to the predetermined channel to which the "countdown voice" has been assigned so far, the channel reservation process and the corresponding post-announcement effect can be performed with only one channel. It can be said that it is beneficial in that it can be realized and the range of production can be expanded within a limited number of channels.

Further, in this embodiment, regarding the prayer mode background display in which the "Torii of the shrine" is displayed as the background image, the timing tY12 at which the playback of the "countdown sound" ends and the playback of the special sound (cuein) are performed. It is designed to continue to be displayed even after the timing of termination has arrived. This is based on the fact that those who request the execution of such a channel reservation process tend to hold their hands to re-occur the channel reservation process each time the number of reservations decreases, and before holding their hands. Considering that it seems that there is a benefit when you hold your hand over the "Torii of the shrine" as a background image (the probability that the special sound will be played at the timing of the later announcement will increase). Yes, the prayer mode background display is continued until a specific condition unrelated to the channel reservation process is satisfied (for example, a button release operation). However, in reality, the player holds his hand over even if the "Torii of the shrine" is displayed as the background image or the "Torii of the shrine" is not displayed as the background image. When this is detected, the process of maintaining the predetermined channel in the allocated state for a predetermined time is only performed by the predetermined sound (countdown sound). Therefore, the timing tY12 at which the reproduction of the “countdown sound” is terminated. Alternatively, the display may be returned to the normal background display at the timing when the reproduction of the special sound (cuein) as the post-notification sound is finished.

Further, when the player holds his hand again during the period of timings tY11 to tY12 and this is detected, the playback time of the "countdown sound" is from the timing when a predetermined time (here, 30 seconds) elapses from the re-detection. May be extended to output a special sound according to the pre-reading winning when the timing is reached.

In addition, such a prayer effect mode is executed based on the fact that a specific action by the player is detected not only when the symbol fluctuation is in the fluctuating state but also when the symbol fluctuation is not in the fluctuating state. You may try to do it. Further, the specific action may be an action to be detected by the contact type sensor, such as a predetermined button operation, in addition to the action to be detected by the non-contact type sensor.

However, when the special sound (cuein) is output as such a post-notification sound, the first prize (first hold) and the second prize (second prize) are compared with the case where the special sound (cuein) is output at the time of winning. Since it is difficult to know which of the 2nd hold), the 3rd prize (3rd hold), and the 4th prize (4th hold) has obtained the special judgment result (look-ahead winning), the look-ahead winning There is a concern that the interest in the game will decline due to the hold being digested without recognizing that the hold has been made. On the other hand, the content reproduced as a special sound is not a uniform sound (here, "cuein"), but the first prize (first hold), the second prize (second hold), and the third prize (first prize). It is also conceivable to make the difference depending on which hold of the 4th prize (4th hold) is pre-read and won. However, with this, the content of the sound played in the look-ahead effect when the channel reservation process is not executed (here, "Kyuin") changes, so it is possible to grasp that the look-ahead was won. There is concern that it will disappear.

Therefore, in the peripheral control MPU1511a according to this embodiment, a special determination result is obtained for any timing between the timings tY11 to tY12 (first hold, second hold, third hold, fourth hold). A process of varying the reproduction time of the special sound (here, "cuein") starting from the timing tY12 is performed depending on whether (pre-reading winning) is obtained.

For example, in the example shown in FIG. 169, it is assumed that a special determination result (look-ahead winning) is obtained in the first winning (first hold) of winning at an extremely early timing between timings tY11 to tY12. However, in this case, the special sound (here, "cuein") is reproduced for 3 seconds from the timing tY12.

On the other hand, in the example shown in FIG. 170, a case where a special determination result (look-ahead winning) is obtained in the second winning (second hold) in which the winning is made at a relatively early timing between the timings tY11 to tY12. Assuming, in this case, the special sound is reproduced for 6 seconds from the timing tY12. Here, the time required to play "Kyuin" once is 3 seconds, and if a special sound (here, "Kyuin") is played for 6 seconds, "Kyuin" is played twice. Then, a sound in the form of "cure cue in" is output.

On the other hand, in the example shown in FIG. 171, it is assumed that a special determination result (look-ahead winning) is obtained in the third winning (third hold), which is won at a relatively late timing between the timings tY11 to tY12. However, in this case, the special sound is reproduced for 9 seconds from the timing tY12. Here, since the time required to play "Kyuin" once is 3 seconds, if a special sound (here, "Kyuin") is played for 9 seconds, "Kyuin" is 3 It is played back in batches and a sound in the form of "cure cue cue in" is output.

On the other hand, in the example shown in FIG. 172, it is assumed that a special determination result (look-ahead winning) is obtained in the fourth winning (fourth hold) in which the winning is performed at an extremely late timing between the timings tY11 to tY12. However, in this case, the special sound is reproduced from the timing tY12 for 12 seconds. Here, since the time required to play "Kyuin" once is 3 seconds, if a special sound (here, "Kyuin") is played for 12 seconds, "Kyuin" is 4 It is played back in batches and outputs a sound in the form of "Kyuin Kyuin Kyuin Kyuin".

According to such a configuration, when a special sound is output at the timing tY12, it is possible to grasp that a special determination result (look-ahead winning) has been obtained between the timings tY11 to tY12, as well as the timing. It becomes possible to predict at which timing between tY11 and tY12 a special determination result (look-ahead winning) was obtained by winning a prize. In this example, it is suggested that the shorter the reproduction time of the special sound from the timing tY12, the more the special judgment result (look-ahead winning) was obtained by the winning that occurred at the earlier timing between the timings tY11 to tY12. Therefore, the longer the reproduction time of the special sound from the timing tY12, the more it is suggested that the special judgment result (look-ahead winning) was obtained by the winning that occurred at the later timing between the timings tY11 to tY12. ..

In this example, it can be assumed that only the first prize is generated between the timings tY11 to tY12 and a special determination result is obtained according to the prize, but also in this case, depending on the timing when the prize is generated. Therefore, the length of the reproduction time of the special sound from the timing tY12 is changed as described above. However, instead of this, considering that the number of holds is limited to 4 at the maximum, if a special judgment result is obtained in the first prize, the special sound is "Kyuin" 1 regardless of the prize timing. Set the playback time for the second prize, and if a special judgment result is obtained in the second prize, set the special sound to the playback time for the second "Kyuin" regardless of the winning timing, and make a special judgment in the third prize. If a result is obtained, the special sound is set to the playback time for 3 times of "Kyuin" regardless of the winning timing, and if a special judgment result is obtained in the 4th winning, the special sound is set regardless of the winning timing. May be set to the playback time for four "cueins".

Further, in this embodiment, when a look-ahead winning is obtained, "cuein" is played as a special sound, but the first judgment result (for example, a relatively high degree of expectation) is obtained in the look-ahead judgment when a prize is won. The reproduced content as a special sound may be changed depending on whether a low look-ahead winning (low look-ahead winning) or a second determination result (for example, a relatively high expectation look-ahead winning) is obtained. For example, if the first judgment result (for example, a look-ahead winning with a relatively low expectation) is obtained in the look-ahead judgment when a prize is won, "Kyuin" is played as a special sound, whereas the look-ahead when a prize is won is played. When the second judgment result (pre-reading winning with relatively high expectation) is obtained in the judgment, if "Dokan" is reproduced as a special sound, it occurs at any timing between timings tY11 to tY12. In addition to the prediction as to whether or not the pre-reading winning was obtained by winning, the first judgment result (relatively low expectation pre-reading winning) and the second judgment result (relatively high expectation pre-reading winning) as the pre-reading winning It will also be possible to make predictions about which one was obtained. In this case, it is desirable to reproduce "cuein" or "dokan" as a special sound according to the determination result even in the look-ahead effect when the channel reservation process is not executed.

For example, in the example shown in FIG. 173, the first judgment result (pre-reading winning with a relatively low degree of expectation) is performed in the pre-reading judgment in the first winning (first hold) in which the winning is performed at an extremely early timing between the timings tY11 to tY12. ) Is obtained, and the second judgment result (pre-reading winning with relatively high expectation) is obtained in the pre-reading judgment in the fourth winning (fourth hold) that won the prize at an extremely late timing. However, in this case, the special sound is reproduced in the "cure" mode for 3 seconds from the timing tY12, and then the special sound is reproduced in the "dokan" mode for another 9 seconds.

According to such a configuration, by confirming that the reproduction time of the special sound in the "cure" mode is 3 seconds, the first prize is won at an extremely early timing among the timings tY11 to tY12 (1st prize). It becomes possible to predict that the first determination result (pre-reading winning with a relatively low degree of expectation) is obtained by the look-ahead determination in the first hold). In addition, by confirming that the playback time of the special sound itself was performed for 12 seconds (3 + 9 seconds), it was possible to win the pre-reading in the pre-reading judgment in the 4th prize (4th hold), which was won at an extremely late timing. It is possible to grasp. Further, in response to the fact that the first judgment result (pre-reading winning with relatively low expectation) was obtained in the pre-reading judgment in the first winning (first hold) in which the prize was won at an extremely early timing between the timings tY11 to tY12. By confirming that the special sound is being played in the form of "dokan" after the one "cure" that has been played is completed, the second pre-reading judgment in the fourth prize (fourth hold) is the second. It will be possible to predict that a judgment result (a look-ahead winning with a relatively low degree of expectation) has been obtained.

Alternatively, when the first judgment result (first look-ahead winning on the first special figure side) is obtained by the look-ahead judgment according to the winning of the first start port 2002, "cuein" is played as a special sound. , When the second judgment result (the look-ahead winning on the second special figure side) is obtained by the look-ahead judgment according to the winning of the second start port 2004, "Dokan" may be reproduced as a special sound. .. In this case, even in the pre-reading effect when the channel reservation process is not executed, either the pre-reading determination according to the winning of the first starting port 2002 or the pre-reading determination according to the winning of the second starting port 2004 is performed. Depending on the presence, it is desirable to play "cuein" or "dokan" as a special sound.

According to such a configuration, for example, when the situation shown in FIG. 173 occurs, by confirming that the reproduction time of the special sound in the "cure" mode is 3 seconds, the timings tY11 to tY12 can be set. The first prize (first hold) that won the prize at an extremely early timing is the prize to the first starting port 2002 side, and the first judgment result (the first special figure side) is the pre-reading judgment corresponding to this. It will be possible to predict that the look-ahead winning) has been obtained. In addition, by confirming that the playback time of the special sound itself was performed for 12 seconds (3 + 9 seconds), the look-ahead was won even in the look-ahead judgment in the 4th prize (4th hold), which was won at an extremely late timing. It is possible to grasp that. Further, according to the fact that the first judgment result (first look-ahead winning on the first special figure side) is obtained in the look-ahead judgment in the first prize (first hold) in which the prize is won at an extremely early timing between the timings tY11 to tY12. By confirming that the special sound is being played in the form of "dokan" after the one "cure" that has been played is completed, the fourth prize (fourth hold) is on the second starting port 2004 side. It becomes possible to predict that the second determination result (the look-ahead winning on the second special figure side) has been obtained by the look-ahead judgment corresponding to the winning prize.

As described above, in this embodiment, as an example of channel control in the case where a special determination result is obtained based on the fact that the game ball is accepted in the specific winning opening while the channel reservation process is being executed. , The case where the look-ahead winning in the look-ahead effect is obtained is illustrated. However, the embodiment described with reference to FIGS. 169 to 173 is, in short, a gaming machine in which a determination process is performed when a game ball is received in a specific winning opening, and the determination process is special. Channel control (channel reservation processing, etc.) that makes it possible to avoid a channel shortage that occurs when a special sound is output when a judgment result is obtained and cannot be output. Therefore, it is clear that the application example is not necessarily limited to the look-ahead winning in the look-ahead effect.

[Channel usage restrictions]
As described above, in a gaming machine in which the number of channels is finite, even if a special result is obtained by the judgment by the judgment means according to the winning, there is no vacancy in the channel to which the sound data is assigned. In (the situation where the number of free channels is 0), it is not possible to assign a special sound corresponding to the special result obtained to the channel, and there is a concern that the game interest may be deteriorated due to the inability to output this.

In this regard, in the pachinko machine 1 according to this embodiment, the number of vacant channels is monitored as the game progresses, and when the number becomes less than a predetermined number, at least a part of the game sounds of the various game sounds is recorded. The ratio of restricting the execution of output-related processing is increased (channel usage restriction). That is, in this case, at least for some game sounds, the execution of the processing related to the output is restricted from the stage before the number of free channels becomes 0, and is executed as the number of free channels approaches 0. Since the limiting ratio becomes high, it becomes possible to make it difficult to reduce the number of free channels to zero.

More specifically, in the peripheral control MPU1511a according to this embodiment, each time the symbol variation corresponding to the jackpot determination in the pending state is digested (every time the start condition is satisfied), the digested symbol variation is changed. Determine the availability of channels during the execution period. As a result, when there is a margin in the availability of the channel, the ratio of channel use restriction (channel restriction level) is lowered at least until the symbol variation to be determined is completed, and the channel is vacant. When there is no room in the situation, the ratio of channel use restriction (channel restriction level) is increased at least until the symbol variation that is the judgment target is completed, and the channel restriction with such symbol variation as one unit is set. By executing this, the occurrence of a situation in which the number of free channels becomes 0 during the execution period of the symbol variation targeted for determination is suppressed. As will be described later, a plurality of level values are prepared as channel restriction levels, and as the level value increases, the ratio of restricting the execution of processing related to the output of the game sound increases.

FIG. 174 is a flowchart showing an example of the procedure for the process related to the setting of such a channel restriction level.

It is assumed that it is determined that the pattern command (variation pattern) has been received from the main control board 1310 in the process of step S1022 (FIG. 95). Then, in the peripheral control MPU 1511a, first, as shown in FIG. 174, the value of the previously set channel limit level is reset as the process of step S3101. The reset process (step S3101) may be performed when the symbol variation is completed.

Next, as the process of step S3102, based on the type of the effect pattern of the first half of the variation corresponding to the received variation pattern, the period of the first half of the variation (for example, the period from the start of the symbol variation to the start of the reach effect, or the symbol Specify "X", which is the number of vacant channels (minimum number of vacant channels) based on the timing when the channel becomes the least vacant within the period from the start of fluctuation to the stop of the symbol without starting the reach effect. do. Further, as the process of step S3103, based on the type of the effect pattern of the latter half of the variation corresponding to the received variation pattern, the channel is channeled within the period of the latter half of the variation (for example, the period from the start of the reach effect to the stop of the symbol variation). Specify "Y", which is the number of free channels (minimum number of free channels) based on the timing when the most free channels are exhausted.

However, when the effect pattern in which the symbol is stopped without starting the reach effect from the start of the symbol change is selected, the symbol change corresponding to the "second half of the change" is not performed. In this case, the next step process is performed without performing the process itself of step S3103, or the maximum value that can be set as the number of free channels "Y" in the process of step S3103 (a value that is not subject to channel restriction). Will be set.

Next, as the process of step S3104, the "X" specified in the process of step S3102 is compared with the "Y" specified in the process of step S3103, and among these "X" and "Y" Based on the value on the side where the minimum number of free channels is small (the side where there is no margin in the number of free channels), the channel restriction level is set at least until the symbol variation targeted for determination is completed. As a result, from the start to the end of the symbol variation targeted for determination, the execution of processing related to the output of the game sound can be restricted based on the set channel restriction level. , It is expected that the number of vacant channels will not be reduced to 0, and that the deterioration of the game entertainment due to the appearance of an unintended production mode will be suppressed.

In this embodiment, when setting the channel restriction level, the "minimum number of free channels" used for the determination is specified separately for the first half of the fluctuation (step S3102) and the second half of the fluctuation (step S3103). It is supposed to be. This means that the production content of the first half of the fluctuation (the period from the start of the symbol fluctuation to the start of the reach production, etc.) is shared by a plurality of production patterns (for example, long reach, super reach A, super reach B, etc.). Therefore, if the minimum number of free channels is specified in units of the first half of the fluctuation, the amount of data required to specify the minimum number of free channels can be reduced. ..

However, the minimum number of free channels used to determine the channel limit level setting does not necessarily have to be specified separately for the first half of the fluctuation and the second half of the fluctuation. With the pattern as one unit, the number of vacant channels (minimum number of vacant channels) may be specified based on the timing when the channels are most vacant within the period in which the effect pattern is executed.

In addition, the "minimum number of free channels" here refers to sounds (BGM-related, symbol stop-related according to big hit judgment, big hit judgment) that are automatically generated when the production pattern (effect content) to be judged progresses. It shows how many channels are left as vacant state when they are assigned to each channel only for the corresponding sound effect related). Therefore, button press sounds (sounds associated with effects generated based on button operations, etc.), volume adjustment completion sounds, various notification sounds, block winning sounds (sounds associated with winning a general winning opening), and pending winning sounds (first) The production patterns (production contents) to be judged, such as the sound associated with winning the starting port 2002 or the second starting port 2004) and the normal electric production sound (sound associated with the production according to the judgment of the normal symbol), have been developed. Various sounds that are not always executed just by squeezing are not included as the judgment target.

FIG. 175 is a diagram showing a value of a channel limit level separately set for the “minimum number of free channels” specified in the process of step S3104, and showing an example of a restriction content separately set for the channel limit level. ..

As shown in FIG. 175, in the peripheral control MPU 1511a according to this embodiment, first, among various game sounds, the block winning sound (winning to the general winning opening) is used as the sound to be restricted from using the channel. (Sounds associated with), hold winning sounds (sounds associated with winning a prize at the first starting port 2002 or second starting port 2004), Fuden production sounds (sounds associated with production according to the judgment of a normal symbol), volume adjustment completion sound Is illustrated. Therefore, during the execution period of the symbol variation in which there is no room in the vacant channel, at least for these game sounds (block winning sound, hold winning sound, general electric production sound, volume adjustment completion sound) among various game sounds. Restrictions on channel usage can occur.

More specifically, when the "minimum number of free channels" specified in the process of step S3103 is 12 or more, in the process of step S3104, the channel restriction level is set based on the correspondence shown in FIG. 175. Set to "0". That is, in this case, it is assumed that there is a margin in the vacant channel, and the sound that is subject to channel use restriction (block winning sound, hold winning sound, general electric production sound, volume adjustment completion sound) is executed. None of these are restricted, and if there is a prize in the general winning slot during the execution of the symbol variation, the block winning sound is assigned to a predetermined empty channel and played, and the first starting port 2002 or the first starting port 2002 or during the execution of the symbol variation. If there is a prize in the second starting port 2004, the hold prize sound is assigned to a predetermined empty channel and played back, and when the effect according to the judgment of the normal symbol is performed during the execution of the symbol change, the normal symbol corresponding to the effect is used. The electric effect sound is assigned to a predetermined empty channel and played back, and when the volume adjustment is performed during the execution of the symbol variation, the corresponding volume adjustment completion sound is assigned to the predetermined empty channel and played back.

On the other hand, when the "minimum number of free channels" specified in the process of step S3103 is any of 6 to 11, in the process of step S3104, channel restriction is performed based on the correspondence shown in FIG. 175. Set the level to "1". That is, in this case, assuming that the vacant channel is in a situation where the symbol fluctuation is executed with a little margin, the four sounds (block winning sound, holding winning sound, general electric production sound, volume adjustment completed) that are subject to channel use restriction. Of the sounds), the channel use limit (25% limit) is generated for the block winning sound. That is, in this case, when there is a prize in the general winning opening during the execution of the symbol change and this is detected, the number of prize balls corresponding to the winning is paid out, but this is specified for the block winning sound. It will be processed so that it will not be assigned to a free channel. At this time, it is desirable not to set the sound generation schedule data according to the winning of the general winning opening and not to reproduce the block winning sound itself.

On the other hand, when the "minimum number of free channels" specified in the process of step S3103 is any of 2 to 5, in the process of step S3104, the channel restriction level is set based on the association shown in FIG. 175. Set to "2". That is, in this case, assuming that the vacant channel is in a situation where the symbol fluctuation is executed with a relatively small margin, the four sounds (block winning sound, holding winning sound, general electric production sound, volume adjustment) that are subject to channel use restriction are applied. Of the completed sounds), channel use restrictions (50% restrictions) are generated for two sounds, the block winning sound and the holding winning sound. That is, in this case, in addition to the above-mentioned restriction on the block winning sound, when there is a winning in the first starting port 2002 or the second starting port 2004 during the execution of the symbol variation and this is detected, the quantity corresponding to the winning. Although the prize balls for the minutes are paid out and the above-mentioned first and second starting port winning processes are performed, the pending winning sounds are processed so as not to be assigned to a predetermined empty channel. At this time, it is desirable not to set the sound generation schedule data corresponding to the winning of the first starting port 2002 or the second starting port 2004, and not to reproduce the hold winning sound itself.

On the other hand, when the "minimum number of free channels" specified in the process of step S3103 is either 0 or 1, in the process of step S3104, the channel restriction level is based on the correspondence shown in FIG. 175. Is set to "3". That is, in this case, assuming that there is no room for symbol fluctuation in the vacant channel, four sounds (block winning sound, holding winning sound, general electric production sound, volume adjustment completed) that are subject to channel use restriction. A channel usage limit (100% limit) is generated for all of the sound). That is, in this case, in addition to the above-mentioned restrictions on the block winning sound and the holding winning sound, even if the effect according to the judgment of the normal symbol is performed during the execution of the symbol variation, the normal electric effect sound is not included. Will be processed so as not to be assigned to a predetermined free channel. In addition, when the player performs a volume adjustment operation during the execution of the symbol variation, the volume adjustment itself is performed according to the volume adjustment operation, but the volume adjustment completed sound is processed so as not to be assigned to a predetermined empty channel. It will be. At this time, do not set the corresponding sound generation schedule data for the Fuden production sound and volume adjustment completed sound, and do not play the Fuden production sound or volume adjustment completed sound itself. Is desirable.

According to such a configuration, when a symbol change is executed in which the number of vacant channels in a state where no sound is not assigned becomes less than a predetermined number while the game is progressing, the number of vacant channels is predetermined. Compared to the case where the symbol variation which is not less than the number is executed, the ratio of restricting the execution of the processing related to the output of at least a part of the game sounds among the various game sounds becomes higher. That is, in this case, some game sounds (block winning sound, holding winning sound, general electric production sound, volume adjustment completion sound) are output from the stage before the number of free channels actually becomes 0. Since the execution of related processing is restricted and the ratio of execution restriction increases as the number of free channels decreases, the number of free channels becomes 0 during the execution of the symbol variation. It is expected that the occurrence of such a situation will be suitably suppressed.

Further, in the above configuration, among various game sounds, the sound for which channel use is restricted is not the most important "directing sound related to jackpot determination" in the pachinko machine 1, but other "sounds associated with winning". , "Direction sound related to normal judgment", and "Sound related to volume adjustment". That is, even if the channel use is restricted during the execution of the symbol variation, the effect of whether or not the jackpot symbol appears due to the symbol variation is not restricted and is appropriately executed. Therefore, during the execution of the symbol variation. The decline in game interest when channel usage is restricted will be suppressed.

In addition, in the above configuration, a plurality of types of sound types that are candidates for channel use restriction target among various game sounds are prepared (block winning sound, holding winning sound, general electric production sound, volume adjustment completion sound). As the channel restriction level becomes higher (the smaller the minimum number of free channels is, the smaller the symbol variation), the number of sound types that are subject to channel usage restriction is increased. However, a method that limits the execution of processing related to the output from the stage before the number of free channels actually becomes 0, and increases the ratio of execution restrictions as the number of free channels decreases. The method is not limited to this, and for example, the method described below with reference to FIG. 176 may be adopted.

FIG. 176 is a diagram showing another example of the restriction content separately determined for the channel restriction level.

As shown in FIG. 176, in this alternative example, the channel is used according to the "minimum number of free channels" specified in the process of step S3103 and the channel restriction level specified in the process of step S3104. A restricted lottery will be held as to whether or not restrictions will be applied. However, here, when a plurality of sounds that are candidates for channel use restriction are not prepared and a determination result indicating that the restriction is applied is obtained in the restriction lottery, one game sound (for example, volume adjustment completion sound) is obtained. The restriction processing related to the channel use is performed only for (etc.).

For example, in this alternative example, when the channel restriction level is 0 (the minimum number of free channels is 12 or more), the probability of obtaining a determination result that the restriction is applied in the restriction lottery is set to 0/100, and the channel is used. The channel usage restriction process is not executed for the specific game sound to be restricted (for example, the volume adjustment completion sound).

However, when the channel restriction level becomes 1 or more, as the value increases, the probability of obtaining a judgment result that the restriction is applied in the restriction lottery increases, and the channel restriction level is 1 (minimum free channel). The same probability is 25/100 when the number is 6 to 11), and the same probability is 50/100 when the channel limit level is 2 (minimum number of free channels is 2 to 5), and the channel limit level. Is 3 (the minimum number of free channels is 0, 1), and the same probability is 100/100. Then, in this alternative example, when the determination result that the restriction is applied is obtained in the restriction lottery, the restriction processing related to the channel use is executed with the same contents regardless of the channel restriction level.

Even with such a configuration, if the number of vacant channels in which no sound is assigned is less than a predetermined number while the game is progressing, the number of vacant channels is increased. Compared to the case where the symbol variation which does not become less than a predetermined number is executed, the ratio of restricting the execution of the processing related to the output of at least a part of the game sounds among the various game sounds becomes higher. That is, in this case, for some of the game sounds (volume adjustment completion sounds), there is a limit to the execution of processing related to the output from the stage before the number of free channels actually becomes 0. Since the ratio of execution restriction increases as the number of free channels decreases and the number of free channels decreases, it is preferable that the number of free channels becomes 0 during the execution of the symbol variation. It will be expected to be suppressed.

Further, according to the above configuration, by confirming whether or not a specific sound (volume adjustment completed sound) is played during the execution period of the symbol variation, the minimum free channel during the execution period of the symbol variation is confirmed. It will be possible to infer the possibility that the number will run out, and it will be possible to promote game progress (winning, button operation, etc.) commensurate with the inference.

In the configuration illustrated in FIGS. 175 and 176, the minimum number of free channels is specified from the occurrence status of the notice effects after the determination processes related to the various notice effects are executed based on the effect patterns, and the specified minimum vacancy is specified. We decided to set the channel limit level based on the number of channels, but this is not always the case. For example, since it is possible to predict in advance how many sounds will be allocated to channels at the same time during the symbol fluctuation period for each production pattern, the susceptibility to channel shortage is classified in advance according to the production pattern. I will do it. Then, when the effect pattern is determined, the higher the likelihood of channel shortage in which the effect pattern is pre-classified, the higher the channel restriction ratio may be. That is, in this case, when a specific type of production pattern that tends to use many channels at the same time is executed, many channels are not used and empty channels are not actually used or various prizes are not generated. Even if there is a margin in the number of, there may be a situation where the execution of the processing related to the output of the game sound may be restricted during the execution of the symbol variation, but the free channel can be performed only by performing a simple processing. It is extremely beneficial in that it becomes possible to avoid the number of beings becoming 0, and even when such a process is executed, "the number of free channels during the symbol fluctuation is relatively large. When the number is small, the rate at which the execution of the process related to the output of the game sound is restricted is high, and when the number of free channels during the symbol variation is relatively large, the rate at which the execution of the process related to the output of the game sound is restricted is high. Only the phenomenon of "becomes low" appears, and since it is a phenomenon that does not give a feeling of strangeness to the player, it is expected that the game entertainment will be maintained favorably. Further, in this case, by confirming whether or not the sound is restricted, it becomes possible to infer the possibility that the effect pattern is likely to cause channel shortage.

Further, in the configurations illustrated in FIGS. 175 and 176 and other examples thereof, the channel restriction is executed with the symbol variation as one unit, but the channel is executed as the production content progresses within one symbol variation. The restriction level may be varied, and channel restriction may be executed according to the channel restriction level each time. Alternatively, when a predetermined restriction condition is satisfied, such as when a specific effect mode is executed over a plurality of symbol fluctuations, the channel restriction level is made unchanged by a specific value over a plurality of symbol fluctuations, and the channel restriction level is set to the channel restriction level. Channel restriction may be performed accordingly.

By the way, in the configurations illustrated in FIGS. 175 and 176 and other examples thereof, the sound to be restricted from using the channel is not the most important "directing sound related to the jackpot determination" in the pachinko machine 1, but other than that. It was decided to use only "sounds associated with winning", "directing sounds related to normal judgment", and "sounds related to volume adjustment". However, since some of these sounds occur less frequently than the production sounds, in order to realize the restriction processing that makes it possible to secure free channels more effectively, "related to the jackpot determination". It is desirable to adopt "directed sound" as a restriction target. However, on the other hand, if the above-mentioned restriction processing is executed for the "directing sound related to the jackpot judgment", there is a concern that the directing sound will not be reproduced and the production will be lacking in excitement. If the jackpot symbol is stopped in some cases, the game interest may deteriorate.

In this regard, in the configurations illustrated in FIGS. 175 and 176 and other examples thereof, among the "directing sounds related to the jackpot determination", only the "directing related to the symbol variation that is in the pending state and will be digested in the future" is produced. If the use of sound channels is restricted (for example, if it is adopted as a specific game sound to be restricted in FIG. 176 or another example), the effect related to the result of the symbol change during execution can be obtained. Therefore, it will be possible to adopt production sounds that occur frequently as restrictions without any restrictions.

For example, if a prize is generated in the first start port 2002 or the second start port 2004 during the period when the symbol change is being executed and the jackpot determination corresponding to the winning is put on hold, the hold is usually made. Performs a determination process as to whether to perform a look-ahead effect on the jackpot determination in the state. As a result, when a special result is obtained, a look-ahead effect (effect display, effect sound) that suggests in advance the degree of expectation as to whether the pending jackpot judgment is a jackpot win is performed. Become.

However, when the number of channels used increases and there is anxiety about availability (such as when the minimum number of available channels is 0 or 1 and the symbol fluctuation is in progress), the channel usage is restricted to "pending state". If "the production sound according to the production related to the symbol fluctuation that will be digested in the future" is targeted, a prize will be generated for the first start port 2002 or the second start port 2004, and the jackpot judgment corresponding to this will be suspended. Even if the state is set, the determination process itself for the look-ahead effect is not executed for the jackpot determination put in the hold state, and both the look-ahead effect and the corresponding effect sound are not performed. In this case, the look-ahead effect is not only a hold change in the game board side effect display device 1600, but also a predetermined effect change (effect sound according to the look-ahead determination) in a different effect means (sub liquid crystal display, lamp, etc.). When executed as causing an effect change that is performed in accordance with a hold change, etc., not only the hold change in the game board side effect display device 1600 but also an effect means different from this (sub liquid crystal display, lamp, etc.) is used. It is more desirable to limit the change of a predetermined effect so that it is not performed in order to suppress a sense of discomfort (effect shift) when a specific effect sound is not assigned as a measure against channel shortage.

According to such a configuration, when the number of channels used increases and anxiety arises about the vacancy, the channels that are assigned to the production related to the future symbol fluctuations, which are not the ongoing symbol fluctuations, are being executed. Since it will be possible to supply the production sound related to the fluctuation of the pattern, the production sound that occurs frequently will be restricted without any adverse effect on the production related to the result of the symbol fluctuation during execution. You will be able to. In addition, the effect to be restricted is only "the effect related to the symbol change for the future that is in the unexecuted state", and even if the symbol change is restricted, it will be restricted when it is put on hold in the future. Since the effect during the change of the symbol (the content of the effect according to the effect pattern) that is not set is always executed, the deterioration of the game entertainment due to the restriction target of the effect can be preferably suppressed.

Further, in the configuration illustrated in FIG. 176 and other examples thereof, processing is performed to limit the output of a specific sound when the "predetermined production condition" that causes concern about the number of free channels is satisfied. bottom. However, even if the "predetermined production conditions" are not satisfied and there is no concern about the number of free channels, processing that limits the output of specific sounds under predetermined conditions. May be executed. For example, when a specific condition different from the "predetermined effect condition" is satisfied, an effect state (effect period) in which the specific sound cannot be output is generated over a plurality of symbol fluctuations. According to such a configuration, a special effect state (effect period) in which the number of vacant channels has a margin over a plurality of symbol fluctuations appears, and in the special effect state (effect period), only that amount is obtained. You will be able to perform other productions more positively.

In addition, when "directing sound related to jackpot judgment" is targeted for restriction, if only the directing sound of the directing (directing display, directing sound) is targeted for restriction (no sound output), the production lacks excitement. In the above configuration, if the number of channels used increases and there is anxiety about the vacancy, a prize will be won and the jackpot judgment will be put on hold. Sometimes, the judgment process for the look-ahead effect itself is not executed, and both the effect display and the effect sound related to the look-ahead effect are not performed. Therefore, a special result (pre-reading winning) cannot be obtained in the look-ahead judgment. Only the same effect situation as at that time (hold display when the look-ahead effect is not executed) is obtained, and it becomes possible to preferably avoid a decrease in the game interest due to the effect execution lacking in excitement.

When the "effect sound related to the jackpot judgment" is restricted, the judgment process itself for the look-ahead effect is not executed when the prize is won and the jackpot judgment is put on hold, and the effect display and effect related to the look-ahead effect are not executed. I tried not to do both with sound, but it is not limited to this. For example, when the "directed sound related to the jackpot judgment" is restricted, the pre-reading effect is judged when a prize is won, but even if a special result is obtained, until a specific timing during the symbol change arrives. Does not execute both the effect display and the effect sound related to the look-ahead effect, but limits them, and when a specific timing arrives during the symbol change, only the effect display and the effect sound are restricted. May be released to do this. That is, in this case, the effect display related to the look-ahead effect is performed in a dedicated mode (timing), which is different from the case where the "effect sound related to the jackpot judgment" is not restricted (normal time), and is special. Since the pre-reading effect is executed after making it appear as if the result (pre-reading winning) was not obtained, the pre-reading effect is suppressed while suppressing the deterioration of the game interest due to not outputting the effect sound corresponding to the pre-reading effect. It becomes possible to perform favorably.

In addition, as processing related to future production under the situation where channel use is restricted, ・ Judgment processing for pre-reading production is performed when a prize is won, but even if a special result is obtained, a specific timing during symbol fluctuation has arrived. Until this is done, both the effect display and the effect sound related to the look-ahead effect are not executed, and these are restricted. The first restriction processing is a configuration in which only the restriction is released and this is performed.
-The game proceeds when the second restricted processing is such that the judgment process itself for the look-ahead effect is not executed when a prize is won, and both the effect display and the effect sound related to the look-ahead effect are not performed. Among them, when the symbol variation is executed in which the number of free channels in the state where no sound is not assigned is less than the predetermined number, compared with the case where the symbol variation in which the number of the same empty channels is not less than the predetermined number is executed. Therefore, the rate at which either the first restricted processing or the second restricted processing is executed is increased, and within the symbol variation that was in the execution state when the first restricted processing is performed. The expected value of the number of channels used in is "A", and the expected value of the number of channels used in the symbol variation that was in the execution state when the second restricted processing is performed is "B". At that time, it is more desirable to execute either the first restricted processing or the second restricted processing so that the relationship becomes "A <B". That is, in this case, as the number of channels used increases and the vacancy causes greater anxiety, both the effect display and the effect sound are restricted instead of the first restricted processing that limits only the effect sound. Since the ratio of channel restriction applied by the second restriction processing is increased, it is expected that anxiety when the number of channels used increases is more preferably suppressed.

Further, as described above, the sounds assigned to the finite channels are the first group sound whose production volume can be adjusted by the operation reception by the player, and the production volume cannot be adjusted by the operation reception by the player. It is at least distinguishable from the second group sound (error sound, etc.). In this regard, when the "predetermined production conditions" that raise concerns about the number of free channels are satisfied, limiting only the sounds that are distinguished by the first group sound causes an abnormality in the pachinko machine 1. It is desirable to appropriately execute the processing when it occurs.

Further, the finite channels are divided into a plurality of groups including at least a first channel group to which the effect sound can be assigned and a second channel group to which a notification sound (error sound) different from the effect sound can be assigned. If it is, "The execution period of the symbol effect display in which the number of empty channels in which no sound is assigned in the first channel group is reduced to less than a predetermined number is empty in the first channel group. Compared to the execution period of the symbol effect display in which the number of channels is not reduced to less than a predetermined number, the ratio of the specific sound to the effect state in which the specific sound is not newly assigned to the channel of the first channel group is high. " As described above, it is desirable to execute the processing only for the first channel group in terms of both more reliable processing when an error occurs and reduction of the processing load.

Further, as described above, in the configuration illustrated in FIG. 176 and other examples thereof, "the execution period of the symbol effect display in which the number of free channels in the state where no sound is not assigned is reduced to less than a predetermined number is free. Compared to the execution period of the symbol effect display in which the number of channels is not reduced to less than a predetermined number, the ratio of the specific effect sound to the effect state in which it is not newly assigned to the channel is high. " There is a feature. In this regard, if the execution period of the symbol effect display in which the number of vacant channels is reduced to less than a predetermined number is processed as "the effect state in which the specific effect sound is not newly assigned to the channel", the relevant state is concerned. As soon as the execution period for displaying the symbol effect is completed, the "effect state in which the specific effect sound is not newly assigned to the channel" can be canceled (finished). On the other hand, when the execution period of the symbol effect display in which the number of vacant channels is not reduced to less than a predetermined number is processed as "the effect state in which the specific effect sound is not newly assigned to the channel", the said. Make sure that the effect state (the effect state in which the specific effect sound is not newly assigned to the channel) is continued over a plurality of symbol fluctuations including the symbol effect display even after the symbol effect display is completed. It is desirable to. According to such a configuration, the execution period of the symbol effect display in which the number of vacant channels is not reduced to less than a predetermined number is processed as "the effect state in which the specific effect sound is not newly assigned to the channel". Although the ratio is low, once this is processed, the effect state is not easily terminated and is prolonged, and during that time, the specific effect sound cannot be output. That is, in this case, when a "effect state in which a specific effect sound is not newly assigned to a channel" appears, a special effect (the symbol effect display reduces the number of vacant channels to less than a predetermined number). It will be possible to add a color rendering property (whether it is something to be made to do), and it is expected that the game entertainment will be maintained favorably.

Further, in the effect state in which the specific effect sound is not newly assigned to the channel, a specific image that can be displayed only in the effect state may be displayed. According to such a configuration, by displaying the specific image, it becomes possible to recognize that the specific effect sound is in the effect state in which the specific effect sound is not newly assigned to the channel.

In addition, if a specific image can appear at multiple timings in one symbol variation and is displayed as an image with different contents (appearance, form, etc.) at each timing, any of the multiple timings can be obtained. Even if there is an image of the content (appearance, form, etc.) that the player does not understand, the image is displayed at other timings and other content (appearance, form, etc.) Therefore, it becomes possible to more reliably recognize that the "specific effect sound is in an effect state in which the specific effect sound is not newly assigned to the channel".

[Channel special opening process]
As described above, in a gaming machine in which the number of channels is finite, even if a special result is obtained by the judgment by the judgment means according to the winning, there is no vacancy in the channel to which the sound data is assigned. In (the situation where the number of free channels is 0), it is not possible to assign a special sound corresponding to the special result obtained to the channel, and there is a concern that the game interest may be deteriorated due to the inability to output this.

In this regard, in the pachinko machine 1 according to this embodiment, when a plurality of game sounds are assigned to different channels and are in the output state, the volume of at least some of the game sounds is lowered. A process of terminating the allocation of the specific game sound to the channel can be performed in the state where the volume is lowered (suppressed state). Then, after the assignment of the specific game sound to the channel is completed in this way, it is possible to execute the process of increasing the volume of the other game sounds for which the allocation to the channel is continued (channel special opening process).

According to such a configuration, it is difficult to recognize that a change has occurred in the channel allocation mode of the game sound (a state in which the volume of the game sound is lowered (suppression state)). It will reduce the number of channels in (increase the number of free channels). Therefore, for example, even if the number of channels in use is reduced prior to this in order to more reliably output important game sounds, the number of channels in use is reduced. It becomes difficult to notice what has been done, and it becomes possible to suppress the deterioration of the game interest due to the fact that a specific game sound is no longer output.

FIG. 177 is a time chart showing an example of the allocation status of each channel when such a channel special opening process is performed.

As shown in FIG. 177, during the period in which the symbol variation according to the result of the jackpot determination is being executed, at the timing tk11, a predetermined effect pattern is produced by the game board side effect display device 1600. The sound of "normal BGM reproduction" corresponding to the above is assigned to the reproduction channels 02 and 03 and reproduced (here, stereo reproduction), and corresponds to the effect A displayed on the game board side effect display device 1600. The sound of "effect A reproduction" is assigned to the reproduction channels 08 and 09 and reproduced (here, stereo reproduction).

In this regard, as shown in FIG. 177 (a), among the sounds in these reproduction states (normal BGM reproduction, effect A reproduction), the sound of "effect A reproduction" is in the stage where a predetermined effect pattern is in the middle of production. At the timing tk13 (during the execution of the symbol variation), the playback channels 08 and 09 are removed and the playback is terminated. In this way, even if the predetermined production pattern is in the middle of the production, the production content of the predetermined production pattern can be obtained by finishing the allocation of the production sound from the channel and promptly changing it to an empty channel. As it progresses, it becomes possible to suppress the occurrence of a situation in which there is a shortage of free channels and new sounds cannot be assigned and played.

However, as described above, when the predetermined effect pattern according to the result of the jackpot judgment is in the middle of the effect (during the execution of the symbol variation) and the effect sound is removed from the channel and changed to an empty channel, The number of effect sounds in the reproduced state is reduced, and there is a concern that the expectation that the jackpot symbol will appear in the effect pattern is lowered by the decrease.

Therefore, in this explanatory example, as shown in FIG. 177 (a), first, before the timing tk13 for removing the sound of the “directing A reproduction” from the reproduction channels 08 and 09 and ending the reproduction arrives. From the "timing tk12" to the arrival of the "timing tk14" after the timing tk13, the sound of the "effect B reproduction" corresponding to the effect B displayed on the game board side effect display device 1600 is produced. Allocate to playback channels 08 and 09 to bring them into a playback (here, stereo playback) state. Then, as shown in FIG. 177 (b), during the period (timing tk12 to tk14) in which the sound of the “effect B reproduction” is put into the reproduction state, the timing tk13 at which the “effect A reproduction” is terminated. In line with the arrival of the above, it is decided to perform a process (volume suppression process) of reducing the volume of each of the plurality of effect sounds including the sound of the "effect B reproduction" while keeping them assigned to the channels.

More specifically, as shown in FIG. 177 (c), the sound of "production B reproduction" in this explanatory example is output as a production sound corresponding to the step production in which the production content can be developed up to four times. After the production content has been developed three times (step 1, step 2, step 3), the production is performed as to whether the production content is further developed according to step 4. Therefore, a process of lowering the volume (volume suppression process) is performed while keeping a plurality of effect sounds including the sound of "effect B reproduction" corresponding to the step effect assigned to the channel. If a high-expected production mode that further develops into the production content according to step 4 appears when the volume suppression process is completed and the volume is returned to the normal volume (a production with a relatively high degree of expectation). While the specific production sound corresponding to the production content of the step 4 is output as the sound of the "effect B reproduction", the effect content according to the step 3 is used without developing into the production content according to the step 4. When a low-expected production mode in which the production is completed appears (a production with a relatively low degree of expectation), a production sound different from the specific production sound is output as the sound of the “production B reproduction”.

According to such a configuration, an effect design is made in which the timing tk13 arrives aiming at the time when the volume suppression process is performed on a plurality of effect sounds, and the “effect A” is performed while the volume suppression process is performed. Since the sound of "playback" is removed from the playback channels 08 and 09 and the playback is terminated, the number of channels in use has decreased (the sound of "effect A playback" is in the non-playback state. It will be possible to make it difficult to notice what was done).

In particular, in the examples shown in FIGS. 177 (a) to 177 (c), the production content having a relatively high expectation (the production content developing to step 4) and the production content having a relatively low expectation (step). Within the period in which the production content (the production of whether or not it develops to step 4) that leads to any of the production content (the production content that does not develop to 4) appears (the period in which it is unclear whether or not it develops), the above-mentioned The volume suppression process is executed to remove the sound of "effect A reproduction" from the reproduction channels 08 and 09 and end the reproduction. According to such a configuration, not only the volume of the production sound is lowered, but also the player's interest itself is strongly attracted to the production B (the sound of "production B reproduction"). Since the production A (sound of "production A playback") is terminated at, the volume of the production sound that was the target of volume suppression including the sound of "production B playback" was returned. Occasionally, even if the sound of "Direction A playback" is prevented from being reproduced, the production content with a relatively high degree of expectation (the production content that develops to step 4) and the production content with a relatively low degree of expectation (the production content with a relatively low degree of expectation). It becomes possible to attract interest in which of the production contents that do not develop into step 4) appears, and to make it difficult to notice that the sound of "production A reproduction" is no longer reproduced.

Moreover, in the volume suppression process according to this explanatory example, although the volume is lowered while a plurality of production sounds including the sound of "production B reproduction" are assigned to the channels, all the production sounds are reduced. The volume is not lowered, and a specific effect sound (here, the sound of "normal BGM reproduction") is continuously reproduced at the normal volume. That is, in this case, the volume of some of the production sounds (the sound of "normal BGM reproduction") is reduced while being reproduced as usual without suppressing the volume, and thus the sounds can be distinguished. Since the reproduction of the sound of "Direction A reproduction" is terminated while the sound is made more difficult, it can be made more difficult to notice because the sound of "Production A reproduction" is no longer reproduced. Will be.

Furthermore, in this explanatory example, the sound reproduction of the "effect A reproduction" is not terminated immediately after the volume suppression process is performed on the plurality of effect sounds, and a predetermined time has passed since the volume suppression process was started. After waiting for the elapsed timing tk13 to arrive, the reproduction of the sound of "Direction A reproduction" is terminated. That is, immediately after the volume suppression process is started, the player may be attracted to the effect sounds A and B in which the change of "volume decrease" occurs, but the volume decreases to a specific value. When the state of not changing at the specific value is maintained for a predetermined time, it is assumed that such interest has already diminished. Therefore, the sound of "Direction A reproduction" is aimed at such a timing. By ending the reproduction of the sound, it becomes possible to make it more difficult to notice because the sound of "Direction A reproduction" is no longer reproduced.

In particular, in this explanatory example, the volume of the effect sound that is the target of the volume suppression process is gradually reduced, and the reproduction of the sound of "effect A reproduction" is terminated after the volume becomes 0 (silence). As a result, it becomes possible to make it more difficult to notice because the sound of "Direction A reproduction" is no longer reproduced.

In the example shown in FIG. 177, the sound of "effect B reproduction" is started to be reproduced while the sound of "effect A reproduction" is being reproduced, but the present invention is not limited to this. For example, while the sound of "Production B playback" is being played back, the sound of "Production A playback" is started to be played back, and while the sound of "Production B playback" is being played back in the suppressed state, "Production A playback" is played back. The reproduction of the sound of "" may be terminated.

Further, the effects A and B do not necessarily have to be an effect accompanied by an effect display on the game board side effect display device 1600, and may be executed as an effect of only sound, for example.

Further, in the example shown in FIG. 177, the timing tk12 for reproducing the sound of "effect B reproduction" is assumed to be reached by the development of the fluctuation pattern (effect pattern) according to the jackpot determination. Not limited. For example, the sound of "effect B reproduction" is started to be reproduced based on the operation for a predetermined operation means (operation button 410, etc.), and the sound of "effect A reproduction" is reproduced while the sound of "effect B reproduction" is reproduced. The reproduction of the above may be terminated in the above-described manner.

Further, it is not always necessary to gradually reduce the volume of the effect sound that is the target of the volume suppression process. On the contrary, as a process for returning the volume of the effect sound, the volume may be returned stepwise. In addition, the volume does not necessarily have to be set to 0 (silence), and if the volume is suppressed to a lower volume than usual, it is difficult to notice that the sound reproduction of "Direction A reproduction" has ended. Is possible.

Further, in the example shown in FIG. 177, the specific production sound according to the production pattern (here, the sound of "normal BGM reproduction") is excluded from the volume suppression processing, and the normal volume remains unchanged. Although the playback is continued, the volume of all the production sounds may be lowered when the volume suppression process is performed. On the contrary, with respect to the sound of "Direction A reproduction", it is possible to maintain the volume without necessarily lowering the volume when the volume suppression process is performed. Even in such a case, the volume is lowered. While attracting the player's interest in the sound of "Direction B playback" in the state of being played, the playback of the sound of "Direction A playback" is terminated, and then the sound of "Production B playback" is included. Even if the sound of "Production A playback" is not played back when the volume of multiple production sounds that were targeted for volume suppression is returned, the production content with relatively high expectations (step 4). The sound of "Direction A playback" is reproduced, attracting interest in which of the production content that develops into (the production content that develops into) and the production content that has relatively low expectations (the production content that does not develop into step 4) appears. You will be able to make it harder to notice that it is no longer being done.

In addition, during the period during which the effect pattern for reproducing the sounds of "effect A reproduction" and "effect B reproduction" is performed, at least while the volume suppression process is performed (after the volume of "effect B reproduction" is lowered from the normal value). (Until it is returned to the normal value), even if a prize is generated in the first start port 2002 or the second start port 2004, in order to maintain the interest in the sound of "Direction B reproduction" more favorably. It is desirable not to play the corresponding hold winning sound. Further, even if a special result (pre-reading winning) is obtained in the pre-reading determination when a prize is won in the first starting port 2002 or the second starting port 2004, the effect sound corresponding to the pre-reading effect is not reproduced. Is desirable.

Further, in the example shown in FIG. 177, the sound reproduction of "effect A reproduction" is terminated within the period in which the volume of the effect sound is decreased, and when the period ends, the sound is assigned to the channel in the state of volume decrease until then. We decided to raise the volume of the production sound that had been used (return to the original volume value), but in addition to this, at the end of the period, a special production sound that was not previously assigned to the channel will be added to the channel. It may be newly assigned and played (played at the normal volume). With such a configuration, it became interesting to see if a special production sound was played when the volume was returned, and it was further noticed that the sound of "Production A playback" was no longer played. You will be able to make it difficult. Moreover, if the number of channels used after the volume is restored is reduced compared to before the volume is lowered, there is a concern that the expectation that the jackpot symbol will appear due to the symbol fluctuation may be lowered, but a special production sound. Is newly assigned to the channel and played back (played at the normal volume), so that the same or more sound before the volume is lowered and after the volume is restored (two or more production sounds are sent to the channel). Since it will be possible to use the channel of (when newly assigned), it is also preferable that the player feels as if the expectation level has decreased. It will be avoided. In this case, the special production sound may or may not be played when the volume is returned, suggesting that the expectation is relatively high when the special production sound is played. It is desirable to do.

If you want to newly assign a special production sound that was not assigned to the channel when the volume is returned and play it, the channel that became vacant due to the sound assignment of "Production A playback" being removed. It is desirable to assign a special production sound to. With such a configuration, it becomes possible to realize a wide range of production with a small amount of channel resources.

Further, such a channel special opening process does not necessarily have to be performed when it is determined to execute a specific effect pattern. For example, a restriction target in the process described with reference to FIGS. 175 and 176. As "Production A" is adopted as, the smaller the minimum number of free channels is, the more the channel is specially opened (when the minimum number of free channels in the symbol fluctuation is less than the predetermined number, compared to when it is not less than the predetermined number). The rate at which the processing is performed may be increased. According to such a configuration, in a situation where there is a margin in the number of free channels so as not to make people feel uneasy about running out of channels, it is possible to continuously output "Direction A" without ending it in the middle. become.

In the above description example, in the "volume suppression effect" in which at least a part of the game sounds is output in a suppressed mode or silently, a specific type of effect pattern is executed (selected) based on the result of the jackpot determination. ), And when the production content reaches a specific timing, it is executed for a part of the period within the production pattern. In this regard, the number of effect patterns prepared (memorized) as "specific type effect patterns" that can generate such volume suppression effects is prepared as "other effect patterns" that do not generate volume suppression effects (). It is desirable to set the number of effect patterns to be less than the number of effect patterns stored (remembered) in order to improve the enjoyment of the game when the volume suppression effect occurs.

Further, when a plurality of effect patterns are prepared as "effect patterns" capable of generating the volume suppression effect, the effect patterns are longer than the effect pattern for executing the volume suppression effect over the first set time and the first set time. It is desirable that the effect patterns for executing the volume suppression effect over the second set time are included, and the degree of expectation that the jackpot symbol appears is different in these effect patterns. According to such a configuration, when at least a part of the game sounds is output in a suppressed mode or silently, the jackpot expectation is suggested depending on how long the state is continued. Will be able to.

As described above, in the pachinko machine 1 according to this embodiment, the player sets a value (volume setting value) regarding the volume by operating the volume adjustment button (effect selection left button 331 or effect selection right button 332). Processing can be executed (peripheral control MPU1511a). Then, when the volume setting value is changed in a state where the symbol variation is not executed (demo state or the like), the peripheral control MPU1511a adjusts the volume applied to the effect sound based on the changed volume setting value. (Processing to reflect the volume setting value as the volume) will be executed. At this time, a volume adjustment confirmation sound can be output at the adjusted volume.

In this regard, in the pachinko machine 1 (peripheral control MPU1511a) according to this embodiment, it is possible to execute a process of changing the set value (volume set value) by the player regarding the volume even in the state where the symbol variation is executed. However, it is desirable that the volume adjustment confirmation sound is not always output even if the volume setting value is changed in the state where the symbol fluctuation is executed. That is, in the pachinko machine 1 in which the "effect pattern capable of generating the volume suppression effect" can be selected, if the volume adjustment confirmation sound is not always output during the symbol fluctuation regardless of the effect pattern, the volume adjustment confirmation sound is confirmed. Since the player who sees the sound not being output becomes aware of the possibility that the "volume suppression effect" is being executed, it is expected that the game interest will be maintained favorably. In this case, the volume adjustment confirmation sound is not output, but the effect display device 1600 can display indicating that the volume setting value has been changed, so that the volume adjustment confirmation sound is not output. It is desirable to make people aware (awareness of the possibility that "volume suppression effect" is being executed). "No volume adjustment confirmation sound is output" means that the volume adjustment confirmation sound itself is assigned to a channel, but this is output at volume 0, or the volume adjustment confirmation sound itself may not be assigned to a channel. ..

The expectation (including 100%) that the jackpot symbol will appear is suggested during the period when the "volume suppression effect" that makes at least a part of the game sounds output in a suppressed mode or silently is executed. It is desirable to perform an expected display (such as an expected effect that causes any one of a plurality of effect modes having different expectations) to appear. According to such a configuration, the player's interest is transferred to the expected display (expected effect), so that the sound of "effect A reproduction" is produced during the period when the "volume suppression effect" is being executed. It will be possible to make it even more difficult to notice that it will be terminated.

When the "volume suppression effect" is executed and at least a part of the game sound is output in the suppressed mode or silent, the sound of the "effect B reproduction" is returned to the state of being output in the non-suppressed mode. At a predetermined timing before the timing arrives, new production sound data different from any of the production sounds (“normal BGM” and “production A playback”) that are already in the output state is assigned to the channel, and the new production sound is assigned. The sound corresponding to the data may be output in an unsuppressed manner. That is, in this case, the sound corresponding to the new effect sound data is output in a non-suppressed mode while the "effect B reproduction" is output in a suppressed mode or a silent mode, and the "effect B reproduction" is performed. Since the sound of "effect B reproduction" is returned to the state of being output in the non-suppressed mode while being output in the non-suppressed mode, the sound of "effect A reproduction" is terminated. Can be made even more difficult to notice.

During the period in which the "volume suppression effect" is executed, it is desirable that the display image on the effect display device 1600 is also hidden or displayed in the suppression mode. However, in this case, it is desirable that the display image displayed by the effect display device 1600 includes an image that is not the target of the processing.

Within one production pattern, the period during which the "volume suppression effect" is executed can appear multiple times, and in those periods, the length of "the time during which at least a part of the game sound is output in the suppression mode or silence". It is desirable that the values are different. According to such a configuration, it becomes possible to set a specific production sound to a non-output state in a manner that is difficult for the player to notice in all production scenes, and it becomes possible to improve the game entertainment. ..

[Operation sound output processing under suppression]
As described above, in a gaming machine in which the number of channels is finite, even if a special result is obtained by the judgment by the judgment means according to the winning, there is no vacancy in the channel to which the sound data is assigned. In (the situation where the number of free channels is 0), it is not possible to assign a special sound corresponding to the special result obtained to the channel, and there is a concern that the game interest may be deteriorated due to the inability to output this.

In this regard, in the pachinko machine 1 according to this embodiment, when it is determined to execute a specific effect pattern as a symbol variation according to the result of the jackpot determination, from the start to the end of the symbol variation. During the period, the game board side effect display device 1600 performs a process of advancing the display effect according to the specific effect pattern, and assigns and reproduces the sound of "BGM reproduction" according to the specific effect pattern to the predetermined channel. Perform the process of causing. Then, when the display effect on the game board side effect display device 1600 progresses to a predetermined timing within the symbol variation period, the sound of "BGM reproduction" is left assigned to the predetermined channel and output in a suppressed mode or silently ( When the volume of "BGM playback" is lowered to a specific value and output) and an operation for a predetermined operation means (operation button 410, etc.) is detected in this state, the jackpot symbol (corresponding to the symbol) is caused by the symbol fluctuation. A special production sound suggesting the degree of expectation that a special display mode) appears in the production pattern is output in a non-suppressed mode (operation sound output processing under suppression). The degree of expectation suggested by the special production may be 100%.

That is, in this case, when the special effect sound is output in response to the operation detection, the sound of "BGM reproduction" is still assigned to the predetermined channel, but is output in a suppressed mode or silently. Therefore, it becomes possible to provide an atmosphere in which the usage status of the channel seems to be affordable. Therefore, it is necessary to provide the player with an operation opportunity to output the special production sound while removing the anxiety that "maybe there is no space in the channel and it may not be possible to output the special production sound". This will prevent the decline in game entertainment.

By the way, when it is attempted to output a sound corresponding to a specific effect pattern (sound of "BGM reproduction") to a channel in a suppressed mode or silently, it is generally assigned to the channel. It is assumed that a process of suppressing the volume of the existing sound (sound of "BGM reproduction") (a process of reducing the volume to a specific value) is performed. In fact, if such volume suppression processing is performed prior to giving the player an operation opportunity (generating a valid period for the production reception), a sound corresponding to a specific production pattern ("" It is possible to give the player an operation opportunity (generate a valid period of the production reception) after setting the sound of "BGM reproduction") in a suppressed mode or in a state of being silently output.

However, as is well known, when giving an operation opportunity to a player, the valid period of the production reception is generated over a predetermined time, but the operation (production reception) is performed at any timing within this valid period. It is indefinite (depending on the player) and cannot be predicted in advance. Therefore, even if the volume suppression process can be terminated and the volume returned to the initial value when the operation (effect reception) is performed within the valid period, the volume is returned in this way. It is impossible to store the sound of "BGM reproduction" in advance so that the sound corresponding to this is started to be reproduced at an indefinite timing.

In addition to performing the process of returning the volume when there is an operation by the player, the sound data of "BGM playback" is switched to the sound data of "BGM playback dedicated to special production sound playback" and this is used. It is also conceivable to perform a process of regenerating. However, since the sound of "BGM reproduction" is reproduced according to the content of various effects until the symbol is stopped and ended, the timing of the symbol stop, etc., the sound of "BGM reproduction" is within the valid period. While it is uncertain (depending on the player) at what timing the operation (production reception) will be performed, if the operation (production reception) is used as an opportunity to newly reproduce the sound of "BGM playback". , There is a concern that so-called sound deviation will occur between the timing of various productions and the timing of stopping the design after that, and the interest in the game will be reduced.

Therefore, in the pachinko machine 1 according to this embodiment, when a specific effect pattern is executed, first, a plurality of sound data stored as "BGM reproduction" sounds corresponding to the specific effect pattern (a plurality of sound data ( For example, the sound data at the time of normal fluctuation, the sound data at the first half of the super reach effect, the sound data at the second half of the super reach effect, etc.) are determined according to the time series specified by the corresponding sound generation schedule data. Performs the process of sequentially assigning to channels. Then, among the plurality of sound data stored as the sound of "BGM reproduction" corresponding to such a specific effect pattern, the specific sound data (one sound material) is defined by the above-mentioned sound generation schedule data. When the sound is assigned to the predetermined channel according to the time series, the sound is assigned to the predetermined channel and the playback is started from the timing before the valid period of the production reception occurs in the specific production pattern, and the valid period ends. The assigned state for a predetermined channel is maintained for a long period of time until the timing after the sound is played.

In this regard, in a part of the section (special period) when the above-mentioned specific sound data (one sound material) is viewed in chronological order, the process is suppressed or silently applied to the sound output as compared with the other sections. When the data content that regulates that is performed is preset and the specific sound data is assigned to a predetermined channel in the time series specified by the above-mentioned sound generation schedule data, a part of the section (special). It is designed to have a time-series relationship in which the valid period of the production reception occurs within the period). In addition to this, regardless of the timing of the operation by the player within the valid period of the above-mentioned production reception that occurs within the special period (partial section), the special period (partial section) to the special period The sound of "BGM reproduction" is a special production sound according to the production reception, straddling the two sections in the specific sound data with the period (other section) after the end of (partial section). The sound is reproduced in an unsuppressed manner on a channel other than the assigned predetermined channel.

According to such a configuration, a plurality of sound data stored as "BGM reproduction" sounds corresponding to a specific effect pattern (for example, sound data at the time of normal fluctuation, sound data at the first half of the super reach effect, super). Only the process of sequentially allocating the sound data in the latter half of the reach effect) to the predetermined channels according to the time series specified by the schedule data for sound generation corresponding to these, without adjusting the volume from the initial value. In both cases, it becomes possible to create a "suppressed mode or a state of being output silently (special period)". In addition, when an operation by the player is received for production in the "suppressed mode or silent output state (special period)" created in this way, it is special in a non-suppressed mode by a highly immediate process triggered by this. While the production sound is started to be played back, the sound of "BGM playback" that is in the playback state on the predetermined channel is "output in a suppressed mode or silently (special period) regardless of the production reception. Is maintained for a predetermined time. After that, a part of the specific sound data (one sound material) (suppression mode or silent sound output) is completed in the form of being mixed in with the special production sound being reproduced. Since the data contents of other sections (unsuppressed sound output) will be reproduced, it will be possible to secretly return the sound of "BGM reproduction" to the output in the unsuppressed mode. It will be possible to provide a production sound that does not give a sense of discomfort. That is, in this case, when the operation by the player is received in the suppressed mode or in the state where the sound of "BGM reproduction" is output in silence, the special directed sound is not suppressed by the highly immediate processing triggered by this. It is possible to preferably avoid the occurrence of sound deviation between various effects and the timing of stopping the symbol after that, while the reproduction is started at.

FIG. 178 is a time chart showing an example of the allocation status of each channel when such a suppressed operation sound output process is performed. Hereinafter, a specific example of executing such a suppressed operation sound output process will be described with reference to FIG. 178.

As shown in FIG. 178 (a), during the period in which the symbol variation according to the result of the jackpot determination is being executed, at the timing ts11, the effect is advanced by the game board side effect display device 1600. The sound of "BGM reproduction" corresponding to the effect pattern of is assigned to the reproduction channels 02 and 03 and is already reproduced (here, stereo reproduction). The sound of this "BGM reproduction" is, for example, one sound data (one sound data) over the entire period of the symbol variation from the start to the end of the symbol variation when it is determined that a specific effect pattern is to be executed. It may be reproduced as a sound material) based on the schedule data for sound generation, or the entire period of the symbol variation is divided into a plurality of periods, and each different sound data prepared for each period is obtained. It may be sequentially reproduced based on the sound generation schedule data corresponding to. In the example shown in FIG. 178, one sound data (one sound material) as the sound of "BGM reproduction" over the entire period (a part of the symbol variation period) in the figure including the timing ts11. Is assigned to channels 02 and 03 and is in the playback state.

In this regard, as shown in FIGS. 178 (a) and 178 (b), one sound data (sound of "BGM reproduction") assigned to channels 02 and 03 and in the reproduction state is special. At the timing ts12, which is before the timing ts13 when the operation valid period (valid period of the production reception), which gives the operation opportunity to trigger the generation of the production sound, is reached, the silent data content is set. It is designed to be in the playback state in some sections. As a result, even if the volume of the "BGM reproduction" sound is not adjusted from the initial value, it can be output silently while being assigned to a predetermined channel.

According to such a configuration, at the timing ts13, the sound of "BGM reproduction" is in the reproduction state within a part of the section set as the silent data content, and it seems that there is a margin in the usage status of the channel. While the atmosphere is provided, it becomes possible to generate an operation valid period (valid period of the production reception) in which the player is given an operation opportunity. This provides an operation opportunity for the player to output the special production sound while removing the anxiety that "maybe there is no space in the channel and it may not be possible to output the special production sound". It will be possible to suppress the decline in the entertainment interest of the game.

Moreover, the operation valid period according to this explanatory example is the timing ts16 at which a part of the section in which the silent data content is set as the sound of "BGM reproduction" is terminated even if there is no operation by the player. At the timing ts15, which is before the arrival of, the period is terminated so that the operation by the player is not accepted for the production. Therefore, regardless of the timing of the operation validity period when the operation by the player is accepted, the sound of "BGM playback" is in the playback state within a part of the section set as the silent data content. It will be possible to generate a special production sound according to the operation by the player while providing an atmosphere in which the usage status of the cage channel seems to be affordable. The operation valid period ends not only when the timing ts15 arrives without any operation by the player, but also when the operation by the player is accepted for production. When the timing ts15 arrives without the operation by the player, the special effect sound may be generated as in the case where the operation by the player is performed at that timing.

Then, in this explanatory example, it is assumed that the operation by the player is received at the timing ts14, and the channel 02 to which the sound of "BGM reproduction" is assigned based on the reception of the effect. Special production sounds are assigned to channels 08 and 09, which are different from those of, 03, and are reproduced.

In this regard, in this explanatory example, the maximum time (time from timing ts13 to timing ts15) from the start to the end of the operation valid period is set to "SY", and the operation valid period ends at this maximum time. When the time (time from timing ts15 to timing ts16) until the end of a part of the section in which silent data content is set as the sound of "BGM playback" is set to "BF", it is within the operation valid period. Regardless of which timing the player operates, the special production sound is assigned to the channels 08 and 09 for a certain period of time of "SY + α (> BF)" and played.

According to such a configuration, the timing ts16 will always arrive when the special effect sound is in the playback state, regardless of the timing during which the operation is valid. The sound of "BGM reproduction" can be output as an unsuppressed mode so as to be mixed in with the special production sound. That is, in this case, although the time from the start of the reproduction of the special production sound to the output of the "BGM reproduction" sound as the non-suppressed mode is variable according to the timing at which the operation by the player is accepted. , The buffer period for restoring the output period of the special production sound in the non-suppressed manner of the "BGM reproduction" sound (the sound of the "BGM reproduction" is restored in the non-suppressed manner by being mixed with the special production sound). By making it function as a period that makes it difficult to notice that, when the operation by the player is accepted, the sound of "BGM playback" is not restored as a non-suppressed mode, but the discomfort caused by returning it after a predetermined time is created. You will be able to make it difficult to remember.

Then, after the sound of "BGM reproduction" is restored as the data content (non-suppressed mode) of the effect sound for BGM reproduction in this way, when the timing ts17 arrives, the sound of "BGM reproduction" is reproduced in the unsuppressed mode. Playback of the special production sound will be terminated while in the state.

In the above explanatory example, the "timing at which the reproduction of the special effect sound is started" and the "timing at which the reproduction of the special effect sound is ended" are operated by the player as shown in FIG. 178 (b). It will be variable within the range indicated by the dotted arrow according to the accepted timing, but regardless of which timing they correspond to, the timing ts16 arrives when the special production sound is in the playback state. , It is clear that the normal section in which the data content (non-suppressed mode) of the BGM reproduction effect sound is set as the sound of "BGM reproduction" is started.

Further, in the example shown in FIG. 178, "a feeling of strangeness caused by not returning the sound of" BGM reproduction "as a non-suppressed mode but returning it after a predetermined time when the operation by the player is accepted" is further remembered. In order to make it difficult, it is desirable to set the volume initial value of the special effect sound to be larger than the initial value of BGM reproduction in the normal section. According to such a configuration, the sound of BGM reproduction can be secretly shifted to the reproduction state in the normal section while the special production sound having a large initial volume value is attracting attention.

Further, in the example shown in FIG. 178, when the operation by the player is received as an effect, a special effect sound is generated based on the effect reception, but a specific effect according to the fluctuation pattern and the result of the jackpot determination is generated. The special production sound may be generated based on the reception of the production only when the conditions are satisfied. Even when a specific effect condition is not satisfied, an operation valid period is generated at the timing ts14, and when the player's operation is received within the operation valid period, the effect is accepted. Based on this, a predetermined production sound (failure production sound, etc.) is reproduced. Then, regardless of the timing within the operation valid period, the sound of BGM reproduction is secretly brought into the reproduction state in the normal section while the predetermined production sound (failure production sound, etc.) is in the reproduction state. It is desirable that the transition to is the same as in the case of the example shown in FIG. 178.

However, instead of this, when a predetermined effect sound (failure effect sound, etc.) is reproduced, the reproduction time is shortened compared to the case where the special effect sound is put into the reproduction state, and the predetermined effect sound (failure effect) is reproduced. The sound of BGM reproduction may be returned to the reproduction state in the normal section when the reproduction of (sound, etc.) is completed. In this case, regardless of the timing within the operation valid period, the timing at which the BGM playback sound is returned to the playback state in the normal section is the reproduction of a predetermined production sound (failure production sound, etc.). Will be set to arrive after the end. According to such a configuration, there is a silence period (depending on the operation timing) between the end of a predetermined production sound (failure production sound, etc.) and the return of the BGM playback sound to the playback state in the normal section. The period in which the length is variable) can be generated as the buffer period. In addition, if a revival effect that raises the degree of expectation (which may be 100%) can occur during this silent period, it is expected that the game will be maintained.

Alternatively, when a predetermined effect sound (failure effect sound, etc.) is reproduced, the symbol variation is stopped in a lost manner without returning the BGM reproduction sound to the reproduction state in the normal section. May be good. In this case, at the timing ts12, the allocation of the BGM reproduction sound to the channels 02 and 03 may be terminated and this may be made an empty channel.

In addition, when generating a special effect sound, it is possible to reduce the degree of attention to the sound of BGM reproduction by also performing a movable effect of operating a predetermined movable body based on the effect reception. It is desirable to secretly shift the reproduced sound to the reproduced state in the normal section.

Further, in the example shown in FIG. 178, the sound of "BGM reproduction" is output silently in a part of the section, but the present invention is not limited to this, and the sound is suppressed more than the sound of "BGM reproduction" in other sections. It suffices if it is output by. Here, the suppressed mode can be exemplified by a mode in which the volume is relatively lowered, a mode in which the vibration frequency of the speaker cone per unit time is reduced, and the like.

Further, in the example shown in FIG. 178, the sound data of the "BGM reproduction" assigned to the predetermined channel itself is set to the suppression mode or the time-series period in which the sound is silenced, so that the "BGM reproduction" can be performed. It is possible to create a state (special period) in which the sound is output in a suppressed mode or silently by simply playing it back without adjusting the volume of the sound. However, it is not always necessary to set a time-series period in which the sound data of the "BGM reproduction" assigned to the predetermined channel is suppressed or silenced. For example, at the timing ts12, the sound of the "BGM reproduction" Volume adjustment may be performed to reduce the volume to a specific value (which may be muted). That is, in this case, even if the operation by the player is received at the timing ts14, the process of raising the volume of the sound of "BGM reproduction" from the specific value (the process of returning to the initial volume value) is performed with the reception of the effect as an opportunity. Try not to. Then, when a specific effect condition is satisfied, when the predetermined timing ts16 arrives, the volume of the sound of "BGM reproduction" is increased from the specific value while the special effect sound is being reproduced. Processing (processing to return to the initial volume value) will be performed. On the other hand, when a specific effect condition is not satisfied, the volume of the sound of "BGM reproduction" is specified while a predetermined effect sound (failure effect sound, etc.) is being reproduced, as in the other example described above. A process of increasing the value (processing of returning to the initial volume value) may be performed, or the volume of the sound of "BGM reproduction" is set to a specific value in a state where the reproduction of a predetermined effect sound (failure effect sound, etc.) is completed. The process of increasing from the value (processing of returning to the initial volume value) may be performed, or the symbol variation may be terminated without increasing a predetermined effect sound (failure effect sound, etc.) from a specific value. good.

Further, in the example shown in FIG. 178, a restriction process for making it difficult for a new sound allocation to occur for an empty channel is performed at least for a period from a predetermined timing before the arrival of the timing ts12 to the timing ts16. It is desirable to. It should be noted that such restriction processing has nothing to do with the result of whether or not a jackpot symbol appears due to a symbol fluctuation during execution, such as a block winning sound, a holding winning sound, a general electric effect sound, and an adjustment sound. It is desirable that a specific game sound is targeted for restriction, and that the specific game sound subject to this restriction is not reproduced without being newly assigned to a channel.

Further, when it is decided to execute a specific effect pattern as a symbol variation according to the result of the jackpot determination, a specific effect sound (BGM) is used on a channel different from channels 02 and 03 before the timing ts12 arrives. (It is desirable that it is a production sound such as a sound effect or dialogue, not music) so that it does not overlap with the sound of It is desirable that the sound of is output in a suppressed mode or silently. That is, in this case, since the sound of the BGM reproduction is mixed into the specific effect sound, it becomes difficult to notice that the sound of the BGM reproduction is in the suppressed mode or the silent state. It should be noted that the reproduction state of a specific effect sound should be terminated before the timing ts14 (timing ts14 or before the timing ts14) when the special effect sound (or a predetermined effect sound) is output. However, it is desirable to alleviate the anxiety that the special production sound is not output.

Here, with respect to the above-mentioned specific effect sound reproduced on a channel different from channels 02 and 03, the reproduction does not necessarily have to be started at a timing before the timing ts12 arrives, and the reproduction does not necessarily start at the timing ts12 or later. It may be present and the reproduction is started before the timing ts13. Even with such a configuration, when the sound of BGM reproduction is in the suppressed mode or the silent state, if a specific effect sound is output in the non-suppressed mode (normal mode), once, " Since the sound of the BGM reproduction in the "suppressed mode or silent state" can be made to appear as if it has been returned to the reproduced state in the normal mode, the sound of the BGM reproduction is in the suppressed mode or the silent state. It is possible to make it difficult to notice that it is.

Further, "for a specific effect sound, the reproduction state is terminated before the timing ts14 (timing ts14 or before the timing ts14) when the special effect sound (or a predetermined effect sound) is output". , "The output of a specific production sound is terminated based on the fact that the operation by the player is received within the operation valid period, or is automatically terminated at a specific timing within the timings ts13 to t15 (operation valid period)." It means that. That is, if the operation by the player is not received before the specific timing within the timings ts13 to t15 (operation valid period) arrives, the specific effect sound is automatically terminated.

Further, when it is determined to execute a specific effect pattern as a symbol variation according to the result of the jackpot determination, the sound of BGM reproduction is emitted from the timing ts14 when the special effect sound (or a predetermined effect sound) is output. It is desirable to output the effect sound in a plurality of channels until the timing ts16 at which the suppression mode or the state of being silenced ends. That is, in this case, since a plurality of production sounds including special production sounds are output, it becomes possible to easily mix the sound of BGM reproduction into those production sounds, and the sound of BGM reproduction is usually mixed. It becomes possible to secretly shift to the reproduction state in the mode.

Further, such a suppressed operation sound output process does not necessarily have to be performed when it is determined to execute a specific effect pattern, and for example, in the process described with reference to FIGS. 175 and 176. "BGM playback sound" is adopted as the restriction target, and the smaller the minimum number of free channels is, the smaller the symbol variation (when the minimum number of free channels in the symbol variation is less than the predetermined number, compared to when it is not less than the predetermined number). The ratio of the operation sound output processing under the suppression may be increased. According to such a configuration, the sound of BGM reproduction is output without being suppressed or silenced in a situation where there is a margin in the number of free channels so as not to cause anxiety that the special production sound is not output due to lack of channels. You will be able to do it.

Regarding the operation valid period (timing ts13 to ts15) shown in FIG. 178, even if there is no operation, the production reception always occurs (automatic reception) within the valid period, and the post-operation effect (special production sound reproduction) is executed. You may do so.

Further, when the operation valid period (timing ts13 to ts15) shown in FIG. 178 occurs, the effect reception is permitted while the sound of "BGM reproduction" is output in the suppressed mode or silently. The "acceptable reception sound" suggesting that (or the reception of the production is allowed) may be output in a non-suppressed manner. The "acceptable sound" is configured as a part of the "specific sound data" for outputting the above "specific production sound", and the "specific sound data" is assigned to the channel. It may be output. That is, in this case, "specific sound data" is assigned to the channel before the operation valid period (timing ts13 to ts15) occurs, and a specific effect sound corresponding to the "specific sound data" is output in an unsuppressed manner. At the same time, when the timing ts13 arrives, the “acceptable sound” is output as the sound corresponding to the “specific sound data” assigned to the channel. Alternatively, the "acceptable sound for acceptance" is output from before the timing ts13 to after the timing ts13 so as to straddle the timing ts13. It should be noted that the specific effect sound can be output as, for example, a precursor effect sound corresponding to a precursor effect (an effect suggesting that the valid period will occur soon) performed before the operation valid period occurs. In this case, a "reproduction section of the precursor sound" and a "reproduction section of the acceptable reception sound" are provided in one sound data assigned to the channel so as to straddle the timing ts13. The "acceptable sound" may be a non-output state in the middle of the operation valid period (timing ts13 to ts15), or may be a non-output state at the timing ts15. It is good, but it is desirable to use this as an opportunity to switch to the non-output state when the production reception is made while the output state is in effect.

That is, "the reception allowable sound is output" here means that "sound data including the reception allowable sound" is newly assigned to the channel at the timing ts13, and is already assigned to the channel. It is a concept including the arrival of the "reproduction section of the acceptable sound for acceptance" in the sound data in accordance with the timing ts13. In addition, the "non-output state" here also cancels the allocation state of the "sound data including the acceptable sound for acceptance" to the channel, and the allocation state of the sound data to the channel is maintained. The concept includes that the "reproduction section of acceptable sound for acceptance" in the sound data is terminated and the subsequent sound (including silent data) is reproduced.

Further, in the operation valid period (timing ts13 to ts15) shown in FIG. 178, the elapsed time from the time when the production reception is performed, regardless of the timing of the production reception within the valid period. Until the predetermined time value is reached, the special production sound is reproduced in an unsuppressed manner on a channel other than the predetermined channel to which the "BGM reproduction" sound is assigned.

In this regard, when the effect reception is performed during the operation valid period (timing ts13 to ts15), the special effect display corresponding to the effect reception will appear as the display image on the effect display device 1600. However, regarding the special effect display corresponding to the effect reception, "the execution state (visible state) is continued until the elapsed time from the time when the effect reception is made reaches the predetermined time value". Instead, it is desirable to "hide the effect when a predetermined timing in the effect pattern arrives, regardless of the timing of the effect reception within the valid period". As the "predetermined timing in the effect pattern", for example, a predetermined timing (for example, timing ts16) within a period after the timing ts15 and before the timing ts17 can be adopted. However, even if the production reception is performed immediately after the operation valid period (timing ts13 to ts15) occurs, the timing must come before the timing when the output state of the special production sound ends. Is desirable. According to such a configuration, with respect to the processing related to the special production sound, the output state must be continued until the timing when the sound of "BGM reproduction" is restored in the non-suppressed manner after the timing ts16. However, since it is possible to end the special effect display before the special effect sound, it is possible to advance the effect after the operation after the operation at a good tempo. become. In order to obtain such an effect, the specific timing at which the special effect display is hidden is set as the timing ts16 at which the sound of "BGM reproduction" is restored or the timing that arrives before the timing ts16. It can be said that it is important.

According to such a configuration, when the production reception is performed during the operation valid period (timing ts13 to ts15), the elapsed time from the production reception timing is predetermined based on the production reception. "Processing for special production sound that keeps the output state until the time value is reached" and "Processing for special production display that continues to display until a predetermined timing in the production pattern arrives" are performed in parallel. Will be started respectively.

For example, if the effect reception is performed at a relatively early timing within the operation valid period (timing ts13 to ts15), the "process related to the special effect display" of the post-operation effect is executed for a relatively long period of time. Of the post-operation effects, the "process related to the special effect sound" ends at the timing when a predetermined time value elapses from the time when the effect reception is performed. On the other hand, if the effect reception is performed at a relatively late timing within the operation valid period (timing ts13 to ts15), the "process related to the special effect display" of the post-operation effect is executed only for a relatively short time. However, among the post-operation effects, the "process related to the special effect sound" is executed from the time when the effect is received until the timing when the predetermined time value elapses.

That is, in this case, in the operation valid period (timing ts13 to ts15) shown in FIG. 178, a specific effect pattern is executed based on the result of the jackpot determination, and the effect content as the specific effect pattern becomes a specific timing. When the production is received within the special operation reception production (valid period), "the output state is displayed until the elapsed time from the timing when the production is received reaches a predetermined time value. It functions as a process for executing the "process related to the special effect sound to be continued" and the "process related to the special effect display in which the display is continued until a predetermined timing in the effect pattern arrives", respectively.

According to such an operation valid period (timing ts13 to ts15), if the operation is performed immediately after the valid period occurs, the execution state of the "process related to the special effect display" among the post-operation effects can be maintained for a long time. As a compensation for this, the end timing of the "processing related to the special production sound" among the post-operation effects will arrive at a relatively early stage. On the other hand, if you do not operate for a while after the validity period occurs and operate it at a later time, the end timing of the "processing related to the special production sound" of the post-operation production will be relatively late. However, there is a demerit that it is not possible to maintain the execution state of the "process related to the special effect display" among the post-operation effects for a long time.

That is, in the operation valid period (timing ts13 to ts15), there is no most desirable operation timing for producing excitement.
-In exchange for accelerating the end timing of the "processing related to the special effect sound", do you enjoy this by lengthening the execution state of the "processing related to the special effect display" (operate at an early stage within the valid period? Do you do) or
-In exchange for shortening the execution state of "processing related to special effect display", do you enjoy this by extending the time until "processing related to special effect sound" is completed (at a late stage within the valid period)? Do you operate it) or
-Sacrifice little by little the time that the "process related to the special effect display" is maintained as the execution state and the time until the "process related to the special effect sound" is completed, and try to balance it as a whole. (Is it operated at a timing that is neither early nor late within the valid period?)
It is possible to have a strategic operation effect such as the above for the effective period itself, thereby providing an operation reception effect that does not cause tiredness and allows the operation timing to be selected according to the mood of the player. Will be able to.

Here, in the above explanatory example, as the post-operation effect when the effect is accepted during the operation valid period (timing ts13 to ts15), "process related to the special effect sound" and "process related to the special effect display" are performed. Although the example described above has been described, the "process of operating the predetermined effect movable body" may be further executed, or the "process of operating the predetermined effect movable body" may be performed instead of the "process related to the special effect display". May be executed. However, regarding the "process of operating the predetermined effect movable body", as in the case of the above-mentioned "process related to the special effect display", "even if the effect is accepted at any timing within the valid period". , It is desirable to end the operating state when a predetermined timing in the effect pattern arrives. " Here, "terminating the operating state" means that, in the case of an effect of operating a predetermined effect movable body to a specific position, the predetermined effect movable body in the operating state at the specific position is moved to the original position. It means to start the process of operating to return.

In the above description example, when the effect reception is performed during the operation valid period (timing ts13 to ts15), the execution state is continued until a predetermined timing in the effect pattern arrives. , The process of operating a predetermined effect movable body) ”and the“ process related to the special effect sound ”that is continued until the elapsed time from the timing when the effect is received reaches a predetermined time value. And said. However, even when the operation valid period (timing ts13 to ts15) occurs, when the predetermined effect conditions are not satisfied (for example, if the jackpot determination is lost or the predetermined effect determination is lost). In such a case), even if the production reception is performed within the operation reception production, the "processing related to the special production display (or the processing for operating the predetermined production movable body)" is not performed, and the predetermined production conditions are met. Is satisfied (FIG. 178), the "processing related to the special production sound" in which the "predetermined time value" is set to be relatively short can be performed as a different production sound. More desirable.

However, even though the operation is performed during the operation valid period (timing ts13 to ts15), this may not be detected well (detection error), and the production may not be accepted. As a result, the production is valid without being accepted. When the period ends, the player's interest in playing the game is that he sees that the "process related to the special effect display (or the process of operating the predetermined effect movable body)" is not performed even though the operation is performed. There is concern that it will decline. Therefore, the operation reception is automatically generated (automatic reception) during the operation validity period (timing ts13 to ts15), and the execution state is continued until a predetermined timing in the production pattern is reached. (Or, the process of operating a predetermined effect movable body) "and the" process related to the special effect sound "that continues until the elapsed time from the timing when the effect is received reaches a predetermined time value" are executed respectively. It is desirable to be done. As a method for automatically generating (automatically receiving) an operation reception or an effect mode related thereto, any one of the examples described with reference to FIGS. 289 to 300, or an appropriate combination can be used.

As described above, during the operation valid period (timing ts13 to ts15) that occurs while the sound of "BGM reproduction" is suppressed, the production reception is performed when the reception allowable sound is in the output state in the non-suppressed manner. Then, the post-operation effect is executed based on the effect reception, and the output state of the reception allowable sound is released at this point. In this regard, even when the normal valid period that occurs while the sound of "BGM reproduction" is not suppressed occurs, the acceptable reception sound is put into the output state in an unsuppressed manner. However, it is desirable that the reception allowable sound is continued without releasing the output state even if the effect reception is performed while the output state is in effect. Further, regarding the reception allowable sound output when the operation valid period (timing ts13 to ts15) occurs, the reproduction state can be continued for a longer time than the reception allowable sound output when the normal valid period occurs. While the sound of "BGM reproduction" is suppressed, it is desirable to use it as a game in order to preferably maintain the interest of the game.

Further, in the effective period generated when the sound of BGM reproduction is in the suppressed mode or the silent state, N as acceptable acceptance sounds suggesting that the effective period occurs (or that the effective period has occurred). There are types (modes), and one of those types must be output (output in a non-suppressive mode). On the other hand, it is suggested that the valid period occurs (or the valid period occurs) in the valid period that occurs when the sound of BGM reproduction is output as usual in the non-suppressed mode. Only M types (modes), which are less than N, are prepared as acceptable reception sounds, and "when outputting in one of these types (output in an unsuppressed mode)" and "output by any of those types". It is desirable that there is a case where the sound data itself including the acceptable sound is not assigned to the channel and the valid period is generated. In addition, it is desirable to suggest that "the degree of expectation that the jackpot symbol appears differs" depending on the type of acceptable sound for reception.

Alternatively, either the valid period that occurs when the sound of BGM reproduction is in the suppressed mode or the silent state, or the valid period that occurs when the sound of BGM reproduction is in the state of being normally output in the non-suppressed mode. Also, although a plurality of types (modes) are prepared as the reception allowable sound, the ratio of the reception allowable sound having a high expectation of big hit occurs when the sound of BGM reproduction is in the suppressed mode or the silent state. It is desirable that the sound is relatively high during the effective period, and is relatively low during the effective period that occurs when the sound of BGM reproduction is output normally in an unsuppressed manner. .. And also in this case, in the valid period generated when the sound of BGM reproduction is in the suppressed mode or the silent state, the acceptance allowable sound suggesting that the valid period occurs (or that the valid period has occurred) is While it is always output (output in the non-suppressed mode), the valid period occurs when the sound of BGM reproduction is in the state of being output normally in the non-suppressed mode (the effective period occurs). Or, the reception allowable sound suggesting that the valid period has occurred) is "output in a non-suppressed manner" and "the sound data itself including the reception allowable sound itself is not channel-assigned and is not output". It is desirable to have it.

According to these configurations, when the sound of BGM reproduction is in a state of being output normally in an unsuppressed manner, the degree of expectation suggested by the reception allowable sound is less detailed (M types less than N). You may not be able to recognize it, or you may not be able to expect much (relatively low). However, in this case, since the sound of the BGM reproduction is output as usual in the non-suppressed mode, there is a possibility that the acceptance allowable sound may be overlooked by the sound of the BGM reproduction. Even if it is leaked, it is possible to be aware of the possibility that the reception allowable sound itself was not output. On the other hand, when the sound of BGM reproduction is in a state of being output in a suppressed mode or a silent state, the acceptance allowable sound is set in a situation where it is possible to make the sound output in the non-suppressed mode stand out. Since the output is always performed in a non-suppressive manner, it is possible to look forward to the degree of expectation suggested by this. When either (or both) of these modes are adopted, among the types of acceptable sound that can be output when the "valid period that occurs when the sound of BGM reproduction is in the suppressed mode or the silent state" occurs. , At least one of the types of acceptable sound that can be output when the "valid period that occurs when the sound of BGM reproduction is normally output in an unsuppressed manner" occurs (for example, of the acceptable sound). Of these, the type with the lowest expectation for big hits) may be included. However, the acceptance allowable sound that can be output when the "valid period that occurs when the sound of BGM reproduction is in the state of being output normally in the non-suppressed mode" includes "the sound of BGM reproduction is in the suppressed mode or silence". The types that cannot be output (for example, the types with the highest expectation of big hits among the acceptable sounds) should be included as the reception allowable sounds that can be output when the "valid period that occurs when the state is" occurs. Is desirable. In addition, the number of production types that can appear as post-operation effects according to the production reception in the "valid period that occurs when the sound of BGM playback is output normally in a non-suppressed mode" is "BGM playback". It is desirable that the number of production types is larger than the number of production types that can appear as a post-operation effect according to the production reception in the "valid period that occurs when the sound of is in a suppressed mode or in a silent state". Among the production types that can appear as a post-operation effect according to the effect reception in the "valid period that occurs when the sound of BGM reproduction is output normally in an unsuppressed manner", "the sound of BGM reproduction is At least one of the effect types that can appear as a post-operation effect according to the effect reception in the "valid period that occurs when in a suppressed mode or in a silent state" may be included.

Further, in the normal gaming state in which neither the time saving function nor the probability fluctuation function is activated, the valid period generated when the sound of BGM reproduction is in the suppressed mode or the silent state, and the sound of BGM reproduction are in the non-suppressed mode. When multiple types (modes) with different jackpot expectations are prepared as acceptance allowable sounds in any of the valid periods that occur when the output is in the normal state, output is performed in any of the valid periods. Then, the special reception permissible sound that "the rate of being stopped by the jackpot symbol becomes 100%" may be output. In addition, a plurality of types (modes) may be prepared as special reception allowable sounds.

That is, in this case, when the special reception allowable sound is output (non-suppressed mode) when the "valid period generated when the sound of BGM reproduction is in the suppressed mode or the silent state" is generated, the effect is produced within the valid period. Even as a post-operation effect performed based on the reception, when it appears, it will be executed in a special mode in which "the rate of being stopped by the jackpot symbol becomes 100%". If the production reception is performed while the special reception permissible sound is being output, the output of the special reception permissible sound is interrupted, and when it is output, "the rate of being stopped by the jackpot symbol becomes 100%" special It is desirable to output the production sound.

However, when the special reception allowable sound is output (non-suppressed mode) when the "valid period that occurs when the sound of BGM reproduction is normally output in the non-suppressed mode" occurs, the valid period As a post-operation effect performed based on the fact that the effect is received within the company, when it appears, it is executed in a special mode in which "the rate of being stopped by the jackpot symbol becomes 100%" and in the special mode. It is desirable that there are cases where it is not done. It should be noted that the special reception allowable sound output when the "valid period generated when the sound of BGM reproduction is in the suppressed mode or the silent state" is generated and the "sound of BGM reproduction is output as usual in the non-suppressed mode". The special reception permissible sound output during the "valid period generated when the state is in the same state" may be different types of reception permissible sounds. In addition, there are multiple types of special reception allowable sounds that are output when the "valid period that occurs when the BGM playback sound is output normally in an unsuppressed manner" occurs, and among these types , The type of special reception allowable sound output when the "valid period generated when the sound of BGM reproduction is in the suppressed mode or the silent state" is generated, and the type may be different from the type. .. If the production reception is performed while the reception permissible sound (including the special reception permissible sound) is output, the output of the reception permissible sound is interrupted, and the production sound corresponding to the post-operation effect (post-operation effect is special). When it is performed in a mode, it is desirable to output a special effect sound that "the rate of being stopped by the jackpot symbol becomes 100%" when it is output.

According to such a configuration, when the sound of BGM reproduction is in a suppressed mode or a silent state (when it is difficult to make a mistake in hearing), when the special reception allowable sound is output, it is within the valid period. Even as a post-operation effect performed based on the fact that the effect reception has been made in, when it appears, it will always be executed in a mode that "the rate of being stopped by the jackpot symbol becomes 100%". On the other hand, in a state where the sound of BGM reproduction is output as usual in an unsuppressed mode (when there is a situation in which a hearing error is likely to occur due to competition with the sound of BGM reproduction), it is assumed that the special reception allowable sound is output. However, as a post-operation effect performed based on the fact that the effect is accepted within the valid period, the effect is not necessarily performed in a mode that "the rate of being stopped by the jackpot symbol becomes 100%". Therefore, it is possible to raise a suspicion (suspicion that the reception allowable sound was output as a "special reception allowable sound"), so that the tension can be maintained appropriately. Become. As a result, while the sound of BGM reproduction is output as usual in an unsuppressed manner, the emphasis is placed on "how to prevent the reception allowable sound from being overheard", and a feeling of tension until the reception allowable sound is output. It becomes possible to maintain this in a suitable manner. In order to increase such tension, in the operation reception effect, "a special reception allowable sound is output and the post-operation effect is not executed in a mode that" when it appears, the rate of being stopped by the jackpot symbol becomes 100% "". Compared to the case of the operation reception effect, "the special reception allowable sound is output and the post-operation effect is executed in a mode that" when it appears, the rate of being stopped by the jackpot symbol becomes 100% "". It is desirable to execute the effect (display related to permissible pre-operation and sound related to permissible pre-operation) in a relatively short time so that the valid period is suddenly generated.

In addition, in the state where the sound of BGM reproduction is output as usual in an unsuppressed mode (when there is a situation in which a hearing error is likely to occur due to a conflict with the sound of BGM reproduction), "the special reception allowable sound is output and the operation is performed. The post-production is not executed in the mode that "when it appears, the rate of being stopped by the jackpot symbol becomes 100%". When it appears, the rate of being stopped by the jackpot symbol becomes 100%. In the operation reception effect (valid period), the special reception allowable sound is output as different types of reception allowable sound. It may be output as a reception allowable sound of the same type. In addition, in a state where the sound of BGM reproduction is output as usual in an unsuppressed mode (when there is a situation in which the reception allowable sound is likely to be misunderstood due to competition with the sound of BGM reproduction), "special reception allowable sound is output. The operation reception effect (valid period) that is performed and the post-operation effect is executed in a mode that "when it appears, the rate of being stopped by the jackpot symbol becomes 100%" may not necessarily occur. In addition, in the operation reception effect (valid period), "the special reception allowance sound is output and the post-operation effect is not executed in the mode that" when it appears, the rate of being stopped by the jackpot symbol becomes 100% "", the acceptance is allowed. Regardless of which type of sound is output, the post-operation effect is not executed in the mode that "when it appears, the rate of being stopped by the jackpot symbol becomes 100%", and that mode is prepared in the first place. It may not be.

In addition, during the operation valid period (timing ts13 to ts15) and the normal valid period that occur while the sound of "BGM reproduction" is suppressed, an image display that imitates the operation means used as the operation target and is effective. A gauge display indicating how much time is left is displayed, and an operation promotion effect is performed to encourage the player to operate. In this regard, at least during the operation valid period (timing ts13 to ts15) that occurs while the sound of "BGM playback" is suppressed, when the production is accepted, the gauge display remains (displayed) and the "production" is performed. "Processing related to special effect display (or processing to operate a predetermined effect movable body)" in which the execution state is continued until a predetermined timing in the pattern arrives, and "elapsed time from the timing when the effect is received" It is desirable to start each of "processing related to the special production sound that is continued until the time value reaches a predetermined time value". According to such a configuration, it is possible to recognize which timing within the valid period the production reception is performed after the production reception based on the remaining gauge remaining as a display. As a result, it becomes possible to predict whether or not the process related to the special effect display (or the process of operating a predetermined effect movable body) will be completed immediately. As a method of starting the effect after the operation while leaving the gauge display (bar display) in this way, any one of the examples described with reference to FIGS. 292 to 296, or an appropriate combination, and further, still It is possible to use the written contents.

In the above description example, regarding the number of effect patterns prepared (memorized) as the "specific type of effect pattern" that outputs the sound of "BGM reproduction" in a suppressed mode or silently, the sound of "BGM reproduction" is suppressed. Alternatively, it is desirable to set the number of production patterns to be less than the number of production patterns prepared (memorized) as "other production patterns" that are not output silently in order to improve the game entertainment when the production occurs. ..

Further, when a plurality of production patterns are prepared as the suppression mode or the "effect pattern" for outputting the sound of the "BGM reproduction" silently, the sound of the "BGM reproduction" is suppressed in the production pattern for the first set time. Alternatively, an effect pattern for outputting silently and an effect pattern for suppressing the sound of "BGM reproduction" for a second set time longer than the first set time or an effect pattern for outputting silently are included, and the jackpot symbol is included in these effect patterns. It is desirable that the expectations that appear are different. According to such a configuration, when the sound of "BGM reproduction" is output in a suppressed mode or silently, the jackpot expectation can be suggested depending on how long the state is continued. ..

As described above, in the pachinko machine 1 according to this embodiment, the player sets a value (volume setting value) regarding the volume by operating the volume adjustment button (effect selection left button 331 or effect selection right button 332). Processing can be executed (peripheral control MPU1511a). Then, when the volume setting value is changed in a state where the symbol variation is not executed (demo state or the like), the peripheral control MPU1511a adjusts the volume applied to the effect sound based on the changed volume setting value. (Processing to reflect the volume setting value as the volume) will be executed. At this time, a volume adjustment confirmation sound can be output at the adjusted volume.

In this regard, in the pachinko machine 1 (peripheral control MPU1511a) according to this embodiment, it is possible to execute a process of changing the set value (volume set value) by the player regarding the volume even in the state where the symbol variation is executed. However, it is desirable that the volume adjustment confirmation sound is not always output even if the volume setting value is changed in the state where the symbol fluctuation is executed. That is, in the pachinko machine 1 in which the "effect pattern for outputting the sound of BGM reproduction in a suppressed mode or silently" can be selected, the volume adjustment confirmation sound is not always output during the pattern change regardless of the effect pattern. In this case, the player who sees the volume adjustment confirmation sound not being output becomes aware of the possibility that the "volume suppression effect" is being executed, so that it is expected that the gaming interest is maintained favorably. become. In this case, the volume adjustment confirmation sound is not output, but the effect display device 1600 can display indicating that the volume setting value has been changed, so that the volume adjustment confirmation sound is not output. It is desirable to make people aware (awareness of the possibility that "volume suppression effect" is being executed). "No volume adjustment confirmation sound is output" means that the volume adjustment confirmation sound itself is assigned to a channel, but this is output at volume 0, or the volume adjustment confirmation sound itself may not be assigned to a channel. ..

Regarding the special production sound that is output based on the fact that the production reception is performed when the sound of BGM reproduction is in the suppressed mode or in the silent state, the special production sound is output for a time more than twice the operation valid period (timing ts13 to ts15). It is desirable to configure it to maintain the output state. According to such a configuration, even if the production reception is performed immediately after the operation valid period (timing ts13 to ts15) occurs, the output time (special production sound) after the timing ts15 has elapsed can be set. The output time up to the timing ts15 (special production sound) can be made longer.

[Channel allocation cancellation operation]
As described above, in a gaming machine in which the number of channels is finite, even if a special result is obtained by the judgment by the judgment means according to the winning, there is no vacancy in the channel to which the sound data is assigned. In (the situation where the number of free channels is 0), it is not possible to assign a special sound corresponding to the special result obtained to the channel, and there is a concern that the game interest may be deteriorated due to the inability to output this.

In this regard, in the pachinko machine 1 according to this embodiment, a process of changing at least one of the channels to which sound data is assigned to an empty channel to which sound data is not assigned is triggered by detection by the detection means. It is made feasible (channel allocation cancellation operation). That is, in this case, since an empty channel is created by the operation by the player, the empty channel is created by the operation by the player at the timing immediately before the player's favorite directing sound or special sound is generated. By securing in advance, it becomes possible to reliably output the player's favorite directing sound or special sound through the empty channel secured in advance.

The operation (channel allocation cancellation operation) in this explanatory example is not limited to the “button operation”, and an act of holding a hand over the pachinko machine 1 and praying is exemplified with reference to FIGS. 169 to 173. It may be a specific action that has been performed, and the point is that a contact-type or non-contact-type predetermined sensor that can detect some state change that occurs when such a specific action to be detected (channel allocation cancellation operation) is performed is used. It suffices that the sound assigned to the channel is removed from the channel and the reproduction is terminated when the detection is detected.

FIG. 179 is a time chart showing an example of the allocation status of each channel when processing related to such a channel allocation cancellation operation is performed.

As shown in FIG. 179, during the period in which the symbol variation according to the result of the jackpot determination is being executed, at the timing tw11, a predetermined effect pattern is produced by the game board side effect display device 1600. The sound of "BGM1 reproduction" (for example, the effect sound effect reproduced during the execution of the super reach effect) corresponding to the above is assigned to the reproduction channels 00, 01 and reproduced (here, stereo reproduction), and The sound of "BGM2 playback" according to the production mode (for example, one song that is continuously played over multiple fluctuations in a time-saving game state, etc.) is assigned to playback channels 02 and 03 and played back (here, stereo playback). ) Is in the situation.

In this regard, as shown in FIGS. 179 (a) and 179 (b), among the sounds in these playback states (BGM1 playback, BGM2 playback), the sound of "BGM2 playback" is a specific action (channel allocation cancellation operation). Is targeted for forcibly terminating the channel allocation when is detected, and when the timing tw12 is reached during the period when the symbol change is being executed, the production reception of the specific action (channel allocation cancellation operation) is received. The permissible reception period can be generated up to the timing tw13. In the reception period from timing tw12 to timing tw13, a specific action (channel allocation cancellation operation) to be detected such as "operate a button to secure an empty channel" in the display area of the game board side effect display device 1600. An operation instruction image prompting the user to perform the above is displayed.

Here, FIG. 179 (a) shows the allocation status of each channel when the specific action (channel allocation cancellation operation) is not performed within the reception period of timing tw12 to timing tw13 and the detection by the predetermined detection means is not performed. Shown.

As shown in FIG. 179 (a), if the detection by the predetermined detection means is not performed before the timing tw13 arrives, the sound of "BGM2 reproduction" is removed from the reproduction channels 02 and 03. Without this, this is continuously reproduced even after the timing tw13 arrives. Further, at the timing tw13 when the reception period ends, the operation instruction image (operate the button to secure an empty channel) displayed in the display area of the game board side effect display device 1600 is hidden.

Further, at the timing tw13, a process of assigning a predetermined effect sound (here, a jackpot confirmation sound) to an empty channel (reproduction channels 10 and 11) and reproducing the sound is performed. In this explanatory example, even if the reproduction channels 02 and 03 are not changed to empty channels by detection by a predetermined detection means, the other channels (reproduction channels 10 and 11) are reserved in advance, so that the vacancy is obtained. It is possible to assign a predetermined production sound (here, a jackpot confirmation sound) to a channel and reproduce it. However, if vacancy is not secured in advance for other channels, there is no vacant channel to which a predetermined production sound (here, a jackpot confirmation sound) can be assigned, and this cannot be played back and output. Concerns will arise.

FIG. 179 (b) shows the allocation status of each channel when a specific action (channel allocation cancellation operation) is performed at timing tw12a and detection is performed by a predetermined detection means during the reception period from timing tw12 to timing tw13. Shown.

On the other hand, as shown in FIG. 179 (b), if detection is performed by a predetermined detection means before the timing tw13 arrives, the reproduction channels 02 and 03 are performed at the timing tw12a where the detection is performed. The sound of "BGM2 playback" will be removed from. As a result, it becomes possible to secure in advance an empty channel (reproduction channel 02, 03) that can function as an allocation target of a predetermined production sound (here, a jackpot confirmation sound) until the timing tw13 arrives. , The concern that a predetermined production sound (here, a jackpot confirmation sound) cannot be reproduced and output will be resolved. Further, when the detection by the predetermined detection means is performed, the playback state of the sound of "BGM2 playback" is forcibly terminated. In this case, the music or dialogue as the sound of "BGM2 playback" is completed (or). Since the playback will end at a halfway point without being played back (up to a good point), I feel that a free channel has been secured in advance by a specific action (channel allocation cancellation operation) by the player. It becomes possible to make it easier, and it becomes possible to wait with confidence at the timing when a predetermined production sound (here, a jackpot confirmation sound) is reproduced.

At the timing tw12a where the detection is performed by the predetermined detection means, the reproduction state of the sound of "BGM2 reproduction" is forcibly terminated, and the operation instruction image displayed in the display area of the game board side effect display device 1600. (Operate the button to secure a free channel) will be hidden, and the acceptance period for which production acceptance of a specific action (channel allocation cancellation operation) is permitted will end.

Further, in the example shown in FIG. 179 (b), in the timing tw13, not the playback channels 02 and 03 reserved in advance as free channels, but other channels (playback channels 10, playback channels 10,) which have been regarded as free channels before that. A predetermined production sound (here, a jackpot confirmation sound) is assigned to 11) and played back. However, if there is no space in the other channels at the timing tw13, a predetermined production sound (here, a jackpot confirmation sound) is assigned to the playback channels 02 and 03 secured in advance and played.

Alternatively, when the production sound is removed from the specific channel based on the fact that the specific action (channel allocation cancellation operation) is performed at the timing tw12a and the detection is performed by the predetermined detection means, there is a vacancy in the other channel. However, a predetermined effect sound (here, a jackpot confirmation sound) may be assigned to the specific channel for reproduction. That is, in this case, when a predetermined effect sound (here, a jackpot confirmed sound) is assigned to a specific channel and reproduced, an effect sound different from the predetermined effect sound (here, here) is assigned to the specific channel. , BGM2) is assigned, but one channel (specific channel) is assigned because the allocation status is canceled at that point when a specific action detection such as a button operation (channel allocation cancellation operation) is triggered. Just by using it, it becomes possible to reproduce the sound of "BGM2 reproduction" and the predetermined production sound (here, the jackpot confirmed sound), respectively, and it becomes possible to effectively use the reproduction channel which is a finite resource. ..

Further, in the example shown in FIG. 179 (b), a predetermined effect sound (here, a jackpot confirmation sound) is reproduced at the timing tw13 when the reception period ends, but the timing is later than the timing tw13. It is also possible to reproduce a predetermined production sound (here, a jackpot confirmation sound).

Further, as the predetermined effect sound, in addition to the jackpot confirmation sound, the effect sound suggesting the degree of expectation that the jackpot symbol appears, or the effect sound suggesting that the jackpot has been lost may be used. It is desirable that these effect sounds are selectively output based on the type of effect pattern that appears due to the symbol variation. Alternatively, in the case of suggesting that the jackpot has been lost, even if the timing tw13 arrives, no directing sound may be output and the empty channel may not necessarily be used.

On the other hand, the sound whose channel allocation is terminated when a specific action (channel allocation cancellation operation) is detected is not output in any of a plurality of modes, but is output in only one mode. It is desirable to execute it as a specific sound. That is, in this case, even if the content of the specific sound is missed when the playback state is forcibly terminated, the content can be easily predicted and there is no problem. It becomes possible to suppress the deterioration of the game interest when the state is forcibly terminated.

Further, in the example shown in FIG. 179 (b), it was decided to generate a reception period in which production reception of a specific action (channel allocation cancellation operation) is permitted when a predetermined timing within the symbol fluctuation arrives. Not limited to. For example, at least during the period when the specific sound to be excluded from the channel allocation is in the playback state, the acceptance of the specific action (channel allocation cancellation operation) is permitted, and the channel allocation of the specific sound is based on the acceptance. May be resolved. In this case, for example, after maintaining the state of the vacant channel secured in advance for a predetermined time, such as a predetermined timing when a predetermined time has elapsed since the specific sound was put into the playback state, another sound is output to the vacant channel. It is desirable to be assigned and played.

Further, as a method of canceling the channel allocation of the specific sound to be forcibly terminated, in addition to the method of making the channel to which the specific sound is assigned an empty channel at that time, a predetermined sound (for example, 0. It is also possible to cancel the channel allocation of a specific sound by allocating an extremely short allocation cancellation reception sound (such as 1 second) to the same channel. Even with such a configuration, it is possible to cancel the channel allocation of the specific sound at an earlier stage when the specific action is accepted and forcibly terminated than when the specific action is not forcibly terminated.

In addition, at least in the period from when the production reception of the specific action (channel allocation cancellation operation) is permitted until the reproduction of the predetermined production sound using the vacant channel created by the production reception is completed, a new sound is produced. Specific game sounds (for example, winning sound, hold change sound, volume adjustment sound) that have nothing to do with the effect of whether the jackpot symbol appears within the symbol fluctuation so that the channel is not wasted due to the occurrence of , Look-ahead effect sound, etc.), it is desirable not to output it.

In addition, the specific sound (sound of "BGM2 playback") that is the target of forced termination is played as a non-loop production sound such as a song or dialogue that is played only for a predetermined time without looping. It is desirable to make it easier to remember the feeling that a free channel has been secured in advance by a specific action (channel allocation cancellation operation) by the player so that the playback ends at a halfway point without being played to the end. ..

[Abnormal notification while the production is being performed according to the production pattern]
As described above, in a gaming machine in which the number of channels is finite, even if a special result is obtained by the judgment by the judgment means according to the winning, there is no vacancy in the channel to which the sound data is assigned. In (the situation where the number of free channels is 0), it is not possible to assign a special sound corresponding to the special result obtained to the channel, and there is a concern that the game interest may be deteriorated due to the inability to output this.

In this regard, in the pachinko machine 1 according to this embodiment, even when a specific abnormal state occurs, a specific notification sound corresponding to the specific abnormal state is not necessarily assigned to the channel and output, and the specific abnormal state is not always output. Is assigned to a channel and output on the condition that it occurs in a specific situation. That is, in this case, when a specific abnormal state occurs, a specific notification sound corresponding to the specific abnormal state is not always output, so that the channel can be provided with a margin and the risk of running out of free channels can be reduced. Will be expected.

More specifically, in the pachinko machine 1 according to this embodiment, the predetermined movable decorative body is not at the specific position (origin position) even though the timing should be at the specific position (origin position). Is detected by a predetermined sensor (movable body abnormality), it is determined that an abnormality (movable body abnormality) has occurred in the predetermined movable decorative body. Then, when such a movable body abnormality occurs, as a notification process by the pachinko machine 1, an output of a notification sound corresponding to the movable body abnormality (for example, "a movable body abnormality has occurred") and a game It is possible to execute an abnormality display (for example, "an abnormality has occurred in the back-middle movable effect unit 3200") in the display area of the board-side effect display device 1600. In addition, as the display at the time of abnormality in the display area, it is desirable to perform so that it is possible to identify which of the plurality of movable decorations the abnormality has occurred. It may be an aspect of identifying which of the groups the movable decorative body belongs to has an abnormality. For example, as a plurality of movable decorative bodies, a plurality of frame-side movable decorative bodies (not shown) provided on the door frame 3 side and a plurality of board-side movable decorative bodies provided on the game board 5 side (for example, the back front decorative unit 3100 and the like) , Back middle movable production unit 3200, back left movable production unit 3300, back right movable production unit 3400, back top movable production unit 3500, back bottom movable production unit 3700, etc.) An abnormality is displayed in the display area in a manner capable of identifying which side of the decorative body or the movable decorative body on the board side the abnormality has occurred. It should be noted that the plurality of movable decorative bodies refer to movable decorative bodies having a relationship in which the drive sources are different from each other and are provided separately.

However, such an abnormality of the movable body is basically caused by a failure of the movable decorative body, and there is a high possibility that the player will not make any mistakes. Therefore, if various games (such as symbol fluctuations and big hit games) according to the jackpot judgment are being executed, the notification process may be executed openly during the execution period. On the other hand, it will have an adverse effect, which is a pleasure for the player. Not only that, there is no room for the number of free channels as much as the notification sound corresponding to the abnormality of the movable body is output, which may give the player anxiety that it will not be possible to output a new sound. , There is concern that the interest in games will decline.

However, on the other hand, a failure of the movable decorative body usually occurs when the movable decorative body operates, and there is also an aspect that it is difficult to assume a situation in which a sudden failure occurs when the movable decorative body does not operate at all. Then, when a movable body abnormality occurs when the movable decoration body is not operating at all, it is abnormal because the movable decoration body is removed from a specific position (origin position) due to a cheating act or a fraudulent act such as wire entry. There is a possibility that it is in a detected situation, and even under such a situation, if the notification sound corresponding to the moving body abnormality is not output, it may promote cheating, and it is legitimate. From the perspective of a good player, there is concern that the interest in the game will decline.

Therefore, in the pachinko machine 1 according to this embodiment, such a movable body abnormality occurs during a period in which various games (design fluctuation, big hit game, etc.) according to the big hit determination are executed, and this is detected. Even in such a case, the pachinko machine 1 can execute the notification process (output of the notification sound, display at the time of abnormality in the display area of the effect display device 1600 on the game board side, lighting at the time of abnormality by various lamps, etc.). However, during the period in which various games (design variation, jackpot game, etc.) according to the jackpot determination are being executed, at least the process of operating the movable decorative body by the effect control by the peripheral control board 1510 (variation pattern (effect pattern)). If an abnormality is detected in the movable body while the movable decorative body is being operated based on the effect pattern during the big hit game, the pachinko machine 1 notifies (outputs the notification sound). , Display at the time of abnormality in the display area of the effect display device 1600 on the game board side, lighting at the time of abnormality by various lamps, etc.) are not performed. It should be noted that the external output (hall side notification) of the information that an abnormality has occurred in the movable decorative body is not performed openly and does not adversely affect the production, and therefore may be performed regardless of the situation.

According to such a configuration, even during the period in which various games (design fluctuation, big hit game, etc.) according to the big hit determination are executed, the movable decorative body is unlikely to break down (according to the peripheral control board 1510). Movable body abnormality in the process of operating the movable decorative body by the effect control (the situation where the movable body drive process of operating the movable decorative body based on the variable pattern (effect pattern) or the effect pattern during the big hit game) is not performed) In the event of an abnormality, the pachinko machine 1 can perform notification processing such as an abnormality notification sound, but at least in a situation where the movable decoration is prone to failure (during the production operation of the movable body), the movable body abnormality occurs. When it occurs, the pachinko machine 1 does not perform notification processing such as an abnormal notification sound, so that a person who commits a fraudulent act is restrained from committing the fraudulent act, but a legitimate game is played. It will be expected that the person will avoid having an adverse effect on the production being performed.

For example, even if a movable body abnormality is detected in the process of operating the movable decorative body by the effect control by the peripheral control board 1510, the display control in the game board side effect display device 1600, the effect sound allocation control to the channel, and the abnormality occurrence occur. Since the light emission control of the light emitting part including the lamp mounted on the movable decorative body is executed as it is in the same manner as when the movable body abnormality is not detected, it has an adverse effect on the effect during execution. It will be suppressed. However, even if the effect timing for operating the movable decorative body again comes after the movable body abnormality is detected, the movable decorative body is operated while the movable decorative body has not been recovered from the abnormal state. No production is performed.

That is, in the peripheral control board 1510 according to this embodiment, when a movable body abnormality is detected, whether or not the pachinko machine 1 performs notification processing such as an abnormality notification sound corresponding to the movable body abnormality. Regardless of this, it is possible to execute a restoration process for causing the movable decoration to perform a predetermined restoration operation (an operation of moving the movable decoration to a specific position (origin position)) in order to recover the movable decoration from an abnormal state. This restoration process may be executed with different contents depending on the type of the movable decorative body in which the abnormality has occurred. According to such a configuration, even if the specific movable decoration is in an abnormal state during the execution period of the symbol variation in which the specific movable effect for operating the specific movable decoration is performed, the specific movable effect is started. If the specific movable decoration is recovered from the abnormal state in the earlier stage, the specific movable effect for operating the specific movable decoration can be executed.

It should be noted that the movable decorative body is specified within a predetermined time even though the restoration process for causing the corresponding movable decorative body to perform a predetermined restoration operation (movement to a specific position (origin position)) is executed. If the player does not return to the position (origin position), the game or production will proceed while maintaining the abnormal state, assuming that the recovery has failed.

FIG. 180 shows the allocation status of each channel when an abnormality in the movable body is detected in the process of operating the movable decorative body according to the fluctuation pattern (effect pattern) according to the jackpot determination during the period in which the symbol is changed. It is a time chart showing an example of the situation on the movable decorative body side.

As shown in FIG. 180 (a), during the period in which the symbol variation (specific effect pattern) according to the result of the jackpot determination is being executed, at the timing ti11, the game board side effect display device 1600 is used. The sound of "BGM reproduction" corresponding to the specific effect pattern in which the effect is being produced is assigned to the reproduction channels 02 and 03 and is already reproduced (here, stereo reproduction).

In this symbol variation (specific effect pattern), at the timing ti12, the operation valid period (valid period of the effect reception) in which the player is given an operation opportunity may occur for a period up to the timing ti14 at the maximum. Then, when an operation by the player (for example, the operation button 410) is detected within this period (the period from timing ti12 to timing ti14), the operation valid period (valid period of the production reception) is terminated with this as an opportunity. The effect control for operating a specific movable decorative body is executed. If the operation by the player (for example, the operation button 410) is not detected within the operation valid period (valid period of the effect reception), the effect control for operating the specific movable decorative body is executed after the timing ti14. Alternatively, the effect control itself for operating a specific movable decorative body may not be executed.

In this regard, in the example shown in FIG. 180, it is assumed that the operation by the player is received at the timing ti13. Therefore, in the timing ti13, based on the fact that the operation by the player is received, the movable body drive process is executed to perform the movable effect of producing the specific movable decorative body (FIG. 180 (b)). (Refer to), the production sound corresponding to the movable effect is assigned to the channels 08 and 09 and played back (see FIG. 180 (a)).

Here, as the movable body driving process, for example, when operating a specific movable decorative body, it is first determined whether or not the abnormality history is stored. As a result, when the abnormality history is stored, the restoration process has failed and the restoration cannot be expected. Therefore, the movable body drive process is terminated without performing any drive. On the other hand, when the abnormality history is not stored, information from a predetermined sensor is acquired, and it is determined whether or not a specific movable decorative body is in a specific position (original position) based on the information. As a result, if the specific movable decorative body is in the specific position (original position), the specific movable decorative body is operated in the manner determined by the effect pattern. In such an operation, the specific movable decoration is finally returned to the specific position (original position), and when the driving for the specific movable decoration is completed, the information from the predetermined sensor is acquired. When it is determined that the vehicle has been returned to the specific position (original position) based on the information, the movable body driving process is terminated. However, if it is determined that the specific movable decoration is not in the specific position (original position) within the movable body drive process, the restoration process for causing the specific movable decoration to perform a predetermined restoration operation is executed. After that, the movable body drive process is terminated. At this time, if the restoration process fails, the abnormality history is stored in a predetermined storage area.

By such a movable body drive process, the specific movable decorative body performs the effect operation from the timing ti13, but in this explanatory example, the specific movable decorative body is set to the specific movable decorative body at the timing ti15 within the period in which the effect operation is performed. It is assumed that an abnormality has occurred and this cannot operate. In FIG. 180 (b), the dotted range indicates the period during which the specific movable decorative body is in an abnormal state. Therefore, at the timing ti17 after the drive for the specific movable decorative body (drive for the effect operation) is completed, it is determined that the specific movable decorative body is not in the state of being returned to the specific position (original position) (movable body). Abnormality is determined), and based on the determination, a restoration process for performing a predetermined restoration operation on a specific movable decorative body is executed.

However, as described above, the situation in which an abnormality (movable body abnormality) occurs in the specific movable decorative body while the specific movable decorative body is operating based on the effect pattern according to the result of the jackpot determination is movable. Since it can be said that the situation is likely to have been caused by the failure of the decorative body, in this explanatory example, the abnormality notification sound corresponding to the abnormality of the movable body is not assigned to the channel and reproduced. That is, in this case, the movable body abnormality is caused by the display control in the game board side effect display device 1600, the effect sound allocation control to the channel, and the light emission control of the light emitting unit including the lamp mounted on the movable decorative body in which the abnormality occurs. Since it is executed as it is in the same manner as when it was not detected, it is possible to suppress adverse effects on the effect being executed. That is, when a situation appears in which the movable body cannot be returned to the normal state (moved to the original position) while executing the movable process based on the effect pattern during the symbol change, it is based on the appearance of the situation. Therefore, the execution trigger of the "restoration process for the movable body (movable body not in the original position) during the effect operation that has not been restored to normal" is established, but when the restoration process is performed (or the said It is not possible to assign an abnormality notification sound corresponding to a movable body abnormality to a channel and play it back (when the restoration process fails to restore the movable body to normal).

At the timing ti18, the restoration process for performing a predetermined restoration operation on the specific movable decoration is completed, but at this time, it is detected that the movable decoration has returned to the specific position (origin position). In that case (when it is determined that the movable body abnormality has been resolved), the memory of the abnormality history is deleted, and after that, it becomes possible to execute the normal movable effect. On the other hand, as shown in the example shown in FIG. 180 (b), it is not detected that the movable decorative body has returned to the specific position (origin position) (it is determined that the movable body abnormality has been resolved), and the recovery fails. If this is done, after that, as long as the RAM is not cleared and the power supply is continued, the game and the production will proceed while maintaining the abnormal state without performing a predetermined restoration operation. That is, in this case, even if the timing for executing the movable effect using the specific movable decorative body based on the effect pattern arrives within the same symbol variation or within the symbol variation after the next time, the specific movable decorative body The effect operation is not performed, the display effect when the movable effect is performed is executed on the game board side effect display device 1600, and the operation effect sound when the movable effect is performed is assigned to the channel and played. Including the lamp mounted on the movable decorative body in which the abnormality has occurred, various light emitting units are only emitted in the light emitting mode when the movable effect is performed. However, in particular, even if the movable decorative body itself does not operate, the actuator (lamp) mounted on the movable decorative body itself is operated (light-emitting) in the mode of operation, so that the movable effect is not performed. It is expected that the game will be suppressed.

In this way, during the period in which the symbol changes, at least when a movable body abnormality is detected in the process of operating the movable decorative body based on the fluctuation pattern (effect pattern) according to the jackpot determination, the movable body By not allocating the abnormality notification sound corresponding to the abnormality to the channel and not playing it, it is possible to suppress the adverse effect on the effect being executed.

On the other hand, even when an abnormality occurs in the same movable decorative body (specific movable decorative body) within the same fluctuation pattern (specific effect pattern) as in the example shown in FIG. 180, this movable body abnormality is caused. When it occurs at a timing different from that when the specific movable decorative body is operated by the effect control (effect pattern), the abnormality notification sound corresponding to the movable body abnormality is assigned to the channel and reproduced.

FIG. 181 shows that the movable body abnormality is not in the process of operating the movable decorative body according to the fluctuation pattern (effect pattern) according to the jackpot determination during the period in which the symbol is changed, but in a process different from this. It is a time chart which shows an example about the allocation situation of each channel at the time of detection, and the situation on the movable decoration side.

As shown in FIG. 181 (a), during the period in which the symbol variation (specific effect pattern) according to the result of the jackpot determination is being executed, at the timing ti11, as described above, the game board side effect. The sound of "BGM reproduction" corresponding to the specific effect pattern being produced by the display device 1600 is assigned to the reproduction channels 02 and 03 and is already reproduced (here, stereo reproduction).

And, as described above, in this symbol variation (specific effect pattern), when the timing ti12 is reached, the operation valid period (effective period of the effect reception) in which the player is given an operation opportunity is the maximum timing ti14. Can occur over a period of time. Then, when an operation by the player (for example, the operation button 410) is detected within this period (the period from timing ti12 to timing ti14), the operation valid period (valid period of the production reception) is terminated with this as an opportunity. The effect control for operating a specific movable decorative body is executed.

However, in the example shown in FIG. 181, the specific movable decorative body moves by some external force at the timing ti11a before the timing ti12 at which such a specific movable decorative body can perform the effect operation (movement without being based on the effect pattern). Therefore, it is assumed that a specific movable decorative body is not detected at a specific position (original position) at the timing ti11b that should be at a specific position (original position) (movable body abnormality). Also in FIG. 181 (b), the dotted range indicates the period during which the specific movable decorative body is in an abnormal state. Therefore, at the timing ti11b, the restoration process for causing the specific movable decoration body to perform a predetermined restoration operation is executed based on the determination that the movable body abnormality has occurred.

At the timing ti13a, the restoration process for performing a predetermined restoration operation on the specific movable decoration is completed, but at this time, it is detected that the movable decoration has returned to the specific position (origin position) (movable body). If it is determined that the abnormality has been resolved), the memory of the abnormality history will be deleted, and after that, it will be possible to execute the normal movable effect without any abnormality notification. Become so. In this regard, in the example shown in FIG. 181, the operation effective period (timing ti12 to timing ti14) is generated so as to straddle such timing ti13a. Therefore, when the operation by the player is accepted within the period from the timing ti12 to the timing ti13a in the operation valid period, the specific movable decoration is still in the abnormal state, so that the effect operation of the specific movable decoration is performed. The display effect when the movable effect is performed is executed on the game board side effect display device 1600, and the operation effect sound when the movable effect is performed is assigned to the channel and played back, and an abnormality occurs. Various light emitting units including the lamp mounted on the movable decorative body are only emitted in the light emitting mode when the movable effect is performed. On the other hand, when the operation by the player is accepted within the period from the timing ti13a to the timing ti14 in the operation valid period (timing ti12 to timing ti14), the abnormal state of the specific movable decoration is caused by the restoration process. If it is resolved, the usual effect control (movable body, display effect, effect sound, light emission) will be executed, including the effect operation of the specific movable decorative body. In this explanatory example, it is assumed that a movable body abnormality occurs only in a specific movable decorative body (one movable decorative body) and the restoration process corresponding to the abnormality is executed. .. That is, when a plurality of movable decorations including a specific movable decoration are executing the restoration process, even if the operation by the player is accepted within the period of timing ti13a to timing ti14, it is specific. The effecting operation of the movable decorative body is not always performed, but this will be described later with reference to FIGS. 182 and 183.

However, in the example shown in FIG. 181, it is assumed that the return of the movable decorative body to the specific position (origin position) is not detected (determined that the movable body abnormality has been resolved) and the recovery fails at the timing ti13a. doing. Therefore, after the timing ti13a, as long as the RAM is not cleared and the power supply is continued, the game and the effect are advanced while maintaining the abnormal state without performing a predetermined restoration operation.

Further, as described above, a situation in which an abnormality (movable body abnormality) occurs in the specific movable decoration body even though it is not the timing when the specific movable decoration body is operated based on the effect pattern according to the result of the jackpot determination. It can be said that there is a possibility that an abnormality has been detected because a specific movable decorative body has been removed from a specific position (origin position) due to a fraudulent act such as a rattling act or a wire entry. Moreover, the timing ti13a is a situation in which the abnormality of the movable body is not resolved by some external force even in the restoration process of performing a predetermined restoration operation on a specific movable decorative body, and there is a possibility that a fraudulent act has been performed. It can be said that it is increasing more and more.

Therefore, at this timing ti13a, although the symbol variation (specific effect pattern) is being executed, the notification process according to the abnormality of the movable body is executed. That is, in this case, in the channel, in addition to the various effect sounds corresponding to the specific effect pattern being assigned and reproduced according to the progress of the effect content, the abnormal notification sound is played over the predetermined time on the reproduction channels 00, 01. It will be assigned to and played. Further, in the display area of the game board side effect display device 1600, in addition to the display effect corresponding to the specific effect pattern being developed and executed as it is, the display at the time of abnormality corresponding to the abnormality of the movable body (for example, " "An abnormality has occurred in the movable production unit 3200 in the back") will be executed. In addition, in various light emitting parts, as a mode corresponding to the abnormality of the movable body, some light emitting parts are made to emit light in an abnormal mode, and the other light emitting parts are made to emit light in a normal manner according to the progress of the production content. It will emit light.

According to the examples of FIGS. 180 and 181 even if the same movable body abnormality occurs during one symbol change, at least the period during which the control related to the effect operation of the movable decorative body based on the change pattern is executed. When the movable body abnormality occurs during the process, it is unlikely that a fraudulent act has been performed, and there is a possibility of a failure during the effect operation. Therefore, the effect is output with priority over the abnormality notification. .. On the other hand, if the movable body abnormality suddenly occurs when the control related to the effect operation of the movable decorative body based on the fluctuation pattern is not executed, there is a high possibility that a fraudulent act is being performed and the abnormality is more than the effect. It has a characteristic configuration assuming that it may be more important to output a notification.

In the example shown in FIG. 181, the notification process according to the movable body abnormality is not performed at the timing ti11b, and the notification process according to the movable body abnormality is performed at the timing ti13a in which the restoration process is executed but the movable body abnormality is not resolved. I decided to do. However, in the timing ti11b, the movable body abnormality is detected even though the specific movable decorative body cannot operate based on the effect pattern, and even this alone causes a fraudulent act such as a rattling act or a wire entry. Since it can be said that there is a high possibility that the wire has been damaged, the notification sound corresponding to the abnormality of the movable body may be started to be output at this timing ti11b. At this time, the notification by the display or the notification by the lamp may also be performed. That is, even when the movable processing based on the effect pattern during the symbol change is not executed, if the movable body moves from the original position due to a rattling action or a wire approach, the symbol change starts or changes. Without waiting for the restoration processing timing at the end, at that point (in the middle of the symbol change), the execution trigger of "restoration processing for movable bodies that have not been restored to normal (movable bodies that are not in the original position)" However, when the restoration process is performed (or when the restoration process fails to restore the movable body to normal), an abnormality notification sound corresponding to the abnormality of the movable body is assigned to the channel and played. It is supposed to be done. Alternatively, when the movable body moves from the original position due to a rattling action or a wire approach, it is possible to execute a process of moving the movable body by a driving force from a drive source (motor, etc.) (movable process not based on an effect pattern). It may be moved to the in-situ position within this process. In this case, when the movable body cannot be moved to the original position by such a movable process, even if the symbol is in the process of changing, the movable body that is not in the original position at that time is targeted. The execution opportunity of "restoration process" is established. Then, when the restoration process is performed (or when the restoration process fails to restore the movable body to the normal position (return to the original position)), an abnormality notification sound corresponding to the abnormality of the movable body is assigned to the channel. Will be played.

The point is that, regarding the notification processing according to the abnormality of the movable body, within the period when the symbol is changed, "the specific movable decorative body does not perform the directing operation based on the directing pattern, but the specific movable decorative body does not perform the directing operation. An abnormality has occurred in the specific movable decoration as a necessary condition, and "an abnormality has occurred in the specific movable decoration while the specific movable decoration is performing the production operation based on the effect pattern". It is important that the above is not executed as a sufficient condition, so that the person who commits the cheating is restrained from committing the cheating, but the legitimate player is being executed. It will be expected to avoid adversely affecting the production of. In addition, as a condition for performing the notification processing according to the movable body abnormality within the period in which the symbol is changed, "the specific movable decoration is not performing the effect operation based on the effect pattern, but the specific movable decoration is not performed. After adopting at least "an abnormality has occurred in the body", for example, "failure in the restoration process performed in response to the abnormality" or "occurred when the abnormality occurred under a specific situation". It is possible to adopt such as as a further condition.

Further, in the examples shown in FIGS. 180 and 181 it is determined whether or not an abnormality has occurred in the specific movable decoration within the process of operating the specific movable decoration according to the effect pattern. However, if an abnormality occurs when operating a specific movable decorative body according to the effect pattern, the notification process according to the movable body abnormality is not performed as a trigger, so that the specific movable body is movable. It may not be determined whether or not an abnormality has occurred in the specific movable decorative body in the process of operating the decorative body according to the effect pattern. In this case, it is desirable that the determination as to whether or not an abnormality has occurred in the movable decorative body is performed at a predetermined timing or at a predetermined time when the movable decorative body is visited regularly.

Further, the method for detecting a movable body abnormality is not limited to detecting the position of the movable decorative body to be detected. For example, when an actuator such as a motor for operating the movable decorative body is overloaded, the movable body abnormality is detected. Other methods such as detection may be adopted. That is, in this case, in the example of FIG. 180, an actuator such as a motor that operates the movable decorative body is overloaded at the timing ti17, whereby the movable body abnormality is detected. Further, in the example of FIG. 181, an actuator such as a motor for operating the movable decorative body is overloaded at the timing ti11b, whereby the movable body abnormality is detected.

Further, in the examples shown in FIGS. 180 and 181, a specific movable decorative body is illustrated as a production operation of a specific movable decorative body at a timing when the player operates it, but the specific movable decorative body is produced at a specific timing determined by the effect pattern. May be produced.

In addition, among the notifications corresponding to the abnormality of the movable body, the abnormality notification sound is assigned to the channel and played for a predetermined time, but during this playback period, the volume of the effect sound is up to a specific value (0). You may perform the process of lowering.

If the abnormality notification is not executed under the sufficient condition that "an abnormality has occurred in the specific movable decoration while the specific movable decoration is performing the production operation based on the effect pattern", the abnormality notification is not executed thereafter. However, even if the abnormal state is not resolved and remains, it is desirable that the abnormality notification is not performed at least as long as the RAM is not cleared and the power supply is continued. In addition, it is desirable that the game and the production proceed while maintaining the abnormal state without performing a predetermined restoration operation.

After the abnormality notification sound is assigned to the playback channels 00 and 01 for a predetermined time and played by the notification processing according to the movable body abnormality, the playback channels 00 and 01 are empty channels even if the movable body abnormality remains. When the game is started in this state, it is desirable that the effect sound is output in a non-suppressed manner even if the movable body abnormality remains.

In the above explanatory example, even in a situation where the movable effect based on the effect pattern is not executed, when the predetermined condition is satisfied, the effect restore operation is performed on the effect movable body in which the movable abnormality has occurred. In this regard, if the restoration is successful in the restoration operation, even if the effect movable body different from the effect movable body in which the movement abnormality occurs is performed, the movable process is performed to test whether the effect can be operated properly. good. That is, as a result of performing the restoration operation on the effect movable body in which the movement abnormality has occurred, if this fails, it is possible to recognize that there is a high possibility that fraudulent activity has been performed. However, as a result of performing the restoration operation on the production movable body in which the movement abnormality has occurred, if this is successful, it is difficult to understand whether or not there is a high possibility of cheating. It will be. Therefore, if the restoration is successful in the restoration operation, a fraudulent act is performed through the movement process to test whether the production movable body different from the production movable body in which the movement abnormality has occurred can be operated properly. It is desirable to continue the determination of whether or not there is a high possibility. Even if the restoration fails in the restoration operation, such a movable process may be further performed.

The restoration operation performed when the movable effect based on the effect pattern is not executed and the restore operation performed when an abnormality occurs in the situation where the movable effect based on the effect pattern is executed are the processing contents related to the restore operation. It is desirable that (for example, the number of retries) be different from each other.

[Restoration processing of multiple movable ornaments]
As described above, in a gaming machine in which the number of channels is finite, even if a special result is obtained by the judgment by the judgment means according to the winning, there is no vacancy in the channel to which the sound data is assigned. In (the situation where the number of free channels is 0), it is not possible to assign a special sound corresponding to the special result obtained to the channel, and there is a concern that the game interest may be deteriorated due to the inability to output this. Therefore, conventionally, even if a movable body abnormality occurs in any of a plurality of movable decorative bodies (movable decorative bodies having different drive sources and are provided separately), common abnormal sound data (one abnormality). By assigning (sound data) to channels and playing them, it is possible to prevent the number of channels used from becoming unnecessarily large even in a situation where movable body abnormalities occur simultaneously for multiple movable decorative bodies. rice field. It should be noted that the movable body abnormality is a state in which the movable body cannot operate properly, and is the same as that illustrated in "Abnormality notification while the production according to the production pattern is being performed". be.

However, in recent years, the number of movable decorative bodies mounted on a gaming machine has increased, and simply associating common abnormal sound data (one abnormal sound data) with all movable decorative bodies is sufficient for the game. It is becoming difficult to properly notify the state of the machine. Therefore, in the pachinko machine 1 according to this embodiment, first, a plurality of movable decorative bodies are divided into two or more groups, and different abnormality notification sounds are transmitted to channels depending on which of those groups the movable decorative bodies belong to. By assigning and making it playable, it is possible to appropriately notify the state of the pachinko machine 1 even when the number of movable decorative bodies mounted on the pachinko machine 1 is increasing.

In this example as well, when a movable body abnormality occurs, as described in the above-mentioned example of "abnormality notification while the effect is being performed according to the effect pattern" (see FIGS. 180 and 181). Is processed. Therefore, also in this example, even if various games (design fluctuation, big hit game, etc.) occur during the period of execution and this is detected, the pachinko machine 1 notifies (output of the notification sound). , Display at the time of abnormality in the display area of the effect display device 1600 on the game board side, lighting at the time of abnormality by various lamps, etc.) can be executed. Similarly, during the period in which various games (design variation, jackpot game, etc.) according to the jackpot determination are executed, at least the process of operating the movable decorative body by the effect control by the peripheral control board 1510 (variation pattern). If an abnormality is detected in the movable body while the (effect pattern) or the movable body drive process for operating the movable decorative body is performed based on the effect pattern during the big hit game, the pachinko machine 1 notifies (the effect process). The output of the notification sound, the display at the time of abnormality in the display area of the effect display device 1600 on the game board side, the lighting at the time of abnormality by various lamps, etc.) are not performed.

However, in this example, when a movable body abnormality occurs in a plurality of movable decorative bodies at the same time, only one abnormal sound data assigned to the channel and set to the playback state corresponds to a specific group among the above groups. On the other hand, it is decided to execute a process of causing the restoration operation to be performed on all of the plurality of movable decorative bodies in which the abnormality has occurred. According to such a configuration, even if a movable body abnormality occurs in a plurality of movable decorative bodies, it is expected to reduce the risk of running out of empty channels by giving a margin to the channels. In addition to this, it will be possible to quickly recover from abnormalities for each movable decorative body, and it will be expected that the channel usage time will be reduced by improving the efficiency of the processing itself when an abnormality occurs. .. Regarding the contents of the restoration process and each process at the time of success or failure, the above-mentioned example of "abnormality notification while the effect is being performed according to the effect pattern" (see FIGS. 180 and 181). ) Is the same.

Here, as a mode for dividing the plurality of movable decorative bodies into two or more groups, it is required that the mode is suitable for notifying the state of the pachinko machine 1, and is provided on the door frame 3 side, for example. A plurality of frame-side movable decorations (not shown) and a plurality of board-side movable decorations provided on the game board 5 side (for example, back front decoration unit 3100, back middle movable production unit 3200, back left movable production unit 3300, back) When divided into two groups (right movable effect unit 3400, back upper movable effect unit 3500, back lower movable effect unit 3700, etc.), the frame side movable decorative body that can be contacted without opening the door frame 3 is abnormal. It is possible to transmit to the hall side depending on the type of abnormality notification sound, whether an abnormality has occurred in the movable decorative body on the board side, which is difficult to contact unless the door frame 3 is opened. become. In other words, if an abnormality occurs in the movable decorative body on the board side, it can be said that there is a high possibility that fraudulent activity has been performed to the extent that contact is more difficult than in the case where the movable decorative body on the frame side has an abnormality. Therefore, by outputting the notification sound based on such grouping, the notification sound corresponds to the abnormality of the moving body, but depending on the type, the player does not notice it (unpleasant feelings). It becomes possible to secretly notify the hall side that the pachinko machine 1 is in a situation where the degree of possibility of fraud is high.

Then, when a movable body abnormality occurs in the pachinko machine 1 according to this embodiment, as a notification process by the pachinko machine 1, in addition to the output of the above notification sound corresponding to the movable body abnormality, the game board side effect display is also performed. As described above, it is possible to execute the display at the time of abnormality in the display area of the device 1600. In this regard, in this explanatory example, a plurality of movable decorative bodies are divided into two or more groups as a notification mode by display on the game board side effect display device 1600 among the notification processes according to the abnormality of the movable body, and any of those groups. It is desirable to display different notifications depending on whether or not an abnormality has occurred in the movable decorative body belonging to. However, the above-mentioned "notification by display" is inferior to the diffusion function for the occurrence of an abnormality as compared with the case of the above-mentioned "notification by sound", whereas the information transmission function for notifying the abnormality contents in more detail is excellent. It has the above-mentioned properties. Therefore, in the above-mentioned "notification by display", the above-mentioned grouping is performed in a manner different from the case of the above-mentioned "notification by sound" in a manner in which the information transmission function is more exerted, by utilizing the difference in its nature. Therefore, it is desirable to display differently depending on which of the movable decorations belonging to the independently divided groups has an abnormality.

That is, in this case, for example, there are cases where a movable body abnormality occurs in the movable decorative body A and a case where a movable body abnormality occurs in the movable decorative body B, and the movable decorative bodies A and B are grouped into either group. Depending on the presence, "Although the abnormality notification sound to be reproduced is the same regardless of which movable body abnormality occurs, the notification content displayed on the game board side effect display device 1600 is Is the first notification mode in which different displays are performed, and the second notification mode in which the abnormal notification sound to be reproduced and the notification content to be displayed are the same regardless of which movable body abnormality occurs. , And "a third notification mode in which the abnormal notification sound to be reproduced and the notification content to be displayed are different from each other regardless of the occurrence of any movable body abnormality". Therefore, it becomes possible to provide a more detailed notification mode by the notification based on the two different contents of the sound and the display.

FIG. 182 shows an example of the allocation status of each channel when a movable body abnormality occurs simultaneously in a plurality of movable decorative bodies at a specific timing during the period in which the symbol changes, and the situation on the movable decorative body side. It is a time chart.

As shown in FIG. 182 (a), during the period in which the symbol variation (specific effect pattern) according to the result of the jackpot determination is being executed, at the timing tj11, the game board side effect display device 1600 The sound of "BGM reproduction" corresponding to the specific effect pattern in which the effect is being produced is assigned to the reproduction channels 02 and 03 and is already reproduced (here, stereo reproduction).

In this symbol variation (specific effect pattern), at the timing tj13, the operation valid period (valid period of the effect reception) in which the player is given an operation opportunity may occur over a period up to the timing tj15 at the maximum. Then, when an operation by the player (for example, the operation button 410) is detected within this period (the period from timing tj13 to timing tj15), the operation valid period (valid period of the production reception) is terminated with this as an opportunity. The effect control for operating a specific movable decorative body is executed. If the operation by the player (for example, the operation button 410) is not detected within the operation valid period (valid period of the effect reception), the effect control for operating the specific movable decorative body is executed after the timing tj15. Alternatively, the effect control itself for operating a specific movable decorative body may not be executed.

In this regard, in the example shown in FIG. 182, it is assumed that the operation by the player is received at the timing tj14. Therefore, at the timing tj14, originally, based on the operation received by the player, the movable body drive process is executed to perform the movable effect of producing the specific movable decorative body, and the channel is performed. The effect sound corresponding to the movable effect is assigned to 08 and 09 and played back.

However, in the example shown in FIG. 182, at the timing tj11, the plurality of movable decorative bodies move (operate without being based on the effect pattern) due to some external force, and the above-mentioned specific movable decorative body can perform the effect operation more than the timing tj13. It is assumed that those movable body abnormalities are detected at the previous timing tj12. In addition, in FIG. 182 (b) and FIG. 183 (b) described later, the dotted range indicates the period during which each movable decorative body is in an abnormal state. Therefore, at the timing tj12, the above-mentioned restoration process for causing each movable decorative body in which the movable body abnormality has occurred to perform a predetermined restoration operation is executed based on the determination that the movable body abnormality has occurred. Therefore, in relation to this restoration process, even if the operation by the player is received at the timing tj14, the specific movable decorative body is not necessarily operated. In the example shown in FIG. 182, the board-side movable decorative body A provided on the game board 5 side, the board-side movable decorative body B provided on the game board 5 side, and the board-side movable decorative body C provided on the game board 5 side. , The frame-side movable decorative body D provided on the door frame 3 side, the frame-side movable decorative body E provided on the door frame 3 side, and the frame-side movable decorative body F provided on the door frame 3 side have abnormal movable bodies. It is assumed that each situation has occurred.

More specifically, in the restoration process according to the example shown in FIG. 182, first, the board-side movable decorations A, B, and C provided on the game board 5 side and the frame-side movable decorations provided on the door frame 3 side. The processing mode is different from that of D, E, and F. For example, with respect to the board-side movable decorative bodies A, B, and C provided on the game board 5 side, a plurality of movable decorative bodies are arranged in a relatively narrow space, and if they operate simultaneously, interference due to contact with each other may occur. Therefore, after the timing tj12, the restoration process is performed based on a predetermined order so that the operation periods do not overlap with each other. On the other hand, the frame-side movable decorative bodies D, E, and F provided on the door frame 3 side operate by utilizing the space outside the pachinko machine 1, and the board-side movable decorative bodies A, B, and C. Since there is no concern that they will interfere with each other due to their movements, including the relationship with the above, the restoration process is performed at the same time at the timing tj12 so that the movable decorative body can be quickly restored to an abnormal state.

In such a configuration, the restoration processing of the board-side movable decorative bodies A, B, and C provided on the game board 5 side is performed for a long time from the timing tj12 to the timing tj18, whereas the door frame 3 side In the frame-side movable decorative bodies D, E, and F provided in the above, the restoration process can be completed in a relatively short time from timing tj12 to timing tj16.

However, in the example shown in FIG. 182, the board-side movable decorative body provided on the game board 5 side is provided until the operation valid period (valid period of the effect reception), which gives the player an operation opportunity, ends. It is assumed that none of the restoration processing of A, B, and C and the restoration processing of the frame-side movable decorative bodies D, E, and F provided on the door frame 3 side are completed. Therefore, when the specific movable decorative body corresponds to any of the board-side movable decorative bodies A, B, and C, it corresponds to any of the board-side movable decorative bodies A, B, and C, and the above operation is effective. Regardless of the timing of the production reception within the period (valid period of the production reception), the production is processed so as not to perform the production operation triggered by the production reception.

That is, in this case, if the effect reception occurs within the period during which the restoration process for the specific movable decoration is executed, it is clear that the specific movable decoration cannot be operated as an opportunity. However, even if the production reception occurs after the restoration process for a specific movable decoration is completed, it is possible to interact with other board-side movable decorations that are still in the stage of executing the restoration process. There is a concern that it will interfere. Therefore, in the example shown in FIG. 182, when the specific movable decorative body corresponds to any of the board-side movable decorative bodies A, B, and C, any of them within the operation valid period (timing tj13 to timing tj15). Even if the operation by the player is accepted at the timing of, the effect operation of the specific movable decorative body is not performed, and the display effect when the movable effect is performed is executed on the game board side effect display device 1600, and the channel is displayed. On the other hand, the effect sound (operation effect sound) when the movable effect is performed is assigned and reproduced, and the movable effect is performed by various light emitting units including the lamp mounted on the movable decorative body in which the abnormality occurs. It will only emit light in the manner in which it emits light. In short, if a specific movable decorative body corresponds to any of the board-side movable decorative bodies A, B, and C, the relevant restoration process is completed after all the restoration processes are completed (all restoration processes are completed successfully). Only when the timing for performing the effect operation of the specific movable decorative body has arrived, the execution of the effect operation is permitted.

On the other hand, when the specific movable decorative body corresponds to any of the frame-side movable decorative bodies D, E, F, it corresponds to any of the frame-side movable decorative bodies D, E, F, and the above. It is processed so that whether or not to perform the production operation triggered by the production reception is changed depending on the timing of the production reception within the operation valid period (valid period of the production reception). It becomes.

That is, in this case, first, if the specific movable decorative body is the frame-side movable decorative body E, the timings tj13 to tj15 at which the specific movable decorative body can perform the effect operation after the restoration process is completed (successful in the restoration process). Will definitely arrive, and even if the other movable ornaments A to C, D, and F are in the process of being restored, there is no concern that they will interfere with each other. Therefore, in the example shown in FIG. 182, when the specific movable decorative body corresponds to the frame-side movable decorative body E, the operation by the player is accepted within the operation valid period (timing tj13 to timing tj15). Even if this is the case, the effect operation of a specific movable decorative body is performed, the display effect when the movable effect is performed is executed by the game board side effect display device 1600, and the movable effect is performed for the channel. The effect sound (operation effect sound) when the operation is performed is assigned and reproduced, and various light emitting parts including the lamp mounted on the movable decorative body in which the abnormality occurs are in the light emitting mode when the movable effect is performed. It will emit light.

On the other hand, if the specific movable decorative body is the frame-side movable decorative body D, the operation effective period (timing tj13 to timing tj15) is generated so as to straddle the timing at which the restoration process is completed. Therefore, when the operation by the player is accepted within the operation valid period before the restoration process is completed, the specific movable decoration is still in an abnormal state, so that the specific movable decoration is in an abnormal state. The body effect operation is not performed, the display effect when the movable effect is performed is executed on the game board side effect display device 1600, and the effect sound when the movable effect is performed is assigned to the channel and reproduced. Therefore, various light emitting units including the lamp mounted on the abnormally generated movable decorative body are only emitted in the light emitting mode when the movable effect is performed. On the other hand, when the operation by the player is accepted within the period after the end of the restoration process (successful restoration process) in the operation valid period, the other movable decorative bodies A to C, F perform the restoration process. Since there is no concern of interfering with them even during the execution of, the normal production control (movable body, display production, production sound, light emission) including the production operation of a specific movable decorative body. Will be executed.

On the other hand, if the specific movable decorative body is the frame-side movable decorative body F, the operation valid period (timing tj13 to timing tj15) does not come after the restoration processing is completed (successful restoration processing). .. Therefore, in the example shown in FIG. 182, when the specific movable decorative body corresponds to the board-side movable decorative body F, the operation by the player is accepted within the operation valid period (timing tj13 to timing tj15). Even if it is performed, the effect operation of the specific movable decorative body is not performed, the display effect when the movable effect is performed is executed in the game board side effect display device 1600, and the movable effect is performed for the channel. The effect sound (operation effect sound) of the time is assigned and reproduced, and various light emitting units including the lamp mounted on the movable decorative body in which the abnormality occurs are emitted in the light emission mode when the movable effect is performed. Will stay in.

Here, the notification processing according to the example shown in FIG. 182 will be described. In this example, when the notification sound corresponding to the abnormality of the movable body is notified, a plurality of board-side movable decorative bodies A and B provided on the game board 5 side are described. , C and a plurality of frame-side movable decorative bodies D, E, and F provided on the door frame 3 side are divided into two groups, and the abnormally generated movable decorative body belongs to any of these groups. Different notification sounds are output depending on the presence.

In this regard, in the example shown in FIG. 182, it is assumed that the movable body abnormality occurs simultaneously in the board-side movable decorative body and the frame-side movable decorative body. However, such a situation cannot usually occur while the proper game is being played, and cannot occur as a result of cheating. Therefore, the hall side is required to check the operation of the accessory and repair it. It is likely that you are in a special situation, such as manually tampering with all movable ornaments. In any case, in such a special situation, the notification process itself may be troublesome, and it is required to terminate the notification state at an early stage.

Therefore, in the example shown in FIG. 182, it was detected that the movable body abnormalities occurred in the board-side movable decorative bodies A, B, and C and the frame-side movable decorative bodies D, E, and F, respectively. In the timing tj12, the restoration process on the board side movable decoration side and the restoration process on the frame side movable decoration side are started at the same time as described above, whereas the notification sound output is frame side movable. The abnormal notification sound common to the frame side corresponding to the decorative bodies D, E, and F is not assigned to the channel, and the abnormal notification sound common to the board side corresponding to the movable decorative bodies A, B, and C on the board side is assigned to the channel. I try to keep it output.

That is, the time during which the abnormality notification sound corresponding to the abnormality of the movable body is reproduced is the time until the abnormality of the movable decorative body to be notified is resolved, or a predetermined predetermined time after the abnormality notification sound is output. It is set as the time until the time (for example, 30 seconds common to the board side and the frame side) elapses. Therefore, of the board-side movable decorations A, B, and C and the frame-side movable decorations D, E, and F, the side that takes a long time to complete the restoration process is "board-side movable decoration A, By assigning only the "abnormality notification sound common to the board side corresponding to the B and C sides" to the channel, the "abnormality notification sound common to the board side corresponding to the movable decorative bodies A, B and C on the board side" can be generated. It is now possible to end the restoration process of the frame-side movable decorations D, E, and F during playback, and "Abnormality notification common to the board side corresponding to the board-side movable decorations A, B, and C". After the output of "sound" is completed, it is possible to avoid being required to output the "abnormality notification sound common to the frame side corresponding to the frame side movable decorative bodies D, E, F side". The notification process can be terminated in a simpler manner.

Therefore, in the example shown in FIG. 182, while the board-side movable decorations A, B, and C and the frame-side movable decorations D, E, and F are being restored, the board-side movable decoration A, The "abnormality notification sound common to the board side corresponding to the board side movable decorations A, B, C side" is assigned to the channel and played over the period until the timing tj18 when all the restoration processes of B and C are completed. Therefore, the "abnormality notification sound common to the frame side corresponding to the frame side movable decorative bodies D, E, F side" is not reproduced. At this time, as described above, the control of assigning the effect sound to the channel is performed as usual.

On the other hand, in the notification mode based on the display on the game board side effect display device 1600 among the notification processes according to the abnormality of the movable body, the above-mentioned "notification by sound" is performed by utilizing the difference in properties from the above-mentioned notification sound. The above grouping is performed in a mode different from that in which the information transmission function is more exerted, and different display is performed depending on which of the independently divided groups the movable decorative body belongs to. ing. That is, in this case, for example, assuming that the frame-side movable decorative body E is grouped with the frame-side movable decorative body F, even if the restoration process of the frame-side movable decorative body E is completed, it corresponds to this. The "notification by display" is maintained, and the "notification by display" is terminated at the timing when the restoration process of the frame-side movable decorative body F is completed. Similarly to this, for example, if the board-side movable decorative body A is grouped with the frame-side movable decorative body D, even if the restoration process of the frame-side movable decorative body A is completed, this will be applied. The corresponding "notification by display" is maintained, and the "notification by display" is terminated at the timing when the restoration process of the frame-side movable decorative body D is completed. Therefore, even if the restoration process of the specific movable decoration is completed first, depending on the execution status of the restoration process of the movable decoration grouped with the specific movable decoration, the restoration process may be higher than that of the specific movable decoration. It is possible that the "notification by display" corresponding to the movable decorative body for which the restoration process has been completed will be terminated first.

According to the example of FIG. 182, as the notification sound corresponding to the movable body abnormality, a plurality of notification sounds according to the type of the movable decorative body in which the movable body abnormality has occurred are prepared. Then, when a movable body abnormality occurs simultaneously in a plurality of movable decorative bodies corresponding to each of the notification sounds, only one of the plurality of notification sounds can be reproduced, but the restoration process is in the reproduction state. The movable decorative body corresponding to the notification sound in the above is not limited to the movable decorative body corresponding to the notification sound, and the movable decorative body not corresponding to the notification sound is also executed during the reproduction period. Moreover, as a movable decorative body corresponding to the notification sound in the reproduced state, when a plurality of movable decorative bodies are in an abnormal state, these movable decorative bodies are individually restored according to a predetermined order. On the other hand, as a movable decorative body that does not correspond to the notification sound in the reproduced state, when a plurality of movable decorative bodies are in an abnormal state, the restoration process applied to these movable decorative bodies is executed at the same time. As a result, for the movable decoration that does not correspond to the notification sound in the reproduction state, the total time required for the restoration process can be shortened as compared with the movable decoration that corresponds to the notification sound in the reproduction state, and a plurality of movable decorations can be shortened. While one of the notification sounds is being played, all the movable ornaments can be returned from the abnormal state to the normal state, and the second notification sound is output. It will be possible to avoid it.

That is, in this embodiment, a plurality of movable decorative bodies are divided into a board-side movable decorative body and a frame-side movable decorative body, and restoration processing according to each group is performed at the same time. Not limited to. In short, a plurality of movable decorative bodies (A to F in the above example) can be operated in two or more groups (in the above example, the board side) that can be operated without being affected by the operating conditions of the movable decorative bodies belonging to other groups. For a plurality of movable decorations (DF) that are classified into (frame side) and the restoration process can be executed independently for each group, and that belong to at least one group (frame side in the above example). If all of them can be restored and operated at the same time by selecting them as movable decorative bodies that can operate without being influenced by each other's operating conditions, refer to FIGS. 182 and 183. It is possible to configure it so that the described effects are obtained.

In the example shown in FIG. 182, it is desirable that the determination as to whether or not an abnormality has occurred in the movable decorative body is performed at a predetermined timing or at a predetermined time when the movable decorative body is visited regularly. Further, the method for detecting a movable body abnormality is not limited to detecting the position of the movable decorative body to be detected. For example, when an actuator such as a motor for operating the movable decorative body is overloaded, the movable body abnormality is detected. Other methods such as detection may be adopted.

Further, in the example shown in FIG. 182, a specific movable decorative body is produced at a timing when the player operates it, but the specific movable decorative body is produced at a specific timing determined by the effect pattern. It may be something to make.

In addition, among the notifications corresponding to the abnormality of the movable body, the abnormality notification sound is assigned to the channel and played for a predetermined time, but during this playback period, the volume of the effect sound is up to a specific value (0). You may perform the process of lowering.

Further, in the example shown in FIG. 182, movable body abnormalities occurred in the board-side movable decorative bodies A, B, and C and the frame-side movable decorative bodies D, E, and F, respectively, during the period in which the symbol variation was executed. Although the explanation is based on the assumption of the situation, the symbol change does not necessarily have to be executed. That is, during the execution period of the jackpot game or when the game of the special symbol is waiting for progress (for example, in the demo screen), the board-side movable decorations A, B, C and the frame-side movable decoration D, Even when a movable body abnormality occurs in E and F, each process according to the movable body abnormality is performed in the same manner as the example described with reference to FIG. 182.

Further, in the example shown in FIG. 182, all of the board-side movable decorative bodies A, B, and C provided on the game board 5 side are restored based on a predetermined order so that the operation periods do not overlap with each other. And said. However, if a plurality of movable decorative bodies that do not interfere with each other due to contact with each other even if they operate simultaneously are included in the board-side movable decorative body, the board-side movable decorative body shall be arranged in a predetermined order. During the restoration process, only some movable ornaments that do not interfere with each other due to contact may be restored at the same time.

Further, in the example shown in FIG. 182, the timing at which it is determined whether or not a movable body abnormality has occurred in the board-side movable decorative bodies A, B, and C, and the timing at which the frame-side movable decorative bodies D, E, and F have a movable body abnormality. It is assumed that the timing at which the occurrence is determined is the same, but these timings may be different. For example, as shown in FIG. 183, after it was determined that a movable body abnormality occurred in the board-side movable decorative bodies A, B, and C, a movable body abnormality occurred in the frame-side movable decorative bodies D, E, and F. Even if it is determined to that effect, the restoration processing of the frame-side movable decorations D, E, and F is completed at a timing earlier than the restoration processing of the board-side movable decorations A, B, and C is completed. As long as there is a relationship, after the output of the "abnormality notification sound common to the board side corresponding to the board side movable decorations A, B, C side" is completed, "the frame side movable decoration bodies D, E, F side It can be avoided that the output request of "corresponding abnormal notification sound common to the frame side" is required.

Conversely, in the example shown in FIG. 182, after it is determined that a movable body abnormality has occurred in the frame-side movable decorative bodies D, E, and F, a movable body abnormality has occurred in the board-side movable decorative bodies A, B, and C. The processing structure may be set so as to determine that the processing has been performed. However, in this case, when it is determined that a movable body abnormality has occurred in the frame-side movable decorative bodies D, E, F, notification processing according to the movable body abnormality and restoration processing of the frame-side movable decorative bodies D, E, F are performed. After waiting for it to be determined that a movable body abnormality has occurred in the board-side movable decorative bodies A, B, and C, the board-side movable decorative bodies A, B, and C are supported. It is desirable to perform the restoration processing of the board-side movable decorations A, B, and C and the restoration processing of the frame-side movable decorations D, E, and F, respectively, while the notification processing is performed. As a result of waiting for the process of determining whether or not the movable body abnormality occurred in the board-side movable decorative bodies A, B, and C, no movable body abnormality occurred in the board-side movable decorative bodies A, B, and C. In this case, the frame-side movable decorative bodies D, E, and F are restored while the notification processing corresponding to the frame-side movable decorative bodies D, E, and F is performed.

When a specific movable body among the board-side movable bodies is treated as an "abnormal state that is not subjected to the effect operation", the board-side movable body itself is normal but has become an abnormal state. It becomes possible to include a movable body that is not used for the production operation in relation to the "specific movable body". On the other hand, in the frame-side movable body, even if any of the board-side movable bodies is treated as an "abnormal state that is not subjected to the effect operation", it is regarded as a "specific movable body" that has become an abnormal state. There is nothing that is not used for the production operation due to the above, and if it is normal, all of them are used for the production operation. Further, even if any of the frame-side movable bodies is treated as an "abnormal state that is not subjected to the effect operation", the other frame-side movable bodies are produced if they are normal. It is designed to be put into operation. In addition, even if any of the frame-side movable bodies is treated as an "abnormal state that is not subjected to the effect operation", all of them are normal in the board-side movable body. Is being used for the production operation. That is, by adopting a configuration in which the pachinko machine 1 realizes a movable effect in a wider space, it is possible to increase the number of movable bodies provided for the effect operation regardless of the abnormal situation of other movable bodies. It has become like.

For each of the movable bodies illustrated in FIGS. 182 and 183, if a movable abnormality occurs in the production operation according to the production request such as the production pattern or the jackpot production, the restoration operation performed accordingly fails. Even in this case, the abnormality notification sound is not output. However, even if the symbol is changing, when a predetermined condition such as the detection of fraudulent activity is satisfied, the movable body in which the movement abnormality has occurred is made to perform the restoration operation, but the restoration operation is performed. It is desirable to output an abnormality notification sound based on the failure of the restoration even though the restoration operation is performed.

[Automatic multiple operation function (automatic repeated hit function)]
By the way, in the pachinko machine 1, a plurality of operations (such as repeatedly hitting the operation button 410) to a predetermined operation means may be urged to perform a plurality of operation effects according to each of these operations. However, in recent years, during a predetermined validity period in which an operation opportunity for such a plurality of operations (such as repeated hits) is given, the predetermined operation means (operation button 410) does not have to be operated a plurality of times. An automatic multiple operation function (auto) that allows the effect mode to appear when the operation is performed multiple times by simply performing an operation in a long mode (so-called long press, etc.) to maintain the operation state for a relatively long time. It is becoming more and more equipped with a continuous hit function).

In such an automatic multiple operation function (auto continuous striking function), a single operation (one operation in a short time) is performed within a relatively short time when an operation in a long mode such as a so-called long press is performed. ) Is repeated (such as the feeling that fast repeated hits are being made) to make the player remember, which is a player who is not good at multiple operations (slow continuous hitting speed). It can be said that it is important to suppress the deterioration of the game interest of (players, etc.) and to encourage various players to use the function. However, if the effect is simply changed (for example, the operation sound) when the effect is received every time a relatively short time elapses when the player is in the operation state, the player can do the same. Even if you intend to perform an operation by a single push, the short operation time (the time that the operation state is slightly maintained by a single push) becomes slightly longer or shorter, so that the production reception is multiple times. It may occur (multiple operation sounds are generated), or the production reception may occur only once (one operation sound may be generated), and the number of production receptions for one single operation is stable. There is a concern that the interest in the game will decline due to the discomfort caused by not doing so.

In this regard, in the conventional automatic continuous striking function, when an operation is performed by a so-called long press, first, as in the case where an operation is performed by a single press, the effect changes due to the reception of the effect (for example, the operation sound). Etc.) is generated only once. Then, after the first effect change (for example, operation sound) is generated, a new effect reception (operation sound) is not generated until a predetermined interval time longer than a predetermined short time elapses. After waiting for the predetermined interval time to elapse, the effect change (operation sound) when the effect reception is made is repeatedly generated every time the predetermined short time elapses. That is, in this case, since there is a time allowance between the generation of the first production reception (operation sound) and the generation of the second production reception (operation sound), a single push is performed. Whether the operation is repeated within a relatively short time just by performing the so-called long press operation, while avoiding the occurrence of discomfort due to the unstable number of production receptions when the operation is performed by It will be possible to create a production that looks like this.

However, from the player's point of view, it is necessary to allow time between the first production reception (operation sound) and the second production reception (operation sound). It is useless in terms of operation and production, and the number of times the production reception (operation sound) is generated per unit time is reduced by the amount of such wasted time (pseudo repeated hits when a so-called long press operation is performed). There is a concern that the game will be less enjoyable due to the fact that the speed will be slower.

Therefore, in the pachinko machine 1 according to this embodiment, even if the operation for the operation means (for example, the operation button 410) is performed only once in the mode of one-shot operation, the operation for the operation means is long. As in the case where the operation (long press, etc.) is performed, the specific sound associated with the operation on the operation means can be output intermittently. That is, in this case, when an operation is performed on the operating means, it feels as if a single operation (one operation in a short time) is repeatedly performed within a relatively short time regardless of the operation mode. It will be possible to make the player remember (such as the feeling that a fast continuous hit is being performed). As a result, all operation modes are adopted while stabilizing the responsiveness of the effect (whether it is a single effect change or multiple effect changes) when the operation is performed by a single push. Even if there is, it becomes possible to suitably maintain the number of occurrences of the effect change (for example, operation sound) per unit time.

FIG. 184 is a time chart showing an example of control contents for realizing such an automatic multiple operation function (auto continuous striking function). Here, it is assumed that the operation button 410 is adopted as the operation means. Further, also in other drawings including FIG. 184, the white specific sound output in the drawing indicates the specific sound generated based on the effect reception corresponding to the operation of the button 410. The black specific sound output in the figure indicates the specific sound generated following the white specific sound output in the figure while the production reception is not occurring when the operation button 410 is not operated. Is. It is desirable that the volume and timbre of these specific sounds are the same without any difference.

First, in the example shown in FIG. 184 (a), the operation state is maintained only for a short time at the timing tx11 in the predetermined valid period in which the operation opportunity of the multiple operations (continuous hits, etc.) is given (single operation). It is assumed that one operation is performed in. Therefore, at the timing tx11, the detection (determination) that the operation has been performed on the operation button 410 is performed, and based on the detection (determination), the output of the specific sound accompanying the operation on the operation button 410 is the same as the output. The process of starting the output of the display (display pattern at the time of operation) accompanying the operation is performed.

As described above, in the pachinko machine 1 according to this embodiment, after the specific sound (for example, "picone") associated with the operation of the operation button 410 is output at the timing tx11, the player's hand is separated from the operation button 410. Even if no operation is performed (in the figure, the period from timing tx12 to tx13), the specific sound (for example, "picone") associated with the operation of the operation button 410 is interrupted in the situation. It can be output as a target.

For example, it is assumed that the operation state (detection state) from the timing tx11 is now terminated at the timing tx12. Then, in the pachinko machine 1 according to this embodiment, first, a grace time TY1 having a predetermined time length is set based on the end of the operation state (detection state). Then, even if no operation by the player is detected until the grace time TY1 elapses, a specific sound (for example, "picone") is generated every time the automation time TY2 shorter than the grace time TY1 elapses. ") Is output so that a specific sound (for example," picone ") associated with the operation of the operation button 410 can be output intermittently.

Here, in the grace time TY1 and the automation time TY2 according to this embodiment, as shown in FIG. 184 (a), 5 times (N times) between the start of the grace time TY1 and the elapse of the grace time TY1. It is set to have a time length that allows a specific minute sound (for example, "picone") to be output. As a result, even if the operation is performed in the form of a single operation within a predetermined valid period in which the operation opportunity of multiple operations (continuous hits, etc.) is given, the specific sound accompanying the operation (sound according to the production reception). Is output for at least 5 times (N times) (one specific sound output at the timing of operation detection, and 4 times (N-) output every time the automation time TY2 elapses even if there is no operation thereafter. It will be output intermittently over one time) and the total number of specific sounds).

In particular, in this embodiment, the grace time TY1 is terminated in the middle of the output of the specific sound (for example, “picone”) (in the example shown in FIG. 184 (a), the grace period is in the middle of the output of the fifth specific sound). Even when the timing tx13) at which the time TY1 ends arrives, a process (output interruption process, etc.) that cuts off the specific sound being output at that timing tx13 (for example, “pico”)) (Such as overwriting with the sound of) is not performed, and even after the timing tx13 arrives, the specific sound that has been output up to that point (in the example shown in FIG. The output (sound type) in the same mode appears. That is, if the specific sound accompanying the operation is interrupted in the middle, it becomes ambiguous whether the operation is received multiple times or not, and in the end, the operation feeling as if the operation was performed multiple times. There is a concern that it will be difficult for the player to remember (it will make you think that it is just a specific sound that is simulated in a non-operation state), but with such a configuration, such a concern is raised. It is expected that the problem will be solved favorably.

Furthermore, in this embodiment, even if the predetermined validity period ends and a new operation is not accepted for production between the start of the grace time TY1 and the elapse of the grace time TY1. Until the grace time TY1 is completed, a specific sound (for example, "picone") is output every time the automation time TY2 arrives. That is, in this case, since the specific sound can be output intermittently even after the predetermined valid period has expired, it is necessary to avoid that the number of times of receiving the production is not stable when the operation by the single push is performed. Not only that, it becomes possible for the player to remember the feeling as if the operation was performed within the period exceeding the predetermined validity period, and it is expected that the game interest will be improved. In this sense, a display (such as a display of the remaining time during which the validity period is continued) is performed so that the player can recognize whether the predetermined validity period is continued or terminated. It can be said that it is more desirable to output the specific sound for the remaining number of times (1 to 4 times) while it is recognizable that the state has been completed.

Regarding the "specific sound output associated with the operation" in the figure, the volume waveform of the specific sound (other sound output) that is output each time the automation time TY2 elapses, rather than the signal waveform associated with the specific sound output. This is a conceptual representation of the excluded waveform). As is clear from the figure, in this embodiment, the automation time TY2 is digested before the time required for the specific sound of the previous output to finish being output to the end elapses, and the specific sound of the previous output is converted to the specific sound of the previous output. On the other hand, the sound data of the new specific sound is output in the form of being overwritten on the specific channel, which makes it possible to output the specific sound continuously and intermittently, as if a fast continuous striking operation is being performed. It will be expected that the player will remember the feeling.

By the way, as the reproduction type of the specific sound, in addition to the mode in which 1SHOT reproduction (corresponding to "1SHOT" in the figure) for reproducing the target sound once is executed every time the automation time TY2 elapses, the target sound is used. It may be a loop reproduction (corresponding to “LOOP” in the figure) that is repeatedly reproduced each time the automation time TY2 elapses. In addition, a mode may be used in which a plurality of specific sounds that are continuously and intermittently output are reproduced as one sound data. In the mode of reproducing a plurality of specific sounds as one sound data, not all the specific sounds are necessarily output as the same single sound, but are sequentially output as a plurality of different single sounds. There may be.

On the other hand, among the examples shown in FIG. 184 (a), regarding the display output of the game board side effect display device 1600, the operation button 410 is also displayed after the operation time display pattern accompanying the operation with respect to the operation button 410 is displayed at the timing tx11. Even if the player's hand is separated from the player and no operation is performed (in the figure, the period from timing tx12 to tx13), the display content of the operation display pattern is advanced multiple times in the situation. It has become something that can be done.

For example, it is assumed that the operation state (detection state) from the timing tx11 is now terminated at the timing tx12. Then, in the pachinko machine 1 according to this embodiment, first, the grace time TY1 having a predetermined time length is set based on the end of the operation state (detection state), as described above. Is. In this regard, in this embodiment, a process of sequentially outputting a plurality of display scenes 1 to 5 (display contents) according to a predetermined time and order from the timing tx11 until the grace time TY1 set above is timed up. By executing, the display content of the operation display pattern can be advanced.

The contents of each of the display scenes 1 to 5 can be set, for example, as the mode shown in FIG. 185. That is, in the example shown in FIG. 185, "display scene 1" is a moving image depicting a ally character holding a sword and trying to pull out the sword, and "display scene 2" is a ally. It is a video that depicts how the character pulls out the sword and cuts off the sword, and "Display Scene 3" is a video that depicts the ally character having a sword fight with the enemy character in the first mode. , "Display scene 4" is a video depicting a friendly character having a sword fight with an enemy character in a second mode, and "display scene 5" is a video in which a friendly character has a third with an enemy character. This is a video that depicts a sword fighting in a mode.

After displaying the operation display pattern accompanying the operation of the operation button 410 at the timing tx11, while the specific sounds are output intermittently, these display scenes 1 to 5 are sequentially displayed, so that the ally character becomes an enemy. It becomes possible for the player to remember the feeling that the production content of fighting the character is progressing in response to a plurality of operations. Note that each of the display scenes 1 to 5 does not necessarily have to be a moving image, but may be a still image. Further, in the game board side effect display device 1600, in addition to displaying the operation display pattern, various effect displays (hold display, operation instruction image, etc.) may be displayed. As one of the effect displays, an image that changes the effect (color change, etc.) each time the effect reception occurs due to the operation by the player may be included, but it recognizes whether or not the effect reception has occurred. To make it difficult, it is important to display the image as a smaller image than the display pattern during operation.

Here, in the operation display pattern (each display scene) and the grace time TY1 according to this embodiment, as shown in FIG. 184 (a), between the start of the grace time TY1 and the elapse of the grace time TY1. It is set to have a time length such that at least 5 (M) display scenes 1 to 5 (display contents) can be sequentially displayed. As a result, even if the operation is performed in the mode of one-shot operation within a predetermined valid period in which the operation opportunity of multiple operations (repeated hits, etc.) is given, at least 5 (M) display contents of the operation display pattern are displayed. ) Minutes (one display scene 1 displayed at the timing of operation detection, and four (M-1 times) display scenes 2 to 5 that are sequentially displayed (progressed) even when there is no operation thereafter. The displayed content will be advanced over (the total number of and).

In particular, in this embodiment, the timing at which the grace time TY1 ends during the output of the display scene (in the example shown in FIG. 184 (a), the timing tx13 at which the grace time TY1 ends during the output of the display scene 5). When the message arrives, unlike the case of the specific sound, the display scene 5 is not displayed to the end, but is interrupted in the form of being chopped at that point to end the operation display pattern. That is, unlike the case of a specific sound without progress, the display content at the time of operation, which has progress in the production content, is displayed if the operation is continued by intentionally interrupting the display scene in the middle of the display scene. It gives the player the impression that he may have been able to make further progress, which is expected to encourage further operations by the player. In this sense, regarding the relationship between the operation display pattern (each display scene) and the grace time TY1, all the display scenes 1 to 5 are not displayed from the start to the end of the grace time TY1. It can be said that it is more desirable to set to to encourage the player to perform further operations. In order to encourage the player to perform further operations, only a part of all the display scenes 1 to 5 should be displayed between the start and the end of the grace time TY1. Is more desirable.

Furthermore, in this embodiment, when the predetermined validity period ends between the start of the grace time TY1 and the elapse of the grace time TY1, and a new operation is not accepted for production, the predetermined validity is performed. At the end of the period (the state where the remaining time of the grace time TY1 is left), the display scene in the output state is interrupted to display the result as the operation display pattern. , This will be described later.

It should be noted that the display scenes 2 to 5 are sequentially displayed and progressed according to a predetermined schedule regardless of the mode of operation after the display scene 1 is displayed. May be preset according to the time from the output of the specific sound to the re-output (automation time TY2), or is set regardless of the time (automation time TY2). It may be a thing. In this sense, display changes such as switching to another display or the occurrence of a new display in the content of each display scene itself (in the example of FIG. 185, display scene 1 states that "from the state where the sword is held, There is a display change due to "video description to the state where the sword is pulled out", and there is a display change due to "effect generation while the ally character fights the enemy character" in the display scene 3). It can be said that it is more desirable. By using a display scene having such a display change, it is possible to make it appear as if the display change in each display scene was caused by the production reception, so that the output timing of the specific sound and the switching timing of the display scene can be made. It is expected that the sense of incongruity will be eliminated even if the above is not strictly matched. Further, as the operation display pattern, it is not always necessary to prepare a plurality of display scenes, and the same display scene may be repeatedly displayed.

On the other hand, in the example shown in FIG. 184 (b), the operation button 410 is operated for a relatively long time at the timing tx21 in the predetermined valid period in which the operation opportunity of the operation (continuous hitting, etc.) is given a plurality of times. It is assumed that the operation is performed in a long mode to be maintained in. Therefore, also in the timing tx21, as in the case of the timing tx11, the detection (determination) that the operation has been performed on the operation button 410 is performed, and based on the detection (determination), the operation on the operation button 410 is performed. The process of starting the output of the specific sound and the output of the display (display pattern at the time of operation) associated with the same operation is performed.

Further, even in the operation maintenance period in which the operation state from the timing tx21 to the timing tx22 is maintained, it is specified every time the automation time TY2 elapses, as in the case of the above-mentioned non-operation period (the period from the timing tx12 to tx13). A sound (for example, "picone") can be output intermittently, and a plurality of display scenes 1 to 5 (display contents) are sequentially output according to a predetermined time and order for operation. The display content of the time display pattern can be developed in the same manner as the example shown in FIG. 184 (a).

That is, in the peripheral control MPU1511a according to this embodiment, first, during the operation maintenance period (the period from the timing tx21 to tx22), it is determined whether or not the operation for the operation button 410 is continued (operation state). Periodic monitoring (determines whether or not the operation state (operation detection state) has been completed (for example, detection of a falling edge in a detection signal)). Then, as long as the operation state is continued, the grace time TY1 having a predetermined time length is not set, and while regular monitoring is performed, "every time the automation time TY2 elapses". "Processing to output a specific sound (for example," picone ")" and "Processing to sequentially output a plurality of display scenes 1 to 5 (display contents) according to a predetermined time and order" are to be performed. In other words, in the operation maintenance period (the period from timing tx21 to tx22), "every time the automation time TY2 elapses, it is determined whether or not the operation is in the operation detection state, and it is determined that the operation is in the operation detection state. Based on this, a process such as "outputting a specific sound (for example," picone ")" or "every time the automation time TY2 elapses, it is determined whether or not the operation is in the state of operation detection, and the state of the operation detection is in effect. No processing such as "advancing the display content based on the judgment" is performed, and "regular monitoring (judgment) of whether or not the operation for the operation button 410 is in a continuous state (operation state)" is performed. And "a process to output a specific sound (for example," picone ") every time the automation time TY2 elapses" and "a plurality of display scenes 1 to 5 (display contents) are sequentially output according to a predetermined time and order". "Processing to make" is performed respectively. The "regular monitoring (judgment) of whether or not the operation of the operation button 410 is in a continuous state (operation state)" is executed as a process executed a plurality of times while the automation time TY2 elapses. Is to be done.

After that, as a result of "regular monitoring (determination) of whether or not the operation on the operation button 410 is continued (operation state)", the operation on the operation button 410 is continued (the operation button 410). When the timing tx22 for determining that the operation state) has been completed arrives, the peripheral control MPU1511a according to this embodiment first sets a predetermined time length based on the result of the determination. Set the grace time TY1 you have. However, at this time, "a process of outputting a specific sound (for example," picone ") each time the automation time TY2 elapses" and "a plurality of display scenes 1 to 5 (display contents) are output according to a predetermined time and order". The "process of sequentially outputting" is continuously executed even after the timing tx22 at which the operation state ends has arrived, over the period until the timing tx23 until the grace time TY1 ends. That is, in this case, from the situation where the operation on the operation button 410 is continued (timing tx21 to x22) to the situation where the player's hand is separated from the operation button 410 and no operation is performed (timing tx22 to x23). In a specific period (timing tx21 to x23) that straddles the timing of the transition, the specific sound can be output intermittently in a single processing mode in which the output is only re-output every time the automation time TY2 elapses. In addition, the operation display pattern can be continuously output in one processing mode in which a plurality of display scenes 1 to 5 (display contents) are sequentially output according to a predetermined time and order.

According to such a configuration, in producing the output mode of the specific sound at the time of the single operation shown in FIG. 184 (a) and the output mode of the specific sound at the time of the long press operation shown in FIG. 184 (b), respectively. , It becomes possible to standardize the processing mode (program) related to the output of a specific sound among them. Similarly to this, the output mode of the operation display pattern during a single operation shown in FIG. 184 (a) and the output mode of the operation display pattern during a long press operation shown in FIG. 184 (b) are shown. In producing, it becomes possible to standardize the processing mode (program) related to the output of the display pattern at the time of operation among them. That is, in this case, in the example of FIG. 184 (a), as a result of "regular monitoring (determination) of whether or not the operation for the operation button 410 is in a continuous state (operation state)" at the timing tx12. It is determined that the operation state (operation detection state) has been completed. Further, the situation where the operation on the operation button 410 is continued (timing tx11 to x12) changes to the situation where the player's hand is separated from the operation button 410 and no operation is performed (timing tx12 to x13). In a specific period (timing tx11 to x13) that straddles the timing, the specific sound is intermittently output in one processing mode that is only re-output every time the automation time TY2 elapses, and a plurality of display scenes. The operation display pattern is continuously output in one processing mode in which 1 to 5 (display contents) are sequentially output according to a predetermined time and order.

As a result, even if the operation on the operation button 410 is performed only once in the single-shot mode, the operation on the operation button 410 is performed in the same manner as in the so-called long-press mode. A specific sound associated with the operation of the operation button 410 will be output intermittently. That is, in this case, when an operation is performed on the operation button 410, the single press (one operation in a short time) is repeated within a relatively short time regardless of the operation mode (single press, long press). It becomes possible to make the player remember the feeling as if it is being performed (such as the feeling as if a fast continuous hit is being performed). This stabilizes the responsiveness of the effect (whether it is a single effect change or multiple effect changes) when the operation is performed by a single push, and which operation mode (single push, single push,) is performed. Even if long press) is adopted, it becomes possible to suitably maintain the number of occurrences of the effect change (specific sound) accompanying the operation per unit time.

However, in the example shown in FIG. 184, the operation of the operation button 410 is performed only once in the single-shot mode (FIG. 184 (a)) and in the so-called long-press mode (FIG. 184). Although the same effect change is generated in (b)), in reality, in the example shown in FIG. 184 (a), one effect reception is performed at the timing tx11, and the white outline in the figure is specified accordingly. In contrast to the sound output for only one time, in the example shown in FIG. 184 (b), four times of production reception are performed according to the elapse of the automation time TY2 from the timing tx11, and the white in the figure corresponding to them. The specific sound output without the sound is output four times. Therefore, in order to make a specific production result appear within a predetermined valid period, at least a specific number of production receptions are required, or a production lottery is performed each time a production reception is performed, and a specific production result is specified according to the result. When a type of production that causes the production result to appear is performed, in the example shown in FIG. 184 (a), since only one production reception is substantially generated, a specific production result is produced. That is not very promising. However, with the pachinko machine 1 according to the embodiment, by intentionally outputting the specific sound in black in the figure even when the production reception is not occurring, so many production receptions actually occur. Even if it is a situation where you can not expect a specific production result to appear, you can operate it multiple times by creating a production situation as if many production receptions are occurring. Even when a player who is not good at playing a game (such as a slow continuous hitting speed) performs a single operation, it becomes possible to preferably suppress a decrease in the interest of the game.

In this embodiment, it is difficult to recognize how much the production reception is generated only by checking the specific sound output each time, but from the start of the operation to the end of the operation. By confirming how many specific sound outputs have been made, it is possible to give a star of how many production receptions have occurred.

Further, in the operation display pattern according to this embodiment, after the display scene 1 to the display scene 5 are sequentially output, the display scene 3 is output again, and after that, the grace time TY1 is timed up. By repeatedly outputting the display scenes 3 to 5 until the predetermined validity period ends or the production conditions are satisfied and a specific production result appears within the predetermined validity period, the ally character becomes the enemy character and the sword. I'm trying to make a depiction of a single-minded meeting. Therefore, it is desirable that the specific effect result describes how the ally character wins over the enemy character as a result of such a sword-based meeting, and the specific effect result is within a predetermined valid period. When does not appear, it is desirable to display the effect result at the time of failure, which depicts how the ally character is defeated by the enemy character as a result of having a meeting with such a sword at the end.

As described above, the case where the operation for the operation button 410 is performed only once in the mode of one-shot pressing (FIG. 184 (a)) and the case where the operation for the operation button 410 is performed in the mode of long pressing (FIG. FIG. In any case of 184 (b)), the specific sound associated with the operation is intermittently output multiple times, and the operation display pattern associated with the operation is sequentially displayed according to a predetermined schedule and progressed. By doing so, even a player who is not good at operating multiple times can be encouraged to perform the operation with peace of mind. However, in reality, during the above-mentioned predetermined validity period, the operation button 410 is often operated as a continuous striking operation over a plurality of times in a single-shot pressing mode, and when such a continuous striking operation is performed, 1 It is important for the player to remember the feeling of operation that each production reception is generated by each operation in order to improve the interest of the game. However, if the operation feeling that the production reception is generated by each operation is completely reflected as the production, the player who is good at multiple operations is more advantageous than the player who is not good at multiple operations. Since the color rendering will be as if it were there, it is necessary to balance the production elements (operation feeling, production fairness) that have such a trade-off relationship.

Therefore, in the pachinko machine 1 according to this embodiment, first, in order to secure the operation feeling that the effect reception is generated by each operation, the pachinko machine 1 is operated as an immediate effect for the operation. Focusing on the fact that "whether the sound is generated (or changed) when operated" is a more important parameter than "whether the display is generated (or changed)", the operation buttons are used for a predetermined validity period. Each time the operation on the 410 is performed in the mode of a single push, a specific sound corresponding to the production reception is output according to the operation timing.

For example, as shown in FIG. 186 (a), an operation on the operation button 410 is performed as a plurality of continuous striking operations in a single-shot pressing mode during the period of timings tx31 to tx32 within a predetermined valid period. Suppose. Then, in the peripheral control MPU 1511a according to this embodiment, each time an operation on the operation button 410 is detected, a new specific sound is generated with respect to the specific sound of the previous output (specific sound in the output state). A new specific sound is output in such a way that the sound data is overwritten on the specific channel. In this way, even when the operation of the operation button 410 is performed only once in the mode of one-shot pressing, such output is performed while intermittently outputting the specific sound multiple times. When the operation button 410 is operated again while the operation button 410 is being operated, a new specific sound is output in a manner in which the specific sound in the output state is intentionally cut off (interrupted) in the middle of the operation. It becomes possible to explicitly suggest that a specific sound is newly output and the production is accepted at the timing when is performed.

In this embodiment, even if the operation button 410 is operated only once in the mode of one-shot pressing or the operation is performed by long-pressing, the specific sound of the previous output is output to the end. The automation time TY2 is digested before the time required for the above elapses, and the sound data of the new specific sound is overwritten on the specific channel for the specific sound of the previous output. That is as described above. However, in this case, the specific sound is output with an accurate rhythm at regular time intervals (automation time TY2), whereas the operation button 410 is operated as a continuous striking operation in the mode of a single press. In that case, every time the operation timing by the player arrives irregularly, the specific sound in the output state is cut off and a new specific sound is output. It becomes possible for the player to appropriately remember the operation feeling that the production reception is occurring.

Incidentally, also in the example shown in FIG. 186 (a), each time the operation button 410 is operated during a predetermined valid period, it is periodically determined whether or not the operation is continued (operation state). Monitoring (determining whether or not the operation state (operation detection state) has been completed) is performed. In this regard, in the period of timing tx31 to tx32 in which the operation button 410 is operated as a continuous striking operation in the mode of one-shot pressing, the operation is continued each time the operation button 410 is operated. As a result of periodical monitoring of whether or not the operation state is in (operation state), it is immediately determined that the continuation of the operation state has been completed, and a predetermined time length is provided accordingly. The grace time TY1 will be set (not shown).

In this regard, in the peripheral control MPU1511a according to this embodiment, when a new operation is performed on the operation button 410 before the grace time TY1 ends (time up), the setting of the grace time TY1 is canceled. Therefore, it is returned to the state in which the process of periodically monitoring whether or not the operation of the operation button 410 is in the continuous state (operation state) is performed. Therefore, in the period of timings tx31 to tx32, every time the operation button 410 enters the operation state or becomes the non-operation state, the process of periodically monitoring whether or not the operation button 410 is in the operation state is performed. , The state transition is performed rapidly with the state in which the grace time TY1 (not shown) having a predetermined time length is set.

Here, in the example shown in FIG. 186 (a), after the continuous striking operation for 6 times is performed between the timings tx31 to tx32, the repeated striking operation is tired, and after that, the repeated striking operation is performed. It is assumed that the time required has become significantly longer. For a player who is not good at such multiple operations, after timing tx32, it is not possible to perform multiple repeated hit operations well, so the number of production receptions is larger than that of a player who is good at multiple operations. There is a concern that the number of games will be reduced and the interest in games will decline. However, in the peripheral control MPU1511a according to this embodiment, a specific sound is emitted each time the automation time TY2 elapses even if the operation by the player is not detected until the grace time TY1 elapses after the operation state is terminated. As described above, the process of outputting is performed. Therefore, according to the peripheral control MPU1511a according to this embodiment, even if the time required for the repeated operation becomes significantly longer after the timing tx32, at least the grace time TY1 after the previous operation state is completed. As long as the repeated operation can be performed within a shorter time than that, the player can be made to feel as if a fast continuous striking operation is being performed by continuously and intermittently outputting a specific sound accompanying the operation. Will be.

For example, if it is determined at the timing tx33 that the continuation of the operating state is completed as a result of periodic monitoring of whether or not the operating state from the timing tx32 is continued, based on the determination. , A grace time TY1 having a predetermined time length is set. After that, although the time required for repeated operations will be significantly longer, a specific sound will be output each time the automation time TY2 elapses in a situation where the player is not operating. By performing the process of causing the operation, the specific sound accompanying the operation is continuously and intermittently output. However, these specific sounds are output as black-out specific sounds (7th to 9th specific sounds) in the figure under the condition that the production reception is not generated.

In this regard, the black specific sounds (7th to 9th specific sounds) in the figure can be generated only until the grace time TY1 elapses after the end of the previous operation state. However, in the example shown in FIG. 186 (a), with respect to the grace time TY1 set at the timing tx33, the operation button 410 is operated again at the timing tx34 before the grace time TY1 elapses. The setting is canceled (the time does not increase) based on the operation. Along with this, at the timing tx34, the white specific sound (10th specific sound) in the figure is output due to the occurrence of the production reception in the form of cutting (interrupting) the specific sound that was in the output state. At the same time, it is returned to the state in which the process of periodically monitoring whether or not the operation state is continued is performed.

However, such an operation state is also terminated when the timing tx35 is reached, and a determination to that effect is made as a result of the above monitoring, and based on the determination, a grace time TY1 having a predetermined time length is obtained. It will be set again. Then, every time the automation time TY2 elapses in a situation where the operation by the player is not performed, the black specific sound (11th to 14th specific sound) in the figure is output again, and the grace period. When the operation by the player is finally performed at the timing tx36 before the time TY1 is timed up, the black specific sound (14th specific sound) in the output state is cut off (interrupted). In the form, the white specific sound (15th specific sound) in the figure is output.

In this way, even if the time required for the repeated operation becomes significantly longer after the timing tx32, the repeated operation can be performed at least within a time shorter than the grace time TY1 after the end of the previous operation state. If it can be done, the specific sound in white in the figure at the timing when the operation by the player is performed, and the specific sound in black in the figure when the operation by the player is not performed regularly. By outputting each of these, the player can be made to feel as if a fast continuous striking operation is being performed by making it possible to continuously and intermittently output a specific sound accompanying the operation. Therefore, according to the mode related to the output of such a specific sound, it is possible to secure the operation feeling that the effect reception is generated by one operation at a time, and the player who is not good at the multiple operations. Even if there is, the specific sound output in black in the figure in the non-operation state makes it possible to output the specific sound accompanying the operation continuously and intermittently, so there is a trade-off relationship (operation feeling). , Production fairness) will be expected to be compatible.

However, even when a specific sound is output in such a manner, the operation display pattern that plays a role of notifying the effect result based on the operation within a predetermined valid period is performed a plurality of times. If the mode of progress of the displayed content is significantly different between a player who is good at operating and a player who is not good at operating multiple times, in the end, it is better than a player who is not good at operating multiple times. It may be possible for a player who is good at multiple operations to have an advantage, and there is a concern that the interest in the game may be reduced. Therefore, in the peripheral control MPU1511a according to this embodiment, the display content of the operation display pattern is not gradually advanced according to the timing of generation of a specific sound accompanying the operation, but the grace time TY1 is timed up. Until the end timing (specific end timing) arrives, the display content can be advanced by a predetermined dynamic display output regardless of the mode of operation.

In this regard, in the example shown in FIG. 186 (a), as described above, it is assumed that the time required for the repeated operation becomes significantly longer after the timing tx32 within the predetermined validity period. However, until the set grace time TY1 is timed up, the operation button 410 is operated again to cancel the setting of the grace time TY1. Therefore, the timing (specific end timing) at which the grace time TY1 is timed up and ended within the predetermined valid period does not come.

When the operation is performed in the manner shown in FIG. 186 (a), the display of the operation display pattern (game board side effect display device 1600) is started based on the operation by the player at the timing tx31. After that, the display scenes 1 to 5 shown in FIG. 185 are predetermined as the operation display patterns regardless of the operation status even though the speed of the continuous striking operation is significantly changed as described above. It is only displayed and progressed in sequence according to the set schedule, which makes it appear that the production fairness between the player who is not good at multiple operations and the player who is good at multiple operations is maintained. You will be able to do it.

However, even if the display content as the display pattern at the time of operation is developed in the same manner, the number of times that the effect reception is actually generated due to the operation is the number of times that the player who is not good at the operation is operated multiple times. It is inevitable that there will be differences with the players who are good at. Therefore, in order to make a specific production result appear within a predetermined valid period, at least a specific number of production receptions are required, or a production lottery is performed each time a production reception is performed, and a specific production result is specified according to the result. When a type of production that causes the production result to appear is performed, it is easier for a player who is good at multiple operations to produce a specific production result, which is a directing effect of performing the operation multiple times. Significance will be maintained. In other words, while maintaining such a dramatic significance, the fairness of the production is maintained between the player who is not good at multiple operations and the player who is good at multiple operations in terms of production such as sound and display. It can be said that there is a technical feature in that it is possible to prevent a player who is not good at operating multiple times from deteriorating the game interest by making it look like it is being played.

Further, according to such a configuration, even if the continuous striking operation is performed earlier than the interval (automation time TY2) at which the effect is received when the operation is performed by long pressing, the mode in which the display pattern at the time of operation progresses is Since it is the same, it is expected to avoid the occurrence of a situation in which the button deterioration is accelerated due to the repeated hitting operation being performed too quickly.

Incidentally, the example shown in FIG. 186 (b) assumes a case where the operation button 410 is not operated in time until the grace time TY1 set at the timing tx33 elapses. That is, in this case, the timing tx37 (specific end timing) at which the grace time TY1 is timed up and ended within a predetermined valid period arrives, and the timing tx37 (specific end timing) starts from the timing tx31. Dynamic display output (process of sequentially displaying and advancing display scenes 1 to 5 according to a predetermined schedule) is interrupted and terminated at that point.

In this regard, in the peripheral control MPU1511a according to this embodiment, regarding the output of a specific sound (for example, “picone”), the timing tx37 (specific end timing) at which the grace time TY1 ends when in the output state has arrived. Even if this is done, processing that cuts off a specific sound in the output state at that timing tx37 (for example, "pico")) (output interruption processing, processing that interrupts by overwriting with another sound, etc.) is performed. As described above, the output (sound wave type) in the same mode as the specific sound that has been output up to that point is made to appear even after the timing tx37 arrives. Therefore, regarding the output of the specific sound, even after the timing tx37 (specific end timing) at which the grace time TY1 ends has arrived, the last specific sound (the tenth specific sound in the figure) is the output. If the operation button 410 is operated before the sound is muted, the player can feel as if a fast continuous striking operation is being performed by continuously and intermittently outputting a specific sound accompanying the operation. It is possible to let them do it.

In fact, in the example shown in FIG. 186 (b), before the black specific sound (10th specific sound) in the figure output across the timing tx37 (specific end timing) is muted, After the white specific sound in the figure is generated twice in the form of interrupting the 10th specific sound output, the black specific sound in the figure is intermittently output again, so that the specific sound associated with the operation is generated. It can be seen that is being output continuously and intermittently. Further, in the example shown in FIG. 186 (b), the specific sound is continuously and intermittently output in this way, whereas in the operation display pattern, the progress of the display content is temporarily terminated at the timing tx37. .. After that, it is clear that the progress of the display content is redone from the first display scene (display scene 1) in accordance with the timing tx38 when the white specific sound in the figure is output again.

FIG. 187 shows a predetermined validity period in which the pachinko machine 1 equipped with the automatic multiple operation function (auto continuous hit function) described with reference to FIGS. 184 to 186 is provided with an operation opportunity for the multiple operation (continuous hit, etc.). It is a time chart which shows the effect example which appears when the operation is performed within the predetermined valid period (timing tx41 to tx48) when the specific effect pattern which generates the above-mentioned is executed.

As shown in FIG. 187, at the timing tx41, a predetermined valid period in which the operation opportunity of a plurality of operations (continuous hits, etc.) is given occurs, and the player determines the timing tx42 within the predetermined valid period. Assuming that the operation is started, also in this production example, based on the detection of the operation, the output of the specific sound associated with the operation for the operation button 410 and the output of the display (display pattern at the time of operation) associated with the operation are output, respectively. The process of starting is to be performed.

However, in this production example, when an operation for the operation button 410 is received within a predetermined valid period, a specific sound output in white in the figure is generated, and a special sound different from the specific sound is produced with a predetermined probability. It is possible to execute the process of outputting.

That is, as described above, in the peripheral control MPU 1511a according to this embodiment, the specific sound output in black in the figure is generated even in a situation where the operation button 410 is not operated and the effect reception is not generated. The black specific sound output in this figure is difficult to distinguish from the white specific sound output in the figure that occurs at the timing when the production reception occurs (the same mode in this production example). ) Is output. Further, as described above, the operation display pattern appearing on the game board side effect display device 1600 is such that the display content is advanced according to a predetermined schedule regardless of the operation mode. Therefore, from the player's point of view, even if the operation is performed by long-pressing or multiple times within a predetermined validity period, it is recognized how much production reception is generated by these operations. It can be said that it is in a difficult situation. Therefore, in this production example, when an operation for the operation button 410 is received within a predetermined valid period, a specific sound output that is outlined in the figure is generated, and a special sound different from the specific sound is generated with a predetermined probability ( For example, by performing a process of outputting at 50% or the like), it is possible to predict to some extent how many production receptions have occurred through the output status of such special sounds.

For example, in the example shown in FIG. 187, when the predetermined validity period is in a relatively early period (timing tx41 to tx45), the two consecutive hit operations at the timing tx42 and tx43 and the timing tx44 By performing each of the long press operations of, a total of 9 production receptions are generated, and the specific sound output in white in the figure corresponding to these is continuously generated 9 times (1st to 9th in the figure). The number of times the production reception occurs per unit time is relatively large. On the other hand, in a relatively late period (timing tx45 to tx48) after the predetermined valid period is started, the operation in the mode of single-shot operation requires a long time that cannot be said to be repeated hits, and the timing tx46 , Tx47 is performed twice, so that the production reception for two times is generated, and the specific sound output in white in the figure corresponding to these is generated twice with a time interval (10th in the figure). , 11th white specific sound), the number of times the production reception occurs per unit time is relatively small.

However, when checking the output status of the specific sound and the output status of the display pattern during operation, the specific sound is compared after the predetermined valid period is started by the above-mentioned blackened specific sound output. It is continuously output in both the early period (timing tx41 to tx45) and the relatively late period (timing tx45 to tx48), and the operation display pattern is also compared after the predetermined effective period is started. Since the display scenes are only switched according to a predetermined schedule in both the early period (timing tx41 to tx45) and the relatively late period (timing tx45 to tx48), these progresses. It can be seen that it is difficult to determine whether the number of times the production reception occurs per unit time is high or low just by checking the output status.

In this regard, when checking the output status of the special sound that is output with a predetermined probability when the white specific sound output in the figure occurs, it is a relatively early period (timing) after the predetermined effective period is started. In tx41 to tx45), the number of occurrences per unit time is larger than that in a relatively late period (timing tx45 to tx48) after the predetermined validity period is started, so such a special sound It will be possible to predict to some extent how many production receptions have occurred through the output status of. Further, according to such a special sound output mode, it is possible to conceal to some extent whether the specific sound output shown in white in the figure or the specified sound output shown in black in the figure is generated. Therefore, it is expected that the game interests of players who are not good at multiple operations will be maintained favorably. In this sense, the special sound can be generated when the specific sound output is generated, but is output based on the condition that the output condition different from the occurrence of the specific sound output is satisfied. Even if the specific sound output is generated, it is required to output the special sound in such a manner that the special sound is not necessarily generated.

Further, the predetermined probability of whether or not to generate a special sound when the production reception occurs may be changed according to the number of production receptions that have occurred within the predetermined valid period. That is, in this case, it becomes possible to make it more difficult to predict which of the white specific sound output in the figure and the black specific sound output in the figure is occurring.

Further, considering that the output frequency of the special sound is lower than that of the specific sound, the time from the output of the specific sound to the mute and the time value longer than the automation time TY2 are obtained. It is desirable to set it as a thing. In this example, the time value is set to be twice the "automation time TY2". Further, when outputting a new special sound when the previous special sound is being output, it is desirable to cut off (interrupt) the previous special sound and output the new special sound.

However, in such a pachinko machine 1, the number of players who perform the operation multiple times is reduced because the same effect as when the operation is performed multiple times can be enjoyed only by performing the operation by long-pressing. However, there is a concern that the significance of the production as requiring multiple operations will be lost. Therefore, in the production example shown in FIG. 187, the operation by the player is a mode of long pressing in the period after the operation by the player is started at least in the timing tx42 within the predetermined valid period (timing tx41 to tx48). A state in which the operation is performed as a mode of a single operation, a state in which the operation is continuously performed (timing tx44 to tx45) and a state in which the operation is performed as a mode of the single operation (timing tx42 to tx44, tx45 to tx48). The display of a specific image (specific display) can be permitted only when there is and a specific display condition is satisfied.

That is, in this case, in order to confirm a specific image, it is required to perform the operation as a single-shot operation rather than at least a long-press operation. It will be possible to give meaning to the production by performing the round operation (continuous hitting, etc.), and it is expected that the game entertainment will be maintained favorably.

Moreover, in this production example, in order to confirm the specific image, only the operation as a mode of the one-shot operation is not a condition, and the specific image is not necessarily displayed unless the specific display condition is satisfied. That is, in this case, since the appearance difficulty of the specific image itself becomes high, each time a predetermined valid period occurs, the automatic continuous hitting (automatic multiple times operation) function is not used and the operation is performed multiple times (continuous hitting, etc.). ), It seems that you are trying to display a specific image that is difficult to appear, and you dare to operate it multiple times without using the automatic repeated hit (automatic multiple operation) function. It is expected to promote the understanding of others about what to do.

In the production example shown in FIG. 187, a specific non-operation time (here, twice the time of “automation time TY2”) has elapsed without a new production reception occurring from the timing when the previous production reception occurred. The display of a specific image within a predetermined validity period is defined as the above-mentioned "specific display condition" that a production hit is obtained in a predetermined production lottery performed when the specific non-operation time has elapsed. Specific display) will appear. In this regard, in the predetermined production lottery, when the jackpot is won by the jackpot judgment (or, depending on the operation mode within the predetermined validity period, the success display can be displayed (the jackpot expectation is high). In the case of (in the production situation), there is a 70% chance that the production hit will be obtained, but when the jackpot is rejected in the jackpot judgment (or the operation is performed within the predetermined validity period). In the production situation (when the production situation has a low expectation of big hit) in which the success display cannot be displayed no matter how much the performance is performed, the production hit can be obtained only with a probability of 30%. Therefore, when the display of the specific image (specific display) appears within the predetermined validity period, it is suggested that the expectation that the jackpot symbol appears is high, and the game entertainment can be preferably maintained. The above "specific display condition" is not limited to this, and "a specific non-operation time (here," automation time TY2 "" without a new production reception occurring from the timing when the previous production reception occurred. When only one of "the time has passed twice as much as" and "the production hit was obtained in the predetermined production lottery" is adopted as the "specific display condition" and this is satisfied. The display of a specific image (specific display) may be made to appear, or other conditions may be adopted as "specific display conditions".

In addition to the above-mentioned types, the predetermined production lottery mode is, for example, a production situation in which a success display can appear depending on the operation mode within a predetermined validity period (a production situation in which a jackpot expectation is low). Occasionally, there is a 0% chance that a production hit will be obtained (or the production lottery itself will not be performed), but no matter how many operations are performed within a predetermined validity period, a success display cannot be displayed. When there is a production situation in which the expectation of a big hit is low, there may be a mode in which a production hit can be obtained with a probability of 60%. According to such an aspect, it is definitely shown that the success display does not appear when the specific display appears, so that there is no need to perform a barren operation for making the specific display appear. Will be recognizable within a predetermined validity period. In this case, it is desirable to use the same display content as the failure display that appears when the predetermined validity period ends without the success display appearing as the specific display.

Further, in this effect example, as shown in FIG. 187, when a new effect reception occurs while the specific image is being displayed (specific display) (timing tx46), the specific image is specified at that time. The display is hidden, and the output is continued on condition that the state in which the player is not operating (the state in which a new production reception is not generated) is maintained. There is.

Further, in the effect example shown in FIG. 187, in order to make a specific effect result (success display) appear within a predetermined valid period (timing tx41 to tx48), it is required that at least a specific number of times or more of the effect reception occurs. The appearance condition is satisfied at the timing tx47 when the 11th production reception (11th white specific sound output) occurs, and the display scene 3 that was in the display state at that time is cut off ( The process of making the success display appear as the display pattern at the time of operation is performed in the form of (interruption). The content of this success display is the production content of the part (display scenes 3 to 5) that is repeated in the operation display pattern, such as destroying the enemy character that was having a sword fight in the display scenes 3 to 5. It is desirable that it is related. In addition, when a success indication appears, it is desirable that the jackpot judgment suggests that the expectation of winning the jackpot is high.

In addition, when the appearance condition is satisfied at the timing tx47 when the 11th production reception (the 11th white specific sound output) occurs, the predetermined validity period is terminated at that time and a new production reception is performed. It will be prevented from occurring. Therefore, at a timing after the timing tx47, no new specific sound or special sound outlined in the figure is generated, and no new specific display appears.

FIG. 188 is executed under the same processing conditions as the production example shown in FIG. 187, but the operation in the mode of one-shot operation by the player is shorter than the grace time TY1. It is a time chart showing an example of an effect that appears when it is repeated for a long time that cannot be said.

As shown in FIG. 188, even when the operations in the mode of the single-shot operation by the player are repeated over a long period of time, as long as the operations are repeated at intervals shorter than the grace time TY1. After the timing tx52 when the operation is started within the predetermined valid period (timing tx51 to tx56), the specific sound is continuously and intermittently output, and the operation display pattern is the display content according to a predetermined schedule. Will be developed. According to such an effect mode, even if the operation is performed only four times within a predetermined valid period, it is possible to create an effect situation as if the continuous striking operation is performed about 20 times. become able to. However, in this case, there is a concern that the person who is seriously performing the continuous striking operation cannot understand the meaning of the continuous striking operation, and the interest in the game is lowered.

Therefore, in the peripheral control MPU1511a according to this embodiment, the length of the predetermined valid period is "Tx1", the length of the grace time TY1 is "Tx2", and a specific effect result (success display) is displayed within the predetermined valid period. When the minimum number of production receptions required for appearance is "EU", each of these numerical values is set so that the relationship ["Tx1 / Tx2" <EU] is established. According to such a configuration, even if the operation is repeated at the last minute when the grace time TY1 elapses to create a production situation in which the specific sound and the display pattern at the time of operation are continuously output, the operation causes the operation. The number of production receptions that occur will be less than the minimum number of production receptions (EU) required to produce a specific production result (success display) within a predetermined valid period. That is, in this case, when the operation is performed in such a malicious manner, it becomes possible to prevent a specific effect result (success display) from appearing. It will be expected that the amusement hobby of the person who is in the game will be maintained favorably. In order to obtain such effects more reliably, the minimum number of production receptions (EU) required to produce a specific production result (success display) within a predetermined valid period is set. Strictly speaking, it is required to set the numerical value calculated by "Tx1 / Tx2" as a numerical value larger than the integer value when it is rounded up to an integer.

In this regard, in this production example, the minimum number of production receptions (EU) required to make a specific production result (success display) appear within a predetermined valid period is calculated by "Tx1 / Tx2". Since it is set to "11 times", which is more than twice the integer value when the numerical value is rounded up to an integer, a failure display is displayed at the timing tx56 when the predetermined validity period ends. Become. That is, in this case, since the failure display appears due to the insufficient number of operations, the production situation is such that it is not possible to recognize whether the jackpot expectation is low or high.

Furthermore, as described above, in the peripheral control MPU1511a according to this embodiment, the display of a specific image can appear only when it is in a state of being performed as a mode of one-shot operation and a specific display condition is satisfied. Is. In this regard, in this production example, when the above-mentioned "specific non-operation time" required to display a specific image is "Tx3", the relationship ["Tx1 / Tx3" <EU] is established. Each of these numerical values is set so as to be performed. In such a configuration, if an attempt is made to make a specific display appear each time the operation is performed once within the predetermined validity period, the number of production receptions that occur within the predetermined validity period is within the predetermined validity period. In, the number of production receptions (EU) required to produce a specific production result (success display) will be less than the minimum. That is, in this case, a directing selection function of whether to make an attempt to make the specific display appear even at the risk that the specific effect result (success display) does not appear is played, and the specific display is displayed. It is expected that the game will be improved because it will not be possible to casually make repeated attempts to make it appear, which will enhance the color rendering index when the attempt is made. Will be.

Further, in this production example, as shown in FIG. 188, when the timing tx55a at which the predetermined valid period ends without the success display appearing, the display scene 4 that was in the display state at that time is cut off ( The process of making a failure display appear as a display pattern during operation is performed in the form of (interruption). The content of this failure display is the production content of the part (display scenes 3 to 5) that is repeated in the operation display pattern, such as being defeated by the enemy character who was having a sword fight in the display scenes 3 to 5. It is desirable that it is related. In addition, when a failure display appears, it is desirable that the jackpot determination suggests that the expectation of winning the jackpot is low.

On the other hand, in this production example, as shown in FIGS. 187 and 188, the specific sound that is in the output state when the predetermined valid period ends regardless of whether the success display or the failure display appears. It is designed not to be chopped (interrupted), but this is as described above. However, even if these specific sounds are output intermittently after that, those specific sounds will be muted while the success display or failure display is being performed, and then the success display or failure display will be displayed. The relationship is set to be hidden.

In this embodiment, the grace time TY1 is set after the operation state by the player ends, and the specific sound output in black in the figure in the non-operation state is output until the grace time TY1 elapses. Although it was decided to perform it at least four times or more, the number of times of "specific sound output in black in the figure" that occurs in the non-operation state is not limited to this. For example, if the grace time TY1 is set as a time having at least twice as long as the automation time TY2, the specified sound output in black in the figure in the non-operation state is at least twice or more. Since it occurs, it is possible to make the player feel as if the continuous striking operation (multiple operations) was continued even in the non-operation state.

Further, in this embodiment, after the display scenes 1 to 5 are sequentially output as the operation display pattern, the display scenes 3 to 5 are repeatedly output so that the display scenes 1 and 2 are not displayed. So, the depiction of the ally character having a sword fight with the enemy character appears. Therefore, in at least one of the display scenes 1 and 2, a specific display in which the jackpot expectation degree is shown may be performed. According to such a configuration, if a specific display is overlooked, it cannot be reconfirmed unless the non-operation state is continued until the grace time TY1 elapses. Therefore, a predetermined validity period However, it becomes possible to provide a directing effect of which one to select between the demerit that the specific display is wasted and the demerit that the specific display cannot be confirmed.

Further, in this embodiment, it is allowed to perform a continuous striking operation in such a manner that the effect reception occurs at an interval shorter than the interval (automation time TY2) at which the effect reception occurs when the operation by long pressing is performed. Therefore, it is possible to realize a highly flexible operation operation effect by the player (see FIG. 186). However, on the other hand, even when such a high-speed continuous striking operation is performed, the progress mode of the display scene in the operation display pattern is the same as when the operation is performed by long-pressing. Therefore, it is possible to make it less attractive to perform high-speed continuous hitting operation, which is expected to suppress excessive operation of the operation button 410 and reduce the risk of damage etc. Will be done.

In addition, in the case of performing a type of production that requires at least a specific number of production receptions in order to make a specific production result appear within a predetermined valid period, only a long press operation is performed within the predetermined valid period. It is desirable to set the value of the specific number of times so that the effect reception is generated more than the specific number of times. More preferably, it is desirable to set the value of the specified number of times so that the effect reception is performed more than the specified number of times only by performing the operation by long pressing for half the period of the predetermined valid period.

Further, as shown in FIGS. 187 and 188, twice the time (specific non-operation time) of the "automation time TY2" has elapsed since the timing when the previous production reception occurred without the new production reception occurring. It was decided that the display of a specific image (specific display) would appear at the time of this, but the specific non-operation time is not limited to this. For example, as a specific non-operation time, any time value within the range of twice or more of the "automation time TY2" and the grace time TY1 as the upper limit value (grace time TY1 or less) is used. , While the specific sound in black in the figure is output more than once when in the non-operation state (as if the repeated hitting operation is being performed when in the non-operation state), It is possible to create an effect as if the display of a specific image (specific display) appears based on the number of simulated operations (the number of times of output of a specific sound in black in the figure) in the non-operation state reaches a predetermined value. It is possible.

[Amusement machine equipped with multiple production operation units]
By the way, in the above description, the gaming machine provided with the effect operation unit 400 in the plate unit 320, which can be pressed by the player and can present the effect image to the player, has been described. A gaming machine capable of further increasing the player's motivation to operate will be described with reference to FIGS. 189 to 240. The effect control of the effect operation unit described below is performed by the peripheral control board 1510.

FIG. 189 is a front view of a gaming machine provided with a sword effect operation unit 5000. FIG. 190 is a right side view of a gaming machine provided with a sword effect operation unit 5000. Here, the sword effect operation unit 5000 arranged on the door frame 3 of the above-mentioned gaming machine 1 will be described, and the same reference numerals will be given to the same configurations as described above, and the description thereof will be omitted as appropriate.

The sword effect operation unit 5000 is provided in front of the door frame 3 on the right side when viewed from the front. The sword production operation unit 5000 accommodates a sword portion 5010 having a sword blade portion 5011, a handle portion 5012, a collar portion 5013 sandwiched between the sword blade portion 5011 and the handle portion 5012, and a sword portion 5011 of the sword portion 5010. It constitutes a sword ornament 5001 composed of a sheath portion 5020 capable of being capable of being used.

The sword decoration body 5001 is provided with a sheath portion 5020 movably provided on the door frame 3 in the left-right direction in the front view. Further, the sword portion 5010 is provided so as to be movable in the sword pulling direction and the sword delivering direction. The sword portion 5010 is usually in a sword-delivered state in which the sword blade portion 5011 is housed in the sheath portion 5020, and the sword-drawing operation makes the sword blade portion 5011 visible to the player in the sword-drawing effect. Then, the sword portion 5010 in the sword-drawn state can function as an operation means for receiving the sword-delivering operation by the player and returning to the sword-delivering state.

Here, with reference to FIG. 191, an opportunity to execute a sword drawing effect accompanied by movement of the sword effect operation unit 5000 (sword decoration body 5001) will be described. FIG. 191 is a diagram showing an example of an effect pattern selection table in an effect mode in which a sword extraction effect can be executed. (A) An example of a selection table for selecting the presence / absence of a sword removal preparation transition effect according to the type of variation pattern. Shown, and (B) an example of a selection table for selecting the presence / absence of the sword-drawing effect is shown.

The production patterns described here include a pattern in which the sword-drawing preparation transition production is performed after the sword-drawing preparation transition production is executed, a pattern in which the sword-drawing preparation transition production is performed without performing the sword-drawing preparation transition production in advance, and a sword-drawing preparation transition production in advance. In spite of this, there are patterns in which the sword-drawing production is not performed, and there are patterns in which the sword-drawing preparation transition production is performed and the sword-drawing production is not performed. Two patterns are provided, one with an aura member and the other without an aura member.

As shown in FIG. 191 (A), whether or not to execute the sword-drawing preparation transition effect is drawn according to the type of variation pattern determined by the main control board 1310 and transmitted to the peripheral control board 1510. Here, a plurality of types of fluctuation patterns are classified into a fluctuation pattern for a large hit fluctuation at the time of a big hit, a fluctuation pattern for a small hit fluctuation at the time of a small hit, and a fluctuation pattern for a missed fluctuation at the time of a miss, and the fluctuation results in an advantageous result for the player. It is set so that the higher the pattern, the higher the probability that the sword preparation transition effect will be executed. Specifically, the sword-drawing preparation transition effect is executed with a probability of 50% in the case of the fluctuation pattern for big hit fluctuations, with a probability of 30% in the case of the fluctuation pattern for small hits, and in the case of the fluctuation pattern for missed fluctuations. It is executed with a 20% probability. It should be noted that the probability of the variation pattern at the time of deviation fluctuation may be changed depending on the presence or absence of the reach effect so that the probability that the sword removal preparation transition effect is executed is higher when the reach effect is performed than when it is not performed. ..

Next, as shown in FIG. 191 (B), whether or not the sword-drawing main effect is executed is drawn according to the type of the variation pattern and the presence or absence of the sword-drawing preparation transition effect. When the sword-drawing preparation transition effect is executed even if the type of the variation pattern is the same, the probability that the sword-drawing main effect is executed is set to be higher than when the sword-drawing preparation transition effect is not executed. In addition, it is set so that the probability that the sword-drawing effect is executed increases as the variation pattern results in an advantageous result for the player. Here, even if the advantage of the fluctuation pattern is low, it is set so that the probability that the sword-drawing main effect is executed is higher when the sword-drawing preparation transition effect is executed. Specifically, when the sword-drawing preparation transition effect is executed in the variation pattern for out-of-order fluctuation, the probability that the sword-drawing main effect is executed is higher than in the case where the sword-drawing preparation transition effect is not executed in the variation pattern for small hit variation. In the case of a variable pattern for jackpot fluctuation, the sword-drawing main effect is always executed regardless of the presence or absence of the sword-drawing preparation transition effect.

In addition, when the sword-drawing effect is executed, the sword-drawing preparation transition effect is executed in advance, and the more the variation pattern is advantageous for the player, the higher the probability that the sword-drawing effect with the aura member is executed. Is set to be. Here, in the case of the variation pattern for small hit variation, the sword-drawing effect of the form with the aura member is not selected.

(State transition and movement of aura member due to sword pulling action of sword decoration)
Subsequently, with reference to FIGS. 192 to 195, the sword-drawing operation of the sword ornament 5001 in the sword-drawing effect (sword-drawing preparation transition effect and sword-drawing book effect) will be described. Further, when the aura member 5030 is provided on the sword portion 5010 (sword blade portion 5011) itself capable of accepting the sword delivery operation by the player, and the sword portion 5010 is deformed by its own constituent member (aura member 5030) (FIG. 192, FIG. FIG. 193) and the aura member 5035 are provided on the sheath portion 5020 of the door frame 3 for accommodating the sword portion 5010 (sword blade portion 5011), and the sword portion 5010 is combined with the member on the door frame 3 side (aura member 5035). The operation of the aura members 5030 and 5035 will be described with respect to the case of forming an integral decorative body (FIGS. 194 and 195).

FIG. 192 is a state transition diagram illustrating a sword pulling operation of the sword ornament body 5001 when the aura member 5030 is provided on the sword portion 5010 (sword blade portion 5011) itself, and is a state transition diagram in which (A) the sword is delivered and (B) the first. The sword-drawn state and (C) the second sword-drawn state are shown. FIG. 193 is a vertical cross-sectional view illustrating the operation of the aura member 5030. Note that FIG. 193 is a vertical cross-sectional view in a state where the blade portion 5011 is pulled out from the sheath portion 5020 in order to make the operation of the aura member 5030 easy to understand.

As shown in FIG. 192 (A), the sword ornament 5001 in the normal state is in a sword-delivered state in which the blade portion 5011 is housed in the sheath portion 5020. As shown in FIG. 192 (B), in the sword decoration body 5001 after the sword pulling operation in the sword pulling preparation transition effect, only the part of the habaki 5011a fitted to the hand of the sword blade part 5011 is pulled out from the sheath part 5020 and can be seen by the player. It becomes the first sword pulling state. Then, as shown in FIG. 192 (C), in the sword decorative body 5001 after the sword pulling operation in the sword pulling main production, the blade portion 5011 is further pulled out from the sheath portion 5020, and most of the second sword is visible to the player. It becomes a state. Here, the sword decoration body 5001 in the second sword withdrawal state can function as an operation means capable of accepting the sword delivery operation by the player.

The aura member 5030 provided on the blade portion 5011 is configured to be able to operate independently of the blade pulling operation of the blade portion 5011. In the case where the sword ornament 5001 has an aura member, the aura member 5030 has a sheath when the blade portion 5011 changes from the sword-delivered state (FIG. 192 (A)) to the first sword-drawn state (FIG. 192 (B)). The movable range is moved as much as possible (maximum movement) from the closed state (FIG. 193 (A)) to the open state (FIG. 193 (B)) inside the portion 5020 to deform the blade portion 5011. Therefore, the player can visually recognize the aura member 5030 even in the process of changing the blade portion 5011 deformed by the aura member 5030 from the first sword withdrawal state to the second sword withdrawal state (FIG. 192 (C)). As will be described later, since the aura member 5030 is provided so as to be located below the habaki 5011a of the blade portion 5011 even if it operates at the maximum, the player cannot visually recognize the aura member 5030 in the first sword-drawn state.

As shown in FIG. 193 (A), the aura member 5030 in the normal state (closed state) is included in the blade portion 5011. The aura member 5030 is provided below the habaki 5011a of the blade portion 5011 and meshes with the right aura member 5031, the left aura member 5032, the rack 5031a provided on the right aura member 5031, and the rack 5032a provided on the left aura member 5032. It has a pinion 5033 and. In the aura member 5030, the pinion 5033 is rotated counterclockwise when viewed from the front by a driving means (not shown), so that the rotational force is converted into linear motion in the right direction of the rack 5031a and in the left direction of the rack 5032a. As shown in (B), the right aura member 5031 and the left aura member 5032 stop at positions (open state) protruding outward from the outer shape of the blade portion 5011, respectively.

Further, below the habaki 5011a of the blade portion 5011, an LED substrate 5011c having a plurality of LEDs is included in the blade shaft 5011b. By emitting light from these LEDs, it is possible to illuminate and decorate the blade portion 50011 (aura member 5030).

Here, regarding the operation timing of the aura member 5030, when the sword decoration body 5001 (sword part 5010) changes from the sword delivery state to the first sword withdrawal state, it changes from the closed state to the open state, and the movement of the aura member 5030 causes the blade part 5011. The sword decoration body 5001 changes from the first sword withdrawal state to the second sword withdrawal state after being deformed, but the present invention is not limited to this. The aura member 5030 may start the operation (deformation) after the sword decoration body 5001 is in the second sword drawing state. The final mode based on the effect pattern set until the sword decorative body 5001 in the second sword withdrawal state functions as an operating means (not limited to the form in which the maximum operation is performed, but also the form in which the operation is stopped in the middle). ).

FIG. 194 is a state transition diagram illustrating a sword pulling operation of the sword decoration body 5001 when the aura member 5035 is provided on the sheath portion 5020, and is a state transition diagram of (A) a sword delivery state, (B) a first sword pulling state, and (C). Indicates the second sword withdrawal state. FIG. 195 is a vertical cross-sectional view illustrating the operation of the aura member 5035. In addition, FIG. 195 is a vertical cross-sectional view in a state where the blade portion 5011 is pulled out from the sheath portion 5020 in order to make the operation of the aura member 5035 easy to understand. Here, the same reference numerals are given to the same configurations as those in FIGS. 193 and 194 described above, and the description thereof will be omitted as appropriate.

As shown in FIGS. 194 (A) to 194 (C), the aura member 5035 provided in the sheath portion 5020 of the door frame 3 for accommodating the sword portion 5010 (sword blade portion 5011) is the above-mentioned sword portion 5010 (sword blade portion 5011). While the aura member 5030 provided in itself can move in the left-right direction, it can move in the up-down direction. Further, the aura member 5035 is provided so as to surround the outer circumference of the blade portion 5011. When the sword decoration body 5001 has an aura member, the aura member 5035 changes the state of the blade portion 5011 while maintaining the relative positional relationship between the blade portion 5011 and the aura member 5035 in the sword delivery state (sword delivery state). ⇔ 1st sword withdrawal state ⇔ 2nd sword withdrawal state) This makes it possible for the sword portion 5010 (sword blade portion 5011) to be united with the member on the frame side (aura member 5035) to appear as an integral decorative body.

The aura member 5035 in the normal state (completely housed state) is housed in the sheath portion 5020 as shown in FIG. 195 (A). The aura member 5035 is provided so that the upper end thereof is below the habaki 5011a of the blade portion 5011 in the completely housed state, and the hollow cylindrical enclosure aura member 5036 provided so as to surround the outer circumference of the blade portion 5011 and the enclosure aura member 5036. It has a right rack 5036a and a left rack 5036b provided below the hollow portion of the above, and a right pinion 5037a and a left pinion 5037b that mesh with the right rack 5036a and the left rack 5036b, respectively. In the enclosure aura member 5036, the right pinion 5037a is rotated counterclockwise in the front view by the driving means (not shown), the left pinion 5037b is rotated clockwise in the front view, and both pinions mesh with each other, so that the rotational force is on the rack right. It is converted into an upward linear motion of the rack 5036a and the left rack 5036b, and as shown in FIG. At this time, the aura member 5035 is in a completely appearing state in which the enclosure aura member 5036 is movable (maximum operation) up to the upper limit of the range of motion.

Further, although not shown, the blade portion 5011 includes an LED substrate having a plurality of LEDs, and the blade portion 5011 and the aura member 5035 can be light-emittingly decorated.

Here, regarding the operation timing of the aura member 5035, the blade portion maintains a relative positional relationship according to the state change (sword delivery state ⇔ first sword extraction state ⇔ second sword extraction state) of the sword decoration body 5001 (sword portion 5010). An example of combining with 5011 is shown, but the present invention is not limited to this. The aura member 5035 may start the operation (combination) after the sword decoration body 5001 is in the second sword drawing state. The final mode based on the effect pattern set until the sword ornament 5001 in the second sword withdrawal state functions as an operating means (not limited to the complete appearance state in which the maximum movement is performed, but the movement is stopped in the middle and appears in the middle It suffices if it can be in a state with an aura member). Further, the aura member 5035 may be combined with the blade portion 5011 so as not to be visually recognized by the player from the sword-delivered state to the first sword-drawn state.

(Example of sword drawing using a sword ornament)
Subsequently, with reference to FIGS. 196 to 201, a sword drawing effect using the sword effect operation unit 5000 (sword ornament 5001) will be described. In the following, when the sword-drawing preparation transition effect is executed in the reach effect ((X1) to (X5) in the figure), the sword-drawing main effect is not executed ((X6) and (X7) in the figure). The screen transition of the effect display device 1600 and the operation transition of the sword decoration body 5001 will be described with respect to the effect patterns ((A1) to (D2) in the figure) in which the sword drawing main effect is executed. FIGS. 196 to 200 are production transition diagrams of the sword drawing effect. FIG. 201 is a timing chart showing the relationship between the state change timing of the sword decoration body 5001 and the operation validity period related to the operation means.

In the reach effect, first, the left decorative symbol and the right decorative symbol that were variablely displayed in the display area of the effect display device 1600 are stopped and displayed at the same symbol (here, "7"), and only the central decorative symbol is variablely displayed. It begins by forming a reach state (Fig. 196 (X1)). Subsequently, the decorative symbol in the reach state is reduced and displayed in the upper right of the display area, and in the central display area, an effect image suggesting the execution of the sword drawing effect (movable of the sword decoration body 5001) is displayed. Specifically, after the image of two samurai facing each other and starting the Iai (Fig. 196 (X2)) is displayed, the image of one samurai holding the handle and holding the sword in the sheath (Fig.) 196 (X3)) is displayed. Here, the effect suggesting that the sword decoration body 5001 is movable is performed by the image in the display area of the effect display device 1600. During this period, the sword decoration body 5001 of the sword effect operation unit 5000 maintains the sword delivery state (FIG. 192 (A)).

Next, when the sword preparation transition effect is executed by a lottery based on the type of variation pattern transmitted to the peripheral control board 1510, the sword preparation transition effect is performed as shown in FIGS. 197 (X4) and (X5). When started, the face of the samurai holding the sword with his eyes closed is displayed in the display area of the effect display device 1600, and the eyes are enlarged and displayed with the passage of time. At this time, the sword decoration body 5001 changes from the sword-delivered state to the first sword-drawn state, so that the sword-drawn preparation transition effect is performed. It should be noted that when the sword-drawing preparation transition effect is performed, it is easier to execute the sword-drawing main effect after that than when it is not performed. Therefore, it can be said that the sword preparation transition effect is an expectation effect that indicates the expectation that the sword main effect is executed by the movement of the sword decoration body 5001. In the sword-drawing preparation transition production, by swinging the sword decoration 5001 in the first sword-drawing state up and down, even if the player is expected to change the sword decoration 5001 to the second sword-drawing state. good. The vertical swing of the sword decoration body 5001 in the first sword drawing state is performed to the extent that the aura member 5030 (5035) is not visible to the player in the form with the aura member. On the other hand, when the sword preparation transition effect is not executed, the sword decoration body 5001 may maintain the sword-delivered state so that the image shown in FIG. 196 (X3) described above continues to be displayed.

Here, when the sword decorative body 5001 in the subsequent sword drawing main effect is in the form of having an aura member, the aura member 5030 is closed inside the sheath portion 5020 at the timing of the sword extraction preparation transition effect (FIG. 193 (A). )) To move the movable range as much as possible (maximum movement) from the open state (FIG. 193 (B)) to deform the blade portion 5011. At this time, in the sword decorative body 5011 in the first sword withdrawal state, the portion from the hand of the blade portion 5011 to the portion of the habaki 5011a can be visually recognized by the player, but as described above, the aura member 5030 is the habaki 5011a of the blade portion 5011. Since it is provided below, there is no possibility that the aura member 5030 will be visually recognized by the player even if the aura member 5030 operates at the maximum. Further, the aura member 5030 is configured to be visible to the player at substantially the same timing as the timing at which the sword decoration body 5001 changes from the first sword withdrawal state to the second sword withdrawal state. Therefore, the sword decorative body 5001 in the second sword withdrawal state functions as an operating means capable of accepting the sword delivery operation by the player, and at the same time, the degree of expectation is determined by the form of the operating portion (sword portion 5010) operated by the player. It is possible to suggest.

Then, after the sword-drawing preparation transition effect is completed, if the sword-drawing main effect is not executed by lottery based on the type of variation pattern and the presence / absence of the sword-drawing preparation transition effect, the eyes are enlarged and displayed in the display area of the effect display device 1600. Sweat oozes on the forehead of the samurai (Fig. 197 (X6)), and the central decorative design that was displayed in a variable manner stops. And the stop mode different from the right decorative symbol, that is, the stop mode (here, "6") is displayed as a stop (FIG. 197 (X7)). At this time, the sword ornament 5001 is returned to the sword-delivered state from the first sword-drawn state at the time of FIG. 197 (X6), and maintains the sword-delivered state. That is, the reach effect is completed without the sword decoration body 5001 functioning as an operating means.

On the other hand, when the sword-drawing main effect is executed, after the sword-drawing preparation transition effect is completed, an image of the Iai slashing being performed is displayed in the display area of the effect display device 1600, and the sword ornament 5001 is the second sword-drawing effect. It becomes a state. Here, the form of the sword decorative body 5001 in the second sword-drawn state includes a form with an aura member that can be visually recognized in a form in which the blade portion 5011 is deformed by the aura member 5030, and the aura member 5030 is invisible. A form without an aura member is provided so that the undeformed blade portion 5011 can be visually recognized.

First, with reference to FIGS. 198 and 199, a case where the sword decorative body 5001 in the second sword drawing state is in the form without an aura member will be described. When the sword-drawing production starts, in the display area of the production display device 1600, an image in which the samurai opens his eyes and his eyes become sharp is displayed from the enlarged image of the eyes of the samurai who closed his eyes in FIG. 198 (A1)), an image of pulling out the sword that was being held and slashing the opponent's samurai is displayed (Fig. 198 (A2)). At this time, the sword ornament 5001 changes from the first sword withdrawal state to the second sword withdrawal state at the time of FIG. 198 (A1), and the sword blade portion 5011 becomes visible to the player.

Next, when the sword decoration body 5001 is in the second sword extraction state and a predetermined period of time elapses, the sword decoration body 5001 is operated by the player, that is, the handle portion 5012 of the sword portion 5010 in which the player protrudes from the sheath portion 5020. In order to function as an operation means capable of accepting the operation of grasping and pushing the sword blade portion 5011 downward so as to fit in the sheath portion 5020, an operation valid period for effectively detecting the sword delivery operation of the sword decoration body 5001 occurs. At this time, in the display area of the effect display device 1600, an operation promotion effect for encouraging the sword delivery operation of the sword decoration body 5001 is performed. Specifically, a sword having the same shape as the second sword withdrawn state of the sword decoration body 5001 is displayed, and an image showing the operation direction and the operation validity period is displayed together with the message "Pay the sword!" (FIG. 198 (Fig. 198). A3)). In the sword decoration body 5001, the LED of the internal LED substrate 5011c blinks to indicate that the operation is valid. Further, the image in the operation promotion effect is preferably an image related to a series of Iai, so that the operation effect image is displayed in the foreground so as to be superimposed on the immediately preceding Iai slashing scene image (FIG. 198 (A2)). It may be (see FIG. 204 (G2) described later).

Then, during the valid operation period, the player grabs the handle portion 5012 of the sword decoration body 5001 and performs a sword delivery operation in which the sword blade portion 5011 is housed in the sheath portion 5020. The post-operation effect is performed according to the degree of expectation that gives an advantageous result, and the effect is terminated with the notification of winning of the symbol type (Fig. 199). Specifically, when the symbol type is a big hit, the cut effect image is displayed flashily in the display area of the effect display device 1600 (FIG. 199 (C1)), and the central decorative symbol that has been variablely displayed is stopped and displayed. At the timing when the opponent's samurai is defeated and the Iai is settled, the center decorative symbol stops in the same stop mode as the left decorative symbol and the right decorative symbol, that is, the jackpot mode (here, "7") in the center of the screen. It is displayed (Fig. 199 (C2)). On the other hand, when the symbol type is out of alignment, in the display area of the effect display device 1600, the cut effect image is displayed more plainly than in the case of a big hit (Fig. 199 (D1)), and the central decorative symbol that has been variablely displayed is displayed. At the timing when the stop is displayed, the center decorative symbol is different from the left decorative symbol and the right decorative symbol in the center of the screen together with the image that the opponent's samurai cannot be defeated and the Iai cannot be settled, that is, the off mode (here, "6"). Is stopped and displayed (Fig. 199 (D2)).

Next, with reference to FIG. 200, a case where the sword decorative body 5001 in the second sword drawing state is in the form of having an aura member will be described. When the sword-drawing production starts, in the display area of the production display device 1600, an image in which the samurai opens his eyes and his eyes become sharp is displayed from the enlarged image of the eyes of the samurai who closed his eyes in FIG. 200 (B1)), an image of pulling out the sword that was being held and slashing the opponent's samurai is displayed (Fig. 200 (B2)). At this time, the sword ornament 5001 changed from the first sword withdrawal state to the second sword withdrawal state at the time of FIG. 200 (B1), and the sword blade portion 5011 deformed by the aura member 5030 (right aura member 5031 and left aura member 5032). Becomes visible to the player. Here, the blade portion 5011 is already deformed by the aura member 5030 at the time when the state changes from the first sword withdrawal state to the second sword withdrawal state, but the present invention is not limited to this. First, even if only the blade portion 5011 is visible to the player after the second sword is pulled out, the aura member 5030 is changed from the closed state to the open state and the blade portion 5011 is deformed to form a form with an aura member. It suffices that the sword decoration body 5001 is in the form with an aura member in the second sword-drawn state by the time the operation valid period is started. However, since the sword decoration body 5001 is already in the second sword extraction state in which the player can operate the sword, the appearance of the aura member 5030 can surely recognize the change in the degree of expectation, while the aura member 5030 If the operation takes time, there is a concern that the player may induce an erroneous operation. Therefore, when the aura member 5030 is made recognizable by the player while a series of movements from the first sword withdrawal state to the second sword withdrawal state are performed as in this example, and the sword decoration body 5001 is in the second sword withdrawal state. It is preferable that the operation validity period is started promptly.

Further, the images of FIGS. 200 (B1) and (B2) are the same as the images of FIGS. 198 (A1) and (A2) described above, and the player can see whether the sword ornament 5001 has an aura member just by looking at the images. It is not possible to judge whether or not it is. By actually looking at the sword decoration body 5001, the player can grasp whether it is a form with an aura member or a form without an aura member. As a result, the sword decoration body 5001 can be attracted attention even before the sword decoration body 5001 is made to function as the operation means, and the player can easily recognize the sword decoration body 5001 as the operation means and enjoy the operation effect without any confusion. Can be done. The image displayed on the effect display device 1600 at this time does not have to be the same as described above, and may be an image similar to the extent that the player can be directed to see the sword decoration body 5001. .. For example, there may be some differences in the samurai image (differences in eye color and effect effect).

Then, when the operation of the sword decoration body 5001 by the player reaches the effective operation period, the image of the sword in the operation promotion effect performed in the display area of the effect display device 1600 is in the same form with an aura member as the sword decoration body 5001. It will be displayed (FIG. 200 (B3)). Subsequent production is the same as in FIG. 199 described above, and thus the description thereof will be omitted. In the case of the form with the aura member, the effect images in FIGS. 199 (C1) and (D1) described above may be displayed more flashy than the form without the aura member.

Subsequently, with reference to FIG. 201, the relationship between the state change timing of the sword decoration body 5001 and the operation valid period in the sword drawing effect in which the sword preparation transition effect and the sword drawing main effect are performed will be described. As shown in FIG. 201, when the reach effect is started (time t0), the Iai effect is started in the display area of the effect display device 1600. The state changes to the state of pulling out the sword (time t1). At this time, when the effect pattern in which the aura member is attached is set, the aura member 5030 is in the open state from the closed state, but even in the open state, the aura member 5030 is in the game in the first sword drawing state. It is provided so that it cannot be seen by a person. Therefore, at the stage of the first sword withdrawal state, the player grasps whether or not the sword decoration body 5001 further changes to the second sword withdrawal state, and if so, whether or not the sword decoration body 5001 is in the form with an aura member. Can't. However, when the sword-drawing preparation transition effect is executed, the sword-drawing main effect is executed, and there is a high possibility that the form will have an aura member, so that the player's expectation can be increased. Further, even if the sword-drawing main effect is not executed, the sword movement suggestion effect (FIG. 196 (X3)) is executed by the effect display device 1600 before the start of the sword-drawing preparation transition effect, so that the player can move the sword. As a movable body effect corresponding to the suggestion effect, the state change (movable) of the sword decoration body 5001 from the sword-delivered state to the first sword-drawn state can be captured.

Then, when the sword preparation transition effect is completed, the sword extraction main effect is subsequently started, and the sword ornament 5001 changes from the first sword extraction state to the second sword extraction state (time t2). Then, after a predetermined period has elapsed, the operation valid period is started, and the sword ornament 5001 functions as an operation means (time t3). When the operation valid period is reached, in the display area of the effect display device 1600, an operation promotion effect using a sword related to a series of Iai effects is performed. Then, when the sword delivery operation by the player is detected during the operation valid period (time tx), the post-operation effect is performed. At this time, the sword decoration body 5001 returns from the second sword drawing state to the sword delivery state by the sword delivery operation by the player. Then, when the preset operation valid period ends, the reach state ends (time t4), and the symbol type is notified in the display area of the effect display device 1600, so that a series of Iai effects ends (a series of Iai effects). Time t5). The operation validity period may be terminated by the detection of the operation by the player, as shown by the alternate long and short dash line in the figure. If no operation is detected during the operation valid period, the sword ornament 5001 is automatically returned from the second sword withdrawal state to the sword delivery state at the end of the operation valid period.

Here, the predetermined period (time t3-t2) from the time when the sword decoration body 5001 is in the second sword pulling state to the start of the operation valid period is the mode (aura member) in which the player is in the second sword pulling state of the sword decoration body 5001. A period longer than the operation valid period (time t4-t3) is secured as an aspect confirmation period during which it is possible to confirm whether or not the form is attached, a light emitting mode, and the like. That is, even if the operation unit (sword part 5010) that can be operated by the player reaches the operation position (second sword withdrawal state) that functions as the operation means, the operation acceptance is immediately started (the operation validity period is generated). Instead, the player is allowed to operate after confirming the final mode of the operation unit at the operation position. As a result, the player confirms the final mode before operating the sword ornament 5001, and raises expectations for the subsequent development (for example, in the case of the form with an aura member, the expectation increases), and prepares the mind. As soon as the second sword is pulled out, the operation validity period starts and there is a concern that the interest of the game will be reduced by rushing to the operation production without confirming the mode of the operation means. Can be wiped off.

Further, the sword pulling effect of the sword decoration body 5001 is performed in a series of Iai effects performed in the display area of the effect display device 1600, and the sword decoration body 5001 is a movable effect (time t0 to t3). An operation effect (time t3 to t4) as an operation means is defined as an effect related to the operation effect. As a result, the player can be impressed with the unexpectedness and variety of effects in switching the functions of the sword decoration body 5001, so that the deterioration of the game interest caused by the uniform effect by the conventional operation means can be suppressed. Can be done.

In the above-mentioned production example, the case where the aura member 5030 is provided on the sword portion 5010 (sword blade portion 5011) itself and the sword blade portion 5011 is deformed by the aura member 5030 has been described. However, the aura member 5035 is the sheath portion of the door frame 3. The same applies to the case where the sword portion 5010 is provided on the 5020 and is united with the member on the frame side (aura member 5035) to form an integral decorative body.

As described above, the sword decorative body 5001 of this example constitutes an operating means capable of changing (deforming or combining) the mode of the members (sword portion 5010 and aura member 5030) of the same system as the decorative movable body having a general appearance. doing. The mode of the sword decoration body 5001 (sword delivery state, first sword withdrawal state, second sword withdrawal state, form without aura member and form with aura member) is a game ball to the first start port 2002 or the second start port 2004. It is determined based on the result of the first special lottery or the result of the second special lottery drawn by acceptance (see FIG. 191). Therefore, the sword decoration body 5001 can suggest the degree of expectation that the variable display will be an advantageous result for the player due to the change of its own mode, and raises the interest of the player's operating means (sword decoration body 5001). Therefore, it is possible to suppress a decline in the interest in the game.

In addition, before the sword decoration body 5001 is in the second sword extraction state (operation position) that can be operated by the player, the expectation level is suggested by changing the state of the sword decoration body 5001 from the sword delivery state to the first sword extraction state. doing. In addition, the appearance of the aura members 5030 and 5035 in the state change from the first sword withdrawal state to the second sword withdrawal state suggests the degree of expectation. In this way, the sword ornament 5001 of this example changes to the expected suggestion mode (first sword withdrawal state and appearance of aura member) in the process of changing from the sword delivery state to the second sword withdrawal state (operation position). , The player becomes strongly interested in the operating means until the operating means becomes operable. Further, when the state change of the operating means and the expectation degree suggestion are performed separately, specifically, when the operation to the operation position is performed after the expectation degree suggestion is performed in advance, the expectation degree is high. In the aspect, there is a concern that the player may operate the sword decoration body 5001 even though the operating means is not yet in the operable operation position when the player grasps the sword decoration body 5001. Since the state change to the position and the expectation degree suggestion proceed at the same time, it is possible to prevent the above-mentioned erroneous operation.

In the above-mentioned first sword pulling state, only the habaki 5011a portion of the blade portion 5011 is pulled out from the sheath portion 5012 so that the player cannot visually recognize the aura member 5030 (5035). A part of the aura member 5030 (5035) may be visible in the one-drawn state. At this time, make sure that the amount of sword drawn in the first sword-drawn state is less than the maximum amount of sword-drawn in the second sword-drawn state (operating position). Here, the aura member 5030 (5035) is in the completely appearing state when the second sword is pulled out. Since the player can see a part of the aura member 5030 (5035) indicating that the expectation is high from the first sword withdrawal state, the player can have a higher expectation at the time of the first sword withdrawal state. You can increase your interest in subsequent changes.

In addition, when the player can see a part of the aura member 5030 (5035) in the first sword withdrawal state, it is determined that the aura member is attached at the stage of the sword withdrawal preparation transition effect (high expectation). Since the player can grasp it and have high expectations, the disappointment when the sword-drawing production is not executed in the subsequent development becomes very large. Therefore, when the sword-drawing preparation transition effect is performed, the player's emotions are greatly shaken depending on the presence or absence of the sword-drawing book effect, and it is possible to provide a highly playful effect.

(Modification example 1-Sword drawing effect using operation buttons)
In the following, with reference to FIGS. 202 to 205, when the sword pulling effect is executed in the reach effect, the sword pulling operation of the sword decoration body 5001 in the sword drawing effect is triggered by the pressing operation of the operation button 410 by the player. Will be described. 202 to 204 are examples of the effect transition diagram of the sword pulling effect of the modified example 1. FIG. 205 is a timing chart showing the relationship between the state change timing of the sword decoration body 5001 of the modified example 1 and the operation timing of the operation means. The same description as the above-mentioned sword-drawing effect (FIGS. 196 to 201) will be omitted as appropriate.

Here, the production patterns ((Y1) to (Y3) → (E1) and (E2) in the figure) in which neither the sword-drawing preparation transition effect nor the sword-drawing main effect is performed, and after the sword-drawing preparation transition effect is executed. The screen transition of the effect display device 1600 and the state of the operation button 410 for the effect patterns ((Y1) to (Y3) → (F1) to (F3) → (G1) to (G4) in the figure) in which the sword-drawing effect is performed. The transition and the operation transition of the sword decoration body 5001 will be described.

When the reach effect is started, the Iai effect is started in the display area of the effect display device 1600 (FIG. 202 (Y1)), and the effect suggests the operation of the operation button 410 by displaying the operation button image to which the effect is added. Is performed (FIG. 202 (Y2)). Then, when the operation valid period of the operation button 410 is started, an image display of the operation button to be operated and a gauge display of the operation valid period are performed, and an operation promotion effect for urging the player to operate is performed (FIG. 202 (FIG. 202). Y3). At this time, the operation button 410 to be operated is lit, and the operation button for image display is also displayed in the same light emitting mode. Therefore, the player can easily perform the operation effect of the operation button 410. It is possible to detect that the operation button 410 is emitted, and the light emission of the operation button 410 is terminated when the operation by the player is detected.

If the sword-drawing preparation transition effect and the sword-drawing main effect are not performed and the result is a disengagement, when the player's pressing operation on the operation button 410 is detected, the reach effect is completed in the display area of the effect display device 1600. An image notifying the result of the loss (“767”) is displayed (FIGS. 203 (E1) and (E2)), and the effect is completed. At this time, there is no change in the sword decoration body 5001 and the operation button 410.

Further, when the sword pulling main effect is performed after the sword pulling preparation transition effect is executed, the sword decoration body 5001 changes from the sword delivery state to the first sword pulling state when the player's pressing operation on the operation button 410 is detected. A sword-drawing preparation transition effect is performed (FIGS. 203 (F1) and (F2)). At this time, in the display area of the effect display device 1600, the white characters of "Tenchu" are displayed on the blackout screen (Fig. 203 (F1)), and the image of the samurai on the side trying to touch the sword is displayed. (Fig. 203 (F2)). Next, the sword-drawing effect in which the sword decoration body 5001 changes from the first sword-drawing state to the second sword-drawing state (a form with an aura member) is started (FIGS. 203 (F3), 204 (G2) and (G2)). At this time, in the display area of the effect display device 1600, when the sword decoration body 5001 changes from the first sword extraction state to the second sword extraction state (a form with an aura member) due to the sword extraction main effect, FIG. 203 (F2) immediately before and immediately after. Unlike the samurai Iai image shown in FIG. 204 (G1), an image of a lightning bolt running is interrupted and displayed on the blackout screen as shown in FIG. 203 (F3), and the mode of the sword decoration 5001 (whether or not it has an aura member). The degree of expectation to win (hit) Iai is shown by the strength of the lightning bolt.

Subsequent production is the same as in FIGS. 198 (A2), (A3) and 199 described above. In order to function as an operation means capable of effectively accepting the operation of the sword decoration body 5001, an operation valid period for effectively detecting the sword delivery operation of the sword decoration body 5001 occurs. Then, the player is urged to perform the sword delivery operation within the operation valid period (FIG. 204 (G2)), and the symbol type (hit or miss) is notified by the player's sword delivery operation (FIG. 204 (G3) or (FIG. 204 (G3)). G4)).

Subsequently, with reference to the timing chart shown in FIG. 205, the operation of the operation button 410 and the sword decoration body 5001 by the player and the state change of the sword decoration body 5001 will be described. The first modification is characterized in that the operation of the operation button 410 by the player starts the state change of the sword decoration body 5001. When the reach effect is started (time t0), the operation valid period of the operation button 410 occurs at an early stage, and the operation promotion effect for urging the player to operate the operation button 410 is performed (time t1). Then, when the player operates the operation button 410 within the operation valid period (time t1 to t2) (time ty), the sword decoration body 5001 starts to change the state, and the sword is first pulled out from the sword-delivered state. Here, in the first sword-drawing state, the player cannot determine whether or not the aura member 5030 appears (whether or not the blade portion 5011 is deformed by the aura member 5030). After that, the sword decoration body 5001 changes from the first sword withdrawal state to the second sword withdrawal state (time t2), and after a predetermined time elapses, the sword decoration body 5001 is operated in order to make the sword decoration body 5001 function as an operation means. When the validity period occurs, an operation promotion effect is performed to encourage the player to operate the sword decoration body 5001 (time t3), and when the player operates the sword decoration body 5001 within the operation validity period (time t3 to t4) (time t3). At time tx), the decorative symbol in the reach state is stopped, the result is notified, and the effect is ended (time t5). If the operation of the operation button 410 by the player is not detected within the operation validity period of the operation button 410 set in advance (time t1 to t2), the sword decoration body 5001 is in the final form (first form) when the operation validity period ends. (2) The form with an aura member in a sword-drawn state) may be deformed and changed at once. Further, the timing of the state change from the first sword withdrawal state to the second sword withdrawal state is changed according to the operation of the player's operation button 410, that is, after the first sword withdrawal state is reached and a certain period of time elapses, the state changes to the second sword withdrawal state. It may be. If the player does not detect the operation of the sword decoration 5001 within the preset operation validity period (time t3 to t4), the sword decoration 5001 becomes the second when the operation validity period ends. It is returned from the sword-drawn state to the sword-delivered state.

In the first modification, the state change timing of the sword decoration body 5001 is determined by the operation of the operation button 410 or the sword decoration body 5001 by the player. The timing for starting the sword withdrawal operation of the sword decoration body 5001 is determined by the operation of the operation button 410 (time ty), and the timing for starting the sword delivery operation of the sword decoration body 5001 is determined by the operation of the sword decoration body 5001 (time tk). In this way, the movement of the sword decoration body 5001 is reversed (sword pulling operation and sword delivery operation) depending on which of the operation button 410 and the sword decoration body 5001 is to be operated, so that the mutual operation is effective. The periods (time t1 to t2 and time t3 to t4) are provided so as not to overlap. Therefore, even if the other operating means is operated during the operation valid period of one operating means, it becomes invalid.

As described above, in the first modification, the state change of the sword decoration body 5001 is started based on the operation of the operation button 410 by the player. Therefore, the operation of the operation button 410 by the player determines the form (final form) when the sword decoration body 5001 functions as an operating means (for example, the form with an aura member by deforming and changing the state of the sword decoration body 5001). It can be made to look like the second sword is pulled out. As a result, the operation value of the operation button 410 can be further increased, and the player's motivation for operation can be increased.

Further, based on the operation of the operation button 410 by the player, in the display area of the effect display device 1600, the effect images corresponding to the deformation and the state change of the sword decoration body 5001 (FIGS. 203 (F1) to (F3) → FIG. 204. Since (G1) and (G2)) are displayed, the operation value of the operation button 410 can be further enhanced, and the interest of the game can be enhanced.

(Modification example 2-Stage aura withdrawal effect using operation buttons)
In the following, with reference to FIGS. 206 to 210, the degree of appearance of the aura member 5035 in the form of the sword decoration body 5001 with the aura member, specifically, the combination of the aura member 5035 with the blade portion 5011, based on the modification 1. A case where the degree (aura level) is changed according to the number of operations of the operation button 410 by the player will be described. 206 to 210 are examples of the effect transition diagram of the sword pulling effect of the modified example 2. The same effects as described above will be omitted as appropriate.

The aura level provided here has 0 to 3 stages. Aura level 0 indicates a completely housed state (FIG. 195 (A)) in which the aura member 5035 is not visible to the player. The aura level 3 is a completely appearing state in which the aura member 5035 is united with the blade portion 5011 in the second sword-drawn state while maintaining a relative positional relationship in the sword-delivered state, so that the player can see the maximum. 195 (B)) is shown. The aura level 1 indicates a 1/3 appearance state in which the aura member 5035 is visibly appearing to the player by only 1/3 of the complete appearance state. The aura level 2 indicates a 2/3 appearance state in which the aura member 5035 is visibly appearing to the player for only two-thirds of the complete appearance state.

Here, there is no sword preparation transition effect with the effect patterns ((Z1) to (Z3) → (H1) and (H2) in the figure) in which neither the sword preparation transition effect nor the sword main effect is performed. Is the case where the sword is pulled out, and the sword decoration body 5001 becomes the final form (the form with the aura member in the completely appearing state (aura level 3)) by operating the operation button 410 once (in the figure). (Z1)-(Z3)-> (I1) and (I2)-> (G1)-(G4)), multiple operation of the operation button 410 is required, and the aura level of the sword ornament 5001 changes stepwise. For the effect patterns ((Z1) to (Z3) → (J1) to (I2) → (G1) to (G4) in the figure), the screen transition of the effect display device 1600, the state transition of the operation button 410, and the sword decoration The operation transition of 5001 will be described.

In the above-mentioned modification 1, the final form (form at the time of operation) of the sword decoration body 5001 is found by operating the operation button 410 once, but in the modification 2, the operation of the operation button 410 is performed step by step. It is characterized in that a step operation effect is performed in which the aura member 5035 is combined with the blade portion 5011 to change the aura level of the sword decoration body 5001.

First, in the production pattern in which the sword preparation transition effect is not performed and the sword extraction main effect is not performed, that is, the state of the sword decoration body 5001 does not change even if the operation button 410 is operated, FIG. 202 of the above-mentioned modification 1. (Y1) to (Y3) → Follow the same effect transition as in FIGS. 203 (E1) and (E2) (FIGS. 206 (Z1) to (Z3) → FIGS. 207 (H1) and (H2)).

In addition, there is no sword preparation transition effect, but the sword main effect is performed, and the sword decoration body 5001 is in the final form (complete appearance state (aura level 3) with an aura member) by operating the operation button 410 once. ), After the same effect as in FIGS. 202 (Y1) to (Y3) of the above-described modification 1 (FIGS. 206 (Z1) to (Z3)), the operation of the operation button 410 by the player is detected. Then, the sword decoration body 5001 changes its state from the sword-delivered state to the second sword-drawn state. At this time, the aura member 5035 of the sword decoration body 5001 is united with the sword blade part 5011 while maintaining the relative positional relationship with the sword blade part 5011 in the sword delivery state, and completely appears when the sword decoration body 5001 is in the second sword removal state. The state (aura level 3) is reached (FIG. 207 (I1)). The above-described modification 1 of the sword decoration body 5001 with an aura member is composed of the aura member 5030, and the modification 2 is composed of the aura member 5035. FIG. 203 (F1) (F2) → follows the same effect transition as in FIG. 204 (FIGS. 207 (I1) (I2) → FIGS. 204 (G1) to (G4)).

Further, in the case where there is no sword preparation transition effect but the sword extraction main effect is performed, the operation of the operation button 410 is required a plurality of times, and the aura level of the sword ornament 5001 changes stepwise. The same production transition as before is followed until the operation of the operation button 410 for the first time (FIGS. 206 (Z1) to (Z3)), but the sword decoration body 5001 after the first operation is in the sword-delivered state to the second sword-drawn state. However, the aura member 5035 is in a completely housed state (aura level 0) in which the player does not see it. The image displayed in the display area of the effect display device 1600 at this time is the same image as in FIG. 207 (I1) described above (FIG. 208 (J1)).

Next, the second operation effect of the operation button 410 is started. When the operation valid period of the operation button 410 starts, an operation promotion image prompting the player to operate the operation button 410 is displayed in the display area of the effect display device 1600, and the operation button 410 to be operated is illuminated and decorated. Is performed (Fig. 208 (J2)). Then, when the operation of the operation button 410 by the player is detected, the next effect is performed according to the preset aura levels 0 to 3.

First, when the set aura level is "0" (that is, in the case of the form without the aura member), the aura member 5035 maintains the completely accommodated state even if the operation of the operation button 410 by the player is detected, and the effect is produced. In the display area of the display device 1600, the step operation effect is terminated (there is no operation request for the operation button 410 thereafter), and it is notified that the process returns to the sword extraction effect (Iai effect) corresponding to the sword decoration body 5001 in the second sword extraction state. An image (here, white characters of "Iza" on the blackout screen) is displayed (Fig. 208 (J3)). After that, the sword decoration body 5001 has no aura member, and follows the same effect transition as in FIG. 203 (F2) → FIG. (FIG. 208 (J4) → FIGS. 204 (G1) to (G4)).

On the other hand, when the set aura level is any one of "1" to "3", when the operation of the operation button 410 by the player is detected, the aura member 5035 is in the 1/3 appearance state from the completely housed state. Become. Then, in the display area of the effect display device 1600, an image showing the aura level 1 is displayed (FIG. 208 (J5)). At this time, the sword ornament 5001 is luminescently decorated in green indicating aura level 1.

Next, the third operation effect of the operation button 410 is started. When the operation valid period of the operation button 410 starts, an operation promotion image prompting the player to operate the operation button 410 is displayed in the display area of the effect display device 1600, and the operation button 410 to be operated is illuminated and decorated. Is done. At this time, an image showing the aura level 1 is displayed in the display area of the effect display device 1600 (FIG. 209 (K1)). The emission color of the operation button 410 at this time may be green indicating the aura level 1. Then, when the operation of the operation button 410 by the player is detected, the next effect is performed according to the preset aura level.

When the aura level is "1", the aura member 5035 maintains the 1/3 appearance state even if the operation of the operation button 410 by the player is detected, and the step operation effect ends in the display area of the effect display device 1600 ( After that, there is no request to operate the operation button 410), and an image (here, "Iza" is displayed on the blackout screen) to notify that the sword decoration body 5001 in the second sword-drawing state is returned to the sword-drawing effect (Iai effect). White letters) are displayed, and an image showing aura level 1 is displayed (FIG. 209 (K2)). After that, the sword decoration body 5001 is in a form with an aura member in a state where 1/3 appears, and in an effect mode (color, sound, etc.) according to the aura level 1, FIG. 203 (F2) → FIG. A similar effect transition is followed (FIG. 209 (K3) → FIGS. 204 (G1) to (G4)). At this time, an image showing the aura level 1 is always displayed in the display area of the effect display device 1600.

When the aura level is "2" or "3", when the operation of the operation button 410 by the player is detected, the aura member 5035 changes from the 1/3 appearance state to the 2/3 appearance state. Then, in the display area of the effect display device 1600, an image showing the aura level 2 is displayed (FIG. 209 (K4)). At this time, the sword ornament 5001 is lightly decorated in red indicating aura level 2.

Next, the fourth operation effect of the operation button 410 is started. When the operation valid period of the operation button 410 starts, an operation promotion image prompting the player to operate the operation button 410 is displayed in the display area of the effect display device 1600 together with an image showing the aura level 2, and the operation button 410 to be operated is displayed. An operation promotion effect that is luminescent and decorated is performed (FIG. 209 (K5)). The emission color of the operation button 410 at this time may be red, which indicates aura level 2. Then, when the operation of the operation button 410 by the player is detected, the next effect is performed according to the preset aura level.

When the aura level is "2", the aura member 5035 maintains the 2/3 appearance state even if the operation of the operation button 410 by the player is detected, and the step operation effect ends in the display area of the effect display device 1600. (Since then, there is no request to operate the operation button 410), and an image notifying that the player returns to the sword-drawing effect (Iai effect) corresponding to the sword decoration body 5001 in the second sword-drawn state (here, "Iza" is displayed on the blackout screen. White letters) are displayed, and an image showing the aura level is displayed (FIG. 210 (M1)). After that, the sword decoration body 5001 is in a form with an aura member in a state where 2/3 appears, and in an effect mode (color, sound, etc.) according to the aura level 2, FIG. 203 (F2) → FIG. A similar effect transition is followed (FIG. 210 (M1) → FIGS. 204 (G1) to (G4)). At this time, an image showing the aura level 2 is always displayed in the display area of the effect display device 1600.

When the aura level is "3", when the operation of the operation button 410 by the player is detected, the aura member 5035 changes from the 2/3 appearance state to the complete appearance state. Then, in the display area of the effect display device 1600, an image showing the aura level 3 (MAX) is displayed (FIG. 210 (L1)). At this time, the sword decoration body 5001 is luminescently decorated in a rainbow color indicating an aura level 3. Subsequently, in the display area of the effect display device 1600, the step operation effect is finished (after that, there is no operation request of the operation button 410), and the sword extraction effect (Iai effect) corresponding to the sword decoration body 5001 in the second sword extraction state is performed. An image notifying the return (here, white characters of "Iza" on the blackout screen) is displayed, and an image showing the aura level 3 is displayed (FIG. 210 (L2)). After that, the sword decoration body 5001 is in a form with an aura member in a completely appearing state, and is the same as in FIG. 203 (F2) → FIG. The production transition is followed (FIG. 210 (L3) → FIGS. 204 (G1) to (G4)). At this time, an image showing the aura level 3 is always displayed in the display area of the effect display device 1600.

In the above description, the degree of integration of the aura member 5035 with the blade portion 5011 is changed each time at the operation timing when the aura level rises to widen the range visible to the player (increasing the degree of appearance). Not limited to. Even if the aura level rises, the aura confirmed when the aura level is confirmed (specifically, when the white letters "Iza" are displayed on the blackout screen) without increasing the appearance of the aura member 5035. A stock type combination may be performed in which the aura member 5035 is united with the blade portion 5011 at once so that the appearance degree according to the level is obtained. Further, the target for increasing the appearance degree stepwise is not limited to the aura member 5035, and the sword portion 5010 (sword blade portion 5011) may be targeted. For example, the sword portion 5010 (sword blade portion 5011) may be changed in a stepwise state from the first sword withdrawal state to the second sword withdrawal state.

As described above, in the second modification, the player is requested to operate the other non-movable operation button 410 while the sword decoration body 5001 functioning as the operation means is in the movable state, which is a surprising novelty. It is possible to provide various operation effects, and it is possible to further enhance the interest of the game as compared with the first modification. In addition, since the player is given multiple operation opportunities to develop the production step by step, it is possible to impress the player with a great deal of involvement in the production and prevent the interest in the production from being interrupted. be able to. In addition, since the determined aura level is recognizable in the subsequent production, the player can feel the afterglow of the operation production.

(Other production patterns 1 using the sword ornament 5001)
Subsequently, with reference to FIGS. 211 to 213, another reach effect using the above-mentioned sword decoration body 5001 will be described. 21 to 213 are diagrams for explaining the screen transition of the effect display device 1600 and the operation transition of the sword decoration body 5001 in the princess reach effect. Here, the following points are mainly different from the above-mentioned sword ornament 5001. First, the sword decorative body 5001 in the sword-delivered state functions as an operating means, and the sword pulling operation by the player is operated and detected. Secondly, the sheath portion 5020 provided on the door frame 3 is configured to be movable in the left-right direction in the front view, and the sword decorative body 5001 in the second sword-drawn state is the effect display device 1600. It can operate up to the center of the front.

When the fluctuating symbol forms a reach state, the variable display of the three decorative symbols is in the reach state in the display area of the effect display device 1600 (FIG. 211 (A1)), and the start image of the princess reach is displayed (FIG. 211 (A2)). Here, above the display area of the effect display device 1600, a specific decorative member SDY (sudare) that can be moved in the vertical direction is provided. In the normal state, the specific decorative member SDY does not overlap the display area of the effect display device 1600 in the front view, and a part of the bamboo blind is stationary above the display area in a state (initial state) visible to the player. There is. At this time, the sword ornament 5001 is in the sword-delivered state.

In the princess reach effect, an image of the princess heading to the back of the blind is displayed (FIG. 211 (A3)), and then an operation effect suggestion image suggesting the operation effect is displayed (FIG. 211 (B1)). Then, the operation effect of the sword decoration body 5001 is started, the operation valid period for accepting the operation of the sword decoration body 5001 is started, and the display area of the effect display device 1600 is urged to the player to pull out the sword decoration body 5001. An operation promotion image and a gauge showing the operation validity period are displayed (FIG. 212 (B2)). At this time, the sword decoration body 5001 and the specific decorative member SDY are moved in small steps in the vertical direction from the display of the operation effect suggestion image to the display of the operation promotion image and the gauge indicating the operation validity period. May be good. Then, when the sword pulling operation by the player is detected, the effect is performed according to the preset development pattern or end pattern.

The sword pulling operation by the player refers to an operation of pulling out the blade portion 5011 from the sheath portion 5020 so that the player grasps the handle portion 5012 of the sword ornamental body 5001 in the sword-delivered state and lifts the sword portion 5010 upward. When the sword decoration body 5001 changes from the sword delivery state to the second sword pulling state, the sword pulling operation by the player is detected, and a detection notification operation for notifying the player of the detection is performed. The detection / notification operation may be an operation in which the sword portion 5010 (or the handle portion 5012) moves up and down, such as movement or vibration, and an operation different from the own sword pulling operation can be felt through the handle portion 5012 grasped by the player. Just do it. Further, the detection / notification operation is performed for a certain period of time after the operation is detected, and the operation can be visually recognized even if the player releases his / her hand from the handle portion 5012. For this reason, the player can visually confirm the operation detection, so that unnecessary contact with the sword decoration body 5001 (such as grasping again for detection confirmation) is reduced, and failure or damage of the movable body is prevented. Can be done.

In the sword pulling operation by the player here, the aura member 5030 (5035) does not appear, but depending on the degree of expectation, the aura member 5030 (5035) appears visibly from the player when the player pulls out the sword. You may do so.

When the end pattern is performed, when the player's sword pulling operation is detected, the specific decorative member SDY is stationary above the display area without overlapping the display area of the effect display device 1600 (initial stage). The state) is maintained, and a screen indicating the end of the operation effect by the sword decoration body 5001 is displayed (FIG. 212 (C1)). Then, the decorative symbol is stopped and displayed in the detached mode "767" (FIG. 212 (C2)). At this time, the sword ornament 5001 is returned to the sword-delivered state at the timing when the stop result of FIG. 212 (C2) is notified, but is not limited to this, and is returned to the sword-delivered state at the timing when the detection notification operation is finished. You may do so.

On the other hand, when the development pattern is performed, when the player's sword pulling operation is detected, the specific decorative member SDY (shadow) is placed in the center of the front surface (below the display area) that overlaps with the display area of the effect display device 1600. Only the hold display area can be dropped and moved to a visible state (total fall state) (FIG. 212 (D1)). Next, the shadow of the princess is projected on the display area of the effect display device 1600. At this time, the sword decoration body The 5001 maintains the second sword-drawn state (FIG. 212 (D2)). At this time, a plurality of patterns of the shadow of the princess projected on the display area of the effect display device 1600 may be provided, for example. By differentiating the color of the shadow, the size of the shadow, and the comment displayed after that, it is possible to suggest the degree of expectation of the lottery result by Princess Reach (the degree of expectation of winning, the game profit when it is a hit, etc.). ..

Then, after a predetermined period has passed since the sword decoration body 5001 was put into the second sword pulling state by the player's sword pulling operation, that is, after the shadow of the princess was projected on the display area of the effect display device 1600, the second sword pulling state was reached. The sword decoration body 5001 moves to the center in the front left-right direction of the display area of the effect display device 1600 by moving the sheath portion 5020 provided on the door frame 3 (FIG. 212 (D3)). Then, when the sword decoration body 5001 reaches the front center position of the display area of the effect display device 1600, the specific decorative member SDY returns from the fully dropped state to the initial state, and the display area of the effect display device 1600 with good visibility is displayed. An image of a surprised princess is displayed with the blinds removed (Fig. 213 (D4)). After that, the sword decoration body 5001 returns to the position where the original sword pulling operation was performed again, and in the display area of the effect display device 1600, when the result of the variable display this time is a hit, the hit is notified together with the smiling princess. An image is displayed (FIGS. 213 (E1) (E2)), and an image notifying the disengagement is displayed together with a sad princess in the case of the disengagement (FIGS. 213 (F1) (F2)).

When the sword pulling operation by the player is detected, the detection notification operation is performed as described above, but the sword decoration body 5001 moves to the center of the front left and right direction of the display area of the effect display device 1600. If the player cannot move due to being grasped when executing, an announcement or display such as "Please release the sword" is made. The production itself proceeds even if the player does not stop grasping the sword decoration 5001, but the sword decoration 5001 is operated by the player at the left-right movable production timing (FIG. 212 (D3)) of the sword decoration 5001. If it is held at the position where it was performed, it will cause a delay in the movable effect in the left-right direction. However, regardless of whether or not the movable effect in the left-right direction of the sword decoration body 5001 is executed, the effect executed in the display area of the effect display device 1600 and the drop movable effect of the specific decorative member SDY (sudare) are progressing. Since it is configured to do so, the progress of the game will not be stagnant. The sword decoration body 5001 may be configured to immediately perform a movable effect in the left-right direction when the player releases the holding of the sword decoration body 5001, or may be configured not to perform a movable effect. You may.

In this way, in the princess reach production, the specific decorative member SDY that suggests the operation production (operation effective) of the sword decoration body 5001 is dropped and moved by the sword pulling operation (vertical movement) of the sword decoration body 5001 by the player. At the same time, the sword decoration body 5001 itself operated outside the display area of the effect display device 1600 is moved in the forward direction (at the operation position) of the effect display device 1600 by moving the sheath portion 5020 provided on the door frame 3. On the other hand, it can be moved to the left). That is, based on the sword pulling operation by the player, the sword decoration body 5001 itself can be moved to an operation position different from the operation position where the sword pulling operation was performed, increasing the operation value of the player and motivating the player to operate. It is possible to suppress the decline of. In addition, since one operating means can be operated in a stepwise different manner (up and down direction during operation, left and right direction after operation) by the operation by the player, an effect using a plurality of movable modes is provided. It is possible to increase the operating value of the operating means as compared with the conventional operating means having only one movable mode. Therefore, it is possible to suppress a decrease in the interest in the game.

The left-right movable effect of the sword decoration body 5001 is an effect display for the purpose of performing an integrated effect with the effect image performed in the display area of the effect display device 1600 and the specific decorative member SDY (sudare). The operation position outside the display area of the device 1600 is displaced to the operation position in front of the display area of the effect display device 1600, but the present invention is not limited to this. For example, after performing the sword pulling operation with the sword decoration body 5001 positioned in front of the display area of the effect display device 1600, the sword decoration body 5001 is moved so as to be located outside the display area of the effect display device 1600. A movable effect in the left-right direction may be performed so as to displace to the left direction (the left end of the frame). Further, since the operation by the player of the sword decoration body 5001 of this example is an operation in the vertical direction (a sword pulling operation of pulling up the sword portion 5011 from the bottom to the top), the sword decoration body 5001 performed after the operation based on the operation. In the movable effect, it is desirable that the sword decoration body 5001 operates in a direction (horizontal direction or the like as in this example) different from the operating direction (here, the vertical direction) when the player operates.

Further, when the sword pulling operation by the player is detected, the detection notification operation for notifying the player of the detection via the operation unit (sword unit 5010) operated by the player is performed, so that the player can accurately determine the operation end timing. Can be judged. Further, since the detection / notification operation is performed so that the player can visually confirm it for a certain period of time, it is possible to suppress unnecessary contact such as touching the operation unit again for detection confirmation. Therefore, it is possible to prevent the player from continuing the operation and delaying the subsequent movable production of the sword decoration body 5001 or damaging the movable body due to unnecessary contact. Further, if the movable effect cannot be executed due to contact with the sword decoration body 5001 even after the detection notification operation, a warning such as an announcement is given to the player to let go, and the operation is required during the operation valid period. Since even contact with the operating means is prohibited after the detection / notification operation is completed, the operating value of the operating means can be increased.

(Other production patterns 2 using the sword ornament 5001)
Subsequently, with reference to FIGS. 214 to 216, another reach effect using the above-mentioned sword ornament 5001 will be described. FIGS. 214 to 216 are diagrams for explaining the screen transition of the effect display device 1600, the state transition of the operation button 410, and the operation transition of the sword decoration body 5001 in the reach effect including the operation effect of the operation button 410 used in many ways. be. Here, as the operation effect of the operation button 410, a pattern ((A) (B) → N in the figure) in which the expectation degree suggestion effect suggesting the expectation degree that the fluctuation during execution becomes a big hit and the operation of the operation button 410 are performed. As an effect, a pattern ((A) (B) → M in the figure) in which the operation effect of the sword decoration body 5001 is suggested and developed will be described.

In the reach effect here, when the variable display of the three decorative symbols is in the reach state in the display area of the effect display device 1600 (FIG. 214 (A)), first, the operation validity period for accepting the pressing operation of the operation button 410 is set. The operation promotion effect is started and the player is urged to press the operation button 410 (FIG. 214 (B)). In the display area of the effect display device 1600, an image of the operation means (operation button 410) to be operated and the operation validity period are displayed, and the operation button 410 to be operated is light-emittingly decorated. At this time, the sword ornament 5001 maintains the sword-delivered state. Then, when the player's pressing operation on the operation button 410 is detected, the effect is performed according to the preset effect pattern.

First, in the pattern in which the expectation suggestion effect is performed by pressing the operation button 410, when the player's pressing operation on the operation button 410 is detected, the effect image is displayed in the display area of the effect display device 1600. Later (FIG. 214 (N1)), an image suggesting a jackpot expectation is displayed (FIG. 215 (N2)). After that, the result of this fluctuation display (big hit, missed) is notified (FIG. 215 (N3) or (N4)). It should be noted that a look-ahead effect may be performed instead of the expected degree suggestion effect for the variable display during execution. For example, it is displayed in the display area of the effect display device 1600 instead of the image showing the expected degree (FIG. 215 (N2)). A character that changes the held display may appear.

Further, in the pattern in which the operation effect of the sword decoration body 5001 is suggested and expanded by the pressing operation of the operation button 410, when the pressing operation on the operation button 410 by the player is detected, the display area of the effect display device 1600 is displayed. FIG. 214 (M1) shows an effect image suggesting that an operation effect requesting the sword delivery operation of the sword decoration body 5001 is performed. Next, in the display area of the effect display device 1600, the start image of the operation effect of the sword decoration body 5001 (here, the message of the title "sword pulling chance" and the operation explanation "I want you to put the sword") is displayed. At the same time, the sword decoration body 5001 changes from the sword-delivered state to the second sword-drawn state. The sword decoration body 5001 at this time is a form with an aura member in which the blade portion 5011 is deformed by the maximum operation of the aura member 5030 (FIG. 216 (M2)). Subsequently, when a predetermined period elapses in the second sword withdrawal state and the operation valid period of the sword decoration body 5001 begins, the specific decorative member SDY (sudare accessory) is moved in small steps in the vertical direction in the initial state, and the effect is produced. In the display area of the display device 1600, an operation promotion image for urging the player to perform the sword delivery operation of the sword decoration body 5001 and a gauge indicating the operation validity period are displayed (FIG. 216 (M3)). Then, when the sword delivery operation by the player is detected, an effect based on the result of the variation display this time is performed.

When the result of this fluctuation display is a big hit, when the sword delivery operation by the player is detected, the specific decorative member SDY (sudare) is dropped and moved from the initial state to the fully dropped state ( FIG. 216 (M4)). Next, when the specific decorative member SDY (sudare accessory) is returned to the initial state again, a big hit is notified to the display area of the effect display device 1600 in which the overlap with the specific decorative member SDY (sudare accessory) is released. An image (a message of the stop mode "777" and "superb" of the decorative pattern) is displayed (FIG. 216 (M5)). On the other hand, if the result of the variation display this time is out of order, when the player's sword delivery operation is detected, the specific decorative member SDY (sudare) only stops moving in small steps in the initial state. In the display area of the effect display device 1600, an image for notifying the disconnection (decorative symbol stop mode “767”) is displayed (FIG. 216 (M6)).

In this way, by pressing the operation button 410, various effects such as suggesting the degree of expectation and developing the operation effect of the other operation means (sword decoration body 5001) become possible, and the player can perform the operation button 410. It is not possible to identify subsequent deployments at the time of manipulating. Therefore, it is possible to raise the player's interest in the operation of the operation button 410, and it is possible to suppress a decrease in the motivation for operation and a decrease in the interest in the game, which is a concern due to the monotonous effect after the operation.

In addition, in a series of reach effects, the first operation (pressing operation of the operation button 410) and the second operation (sword delivery operation of the sword decoration body 5001) are different operation modes (pressing operation and sword delivery operation) for the first time. The player is requested based on the operation (pressing operation of the operation button 410). Therefore, it is possible to raise the player's interest in participating in the operation, and it is possible to suppress a decline in the interest in the game, which is a concern due to the monotonous operation that does not look good.

In this example, the operation button 410 is used as an effective operation means as the first operation opportunity, and the second operation opportunity (sword delivery operation of the sword decoration body 5001) is given based on the pressing operation of the operation button 410. However, it is not limited to this. As the first operation opportunity, the sword delivery operation of the sword decoration body 5001 may be an effective operation. The operating means effective for the second operation opportunity in this case targets the sword decoration 5001 rather than the operation button 410, which has a relatively lower expectation than the first sword decoration 5001. Is desirable.

(Other production patterns 3 using the sword ornament 5001)
Subsequently, another reach effect using the above-mentioned sword ornament 5001 will be described with reference to FIGS. 217 to 221. 217 to 221 are diagrams for explaining the screen transition of the effect display device 1600, the state transition of the operation button 410, and the operation transition of the sword decoration body 5001 in the reach effect. Here, a pattern ((A) (B1) (B2) → O in the figure) that becomes a big hit when the specific decorative member SDY (sudare) moves based on the pressing operation of the operation button 410, and the operation button 410 Even if the specific decorative member SDY (sudare) is not movable and is displayed in the detached mode based on the pressing operation of, the player is given an operation opportunity again by re-variating from the symbol display in the detached mode. Pattern ((A) (B1) (B2) → (P1) to (P4) in the figure → Q when the operation opportunity of the sword decoration 5001 is given / R when the operation opportunity of the operation button 410 is given) Will be described.

In the reach effect here, when the variable display of the three decorative symbols is in the reach state in the display area of the effect display device 1600 (FIG. 217 (A)), first, the start image of the operation effect of the operation button 410 (here, here). , "You can move the movable body with a single button stroke") is displayed (Fig. 217 (B)), then the operation validity period for accepting the pressing operation of the operation button 410 is started, and the pressing operation of the operation button 410 is started. An operation promotion effect is performed to encourage the operation (FIG. 217 (C)). In the display area of the effect display device 1600, an image of the operation means (operation button 410) to be operated, the number of operations, and the operation validity period are displayed, and the operation button 410 to be operated is light-emittingly decorated. At this time, the sword ornament 5001 maintains the sword-delivered state. Then, when the player's pressing operation on the operation button 410 is detected, the effect is performed according to the preset effect pattern. The pressing operation of the operation button 410 is not limited to a single blow (once), but may be repeated (multiple times). In addition, the specific decorative member SDY (sudare) is moved in small steps in the vertical direction in the initial state during the operation valid period of the operation button 410 so that the player can easily grasp the object (movable body) to be moved by the operation. You may do so. Further, when the sword decoration body 5001 is to be operated later, the sword decoration body 5001 may be changed from the sword delivery state to the second sword removal state at this point.

In the pattern in which the specific decorative member SDY (sudare) is movable and becomes a big hit, when the player detects the pressing operation of the operation button 410, the specific decorative member SDY (sudare) is completely dropped from the initial state. (Fig. 218 (O1)). Next, when the specific decorative member SDY is returned to the initial state again, an image (decorative symbol) for notifying a big hit is displayed in the display area of the effect display device 1600 in which the overlap with the specific decorative member SDY (sudare) is released. The stop mode "777", the message of "superb") is displayed (FIG. 218 (O2)). At this time, the operation button 410 may be vibrated.

In the pattern in which the specific decorative member SDY (sudare) does not move, when the player detects the pressing operation of the operation button 410, the specific decorative member SDY (sudare) is only stopped to move in small steps and can be dropped. Not done. Then, in the display area of the effect display device 1600, a decorative symbol in an offset mode (“767”) is oscillatedly displayed in the center of the screen (FIG. 219 (P1). After that, as it is, according to the effect pattern to be set. It is developed into a pattern (FIG. 219 (P2)) in which the decorative symbol is stopped and displayed in an detached mode (“767”), or a resurrection pattern in which the reach state is restored again.

In the resurrection pattern, in the display area of the effect display device 1600, the resurrection start image (referred to as "yet") indicating that the fluctuation display has not yet ended from the swing display of the decorative symbol in the detached mode of FIG. 219 (P1). (Samurai image) is inserted (Fig. 219 (P3)), and the decorative design is again in the reach state and reduced to the upper right of the screen, and the operation means of either the operation button 410 or the sword decoration 5001 is displayed in the center of the screen. An operation valid suggestion image (a face with closed eyes of a samurai ally) is displayed (FIG. 219 (P4)). Then, with the passage of time, the displayed samurai's eyes are enlarged and displayed, and the specific decorative member SDY (sudare) is moved in small steps in the vertical direction in the initial state (FIG. 219 (P5)). As a result, the player raises the expectation that the production using the specific decorative member SDY (sudare) will be performed. Further, at this time, the operation button 410 may be light-emitting decorated in a high-speed blinking mode, or the sword decoration body 5001 may be changed from the sword-delivered state to the first sword-drawn state and moved up and down. Then, the operation button 410 or the sword decoration body 5001 functions as an operation effective operation means according to the set effect pattern, and the specific decoration member SDY based on the pressing operation of the operation button 410 or the sword delivery operation of the sword decoration body 5001. The production of (Katana) is performed. The pattern in which the operation button 410 is the operation target is set so that the degree of expectation is lower than the pattern in which the sword decoration body 5001 is the operation target.

When the operation button 410 is used as the operation means, an image (operation button confirmation image) in which sweat oozes on the samurai's forehead of the operation effective suggestion image displayed in the display area of the effect display device 1600 is displayed, and the operation button is displayed. 410 is luminescently decorated (FIG. 220 (R1)). Then, while the specific decorative member SDY (sudare) is continuously moved in small steps and the operation button 410 is light-emittingly decorated, the operation valid period of the operation button 410 is started, and an operation for prompting the pressing operation of the operation button 410 is started. A promotion effect is performed (FIG. 220 (R2)). In the display area of the effect display device 1600, an image of the operation means (operation button 410) to be operated, the number of operations, and the operation validity period are displayed. Here, the operation button 410 is not decorated with light emission when it is operated a required number of times.

Then, when the result of the variable display is a big hit, when the pressing operation of the operation button 410 by the player is detected, the specific decorative member SDY (sudare) is dropped and moved from the initial state to the fully dropped state. (FIG. 220 (R3)). At this time, the decorative symbol displayed in the upper right corner of the screen in the display area of the effect display device 1600 is stopped and displayed so as to be visible to the player in the lower right corner of the screen. As in the case of the above (FIG. 216 (M4)), it may be difficult for the player to grasp the aspect of the decorative symbol at this point. Next, the specific decorative member SDY (sudare accessory) is returned to the initial state again from the completely dropped state, and the display area of the effect display device 1600 in which the overlap with the specific decorative member SDY (sudare accessory) is released is a screen. An image notifying the big hit (message of the stop mode "777", "superb" of the decorative symbol) is displayed in the center (FIG. 220 (R4)).

On the other hand, when the result of the variable display is out of alignment, when the player's pressing operation of the operation button 410 is detected, the small movement of the specific decorative member SDY (sudare) is stopped, and the effect display device 1600 is stopped. In the display area, the decorative symbol of the misaligned mode (“767”) is stopped and displayed in the center of the screen (FIG. 220 (R5)).

When the sword decoration body 5001 is used as the operation means, the image of the samurai who has closed his eyes and sharpens his eyes (sword decoration body) of the operation effective suggestion image displayed in the display area of the effect display device 1600. The confirmed image) is displayed, and the sword ornament 5001 is changed from the sword-delivered state to the second sword-drawn state in the form with an aura member (FIG. 221 (Q1)). At this time, the sword decoration body 5001 may be light-emitting decorated. The player can grasp from the image of the display area that the sword decoration body 5001 is effective for operation instead of the operation button 410, but at this point, the form such as whether or not the sword decoration body 5001 is in the form with an aura member. Can be grasped by actually looking at the sword decoration body 5001. Next, while the specific decorative member SDY (sudare accessory) is moved in small steps, the second sword is pulled out and a predetermined period of time elapses, and when the operation valid period of the sword decoration body 5001 starts, the display of the effect display device 1600 is displayed. In the area, an operation promotion image for urging the player to perform the sword delivery operation of the sword decoration body 5001 and a gauge showing the operation validity period are displayed (FIG. 221 (Q2)).

Then, when the result of the variation display this time is a big hit, when the sword delivery operation by the player is detected, the same effect transition as in FIGS. 220 (R3) and (R4) described above is followed (FIG. 221 (FIG. 221). Q3) and (Q4)). On the other hand, when the variation display result is out of alignment, when the sword delivery operation by the player is detected, the same effect transition as in FIG. 220 (R5) described above is followed (FIG. 221 (Q5)).

In this way, since the expectation is suggested according to the falling state of the specific decorative member SDY (sudare) executed based on the pressing operation of the operation button 410, the expectation is more powerful than the expectation suggested by the image. Suggestions can be provided, and the decline in game interest can be suppressed. Further, even if the specific decorative member SDY (sudare accessory) is not dropped and moved based on the pressing operation of the operation button 410, the player is given an opportunity to operate either the operation button 410 or the sword decoration 5001 again. Will be done. Since the degree of expectation can be suggested by the operation means to which the operation opportunity is given, it is possible to suppress the deterioration of the game interest, which is a concern because the operation effect is monotonous without shining instead.

Although 3 examples of the effect pattern of the reach effect using the sword decoration body 5001 are shown in FIGS. 211 to 221 described above, various effect modes may be combined. As a result, a wide variety of productions can be provided, and the game entertainment can be further enhanced.

(Pseudo-continuous production using sword decoration)
Subsequently, with reference to FIGS. 222 to 236, a pseudo-continuous effect using the sword ornament 5001 that changes the form stepwise according to the number of continuations of the pseudo-continuous variation (re-variation) will be described. The pseudo-continuous effect is an effect in which the variation display of the decorative symbol is temporarily stopped and re-variable, and the temporary stop and the re-variation are repeated once or a plurality of times. Etc. are shown. Here, the above-mentioned temporary stop indicates a state in which the fluctuation display appears to have stopped, but actually swings slightly and continues to fluctuate. In this example, when a variation pattern that performs pseudo-continuous variation (re-variation) is selected by the main control board 1310, the pseudo-continuous effect of the effect pattern that can be selected by the lottery of the effect contents by the peripheral control board 1510 is described below. Explain to.

(Form of sword decoration)
First, the form of the sword ornament 5001 of this example will be described with reference to FIG. 222. There are two types of the sword decoration body 5001 described above, one with an aura member and the other without an aura member. Here, the sword portion 5010 is deformed by further operating the handle portion 5012. Are provided in two types.

FIG. 222 is a diagram illustrating a form of the sword decoration body 5001 used for the pseudo-continuous production. The sword decoration body 5001 here is provided so as to be able to change its shape in two stages by deforming the handle portion 5012, and is provided inside the sheath portion 5020 of the door frame 3, and the player is provided from the left and right sides of the sheath portion 5020. It is characterized by having an aura member 5040 that appears visibly in the door. The aura member 5040 is provided inside the sheath portion 5020 of the door frame 3 like the aura member 5035 described above, but its operation mode is movable in the left-right direction like the aura member 5030 described above. FIGS. 222 (A) to 222 (D) are diagrams showing the types (step changes) of the forms of the sword ornament 5001 in the sword-delivered state, and show the step 0 form to the step 3 form in order. The sword ornament 5001 takes any form from stage 0 to stage 3 depending on the effect.

As shown in FIG. 222 (A), the step 0 form is a form in a normal state similar to those in FIGS. 192 (A) and 194 (A) described above, and no operation is required for any of the constituent members at the initial stage. Shows the morphology. As shown in FIG. 222 (B), the stage 1 form shows a form in which the aura member 5040 appears on the outside of the side surface of the sheath portion 5012 by the operation of the aura member 5040 from the stage 0 form. As shown in FIG. 222 (C), the stage 2 form is a form in which the handle portion 5012 expands and moves from the center so as to be divided into two parts from the center to the left and right, and the first decorative portion 5012a appears from the inside. show. As shown in FIG. 222 (D), in the stage 3 form, in the stage 2 form, the second decorative portion 5012b is further moved upward from the inside of the handle portion 5012 to form an integral decoration with the first decorative portion 5012a. Shows the morphology. Here, the step 1 form to the step 3 form enable the morphological change without putting the sword ornament 5001 into the second sword drawing state. Further, since the sword portion 5010 capable of accepting operations by the player and the non-operating sheath portion 5020 operate together to form an integral decorative body as the operation unit of the operation means, a more powerful operation means is provided. Can be done.

(Example of pseudo-continuous production)
Next, with reference to FIGS. 223 to 236, an example of the effect transition will be described with respect to the effect pattern for performing the pseudo-continuous effect. First, the types of effect patterns will be described with reference to FIG. 231. FIG. 231 is a diagram for explaining the types of effect patterns that can be selected based on the variation pattern.

As shown in FIG. 231 (A), the main control board 1310 determines the sword LV1 weak fluctuation pattern, the sword LV1 strong fluctuation pattern, the sword LV2 weak fluctuation pattern, the sword LV2 strong fluctuation pattern, the sword LV3 weak fluctuation pattern, and the sword LV3 strong fluctuation pattern. When any of the six types of variation patterns of the pattern is selected, the pseudo-continuous effect is performed. The production patterns for performing pseudo-continuous production include basic production patterns (sword LV1 weak production pattern, sword LV1 strong production pattern, sword LV2 weak production pattern, sword LV2 strong production pattern, sword LV3 weak) corresponding to each of the six types of fluctuation patterns. In addition to the effect pattern and the sword LV3 strong effect pattern), a specific effect pattern (pseudo sword LV1 weak effect pattern, pseudo sword LV1 strong effect pattern, and pseudo resurrection sword LV1 effect pattern) is provided. When the fluctuation pattern is a sword LV1 weak fluctuation pattern (sword LV1 strong fluctuation pattern), a sword LV1 weak production pattern or a pseudo sword LV1 weak production pattern (sword LV1 strong production pattern or a pseudo sword LV1 strong production pattern) is selected. When the fluctuation pattern is the sword LV2 weak fluctuation pattern (sword LV2 strong fluctuation pattern), the sword LV2 weak production pattern (sword LV2 strong production pattern) is selected, and the fluctuation pattern is the sword LV3 weak fluctuation pattern (sword LV3 strong fluctuation pattern). ), Either the sword LV3 weak production pattern, the pseudo sword LV1 weak production pattern, or the pseudo revival sword LV1 production pattern (sword LV3 strong production pattern, pseudo sword LV1 strong production pattern, and pseudo revival sword LV1 production pattern) Be selected.

The effect patterns include the number of times the pseudo-continuous variation (re-variation) continues (1 to 3 times), whether or not the sword decoration 5001 is given an operation opportunity according to the number of continuations, and when the operation opportunity is given. The mode of the specific decorative member SDY (sudare) is set (see FIG. 231 (B)). The effect pattern names "LV1" to "LV3" correspond to the number of continuations of the pseudo-continuous fluctuation (re-variation) of 1 to 3 times. Further, "weak" and "strong" correspond to the drop positions (half drop, full drop) in the drop effect of the specific decorative member SDY (sudare). In addition, the "pseudo-sword LV1" gives the sword decoration body 5001 a selection operation opportunity for the first pseudo-continuous fluctuation (re-variation), and the player makes a selection not to operate, so that the pseudo-continuous fluctuation (re-variation) continues. It is shown that it is a production that can acquire. In addition, the "pseudo-revival sword LV1" follows the same production transition as the sword LV1 weak production pattern, which is the basic production pattern that gives the sword decoration body 5001 an operation opportunity for the first pseudo-continuous fluctuation (re-variation). Fluctuation Indicates that the pseudo-continuous variation (re-variation) is performed again after the drop effect of the special decorative member SDY (sudare) based on the first operation opportunity. The details of the production contents of each production pattern will be described later.

Here, the basic effect pattern is set so that the higher the number of continuations of the pseudo-continuous fluctuation (re-variation), that is, the higher the degree of expectation as the morphological change of the sword decoration body 5001 progresses, and further, the specific decorative member SDY (sudare role) is set. The lower the drop position of the object), the higher the expectation is set. It is set so that the drop position of the specific decorative member SDY (sudare) is the same as the case where all the drops are made with a few production patterns. Specifically, the expectation of the pseudo-continuous fluctuation (re-variation) once and the half-falling sword LV1 weak production pattern is 29%, the pseudo-continuous fluctuation (re-variation) continuation once and the full-falling sword. The expectation of the LV1 strong production pattern is 40%, the number of continuations of the pseudo-continuous fluctuation (re-variation) is 2 times, and the expectation of the half-falling sword LV2 weak production pattern is 40%, the number of continuations of the pseudo-continuous fluctuation (re-variation) is 2. The expectation of the sword LV2 strong production pattern of times and full fall is 50%, the number of continuations of pseudo-continuous fluctuation (re-variation) is 3 times, and the expectation of the sword LV3 weak production pattern of half-fall is 50%, pseudo-continuous fluctuation (re-variation) The expectation of the LV3 strong production pattern of the sword LV3 strong production pattern of the sword LV3 strong production pattern of the sword LV3 strong production pattern is set to be 65%. Further, the specific effect pattern is set so that the degree of expectation differs depending on the selected fluctuation pattern even if the effect pattern is the same, and the higher the degree of expectation is, the higher the degree of expectation is set. The expectation of the pseudo sword LV1 weak production pattern that gives the player a selection operation opportunity is 38% and 53%, respectively, when the selected fluctuation pattern is the sword LV1 weak fluctuation pattern and the sword LV3 weak fluctuation pattern, respectively. It becomes. Further, the expected degree of the pseudo sword LV1 strong effect pattern is 47% and 74%, respectively, when the selected fluctuation pattern is the sword LV1 strong fluctuation pattern and when the sword LV3 strong fluctuation pattern is used. Further, the expectation of the pseudo-revival sword LV1 effect pattern in which the pseudo-continuous fluctuation (re-variation) is restored after following the same effect transition as the sword LV1 weak effect pattern is set to 100% regardless of the variation pattern.

In the following, the pseudo continuous effect of each effect pattern shown in FIG. 231 (B) will be described with reference to the effect transition example shown in FIGS. 223 to 230 and the effect execution timing chart shown in FIGS. 223 to 236. FIG. 223 is a diagram showing an effect transition example of the pseudo continuous effect common to all the effect patterns. FIGS. 224 to 226 are diagrams showing a transition example of the effect of whether or not the operation opportunity of the sword decoration body 5001 is given while the pseudo-continuous fluctuation (re-variation) is being performed. Further, FIG. 227 is a diagram showing a transition example of the post-operation effect (drop effect of the specific decorative member SDY (sudare)) of the sword decoration body 5001 during the pseudo-continuous variation (re-variation) common to all the effect patterns. be. Further, FIGS. 228 and 229 are diagrams showing examples of effect transitions that are characteristic of the pseudo sword LV1 weak effect pattern and the pseudo sword LV1 strong effect pattern. Further, FIG. 230 is a diagram showing an example of an effect transition that is a feature of the pseudo-revival sword LV1 effect pattern. Further, FIGS. 232 to 236 are operation execution timing charts of the sword decorative body 5001 and the specific decorative member SDY (sword accessory) in the pseudo-continuous production, and FIG. 232 is a sword LV1 weak production pattern (sword LV1 strong production pattern). , FIG. 233 is a sword LV2 weak production pattern (sword LV2 strong production pattern), FIG. 234 is a sword LV3 weak production pattern (sword LV3 strong production pattern), and FIG. 235 is a pseudo sword LV1 weak production pattern (pseudo sword LV1 strong production pattern). , FIG. 236 shows a pseudo resurrection sword LV1 production pattern. In the following, an example of an effect transition in the case where the pseudo continuous effect is executed in the effect before the variable display is started and the reach state is reached will be described.

(Common to all production patterns)
As shown in FIG. 223 (A), when the variable display is started, three decorative symbols are variablely displayed in the display area of the effect display device 1600. At this time, the specific decorative member SDY (bamboo blind) does not overlap with the display area of the effect display device 1600 in front view, and a part of the blind is visible to the player above the display area (initial state). ) Is stationary. At this time, the sword ornament 5001 is in the sword delivery state in the stage 0 form (initial form).

Next, as shown in FIGS. 223 (B) and 223 (C), in the display area of the effect display device 1600, a start image indicating the start of the pseudo-continuous effect (effect content notification "great chance if 100 bodies can be defeated" message, samurai An image that accumulates the aura) is displayed, suggesting to the player that the pseudo-continuous production will start. At this time, there is no change in the specific decorative member SDY (sudare) and the sword decorative body 5001.

Next, as shown in FIG. 223 (D), the three decorative symbols that have been variablely displayed in the display area of the effect display device 1600 are temporarily stopped and displayed in a pseudo-continuous manner, and the decorative symbols are re-variated to the player. Notify that. Here, among the three decorative symbols, the central decorative symbol is a pseudo-sword symbol that is not prepared for the left and right decorative symbols, specifically, the form and effect level (number of pseudo-continuous fluctuations) of the sword ornament 5001 are shown. By displaying the pseudo-sword symbol of the aspect, the player can easily recognize the re-variation of the decorative symbol (start of the pseudo-continuous variation). At this time, there is no change in the specific decorative member SDY (sudare) and the sword decorative body 5001, but the pseudo-continuous sword symbol displayed in the display area of the effect display device 1600 has the first pseudo-continuous variation (re-variation). ), A sword image showing the form of the sword ornament 5001 (stage 1 form) in advance is displayed. In this way, the form and effect level (number of pseudo-continuous fluctuations) of the sword decoration body 5001 in the pseudo-continuous fluctuation (re-variation) is notified at the time of the temporary stop display immediately before the pseudo-continuous fluctuation (re-variation) starts, so that the player Can grasp and face the stage of pseudo-continuous fluctuation (re-variation).

Then, when the first pseudo-continuous fluctuation (re-variation) is started, as shown in FIG. 223 (E), it is displayed in the display area of the effect display device 1600 at the time of FIG. 223 (D) described above. The pseudo-sword symbol is enlarged and displayed, and the effect display is moved toward the sword decoration 5001 so as to act on the sword decoration 5001, and the re-variation of the decorative symbol is displayed. Then, the sword decoration body 5001 changes its form from the stage 0 form (initial form) to the stage 1 form in which the aura member 5040 becomes visible. The morphological change of the sword decoration body 5001 at this time is the timing when the player's line of sight shifts to the sword decoration body 5001 from the effect display which is moved toward the sword decoration body 5001 when the pseudo-continuous fluctuation (re-variation) is started. That is, it is performed after the start of pseudo-continuous fluctuation (re-variation). The morphological change timing of the sword decoration body 5001 may be before the start of the pseudo-continuous variation (re-variation). Pseudo-continuous fluctuation (re-variation) may be started.

After that, as shown in FIG. 223 (F), the sword image of the pseudo-sword pattern displayed in the display area of the effect display device 1600 is changed from the sword-delivered state to the second sword-drawn state in a magnified display state. , The sword decoration body 5001 changes its state from the sword-delivered state to the second sword-drawn state.

Then, as shown in FIG. 223 (G), in the display area of the effect display device 1600, is it possible to enable the sword decoration body 5001 in the second sword-drawing state in which the player can operate the sword as an operating means? An operation opportunity suggestion image (samurai image with closed eyes) indicating whether or not, that is, whether or not to give the player an operation opportunity is displayed. Subsequent productions include a pattern in which the sword decoration body 5001 is operation-enabled (a production pattern with "LV1" in the name) and a pattern in which the sword decoration body 5001 is not operation-effective (name) according to the preset production pattern. Branches to an effect pattern with "LV2" or "LV3" attached to. In the following, an example of the effect transition will be described in order for the nine types of effect patterns.

(Katana LV1 weak production pattern / sword LV1 strong production pattern)
First, with reference to FIGS. 224 and 227, a sword LV1 weak effect pattern or a sword LV1 strong effect pattern that enables the sword ornament 5001 as an operating means in the first pseudo-continuous variation (re-variation) is set. An example of the effect transition in the case will be described. When these effect patterns are set and the operation opportunity of the sword decoration body 5001 is given by the first pseudo-continuous variation (re-variation), the display area of the effect display device 1600 is set to the above-mentioned FIG. 223 (G). An operation confirmation image (an image in which the samurai's eyes are opened) indicating that an operation opportunity is given from the operation opportunity suggestion image shown in) is displayed (FIG. 224 (T1)). Next, in the display area of the effect display device 1600, an image (“opportunity !!” message) indicating that the player is given an operation opportunity to request an active operation is displayed (FIG. 224 (T2)). .. Then, the operation valid period of the sword decoration body 5001 is generated, and in the display area of the effect display device 1600, an operation promotion effect for encouraging the sword delivery operation of the sword decoration body 5001 is performed. Specifically, the sword image in the second sword state (stage 1 form), which is the same as the sword decoration body 5001, is displayed, and an image showing the operation direction and the operation validity period is displayed together with the message "Pay the sword!". (FIG. 224 (T3)). Then, when the sword delivery operation by the player is detected, the expectation degree notification effect is performed by the drop effect of the specific decorative member SDY (sudare) according to the set effect pattern.

Here, when the set effect pattern is a "strong" effect pattern, when the sword delivery operation by the player is detected, as shown in FIG. 227 (U1), the specific decorative member SDY (sudare accessory) ) Is moved from the initial state to the fully dropped state. Then, the sword decoration body 5001 is returned to the stage 0 form (initial form) from the second sword drawing state to the sword delivery state by the sword delivery operation by the player. After that, as shown in FIG. 227 (U2), the specific decorative member SDY (sudare) is returned from the fully dropped state to the initial state, and the display area of the effect display device 1600 is shown in FIG. 223 (B) described above. An expectation notification image (“100 bodies destroyed!”) That notifies the expectation of the variation display result is displayed in a mode corresponding to the start image of the pseudo continuous effect shown. Here, the degree of expectation indicated by the full-fall state is set to be higher than the degree of expectation indicated by the half-fall state described later. At this time, there is no change in the sword decoration body 5001. Here, the expected degree notification image is displayed so that the player can grasp the end of the pseudo-continuous fluctuation (re-variation).

Further, when the set effect pattern is a "weak" effect pattern, when the player's sword delivery operation is detected, as shown in FIG. 227 (U3), the specific decorative member SDY (sudare) Is moved to fall from the initial state to a half-fall state. The semi-falling state means a state in which the specific decorative member SDY (sudare) is moved to an intermediate position between the initial state and the fully falling state and overlaps with the upper half area of the display area of the effect display device 1600 in front view. .. Then, the sword decoration body 5001 is returned to the stage 0 form (initial form) from the second sword drawing state to the sword delivery state by the sword delivery operation by the player. After that, as shown in FIG. 227 (U4), the specific decorative member SDY (sudare) is returned from the semi-falling state to the initial state, and the display area of the effect display device 1600 is shown in FIG. 223 (B). An expectation level notification image (“50 bodies destroyed!”) That notifies the expectation level of the variation display result is displayed in a mode corresponding to the start image of the pseudo continuous effect shown. At this time, there is no change in the sword decoration body 5001. Then, as in the "strong" effect pattern, the player can grasp the end of the pseudo-continuous fluctuation (re-variation) by displaying the expectation degree notification image at this time.

If the sword delivery operation by the player is not detected within the operation valid period of the sword decoration body 5001, the set effect pattern is regardless of whether it is a "strong" effect pattern or a "weak" effect pattern. In the display area of the effect display device 1600, an escape image ("enemy, escape!") Showing that the pseudo-continuous fluctuation (re-variation) has ended without the fall effect of the specific decorative member SDY (sudare). Is displayed (see FIG. 229 (W2)). That is, if the sword delivery operation by the player is not detected within the operation valid period, the player is prevented from grasping the expected degree of the variable display result. At this time, the sword decoration body 5001 is returned to the initial sword delivery state when the operation valid period ends. Here, the escape image is displayed so that the player can grasp the end of the pseudo-continuous fluctuation (re-variation).

Then, when the pseudo-continuous variation (re-variation) is completed, as shown in FIG. 227 (U5), a reach state is formed in the display area of the effect display device 1600 by the decorative symbol of the normal mode, and the reach effect is started. NS. Regarding the reach effect at this time, the reach effect of the same effect content is executed in the "weak" effect pattern and the "strong" effect pattern. In this way, by operating the sword decoration body 5001 when the sword delivery operation is required, the player can perform a reach effect after grasping the degree of expectation based on the drop position of the specific decoration member SDY (sudare). I can welcome you. Therefore, even if the subsequent reach production is the same, it is possible to have different expectations each time, so that the decrease in the motivation of the player to operate is suppressed, and further, the deterioration of the game interest for the uniform production is suppressed. can do.

Subsequently, with reference to FIGS. 231 (B) and 232, the operation of the sword decorative body 5001 and the specific decorative member SDY (sudare accessory) when the sword LV1 weak effect pattern or the sword LV1 strong effect pattern is set. The execution timing will be described.

As shown in FIG. 231 (B), in the sword LV1 weak effect pattern and the sword LV1 strong effect pattern, the sword ornament 5001 in the stage 1 form is operated during the period T1 in which the first pseudo-continuous variation (re-variation) is performed. Enable as a means and give the player an opportunity to operate. Then, when the sword LV1 weak effect pattern is set, a drop effect (expectation notification effect) is performed in which the specific decorative member SDY (sudare accessory) is half-falled by the operation of the player. Further, when the sword LV1 strong effect pattern is set, a drop effect (expectation notification effect) is performed in which the specific decorative member SDY (sudare accessory) is completely dropped by the operation of the player. If there is no operation by the player, the fall effect (expectation notification effect) is not performed in either effect pattern.

As shown in FIG. 232, when the sword LV1 weak effect pattern is set, the sword decoration body 5001 changes its form from the initial form to the stage 1 form at the same time as the start of the first pseudo-continuous variation (re-variation) ( (See FIG. 223 (E)). After that, the sword decoration body 5001 changes its state from the sword-delivered state to the second sword-drawn state (see FIG. 223 (F)), and whether the operation is enabled by the operation opportunity suggestion image displayed in the display area of the effect display device 1600. Whether or not the player's feeling of excitement is enhanced, and after the player is made to fully recognize the sword ornament 5001 that is in the operable state (second sword withdrawal state) (Fig. 223 (G) → Fig. 224 (T1) → (T2). ), The operation validity period for effectively accepting the player's operation is started (see FIG. 224 (T3)).

Then, when the player performs the sword delivery operation during the operation valid period, the sword decoration body 5001 changes its state from the second sword withdrawal state to the sword delivery state, and also changes from the stage 1 form to the initial form. At this time, in the case of the "weak" effect pattern, the specific decorative member SDY (sudare) changes from the initial state to the semi-falling state (see FIG. 227 (U3)). Then, at the end of the first pseudo-continuous fluctuation (re-variation), that is, at the end timing of the period T1, the specific decorative member SDY (sudare) returns to the initial state and corresponds to a half drop in the display area of the effect display device 1600. Since the expected degree notification image of the expected degree is displayed (see FIG. 227 (U4)), the player recognizes the end of the period T1. Further, in the case of the "strong" effect pattern, the specific decorative member SDY (sudare) changes from the initial state to the fully dropped state (see FIG. 227 (U1)), and the expected degree notification of the expected degree corresponding to the total fall is notified. The difference is that the image is displayed (see FIG. 227 (U2)).

On the other hand, when the player does not perform the sword delivery operation during the operation validity period, the sword decoration body 5001 changes from the second sword withdrawal state to the sword delivery state at the end of the operation validity period, and changes from the stage 1 form to the initial form. The morphology changes. Then, at the end of the first pseudo-continuous variation (re-variation), that is, at the end timing of the period T1, an escape image indicating that the expected degree is not notified to the display area of the effect display device 1600 is displayed (FIG. 229 (FIG. 229). See W2)), the player recognizes the end of period T1.

(Katana LV2 weak production pattern / Katana LV2 strong production pattern)
Next, with reference to FIGS. 224 and 225, a sword LV2 weak effect pattern or a sword LV2 strong effect pattern that enables the sword ornament 5001 as an operating means in the second pseudo-continuous variation (re-variation) is set. An example of the effect transition in the case of being present will be described. The description of the effect transition similar to the effect pattern described above will be omitted as appropriate.

When the set effect pattern is the sword LV2 weak effect pattern or the sword LV2 strong effect pattern, the operation opportunity of the sword decoration body 5001 is not given at the timing of giving the operation opportunity of the first pseudo-continuous fluctuation (re-variation). After following the effect transitions shown in FIGS. 223 (A) to 223 (G), the display area of the effect display device 1600 is not provided with an operation opportunity from the operation opportunity suggestion image shown in FIG. 223 (G). A continuous image (an image with the samurai's eyes closed) is displayed, and the sword ornament 5001 that was in the second sword withdrawal state is returned to the sword delivery state while maintaining the morphology in the stage 1 morphology (Fig. 224 (S1)).

Next, the three decorative symbols that have been variablely displayed in the display area of the effect display device 1600 are temporarily stopped and displayed in a pseudo-continuous manner, and the player is notified that the decorative symbols are re-variated (FIG. 224 (S2)). ). Here, among the three decorative symbols, the central decorative symbol is a pseudo-sword symbol that is not prepared for the left and right decorative symbols, specifically, the form and effect level (number of pseudo-continuous fluctuations) of the sword ornament 5001 are shown. By displaying the pseudo-sword symbol of the aspect, the player can easily recognize the re-variation of the decorative symbol (start of the pseudo-continuous variation). Then, a sword image showing in advance the form (step 2 form) of the sword decoration body 5001 in the second pseudo-continuous variation (re-variation) is displayed on the pseudo-sword pattern displayed in the display area of the effect display device 1600. Will be done. At this time, there is no change in the specific decorative member SDY (sudare) and the sword decorative body 5001. In addition, the sword ornament 5001 maintains the stage 1 form. In this way, the form and effect level (number of pseudo-continuous fluctuations) of the sword ornament 5001 in the second pseudo-continuous fluctuation (re-variation) are displayed at the time of the temporary stop display immediately before the second pseudo-continuous fluctuation (re-variation) starts. Since the notification is given, the player can grasp and face the pseudo-continuous fluctuation (re-variation) at which stage.

Then, when the second pseudo-continuous variation (re-variation) is started, the pseudo-continuous sword symbol displayed at the time of FIG. 224 (S2) described above is enlarged and displayed in the display area of the effect display device 1600. At the same time, the effect display is moved toward the sword decoration body 5001 so as to act on the sword decoration body 5001, and the re-variation of the decoration pattern is displayed. Then, the sword decorative body 5001 changes its form from the step 1 form to the step 2 form in which the handle portion 5012 is split left and right so that the first decorative portion 5012a can be visually recognized (FIG. 224 (S3)). Subsequently, the sword image of the pseudo-sword pattern displayed in the display area of the effect display device 1600 is changed from the sword-delivered state to the second sword-drawn state, and the sword ornament 5001 is actually changed from the sword-delivered state to the second sword-drawn state. The state changes to (FIG. 224 (S4)). The morphological change timing of the sword decoration body 5001 from the stage 1 form to the stage 2 form and the state change timing from the sword delivery state to the second sword removal state may be set to be simultaneous. The effect display displayed in the display area of the effect display device 1600 is performed so as to act on the sword decoration body 5001, and the sword decoration body 5001 changes at once when the player's line of sight is directed toward the sword decoration body 5001. It can impress the powerful movement and attract the attention of the player.

After that, in the display area of the effect display device 1600, whether or not to enable the sword decoration body 5001 in the second sword drawing state (stage 2 form) in which the player can operate the sword as an operation means, that is, the game. An operation opportunity suggestion image (samurai image with closed eyes) showing the result of deciding whether or not to give the person an operation opportunity is displayed (FIG. 225 (V1)).

Here, when the set effect pattern is the sword LV2 weak effect pattern or the sword LV2 strong effect pattern, the operation opportunity of the sword decoration body 5001 is given by the second pseudo continuous variation (re-variation). In the display area of the effect display device 1600, an operation confirmation image (an image in which the samurai's eyes are opened) indicating that an operation opportunity is given from the operation opportunity suggestion image shown in FIG. 225 (V1) is displayed (an image in which the samurai's eyes are opened). FIG. 225 (V2)). Next, in the display area of the effect display device 1600, an image (“opportunity !!” message) indicating that the player is given an operation opportunity to request an active operation is displayed (FIG. 225 (V3)). .. Then, the operation valid period of the sword decoration body 5001 is generated, and in the display area of the effect display device 1600, an operation promotion effect for encouraging the sword delivery operation of the sword decoration body 5001 is performed. Specifically, the sword image in the second sword state (stage 2 form), which is the same as the sword decoration body 5001, is displayed, and an image showing the operation direction and the operation validity period is displayed together with the message "Pay the sword!". (Fig. 225 (V4)). Then, when the sword delivery operation by the player is detected, as shown in FIG. 227 described above, the expectation degree notification effect is performed by the drop effect of the specific decorative member SDY (sudare) according to the set effect pattern. Therefore, the player can grasp that the pseudo-continuous fluctuation (re-variation) has ended. If the player's sword-delivery operation is not detected during the valid operation period, the effect display device 1600 is used regardless of whether the set effect pattern is a "strong" effect pattern or a "weak" effect pattern. In the display area, an escape image (“enemy, escape!”) Showing that the pseudo-continuous fluctuation (re-variation) has ended without the fall effect of the specific decorative member SDY (sudare) is displayed (Fig.). 229 (W2)). That is, if the sword delivery operation by the player is not detected within the operation valid period, the player is prevented from grasping the expected degree of the variable display result. At this time, the sword decoration body 5001 is returned to the initial sword delivery state when the operation valid period ends. Here, the escape image is displayed so that the player can grasp the end of the pseudo-continuous fluctuation (re-variation).

Subsequently, with reference to FIGS. 231 (B) and 233, the operation of the sword decorative body 5001 and the specific decorative member SDY (sudare accessory) when the sword LV2 weak effect pattern or the sword LV2 strong effect pattern is set. The execution timing will be described.

As shown in FIG. 231 (B), in the sword LV2 weak effect pattern and the sword LV2 strong effect pattern, the operation opportunity of the sword decoration body 5001 is not given during the period T1 in which the first pseudo-continuous variation (re-variation) is performed. In the period T2 in which the second pseudo-continuous variation (re-variation) is performed, the sword decoration body 5001 in the stage 2 form is enabled as an operation means, and the player is given an operation opportunity. Then, when the sword LV2 weak effect pattern is set, a drop effect (expectation notification effect) is performed in which the specific decorative member SDY (sudare accessory) is half-dropped by the operation of the player. Further, when the sword LV2 strong effect pattern is set, a drop effect (expectation notification effect) is performed in which the specific decorative member SDY (sudare accessory) is completely dropped by the operation of the player. If the player's operation is not detected, the drop effect (expectation notification effect) is not performed in either effect pattern.

As shown in FIG. 233, when the sword LV2 weak effect pattern is set, the sword decoration body 5001 changes its form from the initial form to the stage 1 form at the same time as the start of the first pseudo-continuous variation (re-variation) ( (See FIG. 223 (E)). After that, the sword decoration body 5001 changes its state from the sword-delivered state to the second sword-drawn state (see FIG. 223 (F)), and is the operation effective by the operation opportunity suggestion image displayed in the display area of the effect display device 1600? Whether or not it enhances the player's feeling of excitement (see Fig. 223 (G)), but the sword decoration 5001 in the operable state (second sword withdrawal state) without generating an operation valid period for effectively accepting the player's operation. Is returned to the sword-delivered state (see FIG. 224 (S1)). Then, the sword ornament body undergoes a second pseudo-continuous fluctuation (re-variation) while maintaining the stage 1 form (see FIG. 224 (S2)).

Then, at the same time as the start of the second pseudo-continuous variation (re-variation), the sword ornament 5001 changes its form from the stage 1 form to the stage 2 form (see FIG. 224 (S3)). After that, the sword decoration body 5001 changes its state from the sword-delivered state to the second sword-drawn state (see FIG. 224 (S4)), and whether the operation becomes effective by the operation opportunity suggestion image displayed in the display area of the effect display device 1600. Whether or not, after enhancing the player's feeling of excitement and making the player fully recognize the sword decoration 5001 that is in the operable state (second sword withdrawal state) (see FIG. 225 (V1) → (V2) → (V3)). ), The operation valid period for effectively accepting the player's operation is started (see FIG. 225 (V4)).

Then, when the player performs the sword delivery operation during the operation valid period, the sword decoration body 5001 changes its state from the second sword withdrawal state to the sword delivery state, and also changes from the stage 2 form to the initial form. At this time, in the case of the "weak" effect pattern, the specific decorative member SDY (sudare) changes from the initial state to the semi-falling state (see FIG. 227 (U3)). Then, at the end of the second pseudo-continuous fluctuation (re-variation), that is, at the end timing of the period T2, the specific decorative member SDY (sudare) returns to the initial state and corresponds to a half drop in the display area of the effect display device 1600. Since the expected degree notification image of the expected degree is displayed (see FIG. 227 (U4)), the player recognizes the end of the period T2. Further, in the case of the "strong" effect pattern, the specific decorative member SDY (sudare) changes from the initial state to the fully dropped state (see FIG. 227 (U1)), and the expected degree notification of the expected degree corresponding to the total fall is notified. The difference is that the image is displayed (see FIG. 227 (U2)).

On the other hand, when the player does not perform the sword delivery operation during the operation validity period, the sword decoration body 5001 changes from the second sword withdrawal state to the sword delivery state at the end of the operation validity period, and changes from the stage 2 form to the initial form. The morphology changes. Then, at the end of the second pseudo-continuous variation (re-variation), that is, at the end timing of the period T2, an escape image indicating that the expected degree is not notified to the display area of the effect display device 1600 is displayed (FIG. 229 (FIG. 229). See W2)), the player recognizes the end of period T2.

(Katana LV3 weak production pattern / Katana LV3 strong production pattern)
Subsequently, with reference to FIGS. 225 and 226, a sword LV3 weak effect pattern or a sword LV3 strong effect pattern that enables the sword ornament 5001 as an operating means is set in the third pseudo-continuous variation (re-variation). An example of the effect transition in the case of being present will be described. The description of the effect transition similar to the effect pattern described above will be omitted as appropriate.

When the set effect pattern is a sword LV3 weak effect pattern or a sword LV3 strong effect pattern, the sword decoration body is used at the timing of giving the operation opportunity of the second pseudo-continuous variation (re-variation) shown in FIG. 225 (V1) above. Since the operation opportunity of 5001 is not given, after following the effect transition shown in FIGS. 223 (A) to (G) → FIGS. 224 (S1) to (S4) → FIG. 225 (V1), the effect display device 1600 In the display area, a continuous image (an image in which the samurai's eyes are closed) indicating that the operation opportunity is not given is displayed from the operation opportunity suggestion image shown in FIG. 225 (V1), and the second sword is pulled out. The sword ornament 5001 is returned to the sword-delivered state while maintaining the morphology in the stage 2 morphology (FIG. 225 (V5)).

Next, the three decorative symbols that have been variablely displayed in the display area of the effect display device 1600 are temporarily stopped and displayed in a pseudo-continuous manner, and the player is notified that the decorative symbols are re-variated (FIG. 225 (V6)). ). Here, among the three decorative symbols, the central decorative symbol is a pseudo-sword symbol that is not prepared for the left and right decorative symbols, specifically, the form and effect level (number of pseudo-continuous fluctuations) of the sword ornament 5001 are shown. By displaying the pseudo-sword symbol of the aspect, the player can easily recognize the re-variation of the decorative symbol (start of the pseudo-continuous variation). Then, a sword image showing in advance the form (step 3 form) of the sword decoration body 5001 in the third pseudo-continuous variation (re-variation) is displayed on the pseudo-sword pattern displayed in the display area of the effect display device 1600. Will be done. At this time, there is no change in the specific decorative member SDY (sudare) and the sword decorative body 5001. In addition, the sword ornament 5001 maintains the stage 2 form. In this way, at the time of the temporary stop display immediately before the start of the third pseudo-continuous variation (re-variation), the form and effect level (number of pseudo-continuous variation) of the sword ornament 5001 in the third pseudo-continuous variation (re-variation) are displayed. Since the notification is given, the player can grasp and face the pseudo-continuous fluctuation (re-variation) at which stage.

Then, when the third pseudo-continuous fluctuation (re-variation) is started, the pseudo-continuous sword symbol displayed at the time of FIG. 225 (V6) described above is enlarged and displayed in the display area of the effect display device 1600. At the same time, the effect display is moved toward the sword decoration body 5001 so as to act on the sword decoration body 5001, and the re-variation of the decoration pattern is displayed. Then, the sword decorative body 5001 changes its form from the step 2 form to the stage 3 form in which the second decorative portion 5012b protrudes above the first decorative portion 5012a so that both decorative portions can be visually recognized as an integral decorative body (. FIG. 225 (V7)). Subsequently, the sword image of the pseudo-continuous sword pattern displayed in the display area of the effect display device 1600 is changed from the sword-delivered state to the second sword-drawn state, and the sword ornament 5001 is actually changed from the sword-delivered state to the second sword-drawn state. The state changes to (Fig. 225 (V8)). The morphological change timing of the sword ornament 5001 from the stage 2 form to the stage 3 form and the state change timing from the sword-delivered state to the second sword-drawn state may be set to be simultaneous. Further, the form of the sword decoration body 5001 does not have to be changed each time according to the number of pseudo-continuous fluctuations, and when the final stage is reached, the form may be changed collectively for a plurality of stages. The effect display displayed in the display area of the effect display device 1600 is performed so as to act on the sword decoration body 5001, and the sword decoration body 5001 changes at once when the player's line of sight is directed toward the sword decoration body 5001. It can impress the powerful movement and attract the attention of the player.

After that, in the display area of the effect display device 1600, whether or not to enable the sword decoration body 5001 in the second sword drawing state (stage 3 form) in which the player can operate the sword as an operation means, that is, the game. An operation opportunity suggestion image (samurai image with closed eyes) showing the result of deciding whether or not to give the person an operation opportunity is displayed (FIG. 226 (X1)).

Here, when the set effect patterns are the sword LV3 weak effect pattern and the sword LV3 strong effect pattern, the operation opportunity of the sword decoration body 5001 is given by the third pseudo-continuous variation (re-variation). In the display area of the effect display device 1600, an operation confirmation image (an image in which the samurai's eyes are opened) indicating that an operation opportunity is given from the operation opportunity suggestion image shown in FIG. 226 (X1) is displayed (an image in which the samurai's eyes are opened). FIG. 226 (X2)). Next, in the display area of the effect display device 1600, an image (“opportunity !!” message) indicating that the player is given an operation opportunity to request an active operation is displayed (FIG. 226 (X3)). .. Then, the operation valid period of the sword decoration body 5001 is generated, and in the display area of the effect display device 1600, an operation promotion effect for encouraging the sword delivery operation of the sword decoration body 5001 is performed. Specifically, the sword image in the second sword state (stage 3 form), which is the same as the sword decoration body 5001, is displayed, and an image showing the operation direction and the operation validity period is displayed together with the message "Pay the sword!". (Fig. 226 (X4)). Then, when the sword delivery operation by the player is detected, as shown in FIG. 227 described above, the expectation degree notification effect is performed by the drop effect of the specific decorative member SDY (sudare) according to the set effect pattern. Therefore, the player can grasp that the pseudo-continuous fluctuation (re-variation) has ended. If the player's sword-delivery operation is not detected during the valid operation period, the effect display device 1600 is used regardless of whether the set effect pattern is a "strong" effect pattern or a "weak" effect pattern. In the display area of, an escape image ("enemy, escape!") Showing that the pseudo-continuous fluctuation (re-variation) has ended without the fall effect of the specific decorative member SDY (sudare) is displayed ("Enemy, escape!") ( (See FIG. 229 (W2)). That is, if the sword delivery operation by the player is not detected within the operation valid period, the player is prevented from grasping the expected degree of the variable display result. At this time, the sword decoration body 5001 is returned to the initial sword delivery state when the operation valid period ends. Here, the escape image is displayed so that the player can grasp the end of the pseudo-continuous fluctuation (re-variation).

Subsequently, with reference to FIGS. 231 (B) and 234, the operation of the sword decorative body 5001 and the specific decorative member SDY (sudare accessory) when the sword LV3 weak effect pattern or the sword LV3 strong effect pattern is set. The execution timing will be described.

As shown in FIG. 231 (B), in the sword LV3 weak effect pattern and the sword LV3 strong effect pattern, the period T1 in which the first pseudo-continuous variation (re-variation) is performed and the second pseudo-continuous variation (re-variation) are In the period T2 in which the sword decoration is performed, the sword decoration body 5001 is not given an operation opportunity, and in the period T3 in which the third pseudo-continuous variation (re-variation) is performed, the sword decoration body 5001 in the stage 3 form is enabled as an operation means, and the game is played. Give the person an operation opportunity. Then, when the sword LV3 weak effect pattern is set, a drop effect (expectation notification effect) is performed in which the specific decorative member SDY (sudare accessory) is half-dropped by the operation of the player. Further, when the sword LV3 strong effect pattern is set, a drop effect (expectation notification effect) is performed in which the specific decorative member SDY (sudare accessory) is completely dropped by the operation of the player. If the player's operation is not detected, the drop effect (expectation notification effect) is not performed in either effect pattern.

As shown in FIG. 234, when the sword LV3 weak effect pattern is set, the sword decoration body 5001 changes its form from the initial form to the stage 1 form at the same time as the start of the first pseudo-continuous variation (re-variation) ( (See FIG. 223 (E)). After that, the sword decoration body 5001 changes its state from the sword-delivered state to the second sword-drawn state (see FIG. 223 (F)), and is the operation effective by the operation opportunity suggestion image displayed in the display area of the effect display device 1600? Whether or not it enhances the player's feeling of excitement (see Fig. 223 (G)), but the sword decoration 5001 in the operable state (second sword withdrawal state) without generating an operation valid period for effectively accepting the player's operation. Is returned to the sword-delivered state (see FIG. 224 (S1)). Then, the sword ornament body undergoes a second pseudo-continuous fluctuation (re-variation) while maintaining the stage 1 form (see FIG. 224 (S2)).

Then, at the same time as the start of the second pseudo-continuous variation (re-variation), the sword ornament 5001 changes its form from the stage 1 form to the stage 2 form (see FIG. 224 (S3)). After that, the sword decoration body 5001 changes its state from the sword-delivered state to the second sword-drawn state (see FIG. 224 (S4)), and is the operation effective by the operation opportunity suggestion image displayed in the display area of the effect display device 1600? Whether or not it enhances the player's feeling of excitement (see Fig. 225 (V1)), but the sword decoration 5001 in the operable state (second sword withdrawal state) without generating an operation valid period for effectively accepting the player's operation. Is returned to the sword-delivered state (see FIG. 225 (V5)). Then, the sword ornament reaches the third pseudo-continuous fluctuation (re-variation) while maintaining the stage 2 form (see FIG. 225 (V6)).

Then, at the same time as the start of the third pseudo-continuous variation (re-variation), the sword ornament 5001 changes its form from the stage 2 form to the stage 3 form (see FIG. 225 (V7)). After that, the sword decoration body 5001 changes its state from the sword-delivered state to the second sword-drawn state (see FIG. 225 (V8)), and is the operation effective by the operation opportunity suggestion image displayed in the display area of the effect display device 1600? Whether or not the player's feeling of excitement is enhanced, and after the player is fully aware of the sword ornament 5001 that is in the operable state (second sword withdrawal state) (see FIG. 226 (X1) → (X2) → (X3)). ), The operation validity period for effectively accepting the player's operation is started (see FIG. 226 (X4)).

Then, when the player performs the sword delivery operation during the operation valid period, the sword decoration body 5001 changes its state from the second sword withdrawal state to the sword delivery state, and also changes from the stage 3 form to the initial form. At this time, in the case of the "weak" effect pattern, the specific decorative member SDY (sudare) changes from the initial state to the semi-falling state (see FIG. 227 (U3)). Then, at the end of the third pseudo-continuous fluctuation (re-variation), that is, at the end timing of the period T3, the specific decorative member SDY (sudare) returns to the initial state and corresponds to a half drop in the display area of the effect display device 1600. Since the expected degree notification image of the expected degree is displayed (see FIG. 227 (U4)), the player recognizes the end of the period T3. Further, in the case of the "strong" effect pattern, the specific decorative member SDY (sudare) changes from the initial state to the fully dropped state (see FIG. 227 (U1)), and the expected degree notification of the expected degree corresponding to the total fall is notified. The difference is that the image is displayed (see FIG. 227 (U2)).

On the other hand, when the player does not perform the sword delivery operation during the operation validity period, the sword decoration body 5001 changes from the second sword withdrawal state to the sword delivery state at the end of the operation validity period, and changes from the stage 3 form to the initial form. The morphology changes. Then, at the end of the third pseudo-continuous variation (re-variation), that is, at the end timing of the period T3, an escape image indicating that the expected degree is not notified to the display area of the effect display device 1600 is displayed (FIG. 229 (FIG. 229). See W2)), the player recognizes the end of period T3.

(Pseudo sword LV1 weak production pattern / Pseudo sword LV1 strong production pattern)
Subsequently, with reference to FIGS. 228 and 229, the sword decoration body 5001 is enabled as an operating means in the first pseudo-continuous variation (re-variation), but the pseudo-continuous variation is made by the player selecting not to operate. An example of the effect transition when the pseudo sword LV1 weak effect pattern or the pseudo sword LV1 strong effect pattern that can acquire the continuation (level-up effect) of (re-variation) is set will be described. The description of the effect transition similar to the effect pattern described above will be omitted as appropriate.

When the set effect pattern is the pseudo sword LV1 weak effect pattern or the pseudo sword LV1 strong effect pattern, the operation opportunity of the sword decoration body 5001 is given at the operation opportunity grant timing of the first pseudo continuous fluctuation (re-variation). .. However, the operation opportunity at this time is not an operation opportunity for asking the player to perform an active operation as described above, but a selection operation opportunity for asking the player to select whether or not to operate. Therefore, after following the effect transition shown in FIGS. 223 (A) to 224 (T1), the display area of the effect display device 1600 is provided with the operation opportunity of FIG. 224 (T1). An operation selection image (“may be an opportunity !?” message) indicating that it is a selection operation opportunity for the player to select whether or not to operate from the operation confirmation image indicating that the operation is to be performed is displayed (FIG. 228 (Z1). )). Then, the operation valid period of the sword decoration body 5001 is generated, and in the display area of the effect display device 1600, an operation selection promotion effect for prompting the selection of the sword delivery operation of the sword decoration body 5001 is performed. Specifically, the sword image in the second sword state (stage 1 form), which is the same as the sword decoration body 5001, is displayed, and the operation direction and the operation validity period are shown together with the message "Please choose whether to put the sword". The image is displayed (FIG. 228 (Z2)).

Here, the set pseudo sword LV1 weak production pattern (pseudo sword LV1 strong production pattern) is a variation of either the sword LV1 weak fluctuation pattern or the sword LV3 weak fluctuation pattern (sword LV1 strong fluctuation pattern or sword LV3 strong fluctuation pattern). Subsequent production transitions differ greatly depending on whether the production pattern is set based on the pattern.

In the case of the pseudo sword LV1 weak production pattern (pseudo sword LV1 strong production pattern) set based on the sword LV1 weak fluctuation pattern (sword LV1 strong fluctuation pattern), the player can perform the sword delivery operation during the operation valid period. When it is detected, it follows the same effect transition (FIG. 227) as the sword LV1 weak effect pattern (sword LV1 strong effect pattern) of the basic effect pattern.

On the other hand, if the sword-delivering operation by the player is not detected during the operation valid period, the operation selection promotion effect shown in FIG. 228 (Z2) is shown regardless of the set effect pattern (“weak” or “strong”). When the valid period of the operation is completed, the sword decoration body 5001 is returned from the second sword drawing state of the stage 1 form to the sword delivery state of the initial form, and the display area of the effect display device 1600 has this selection operation opportunity. An image (“Is it an opportunity ...”) indicating that it was an opportunity to operate is displayed (FIG. 229 (W1)). At this time, there is no change in the specific decorative member SDY (sudare). Next, in the display area of the effect display device 1600, an escape image ("enemy, escape!" ) Is displayed (FIG. 229 (W2)). Then, when the pseudo-continuous variation (re-variation) is completed, a reach state is formed in the display area of the effect display device 1600 by the decorative symbol of the normal mode, and the reach effect is started (FIG. 229 (W3)).

In the case of the pseudo sword LV1 weak production pattern (pseudo sword LV1 strong production pattern) set based on the sword LV3 weak fluctuation pattern (sword LV3 strong fluctuation pattern), the player can perform the sword delivery operation during the operation valid period. When detected, FIG. 227 (U3) → (U4) (FIG. 227 (U1) → After following the effect transition of (U2)), the remaining effect period (total period of the periods T2 and T3) is varied and displayed by the decorative symbol in the normal mode (not shown). Then, a reach state is formed by the decorative symbol of the normal mode at the same timing as a predetermined timing in the sword LV3 weak fluctuation pattern (sword LV3 strong fluctuation pattern), and then the reach effect is started (FIG. 227 (U5)). reference).

On the other hand, if the sword delivery operation by the player is not detected during the operation valid period, the operation selection promotion effect shown in FIG. 228 (Z2) described above is not observed regardless of the set effect pattern (“weak” or “strong”). When the operation validity period in which the operation is performed ends, the operation pseudo-continuous fluctuation (re-variation) is continued by acquiring the level-up effect. The effect transition at this time shifts from the above-mentioned FIG. 228 (Z2) to a continuous image (FIG. 224 (S1)) indicating that the operation opportunity is not given at the first operation grant timing, that is, the continuation of the pseudo-continuous fluctuation. After that, in the same manner as the sword LV3 weak effect pattern (sword LV3 strong effect pattern) of the basic effect pattern, FIGS. 224 (S2) to (S4) → FIG. ) → FIGS. 226 (X1) to (X4) → FIG. 227 (U1) → (U2) or (U3) → (U4) → FIG. 227 (U5).

As described above, the pseudo sword LV1 weak effect pattern (pseudo sword LV1 strong effect pattern) greatly differs in the effect development after the selection operation opportunity is given according to the fluctuation pattern selected by the main control board 1310. When the selected fluctuation pattern is a sword LV1 weak fluctuation pattern (sword LV1 strong fluctuation pattern), the player should choose to operate at the selection operation opportunity, and when operating at the selection operation opportunity, the basic effect pattern and Similarly, you can grasp the degree of expectation and face the reach production. On the other hand, if you choose not to operate, not only will you not be able to obtain the level-up effect described later, but you will also reach the reach effect without being able to grasp the degree of expectation that you could have known if you originally operated it. .. Further, when the selected fluctuation pattern is the sword LV3 weak fluctuation pattern (sword LV3 strong fluctuation pattern), the player should choose not to operate at the selection operation opportunity. If you do not operate at the selection operation opportunity, you can enjoy the production by continuing the pseudo-continuous fluctuation (re-variation) as in the basic production pattern. On the other hand, if you operate it, you will miss the effect of continuing the pseudo-continuous fluctuation (re-variation) that you could have acquired if you did not operate it (the shape change of the sword decoration 5001 due to the level-up effect), and the form of the sword decoration 5001 will be initialized. It will return to the form. As for the operation at the selection operation opportunity, the operation effect obtained according to the fluctuation pattern selected by the main control board 1310, which the player does not know, is the opposite, and the operation during the operation effective period in which the operation is effectively accepted is the game. It provides a novel production that brings a disadvantageous operation result to the person. In addition, the operation at the selection operation opportunity of the specific effect pattern has a greater influence on the subsequent production development than the operation at the operation opportunity of the basic effect pattern. Therefore, the player faces the operation at the selection operation opportunity with a sense of tension and anticipation. Therefore, it is possible to suppress a decrease in the player's motivation for operation and a decrease in the interest in the game caused by a uniform operation effect.

In particular, when the pseudo sword LV1 weak effect pattern (pseudo sword LV1 strong effect pattern) is set based on the sword LV3 weak variation pattern (sword LV3 strong variation pattern), the first pseudo continuous variation (re-variation) occurs. When the player operates the sword decoration body 5001 at the selection operation opportunity, the level of the stage 3 form is lowered from the stage 1 form at the time of the selection operation opportunity to the stage 0 form (initial form). On the other hand, if the player does not operate the sword decoration body 5001, the pseudo-continuous fluctuation (re-variation) is continuously performed twice, the level is raised to the stage 3 form, and the operation opportunity is given again. Conventionally, a preset number of operations is required in the effect pattern, but in this example, two operation opportunities (LV1 and L3) can be given in advance, but one operation is performed by the player. The grant will end at the opportunity, and it is possible to provide a novel production that more reflects the player's intention. Therefore, it is possible to suppress a decrease in the player's motivation to operate the operation effect that does not look good and to suppress a decrease in the interest in the game.

In other words, even if the effect pattern in which the sword decoration body 5001 can be changed from the initial form to the stage 3 form is set by the variation pattern selected by the main control board 1310, the initial form to the stage 1 form is set depending on the operation of the player. Only the changes up to can be seen, leading to reach production. Since the player can be made to select the operation without being caught by the selected fluctuation pattern (set effect pattern), it is possible to give the player the feeling that his / her own operation selection determines the effect. Therefore, it is possible to suppress a decrease in the player's willingness to operate and a decrease in the interest in the game.

Further, when the sword decoration body 5001 is operated at the selection operation opportunity, the form of the sword decoration body 5001 returns to the initial form, but the degree of expectation can be grasped by the drop effect of the specific decoration member SDY (sudare). .. If you do not operate the sword decoration body 5001, you will not be able to grasp the degree of expectation and you will end up, and the form will change (level up) further, and you will operate it at the operation opportunity given after becoming the stage 3 form. In some cases, the degree of expectation can be grasped by the falling effect of the specific decorative member SDY (sudare). In this way, the operation selection at the selection operation opportunity produces the same normal operation effect as the basic effect pattern, and the non-operation selection produces an effect lower than the normal operation effect or a higher effect than the normal operation effect. Therefore, it is preferable to set the degree of expectation to be higher when the effect is high than when the effect is low. In FIG. 231 (A), the degree of expectation in the same effect pattern (pseudo sword LV1 weak effect pattern, pseudo sword LV1 strong effect pattern) is changed according to the fluctuation pattern, but the present invention is not limited to this. For example, the degree of expectation of the same production pattern may be constant regardless of the fluctuation pattern. In addition, in order to provide an appropriate effect more suitable for the player's own sense of selection, it is preferable to change the degree of expectation in the same effect pattern according to the fluctuation pattern and the effect. As a result, it is possible to suppress a decrease in the player's willingness to operate and a decrease in the interest in the game.

Subsequently, with reference to FIGS. 231 (B) and 235, the sword decorative body 5001 and the specific decorative member SDY (sudare) when the pseudo sword LV1 weak effect pattern or the pseudo sword LV1 strong effect pattern is set. The operation execution timing of is described.

As shown in FIG. 231 (B), in the pseudo sword LV1 weak effect pattern and the pseudo sword LV1 strong effect pattern, in the period T1 in which the first pseudo-continuous variation (re-variation) is performed, the sword ornament 5001 in the stage 1 form Is enabled as an operation means, and an operation opportunity is given to the player. When the pseudo sword LV1 weak effect pattern is set, a drop effect (expectation notification effect) is performed in which the specific decorative member SDY (sudare accessory) is half-falled by the operation of the player. Further, when the pseudo sword LV1 strong effect pattern is set, a drop effect (expectation notification effect) is performed in which the specific decorative member SDY (sudare accessory) is completely dropped by the operation of the player. Further, when the fluctuation pattern selected at this time is the sword LV3 weak fluctuation pattern or the sword LV3 strong fluctuation pattern, three pseudo-continuous fluctuations (re-variations) are originally provided so that the specific decoration can be performed. After the drop effect of the member SDY, the symbol variation in the normal mode is performed in the remaining effect period (period T2 + period T3).

If the player's operation is not detected, the drop effect (expectation notification effect) is not performed in either effect pattern. Then, when the fluctuation pattern selected at this time is the sword LV3 weak fluctuation pattern or the sword LV3 strong fluctuation pattern, the second and third pseudo-continuous fluctuations (re-variations) are continued, and the second pseudo-continuous fluctuation is continued. In the period T2 in which (re-variation) is performed, the operation opportunity of the sword decoration body 5001 is not given, and in the period T3 in which the third pseudo-continuous variation (re-variation) is performed, the sword decoration body 5001 in the stage 3 form is operated. And give the player an opportunity to operate. Then, when the pseudo sword LV1 weak effect pattern is set, a drop effect (expectation notification effect) is performed in which the specific decorative member SDY (sudare accessory) is half-dropped by the operation of the player. Further, when the pseudo sword LV1 strong effect pattern is set, a drop effect (expectation notification effect) is performed in which the specific decorative member SDY (sudare accessory) is completely dropped by the operation of the player. If the player's operation is not detected, the drop effect (expectation notification effect) is not performed in either effect pattern.

As shown in FIG. 235, when the pseudo sword LV1 weak effect pattern is set, the sword decoration body 5001 changes its form from the initial form to the stage 1 form at the same time as the start of the first pseudo continuous variation (re-variation). (See FIG. 223 (E)). After that, the sword decoration body 5001 changes its state from the sword-delivered state to the second sword-drawn state (see FIG. 223 (F)), and whether the operation is enabled by the operation opportunity suggestion image displayed in the display area of the effect display device 1600. Whether or not the player's feeling of excitement is enhanced, and after the player is made to fully recognize the sword ornament 5001 that is in the operable state (second sword withdrawal state) (Fig. 223 (G) → Fig. 224 (T1) → Fig. 228). (See (Z1)), the operation valid period for effectively accepting the player's operation is started (see FIG. 228 (Z2)).

Then, when the player performs the sword delivery operation during the operation valid period, the sword decoration body 5001 changes its state from the second sword withdrawal state to the sword delivery state, and also changes from the stage 1 form to the initial form. At this time, in the case of the "weak" effect pattern, the specific decorative member SDY (sudare) changes from the initial state to the semi-falling state (see FIG. 227 (U3)). Then, at the end of the first pseudo-continuous fluctuation (re-variation), that is, at the end timing of the period T1, the specific decorative member SDY (sudare) returns to the initial state and corresponds to a half drop in the display area of the effect display device 1600. Since the expected degree notification image of the expected degree is displayed (see FIG. 227 (U4)), the player recognizes the end of the period T1. Further, although not shown, in the case of the "strong" effect pattern, the specific decorative member SDY (sudare accessory) changes from the initial state to the fully dropped state (see FIG. 227 (U1)), and corresponds to the total fall. The difference is that the expected degree notification image of the expected degree is displayed (see FIG. 227 (U2)).

On the other hand, when the player does not perform the sword delivery operation during the operation validity period and the pseudo-continuous fluctuation (re-variation) continues (when the sword is set based on the sword LV3 weak fluctuation pattern or the sword LV3 strong fluctuation pattern), the sword The decorative body 5001 changes its state from the second sword-drawn state to the sword-delivered state at the end of the operation validity period, but maintains the stage 1 form (see FIG. 224 (S1)).

Then, at the same time as the start of the second pseudo-continuous variation (re-variation), the sword ornament 5001 changes its form from the stage 1 form to the stage 2 form (see FIG. 224 (S3)). After that, the sword decoration body 5001 changes its state from the sword-delivered state to the second sword-drawn state (see FIG. 224 (S4)), and is the operation effective by the operation opportunity suggestion image displayed in the display area of the effect display device 1600? Whether or not it enhances the player's feeling of excitement (see Fig. 225 (V1)), but the sword decoration 5001 in the operable state (second sword withdrawal state) without generating an operation valid period for effectively accepting the player's operation. Is returned to the sword-delivered state (see FIG. 225 (V5)). Then, the sword ornament reaches the third pseudo-continuous fluctuation (re-variation) while maintaining the stage 2 form (see FIG. 225 (V6)).

Then, at the same time as the start of the third pseudo-continuous variation (re-variation), the sword ornament 5001 changes its form from the stage 2 form to the stage 3 form (see FIG. 225 (V7)). After that, the sword decoration body 5001 changes its state from the sword-delivered state to the second sword-drawn state (see FIG. 225 (V8)), and is the operation effective by the operation opportunity suggestion image displayed in the display area of the effect display device 1600? Whether or not the player's feeling of excitement is enhanced, and after the player is fully aware of the sword ornament 5001 that is in the operable state (second sword withdrawal state) (see FIG. 226 (X1) → (X2) → (X3)). ), The operation validity period for effectively accepting the player's operation is started (see FIG. 226 (X4)).

Then, when the player performs the sword delivery operation during the operation valid period, the sword decoration body 5001 changes its state from the second sword withdrawal state to the sword delivery state, and also changes from the stage 3 form to the initial form. At this time, in the case of the "weak" effect pattern, the specific decorative member SDY (sudare) changes from the initial state to the semi-falling state (see FIG. 227 (U3)). Then, at the end of the third pseudo-continuous fluctuation (re-variation), that is, at the end timing of the period T3, the specific decorative member SDY (sudare) returns to the initial state and corresponds to a half drop in the display area of the effect display device 1600. Since the expected degree notification image of the expected degree is displayed (see FIG. 227 (U4)), the player recognizes the end of the period T3. Further, although not shown, in the case of the "strong" effect pattern, the specific decorative member SDY (sudare accessory) changes from the initial state to the fully dropped state (see FIG. 227 (U1)), and corresponds to the total fall. The difference is that the expected degree notification image of the expected degree is displayed (see FIG. 227 (U2)).

On the other hand, when the player does not perform the sword delivery operation during the operation validity period, the sword decoration body 5001 changes from the second sword withdrawal state to the sword delivery state at the end of the operation validity period, and changes from the stage 3 form to the initial form. The morphology changes. Then, at the end of the third pseudo-continuous variation (re-variation), that is, at the end timing of the period T3, an escape image indicating that the expected degree is not notified to the display area of the effect display device 1600 is displayed (FIG. 229 (FIG. 229). See W2)), the player recognizes the end of period T3.

In addition, when the player does not perform the sword delivery operation during the operation valid period and the pseudo continuous fluctuation (re-variation) is not continued (when the sword is set based on the sword LV1 weak fluctuation pattern or the sword LV1 strong fluctuation pattern), the sword The decorative body 5001 changes its state from the second sword-drawn state to the sword-delivered state at the end of the operation valid period, and changes its form from the stage 1 form to the initial form. Then, at the end of the first pseudo-continuous variation (re-variation), that is, at the end timing of the period T1, an escape image indicating that the expected degree is not notified to the display area of the effect display device 1600 is displayed (FIG. 229 (FIG. 229). See W2)), the player recognizes the end of period T1.

(Pseudo resurrection sword LV1 production pattern)
Subsequently, with reference to FIG. 230, the same production transition as the above-mentioned sword LV1 weak production pattern is followed, and after making it appear as if the reach production is started as it is, the pseudo-continuous fluctuation (re-variation) is revived. An example of the effect transition when the sword LV1 effect pattern is set will be described. The description of the effect transition similar to the effect pattern described above will be omitted as appropriate.

The pseudo revival sword LV1 effect pattern is an effect pattern that can be set by the peripheral control board 1510 when the sword LV3 weak fluctuation pattern or the sword LV3 strong fluctuation pattern is selected by the main control board 1310.

When the set effect pattern is a pseudo revival sword LV1 effect pattern, similarly to the above-mentioned sword LV1 weak effect pattern, the above-mentioned FIGS. 223 (A) to (G) → FIGS. 224 (T1) to (T3). Follow the production transition. Then, when the operation by the player is detected in the first operation opportunity, the same effect as in FIGS. 227 (U3), (U4) and (U5) described above is performed regardless of the type of the fluctuation pattern. After following the production transition of UA1) → (UA2) → (UA3), the pseudo-continuous fluctuation by the pseudo-continuous sword symbol is restarted again. If the operation by the player is not detected in the first operation opportunity, the sword decoration body 5001 changes to the initial form of the sword delivery state at the end of the operation validity period, as in the other production patterns. Instead of FIG. 230 (UA1) → (UA2) described above, the pseudo-continuous variation (re-variation) ends without the drop effect of the specific decorative member SDY (sudare) in the display area of the effect display device 1600. An escape image (“enemy, escape!”) Is displayed (see FIG. 229 (W2)).

The resumption of the pseudo-continuous fluctuation (re-variation) is centered among the three decorative symbols in the reach state (“7 ↓ 7”) displayed in the display area of the effect display device 1600 shown in FIG. 230 (UA3). Temporary stop display with a pseudo-sword symbol that is not prepared for the left and right decorative symbols, specifically, a pseudo-sword symbol that indicates the form and effect level (number of pseudo-sequential fluctuations) of the sword decoration body 5001. This is notified to the player (Fig. 230 (UA4)). On the pseudo-sword pattern at this time, the sword image of the sword decoration body 5001 in the stage 3 form and the effect level 3 are displayed. At this point, there is no change in the sword ornament 5001, and the initial form (sword delivery state) is maintained. As described above, in the pseudo-recovery sword LV1 production pattern, when the pseudo-continuous fluctuation (re-variation) is restored, the pseudo-continuous fluctuation (re-variation) corresponding to the sword decoration body 5001 of the stage 1 form and the stage 2 form is not performed. Pseudo-continuous variation (re-variation) corresponding to the sword decoration body 5001 in the stage 3 form is performed. Then, at the time of the temporary stop display (FIG. 230 (UA4)) immediately before the pseudo-continuous variation (re-variation) in the stage 3 form starts, the form and the effect level of the sword decoration body 5001 in the pseudo-continuous variation (re-variation) are notified. Therefore, the player can grasp the stage of the pseudo-continuous fluctuation (re-variation) and face it.

Then, in the display area of the effect display device 1600, the pseudo-sword pattern displayed at the time of FIG. 230 (UA4) is enlarged and displayed, and the effect display acts on the sword decoration body 5001. It is moved and displayed toward 5001, and the re-variation of the decorative pattern is displayed. Then, the sword decoration body 5001 changes its form from the initial form to the stage 3 form in which the aura member 5040, the first decoration part 5012a and the second decoration part 5012b operate to make both decoration parts visible as an integral decoration body. (Fig. 230 (UA5)). Subsequently, the sword image of the pseudo-sword pattern displayed in the display area of the effect display device 1600 is changed from the sword-delivered state to the second sword-drawn state, and the sword ornament 5001 is actually changed from the sword-delivered state to the second sword-drawn state. The state changes to (Fig. 230 (UA6)). Here, since the sword decoration body 5001 changes its form at once from the initial form to the stage 3 form for a plurality of stages, it is possible to impress a powerful movement and attract the interest of the player.

After that, the sword decoration body 5001 in the second sword-drawing state (stage 3 form), which enables the player to operate the sword, is enabled as an operation means, and the above-mentioned FIGS. 226 (X1) to (X5) are given an operation opportunity. If an operation by the player is detected after following the effect transition of, although not shown, the specific decorative member SDY (not shown) depends on the presence or absence of the operation detection at the first operation opportunity regardless of the type of fluctuation pattern. The type of drop effect of the bamboo blind is determined. If the operation is detected at the first operation opportunity, the specific decorative member SDY (sudare) is once in a half-falling state, so the level is raised and the above-mentioned FIG. 227 (U1) → (U2) → The same as (U5), the expectation level notification effect is performed by the total drop effect of the specific decorative member SDY (sudare), and the pseudo-continuous variation (re-variation) ends. On the other hand, if the operation is not detected at the first operation opportunity, the degree of expectation due to the semi-falling effect of the specific decorative member SDY (sudare) as in FIG. 227 (U3) → (U4) → (U5) described above. The notification effect is performed, and the pseudo-continuous fluctuation (re-variation) ends.

If the operation by the player is not detected at the operation opportunity to enable the sword decoration body 5001 in the second sword withdrawal state (stage 3 form) as the operation means, the operation validity period ends as in the other effect patterns. At the same time, the sword decoration body 5001 changes to the initial state of the sword, and in the display area of the effect display device 1600, the specific decorative member SDY (sudare) is not dropped and the pseudo-continuous fluctuation (re-variation) is performed. An escape image (“enemy, escape!”) Is displayed (see FIG. 229 (W2)), and the pseudo-continuous variation (re-variation) ends.

In this way, the pseudo-revival sword LV1 production pattern follows the same production transition as the above-mentioned sword LV1 weak production pattern, and when the pseudo-continuous fluctuation (re-variation) is restored again, it jumps over the level of the stage 2 form and the stage 3 form. Since the same development as the production of the level of (the production of the third pseudo-continuous fluctuation (re-variation) in the basic production pattern) is performed, the player is surprised and has a stronger expectation than other production patterns to reach the production. Can face. In addition, even if the player is given an operation opportunity by the first pseudo-continuous fluctuation (re-variation) or the subsequent drop effect of the specific decorative member SDY (sudare) is half-fall, he / she will not be disappointed. You can enjoy the game in anticipation of the revival of pseudo-continuous fluctuation (re-variation).

Subsequently, with reference to FIGS. 231 (B) and 236, the operation execution timing of the sword decoration body 5001 and the specific decoration member SDY (sudare accessory) when the pseudo resurrection sword LV1 effect pattern is set will be described. ..

As shown in FIG. 231 (B), in the pseudo-revival sword LV1 effect pattern, the sword decoration body 5001 in the stage 1 form is enabled as an operating means during the period T1 in which the first pseudo-continuous fluctuation (re-variation) is performed. Give the player an operation opportunity. At this time, regardless of the selected fluctuation pattern (sword LV3 weak fluctuation pattern or sword LV3 strong fluctuation pattern), the specific decorative member SDY (sudare accessory) is half-dropped by the operation of the player. (Direction) is performed. If there is no operation by the player, the drop effect (expectation notification effect) is not performed.

Then, after the first pseudo-continuous variation (re-variation) is completed and the display returns to the variation display of the decorative symbol in the normal mode, the period during which the third pseudo-continuous variation (re-variation) is performed in another effect pattern. Pseudo-continuous variation (re-variation) is performed using the sword ornament 5001 corresponding to T3, that is, the form changes to the step 3 form. Then, the sword decoration body 5001 in the stage 3 form is enabled as an operation means, and the player is given an operation opportunity. At this time, if the specific decorative member SDY (sudare accessory) is dropped during the period T1, the specific decorative member SDY (sudare accessory) is completely dropped by the player's operation (expectation notification). (Direction) is performed. In addition, when the specific decorative member SDY (sudare accessory) is not dropped during the period T1 during the period T1, the specific decorative member SDY (sudare accessory) is dropped by the player's operation. A production (expectation notification production) is performed. If there is no operation by the player, the drop effect (expectation notification effect) is not performed.

As shown in FIG. 236, when the pseudo-revival sword LV1 effect pattern is set, the sword decoration body 5001 changes its form from the initial form to the stage 1 form at the same time as the start of the first pseudo-continuous variation (re-variation). (See FIG. 223 (E)). After that, the sword decoration body 5001 changes its state from the sword-delivered state to the second sword-drawn state (see FIG. 223 (F)), and whether the operation is enabled by the operation opportunity suggestion image displayed in the display area of the effect display device 1600. Whether or not the player's feeling of excitement is enhanced, and after the player is made to fully recognize the sword ornament 5001 that is in the operable state (second sword withdrawal state) (Fig. 223 (G) → Fig. 224 (T1) → (T2). ), The operation validity period for effectively accepting the player's operation is started (see FIG. 224 (T3)).

Then, when the player performs the sword delivery operation during the operation valid period, the sword decoration body 5001 changes its state from the second sword withdrawal state to the sword delivery state, and also changes from the stage 1 form to the initial form. Then, the specific decorative member SDY (sudare) changes from the initial state to the semi-falling state (see FIG. 230 (UA1)). Then, at the end of the first pseudo-continuous fluctuation (re-variation), that is, at the end timing of the period T1, the specific decorative member SDY (sudare) returns to the initial state and corresponds to a half drop in the display area of the effect display device 1600. Since the expected degree notification image of the expected degree is displayed (see FIG. 230 (UA2)), the player recognizes the end of the period T1.

On the other hand, when the player does not perform the sword delivery operation during the operation validity period, the sword decoration body 5001 changes from the second sword withdrawal state to the sword delivery state at the end of the operation validity period, and changes from the stage 1 form to the initial form. The morphology changes. Then, at the end of the first pseudo-continuous variation (re-variation), that is, at the end timing of the period T1, an escape image indicating that the expected degree is not notified to the display area of the effect display device 1600 is displayed (FIG. 229 (FIG. 229). See W2)), the player recognizes the end of period T1.

After that, in the display area of the effect display device 1600, the reach state is once formed by the decorative symbol in the normal mode (see FIG. 230 (UA3)), but the pseudo-continuous variation (re-variation) is restored (FIG. 230 (UA4)). )reference).

Then, at the same time as the pseudo-continuous variation (re-variation) is restarted, the sword decoration body 5001 changes its form from the initial form (stage 0 form) to the stage 3 form (see FIG. 230 (UA5)). After that, the sword decoration body 5001 changes its state from the sword-delivered state to the second sword-drawn state (see FIG. 230 (UA6)), and whether the operation becomes effective by the operation opportunity suggestion image displayed in the display area of the effect display device 1600. Whether or not the player's feeling of excitement is enhanced, and after the player is fully aware of the sword ornament 5001 that is in the operable state (second sword withdrawal state) (see FIG. 226 (X1) → (X2) → (X3)). ), The operation validity period for effectively accepting the player's operation is started (see FIG. 226 (X4)).

Then, when the player performs the sword delivery operation during the operation valid period, the sword decoration body 5001 changes its state from the second sword withdrawal state to the sword delivery state, and also changes from the stage 3 form to the initial form. At this time, if the specific decorative member SDY (sudare accessory) is dropped in the first pseudo-continuous fluctuation (re-variation), the specific decorative member SDY (sudare accessory) is changed from the initial state to the total drop state. A changing drop effect is performed (see FIG. 227 (U1)). Then, at the end of the pseudo-continuous fluctuation (re-variation) of the resurrection, that is, at the end timing of the period T3, the specific decorative member SDY (sudare) returns to the initial state and corresponds to the entire drop in the display area of the effect display device 1600. Since the expected degree notification image of the expected degree is displayed (see FIG. 227 (U2)), the player recognizes the end of the period T3. Further, although not shown, if the specific decorative member SDY (sudare accessory) is not dropped in the first pseudo-continuous fluctuation (re-variation), the specific decorative member SDY (sudare accessory) starts from the initial state. It changes to the half-fall state (see FIG. 227 (U3)), and the expected degree notification image of the expectation degree corresponding to the half-fall is displayed (see FIG. 227 (U4)).

On the other hand, when the player does not perform the sword delivery operation during the operation validity period, the sword decoration body 5001 changes from the second sword withdrawal state to the sword delivery state at the end of the operation validity period, and changes from the stage 3 form to the initial form. The morphology changes. Then, at the end of the pseudo-continuous fluctuation (re-variation) of the resurrection, that is, at the end timing of the period T3, an escape image indicating that the expected degree is not notified to the display area of the effect display device 1600 is displayed (FIG. 229 (W2). )), The player recognizes the end of period T3.

In this way, in the pseudo-continuous effect using the sword decoration body 5001, in the sword LV2 effect pattern and the sword LV3 effect pattern in which the pseudo-continuous variation (re-variation) is performed a plurality of times, the number of pseudo-continuous changes is 2 and 3 times, respectively. If it is less than, the sword decoration body 5001 is changed from the sword-delivered state to the second sword-drawn state for each pseudo-continuous fluctuation (re-variation) so that the player can operate it, but an operation validity period is provided. It is characterized by returning to the sword-delivered state without giving the player an operation opportunity. For this reason, the player is expected to see whether or not the operation is effective even when the sword decoration body 5001 becomes operable, so that the player is interested in the sword decoration body 5001 as an operation means. It is possible to suppress a decrease in the motivation for operation and a decrease in the interest in the game.

Further, the pseudo-continuous variation (re-variation) is characterized in that the sword ornament 5001 returns to the initial form when the player operates the sword ornament 5001 whose form has changed from the initial form. Therefore, it is possible to give the player a novel impression different from the conventional uniform operation effect that provides a useful effect for the player by the operation of the player. Make the player's operation selection careful. Therefore, it is possible to make the sword decoration body 5001 interested in the operation, and it is possible to suppress a decrease in the motivation for the operation and a decrease in the interest in the game.

In addition, since the sword decoration body 5001 can change its form stepwise until an operation opportunity is given (until the operation validity period occurs), the expectations and interests of the player are gradually raised, and the game is played. It is possible to suppress the decline in interest. It should be noted that the period from when the sword decoration body 5001 is in the operation state and in the second sword withdrawal state (operation position) until the operation effective period is generated is the operation mode (form, light emission, movable) in the operation position by the player. Etc.), it is desirable to provide a period during which sufficient confirmation can be made. As a result, the player can confirm the operation mode before operating the sword decoration body 5001, so that the operation valid period is generated as soon as the second sword is pulled out, and the mode of the operation means cannot be confirmed. It is possible to dispel the concern that the interest in the game will be reduced by shifting to the operation production in a hurry.

The step change of the sword decoration body 5001 described above is shown in the form, but the present invention is not limited to this. Each effect mode, such as a change in the light emitting mode or the operation mode of the sword decoration body 5001, may be changed stepwise according to the number of continuations of the pseudo-continuous variation (re-variation).

(Application to look-ahead production)
Although the sword-drawing effect in the pseudo-continuous reach effect has been described above, it can also be executed as a look-ahead effect. The case of applying to the look-ahead effect will be described below. In the following, a case where the third hold is the target of the look-ahead effect and the sword LV3 strong effect pattern is set as the look-ahead effect pattern will be described as an example.

When the hold to be read-ahead effect occurs as the third hold 3, the same effect as in FIGS. 223 (B) to 223 (F) described above is performed in the variable display executed at the time of occurrence. The sword decoration body 5001 is different in that the second sword withdrawal state is limited to the time when the operation opportunity is given (the operation validity period is generated). Then, in the next variation display (that is, the variation display of the hold 1 when the hold 3 occurs), the same effect as in FIG. 223 (G) → FIGS. 224 (S1) to (S4) described above is performed. Further, in the next variation display (that is, the variation display of hold 2 when hold 3 occurs), the same effect as in FIGS. 225 (V1) → (V5) → (V8) → FIGS. 226 (X1) to (X3) is performed. Will be. As described above, the sword decoration body 5001 changes from the sword-delivered state to the second sword-drawn state in the look-ahead effect only when the operation valid period occurs. Here, the operation valid period is generated at the timing when the variable display of the hold 3 which is the target of the look-ahead effect is started, and the operation promotion effect and the state change of the sword decoration body 5001 (sword delivery state) shown in FIG. 226 (X4) described above are started. The second sword is pulled out from). After that, the same effect transition as in FIG. 227 (U1) → (U2) → (U5) is followed, and the look-ahead effect is completed.

The state change of the sword decoration body 5001 from the sword-delivered state to the second sword-drawn state is limited to the timing of occurrence of the operation valid period, but the gradual morphological change is performed at the end of the variable display, but the next variable display is performed. It may be done at the start. The look-ahead effect has the same effect as the pseudo-continuous reach effect.

(Pre-operation suggestion effect using specific decorative member SDY)
Subsequently, with reference to FIGS. 237 to 240, the pre-operation suggestion effect executed before the operation valid period in which the operation button 410 or the sword decoration body 5001 becomes effective in the reach effect will be described. In the pre-operation suggestion effect, it is possible to suggest whether the operation button 410 or the sword decoration 5001 is effective among the plurality of operation means by the operation of the specific decorative member SDY (sudare). .. Specifically, as a suggestion pattern by the pre-operation suggestion effect using the specific decorative member SDY (sudare accessory), the operation valid period is generated with the specific decorative member SDY (sudare accessory) positioned at the initial position. There is a first suggestion pattern and a second suggestion pattern that generates an operation validity period in a state where the specific decorative member SDY (sudare) is operated from the initial position to the suggestion position. When the operation is valid, the second suggestion pattern is executed at a higher rate than the first suggestion pattern. Specifically, the pre-operation suggestion effect of the first suggestion pattern (FIG. 237 (B)) that generates the operation validity period with the specific decorative member SDY (sudare accessory) positioned at the initial position even during the operation validity period. If this is done, there is a 30% chance that the sword decoration 5001 will be effective, and a 70% chance that the operation button 410 will be valid. On the other hand, when the pre-operation suggestion effect of the second suggestion pattern (FIG. 239 (AA1)) in which the operation validity period is generated while the specific decorative member SDY (sudare) is operated to the suggestion position is performed. Has a 70% probability (including a step-up pattern) that the sword decoration body 5001 is effective for operation, and a 30% probability that the operation button 410 is effective for operation. An example of the effect transition according to the operation of the specific decorative member SDY (sudare) in the first suggestion pattern and the second suggestion pattern of the pre-operation suggestion effect will be described below.

(1st suggestion pattern)
FIGS. 237 and 238 show either the operation button 410 or the sword decoration 5001 during the reach effect by the lottery by the peripheral control board 1510 based on the variation effect (reach effect) of the variation pattern drawn by the main control board 1310. Is a diagram showing a transition example of the reach effect in which the pre-operation suggestion effect of the first suggestion pattern is executed when it is determined that the operation is valid. In this reach effect, when the three decorative symbols are in the reach state in the display area of the effect display device 1600 (FIG. 237 (A)), the operation buttons are determined in advance to be valid by the lottery of the peripheral control board 1510. The pre-operation suggestion effect of the first suggestion pattern is executed before the operation validity period for any of the operating means of the 410 or the sword decoration 5001 is generated. As a specific effect content of the first suggestion pattern, an operation effect suggestion image (rotation of the aura) suggesting that the operation means is effective in the display area of the effect display device 1600 before the operation valid period is generated. It is displayed (FIG. 237 (B)), and at this time, the specific decorative member SDY (sudare) maintains the initial position. Further, there is no change in the operation button 410 and the sword decoration body 5001.

Then, while the specific decorative member SDY (sudare) is maintained at the initial position, an operation valid period for the operation means (operation button 410 or sword decoration 5001) that is determined to be valid for operation is generated. Let me. In this example, when the operation button 5001 is enabled for operation, the first suggestion pattern is set to be executed at a higher rate than the second suggestion pattern (described later) as the pre-operation suggestion effect. In other words, when the operation validity period occurs with the specific decorative member SDY (sudare) in the initial position, the operation button 410 is considered to be more effective than the sword decoration 5001. It can be suggested to the player.

When the operation button 410 is activated, as shown in FIG. 237 (C), the operation valid period for the operation button 410 is generated while the specific decorative member SDY (sudare) maintains the initial position. Let me. At the same time, in the display area of the effect display device 1600, an operation promotion effect is performed in which an operation promotion image for urging the player to press the operation button 410 and a gauge indicating the operation effective period are displayed. Further, at this time, the operation button 410 is light-emittingly decorated so that the player can easily recognize the operation target. Further, even when the sword decoration body 5001 is effective for operation, the pre-operation suggestion effect may be executed in the first suggestion pattern, although the ratio is lower than that of the operation button 410. At that time, as shown in FIG. 237 (D), the operation valid period for the sword decoration body 5001 is generated while the specific decorative member SDY (sudare accessory) maintains the initial position. At the same time, in the display area of the effect display device 1600, an operation promotion effect is performed in which an operation promotion image for urging the player to perform the sword delivery operation of the sword decoration body 5001 and a gauge indicating the operation validity period are displayed. Further, at this time, the sword decoration body 5001 is changed from the sword-delivered state to the second sword-drawn state (a form with an aura member), and the sword-delivering operation by the player is possible.

If an operation on an operation means (operation button 410 or sword decoration 5001) that is effective for operation is detected in FIG. 237 (C) or (D) described above, and the result of this variation display is a big hit, The specific decorative member SDY (sudare accessory) is dropped and moved so as to be in a completely dropped state from the initial state (FIG. 238 (CC1)). Next, when the specific decorative member SDY (sudare accessory) is returned to the initial state again, a big hit is notified to the display area of the effect display device 1600 in which the overlap with the specific decorative member SDY (sudare accessory) is released. An image (a message of the stop mode "777" and "superb" of the decorative symbol) is displayed (FIG. 238 (CC2)). On the other hand, if the result of the variation display this time is out of alignment, the specific decorative member SDY (sudare) is kept in the initial state and is not moved, and the display area of the effect display device 1600 is notified of the deviation. An image (the stop mode "767" of the decorative symbol) is displayed (FIG. 238 (CC3)).

(Second suggestion pattern)
FIG. 239 shows the pre-operation suggestion effect of the second suggestion pattern when it is determined that the operation of either the operation button 410 or the sword decoration 5001 is valid during the reach effect, as in the case of the first suggestion pattern described above. It is a figure which shows the transition example of the reach effect to be executed. In FIG. 240, although the second suggestion pattern was performed as the pre-operation suggestion effect, the operation button 410 was once enabled for operation without the sword decoration body 5001 being effective for operation, and then the sword decoration was performed. It is a figure which shows the pre-operation suggestion effect of the step-up pattern which makes the body 5001 operation effective.

As shown in FIG. 239 (AA1), the pre-operation suggestion effect of the second suggestion pattern is either the operation button 410 or the sword decoration 5001 which is determined in advance to be valid for operation by the lottery of the peripheral control board 1510. It is executed before the operation validity period for the operation means of is generated. As a specific effect content of the second suggestion pattern, an operation effect suggestion image (rotation of the aura) suggesting that the operation means is effective in the display area of the effect display device 1600 before the operation valid period is generated. Is displayed. The operation effect suggestion image displayed at this time is the same as the image displayed in the first suggestion pattern, but in the second suggestion pattern, the operation effect suggestion image is displayed and the specific decorative member SDY (sudare) is displayed. It operates in a small drop state (suggested position) that overlaps the upper part of the display area of the effect display device 1600 from the initial position, and the specific decorative member SDY (sudare) moves up and down between the initial position and the suggested position. It is moved in small steps in the direction. At this time, there is no change in the operation button 410 and the sword decoration.

Then, in a state where the specific decorative member SDY (sudare) is operated at the suggested position, the operation valid period for the operation means (operation button 410 or sword decoration 5001) which is determined in advance to be effective is set. generate. In this example, when the sword decoration body 5001 is effective for operation, the second suggestion pattern is set to be executed at a higher rate than the first suggestion pattern as the pre-operation suggestion effect. In other words, when the operation validity period occurs while the specific decorative member SDY (sudare) is in the suggested position, the sword decoration body 5001 is considered to be operation effective at a higher rate than the operation button 410. It can be suggested to the player.

When the sword decoration body 5001 is effective for operation, as shown in FIG. 239 (AA3), the operation validity period for the sword decoration body 5001 in a state where the specific decorative member SDY (sudare) is operating at the suggested position. To generate. At the same time, in the display area of the effect display device 1600, an operation promotion effect is performed in which an operation promotion image for urging the player to perform the sword delivery operation of the sword decoration body 5001 and a gauge indicating the operation validity period are displayed. At this time, the sword decoration body 5001 is changed from the sword-delivered state to the second sword-drawn state (a form with an aura), and the sword-delivering operation by the player is possible. Further, even when the operation button 410 is activated, the pre-operation suggestion effect may be executed in the second suggestion pattern, albeit at a low rate. At that time, as shown in FIG. 239 (AA2), an operation valid period for the operation button 410 is generated in a state where the specific decorative member SDY (sudare) is operating at the suggested position, and at the same time, the effect display device 1600 In the display area, an operation promotion effect is performed in which an operation promotion image for urging the player to press the operation button 410 and a gauge indicating the operation validity period are displayed. In the second suggestion pattern, when the player's operation is detected in the operation promotion effect, the specific decorative member SDY (sudare) is moved from the state of being operated at the suggested position to the initial state. Further, the specific decorative member SDY (sudare) may be moved from the state of operating at the suggested position to the fully dropped state or the initial state without being returned to the initial state.

Then, when an operation on the operation effective means (operation button 410 or sword decoration 5001) is detected in FIG. 239 (AA2) or (AA3), the above-mentioned FIG. 237 (C) or (D) Similarly, when the result of the variation display this time is a big hit, the specific decorative member SDY (sudare accessory) is dropped and moved so as to be in a fully dropped state from the initial state (FIG. 238 (CC1)). Next, when the specific decorative member SDY (sudare accessory) is returned to the initial state again, a big hit is notified to the display area of the effect display device 1600 in which the overlap with the specific decorative member SDY (sudare accessory) is released. An image (a message of the stop mode "777" and "superb" of the decorative symbol) is displayed (FIG. 238 (CC2)). On the other hand, if the result of the variation display this time is out of alignment, the specific decorative member SDY (sudare) is kept in the initial state and is not moved, and the display area of the effect display device 1600 is notified of the deviation. An image (the stop mode "767" of the decorative symbol) is displayed (FIG. 238 (CC3)). The effect transition after the operation promotion effect is the same as the effect transition after the operation promotion effect in the first suggestion pattern.

The operation pattern of the specific decorative member SDY (sudare) in the second suggestion pattern is not limited to the pattern operated at the suggested position, and a plurality of operation patterns may be provided. For example, when a plurality of types of movement patterns are provided so that the sword decoration body 5001 has a different ratio of effective operation, the player's interest in the movement can be increased. It is possible to enhance the interest of the pre-operation suggestion effect and the operation promotion effect used.

(Step-up pattern)
When the pre-operation suggestion effect of the second suggestion pattern that the operation validity period is generated while the specific decorative member SDY (sudare) is operated to the suggestion position is performed and the sword decoration body 5001 becomes operation valid, In addition to the basic pattern that follows the effect transition from FIG. 239 (AA1) to (AA3) described above before the sword decoration body 5001 becomes effective for operation, the operation button 410 is once enabled for operation, and then the sword decoration body 5001 is operated. There is a step-up pattern that enables the operation.

As shown in FIGS. 240 (BB1) to (BB4), the pre-operation suggestion effect of the step-up pattern is the operation validity period for the sword decoration body 5001 which is determined in advance to be operation-effective by the lottery of the peripheral control board 1510. Is generated, that is, before the operation promotion effect of the sword decoration body 5001 shown in FIG. 239 (AA3) described above is performed.

In the step-up pattern, first, the same operation effect suggestion image (rotation of the aura) as in FIG. 239 (AA1) is displayed, and the specific decorative member SDY (sudare) is moved in small steps (FIG. 240 (BB1)). ). Next, the operation valid period for the operation button 410 is generated in a state where the specific decorative member SDY (sudare) is operated at the suggested position. At the same time, the operation button 410 is light-emittingly decorated, and in the display area of the effect display device 1600, an operation promotion effect is performed in which an operation promotion image for urging the player to press the operation button 410 and a gauge indicating the operation validity period are displayed. (Fig. 240 (BB2)). Here, even if a player's pressing operation of the operation button 410 is detected during the operation valid period of the operation button 410, the result notification as shown in FIG. 238 is not performed, and the switching suggests the switching of the operation effective operation means. Suggested images (most blackout images) are displayed (FIG. 240 (BB3)). The switching suggestion image is displayed when the player presses the operation button 410 or the operation valid period of the operation button 410 ends. After that, the sword decoration body 5001 changes from the sword delivery state to the second sword removal state (a form with an aura), and in the display area of the effect display device 1600, the operation means for which the operation is effective is from the operation button 410 to the sword decoration body 5001. A switching notification image (messages of "chance to pull out the sword" and "I'm sorry to have you pay the sword") is displayed (Fig. 240 (BB4)). During this time, the specific decorative member SDY (sudare) is in a state of operating at the suggested position. Then, when the operation valid period of the sword decoration body 5001 is generated, the operation promotion effect of the sword decoration body 5001 shown in FIG. 239 (AA3) is performed. The effect transition after the operation promotion effect is the same as the effect transition after the operation promotion effect (FIG. 238) in the above-mentioned second suggestion pattern.

Note that, at the time of FIG. 240 (BB2) described above, only the image display of the button operation 410 may be performed without enabling the operation of the button operation 410 (without the operation promotion effect). It would be good if the player's interest could be directed to the button operation 410 and then the sword decoration body 5001 could be operated. Further, the step-up pattern may be selectable not only when it becomes the second suggestion pattern but also when it becomes the first suggestion pattern.

As described above, in the pre-operation suggestion effect of this example, the specific decorative member SDY (sudare) is used before the operation valid period of the operation means in which one of the plurality of operation means is effective is generated. ) Can be changed, and the operation means that is effective for the operation is suggested depending on the position. Specifically, in the first suggestion pattern (FIG. 237 (B)) in which the operation validity period is generated when the specific decorative member SDY (sudare) is located at the initial position, the operation button 410 is operation-effective. In the second suggestion pattern (FIG. 239 (AA1), the sword decoration 5001 Is highly expected to be effective for operation. Therefore, the player pays attention to the state of the specific decorative member SDY (sudare) in order to grasp which operation means is effective for operation. It is possible to enhance the interest of the production.

Further, in the second suggestion pattern, the specific decorative member SDY (sudare) is moved in small steps in the vertical direction in the pre-operation suggestion effect. Since the operation effect (fall effect) of the specific decorative member SDY (sudare accessory) is also used for the result notification (FIG. 238) after the operation of the operation means, a series of drop effects are performed from the vertical small movement of the pre-operation suggestion effect. It can be shown as a production of the game, and it is possible to suppress the deterioration of the game entertainment. In the above description, the state of the specific decorative member SDY (sudare), that is, the degree of expectation that the operation means that is effective by the movable body will be effective, is not limited to this, and the character is shown during the pre-operation suggestion effect. It may be displayed to suggest the degree of expectation. Further, when the operation means for which the operation is effective is determined, not only the operation button 410 is lit or the sword decoration body 5001 is changed to the second sword withdrawal state, but also the operation means for which the operation is effective is moved by vibration or the like. You may do it.

Further, in the second suggestion pattern, the operation button 410 is once enabled for operation (or pretended to be valid for operation) in a state where the specific decorative member SDY (sudare) is located at the suggested position. There is a step-up pattern that enables the operation of the sword decoration body 5001. As a result, the player is interested in both operating means. Further, even if the operation button 410 becomes effective immediately after the pre-operation suggestion effect, it is possible to expect that the sword decoration body 5001 may become effective after that, so that the motivation for operation is reduced and the interest in the game is reduced. Can be suppressed.

In the first suggestion pattern of the pre-operation suggestion effect, the operation effect suggestion image before the operation valid period in which any one of the plurality of operation means (operation button 410 or the sword decoration 5001) is effective is displayed. At the same timing (FIG. 237 (B)), as in the case of the second suggestion pattern (FIG. 239 (AA1)), the specific decorative member SDY (sudare) is viewed from the initial position in front view of the display area of the effect display device 1600. It may operate in a small drop state (suggested position) overlapping the upper portion, and may be moved in small steps in the vertical direction between the initial position and the suggested position. After that, when the operation valid period is generated, the specific decorative member SDY (sudare) is returned to the initial position (stationary). As a result, the movement of the specific decorative member SDY (sudare) in the first suggestion pattern is partially the same as the movement in the second suggestion pattern at the same timing. Even when the image is displayed, it is possible to make it think that the pre-operation suggestion effect of the second suggestion pattern is being executed. Therefore, it is possible to make the player expect the sword decoration body 5001 to be effective even when the pre-operation suggestion effect by the first suggestion pattern is executed. Then, the player strongly desires that the operation valid period occurs in a state where the specific decorative member SDY (sudare) operated at the display timing of the operation effect suggestion image is operated at the suggestion position. It is possible to improve the interest of the production.

[Specific operation-related effects]
As described above, in the pachinko machine 1 (peripheral control MPU1511a) according to this embodiment, when a specific result is obtained by the effect determination according to the result of the big hit determination, the game board side effect display device 1600 has a specific effect. Perform the production with a pattern. In the production period in which a specific production pattern is executed, a specific production reception period (valid period) that establishes a specific production execution condition can be generated by an operation by the player, and the operation is performed within the specific production reception period. And, based on the establishment of a specific effect execution condition, it is possible to execute a specific operation-time effect (such as an effect that suggests the degree of expectation for granting a privilege). The degree of expectation for giving a privilege suggested as a result of a specific operation-time effect may be 100% or 0%.

Further, as described above, in the pachinko machine 1 according to this embodiment, the pachinko machine 1 is operated as an operation means provided for such an operation-time effect (such as an effect that suggests the degree of expectation for giving a privilege when operated). In addition to the button 410, it is possible to further provide another operating means (sword decoration body 5001 or the like). In this regard, in a specific effect pattern, when an operation opportunity is given to the operation button 410 based on the result of the effect determination (when a specific effect execution condition is satisfied when the operation button 410 is operated), this There is a case where an operation opportunity is given to another operation means (sword decoration body 5001 or the like) (a case where a specific effect execution condition is satisfied by operating another operation means). Then, when an operation opportunity is given to another operation means (sword decoration body 5001 or the like), the pre-operation effect in which the operation opportunity is given is generated even if the operation is not performed at the operation opportunity. It is made possible for the player to recognize that the degree of expectation (big hit expectation) for giving the privilege is higher than the case where the operation opportunity is given to the operation button 410. The degree of expectation for giving the privilege suggested when the operation opportunity is given to another operation means (sword decoration body 5001 or the like) may be 100% or 0%.

According to such a configuration, when an operation opportunity is given to another operation means (sword decoration body 5001 or the like), the operation corresponding to the operation to the other operation means (sword decoration body 5001 or the like) is performed. It will be possible to improve the interest of the game when the production is in the pre-stage where it has not been performed yet and the operation is about to be performed. That is, in this case, the desired effect result (effect result suggesting that the expectation for granting the privilege is high, etc.) does not appear in the operation-time effect corresponding to the operation for another operation means (sword decoration body 5001 or the like). Even if the operation means cannot be operated within the specific production reception period (valid period), it is possible to improve the game entertainment through such operation-related production. Become.

Then, in the pachinko machine 1 (peripheral control MPU1511a) according to this embodiment, an operation opportunity is given to any of a plurality of operation means (operation button 410, sword decoration body 5001 and the like) having such a directing property. When doing so, it is possible to execute a common operation-related effect when giving those operation opportunities.

For example, in the pachinko machine 1 (peripheral control MPU1511a) according to this embodiment, at least, as an effect mode for generating an effective period (effect acceptance period) in which the operation for the operation button 410 is enabled (the effect can be accepted), at least
-The operation on the operation button 410 is enabled (the effect can be accepted) after the "specific operation-related effect" that can appear even when the operation on the sword decoration 5001 is enabled (the effect can be accepted). The first production mode that generates the valid period (effect reception period) to be performed, and the operation for the operation button 410 is enabled without the production of the "specific operation-related production" being started (the production can be accepted). A plurality of production modes such as a second production mode that generates an effective period (effect reception period) to be performed are prepared, and by executing any of these production modes, the operation for the operation button 410 is enabled (effect). It is designed to generate a valid period (production reception period) that can be accepted.

According to such a configuration, there may be a period in which the operation for the specific operation means (for example, the operation button 410) among the plurality of operation means (operation button 410, sword decoration body 5001 and the like) can be received. Regardless of whether there is a period during which the operation means different from the specific operation means (for example, the sword decoration body 5001) can accept the effect, it is common (specification) prior to the occurrence of those periods. ) Operation-related effects will be made feasible, so it will be possible to have fun as to whether a specific operation means or another operation means can accept the effects. By performing the operation while the above is performed, it becomes possible to suppress the deterioration of the game interest.

In such a common (specific) operation-related effect, when a predetermined time elapses from the start of the effect, it corresponds to any of a plurality of operation means (for example, operation button 410, sword decoration body 5001). The production reception period will be generated, but at least when the production is started, which of those operation means (for example, operation button 410, sword decoration 5001) corresponds to the production reception period will occur. Should be kept secret. Further, for each operation-related effect exemplified below, an operation opportunity is given to any of a plurality of operation means (for example, operation button 410, sword decoration body 5001) before the effect reception period occurs. It may be possible to indicate whether or not the effect is to be performed (display the effect result display), or a plurality of operations within the period after the effect acceptance period occurs, including at the same time as the effect acceptance period occurs. It may be possible to indicate which of the means (for example, the operation button 410 and the sword decoration 5001) is given the operation opportunity (the effect result display appears), and the operation-related effect is executed until what timing. It can be changed as appropriate.

Hereinafter, some effect modes that can be adopted when carrying out such a common (specific) operation-related effect will be sequentially described. In each of the following explanatory examples and other examples thereof, the operation button 410 and the sword decoration body 5001 are used as a plurality of operation means targeted for common (specific) operation-related effects. The types of operation means are not limited to these, and three or more operation means may be prepared as a plurality of operation means to be targeted for common (specific) operation-related effects. In addition, the following production examples and other examples thereof mainly show the production contents when any of the production reception periods occurs after the common (specific) operation-related production is executed, and the common (specific) production is shown. ) Operation-related effects If any of the effect reception periods occurs without being executed, the effect contents may be omitted. However, when a common (specific) operation-related effect is not executed and one of the effect acceptance periods occurs, the effect content is as follows: "The operation for the operation button 410 is performed without the specific operation-related effect being executed. A general effect such as "an operation instruction image for prompting appears or an operation instruction image for prompting an operation for the sword decoration body 5001 appears" can be mentioned. Furthermore, in each of the following production examples and other examples thereof, a common (specific) operation-related effect is performed when the reach state is not formed, but the reach state is formed and the reach effect is performed. A common (specific) operation-related effect may be generated as an image different from the effect image displayed as the reach effect during the period during which is being executed, or is common during the execution period of the jackpot game. (Specific) operation-related effects may be generated.

It should be noted that each of the effects described below can be appropriately combined and executed with each of the effects of each of the other examples described later, and can also be appropriately combined and executed with each of the above-mentioned effects. It is possible. Each of the effects described below can be combined by substituting a part of each effect of another example described later, and when the first effect pattern is executed, each effect described below is performed. Therefore, when the second effect pattern is executed, it is also possible to perform each of the different examples described later. The same can be said for each of the different productions described below.

[First production mode]
In FIGS. 241 and 242, after the production of the specific operation-related effect is started, at least one of the operation button 410 and the sword decoration body 5001 can accept the effect during the period during which the specific operation-related effect is being executed. It is a figure which shows the production example (the first production mode) to be performed.

In FIG. 241 (a), in the normal game state, the variation display of the decorative symbol SZ (special symbol) is performed by the effect display device 1600 with a specific effect pattern according to the result of the jackpot determination in the state where the number of holdings is 0. It shows the production situation.

FIG. 241 (b) shows an effect situation in which a specific operation-related effect is started during the execution of the variable display of the decorative symbol SZ shown in FIG. 241 (a).

Here, in the specific operation-related effect shown in FIG. 241B, the button image BTG corresponding to the operation button 410 and the sword decoration image SYG corresponding to the sword decoration body 5001 are displayed in the display area of the effect display device 1600. A display is made to move within each. In this way, by simultaneously displaying a plurality of types of operation-related images (here, button image BTG and sword decoration image SYG) corresponding to different types of operation means in the display area, the operation button 410 and the sword It is suggested that the operation for any of the operation means (operation button 410, sword decoration body 5001) will soon be possible for the production reception, while it is unclear which of the decoration body 5001 can be received for the production. You will be able to.

In FIG. 241 (c), the specific operation-related effect shown in FIG. 241 (b) has progressed, and both the button image BTG corresponding to the operation button 410 and the sword decoration image SYG corresponding to the sword decoration body 5001 are displayed. An instruction display (here, a character display such as "operate" and a production reception) prompting the user to operate any of these operation means (operation button 410, sword decoration body 5001) while each is stopped and displayed in the area. A bar display indicating the remaining time of the possible period) appears to indicate the production status.

According to such an effect mode, although it is possible to receive an operation on at least one of the operation button 410 and the sword decoration body 5001, those operation means (operation button 410, sword decoration body 5001). It will be possible to make it unclear which of the above can be accepted for production. This is the same effect mode (FIG. 241 (c)) in both the situation where the operation for the operation button 410 is capable of accepting the effect and the situation where the operation for the sword decoration 5001 is possible for the effect. It is nothing but because it is displayed. That is, in this production example (first production mode), a plurality of operation means are performed before the operation for at least one of the plurality of operation means (operation button 410, sword decoration body 5001) can be received. Common (specific) operation-related as shown in FIGS. I try to perform the production.

Therefore, in addition to this production example, in each production example described below and other examples thereof, the production content of the specific operation-related production is limited to the content shown in FIGS. 241 (b) and 241 (c). No. In short, when a specific operation-related effect is executed, at least one of the effect reception period for the operation button 410 and the effect reception period for the sword decoration 5001 is after that (here, the execution period of the specific operation-related effect). It suffices if it occurs in (middle). With such a configuration, at least one of the operation means (operation button 410, sword decoration 5001) remains unclear as to which of the operation button 410 and the sword decoration 5001 can accept the effect. It is possible to suggest that the operation for one can be accepted for production. For example, a plurality of types of operation-related images (here, button image BTG and sword decoration image SYG) corresponding to different types of operation means do not necessarily have to be displayed at the same time, and the button image BTG and sword decoration are not necessarily displayed at the same time. It is possible that none of the image SYGs appear and an effect image different from any of them appears as a specific operation-related effect.

However, in order to more reliably conceal which of the operation button 410 and the sword decoration body 5001 can be received for the production, there is a case where the production reception period for the operation button 410 occurs and the production for the sword decoration body 5001. It is more desirable to set the same time required from the execution (start of production) of specific operation-related effects to the occurrence of those effect reception periods, depending on the case where the reception period occurs.

In addition, as an operation instruction displayed while a specific operation-related effect is being performed, it is unclear which of the operation means should be operated, but a display prompting an operation for any of the operation means ("Operate". , Etc.), or always operate a specific operating means among the plurality of operating means, regardless of how the plurality of operating means are allowed to receive the effect. May be displayed to prompt the user. In short, as an operation instruction, the same production mode appears in both the situation where the operation for the operation button 410 is possible for the production and the situation where the operation for the sword decoration 5001 is possible for the production. By doing so, it becomes possible to give an operation opportunity while keeping secret which of the plurality of operation means is capable of accepting the production.

Further, in the production example (first production mode) shown in FIG. 241 (c), it is kept secret as to which of the operation button 410 and the sword decoration body 5001 can be operated to receive the production. , Even when the operation on the sword decoration body 5001 is capable of accepting the production, and when the operation on the sword decoration body 5001 is not capable of accepting the production (in any of the first to third situations described later). Even so), only the operation button 410 of the operation button 410 and the sword decoration body 5001 is in a light emitting state to prompt the operation of the operation button 410. However, instead of this, both the operation button 410 and the sword decoration body 5001 may be in a non-light emitting state, or a light emitting means may be provided on the sword decoration body 5001 side to provide the operation button 410 and the sword decoration body 5001. Both may be made to emit light.

Here, in this effect example (first effect mode), the effect situation in which the image shown in FIG. 241 (c) appears is only the operation of the operation button 410 of the operation button 410 and the sword decoration body 5001. Whether it is in the first situation where the production can be accepted, or in the second situation where only the operation for the sword decoration 5001 can be accepted for the production, or the operation for the operation button 410 and the operation for the sword decoration 5001 Both of them are set to be in one of the third situations where the production can be accepted. When the second situation (the situation where the operation opportunity is given to the sword decoration 5001) occurs among these a plurality of situations, the first situation (the operation opportunity is given to the operation button 410) is given. The expectation for granting benefits is higher than when the situation) occurs. Therefore, the rate at which the second situation (the situation where the operation opportunity is given to the sword decoration 5001) occurs within the symbol variation according to the result of the jackpot determination is the first situation (the operation opportunity for the operation button 410). It is desirable to make it lower than the rate at which

Then, in this effect example (first effect mode), the operation on the operation button 410 is performed in any of the first situation (operation button 410) and the third situation (operation button 410, sword decoration body 5001). (Whether "FF" is progressed in the figure), or in either the second situation (sword decoration 5001) or the third situation (operation button 410, sword decoration 5001). When the operation on the sword decoration body 5001 is performed (when the "GG" in the figure is advanced), the effect reception is performed and the operation-time effect corresponding to the operation (FIGS. 242 (d) and 242 (f)). Is supposed to be done.

In the operation-time effect, in any of the situations shown in FIGS. 242 (d) and 242 (f), the specific decorative member SDY is displaced to the front of the display area, and the effect display device 1600 performs a predetermined display effect. ("Chance !!") is supposed to be executed. The predetermined display effects include, for example, "chance !!", which is suggested to have a relatively low expectation, and "super heat !!", which is suggested to have a relatively high expectation. By preparing a plurality of production modes such as, and displaying one of these production modes according to the reception of the production, the degree of expectation for granting the privilege may be suggested. Similar to this, the operation of the specific decorative member SDY is also provided by providing an effect mode in which the operation of displacement to the front of the display area is not performed, and one of these effect modes appears in response to the effect reception. , The degree of expectation for granting benefits may be suggested. The degree of expectation may be "100%" or "0%".

Moreover, in the operation-time production according to this production example (first production mode), the production is accepted by the operation by the player in any of the situations shown in FIGS. 242 (d) and 242 (f). Then, based on the operation, it is possible to execute the control to put the operating means into the operating state (a state different from the non-operating state before the operation).

More specifically, first, in the effect situation shown in FIG. 242 (d), although the operation button 410 is operated by the player, the operation is performed in response to the effect reception. It is possible to execute control to reciprocate the sword decoration body 5001 on the side that has not been performed between the first position and the second position. According to such a configuration, although there is a situation in which the effect reception is generated as a result of the player's operation on the operation button 410 and the operation time effect on the operation button 410 side is executed, the "operation" is performed. Even if the sword decoration body 5001 on the higher expectation side is operated without operating the button 410, the production reception may have occurred and the production on the sword decoration body 5001 side may have been executed. It will be possible to appeal the possibility to the player.

On the other hand, in the production situation shown in FIG. 242 (f), as a result of the player performing a sword pulling operation on the sword decoration body 5001, the sword decoration body 5001 is placed in the sword delivery position according to the production reception. It is possible to execute control to maintain the sword at the sword withdrawal position (sword withdrawal state) instead of returning to the (sword withdrawal state). As a result, the sword decoration body 5001 moves from the sword delivery position (sword delivery state) to the sword extraction position (sword extraction state) based on the operation by the player, and is maintained in such a sword extraction state. Occasionally, the production will be performed during operation. Therefore, even if the same effect (specific decorative member SDY, predetermined display effect, etc.) is executed between the operation button 410 side operation effect and the sword decoration body 5001 side operation operation effect, the sword decoration body at that time By confirming the operating state of the 5001, it becomes possible to feel that the operation-time effect caused by the operation of the sword decoration body 5001 side is being executed.

Then, after the operation-time effect (FIGS. 242 (d) and (f)) is performed in this way, a reach state is formed and the reach effect can be performed as shown in FIG. 242 (e). However, since there is a possibility that the effect using the sword decoration body 5001 is executed during the execution period of the reach effect, either the operation time effect on the operation button 410 side or the operation time effect on the sword decoration body 5001 side is available. Even if it is executed, when a predetermined time elapses (at a stage before the reach effect is started), the sword decoration body 5001 is not operated (sword delivery position (sword delivery state)). It will be controlled to return to. However, in order to preferably obtain the above-mentioned effects, for the sword decoration body 5001, at least half or more of the period from when the specific decorative member SDY moves to the display area side to when it returns to the initial position (non-driving position). It is desirable to continue the operating state (reciprocating operation or maintenance in the sword-drawn state) for the period of. Further, with respect to the sword decorative body 5001, the power consumed by ending the operating state at an earlier stage than the specific decorative member SDY returning to the initial position (non-driving position) so that the driving force is not applied. More desirable in relation to quantity (movable load).

According to the effect example (first effect mode) shown in FIGS. 241 and 242, a specific operation means (for example, a sword decoration body) among a plurality of operation means (operation button 410 and sword decoration body 5001) is used. Regardless of whether 5001) is allowed to accept the effect or not, the common (specific) operation-related effect is started, and the common (specific) effect is started. While the operation-related effect is being executed, a specific operation means (for example, the sword decoration body 5001) is not allowed to accept the effect, or the specific operation means (for example, the sword decoration body 5001) is not allowed to accept the effect. Since the operation button 410 can receive the effect, the specific operation means (for example, the sword decoration body 5001) and another operation means (for example, the operation button 410) can receive the effect respectively. It will be possible to give an operation opportunity in a state where it is kept secret.

In this production example (first production mode), in particular, a specific operating means (for example, the sword decoration body 5001) can receive the production, or the specific operating means (for example, the sword decoration body 5001) produces the production. Regardless of whether the operation button 410 can accept the effect without being able to accept it, when the operation opportunity is given while such a common (specific) operation-related effect is being performed, the operation button 410 and the operation button 410 Coupled with the fact that only the operation button 410 of the sword decoration body 5001 emits light, even if the sword decoration body 5001 is capable of receiving the production, the sword decoration body 5001 is said to be capable of receiving the production. You will be able to mislead as if you weren't there. That is, in this case, it becomes possible to prompt the operation of the operation button 410 on the lower side instead of the sword decoration 5001 on the side where the production with a relatively high expectation is performed when the production is accepted. It is expected that it will be interesting to know which operation means should be operated when a common (specific) operation-related effect is performed.

In addition, when the operation means of the side that cannot accept the effect (the side that does not have the effect acceptance period) is operated while such a common (specific) operation-related effect is being performed, No reaction will occur. However, it is possible to enjoy the demerit that the production reception period is exhausted by the amount of such an erroneous operation and the remaining time is reduced.

However, if the operation means on the side that is not allowed to accept the effect (the side that does not have the effect acceptance period) is operated while the common (specific) operation-related effect is being performed, the above operation is performed. Although the effect reception required for executing the effect (specific decorative member SDY, predetermined display effect, etc.) is not established, the detection of the operation itself is to be performed, and the operation on the side where the effect can be accepted based on the detection itself. Control may be performed to end the effect reception period for the means at that time. With such a configuration, there is a risk that the operation opportunity will be lost. Therefore, it is recommended to carefully consider which of the plurality of operation means is capable of accepting the production and to operate it carefully. become able to.

Further, in the above-mentioned effect example (first effect mode), the same effect (specific decorative member SDY, predetermined display effect, etc.) is obtained between the operation effect on the operation button 410 side and the operation effect on the sword decoration body 5001 side. Although it is made to be executed, these operation-time effects may be different from each other. For example, in the operation-time effect on the sword decoration body 5001 side, in addition to the effect-time effect performed by the operation button 410 side, another effect mode (for example, a light emitting unit different from the effect display device 1600 may emit light. , A unique production sound is generated, etc.), it is possible to more appropriately improve the game entertainment when the operation on the sword decoration body 5001 is received.

Further, when preparing another effect mode that can be executed only when the first operation means (for example, the operation button 410 or the sword decoration body 5001) is operated, it is related to the generation of the other effect mode. The production reception period is not set when the production reception period is set for the first operation means (for example, the operation button 410 or the sword decoration body 5001) and the production reception period related to the occurrence of the other production mode is not set. An effect reception period is set for the second operating means (for example, if the first operating means is the operating button 410, the sword decoration is 5001, and if the first operating means is the sword decorative 5001, the operating button 410). In either case, when there is an operation on the first operating means in the situation shown in FIG. 241 (c), it may be possible to perform an operation-time effect. That is, in this case, when a common (specific) operation-related effect is being performed and an operation for the first operation means is performed while the effect acceptance period related to the occurrence of the other effect mode is set, While another effect mode is executed as an operation-time effect, when a common (specific) operation-related effect is performed and the effect reception period related to the occurrence of the other effect mode is not set (No. 1). When there is an operation for the first operation means (when the effect reception period for the operation means 2 is set), another effect mode is not executed as the effect during operation, but when the operation button 410 is operated. The same operation will be produced. In short, when the effect reception period related to the generation of another effect mode is not set for the first operation means, the effect reception period related to the generation of the operation-time effect on the second operation means side is set to the second operation means. It is set for both the operating means and the first operating means. In addition, when another effect mode appears as the operation mode, the second operation is performed instead of causing the other effect mode to appear in addition to the effect mode performed in the operation mode on the second operation means side. The operation-time effect may be performed as an effect content different from the operation-time effect on the means side.

In the above-mentioned production example (first production mode), the situation in which the instruction display prompting the operation appears while the common (specific) operation-related production is being performed is the situation where the operation button 410 and the sword decoration body 5001 are used. The first situation where only the operation for the operation button 410 can be accepted for the production, the second situation where only the operation for the sword decoration body 5001 can be received for the production, and the operation for the operation button 410 and the sword decoration body 5001 It is set so that both the operation and the operation for are corresponding to any of the third situations in which the production can be accepted. In this case, in the first situation and the second situation, the same operation effect is displayed when the effect reception is performed, whereas in the third situation, the operation time is different from that of both the first situation and the second situation. It is desirable that the effect or the above-mentioned other effect mode (different from the operation-time effect of the first situation and the second situation) appears. However, in the above-mentioned production example, the above-mentioned third situation is not always necessary.

Further, although the operation button 410 according to the above-mentioned production example is not provided as an operation means to which a driving force is applied by the control by the peripheral control MPU1511a, the operation button 410 is provided as an operable operation means. In the above-mentioned production example (first production mode), even in the production situation shown in FIG. 242 (f), the player does not perform the operation as in the production situation shown in FIG. 242 (d). The control for operating the operation button 410 on the other side may be enabled. In such control, it is important to at least operate the operating means on the side that has not been operated by the player, and at this time, the operating means on the side that has been operated by the player is also operated. Whether or not it should be designed appropriately. However, regarding the control to operate the operating means on the side where the operation by the player has not been performed, the specific decorative member SDY provided on the game board 5 side returns to the initial position (non-driving position) at an earlier stage. It is desirable to end the operating state so that the player's gaze is naturally returned to the game board 5.

Further, when the operation button 410 is provided as an operable operation means, the drive source for applying the drive force to the operation button 410 and the drive source for applying the drive force to the sword decoration body 5001 are different drive sources. It may be the same drive source. Needless to say, the drive source provided corresponding to these operating means is provided as a drive source different from the drive source for the specific decorative member SDY (sudare). Further, as the "operation" in the operation means (operation button 410, sword decoration body 5001) generated by such a drive source, modes such as "movement", "rotation", "swing", and "vibration" are exemplified. This is not limited to the production example, and the same applies to other production examples.

[Second production mode]
FIGS. 243 to 246 are executed as an effect showing the process of the specific operation-related effect until either the first effect result or the second effect result appears. It is suggested that when the first effect result appears as a result of the above, an effect reception period for the operation button 410 occurs among the plurality of operation means, and when the second effect result appears as a result of the effect, the plurality of operation means It is a figure which shows the production example (second production mode) which suggests that the production reception period for the sword decoration body 5001 occurs.

In FIG. 243 (a), in the normal game state, the variation display of the decorative symbol SZ (special symbol) is performed by the effect display device 1600 with a specific effect pattern according to the result of the jackpot determination in the state where the number of holdings is 0. It shows the production situation.

FIG. 243 (b) shows an effect situation in which a specific operation-related effect is started during the execution of the variable display of the decorative symbol SZ shown in FIG. 243 (a).

Here, in the specific operation-related effect shown in FIG. 243 (b), the button image BTG corresponding to the operation button 410 and the sword decoration image SYG corresponding to the sword decoration body 5001 are displayed in the display area of the effect display device 1600. It is displayed simultaneously in the image, and the lightning bolt image IZ is depicted acting on those images BTG and SYG. In this way, by simultaneously displaying a plurality of types of operation-related images (here, button image BTG and sword decoration image SYG) corresponding to different types of operation means in the display area, the operation button 410 and the sword It is suggested that the operation for any of the operation means (operation button 410, sword decoration body 5001) will soon be possible for the production reception, while it is unclear which of the decoration body 5001 can be received for the production. You will be able to.

In FIG. 243 (c), the specific operation-related effect shown in FIG. 243 (b) has progressed, and the button image BTG corresponding to the operation button 410 and the sword decoration image SYG corresponding to the sword decoration body 5001 are displayed as effects. An effect is performed in which the other party is pushed out of the display area by pushing each other within the display area of the device 1600.

That is, in the specific operation-related effects (FIGS. 243 (b) and (c)) related to this effect example (second effect mode), "the button image BTG and the sword decoration image SYG are pressed against each other, and these images are displayed. It is executed as an effect such as "Which of BTG and SYG is left in the display area", and when the effect result (first effect result) in which the button image BTG is left appears, the effect reception for the operation button 410 is performed. When a period occurs and an effect result (second effect result) in which the sword decoration image SYG is left appears, an effect acceptance period for the sword decoration body 5001 occurs. Therefore, in this production example (second production mode), the production shown in FIGS. 243 (b) and 243 (c) is either "the production reception period for the operation button 410 or the production reception period for the sword decoration body 5001". Corresponds to "a specific operation-related effect that can appear prior to the occurrence of those periods" even when

The figure on the left side of FIG. 243 (c) depicts a situation in which the button image BTG remains in the display area in a predominant situation, and the figure on the right side shows the sword decoration image SYG. It depicts how the situation is predominant to remain in the territory. In a specific operation-related production, the situation of such inferiority / superiority changes from moment to moment with the passage of time.

FIG. 244 (d) shows a state in which the sword decorative image SYG is completely pushed out of the display area and the button image BTG is left in the display area as a result of the effect shown in FIG. 243 (c). Is being performed (first production result). When the content of the effect is developed, the period for accepting the effect for the sword decoration body 5001 does not occur, and only the period for accepting the effect for the operation button 410 occurs.

That is, a specific operation-related effect (FIGS. 243 (b), (c)) is executed, which suggests that an operation opportunity will be granted soon while keeping secret which of the plurality of operation means can accept the effect. As a result, the sword decoration image SYG corresponding to the sword decoration body 5001 is not displayed in the display area, and the button image BTG corresponding to the operation button 410 is displayed in the display area (FIG. 244 (d)). Is executed, it becomes possible to recognize that the operation for the operation button 410 among the plurality of operation means can be received for the effect (the period for accepting the effect for the operation button 410 occurs).

At this time, in addition to the button image BTG corresponding to the operation button 410, a plurality of instruction displays (character display such as "press" and bar display indicating the remaining time of the production reception period) are displayed. Among the operation means of the above, it becomes possible to recognize that the operation for the operation button 410 is in a state where the effect reception is possible (during the effect reception period for the operation button 410). In particular, in this production example, the operation of the operation button 410 is promoted by setting only the operation button 410 of the operation button 410 and the sword decoration body 5001 to the light emitting state.

It should be noted that the effect shown in FIG. 244 (d) does not go through the specific operation-related effect, except when the effect is progressed through the specific operation-related effect (FIGS. 243 (b), (c), etc.). The production progress (for example, the production progress from the production state shown in FIG. 243 (a)) may be achieved. However, even if the same effect shown in FIG. 244 (d) is performed, if the effect is performed after a specific operation-related effect, the effect is performed without the specific operation-related effect. It is desirable that the degree of expectation for granting benefits is higher than that.

Further, regarding the length of the effect reception period, when an effect (FIG. 244 (d)) in which an operation opportunity is given to the operation button 410 is performed after a specific operation-related effect, the specific operation-related effect is performed. Percentage of the length of the effect reception period generated for the operation button 410 is shorter than that when the effect (FIG. 244 (d)) in which the operation button 410 is given an operation opportunity is performed without going through. Is desirable to be high. According to such a configuration, it is possible to suppress a decrease in the game interest due to the effectary delay described later when a specific operation-related effect is performed.

In FIG. 244 (e), as a result of performing an operation on the operation button 410 among the plurality of operation means while the effect shown in FIG. 244 (d) is being performed, the effect is received and the operation is performed. It depicts how the production is being performed during operation.

The operation effect shown in FIG. 244 (e) is the same as that shown in FIG. 242 (d). That is, in the operation-time effect shown in FIG. 244 (e), the specific decorative member SDY is displaced to the front side of the display area, and the effect display device 1600 executes a predetermined display effect (“chance !!”). It has become. At this time, even though the operation button 410 is operated by the player, the sword decoration body 5001 on the side where the operation is not performed is placed in the first position and the second position according to the reception of the production. The same applies to the fact that control for reciprocating operation with the position (control for setting the operating state) can be executed. The predetermined display effects include, for example, "chance !!", which is suggested to have a relatively low expectation, and "super heat !!", which is suggested to have a relatively high expectation. By preparing a plurality of production modes such as, and displaying one of these production modes according to the reception of the production, the degree of expectation for granting the privilege may be suggested. Similar to this, the operation of the specific decorative member SDY is also provided with an effect mode in which the operation of displacement to the front side of the display area is not performed, and one of these effect modes appears according to the effect reception. Then, the degree of expectation for granting the privilege may be suggested. The degree of expectation may be "100%" or "0%".

Then, after such an operation-time effect (FIG. 244 (e)) is performed, a reach state is formed and the reach effect can be performed as shown in FIG. 244 (f). However, since there is a possibility that the effect using the sword ornament 5001 is executed during the execution period of the reach effect, the reach effect is started when a predetermined time elapses after the operation effect is executed. Control is performed to return the sword decoration body 5001 to the non-operated state (sword delivery state)) at a stage earlier than that. However, in order to preferably obtain the above-mentioned effects, for the sword decoration body 5001, at least half or more of the period from when the specific decorative member SDY moves to the display area side to when it returns to the initial position (non-driving position). It is desirable to continue the operating state (reciprocating operation or maintenance in the sword-drawn state) for the period of. Further, with respect to the sword decorative body 5001, the power consumed by ending the operating state at an earlier stage than the specific decorative member SDY returning to the initial position (non-driving position) so that the driving force is not applied. More desirable in relation to quantity (movable load).

On the other hand, in FIG. 245 (g), as a result of the effect shown in FIG. 243 (c), the button image BTG is completely pushed out of the display area, and the sword decoration image SYG is in the display area. A production that depicts the remaining state is being performed (second production result). When the content of the effect is advanced, the period for accepting the effect for the operation button 410 does not occur, and only the period for accepting the effect for the sword ornament 5001 occurs.

That is, a specific operation-related effect (FIGS. 243 (b), (c)) is executed, which suggests that an operation opportunity will be granted soon while keeping secret which of the plurality of operation means can accept the effect. As a result, the button image BTG corresponding to the operation button 410 is not displayed in the display area, and the sword decoration image SYG corresponding to the sword decoration body 5001 is displayed in the display area (FIG. 245 (g)). Is executed, it becomes possible to recognize that the operation for the sword decoration body 5001 among the plurality of operation means can be received for the production (the production reception period for the sword decoration body 5001 occurs). ..

At this time, in addition to the sword decoration image SYG corresponding to the sword decoration body 5001, an instruction display prompting the operation (character display such as "sword pull out" and bar display indicating the remaining time of the production reception period) is displayed. Then, among the plurality of operating means, it becomes possible to recognize that the operation on the sword decoration body 5001 is in a state where the effect reception is possible (during the production reception period on the sword decoration body 5001). In particular, in this production example, only the operation unit having the sword decoration body 5001 of the operation button 410 and the sword decoration body 5001 (the sword decoration body 5001 itself may be made to emit light) is set to the light emitting state. By doing so, the operation of the sword decoration body 5001 is encouraged.

It should be noted that the effect shown in FIG. 245 (g) does not go through the specific operation-related effect, except when the effect is progressed through the specific operation-related effect (FIGS. 243 (b), (c), etc.). The effect progress (for example, the effect progress from the effect state shown in FIG. 243 (a)) may be achieved. However, even if the same effect shown in FIG. 245 (g) is performed, if the effect is performed after a specific operation-related effect, the effect is performed without the specific operation-related effect. It is desirable that the degree of expectation for granting benefits is higher than that. Furthermore, when the effect shown in FIG. 244 (d) is performed after the specific operation-related effect, the effect shown in FIG. 245 (g) is performed without the specific operation-related effect. The expectation for granting benefits is higher than in the case, and the expectation for granting benefits is lower than when the effect shown in FIG. 245 (g) is performed after a specific operation-related effect. desirable.

In FIG. 245 (h), as a result of performing an operation on the sword decoration body 5001 among the plurality of operating means while the effect shown in FIG. 245 (g) is being performed, the effect is accepted and the operation is performed. It depicts how the production is being performed during the operation.

The operation-time effect shown in FIG. 245 (h) is basically the same as the operation-time effect shown in FIG. 244 (e), and the specific decorative member SDY is displaced to the front side of the display area and the effect display device. At 1600, a predetermined display effect is executed. Here, a production mode such as "super heat !!", which is suggested to have a relatively high degree of expectation, is displayed according to the production reception, but it is suggested that the degree of expectation is relatively low. "Chance !!" may be displayed. Similar to this, the operation of the specific decorative member SDY is also provided with an effect mode in which the operation of displacement to the front side of the display area is not performed, and one of these effect modes appears according to the effect reception. By doing so, it is possible to suggest the degree of expectation for granting the privilege. The degree of expectation may be "100%" or "0%".

However, in the operation-time effect shown in FIG. 245 (h), the effect mode of the sword decoration body 5001 itself changes to one of the above-mentioned plurality of modes based on the operation on the sword decoration body 5001 ( (Change from stage 0 form shown in FIG. 222 to any of stage 1 form to stage 3 form), and depending on which of these modes appears, the degree of expectation for granting benefits such as big hits The height is suggested.

Moreover, as shown in FIG. 245 (i), even if the operation-time effect (FIG. 245 (h)) is completed and the specific decorative member SDY is returned to the initial position (non-driving position). The sword ornament 5001 is not returned to the sword-delivered state, but is maintained in the sword-drawn state. That is, in this production example, although the illustration is omitted, the sword decoration body 5001 is kept in the sword-drawn state, and then the sword decoration body 5001 is put into the sword delivery state (during the period when the reach production is performed, etc.). The operation opportunity to be operated is further given, and in that case, the operation time effect according to the operation to the sword delivery state can be further executed.

According to such a configuration, one operation means (sword decoration body 5001) is given an operation opportunity in two stages, and the first stage operation (operation to the sword withdrawal state) and the second stage operation. Since the effect at the time of operation is performed according to each operation (operation to the sword delivery state), not only when the operation means (sword decoration body 5001) is being operated, but also the first stage. It is expected that the game interest for the operation will be maintained favorably even during the non-operation period from the operation (operation to the sword withdrawal state) to the second stage operation (operation to the sword delivery state). Become so. It is desirable that the first-stage operation and the second-stage operation have different operation modes (here, operations in opposite directions). Further, it is desirable that the operation-time effect according to the first-stage operation and the operation-time effect according to the second-stage operation are different from each other.

Further, when the operation-time effect (FIG. 245 (h)) corresponding to the first stage operation is performed, the sword decoration body 5001 is not necessarily maintained in the sword-drawn state, and is not maintained in the sword-drawn state. In that case, it is desirable not to give the second stage operation opportunity. Whether to maintain the sword ornament 5001 at a position (sword-drawn state) that allows the second-stage operation opportunity (operation opportunity from the sword-drawn state to the sword-delivered state) can be given in the operation-time production according to the first-stage operation. It may be executed as an effect suggesting the degree of expectation of whether or not. That is, when the sword decoration body 5001 is not maintained in the sword-drawn state and is returned to the sword-delivered state, it is practically impossible to give a second stage operation opportunity (operation opportunity from the sword-drawn state to the sword-delivered state). It is clear that it will be. The degree of expectation may be "100%" or "0%".

If the sword decoration body 5001 is not maintained in the sword-drawn state as a result of performing the operation-time effect (FIG. 245 (h)) according to the first-stage operation, when a predetermined time elapses (reach effect). The control is performed to return the sword decoration body 5001 to the non-driven state (sword delivery state)) before the start of the operation. However, in this case, the operating state (reciprocating) of the sword decorative body 5001 is at least half or more of the period from when the specific decorative member SDY moves to the display area side to when it returns to the initial position (non-driving position). It is desirable to continue the movement (or maintenance with the sword pulled out). Further, with respect to the sword decorative body 5001, the power consumed by ending the operating state at an earlier stage than the specific decorative member SDY returning to the initial position (non-driving position) so that the driving force is not applied. More desirable in relation to quantity (movable load).

On the other hand, in FIG. 246 (j), as a result of the effect shown in FIG. 243 (c), the sword decorative image SYG is completely pushed out of the display area as in the case shown in FIG. 244 (d). Therefore, an effect is performed that depicts how the button image BTG is left in the display area. That is, in this production example (second production mode), when a predetermined time elapses after the production shown in FIG. 243 (c) is performed, the production shown in FIG. 244 (d) or the production shown in FIG. 245 (g). Either the effect shown in FIG. 246 (j) or the effect shown in FIG. 246 (j) appears. It is said that which effect content appears has been determined in advance in the effect pattern determination process according to the result of the jackpot determination.

However, in the effect shown in FIG. 246 (j), unlike the case of the effect shown in FIG. 244 (d), the effect performed in the specific operation-related effect (FIGS. 243 (b), (c)). (Here, the lightning bolt image IZ) is continued, and it is suggested that such a lightning bolt image IZ may cause some change in the button image BTG.

Further, in the effect shown in FIG. 246 (j), the instruction display (character display such as "press" or bar display indicating the remaining time of the effect reception period) for prompting the operation is not displayed, and also in FIG. 244 (d). ) Is different from the case of the production shown in. As a result, the sword decoration image SYG is completely pushed out of the display area, and the button image BTG is left in the display area, but the production acceptance period for the button image BTG has not yet occurred. It becomes recognizable that there is.

In FIG. 246 (k), as a result of the progress of the effect shown in FIG. 246 (j), the lightning bolt image IZ acts on the button image BTG, the button image BTG is wrapped in the mist MY, and even the outline description thereof is lost. There is a production that will be broken.

That is, in the effect shown in FIG. 246 (k), all the effect elements (button image BTG) suggesting that the operation on the operation button 410 can be accepted for the effect are removed. Therefore, although it is once suggested by the effect shown in FIG. 246 (j) that the operation for the operation button 410 can be accepted, the effect shown in FIG. 246 (k) appears. As a result, it becomes possible to raise a suspicion as to whether the production reception period for the operation button 410 will actually occur.

Even in the effect shown in FIG. 246 (k), the effect display (here, the lightning bolt image IZ) performed in the specific operation-related effect (FIGS. 243 (b) and (c)) is continued. .. However, here, the mode of the lightning bolt image IZ is changing (disappearing), and the remaining time until it is definitively shown which of the plurality of operating means the production reception period will occur is reduced. It suggests that.

In FIG. 246 (i), as a result of the progress of the effect shown in FIG. 246 (k), the outer shape of the mist MY is closer to the sword decoration body 5001 (sword decoration image SYG) instead of the operation button 410 (button image BTG). A production that depicts the appearance of the sword is being performed.

According to such a configuration, although the sword decoration image SYG is not yet displayed, it is suggested that the outer shape of the mist MY may cause an effect reception period for the sword decoration body 5001 instead of the operation button 410. You will be able to.

Further, also in the effect shown in FIG. 246 (i), the effect display (here, the lightning bolt image IZ) performed in the specific operation-related effect (FIGS. 243 (b) and (c)) is continued. .. However, here, the aspect of the lightning bolt image IZ is further changed (immediately before disappearing) as compared with FIG. It suggests that the remaining time of is even less.

Then, in this production example (second production mode), when the production shown in FIG. 246 (i) is further advanced and the mist MY is hidden, the sword decoration image SYG is displayed and FIG. 245 is displayed. The production shown in (g) is performed.

According to such a configuration, as a result of performing specific operation-related effects (FIGS. 243 (b) and (c)), the sword decoration image SYG is not displayed and the button image BTG is displayed on the effect display device 1600. Even in the case of this (FIG. 244 (d), FIG. 246 (j)), there is a possibility that the production reception period for the sword decoration body 5001 will occur, so that the interest of the game should be maintained. Will be able to.

In particular, in this effect example (second effect mode), when the sword decoration image SYG is not displayed and the button image BTG is displayed on the effect display device 1600 (FIGS. 244 (d) and 246 (j)). By confirming whether or not the effect display by the lightning bolt image IZ that appeared in the specific operation-related effect (FIGS. 243 (b) and (c)) is still continued, the effect on the sword ornament 5001 is achieved. It is possible to grasp whether there is a possibility that a reception period will occur, and this will also make it possible to maintain the interest of the game.

In this production example (second production mode), the button image BTG is hidden by the haze MY when the production shown in FIG. 246 (j) appears (FIG. 246 (k)), and further. When the production is advanced, the sword decoration image SYG is displayed and the production shown in FIG. 245 (g) is sure to occur. In this sense, the effect shown in FIG. 246 (j) does not display the sword decoration image SYG and displays the button image BTG on the effect display device 1600, but contrary to such display contents, the sword decoration It can also be said that the production suggests that the production reception period for the body 5001 will occur.

However, instead of this, when the effect shown in FIG. 246 (k) progresses, the outer shape of the mist MY is not necessarily close to the sword decoration body 5001 (sword decoration image SYG), and the operation button 410 (button image BTG) is prevented. ) May also be set so that an effect pattern approaching the outer shape may appear, and when the effect pattern appears, the button image BTG may be displayed again and the effect shown in FIG. 244 (d) may be performed. When such an effect pattern can be performed, the effect shown in FIGS. 246 (j) and 246 (k) also hides which of the plurality of operating means can accept the effect. It will be executed as a specific operation-related effect.

Further, even in the production situation shown in FIG. 245 (h) in the above production example (second production mode) after providing the operation button 410 as an operable operation means, FIG. 244 (e) Similar to the effect situation shown in the above, the control for operating the operation button 410 on the side where the operation by the player has not been performed may be enabled. In such control, it is important to at least operate the operating means on the side that has not been operated by the player, and at this time, the operating means on the side that has been operated by the player is also operated. Whether or not it should be designed appropriately.

Further, when the operation button 410 is provided as an operable operation means, the drive source for applying the drive force to the operation button 410 and the drive source for applying the drive force to the sword decoration body 5001 are different drive sources. It may be the same drive source. Needless to say, the drive source provided corresponding to these operating means is provided as a drive source different from the drive source for the specific decorative member SDY (sudare). Further, as the "operation" in the operation means (operation button 410, sword decoration body 5001) generated by such a drive source, modes such as "movement", "rotation", "swing", and "vibration" are exemplified. This is not limited to the production example, and the same applies to other production examples.

[Third production mode]
FIGS. 247 to 250 are basically the same as the second effect mode with respect to the specific operation-related effect, but show an effect example (third effect mode) different from the second effect mode. Is.

In FIG. 247 (a), in the normal game state, the variation display of the decorative symbol SZ (special symbol) is performed by the effect display device 1600 with a specific effect pattern according to the result of the jackpot determination in the state where the number of holdings is 0. It shows the production situation.

FIG. 247 (b) shows an effect situation in which a specific operation-related effect is started during the execution of the variable display of the decorative symbol SZ shown in FIG. 247 (a). However, as shown in FIG. 247 (b), in the specific operation-related effect according to this effect example (third effect mode), first, a predetermined movable member different from the effect display device 1600 is operated. This suggests that either the operation button 410 or the sword ornament 5001 will soon be ready for production.

In particular, in this production example (third production mode), the operation button 410 and the sword decoration body 5001 are adopted as such predetermined movable members, and the operation button 410 and the sword decoration body 5001 are operated respectively. As a result, it is easy to make it possible for either the operation button 410 or the sword decoration 5001 to be able to receive the effect soon after the effect display related to the operation is not yet performed on the effect display device 1600 side. It is made recognizable. Here, the operation button 410 and the sword decoration body 5001 are controlled to be operated from the initial position to the operation position, but compared to the case where the operation button 410 and the sword decoration body 5001 are operated to the operation positions when the operation opportunity is given. I try to operate each at a slow speed.

According to such a configuration, it is also an operation means in which time is still left before the production reception period occurs, or an operation means in which the production reception period does not occur in the first place until the symbol change is completed. Regardless of this, each of these operating means (operation button 410, sword decoration body 5001) will operate. Therefore, from the situation where there is still time left before the production reception period occurs, or when the production reception period does not occur in the first place until the symbol change is completed, the game entertainment for those operations can be enjoyed. It becomes possible to maintain it suitably.

Then, in this effect example (third effect mode), a specific operation-related effect is generated by each operation (FIG. 247 (b)) by the operation button 410 and the sword decoration body 5001 instead of the effect display in the effect display device 1600. After the start, basically, the same production progress as the above-mentioned second production mode is performed.

For example, first, among the effects shown in FIG. 247 (c), the effect display on the effect display device 1600 is displayed except that the button image BTG is displayed as corresponding to the “movable operation button 410”. , The production content is as described with reference to FIG. 243 (b).

However, in the effect shown in FIG. 247 (c), unlike the effect shown in FIG. It has become. In the effect shown in FIG. 247 (c), it is suggested that either the operation button 410 or the sword decoration body 5001 can accept the effect even by such a movable effect.

Further, in the effect shown in FIG. 247 (c), the operation button 410 and the sword decoration body 5001 are located at positions different from the initial positions (positions when not driven) after the specific operation-related effect is started. In addition, it is positioned as an operating state (a state in which a driving force is applied) at a position different from the operating position when the operating opportunity is given.

That is, when such an operation-related effect is performed, the operation-related effect is delayed as compared with the case where the operation-related effect is not performed and the operation opportunity is immediately given, but it is movable. When the operation means is adopted, even if such an operation-related effect is finally completed, it is necessary to operate the operation means on the side where the effect can be accepted to at least the operation position. Therefore, the operation-related production is further delayed by the time required for such an operation, and there is a concern that such a delay may reduce the interest in the game.

Therefore, in this effect example (third effect mode), the operation button 410 and the sword decoration body 5001 are placed at both the initial position (position when not driven) and the operation position during the period when the specific operation-related effect is performed. It is positioned in a different position (for example, an intermediate position) as an operating state (a state in which a driving force is applied). As a result, when a specific operation-related effect is completed and the effect reception period occurs, the operation means on the side where the effect reception period has occurred is operated to the operation position in a shorter time, and the effect reception period does not occur. It becomes possible to operate the operating means on the other side to the initial position in a shorter time, and it becomes possible to suppress the deterioration of the game entertainment due to the extension of the operation-related production. In addition, until the production reception period occurs, the operation means on the side to be operated is positioned as an operating state at a position different from the operation position, so that the production reception period is in the operating state. It becomes possible to easily recognize that this has not occurred yet.

Then, when the effect shown in FIG. 247 (c) progresses and the effect shown in FIG. 247 (d) is performed, the effect display on the effect display device 1600 has a button image BTG "movable operation button". Except for the fact that it is displayed as corresponding to "410", the production content is as described with reference to FIG. 243 (c). However, in the effect shown in FIG. 247 (d), unlike the effect shown in FIG. 243 (c), the operation button 410 and the sword ornament 5001 are placed at the initial position (position when not driven) and the operation position, respectively. It is positioned as an operating state (a state in which a driving force is applied) at a position different from any of the above.

In the effect shown in FIGS. 247 (b) and 247 (c), the button image BTG and the sword decoration image SYG in the effect display device 1600 show the mode when they are in the initial position (non-driven position). On the other hand, the operation button 410 and the sword decoration body 5001 are positioned in an operating state at a position different from the initial position (non-driving position). In this way, by intentionally making the modes of the button image BTG and the sword decoration image SYG in the effect display device 1600 different from the modes of the operation button 410 and the sword decoration body 5001, their matching will be achieved in the near future. It becomes possible to suggest that the effect to be performed (whether the mode of the button image BTG and the sword decoration image SYG is changed, or whether the operation button 410 and the sword decoration body 5001 operate) occurs.

Further, as a result of performing the effect shown in FIG. 247 (d), when the effect shown in FIG. 248 (e) is performed, the effect display on the effect display device 1600 has the button image BTG "at the operation position". Except that it is displayed as corresponding to the movable operation button 410 at a certain time, the effect content is as described with reference to FIG. 244 (d).

However, in the effect shown in FIG. 248 (e), unlike the effect shown in FIG. 244 (d), the operation button 410 is in the operating position, and the sword ornament 5001 is in the initial position. It is in a state of operating at a position different from both the (non-driving position) and the operating position. That is, in this case, since the operation button 410 is moved from a position closer to the operation position than the initial position (position when not driven) toward the operation position, the extension of the operation-related effect is preferably suppressed. Become so.

As the effect shown in FIG. 248 (e), first of all, "a display effect in which the button image BTG is displayed (preferably displayed in a manner of moving to the operation position) and the sword decoration image SYG is not displayed". After performing the display effect, the operation button 410 is operated to the operation position, and an instruction display (character display such as "press" or effect) that prompts the operation by generating an effect reception period for the operation button 410 is performed. A bar display indicating the remaining time of the reception period) may be displayed. According to such a configuration, the button image BTG that appears as a result of executing a specific operation-related effect is displayed in the "mode of moving to the operation position", whereas the operation button at the time of the display is displayed. 410 will be different from the "mode of moving to the operation position". In this way, by displaying the button image BTG that appears as a result of executing the specific operation-related effect as a mode different from the mode of the operation button 410 at that time, the deviation of those modes will be filled soon. (Here, the operation button 410 moves to the operation position) can be suggested in advance.

Then, as a result of performing the effect shown in FIG. 248 (e), the effect shown in FIG. 248 (f) is performed, which has been described with reference to FIG. 244 (e) in the effect display device 1600. The contents of the street production will appear. However, in the effect shown in FIG. 248 (f), unlike the effect shown in FIG. 244 (e), the operation button 410 is returned from the operation position to the initial position (non-driving position). In addition, the sword ornament 5001 is in a state of operating at a position different from both the initial position (position when not driven) and the operating position.

After such an operation effect (FIG. 248 (f)) is performed, a reach state is formed and a reach effect can be performed as shown in FIG. 248 (g). Is also as described with reference to FIG. 244 (f).

On the other hand, as a result of performing the effect shown in FIG. 247 (d), when the effect shown in FIG. 249 (h) is performed, the effect display in the effect display device 1600 is an operation of the sword decoration body 5001. Except that the instruction content regarding is "pushed in" and the sword decoration image SYG is displayed in the "mode of moving to the operation position", the production as explained with reference to FIG. 245 (g). It is the content.

However, in the effect shown in FIG. 249 (h), unlike the effect shown in FIG. 245 (g), the operation button 410 is at a position different from both the initial position (position when not driven) and the operation position. It is in an operating state, and the sword decoration body 5001 is in an operating state. That is, in this case, since the sword decoration body 5001 has moved from a position closer to the operation position than the initial position (position when not driven) toward the operation position, the extension of the operation-related effect is preferably suppressed. Will be done.

As the effect shown in FIG. 249 (h), "a display effect in which the button image BTG is not displayed and the sword decoration image SYG is displayed (preferably displayed in a mode of moving to the operation position)". First, after performing the display effect, the sword decoration body 5001 is operated to the operation position, and an instruction display (characters such as "push"" that prompts the operation by generating an effect reception period for the sword decoration body 5001 is performed. A display or a bar display indicating the remaining time of the production reception period) may be displayed. According to such a configuration, the sword decorative image SYG that appears as a result of executing a specific operation-related effect is displayed in the "mode of moving to the operation position", whereas the sword at the time of the display is displayed. The decorative image SYG is different from the "mode of moving to the operation position". In this way, by displaying the sword decoration image SYG that appears as a result of executing the specific operation-related effect as a mode different from the mode of the sword decoration body 5001 at that time, the deviation of those modes can be prevented. It will be possible to suggest in advance that it will soon be filled (here, the sword ornament 5001 moves to the operating position).

Then, as a result of performing the effect shown in FIG. 249 (h), the effect shown in FIG. 249 (i) is performed, which has been described with reference to FIG. 245 (h) in the effect display device 1600. The contents of the street production will appear. However, in the effect shown in FIG. 249 (i), unlike the effect shown in FIG. 245 (h), the operation button 410 operates at a position different from both the initial position (position when not driven) and the operation position. The sword decoration body 5001 is returned from the operating position to the initial position (non-driving position).

After such an operation effect (FIG. 249 (i)) is performed, a reach state is formed and a reach effect can be performed as shown in FIG. 249 (j). Is as described with reference to FIG. 244 (f).

On the other hand, as a result of performing the effect shown in FIG. 247 (d), when the effect shown in FIG. Except that it is displayed as corresponding to the movable operation button 410 at a certain time, the effect content is as described with reference to FIG. 246 (j).

However, in the effect shown in FIG. 250 (k), unlike the effect shown in FIG. 246 (j) and the effect shown in FIG. 248 (e), the operation button 410 and the sword ornament 5001 are at the initial positions ( It is in a state of operating at a position different from both the non-driving position) and the operating position. It is suggested that the effect acceptance period for the operation button 410 has not yet occurred, and the possibility that the effect acceptance period for the sword ornament 5001 still occurs is left even by setting such an operation state. You will be able to do it.

Then, as a result of performing the effect shown in FIG. 250 (k), the effect shown in FIG. 250 (l) is performed, which has been described with reference to FIG. 246 (k) in the effect display device 1600. The contents of the street production will appear. However, in the effect shown in FIG. 250 (l), unlike the effect shown in FIG. 246 (k), the operation button 410 and the sword ornament 5001 have an initial position (position when not driven) and an operation position, respectively. Both are in a state of operating at different positions.

Then, as a result of performing the effect shown in FIG. 250 (l), the effect shown in FIG. 250 (m) is performed, which has been described with reference to FIG. 246 (l) in the effect display device 1600. The contents of the street production will appear. However, in the effect shown in FIG. 250 (l), unlike the effect shown in FIG. 246 (k), the operation button 410 and the sword ornament 5001 have an initial position (position when not driven) and an operation position, respectively. Both are in a state of operating at different positions. In the effect shown in FIG. 250 (m), it is more desirable that the outer shape of the mist MY is closer to the sword decoration 5001 when it is in the operating position than to the sword decoration 5001 when it is in the initial position.

When the effect shown in FIG. 250 (m) is further advanced, the sword decorative image SYG is displayed and the effect shown in FIG. 249 (h) is sure to occur. In this sense, the effect shown in FIG. 250 (k) does not display the sword decoration image SYG and displays the button image BTG on the effect display device 1600, but contrary to such display contents, the sword decoration It can also be said that the production suggests that the production reception period for the body 5001 will occur.

However, instead of this, when the effect shown in FIG. 250 (l) progresses, the outer shape of the mist MY is not necessarily close to the sword decoration body 5001 (sword decoration image SYG), and the operation button 410 (button image BTG) is prevented. ) May be set so that an effect pattern approaching the outer shape may also appear, and when the effect pattern appears, the button image BTG may be displayed again and the effect shown in FIG. 248 (e) may be performed. When such an effect pattern can be performed, the effect shown in FIGS. 250 (k) and 250 (l) also hides which of the plurality of operation means can accept the effect. It will be executed as a specific operation-related effect.

Further, in the above explanatory example, when the operation button 410 of the operation button 410 and the sword decoration body 5001 is operated to receive the effect during the valid period that occurs after the specific operation-related effect is executed, the effect is received. Therefore, the sword ornament 5001 on the side where the operation is not performed is reciprocated between the first position and the second position (FIGS. 242 (d), 244 (e), etc.). However, it suffices as long as the sword decoration body 5001 on the side where the operation is not performed is put into an operating state, and the operating state includes, for example, a mode of moving to another place and staying, a mode of vibrating, and the like. It is possible to adopt. In addition, even if the sword decoration body 5001 of the operation button 410 and the sword decoration body 5001 is operated and the production reception is performed during the valid period that occurs after the specific operation-related effect is executed, the production reception is performed according to the production reception. It is desirable to put the operation button 410 on the side where the operation is not performed into an operating state (vibration, etc.).

In addition, regarding the effect of putting the "operation unit on the side where the operation is not performed" into the operating state, the post-operation effect according to the operation is "expectation (the rate at which the jackpot symbol appears," 0 "," Appears when executed in a "high mode" (including "100"), and the post-operation effect according to the operation is "expectation (the rate at which the jackpot symbol appears, including" 0 "and" 100 "). It may not appear when performed in a "low mode".

Further, when the post-operation effect is performed by operating one of the two operation units (operation button 410 and sword decoration body 5001), the "operation unit on the other side that has not been operated" is also put into the operating state. , When the post-operation effect is performed by the operation on the other side, the "operation unit on one side where the operation is not performed" may not be put into the operating state.

In this production example (third production mode), the driving source that applies the driving force to the operation button 410 and the driving source that applies the driving force to the sword decoration body 5001 are different driving sources. It may be the same drive source.

In each of the above-mentioned effect modes and other examples thereof, when "button image BTG (first display mode) imitating the operation button 410" appears as an effect result in which a specific operation-related effect is performed, it is basic. Is given an operation opportunity only to the operation button 410 of the operation button 410 and the sword decoration body 5001, and when the operation for the operation button 410 is received, the operation time effect on the button side is performed. Become. In addition, when "sword decoration image SYG (second display mode) imitating sword decoration body 5001" appears as a result of the production in which a specific operation-related effect is performed, basically, the operation button 410 and the sword decoration are displayed. Of the body 5001, the operation opportunity is given only to the sword decoration body 5001, and when the operation for the sword decoration body 5001 is received, the operation time effect on the sword accessory side is performed. In this regard, in the effect at the time of operation on the button side, the effect at the time of success (operate the specific decorative member SDY) and the effect at the time of failure (do not operate the specific decorative member SDY) based on the result of the effect lottery according to the jackpot judgment. While it is supposed that either one will appear, even in the operation time production on the sword character side, success production (operate the specific decorative member SDY) and failure production based on the result of the production lottery according to the big hit judgment (The specific decorative member SDY is not operated) is to be made to appear, and the contents of their production are the same. Therefore, when an operation opportunity is given to an operation means on a side different from the side desired by the player among the operation button 410 and the sword decoration body 5001, the deterioration of the game interest can be suppressed.

It should be noted that, in the operation-time effect on the button side and the operation-time effect on the sword accessory side, in addition to the effect on whether or not the specific decorative member SDY operates, the display effect performed by the effect display device 1600 is the same as each other. It may be the content.

Further, in each of the effect examples described above with respect to the specific operation-related effect, it is decided to perform an effect as to which of the plurality of operation means the operation opportunity is given, and the operation means on the side according to the result is used. On the other hand, operation opportunities are given. However, there are cases where a specific operation-related effect is performed with the effect content that gives an operation opportunity to the specific operation means regardless of which effect result appears, such as pushing each other with each other. It may be.

For example, in any mode (for example, an operation in which the sword ornament 5001 in the sword-delivered state is brought into the sword-drawn state, or an operation in which the sword ornament 5001 in the sword-drawn state is brought into the sword-delivered state) with respect to one operating means. The operation opportunity may be given to the operation means according to the result. In this case, the sword decoration body 5001 is operated in a state different from that of the sword-delivered state and the sword-drawn state while the specific operation-related effect is performed, and the sword decoration body 5001 is operated in any mode in the specific operation-related effect. It is desirable to operate the sword decoration body 5001 in the sword-delivered state or the sword-drawn state when the effect result of making the sword is shown.

In addition, when the symbol variation in the pending state is digested, a specific operation-related effect is performed within the execution period of the symbol variation, and when the symbol variation is in the pending state (digested before this). It is also possible to perform the effect suggested from (within the execution period of the symbol change). According to such a configuration, although the operation opportunity is given to only one of the plurality of operation means, the operation means on the side where the operation opportunity is given and the operation means on the side where the operation opportunity is not given are provided. For both, it will be possible to sustain the game interest related to operation for a longer period of time. In addition, as such an effect, when the symbol variation in which the specific operation-related effect is performed is in the pending state (within the execution period of the symbol variation digested before this), the specific operation-related effect is used. It is desirable to operate each of the plurality of operating means provided.

In the second and third effect modes described above, and in another example thereof, as a specific operation-related effect, a plurality of images (button image BTG,) corresponding to a plurality of operation means (operation button 410, sword decoration body 5001) Although it was decided to display the sword decoration image SYG), these images do not necessarily have to be displayed. In short, when a specific operation-related effect is executed, either the effect reception period for the operation button 410 or the effect reception period for the sword decoration body 5001 may occur after that. With such a configuration, while suggesting that the production reception period occurs for either the operation button 410 or the sword decoration body 5001, those operations are performed until the production reception period occurs. It will be possible to keep secret which of the means the production reception period will occur. Therefore, it is not always necessary to simultaneously display a plurality of types of operation-related images (here, button image BTG and sword decoration image SYG) corresponding to different types of operation means, and the button image BTG and sword decoration. It is possible that none of the image SYGs appear and an effect image different from any of them appears as a specific operation-related effect.

However, even when the effect mode in which the button image BTG and the sword decoration image SYG are not displayed at the same time is adopted while the specific operation-related effect is being executed, the button image is displayed when the specific operation-related effect is completed. Either BTG (image corresponding to the operation button 410) or sword decoration image SYG (image corresponding to the sword decoration body 5001) is displayed to indicate which of these operation means the production reception period occurs. It will be. In this case, the button image BTG (image corresponding to the operation button 410) or the sword decoration image SYG (image corresponding to the sword decoration 5001) displayed in this way is displayed during the execution period of the specific operation-related effect. By executing the specific image (for example, lightning bolt image IZ, etc.) as the effect content, it is possible to determine which of the plurality of operation means the effect acceptance period occurs for the specific operation-related effect. It can be said that it is important to make it function as a suggestive effect. For example, a specific operation-related effect may be executed as an effect of dropping a lightning bolt toward one of two rocks, and when a lightning bolt falls on one side of the rock, a button image BTG appears from the rock and the other side. By making the sword decorative image SYG appear from the rock when lightning strikes the rock on the side, it is possible to advance the production to the production shown in FIGS. 244 (d) and 245 (g). .. Alternatively, a specific operation-related effect is executed as an effect of dropping a lightning bolt toward one rock, and when the lightning bolt falls on the rock, either the button image BTG or the sword decoration image SYG appears from the rock. Therefore, it is also possible to advance the production to the production shown in FIGS. 244 (d) and 245 (g). In short, it is desirable to advance the production as the production content such that the button image BTG or the sword decoration image SYG is displayed as the production result of the specific operation-related effect.

Further, in the second and third production modes described above, and in another example thereof, there are specific cases where the production reception period for the operation button 410 occurs and the production reception period for the sword decoration 5001 occurs. It is more desirable to set the same time required from the execution of the operation-related effects (start of the effects) to the occurrence of the effect reception period. Further, it is desirable to set so that the effect reception period occurs for the same time regardless of which operation means is given an operation opportunity after the specific operation-related effect is performed.

In addition, a plurality of production modes are prepared as specific operation-related productions, and a production reception period during which a specific production (operation-time production) can be generated depends on which of these production modes the production is performed. The ratio set for the specific operating means among the plurality of operating means may be different. The ratio may be 100% or 0%.

Further, in the second and third effect modes described above, and in another example thereof, the operation was not performed based on the operation with respect to the operation means on the side indicated by the specific operation-related effect. When operating the operating means on the side (such as FIG. 244 (e)), control is performed to return the operating means on the non-operated side to the initial position after a lapse of a predetermined time based on the time when the operation was performed. It may be. However, it is not based on the time when the operation is performed, and depending on which timing of the production reception period the operation is performed, from the operation of the operation means on the side that did not perform the operation to the end of the operation. It is desirable to make the time lengths different.

That is, when the operation means on the side indicated by the specific operation-related effect is operated and the remaining time of the effect reception period is short, the operation means on the side indicated by the specific operation-related effect should be operated. It can be said that there is a high possibility that the player struggled with whether to operate the operation means on the side that was not shown in the specific operation-related effect. Therefore, depending on the timing of the operation during the production reception period (depending on the high possibility of conflict), the operation means on the side that did not operate is operated and then the operation is terminated. Time length up to ("Even if the operation means on the side indicated by the specific operation-related effect is operated, the effect reception may have occurred and the operation effect may have been executed." By making the length of time that appeals to the player different), it becomes possible to maintain the game interest appropriately.

In addition, if none of the plurality of operation means provided for the effect is operated after the specific operation-related effect is performed, the plurality of operation means provided for the effect when the effect reception period ends. May be made to work.

Further, between the start of the specific operation-related effect and the display of the effect result (button image BTG, sword decoration image SYG, etc.), the side with high expectation as the effect result of the specific operation-related effect. A predetermined effect suggesting the ratio at which the effect image (sword decorative image SYG) is displayed may be performed. A movable body effect may be performed as a predetermined effect, but in this case, a specific movable body (here, a specific movable body) that operates based on the effect reception within the effect reception period after the specific operation-related effect is performed. , The specific movable body can be operated more reliably based on the effect reception within the effect reception period after the specific operation-related effect is performed by operating the movable body different from the specific decorative member SDY). Desirable to enable.

In addition, it corresponds to any one of the images that can appear in the effect results between the start of the specific operation-related effect and the display of the effect result (button image BTG, sword decoration image SYG, etc.). An operation opportunity may be given to a specific operation means (for example, the operation button 410). According to such a configuration, for example, a specific operation regarding which of the operation button 410 and the sword decoration body 5001 is used to generate an effect reception period for a specific effect (an effect such as operating the specific decorative member SDY). While the related effects are being performed, the effect reception period is intentionally generated only on one side (for example, the operation button 410) of those operation means. As a result, it becomes possible to create a special production mode as if the production result is shown and the production is completed even though the production is in the middle of a specific operation-related production, and the production is performed. It becomes possible to maintain the game entertainment hobby during the period. In addition, when an operation for one side of those operation means (for example, the operation button 410) is received while a specific operation-related effect is being performed, a predetermined effect is performed based on the effect reception. Therefore, it is desirable to suggest the ratio at which the effect image (sword decoration image SYG) on the side with high expectation is displayed as the effect result of the specific operation-related effect.

Here, as the specific operation means to which the operation opportunity is given during the execution of the specific operation-related effect, the degree of expectation is relatively high among the plurality of operation means (for example, the operation button 410 and the sword decoration body 5001). It is desirable to use the lower operation means (for example, the operation button 410) in order to improve the game interest when the player understands that it was in the middle of a specific operation-related production. ..

In addition, when the effect reception period is intentionally generated only for the operation button 410 of the operation means while the above-mentioned specific operation-related effects related to the plurality of operation means are being performed, the effect reception period is within the effect reception period. When the operation button 410 is operated in, the special operation effect is executed when a predetermined effect condition is satisfied, and when the special operation effect is executed, a plurality of operation means (for example, for example). Regardless of which of the operation button 410 and the sword ornament 5001) appears as the effect result, the degree of expectation for granting the privilege may be the same. The degree of expectation may be 100%. According to such a configuration, it becomes possible to lose the effectability as the specific operation-related effect between the time when the specific operation-related effect is started and the time when the effect result is shown. As a result, it becomes possible to suppress a decrease in the game interest when an operation opportunity is given to the operation means on the side with a relatively low expectation. However, when the special operation effect is executed, the special operation effect is not executed, and the privilege is granted more than when the operation opportunity is given to the operation means on the side having the higher expectation among the plurality of operation means. It is desirable to increase such expectations.

Further, in each of the above-mentioned production reception periods, normally, when there is an operation by the player, the production is generated based on the operation, but even if such an operation is not performed, the production reception period elapses. It may be possible to set an automatic button effect state, which will be described later, in which control is performed to start the same effect as when the operation was performed before. According to such an automatic button effect state, the effect at the time of operation is generated even if the operation is not performed every time the effect reception period occurs, so that it is possible to suppress the deterioration of the game interest due to forgetting to operate. Become. Then, when the specific operation-related effect is performed while the automatic button effect state is set, the effect acceptance period for any of the plurality of operation means occurs as a result of the effect. Even if there is, the same operation-time effect as when the operation means is operated is executed without operating the corresponding operation means within the effect reception period.

However, even if it is set to the automatic button effect state described later, the effect acceptance period is only for the operation button 410 of those operation means while a specific operation-related effect is being performed. In the case of generating the above-mentioned special operation effect, it is desirable that the special operation effect is not executed unless the operation button 410 is operated within the effect reception period (so that the automatic button function does not function). After that, even if an effect acceptance period for any of the above-mentioned plurality of operation means occurs as a result of performing a specific operation-related effect, the corresponding operation means is operated within the effect acceptance period. It is desirable that the same operation effect as when the operation means is operated is executed (so that the automatic button function functions) without doing so. With such a configuration, it becomes possible to grasp whether or not a specific operation-related effect is being performed depending on whether or not the automatic button function functions, and it becomes possible to grasp whether or not a specific operation-related effect is being performed. It will be expected to suppress the decrease in.

It should be noted that the setting change related to the on / off of the automatic button effect state can be changed not only during the period when the symbol change is not executed but also during the period when the symbol change is executed by operating the operation button 410, for example. It is desirable to be. For example, if the operation button 410 is operated when the effect reception period for the operation button 410 is not generated when the automatic button effect state is off, the setting of the automatic button effect state can be changed from the off state to the on state, and the automatic button can be changed. When the effect state is on, the effect reception period for the operation button 410 occurs, and when the operation button 410 is operated within the effect reception period, the operation time effect corresponding to the operation is performed and the automatic button effect state is set. It is possible to change the setting from the on state to the off state. However, since it is considered that there may be a case where it is desired to generate an operation effect by an operation by the player while maintaining the on state of the automatic button effect state, for example, the automatic button effect state is turned on. During the effect reception period for the operation button 410 at the time, when the operation for the operation button 410 as well as the operation means other than the operation button 410 is enabled and the operation is performed for the other operation means, Unlike the case where the operation button 410 is operated, it is desirable that the automatic button effect state is maintained in the on state to cause a change in the effect being executed. At this time, it is more desirable to generate the same operation effect as when the operation button 410 is operated.

The operation mode may be different depending on whether the automatic button effect state is changed from the off state to the on state or from the on state to the off state.

Further, in the second and third effect modes described above, and in another example thereof, as an effect result in which a specific operation-related effect is performed, a button image BTG that imitates the operation button 410 or a sword decoration body 5001 is imitated. It was decided to give an operation opportunity corresponding to the displayed sword decorative image SYG, but the present invention is not limited to this. That is, two different display modes (first display mode and second display mode) are prepared, and when the first display mode is displayed, an operation opportunity (effect reception) is given to the operation button 410. The first display mode and the second display mode are provided as long as the period) is given and the operation opportunity (effect reception period) is given to the sword decoration body 5001 when the second display mode is displayed. Any display content may be adopted.

For example, in the above-mentioned second and third production modes, the production image CG (first) shown in FIG. 251 (a) is replaced with the production image shown in FIGS. 244 (d) and 248 (e). The display mode) is displayed, and the effect image TG (second display mode) shown in FIG. 251 (b) is displayed instead of the effect image shown in FIGS. 245 (g) and 249 (h). May be good. According to such a configuration, while a specific operation-related effect is being performed, the effect part and the other background image (the part displayed before the specific operation-related effect is started) Both are suddenly replaced with the effect image CG (first display mode) or the effect image TG (second display mode) as the effect result of the specific operation-related effect (almost the entire effect in the display area). Since it can be replaced), a partial display mode (button image BTG, sword) in the display area shown in FIGS. 244 (d), 245 (g), 248 (e), and 249 (h). Unlike the case where the decorative image SYG) appears, the effect display related to the granting of operation opportunities is performed using almost the entire display area (until other effect images such as the background part where the degree of expectation can be suggested are hidden). By doing so, it is expected that the game will be more enjoyable for operation.

In addition, in the effect image CG (first display mode) shown in FIG. 251 (a), the first display having a shield (button image BTG imitating the operation button 410) incorporating the operation button 410 in the design. The character is displayed, and in the effect image TG (second display mode) shown in FIG. 251 (b), a sword (sword decoration image SYG) imitating the sword decoration body 5001 is possessed. The second character is displayed so as to implicitly suggest which operating means (operation button 410, sword decoration 5001) should be operated. As described above, as the effect image CG (first display mode) and the effect image TG (second display mode), it is not necessary to prepare the operation button 410 or the sword decoration 5001 itself as an effect image. , It is desirable to display as an effect image incorporating at least a part of the shape and a part of the design of the operating means.

Further, regarding the effect image CG (first display mode) and the effect image TG (second display mode) using the entire display area in this way, the effect image CG (first display mode) and the effect image TG It may also be performed with an effect suggesting a different degree of expectation depending on which of (second display modes) is displayed. For example, when the effect image TG (second display mode) appears, it is suggested that the expectation for granting the privilege is higher than when the effect image CG (first display mode) appears. Further, a plurality of effect modes (different colors, etc.) are prepared as the effect image CG (first display mode) and the effect image TG (second display mode), and it depends on which of these effect modes is displayed. It may suggest the degree of expectation. In this case, even if the effect image CG (first display mode) appears, when it is displayed in a specific display mode, the degree of expectation is higher than when the effect image TG (second display mode) appears. It may be.

Further, regarding the button image BTG and the sword decoration image SYG, when a specific operation-related effect is executed and displayed as the effect result (preferably, it is desirable that the effect situation has a relatively high degree of expectation). When the operation-related effect is displayed without being executed (for example, after the precursor effect described later, which is not a specific operation-related effect, is executed) (it is desirable that the effect is a relatively low expectation situation). It may be. In this case, for example, when a specific operation-related effect is executed and the button image BTG (first display mode) is displayed as the effect result, the effect is produced only for the operation button 410 among the plurality of operation means. While the reception period is generated, the button image BTG (first display mode) is displayed without executing the specific operation-related effect (for example, after the precursor effect described later, which is not the specific operation-related effect, is executed). If it is displayed, in addition to the operation means (operation button 410) corresponding to the button image BTG, the effect acceptance period is also applied to another operation means (for example, sword decoration body 5001) that does not correspond to the button image BTG. May be generated. According to such a configuration, even if the button image BTG appears in the production situation where the specific operation-related effect is not executed and the expectation is relatively low, the specific operation-related effect is executed. In the production situation where the expectation is relatively high, it becomes possible to give a different kind of fun to the operation than when the button image BTG appears, and it becomes possible to improve the game entertainment. Another operating means may be a different operating means from the sword decoration body 5001.

In addition, when a button image BTG appears in a production situation where a specific operation-related effect is not executed and the expectation is relatively low, an operation for another operation means that does not correspond to the button image BTG within the effect reception period. When the effect is accepted, the special operation effect is executed when a predetermined effect condition is satisfied, and when the special operation effect is executed, "a specific operation-related effect is executed and relatively It is desirable to suggest that the production situation has a higher degree of expectation than when the sword decoration image SYG appears in the production situation with a high degree of expectation. The degree of expectation may be 100%.

Here, when the button image BTG appears in the production situation where the specific operation-related effect is not executed and the expectation is relatively low, the operation means (operation button) corresponding to the button image BTG within the effect acceptance period. When 410) is operated, the effect reception period for another operation means that is occurring at the same time is also terminated so that the special operation effect is not executed, and the operation for the operation means (operation button 410) is performed. It is desirable that the effect at the time of operation is executed.

On the other hand, when a button image BTG appears in a production situation where a specific operation-related effect is not executed and the expectation is relatively low, what is the operation means corresponding to the button image BTG within the effect acceptance period? When another operation means is operated, the effect reception period for the button image BTG and the corresponding operation means may be terminated so that the special operation effect is executed when a predetermined effect condition is satisfied. desirable. In this case, when the predetermined effect condition is not satisfied, the special operation effect is not executed, and instead, the operation means (operation button 410) corresponding to the button image BTG is not operated and the operation is performed. Even though an operating means other than the means is being operated, the operation-time effect when the button image BTG and the corresponding operating means (operation button 410) are operated may be executed.

If a specific operation-related effect is executed while the automatic button effect state is set, the side corresponding to either the button image BTG or the sword decoration image SYG as a result of the effect. Even if an effect reception period occurs for the operation means of, the same operation time effect as when the operation means is operated is executed within the effect reception period without operating the corresponding operation means. It is desirable to make it work (make the automatic button function work). However, when the button image BTG appears without executing the specific operation-related effect when the above-mentioned automatic button effect state is set, the operation means (operation button 410) corresponding to the button image BTG is used. Even when the effect reception period is generated for both the operation means and the operation means different from the operation means, the operation means corresponding to the button image BTG is provided even if no operation is performed. It is desirable that only the same operation effect as when the operation is performed is executed, and the special operation effect that may appear only when another operation means that does not correspond to the button image BTG is executed is not executed.

However, during the effect reception period, another effect before the specific timing at which the operation-time effect (effect when the button image BTG and the corresponding operation means are operated) appears by the above-mentioned automatic button function is different. When an operation is performed on the operation means and a predetermined effect condition is satisfied, a special operation effect is performed according to the effect reception, and a specific timing has arrived. However, it is desirable that the effect during operation (the effect when the button image BTG and the corresponding operation means are operated) does not appear. In this case, the above-mentioned automatic button function does not substantially function during the effect reception period, but the automatic button effect state is continued in the on state even after the effect reception period ends. Is desirable.

Further, in the above-mentioned effect example, the button image BTG and the sword decoration image SYG may be reversed, and then each of the above-described effects (operation-time effect, automatic button function, etc.) may be applied. That is, in this case, when the button image BTG (first display mode) is displayed without executing the specific operation-related effect (for example, after the precursor effect described later, which is not the specific operation-related effect, is executed). When the sword decoration image SYG (second display mode) is displayed without executing a specific operation-related effect (for example, after executing a precursor effect described later that is not a specific operation-related effect). In addition to the operation means corresponding to the sword decoration image SYG (sword decoration body 5001), another operation means not corresponding to the sword decoration image SYG (for example, the operation button 410) is also subjected to the effect reception period. It becomes.

Further, as described above, in each of the above-mentioned effect modes, and in another example thereof, as an effect result in which a specific operation-related effect is performed, "button image BTG (first display mode) imitating the operation button 410" or If any of the "sword decoration image SYG (second display mode) that imitates the sword decoration body 5001" is displayed, and if the production is accepted by the operation means on the displayed side, it is relative. The first operation-time effect (for example, the effect mode in which the specific decorative member SDY operates) and the effect content suggesting that the expectation is relatively low. It is possible to make one of the second operation-time effects (for example, an effect mode in which the specific decorative member SDY does not operate). That is, in this case, when the sword decorative image SYG (second display mode) is displayed, the expectation is relatively high at a higher rate than when the button image BTG (first display mode) is displayed. The first operation-time effect, which is the effect content suggesting the above, will be executed. However, when the first operation-time effect is executed based on the effect reception within the effect reception period generated after the specific operation-related effect, the first operation-time effect is the button image BTG (first). The effect reception for the sword decoration body 5001 when the operation button 410 is executed based on the effect reception for the operation button 410 when the display mode) is displayed and when the sword decoration image SYG (second display mode) is displayed. It is desirable to suggest the same degree of expectation as when it was executed based on. The degree of expectation may be 0% or 100%. According to such a configuration, there is a case where an effect image (button image BTG (first display mode)) on the side having a relatively low expectation is displayed as an effect result of performing a specific operation-related effect. However, as long as the first operation-time production is executed based on the reception of the production, the production image (sword decoration) on the side with relatively high expectations as a result of the production in which the specific operation-related production is performed. Compared with the case where the image SYG (second display mode)) is displayed, there is no demerit in the effect result, so that the deterioration of the game interest can be suppressed.

Further, in the timer effect described above (FIG. 118), it is possible to set "granting an operation opportunity to the operating means" as the effect target (one of the plurality of effect modes targeted by the timer). That is, in the timer effect for which "giving an operation opportunity to the operation means" is the effect target, when the count display reaches a predetermined value (here, "0"), the operation opportunity is soon given to the operation means. This makes it possible to enjoy the production during operation. In this case, in the "operation opportunity for the operation means" prepared as a candidate for the effect of the timer effect, when the operation for the operation means is performed, the effect result is advantageous to the player according to the result of the predetermined effect lottery. Allow any of the unfavorable production results to appear. However, when the "operation opportunity for the operating means" is given as the effect target of the timer effect, the ratio of the effect result advantageous to the player is higher than that of the case where the effect target of the timer effect is not set. It is more desirable to be. The ratio may be 100%.

In this regard, when an effect pattern for executing a timer effect for the effect of "giving an operation opportunity to the operation means (for example, the sword decoration body 5001)" appears, the "operation opportunity for the operation means" that is the effect target appears. A specific operation-related effect using "grant" may be further performed. That is, in this case, when the count display of the timer effect reaches a predetermined value (here, "0"), the sword decoration image SYG appears and an operation opportunity is given to the sword decoration body 5001. Before the sword decorative image SYG appears, a specific operation-related effect as to whether the button image BTG or the sword decorative image SYG appears is executed.

According to such a configuration, since the timer effect and the specific operation-related effect are executed for the same effect, an operation opportunity is given to the operation means (for example, the sword decoration body 5001). It will be possible to improve the game entertainment when it is played.

However, at this time, two different effects (timer effect, specific operation-related effect) may be simultaneously developed for one effect target (giving an operation opportunity to the sword decoration body 5001) until just before that. However, there is a concern that it will not be possible to understand which production should be watched, distracted attention, and conversely reduce the interest in the game.

Therefore, when executing a specific timer effect and a specific operation-related effect for one effect target (giving an operation opportunity to the sword decoration body 5001), as described below with reference to FIG. 252. , Until the count display of the specific timer effect is executed and the count value reaches a predetermined value (here, the count is "0"), the "specific operation-related effect" is set to the unexecuted state, and the count value is set. It is desirable to start the production of the "specific operation-related effect" after the value reaches a predetermined value (here, the count is "0").

FIG. 252 is a diagram illustrating an example of an effect when a specific timer effect and a specific operation-related effect are executed for one effect target (giving an operation opportunity to the sword decoration body 5001). The following timer effect corresponds to the above-mentioned notice side timer effect, and is executed as a result of performing various processes according to the timer effect.

In FIG. 252 (a), in the normal game state, the variation display of the decorative symbol SZ (special symbol) is performed by the effect display device 1600 with a specific effect pattern according to the result of the jackpot determination in the state where the number of holdings is 0. It shows the production situation.

In FIG. 252 (b), the timer effect is started (here, the countdown display) with a specific numerical value (here, “3”) during the execution of the variable display of the decorative symbol SZ shown in FIG. 252 (a). It shows the situation. In the effect situation shown in FIG. 252 (b), the "specific operation-related effect" has not yet been executed, and it is unclear which effect the timer effect is intended for. There is.

That is, in the timer effect related to this effect example, the count value is first set to a predetermined value (1), while it remains unclear which of the plurality of timer target effect candidates is being executed. Here, the count "0") is reached so that it is displayed. Then, after "0 (predetermined value)" as the count value is displayed in this way, as shown in FIG. 252 (d), the "specific operation-related effect" is started to be produced. At the time when the "specific operation-related effect" is started, the count value is not even "0" and is hidden.

According to such a timer effect, after the count display reaches a predetermined value (here, the count "0"), the button image BTG (first display mode) and the sword decoration image SYG (second display mode). A specific operation-related effect as to which of and is displayed will be executed. That is, in this case, although two different effects (timer effect, specific operation-related effect) are executed for one effect target (giving an operation opportunity to the sword decoration body 5001), those effects are sometimes performed. Since it is possible to avoid overlapping in a series, it becomes possible to enjoy each different production.

However, if the count display of the timer effect reaches a predetermined value (here, the count is "0") when the specific operation-related effect is not executed, the timer effect targets any effect. There is a concern that the game will be less enjoyable because it cannot be recognized whether it was done as a timer. Therefore, in this production example, as shown in FIG. 252 (c), between the time when the count display reaches a predetermined value (here, the count is “0”) and the time when a specific operation-related effect is started, An effect that suggests an effect type (giving an operation opportunity to the sword decoration body 5001) that the timer effect is intended for is performed.

In the example shown in FIG. 252 (c), when the count display of the timer effect reaches a predetermined value (here, the count is “0”), the effect display device 1600 first displays “sword”. This suggests that the timer production was intended to "provide an operation opportunity (operation opportunity by" sword ") to the sword decoration body 5001".

According to such a configuration, as shown in FIG. 252 (d), the effect image (sword decoration image SYG (second display mode)) corresponding to the sword decoration body 5001 is displayed (“sword delivery). In the production situation where the player recognizes that the operation opportunity is given by "", the production of "specific operation-related production" will be started, so that the game entertainment can be improved. become. When the count display of the timer effect reaches a predetermined value (here, the count "0"), the count display (count "0") is displayed when the effect display device 1600 displays "sword". It may be displayed continuously.

Further, in this effect example, as shown in FIG. 252 (c), when the count display of the timer effect reaches a predetermined value (here, the count is “0”), the sword decoration body 5001 performs a predetermined operation (here, the count is “0”). It is designed to perform reciprocating movements in the vertical direction), and this also means that "giving an operation opportunity (operation opportunity by" sword ") to the sword decoration 5001" is the target of the timer production. I try to suggest it.

It should be noted that the predetermined operation by the sword decoration body 5001 is counted not only when the timer effect targets "giving an operation opportunity to the sword decoration body 5001" but also when another effect is the production target. It may be performed when becomes 0. That is, in this case, the predetermined operation by the sword decoration body 5001 does not function as an effect suggesting the effect type that the timer effect is intended for, but functions as an effect suggesting that the count display has become 0. It becomes. In this sense, the predetermined operation by the sword decoration body 5001 is after the count display becomes 0, before the production to be the production target is started, and the timer production is the production target. It is said that the effect that suggests the type of effect is being executed at the same time as or before the start of the effect that suggests the type of effect, and that the effect that suggests the type of effect that the timer effect is targeting is also being executed during the execution state. It can be said that it is important to be done.

FIG. 252 (d) shows an effect situation in which the “specific operation-related effect” is started.
In this effect situation, as described above, not only the count value is already hidden, but also the effect suggesting the effect type for which the timer effect is the effect target is hidden. In addition, the predetermined operation by the sword decoration body 5001 is also in a completed state. However, it is important to execute the effect suggesting the type of effect that the timer effect is intended for, and the predetermined operation by the sword decoration body 5001 before the specific operation-related effect is started. The execution state may be continued even after the operation-related effect of is started.

Then, after the "specific operation-related production" is started in this way, the production progresses in the order of FIGS. 252 (e) to 252 (h), and the contents of these productions are described in FIG. 243 (c). ), FIGS. 245 (g) to (i), or FIGS. 247 (d) and 249 (h) to (j), which are substantially the same as those described above, and thus details are omitted.

As the timer effect performed in connection with the specific operation-related effect, either the timer effect shown in FIG. 252 or the timer effect different from the timer effect is based on the result of a predetermined effect lottery. It may be made viable. That is, in another timer effect, the point that a specific operation-related effect is started after the timer effect is started is the same as the timer effect shown in FIG. 252, but the specific operation-related effect is produced. The count value does not reach the predetermined value (here, "0") according to the start timing (strictly, a little earlier than this), and the specific operation-related effect is to be continued even after the effect is started. It has become. In this case, regardless of whether the button image BTG (first display mode) or the sword decoration image SYG (second display mode) is shown as the effect result of the specific operation-related effect, the privilege is given (the privilege is given (the second display mode). Expectations for (big hit) are the same. The degree of expectation may be 100%.

According to such another timer effect, the specific operation-related effect and the timer effect are simultaneously advanced, but when the effect situation in which the effect is developed at the same time appears, the specific operation-related effect is produced. Regardless of whether the button image BTG (first display mode) or the sword decorative image SYG (second display mode) is shown as the effect result, their effect value is the same (the degree of expectation for the privilege grant (big hit) is the same. The same). That is, in this case, since the directability of the specific operation-related effect itself can be substantially lost, even if the specific operation-related effect and the timer effect are simultaneously produced, any effect is produced. It will be possible to avoid the situation where the person cannot understand whether to pay attention to the timer and is distracted. However, in order to improve the interest of the game, if a production pattern in which a specific operation-related effect and a timer effect appear at the same time appears, a privilege is given as compared with the case where the effect pattern shown in FIG. 252 appears. It is desirable to increase such expectations.

Further, in the example shown in FIG. 252 (c), when the count display of the timer effect reaches a predetermined value (here, the count is “0”), the effect display device 1600 first indicates the type of the effect target (in this case, the display suggests the type of the effect target. Although "sword delivery") is performed, such a display suggesting an effect target may be performed even when another effect mode is set as the effect target as a timer effect. However, when a specific effect is targeted by the timer among a plurality of effects that can be targeted by the timer, the display suggesting which effect is the target of the timer effect may not be displayed.

Further, in each of the above-mentioned production modes and in another example thereof, the operation opportunity is given to any of the operation means prior to giving the operation opportunity to any of the operation button 410 and the sword decoration body 5001. It was decided to perform a specific operation-related effect as to whether or not it would be granted. However, the first precursor effect that does not appear when the operation opportunity is given to the sword decoration body 5001 prior to giving the operation opportunity to the operation button 410 (prior to the production reception period). Does not appear when the operation opportunity is given to the operation button 410 prior to giving the operation opportunity to the sword decoration body 5001 (prior to the production reception period). An effect pattern such as performing a second precursor effect may appear. When performing these precursory effects (first precursory effect, second precursory effect), the time required for the effect (precursor effect) is set shorter than when a specific operation-related effect is performed, and the time required is set to be shorter. It is desirable to reduce the degree of expectation for granting benefits when a production appears in order to enhance the interest of the game when a specific operation-related production is performed.

Here, as the precursor effect, for example, before the effect image (for example, the button image BTG) that imitates the operation means (for example, the operation button 410) on the side to which the operation opportunity is given appears, for example, fog is generated. Display a specific image, such as expressing the state of being stuck. Next, while the specific image is being displayed, the button image BTG is displayed at a position (a position on the layer, behind the specific image) that is difficult to see due to overlapping with the specific image. After that, the button image BTG is gradually changed by gradually changing the specific image to non-display (increasing the transmittance, reducing the area where the specific image is displayed, etc.). It is possible to execute it as an effect to make it exposed to the public. An example of a specific depiction mode related to such a precursory effect will be described later.

At this time, if the button image BTG is displayed in any of a plurality of display modes (for example, blue button image BTG, red button image BTG, etc.) with different expectations for granting benefits (big hit), As the precursory effect in which the button image BTG is gradually exposed progresses, it becomes possible to have an interest in which display mode the button image BTG appears.

It should be noted that the first precursor effect that appears when the operation button 410 is given an operation opportunity and the sword decoration body 5001 is not given an operation opportunity, and the operation button 410 is not given an operation opportunity and the sword decoration is provided. The second precursor effect that appears when an operation opportunity is given to the body 5001, and the above-mentioned specific operation-related effect that appears when an operation opportunity is given to either the operation button 410 or the sword decoration body 5001. It is important that each of them is executed as a different production content. Further, it is desirable that not only the content of the effect but also the time required for the effect is different.

Such a precursor effect is the above-mentioned "specific operation-related effect" in the sense that "when an operation opportunity is given to a specific operation means, the effect is performed as an effect related to the addition of the operation opportunity". It can be said that it is a higher-level concept that includes. Then, with respect to the precursory effect including the "specific operation-related effect", as described below with reference to FIG. 253, a plurality of effect modes are prepared, and the precursory effect is performed in any of the effect modes. By suggesting how long the production reception period that occurs in response to the precursory effect is, depending on what was done, it is possible to improve the game entertainment when the precursory effect is performed. It is more desirable to plan.

FIG. 253 is a time chart for explaining an example of the effect contents for each type of the effect when a plurality of types (precursor effects A, B1, B2, C) are prepared as the precursor effect.

First, in the example shown in FIG. 253 (a) (precursor effect A), the precursor effect A is started when the first predetermined time elapses after the symbol variation is started. This precursor effect A is executed as the above-mentioned "specific operation-related effect" as to which of the operation button 410 and the sword decoration body 5001 is given an operation opportunity, and the precursor effect When A is executed, the effect acceptance period (valid period) T1 is generated for the specific operation means on the side indicated as the effect result. That is, in the example shown in FIG. 253 (a) (precursor effect A), when the precursor effect A is performed, the same time length is provided regardless of which operation means is given an operation opportunity. The production reception period (valid period) T1 that you have will occur.

In the production reception period (valid period) T1, an instruction display (character display such as "press" or a bar display indicating the remaining time of the production reception period) is displayed to prompt the specific operation means on the side shown as the result of the precursor effect A. ) Is displayed. Then, when the production reception is performed by the operation for the specific operation means within the production reception period (valid period) T1, the above-mentioned operation-time production (for example, FIGS. 242 (d), (f)) is performed based on the production reception. , FIG. 244 (e), FIG. 245 (h), FIG. 248 (f), FIG. It is supposed to be done.

On the other hand, in the example shown in FIG. 253 (b) (precursor effect B1), when the first predetermined time elapses, not when the first predetermined time elapses from the start of the symbol variation, when the second predetermined time elapses. The precursor effect B1 is started to be produced. This precursor effect B1 is not a "specific operation-related effect", but is executed prior to a specific operation means (for example, operation button 410) when an operation opportunity is given (specific operation). It is not executed when an operation opportunity is given to the means), and when the precursor effect B1 is executed, the effect acceptance period (valid period) T2 for a specific operation means (for example, the operation button 410) is set. Is to occur.

In the production reception period (valid period) T2, an instruction display (character display such as "press" or a bar display indicating the remaining time of the production reception period) is displayed to prompt the specific operation means corresponding to the precursor effect B1. Will be done. Then, when the effect reception is performed by the operation for a specific operation means within the effect reception period (valid period) T2, a predetermined operation time effect different from the above-mentioned operation time effect is executed based on the effect reception. At the same time, a process of terminating the period T2 at that time is performed.

In this regard, in this production example, the production reception period (valid period) T2 corresponding to the precursor production B1 is the production reception period corresponding to the precursor production A, as shown in FIGS. 253 (a) and 253 (b). (Validity period) It occurs as a period having a time length (here, a short time length) different from that of T1. This suggests how long the effect reception period generated in response to the precursor effect is, depending on which mode (precursor effect A, precursor effect B1) the precursor effect is performed. It becomes possible to preferably maintain the game entertainment taste when the precursory effect is performed.

On the other hand, in the example shown in FIG. 253 (c) (precursor effect B2), the precursor effect B2 is started when the second predetermined time elapses from the start of the symbol variation. Like the precursor effect B1, this precursor effect B2 is not a "specific operation-related effect", but is executed prior to the time when an operation opportunity is given to a specific operation means (for example, the operation button 410). (Those that are not executed when an operation opportunity is given to a specific operation means). However, when the precursor effect B2 is executed, the effect reception period (for a specific operation means (for example, the operation button 410)) having a time length different from the effect reception period (valid period) T2 corresponding to the precursor effect B1 Production reception period) T3 is to be generated.

In addition, even in this effect reception period (valid period) T3, an instruction display (character display such as "press" and a bar indicating the remaining time of the effect reception period) for prompting the operation to the specific operation means corresponding to the precursor effect B2 are displayed. Display) is displayed. Further, when the production reception is performed by the operation for a specific operation means within the production reception period (valid period) T3, the operation time production different from the case where the precursor effects A and B1 are executed based on the production reception. Is executed, and the process of ending the period T3 at that time is performed.

In this regard, in this production example, the production reception period (valid period) T3 corresponding to the precursor production B2 is the production reception period corresponding to the precursor production A, as shown in FIGS. 253 (a) and 253 (c). (Validity period) It is designed to occur as a period having the same time length as T1. That is, in this case, even though the precursor effect B2 with a relatively low expectation for granting a privilege (big hit) is executed, the same time as when a specific operation-related effect with a relatively high expectation is executed. Since it is suggested that a long production reception period (valid period) T3 will occur, a production situation will be created as if a specific operation-related production was performed, and the precursor production B2 It becomes possible to preferably maintain the game entertainment taste when it is performed. In this case, it is desirable that the degree of expectation for granting the privilege differs between when the production reception period (valid period) T2 occurs and when the production reception period (valid period) T3 occurs.

It should be noted that the precursory effects B1 and B2 can be specified by making the same effect mode appear from the start of the effect until the timing in the middle of the effect, and making a different effect mode appear after the timing has passed. The operation means of the above may be provided with a color rendering property as to whether to generate the effect reception period (valid period) T2 or the effect reception period (valid period) T3. However, it is not always necessary to have such a directing property, and even when the precursory effects B1 and B2 are started to be produced, the effect is started when a different time elapses from the start of the symbol variation. Alternatively, the precursor effects B1 and B2 may have different time lengths from each other.

On the other hand, in the example shown in FIG. 253 (d) (precursor effect C), the precursor effect C is started when the third predetermined time elapses from the start of the symbol variation. This precursor effect C is executed as the above-mentioned "specific operation-related effect" as to which of the operation button 410 and the sword decoration body 5001 is given an operation opportunity, and the precursor effect is executed. When C is executed, the effect acceptance period (valid period) T4 is generated for the specific operation means on the side indicated as the effect result. That is, in the example shown in FIG. 253 (d) (precursor effect C), when the precursor effect C is performed, the same time length is provided regardless of which operation means is given an operation opportunity. The production reception period (valid period) T4 that you have will occur.

Even in the production reception period (valid period) T4, an instruction display (character display such as "press" or a bar display indicating the remaining time of the production reception period) is displayed to prompt the specific operation means on the side shown as the result of the precursor effect C. ) Is displayed. Then, when the production reception is performed by the operation for the specific operation means within the production reception period (valid period) T4, the above-mentioned operation-time production (for example, FIGS. 242 (d), (f)) is performed based on the production reception. , FIG. 244 (e), FIG. 245 (h), FIG. 248 (f), FIG. It is supposed to be done.

In this regard, in this production example, the production reception period (valid period) T4 corresponding to the precursor production C is the production reception period corresponding to the precursor production A, as shown in FIGS. 253 (a) and 253 (d). (Validity period) It is designed to occur as a period having the same time length as T1. That is, in this case, even if the length of time required for the precursor effect C itself is shorter than that of the precursor effect A, if the precursor effect is executed as the above-mentioned "specific operation-related effect". Since it is suggested that the production reception period (valid period) T4 having the same time length as that of the precursor production A is generated, the game entertainment taste when the precursor production C is performed is preferably maintained. You will be able to.

In the production example shown in FIG. 253, the production reception period is associated with the types of precursor productions A, B1, B2, and C in a one-to-one relationship with the length of the production reception period (valid period). The length of (validity period) is suggested. However, by setting the ratio of occurrence of a specific production reception period (for example, production reception period T2, etc.) having a predetermined time length to be different for each type of precursory production, the production reception period (valid period) ) May be suggested.

Further, in each of the above-mentioned effect modes and in another example thereof, after a specific operation-related effect is performed, the specific operation means (for example, the operation button 410) on the side suggested as a result of the effect is subjected to. When the effect acceptance period (valid period) occurs, an effect image (for example, a button image BTG) imitating the specific operating means is displayed. At this time, the effect image (for example, the button image BTG) is displayed so as to imitate the same state as the state of the specific operating means at that time. For example, in the example shown in FIG. 248 (e), the operation button 410 is in the operating position, but the button image BTG is also displayed in the operating position in accordance with this. In the example shown in (h), the sword decoration body 5001 is in the operating position (sword withdrawal state), but the sword decoration image SYG is also displayed as the state in which the sword decoration image SYG is operated in the operation position (sword withdrawal state). Has been done.

However, a specific operation means (for example, operation button 410) to which an operation opportunity is given after a specific operation-related effect is performed is displayed as an effect image (for example, button image BTG) that is imitated as it looks. If this happens, the range of the production will be significantly narrowed when displaying the result of the production even though a specific operation-related production with a relatively high expectation is being performed, and the interest in the game will be reduced. I am concerned.

Therefore, when a specific operation-related effect is performed, an effect image (for example, a button image) imitating a specific operation means (for example, an operation button 410) is described below with reference to FIGS. 254 and 255. Regarding BTG), it is desirable not to necessarily express the state of the specific operating means at that time as it is, but to display it as a state different from the specific operating means at that time.

FIG. 254 is a diagram showing an example of the effect when a precursor effect that is not a specific operation-related effect is performed and an effect content when a precursor effect as a specific operation-related effect is performed.

First, FIGS. 254 (a) to 254 (c) show the content of the effect when a precursor effect that is not a specific operation-related effect is performed. For example, in the normal game state, the effect display device 1600 is performing the variation display of the decorative symbol SZ (special symbol) in the effect display device 1600 with a specific effect pattern according to the result of the jackpot determination while the number of holdings is 0. Suppose you are in a situation. Then, in the production situation, as shown in FIG. 254 (a), it corresponds only to the sword decoration 5001 side of the operation button 410 and the sword decoration 5001 instead of the "specific operation-related production". Assuming that the precursory effect is executed, it becomes recognizable that the sword decoration body 5001 will soon be given an operation opportunity. In addition, in the precursor effect (the same applies to the precursor effect in other examples), if a predetermined display corresponding to the operation means on the side to which the operation opportunity is given soon is made, the effect image imitating the operation means. Does not necessarily have to be displayed. According to such a configuration, it is possible to recognize that the sword decoration body 5001 will soon be given an operation opportunity from the time when the sword decoration image SYG displayed during the production reception period is not yet displayed. Will be.

In the precursory effect shown in FIG. 254 (a), the sword decorative image SYGa wearing a blue aura with a relatively low expectation and the sword decorative image SYGb wearing a red aura with a relatively high expectation. Is displayed on the effect display device 1600, and the effect content as to which of them is finally left in the display area appears. Therefore, in this production situation, although it is recognizable that the sword decoration body 5001 will soon be given an operation opportunity, the sword decoration image SYG, which has a low expectation as the sword decoration image SYG, or the sword decoration image SYG of the degree of expectation. Which of the high sword decorative images SYGb is displayed is kept secret.

FIG. 254 (b) shows the final production result of the sword decoration image SYGb wearing a red aura, and as a result, the sword decoration body 5001 is in a relatively highly expected production situation. It will be suggested that there will be a production reception period for. In the display shown in FIG. 254 (b), the final effect suggesting that the sword decorative image SYGb wearing a red aura does not change to another effect image (sword decorative image SYGa, etc.) is displayed. ..

FIG. 254 (c) shows an example of the effect when the effect reception period for the sword decoration body 5001 occurs, and when the effect reception period occurs, an instruction display (“push-in”) prompting the sword decoration body 5001 to operate is shown. , And a bar display indicating the remaining time of the production reception period) is displayed. In addition, when the production acceptance period for the sword decoration body 5001 occurs, the state of the sword decoration body 5001 changes from the sword delivery state to the sword removal state, and the sword decoration image SYGb also changes from the sword delivery state to the sword removal state accordingly. I try to change the state to the state. When the production reception is performed within the production reception period, the production at the time of a predetermined operation is performed based on the production reception, the sword decoration image SYG is hidden, and the sword decoration body 5001 is in the sword delivery state. Be maintained. In addition, a process is performed to end the production reception period at that time.

According to such a configuration, when a precursory effect corresponding to only one of the operation button 410 and the sword decoration body 5001 is performed, when the effect acceptance period occurs, the operation means on the operation target side (here, here). , The effect image (here, the sword decoration image SYGb) imitating the sword decoration body 5001) is displayed in the same state (sword removal state) as the operation means (here, the sword decoration body 5001) on the operation target side at that time. Become so. In particular, during the production reception period related to this production example, the production image (here, the sword decoration image SYGb) that imitates the operation means on the operation target side and the operation means (here, the sword decoration body 5001) on the operation target side Are all in a state of being stopped at a predetermined position.

On the other hand, FIGS. 254 (d) to 254 (g) show the contents of the effect when a specific operation-related effect is performed as a precursor effect. For example, in the normal game state, the effect display device 1600 is performing the variation display of the decorative symbol SZ (special symbol) in the effect display device 1600 with a specific effect pattern according to the result of the jackpot determination while the number of holdings is 0. Suppose you are in a situation. Then, in the production situation, as shown in FIG. 254 (d), if the precursor production as the "specific operation-related production" is started, either the operation button 410 or the sword decoration body 5001 It will be recognizable that an operation opportunity will soon be given to the crab.

FIG. 254 (e) shows a production situation in which the precursory production as a “specific operation-related production” has progressed and the production result has appeared. In this production situation, the button image BTG is not displayed and the sword decoration image SYG is displayed in order to suggest that the sword decoration body 5001 is given an operation opportunity as a production result of the "specific operation-related production". Has been done. In the display shown in FIG. 254 (e), a final effect suggesting that the sword decoration image SYG does not change to another effect image (button image BTG or the like) is displayed.

FIG. 254 (f) shows an example of the effect when the effect reception period for the sword decoration body 5001 occurs, and when the effect reception period occurs, an instruction display (“push-in”) prompting the sword decoration body 5001 to operate is shown. , And a bar display indicating the remaining time of the production reception period) is displayed. Further, when the effect acceptance period for the sword decoration body 5001 occurs, the state of the sword decoration body 5001 changes from the sword delivery state to the sword removal state, and the sword decoration image SYG is displayed in the sword removal state.

In this regard, in the examples shown in FIGS. 254 (f) and 254 (g), the sword decoration image SYG is maintained as the display content when the sword decoration body 5001 is in the sword withdrawal state during the production reception period (sword decoration image SYG). The sword ornament 5001 is designed to slowly and continuously perform upward displacement until the end of the production reception period, and is in a different state from each other. I am trying to do it.

In the production reception period, regardless of the position of the sword decoration body 5001, the production reception will be performed when the operation target accessory 141 is operated to the sword delivery state. Based on the reception, a predetermined operation effect is performed, the sword decoration image SYG is hidden, and the sword decoration body 5001 is maintained in the sword delivery state. In addition, a process is performed to end the production reception period at that time.

According to such a configuration, when the production reception period occurs after a specific operation-related production, one side of the sword decoration body 5001 and the sword decoration image SYG continues to operate and is used for the production. On the other hand, the other side does not work and can take on the role of accurately communicating the current situation. In the examples of FIGS. 254 (f) and 254 (g), the sword decoration image SYG is stopped and the sword decoration body 5001 is continuously operated during the production reception period, but the sword is not limited to this. The decorative image SYG may be continuously operated to stop the sword decoration body 5001.

As described above, in the effect example shown in FIG. 254, both the sword decoration body 5001 and the sword decoration image SYG are displayed during the effect reception period (FIG. 254 (c)) that occurs without going through a specific operation-related effect. In contrast to the stopped state, during the effect reception period (FIG. 254 (f)) that occurs after a specific operation-related effect, one of the sword decoration body 5001 and the sword decoration image SYG is stopped. On the other side, this is continued as a dynamic state so that it can be used for production. Therefore, when the production reception period occurs after a specific operation-related production, the range of the production can be expanded, and the game entertainment can be suitably maintained.

In particular, even if the operation button 410 itself is not an operation means to which a driving force is applied by the control by the peripheral control MPU1511a, the operation is performed when the effect reception period for the operation button 410 occurs after a specific operation-related effect. While the button 410 itself is stopped, if the button image BTG that imitates the operation button 410 is made to be a dynamic state and the depiction is continued, a specific operation-related effect is obtained. It is expected that the width of the effect when the effect acceptance period for the operation button 410 occurs will be greatly improved.

Either the sword decoration image SYGa wearing a blue aura with a relatively low expectation or the sword decoration image SYGb wearing a red aura with a relatively high expectation is displayed as a sword decoration image SYG. The method may be adopted not only when a precursor effect other than a specific operation-related effect is performed, but also when a specific operation-related effect as a precursor effect is performed. That is, in this case, in the specific operation-related effect, in addition to the effect of determining which of the button image BTG imitating the operation button 410 and the sword decorative image SYG imitating the sword ornament 5001 appears, any one of them. When an effect image (for example, a button image BTG) appears, whether the effect image (button image BTG) is displayed in a display mode having a relatively high degree of expectation or a display mode having a relatively low degree of expectation. It will be possible to further provide the directing effect of. The method may be appropriately adopted in each of the above-mentioned production modes and other examples thereof, in addition to the production example of FIG. 254.

Then, in the case of giving such two effects to a specific operation-related effect, first, which of the button image BTG and the sword decoration image SYG is produced as the effect result of the specific operation-related effect. It is in a state where it appears or can be recognized, and it is unknown whether or not the display mode of the effect image on the appearing side has a high degree of expectation (for example, the effect image imitating the operating means is outlined and only the outline is shown. Make the display state recognizable) appear as the production progresses. After that, it is possible to recognize whether or not the display mode of the effect image on the side appearing as the effect result of the specific operation-related effect has a high degree of expectation (for example, the white outline of the effect image imitating the operation means). It is desirable that the state is released so that the color can be confirmed) in sequence as the production progresses. Further, when the button image BTG is displayed through such an effect progress, it is possible to recognize whether or not the display mode has a high degree of expectation under a predetermined condition (for example, an operating means). After making the imitated production image white out, etc.), the button image BTG is further hidden, and it is recognizable that the sword decoration image SYG appears as the production result of the specific operation-related production. To a state where it is unclear whether or not the display mode of the sword decorative image SYG is highly expected (for example, the sword decorative image SYG is outlined so that only the outline can be recognized). It is also possible to generate an effect pattern that further advances the effect. After this, it is possible to recognize whether or not the display mode of the sword decorative image SYG that appears as a result of the production of a specific operation-related effect has a high degree of expectation (for example, the white state of the sword decorative image SYG). To make it possible to check the color, etc.). In this case, when the display mode when the button image BTG is displayed is the display mode on the high expectation side (for example, red), the display mode is higher than the display mode on the low expectation side (for example, blue). However, it is desirable to increase the rate at which such further production progress occurs.

FIGS. 255 (a) to 255 (e) are diagrams showing another example of the effect shown in FIGS. 254 (d) to 254 (g) as an effect content when a specific operation-related effect is performed as a precursor effect. That is, in FIG. 255 (a), the precursor effect as the "specific operation-related effect" is started, but the precursor effect has a shield (button image BTG) that imitates the operation button 410. The first character (effect image corresponding to the operation button 410) and the second character holding the sword (sword decoration image SYG) imitating the sword decoration 5001 (effect image corresponding to the sword decoration 5001). It is depicted that they are facing each other, and it is suggested which of the operation button 410 and the sword decoration 5001 is given an operation opportunity depending on which of these characters is left in the display area. I am trying to do it.

FIG. 255 (b) shows a production situation in which the production result of the precursory production as the “specific operation-related production” appears. In this production situation, the first character (effect image corresponding to the operation button 410) is not displayed and the second character (sword decoration) is not displayed in order to suggest that the sword decoration body 5001 is given an operation opportunity. The effect image corresponding to the body 5001) is displayed. The display image shown in FIG. 255 (b) is substantially the same as the display image TG shown in FIG. 251 (b) (the instruction display prompting the sword decoration 5001 to operate is hidden), and is specific. While the operation-related effect is being performed, both the effect part (confrontation between characters) and the other background image (the part that was displayed before the start of the specific operation-related effect) are the relevant. It is suddenly replaced with an effect image (display image shown in FIG. 255 (b)) as an effect result of a specific operation-related effect (substantially the entire effect in the display area is replaced).

FIGS. 255 (c) to 255 (e) show an example of the effect when the effect acceptance period for the sword ornament 5001 occurs, and when the effect acceptance period occurs, first, as shown in FIG. 255 (c). An instruction display (a character display such as "push" or a bar display indicating the remaining time of the production reception period) is displayed to prompt the sword decoration body 5001 to operate.

Here, in this production example, as shown in FIG. 255 (c), the sword decoration body 5001 starts the operation from the sword delivery state to the sword removal state when the production reception period occurs. As shown in FIG. 255 (d), the sword ornament 5001 completes the operation (movement) from the sword-delivered state to the sword-drawn state only after a relatively short time has passed since the production reception period started. It is designed to do. After that, as shown in FIG. 255 (e), unless there is an operation by the player, the sword decoration body 5001 is maintained in a sword-drawn state at least until the end of the production reception period, and the player (Operation from the sword withdrawal state to the sword delivery state) will be waited for.

On the other hand, in the effect display device 1600, as shown in FIGS. 255 (c) to 255 (e), the movement (swing in the rotation direction) is completely different from the movement (movement in the linear direction) of the sword decoration body 5001. In the lowering operation), the second character is depicted as swinging down the sword decoration image SYG, and even after the sword decoration body 5001 is maintained in the sword-drawn state, the sword decoration image SYG continues. It is designed to operate. The sword decoration image SYG related to this production example loops a series of displays from the start (FIG. 255 (c)) to the end (FIG. 255 (e)) of the swing-down operation within the production reception period. It is designed to be repeated by processing.

However, even if this loop processing is performed, the bar display indicating the remaining time of the effect reception period is not affected by the loop processing, and the display change progresses by the amount according to the passage of time. Further, the sword ornament 5001 is also brought into the sword-pulled state while a series of displays from the start (FIG. 255 (c)) to the end (FIG. 255 (e)) of the swing-down operation are performed. However, even if the loop processing is performed, it will be maintained in the sword-drawn state without being affected by it. It should be noted that when the operation target accessory 141 is operated to the sword-delivered state within the production reception period, the production reception is performed, and the predetermined operation production is performed based on the production reception, and the above-mentioned The loop processing is completed, the sword decoration image SYG is hidden, and the sword decoration body 5001 is maintained in the sword delivery state. In addition, a process is performed to end the production reception period at that time.

According to such a configuration, when a precursor effect as a specific operation-related effect is performed, both the sword decoration body 5001 and the sword decoration image SYG operate within the effect reception period. The movement modes (movements that play a role in accurately transmitting the current situation (movements until moving to the operation position), loop movements used for the production) are different from each other, and the movement of the sword decoration body 5001 is completed. Even after that, the sword decoration image SYG will continue its operation without ending. As a result, when the effect reception period (FIGS. 255 (c) to (e)) that occurs after the specific operation-related effect occurs, the effect content of the specific operation-related effect is continued until after the effect reception period occurs ( It will be possible to expand the range of the production, such as making it feasible by (continuing the background), and it will be possible to maintain the amusement interest of the game.

Further, according to the effect example shown in FIG. 255, the effect content (display in which the characters confront each other) that appeared when the precursor effect (FIG. 255 (a)) as the specific operation-related effect is performed. The effect (FIGS. 255 (c) to (e)) is executed when the effect reception period occurs in a form that changes both the background image and the background image. In particular, during the production reception period related to this production example, the production image (sword decoration image SYG) and the character (sword decoration image SYG) that imitate the operation means are specified differently from each other under the display of the dedicated background (full moon). Since the display is performed during the reception period by dynamically displaying both the image) and the image), it is possible to improve the effectability during the production reception period. In this sense, even in the precursory production, it is possible to perform the production using at least one of the production image (sword decoration image SYG) that imitates the operation means and the character. It can be said that it is more desirable to have a directing connection between them to further improve the directing effect. Further, the dedicated background (full moon) has a plurality of display modes having different expectations for granting the privilege, and may be displayed by any of the display modes.

In addition, in the precursory production as a specific operation-related production or the production within the production reception period, a plurality of production modes are prepared as those productions, and the production reception is performed according to which of the production modes appears. It is also possible to suggest whether or not a mode with a high degree of expectation appears as an operation-time effect when the effect is received during the period. The background image that appears when the precursory effect is performed may be used to suggest the degree of expectation for granting the privilege.

Further, in the effect example shown in FIG. 255, when a precursor effect as a specific operation-related effect is being performed, the effect reception is performed by changing both the effect content and the background image appearing in the precursor effect. Although it was decided to execute the effect within the period, the above-mentioned precursor effect that is not a specific operation-related effect (for a specific operation means among a plurality of operation means (or in a specific operation mode among a plurality of operation modes). ) When a production reception period occurs in the form of changing both the production content and the background image that appeared in the precursor production when the dedicated precursor production when the operation opportunity is given) is being performed. You may try to perform the production. The point is, "It is possible to generate an operation-related effect (precursor effect) related to the operation of the operation means, and as the operation-related effect (precursor effect), the effect reception for the first effect is performed by the operation by the player. It is said that at least one operation-related effect and a second operation-related effect in which an effect reception is performed for a second effect different from the first effect due to an operation by the player can be generated, and is displayed in the first operation-related effect. The first operation promotion image is displayed while the background image that has been displayed since the first operation promotion image is not yet displayed is continuously displayed, and is related to the second operation. The second operation promotion image displayed in the effect is displayed according to changing the background image when the second operation promotion image is not yet displayed to another background image. " All you need is. Here, the first operation promotion image and the second operation promotion image do not have to be the same image, and for example, the button image BTG, the sword decoration image SYG, the gauge display, or "press!" Or "deliver the sword!" It is possible to adopt it as appropriate, such as displaying comments. Further, the "first production" and the "second production" may also be different post-operation productions. For example, the "first operation-related production in which the production reception for the first production is performed" includes the production reception. It is possible to exemplify which mode appears as a conversation notice when the conversation is made, and as the "second operation-related production in which the production reception for the second production is performed", the production reception is performed. It is possible to exemplify as an effect as to whether or not the specific decorative member SDY operates at that time. At this time, regardless of which mode appears as a conversation notice, the production design is such that the rate at which the jackpot symbol appears (including 100%) is higher when the specific decorative member SDY operates. It is desirable to do. Further, regarding the "second operation-related effect in which the effect reception for the second effect is performed", the operation reception effect described later with reference to FIGS. 178, 390 to 393, 395 to 398, 401, and the like. It may be executed as any of (operation reception effect under BGM suppression). On the other hand, regarding the "first operation-related effect in which the effect reception for the first effect is performed", the operation reception effect (operation under non-BGM suppression) described later with reference to FIGS. 394, 400, 402, and the like. It may be executed as one of the reception effects). In addition, each of these different examples of the operation reception effect, which will be described later, may be appropriately adopted. Further, the background image "continuous display" does not necessarily have to be a still image, and may be displayed as a moving image showing a state of a river flowing or a duel between characters. It also includes those in which the projected range of such a still image or moving image is displayed in a sliding manner (displayed in a manner in which the coordinates move). That is, it can be said that the background image is "continuously displayed" if it is displayed in a time-series or coordinated connection in the projected depiction content. On the other hand, "changing a background image to another background image" does not necessarily have to be displayed by another image data or another layer. For example, the background image itself does not have to be displayed in time series or coordinates. It also includes images that are suddenly changed to "images with different forms (dedicated background images corresponding to the production reception period)" that are not connected to each other, or are replaced (switched). It also includes images that change to "black images" or are replaced (switched). That is, if there is no connection in terms of depiction content in terms of time series and coordinates before and after the change, it can be said that "the background image is changed to another background image". In order to make it easier to recognize that the background image has changed in this way, the effect image (blackout, whiteout, etc.) that hides the background image that has been displayed up to that point is displayed on the effect display device 1600. It is more desirable to display the display over an area (more preferably substantially the entire area) of at least half of the display area, and to display the second operation promotion image together with the new background image after the display. The first operation-related effect and the second operation-related effect may be sequentially displayed within one variation pattern. As described above, the timing for changing the background image to another background image may be before the production reception period occurs, or the production reception period may occur, including the timing when the production reception period occurs. It may be set after the timing (for example, FIG. 255 (b) may be omitted and the production may progress from FIG. 255 (a) to FIG. 255 (c)).

In the production example shown in FIG. 255, the operation of the sword decoration body 5001 is started after the production reception period occurs, but the operation of the sword decoration body 5001 is started before the production reception period occurs. The operation of the sword ornament 5001 started before the production reception period occurs is completed before the production reception period occurs (the role of accurately communicating the current situation). The performed operation may be completed before the production reception period occurs), and then the stopped state may be maintained.

Further, even when an operation opportunity is given to a specific operation means (for example, the sword decoration body 5001), the background image may be changed when the effect reception period occurs or the background image may be changed. It may be possible that the display to be displayed may not be performed. In this case, if the display for changing the background image is performed when the production reception period occurs, the expectation for granting the privilege is higher than when the display for changing the background image is not performed when the production reception period occurs. It is desirable to.

Further, in each of the above-mentioned effect modes and in another example thereof, after a specific operation-related effect is performed, an operation on a specific operation means (for example, an operation button 410) on the side suggested as a result of the effect is performed. When the production reception is performed, it is decided to operate the specific decorative member SDY (movable body provided on the game board 5 side) as an operation operation based on the production reception. At this time, for example, in the production examples shown in FIGS. 242 (d), 244 (e), and 245 (h), the sword decoration body 5001 (or the operation button) is provided as a movable body on the door frame 3 side. By making 410) also operate, it is possible to improve the effectability of the operation-time effect when a specific operation-related effect is performed. In this way, in order to improve the effectability of the operation-related effect when the specific operation-related effect is passed, the operation-time effect when the specific operation-related effect is performed depends on the result of the effect. Then, the production situation at the time of success in which both the movable body provided on the game board 5 side and the movable body provided on the door frame 3 side (game machine main body side) are activated appears, or the movable body provided on the game board 5 side is movable. While the effect situation at the time of failure in which both the body and the movable body provided on the door frame 3 side do not operate appears, the operation-time effect (for example, a specific operation-related effect) performed without going through a specific operation-related effect. In the operation-time effect after the precursor effect, which is not an operation-related effect, either the movable body provided on the game board 5 side or the movable body provided on the door frame 3 side depends on the result of the effect. It is possible to show the production situation at the time of success when only operates, or to show the production situation at the time of failure when both the movable body provided on the game board 5 side and the movable body provided on the door frame 3 side do not operate. desirable.

Further, in each of the above-mentioned effect modes and the specific operation-related effect related to the other examples thereof, when the sword decoration image SYG is displayed as a result of the effect, when the button image BTG is displayed as a result of the effect. The expectation for granting benefits is higher than that. In this regard, when the button image BTG is displayed as the effect result of the specific operation-related effect, for example, as shown in FIG. 256 (a), the button is in a mode in which the princess character is added (specific effect mode). The image BTG may be displayed, and when the button image BTG is displayed in this mode, the degree of expectation for granting benefits is higher than when the sword decoration image SYG is displayed as a production result of a specific operation-related effect. If the value is set to be high, it becomes possible to suitably maintain the game entertainment taste when the button image BTG is displayed as the effect result of the specific operation-related effect.

Further, the mode in which the princess character is displayed (specific production mode) may be applied to the sword decoration image SYG as shown in FIG. 256 (b). In this case, when the sword decorative image SYG is displayed in a specific effect mode, it is desirable that the expectation for granting the privilege is higher than when the sword decorative image SYG is displayed in the normal mode.

Further, as an effect pattern that may appear as a result of performing a specific operation-related effect, a first effect pattern (FIG.) in which the button image BTG is displayed in a specific effect mode (a mode in which the princess character is displayed). 256 (a)) and the second effect pattern (FIG. 256 (b)) in which the sword decoration image SYG is displayed in a specific effect mode (a mode in which the princess character is displayed) as a result of performing a specific operation-related effect. )) And may be prepared respectively. In this case, the expectation for granting the privilege is set to be the same when the first effect pattern appears as a result of performing a specific operation-related effect and when the second effect pattern appears. It is desirable to do. According to such a configuration, it is possible to provide an interest as to whether the button image BTG or the sword decorative image SYG appears as a result of performing a specific operation-related effect, as well as the button image BTG and the sword. Regardless of which of the decorative image SYG appears, it becomes possible to provide completely different fun such as whether or not a specific effect mode (a mode in which the princess character is displayed) appears. The degree of expectation may be 0% or 100%.

Further, in the case where such a specific effect mode (a mode in which the princess character is displayed) can appear as a result of performing a specific operation-related effect, when a predetermined effect condition is satisfied, As shown in FIG. 256 (c), when the production result of the specific operation-related production (whether the button image BTG or the sword decoration image SYG appears) has not yet appeared in the specific production mode. (For example, from the time when a specific operation-related effect is being produced), this may be displayed in advance. According to such a configuration, although a specific operation-related effect regarding which of the button image BTG and the sword decorative image SYG appears is in the stage of being performed, a specific effect mode (the princess character is displayed). The button image BTG and the sword decoration image SYG have the same effect value (same degree of expectation). That is, in this case, since the rendering property of the specific operation-related effect itself is lost, it is said that "a precursory effect by the princess character" even though the specific operation-related effect is being performed. It will be possible to provide a completely different color rendering index.

Further, in the sword decoration body 5001 according to each of the above-mentioned production modes and other examples thereof, the sword portion (handle portion 5012, sword blade portion 5011) of the sword decoration body 5001 can be operated in the vertical direction. In addition to the first operation mode (first operation mode), as shown in FIG. 212, a second operation in which the sheath portion (sheath portion 5020) of the sword decoration body 5001 can be operated in the lateral direction. It is provided so as to have a mode (second operation mode). Therefore, in each of the above-mentioned production modes and in another example thereof, which of the first operation mode and the second operation mode is given to the sword decoration body 5001 provided as one operation unit? The above-mentioned specific operation-related effect may be performed as the effect of the above. Both the sword part (handle part 5012, sword blade part 5011) and the sheath part (sheath part 5020) are operably supported by one main body support part (not shown) provided on the door frame 3. Even if one side of the sword part (handle part 5012, blade part 5011) and the sheath part (sheath part 5020) is in the state of being operated (operated), the other side has a structure that can be operated (operated). It is formed.

However, when a specific operation-related effect is performed in such a mode, the operation mode is different regardless of which effect result appears, and the operation on the sword decoration body 5001 is not possible. Since there is no change, there is a concern that there is a high possibility that an operation error will occur on the player side. In particular, regardless of whether the operation opportunity is given to either the first operation mode or the second operation mode, for example, an effect image (and its) that imitates the sword part of the sword decoration body 5001. When the instruction display prompting the operation) is displayed, there is an increasing concern that an operation error may occur between the first operation mode and the second operation mode on the player side. Become. That is, in this case, as the remaining time of the production reception period is decreasing moment by moment, let the player first perform the operation for correcting the operation error, and then further perform the operation in the original correct mode. It is difficult to do so, and if the production reception period ends before the production reception is done even though a specific operation-related production with relatively high expectations has been performed. , There is a concern that the game entertainment will decline.

Further, in the sword decoration body 5001, there are modes such as "movement in the vertical direction" by the sword part and "movement in the lateral direction" by the sheath part, and a plurality of complicated operations not having such a reversal relationship. In the operation unit that can provide the mode, if the operation on the wrong side is performed when the operation opportunity is given, it takes time to perform the operation on the proper side, and the production reception period ends. Therefore, it can be said that the risk of losing operation opportunities is increased.

Therefore, when performing the above-mentioned specific operation-related effect as an effect as to which of the first operation mode and the second operation mode is given to the sword decoration body 5001 provided as one operation unit. , As will be described below with reference to FIGS. 257 and 258, an operation error occurs between the first operation mode and the second operation mode on the player side, and the state of the operation error is corrected. Even if the original correct operation is performed as it is, it is desirable that the effect reception is properly performed and the operation-time effect corresponding to the effect reception is executed.

FIGS. 257 and 258 show an example of an effect when an operation error occurs between the first operation mode and the second operation mode on the player side in the effect pattern in which a specific operation-related effect is performed. It is a figure.

In FIG. 257 (a), in the normal game state, the variation display of the decorative symbol SZ (special symbol) is performed by the effect display device 1600 with a specific effect pattern according to the result of the jackpot determination in the state where the number of holdings is 0. It shows the production situation.

FIG. 257 (b) shows an effect situation in which a specific operation-related effect is started during the execution of the variable display of the decorative symbol SZ shown in FIG. 257 (a).

Here, in the specific operation-related effect shown in FIG. 257 (b), the first effect is modeled on the first operation mode in which the sword portion of the sword ornament 5001 is operated from the sword-drawn state to the sword-delivered state. The image OX and the second effect image TX that mimics the second operation mode in which the sheath portion of the sword decoration body 5001 is operated so as to move in the lateral direction are included in the display area of the effect display device 1600. It is displayed at the same time to suggest that an operation opportunity by any of these operation modes will soon be available for production. In this regard, in the first production image OX, although the image portion of the sword decoration body 5001 that imitates the sword part is displayed larger than the second production image TX, the first production image OX and the first production image OX In each of the second effect image TX, the sword portion is displayed as an image, and an operation error may occur between the first operation mode and the second operation mode.

FIG. 257 (c) shows the development of the specific operation-related effect shown in FIG. 257 (b), the first effect image OX corresponding to the first operation mode, and the second effect image OX corresponding to the second operation mode. The effect image TX and the effect image TX are pressed against each other in the display area of the effect display device 1600 to push the other party out of the display area. When the effect result (first effect result) in which the first effect image OX is left appears, the effect acceptance period for the first operation mode occurs, and the effect result in which the second effect image TX is left (second effect) When the result) appears, the effect acceptance period for the second operation mode is generated.

In the specific operation-related effect related to this effect example, as shown in FIG. 257 (c), when the first effect image OX is left in a predominant situation, a display such as "push" can be visually recognized. The display such as "slide" can be visually recognized when the second effect image TX is left in a predominant situation. The details of the operation contents are made easy to recognize according to the situation of the production. However, these displays may not necessarily be displayed because there is a concern that they may be mistakenly recognized as prompting an operation at the timing when the production reception period has not yet occurred.

In FIG. 257 (d), as a result of performing the effect shown in FIG. 257 (c), the second effect image TX is completely pushed out of the display area, and the first effect image OX is in the display area. A production that depicts the state left in is being performed (first production result). When the content of the effect is developed, even if the operation in the second operation mode is performed, the effect at the time of a specific operation (movable effect by the specific decorative member SDY, etc.) does not occur, and the effect in the first operation mode is used. When the operation is performed, the effect reception is performed, and a specific operation-time effect (movable effect by the specific decorative member SDY, etc.) corresponding to the effect reception is generated.

That is, in the effect situation shown in FIG. 257 (d), the effect reception period related to the specific operation time effect occurs only for the first operation mode side of the first operation mode and the second operation mode. Therefore, in the production reception period, in addition to the first production image OX corresponding to the first operation mode, an instruction display for prompting the operation (character display such as "push" and the remaining time of the production reception period are shown. Bar display) will be displayed. At this time, the sword decoration body 5001 operates from the sword-delivered state to the sword-drawn state so that the operation according to the first operation mode can be performed.

In FIG. 258 (e), although the first effect image OX corresponding to the first operation mode is displayed, the operation (erroneous operation) by the second operation mode is performed instead of the first operation mode. It shows the production situation when it is performed by the player.

That is, in this effect example, even if the effect reception period related to the specific operation time effect occurs only for the first operation mode side of the first operation mode and the second operation mode, the first The operation detection of the operation mode 2 itself is enabled. Then, when the operation in the second operation mode is detected during the effect reception period, it is assumed that there is an operation error by the player, and the specific notification that cannot appear when the operation in the first operation mode is received in the effect is specified. (Here, "it is fine as it is") is done.

Further, as shown in FIG. 258 (f), the content of such a specific notification changes with the passage of time so that the player can regain his / her calmness (here, “calmly push in”). It has become like. According to such a configuration, even if the content to be notified is complicated, it is possible to sequentially notify in short words, so that even if the player side is in a panic state, this is preferable. It will be expected to be suppressed. As a result, even if the sword decoration body 5001 in the state of the second operation mode is operated by the first operation mode as it is, the player side is informed that the effect is properly received. You will be able to recognize it.

In FIG. 258 (g), the operation on the proper side (first operation mode) is performed in the production situation (effect reception period when the operation is erroneously operated) in FIGS. 258 (e) and 258 (f). As a result of this, it is a depiction of how the production reception is performed and the above-mentioned operation-time production corresponding to the operation is performed. However, at this time, when the player's hand is separated from the sword decoration body 5001 (when the operation is completed), the sword decoration body 5001 is in a non-operated state (normal state) from the state of the second operation mode. ) Will be returned.

According to such a configuration, an operation error occurs on the player side between the first operation mode and the second operation mode, the state of the operation error is not corrected, and the original correct operation remains as it is. Even if it is performed from the state (state of operation error), since the production reception is properly performed, the deterioration of the game interest when the operation error occurs can be suppressed.

In the above-mentioned production example, when an erroneous operation is performed by the player, it is decided to notify that the operation should be performed as it is without correcting the operation error, but the content (the operation is performed as it is without correcting the operation error). It is not always necessary to provide detailed notification for the purpose of (should). That is, as described above, since the player may be in a panic in a situation where an erroneous operation is performed, it may be counterproductive to notify the complicated contents. Therefore, when there is an operation error by the player during the effect reception period, as a specific notification that cannot appear when the operation in an appropriate manner is received, the notification is not displayed by a message but by an effect or sound only. It is desirable to make a simple notification such as. In this case, there is a possibility that the player does not recognize that the operation error has been made, but a special situation is confirmed in which a specific notification is performed based on the operation and no effect is performed during the operation. Therefore, it can be said that it is possible to fully expect that the operation is switched to the proper operation.

On the other hand, depending on the player (particularly, an elderly player, etc.), it is possible that a situation may occur in which the operation is mistakenly performed even before the production reception period occurs in the specific operation-related production. For example, when the operation instruction for the second operation unit (for example, the sheath portion) is not given, but the operation for the second operation portion (such as lateral movement of the sheath portion) is performed, the first operation unit is performed. It is assumed that a situation may occur in which a production reception period related to a specific operation production is generated only for the operation unit (for example, the sword part) side of the above, and in this case as well, how should the player operate it? There is a concern that it will not be recognized whether it is good or not.

Therefore, when a specific operation-related effect as to which of the first operation unit (sword part) and the second operation part (sheath part) is given the operation opportunity is performed, the first operation-related effect is performed. The second operation unit is in a situation where the operation instruction (bar display of the remaining time) is not given to the operation unit side of 2 (for example, the situation shown in FIGS. 257 (b) and 257 (c)). Even when the operation for is performed, it is desirable to be able to perform a specific notification that cannot appear when the operation in an appropriate manner is received. The specific notification may be "a message display indicating that the operation unit on the appropriate side to which an operation opportunity is given soon should be operated while maintaining the operation state", or a message display may be used. Instead, it may be an effect or a simple notification such as a notification using only sound. In any case, by confirming a special situation such that a specific notification is performed based on the operation and no effect is performed at the time of operation even though the operation is performed, the operation is subsequently performed on the appropriate side. It can be said that it is possible to fully expect that it will be a chance to go.

In this case, for example, the first operation unit (for example, the sheath portion) is being operated (for example, the sword decoration body 5001 is moved to the left) while the operation is being performed on the second operation unit (for example, the sheath portion). Even when the production reception period related to the production during a specific operation occurs only for the sword part) side, the state in which the operation for the second operation part (for example, the sheath part) is being performed (sword decoration body). When the first operation unit (for example, the sword part) is operated while maintaining the state in which the 5001 is moved to the left), the effect reception is performed and the above-mentioned operation effect according to the operation is performed. It becomes.

According to such a configuration, an operation error occurs between the first operation mode and the second operation mode before the effect reception period occurs, and the effect reception occurs while the operation error is maintained. Even if the state of the operation error is not corrected within the period and the original correct operation is performed from the same state, the production reception will be performed properly, so that the operation error occurs before the production reception period occurs. Even when the above occurs, the decline in the interest in the game will be suppressed.

However, during the period in which a specific operation-related effect as to which of the first operation unit and the second operation unit is given an operation opportunity is performed, the effect result is shown and the effect acceptance period is shown. If the above-mentioned specific notification is performed in the period immediately before the occurrence of the above-mentioned, the information will be mixed with the content to be notified (instruction display, etc.) within the production reception period, and the player will be more and more confused. There is a concern that it will end up. Therefore, in the specific operation-related effect in which the effect result suggesting that the operation opportunity is given to the first operation unit is finally displayed, in the period until the effect result is displayed. , The above-mentioned specific notification is executed when the operation in the second operation mode is performed even though the operation instruction regarding the second operation unit (for example, the sheath portion) is not displayed. There is a period and a second period in which the above-mentioned specific notification is not executed even if the operation in the second operation mode is performed in the situation, and after the first period and the second period are sequentially passed, the above-mentioned first period is performed. It is desirable to generate an effect reception period for the operation unit of 1.

In the above-mentioned production example, the degree of expectation for granting the privilege may be suggested when the specific notification is performed. The degree of expectation may be 0% or 100%.

Further, in each of the above-mentioned production modes and the sword decoration body 5001 according to another example thereof, the production mode of the sword decoration body 5001 itself changes to one of the above-mentioned plurality of modes (for example, FIG. 222). It is possible to change from the stage 0 form shown in the above to any of the stage 1 form to the stage 3 form). In this regard, after the specific operation-related effect is performed, the sword decoration body 5001 is changed to one of the plurality of modes described above, and the effect reception period for the sword decoration body 5001 is generated in the changed state. You may let it. Alternatively, when the effect reception period occurs after the specific operation-related effect is performed, the sword decoration body 5001 may be changed to any of the plurality of modes described above.

In this case, in the production display device 1600 during the production reception period, an instruction display (character display such as "push" or a bar display indicating the remaining time of the production reception period) for prompting the operation of the sword decoration body 5001 and the sword decoration body 5001 The sword decoration image SYG is displayed in the same manner as the sword decoration body 5001 at that time (stage 0 form to stage 3 form shown in FIG. 222). It will be.

However, when the sword decoration image SYG is displayed on the effect display device 1600, if it is always displayed in the same manner as the sword decoration body 5001, it is possible to add some fun to confirm the sword decoration image SYG. However, the performance is poor when it is in the production reception period. Therefore, when displaying the sword decoration image SYG on the effect display device 1600, when the predetermined effect conditions are satisfied, the sword decoration image SYG may be displayed in a manner different from that of the sword decoration body 5001 at that time. It is desirable to ensure the performance during the production reception period.

At this time, it is necessary to make the aspect represented by the sword decorative image SYG have a higher degree of expectation than the aspect of the sword decorative body 5001, which makes the effectability during the effect reception period more effective. It is desirable to ensure that it is suitable. For example, when the sword decoration body 5001 is in the stage 1 form and the predetermined effect conditions are satisfied, the sword decoration image SYG is displayed in the stage 2 form or the stage 3 form instead of the stage 1 form. To display. According to such a configuration, even if the sword decoration body 5001 is in the stage 1 form, it is possible to grasp that the degree of expectation is higher by confirming the aspect of the sword decoration image SYG. Therefore, the game entertainment during the production reception period will be preferably maintained.

In order to obtain such an effect, the number of production modes on the sword decoration image SYG side may be larger than the number of production modes on the sword decoration body 5001 side. The number of production modes on the sword decoration body 5001 side may be one. Further, when a plurality of production modes are prepared as the sword decoration body 5001, the plurality of production modes do not necessarily have to change the form.

However, if the aspect of the sword decoration body 5001 and the aspect of the sword decoration image SYG are simply different from each other in this way, some players may feel uncomfortable because they are falsely displayed. There is concern, which may reduce the enjoyment of the game. Therefore, more preferably, the aspect of the sword decorative image SYG is a special aspect different from any of the aspects prepared as the aspect of the sword decorative body 5001 (here, the stage 0 form to the stage 3 form shown in FIG. 222). When the predetermined effect conditions are satisfied, the sword decoration image SYG is displayed in a special mode instead of the mode of the sword decoration body 5001 at that time, thereby displaying the mode of the sword decoration body 5001 and the sword. It is desirable to make the appearance of the decorative image SYG different from each other. Regarding the special aspect, the outer shape may be changed by further deforming and combining the sword decoration image SYG, or the sword decoration image 5001 may operate in a mode that does not appear in the sword decoration body 5001. It may emit light in a manner that does not appear.

According to such a configuration, the structurally difficult staging expression of the sword decoration body 5001 is realized by the sword decoration image SYG, so that the concern that the sword decoration is falsely displayed is suppressed. In addition to being able to do this, it is expected that the enjoyment of the game will be improved by providing a directing effect beyond the player's imagination when looking at the structure of the sword decoration body 5001.

Even when the sword decorative image SYG is provided with a special aspect in this way, each aspect of the sword decorative image SYG is prepared as an aspect of the sword decorative body 5001 (here, FIG. 222 is shown). It is desirable to be able to perform the display in the stage 0 form to the stage 3 form). That is, in this case, basically, while the sword decoration image SYG is displayed in the same manner as the sword decoration body 5001, the sword decoration image SYG is displayed only when a predetermined effect condition is satisfied. It will be displayed in a special mode. When the sword decorative image SYG is displayed in a special mode, it is desirable to suggest that the expectation for granting the privilege is higher than when the sword decorative image SYG is displayed in the other mode. The degree of expectation may be 100%.

Further, regarding the method for displaying the sword decorative image SYG in a special mode, in addition to the case where a specific operation-related effect is performed, for another effect (for example, the effect shown in FIGS. 223 to 230). It may be applied.

For example, assuming that the production situation shown in FIG. 226 (X1) is present, the next production progress destination is the production situation shown in FIG. 226 (X2) and the production situation shown in FIG. 259 (a). The production pattern will be prepared. Then, when the effect is developed into the effect pattern, first, as shown in FIG. 259 (a), the display area of the effect display device 1600 is operated from the operation opportunity suggestion image shown in FIG. 226 (X1). A continuous image (an image with the samurai's eyes closed) indicating that no opportunity is given is displayed, and the sword ornament 5001 that was in the second sword withdrawal state is now in the sword delivery state while maintaining the form in stage 3 form. Be returned.

Next, the three decorative symbols that have been variablely displayed in the display area of the effect display device 1600 are temporarily stopped and displayed in a pseudo-continuous manner, and the player is notified that the decorative symbols are re-variated (FIG. 259 (b)). ). Here, among the three decorative symbols, the central decorative symbol is a pseudo-sword symbol that is not prepared for the left and right decorative symbols, specifically, the form and effect level (number of pseudo-continuous fluctuations) of the sword ornament 5001 are shown. By displaying the pseudo-sword symbol of the aspect, the player can easily recognize the re-variation of the decorative symbol (start of the pseudo-continuous variation).

However, here, as shown in FIG. 259 (c), the pseudo-continuous sword symbol displayed in the display area of the effect display device 1600 has the form of the sword decoration body 5001 in the fourth pseudo-continuous variation (re-variation). A sword image showing (special mode) is displayed, but this special mode can appear only in the sword image (sword decoration image SYG) that imitates the sword decoration body 5001 in the display area, and the sword decoration Body 5001 itself is immutable. The special mode according to this production example is a mode in which the sheath portion is divided into two. Therefore, as shown in FIG. 259 (c), even if the sword image (sword decoration image SYG) imitating the sword decoration body 5001 is changed to a special mode in the display area, the sword decoration body 5001 has a stage 3 form. It will change from the sword-delivered state to the second sword-drawn state while maintaining.

After that, the operation valid period of the sword decoration body 5001 is generated, and in the display area of the effect display device 1600, an operation promotion effect for encouraging the sword delivery operation of the sword decoration body 5001 is performed. Specifically, while the sword decoration body 5001 is in the second sword extraction state (stage 3 form), a sword image (sword decoration image SYG) that imitates the sword decoration body 5001 which is a special mode is displayed. An image (bar display) showing the operation direction and the operation validity period is displayed together with the message "Pay the sword!" (FIG. 259 (d)). Then, as shown in FIG. 259 (e), when the sword delivery operation by the player is detected during the operation valid period, the specific decorative member SDY (sudare) is dropped according to the set effect pattern. Along with the expectation notification effect, the sword decoration body 5001 changes its form from the stage 3 form to the initial form. As a result, the player can grasp that the pseudo-continuous fluctuation (re-variation) has ended.

Further, in each of the above-mentioned effect modes and other examples thereof, for example, when the symbol variation is performed in the first effect pattern based on the result of the jackpot determination, the operation button 410 is subjected to the symbol variation. It is possible to execute the first precursor effect that appears when the operation opportunity is given and the operation opportunity is not given to the sword decoration body 5001. Further, when the symbol variation is performed in the second effect pattern based on the result of the jackpot determination, the operation button 410 is not given an operation opportunity and the sword decoration body 5001 is operated within the symbol variation. It makes it possible to execute the second precursor effect that appears when an opportunity is given. Further, when the design is changed in the third effect pattern based on the result of the jackpot determination, the third precursor that appears when an operation opportunity is given to either the operation button 410 or the sword decoration 5001. The effect (specific operation-related effect) can be executed.

In this respect, these precursory effects are executed as different effect contents from each other, and as those effect contents, for example,
-A specific image is displayed so as to cover at least the area where the effect image appears before the effect image imitating the operation means on the side to which the operation opportunity is given appears in the display area.
-After that, a production image that imitates the operation means on the side to which the operation opportunity is given is displayed at a position that is difficult to see by the specific image.
-After that, it is common in that the specific image is gradually changed from the display area to non-display (the transmittance of the specific image itself is increased, the area where the specific image is displayed is decreased, etc.). It may be made to change. For example, in the first precursor effect, a display effect by "cloud effect" is performed as a specific image (a display effect that gradually makes it easier to see the effect image that imitates the operation means), and in the second precursor effect, "flame" is performed as a specific image. Display effect by "effect" (display effect that gradually makes it easier to see the effect image that imitates the operation means, and in the third precursor effect, display effect by "water effect" as a specific image (effect image that imitates the operation means) By making the types of specific images different, such as by gradually making the display effect easier to see, it is possible to make those precursor effects different from each other. That is, in this case, the "cloud effect" is used. When the display effect is performed, it is possible to recognize that the first precursor effect is performed prior to the operation opportunity being given to the operation button 410, and the display effect by the "flame effect" is performed. At that time, it is recognizable that the second precursor effect is performed prior to the operation opportunity being given to the sword decoration body 5001, and when the display effect by the "water effect" is performed, the operation is performed. It becomes possible to recognize that the third precursor effect (specific operation-related effect) as to which of the button 410 and the sword decoration 5001 is given the operation opportunity is performed.

Then, when performing a precursory effect (at least one of the first precursory effect, the second precursory effect, and the third precursory effect) with such an effect content, an effect image in which the operation means is imitated by a specific image is displayed. It is desirable to generate the effect reception period for the operating means during the period when it is difficult to see. When such a configuration is applied to either the first precursor effect or the second precursor effect, the effect image imitating the operating means has a display mode with high expectation (for example, red) and a low expectation. Since the operation opportunity is given to the operation means from the stage when it is uncertain which of the display mode (for example, blue) is displayed, the effect is produced during the effect reception period. You will be able to improve your sex. In addition, even when such a configuration is applied to the third precursor effect (specific operation-related effect), the conviction as to which of the operation button 410 and the sword decoration 5001 is given an operation opportunity. Since the operation opportunity is given to the operation means from the stage when the sword cannot be held, the effectability during the effect reception period can be improved.

FIG. 260 is a diagram showing an effect example when the first precursor effect is performed with such an effect content, and FIG. 261 is an effect example when the first precursor effect is performed with the same content. It is a time chart which shows. Hereinafter, an example of the effect when the first precursor effect is performed will be described with reference to FIGS. 260 and 261. However, this example of the effect is not the first precursor effect but the second precursor effect and the third. It can also be applied to precursory effects.

In FIG. 260 (a), in the normal game state, the variation display of the decorative symbol SZ (special symbol) is performed by the effect display device 1600 with a specific effect pattern according to the result of the jackpot determination in the state where the number of holdings is 0. It shows the production situation.

FIG. 260 (b) shows an effect situation in which the first precursor effect is started during the execution of the variable display of the decorative symbol SZ shown in FIG. 260 (a).

Here, in the effect situation shown in FIG. 260 (b), the display effect by the "cloud effect" is performed in a large range within the display area of the effect display device 1600. The display effect by such a "cloud effect" gradually changes from the display area to non-display after the effect is started at the timing t1 shown in FIG. 261 (the transmittance of the specific image itself is increased. Or, the area where a specific image is displayed is reduced, etc.).

Then, in this effect example, as shown in FIG. 261, the effect acceptance period for the operation button 410 is set at the timing t2 in which the display effect by the “cloud effect” is gradually changing to non-display. Along with the occurrence, a button image BTG that imitates the operation button 410 and an instruction display (a bar display indicating the remaining time of the effect reception period) for prompting the operation of the operation button 410 are displayed (bar display). FIG. 260 (c).

In this production example, the button image BTG can be displayed in any of a plurality of modes, and when the button image BTG is displayed in the first display mode (for example, red), the second display mode (for example, red) is displayed. , Blue), the ratio of the operation-time effect being performed in a manner with high expectation is higher than when the button image BTG is displayed. In this regard, in the production situation shown in FIG. 260 (c), it is uncertain whether the button image BTG is displayed in the first display mode or the second display mode by the "cloud effect". However, when the operation button 410 is operated, the effect reception is performed and the operation-time effect corresponding to the effect reception is executed. That is, in this case, even in the display area of the effect display device 1600, the effect during operation is executed in a form in which the effect content is switched from such a precursor effect, so that the button image BTG is the first display mode and the first display mode. It becomes possible to advance the production without being sure of which of the two display modes is displayed.

Further, in the effect situation shown in FIG. 260 (c), it is not possible to be sure whether the button image BTG is displayed in the first display mode or the second display mode by the “cloud effect”. Despite this, the instruction display prompting the operation of the operation button 410 keeps changing the length of the bar display so as to suggest that the remaining time of the effect reception period is gradually decreasing.

On the other hand, when the predetermined time elapses from the occurrence of the production situation shown in FIG. 260 (c) at the timing t3, the production reception period generated at the timing t2 continues, and the “cloud effect” Is completely hidden (Fig. 260 (d)). In such a situation, the operation button 410 can be operated while it is easily recognizable whether the button image BTG is displayed in the first display mode or the second display mode. become able to. That is, in this case, the operation-time effect is executed in such a way that the effect content is switched from the effect shown in FIG. 260 (d).

According to such a configuration, in the production reception period (timing t2 to t4), the period from the display of the button image BTG until the "cloud effect" is completely hidden (timing t2 to t3). ), It becomes possible to provide the effectability by making the button image BTG relatively difficult to see.

In addition, in order to enhance the color rendering index during the production reception period (timing t2 to t4), the period during which the "cloud effect" is completely hidden (timing t3 to t4). It is desirable to perform an effect display that is not performed during the period of the above timings t2 to t3. In this production example, a message such as "press" is displayed during the period (timing t3 to t4) in which the "cloud effect" is completely hidden. For example, at timings t2 to t3. If the button image BTG displayed in the stop mode in the period is dynamically displayed in the period from timing t3 to t4, the effectability in the period (timing t3 to t4) can be more preferably enhanced. Will be able to.

Further, in the effect example shown in FIG. 260, the instruction display for prompting the operation of the operation button 410 and the button image BTG that imitates the operation button 410 are displayed at the same time (when the effect reception period occurs). The button image BTG that imitates the operation button 410 may be displayed before the production reception period occurs. That is, in this case, after the effect display by the "cloud effect" is performed, the effect situation in which the button image BTG is difficult to see first appears, and after a predetermined time from that situation, the effect situation is set to be difficult to see. Until then, the effect acceptance period for the operation button 410 occurs, and an instruction display for prompting the operation for the operation button 410 appears.

At this time, when the button image BTG is in a production situation where it is difficult to see before the production reception period occurs, the display mode of the button image BTG changes to a mode with higher expectation (third precursor). In the case of the production, the production pattern that changes from the button image BTG to the sword decoration image SYG) may appear. According to such a configuration, the more difficult it is to see the button image BTG, the more interesting it is to pay attention to the button image BTG. It becomes possible to maintain it favorably.

Further, in the production example shown in FIG. 260, the button image BTG is made difficult to see by the "cloud effect", but the instruction display for prompting the operation of the operation button 410 is affected by the "cloud effect". It was decided to display so that the visibility would be maintained without receiving it. As a result, it becomes possible to enjoy the change in the visibility of the button image BTG with peace of mind while grasping the remaining time of the production reception period.

However, the instruction display for prompting the operation of the operation button 410 may be affected by the "cloud effect" so that it is difficult to see until the timing t3. That is, in this case, it is possible to give the player a conflict as to whether or not to operate the operation button 410 without being sure of the display mode while the remaining time of the production reception period cannot be grasped well. It will be possible to provide an unprecedented novel color rendering.

Further, in the operation reception effect shown in FIG. 260, the above-mentioned or later-described “acceptance allowable sound” may be output. In this case, the "acceptable sound for reception" is output from the time when the operation button 410 is in a state where it is difficult to see by the "cloud effect".

In addition, when such "acceptable sound" is output in any of a plurality of modes having different expectations (the rate at which the jackpot symbol appears, including "0" and "100"), the button image BTG It will be possible to properly recognize the degree of expectation even before the whole appears, and it will be expected to improve the interest of the game.

When the production reception (operation) is performed while the "acceptable sound for reception" is being output, it is desirable that the "allowable sound for reception" in the output state is not output at that time. In addition, as for the "acceptable sound for reception", each configuration described above or described later may be appropriately adopted.

The "cloud effect" may be transparent, in which case the button image will be faintly visible behind it, but visibility will be maintained even with such a configuration. ..

The "cloud effect" itself may be displayed in any of a plurality of modes having different expectations (the rate at which the jackpot symbol appears, including "0" and "100"). In this case, although the operation button 410 functions to make it difficult to see, the game entertainment is improved when a high degree of expectation is suggested.

Before the "cloud effect" is displayed and completely hidden, the following production method is used to put a specific effect sound (BGM) into a suppressed mode or a silent output state, or to make it a non-output state. It may be adopted. In this way, the specific effect sound (BGM) that has been put into the suppressed mode or the silent output state or has been put into the non-output state is output in the non-suppressed state even when the player operates it. It will not be returned.

In addition, when such a directing property is applied to any of the first precursor effect, the second precursor effect, and the third precursor effect, the effect image that imitates the operation means after the start of the precursor effect is clear. Even if the length of the time until the specific image is made visible (the time until the specific image is hidden) is different from each other, the effect image is clear after the effect image imitating the operation means is displayed. It is desirable to set the time until the specific image becomes visible (the time until the specific image is hidden) at the same time. Further, when such an effect is applied to any of the precursor effects of the first precursor effect, the second precursor effect, and the third precursor effect, the operation means is imitated after the precursor effect is started. Regarding the length of time until the image is clearly visible (time until the specific image is hidden), prepare multiple of these so that multiple effects with different expectations are given. However, the time from when the effect image imitating the operation means is displayed until the effect image is clearly visible (the time until the specific image is hidden) is the same. It is desirable to set it to the time.

In addition, it is not always necessary to use another image (specific image) as a method of making it difficult to visually recognize the effect image imitating the operating means. For example, the effect image imitating the operation means is made to appear in a display mode (timing t2) that is relatively difficult to see due to a change in the setting of the transmittance of the effect image itself that imitates the operation means, and then relative. It may be gradually changed toward a display mode (timing t3) that is easy to visually recognize. However, the timing at which the effect image imitating the operating means appears in a display mode in which it is relatively difficult to see may be a timing before the timing t2, and in this case, the appearance itself in such a display mode itself. May be performed as a precursor effect, or while another display is performed as a precursor effect, the effect image imitating the operation means is made to appear in a display mode that is relatively difficult to see. May be good.

Further, when a specific effect pattern according to the result of the jackpot determination is executed, the specific operation-related effect described with reference to FIGS. 241 to 261 will be described in a specific effect state (automatic button effect state) described later. ) May occur only when it occurs. That is, at the time when a specific operation-related effect is started, it is kept secret which of the plurality of operation means can accept the effect, and as a result of the progress of the effect, a plurality of operation means are available. Since the production reception period corresponding to only one of the operating means will occur, if there is a delay in deciding which of the plurality of operating means should be operated, it is better than being operated by the player. It is possible that the production reception period will end after all the remaining time has been exhausted. In this regard, if a specific operation-related effect can be executed only when a specific effect state (automatic button effect state) described later is generated, the effect after the specific operation-related effect is performed. During the reception period, even if an image corresponding to any operation means appears as a result of the production of a specific operation-related effect, the player operates the operation means on the side to be operated and the automatic effect function. Since the production is accepted by any of the above and the post-operation production is always executed, it is possible to suitably maintain the game entertainment when a specific operation-related production is performed.

[Automatic button effect state]
As described above, in the pachinko machine 1 (peripheral control MPU1511a) according to this embodiment, control to the automatic button effect state (specific effect state) can be executed, and the pachinko machine 1 (peripheral control MPU1511a) is controlled to this automatic button effect state. When the effect reception period for the operation button 410 (more accurately, a predetermined effect pattern in which the effect reception period for the operation button 410 is set) occurs based on the result of the jackpot determination, the effect reception period is within the effect reception period. Even if the operation by the player is not received for the production, the process (automatic production function) that causes the same change as when the operation by the player is received for the production can be executed within the production reception period. There is. According to such an automatic button effect state, even if the operation is not performed every time the effect reception period occurs, the effect after the operation is generated when the operation is performed, so that the deterioration of the game interest due to forgetting to operate is suppressed. You will be able to. As for the automatic effect function, when the operation is performed, the same effect reception as when the operation actually occurs may be generated, so that the processing according to the effect reception may be performed, or the effect reception may be generated. The same processing as when there is a production reception may be performed without letting it.

In the embodiment relating to the "automatic effect function" described below, the above-mentioned operation-related techniques, effects, settings, and the like may be appropriately combined or replaced.

Here, in the pachinko machine 1 (peripheral control MPU1511a) according to this embodiment, the automatic button is operated by operating the operating means a plurality of times during the period in which the demo screen in which the symbol variation is not executed is displayed. The setting to the production state can be made. More specifically, after the menu screen is displayed by the first operation on the operation button 410, it is displayed in the menu screen by the second operation on the operation button 410 (or an operation means different from the operation button 410). The "Various settings" screen is selected so that the "Various settings" screen is displayed, and the "Various settings" screen is displayed by the third operation (or an operation means different from the operation button 410) for the operation button 410. When the "setting of the automatic button effect state" displayed in is selected, the setting to the automatic button effect state is made. It should be noted that only the operation button 410 may be operated a plurality of times, or the operation button 410 may be operated a plurality of times, and the operation for the operation button 410 and an operation for an operation means different from the operation button 410 may be operated a plurality of times.

On the other hand, during the period when the symbol variation is in the execution state, the operation button 410 can be set to the automatic button effect state only by operating the operation button 410 once. It is possible to set the automatic button effect state while keeping an eye on the progress of the effect while the pattern is changing. However, some players want to actively operate the operation button 410 regardless of whether or not the validity period has occurred, and from such a person, the operation button 410 is used. If the automatic button effect state is set just by operating it, the game interest may be reduced. Therefore, in the pachinko machine 1 according to this embodiment, in order to set the automatic button effect state during the period in which the symbol variation is in the execution state, the operation state for the operation button 410 is set for a predetermined time ( Here, it is required to operate this once in a mode maintained for 2 seconds (so-called "long press mode"). As a result, even if the operation button 410 is actively operated regardless of whether or not the valid period has occurred during the period in which the symbol change is in the execution state, the automatic button effect state is entered. It becomes possible to make it difficult for it to be set incorrectly. It is desirable that the automatic button effect state is not set even if the operation is performed in the long press mode when at least the effect reception period occurs during the period in which the symbol change is in the execution state. ..

On the other hand, in the pachinko machine 1 (peripheral control MPU1511a) according to this embodiment, even if the automatic button effect state is set and the setting is canceled, the demo screen in which the symbol change is not executed is displayed. Different operation modes are required during the displayed period and during the period when the symbol variation is in the execution state.

That is, during the period in which the demo screen in which the symbol change has not been executed is displayed, the setting of the automatic button effect state can be canceled by operating the operation means a plurality of times. More specifically, after the menu screen is displayed by the first operation on the operation button 410, it is displayed in the menu screen by the second operation on the operation button 410 (or an operation means different from the operation button 410). The "Various settings" screen is selected so that the "Various settings" screen is displayed, and the "Various settings" screen is displayed by the third operation (or an operation means different from the operation button 410) for the operation button 410. When "Release of automatic button effect state" displayed in is selected, the setting of automatic button effect state is canceled.

On the other hand, during the period when the symbol variation is in the execution state, the setting of the automatic button effect state can be canceled by operating the operation button 410 only once. It is possible to cancel the setting of the automatic button effect state while keeping an eye on the progress of the effect while the pattern is changing. However, unlike the case of setting the automatic button effect state, the operation button 410 is positioned in the operation state even if the operation state for the operation button 410 is not maintained for a predetermined time (even if the operation mode is not long-pressed). The automatic button effect state is canceled only when it is detected (just operated in a single operation mode). That is, it can be said that the fact that some operation is performed on the operation button 410 means that the desire to perform the operation on the operation button 410 appears. Therefore, when the operation is performed, the automatic button effect is produced. By canceling the setting of the state and returning to the normal production state at an early stage, it is expected that the game entertainment will be maintained favorably.

As described above, the pachinko machine 1 (peripheral control MPU1511a) according to this embodiment is configured to include a plurality of operation means including the operation button 410. In this respect, the pachinko machine 1 (peripheral control MPU1511a) according to this embodiment is different from the operation button 410 based on the result of the jackpot determination when it is in the automatic button effect state set by the operation on the operation button 410. Production reception period in which an operation opportunity is given to a specific operating means (for example, sword decoration body 5001 or the like) (more accurately, a predetermined production pattern in which the production reception period for the sword decoration body 5001 or the like is set) Is generated, and even if the operation by the player (operation on the sword decoration body 5001) is not received during the production reception period, the operation by the player (operation on the sword decoration body 5001) is performed during the production reception period. It is possible to execute a process (automatic production function) that causes the same change as when the production is received. According to such a configuration, is there a period during which the operation for the operation button 410 among the plurality of operation means (operation button 410, sword decoration body 5001 and the like) can be received, or another operation means (for example, for example). , When the above-mentioned effect (specific operation-related effect (see FIGS. 241 to 261)) regarding whether or not the operation for the sword decoration body 5001) can be accepted for the effect occurs, the effect result. Regardless of which of the operation button 410 and the sword decoration 5001 can be accepted for production, there is no need to worry about forgetting to operate it, so that such a specific operation-related production can be enjoyed with peace of mind. ..

Further, in the pachinko machine 1 (peripheral control MPU1511a) according to this embodiment,
-When the first side effect acceptance period in which the first operation means (for example, the operation button 410) is set as the operation target among the plurality of operation means occurs while being controlled to a specific effect state (automatic button effect state). , When the operation for the first operating means is not performed within the first side effect reception period, it is possible to execute an automatic process that causes the same change for the effect as when the operation for the first operating means is performed. Yes (first automatic production means),
-When controlled to a specific effect state (automatic button effect state), the second side effect reception period in which the second operation means (for example, sword decoration body 5001) is set as the operation target among the plurality of operation means is set. When it occurs, when the operation for the second operating means is not performed within the second side effect reception period, an automatic process for causing the same change as when the operation for the second operating means is performed is executed. It is possible (second automatic production means)
Regardless of whether the first-side production reception period or the second-side production reception period occurs, when the same specific time elapses after the period occurs, the first (1) Automatic processing by the automatic effect means or automatic processing by the second automatic effect means can be executed.

According to such a configuration, when controlled to a specific effect state (automatic button effect state), the first side effect reception period in which the first operation means is set as the operation target and the second operation means are the operation targets. Regardless of which of the second-side production reception period set as is within the execution period of the symbol change, the automatic production function can function when the same specific time elapses from the occurrence of those periods. Therefore, you will be able to enjoy the production with peace of mind.

However, when the first-side effect reception period in which the first operation means (for example, the operation button 410) is set as the operation target occurs, when a specific time elapses after the first-side effect reception period occurs. The automatic processing by the first automatic production means is executed when the automatic processing by the first automatic production means is executed and when a time different from the specific time elapses after the first side production reception period occurs. As in some cases, the production progress within the symbol variation may be performed. According to such a configuration, it was assumed that the automatic processing by the first automatic production means would be executed when a specific time elapses after the first side production reception period occurs, but the timing is different from this. Since the production is accepted and the production is automatically generated after the operation, it can function as a surprise production.

It should be noted that when the control is performed in a specific effect state (automatic button effect state), an operation opportunity is given to the operation means within the symbol variation period as compared with the case where the control is not performed in the specific effect state (auto button effect state). The ratio of the production reception period to be performed may be increased. That is, in this case, as the frequency of occurrence of the production reception period increases, it can be assumed that the frequency of forgetting to operate within the production reception period also increases, but even if the operation is forgotten, the automatic production is performed. Since the post-operation effect is executed by the functioning of the function, the effect reception period can be generated more frequently while suppressing the deterioration of the game interest due to the frequent occurrence of forgetting to operate. By the way, when controlled to a specific effect state (automatic button effect state), it is desirable that the rate of occurrence of both the effect reception period for the first operation means and the effect reception period for the second operation means is high. However, it is more desirable that the degree of increase in the occurrence rate differs between the effect reception period for the first operation means and the effect reception period for the second operation means.

Further, as described above, in the pachinko machine 1 (peripheral control MPU1511a) according to this embodiment,
-If the production reception conditions are met within the production reception period, the post-operation production can be executed (post-operation production execution means).
-It is possible to execute the process of establishing the production reception condition based on the operation performed by the player within the production reception period (player operation reception means).
-When the operation by the player is not performed within the production reception period, it is possible to execute the process of establishing the production reception condition without receiving the operation by the player at a specific timing within the production reception period (automatic production reception means). )
However, regarding the specific timing within the production reception period, it is set so that it will not arrive until at least half of the time set as the production reception period has elapsed from the start of the production reception period. I'm supposed to do it. As a result, a sufficient margin for the player to operate by himself / herself will be given before the automatic production function functions, and there will be an option to generate the production reception by the operation by the player. , It becomes possible to maintain the game entertainment hobby.

In this case, the automatic processing by the first automatic production means is executed when a specific time elapses after the first side production reception period occurs, and the specific time after the first side production reception period occurs. When the production progress within the symbol variation is performed so that the automatic processing by the first automatic effect means may be executed when a time different from the above "specific time" or the above "specific time" is used. Any of the "time different from" will be set as a time value longer than at least half of the time set as the first-side production reception period.

Here, if the effect reception period for the operation button 410 occurs during the execution period of the symbol change when the automatic button effect state is controlled, and the operation for the operation button 410 is received within the effect reception period, the effect is received. , The process of generating the post-operation effect according to the effect reception is executed. However, at this time, in addition to the process of generating the post-operation effect according to the effect reception, the process of canceling the setting of the automatic button effect state may also be performed.

Similarly, during the execution period of the symbol variation when controlled to the automatic button effect state, an effect reception period for an operation means (sword decoration body 5001 or the like) different from the operation button 410 occurs, and the effect reception Even if the operation for the sword decoration body 5001 is received within the period, the process of generating the post-operation effect according to the effect reception and the process of canceling the setting of the automatic button effect state are to be executed respectively. Is desirable. Also in this case, regarding the "post-operation production according to the production reception", the production reception period for the sword decoration body 5001 occurs during the period when the automatic button production state is not controlled, and the sword decoration is performed within the production reception period. The operation on the body 5001 is executed as an effect having the same content as the post-operation effect executed when the effect is received.

That is, after being controlled to the automatic button effect state (specific effect state), the desire to return to the effect state (normal effect mode) in which the effect can be advanced depending on the player's own operation (specific effect). The desire to end the condition) may occur. Such a desire often occurs when a production reception period occurs in which the player is given an operation opportunity, but a limited time from the start of the production reception period to the end of the production reception period. Within, it is difficult to perform both the operation to end a specific production state and the operation to allow the operation reception to be performed, and as a result, the operation opportunity may be lost. If there is, the interest in games may decline. In this regard, in the above configuration, when the effect reception period related to the specific effect occurs while being controlled to the automatic button effect state (specific effect state), the operation button is given an operation opportunity within the effect reception period. A process for ending the automatic button effect state (specific effect state) and a process that can cause a change in the effect by performing the operation on the 410 or the sword decoration body 5001 only once (only by operating in a single operation mode). (Processing to execute the effect after operation) is performed respectively, so the desire to end the automatic button effect state (specific effect state) and advance the effect depending on the player's own operation is accepted. Even if it occurs within the period, it becomes possible to smoothly switch the production state.

However, regarding the setting change related to the automatic button effect state (change of setting to automatic button effect state or cancellation of setting of automatic button effect state) during the period when the demo screen is displayed (state in which the symbol change is not executed). , The setting can be changed without requiring an operation on the sword decoration body 5001. That is, the sword decoration body 5001 is given an operation opportunity less frequently than the operation button 410 during the execution period of the symbol variation, and when the operation opportunity is given by that amount, a big hit is expected than the operation button 410. The degree is increased. Therefore, the operation on the sword decoration body 5001 is not allowed only for the purpose of changing the setting related to the automatic button effect state (specific effect state), and thereby the operation opportunity is given to the sword decoration body 5001. It can be said that it is more desirable to increase the premium feeling at the time and maintain the game entertainment. In the pachinko machine 1 according to this embodiment, during the period in which the demo screen in which the symbol change is not executed is displayed, the operating means (operation buttons) other than the sword decoration body 5001 among the plurality of operating means. By operating 410 or another operating means) multiple times, it is possible to set or cancel the setting to the automatic button effect state.

Therefore, in the pachinko machine 1 according to this embodiment, even during the execution period of the symbol change when the automatic button effect state is not controlled, the sword decoration body 5001 does not need to be operated to enter the automatic button effect state. Settings can be changed. That is, as described above, if the operation button 410 is operated once in the "long press mode", it is controlled to the automatic button effect state, but only the setting change to the automatic button effect state is performed. The operation on the sword decoration body 5001 is not allowed for the purpose of.

That is, in the pachinko machine 1 according to this embodiment, the case where the setting related to the automatic button effect state can be changed by the operation on the sword decoration body 5001 is the pattern when the automatic button effect state is controlled. Only when the production reception period for the sword decoration body 5001 occurs during the execution period of the fluctuation, the operation for the sword decoration body 5001 is received during the production reception period, and the post-operation production corresponding to the production is received. .. According to such a configuration, it is possible to change the setting to the automatic button effect state by operating the sword decoration body 5001 without impairing the premium feeling when the operation opportunity is given to the sword decoration body 5001. Will be.

In addition, as a plurality of operation means provided in the pachinko machine 1 (peripheral control MPU1511a) according to this embodiment, when the automatic button effect state is set, "automatic operation for generating an operation effect even if the pachinko machine 1 (peripheral control MPU1511a) is not operated within the effect reception period" In addition to the operation means (operation button 410, sword decoration 5001) that can be the target of the "effect function", the special operation means that is not the target of the "automatic effect function that generates an operation effect even if it is not operated during the effect reception period". May further be included. That is, in this case, when the effect reception period in which the operation opportunity for the special operation means is given occurs when the symbol variation is in the execution state, and the operation for the special operation means is received within the effect reception period, the effect is received. The degree of expectation for a big hit will be suggested by the post-operation production according to the production reception. However, even if the automatic button effect state is controlled, if the operation for the special operation means is not received within the effect reception period, the same post-operation effect as when the above effect is received will appear. There is no. However, in this case, the same post-operation effect as when the effect is received does not appear, but if the effect is different from the effect when the effect is received, it may appear.

Further, regarding the setting to the automatic button effect state using the operation button 410 (operation in the mode of long press), the effect acceptance period for the operation button 410 occurs during the period in which the symbol variation is in the execution state. Not only when, but also the effect reception period for the operation means other than the operation button 410 (the effect reception period where the expectation is suggested when the sword decoration 5001 is operated, and the expectation is suggested when the special operation means is operated. It is desirable that this is not allowed even if there is a production reception period, etc.). That is, when the operation button 410 is within the effect reception period for an operation means different from the operation button 410, the automatic button effect state is generated by operating the operation button 410 (operation in a long-pressed manner). In the middle of the production reception period, the "automatic production function that generates the production during operation without operating during the production reception period" is enabled to operate the original production reception (operation means different from the operation button 410). The production reception when the operation button is performed) may occur without any operation, and for a player who is not familiar with such an automatic button production state, is there a production reception period for the operation button 410, or the operation button 410? This is because it may be confusing whether the production reception period for the operation means different from the above has occurred, and there is a concern that this may reduce the interest in the game.

Further, as described above, in the pachinko machine 1 (peripheral control MPU1511a) according to this embodiment, the precursor effect can be executed prior to the occurrence of the effect reception period, but it is controlled to a specific effect state (automatic button effect state). A precursor effect that appears prior to the occurrence of the production reception period when it is not performed, and a precursor effect that appears prior to the occurrence of the production reception period when controlled to a specific production state (automatic button production state). It may be possible to execute it as a display mode different from the above. That is, in this case, it becomes possible to preliminarily recognize whether or not the automatic production function can function within the specific production reception period, and the production can be enjoyed with peace of mind.

Further, the pachinko machine 1 (peripheral control MPU1511a) according to this embodiment displays a specific image suggesting the remaining time (for example, "bar display" suggesting the remaining time) during the effect reception period. However, when the production reception period occurs, the specific image is specified so as to go to the specific area where the specific image is displayed at least until the specific image (for example, "bar display" suggesting the remaining time) is displayed. An effect image different from the specific image (for example, an image in which a lightning bolt falls toward a specific area) may be displayed (precursor effect) outside the area. That is, in this case, when the production reception period occurs, by confirming the movement of the production image different from the specific image, the "specific image suggesting the remaining time" in the hidden state is closely watched to the place where it will appear in the future. Since it becomes possible to prompt the player, it becomes possible to preferably suppress the occurrence of a situation in which the operation by the player is not in time and the specific production reception period ends. Even if the operation by the player is not in time, the post-operation effect is executed by the function of the automatic effect function, so that it is expected that the game enjoyment is appropriately maintained.

In the pachinko machine 1 according to this embodiment, it is possible to execute the state setting and the setting cancellation related to the automatic button effect state by the operation by the player. Based on the progress of the game or the effect, the state may be set to the automatic button effect state, or the setting of the automatic button effect state may be canceled. As an example in which the state can be set or canceled according to the progress of the game or the effect, for example, "While it is controlled to the normal game state, it is controlled as an automatic button effect state, but it is a big hit game state. And the control mode such as "The automatic button effect state is canceled when the state shifts to the high probability time saving state" and "The automatic button effect state is generated within the execution period of the symbol change, and the symbol change in the execution state ends. A control mode such as "generate an effect pattern that cancels the setting when a predetermined time elapses from the occurrence" or "generate an automatic button effect state over a period in which a plurality of symbol fluctuations are executed". It is possible to adopt a control mode such as, etc. Further, the pachinko machine 1 may be constantly controlled to the automatic button effect state. In this case, the setting of the automatic button effect state is not canceled, and the setting and cancellation of the "auto button effect state" are applied. Such processing itself will disappear.

Further, the timing at which the above-mentioned automatic production function functions may be a predetermined timing when the remaining time of the production reception period is exhausted or after that, or the remaining time of the production reception period is left. It may be an intermediate timing (specific timing). When the remaining time of the production reception period is exhausted, or when the above-mentioned automatic production function functions at a predetermined timing after that, the post-operation production is performed as if the production reception was performed after the production reception period was completed. It will be executed. On the other hand, when the above-mentioned automatic production function functions at an intermediate timing (specific timing) in which the remaining time of the production reception period is left, the above-mentioned automatic production function functions as in the case of actual operation. At that point (specific timing), the effect reception period ends and the effect is executed after the operation.

However, in order to ensure a sense of security that the post-operation effect will occur even if the operation is not performed while the automatic button effect state is controlled, until the effect reception period ends (effect reception). It is important to make the above-mentioned automatic effect function function at a specific timing within the period) to start the post-operation effect corresponding to the function. That is, in this case, when the above-mentioned automatic production function does not function even though the specific timing within the production reception period has arrived, the post-operation effect is generated by the player himself / herself operating after the specific timing has arrived. It is also possible to make it feel uneasy when it is controlled to the automatic button effect state (for example, it is mistaken that it is controlled to the automatic button effect state even though it is not controlled to the automatic button effect state. It is recognized and you may not be able to check the post-operation effect "," The automatic effect function may not work due to some trouble, and you may not be able to check the post-operation effect "). You will be able to.

The pachinko machine 1 according to this embodiment has a characteristic technique related to such an automatic button effect state. Hereinafter, the characteristic techniques related to the automatic button effect state will be described in order, but these characteristic techniques may be applied to each of the above-mentioned effect examples, and the following characteristic techniques may be applied. It may be used in an appropriate combination.

In explaining each of the following characteristic techniques, as a premise, in a specific effect state (automatic button effect state), when the specific effect state (automatic button effect state) is not normally controlled. When an effect reception period occurs, the same post-operation effect as when the operation is performed is generated even if the operation is not performed within the effect reception period. However, instead of this, a specific display effect (display effect that can be selected based on the result of the jackpot judgment) that can be executed only when controlled to a specific effect state (automatic button effect state) is prepared. When a specific valid period related to this is generated while the specific display effect is being performed, the same post-operation effect as when the operation is performed is generated even if the operation is not performed within the specific valid period. You may do it. According to such a configuration, the effectability when controlled to a specific effect state (automatic button effect state) is enhanced (improvement of the effectability by allowing the generation of a specific display effect). Of course, even if a specific effect state (automatic button effect state) occurs, the automatic effect function may not work during another effect reception period set when a specific display effect is not performed. On the other hand, during a specific valid period when a specific display effect is being performed, the automatic effect function functions so that you can enjoy the feeling of VIP by saving the trouble of operating it. Therefore, it is expected that the game entertainment will be enhanced. It should be noted that it is not always necessary to prevent the automatic production function from functioning in all of the other production reception periods set when a specific display production is not performed, and the automatic production is performed in at least a part of the production reception period. If the function cannot function, the above-mentioned effect will occur when a specific valid period occurs while a specific display effect is being performed (when an effect reception period in which the automatic effect function always functions occurs). It is possible to expect. Further, even when such a specific valid period occurs, if there is no operation by the player before the specific timing within the specific valid period arrives, the above-mentioned automatic effect function is made to function at the specific timing. It is desirable to start the post-operation production according to this.

Further, as specific display effects that can be executed based on the result of the jackpot determination, at least the first specific display effect, the second specific display effect, and the third specific display effect are prepared.
-If the first specific valid period occurs while the first specific display effect is being executed, the above-mentioned automatic effect occurs at the timing when the first predetermined time elapses after the first specific valid period occurs. While the function functions to end the first specific validity period and generate a post-operation effect corresponding to this,
-If a second specific valid period occurs while the second specific display effect is being executed, a second predetermined time longer than the first predetermined time after the second specific valid period occurs. The above-mentioned automatic effect function functions at the timing when the above-mentioned has elapsed, the second specific valid period is terminated, and the post-operation effect corresponding to this is generated.
-If a third specific valid period occurs while the third specific display effect is being executed, the third specific valid period is controlled even though it is controlled to a specific effect state (automatic button effect state). If there is no operation before the end of the operation, the same post-operation effect as when the operation was performed may be performed when each process is in a specific effect state, such as preventing the appearance of the post-operation effect. According to such a configuration, even if the effect acceptance period (specific valid period) occurs while being controlled to a specific effect state (automatic button effect state), the first effect is from the time when the effect acceptance period occurs. The above-mentioned automatic effect function may function when the predetermined time has elapsed, or the above-mentioned automatic effect function may not function until a second predetermined time longer than the first predetermined time has elapsed. Even if the production reception period ends, the above-mentioned automatic production function may not be able to function in the first place. Therefore, even if it is controlled to a specific effect state (automatic button effect state), it is confirmed which type of specific display effect was performed when the effect acceptance period (specific valid period) occurred. For example, when the above-mentioned automatic effect function does not function even though the first predetermined time has elapsed, the above-mentioned is described when the second predetermined time elapses. It becomes possible to advance the production with a sense of tension, such as whether the automatic production function of the above works or the above-mentioned automatic production function does not work in the first place. The first specific valid period, the second specific valid period, and the third specific valid period are all when the operating means (for example, the operation button 410) to be operated is in the operating state (so-called). When a single operation is performed), the effect is received and a post-operation effect is generated.

The first specific display effect, the second specific display effect, and the third specific display effect can be executed only when the specific effect state (automatic button effect state) is controlled. There may be. In this way, when controlled to a specific effect state (automatic button effect state), a display mode that cannot appear when not controlled to the specific effect state (automatic button effect state) can be displayed. If this is the case, it becomes possible to suitably maintain the gaming interest when the player is in a specific effect state (automatic button effect state). In addition, a first specific display effect (first specific effective period) and a second specific display effect (second specific effective period) are prepared, and a third specific display effect (third specific effective period) is provided. Does not necessarily have to be prepared. Further, the post-operation effects generated when the effects are received in the first specific valid period, the second specific valid period, and the third specific valid period may have different production contents.

In addition, when the post-operation effect is generated by the function of the above-mentioned automatic effect function, at what timing within the effect reception period the automatic effect function functions (when the effect is received, which is the effect reception period). The automatic production function worked for the bar display (display that changes the image (here, the area changes) with the passage of time) showing the remaining time of the production reception period so that it can be recognized (whether only the time was left). It is also possible to generate the post-operation effect in the state where this is displayed instead of being hidden at the time point. According to such a configuration, for example, by checking the remaining time indicated by the "bar display" that is continuously displayed when the automatic effect function is activated, the effect acceptance period is the first specific valid period ( A relatively early stage after the production reception period occurs, the period during which the automatic production function functions when the first predetermined time elapses) and the second specific valid period (relatively after the production reception period occurs). It becomes possible to recognize which of the later stage, the period during which the automatic effect function operates when the second predetermined time elapses).

In this sense, when the first specific validity period (the period during which the automatic production function functions when the first predetermined time elapses after the production reception period occurs) and the second specific validity period (the second specific validity period () The jackpot expectation is different from when the second predetermined time elapses after the production reception period occurs (for example, the second specific valid period is more advantageous). It is desirable to do so. Further, in this case, the first specific display effect and the second specific display effect may not necessarily be executed. However, if the first specific display effect or the second specific display effect is executed, a big hit is expected when the first specific display effect appears and when the second specific display effect appears. It functions so that the degree is different (for example, the second specific display effect is more advantageous). Further, when the post-operation effect is generated by the operation by the player within the effect reception period, the "bar display" may be hidden in the state where the post-operation effect is generated, or the above-mentioned automatic effect function may be hidden. As in the case where is functioning, the "bar display" may not be hidden and the post-operation effect may be generated in the state where the "bar display" is displayed. The post-operation effect does not have to be executed as a display change in the effect display device 1600, and is, for example, executed as a light emission by a lamp provided on the game board 5 or an operation by a movable decorative body. May be good.

Further, when the post-operation effect is generated by the above-mentioned automatic effect function, the player does not participate in the operation means (for example, the operation button 410) that is the operation target after the operation. Since the effect is automatically generated, there is a concern that the player may not be able to grasp which operation means the automatically generated post-operation effect corresponds to. Therefore, when the above-mentioned automatic effect function is activated to generate a post-operation effect, first, an operation target suggestion image suggesting an operation means to be operated within the effect reception period (for example, an operation to be operated). In addition to displaying an image display that imitates the means), even if the above-mentioned automatic effect function functions, the post-operation effect is generated in the state where the operation target suggestion image is displayed without being hidden. It is desirable to. In this case, the display mode (for example, color, transmittance, etc.) of the operation target suggestion image does not necessarily have to be the same before and after the post-operation effect occurs, and the operation means that was the operation target. It suffices if it is possible to recognize which was the case even in the state where the effect is generated after the operation. On the other hand, when the post-operation effect is generated by the operation by the player within the effect reception period, the operation target suggestion image may be hidden in the state where the post-operation effect is generated, or the above-mentioned automatic operation may be hidden. As in the case where the effect function functions, the post-operation effect may be generated in the state where the operation target suggestion image is displayed without being hidden. Whenever the above-mentioned automatic effect function functions, such as when the automatic effect function functions within the above-mentioned first specific valid period or when the automatic effect function functions within the above-mentioned second specific effective period, It is also possible to generate the post-operation effect in the state where the operation target suggestion image is displayed instead of being hidden.

At this time, if the post-operation effect is generated while the operation target suggestion image is displayed in any of a plurality of modes having different jackpot expectations, both the mode of the operation target suggestion image and the mode of the post-operation effect are both generated. Will be able to be confirmed at the same time, and it will be possible to improve the interest of the game. Further, the post-operation effect does not have to be executed as a display change in the effect display device 1600, and is, for example, executed as a light emission by a lamp provided on the game board 5 or an operation by a movable decorative body. There may be.

Further, when an effect that generates an effect reception period in which an operation opportunity is given to an operation means (any of a plurality of operation means) is referred to as an "operation system effect", the operation system effect is related to this. It may be executed in parallel with another specific effect (for example, a movable body effect, a count effect, etc.) that does not have. However, in this case, when the "operation system effect" is executed but the "another specific effect unrelated to this" is not executed, the "operation system effect" and "another specific effect unrelated to this" are not executed. It is desirable that the ratio of the above-mentioned automatic effect function functioning is higher than that in the case where the "specific effect" is performed in parallel. That is, when the "operation system production" and "another specific production unrelated to this" are in parallel, it is assumed that the production reception is not performed in the "operation system production" and the post-operation production is not executed. However, since "another specific effect that has nothing to do with this" is in the execution state, the decline in the interest in the game can be suppressed, while the "operation system effect" is executed but "another effect that has nothing to do with this". When the "specific effect" is not executed, if the effect is not accepted in the "operation system effect" and the effect is not executed after the operation, no effect will be executed. Therefore, it is inevitable that the interest in games will decline. Therefore, when the "operation system effect" is executed but the "another specific effect unrelated to this" is not executed, the "operation system effect" and "another specific effect unrelated to this" are not executed. By increasing the ratio of the above-mentioned automatic effect function functioning compared to the case where the "effect" is performed in parallel, it is possible to preferably maintain the game entertainment when the operation system effect occurs. become. The ratio may be 100%. By the way, when the production reception period occurs, the precursory production that is performed before that, the production that the operation means to be operated operates, etc. are executed as "operation system production" or related production. It can be said that it is a thing. Further, as "another specific effect", for example, if it is generated before the start of the effect reception period (preferably a precursor effect), it is suggested in advance that the ratio of the above-mentioned automatic effect function functioning increases. You will be able to. In this case, it is desirable that the effect is executed as an effect that ends after the end of the effect reception period (preferably the post-operation effect). On the other hand, as "another specific effect", for example, if it is executed as an effect that occurs after the start of the effect reception period (preferably a precursor effect) and ends before the end of the effect reception period. It becomes possible to recognize only immediately before whether the above-mentioned automatic effect function is in a high rate of functioning, and it becomes possible to provide the effect in a tense atmosphere. In this regard, if the "other specific effect" is to be generated before the start of the effect reception period (preferably the precursor effect), the "other specific effect" is performed multiple times within one symbol variation. If it is performed, it will be executed even when the production reception period does not occur, so the ratio of the automatic production function functioning when "another specific production" is executed is high. It will be possible to give a sense of tension as to whether the production reception period will occur.

In addition, when in a specific effect state (automatic button effect state), the loss variation according to the result of the jackpot determination is sequentially digested, and the number of executions is a specific value (for example, the loss variation is executed 999 times in succession. Until the 1000th loss fluctuation) is reached, an effect reception period in which an operation opportunity is given to the operation means (any of a plurality of operation means) based on the result of the jackpot determination may occur with a predetermined probability. In addition, even if the effect reception period occurs, the above-mentioned automatic effect function may or may not function when there is no operation by the player. On the other hand, when in a specific effect state (automatic button effect state), the loss variation according to the result of the jackpot determination is sequentially digested, and the number of executions is a specific value (for example, 999 consecutive loss variations are executed). Then, when the 1000th loss variation) is reached, in the symbol variation (effect pattern) that reaches the specific value, there is an operation opportunity for the operation means (any of a plurality of operation means) regardless of the result of the jackpot determination. Is always generated, and even if there is no operation by the player within the production reception period, the above-mentioned automatic production function is activated and the player operates within the production reception period. It is also possible to execute a process that always generates the same post-operation effect as at the time. According to such a configuration, when the number of continuous executions of the loss fluctuation reaches a specific value, "the player should be operated every time the production reception period occurs while the loss fluctuation is continuously executed. Even though I was urging them to do so, I couldn't get any results. ”As if I felt the responsibility so far, even if there was no operation by the player, the pachinko machine 1 itself always functions the automatic production function. Since it is realized as a directing effect, it becomes possible to suitably maintain the game entertainment taste. At this time, in the production reception period that occurs when the loss fluctuations are sequentially digested and the number of executions reaches a specific value (for example, the 1000th loss fluctuation), the loss fluctuations are sequentially digested and executed. A special display image (for example, "operate") that is different from the display image (for example, "operate") that appeared during the production reception period until the number of times reaches a specific value (for example, loss fluctuation up to 999 times). It is desirable to make "If it is troublesome, I will operate it on your behalf" etc.). In addition, even after the symbol variation (effect pattern) that has reached a specific value is digested, the symbol variation is consumed each time the symbol variation is digested until a specific condition (for example, the occurrence of a big hit game state) is satisfied. In the (effect pattern), a special display image (for example, "for example," If it is troublesome, I will operate it on your behalf. " It is desirable to execute the process that always generates the effect after the operation.

In addition, when in a specific effect state (automatic button effect state), the loss variation according to the result of the jackpot determination is sequentially digested, and the number of executions is a specific value (for example, the loss variation is executed 999 times in succession. The number of remaining fluctuations until the 1000th loss fluctuation) may be displayed.

In addition, while the symbol is in the specific effect state (automatic button effect state), the first operation is performed during the symbol change until the loss variation according to the result of the jackpot determination is sequentially digested and the number of executions reaches the specific value. Both the effect reception period for the means and the effect reception period for the second operation means can occur, but in the symbol variation when the loss variation is sequentially digested and the number of executions reaches a specific value. , Only one of the effect reception period for the first operation means and the effect reception period for the second operation means always occurs, and the other side may advance the effect so that it cannot occur. According to such a configuration, since the operation opportunity is always given to the same operation means, it is preferably suppressed that the production reception period occurs and the expectation is given to itself. You will be able to get it. However, this production example has achieved some results even though it has urged the player to operate each time the production reception period occurs while the loss fluctuation is continuously executed. There was no such thing. ”As if I felt the responsibility so far, even if there was no operation by the player, the pachinko machine 1 itself is realized as a production that always functions the automatic production function, so it is transient. A production acceptance period is generated for the first operation means (for example, the operation button 410) on the side where the degree of expectation at the time of occurrence is relatively low so as not to have any more expectations, and the second operation means (for example, for example) is generated. It is desirable not to generate the production reception period for the sword decoration body 5001).

Further, the first effect reception period in which an operation opportunity is given to the first operation means (for example, the operation button 410) among the plurality of operation means is controlled to a specific effect state (automatic button effect state). It can occur in both the case where it is not and when it is controlled to a specific effect state (automatic button effect state), but the second operation means among the plurality of operation means (for example, the sword decoration body 5001). The second effect reception period, in which an operation opportunity is given to the object, cannot occur when it is not controlled to a specific effect state (automatic button effect state), and is controlled to a specific effect state (automatic button effect state). It may be made possible when it is done. According to such a configuration, it is possible to enhance the effectability when controlled to a specific effect state (automatic button effect state), and when the specific effect state (automatic button effect state) is present. You will be able to maintain the color rendering index of.

Further, as described above, in the pachinko machine 1 (peripheral control MPU1511a) according to this embodiment, when the effect reception period is generated based on the result of the jackpot determination,
-Displays a copy image (operation target suggestion image suggesting the operation target to be operated) that imitates the operation means (model image display means).
-If an operation is performed by the player while the image is displayed after the effect reception period has occurred, the post-operation effect can be executed based on the operation (player operation reception means).
-After the production reception period occurs, if a specific timing arrives without the player performing the operation while the image is displayed, the post-operation production can be executed without receiving the operation by the player ( Automatic production reception means)
However, the image is displayed in one of a plurality of modes in which the ratio (expectation degree) at which the post-operation effect is executed in the "player-friendly mode" when the effect is received is different. It is desirable to be able to do it. According to such a configuration, the degree of expectation can be recognized regardless of whether the post-operation effect is generated by the player operation reception means or the post-operation effect is generated by the automatic effect reception means. It will be possible to generate an effect after the operation.

Further, when the post-operation effect is generated by the above-mentioned automatic effect function, the player does not participate in the operation means (for example, the operation button 410) that is the operation target after the operation. Since the effect is automatically generated, there is a concern that the player may not be able to grasp which operation means the automatically generated post-operation effect corresponds to. Therefore, when the above-mentioned automatic effect function is to be activated to generate a post-operation effect, first, a copy image (an operation target suggestion image suggesting an operation target to be operated) is displayed within the effect reception period, and the operation target suggestion image is displayed. Even when the above-mentioned automatic effect function functions, it is desirable that the post-operation effect is generated in the state where the copied image is displayed without being hidden. In this case, the display mode (for example, color, transmittance, etc.) of the operation target suggestion image does not necessarily have to be the same before and after the post-operation effect occurs, and the operation means that was the operation target. It suffices if it is possible to recognize which was the case even in the state where the effect is generated after the operation. On the other hand, when the post-operation effect is generated by the operation by the player within the effect reception period, the operation target suggestion image may be hidden in the state where the post-operation effect is generated, or the above-mentioned automatic operation may be hidden. As in the case where the effect function functions, the post-operation effect may be generated in the state where the operation target suggestion image is displayed without being hidden. The post-operation effect may be performed using at least an area of the effect display device 1600 that is different from the area where the image is displayed, or a light emitting or movable decorative body by a lamp provided on the game board 5. It may be executed as an operation by.

At this time, if the image is displayed in one of a plurality of modes having different expectations, the expectation (image) suggested within the effect reception period even when the effect is generated after the operation. Display mode) can be confirmed.

The image that is continuously displayed in this way is hidden after the effect is generated after the operation. However, what is the case where the automatic processing by the first automatic production means is executed when a specific time elapses after the first side production reception period occurs, and the specific time after the first side production reception period occurs? The time from when the post-operation effect is executed until the image is hidden is also different from the case where the automatic process by the first automatic effect means is executed when different times elapse. Is desirable. According to such a configuration, it is possible to recognize whether the post-operation effect is generated by the automatic processing when a specific time elapses or the post-operation effect is generated by the automatic process when a time different from the specific time elapses. Even if it does not exist, by checking the time from when the post-operation effect is executed until the image is hidden, it becomes possible to recognize at what time the post-operation effect occurred. ..

In addition, when the post-operation effect is generated by the automatic processing when the specific time elapses, and when the post-operation effect is generated by the automatic processing when the time different from the specific time elapses, the big hit is determined by the big hit judgment. The degree of expectation obtained may be different.

Further, when the effect reception period in which the player is given an operation opportunity occurs while being controlled to a specific effect state (automatic button effect state), two displays are displayed during the effect reception period. One of the modes (for example, a low expectation display mode with a relatively low jackpot expectation, a high expectation display mode with a relatively high jackpot expectation) can appear, and a high expectation display mode (for example, a red operation image) can be displayed. ) Appears, even if the operation is not performed within the production reception period, the production reception (automatic production function always functions) is performed and the post-operation production according to the production reception is executed, but the low expectation display is displayed. When an aspect (for example, a blue operation image) appears, when the operation is not performed within the effect reception period, the effect reception (automatic effect function functions) is performed and the post-operation effect corresponding to the effect reception is executed. In some cases, the effect is not accepted (the automatic effect function is functioning) and the effect is not executed after the operation. That is, if a high-expected display mode (for example, a red operation image) appears and the operation is forgotten, it is inevitable that the post-operation effect cannot be confirmed, but the low expectation is low. When the display mode (for example, the blue operation image) appears, it is assumed that the game interest does not deteriorate so much even if the operation is forgotten, so that the highly expected display mode (for example, the red operation image) appears. Occasionally, if you forget to operate, the automatic production function must be activated within the production reception period to avoid the deterioration of the game entertainment due to forgetting to operate, but the low expectation display mode (for example, blue operation). If you forget to operate when the image) appears, make sure that the automatic production function does not function within the production reception period so that you can feel the tension in playing so that you do not forget to operate it. It will be expected to raise the player's participation consciousness. When not controlled to a specific effect state (automatic button effect state), a low expectation display mode (for example, a blue operation image) appears, but a high expectation display mode (for example, a red operation image) appears. It may not be possible to appear. Further, during the production reception period, any one of three or more display modes may appear.

Then, in each of the characteristic techniques described below, another example relating to these automatic button effect states may be appropriately applied and implemented.

[Suggestion of expectations by automatic production function]
As described above, in the automatic button effect state, even if the player does not perform the operation within the effect reception period (when the above alternative example is applied, the first specific valid period or the second specific valid period), the said It is possible that a process (automatic effect function) that causes the same change as when the operation is performed on the effect can be executed. In this respect, in the pachinko machine 1 (peripheral control MPU1511a) according to this embodiment, in the automatic button effect state, when the operation by the player is not received during the effect reception period, the same change as when the effect is received. It is possible to generate an effect pattern in which the process (automatic effect function) that causes the effect is not executed. At this time, in the automatic button effect state, when the operation by the player is not received within the effect reception period and the automatic effect function does not function, the symbol changes as compared with the case when the automatic effect function functions. In, it is possible to execute a process in which the effect within the symbol variation is advanced so that the degree of expectation (ratio) at which the jackpot symbol appears is low. At this time, the degree of expectation (ratio) at which the jackpot symbol appears may be 0%.

According to such a configuration, when the effect reception period for the operation button 410 occurs in the automatic button effect state, the automatic effect function is activated when the operation for the operation button 410 is intentionally not performed within the effect reception period. By confirming whether or not it functions, it is possible to grasp the degree of expectation as to whether or not the jackpot symbol appears due to the symbol fluctuation in the executing state. That is, in this case, in the automatic button effect state, "the post-operation effect itself, which should have been confirmed if only the effect reception (operation for the operation button 410) was performed within the effect reception period, cannot be confirmed". While there is a risk that a directing demerit may occur, a novel directing property such as forcing the player to exercise a directing selection such as "do not dare to operate the operation button 410 within the directing reception period". It is expected that the game will be maintained favorably.

Further, as described above, in the pachinko machine 1 (peripheral control MPU1511a) according to this embodiment, it is possible to receive an operation on the operation button 410 among a plurality of operation means (operation button 410, sword decoration body 5001 and the like). The above-mentioned effect (specific operation-related effects (FIGS. 241 to 261)) regarding whether a period occurs or whether an operation for another operation means (for example, the sword decoration body 5001) can be accepted for the effect occurs. )) Is executable. In this respect, in the automatic button effect state, in the effect reception period that occurs in response to such a specific operation-related effect, those effects are compared with the effect reception period that occurs without executing the specific operation-related effect. It is possible to execute a process in which the effect is advanced within the symbol variation so that the ratio of the above-mentioned automatic effect function functioning is increased when there is no operation (effect reception) within the reception period. At this time, the ratio at which the automatic effect function functions may be 100%.

According to such a configuration, the execution of a specific operation-related effect before the effect acceptance period occurs itself also functions as an effect suggesting that the above-mentioned automatic effect function functions at a high rate. Since it becomes possible to do so, it becomes possible to more preferably improve the game entertainment when a specific operation-related effect is executed.

Further, as described above, in the specific operation-related effect, the operation opportunity is given to the sword decoration body 5001 more than when it is shown that the operation button 410 is given the operation opportunity as the effect result. When it is shown that it is given, it is set so that the expectation that the jackpot symbol will appear due to the symbol fluctuation in the executing state is higher. However, in the automatic button effect state, the ratio of the above-mentioned automatic effect function to function when there is no operation (effect reception) within the effect reception period generated in response to a specific operation-related effect is set to the operation button 410. On the other hand, it is more desirable to set the ratio so that the ratio is the same when it is shown that the operation opportunity is given and when it is shown that the operation opportunity is given to the sword decoration body 5001.

According to such a configuration, a production situation with a relatively low expectation (suggesting that an operation opportunity is given to the operation button 410) appears as a production result of a specific operation-related effect. However, since the ratio of the above-mentioned automatic effect function functioning is not changed by this (the effect result of a specific operation-related effect), this is the expectation that the above-mentioned automatic effect function will function. It becomes possible to maintain it suitably. In this way, two different effects (specific operation-related effects, suggestion of expectation level by the automatic effect function) that are not affected by each other's effect results can be performed in parallel to enhance the interest of the game.

Hereinafter, specific examples of the effect in which the degree of expectation is suggested by such an automatic effect function will be described with reference to FIGS. 262 to 264.

FIG. 262 (a) shows that the number of holds is 3 in the automatic button effect state, and the variation display of the decorative symbol SZ (special symbol) is displayed on the effect display device 1600 with a specific effect pattern according to the result of the jackpot determination. It shows the production situation being performed. As shown in the figure, a display indicating that the automatic button effect state is controlled within the display area of the effect display device 1600 during the period controlled by the automatic button effect state (here, "auto button"). "Setting") appears continuously.

FIG. 262 (b) shows an effect situation in which a specific effect reception period for the operation button 410 occurs during execution of the variable display of the decorative symbol SZ shown in FIG. 262 (a). As shown in the figure, during a specific effect reception period, the button image BTG corresponding to the operation button 410 is displayed in the display area, and an instruction display prompting the operation of the operation button 410 (here, "press"). ”And a bar display indicating the remaining time of a specific production reception period) are displayed. At this time, the operation button 410 to which the operation opportunity is given is in a light emitting state, which also prompts the operation of the operation button 410.

Here, assuming that the operation for the operation button 410 is received within the specific effect reception period shown in FIG. 262 (b), the specific decorative member SDY (sudare) is used as the post-operation effect according to the effect reception. In addition to producing the effect (such as), there are multiple modes with different expectations even within the display area (for example, "chance!" With relatively low expectations, "super heat!" With relatively high expectations, etc.). Either will be displayed. At this time, the automatic button effect state is canceled and returned to the normal effect state, and the specific effect reception period ends when the effect is received without exhausting the remaining time.

On the other hand, in the production situation shown in FIG. 262 (b), when the operation button 410 is not operated within the specific production reception period (when the production reception does not occur), the ratio is 60%. The above-mentioned automatic effect function does not function, and the above-mentioned automatic effect function functions at a rate of 40%.

That is, when the above-mentioned automatic effect function does not function at a rate of 60%, as shown in FIG. 262 (c), the operation for the operation button 410 is not received within the specific effect acceptance period. As a result, the post-operation effect that should have occurred as long as the effect reception is performed is not executed. After that, the production is progressed in the form of forming a reach state after a predetermined time from the occurrence of the specific production reception period.

On the other hand, when the above-mentioned automatic effect function functions at a rate of 40%, as shown in FIG. 262 (d), even though the operation button 410 was not operated within the specific effect reception period. , The post-operation production with the same contents as when the operation is performed within the specific production reception period and the production reception is performed will be executed. That is, as described above, in the post-operation effect generated by the effect reception within the specific effect reception period, the specific decorative member SDY (sudare) is operated and the degree of expectation is different in the display area. One of multiple modes (for example, "chance!" Or "super heat!") Is displayed, but a post-operation effect occurs depending on the operation within a specific effect reception period. In both cases, the mode of being displayed in the display area is the same as that of the case where the effect is generated after the operation due to the function of the automatic effect function. After that, as shown in FIG. 262 (e), the production progresses in the form of forming a reach state after a predetermined time from the occurrence of the specific production reception period.

In this regard, in the pachinko machine 1 (peripheral control MPU1511a) according to this embodiment, a specific effect reception period is generated as "the effect reception period in which the above-mentioned automatic effect function functions", or "the above-mentioned automatic effect function". Is determined (selected) based on the result of the jackpot judgment when executing the symbol change, and as a result, 60% in a specific production reception period. The above-mentioned automatic effect function does not function at a rate of 40%, and the above-mentioned automatic effect function functions at a rate of 40%. For example, when a big hit is won as a result of the big hit judgment, the selection table for winning is referred to, and based on the distribution ratio in the selection table for the corresponding selection, "the above-mentioned automatic effect function functions. "Period" or "Production reception period when the above-mentioned automatic production function does not work" will be generated, and when a big hit is lost as a result of the big hit judgment, the selection table for the time of the loss is referred to, and the selection table for the time of the loss is referred to. Based on the distribution ratio in the selection table, the "effect reception period in which the above-mentioned automatic effect function functions" or the "effect reception period in which the above-mentioned automatic effect function does not function" is generated. As a result, the above-mentioned automatic effect function does not function at a rate of 60% and the above-mentioned automatic effect function functions at a rate of 40% during a specific effect reception period.

Moreover, in the pachinko machine 1 (peripheral control MPU1511a) according to this embodiment, when a specific effect reception period is generated as the "effect reception period in which the above-mentioned automatic effect function functions", "the above-mentioned Which of those periods should be generated so that the rate at which the jackpot symbol appears when the symbol fluctuation is stopped is higher than when it is generated as the "effect reception period in which the automatic effect function does not work". Is determined (selected) based on the result of the jackpot determination.

According to such a configuration, the automatic production function functions when the production reception period occurs, in which it is determined that a highly expected mode (such as "super heat!") Appears as a post-operation production when the production is accepted. While the ratio of performing is relatively high, when the production reception period occurs, it is decided that a mode with low expectation (such as "chance!") Will appear as a post-operation production. The rate at which the function works becomes relatively low. Therefore, when the effect reception period for the operation button 410 occurs in the automatic button effect state, whether or not the automatic effect function functions when the operation for the operation button 410 is intentionally not performed within the effect reception period is determined. By confirming it, it is possible to grasp the degree of expectation as to whether or not the jackpot symbol appears due to the symbol fluctuation in the executing state. That is, in this case, in the automatic button effect state, "the post-operation effect itself, which should have been confirmed if only the effect reception (operation for the operation button 410) was performed within the effect reception period, cannot be confirmed". While there is a risk that a directing demerit may occur, a novel directing property such as forcing the player to exercise a directing selection such as "do not dare to operate the operation button 410 within the directing reception period". It is expected that the game will be maintained favorably.

However, as shown in FIG. 262 (d), even if the automatic effect function functions when the operation button 410 is intentionally not operated within the effect reception period, it is expected as a post-operation effect. Since low-level modes (such as "chance!") Can also appear, even if it is suggested that the automatic effect function has a relatively high degree of expectation, this The suggestion of continuous expectations (suggestion by the function of the automatic production function, suggestion by the mode of post-operation production) will realize the performance that will not let you down, and it will be possible to maintain the game entertainment hobby. You will be expected.

Further, as shown in FIG. 262 (c), even if the automatic production function does not function when the operation button 410 is intentionally not operated within the production reception period, the production reception is performed. If this is done, there is a possibility that a highly expected aspect has appeared in the post-operation production that should have appeared, so it is expected that the game entertainment will be maintained favorably. However, when the effect situation shown in FIG. 262 (c) (the situation in which the automatic effect function does not function and the effect does not appear after the operation) appears, the effect situation (automatic effect function) shown in FIG. 262 (d) appears. Worked, but it is desirable that the expectation is lower than when a mode with low expectation appears as a post-operation effect).

In FIGS. 263 and 264, when the effect reception period corresponding to a specific operation-related effect (see FIGS. 241 to 261) occurs in the automatic button effect state, the effect suggests the degree of expectation by the automatic effect function. A concrete example is shown.

FIG. 263 (a) shows that the number of holds is 3 in the automatic button effect state, and the variation display of the decorative symbol SZ (special symbol) is displayed on the effect display device 1600 with a specific effect pattern according to the result of the jackpot determination. It shows the production situation being performed. Also in this example, as shown in the figure, a display indicating that the automatic button effect state is controlled within the display area of the effect display device 1600 during the period controlled by the automatic button effect state (here, the display indicates that the automatic button effect state is controlled). , "Auto button is being set") appears continuously.

FIG. 263 (b) shows a specific operation-related effect illustrated in FIGS. 243 to 246 (a specific operation-related effect illustrated separately) during execution of the variation display of the decorative symbol SZ shown in FIG. 263 (a). (It may be a production) indicates the production status at which the production has started. That is, as described above, in the specific operation-related effects exemplified in FIGS. 243 to 246, the operation opportunity is given to the operation button 410, and the operation opportunity is given to the sword decoration body 5001. The common display effect is performed in the above, and while the common display effect is being performed, it is kept secret whether the operation button 410 or the sword decoration 5001 is given an operation opportunity. .. However, when a predetermined time elapses from the start of a specific operation-related effect, a production situation indicating that the operation button 410 should be operated appears as a first effect result with a relatively low expectation. As a result of the second effect with a relatively high degree of expectation, an effect state indicating that the sword decoration body 5001 should be operated appears, so that the operation button 410 with a relatively low degree of expectation and the degree of expectation are relatively high. It will be shown which of the high sword ornaments 5001 is given the operation opportunity.

FIG. 263 (c) shows that the operation button 410 should be operated as the first effect result having a relatively low expectation as a result of performing the specific operation-related effect shown in FIG. 263 (b). The effect status indicating that the effect has been received for the operation button 410 has appeared. In this effect situation, as shown in the figure, the button image BTG corresponding to the operation button 410 is displayed in the display area, and an instruction display for prompting the operation of the operation button 410 (here, "press" etc.) is displayed. Character display and bar display showing the remaining time of a specific production reception period) are displayed. At this time, the operation button 410 to which the operation opportunity is given is in a light emitting state, which also prompts the operation of the operation button 410.

Here, assuming that the operation for the operation button 410 is received within the effect reception period shown in FIG. 263 (c), the specific decorative member SDY (such as a bamboo blind) is used as the post-operation effect according to the effect reception. One of a plurality of modes (for example, "chance!" With relatively low expectation or "super heat!" With relatively high expectation) with different expectations in the display area while operating the effect. It will be displayed. At this time, the automatic button effect state is canceled and returned to the normal effect state, and the specific effect reception period ends when the effect is received without exhausting the remaining time.

On the other hand, in the production situation shown in FIG. 263 (c), when the operation button 410 is not operated within the production reception period (when the production reception does not occur), the above-mentioned ratio is 20%. The automatic effect function of is not functioning, and the above-mentioned automatic effect function is functioning at a rate of 80%.

That is, in the specific operation-related effect (specific display effect), the player side is confused as to which of the operation button 410 and the sword decoration body 5001 is enabled, and as a result, it is appropriate within the effect acceptance period. There is a possibility that the operation cannot be performed. Therefore, in the automatic button effect state, when an effect reception period corresponding to such a specific operation-related effect occurs (see FIG. 263 (c)), the effect occurs without executing the specific operation-related effect. Compared to the reception period (see FIG. 262 (b)), the effect within the symbol variation is increased so that the ratio of the above-mentioned automatic effect function functioning when there is no operation (effect reception) within the effect reception period is increased. Makes it possible to carry out the processing that progresses. According to such a configuration, the operation button 410 and the sword decoration are suppressed while suppressing anxiety such as "the proper operation cannot be performed within the production reception period and the production corresponding to the operation may not appear". It becomes possible to provide anxiety about which of the bodies 5001 is activated through the above-mentioned specific operation-related effect. In order to obtain such an effect, it is not always necessary to provide a configuration that suggests the degree of expectation depending on whether or not the automatic effect function has functioned.

Therefore, in the pachinko machine 1 according to this embodiment, during the period controlled to the automatic button effect state, the effect reception period corresponding to the specific operation-related effect (specific display effect) is executed. Until the end, as shown in the figure, the display indicating that the production status is such that the ratio of the automatic production function functioning is high (here, "auto button high accuracy") continues. It has come to appear as a target.

If the above-mentioned automatic effect function does not function at a rate of 20%, it is assumed that the operation for the operation button 410 is not received within the effect acceptance period, as shown in FIG. 263 (d). As long as the effect reception is performed, the post-operation effect that should have occurred is not executed. After that, the production is progressed in the form of forming a reach state after a predetermined time from the occurrence of the specific production reception period. However, in the production situation shown in FIG. 263 (c), when the operation button 410 is not operated within the production reception period (when the production reception does not occur), the above-mentioned automatic production function does not function. In this case, in the production situation shown in FIG. 262 (b), when the operation button 410 is not operated within the production reception period (when the production reception does not occur), the above-mentioned automatic production function functions. It is desirable to have higher expectations than if not.

Further, when the above-mentioned automatic effect function functions at a rate of 80%, as shown in FIG. 263 (e), the effect is produced even though the operation button 410 is not operated within the effect reception period. The post-operation production with the same contents as when the operation was performed within the reception period and the production reception was performed will be executed. That is, as described above, in the post-operation effect generated by the effect reception within the specific effect reception period, the specific decorative member SDY (sudare) is operated and the degree of expectation is different in the display area. One of multiple modes (for example, "chance!" Or "super heat!") Is displayed, but a post-operation effect occurs depending on the operation within a specific effect reception period. In both cases, the mode of being displayed in the display area is the same as that of the case where the effect is generated after the operation due to the function of the automatic effect function. After that, as shown in FIG. 263 (f), the production is advanced in such a way that a reach state is formed after a predetermined time from the occurrence of the specific production reception period.

On the other hand, FIG. 264 (g) shows a state in which the sword decoration body 5001 should be operated as a second effect result having a relatively high expectation as a result of performing the specific operation-related effect shown in FIG. 263 (b). It shows that the production reception period for the sword decoration body 5001 has occurred due to the appearance of the production status indicating that there is. In this production situation, as shown in the figure, the sword decoration image SYG corresponding to the sword decoration body 5001 is displayed in the display area, and an instruction display for prompting the operation of the sword decoration body 5001 (here, "" A character display such as "Pay the sword" and a bar display indicating the remaining time of a specific production reception period) are displayed. At this time, the operation button 410 to which the operation opportunity is given is in the operating state, which also prompts the operation of the operation button 410 and shifts the sword decoration body 5001 from the operating state to the original position. Will be allowed to operate.

Here, assuming that the operation for the sword decoration 5001 is received within the effect reception period shown in FIG. 264 (g), the operation for the operation button 410 is received for the effect within the effect reception period shown in FIG. 263 (c). The same post-operation effect as when it was done will be executed. However, when the operation for the sword decoration 5001 is received within the effect reception period shown in FIG. 263 (g), the operation for the operation button 410 is received within the effect reception period shown in FIG. 263 (c). Among multiple modes with different expectations (for example, "chance!" With relatively low expectations, "super heat!" With relatively high expectations, etc.), the mode with high expectations is The rate of appearance in the display area is high. This ratio may be 100%. In addition, when the operation for the sword decoration body 5001 is received within the production reception period, the automatic button production state is canceled and the normal production state is returned, and the remaining time is exhausted during the specific production reception period. The point that the production is terminated when there is no production reception is the same as in the case of the production reception period shown in FIG. 263 (c).

In this respect, in the pachinko machine 1 according to this embodiment, when the operation for the sword decoration body 5001 is not performed within the production reception period in the production situation shown in FIG. 264 (g) (the production reception does not occur). In the case), although the production situation has a higher degree of expectation than when the production situation shown in FIG. 263 (c) occurs, the production reception occurs in the production situation shown in FIG. 263 (c). As in the case of not doing so, the above-mentioned automatic effect function does not function at a rate of 20%, and the above-mentioned automatic effect function functions at a rate of 80%.

According to such a configuration, as a result of performing a specific operation-related effect, an effect state indicating that the operation button 410 should be operated as a first effect result having a relatively low expectation (FIG. 263). Even when (see (c)) appears, the ratio of the above-mentioned automatic effect function functioning is not changed by this (the effect result of the specific operation-related effect), so that the above-mentioned automatic effect is not changed. It will be possible to suitably maintain the expectation that the function will function. In this way, two different productions that are not affected by each other's production results (specific operation-related production, suggestion of expectation level by the automatic production function) are paralleled, and a disadvantageous production result appears in one side of the production. It will be possible to suppress the decline in the interest in playing games. However, in this case, in the production situation shown in FIG. 263 (c), when the operation button 410 is not operated within the production reception period (when the production reception does not occur), the above-mentioned automatic production function functions. In this case, in the production situation shown in FIG. 264 (g), when the operation for the sword decoration body 5001 is not performed within the production reception period (when the production reception does not occur), the above-mentioned automatic production function is activated. Expectations will be lower than if it worked.

If the above-mentioned automatic effect function does not work at a rate of 20%, it is assumed that the operation on the sword ornament 5001 is not received within the effect acceptance period, as shown in FIG. 264 (h). , The post-operation effect that should have occurred as long as the effect reception is performed is not executed. After that, the production is progressed in the form of forming a reach state after a predetermined time from the occurrence of the specific production reception period. However, in the production situation shown in FIG. 264 (g), when the operation for the sword decoration body 5001 is not performed within the production reception period (when the production reception does not occur), the above-mentioned automatic production function functions. Even if it does not exist, in the production situation shown in FIG. 262 (b), when the operation button 410 is not operated within the production reception period (when the production reception does not occur), the above-mentioned automatic production function is activated. It is desirable to have higher expectations than if it did not work.

Further, when the above-mentioned automatic effect function functions at a rate of 80%, as shown in FIG. 264 (i), even though the operation on the sword decoration body 5001 was not performed within the effect reception period, as shown in FIG. 264 (i). The post-operation production with the same contents as when the operation was performed and the production reception was performed within the production reception period will be executed. That is, as described above, in the post-operation effect generated by the effect reception within the specific effect reception period, the specific decorative member SDY (sudare) is operated and the degree of expectation is different in the display area. One of multiple modes (for example, "chance!" Or "super heat!") Is displayed, but when the post-operation effect occurs according to the operation within the effect reception period. In both cases, when the post-operation effect is generated due to the function of the automatic effect function, the modes displayed in the display area are the same. After that, as shown in FIG. 264 (j), the effect is advanced in such a way that a reach state is formed after a predetermined time from the occurrence of the effect reception period corresponding to the specific operation-related effect.

It should be noted that the effect reception period (see FIGS. 263 (c) and 264 (g)) corresponding to the specific operation-related effect is generated as the "effect reception period in which the above-mentioned automatic effect function functions", or "the above-mentioned". As for whether or not it is generated as the "effect reception period in which the automatic production function of the above does not work", as in the case of the production reception period (see FIG. 262 (b)) in which a specific operation-related effect is not executed, the symbol changes. At the time of execution, it is decided (selected) based on the result of the jackpot judgment, and as a result, the above-mentioned automatic effect function functions at a rate of 20% during the effect reception period corresponding to a specific operation-related effect. Instead, the above-mentioned automatic effect function functions at a rate of 80%. For example, when a big hit is won as a result of the big hit judgment, the selection table for winning is referred to, and based on the distribution ratio in the selection table for the corresponding selection, "the above-mentioned automatic effect function functions. "Period" or "Production reception period when the above-mentioned automatic production function does not work" will be generated, and when a big hit is lost as a result of the big hit judgment, the selection table for the time of the loss is referred to, and the selection table for the time of the loss is referred to. Based on the distribution ratio in the selection table, the "effect reception period in which the above-mentioned automatic effect function functions" or the "effect reception period in which the above-mentioned automatic effect function does not function" is generated. As a result, the above-mentioned automatic effect function does not function at a rate of 20% during the effect reception period (see FIGS. 263 (c) and 264 (g)) corresponding to a specific operation-related effect, and 80%. The above-mentioned automatic effect function is functioning at the ratio of.

Similarly, the effect reception period corresponding to a specific operation-related effect (see FIGS. 263 (c) and 264 (g)) is also generated as the “effect reception period in which the above-mentioned automatic effect function functions”. In that case, the rate at which the jackpot symbol appears when the symbol fluctuation is stopped is higher than when it is generated as the "effect reception period in which the above-mentioned automatic effect function does not work". , Which of those periods should be generated is determined (selected) based on the result of the jackpot determination.

It should be noted that the post-operation effect occurs in the case of the effect reception period (see FIGS. 263 (c) and 264 (g)) corresponding to the specific operation-related effect, and in the case where the specific operation-related effect is not executed. It may be executed as a different effect from the case of the effect reception period (see FIG. 262 (b)). However, even when the effects are executed as different effects, it is desirable that any of a plurality of modes having different expectations can appear in the post-operation effect. The degree of expectation may be 0% or 100%.

Further, the sword decoration body 5001 used in the production example shown in FIGS. 262 to 264 may be the sword decoration body 5001 of the type shown in FIG. 222. Further, in FIGS. 263 and 264, the description will be given as an example in which the “effect using the automatic effect function” is applied to the specific operation-related effects shown in FIGS. 243 to 246, but the “automatic effect” will be described. The “effect using function” may be applied to any specific operation-related effect shown in FIGS. 241 to 261.

Further, in the effect examples shown in FIGS. 263 and 264, when a specific operation-related effect is executed without being controlled by the automatic button effect state, the effect acceptance period corresponding to the specific operation-related effect is performed. In addition to preventing the setting operation to the automatic button effect state from being accepted, the state of "the setting operation to the automatic button effect state is not accepted" is before the effect acceptance period occurs. It is desirable to generate the effect from at least the effect situation shown in FIG. 263 (b) (the effect state in which a specific operation-related effect is started) so that this can be continued until the effect reception period. According to such a configuration, even if an attempt is made to perform a setting operation to the automatic button effect state after confirming that a specific operation-related effect has been started, this will not be accepted. Therefore, the automatic button effect state It has become possible to provide "production using the automatic production function" only to those who are continuously playing the game while maintaining the automatic button production state, and the game is continuously performed while maintaining the automatic button production state. You will be able to provide dramatic value for what you do.

In addition, an effect reception period (see FIG. 262 (b)) that occurs without executing a specific operation-related effect, and an effect reception period (FIG. 263 (c), FIG. 264 (g) corresponding to a specific operation-related effect). ), The first display mode (for example, blue button image BTG and blue sword decoration image SYG) and the second display mode (for example, green button image BTG and green sword decoration). Image SYG) can be made to appear, and when the second display mode appears, the "effect reception period in which the above-mentioned automatic effect function functions" occurs as compared with the case when the first display mode appears. It is desirable to have a high percentage of.

In addition, an effect reception period (see FIG. 262 (b)) that occurs without executing a specific operation-related effect, and an effect reception period (FIG. 263 (c), FIG. 264 (g) corresponding to a specific operation-related effect). )), A third display mode (for example, a red button image BTG or a red sword decorative image SYG) can be made to appear, and when the third display mode appears, "the above-mentioned automatic effect". It is also possible to ensure that the "effect reception period" in which the function functions occurs.

According to these configurations, in the automatic button effect state, it becomes impossible to confirm the post-operation effect itself, which should have been confirmed if only the effect reception (operation for the operation button 410) was performed within the effect reception period. While there is a risk that a directing demerit such as "do not dare to operate the operation button 410 within the directing reception period", it is necessary to provide a judgment material as to whether or not to exercise a directing selection such as "do not dare to operate the operation button 410". Will be possible, and it will be expected that the game entertainment will be maintained favorably.

In addition, regardless of whether or not the "effect using the automatic effect function" is applied, the effect acceptance period corresponding to each "specific operation-related effect" illustrated in FIGS. 241 to 261 and 263 and 264. It is desirable to generate the above-mentioned effect as a period having a longer time than the effect reception period (such as FIG. 262 (b)) that occurs without executing the specific operation-related effect. That is, in the specific operation-related effect (specific display effect), the player side is confused as to which of the operation button 410 and the sword decoration body 5001 is enabled, and as a result, it is appropriate within the effect acceptance period. There is a possibility that the operation cannot be performed, but by giving a long time to the production reception period corresponding to the "specific operation-related production", it is possible to prevent such a situation from occurring. Will be expected.

In particular, in the examples of FIGS. 263 and 264, it is considered that the ratio of the automatic effect function to function is set to be relatively high during the effect reception period corresponding to the "specific operation-related effect". For example, whether or not the automatic effect function works by setting the effect reception period to have a longer time than the effect reception period that occurs without executing the "specific operation-related effect". It can be said that it is desirable to maintain the color rendering index of the game for a long time and to improve the game entertainment. In this case, the timing at which the automatic effect function functions is reached when the first hour has passed since the period occurred in the effect reception period in which the "specific operation-related effect" is not executed. On the other hand, in the production reception period corresponding to the "specific operation-related production", the automatic production function is to make it arrive when the second time, which is longer than the first time, elapses after the period occurs. It is important to maintain the effect of whether or not the function works for a long time.

In addition, there is a production reception period that occurs without executing the "specific operation-related effect" and a production reception period that corresponds to the "specific operation-related effect", and the time from the start to the end of those periods. Even if the items are different, the bar display indicating the remaining time of the production reception period will be displayed in the same mode (bar display of the same length), and the remaining gauge amount will be reduced. It is desirable to only have different speeds. That is, in this case, even if the effect reception period corresponding to the "specific operation-related effect" occurs, it is continued for the same period as the effect acceptance period that occurs without executing the "specific operation-related effect". Since it will be possible to make people think that it is, the color rendering index as to whether or not the automatic effect function works is preferably maintained, coupled with the "frustration" caused by the fact that it is continued for a longer period than expected. You will be able to make it.

According to the example shown in FIGS. 262 to 264, the first effect acceptance period (effect acceptance period for the specific operation means (operation button 410)) when controlled to a specific effect state (automatic button effect state). Is generated, and even if the operation for the specific operation means (operation button 410) is not performed within the first effect reception period, the processing by the first automatic effect means (automatic effect function for the operation button 410) is not necessarily performed. Although it is not always executed, the specific display effect occurs without being executed during the effect reception period that occurs when a predetermined time elapses after the specific display effect (specific operation-related effect) is executed. When the operation for the specific operation means (operation button 410) is not performed within the first effect reception period rather than the effect reception period for 1 (the effect reception period for the specific operation means (operation button 410)), the first The ratio of processing by the automatic effect means (automatic effect function for the operation button 410) is increased.

In this regard, in such an automatic button effect state, the ratio of the automatic effect function functioning (“60% -40%”, “20% -80%”) differs depending on the type of effect reception period as described above. When the set automatic button effect state is set to the "first automatic button effect state", the ratio of the automatic effect function functioning differs depending on the type of effect reception period ("50% -50%", "10". % -90% "), which is set differently in the" second automatic button effect state ", and when the effect reception period occurs, the automatic effect function is set to always function regardless of the type of period. A third automatic button effect state to be generated may be further prepared so that any of these effect states can be set, including a normal effect state in which the automatic effect function does not function. In addition, a normal effect state in which the automatic effect function does not function is not prepared, and the game is always played in the automatic button effect state (first automatic button effect state, second automatic button effect state, third automatic button effect state). Or the production may be executed.

Further, the production example shown in FIGS. 262 to 264 may be modified and implemented as follows. That is, when the automatic effect function functions in the first effect reception period shown in FIG. 262 (b), the timing (first) when the first predetermined time elapses after the first effect reception period occurs. The above-mentioned automatic effect function functions at the timing within the effect reception period) to end the first effect reception period and generate a corresponding post-operation effect. However, if the automatic effect function does not function within the first effect acceptance period shown in FIG. 262 (b), the timing at which the first predetermined time has elapsed since the first effect acceptance period occurred (the first). The above-mentioned automatic effect function does not function at (timing within the effect reception period of 1), and then the first effect reception period ends without the post-operation effect being executed (the post-operation effect is not executed after that). ). On the other hand, if the automatic production function functions during the second production reception period shown in FIG. 263 (c) or the third production reception period shown in FIG. 264 (g), the second production reception period or The above-mentioned automatic production function functions at the timing when the second predetermined time longer than the first predetermined time elapses after the third production reception period occurs, and the second production reception period or the third production reception period or the third The production reception period is terminated and the post-operation production is generated accordingly. However, if the automatic production function does not function within the second production reception period shown in FIG. 263 (c) or the third production reception period shown in FIG. 264 (g), the second production reception period or The above-mentioned automatic production function does not function at the timing when the second predetermined time elapses after the third production reception period occurs, and then the second production reception period or the third production reception period or the third production without the post-operation effect being executed. End the production reception period of (After that, the production after operation is not executed).

According to such a configuration, the automatic effect function can function at a relatively early stage in the first effect reception period on the side where the ratio of the automatic effect function functions is low, and the automatic effect function can function. Even if it does not function, there will be enough time for the player to receive the production by his / her own operation before the end of the first production reception period. You will be able to play games with your heart. On the other hand, in the second production reception period or the third production reception period on the side where the ratio of the automatic production function functioning is high, the automatic production function can function only at a relatively late stage, and the automatic production function can be used. Since there is not much time left for the player to operate when it does not function, even though the ratio of the automatic production function functioning is high, providing a game with a sense of tension. Will be able to.

Regarding the above modification, in the first effect reception period, the above-mentioned automatic effect function may or may not function at the timing when the first predetermined time elapses (timing within the first effect reception period). However, in the second production reception period and the third production reception period, the above-mentioned automatic production function always functions at the timing when the second predetermined time elapses (timing within the second production reception period). You may do so. Even with such a configuration, the automatic production function can only function at a relatively late stage, and if the automatic production function should not function (due to some trouble), it is time for the player to operate it. Since it is considered that the player delusions that there is not much room left, it can be expected that the same effect will be produced.

Further, in addition to the above-described effect examples with reference to FIGS. 262 to 264, in other effect examples, the control to the automatic button effect state (specific effect state) is not necessarily performed by the operation by the player. For example, it may be controlled based on the result of the jackpot determination, or may be constantly controlled as an automatic button effect state (specific effect state). Further, the setting itself to the automatic button effect state is not performed, and the automatic effect function may always be provided as a gaming machine capable of functioning at a predetermined ratio.

[Unified operation control when in the automatic button effect state]
As described above, in the automatic button effect state (specific effect state), the player operates within the effect reception period (when the above alternative example is applied, the first specific valid period or the second specific valid period). Even if the operation is not performed, a process (automatic effect function) that causes the same change as when the operation is performed can be executed. However, after being controlled to the automatic button effect state (specific effect state), the desire to return to the normal effect mode in which the effect can be advanced depending on the player's own operation (end the automatic button effect state). Wish) may occur. Such a desire often occurs when a production reception period occurs in which the player is given an operation opportunity, but a limited time from the start of the production reception period to the end of the production reception period. Within, it is difficult to perform both the operation for ending the automatic button effect state and the operation for accepting the operation, and as a result, the operation opportunity may be lost. If there is, the interest in games may decline.

In this regard, in the pachinko machine 1 (peripheral control MPU1511a) according to this embodiment, when the effect reception period related to the specific effect occurs while being controlled to the automatic button effect state (specific effect state), the effect reception is received. After the process of ending the automatic button effect state and the operation according to the effect reception, only by performing the operation once for the operation means (operation button 410, sword decoration body 5001, etc.) to which the operation opportunity is given within the period. Each effect (process that can cause a change in the effect) is performed (operation unified control in the automatic button effect state). As a result, even if there is a desire to end the automatic button production state and advance the production depending on the player's own operation within the production reception period, the production mode can be switched while avoiding the loss of operation opportunities. Will be able to be performed smoothly.

As described above, when the automatic button effect state is set when the symbol variation is in the execution state, the setting operation is permitted only for the operation button 410 of the operation button 410 and the sword decoration body 5001. ..

On the other hand, as described above, when the automatic button effect state is canceled when the symbol change is in the execution state, the operation of the operation button 410 and the sword decoration 5001 is performed in the state where the effect reception period has not occurred. The operation for canceling the setting is allowed only for the button 410. On the other hand, in the state where the effect reception period has occurred, when the operation means (operation button 410, sword decoration body 5001, etc.) to which the operation opportunity is given is operated within the effect reception period. , The process of ending the automatic button effect state and the post-operation effect (process that can cause a change in the effect) according to the effect reception are performed respectively (operation unified control). Therefore, even if the operation button 410 is operated while the effect acceptance period for the sword decoration body 5001 has occurred, the operation is not accepted and the process of ending the automatic button effect state is not executed.

However, some players play games with a selfish game technique such as "while maintaining the automatic button effect state (without switching the effect mode), operate by yourself only when you like to advance the effect". It can be assumed that some people want to do that. Therefore, in the pachinko machine 1 (peripheral control MPU1511a) according to this embodiment, the door frame 3 is further provided with a special operation means (button for continuing the automatic mode) different from both the operation button 410 and the sword decoration body 5001. When the operation button 410 (or the sword decoration body 5001) is operated within the effect reception period related to the specific effect while being controlled to the automatic button effect state (specific effect state), the automatic button effect is performed. The process of ending the state (specific effect state) and the process of causing a change in the effect are performed respectively (operation unified control in the automatic button effect state), but the control is performed in the automatic button effect state (specific effect state). If an operation is performed on the above-mentioned special operation means within the effect reception period related to the specific effect, the process of ending the automatic button effect state (specific effect state) is not performed and the effect changes according to the operation. The processing that can cause the above is performed.

According to such a configuration, when the automatic button effect state is terminated and it is desired to actively perform the operation game after that, the operation button 410 (or the sword decoration body 5001) is operated within the effect reception period. As a matter of fact, if you want to perform only rare operations while maintaining the automatic button effect state (without switching the effect mode), you should operate the special operation means within the effect reception period. It becomes possible to realize the game desired by the player only by properly using the operation means.

Hereinafter, the operation unified control in such an automatic button effect state will be described with reference to FIGS. 265 to 267.

FIG. 265 (a) shows that the number of holds is 1 in the automatic button effect state, and the variation display of the decorative symbol SZ (special symbol) is displayed on the effect display device 1600 with a specific effect pattern according to the result of the jackpot determination. In the production situation being performed, it is shown that the production reception period for accepting the pressing operation of the operation button 410 has occurred while the reach state is formed. As shown in the figure, a display indicating that the automatic button effect state is controlled within the display area of the effect display device 1600 during the period controlled by the automatic button effect state (here, "auto button"). "Setting") appears continuously.

Further, as shown in the figure, the button image BTG corresponding to the operation button 410 is displayed in the display area even during this effect reception period, and an instruction display for prompting the operation of the operation button 410 (here, below). An arrow display in the direction and a bar display indicating the remaining time of the production reception period) are displayed. At this time, the operation button 410 to which the operation opportunity is given is in a light emitting state, which also prompts the operation of the operation button 410. However, in reality, not only the operation button 410 in the light emitting state but also the special operation means (button described as "PUSH" in the figure) 1410 in which no change has occurred is allowed to be operated.

In FIGS. 265 (b) to 265 (d), although the operation button 410 was not operated within the effect reception period generated in FIG. 265 (a), the above-mentioned automatic effect function functions, so that the effect reception period It shows how the post-operation production with the same contents as when the operation was performed and the production was accepted is being executed. When the above-mentioned automatic effect function is activated, the effect acceptance period generated in FIG. 265 (a) is terminated, and the operation opportunity for the operation button 410 and the special operation means (described as "PUSH" in the figure) are described. Any operation opportunity for the button) 1410 will be lost.

That is, in the post-operation production according to this production example, a stepwise production progress appears, and any of the production results of the plurality of modes (FIGS. 265 (c) and FIG. 265 (d)) having different expectations can be obtained. Even if it is decided at the start of the symbol variation (determined based on the result of the jackpot determination) that the final appearance is made, first, as shown in FIG. 265 (b), a specific effect image (here, an explosion). Smoke image) is displayed. After that, when the production progresses to a production result with a relatively low degree of expectation, as shown in FIG. 265 (c), a specific production image (here, an explosion) shown in FIG. 265 (b). As the (smoke image) gradually disappears, a production image (here, "Kichi" fortune) suggesting that the production result has a relatively low degree of expectation will be displayed, which is relatively expected. When the production progresses to a high degree of production result, the specific production image (here, the smoke image due to the explosion) shown in FIG. 265 (b) gradually disappears as shown in FIG. 265 (d). In the process, a production image (here, "Nakayoshi" fortune) suggesting that the production result has a relatively high degree of expectation will be displayed.

Then, the flow of the effect shown in FIGS. 265 (a) to 265 (d) appears as a basic effect progress when the effect reception period occurs in the automatic button effect state, and the above-mentioned automatic effect function Even after the post-operation effect (FIGS. 265 (b) to 265 (d)) is executed, the automatic button effect state is maintained without being terminated unless the player performs the operation. ..

However, as described above, after being controlled to the automatic button effect state (specific effect state), the desire to return to the normal effect mode in which the effect can be advanced depending on the player's own operation (automatic button effect state). A desire to end) may occur. Such a desire often occurs when a production reception period occurs in which the player is given an operation opportunity, but a limited time from the start of the production reception period to the end of the production reception period. Within, it is difficult to perform both the operation for ending the automatic button effect state and the operation for accepting the operation, and as a result, the operation opportunity may be lost. If there is, the interest in games may decline.

Therefore, in the pachinko machine 1 (peripheral control MPU1511a) according to this embodiment, when the operation button 410 is operated within the effect reception period generated in FIG. 265 (a), it is detected that the operation has occurred. Based on the fact that (detection that the operation button 410 is located at the operation position), the process of ending the automatic button effect state and the post-operation effect according to the effect reception are performed (automatically). Operation unified control in the button effect state). When the operation for the operation button 410 is received, the effect reception period generated in FIG. 265 (a) ends, the above-mentioned automatic effect function cannot function, and the special operation means (special operation means (a). In the figure, the operation opportunity for the button (button) 1410 described as "PUSH" will also be lost.

Even if the operation button 410 is operated within the effect reception period generated in FIG. 265 (a), the operation is performed within the effect reception period and the effect is received as shown in FIG. 266 (e). As a post-operation effect according to the situation, first, a specific effect image (here, a smoke image due to an explosion) is displayed. After that, when the production progresses to a production result with a relatively low degree of expectation, as shown in FIG. 266 (f), a specific production image (here, an explosion) shown in FIG. 266 (e). As the smoke image) gradually disappears, a production image (here, "Kichi" fortune) suggesting that the production result has a relatively low degree of expectation will be displayed, which is relatively expected. When the production progresses to a high degree of production result, the specific production image (here, the smoke image due to the explosion) shown in FIG. 266 (e) gradually disappears as shown in FIG. 266 (g). In the process, a production image (here, "Nakayoshi" fortune) suggesting that the production result has a relatively high degree of expectation will be displayed.

However, if the operation button 410 is operated within the effect reception period generated in FIG. 265 (a), the process of ending the automatic button effect state is also performed based on the operation. Therefore, as shown in FIGS. 266 (e) to 266 (g), after the operation for the operation button 410 is received, the automatic button effect state is controlled within the display area of the effect display device 1600. The display shown (here, "auto button is being set") will be hidden. In the pachinko machine 1 according to this embodiment, when the operation button 410 is operated within the effect reception period generated in FIG. 265 (a), the process of ending the automatic button effect state is executed. A suggestive display (here, "auto button release") appears (see FIG. 266 (e)).

Further, as described above, during the effect reception period generated in FIG. 265 (a), not only the operation button 410 in the light emitting state but also the special operation means in which no change has occurred (in the figure, "PUSH" is described. The operation on the button) 1410 is also allowed. Then, this special operation means (button described as "PUSH" in the figure) 1410 "operates by itself only when it is desired while maintaining the automatic button effect state (without causing the effect mode switching). As mentioned above, it is prepared to enable a selfish game technique such as "progressing the production."

Therefore, even when the operation for the special operating means (button described as "PUSH" in the figure) 1410 is performed within the effect reception period generated in FIG. 265 (a), as shown in FIG. 267 (h). In addition, as a post-operation effect according to the operation being performed within the effect reception period and the effect reception being performed, first, a specific effect image (here, a smoke image due to an explosion) is displayed. After that, when the production progresses to a production result with a relatively low degree of expectation, as shown in FIG. 267 (i), a specific production image (here, an explosion) shown in FIG. 267 (h). As the smoke image) gradually disappears, a production image (here, "Kichi" fortune) suggesting that the production result has a relatively low degree of expectation will be displayed, which is relatively expected. When the production progresses to a high degree of production result, the specific production image (here, the smoke image due to the explosion) shown in FIG. 267 (h) gradually disappears as shown in FIG. 267 (j). In the process, a production image (here, "Nakayoshi" fortune) suggesting that the production result has a relatively high degree of expectation will be displayed. When the operation for the special operation means (button described as "PUSH" in the figure) 1410 is received, the effect reception period generated in FIG. 265 (a) is terminated, and the above-mentioned automatic effect is performed. The function cannot be functioned, and the operation opportunity for the operation button 410 is also lost.

However, if an operation is performed on the special operation means (button described as "PUSH" in the figure) 1410 within the effect reception period generated in FIG. 265 (a), the automatic button effect state is based on the operation. The process of terminating is not performed at the same time. Therefore, as shown in FIGS. 267 (h) to 267 (j), even after the operation for the operation button 410 is received, the automatic button effect state is controlled within the display area of the effect display device 1600. The indicated display (here, "auto button is being set") will be continuously displayed.

In this regard, in the pachinko machine 1 (peripheral control MPU1511a) according to this embodiment, the special operating means (button described as “PUSH” in the figure) 1410 is used within the effect reception period generated in FIG. 265 (a). A special case that cannot appear when an operation is performed, when the above-mentioned automatic effect function functions (Fig. 265 (b)), or when an operation is performed on the operation button 410 (Fig. 266 (e)). The production is made to appear. Such a special effect may be an effect using a movable body, a lamp, or the like, but in the effect example shown in FIG. 267 (j), the above-mentioned automatic effect function functions in the effect display device 1600. In addition to the effect image (post-operation effect) that appears in the case (FIG. 265 (b)) or when the operation button 410 is operated (FIG. 266 (e)), a glittering effect display is additionally displayed. I am trying to do it. Instead of the glittering effect display, an additional effect using a movable body, a lamp, or the like may be performed.

According to such a configuration, the change content of the effect caused when the operation button 410 is operated within the effect reception period related to the fortune telling effect while being controlled to the automatic button effect state (specific effect state). And, when controlled to the automatic button effect state (specific effect state), an operation was performed on the special operation means (button described as "PUSH" in the figure) 1410 within the effect reception period related to the fortune telling effect. The contents of the changes in the effect that occur in some cases will be different from each other. In this case, when the above-mentioned special effect (here, a glittering effect display) appears, "The operation means is operated and the post-operation effect according to the effect reception appears, but the automatic button effect state is You will be able to enjoy the effect after the operation and recognize that the setting has not been canceled and this is being continued. Therefore, as shown in FIG. 267 (i), even when displaying a production image (here, “Kichi” fortune) suggesting that the production result has a relatively low degree of expectation, it is special. The production (here, the effect display that shines brilliantly) can appear.

Further, such a special effect (here, a glittering effect display) is made to appear additionally to the above-mentioned post-operation effect at a predetermined ratio based on the result of the jackpot determination, and the special effect. When an additional effect appears, it is desirable that the ratio of the big hit symbol appearing due to the symbol variation is higher than when the special effect does not appear. However, in this case, it is beneficial for the player to operate the special operation means (button described as "PUSH" in the figure) 1410 instead of the operation button 410, and the operation button 410 There is a concern that the operation for will not be performed. Therefore, when the special operation means (button described as "PUSH" in the figure) 1410 is operated within the effect reception period generated in FIG. 265 (a), the special effect (here, glitteringly shines). If the effect display) does not appear, any effect result will appear by operating the operation button 410 within the effect reception period generated in FIG. 265 (a) or by operating the above-mentioned automatic effect function. It is desirable that the ratio of jackpot symbols appearing due to the symbol fluctuation is lower than in the case of.

According to such a configuration, "the operation on the operation means is performed by the operation on the special operation means (button described as" PUSH "in the figure) 1410, and the post-operation effect corresponding to the effect reception appears. , In order to create a state in which the automatic button effect state is not canceled and this is continued, there is a demerit such as "it can be suggested that the rate of big hit symbols appearing due to symbol fluctuations is extremely low". Since there is a risk that the player will be able to play the game, it is expected that the player will be able to exercise such a directing selection in a suitable manner.

Therefore, in the example shown in FIG. 267 (i), although the same effect mode as that in the example shown in FIG. 266 (f) appears, the above-mentioned effect demerit has occurred. Therefore, it is recognizable that the rate at which the jackpot symbol appears due to the symbol variation is lower than that in the examples shown in FIGS. 265 (c) and 266 (f). However, in the example shown in FIG. 267 (i), the effect mode is shown in FIGS. 265 (c) and 266 (f) while making it recognizable that the situation has a low degree of expectation. By making it the same as the case, the third party who does not operate the special operation means (button described as "PUSH" in the figure) 1410 is in a production situation where the production selection fails. It is difficult to grasp the above, and it is expected that this will suppress the decline in the interest in games.

In addition, in the pachinko machine 1 according to this embodiment, regardless of which effect selection is made within the effect reception period generated in FIG. 265 (a), FIGS. 265 (b) and 266 ( Although it was decided to display a specific effect image (here, a smoke image due to an explosion) as shown in e), FIG. 267 (h), etc., the specific effect image is relatively as a post-operation effect. It may be displayed in either a plurality of modes in which a high-expected production mode (here, the fortune-telling of "Nakayoshi") appears, or a ratio in which a special production appears is different.

Further, regardless of which of the production selections is made within the production reception period generated in FIG. 265 (a), this is omitted without displaying a specific production image, and the production modes having different expectations are obtained. (Here, "Kichi" or "Nakayoshi" fortune) may be made to appear directly as a post-operation effect. However, in order to make it difficult for a third party to grasp that the production situation is in the production situation (FIG. 267 (i)) in which the production selection fails, the production mode with different expectations ( Here, when either "Kichi" or "Nakayoshi" fortune) appears as a post-operation effect, it is desirable to first display a specific effect image (here, a smoke image due to an explosion).

In addition, the production that suggests the degree of expectation can be performed even within the production reception period generated in FIG. 265 (a), so that it can be used for determining whether or not to take the above-mentioned production risk. You may.

Further, the special operating means (button described as "PUSH" in the figure) 1410 is not necessarily prepared as a dedicated operating means for continuing the state when the automatic button effect state is in effect. Alternatively, it may be carried by another operating means already prepared.

Further, during the effect acceptance period generated in FIG. 265 (a), is there a period during which the operation for the operation button 410 among the plurality of operation means (operation button 410, sword decoration body 5001 and the like) can be received for the effect? Alternatively, the above-mentioned effect (specific operation-related effect (see FIGS. 241 to 261)) is executed as to whether or not an operation for another operation means (for example, the sword decoration body 5001) can be accepted for the effect. It may occur as a result of the above.

In addition, during the effect reception period in which the operation button 410 is given an operation opportunity, the first effect is also given an operation opportunity for the special operation means (button described as "PUSH" in the figure) 1410. Even if the reception period (see FIG. 265 (a)) and the second production reception period in which no operation opportunity is given to the special operation means (button described as "PUSH" in the figure) 1410 are included. good. In this case, when the first effect reception period (see FIG. 265 (a)) occurs, the specific operation-related effect (FIGS. 241 to 261) described above is higher than when the second effect reception period occurs. It is desirable that the ratio of (see) appearing before the symbol fluctuation is stopped is high. According to such a configuration, the ratio of the above-mentioned specific operation-related effects (see FIGS. 241 to 261) appears depending on whether the first effect reception period or the second effect reception period occurs. It will function as a suggested effect.

[Stable side automatic production processing]
As described above, in the automatic button effect state (specific effect state), the player operates within the effect reception period (when the above alternative example is applied, the first specific valid period or the second specific valid period). Even if the operation is not performed, a process (automatic effect function) that causes the same change as when the operation is performed can be executed. However, in the pachinko machine 1 (peripheral control MPU1511a) according to this embodiment, there is a special case such as "a plurality of operating means can be received for directing, and different directing is executed depending on which operating means is operated". It is possible to generate the production reception period of. Therefore, such a special effect reception period occurs when the state is controlled to the automatic button effect state (specific effect state), and for any operation means within the special effect reception period. If there is no operation, which of the multiple operating means should the automatic effect function be enabled (which of the multiple operating means causes the same change as when the effect was received)? Is a problem.

Therefore, in the pachinko machine 1 (peripheral control MPU1511a) according to this embodiment, a special effect such as "a plurality of operation means can be received for production, and different productions are executed depending on which operation means is operated". When the production acceptance period of is generated, "whether or not there is a possibility that a production result with a lower degree of expectation will appear" instead of "whether or not there is a possibility that a production result with a higher degree of expectation will appear". Is the standard, and the process of enabling the automatic effect function for an operation means different from the "operation means on the side that can generate an effect that may produce an effect with a lower expectation" (automatic effect on the stable side). Processing) can be executed.

According to such a configuration, the production mode with the lowest expectation among the plurality of production modes that can occur when the production reception is performed for any of the plurality of operation means within the special production reception period is Since it will not be possible to appear when the automatic production function functions, a situation such as "when the automatic production function forgets to operate, the production mode with the lowest expectation will appear by the automatic production function" will occur. It becomes possible to avoid it preferably.

Hereinafter, the stable side automatic effect processing in such an automatic button effect state will be described with reference to FIGS. 268 to 270.

First, an example of an effect when a special effect acceptance period occurs when the effect is not controlled by the automatic button effect state and is in the normal effect state will be described. In FIG. 268 (a), the number of holds is 3 in the normal effect state, and the variation display of the decorative symbol SZ (special symbol) is displayed on the effect display device 1600 with a specific effect pattern according to the result of the jackpot determination. In the production situation being performed, the player can select either the pressing operation of the operation button 410 or the sword delivery operation of the sword decoration body 5001 while the reach state is formed. It shows the production situation where the production display suggesting that the special production reception period is started. In this production situation, although neither the production reception for the operation button 410 nor the production reception for the sword decoration body 5001 has been activated yet, the operation button 410 and the sword have been in this situation. The operation button 410 is in a light emitting state, and the sword decoration body 5001 is in a state of being moved to the sword pulling position in order to prompt the determination of which of the decoration body 5001 should be operated. Further, in the effect display device 1600, the button image BTG and the sword decoration image SYG are displayed, respectively.

FIG. 268 (b) shows the player to perform either a special effect reception period (pressing operation of the operation button 410 or sword delivery operation of the sword decoration body 5001) suggested by the effect display shown in FIG. 268 (a). It shows the production status in which the production reception period) that can be selected by the side has occurred. In this effect situation, at least a part of the effect display (here, button image BTG, sword decoration image SYG) in the effect display device 1600 that has appeared since the effect state shown in FIG. 268 (a), and operation buttons. While the state of 410 and the sword decoration body 5001 is kept to be continued, an instruction display prompting the operation of either the operation button 410 or the sword decoration body 5001 (here, the button image BTG or the sword decoration image SYG is displayed. Correspondingly, the downward arrow displayed and the bar display indicating the remaining time of the special production reception period, etc.) are displayed.

Here, in the production situation shown in FIG. 268 (b), a character image such as "stable" is displayed corresponding to the button image BTG, and a character image such as "disturbance" is displayed corresponding to the sword decoration image SYG. Has been done. However, instead of this, the button image BTG and the sword decoration image SYG may not be displayed, and a dedicated mark may be displayed when both of the two operating means are capable of accepting the effect.

That is, in this production example, when the production reception for the operation button 410 is performed within the special production reception period shown in FIG. 268 (b), the production reception for the operation button 410 is first performed as the post-button operation effect. After it is displayed that it has been done (Fig. 268 (c)), it is suggested that the smaller the number of defeats, the lower the expectation, and the larger the number of defeats, the higher the expectation. And the effect of making any one of "100 defeated" appear based on the result of the jackpot determination (FIGS. 268 (d) and 268 (e)) is executed. For example, in the post-button operation effect when a big hit is won, the effect mode shown in FIG. 268 (d) appears at a rate of "40%", and in FIG. 268 (e) at a rate of "60%". The effect mode shown is made to appear, and in the post-button operation effect when the jackpot is lost, the effect mode shown in FIG. 268 (d) appears at a ratio of "60%", and the ratio of "40%". It is possible to make the effect mode shown in FIG. 268 (e) appear.

On the other hand, when the production reception for the sword decoration body 5001 is made within the special production reception period, as the production after the sword side operation, first, after it is displayed that the production reception for the sword decoration body 5001 has been made ( FIG. 269 (f)) shows that the smaller the number of defeats, the lower the expectation, and the larger the number of defeats, the higher the expectation. An effect (FIGS. 269 (g) to 269 (i)) in which any one of "777 defeated" appears based on the result of the jackpot determination is executed. For example, in the post-operation effect on the sword side when a big hit is won, the effect mode shown in FIG. 269 (g) appears at a rate of "10%", and in FIG. 269 (h) at a rate of "50%". The effect mode shown appears, and the effect mode shown in FIG. 269 (i) appears at a ratio of "40%". The effect mode shown in FIG. 269 (g) appears, the effect mode shown in FIG. 269 (h) appears at a rate of "50%", and the effect shown in FIG. 269 (i) appears at a rate of "0%". It is possible to make the aspect appear.

In the production examples shown in FIGS. 268 to 270, the number of defeats is small regardless of whether the effect after the button side operation or the effect after the sword side operation is performed. Has a lower degree of expectation than a production mode in which the number of defeats is large. Further, when the number of defeats is the same (for example, the effect mode shown in FIG. 268 (e), the effect mode shown in FIG. 269 (h), and the effect mode shown in FIG. 270 (e) described later). , Expectations may be different, but it is desirable that they be the same.

In such a configuration, a special effect reception period is generated to allow the effect reception for both the operation button 410 (first operation means) and the sword decoration body 5001 (second operation means), and the special effect reception period is generated. Since it is possible to generate different operation effects (effect after button side operation, effect after sword side operation) depending on the type of operation means on the operated side within the production reception period, one operation means can be operated. The monotonous color rendering will be improved, and it will be possible to improve the game entertainment.

In particular, the same expectation is not shown by operating either the operation button 410 (first operating means) or the sword decoration body 5001 (second operating means), but the sword decoration body 5001 (first operating means). Only when the operation means (2) is operated, a specific effect mode (here, FIG. 269 (g)) is shown, which suggests that the jackpot symbol is unlikely to appear due to the symbol variation (symbol variation in the executing state). Since we have made it possible for the production mode of "defeating one body" to appear, we would like to see the production (effect after operation of the sword side) on the side of the sword decoration 5001 (second operating means) even if we take such a risk. It is expected that the game will be maintained by giving conflicts and stimuli to the sword.

In this case, the post-operation effect on the button side is "a specific effect mode with the lowest expectation" among the effect modes that appear when either the operation button 410 or the sword decoration body 5001 is operated within the special effect reception period. (Here, the effect mode of "defeating one body" shown in FIG. 269 (g)) "is eliminated, and it functions as a relatively stable post-operation effect. Further, the post-operation effect on the sword side is "a specific effect mode with the lowest expectation (here)" among the effect modes that appear when either the operation button 410 or the sword decoration body 5001 is operated within the special effect reception period. Then, in the sense that there is a risk of appearance of the “one-body defeat” effect mode) shown in FIG. 269 (g), it functions as a post-operation effect that includes relative turbulence.

Furthermore, in this production example, from the appearance of the production situation shown in FIG. 268 (a) to the appearance of the production situation shown in FIG. 268 (b) (here, within the special production reception period), The effect mode shown in FIG. 268 (ab) can be made to appear based on the result of the jackpot determination, and when the effect mode appears, it is more than when the effect mode does not appear. , The rate of appearance of "the specific production mode with the lowest expectation (here, the production mode of" one body defeat "shown in FIG. 269 (g))" is low when the operation on the sword decoration body 5001 is performed. It is possible to carry out the production progress in the form of a sword. This ratio may be 0%.

According to such a configuration, there is a risk that "a specific production mode with the lowest expectation (here, a production mode of" one body defeat "shown in FIG. 269 (g))" may appear. As a material for determining whether or not the operation should be performed on the sword decoration body 5001 instead of the operation button 410, it becomes possible to use the effect result of whether or not the effect mode shown in FIG. 268 (ab) appears. , It is expected that the game entertainment will be suitably improved when the special production reception period shown in FIG. 268 (b) occurs.

In the normal production state, when the special production reception period shown in FIG. 268 (b) occurs but no production reception is performed within the special production reception period, the above-mentioned automatic production is performed. The function does not work, and the production progresses without executing both the post-button operation effect and the post-operation sword effect.

On the other hand, FIGS. 270 (a) to 270 (e) show an example of an effect when such a special effect acceptance period occurs while the automatic button effect state is controlled.

As shown in FIGS. 270 (a), 270 (ab), and 270 (b), even when the automatic button effect state is controlled, the automatic button effect state is controlled. Except for the fact that a display indicating that effect (here, "auto button is being set") appears continuously on the effect display device 1600, an effect display suggesting that a special effect acceptance period will start appears. From to the end of the special production reception period, the production is performed with the same contents as in the case of the above-mentioned normal production state (FIGS. 268 (a), 268 (ab), and 268 (b)). Be progressed.

However, as described above, when neither the operation button 410 nor the sword decoration body 5001 is operated within the special production reception period shown in FIG. 270 (b), "a production result with a lower degree of expectation (here, FIG. The automatic effect function is enabled for the operation button 410, which is different from the sword decoration body 5001 on the side that can generate the effect that may cause the effect of "defeating one body" shown in 269 (g). It is possible to execute the process of making it (stable side automatic effect process).

That is, in this case, even though neither the operation button 410 nor the sword decoration body 5001 was operated within the special effect reception period shown in FIG. 270 (b), the automatic effect function for the operation button 410 is enabled. As a result, the same change as when the operation for the operation button 410 is received within the special effect reception period is generated for the effect. Therefore, as a post-operation effect on the button side, first, after it is displayed that the effect reception for the operation button 410 has been made (FIG. 270 (c)), the smaller the number of defeats, the lower the expectation and the larger the number of defeats. As an effect suggesting that the degree of expectation is higher, either "50 defeated" or "100 defeated" appears based on the result of the jackpot judgment (Fig. 270 (d), Fig. 270 (e)). ) Will be executed.

According to such a configuration, the lowest degree of expectation among the plurality of production modes that can occur when the production reception is performed for any of the operation button 410 and the sword decoration body 5001 within the special production reception period. Since the effect mode (here, the effect mode of "defeating one body" shown in FIG. 269 (g)) cannot appear when the automatic effect function is activated, "when you forget to operate". It becomes possible to preferably avoid the occurrence of a situation such as "the automatic effect function causes an effect mode with the lowest expectation to appear."

Here, due to the convenience of the automatic effect function, there is a concern that the player will not operate either the operation button 410 or the sword ornament 5001 in order to maintain the automatic button effect state. However, as described above, within the special effect reception period, the effect mode shown in FIG. 270 (ab) can appear based on the result of the jackpot determination, and when the effect mode appears. , "The specific production mode with the lowest expectation (here, the production mode of" one body defeat "shown in FIG. 269 (g))" appears at a low rate, and the production after the sword side operation is performed. Since the opportunity to enjoy the sword is given, it is expected that the sword decoration body 5001 is preferably encouraged to operate.

In the production example shown in FIGS. 268 to 270, a special period in which the operation for the operation button 410 is received for the production and the period for which the operation for the sword decoration 5001 is received for the production are simultaneously generated and terminated at the same time. Although it was decided to control it as the production reception period, it is not always necessary to generate these periods at the same time. For example, if the period in which the operation for the operation button 410 is received for the effect and the period in which the operation for the sword ornament 5001 is received for the effect overlap in a part of them, those periods are separated. It may be generated at the timing.

In addition, when a specific effect pattern is selected from a plurality of effect patterns based on the result of the jackpot determination, "a plurality of operation means can accept the effect, and the effect differs depending on which operation means is operated. May be executed without fail. That is, in this case, "Which of the plurality of operating means should be operated within the special effect reception period, and further, a special effect reception period occurs" at a relatively early stage from the time when the symbol variation is started with a specific effect pattern. You will be able to think about a production strategy that assumes that a special production reception period will occur, such as "Should the setting operation to the automatic button production state be performed before doing?" .. For example, it will be possible to confirm "how much notice production was performed in what production mode (expectation degree)" before the special production reception period occurs. It has become possible to use the result as a judgment material for "which of a plurality of operating means should be operated within the special production reception period", and the game until the special production reception period occurs. It will be possible to maintain this as well as the interest.

However, even when a specific effect pattern is selected, when there is an operation on the operation button 410, when there is an operation on the sword ornament 5001, and even when there is an operation on the sword decoration body 5001 within the special effect reception period, the automatic effect function Which effect mode will appear when is functioning is determined by a lottery (judgment) based on the result of the jackpot judgment at the start of the symbol change or when the effect reception occurs (or when the automatic effect function is functioning). It is desirable to do so.

Further, even if there is a production situation in which the special production reception period has not yet occurred, the player can select either the pressing operation of the operation button 410 or the sword delivery operation of the sword decoration body 5001. When there is an effect display (FIGS. 268 (a), 270 (a)) that suggests that a special effect reception period will start, it is permissible to set the automatic button effect state. It is desirable to control this as a prohibited period so that it will not be done. According to such a configuration, it is suggested that a special production reception period in which the player can select either the pressing operation of the operation button 410 or the sword delivery operation of the sword decoration body 5001 is started. Even if you try to set the automatic button effect state after confirming that "effect display" has started, this will not be accepted, so you can continue playing the game while maintaining the automatic button effect state. It has become possible to provide "stable side automatic effect processing when in the automatic button effect state" only for those who are, and it is an effect for continuously playing the game while maintaining the automatic button effect state. Value can be provided.

Further, in the production examples shown in FIGS. 268 to 270, the button side operation is performed on the "specific production mode with the lowest expectation (FIG. 269 (g)") that may appear when the production after the sword side operation is performed. It was decided to execute it as a unique production mode that is different from any of the production modes that may appear when the post-production is performed, but for the "specific production mode with the lowest expectation", the post-button operation production is performed. It may be executed in the same mode as the effect mode that may appear when it is performed (for example, (for example, “defeating 50 bodies” shown in FIG. 268 (d)). In this case, the effect after the sword side operation is performed. Even if "a specific production mode with the lowest expectation" appears as a result of the performance, the same mode as the production mode that can appear when the effect after the button side operation is performed appears for the purpose of seeing. Therefore, it is difficult for a third party who does not know which of the operation button 410 and the sword decoration body 5001 is operated to recognize that the production situation is such that the degree of expectation is extremely low. It becomes possible to do so, and it is expected that the deterioration of the game interest will be suppressed. That is, in this case, in the effect display device 1600, one such as "a specific effect mode is displayed based on the effect reception". Even though the effect situation only appears, the symbol changes depending on whether the effect situation is generated by the operation on the operation button 410 or the operation on the sword decoration body 5001. Since the degree of expectation that the jackpot symbol will appear differs depending on (the fluctuation of the symbol in the execution state), it becomes possible to further enhance the fun as an effect using a plurality of operating means.

However, this is a case where the "specific production mode with the lowest expectation" in the post-operation on the sword side is executed as the same mode as the production mode that can appear even when the post-operation on the button side is performed. However, regarding the "special production mode with the highest expectation" in the post-operation on the sword side, a unique production mode different from any of the production modes that can appear when the post-operation on the button side is performed (for example, (It is desirable to execute as (“777 body defeat” shown in FIG. 269 (i)). According to such a configuration, “a specific production mode with the lowest expectation” in the post-operation effect on the sword side. When appears, it is difficult to recognize that the degree of expectation is extremely low for a third party who does not know which of the operation button 410 and the sword decoration 5001 is operated. On the other hand, when "the most promising special production mode" appears in the production after the sword side operation, even a third party who does not know which of the operation button 410 and the sword decoration 5001 is operated. It becomes possible to easily recognize that the production situation has extremely high expectations. Therefore, as a player, he / she takes the above-mentioned risk without worrying about the eyes of a third party. You will be able to enjoy the production on the side of the sword decoration body 5001 (second operation means) (effect after operation on the sword side). In addition, regarding the "special production mode with the highest expectation", a third party Anything that is recognizable may be used, and for example, uniqueness with other production modes may be ensured by performing a movable body operation or lamp emission.

Further, in the production example shown in FIGS. 268 to 270, as a result of performing the effect after the sword side operation (FIGS. 269 (f) to 269 (i)), the effect mode of "defeating 777 bodies" (FIG. 269 (FIG. 269). i)) can appear, and when the effect mode (FIG. 269 (i)) of the "777 body defeat" appears, any other effect mode (FIG. 268 (d), FIG. 268 (e)) appears. , FIG. 269 (g) and FIG. 269 (h)) appear at a higher rate in which the jackpot symbol appears due to the symbol variation (symbol variation in the executing state). This ratio may be 100%. However, it is not always necessary to make the effect mode (FIG. 269 (i)) of the "777 defeated body" appear, and in this case, the effect mode shown in FIG. 268 (d) is shown in FIG. 269. The appearance rate of the effect mode shown in FIG. 269 (h) is higher than the appearance rate of the effect mode shown in FIG. 268 (e) by the amount of lowering the expectation of the effect mode shown in (g). It becomes.

Further, in the effect examples shown in FIGS. 268 to 270, the effect after the button side operation (FIGS. 268 (c) to 268 (e)) and the effect after the sword side operation (FIGS. 269 (f) to 269 (i)). ), A common effect mode (here, the effect mode of "defeating 100 bodies") can appear, but the common effect mode does not appear. May be good. Further, in the post-operation effect on the button side, only the display change appears, whereas in the post-operation effect on the sword side, in addition to the display change, the movement of the movable body, the light emission of the lamp, and the like may be enabled. Further, the effect after the operation on the button side and the effect after the operation on the sword side do not have commonality as the effect contents regarding the number of defeats, and the effect contents themselves may be executed as different effects from each other.

Further, in the effect examples shown in FIGS. 268 to 270, when the effect reception occurs, including when the effect is received by the function of the automatic effect function, first, for either the operation button 410 or the sword decoration body 5001. Although it was decided that a display (FIG. 268 (c), FIG. 269 (f), FIG. 270 (c)) suggesting whether the production was accepted was made to appear here, the degree of expectation was suggested without displaying the display. It is also possible to execute an effect that causes the effect result to appear.

Further, in the production example shown in FIGS. 268 to 270, as a result of performing the effect after the sword side operation (FIGS. 269 (f) to 269 (i)), the effect mode of "defeating 777 bodies" (FIG. 269 (FIG. 269). When i)) appears, it is more related to the specific operation described above than when any other production mode (FIG. 268 (d), FIG. 268 (e), FIG. 269 (g), FIG. 269 (h)) appears. The rate at which the effects (see FIGS. 241 to 261) appear before the symbol variation is stopped, and when the specific operation-related effect appears, the operating means (sword decoration) on the higher expected side. It is desirable that the ratio of operation opportunities given to 5001) is high. According to such a configuration, in the production examples shown in FIGS. 268 to 270, it is possible to preferably encourage the sword decoration body 5001 on the side having a high production risk to perform an operation.

[Production reception processing according to display type]
As described above, in the automatic button effect state (specific effect state), the player operates within the effect reception period (when the above alternative example is applied, the first specific valid period or the second specific valid period). Even if the operation is not performed, a process (automatic effect function) that causes the same change as when the operation is performed can be executed. However, in the pachinko machine 1 (peripheral control MPU1511a) according to this embodiment,
-The first display effect can be displayed within the effect reception period that allows the effect reception (operation) for the operation button 410, and the operation button 410 is operated while the first display effect is displayed. And, the process of generating the first expected effect (post-operation effect that suggests the degree of expectation) based on the effect received by the operation, and the effect reception that allows the effect reception (operation) for the operation button 410. The second display effect can be displayed within the period, and when an operation is performed on the operation button 410 while the second display effect is displayed, the above-mentioned first display effect is received based on the operation. It is possible to execute a plurality of processes related to different operation effects, such as a process of generating a second expected effect (post-operation effect in which the degree of expectation is suggested) different from the expected effect of 1.

In such a configuration, the type of effect as the expected effect (post-operation effect) that appears at the time of operation differs depending on the display effect (first display effect, second display effect) displayed within the effect reception period. Therefore, it is possible not only to enhance the game entertainment when the operation is performed, but also to preferably enhance the game entertainment from the occurrence of the production reception period to the operation.

In this respect, in the pachinko machine 1 according to this embodiment, at least when the automatic button effect state (specific effect state) is controlled, the effect reception (operation) for the operation button 410 is allowed within the effect reception period. When the effect status in which the first display effect is displayed or the effect status in which the second display effect is displayed appears within the effect reception period that allows the effect reception (operation) for the operation button 410, the effect reception Even if the operation button 410 is not operated within the period, the same expected effect (here, the first expected effect or the second expected effect) is generated as when the operation button 410 is operated. Is feasible.

According to such a configuration, when the automatic button effect state (specific effect state) is controlled, the operation button 410 is operated when the effect situation in which the first display effect is displayed appears within the effect reception period. The first display effect will be executed regardless of whether or not it has been performed, and when the effect situation in which the second display effect is displayed appears within the effect reception period, whether or not the operation button 410 has been operated is determined. Regardless, the second display effect will be executed. Therefore, in the automatic button effect state (specific effect state), even if either the first display effect or the second display effect is displayed within the effect reception period, there is a concern about forgetting to operate. You will be able to enjoy the production without having to.

Furthermore, in the pachinko machine 1 (peripheral control MPU1511a) according to this embodiment, the first display effect can be displayed only when the effect acceptance period for generating the post-operation effect occurs. However, the second display effect can be displayed even when the effect reception period for generating the effect after the operation does not occur. and,
-The production status in which the production reception period is controlled to the automatic button production state (specific production state) and the production reception (operation) for the operation button 410 is allowed, and the first display production is displayed. When the operation button 410 is operated in, the process of generating the first expected effect (effect after operation) and the process of ending the automatic button effect state are performed, respectively (the effect shown in FIG. 271 described later). See progress),
-A production situation in which the automatic button effect state (specific effect state) is controlled, an effect reception period for allowing the effect reception (operation) for the operation button 410 has occurred, and the second display effect is displayed. When the operation button 410 is operated in, the process of generating the second expected effect (effect after operation) is performed, but the process of ending the automatic button effect state is not performed (shown in FIG. 272 described later). See production progress),
-An effect that is controlled to the automatic button effect state (specific effect state), does not have an effect reception period that allows the effect reception (operation) for the operation button 410, and the second display effect is displayed. When the operation button 410 is operated in the situation, neither the process of generating the first expected effect (post-operation effect) nor the process of generating the second expected effect (post-operation effect) is performed, and the automatic button is performed. The process of terminating the production state is also prevented (see the production progress shown in FIG. 273 below).
-The effect reception period that is controlled to the automatic button effect state (specific effect state) and allows the effect reception (operation) for the operation button 410 has not occurred, and the first display effect and the second display effect When an operation is performed on the operation button 410 in an effect situation in which none of the above is displayed, a process for generating a first expected effect (post-operation effect) and a process for generating a second expected effect (post-operation effect). Each process, such as the process of terminating the automatic button effect state, is executed according to each effect situation (effect reception process according to the display type).

According to such a configuration, when the operation button 410 is operated when the first display effect appears and the second display effect does not appear, and when the first display effect appears. The type (second post-operation effect) as the expected effect (post-operation effect) according to the operation (effect reception), depending on whether the operation button 410 is operated while the second display effect is appearing. The expected effect of 1 and the second expected effect) are made different, and even if the operation is performed only when the second display effect appears, the expected effect (post-operation effect) itself does not appear. There is a possibility, and the process of ending the automatic button effect state will not be performed. Therefore, the variety of effects using the operation buttons 410 can be ensured, and the game entertainment when the effects using the operation buttons 410 are performed can be suitably improved.

Hereinafter, the effect reception process according to the display type in such an automatic button effect state will be described with reference to FIGS. 271-275.

In FIG. 271, while the automatic button effect state is controlled, the period tb11 to tb13 (see FIG. 271 (a)) of the execution period of the symbol variation is set to “the effect reception (operation) for the operation button 410). An example of the effect when the first effect pattern that can be set as "the effect acceptance period that allows the above" is executed is shown.

In this first effect pattern, when the timing tb11 for generating the “effect reception period for allowing the effect reception (operation) for the operation button 410” arrives, as shown in FIG. 271 (b), the effect display device 1600 , The button image BTG corresponding to the operation button 410 is displayed, and an instruction display (here, an arrow display in the downward direction and a bar display indicating the remaining time of the production reception period) appear to prompt the operation of the operation button 410. (First display effect).

Then, assuming that the operation for the operation button 410 is received at the timing tb12 before the timing tb13, as shown in FIG. 271 (c), the symbol variation (execution state) based on the effect reception. The first post-operation effect (in the figure, the fortune of "Nakayoshi") that suggests the degree of expectation that the jackpot symbol will appear due to the symbol variation) is executed (the first expected effect). At this time, the automatic button effect state is canceled and returned to the normal effect state based on the effect reception, and the effect reception period generated from the timing tb11 also has the effect reception without exhausting the remaining time. It will be terminated at that point. Therefore, at the timing tb12 when the effect is received, the display indicating that the effect is controlled to the "auto button effect state" (here, "auto button is being set") has appeared in the display area of the effect display device 1600. ) ”Will also be hidden.

However, in this case, regardless of whether the effect is received within the period of timing tb11 to tb13, in the timing tb13, as shown in FIG. 271 (d), the first post-operation effect generated by the effect reception ( The first expected production) is not finished yet, and it is in the state of being executed so that the game entertainment interest is suitably maintained for the period of timings tb11 to tb13 regardless of the timing when the production reception is performed. It is desirable to do.

In FIG. 272, while the automatic button effect state is controlled, the period tb21 to tb23 (see FIG. 272 (a)) of the execution period of the symbol variation is set to “the effect reception (operation) for the operation button 410). An example of the effect when the second effect pattern that can be set as "the effect acceptance period that allows the above" is executed is shown.

In this second effect pattern, when the timing tb21 for generating the “effect reception period for allowing the effect reception (operation) for the operation button 410” arrives, as shown in FIG. 272 (b), the effect display device 1600 , "Haunted OBK with a present box" will be introduced (second display production).

Here, when "Haunted OBK with a present box" is displayed, unlike the case where the button image BTG is displayed, an effect suggesting the degree of expectation is always generated when the operation button 410 is operated. Therefore, an instruction display (a downward arrow display or a bar display indicating the remaining time of the effect reception period) for prompting the operation of the operation button 410 does not appear.

In this regard, in the production example shown in FIG. 272, the ghost OBK holding the present box can be displayed within the period of timings tb21 to tb23, and the ghost OBK is displayed before the timing tb23. When the operation button 410 is operated at the timing tb22, the effect is received, and as shown in FIG. 272 (c), the jackpot symbol is generated by the symbol variation (the symbol variation in the executing state) based on the effect reception. The second post-operation effect (displaying the characters "super heat" in the figure) that suggests the degree of expectation that appears is executed (second expected effect).

However, at this time, the production reception period generated from the timing tb21 is terminated when the production reception is received without exhausting the remaining time, whereas the automatic button production state is not canceled. I am trying to maintain this. Therefore, at the timing tb22, the "display indicating that the control is controlled to the automatic button effect state (here," auto button is being set ")" that appears in the display area of the effect display device 1600 continues to be displayed. Will be done.

Regardless of whether the effect is received within the period of timing tb21 to tb23, in the timing tb23, as shown in FIG. 272 (d), the second post-operation effect (second post-operation effect) generated by the effect reception is performed. The expected production of Is desirable.

FIG. 273 is for generating the second post-operation effect during the period of timings tb31 to tb33 (see FIG. 273 (a)) in the execution period of the symbol variation while being controlled to the automatic button effect state. An example of the production when the third production pattern for displaying "Haunted OBK with a present box" is executed even though the production reception period of the above has not occurred is shown.

In this third effect pattern, when the timing tb31 arrives, as shown in FIG. 273 (b), the effect display device 1600 causes a ghost OBK with a present box to appear (second display effect).

However, as described above, in the production situation where the ghost OBK with the present box is displayed, unlike the case where the button image BTG is displayed, the post-operation production that suggests the degree of expectation even if the operation button 410 is operated is performed. Since it is not always generated, an instruction display (a downward arrow display or a bar display indicating the remaining time of the production reception period) for prompting the operation of the operation button 410 does not appear.

In this regard, in the production example shown in FIG. 273, the ghost OBK holding the present box can be displayed within the period of timings tb31 to tb33, but as shown in FIG. 273 (a), the ghost OBK is displayed. During this period, the "effect reception period for allowing the production reception (operation) for the operation button 410" does not occur. Therefore, as shown in FIGS. 272 (a) and 272 (c), even if the operation button 410 is operated while the ghost OBK holding the present box is displayed, after the operation corresponding to the operation. The effect (first post-operation effect, second post-operation effect) does not appear, and the ghost OBK with the present box is displayed over the period of timings tb31 to tb33.

However, as described above, in the pachinko machine 1 (peripheral control MPU1511a) according to this embodiment, in the automatic button effect state, the operation button 410 is operated when the effect reception period related to the post-operation effect does not occur. In this case, basically, the process of ending (cancelling the setting) the automatic button effect state is performed, but it is shown in FIG. 273 even when the effect reception period related to the post-operation effect does not occur. If an operation is performed on the operation button 410 while in such a production situation (a production situation in which a ghost OBK holding a present box is displayed), a process for generating a post-operation effect and an automatic button effect state are displayed. The production will be advanced so that neither of the ending processes will be performed.

Therefore, the second operation shown in FIG. 272 (c) is displayed when the aspect shown in FIG. 273 (b) (a ghost OBK holding a present box), which is the same aspect as in FIG. 272 (b), is displayed. Even if the operation button 410 is operated in the expectation that a post-effect (second expected effect) will occur, the effect will not change, but the automatic button effect state will not be canceled. You will be able to continue this. At this time, as a method of not canceling the setting of the automatic button effect state,
-Even when the effect reception period related to the post-operation effect has not occurred, only the detection of whether or not the operation button 410 has been performed is enabled, and when the effect reception period related to the post-operation effect does not occur, the detection is performed. If there is a detection, it is determined whether or not the timing of the detection is "within the period of the timing tb31 to tb33 when the ghost OBK with the present box is displayed", and the "hold the present box". When the timing when the ghost OBK is displayed is within the period of tb31 to tb33, the process of canceling the setting of the automatic button effect state is not performed, and the timing when the ghost OBK with the present box is displayed. A method for canceling the setting of the automatic button effect state when it is not "within the period of tb21 to tb23" (the period of timing tb31 to tb33 is set as a prohibition period for canceling the setting of the automatic button effect state. Method)
-During the period tb21 to tb23 when the ghost OBK with the present box is displayed, a method such as detecting whether or not the operation button 410 has been performed and not performing the operation itself should be adopted. Is possible, and any method for realizing the above may be used.

In FIG. 274, while the automatic button effect state is controlled, the period tb11 to tb13 (see FIG. 274 (a)) of the execution period of the symbol variation is set to “the effect reception (operation) for the operation button 410. An example of an effect is shown when the operation button 410 is not operated within the period of the timings tb11 to tb13, although the above-mentioned first effect pattern that can be set as the “allowable effect acceptance period” is executed.

As described above, in this first effect pattern, when the timing tb11 for generating the “effect reception period for allowing the effect reception (operation) for the operation button 410” arrives, the effect display is as shown in FIG. 274 (b). In the device 1600, the button image BTG corresponding to the operation button 410 is displayed, and an instruction display prompting the operation of the operation button 410 (here, an arrow display in the downward direction and a bar indicating the remaining time of the effect reception period) are displayed. Display) appears (first display effect).

In this regard, in the effect example shown in FIG. 274, the operation button 410 is not operated within the period of timings tb11 to tb13, but when the timing tb12'before the timing tb13 arrives, the above-mentioned automatic effect function Is now functioning, which causes the same changes to the effect as when the operation button 410 is operated. Therefore, as shown in FIG. 274 (c), at the timing tb12', the degree of expectation that the jackpot symbol will appear due to the symbol variation (symbol variation in the execution state) based on the above-mentioned automatic effect function functioning. The suggested first post-operation effect (in the figure, the fortune of "Nakayoshi") is executed (first expected effect). However, at this time, the effect reception period generated from the timing tb11 ends when the automatic effect function functions without exhausting the remaining time, but the automatic button effect state is not canceled and continues. Become. Therefore, at the timing tb12', the "display indicating that the control is controlled to the automatic button effect state (here," auto button is being set ")" that has appeared in the display area of the effect display device 1600 continues. It will be displayed.

Further, even when the above-mentioned automatic effect function functions at the timing tb12', at the timing tb13, as shown in FIG. 274 (d), the first post-operation effect (first post-operation effect) generated by the above-mentioned automatic effect function is performed. It is desirable that the expected production of the above) is not completed yet and is in the state of being executed in order to preferably maintain the game entertainment interest for the period of timings tb11 to tb13.

In FIG. 275, while the automatic button effect state is controlled, the period tb21 to tb23 (see FIG. 275 (a)) of the execution period of the symbol variation is set to “the effect reception (operation) for the operation button 410. An example of an effect is shown when the operation button 410 is not operated within the period of the timings tb21 to tb23, although the above-mentioned second effect pattern that can be set as the “allowable effect acceptance period” is executed.

As described above, in this second effect pattern, when the timing tb21 for generating the “effect reception period for allowing the effect reception (operation) for the operation button 410” arrives, the effect display is as shown in FIG. 275 (b). In the device 1600, a "ghost OBK with a present box" will be introduced (second display effect).

Here, as described above, when "Haunted OBK with a present box" is displayed, unlike the case where the button image BTG is displayed, the degree of expectation is suggested when the operation button 410 is operated. Since it is not always possible to generate the effect, an instruction display (a downward arrow display or a bar display indicating the remaining time of the effect reception period) that prompts the operation of the operation button 410 appears. There is no.

In this regard, in the effect example shown in FIG. 275, the operation button 410 is not operated within the period of timings tb21 to tb23, but when the timing tb22'before the timing tb23 arrives, the above-mentioned automatic effect function Is now functioning, which causes the same changes to the effect as when the operation button 410 is operated. Therefore, as shown in FIG. 275 (c), at the timing tb22', the degree of expectation that the jackpot symbol will appear due to the symbol variation (symbol variation in the execution state) based on the function of the above-mentioned automatic effect function. The suggestion second post-operation effect (in the figure, the character display of "super heat") is executed (second expected effect). However, even in this case, the effect reception period generated from the timing tb21 ends when the automatic effect function functions without exhausting the remaining time, but the automatic button effect state is not canceled and continues. It becomes. Therefore, at the timing tb22', the "display indicating that the control is controlled to the automatic button effect state (here," auto button is being set ")" that has appeared up to that point in the display area of the effect display device 1600 continues. It will be displayed.

Further, even when the above-mentioned automatic effect function functions at the timing tb22', at the timing tb23, as shown in FIG. 275 (d), the second post-operation effect (second post-operation effect) generated by the above-mentioned automatic effect function is performed. It is desirable that the expected production of the above) is not completed yet and is in the state of being executed in order to preferably maintain the game entertainment interest during the period of timings tb21 to tb23.

By the way, although the illustration is omitted, although the above-mentioned third effect pattern (see FIG. 273) is executed while being controlled to the automatic button effect state, the operation button 410 is relative to the operation button 410 within the period of the timing tb31 to tb33. When the operation is not performed, the above-mentioned automatic effect function cannot function and the automatic button effect state is also canceled because the effect acceptance period for generating the second post-operation effect has not occurred in the first place. It goes without saying that it will continue (that is, no change will occur).

In the effect example shown in FIGS. 271 to 275, the first display effect shown in FIG. 271 and the second display effect shown in FIGS. 272 and 273 execute effects that are developed with different contents from each other. , The type as the post-operation effect when the operation button 410 is performed when either the first display effect or the second display effect is displayed (first). The expected effect (the second expected effect) is made different, and even if the operation is performed only when the second display effect appears, the expected effect (post-operation effect) itself may not appear. It will be prevented from being processed to end the automatic button effect state. Therefore, the variety of effects using the operation buttons 410 can be ensured, and the game entertainment when the effects using the operation buttons 410 are performed can be suitably improved.

Regarding the first display effect, there are a plurality of effect modes having different expectations, and it may be possible to execute the first display effect in any of these effect modes. Further, the second display effect also has a plurality of effect modes having different expectations, and may be executed in any of these effect modes. However, it is important that the first display effect and the second display effect are executed as display contents having no relation to each other. In the effect example shown in FIGS. 271 to 275, in the first display effect, an instruction display prompting the operation of the button image BTG and the operation button 410 is displayed, whereas in the second display effect, the button is displayed. Neither the image BTG nor the instruction display prompting the operation to the operation button 410 is displayed, and a specific background image (a ghost with a present box) that is not displayed when the first display effect is being performed is displayed. It has become.

Further, regarding the first expected effect, there are a plurality of effect modes having different expectations, and it may be possible to execute in any of these effect modes. Further, the second expected effect also has a plurality of effect modes having different expectations, and may be executed in any of these effect modes. However, it is important that the first expected production and the second expected production are executed as production contents having no relation to each other. In the production example shown in FIGS. 271 to 275, the fortune-telling image is displayed in the first expected production, whereas the fortune-telling image is not displayed in the second expected production, and the degree of expectation by character display is displayed. Is being suggested. By executing either the first expected effect or the second expected effect as a movable effect or a lamp display effect, the contents may not be related to each other.

Further, in the effect example shown in FIGS. 271 to 275, as an effect pattern for causing the second display effect to appear within the execution period of the symbol variation, when the second display effect appears, "the effect for the operation button 410". A second effect pattern and a second display effect appear in which it is determined in advance (for example, in the judgment process performed at the start of the symbol variation) that a "effect reception period that allows reception (operation)" will occur. When the third effect pattern is set, it is determined in advance (for example, in the determination process performed at the start of the symbol variation) that the "effect reception period for allowing the effect reception (operation) for the operation button 410" does not occur. I decided to prepare. However, after preparing a second effect pattern in which it is predetermined that a "effect acceptance period that allows the effect reception (operation) for the operation button 410" will occur when the second display effect appears. Based on the fact that the production reception is performed within the production reception period that allows the production reception (operation) for the operation button 410, a determination (lottery) is made as to whether or not to generate the second expected production, and the result is determined. By generating a second expected effect when a specific result is obtained in the determination and not generating a second expected effect when a specific result is not obtained in the determination, FIG. 271 ~ The production example shown in FIG. 275 may be realized. Further, apart from the second effect pattern according to such another example, when the second display effect appears, the "effect acceptance period that allows the effect reception (operation) for the operation button 410" does not occur. It is also possible to further prepare the above-mentioned third effect pattern that has been determined in advance (for example, in the determination process performed at the start of the symbol variation).

In addition, when the second expected effect occurs as a result of the effect reception (operation) for the operation button 410 while the second display effect is being performed, the first display effect is being performed. It is possible to make the rate at which the jackpot symbol appears in the symbol variation (symbol variation in the executing state) higher than when the first expected effect occurs as a result of the effect reception (operation) for the operation button 410. desirable.

Further, when the second display effect is performed, the above-mentioned specific operation-related effect (see FIGS. 241 to 261) is stopped until the symbol variation is stopped, as compared with the case where the first display effect is performed. It is desirable to increase the rate of appearance between. According to such a configuration, even if the second expected effect does not occur as a result of the effect reception (operation) for the operation button 410 while the second display effect is being performed, a specific operation is performed. It becomes possible to have a sense of expectation that the related effects (see FIGS. 241 to 261) will be performed, and it will be possible to suitably suppress the game entertainment.

Further, in the effect examples shown in FIGS. 271 to 275, when the first display effect (see FIG. 271 (b)) is displayed and when the second display effect (FIG. 272 (b), FIG. 273) is displayed. (Refer to (b)) is displayed, and the above-mentioned automatic effect function is activated. However, even if there is an operation, the second expected effect does not always occur. When the second display effect (see FIGS. 272 (b) and 273 (b)) is displayed, the above-mentioned automatic effect is displayed. When the effect function is made to function, when the second display effect (see FIGS. 272 (b) and 273 (b)) is displayed, the operation is performed by leaving it to the above-mentioned automatic effect function. There is concern that it will disappear. Therefore, when the first display effect (see FIG. 271 (b)) is displayed, the above-mentioned automatic effect function functions, but the second display effect (FIG. 272 (b) and FIG. 273 (b)) is displayed. (See) is displayed, the above-mentioned automatic effect function is disabled, and when the second display effect is displayed, even if it is operated, the second expected effect will occur, but at least it must be operated. For example, the second expected effect may not occur.

Further, in the effect example shown in FIGS. 271 to 275, when the ghost OBK is displayed, a "effect reception period that allows the effect reception (operation) for the operating means" is generated while the ghost OBK is displayed. You may do so. Further, in the production example shown in FIGS. 271 to 275, when displaying the ghost OBK, the automatic production function may function within the "effect reception period for allowing the production reception (operation) for the operating means", or the player may use it. Even if the operation is performed, the ghost OBK may not be hidden, and the effect of displaying the ghost OBK may be continued at the timing tb23 and the timing tb33.

[Auto repeated hit function in the automatic button effect state]
As described above, in the automatic button effect state (specific effect state), the player operates within the effect reception period (when the above alternative example is applied, the first specific valid period or the second specific valid period). Even if the operation is not performed, a process (automatic effect function) that causes the same change as when the operation is performed can be executed. However, in the pachinko machine 1, the pachinko machine 1 prompts a plurality of operations (such as repeatedly hitting the operation button 410) to a predetermined operation means, generates an effect reception every time there is such an operation, and performs a multiple operation effect corresponding to the operation. May be struck. Therefore, in the automatic button effect state, how to make the above-mentioned automatic effect function function when such a specific effect reception period in which the operation effect is performed a plurality of times occurs becomes a problem.

On the other hand, in the pachinko machine 1 (peripheral control MPU1511a) according to this embodiment, a predetermined operation means (for example, an operation button 410) is provided during a specific effect reception period in which an operation opportunity of a plurality of operations (continuous hits, etc.) is given. Is not required to be operated multiple times, but an effect when the operation is performed multiple times simply by performing an operation in a long mode (so-called long press, etc.) for maintaining the predetermined operating means in the operating state for a relatively long time. It is equipped with an automatic multiple-time operation function (auto-continuous hitting function) that allows the mode to appear, and the automatic multiple-time operation function (auto-continuous hitting function) functions when an operation is performed on a predetermined operating means in a long-operation mode. When this is done, the effect is received every time a predetermined time elapses while the operation state is maintained, and it is possible to execute a process of generating the post-operation effect a plurality of times according to these.

In this regard, in the pachinko machine 1 (peripheral control MPU1511a) according to this embodiment, an operation opportunity of a plurality of operations (continuous hitting, etc.) is given when the pachinko machine 1 (peripheral control MPU1511a) is controlled to the automatic button effect state (specific effect state). When the specific effect reception period occurs, even if the operation means is not operated within the specific effect reception period, the operation means is automatically performed in the long operation mode within the specific effect reception period. Similar to when the multiple operation function (automatic continuous hitting function) functions, the process of generating an effect according to the effect reception is executed every time a predetermined time elapses (automatic effect function).

According to such a configuration, there is a pachinko machine 1 in which the automatic continuous striking function is enabled when a so-called long press operation is performed within a specific effect reception period in which an operation opportunity for multiple operations (continuous striking, etc.) is given. Therefore, at least when the automatic button effect state is controlled, the same effect mode as when the automatic continuous striking function is enabled appears even if the operation by long pressing is not performed within the specific effect reception period. Therefore, even if the automatic effect function is activated when a specific effect reception period that requires multiple operation receptions occurs in the automatic button effect state, the specific effect (operation reception) within the specific effect reception period. Players will not be dissatisfied with the frequency of occurrence of, and will be able to enjoy the production.

FIG. 276 (a) shows an operation opportunity of “multiple operations (repeated hits, etc.) on the operation button 410” during the timings tc11 to tk13 in the execution period of the symbol variation when the automatic button effect state is not controlled. A specific effect pattern that can be set as a "specific effect reception period to which is given" is executed, and the operation button 410 is operated a plurality of times in a single-shot operation mode in which the operation state is maintained for a relatively short time within the specific effect reception period. It shows an example of the production when it was performed over.

As shown in FIG. 276 (a), in this production example, every time the operation button 410 is operated in the mode of the single-shot operation within the specific production reception period (timing tk11 to tk13) (the operation button 410 is the original). Every time it is detected that the position is changed from the position to the operation state (here, the rising is detected), the effect reception is performed according to the operation, and the specific effect (post-operation effect) is executed according to the effect reception. .. Then, when a specific effect condition is satisfied, such as the number of times the operation is detected (effect reception) for the operation button 410 reaches a specific number of times, or a specific result is obtained by a lottery when the effect is received. , A production mode in which the degree of expectation is suggested is made to appear according to the satisfaction of the specific production condition, and the specific production reception period is terminated at that time without exhausting the remaining time. ..

Here, although omitted in the figure, within the specific effect reception period (timing tk11 to tk13), the specific time from the start to the end of the specific effect (post-operation effect) according to the effect reception. A new production reception (operation detection) may be made within. In such a case, the specific effect (post-operation effect) that is in the process of being executed at the time when the effect is received is interrupted, and a new specific effect (post-operation effect) corresponding to the effect reception is generated. Therefore, it is desirable to suitably maintain the operation feeling (effect reactivity) when the player operates it. It should be noted that the newly generated specific effect (post-operation effect) is terminated when a specific time elapses from the start, unless a new effect reception is generated again during the execution of the specific effect. Become.

FIG. 276 (b) shows an operation opportunity of “multiple operations (repeated hits, etc.) on the operation button 410” during the timings tc11 to tk13 in the execution period of the symbol variation when the automatic button effect state is not controlled. A specific effect pattern that can be set as a "specific effect reception period to which is given" is executed, and the operation is performed in a long mode (so-called long press) in which the operation state is maintained for a relatively long time within the specific effect reception period. An example of the effect when the operation for the button 410 is performed is shown.

As shown in FIG. 276 (b), the operation button 410 is in the operation state while the operation state for the operation button 410 is maintained in the mode of long pressing during the specific effect reception period (timing tk11 to tk13). A process to generate a new specific effect (post-operation effect) every time a predetermined time t1 elapses after the first specific effect (post-operation effect) is generated based on the operation detection (effect reception) at the time. Auto repeated hit function) is to be executed. As this process (automatic continuous striking function), for example, "operation detection (effect reception) is performed on condition that the operation button 410 is in the operation state every time the predetermined time t1 elapses, and the operation detection (effect reception) is performed. It is possible to execute it as a process such as "generating a new specific effect (effect after operation) based on the reception). Then, when a specific effect condition is satisfied, such as the number of times the operation is detected (effect reception) for the operation button 410 reaches a specific number of times, or a specific result is obtained by a lottery when the effect is received. , A production mode in which the degree of expectation is suggested is made to appear according to the satisfaction of the specific production condition, and the specific production reception period is terminated at that time without exhausting the remaining time. ..

FIG. 277 (a) shows an operation opportunity of “multiple operations (repeated hits, etc.) on the operation button 410” during the timings ct11 to tk13 in the execution period of the symbol variation when controlled to the automatic button effect state. An example of an effect when a specific effect pattern that can be set as a "specific effect reception period to which is given" is executed and no operation is performed within the specific effect reception period is shown.

First, if no operation is performed during the specific effect reception period (timing ct11 to tk13) when the automatic button effect state is not controlled, the specific effect is not executed even once, and the timing ct13 is reached. When it reaches, the specific production acceptance period will end.

On the other hand, if no operation is performed during the specific effect reception period (timing tk11 to tk13) while the automatic button effect state is controlled, it is specified as shown in FIG. 277 (a). The above-mentioned automatic effect function functions at the timing ct12 when a predetermined time has elapsed since the effect reception period has occurred. That is, in this case, after the first specific effect is generated at the timing t12, the automatic effect function performs a new specific effect every time the predetermined time t1 elapses, as in the case where the above-mentioned automatic continuous striking function functions. The process of generating the effect after the operation) will be executed.

As this process (automatic effect function), for example, "operation detection (effect reception) is performed every time a predetermined time t1 elapses, and a new specific effect (effect reception) is performed based on the operation detection (effect reception). It is possible to execute it as a process such as "generating a post-operation effect)". Further, when the above-mentioned automatic effect function functions at the timing tc12, the automatic continuous striking function is activated so that "operation detection (effect reception) is performed every time the predetermined time t1 elapses, and these operation detections are performed. A process such as "generating a new specific effect (effect after operation) based on (effect reception)" may be performed. Then, when a specific effect condition is satisfied, such as the number of times the operation is detected (effect reception) for the operation button 410 reaches a specific number of times, or a specific result is obtained by a lottery when the effect is received. , A production mode in which the degree of expectation is suggested is made to appear according to the satisfaction of the specific production condition, and the specific production reception period is terminated at that time without exhausting the remaining time. ..

FIG. 277 (b) shows an operation opportunity of “multiple operations (repeated hits, etc.) on the operation button 410” during the timings ct11 to tk13 in the execution period of the symbol variation when controlled to the automatic button effect state. A specific effect pattern that can be set as a "specific effect reception period" is executed, and the operation button 410 is pressed and held while the above-mentioned automatic effect function is functioning during the specific effect reception period. An example of the production when it is performed is shown.

In the effect example shown in FIG. 277 (b), the above-mentioned automatic effect function functions at the timing ct12 as in the effect example shown in FIG. 277 (a), whereby the first specific effect is performed at the timing tk12. After the generation of The process of causing it to be executed.

However, in this effect example, it is assumed that the operation for the operation button 410 is performed in a long-pressed manner at the timing tc12a when the process by the automatic effect function is being executed. Therefore, in the timing tc12a, the setting of the automatic button effect state is canceled (finished) when the operation for the operation button 410 is detected while the automatic button effect state is in the state. However, in this production example, even though the operation by the player is detected at the timing tc12a, the production reception is not performed. Then, after preventing the specific effect (post-operation effect) corresponding to the effect reception from occurring at the timing tc12a, the process (predetermined time t1) executed before the automatic button effect state is canceled is set. The process of generating a new specific effect (effect after operation) is continued without ending each time.

According to such a configuration, in the automatic button effect state, when the above-mentioned automatic effect function is functioning within the specific effect reception period, a long press operation is performed at any timing in the state. Even if is started, there is no longer a delay in the progress of the production due to a change in the rhythm or tempo related to the generation of the specific production (effect after the operation) triggered by the operation, and it is already in the execution state. The process (the process of generating a new specific effect (post-operation effect) each time the predetermined time t1 elapses) is executed in a form that is inherited until after the operation mode by long pressing is started. Therefore, in the automatic button effect state, even if the above-mentioned automatic effect function is functioning within the specific effect reception period, the player can operate the operation without worrying about adverse effects on the effect in the executed state. It becomes possible to perform the operation, which facilitates the operation by the player. That is, although the effect example shown in FIG. 277 (b) is different from the effect example shown in FIG. 277 (a) in that the long press operation by the player is started at the timing tc12a, The same mode will appear as the mode of the specific effect that appears within the specific effect reception period.

It should be noted that the process already in the execution state (the process of generating a new specific effect (post-operation effect) each time the predetermined time t1 elapses) is inherited until after the operation mode by long pressing is started. It is possible to execute in the form of an auto continuous hit function that works when a long press operation is performed within the specific production reception period, and a function when the operation is not performed within the specific production reception period. Regardless of which of the automatic effect functions to be performed, the same process (process to generate a new specific effect (post-operation effect) each time the predetermined time t1 elapses) is executed. It is nothing but from.

However, after the long press operation by the player is started at the timing tc12a, it is determined whether or not the operation button 410 is in the operation state every time the predetermined time t1 is digested, indicating that the operation button 410 is in the operation state. On the condition that the judgment is made, the process executed from the time when the automatic button effect state is set (the process of generating a new specific effect (post-operation effect) every time the predetermined time t1 elapses) is continued. It will be. Therefore, if the operation button 410 is not in the operating state when the predetermined time t1 based on the previously executed specific effect is exhausted, a new specific effect (post-operation effect) is generated at that time. Instead, the process that has been executed since the state of the automatic button effect (the process of generating a new specific effect (post-operation effect) each time the predetermined time t1 elapses) is terminated.

In the production example using the automatic continuous striking function shown in FIG. 276 (b) and the automatic effect function shown in FIGS. 277 (a) and 277 (b), the predetermined time t1 is set based on the timing when the specific effect is completed. After the lapse of time, a process (automatic continuous striking function, first aspect as an automatic effect function) for generating a new specific effect (post-operation effect) was executed, but instead of this, the timing at which the specific effect started was used as a reference. As a result, a process (automatic continuous striking function, second aspect as an automatic effect function) for generating a new specific effect (post-operation effect) may be executed after the elapse of a predetermined time t2. In this case, the predetermined time t2 may be longer than the specific time required from the start to the end of the specific effect, but is preferably from the start to the end of the specific effect. Set so that it is shorter than the specific time required for. According to such a configuration, when the specific effect is in the middle of execution, a new specific effect is executed in the form of interrupting the specific effect. It becomes possible to make the player feel as if he / she is repeatedly performing a single operation at high speed even though he / she has not performed any operation, and it is expected that the game entertainment will be maintained favorably.

In the effect example shown in FIG. 277 (b), when the operation button 410 is operated before the timing ct12 at which the automatic effect function functions (within the period of timings tc11 to tk12), it is at that time. The setting of the automatic button effect state will be canceled (finished). At this time, the first specific effect is generated in response to the operation of the operation button 410, and thereafter, if the operation is a long press mode, every time the predetermined time t1 (or the predetermined time t2) elapses. A process (automatic continuous striking function) for generating a new specific effect (effect after operation) is executed, and if the operation is in the mode of one-shot pressing, it is detected that the operation button 410 is in the operation state. A new specific effect (effect after operation) will be generated each time.

Further, in the effect examples shown in FIGS. 276 and 277, when the effect is received while the specific effect is in the middle of execution, the effect is accepted by interrupting the specific effect in the state of being executed. Although it was decided to generate a new specific effect, it is also possible to generate a new specific effect according to the effect reception in parallel with the specific effect in the state of being executed without ending it.

As described above, in the effect example shown in FIGS. 276 and 277, when a new single-shot operation is performed and the effect is accepted while the previous specific effect generated by the single-shot operation is in the middle of execution. When a new specific effect (post-operation effect) is generated according to the effect reception, while the previous specific effect generated by the automatic effect function (or auto continuous hit function) is in the middle of execution. Even if it is detected that the operation button 410 has entered the operation state from the original position due to a single operation or a long press operation, a new specific effect (post-operation effect) is not generated at the time of the detection, and the operation button 410 is already in the execution state. It was decided to continue the process (process to generate a specific effect every time a predetermined time elapses). After that, if the operation state is maintained when the predetermined time based on the previous specific effect elapses (in the case of a long press operation), the process that is already in the execution state (the specific effect is performed for the specified time). Since the process (process generated each time the game elapses) is further continued, the player can end the automatic button effect state while preferably continuing the operation system effect that has been in the execution state since the state of the automatic button effect state. It becomes possible to shift to the state where the operation system production is performed by the operation by the player, and it is expected that the player's participation consciousness will be raised by this.

[Setting processing related to the automatic button effect state according to the type of effect pattern]
As described above, in the automatic button effect state (specific effect state), the player operates within the effect reception period (when the above alternative example is applied, the first specific valid period or the second specific valid period). Even if the operation is not performed, a process (automatic effect function) that causes the same change as when the operation is performed can be executed. Further, as described above, in the pachinko machine 1 (peripheral control MPU1511a) according to this embodiment, even during the execution period of the symbol variation, the operation of a predetermined operation means (for example, the operation button 410) is performed. It is possible to set or cancel the automatic button effect state, and by simplifying such operations, it is possible to set or cancel the automatic button effect state while maintaining attention to the progress of the effect while the symbol is changing. I am trying to do it.

However, if the automatic button effect state is set or canceled during the execution period of the symbol variation, the processing load increases due to the setting change that was not expected at the start of the symbol variation, and the processing load increases at the start of the symbol variation. There is concern that it will adversely affect the decided production progress. In this regard, the types of the "effect pattern executed based on the result of the jackpot determination" include, at least, "the first effect pattern in which the specific effect reception period in which the instruction display prompting the operation appears can be set" and "the operation. Since a "second effect pattern in which the specific effect reception period cannot be set" in which a prompting instruction display appears is prepared, the setting or cancellation of the automatic button effect state is not always promptly executed depending on the type of effect pattern. In some cases, no problem will occur. Therefore, in the pachinko machine 1 (peripheral control MPU1511a) according to this embodiment, when the symbol variation is in the execution period depending on which of the first effect pattern and the second effect pattern is in the execution state. By making the setting and the processing mode for canceling the automatic button effect state different, the increase in the processing load during the execution period of the symbol variation is suppressed.

FIG. 278 shows a symbol variation in the "first effect pattern in which a specific effect reception period in which an instruction display prompting an operation appears can be set" when the automatic button effect state is controlled and the number of holds is three. Is started, and is a time chart showing a processing example when an operation for canceling the automatic button effect state (release operation) or an operation for setting (setting operation) is performed within the execution period of the symbol variation. .. The first effect pattern may be either a hit variation or a loss variation.

As shown in FIG. 278, when the automatic button effect state is controlled and the number of holds is three, "a specific effect reception period in which an instruction display prompting an operation appears can be set. It is assumed that the symbol change is started in the "effect pattern". Then, although the symbol change is being executed, the effect progress as the first effect pattern is made while the automatic button effect state can be released (the release operation is allowed). ..

Then, in this effect example, it is assumed that the release operation by the player is detected at the timing td11 shown in the figure, and the automatic button effect state is released based on the detection of the release operation. It is supposed to be (finished). As described above, in the pachinko machine 1 according to this embodiment, the setting cancellation of the automatic button effect state during the symbol change is executed based on the detection that the operation button 410 is in the operation state. Will be done.

Further, in this effect example, after the automatic button effect state is canceled in this way, the operation for the operation button 410 (the operation button 410 is in the operation state) is performed at the timing td12 within the specific effect reception period shown in the figure. ) Is detected. When an operation for the operation button 410 is detected within the specific effect reception period, the effect is received, the post-operation effect corresponding to the effect reception is executed, and the specific effect reception period ends without exhausting the remaining time. Will be done. As described above, in the pachinko machine 1 according to this embodiment, during the specific effect reception period when the automatic button effect state is not set, the effect is received when the operation button 410 is operated. It will not be accepted as a setting operation to the automatic button effect state. On the other hand, in the specific effect reception period when the automatic button effect state is set, when the operation button 410 is operated, the effect is received, the post-operation effect is executed, and the automatic button effect state is released. It is also accepted as an operation, and the setting of the automatic button effect state is canceled (finished).

Furthermore, in this production example, it is assumed that the setting operation by the player is detected at the timing td13 shown in the figure after the specific production reception period is completed in this way, although the design is changing. , The automatic button effect state is set based on the detection of the setting operation. As described above, in the pachinko machine 1 according to this embodiment, the setting to the automatic button effect state during the symbol variation is maintained for a predetermined time (for example, 2 seconds) when the operation button 410 is in the operation state. It is supposed to be executed when it is detected. However, instead of this, the setting to the automatic button effect state during the symbol change may be executed based on the detection that the operation button 410 is in the operation state.

Then, in this effect example, when the symbol variation is stopped after the setting to the automatic button effect state is made, the symbol variation is put in the hold state after a predetermined time (for example, 0.5 seconds) after the symbol variation is stopped. The next symbol change is digested (change starts). Then, during the period in which the next symbol change is being executed, the effect progresses in the state set in the automatic button effect state unless the player performs the release operation.

As described above, in the effect example shown in FIG. 278, in the state where the automatic button effect state is not controlled and the first effect pattern is executed, the specific effect is specified during the period in which the first effect pattern is executed. When the operation button 410 is operated when the reception period is not set, the control to the automatic button effect state can be executed while the first effect pattern is in the execution state. According to such a configuration, it is assumed that the symbol variation is started in the "first effect pattern in which the specific effect reception period in which the instruction display prompting the operation appears" can be set while the automatic button effect state is controlled. However, by performing the release operation before the specific effect reception period occurs, it is possible to make the specific effect reception period occur in the state where the automatic button effect state is canceled, and the player himself operates it. It becomes possible to suitably maintain the game entertainment taste when the desired desire arises. In the effect example shown in FIG. 278, it is assumed that the release operation is accepted before the specific effect reception period starts, but the release operation is performed after the specific effect reception period ends. It is also possible to end the automatic button effect state within the period of one effect pattern.

Further, according to the above configuration, the setting operation to the automatic button effect state is performed during the period in which the symbol variation is executed in the "first effect pattern in which the specific effect reception period in which the instruction display prompting the operation appears can be set". Is also allowed. In the production example shown in FIG. 278, it is assumed that the setting operation is accepted after the specific production reception period ends, but the setting operation by the player within the period before the specific production reception period starts. Is performed, the setting operation is accepted. Therefore, when the symbol variation is started in the "first effect pattern in which the specific effect reception period in which the instruction display prompting the operation appears" is started without being controlled by the automatic button effect state, the specific effect reception period occurs. By operating the operation button 410 so that the setting operation to the automatic button effect state is detected in the period before, the specific effect reception period is generated in the state set to the automatic button effect state. It is also possible, and the automatic effect function makes it possible to suitably maintain this for the game entertainment when one wants to enjoy the effect after operation.

In order to obtain such an effect, when the first effect pattern is selected at the start of the symbol variation, any effect determination result regarding the determination (lottery) relating to the effect content in the first effect pattern. Even if is obtained, it is desirable to make sure that this occurs during the specific production reception period. In addition, the specific effect display can appear within the period of the symbol change, and when the specific effect display appears, the specific effect acceptance period always occurs until the symbol change in the execution state is completed. It is desirable to make the production progress in this way. According to these configurations, by confirming the effect content that appears within the execution period of the symbol variation, it becomes possible to recognize that the specific effect reception period occurs, and until the specific effect reception period occurs. You will be able to select whether to cancel or set the automatic button effect state.

At this time, regarding the above-mentioned specific effect display, it is possible to suggest whether or not there is a high possibility that the post-operation effect will be performed in a manner with high expectation when the effect is received within the specific effect reception period. , If it is performed by any one of a plurality of modes, it is expected that it will be used for a judgment regarding selection as to whether to cancel or set the automatic button effect state.

Further, the specific effect display has at least a first specific effect display and a second specific effect display, and when the first specific effect display appears, the first specific effect display appears. It may be permissible to set (or cancel) the automatic button effect state by the operation of the player between the time when the specific effect reception period occurs, but when the second specific effect display appears, the said. If it is not allowed to set (or cancel) the automatic button effect state by the operation by the player between the appearance of the second specific effect display and the occurrence of the specific effect reception period, the specific effect can be set. It becomes possible to suitably maintain the game entertainment interest from the appearance of the display to the occurrence of the specific production reception period.

FIG. 279 shows a second effect pattern (loss variation) in which a specific effect reception period in which an instruction display prompting an operation appears cannot be set when the automatic button effect state is controlled and the number of holdings is three. ) ”, And a processing example when an operation for canceling the automatic button effect state (release operation) or an operation for setting (setting operation) is performed within the execution period of the symbol change. It is a time chart which shows.

As shown in FIG. 279, when the automatic button effect state is controlled and the number of holds is three, "a specific effect acceptance period in which an instruction display prompting an operation appears cannot be set. It is assumed that the symbol change is started in "2 production pattern". Then, also in this effect example, as in the case shown in FIG. 278, although the symbol variation is in the execution period, the automatic button effect state can be released (the release operation is allowed). The production progress as the second production pattern will be made.

Then, in this effect example, it is assumed that the release operation by the player is detected at the timing td21 shown in the figure, and the automatic button effect state is released based on the detection of the release operation. It is supposed to be (finished). As described above, in the pachinko machine 1 according to this embodiment, the setting cancellation of the automatic button effect state during the symbol change is executed based on the detection that the operation button 410 is in the operation state. Will be done.

That is, it seems that there is little merit in ending the automatic button effect state when the second effect pattern in which the specific effect reception period is not set is in the execution state. When it appears, there is a high possibility that the "first effect pattern in which the specific effect reception period is set" will appear when the symbol variation in the pending state is digested. At this time, there may be a desire to return to the normal production mode (a desire to end a specific production state) in which the production can be advanced depending on the player's own operation.

In this regard, according to the above configuration, not only during the period in which the first effect pattern in which the specific effect reception period is set is executed, but also in the period in which the second effect pattern in which the specific effect reception period is not set is executed. However, the automatic button effect state can be terminated by the operation by the player. Therefore, when the "first effect pattern in which the specific effect reception period is set" is still in the hold state, the automatic button effect state can be terminated in advance, whereby in the "first effect pattern". It is possible to avoid a situation in which the automatic button effect state is terminated immediately before the specific effect reception period is set and the operation means (operation button 410) must be operated without hesitation.

Further, in the effect example shown in FIG. 279, it is assumed that the player performs the setting operation at the timing td23 shown in the figure after the automatic button effect state is canceled in this way. However, in the pachinko machine 1 (peripheral control MPU1511a) according to this embodiment, when the second effect pattern is being executed, which is not controlled to the automatic button effect state and the specific effect reception period is not set. Even if an operation is performed by the player (even if the operation button 410 is moved from the original position to the operation state and the operation state is maintained for a predetermined time (here, 2 seconds)), at least the second effect pattern The setting operation by the player is not accepted (the setting to the automatic button effect state is performed) within the period during which is being executed. Instead of this, even if the setting to the automatic button effect state during the symbol change is executed based on the detection that the operation button 410 is in the operation state, the said During the period when the second effect pattern is being executed, the setting operation by the player is not accepted.

That is, even if "setting from the normal effect state to the automatic button effect state" is performed immediately before the specific effect reception period occurs, it is necessary to perform any operation within the specific effect reception period. However, even if the operation is performed, the production is accepted and the production is executed after the operation. In view of these facts, it is necessary to promptly set the automatic button effect state even if the setting operation is performed during the period when the second effect pattern in which the specific effect reception period is not set is executed. It is considered that no problem will occur if the automatic button effect state is set before the start of the specific effect reception period that may occur after the next symbol change is digested.

In this regard, in the production example shown in FIG. 279, during the period in which the second production pattern (loss variation) in which the specific production reception period is not set is being executed, the setting operation is performed by the player within the period. Even so, until the end of the period (while the symbol variation is being executed), the automatic button effect state is not set, the symbol variation according to the second effect pattern is completed, and the symbol is stopped (loss). When it is in the state of (design stop) (timing td24 in the figure), the setting to the automatic button effect state is made based on the setting operation. In this way, within the period in which the symbol variation of the second effect pattern is executed, even if the player performs an operation, the setting to the automatic button effect state is not allowed, and the set timing is set to the symbol. Since it is carried over after it is stopped, the processing load increases because the setting change related to the effect state that was not determined at the start of the symbol change occurs during the execution of the symbol change (by the operation by the player). Such things can be suitably suppressed.

Then, in the effect example shown in FIG. 279, when a predetermined time (for example, 0.5 seconds) elapses after the symbol variation is stopped, the automatic button effect state is set and the hold state is set. The next symbol change that was there is being digested (change start). Then, during the period in which the next symbol change is being executed, the effect progresses in the state set in the automatic button effect state unless the player performs the release operation.

As described above, in the effect example shown in FIG. 279, in the state where the automatic button effect state is not controlled and the second effect pattern is executed, the second effect pattern is in the execution state during the period. Regardless of the timing at which the operation button 410 is operated, the control to the automatic button effect state is not executed while the second effect pattern is in the execution state, and the second effect pattern ends. After that, the control to the automatic button effect state can be executed. As a result, it is possible to preferably suppress an increase in the processing load due to a setting change related to the effect state, which was not determined at the start of the symbol variation, during the execution of the symbol variation (by an operation by the player). Will be.

In the effect example shown in FIG. 279, it is assumed that the next symbol change in the pending state is started after the symbol change of the second effect pattern for which the specific effect reception period is not set is stopped. However, even if the next symbol change is not in the hold state at the time when the symbol change of the second effect pattern is stopped (lost symbol stop), the automatic button is in the state of the symbol stop (loss symbol stop). The setting to the production state will be made.

Further, in the effect example shown in FIG. 279, when the setting operation is performed by the player within the period in which the second effect pattern (loss variation) in which the specific effect reception period is not set is executed, the second effect pattern is performed. The automatic button effect state is set when the symbol fluctuation of is stopped, but it is not always limited to this, and the point is that the automatic button is set within the period when the second effect pattern is executed. It suffices that the setting to the effect state is not allowed, and the set timing is carried over after the symbol is stopped. For example, it is desirable that the automatic button effect state is set when the symbol is stopped (lost symbol stopped) or during the period when the next symbol change is executed. That is, if there is an effect situation such as "it is decided to change the setting related to the effect state within the symbol change" at the time when the next symbol change is started, the effect is performed according to the determined schedule. Since it is only necessary to advance the pattern, it is possible to preferably avoid an increase in the processing load due to an unintended state change during the execution of the symbol variation.

In this case, even if the next symbol variation is executed as the second effect pattern (the same effect pattern as the previous one), the symbol is stopped (lost symbol stop) or the next symbol variation is executed. It is desirable that the automatic button effect state is set within the specified period. According to such a configuration, when the setting operation is performed by the player within the period in which the symbol variation is executed in the second effect pattern, it is determined in which effect pattern the next symbol variation is executed. It becomes possible to carry over the timing when the setting to the automatic button effect state is performed after the symbol is stopped without performing.

Further, when the operation button 410 is put into the operation state within the period in which the second effect pattern is executed in order to set the automatic button effect state, at least a predetermined time has elapsed since the end of the second effect pattern. The automatic button effect state may be set only after that. That is, in this case, when the second effect pattern is terminated while the next symbol change is in the pending state, the automatic button effect state is set within the execution period of the next symbol change, but the next symbol change If the second effect pattern is terminated while is not in the hold state, the automatic button effect state can be set when the symbol is stopped (lost symbol stop).

In addition, apart from the "second effect pattern (loss variation) in which the specific effect reception period in which the instruction display prompting the operation appears cannot be set", the "specific effect reception period in which the instruction display prompting the operation appears cannot be set". "3 effect pattern (hit variation)" is further prepared, and when the setting operation is performed by the player within the period during which the symbol variation is executed in the third effect pattern, the symbol is stopped or the execution period of the big hit game is executed. The setting to the automatic button effect state may be made within.

[Prohibition period for setting the automatic button effect state]
As described above, in the automatic button effect state (specific effect state), the player operates within the effect reception period (when the above alternative example is applied, the first specific valid period or the second specific valid period). Even if the operation is not performed, a process (automatic effect function) that causes the same change as when the operation is performed can be executed. Further, as described above, in the pachinko machine 1 (peripheral control MPU1511a) according to this embodiment, even during the execution period of the symbol variation, the operation of a predetermined operation means (for example, the operation button 410) is performed. It is possible to make settings related to the automatic button effect state, and by simplifying such operations, it is possible to make settings related to the automatic button effect state while maintaining attention to the progress of the effect during symbol fluctuations. ing.

However, if the specific processing related to the effect such as the effect setting is allowed at any time by the operation by the player during the execution period of the symbol change, including the setting process to the automatic button effect state, the feeling of tension is felt. There is a possibility that the game entertainment will be reduced due to the lack of directability. Therefore, among the periods in which the symbol variation according to the result of the jackpot determination is executed, at least when the specific effect reception period has not occurred, the specific processing related to the effect such as the effect setting is performed by the operation by the player. In a permissible gaming machine, it is desirable that a prohibited period in which the specific processing related to the above-mentioned effect is not allowed can be started to occur between the start of the symbol change and the occurrence of the specific effect reception period. That is, in this case, since there is a concern that a prohibited period will occur, even in a state where a specific effect reception period has not occurred, the operating means (operation button 410, etc.) has not occurred while the prohibited period has not occurred. ) Will be required to be performed, and it will be possible to suitably maintain the player's participation consciousness in the game and the production.

Hereinafter, an example of an effect in which "setting process to the automatic button effect state" is adopted as "specific process related to effect" will be described in detail, but the "specific process related to effect" is not limited to this, and for example, an effect mode ( It may be applied as another process such as a process of changing the effect mode in which the first character plays a leading role to another effect mode (effect mode in which the second character plays a leading role).

In FIG. 280, when the automatic button effect state is not controlled, the symbol variation is started in the "third effect pattern in which the specific effect reception period (specific effective period) in which the instruction display prompting the operation appears" can be set, and the symbol is shown. FIG. 281 is a time chart showing a processing example when an operation for setting the automatic button effect state is performed within the execution period of the fluctuation, and FIG. 281 is an effect example when the effect is progressed in the third effect pattern. It is a figure which shows. The third effect pattern may be either a hit variation or a loss variation, and may be the same as the above-mentioned first effect pattern.

As shown in FIGS. 280 and 281 (a), a third effect in which a specific effect reception period in which an instruction display prompting an operation appears can be set when the effect is not controlled by the automatic button effect state. It is assumed that the symbol change is started in "Pattern". Then, although it is during the execution period of the symbol variation, the effect progress as the third effect pattern is made while the state can be set to the automatic button effect state (the state in which the setting operation is allowed). ..

However, in this effect example, when the symbol is changed in the "third effect pattern in which the specific effect reception period in which the instruction display prompting the operation appears" is performed, the timing te11 (before the specific effect reception period occurs) (See FIG. 280), the operation reception itself for setting the automatic button effect state, or the prohibition period in which the setting process for the automatic button effect state is not allowed is started. Then, as shown in FIG. 281 (b), in this prohibited period, a specific effect (prohibited image) that can appear only when the prohibited period occurs is displayed. In the specific effect (prohibited image) shown in FIG. 281 (b), an image in which the chain is attached to the padlock is displayed, and a button lock effect such as "auto setting invalid" is displayed. Has been done.

The prohibition period generated in this way ends when the timing te12, in which the first specific time (for example, 25 seconds) has elapsed from the timing te11, arrives. However, no matter how much the operation (operation for the operation button 410) is performed before the timing te12 arrives, as shown in FIGS. 281 (c) and 281 (d), the above-mentioned specific effect (prohibited image) ) Is designed so that no change occurs.

Then, when the prohibition period ends at the timing te12, the specific effect (prohibited image) is hidden, and the setting process for the automatic button effect state is returned to the allowable state. After that, when the above-mentioned "precursor effect" or "specific operation-related effect" is performed (see FIG. 281 (e)), a specific effect acceptance period in which an instruction display prompting the operation appears appears at timing te13. (See FIG. 281 (f)). In the example shown in FIG. 281 (f), the effect reception period in which the operation opportunity is given to the sword decoration body 5001 is set, but the operation reception is given to the operation button 410. It may be set as a period.

In this regard, in the production example shown in FIGS. 280 and 281 (f), since the specific production reception period occurs in the state where the automatic button production state is not set, the specific production reception period is within the specific production reception period. The above-mentioned automatic effect function does not function at a specific timing. However, even when the "third effect pattern in which the specific effect reception period in which the instruction display prompting the operation appears" is executed in the effect situation shown in FIG. 280, it is before the prohibition period is started. If you set the automatic button effect state to, it is possible to make the specific effect reception period occur while the automatic button effect state is set. In this case, the specific effect can be set. The above-mentioned automatic effect function can be activated at a specific timing within the reception period.

As described above, in the pachinko machine 1 according to this embodiment, the setting to the automatic button effect state during the symbol change is not the timing when the operation button 410 is in the operation state, but the operation button 410 is in the operation state. It may be executed when it is maintained for a predetermined time (for example, 2 seconds) after becoming. However, in this case, if the operation button 410 is put into the operation state and maintained for 2 seconds within a period of less than 2 seconds before the timing te11 shown in FIG. 280 arrives, after the timing te11 occurs. It is possible to allow the setting to the automatic button effect state. Therefore, the specific effect (prohibited image) is not generated at the timing te11 when the prohibited period is started as in the effect example shown in FIG. 280, but is generated after the timing te11. Is desirable.

FIGS. 282 and 283 are diagrams showing a modified example of the prohibited period (here, the prohibited period related to the setting of the automatic button effect state) related to the “specific process related to the effect such as the effect setting”.

That is, as described above, in the above-mentioned production example with reference to FIGS. 280 and 281, when the prohibition period occurs at the timing te11 (see FIG. 280), the first specific time (for example, 25) after the prohibition period occurs. No matter how many operations (operations for the operation button 410) are performed until the elapse of seconds) and the end of this, the setting operation is not accepted and the above specific effect (prohibited image) is used. Is designed so that no change occurs.

However, in the following modification described in detail with reference to FIGS. 282 and 283, the prohibition period is "a first specific time (for example, 25 seconds) is required from the occurrence to the end". Is the same, but when the second specific time (for example, 10 seconds) shorter than the first specific time elapses after the prohibition period occurs, an operation (operation button) by the player to end the prohibition period early. It differs from the above-mentioned production example described in detail with reference to FIGS. 280 and 281 in that a process capable of allowing the operation for 410) can be performed.

That is, as shown in FIGS. 282 and 283 (a), a specific effect acceptance period in which an instruction display prompting an operation appears can be set when the effect is not controlled by the automatic button effect state. It is assumed that the symbol change is started in "3 production pattern". Then, even in this modified example, although it is during the execution period of the symbol variation, the effect progresses as the third effect pattern while it is in a state where it can be set to the automatic button effect state (a state in which the setting operation is allowed). Will be made.

Further, at the timing te11 (see FIG. 282) before the specific effect reception period occurs, the operation reception itself for setting the automatic button effect state or the setting process to the automatic button effect state is allowed. In addition to starting to generate a prohibited period that is not prohibited, a specific effect (prohibited image) that can appear only when the prohibited period occurs is displayed in FIGS. 280 and 280. It is the same as the above-mentioned production example with reference to 281.

However, in this modified example, as shown in FIG. 282, of the prohibited period, the period from the timing te11 to the arrival of the timing te11a in which the second specific time (for example, 10 seconds) has elapsed (the period during which the cancellation is not possible). Then, no matter how many operations (operations for the operation button 410) are performed within the period, no change is caused in the specific effect (prohibited image) (FIG. 283 (c)). (Refer to), in the period from the timing te11a to the arrival of the timing te12 (the timing when the first specific time (for example, 25 seconds) elapses after the prohibition period occurs) (the period during which the release is allowed), the operation by the player When (operation for the operation button 410) is performed, it is possible to execute a process in which the prohibition period can be terminated early.

More specifically, when the timing te11a arrives and the prohibited period can be terminated early by an operation by the player (operation for the operation button 410), the timing te11a first arrives in the effect display device 1600. A special image that did not appear in the period up to (the period that cannot be canceled) is displayed. In this modification, as shown in FIG. 283 (d), the image NJG suggesting the remaining time as the prohibited period is displayed as the special image.

That is, in the prohibition period related to this modification, when the timing te11a arrives, such an image NJG will appear (see FIG. 283 (d)), so that the prohibition period cannot be canceled (see FIG. 283 (d)). It can be suggested that the timing te11 to te11a) has shifted to the period (timing te11a to te12) in which the prohibition period is allowed to be lifted, and the prohibition period is shown while the remaining time is shown. Will be able to function as an effect on whether to end early.

Then, when the first operation (operation for the operation button 410) is performed within the period (timing te11a to te12) in which the prohibition period is allowed to be released, the operation button 410 is put into the operation state. Based on the fact, the process of terminating the prohibited period early is executed. As a result, after the first operation (operation for the operation button 410) is performed, the setting operation by the player can be accepted even if the timing te12 has not yet arrived.

Here, in this modification, when the prohibition period is terminated early by the first operation (operation for the operation button 410) by the player, the effect display device 1600 also changes the effect based on the first operation. It is possible to execute the process that causes the above. In this modified example, as shown in FIG. 283 (e), the image in which the chain is attached to the padlock is destroyed and the characters such as "successful release" are displayed to cause a change in the effect. As a result, the specific effect (prohibited image) is also hidden before the timing te12 arrives.

Then, in the state where the prohibition period is terminated early in this way, when the second operation (operation for the operation button 410) is performed within the period before the timing te12 arrives, as shown in FIG. 282, the operation is performed. When the second operation is performed (here, when the operation state is maintained for 2 seconds), the setting process for the automatic button effect state can be performed. Then, in this case, in the effect display device 1600, a display (here, "auto button is being set") accompanying the effect setting is displayed.

After that, when the above-mentioned "precursor effect" or "specific operation-related effect" is performed (see FIG. 283 (f)), a specific effect acceptance period in which an instruction display prompting the operation appears appears at timing te13. (See FIG. 283 (g)). In the example shown in FIG. 283 (g), the effect reception period in which the operation opportunity is given to the sword decoration body 5001 is set, but the operation reception is given to the operation button 410. It may be set as a period.

In this regard, in the production example shown in FIGS. 282 and 283 (g), since the specific production reception period is generated in the state of being set to the automatic button production state, the specific production reception period is within the specific production reception period. If no operation is performed by the player before the specific timing arrives, the above-mentioned automatic effect function will function. However, even in the production example shown in FIGS. 282 and 283 (g), the invalid period is first set by performing the first operation within the period (timing te11a to te12) in which the invalid period is allowed to be canceled. In the case of the effect example shown in FIGS. 280 and 281 (f), unless the setting process for the automatic button effect state is performed by performing the early end and performing the second operation in the early end state. It goes without saying that the same production situation as above will appear.

In the effect example shown in FIGS. 280 to 283, the specific effect reception period is generated after a predetermined time has elapsed from the end of the "prohibition period in which the setting process for the automatic button effect state is not allowed" is completed. A specific effect reception period may be generated immediately after the "prohibition period in which the setting process for the automatic button effect state is not allowed" is completed (in a form connected to the prohibition period). That is, in this case, if the prohibition period occurs when the automatic button effect state is not controlled, the specific effect reception period will occur while the setting opportunity to the automatic button effect state is prohibited. It becomes possible to raise the player's participation consciousness when the production reception period has not occurred.

Further, in the production example shown in FIGS. 280 to 283, in the "prohibition period in which the setting process to the automatic button production state is not allowed", when the production reception is performed within the specific production reception period that occurs thereafter. As a post-operation effect, any one of a plurality of effect modes having a different ratio of appearance of a relatively high expectation effect mode and a rate of appearance of a big hit symbol due to a symbol variation in an execution state may be made to appear.

Further, in the production example shown in FIGS. 282 and 283, based on the result of the jackpot determination,
-When the effect image of FIG. 283 (e) is in the third state, a plurality of third effect modes (for example, "padlock") in which the ratio (expectation degree) at which the jackpot symbol appears due to the symbol fluctuation in the execution state are different from each other. Appear one of "multiple production modes with different destruction conditions of the image with the chain attached to it")
When the effect image of FIG. 283 (d) is in the second state, when the third state is reached, "a specific third effect mode (plural third effect)" is selected from the plurality of third effect modes. Of the modes, a plurality of second effect modes (for example, "a plurality of effect modes having different colors of the image NJG") in which the ratio (expectation degree) at which "the third effect mode most advantageous to the player" appears is different. Make one appear,
When the effect images of FIGS. 283 (b) and 283 (c) are in the first state, when the second state is reached, "a specific second effect mode (plural)" is selected from the plurality of second effect modes. Of the second production modes of the above, a plurality of first production modes (for example, a plurality of production modes in which the colors of the background images are different) in which the ratio (expectation degree) at which the "second production mode most advantageous to the player" appears is different. It is desirable to execute processing such as making one of) appear. According to such a configuration, while the production progresses within the prohibition period or the process of ending the prohibition period early is executed, the degree of expectation can be suggested step by step by the productions related to each other. Therefore, it is expected that the player's interest in the game during the prohibited period can be appropriately maintained, and that the player's participation consciousness is raised by promoting the early termination of the prohibited period. In this sense, the first effect mode and the second effect mode are executed as an effect in which the movable decorative body cannot operate, and only the third effect mode that directly leads to the early end of the prohibited period is movable. It is desirable to be able to execute it as an effect mode for operating the decoration. A predetermined movable decoration is operated when a specific third effect mode appears among the plurality of third effect modes, and a predetermined movable decoration appears when a third effect mode different from the specific third effect mode appears. You may not move your body.

Further, with respect to the effects illustrated in FIGS. 281 (e) and 281 (f) and FIGS. 283 (f) and 283 (g), the operation button 410 among the plurality of operation means (operation button 410, sword decoration body 5001 and the like) is used. The above-mentioned effect (specific operation) as to whether the operation can be accepted for the effect or the operation for another operation means (for example, the sword ornament 5001) can be accepted for the effect. It may be executed as a related effect (see FIGS. 241 to 261).

Further, in the effect example shown in FIGS. 280 to 283, it has been described that the specific effect reception period is always generated after the “prohibition period in which the setting process for the automatic button effect state is not allowed” is generated. However, it is not always necessary to generate the specific effect reception period, and after the "prohibition period in which the setting process to the automatic button effect state is not allowed" is generated, the symbol change stops without the specific effect reception period occurring. You may prepare a production pattern that can be done.

Further, in the effect examples shown in FIGS. 280 to 283, regarding the “prohibition period in which the setting process to the automatic button effect state is not allowed”, the effect pattern in which the jackpot expectation is relatively low (for example, the super reach state). It is desirable that the appearance rate of the effect pattern (for example, the effect pattern in which the super reach state occurs) is higher than that of the effect pattern in which the jackpot expectation is relatively high. That is, in this case, even though the effect pattern with a relatively high expectation of big hit appears, the opportunity to execute the setting process to the automatic button effect state for a predetermined period is forcibly lost. It will be possible to encourage players to participate in the operation, and it is expected that the player's awareness of getting a big hit will increase.

However, if the process of setting the automatic button effect state is completely prohibited for a predetermined period of time, it is inevitable that the player who desires the automatic button effect state will lose his or her interest. As shown, after a certain amount of time has passed, the player can cancel the prohibited period early, and when it is canceled, the player can return to the state where the setting operation to the automatic button effect state is allowed again. Is desirable.

Regarding the setting operation to the automatic button effect state, the operation target to be set by the operation by the player may be the touch panel, the sword decoration body 5001, the cross key, or other operation means in addition to the operation button 410. Further, the prohibition period may be terminated early by operating an operation target different from the operation target used when setting the automatic button effect state, or when setting the automatic button effect state. The prohibition period may be terminated early by manipulating the operation target used. However, if the prohibited period is to be terminated early by operating the operation target used when setting the automatic button effect state, the mode of operation (single press, long press, etc.) should be different from each other. Is desirable.

As described above, in FIGS. 280 to 283, an effect example in which the “setting process for the automatic button effect state” is adopted as the “specific process related to the effect” is shown, but this is referred to as the “specific process related to the effect”. Not limited to. However, with regard to the "specific processing related to the effect", regardless of the type of effect pattern according to the result of the jackpot determination, the operation means is subjected to the operation means within the execution period of the symbol variation. It is desirable that it can be performed by an operation.

[Automatic production function for movable operation means]
As described above, in the automatic button effect state (specific effect state), the player operates within the effect reception period (when the above alternative example is applied, the first specific valid period or the second specific valid period). Even if the operation is not performed, a process (automatic effect function) that causes the same change as when the operation is performed can be executed. Further, as described above, in the pachinko machine 1 (peripheral control MPU1511a) according to this embodiment, even during the execution period of the symbol variation, the operation of a predetermined operation means (for example, the operation button 410) is performed. It is possible to make settings related to the automatic button effect state, and by simplifying such operations, it is possible to make settings related to the automatic button effect state while maintaining attention to the progress of the effect during symbol fluctuations. ing.

In this regard, in the pachinko machine 1 (peripheral control MPU1511a) according to this embodiment, as an operation means, in addition to the operation button 410, a movable operation is operably provided between the original position and the operation position by a predetermined driving force. The means (here, the sword decoration body 5001) is provided, and in the automatic button effect state (specific effect state), the player performs the effect reception period for the movable operation means (here, the sword decoration body 5001). Even when the operation is not performed, a process (automatic effect function) that causes the same change as when the operation is performed can be executed.

By the way, when the effect reception period for such a movable operation means (here, the sword decoration body 5001) occurs, for example, as shown in FIG. 204 (G2), the movable operation means is placed in its original position by a predetermined driving force. The player may be given an operation opportunity to operate the movable operation means in the moved state by first moving from the to the operation position. In this operation opportunity, the effect reception may be performed not by the operation of returning from the operation position to the original position but by the operation of moving from the operation position to a position different from the original position.

However, when such an effect reception period occurs, there is a possibility that some abnormality or failure has occurred in the movable operating means (here, the sword decoration body 5001), and thereby the movable operating means (here, here, the movable operating means). If the sword decoration body 5001) cannot be driven from the original position to the operation position, the operation opportunity as shown in FIG. 204 (G2) cannot be properly given, and the production reception desk There is a concern that the production after the corresponding operation cannot occur. Therefore, in the pachinko machine 1 (peripheral control MPU1511a) according to this embodiment, some abnormality / failure has occurred in the movable operating means (here, the sword decoration body 5001), and thereby the movable operating means (here, here, the movable operating means). Even if the effect reception period as shown in FIG. 204 (G2) occurs without being able to drive the sword decoration body 5001) from the original position to the operation position, it is controlled to the automatic button effect state. At that time, a process (automatic effect function) that causes the same change as when a specific operation by the player from the operation position is detected in the effect within the effect reception period can be executed. ..

According to such a configuration, even if some abnormality or failure occurs in the movable operation means (here, the sword decoration body 5001) and it becomes inoperable, it can be moved by using the automatic effect function. It becomes possible to properly appear the post-operation effect using the operation means.

However, when the movable operating means (here, the sword decoration body 5001) is in a state where it cannot operate due to some abnormality or failure, the operation itself for the movable operating means (here, the sword decoration body 5001) itself Since it is a difficult situation, if an operation on the movable operation means (here, the sword decoration body 5001) is required in order to set the automatic button effect state (specific effect state), the automatic button is used. It is not possible to set the effect state (specific effect state), and in the end, the post-operation effect corresponding to the effect reception for the movable operation means (here, the sword decoration body 5001) cannot be generated.

Therefore, in the pachinko machine 1 (peripheral control MPU1511a) according to this embodiment, first, in the automatic button effect state (specific effect state), the operation button 410 and the movable operation means (here, the sword decoration body 5001) are used. Regardless of which of the production acceptance periods occurs, the same production change as when the operation means (here, the operation button 410 or the sword decoration body 5001) on the side to which the operation opportunity is given is operated is generated. Processing can be executed (automatic production function). On top of this, the setting to the automatic button effect state (specific effect state) can be executed only by operating the operation button 410 of the operation button 410 and the movable operation means (here, the sword decoration body 5001). I am trying to be.

That is, in this case, not the movable operation means (here, the sword decoration body 5001) on the side where there is a concern that the operation cannot be performed when an abnormality or failure occurs, but only the operation with the general push-type operation button 410 is required. It becomes possible to generate an automatic button effect state (specific effect state) corresponding to both the operation button 410 and the movable operation means (here, the sword decoration body 5001). Therefore, even if an abnormality or failure occurs in the movable operation means (here, the sword decoration body 5001) during the execution period of the symbol variation, the operation to the operation button 410 sets the automatic button effect state (specific effect state). By performing the above, it becomes possible to appropriately generate a post-operation effect according to the effect reception for the movable operation means (here, the sword decoration body 5001).

In order to adequately ensure operability in the event of such an abnormality or failure, the operation means (here, the operation button 410) provided for the setting operation to the automatic button effect state (specific effect state) is used. It is important that it is provided as an operation means that is basically non-driven (to the extent that it vibrates even if there is a drive system) so that it is not subject to the above-mentioned restoration processing in the event of an abnormality or failure. I can say.

However, even if the movable operating means (here, the sword decoration body 5001) has an abnormality / failure, as long as the movable operating means (here, the sword decoration body 5001) maintains the stopped state, the abnormality / failure occurs. Since it is difficult for the player to recognize that the player is in the state, it cannot be expected that the automatic button effect state (specific effect state) is set.

Therefore, in the pachinko machine 1 (peripheral control MPU1511a) according to this embodiment, when an abnormality or failure occurs in the movable operating means (here, the sword decoration body 5001) at the start timing (or end timing) of the symbol variation. , The restoration process for returning the movable operating means (here, the sword decoration body 5001) to the normal state (original position) is executed. The restoration process can be executed as the above-mentioned processing content. For example, a restoration operation (operation for 5 seconds) for returning the movable operating means (here, the sword decoration body 5001) to the original position is performed. , It is repeated up to a predetermined number of times (for example, 3 times) until it returns to the original position properly.

According to such a configuration, the movable operation is performed by confirming that the restoration process is started for the movable operation means (here, the sword decoration body 5001) at the start timing (or end timing) of the symbol variation. The player can recognize that the means (here, the sword decoration body 5001) is in a state of being abnormal or malfunctioning. Furthermore, by confirming whether or not the movable operating means (here, the sword ornament 5001) has been properly returned to the original position as a result of executing the restoration process, the movable operating means (here, the sword). The player side decides whether the restoration process for the decorative body 5001) has succeeded and the state in which the abnormality / failure has occurred has been resolved, or whether the restoration process has failed and the state in which the abnormality / failure has occurred continues. You will be able to recognize it. That is, in this case, when the player recognizes that the restoration process has failed and the state in which the abnormality / failure has occurred continues, the operation to the operation button 410 causes the automatic button effect state (specific effect state). By setting the above, even if the movable operating means (here, the sword decoration body 5001) is in a state of being abnormal or malfunctioning, the movable operating means (here, the sword decoration body 5001) is provided. It becomes possible to properly generate a post-operation effect according to the effect reception.

However, after confirming that the restoration process for the movable operating means (here, the sword decoration body 5001) in a state where an abnormality or failure has occurred has failed, the setting operation to the automatic button effect state (specific effect state) is performed. Even if this is done, the effect acceptance period for the movable operation means (here, the sword decoration body 5001) occurs before the automatic button effect state occurs (for example, during the execution period of the restoration process). If there is, there is a concern that the post-operation effect corresponding to the effect reception for the movable operation means (here, the sword decoration body 5001) cannot be properly generated.

Therefore, in the pachinko machine 1 (peripheral control MPU1511a) according to this embodiment, a plurality of special production reception periods in which an operation opportunity is given to the movable operation means (here, the sword decoration body 5001) can be generated. Regardless of which of the effect patterns is selected and executed based on the result of the jackpot determination, the maximum time required for the restoration process for the movable operation means (here, the sword decoration body 5001) (restoration operation (5). Addition time between the time when the operation per second) is repeated up to the upper limit number of times (for example, 3 times) and the time required for the setting operation to the automatic button effect state (specific effect state) (here, 2 seconds). It is possible to execute the process of advancing the production so that the special production reception period does not occur only after the lapse of time.

According to such a configuration, when the symbol variation is started in the effect pattern that can generate the special effect reception period in which the operation opportunity is given to the movable operation means (here, the sword decoration body 5001), the movable operation is performed. Even if the means (here, the sword decoration body 5001) has an abnormality / failure, the player recognizes that the abnormality / failure has occurred before the special production reception period occurs. However, since it becomes possible to perform the setting operation to the automatic button effect state (specific effect state), the post-operation effect according to the effect reception for the movable operation means (here, the sword decoration body 5001) is appropriate. Will be able to generate. That is, in the automatic button effect state (specific effect state), even if the special effect reception period occurs in a state where the movable operation means (here, the sword decoration body 5001) has an abnormality or failure, the special effect is produced. The same change as when the operation for the movable operation means is performed within the reception period will be generated for the production.

FIG. 284 is a time chart showing an example of such an effect processing.

As shown in FIG. 284, in the example related to this effect processing, when an abnormality or failure occurs in the movable operating means (here, the sword decoration body 5001), the movable operating means (here) is performed at the start timing of the symbol variation. Then, the restoration process for returning the sword ornament 5001) to normal is executed for a maximum of 15 seconds. In addition, it takes 2 seconds to set the automatic button effect state. In addition, the special production reception period can be continued for a maximum of 3 seconds, and the operation for the movable operation means (here, the sword decoration body 5001) can be used for the post-operation production according to the production reception. It takes 10 seconds.

In view of each time setting value, first, as the effect pattern (variation pattern) that can generate the special effect reception period, 15 seconds (restoration process), 2 seconds (setting operation), and 3 seconds (special effect reception). A time longer than "30 seconds", which is the sum of "period" and 10 seconds (post-operation effect), is assigned, and "17", which is the sum of 15 seconds (restoration process) and 2 seconds (setting operation). Unless the production is advanced so that the special production reception period is generated at a timing later than "seconds", the design changes (here, the sword decoration body 5001) is abnormal or malfunctioning. It is not possible to ensure the above-mentioned effectability when the effect pattern that can generate the special effect reception period) is started.

Therefore, in the figure, as a plurality of effect patterns that can be selected based on the result of the jackpot determination, effect patterns A to E to which different times (symbol variation time of 11 seconds to 60 seconds) are assigned are exemplified. However, in the production patterns A to C in which a time shorter than the above-mentioned addition time of "30 seconds" is allocated, only the production progress in which the special production reception period cannot occur is executed. .. On the other hand, in the effect patterns D and E to which a time longer than the above-mentioned addition time of "30 seconds" is assigned, a special effect reception period can be generated, but the symbol variation is started. By making sure that only the production progress that the special production reception period cannot occur is executed at the timing before "17 seconds (15 seconds (restoration processing) and 2 seconds (setting operation) addition time)". To ensure the above-mentioned effect when the symbol variation (the effect pattern that can generate the special effect reception period) is started in the state where the movable operation means (here, the sword decoration body 5001) has an abnormality or a failure. I have to.

In the example of this effect processing, the special effect reception period can be generated in all of a plurality of effect patterns to which a time longer than the above-mentioned addition time of "30 seconds" is assigned. The special effect reception period may be generated only in a part of a plurality of effect patterns to which a time longer than "30 seconds" is assigned.

However, in reality, the restoration process fails if the special production reception period occurs immediately after the addition time of 15 seconds (restoration process) and 2 seconds (setting operation) has passed since the symbol change started. If you do not perform the setting operation to the automatic button effect state (specific effect state) immediately after recognizing that you have done so, the special effect reception period will be generated with the setting changed to the automatic button effect state (specific effect state). It is not realistic because it cannot be done. That is, when the player recognizes that the restoration process has failed, it usually takes time to determine whether or not to perform the setting operation to the automatic button effect state (specific effect state). It can be said that the above-mentioned effects are not effective unless the above-mentioned time setting values are designed on the assumption of such time values.

In this respect, what is designed to include such a time value is a multiple operation valid period (for example, 8) in which a plurality of operations are received and a post-operation effect is generated each time the effects are received. Seconds) or a long press valid period (for example, 10 seconds) in which the effect is received and the effect is generated after the operation when the operation means to which the operation opportunity is given is maintained in the operating state for a predetermined time or longer. In the valid period (effect reception period), even if the operation is started later than the occurrence of the valid period, multiple operations or long presses are performed a proper number of times and a proper time until the valid period ends. It is possible to do it over.

In view of these facts, among the above time settings, instead of 2 seconds (setting operation), a multiple operation valid period (for example, 8 seconds) or a long press valid period (for example, 10 seconds) should be used. It is desirable to. That is, in this case, as the effect pattern (variation pattern) that can generate the special effect reception period, "15 seconds (restoration process)", "8 seconds or 10 seconds (multiple operation valid period or long press valid period)", A time longer than "36 seconds" or "38 seconds", which is the sum of "3 seconds (special effect reception period)" and "10 seconds (post-operation effect)", is allocated, and "15 seconds". (Restoration process) ”and“ 8 seconds or 10 seconds (multiple operation valid period or long press valid period) ”are added to generate a special production reception period at a timing later than“ 23 seconds ”or“ 25 seconds ”. As a result, only the effect pattern E among the effect patterns A to E can be executed as an effect pattern satisfying the condition.

It should be noted that the multiple operation valid period (for example, 8 seconds) and the long press valid period (for example, 10 seconds) do not necessarily occur in the effect pattern (variation pattern) that can generate the special effect reception period. It may be generated by a production pattern different from this. Further, the pachinko machine 1 (peripheral control MPU1511a) may generate only one of a plurality of operation valid periods (for example, 8 seconds) and a long press valid period (for example, 10 seconds). In this case, Will set the length of the valid period on the generating side instead of 2 seconds (setting operation). Further, when the pachinko machine 1 (peripheral control MPU1511a) is capable of generating both a multiple operation valid period (for example, 8 seconds) and a long press valid period (for example, 10 seconds), those valid periods. It is desirable to set the long side instead of 2 seconds (setting operation).

Further, in the gaming state in which the time saving function is effective, it is required to digest the symbol fluctuations one after another in a shorter time. Therefore, in the gaming state in which the time saving function is effective, each of the above time settings is set. It is not always necessary to carry out the design related to. However, in this case, there is a concern that a special effect reception period will occur during the period in which the restoration process is being executed for the movable operating means (here, the sword decoration body 5001). Therefore, even during the period when the restoration process is being executed for the movable operation means (here, the sword decoration body 5001), the player controls the automatic button effect state (specific effect state) by the setting operation. It is desirable to be able to get it. According to such a configuration, even though the restoration process is being executed for the movable operation means (here, the sword decoration body 5001), the post-operation effect as an effect using the movable operation means. Can be made feasible, and an efficient process in which both the restoration process for the movable operating means (here, the sword decoration body 5001) and the post-operation effect can be performed in parallel can be realized. Note that this process is not limited to the gaming state in which the time saving function is enabled, and may be applied to the gaming state in which the time saving function is not enabled. In this case, the design required for each time setting described above is applied. Will not be done.

Further, in the example related to the effect processing described with reference to FIG. 284, the effect using the movable operating means may be executed as any of the effects shown in FIGS. 190 to 261. .. When a specific operation-related effect is executed, the "effect using movable operation means" shown in the figure is realized as an effect in which a specific operation-related effect, a special effect acceptance period, and a post-operation effect are sequentially performed. The Rukoto.

In addition, a special effect reception period in which an operation opportunity is given to the movable operation means (here, the sword decoration body 5001) is not generated only when the automatic button effect state (specific effect state) is controlled. When the special effect reception period occurs, even if the operation is not performed, the effect reception for the movable operation means is always performed within the special effect reception period, and the post-operation effect may appear. In addition, when it is not controlled to the automatic button effect state (specific effect state), there is an operation opportunity for the movable operation means (here, the sword decoration body 5001) at least during the symbol change in the normal game state. Although the special production reception period to be granted does not occur, the production reception period in which an operation opportunity is granted to the operation means (here, the operation button 410) that is not subject to the above-mentioned restoration processing in the case of an abnormality or failure is generated. Is possible. The effect reception period in which an operation opportunity is given to an operation means (here, operation button 410) that is not subject to the above-mentioned restoration process in the case of an abnormality or failure is controlled to an automatic button effect state (specific effect state). It can also occur when you are. When such a configuration is adopted, the design for each time setting described above may be performed, but the movable operating means (here, the sword decoration body 5001) does not have to be designed for each time setting described above. It becomes possible to secure the above-mentioned effectability when an effect pattern that can generate a special effect reception period is started in a state where an abnormality or failure has occurred.

Further, in the example related to this effect processing, the automatic button effect state (specific effect state) is controlled by the setting operation by the player, but the control to the automatic button effect state (specific effect state) is performed. Is not necessarily performed by the operation by the player, for example, it is controlled based on the result of the jackpot judgment, or the setting to the automatic button effect state itself is not performed, and the automatic effect function always functions. It may be provided as a playable gaming machine.

[Post-operation production that suggests an automatically accepted operation target]
As described above, in the automatic button effect state (specific effect state), the first reception effect (effect in which an operation opportunity is given to the operation button 410) is executed according to the establishment of a predetermined effect condition. Even if the operation button 410 is not operated within the period, when the predetermined timing within the period in which the first reception effect is executed arrives, the effect reception is automatically generated and the operation button 410 is operated. The same post-operation effect as is executed. In addition, the operation on the sword decoration body 5001 is performed within the period in which the second reception production (the production in which the operation opportunity is given to the sword decoration body 5001) according to the establishment of the production condition different from the predetermined production condition is executed. Similarly, when the predetermined timing within the period in which the second reception effect is executed arrives, the effect reception is automatically generated, and the same post-operation effect as when the sword decoration 5001 is operated is performed. It is supposed to be executed. Therefore, even if the operation means on the side of the operation button 410 and the sword decoration 5001 that is not given the operation opportunity is erroneously operated when the reception effect occurs, the operation opportunity is lost during the operation. It will be possible to prevent the situation where the post-production cannot be confirmed. It should be noted that the "predetermined effect condition" and the "effect condition different from the predetermined effect condition" can be separately established as a result of the effect determination being performed based on the result of the jackpot determination.

However, if the effect reception is automatically generated in a place unknown to the player due to "looking away" and the post-operation effect is executed according to the effect reception, the post-operation effect becomes an operation target. The player does not have any involvement in the operating means (for example, the operation button 410). That is, in this case, since the player cannot recognize which of the operation button 410 and the sword decoration 5001 is the post-operation effect, the first reception effect and the second reception effect If the degree of expectation is different, there is a concern that the game entertainment will be reduced because it cannot be recognized.

In this regard, in the pachinko machine 1 (peripheral control MPU1511a) according to this embodiment, the ratio of satisfying a predetermined effect condition (ratio of execution of the first reception effect) when the symbol changes is determined by the different effect conditions. Judgment related to various effects (effect judgment based on the result of big hit judgment) is made so as to be higher than the satisfied ratio (ratio at which the second reception effect is executed), and the symbol variation is based on the result of the judgment. I try to control the production. As a result, even if the production reception is automatically generated without the player's knowledge, it is possible to predict that there is a high possibility that the first reception production has been executed. Become.

Furthermore, in the pachinko machine 1 (peripheral control MPU1511a) according to this embodiment, when the production reception is automatically generated, the “image suggesting the type of operation target” that appears during the period when the production reception is permitted (No. 1). If it is the reception effect of 1, it corresponds to the button image BTG, and if it is the second reception effect, it corresponds to the sword decoration image SYG). After the operation based on the reception, the production is started. According to such a configuration, even if the effect reception is automatically generated without the player's knowledge, the post-operation effect is executed while the "image suggesting the type of the operation target" is displayed. Therefore, it becomes possible to preferably suppress the inability to recognize which of the operation button 410 and the sword decoration body 5001 is the post-operation effect caused by the operation.

In this case, the display mode (for example, color, transmittance, etc.) and the display position of the "image suggesting the type of the operation target" may be the same before and after the post-operation effect occurs. However, they may be different, and the point is that the type of the operating means that was the operation target is expressed as a display on the effect display device 1600 at the time when the effect is started after the operation. Just do it. Further, when the post-operation effect is generated based on the effect reception generated by the operation by the player, the "image suggesting the type of the operation target" may be hidden when the post-operation effect is generated. , As in the case where the above-mentioned effect reception is automatically generated, the "image suggesting the type of operation target" is not hidden and is maintained in the displayed state, and the post-operation effect based on the operation by the player is started. You may do so. However, considering the simplification of the design and the processing load, regardless of whether or not the production reception is automatically generated, the "image suggesting the type of operation target" is not hidden and is maintained as the display state. Therefore, it is desirable to start the post-operation effect based on the operation by the player.

FIG. 285 shows an example of progress in the production when the production reception is automatically generated, and the “image suggesting the type of operation target” is not hidden and the production is started after the operation while maintaining the display state. It is a time chart which shows. 286 and 287 are diagrams showing an effect display example that appears in the effect display device 1600 when the effect pattern for which the effect is advanced is executed in the manner shown in FIG. 285. In the production example, it is assumed that the production reception is in a situation where it can be automatically generated.

That is, while being controlled to the automatic button effect state, a specific effect pattern that can set the period of timings tf1 to tf3 in the execution period of the symbol change as the "effect reception period that allows the effect reception (operation)". Assuming that is started based on the result of the jackpot determination, as shown in FIG. 286 (a), the effect display device 1600 first performs variable display of the decorative symbol SZ (special symbol).

In this specific effect pattern, as shown in FIG. 286 (b), the effect reception (operation) is allowed shortly before the arrival of the timing tf1 (see FIG. 285) in the execution period of the symbol variation. As a suggestive precursor effect, the specific operation-related effect exemplified in FIGS. 243 to 246 (may be a specific operation-related effect illustrated separately) is performed. That is, as described above, in the specific operation-related effects exemplified in FIGS. 243 to 246, the operation opportunity is given to the operation button 410, and the operation opportunity is given to the sword decoration body 5001. The common display effect is performed in the above, and while the common display effect is being performed, it is kept secret whether the operation button 410 or the sword decoration 5001 is given an operation opportunity. .. However, when the timing tf1 (see FIG. 285) arrives after a predetermined time has passed since the start of the specific operation-related effect, the operation button 410 should be operated as the first effect result having a relatively low expectation. Relatively expected by the appearance of a production situation indicating that the sword is in a state, or by the appearance of a production situation indicating that the sword decoration body 5001 should be operated as a second production result with a relatively high degree of expectation. It will be shown which of the operation button 410 with a low degree and the sword decoration body 5001 with a relatively high expectation is given an operation opportunity.

FIG. 286 (c) is operated as a first effect result having a relatively low expectation at timing tf1 (see FIG. 285) as a result of performing the specific operation-related effect shown in FIG. 286 (b). An effect situation indicating that the button 410 is in a state to be operated appears, and an operation opportunity is given to the operation button 410. The first reception effect is started. The first effect condition (the effect pattern in which the effect result shown in FIG. 286 (d) described later appears) or the second effect condition (the effect result shown in FIG. 286 (e) described later) appears in the effect determination. The production situation) when the pattern) is satisfied is shown.

In this effect situation, as shown in the figure, a button image BTG (an image imitating the operation button 410) corresponding to the operation button 410 is displayed in the display area, and an operation on the operation button 410 is urged. An instruction display (here, a character display such as "press", a downward arrow display, and a bar display indicating the remaining time for which the production reception is allowed) appears. At this time, the operation button 410 to which the operation opportunity is given is in a light emitting state, which also prompts the operation of the operation button 410.

However, in this production example, the operation button 410 is not operated within the period (FIG. 285: timings tf1 to tf3) set so that the production reception is permitted, and the predetermined timing within the valid period (here). Then, it is assumed that the automatic effect function for the operation button 410 is enabled at the timing tf2 (see FIG. 285).

That is, in this case, the same change as when the production reception is performed by the operation with respect to the operation button 410 within the period set so that the production reception is allowed (FIG. 285: timings tf1 to tf3) is generated for the production. It becomes. Here, based on the result of the effect determination performed at the time of the symbol change, the low-expected mode effect (FIG.) in which "the specific decorative member SDY (sudare) does not operate and a chance !! 286 (d) ”or“ The specific decorative member SDY (sudare) operates and the effect display device 1600 displays intense heat !! Highly expected mode effect (see FIG. 286 (e)). ) ”Is executed as a post-operation effect.

However, regardless of which mode the post-operation effect is executed, the model image (button image BTG) that imitates the operation button 410 is not hidden and the post-operation effect is started in a state where this is maintained. Even if the effect reception is automatically generated without the player's knowledge, the effect after the operation is performed according to the "effect reception for the operation button 410" (relatively expected degree). It becomes possible to recognize that is the effect after the operation on the lower side).

In this production example, as shown in FIG. 285, the period during which the production reception is allowed is terminated early at the timing tf2 when the automatic production function for the operation button 410 is enabled and the production reception is automatically generated. It will be. After that, while the production reception is not allowed, the post-operation production is started with the operation button 410 imitated image (button image BTG) in the display state, but the operation button 410 is imitated. The image (button image BTG) is hidden before the timing tf5 at which the effect is finished after the operation arrives.

According to such a configuration, a model image of the operation means (here, the operation button 410) that was the operation target is displayed within the period from the start to the end of the post-operation effect. The period during which the image is displayed (timing tf2 to tf4) and the period during which the same image is not displayed (timing tf4 to tf5) will appear. Therefore, even if the post-operation effect is started while the imitation image of the operation means (here, the operation button 410) that was the operation target is displayed, the imitation image is hidden. It is expected that the tension caused by having to confirm the effect after the operation before the operation is preferably maintained.

Further, in this production example, the period of timing tf2 to tf3 and the period of timing tf3 to tf4 are set to the same length. According to such a configuration, when the time that doubles the "remaining time indicated by the bar display" has elapsed when the production reception is automatically generated, the operation means (here, the operation button) that has been the operation target has elapsed. Since it becomes possible to recognize that the copy image of 410) is hidden, it is possible to prevent the copy image from being overlooked (the copy image is hidden during the execution of the post-operation effect). It will be expected to suppress the decline in the game interest when it is played. In this case, the bar display may be continued without being hidden when the effect reception is automatically generated.

On the other hand, in this production example, at the timing tf1 (see FIG. 285) after the specific operation-related effect shown in FIG. 286 (b) is performed, the effect situation is not shown in FIG. 286 (c). The effect situation shown in 287 (f) (the effect determination performed based on the result of the jackpot determination, the third effect condition (the effect pattern in which the effect result shown in FIG. 287 (g) described later appears), or the fourth effect. The effect condition (the effect situation when the effect result shown in FIG. 287 (h) described later) is satisfied) may appear.

Also in this effect situation (FIG. 287 (f)), as shown in the figure, the button image BTG (imitation image of the operation button 410) corresponding to the operation button 410 is displayed in the display area, and the operation button 410 is displayed. An instruction display for prompting the operation of the operation button 410 (here, a character display such as "press", an arrow display in the downward direction, and a bar display indicating the remaining time for which the production reception is allowed) appears. At this time, the point that the operation button 410 to which the operation opportunity is given is in the light emitting state is also the same as the effect situation shown in FIG. 286 (c).

However, in the production situation shown in FIG. 287 (f), the button image BTG (an image of the operation button 410) is displayed in a specific mode (here, a flame-wearing mode). The rate at which the jackpot symbol appears due to the symbol fluctuation (relatively expected as a post-operation effect) than in the normal mode (here, the mode without flames) that appeared in the effect situation shown in 286 (c). It has come to be suggested that a high production result (here, the rate at which "super heat !!") appears) is in a high situation.

Further, also in this production example, the operation button 410 is not operated within the period (FIG. 285: timings tf1 to tf3) set so that the production reception is permitted, and the predetermined timing within the valid period (here). Then, it is assumed that the automatic effect function for the operation button 410 is enabled at the timing tf2 (see FIG. 285).

In this regard, even when the effect reception is automatically generated when the button image BTG is in the effect state displayed in the specific mode, the button image BTG is in the normal mode as shown in FIGS. 287 (g) and 287 (h). Similar to the above-mentioned case (FIGS. 286 (d) and (e)) in which the effect reception is automatically generated when the displayed effect is in the state, "the specific decorative member SDY (sudare) does not operate and the effect display device is displayed. A low-expected mode effect in which a chance !! is displayed at 1600 (see FIG. 287 (g)) "or" a specific decorative member SDY (sudare) is operated, and the effect display device 1600 is extremely hot !! The displayed high-expected mode effect (see FIG. 287 (h)) ”is executed as a post-operation effect (the same change as when the effect is received by the operation of the operation button 410).

However, here, as shown in FIGS. 287 (g) and 287 (h), the image of the operation button 410 is not hidden regardless of the mode in which the post-operation effect is executed. The post-operation effect is started while the state is displayed in a specific mode (here, a flame-wearing mode). As a result, even if the effect reception is automatically generated without the player's knowledge, the post-operation effect is performed in response to the "effect reception for the operation button 410", and the specific mode with high expectation is high. It becomes possible to recognize that the button image BTG was displayed in (here, the mode of wearing a flame).

That is, in this effect example, even when the same effect mode (for example, chance !!) appears as the post-operation effect, the operation is performed while the model image of the operation button 410 is displayed in the specific mode. When the post-effect is started (see, for example, FIG. 287 (g)), the post-operation effect is started while the image of the operation button 410 is displayed in the normal mode (for example,). Since the proportion of jackpot symbols appearing is higher than that of FIG. 286 (d)), it is preferable to make it possible to recognize such a difference in production even after the production is started after the operation. Will be expected to be maintained.

In this production example as well, the timing at which the period for which the production reception is permitted ends, the timing at which the modeled image (specific mode) of the operation button 410 is hidden, and the period at timings tf2 to tf3. The point that the periods of the timings tf3 to tf4 are set to the same length is as shown in FIG. 285, which is the same as the case of the above-described example with reference to FIGS. 286 (c) to 286 (e). be.

On the other hand, in this production example, it is shown in FIGS. 286 (c) and 287 (f) at the timing tf1 (see FIG. 285) after the specific operation-related effect shown in FIG. 286 (b) is performed. The effect situation shown in FIG. 287 (i) is not any of the effect situations (the effect result shown in FIG. 287 (j) described later appears in the effect determination performed based on the result of the jackpot determination). The effect pattern) or the sixth effect condition (the effect situation when the effect result shown in FIG. 287 (k) described later) is satisfied) may appear.

In this production situation (FIG. 287 (i)), as shown in the figure, the sword decoration image SYG (image of the sword decoration 5001) corresponding to the sword decoration 5001 is displayed in the display area. In addition, an instruction display prompting the operation of the sword decoration body 5001 (here, a character display such as "Pay the sword", an arrow display in the lower right direction, and a bar display indicating the remaining time when the production reception is allowed). Is coming to appear. At this time, the sword decoration body 5001 to which the operation opportunity is given moves to the operation position, which allows the player to operate the sword decoration to the original position.

Then, also in this production example, the operation means (here, the sword decoration body 5001) that is the operation target within the period (FIG. 285: timings tf1 to tf3) set so that the production reception is allowed is operated. Instead, it is assumed that the automatic effect function for the sword ornament 5001 is enabled at a predetermined timing (here, timing tf2 (see FIG. 285)) within the valid period.

In this regard, even when the production reception is automatically generated when the sword decoration image SYG is displayed, the production status in which the button image BTG is displayed is displayed as shown in FIGS. 287 (j) and 287 (k). Similar to the above-mentioned case (FIG. 286 (d), (e) or FIG. 287 (g), (h)) in which the effect reception is automatically generated when the screen is in the position of Instead, a low-expected mode effect in which a chance !! is displayed on the effect display device 1600 (see FIG. 287 (j)) "or" a specific decorative member SDY (sudare) is operated, and the effect display device 1600 operates. The high-expected mode effect in which the intense heat is displayed (see FIG. 287 (k)) "is executed as a post-operation effect (the same change as when the effect is accepted by the operation on the sword decoration body 5001). It has become.

However, here, as shown in FIGS. 287 (j) and 287 (k), the sword decoration image SYG imitating the sword decoration body 5001 is hidden regardless of which mode the post-operation effect is executed. The effect is started after the operation without setting it to the displayed state. As a result, even if the effect reception is automatically generated without the player's knowledge, it is possible to recognize that the effect after the operation is performed in response to the "effect reception for the sword decoration body 5001". Become.

That is, in this production example, even when the same production mode (for example, chance !!) appears as the post-operation effect, the operation is performed while the sword decoration image SYG imitating the sword decoration body 5001 is displayed. When the post-effect is started (see, for example, FIG. 287 (j)), the post-operation effect is started while the model image of the operation button 410 is displayed in a normal mode or a specific mode. (For example, see FIG. 286 (d) and FIG. 287 (g)), the proportion of jackpot symbols appearing is higher than that (see, for example, FIG. 286 (d) and FIG. 287 (g)). ..

Also in this production example, the timing at which the period for which the production reception is permitted ends, the timing at which the model image (sword decoration image SYG) imitating the sword decoration body 5001 is hidden, and the timings tf2 to tf3 The point that the period of and the period of timings tf3 to tf4 are set to the same length is as shown in FIG. 285, and in the case of the above-mentioned example with reference to FIGS. 286 (c) to 286 (e). Is similar to.

According to the above-mentioned effect example shown in FIGS. 285 to 287, the operation target suggestion is generated because the operation target suggestion image is displayed in any of a plurality of modes having different jackpot expectations. It becomes possible to simultaneously confirm both the aspect of the image and the aspect of the post-operation effect, and it becomes possible to improve the game entertainment.

In the above-mentioned production example shown in FIGS. 285 to 287, the production situation shown in FIG. 286 (c) appears, the production situation shown in FIG. 287 (f) appears, and FIG. 287 (i). The same production content is made to appear as the production after the operation, depending on the production situation shown in. However, instead of this, the production situation shown in FIG. 286 (c) and the production situation shown in FIG. 287 (f) (a situation in which a reception effect in which an operation opportunity is given to the operation button 410 has occurred) Although the same post-operation effect is generated in the above, the operation is different in the effect situation shown in FIG. 287 (i) (a situation in which a reception effect is given to the sword decoration body 5001). A post-effect (for example, the post-operation effect shown in FIG. 269) may be generated. Further, the effect situation shown in FIG. 286 (c), the effect situation shown in FIG. 287 (f), and the effect situation shown in FIG. 287 (i) show different post-operation effects for each effect situation. It may be made to appear. In addition, when these other examples are adopted, the precursor effect shown in FIG. 286 (b) may not necessarily be executed.

In the above-mentioned production example shown in FIGS. 285 to 287, after executing the “precursor effect shown in FIG. 286 (b) (here, a specific operation-related effect)” suggesting that the reception effect will occur soon. "A reception effect in which an operation opportunity is given to the operation button 410 (the effect situation shown in FIGS. 286 (c) and 287 (f))" and "an operation opportunity is given to the sword decoration body 5001." The reception effect (the effect situation shown in FIG. 287 (i)) is generated, but the reception effect (in FIG. 287 (i)) in which an operation opportunity is given to the sword decoration body 5001. It is not always necessary to generate the "shown production status)". That is, in this case, after the precursor effect suggesting that the reception effect will occur soon is executed, at the timing tf1, the reception effect is shown in FIG. 286 (c) as the reception effect in which the operation button 410 is given an operation opportunity. Either the effect status is displayed or the effect status shown in FIG. 287 (f) is displayed. Even in such a case, the operation button 410 is pressed when the post-operation effect is started. The degree of expectation for the post-operation effect will differ depending on whether the imitated image is displayed in the normal mode or in a specific mode with a high degree of expectation (here, the mode of wearing a flame). Therefore, it is expected that the game entertainment will be maintained favorably.

In this case, it is desirable that the content of the precursory effect is such that it cannot appear in the precursory effect when the sword decoration body 5001 is given an operation opportunity. Further, there is a common omen in the case where the imitation image of the operation button 410 is displayed in the normal mode and the case where the imitation image is displayed in the specific mode with high expectation (here, the mode of wearing a flame). It is desirable to execute the effect and, as a result, advance the effect so that the image of the operation button 410 appears in a normal mode or a specific mode.

Further, the image obtained by imitating the operation button 410 shall be displayed in any of three or more modes including a normal mode and a specific mode, and the degree of expectation differs depending on which of these modes is displayed. You may do so. However, in the above-mentioned production example, even if a model image of the operation button 410 is displayed in any of these modes at the timing tf1, the post-operation effect is started while the mode of the model image is displayed. It will be.

Further, after the specific precursor effect is made to appear, the effect situation shown in FIG. 286 (c), the effect situation shown in FIG. 287 (f), and the effect situation shown in FIG. 286 (c). Similarly, in the effect display device 1600, an image of the operation button 410 is displayed in a normal manner, but when there is no operation by the player, the automatic effect function for the operation button 410 is not enabled and the post-operation effect is produced. Is not executed (not shown) ”may appear. That is, in this case, when the reception effect in which the image of the operation button 410 is displayed in the normal mode occurs, it is grasped whether the automatic effect function for the operation button 410 is enabled when there is no operation by the player. Since it becomes possible to make it difficult, it is expected that the tension when the reception effect occurs (the tension about whether the player himself should operate and start the effect after the operation) is preferably maintained. Become so. On the other hand, when the image of the operation button 410 is displayed in a specific mode, the automatic effect function for the operation button 410 is enabled and the post-operation effect is always generated even if the player does not operate the operation button 410. This, coupled with the suggestion that the degree of expectation is high, makes it possible to suitably improve the game entertainment.

It should be noted that, based on the result of the jackpot determination, the operation button 410 was imitated in the effect display device 1600, as in the effect situation shown in FIG. 286 (c), instead of the “effect situation shown in FIG. 286 (c)”. When the image is displayed in the normal mode, but the automatic effect function for the operation button 410 is not enabled and the post-operation effect is not executed when there is no operation by the player (not shown). If the operation button 410 is not operated before the end of the effect reception period, the post-operation effect will not be executed. However, in this case as well, when the production reception period ends and the production reception becomes unacceptable, the image of the operation button 410 is not hidden, but is displayed in the normal mode. Is desirable. According to such a configuration, even though the reception effect in which the image of the operation button 410 is displayed in the normal mode occurs, the effect is not executed after the operation without being operated by the player. It becomes possible to recognize that it has become, and when the image of the operation button 410 is displayed in the normal mode in the next reception effect, the automatic effect function for the operation button 410 is enabled. In particular, it is expected that the player will be encouraged to operate it without excessive expectations.

In the above-mentioned production example shown in FIGS. 285 to 287, when the production reception is generated by the automatic production function, the display mode of the image of the operation button 410 and the image of the sword decoration 5001 is changed. The post-operation effect was started with these images displayed in the changed display mode, but the operation button 410 was modeled with the display mode and display position during the effect reception period. The effect may be started after the operation in a state where the image or the image of the sword decoration 5001 is displayed.

The post-operation effect that is started while displaying the image of the operation button 410 and the image of the sword decoration 5001 is the display effect on the effect display device 1600 and the light emission by the lamp provided on the game board 5. It may be any one of an effect, an effect by sound, and a movable effect by a decorative accessory, or may be an appropriate combination of each of these effects. Further, as will be described later, the first post-operation effect that is started while displaying the image of the operation button 410 and the image of the sword decoration 5001 and the image of the operation button 410 and the sword decoration are displayed. The second post-operation effect started after the timing tf4 at which the imitation image of the body 5001 is hidden may be executed.

In the above-mentioned production example shown in FIGS. 285 to 287, when the production reception is generated by the automatic production function, the operation is performed while displaying the image of the operation button 410 and the image of the sword decoration 5001. I tried to start the post-production. However, in terms of processing load, even if the production reception is generated by the operation by the player, the post-operation production is started while displaying the image of the operation button 410 and the image of the sword decoration 5001. It is desirable that the post-operation effect is executed by the same process.

In the above-mentioned production example shown in FIGS. 285 to 287, the image of the operation button 410 and the image of the sword decoration 5001 are dynamically displayed as in the case of the production example described later. , The effect may be started after the operation while maintaining the dynamic display.

Further, when the precursor effect showing that the reception effect shown in FIG. 286 (c) is generated soon is generated and then the reception effect shown in FIG. 286 (c) is executed, the operation button 410 is also pressed. It is also possible to start the production after the operation while displaying the imitated image.

[Post-operation production that makes it difficult to recognize the timing of automatic reception]
As described above, in the pachinko machine 1 according to this embodiment, the automatic effect function for the operation target is enabled at a predetermined timing within the valid period in which the effect reception is allowed, and the pachinko machine 1 can be operated without any operation by the player. It is possible to generate a post-production. However, if the player wants to generate a post-operation effect by his / her own operation while such an "automatic effect function" can be enabled, it is determined in advance within the period when the reception effect is performed. It must be operated before the set timing (timing when the automatic effect function is activated) arrives, and if the player tries to operate it, the validity period of the reception effect will be increased accordingly. It will be substantially shortened. Therefore, in the situation where such a reception effect is executed, it is not possible to recognize what kind of operation should be performed, or an image suggesting the elapsed time (remaining time) after the valid period occurs. If there is a case of checking one by one, the production reception may be automatically generated by the time the player tries to operate the game, and there is a concern that the interest of the game may be reduced.

Therefore, in the pachinko machine 1 according to this embodiment, first, a copy image of a specific operation means (for example, an operation button 410) that is a target of production reception is displayed as a plurality of copy images (for example, an operation button 410). About "how to move a specific operation means" by displaying it as a moving image by sequentially displaying multiple images) in which the operation state (operation state) is depicted as different from each other. The operation method of is suggested. Further, when displaying the image as a moving image in this way, a predetermined predetermined image among a plurality of images is displayed as the first displayed image, and a plurality of subsequent images are displayed in a predetermined order thereafter. By displaying the images of It is also possible to recognize.

That is, in this case, the operation method of "how to move the specific operation means" and the specific reception effect are executed only by looking at the image of the specific operation means that is the target of the production reception. It becomes possible to simultaneously recognize the elapsed time from the occurrence of the period (valid period). As a result, the time required for the player to grasp the operation method and the remaining time after thinking of operating it can be shortened, and by extension, the operation can be performed before the production reception is automatically generated. It will be expected to encourage.

Further, in the pachinko machine 1 according to this embodiment, the process of automatically generating the above-mentioned effect reception can be executed at the timing after half of the period during which the specific reception effect is executed. This also encourages the operation of the production reception before it is automatically generated.

However, even if these processes are performed, it cannot be completely avoided that the production reception is automatically generated before the player operates the operation. Therefore, it can be said that it is more important to take measures to prevent the game entertainment from being deteriorated even if the situation occurs. When taking the measures, the above-mentioned process of "prompting the user to operate before the effect reception is automatically generated" may not necessarily be performed.

Therefore, in the pachinko machine 1 according to this embodiment, first, even when the effect reception is automatically generated, the process of displaying the simulated image as a moving image is continued without being stopped. That is, a predetermined time (video) after the production reception is automatically generated by continuously displaying the progress image as a moving image even after the production reception is automatically generated and the production is started after the operation. While the image is being continued), it is difficult to recognize that the effect has been started after the operation, and the player is performing the operation while the simulated image as the moving image is continuously displayed. For example, it is possible to give an impression as if the post-operation effect was started by the operation.

Furthermore, in the pachinko machine 1 according to this embodiment, even if the operation by the player is delayed from the "automatic generation of the effect reception", it is as if the effect change is caused by the operation. In order to give a good impression, the post-operation production is performed as a stepwise production. As a result, it is possible to give the impression that the production change from the second stage onward is caused by the operation by the player, and the "automatic generation of the production reception" deprives the player of the operation opportunity. It is expected that it will be difficult to give an impression.

FIG. 288 shows a plurality of images (sword decoration image SYG) of a specific operating means (here, sword decoration body 5001) that is the target of the production reception when a specific reception effect occurs. In the figure which shows an example of displaying as a moving image by sequentially displaying an image (here, a plurality of images in which the operating state (operating state) of the sword decoration body 5001 is depicted differently) is displayed in sequence. be.

Now, assuming that a specific reception effect is executed based on the result of the jackpot determination and a period in which the effect reception is allowed occurs, the peripheral control MPU1511a has a specific operation means (here, here, the target of the effect reception). As a model image (sword decoration image SYG) of the sword decoration body 5001), first, the sword decoration image SYGa (predetermined model image) shown in FIG. 288 (a) is displayed as a "first displayed image". At this time, the bar display indicating the remaining time for which the production reception is allowed is also displayed in the state where the gauge is full.

Here, the sword decoration image SYGa shown in FIG. 288 (a) is a moving image of the "image of the sword decoration 5001" when the reception effect of giving the operation opportunity to the sword decoration 5001 occurs. When displaying as an image, it is always selected as the "first image to be displayed". That is, the state in which the bar display of "gauge full" is displayed within the period in which the production reception is permitted can be said to be the state in which the sword decoration image SYGa is displayed, and these images correspond to each other. It can be said that it is a thing.

After that, as shown in FIGS. 288 (b) to (f), the bar display indicating the remaining time is depicted as a moving image in which the gauge amount decreases with the passage of time (a plurality of gauge remaining amounts are different). The sword decoration image SYG will be displayed sequentially by images), and multiple images (in the figure, sword decoration) will be depicted so that the amount of movement (operation amount) will increase over time. Images SYGb to SYGf) will be displayed in a predetermined order.

According to such a configuration, the operation method about "how to operate the sword decoration body 5001" and the operation method about "how to operate the sword decoration body 5001" just by looking at the movement of the sword decoration image SYG that appears when a specific reception effect occurs. It is possible to recognize both the elapsed time from the occurrence of the period in which the production reception is allowed (which can be grasped by the movement amount (operation amount) of the sword decoration image SYG starting from the sword decoration image SYGa). Will be. Therefore, it is expected that it will be difficult to generate a timing in which the production reception is automatically generated before the operation by the player is performed even though the player himself has tried to operate it. become.

Here, in the specific reception effect, the timing shown in FIG. 288 (d) of the period in which the effect reception is allowed (the timing after half of the period in which the specific reception effect is executed has passed). ), The production reception is automatically generated. Therefore, when the player himself intends to operate the sword decoration body 5001, it is required to operate the sword decoration body 5001 until the moving image as the sword decoration image SYG is displayed and advanced on the "sword decoration image SYGd". It becomes.

By the way, if it is decided to execute a specific reception effect so that the effect reception is automatically generated at the timing shown in FIG. 288 (d) even if there is no operation by the player, the "sword decoration image SYGe" and The "sword decoration image SYGf" can be said to be an image that cannot be originally displayed regardless of whether or not the player has operated it. However, in the pachinko machine 1 according to this embodiment, even when the effect reception is automatically generated at the timing shown in FIG. 288 (d), the “sword decoration image SYGe” and the “sword decoration image SYGf” are used. "Is intentionally displayed, and this will be described later.

In FIGS. 289 to 291, although a specific reception effect is generated in which a model image of the sword decoration 5001 is dynamically displayed, the player operates until the timing when the effect reception is automatically generated arrives. It is a figure which shows an example about the production which appears when it is not in time. In the production example, it is assumed that the production reception is in a situation where it can be automatically generated.

In FIG. 289 (a), the number of reservations is 2, and the variation display of the decorative symbol SZ (special symbol) is performed by the effect display device 1600 in a specific effect pattern according to the result of the jackpot determination. It shows the situation.

FIG. 289 (b) shows a specific moving image TDG based on the fact that a predetermined effect condition (first effect condition) is satisfied during execution of the variable display of the decorative symbol SZ shown in FIG. 289 (a). It shows the production status that has started to be displayed. In addition, as a "predetermined effect condition", for example, accumulating a certain value of the score accumulated in the effect can be mentioned.

That is, in the pachinko machine 1 according to this embodiment, when a predetermined effect condition is satisfied, the "effect mode for generating an operation opportunity for the sword decoration 5001" is set as a waiting state (up to 3 times). ) It is possible to execute the process of waiting. In this regard, in FIG. 289 (b), in the effect display device 1600, the "specific moving image TDGa (specific moving image TDG)" is started to be displayed in the frame in which the first coin is shaped, and the "sword stock" is displayed. By displaying the count value to be changed from "0" to "1", the "effect mode for generating an operation opportunity for the sword decoration 5001" is in a new production waiting state. Has come to be suggested.

Here, regarding the specific moving image TDG related to this production example, it is assumed that each image shown in FIGS. 255 (b) to 255 (e) is sequentially displayed in a frame in which a coin is formed to be displayed as a moving image. It has become. Then, after the "image shown in FIG. 255 (b)" is displayed and the images shown in "FIG. 255 (e)" are sequentially displayed, a series of these displays (FIGS. 255 (b) to (b) e)) is repeated by loop processing.

In FIG. 289 (c), after the “specific moving image TDGa (specific moving image TDG)” shown in FIG. 289 (b) is started to be displayed, a predetermined effect condition (first effect condition) is satisfied again. Based on this, a new "specific moving image TDGb (specific moving image TDG)" different from the "specific moving image TDGa (specific moving image TDG)" that has already been started to be displayed has started to be displayed. Is shown.

That is, as described above, in the peripheral control MPU1511a according to this embodiment, when a predetermined effect condition is satisfied, the "effect mode for generating an operation opportunity for the sword decoration 5001" is set as a waiting state (maximum). It is possible to execute the process of waiting (up to 3 times). In this regard, in FIG. 289 (c), the second coin is displayed in the effect display device 1600 in which the "specific moving image TDGa (specific moving image TDG)" is displayed in the frame in which the first coin is shaped. By newly starting the display of "specific moving image TDGb (specific moving image TDG)" and changing the count value of "sword stock" from "1" to "2" even in the frame in the shape of It has been suggested that the "effect mode for generating an operation opportunity for the sword decoration body 5001" for two times is in the state of waiting for execution.

Here, in this production example, when the "specific moving image TDGb (specific moving image TDG)" is newly displayed in the frame in which the second coin is shaped, the frame in which the first coin is shaped is used. A process of synchronizing with the "specific moving image TDGa (specific moving image TDG)" which is already displayed in the screen is performed. That is, in the peripheral control MPU1511a according to this embodiment, the timer value of the predetermined timer related to the specific moving image TDG is updated at predetermined time intervals, and the timer value is updated when the specific moving image TDG is newly displayed. The image corresponding to the timer value (any of the images shown in FIGS. 255 (b) to (e)) is selectively displayed as the "first displayed image" with reference to.

For example, assuming that the timer value of the predetermined timer is updated every predetermined time within the range of "1" to "4", if the timer value referred to above is "1", FIG. 255 (b). ) Is selectively displayed as the "first displayed image", and when the timer value referred to above is "2", the image shown in FIG. 255 (c) is "first displayed". The image shown in FIG. 255 (d) is selectively displayed as the "first displayed image" when the timer value referred to above is "3". When the referenced timer value is "4", the image shown in FIG. 255 (e) is selectively displayed as the "first displayed image". Then, after the new display of the specific moving image TDG is started in this way, each time the timer value of the predetermined timer is updated, the image corresponding to the updated timer value is newly designated as the "specific moving image TDG". Show it so that the previously displayed image is hidden. By performing such processing on the specific moving image TDGa in the first coin and the specific moving image TDGb in the second coin, respectively, the specific moving image TDGa and the specific moving image are performed. The TDGb will be displayed as moving images synchronized with each other regardless of their display start timings (in FIG. 289 (c), both the specific moving image TDGa and the specific moving image TDGb are shown in FIG. 255 (d). (Displayed as the image shown). The specific moving image TDGa and the specific moving image TDGb are not limited to this as a method for displaying them in synchronization, and other methods may be adopted.

However, in the peripheral control MPU 1511a according to this embodiment, regarding the update process for the predetermined timer at predetermined time intervals, no specific moving image TDG is displayed (for example, the situation shown in FIG. 289 (a)). In addition, it is also executed in the situation where the symbol is not changed), and by this, "Specific moving image TDGa (Specific moving image TDG)" is executed in the frame in which the first coin is shaped. Which of the images shown in FIGS. 255 (b) to 255 (e) is selected as the "first image to be displayed" is determined differently each time. The "first displayed image" changes according to the timing when the predetermined production conditions are satisfied). That is, as will be described later, in the peripheral control MPU1511a according to this embodiment, the “first displayed image” is predetermined as the “sword decorative image SYG moving image” within the period in which the specific reception effect is performed. (FIGS. 288 (a) to (f)) "and" moving image as a specific moving image TDG (FIGS. 255 (b) to (e)) "in which the" first displayed image "is indefinite. Are displayed respectively.

After the specific moving image TDGb is newly started to be displayed in this way, as shown in FIG. 289 (d), the specific moving image TDGa and the specific moving image TDGb are displayed and advanced as moving images synchronized with each other. ..

Then, while the specific moving image TDGa and the specific moving image TDGb are being displayed as moving images synchronized with each other in this way, the above-mentioned "sword decoration body 5001 is generated as an operation opportunity." When the condition for executing "(second effect condition) is satisfied, the peripheral control MPU1511a according to this embodiment is displayed in the first coin as shown in FIG. 289 (e). It is suggested that the "effect mode for generating an operation opportunity for the sword decoration 5001" has been started by displaying the coin toss-like effect motion (predetermined motion) on the "specific motion image TDGa". I try to do it. At this time, the peripheral control MPU1511a performs a process of changing the previously displayed "sword stock 2" to "stock is being released", and at the same time, the background image is flipped to a "specific moving image TDGa" like a coin toss. The effect changes (effects) that accompany the appearance of the effect (predetermined movement).

In the peripheral control MPU1511a according to this embodiment, when a coin toss-like effect motion (predetermined motion) appears in the “specific motion image TDGa”, the “specific motion image TDGa” is shown in FIG. 289 (f). The player is trying to execute the "directing mode that generates an operation opportunity for the sword decoration body 5001" while moving the "" without returning it to the original position. I am trying to encourage the attention of the coin toss. Here, as an "effect mode for generating an operation opportunity for the sword decoration body 5001", first, a display such as "a chance to pull out a sword" and "a sword to be paid" is displayed on the production display device 1600. , The process of moving the sword decoration body 5001 to the operation position is performed.

After that, the specified moving image TDGa that has performed a predetermined movement will continue to be displayed and advanced from before the movement while remaining in the moved state. Therefore, the specific moving image TDGa is displayed and advanced as a moving image display synchronized with the specific moving image TDGb displayed in the second coin even in the moved state. The specific moving image TDGa according to this embodiment is displayed in a different mode from that before the movement (here, in a slightly laterally rotated state) in the moved state, and also by this, the "sword decoration body 5001" It is suggested that the "effect mode for generating an operation opportunity" is in the started state.

Then, when a predetermined time elapses from the start of the "effect mode for generating an operation opportunity for the sword decoration body 5001" in this way, as shown in FIG. 290 (g), there is an operation opportunity for the sword decoration body 5001. The specific reception effect to which is given is started. In the specific reception effect, the image of the sword decoration 5001 is dynamically displayed in the manner shown in FIG. 288, and the sword decoration image that appears when the specific reception effect occurs. Just by looking at the movement of SYG, the operation method about "how to operate the sword decoration body 5001" and the elapsed time from the period when the production reception is allowed (sword decoration image SYGa) As described above, it is possible to recognize both the movement amount (operation amount) of the sword decoration image SYG as the starting point).

Therefore, even in this production example, if the valid period corresponding to the specific reception production occurs at the timing shown in FIG. 290 (g), first, "an image of the sword decoration 5001" and "production reception". Is displayed in the manner shown in FIG. 288 (a), and then FIGS. 290 (h) and (i) (corresponding to FIGS. 288 (b) and (c)). The display will be advanced in each mode such as.

However, in this production example, it is assumed that the operation by the player is not performed within the valid period corresponding to the specific reception production, and is shown in FIG. 290 (j) (corresponding to FIG. 288 (d)). When the timing arrives, the effect reception is generated by the automatic effect function, and the post-operation effect corresponding to the effect reception is started.

In this regard, in the peripheral control MPU1511a according to this embodiment, as described above, even when the effect reception is automatically generated within the specific reception effect, the model image (sword decoration image SYG) is displayed as a moving image. It is decided to continue the process as it is without stopping it. That is, as shown in FIGS. 290 (j) and 291 (k) and 291 (l), a simulated image (sword decoration image) as a moving image even after the effect reception is automatically generated and the post-operation effect is started. By continuously displaying SYG) as it is, it is recognized that the post-operation effect is started for a predetermined time (while the moving image is continued) after the effect reception is automatically generated. If the operation by the player is performed while the sword decorative image SYG is continuously displayed (within the period shown in FIGS. 290 (j) and 291 (k) and 291 (l)). The operation makes it possible to give an impression as if the post-operation effect was started.

Further, in this production example, after the operation, at least while the dynamic display as the sword decorative image SYG is continued (within the period shown in FIGS. 290 (j) and 291 (k) and 291 (l)). Regardless of whether the first effect result (FIG. 290 (m)) or the second effect result (FIG. 290 (n)) having different expectations appear as the effect, the same (common) effect mode (expectation degree) is used. (Aspects that are not suggested) are made to appear (first stage production change). Here, as shown in FIGS. 290 (j) and 291 (k) and 291 (l), the sword ornament 5001 is set as the "mode in which the aura member 5040 appears" as the "same production mode", and the production is performed. The effect corresponding to the aura member is also displayed on the sword decorative image SYG displayed on the display device 1600.

Then, after the dynamic display as the sword decorative image SYG is hidden, based on the result of the effect determination performed at the time of the symbol change, the "specific decorative member SDY (sudare accessory) operates and the effect is produced. A low-expected mode effect in which a chance !! is displayed on the display device 1600 (see FIG. 291 (m)) "or" a specific decorative member SDY (sudare) is operated, and the effect display device 1600 is extremely hot! The high-expected mode effect in which! Is displayed (see FIG. 291 (n)) ”is further executed as a post-operation effect (second stage effect change). Further, while the degree of expectation is suggested by the post-operation effect, the drive control for returning the sword decoration body 5001 and the aura member 5040 to the original positions is performed.

According to the configuration in which the post-operation effect is executed as a stepwise effect in this way, the operation by the player is set to "automatic generation of the effect reception (timing shown in FIG. 290 (j) (FIG. 288 (d))". Even if it is not in time, if it is delayed while the dynamic display as the sword decoration image SYG is continued (until the timing shown in FIG. 290 (l) (FIG. 288 (f))). If so, then, since the post-operation effect (second stage effect change) is performed in a manner suggesting the degree of expectation, it gives the impression that the effect change is caused by the operation. It will be possible to make it possible, and it will be expected that it will be difficult to give the impression that the player has been deprived of the operation opportunity by the "automatic generation of the production reception".

In particular, in this embodiment, as described above, the valid period corresponding to the reception effect is set in the specific reception effect (FIGS. 290 (g) to (j) and FIGS. 291 (k) and 291 (l)). The image displayed at the time of starting (the image displayed first) is a predetermined "moving image as a sword decorative image SYG (FIGS. 288 (a) to (f))", and the image is indefinite. Each time, a different "moving image as a specific moving image TDG (FIGS. 255 (b) to (e))" is displayed. That is, the progress status in the "moving image as the specific moving image TDG (FIGS. 255 (b) to (e))" instead of the "moving image as the sword decorative image SYG (FIGS. 288 (a) to (f))". If the player confirms the above, a situation may occur in which the elapsed time from the start of the specific reception effect is erroneously recognized. However, according to the above configuration, the specific reception effect is used. As a result of erroneously recognizing the elapsed time since the start of the operation, the operation by the player may not be in time for the "automatic occurrence of the production reception (timing shown in FIG. Even if this happens, it will be expected that the game entertainment will be maintained favorably.

Incidentally, the specific reception effect described above with reference to FIGS. 290 and 291 is basically advanced in the same manner as the effect example shown in FIG. 285. That is, at the timing tf1 shown in FIG. 285, the effect situation shown in FIG. 290 (g) appears, and at the timing tf2 shown in FIG. 285, the effect situation shown in FIG. 290 (j) appears. It has become. However, at the timing tf2 shown in FIG. 285, only the post-operation effect that does not suggest the degree of expectation is executed, and the timing tf4 shown in FIG. 285 that the moving image continued as the sword decoration image SYG is hidden. It can be said that it is different from the production example shown in FIG. 285 in that the post-operation production that suggests the degree of expectation is newly started after the arrival of. In this production example, the above-mentioned alternative example with respect to FIG. 285 may be applied.

Further, also in this production example, as in the case of the production example shown in FIG. 285, the time from the automatic generation of the production reception to the end of the period initially set as the production reception period (timing tf2 to tf3). ) And the time from the end of the period initially set as the production reception period until the moving image is hidden (timing tf3 to tf4) should be set as the same length of time. desirable.

It should be noted that a plurality of modes are prepared as the specific moving image TDG, and a plurality of modes having different expectations are prepared as a model image (here, the sword decorative image SYG) that imitates the operation means to be operated. Then, when the above-mentioned predetermined effect condition (first effect condition) is satisfied, it is determined which of the plurality of modes is to be displayed as the specific moving image TDG, and the specific moving image TDG is displayed in which of those modes. Depending on whether or not the image is used, a mode with a high degree of expectation may be likely to appear as the above-mentioned image (here, the sword decorative image SYG).

In the above-mentioned production example, a case where the second production condition is satisfied and the "effect mode for generating an operation opportunity for the sword decoration 5001" is executed after two specific moving images TDG are displayed is illustrated. However, the second effect condition may be satisfied in a state where only one specific moving image TDG is displayed. Further, even when the second effect condition is satisfied (when a predetermined movement appears in the specific moving image TDG), the "effect mode for generating an operation opportunity for the sword decoration 5001" is not necessarily set. It may not be executed, and for example, any one of a plurality of production modes including "a production mode that generates an operation opportunity for the sword decoration body 5001" may be selectively executed. Further, in the above-mentioned production example, such a specific moving image TDG may not necessarily be displayed, and a specific reception production may be started when a predetermined timing arrives while the design production is being performed. It may be.

Although the "same image (here, sword decoration image SYG)" and "bar display with the same length" are displayed within the valid period when the production reception is allowed, the production reception is allowed. The first reception effect and the second reception effect having different lengths of valid periods may be executed. That is, in this case, for the "bar display", the speed at which the gauge amount decreases depends on the length of the valid period, but for the "model image (here, the sword decoration image SYG)", Regardless of whether the first reception effect or the second reception effect is being executed, the operation method regarding "how to operate the operation target (here, the sword decoration body 5001)" , It is possible to recognize both the elapsed time since the period when the production reception is allowed occurs (which can be grasped by the movement amount (operation amount) of the sword decoration image SYG starting from the sword decoration image SYGa). It is desirable that the display progress as a moving image is performed in the same manner so that it can be performed. According to such a configuration, even in a situation where it is difficult to recognize which of the first reception effect and the second reception effect is being executed, the "image (here, sword decoration)" As long as the "image SYG)" is confirmed, it is possible to grasp the elapsed time from the acceptance of the production reception. Then, based on the elapsed time grasped in this way, by confirming whether the remaining gauge amount of the bar display is large or small, which of the first reception effect and the second reception effect is being executed? Will be able to be recognized. That is, usually, the first reception effect and the second reception effect often have different production expectations. Therefore, by recognizing the type of the reception effect, the post-operation effect is started. , It is expected that the game entertainment will be maintained favorably.

When the above-mentioned first reception effect and second reception effect are prepared, it is desirable to set the time from the occurrence of the valid period to the automatic occurrence of the effect reception as different times from each other. When the different times are set in this way, the time until the effect reception is automatically generated may be misidentified, and as a result, a situation may occur in which the operation is not in time even though the player himself tries to operate it. However, according to the production example in which the dynamic display by the "model image (here, the sword decoration image SYG)" is continued or the effect is executed step by step after the operation, such a situation occurs. However, the decline in the game interest will be suppressed favorably.

In the above production example, in the case of displaying a model image (here, the sword decoration image SYG) that imitates the operation means to be operated as a moving image in a specific reception effect, as shown in FIG. 288, "operation start". The operation from the position to be performed (see FIG. 288 (a)) to the position where the operation is completed (see FIG. 288 (f)) is adjusted to the length of the valid period as the specific reception effect. It was decided to advance the display. However, one operation from "the position where the operation is started (see FIG. 288 (a))" to "the position where the operation is finished (see FIG. 288 (f))" is not necessarily adjusted to the length of the valid period. It is not necessary to advance the display by means of, for example, "the position where the operation is started (see FIG. 288 (a))" and "the position where the operation is completed (FIG. 288)" over the time until the end of the valid period. (F)) ”may be displayed as a moving image that repeats the reciprocating movement. The point is that the image to be displayed (the image displayed first) at the start of the valid period corresponding to the reception effect is predetermined, and after that, the moving images are displayed in the predetermined order and progress speed. If it is progressed (displayed sequentially by multiple images), the operation method regarding "how to operate the operation target (here, the sword decoration body 5001)" and the reception of the production are allowed. Both the elapsed time since the period occurred (which can be grasped by the amount of movement of the sword decoration image SYG starting from the sword decoration image SYG (here, the amount of movement including how many times it reciprocated)), respectively. It is possible to recognize.

In the above-mentioned production example, the "post-operation effect performed stepwise" performed based on the effect reception may be in another mode. For example, in a state where the moving image as a model of the operation means (here, the sword decoration body 5001) to be operated is continued, the "light emission effect by the lamp provided on the game board 5" is set to 1. Start as a production after the operation of the stage. Then, after the moving image as the imitation image of the operation means (here, the sword decoration body 5001) to be operated is hidden, and the "light emission effect by the lamp provided on the game board 5" is achieved. Is being executed as the post-operation effect of the first stage, and the "display effect on the effect display device 1600" or the "movable effect by the decorative accessory" (or at least one of them) is performed in two stages. It is started as a post-operation effect of the eyes (in the post-operation effect of the second stage, an effect target different from the effect target used in the post-operation effect of the first stage is used). According to such a configuration, the "light emitting effect by the lamp provided on the game board 5" is the "display effect on the effect display device 1600" or the "movable effect by the decorative accessory" (or at least one of them). Since it is expected that it will function as a precursory effect, even if it is recognized that this is a post-operation effect of the first stage, it will be uncomfortable (a predetermined time has passed since the effect was accepted). Until this is done, it becomes possible to provide a post-operation effect without the discomfort that the post-operation effect using the effect display device 1600 and the post-operation effect using the decorative accessory are not executed.

Further, the same effect target (for example, the light emitting effect by the lamp provided on the game board 5) is used for the first stage post-operation effect and the second stage post-operation effect, and then the operation target is set. In a state where the moving image as a model of the operation means (here, the sword decoration body 5001) is continued, the post-operation effect (light emission effect by the lamp) is performed in a form in which the degree of expectation is not suggested. In this way, after the moving image as the imitation image is hidden, the post-operation effect (light emission effect by the lamp) may be advanced as a mode in which the degree of expectation is suggested.

A plurality of modes having different expectations were prepared as modes of the moving image as a model of the operating means (here, the sword decoration body 5001) to be operated, and the moving image was displayed in any of the modes. Even in that case, the moving image may be continuously displayed even after the production reception occurs in both of the modes.

Even if an image of the operating means to be operated (here, the sword decoration body 5001) is displayed as a moving image, if the operating means is not operated within the valid period, the effect is produced. A special reception effect in which reception does not occur may be generated by the establishment of an effect condition different from the effect condition for generating the specific reception effect. That is, in this case, the production reception is automatically generated by displaying the "moving image by the same image (here, the sword decorative image SYG)" and the "bar display having the same length" respectively. It becomes possible to make it difficult to grasp whether the "specific reception effect" or the "special reception effect" that does not automatically generate the effect reception is being executed, and provides a tense reception effect. You will be able to do it. However, in the "specific reception production" where the production reception is automatically generated and the "special reception production" where the production reception is not automatically generated, it is possible to make different production contents appear as the production after the operation. It is desirable to make people recognize which reception production was done when they did. In addition, a production pattern that allows only one of "specific reception production" in which the production reception is automatically generated and "special reception production" in which the production reception is not automatically generated, and both of them are generated at different timings. By preparing an effect pattern that enables it and executing one of a plurality of effect patterns including those effect patterns based on the result of the jackpot judgment at the time of the symbol change, " A "specific reception effect" or a "special reception effect" may appear.

In the above-mentioned production example shown in FIGS. 289 to 291, a moving image as a model of the operation means (here, the sword decoration body 5001) to be operated when the production reception is generated by the automatic production function. The post-operation effect was started while continuing the progress related to the dynamic display, and the post-operation effect was executed step by step. However, in terms of processing load, even when the production reception is generated by the operation by the player, the moving image as the imitation image of the operation means (here, the sword decoration body 5001) to be operated is used as the motion image. It is desirable to start the post-operation effect while continuing the progress related to the target display, and to execute the post-operation effect step by step so that the post-operation effect is executed by the same process.

[Post-operation production that suggests the type of reception production that was automatically received]
As described above, in the pachinko machine 1 according to this embodiment, the automatic effect function for the operation target is enabled at a predetermined timing within the valid period in which the effect reception is allowed, and the pachinko machine 1 can be operated without any operation by the player. It is possible to generate a post-production. However, in the pachinko machine 1 provided with such an "automatic production function", even if the player forgets to operate the pachinko machine 1, the production reception is automatically generated, so that the player has an opportunity to operate the pachinko machine 1. Not only does it eliminate the tension when it is given, but there is also concern that it will become a mere display effect in which a predetermined moving image is played.

Therefore, in the pachinko machine 1 according to this embodiment, it is possible to generate a first reception effect and a second reception effect in which the time from the time when the effect reception is allowed to the time when the effect reception is automatically generated is different. In the above, the remaining time image (for example, bar display) and the pachinko image (for example, button image BTG) displayed at the effect reception desk are set to be the same image. That is, in this case, it is urged that the second reception effect is erroneously recognized even though the first reception effect is occurring, and the player who has made such a erroneous recognition is encouraged to erroneously recognize that the second reception effect is occurring. , "Even though the timing when the production reception should be automatically generated has arrived after the period when the production reception is allowed occurs, the production reception does not automatically occur (or the timing when the production reception should be automatically generated has arrived yet. Unexpected situations such as "The production reception was automatically generated even though it was not in the stage where it was not done)", so it is possible to maintain a good sense of tension until the production reception is automatically generated. It will be expected.

However, if it is mistakenly recognized that a second reception effect different from this is occurring in the time until the effect reception is automatically generated even though the first reception effect has occurred, what kind of effect will be produced? It is not possible to understand whether progress is being made, and there is concern that the interest in games will decline. In this respect, in the pachinko machine 1 according to this embodiment, the bar display indicating the remaining time as the valid period is continuously displayed even after the effect reception is automatically generated. That is, in this case, even if it is not possible to recognize which of the first reception effect and the second reception effect is being executed when the valid period in which the effect reception is allowed occurs, the effect reception is automatically generated (the effect after operation starts). ) By checking how much gauge is left as a bar display, it is possible to recognize whether the first reception effect or the second reception effect was being executed. After the operation, the production can be started.

Further, in the pachinko machine 1 according to this embodiment, although the precursor effect of the same content is generated and the same image and the same bar display are displayed even when the valid period occurs, the pachinko machine 1 is said to be the same. It is possible to execute the production progress in some cases where the production reception is automatically generated and in some cases where the production reception is not automatically generated within the valid period. In such a configuration, even if a precursor effect or a reception effect occurs, it is not possible to distinguish whether or not the reception is automatically received within the valid period, so it is possible to perform the reception effect with a sense of tension. become able to.

FIGS. 292 and 293 are diagrams showing examples of a first reception effect and a second reception effect in which the time from the occurrence of the period (valid period) in which the effect reception is allowed to the automatic occurrence of the effect reception is different. be. In the production example, it is assumed that the production reception is in a situation where it can be automatically generated.

FIG. 292 (a) shows a state in which the number of reservations is 3, and the variation display of the decorative symbol SZ (special symbol) is performed by the effect display device 1600 with an effect pattern according to the result of the jackpot determination, and is in the reach state. It shows the production situation that formed.

FIG. 292 (b) shows the effect reception (operation) during the execution of the variable display of the decorative symbol SZ shown in FIG. 292 (a) (here, it may be in the reach state but may be in the non-reach state). It shows the production situation in which a precursory effect is being executed, which suggests that it will soon be tolerated.

FIG. 292 (c) shows an effect situation (result of jackpot determination) in which the first reception effect in which an operation opportunity is given to the operation button 410 is started after the precursor effect shown in FIG. 292 (b) is performed. In the effect determination performed based on the above, the first effect condition (the effect pattern in which the effect result shown in FIG. 292 (e) described later appears) or the second effect condition (the effect result shown in FIG. 292 (f) described later) is The effect status) when the effect pattern) that appears is satisfied.

In this effect situation, as shown in the figure, a button image BTG (an image imitating the operation button 410) corresponding to the operation button 410 is displayed in the display area, and an operation on the operation button 410 is urged. An instruction display (here, a character display such as "press", a downward arrow display, and a bar display indicating the remaining time for which the production reception is allowed) appears. At this time, the operation button 410 to which the operation opportunity is given is in a light emitting state, which also prompts the operation of the operation button 410.

However, in this effect example, the operation button 410 is not operated within the period set so that the effect reception is allowed, and the automatic effect function for the operation button 410 is enabled at a predetermined timing within the valid period. It is assumed that it is done. FIG. 292 (d) depicts that the automatic effect function for the operation button 410 is about to be activated during the execution period (valid period) of the first reception effect, and the automatic effect function is enabled. Then, the same change as when the effect reception is performed by the operation of the operation button 410 within the valid period set so that the effect reception is allowed is caused to the effect. Here, based on the result of the effect determination performed when the design changes, a low-expected mode effect (FIG.) in which "the specific decorative member SDY (sudare) operates and a chance !! 292 (e) ”or“ The specific decorative member SDY (sudare) operates and the effect display device 1600 displays intense heat !! Highly expected mode effect (see FIG. 292 (f)). ) ”Is executed as a post-operation effect.

In this regard, in this production example, regardless of which mode (FIGS. 292 (e) and (f)) the post-operation effect is executed, "the remaining time as a period in which the effect reception is allowed is shown. The "bar display" is not hidden, and the effect is started after the operation while this is maintained. As a result, by confirming how much gauge remaining remains at the time when the production is started after the operation, the reception production is "reception after the period (valid period) in which the production reception is allowed occurs". It becomes possible to recognize which of the first reception effect and the second reception effect, which has a different time until is automatically generated. That is, since the production expectations are usually different between the first reception production and the second reception production, it is possible to start the post-operation production based on the recognition of the type of reception production. , It is expected that the game entertainment will be maintained favorably.

On the other hand, in this production example, after the effect situation shown in FIG. 292 (a) appears, the effect situation in which the precursor effect shown in FIG. 293 (g) appears instead of the precursor effect shown in FIG. 292 (b). (In the effect determination performed based on the result of the jackpot determination, the third effect condition (the effect pattern in which the effect result shown in FIG. 293 (j) described later appears) or the fourth effect condition (in FIG. 293 (k) described later). When the fifth effect condition (the effect pattern in which the effect situation shown in FIGS. 293 (l) and (m) described later is satisfied) appears. There is.

Then, after the precursor effect is performed in the manner shown in FIG. 293 (g), the second reception effect in which the operation button 410 is given an operation opportunity is started as shown in FIG. 293 (h). Will be done.

However, in this second reception effect, although the time from the time when the effect reception is allowed to the activation of the automatic effect function is shorter than that of the first reception effect, the figure is shown in the figure. As shown together with 293 (c) and FIG. 293 (h), the button image BTG (an image of the operation button 410) and the bar display suggesting the remaining time of the valid period (the gauge length is also the same). ) And are the same images as in the case of the above first reception production.

That is, in this case, the first reception is performed in both the production situation shown in FIG. 293 (c) and the production situation shown in FIG. 293 (h). It becomes difficult to recognize whether the production or the second reception production is occurring, and it becomes possible to give a sense of tension as to when the production reception will occur.

Then, in this effect example, the operation button 410 is not operated within the period set so that the effect reception is allowed, and the automatic effect function for the operation button 410 is enabled at a predetermined timing within the valid period. It is assumed that it is done. FIG. 293 (i) depicts that the automatic effect function for the operation button 410 is about to be activated during the execution period (valid period) of the second reception effect, and the effective period occurs. When the automatic effect function is enabled at a timing earlier than the second reception effect, the same change as when the effect reception is performed by the operation of the operation button 410 is generated for the effect. Here, based on the result of the effect determination performed when the design changes, a low-expected mode effect (FIG.) in which "the specific decorative member SDY (sudare) operates and a chance !! 293 (j)) ”or“ The specific decorative member SDY (sudare) operates and the effect display device 1600 displays intense heat !! Highly expected mode effect (see FIG. 293 (k)). ) ”Is executed as a post-operation effect.

In this regard, in this production example, regardless of which mode (FIGS. 293 (j), (k)) the post-operation effect is executed, "the remaining time as a period in which the effect reception is allowed is shown. The "bar display" is not hidden, and the effect is started after the operation while this is maintained. As a result, by confirming how much gauge remaining remains at the time when the production is started after the operation, the reception production is "reception after the period (valid period) in which the production reception is allowed occurs". It becomes possible to recognize which of the first reception effect and the second reception effect, which has a different time until is automatically generated. That is, since the production expectations are usually different between the first reception production and the second reception production, it is possible to start the post-operation production based on the recognition of the type of reception production. , It is expected that the game entertainment will be maintained favorably.

However, in this production example, even when the precursor effect in the mode shown in FIG. 293 (g) and the reception effect in the mode shown in FIG. 293 (h) are sequentially displayed, FIG. 293 ( As shown in l), the production situation (fifth production condition) in which the valid period of the reception production is terminated without the automatic production function being activated unless the player operates it can also appear. ing.

That is, in this case, the same precursor effect (see FIG. 293 (g)) occurs, and the same bar display (including gauge length and how to reduce the gauge) occurs even when the valid period occurs. When the effect reception is executed as the second reception effect that is automatically generated within the valid period (see FIGS. 293 (i) to (k)), the effect reception is received. Is executed as a third reception effect that does not automatically occur (see FIGS. 293 (l) and (m)), and it is possible to execute a certain effect progress. In such a configuration, even if a precursor effect in which a specific mode appears or a reception effect in which a specific mode appears is displayed, it becomes impossible to distinguish whether or not the reception is automatically received within the valid period, so that there is a sense of tension. It will be possible to perform reception production with.

Moreover, in this effect example, as shown in FIG. 293 (m), even when the valid period as the reception effect is terminated without the automatic effect function being enabled, the effective period is terminated and the effect reception is received. Is not allowed, but the "bar display showing the remaining time as the period for which the production reception is allowed" is not hidden and is maintained. Therefore, it was a reception effect in which the automatic effect function was not enabled by confirming that an effect situation occurred in which the effect was not generated after the operation even though the gauge remaining amount was "0". Will be able to recognize, and it will be expected to suppress the decline in the interest in games. Although "?" Appears in the figure shown in FIG. 293 (m), it may not cause any change in the effect.

Further, in this production example, although the types of precursory effects (see FIGS. 292 (b) and 293 (m)) are different, the same image and the same bar display are displayed when the effect reception occurs. However, since the time until the automatic effect function is activated is different (see FIGS. 292 (c) and 293 (h)), when the precursor effect is overlooked, it is relatively relatively To be able to provide a directing effect as to whether the automatic directing function is enabled at an early timing, whether the automatic directing function is enabled at a relatively late stage, or whether the automatic directing function is not enabled in the first place. As a result, you will be able to perform reception production with a sense of tension. On the other hand, when it is confirmed that the precursor effect is performed in the manner shown in FIG. 292 (b), it is possible to recognize in advance that the reception effect in which the automatic effect function is always enabled will occur. Therefore, it is expected that the game entertainment will be maintained favorably.

In this production example, the display mode is different between the precursor effect shown in FIG. 292 (b) and the precursor effect shown in FIG. 293 (g), but these are executed in the same display mode. It may be. That is, in this case, even if both the precursor effect and the reception effect are confirmed, the operation opportunity is kept secret at which timing the automatic effect function is activated and whether the automatic effect function is activated in the first place. You will be able to grant.

Incidentally, each reception effect described above with reference to FIGS. 292 and 293 is basically developed in the same manner as the effect example shown in FIG. 285. That is, at the timing tf1 shown in FIG. 285, the effect situation shown in FIG. 292 (c) or FIG. 293 (h) appears, and at the timing tf2 shown in FIG. 285, FIGS. 292 (e) and (f). ) Or the production situation shown in FIGS. 293 (j) and (k). However, in the example shown in FIG. 285, the automatic effect function may not be enabled, and the timing tf2 at which the automatic effect function is activated may be delayed depending on the established effect conditions (effect pattern). It can be said that it is different from the production example shown in FIG. 285 in that it may be accelerated and that the production is started after the operation while the bar display is left. In this production example, the above-mentioned alternative example with respect to FIG. 285 may be applied. Further, also in this effect example, in addition to the bar display, the effect may be started after the operation while leaving the image of the operation means. Further, when the post-operation effect is started while leaving the imitation image of the operating means, the imitation image may be continued as a moving image as described with reference to FIGS. 290 and 289.

Further, also in this production example, as in the case of the production example shown in FIG. 285, the time from the automatic generation of the production reception to the end of the period initially set as the production reception period (timing tf2 to tf3). ) And the time from the end of the period initially set as the production reception period until the bar display is hidden (timing tf3 to tf4) should be set as the same length of time. desirable.

Further, also in this effect example, when the post-operation effect is started while the bar display is left, the stepwise effect as described with reference to FIGS. 290 and 289 may be performed.

In addition, the time from the occurrence of the second reception effect to the time when the effect reception is automatically generated and the bar display is hidden is from the time from the occurrence of the first reception effect to the time when the effect reception is automatically generated. It is desirable to set it as a short time. According to such a configuration, it is clarified that it is not the second reception effect in which the effect reception is automatically generated at a relatively early timing when the bar display is displayed in the manner shown in FIG. 292 (d). (If it is the second reception production, it should have already been hidden), so you can enjoy the remaining validity period while being aware of the possibility of the first reception production.

In this effect example, when the reception effect for which the automatic effect function is not enabled is set as the third reception effect, the effect patterns (FIGS. 293 (l), (m)) for generating the third reception effect are not necessarily prepared. You may.

The first reception effect and the second reception effect may be made to be able to occur sequentially within one symbol variation. However, when the above-mentioned second reception effect is executed, which takes a relatively short time until the automatic effect function is activated, the first reception effect may occur until the symbol is stopped. When the above-mentioned first reception effect is executed, which takes a relatively long time until the automatic effect function is activated, the second reception effect cannot occur until the symbol is stopped. Is desirable. According to such a configuration, a person who recognizes that it takes a relatively long time to receive the production by executing the first reception production, at a relatively early timing when the second reception production occurs. It is expected that the situation in which the operation opportunity is lost due to the automatic generation of the production reception of the above is suppressed.

Also in the above-mentioned production example, the modeled image of the operating means may be displayed in any of a plurality of modes (first mode, second mode) having different expectations. Then, the automatic effect function is not always enabled when the first aspect with a low degree of expectation appears (third reception effect), but the automatic effect function is always enabled when the second aspect with a high degree of expectation appears. (First reception production or second reception production).

In the above production example, when the first reception effect (see FIGS. 292 (c) to (f)) occurs and when the second reception effect (see FIGS. 293 (h) to (k)) occurs. , When the third reception effect (see FIGS. 293 (l) and (m)) occurs, and when the effect reception is performed, the same post-operation effect (operation of the specific decorative member SDY (sudare), etc.) Is supposed to be done. However, when the first reception effect (see FIGS. 292 (c) to (f)) occurs, when the second reception effect (see FIGS. 293 (h) to (k)) occurs, and when the third reception effect occurs. It is also possible to perform different post-operation effects when the reception effect (see FIGS. 293 (l) and (m)) occurs and when the effect reception is performed.

In the above-mentioned effect example shown in FIGS. 292 and 293, when the effect reception occurs by the automatic effect function or when the effective period ends without the automatic effect function being activated, after the operation with the bar display left. The production is started, and the production situation where the production is not started after the operation appears. However, in terms of processing load, even if the effect reception occurs due to the operation by the player, the post-operation effect is started with the bar display left, so that the post-operation effect is executed by the same process. Is desirable.

[Omen production that also functions as a production that suggests whether it will be automatically accepted]
As described above, in the pachinko machine 1 according to this embodiment, the automatic effect function for the operation target is enabled at a predetermined timing within the valid period in which the effect reception is allowed, and the pachinko machine 1 can be operated without any operation by the player. It is possible to generate a post-production. However, in the pachinko machine 1 provided with such an "automatic production means", even if the player forgets to operate the pachinko machine 1, the production reception is automatically generated, so that the player is given an operation opportunity. Not only does the tension disappear at that time, but there is also concern that it will become a mere display effect in which a predetermined moving image is played.

Therefore, in the pachinko machine 1 according to this embodiment, it is possible to generate a non-automatic reception effect that is not the target of the "automatic effect function" and an automatic reception effect that is the target of the "automatic effect function". That is, in this case, since the production reception is not always automatically generated, it is expected that the tension until the production reception is automatically generated is preferably maintained.

However, even though a non-automatic reception effect that is not covered by the "automatic effect function" has occurred, it may not be operated as a result of erroneous recognition that the effect reception will occur without the operation by the player. There is a concern that the interest in the game will decline due to the loss of opportunities for production reception. In this respect, in the pachinko machine 1 according to this embodiment, when the precursor effect is executed in a special mode, the automatic reception effect is always generated as the reception effect corresponding to the precursor effect. It is possible to suppress the decline in the game interest due to the loss of the opportunity to generate the production reception because it is not possible to understand whether or not is enabled.

Further, in the pachinko machine 1 according to this embodiment, during the period when the precursor effect is executed in a special mode, the reception effect corresponding to the precursor effect is the target of the "automatic effect function". When the precursor effect is completed and the reception effect (automatic reception effect) is actually generated (valid period), the reception effect becomes "automatic effect". It is difficult to recognize whether the automatic reception effect is the target of the "function" or the non-automatic reception effect that is not the target of the "automatic effect function". For example, in both the non-automatic reception effect and the automatic reception effect, by displaying a model image of the same operation means as an operation target and a bar display having a gauge amount of the same length. , It will be difficult to recognize which reception production is occurring.

According to such a configuration, if it is overlooked in which mode the precursor effect is executed, whether or not the "automatic effect function" is enabled once the reception effect is started is determined. Difficult to recognize. Therefore, it is expected that the tension until the production reception is automatically generated is appropriately maintained while executing the production that suggests whether or not the "automatic production function" is enabled. ..

FIGS. 294 to 296 are diagrams showing an example of an effect suggesting whether or not a reception effect in which the "automatic effect function" is enabled occurs depending on the mode of the precursor effect. Here, too, the description will be given as an example of the effect when the automatic effect function can be enabled (automatic effect mode, or a gaming machine in a state where the automatic effect can always be produced, etc.). Since reception effects that are not subject to activation can occur, the display such as "Auto button is being set" is not displayed.

In FIG. 294 (a), the number of reservations is 3, and the variation display of the decorative symbol SZ (special symbol) is performed by the effect display device 1600 with an effect pattern according to the result of the jackpot determination, and is in the reach state. It shows the production situation that formed.

FIG. 294 (b) shows the effect reception (operation) during the execution of the variable display of the decorative symbol SZ shown in FIG. 294 (a) (here, it may be in the reach state but may be in the non-reach state). It shows the production situation in which a precursory effect is being executed, which suggests that it will soon be tolerated.

Here, the precursor effect shown in FIG. 294 (b) occurs when the timing tg1 (see FIG. 296 (a)) arrives, and the model image of the operation button 410, which is the operation target, is displayed. It is displayed as an effect image (special mode) that moves in a swirling manner toward a part that appears later. Then, when the precursor effect is executed in such a special mode, the automatic reception effect targeted by the "automatic effect function" is always generated as the reception effect corresponding to the precursor effect. During the period when the precursory effect is performed, it is possible to know in advance that the "automatic effect function" will be enabled in the subsequent reception effect. In the precursory effect of this production example, a display such as "auto button!" Appears, but this does not necessarily have to be displayed.

FIG. 294 (c) shows an effect situation (an effect performed based on the result of the jackpot determination) when the precursor effect shown in FIG. 294 (b) is performed and the timing tg2 (see FIG. 296 (a)) arrives. In the determination, the first determination condition (the effect pattern in which the effect result shown in FIG. 294 (e) described later appears) or the second determination condition (the effect pattern in which the effect result shown in FIG. 294 (f) described later appears) is shown. It is depicted that the reception effect, which gives an operation opportunity to the operation button 410, has just started.

In this effect situation, as shown in the figure, a button image BTG (an image imitating the operation button 410) corresponding to the operation button 410 is displayed in the display area, and an operation on the operation button 410 is urged. An instruction display (here, a character display such as "press", a downward arrow display, and a bar display indicating the remaining time for which the production reception is allowed) appears. At this time, the operation button 410 to which the operation opportunity is given is in a light emitting state, which also prompts the operation of the operation button 410.

As described above, in the reception effect shown in FIG. 294 (c), the effect reception is automatically generated (the "automatic effect function" is enabled) when a predetermined timing within the valid period arrives without any operation by the player. The same post-operation effect as when the player performed the operation appears. However, as will be described later, in the effect situation shown in FIG. 294 (c), is there an automatic reception effect in which the "automatic effect function" is enabled, or is it non-automatic in which the "automatic effect function" is not enabled? It is difficult to recognize whether the reception production is occurring. That is, in this case, if it is overlooked in which mode the precursor effect is executed, it is possible to recognize whether or not the "automatic effect function" is enabled once the reception effect is started. Have difficulty. Therefore, while performing an effect (a precursory effect of a special mode) that suggests whether or not the "automatic effect function" is enabled, the tension until the effect reception is automatically generated should be appropriately maintained. Will be expected.

Then, in this effect example, the operation button 410 is not operated within the period set so that the effect reception is allowed, and the operation button 410 is operated at a predetermined timing tg3 (see FIG. 296) within the valid period. It is assumed that the automatic effect function for is enabled. FIG. 294 (d) depicts that the automatic effect function for the operation button 410 is about to be enabled at the timing tg3, and when the automatic effect function is enabled, the effect reception is permitted. Within the valid period set to be such, the same change as when the effect is received by the operation of the operation button 410 is generated for the effect. Here, based on the result of the effect determination performed when the design changes, a low-expected mode effect (FIG.) in which "the specific decorative member SDY (sudare) operates and a chance !! 294 (e) ”or“ The specific decorative member SDY (sudare) operates and the effect display device 1600 displays intense heat !! Highly expected mode effect (see FIG. 294 (f)). ) ”Is executed as a post-operation effect.

In this regard, in this effect example (including the effect portion described later with reference to FIG. 295), even when the post-operation effect is executed in any of the modes (FIGS. 294 (e) and (f)). , "Bar display indicating the remaining time as the period for which the production reception is allowed" is not hidden, and the production is started after the operation while this is maintained. That is, although details are omitted, even in this production example (including the production portion described later with reference to FIG. 295), the production reception is automatically performed after the period (valid period) in which the production reception is permitted occurs. The first reception effect and the second reception effect with different times until they occur are prepared, and by checking how much gauge remaining is left when the effect is started after operation, It is possible to recognize whether the reception effect is "the first reception effect or the second reception effect in which the time from the occurrence of the period (valid period) in which the effect reception is allowed to the automatic occurrence of the effect reception is different". I am trying to be. That is, since the production expectations are usually different between the first reception production and the second reception production, it is possible to start the post-operation production based on the recognition of the type of reception production. , It is expected that the game entertainment will be maintained favorably. In this production example as well, the above configuration ("bar display" is not hidden and is maintained) described in the item of "Post-operation effect suggesting the type of automatically received reception effect". Each configuration other than (starting the effect after the operation) may be appropriately adopted.

Further, also in this effect example (including the effect portion described later with reference to FIG. 295), the image display described in the item of "post-operation effect suggesting an automatically accepted operation target" is left. It is also possible to adopt a configuration in which the production is started after the operation as it is. Further, in this case, each configuration other than the above configuration described in the same item (starting the effect after the operation while leaving the image display) may be appropriately adopted. Further, in this case, the configuration in which the effect is generated after the operation while leaving the bar display without being hidden is not necessarily adopted and may be omitted.

On the other hand, in this production example, while the variable display of the decorative symbol SZ shown in FIG. 294 (a) (here, it is in the reach state but may be in the non-reach state) is being executed, FIG. 294 (b) The effect situation in which the precursor effect of the specific mode shown in FIG. 295 (g) appears instead of the precursor effect of the special aspect shown in FIG. An effect pattern in which the effect result shown in 295 (j) appears), or a fourth determination condition (an effect pattern in which the effect result shown in FIG. 295 (k) described later appears), or a fifth determination condition (FIG. 295 (described later)). l) The production status) when the production pattern) in which the production status shown in (m) appears may appear.

Here, the precursor effect shown in FIG. 295 (g) occurs when the timing tg1 (see FIGS. 296 (a) and 296 (b)) arrives, and the operation button 410, which is the operation target, is imitated. The two images are displayed as an effect (specific mode) until they approach each other and overlap each other. However, in the precursory effect, the image of the operation button 410, which is the operation target, is not always used. May be good. Then, when the precursor effect is executed in such a specific mode, the automatic reception effect targeted by the "automatic effect function" may occur as the reception effect corresponding to the precursor effect, or the "automatic effect function". A non-automatic reception effect that is not targeted may occur as a reception effect corresponding to the precursor effect, and as a result, during the period when the precursor effect is performed, the subsequent reception effect will have an "automatic effect function". It is not possible to know in advance whether "" will be enabled. In the precursory effect of this production example, a display such as "auto button?" Appears, but this does not necessarily have to be displayed.

FIG. 295 (h) shows the effect status when the precursor effect shown in FIG. 295 (g) is performed and the timing tg2 shown in FIG. 296 (a) arrives, and the operation button 410 is operated. It is depicted that the reception production, which gives an opportunity, has just started.

In this effect situation, as shown in the figure, a button image BTG (an image imitating the operation button 410) corresponding to the operation button 410 is displayed in the display area, and an operation on the operation button 410 is urged. An instruction display (here, a character display such as "press", a downward arrow display, and a bar display indicating the remaining time for which the production reception is allowed) appears. At this time, the operation button 410 to which the operation opportunity is given is in a light emitting state, which also prompts the operation of the operation button 410.

As described above, in the reception effect shown in FIG. 295 (h), the effect reception is automatically generated within the valid period even if there is no operation by the player (the "automatic effect function" is enabled). If there is no operation by the player, the production reception may not occur within the valid period (the "automatic production function" may not be enabled). And, as described above, in the production situation shown in FIG. 295 (h), the button image BTG corresponding to the operation button 410 (the image of the operation button 410) and the remaining time for which the production reception is allowed are allowed. Only the bar display indicating the above is displayed, and it is difficult to distinguish it from the effect situation shown in FIG. 294 (c). As a result, while performing an effect (a precursory effect of a special aspect) suggesting that the "automatic effect function" is enabled, it is possible to suitably maintain a sense of tension until the effect reception is automatically generated. It will be expected.

In this regard, when the automatic reception effect in which the "automatic effect function" is enabled occurs and the timing tg3 (see FIG. 296 (a)) arrives without being operated by the player, FIG. As shown in 295 (i), the effect situation in which the automatic effect function for the operation button 410 is about to be activated appears. After that, when the automatic effect function is enabled, the same change as when the effect is received by the operation of the operation button 410 occurs in the effect within the valid period set so that the effect reception is allowed. Will be made to. Here, based on the result of the effect determination performed at the time of the symbol change, the low-expected mode effect (FIG. 295 (j)) ”or“ The specific decorative member SDY (sudare) operates and the effect display device 1600 displays intense heat !! Highly expected mode effect (see FIG. 295 (k)). ) ”Is executed as a post-operation effect.

As described above, in this production example as well, regardless of the mode (FIGS. 295 (j), (k)) in which the post-operation effect is executed, the "remaining time as the period for which the effect reception is allowed" The "bar display indicating" is not hidden and the effect is started after the operation while this is maintained. As a result, by confirming how much gauge remaining remains at the time when the production is started after the operation, the reception production is "reception after the period (valid period) in which the production reception is allowed occurs". It becomes possible to recognize which of the first reception effect and the second reception effect, which has a different time until is automatically generated. That is, since the production expectations are usually different between the first reception production and the second reception production, it is possible to start the post-operation production based on the recognition of the type of reception production. , It is expected that the game entertainment will be maintained favorably.

However, as described above, in this production example, the precursor effect in the specific mode shown in FIG. 295 (g) and the reception effect in the mode shown in FIG. 295 (h) are sequentially displayed. Even if there is, if there is no operation by the player, the production reception may not occur within the valid period (the "automatic production function" may not be activated). In this case, when the timing tg4 arrives without being operated by the player, the reception is performed without the automatic effect function being enabled, as shown in FIGS. 295 (l) and 296 (b). The production status (when the production pattern is selected according to the establishment of the fifth determination condition) at which the valid period of the production ends will appear.

That is, in this case, when the precursor effect of a specific mode (see FIG. 295 (g)) is performed, the reception effect corresponding to the precursor effect displays the same image and the same bar display, respectively. Instead, there will be cases where the production reception is automatically generated within the valid period (see FIGS. 295 (i) to (k)) and cases where it is not automatically generated (see FIGS. 295 (l) and (m)). Therefore, it becomes possible to perform the reception production with a sense of tension.

Moreover, in this effect example, as shown in FIG. 295 (m), even if the valid period as the reception effect is terminated without the automatic effect function being enabled, the effective period is terminated and the effect reception is received. Is not allowed, but the "bar display showing the remaining time as the period for which the production reception is allowed" is not hidden and is maintained. Therefore, it was a reception effect in which the automatic effect function was not enabled by confirming that an effect situation occurred in which the effect was not generated after the operation even though the gauge remaining amount was "0". Will be able to recognize, and it will be expected to suppress the decline in the interest in games. Although "?" Appears in the figure shown in FIG. 295 (m), it may not cause any change in the effect.

In this production example as well, as in the case of the production example shown in FIG. 285, the time from the automatic generation of the production reception to the end of the period initially set as the production reception period (in FIG. 296 (a)). The timings tg3 to tg4) shown and the time from the end of the period initially set as the production reception period until the bar display is hidden (timings tg4 to tg5 shown in FIG. 296 (a)). Should be set as the same length of time.

Further, also in this effect example, when the post-operation effect is started while the bar display is left, the stepwise effect as described with reference to FIGS. 290 and 289 may be performed.

Further, the time when the bar display is left when the automatic effect function is enabled (timing tg3 to tg5 shown in FIG. 296 (a)) and the time when the bar display is left when the automatic effect function is not enabled (the time when the bar display is left (timing tg3 to tg5) (FIG. 296 (a)). It is desirable that the time is the same as the timings tg4 to tg5a) shown in FIG. 296 (b).

The non-automatic reception effect (FIGS. 295 (g), (h), (l), (m)) and the automatic reception effect (FIGS. 294 (b) to (f)) are sequentially performed within one symbol variation. It may be possible to occur in. However, when the non-automatic reception effect is executed, the automatic reception effect may occur thereafter, but when the automatic reception effect is executed, the non-automatic reception effect cannot occur thereafter. Is desirable. According to such a configuration, a person who mistakenly recognizes that the production reception is automatically generated by executing the automatic reception production loses the opportunity to generate the production in the reception production in which the automatic production function is not activated thereafter. It is expected that such a situation will be suppressed favorably.

Also in the above-mentioned production example, the modeled image of the operating means may be displayed in any of a plurality of modes (first mode, second mode) having different expectations. The first aspect with a low degree of expectation can be displayed in both the reception effect in which the automatic effect function is enabled and the reception effect in which the automatic effect function is not enabled, but the second aspect with a high degree of expectation May appear only when a reception effect is occurring in which the automatic effect function is enabled.

In the above-mentioned production example, an automatic reception effect (see FIGS. 294 (d) to (f)) generated after a special mode precursor effect and an automatic reception effect generated after a specific mode precursor effect (FIG. 295 (i)). ~ (K)) and the non-automatic reception effect (see FIGS. 295 (l) and (m)) that occurs after the precursor effect of a specific mode. The operation of the specific decorative member SDY (sudare), etc.) is being performed. However, the automatic reception effect generated through the precursor effect of the special mode (see FIGS. 294 (d) to (f)) and the automatic reception effect generated after the precursor effect of the specific mode (FIGS. 295 (i) to (k)). ) And the non-automatic reception effect (see FIGS. 295 (l) and (m)) generated after the precursor effect of a specific mode, so that different post-operation effects are performed when the effect reception is performed. You may do it.

In the above-mentioned production example, an automatic reception effect (see FIGS. 294 (d) to (f)) generated after a special mode precursor effect and an automatic reception effect generated after a specific mode precursor effect (FIG. 295 (i)). ~ (K)) and the non-automatic reception effect (see FIGS. 295 (l) and (m)) that occurs after the precursor effect of a specific mode, at the same timing tg1 after the symbol change is started. The effect is started, and the reception effect is started at the same timing tg2, but each of these start timings does not necessarily have to be the same. As described above, each of these effects is executed in a different effect pattern.

The effect time may be different between the precursor effect of the special mode shown in FIG. 294 (b) and the precursor effect of the specific mode shown in FIG. 295 (g). For example, the precursory effect of the special aspect shown in FIG. 294 (b) has a relatively long effect time so as not to be overlooked, and the precursory effect of the specific aspect shown in FIG. 295 (c) is overlooked. If the production time is set to be relatively short so as to be easy, it is easy to overlook only when a precursory production that is inconvenient for the player appears, and the game entertainment hobby is before the reception production is started. Can be suppressed from decreasing.

In the above-mentioned production example, the case where the operation button 410 is used as the operation target has been described, but the present invention is not necessarily limited to this. For example, in the automatic reception effect generated after the precursor effect of the special mode (see FIGS. 294 (d) to (f)), the sword decoration body 5001 is the operation target, and the automatic reception effect generated after the precursor effect of the specific mode (see FIGS. 294 (d) to (f)). (See FIGS. 295 (i) to 295 (k)) and the non-automatic reception effect (see FIGS. 295 (l) and (m)) generated after the precursor effect of a specific mode, the operation button 410 is the operation target. You may do so. Furthermore, in the automatic reception effect (see FIGS. 294 (d) to (f)) generated after the precursor effect of the special aspect, the reception effect for the sword decoration body 5001 as the operation target occurs, and the operation button 410 There may be a case where a reception effect is generated with the operation target. Needless to say, when the reception effect for operating the sword decoration body 5001 is generated, the model image displayed during the reception effect is displayed as the sword decoration image SYG.

In the above-mentioned production example, a part of the period in which the precursor effect (special mode, specific mode) is executed and the period in which the reception effect is executed may overlap. For example, if at least a part of the precursory effect (for example, a part of the spiral effect) is left only for a predetermined time after the reception effect is started and this gradually disappears, the reception effect can be produced. Even after the validity period has started, it will be possible to grasp that the automatic production function will be enabled in the early stages. Of the precursory effect of the special aspect and the precursory effect of the specific aspect, only the precursory effect of the special aspect may be left after the reception effect is started.

In this production example, when a precursor effect of a specific mode (FIG. 295 (g)) appears, a non-automatic reception effect that is not subject to the "automatic effect function" is sure to occur as a reception effect corresponding to the precursor effect. By doing so, it may be possible to know in advance that the "automatic effect function" will not be activated in the subsequent reception effect during the period in which the precursor effect is performed. That is, in this case, if the player does not perform the operation after the reception effect shown in FIG. 295 (h) occurs, FIGS. 295 (l) and (m) will appear in sequence, and FIG. 295 (i) ~ (K) will be omitted.

In the above-mentioned effect example shown in FIGS. 294 to 296, when the effect reception occurs by the automatic effect function or when the effective period ends without the automatic effect function being activated, after the operation with the bar display left. The production is started, and the production situation where the production is not started after the operation appears. However, in terms of processing load, even if the effect reception occurs due to the operation by the player, the post-operation effect is started with the bar display left, so that the post-operation effect is executed by the same process. Is desirable.

[Reception production that also functions as a production that suggests whether it will be automatically accepted]
As described above, in the pachinko machine 1 according to this embodiment, the automatic effect function for the operation target is enabled at a predetermined timing within the valid period in which the effect reception is allowed, and the pachinko machine 1 can be operated without any operation by the player. It is possible to generate a post-production. However, in the pachinko machine 1 provided with such an "automatic production means", even if the player forgets to operate the pachinko machine 1, the production reception is automatically generated, so that the player is given an operation opportunity. Not only does the tension disappear at that time, but there is also concern that it will become a mere display effect in which a predetermined moving image is played.

Therefore, in the pachinko machine 1 according to this embodiment, when the precursor effect is executed in a specific mode, a non-automatic reception effect that is not subject to the "automatic effect function" occurs as a reception effect corresponding to the precursor effect. In some cases, an automatic reception effect that is the target of the "automatic effect function" may occur. That is, in this case, since the production reception is not always automatically generated, it is expected that the tension until the production reception is automatically generated is preferably maintained.

However, even though a non-automatic reception effect that is not covered by the "automatic effect function" has occurred, it may not be operated as a result of erroneous recognition that the effect reception will occur without the operation by the player. There is a concern that the interest in the game will decline due to the loss of opportunities for production reception. In this regard, in the pachinko machine 1 according to this embodiment, during the period in which the precursor effect is executed in a specific mode, the reception effect corresponding to the precursor effect occurs in either the automatic reception effect or the non-automatic reception effect. Although it is difficult to recognize whether or not to do so, within the valid period after the reception effect is started, a display that makes it possible to recognize that the reception effect is occurring in the automatic reception effect can appear. , The loss of the opportunity to receive the production reception due to the inability to understand whether the automatic production function is enabled is suppressed.

FIGS. 297 to 299 are diagrams showing an example of an effect in which it is possible to recognize that the "automatic effect function" is enabled only in the reception effect among the precursor effect and the reception effect. Here, too, the description will be given as an example of the effect when the automatic effect function can be enabled (automatic effect mode, or a gaming machine in a state where the automatic effect can always be produced, etc.). Since reception effects that are not subject to activation can occur, the display such as "Auto button is being set" is not displayed.

In FIG. 297 (a), the number of reservations is 3, and the variation display of the decorative symbol SZ (special symbol) is performed by the effect display device 1600 with an effect pattern according to the result of the jackpot determination, and the reach state. It shows the production situation that formed.

FIG. 297 (b) shows the effect reception (operation) during the execution of the variable display of the decorative symbol SZ shown in FIG. 297 (a) (here, it may be in the reach state but may be in the non-reach state). It shows the production situation in which a precursory effect is being executed, which suggests that it will soon be tolerated.

Here, the precursory effect shown in FIG. 297 (b) occurs when the timing th1 (see FIG. 299 (a)) arrives, and two images of the operation button 410, which is the operation target, are modeled. It is displayed as an effect (specific mode) until the images approach each other and overlap. In particular, in this production example, the first image with a display such as "safety" suggesting that the "automatic production function" is enabled, and whether the "automatic production function" is enabled or kept secret. It is displayed as an effect (specific mode) until the second image, which is displayed as "pounding", approaches each other and overlaps with each other. When the precursor effect shown in FIG. 297 (b) appears, as a reception effect corresponding to the precursor effect, an automatic reception effect in which the "automatic effect function" is enabled occurs, and an "automatic effect function" is used. Since there are both cases where a non-automatic reception effect that is not activated occurs, either the automatic reception effect or the non-automatic reception effect is performed after the precursor effect is performed while the precursor effect is being performed. It is difficult to recognize if it will occur. In this precursory effect, it is not always necessary to display the image of the operation button 410 that is the operation target, and whether the automatic reception effect or the non-automatic reception effect occurs after the precursory effect is performed. Anything that makes it difficult to recognize.

FIG. 297 (c) is a first image in which a display such as "safety" is made, which suggests that the "automatic effect function" is enabled as a result of performing the precursory effect shown in FIG. 297 (b). , Of the second image that is displayed as "pounding" that the "automatic production function" is enabled or concealed, the first image that is displayed as "safety" is left, and " The effect situation in which the second image with the display such as "pounding" is hidden (the effect result shown in FIG. 297 (e) described later in the effect determination performed based on the result of the jackpot determination) An effect pattern that appears) or a second determination result (when an effect pattern in which the effect result shown in FIG. 297 (f) described later appears) is obtained). Such an effect situation appears when the timing th2 (see FIG. 299 (a)) arrives, and at the timing th2, the reception effect in which the operation button 410 is given an operation opportunity starts. Will be done.

More specifically, as shown in the figure, the first image in the display area is displayed as "safety" as the button image BTG (image that imitates the operation button 410) corresponding to the operation button 410. In addition to being displayed with, an instruction display prompting the operation of the operation button 410 (here, a character display such as "press", an arrow display in the downward direction, and a bar display indicating the remaining time for which the production reception is allowed) appears. It has become like. At this time, the operation button 410 to which the operation opportunity is given is in a light emitting state, which also prompts the operation of the operation button 410.

In this regard, when the first image (safety) is displayed in the reception production, "the production reception is automatically generated when the predetermined timing within the valid period arrives without any operation by the player (" automatic production function "is It is limited to the situation where "automatic reception effect" is being executed, in which the same post-operation effect appears as when the player operates it. Therefore, by confirming that the first image (safety) is displayed when the reception effect occurs, it is in the state of being executed as the automatic reception effect in which the "automatic effect function" is enabled. It will be possible to recognize.

According to such a configuration, while the precursor effect (see FIG. 297 (b)) is being performed, the “automatic reception effect in which the automatic effect function is enabled” is the reception effect corresponding to the precursor effect. While keeping the occurrence after this secret, when the reception effect is started, it is possible to grasp that the "automatic reception effect in which the automatic effect function is enabled" is being executed. Become so. That is, in this case, until just before the reception production is started, it is possible to increase the tension appropriately by concealing whether or not the "automatic production function" is enabled, but after the reception production is started. By making it possible to grasp this, it becomes possible to suppress the loss of the opportunity to generate the production reception due to the inability to understand whether the "automatic production function" is enabled.

Then, in this effect example, the operation button 410 is not operated within the period set so that the effect reception is allowed, and the operation button 410 is not operated at the predetermined timing th3 (see FIG. 299 (a)) within the valid period. It is assumed that the automatic effect function for the operation button 410 is enabled. FIG. 297 (d) depicts that the automatic effect function for the operation button 410 is about to be activated at the timing th3, and when the automatic effect function is enabled, the effect reception is permitted. Within the valid period set to be such, the same change as when the effect is received by the operation of the operation button 410 is generated for the effect. Here, based on the result of the effect determination performed when the design changes, a low-expected mode effect (FIG.) in which "the specific decorative member SDY (sudare) operates and a chance !! 297 (e) ”or“ The specific decorative member SDY (sudare) operates and the effect display device 1600 displays intense heat !! Highly expected mode effect (see FIG. 297 (f)). ) ”Is executed as a post-operation effect.

In this regard, in this effect example (including the effect portion described later with reference to FIG. 298), even when the post-operation effect is executed in any mode (FIGS. 297 (e) and (f)). The image (button image BTG) that imitates the operation button 410 is not hidden, and the post-operation effect is started in a state where this is maintained. As a result, even if the effect reception is automatically generated without the player's knowledge, it is possible to recognize that the post-operation effect is performed in response to the "effect reception for the operation button 410". , "Relief" makes it possible to recognize that "the situation where the post-operation effect is automatically generated by enabling the automatic effect function".

In this production example, as shown in FIG. 299 (a), the period during which the production reception is allowed is early at the timing th3 when the automatic production function for the operation button 410 is enabled and the production reception is automatically generated. It will be terminated. After that, while the production reception is not allowed, the post-operation production is started with the operation button 410 imitated image (button image BTG) in the display state, but the operation button 410 is imitated. The image (button image BTG) is hidden before the timing th6, when the effect is finished after the operation, arrives.

According to such a configuration, a model image of the operation means (here, the operation button 410) that was the operation target is displayed within the period from the start to the end of the post-operation effect. The period during which the image is displayed (timing th3 to th5) and the period during which the same image is not displayed (timing th5 to th6) will appear. Therefore, even if the post-operation effect is started while the imitation image of the operation means (here, the operation button 410) that was the operation target is displayed, the imitation image is hidden. It is expected that the tension caused by having to confirm the effect after the operation before the operation is preferably maintained.

On the other hand, in this production example, after the precursor effect shown in FIG. 297 (b) is performed, the reception effect shown in FIG. 298 (g) occurs instead of the reception effect shown in FIG. 297 (c). In some cases, it is possible.

That is, in FIG. 298 (g), as a result of performing the precursory effect shown in FIG. 297 (b), a display such as "safety" suggesting that the "automatic effect function" is enabled is made. Of the image and the second image that is displayed as "Dokidoki" that is either enabled or concealed by the "automatic production function", the second image that is displayed as "Dokidoki" is left. , "Relief" is displayed. The production situation in which the first image is hidden (the production judgment performed based on the result of the jackpot judgment is the third judgment result (the production shown in FIG. 298 (i) described later). The effect pattern in which the result appears), the fourth determination result (the effect pattern in which the effect result shown in FIG. 298 (j) described later appears), or the fifth determination result (shown in FIGS. 298 (k) and 298 (l) described later). (When the production pattern) in which the production situation appears is obtained) is shown. Such an effect situation appears when the timing th2 (see FIG. 299 (a) or (b)) arrives, and at the timing th2, an operation opportunity is given to the operation button 410. The reception production will start.

More specifically, as shown in the figure, a second image with a display such as "pounding" as a button image BTG (an image of the operation button 410) corresponding to the operation button 410 is in the display area. In addition to being displayed with, an instruction display prompting the operation of the operation button 410 (here, a character display such as "press", an arrow display in the downward direction, and a bar display indicating the remaining time for which the production reception is allowed) appears. It has become like. At this time, the operation button 410 to which the operation opportunity is given is in a light emitting state, which also prompts the operation of the operation button 410.

In this regard, when the second image (pounding) is displayed in the reception production, "the production reception is automatically generated when the predetermined timing within the valid period arrives without any operation by the player (" automatic production function "is (Enable) and when the "automatic reception effect" that the same post-operation effect appears as when the player performed the operation is being executed, and "the effect reception does not occur without the player's operation". , The non-automatic reception effect that the effect is not executed after the operation is being executed. Therefore, by confirming that the second image (pounding) is displayed when the reception effect occurs, it is not possible to recognize whether or not the "automatic effect function" is enabled. You will be able to understand, which will help you maintain a sense of tension.

According to such a configuration, while the precursor effect (see FIG. 297 (b)) is being performed and while the reception effect corresponding to the precursor effect (see FIG. 298 (g)) is being performed. In either case, it becomes difficult to recognize whether or not the "automatic effect function" is enabled, and this makes it possible to maintain a sense of tension.

Then, when the reception detection shown in FIG. 298 (g) is executed as the "automatic reception effect in which the automatic effect function is enabled", the timing th3 (FIG. 299 (FIG. 299)) without being operated by the player. When (see a)) arrives, as shown in FIG. 298 (h), an effect situation in which the automatic effect function for the operation button 410 is about to be activated appears. After that, when the automatic effect function is enabled, the same change as when the effect is received by the operation of the operation button 410 occurs in the effect within the valid period set so that the effect reception is allowed. Will be made to. Here, based on the result of the effect determination performed when the design changes, a low-expected mode effect (FIG.) in which "the specific decorative member SDY (sudare) operates and a chance !! 298 (i)) ”or“ The specific decorative member SDY (sudare) operates and the effect display device 1600 displays intense heat !! Highly expected mode effect (see FIG. 298 (j)). ) ”Is executed as a post-operation effect.

As described above, also in this effect example, regardless of whether the post-operation effect is executed in any of the modes (FIGS. 298 (i) and (j)), a model image (button image BTG) that imitates the operation button 410. ) Is not hidden and the effect is started after the operation while maintaining this. As a result, even if the effect reception is automatically generated without the player's knowledge, it is possible to recognize that the post-operation effect is performed in response to the "effect reception for the operation button 410". , "Dokidoki" is written, and it is kept secret that "the automatic reception effect is activated when the automatic effect function is enabled". You will be able to recognize that you are in a situation where

On the other hand, when the reception detection shown in FIG. 298 (g) is executed as "non-automatic reception effect in which the automatic effect function is not enabled", the timing th4 (FIG. 299 (FIG. 299)) without being operated by the player. When b) arrives, as shown in FIGS. 298 (k) and 299 (b), the effect period as the reception effect ends without the automatic effect function being enabled. (At the time of selecting the production pattern according to the fact that the fifth judgment result is obtained) will appear.

Then, in this effect example, as shown in FIG. 298 (l), even when the valid period as the reception effect is terminated without the automatic effect function being enabled, the effective period is terminated and the effect is received. Is not allowed, but the "image of the operation button 410 (button image BTG)" is not hidden and is maintained. Therefore, the post-operation effect is not performed as a result of the effect reception not being automatically generated while it was kept secret that the "automatic reception effect in which the automatic effect function is enabled is occurring". You will be able to recognize that you are in a situation. Although "?" Appears in the figure shown in FIG. 298 (l), it may not cause any change in the effect.

In this production example as well, as in the case of the production example shown in FIG. 285, the time from the automatic generation of the production reception to the end of the period initially set as the production reception period (at FIG. 299 (a)). The timings th3 to th4) shown and the time from the end of the period initially set as the production reception period until the image is hidden (timings th4 to th5 shown in FIG. 299 (a)). It is desirable to set the time as the same length as.

In addition, the time when the image is left when the automatic effect function is enabled (timings th3 to th5 shown in FIG. 299 (a)) and the time when the image is left when the automatic effect function is not enabled (the time when the image is left (timing th3 to th5). It is desirable that the time is the same as the timings th4 to th5a) shown in FIG. 299 (b).

The non-automatic reception effect (FIGS. 298 (g), (k), (l)) and the automatic reception effect (FIGS. 297 (b) to (f)) can occur sequentially within one symbol variation. You may do so. However, when the non-automatic reception effect is executed, the automatic reception effect may occur thereafter, but when the automatic reception effect is executed, the non-automatic reception effect cannot occur thereafter. Is desirable. According to such a configuration, a person who mistakenly recognizes that the production reception is automatically generated by executing the automatic reception production loses the opportunity to generate the production in the reception production in which the automatic production function is not activated thereafter. It is expected that such a situation will be suppressed favorably.

Also in the above-mentioned production example, the modeled image of the operating means may be displayed in any of a plurality of modes (first mode, second mode) having different expectations. The first aspect with a low degree of expectation can be displayed in both the reception effect in which the automatic effect function is enabled and the reception effect in which the automatic effect function is not enabled, but the second aspect with a high degree of expectation May appear only when a reception effect is occurring in which the automatic effect function is enabled.

In the above production example, an automatic reception effect (see FIG. 297 (c)) in which the first image with a display such as "safety" is displayed, and a second image with a display such as "sudare" are displayed. An automatic reception effect (see Fig. 298 (h)) and a non-automatic reception effect (see Fig. 298 (k)) in which a second image with a display such as "sudare" is displayed. When they are done, the same post-operation effects (such as the operation of the specific decorative member SDY (sudare)) are performed. However, the automatic reception effect (see Fig. 297 (c)) in which the first image with a display such as "safety" is displayed, and the automatic reception in which the second image with a display such as "pounding" is displayed. When the production is accepted by the production (see Fig. 298 (h)) and the non-automatic reception production (see Fig. 298 (k)) in which the second image with the display such as "pounding" is displayed. It is also possible to perform different post-operation effects.

In the above production example, an automatic reception effect (see FIG. 297 (c)) in which the first image displayed as "safety" is displayed and a second image displayed as "pounding" are displayed. There are variations in the design of the automatic reception effect (see Fig. 298 (h)) and the non-automatic reception effect (see Fig. 298 (k)) in which the second image is displayed. The precursor effect is started at the same timing th1 and the reception effect is started at the same timing th2 after the start, but each of these start timings does not necessarily have to be the same. As described above, each of these effects is executed in a different effect pattern.

A reception effect (see Fig. 297 (c)) in which the first image with a display such as "safety" is displayed, and a reception effect in which a second image with a display such as "pounding" is displayed (Fig. 298). (H), (k) may be different from each other in the length of the valid period in the reception effect. In particular, in the reception effect (see FIGS. 298 (h) and (k)) in which the second image with the display of "pounding" is displayed, the first image with the display of "safety" is displayed. By setting an effective time shorter than that of the reception effect (see FIG. 297 (c)), it becomes possible to more preferably maintain a feeling of tension during the effective period.

In addition, an automatic reception effect (see FIG. 298 (h)) in which a second image with a display such as "Dokidoki" is displayed, and a non-automatic display in which a second image with a display such as "Dokidoki" is displayed. The length of the valid period in the reception effect may be different from that of the reception effect (see FIG. 298 (k)). In particular, in a non-automatic reception effect (see FIG. 298 (k)) in which the "automatic effect function" is not enabled, compared to an automatic reception effect (see FIG. 298 (h)) in which the "automatic effect function" is enabled. By setting a short effective time, it becomes possible to more preferably maintain a feeling of tension during the effective period.

In the above-mentioned production example, the case where the operation button 410 is used as the operation target has been described, but the present invention is not necessarily limited to this. For example, in the automatic reception effect (see FIG. 297 (c)) in which the first image with the display of "safety" is displayed, the sword decoration 5001 is the operation target, and the display of "pounding" is made. An automatic reception effect in which a sword image is displayed (see FIG. 298 (h)) and a non-automatic reception effect in which a second image such as "pounding" is displayed (see FIG. 298 (k)). Then, the operation button 410 may be the operation target. Needless to say, when the reception effect for operating the sword decoration body 5001 is generated, the model image displayed during the reception effect is displayed as the sword decoration image SYG.

In the above-mentioned production example, a part of the period in which the precursor effect (special mode, specific mode) is executed and the period in which the reception effect is executed may overlap. For example, at least a part of the precursory effect (for example, a predetermined effect) is left in the form of partially or partially overlapping the above-mentioned image only for a predetermined time after the reception effect is started, and this gradually overlaps. If it disappears to, it will be difficult to grasp that the automatic effect function will be enabled in the early stage even after the valid period of the reception effect has started. It should be noted that the reception effect (see FIG. 297 (c)) in which the first image with the indication "safety" is displayed and the reception effect in which the second image with the indication "pounding" is displayed (see FIG. 297 (c)). Only in any of the reception effects (see FIGS. 298 (h) and (k)), at least a part of the precursory effect (for example, a predetermined effect) overlaps with the above-mentioned image in whole or in part. It may be left in the form.

In this effect example, the reception effect in which the second image with the display such as "pounding" is displayed may be generated only as a non-automatic reception effect that is not subject to the "automatic effect function". That is, in this case, if the player does not perform the operation after the reception effect shown in FIG. 298 (g) occurs, FIGS. 298 (k) and 298 (l) will appear in sequence, and FIG. 298 (h). ~ (J) will be omitted.

In the above-mentioned production example shown in FIGS. 297 to 299, when the production reception occurs by the automatic production function or when the valid period ends without the automatic production function being activated, after the operation with the image left. The production is started, and the production situation where the production is not started after the operation appears. However, in terms of processing load, even if the effect reception occurs due to the operation by the player, the post-operation effect is started with the image left, so that the post-operation effect is executed by the same process. Is desirable.

In the above-mentioned production example shown in FIGS. 297 to 299, the precursory effect corresponding to the reception effect in which the first image with the display of "safety" is displayed and the second image with the display of "pounding" are displayed. Is the same as the precursor effect corresponding to the reception effect in which is displayed. However, as a precursory effect corresponding to the reception effect in which the first image in which the display such as "safety" is displayed is displayed on condition that the predetermined effect conditions are satisfied, the normal time (FIG. 297 (b)) is shown. The production content different from (see) may appear. For example, if a flame effect suggesting a high degree of expectation is added to the precursor effect, "high expectation" and "the automatic effect function is enabled" are predetermined. Since it is suggested in advance only when the production conditions are satisfied, it becomes possible to improve the game entertainment while maintaining the tension when the valid period occurs.

In the above-mentioned production example shown in FIGS. 297 to 299, when the production reception occurs or when the valid period ends without the automatic production function being activated, the operation means to be operated is imitated. The display mode of the image was changed so that the post-operation effect was started (or the post-operation effect was not started) while the model image was displayed in the changed display mode, but the validity period (effect reception). The post-operation effect may be started (or the post-operation effect is not started) in a state where the model image is displayed with the display mode and the display position at the time of the period).

The post-operation effect that is started while displaying the image of the operation means to be operated is the display effect on the effect display device 1600, the light emission effect by the lamp provided on the game board 5, the effect by sound, and the effect. It may be any one of the movable effects by the decorative accessory, or it may be an appropriate combination of these effects. In addition, the first post-operation effect that is started while displaying the imitation image of the operation target to be operated, and the timing th5 in which the imitation image of the operation target to be operated is hidden. The second post-operation effect that is started thereafter may be executed respectively.

In the above-mentioned production examples shown in FIGS. 297 to 299, as in the case of the above-mentioned production example, a model image of the operation means to be operated is dynamically displayed, and the dynamic display is maintained. You may start the production after the operation in this state.

In the above-mentioned production example shown in FIGS. 297 to 299, when a reception production is performed by adding a notation such as "safety" or "pounding" to the image and making the mode as the image different. It was decided to suggest whether the "automatic production function" would be enabled. However, the special image that is displayed only when the "automatic effect function" is enabled should be displayed within the period (valid period) when the reception effect is performed, and this is not necessarily displayed as the mode of the image. You don't have to. In this case, it is desirable not to hide the special image displayed separately from the model image, and to start the post-operation effect while leaving this as it is. Similarly, the notation such as "dokidoki" may be displayed separately from the image and the post-operation effect may be started (or the post-operation effect may not be started) while leaving the image.

In the above production example, by changing the display such as "safety" and "pounding" during the period when the reception production is performed, it is suggested whether the automatic reception production in which the "automatic production function" is enabled is occurring. I decided to do it. However, instead of this, by changing the mode of the operating means to be operated (light emitting mode, operating state (presence or absence of vibration), etc.), an automatic reception effect in which the "automatic effect function" is enabled occurs. You may try to suggest what you are doing. Alternatively, during the period when the reception production is performed, both the display such as "safety" and "pounding" and the mode of the operating means to be operated (light emitting mode, operating state (whether or not there is vibration), etc.) are made different. However, in this case, either the display such as "safety" or "pounding" or the mode of the operating means to be operated (light emitting mode, operating state (whether or not there is vibration), etc.) is used. It is desirable to continue the state only and to end the state and start the post-operation effect in order to shift the gaze to the newly generated post-operation effect.

In the above production example, when an automatic reception effect in which the "automatic effect function" is enabled occurs, a display such as "safety" is displayed within a period even before the precursor effect for the automatic reception effect occurs. A specific display mode suggesting that a reception effect in which the first image is displayed may occur may appear. In this case, it is desirable that the specific display mode is hidden at least before the reception effect is started, such as within the period from the start to the end of the precursor effect.

In the above production example, after displaying a specific image (pounding) that suggests that the "automatic production function" may not be enabled within the period during which the precursory effect is being performed, the specific image (pounding) is displayed. The reception effect may be started in the form of changing to a special image (safety) that has been hidden until. Even with such a configuration, it is not possible to recognize that the "automatic production function" is activated within the period during which the precursory effect is being performed, and the tension when the valid period occurs is preferably maintained. You will be able to.

[Improvement of color rendering using automatic production function]
As described above, in the pachinko machine 1 according to this embodiment, the automatic effect function for the operation target is enabled at a predetermined timing within the valid period in which the effect reception is allowed, and the pachinko machine 1 can be operated without any operation by the player. It is possible to generate a post-production. In this regard, the pachinko machine 1 according to this embodiment should be devised to increase the operating rate of the pachinko machine 1 by creating a novel color rendering property using such an "automatic effect function". I have to.

FIG. 300 is a diagram for explaining a novel effectability using the automatic effect function. More specifically, the reception effect is generated based on the number of holds (0 to 3) that keeps the unexecuted state when the symbol change is newly digested, or the automatic effect function is enabled. It is a random number distribution table used for the production judgment of. The total number of random numbers is "100", and by acquiring any one of these random numbers and referring to which of the above distribution tables the acquired random numbers are distributed, a reception effect is generated. In addition, an effect determination is made as to whether to enable the automatic effect function. Here, the example of the effect when the automatic effect function can be enabled (automatic effect mode, or a gaming machine in a state where the automatic effect can always be produced, etc.) will be described.

As shown in FIG. 300, in the pachinko machine 1 (peripheral control MPU1511a) according to this embodiment, the first production situation (for example, specific) in which the number of holdings (which has just started the game) is still small in the normal game state. Percentage of "non-automatic reception effects that are not subject to the automatic effect function" when a reception effect occurs within the symbol variation (effect pattern) that has been digested when the number is less than "2") However, the reception production is performed within the symbol variation (production pattern) that is digested when the player is in the second production situation (for example, a situation where the number is larger than the specific number "2") with a large number of holdings (the game is continued to some extent). When this occurs, the effect is controlled so that it becomes higher than the ratio of "non-automatic reception effect that is not the target of the automatic effect function".

Here, in the symbol variation (effect pattern) started when the number of reservations is still small, the ratio of generating "non-automatic reception effect not subject to the automatic effect function" is relatively high. On the other hand, in the symbol variation (effect pattern) started when the number of reservations is large, the ratio of generating "non-automatic reception effect not targeted by the automatic effect function" is relatively low. In this regard, in the pachinko machine 1 according to this embodiment, the automatic reception effect, which is the target of the "automatic effect function", is also the same as the symbol variation (effect pattern) started when the number of reservations is small. The rate of occurrence is relatively high, and the rate of occurrence is relatively low for symbol fluctuations (effect patterns) that are started when the number of reservations is large. However, the degree of change in the rate of occurrence is said to be milder than in the case of non-automatic reception effects that are not subject to the "automatic effect function", and this is "automatic" when reception effects occur. The percentage of "non-automatic reception effects that are not subject to the effect function" is set to decrease as the number of reservations increases.

According to such a configuration, when the number of reservations is small, the ratio of the non-automatic reception effect is higher than that when the reception effect occurs. Therefore, when the game has just started and the number of reservations is small, it is possible to raise the player's awareness of participation in the game and encourage enthusiasm. In addition, if the game is continued to some extent and the number of reservations is large, the proportion of non-automatic reception production will decrease, so another production will be performed before you get tired of the production that raises the awareness of participation in the game. It will be possible to provide a calm color rendering index). In this way, by changing the color rendering index related to the operation while the game is continued, it is expected that the game will be less likely to get bored and the game enjoyment will be maintained favorably.

Further, according to the above configuration, if the above-mentioned other color rendering index (calm color rendering index) becomes tired and the player tries to quit the game, the number of reservations is reduced and the consciousness of participation in the game is enhanced. Since it will reappear, it is expected that such a change in color rendering will discourage the interruption of the game.

An important point as an invention relating to this production example is to change the ratio of activation of the "automatic production function" by increasing or decreasing the number of reservations, thereby changing the color rendering property related to the "automatic production function". To create. Therefore, the rate of occurrence of the reception effect may or may not be different between the symbol variation that is digested when the number of reservations is small and the symbol variation that is digested when the number of reservations is large. It can be said that there is a technical feature in how the ratio of the "automatic effect function" enabled to the reception effect changes when the reception effect occurs within the symbol variation.

For example, of "non-automatic reception effect not targeted by the automatic effect function" and "automatic reception effect targeted by the automatic effect function", only "non-automatic reception effect not targeted by the automatic effect function" By making the occurrence rate different depending on whether the number of holds is small or large, the number of holds is small for the "automatic reception effect that is the target of the automatic effect function". The rate of occurrence may be the same when there is a certain time and when the number of holds is large. That is, in this case, for the "non-automatic reception effect that is not the target of the automatic effect function", for example, the random number distribution shown in FIG. In the pattern), the occurrence rate is relatively high, and in the symbol variation (effect pattern) started when the number of reservations is large, the occurrence rate is relatively low. However, for the automatic reception effect that is the target of the "automatic effect function", the same occurrence rate (for example, the value of "automatic reception function" shown in FIG. 300 is held, regardless of the number of hold numbers. Regardless of the number, all will be set to "20", etc.).

According to such a configuration, a level that guarantees that the same post-operation effect as when the operation is performed without the operation by the player is performed (the rate of occurrence of the "automatic reception effect targeted by the automatic effect function"). For this in itself, this will be uniform regardless of the number of holds. Therefore, even if the rate of occurrence of "non-automatic reception effects that are not subject to the automatic effect function" is changed according to the number of holds, the player may forget to operate the game uniformly regardless of the game situation. It will be possible to provide the guarantee of the above, and a sense of security will be created.

Regarding "non-automatic reception effect that is not the target of the automatic effect function", there are multiple effect modes (such as those with different display contents during reception effect, those with different post-operation effects, and those with different operation targets). Is prepared, and in addition to the case where the non-automatic reception effect occurs in only one of the effect modes based on the result of the effect judgment when the symbol changes, the non-automatic reception effect is sequentially performed multiple times in two or more effect modes. It may occur. That is, in this case, the occurrence rate of the "non-automatic reception effect that is not the target of the automatic effect function" means the rate at which at least one of those effect modes occurs within the execution period of the symbol variation.

In addition, regarding the "automatic reception effect that is the target of the automatic effect function", there are multiple production modes (such as those with different display contents during reception effect, those with different post-operation effects, and those with different operation targets). Is prepared, and in addition to the case where the automatic reception effect is generated in only one of the effect modes based on the result of the effect determination when the symbol changes, the automatic reception effect is sequentially generated a plurality of times in two or more effect modes. In some cases, it may be. That is, in this case, the occurrence rate of the "automatic reception effect targeted by the automatic effect function" means the rate at which at least one of those effect modes is generated within the execution period of the symbol variation.

However, when the non-automatic reception effect is executed, the automatic reception effect may occur thereafter, but when the automatic reception effect is executed, the non-automatic reception effect cannot occur thereafter. Is desirable. According to such a configuration, a person who mistakenly recognizes that the production reception is automatically generated by executing the automatic reception production loses the opportunity to generate the production in the reception production in which the automatic production function is not activated thereafter. It is expected that such a situation will be suppressed favorably.

Further, in the above-mentioned production example, only one of "non-automatic reception production that is not the target of the automatic production function" and "automatic reception production that is the target of the automatic production function" is available within the period in which the symbol is changed. Although described as an example of occurrence, "non-automatic reception effect not targeted by the automatic effect function" and "automatic reception effect targeted by the automatic effect function" may be sequentially generated. In this case, in the table shown in FIG. 300, the total number of random numbers obtained by adding the distribution value of "without reception effect" and the distribution value of "with reception effect" exceeds "100".

Further, in the above-mentioned production example, in at least one of the "non-automatic reception effect that is not the target of the automatic effect function" and the "automatic reception effect that is the target of the automatic effect function", the operation means that is the operation target is 2. There may be more than one. For example, when the number of hold is "0", the random value of "20" assigned to "automatic reception function" is given to the first operation means as an operation opportunity, and to the second operation means. On the other hand, it may be further divided depending on the case where the operation opportunity is given.

It should be noted that the determination of whether to generate the "non-automatic reception effect that is not the target of the automatic effect function" and the determination of whether to generate the "automatic reception effect that is the target of the automatic effect function" are performed when the symbol changes. It is desirable that it is executed as one of the effect determinations according to the result of the jackpot determination.

As described above, in the above-mentioned production example, "non-automatic reception production that is not the target of the automatic production function" is less likely to occur when the number of reservations is large. In this respect, when the "non-automatic reception effect" occurs in spite of the situation where the number of holds is large, compared to the case where the "non-automatic reception effect" occurs when the number of holds is small. If the ratio of "automatic reception effect targeted by the automatic effect function" is further increased within one symbol variation in which the "non-automatic reception effect" occurs, only when the number of holds is large. The "non-automatic reception effect" can now function as an effect that suggests that an "automatic reception effect" will occur (a production that suggests before the precursor effect for the automatic reception effect is performed). It will be possible to make the effect of the automatic effect function different. As a method of increasing the rate of occurrence of "automatic reception effect" within one symbol variation in which "non-automatic reception effect" occurs, the rate of occurrence of "automatic reception effect" itself is not increased. It is desirable to make it easier for the effect conditions for generating the "automatic reception effect" to be satisfied as the effect conditions for generating the "non-automatic reception effect" are satisfied.

In addition, when the number of pending numbers is the largest (the situation in which the "non-automatic reception effect" is most difficult to appear), when the "non-automatic reception effect" occurs, one symbol change in which the "non-automatic reception effect" occurs. You may make sure that "automatic reception effect" also occurs within. According to such a configuration, the "non-automatic reception effect" can be made to function as a precursor effect for the "automatic reception effect", and this also makes it possible to make the effect related to the automatic effect function different. become.

Depending on the situation (valid period) when the "non-automatic reception effect" occurs and the situation (valid period) when the "automatic reception effect" occurs, the image or background image that imitates the operating means, etc. It is desirable to make the displayed contents different. In this case, of the displayed images displayed in the situation (valid period) in which the "non-automatic reception effect" occurs and in the situation (valid period) in which the "automatic reception effect" occurs. It is desirable to generate the production reception and perform the post-operation production while leaving at least the different parts without hiding them. It is as explained in the production example of "Post-production". If you want to generate the production reception and perform the post-operation production while leaving the different parts (such as the image of the operation means imitated) without hiding it, "Automatically accepted operation target" The configuration and other examples described in "Post-operation effect suggesting" may be appropriately adopted.

Regarding each of the above-mentioned configurations and variations thereof related to the effect example (improvement of effect by using the automatic effect function), a non-automatic reception effect that is not targeted by the automatic effect function and an automatic reception that is targeted by the automatic effect function. It may be applied to each of the above-mentioned production examples in which the production can be generated.

[Prevention of wasteful use of channels by automatic production function]
As described above, in a gaming machine in which the number of channels is finite (for example, 32 channels), even if a special result is obtained in the jackpot judgment according to the winning, the channel to which the sound data is assigned is selected. In the situation where there is no space (the number of free channels is 0), the special sound corresponding to the special result cannot be assigned to the channel, and this cannot be output (or the sound that is already in the playback state). There is a concern that the interest in the game will decline due to the forced suspension of the game.

In this regard, in the pachinko machine 1 according to this embodiment, when it is determined to execute a specific effect pattern as a symbol variation according to the result of the jackpot determination, from the start to the end of the symbol variation. During the period, the effect display device 1600 performs a process of advancing the display effect according to a specific effect pattern, and also assigns a sound of "BGM reproduction" according to the specific effect pattern to a predetermined channel and reproduces the sound. conduct. Then, when the display effect on the effect display device 1600 progresses to a predetermined timing within the symbol variation period, the sound of "BGM reproduction" is left assigned to the predetermined channel and output in a suppressed mode or silently, and this state is achieved. Is used to generate a reception effect for the operation means (operation button 410, sword decoration body 5001, etc.). As a result, when the effect reception occurs, the sound of "BGM reproduction" is maintained in the suppressed mode or the state of being output silently, while the jackpot symbol (a special display mode in the effect pattern) is generated due to the symbol variation. The special production sound that suggests the degree of expectation that appears is output in an unsuppressed manner (operation sound output processing under suppression). The degree of expectation suggested by the special production may be 100%.

That is, in this case, when the special production sound is output in response to the production reception, the sound of "BGM reproduction" is still assigned to the predetermined channel, but is output in a suppressed mode or silently. Therefore, it becomes possible to provide an atmosphere in which the usage status of the channel seems to be affordable. Therefore, it is necessary to provide the player with an operation opportunity to output the special production sound while removing the anxiety that "maybe there is no space in the channel and it may not be possible to output the special production sound". This will prevent the decline in game entertainment.

Data related to various production sounds such as a plurality of BGM data are stored in a predetermined storage means, and the various production sounds are reproduced by being read from the storage means and assigned to the channel. Become.

By the way, when it is attempted to output specific BGM data (sound of "BGM reproduction") corresponding to a specific effect pattern to a channel in a suppressed mode or silently, it is generally assigned to the channel. It is assumed that a process of suppressing the volume of the sound (sound of "BGM reproduction") (a process of changing the initial volume value defined in the sound data to lower it) is performed. In fact, if such volume suppression processing is performed prior to giving the player an operation opportunity (generating a valid period for the production reception), a sound corresponding to a specific production pattern ("" It is possible to give the player an operation opportunity (generate a valid period of the production reception) after setting the sound of "BGM reproduction") in a suppressed mode or in a state of being silently output.

However, as is well known, when giving an operation opportunity to a player, the valid period of the production reception is generated over a predetermined time, but the operation (production reception) is performed at any timing within this valid period. It is indefinite (depending on the player) and cannot be predicted in advance. Therefore, even if the volume suppression process can be terminated and the volume returned to the initial value when the operation (effect reception) is performed within the valid period, the volume is returned in this way. It is impossible to store the sound of "BGM reproduction" in advance so that the specific music is cueed at an indefinite timing.

In addition to performing the process of returning the volume when there is an operation by the player, the sound data of "BGM playback" is switched to the sound data of "BGM playback dedicated to special production sound playback" and this is used. It is also conceivable to perform a process of regenerating. However, since the sound of "BGM reproduction" is reproduced according to the content of various effects until the symbol is stopped and ended, the timing of the symbol stop, etc., the sound of "BGM reproduction" is within the valid period. While it is uncertain (depending on the player) at what timing the operation (production reception) will be performed, if the operation (production reception) is used as an opportunity to newly reproduce the sound of "BGM playback". , There is a concern that so-called sound deviation will occur between the timing of various productions and the timing of stopping the design after that, and the interest in the game will be reduced. In short, considering that "the remaining time from the occurrence of the production reception to the end of the symbol variation is also indefinite", the length commensurate with the indefinite remaining time at the timing when the production reception occurs. It can be said that it is also difficult to newly assign the BGM data (sound of "BGM reproduction") to the channel.

Therefore, in the pachinko machine 1 according to this embodiment, when a specific effect pattern is executed, first, a plurality of sound data stored as "BGM reproduction" sounds corresponding to the specific effect pattern (a plurality of sound data ( For example, the sound data at the time of normal fluctuation, the sound data at the first half of the super reach effect, the sound data at the second half of the super reach effect, etc.) are determined according to the time series specified by the corresponding sound generation schedule data. Performs the process of sequentially assigning to channels. Then, among the plurality of sound data stored as the sound of "BGM reproduction" corresponding to such a specific effect pattern, the specific sound data (one sound material) is defined by the above-mentioned sound generation schedule data. When the sound is assigned to the predetermined channel according to the time series, the sound is assigned to the predetermined channel and the playback is started from the timing before the valid period of the production reception occurs in the specific production pattern, and the valid period ends. The assigned state for a predetermined channel is maintained for a long period of time until the timing after the sound is played.

In this regard, in a part of the section (special period) when the above-mentioned specific sound data (one sound material) is viewed in chronological order, the process is suppressed or silently applied to the sound output as compared with the other sections. Is set in advance (stored as silent data), and when the specific sound data is assigned to a predetermined channel in the time series specified by the above-mentioned sound generation schedule data, It is designed to have a time-series relationship in which the valid period of the production reception occurs within a part of the section (special period). In addition to this, regardless of the timing of the operation by the player within the valid period of the above-mentioned production reception that occurs within the special period (partial section), the special period (partial section) to the special period The sound of "BGM reproduction" is a special production sound according to the production reception, straddling the two sections in the specific sound data with the period (other section) after the end of (partial section). The sound is reproduced in an unsuppressed manner on a channel other than the assigned predetermined channel.

According to such a configuration, a plurality of sound data stored as "BGM reproduction" sounds corresponding to a specific effect pattern (for example, sound data at the time of normal fluctuation, sound data at the first half of the super reach effect, super). Only the process of sequentially allocating the sound data in the latter half of the reach effect) to the predetermined channels according to the time series specified by the schedule data for sound generation corresponding to these, without adjusting the volume from the initial value. In both cases, it becomes possible to create a "suppressed mode or a state of being output silently (special period)". In addition, when an operation by the player is received for production in the "suppressed mode or silent output state (special period)" created in this way, it is special in a non-suppressed mode by a highly immediate process triggered by this. While the production sound is started to be played back, the sound of "BGM playback" that is in the playback state on the predetermined channel is "output in a suppressed mode or silently (special period) regardless of the production reception. Is maintained for a predetermined time. After that, a part of the specific sound data (one sound material) (suppression mode or silent sound output) is completed in the form of being mixed in with the special production sound being reproduced. Since the data contents of other sections (unsuppressed sound output) will be reproduced, it will be possible to secretly return the sound of "BGM reproduction" to the output in the unsuppressed mode. It will be possible to provide a production sound that does not give a sense of discomfort. That is, in this case, when the operation by the player is received in the suppressed mode or in the state where the sound of "BGM reproduction" is output in silence, the special directed sound is not suppressed by the highly immediate processing triggered by this. It is possible to preferably avoid the occurrence of sound deviation between various effects and the timing of stopping the symbol after that, while the reproduction is started at.

As described above, for "BGM reproduction" corresponding to a specific production pattern, in a part of the section (special period) when viewed in chronological order, the sound is output in a suppressed mode or silently as compared with the other sections. The data content (silence data, etc.) that specifies that the processing related to is performed will be set in advance, but in the "suppression mode or the state of being output silently (special period)", the volume from the initial value The volume may be lowered by adjustment. According to such a configuration, it is possible to suppress an adverse effect due to noise or the like from the channel to which the BGM data is assigned.

Furthermore, in the pachinko machine 1 according to this embodiment, when the sound of "BGM reproduction" corresponding to a specific effect pattern is being reproduced, in a section (normal section) different from the above-mentioned special section. Also, the reception effect for the operation means (operation button 410, sword decoration body 5001, etc.) is generated.

That is, in the pachinko machine 1 in which the number of channels is finite, the reception effect occurs in the situation where there is no vacancy in the channel to which the sound data is assigned (the situation where the number of vacant channels is 0). When the operation by the player is received as a production, the production sound corresponding to the production reception is output by canceling the output of any of the production sounds in the playback state, or the production reception is received. There is no choice but to stop the output of the directing sound itself. Then, in this case, a production situation lacking excitement such as "the production sound is forcibly terminated in the middle, or no production sound is played even though the production is accepted" appears, as in the case of losing the jackpot judgment. Therefore, the player side also has a consciousness that he / she does not want to generate such an unlucky production situation (a consciousness that the production reception should not be generated by the operation).

In that case, there is a concern that the operation by the player will not be performed easily even though the reception effect is generated, and it will not be possible to improve the game interest. On the other hand, if the above-mentioned "technology for automatically generating reception effects" is simply applied contrary to the player's intention of "not wanting to generate production reception", the game interest will be reduced. You may end up doing it.

On the other hand, on the developer side, in the reception production with confidence or feelings, regardless of the state of channel usage, "the production reception is generated by the active operation by the player and the post-operation production is performed. It can be assumed that there is a speculation that "I want you to enjoy it."

Therefore, as described above, in the above configuration, first, in the section from the allocation of the specific BGM data to the channel to the end of the allocation, the specific BGM effect sound can be output in a suppressed mode or silently. , There is a normal section different from the special section. Then, in the normal section, "non-automatic reception effect that is not the target of the automatic effect function" can be generated as the above reception effect, and in the special section, "automatic reception effect that is the target of the automatic effect function" is received. It can be generated as a production.

That is, in this case, in the "normal section in which the specific BGM production sound is not suppressed or silenced and can be output in the normal mode", whether or not to generate the production reception (predicting the availability of channels). Since the selection right is entrusted only to the player, the reception production is automatically generated contrary to the player's intention such as "Because there may not be enough free channels, let's not generate the production reception". Will be preferably avoided (prevention of wasteful use of channels by the automatic production function).

On the other hand, in the "special section in which the specific BGM production sound can be output in a suppressed mode or silently", the impression is that the specific BGM production sound is out of the channel allocation and a margin is created in the empty channel (from the player's side). But it feels like there is space in the channel). Therefore, it will be possible to actively encourage the player to operate while removing the anxiety that "maybe there is no space in the channel and it may not be possible to output the special production sound". Of course, even if the player does not operate it, by automatically generating the reception effect, "If the effect reception occurs anyway, let's generate the effect reception by the player's own operation next time". You will be able to encourage them to become.

FIG. 301 is a time chart showing an example of the allocation status of each channel when such processing is performed. Hereinafter, a specific example when such a process is executed will be described with reference to FIG. 301. In this production example, the above-mentioned special section is described as a silence section in which silence data is set, but it may be a suppression section in which data in a suppression mode is set.

As shown in FIG. 301 (a), during the period in which the specific effect pattern according to the result of the effect determination is being executed, the timing tm11 corresponds to the specific effect pattern in which the effect is progressing. The sound of "BGM reproduction" is assigned to the reproduction channels 02 and 03 and is already reproduced (here, stereo reproduction). The sound of this "BGM reproduction" is, for example, one sound data (one sound data) over the entire period of the symbol variation from the start to the end of the symbol variation when it is determined that a specific effect pattern is to be executed. It may be reproduced as a sound material) based on the schedule data for sound generation, or the entire period of the symbol variation is divided into a plurality of periods, and each different sound data prepared for each period is obtained. It may be sequentially reproduced based on the sound generation schedule data corresponding to. In any case, in the example shown in FIG. 301, one sound data (one sound) as the sound of "BGM reproduction" over the entire period (a part of the symbol variation period) in the figure including the timing tm11. Material) is assigned to channels 02 and 03 and is in a playback state.

In this regard, as shown in FIGS. 301 (a) and 301 (b), one sound data (sound of "BGM reproduction") assigned to channels 02 and 03 and in the reproduction state is the timing. At tm14, the playback state is set in the silent section in which the silent data content (silent data) is set. As a result, even if the volume of the "BGM playback" sound corresponding to a specific effect pattern is not adjusted from the initial value, it can be output silently while being assigned to a predetermined channel. ..

According to such a configuration, in the silent section after the timing tm14 is generated, an atmosphere in which the usage status of the channel seems to be affordable is provided because the sound of "BGM reproduction" seems to be removed from the channel. On the other hand, in the normal section before the timing tm14 occurs, the sound of "BGM playback" occupies the channel, so the atmosphere that the usage status of the channel seems to be tight is provided. Will be done.

That is, although the illustration is omitted, the timing tm14 is generated for various sounds different from the sound of "BGM reproduction" (for example, the advance notice sound, the effect sound accompanying the occurrence of the valid period, the winning sound, etc.). In both the subsequent silent section and the normal section before the timing tm14 occurs, the appropriate channels are assigned to each and the playback state is set. In particular, in the normal section, multiple sounds are often output at the same time in order to excite the production and suggest that the game situation such as winning or paying out has changed, so how many channels should be selected. It is difficult to know whether the channel is in use (whether there is room in the free channel), and the sound of "BGM playback" is always in the playback state, so it seems that there is no room in the channel usage. Atmosphere will be provided. Further, the reproduction channels "00" and "01" are dedicated channels for assigning the various error sounds described above, and the number of channels that can be used as the production sound is also reduced by this.

Then, in this production example, when the timing tm12 arrives in the normal section where there seems to be no margin in the usage status of the channel, an operation opportunity is given to the operation means (operation button 410, sword decoration body 5001, etc.). Generate a reception effect. When the production reception is performed by the player performing the operation within the operation valid period A (timing tm12 to tm13) for the normal reception production, the production reception is performed, as shown in FIGS. 301 (a) and 301 (b). As one of the post-operation effects according to the effect reception, the "special effect sound A" is assigned to an empty channel (channels "08" and "09" in the figure) and played. On the other hand, if all the channels to which "special production sound A" can be assigned are in use when the production is accepted within the operation validity period A, one of the sounds in the playback state is forced in the middle. The process is performed so that the channel is reproduced by assigning the "special effect sound A" to the channel in the form of termination, or the "special effect sound A" is not assigned to the channel and is not reproduced.

However, as mentioned above, there are some players who are aware that the production reception should not be generated in the normal section where the usage status of the channel seems to be tight. Therefore, in this production example, the normal reception production (operation valid period A) that occurs in the normal section where there seems to be no margin in the usage status of the channel is referred to as "non-automatic reception production that is not subject to the automatic production function". Is to be generated. As a result, the right to select whether or not to generate the production reception within the operation validity period A is entrusted only to the player. Therefore, "Since there may not be enough free channels, the production reception is not generated. It is preferable to avoid the automatic generation of the reception effect contrary to the player's intention such as "Let's do it" (prevention of wasteful use of the channel by the automatic effect function).

That is, if the player does not operate the operation means to be operated in the normal reception effect (operation valid period A), the normal reception effect (operation valid period A) without the effect reception occurring. ) Will be terminated, and none of the post-operation effects including the "special effect sound A" will be executed, and the subsequent effect progress will be performed.

On the other hand, in this production example, as described above, when the timing tm14 arrives, a silent section appears in which it seems that there is a margin in the usage status of the channel. Then, when the timing tm15 arrives in such a silent section, a silent reception effect (operation valid period B) that gives an operation opportunity to the operation means (operation button 410, sword decoration body 5001, etc.) is generated. While removing the anxiety that "maybe there is no space in the channel and it may not be possible to output the special production sound", we are actively encouraging the production to be accepted by the operation by the player. That is also as described above. When the effect reception occurs within the operation valid period B (timing tm15 to tm16) for the silent reception effect, as shown in FIGS. 301 (a) and 301 (b), the post-operation effect corresponding to the effect reception is performed. As one, the "special production sound B" is assigned to an empty channel (channels "10" and "11" in the figure) and played.

In this regard, with regard to the silent reception production (operation valid period B) related to this production example, the anxiety that "maybe there is no space in the channel and it may not be possible to output the special production sound" has been removed. Considering that it is in a state, it is decided to generate this as an "automatic reception effect that is the target of the automatic effect function". That is, in this case, the player will no longer have the intention of "not generating the production reception because there may not be enough free channels", so that the reception production is automatically generated contrary to the player's intention. It becomes possible to reliably execute the post-operation effect according to the effect reception within the silent reception effect (operation valid period B) while preferably avoiding this.

Further, in the silent reception effect (operation valid period B) according to this effect example, regardless of the presence or absence of the operation by the player, until the predetermined timing tm15a within the operation valid period B arrives (operation). When the timing tm15a arrives at the latest (when the automatic effect function is enabled), the effect reception will always occur. Then, as shown in FIGS. 301 (a) and 301 (b), while the "special effect sound B" is in the reproduction state as one of the post-operation effects corresponding to the effect reception, the above "BGM reproduction" is performed. The relationship is such that the timing tm17 when the sound of "" changes from the silent section to the normal section arrives.

According to such a configuration, the silent section of the specific sound data (sound of "BGM reproduction") ends in the form of being mixed in with the "special production sound B" being reproduced. Since the data content of the section (unsuppressed sound output) is reproduced, it is possible to secretly return the sound of "BGM reproduction" to the output in the unsuppressed mode. It will be possible to provide a production sound that does not give a sense of discomfort. That is, in this case, when an effect reception occurs in a state where the sound of "BGM reproduction" is output as silent data, the "special effect sound B" is started to be reproduced in an unsuppressed manner by a highly immediate process triggered by this. It is possible to preferably avoid the occurrence of sound deviation in the BGM between various effects and the timing of stopping the symbol after that. In this way, in order to secretly return the sound of "BGM reproduction" to the output in a non-suppressed manner, the above-mentioned silent reception effect (operation valid period B) is subject to the "automatic effect function". It can be said that it is important to generate it as "automatic reception production".

During the operation valid period B (timing tm15 to tm16) related to this effect example, the symbol is changing so that all the channels to which the "special effect sound B" can be assigned are not in use. Execution periods for various notice effects are set.

FIG. 302 is a diagram for explaining in more detail the technical features of the normal reception effect (operation validity period A) according to this effect example. Next, with reference to FIG. 302, the normal reception effect (operation validity period A) will be described in more detail.

As described above, the normal reception effect (operation valid period A) according to this effect example is usually within the period during which specific sound data (sound of "BGM reproduction") corresponding to a specific effect pattern is reproduced. Based on the arrival of the timing tm12 in the section, it is generated as "non-automatic reception effect that is not the target of the automatic effect function". Although not shown in the illustration, a precursory effect (for example, FIG. 293 (g)) suggesting that an operation opportunity is given to the player when the normal reception effect (operation valid period A) occurs is shown. (See), but it is desirable that the precursor effect be executed as a display content different from the precursor effect performed when the silent reception effect (operation valid period B) occurs.

When the operation valid period A corresponding to the normal reception effect occurs, the operation valid period A is terminated due to the occurrence of the effect reception associated with the operation within the operation valid period A, or within the operation valid period A. The embodiment (or another example thereof) described with reference to FIGS. 293 (h) and (l), for example, until the operation valid period A ends without the operation being performed and the effect reception not occurring. For example, an image prompting the operation or an image showing the remaining time is displayed. Then, when the operation is performed within the operation valid period A and the effect reception occurs, in addition to outputting the "special effect sound A" as one of the post-operation effects, FIGS. 293 (j), (k). ), Etc., another post-operation effect is further executed. When performing the post-operation effect step by step, it is desirable to first output the "special effect sound A" in advance. On the other hand, when the operation valid period A is terminated without the operation being performed within the operation valid period A and the effect reception not occurring, for example, the embodiment described with reference to FIG. 293 (m) (or the embodiment thereof). In another example), the production status after the operation valid period A is completed will appear.

Here, the normal reception effect (operation valid period A) according to this effect example is set as a period from the timing tm12 to the timing tm13 when the “time Ta” has elapsed, and the normal internal reception effect (operation valid period). When a production reception occurs within A), the "special production sound A" is output over a "time Tc" longer than the "time Ta".

That is, in this case, even if the player operates immediately after the normal reception effect (operation valid period A) occurs at the timing tm12 and the effect reception occurs, the "special effect sound A" is produced. , As shown in FIG. 302A, the timing tm13 and the timing tm13a are assigned to the channels and output. On the other hand, when the player performs an operation immediately before the timing tm13 at which the normal reception effect (operation valid period A) ends and the effect reception occurs, the “special effect sound A” is shown in FIG. 302 (b). ), It will be assigned to the channel and output up to the more delayed timing tm13b.

According to such a configuration, the "special effect sound A" corresponding to the normal reception effect (operation valid period A) covers a range more than twice as wide as the operation valid period A, such as timing tm12 to tm13b. Understand that it can be used. This means that at least four channels (stereo BGM, stereo special production sound A) can be used at the timings tm12 to tm13b, and there is no room for free channels by that amount.

In this regard, as shown in FIGS. 302 and 303, in the normal reception effect according to this production example, the “time Ta” as the operation valid period A is set to the silent reception effect (operation valid period B) described later. ) Is set to a shorter time than the "time Tb". As a result, the time (timing tm12 to tm13b) until the output of the "special production sound A" is completed can be relatively shortened, and as a result, the production sound accompanying the normal reception production can be generated. It is possible to suitably suppress the occurrence of a situation where the number of channels is insufficient. In addition, by making the time as the operation valid period A relatively short in this way, it seems that there is not much room in the vacant channel, and the automatic production function cannot be activated in the period when the player cannot be activated. It is also possible to create a directing effect that urges the choice of whether or not to operate.

In this production example, the output of the "special production sound A" is terminated before the timing tm14 for switching to the silent section arrives at the latest (FIGS. 302 (a), (Fig. 302), b)). In this regard, according to the above-described configuration in which the timings tm12 to tm13b are relatively shortened, there is no sound at a relatively early stage after the normal in-house reception effect is generated while maintaining the relationship between the timings tm13b and tm14. It will be possible to make the section appear, and it will be possible to suitably eliminate the dramatic extension.

FIG. 303 is a diagram for explaining in more detail the technical features of the silent reception effect (operation valid period B) according to this effect example. Next, with reference to FIG. 303, the silent reception effect (operation valid period B) will be described in more detail.

As described above, the normal reception effect (operation valid period B) related to this effect example is silent during the period in which specific sound data (sound of "BGM reproduction") corresponding to a specific effect pattern is reproduced. Based on the arrival of the timing tm15 in the section, it is generated as "automatic reception effect targeted by the automatic effect function".

As described above, although the illustration is omitted, when the silent reception effect (operation valid period B) occurs, a precursor effect suggesting that an operation opportunity is given to the player (for example, FIG. 292 (for example, FIG. 292). b)) will be performed.

In this respect, the illustration is also omitted, but in the pachinko machine 1 according to this production example, even when the symbol variation is performed in a predetermined production pattern different from the specific production pattern based on the result of the production determination, the predetermined timing is used. When the message arrives, the BGM data (sound of "BGM reproduction") corresponding to the predetermined effect pattern can be output in a suppressed mode or silently. However, when a "period in which the sound is output in a suppressed mode or silence" occurs within the predetermined effect pattern, no reception effect is generated after a predetermined time (certain period) has elapsed from the occurrence of the period. Therefore, the production progress is made so that the BGM data (sound of "BGM reproduction") is returned to the production state in which the BGM data (sound of "BGM reproduction") is output in a non-suppressed manner.

In view of the pachinko machine 1 in which such an effect progress (predetermined effect pattern) can appear, the above-mentioned precursor effect (for example, FIG. Regarding (see 292 (b)), by starting after the timing tm14 when the silent section appears, it becomes difficult to recognize whether or not the reception effect will occur when the silent section appears, and it becomes tense. It is desirable to maintain the feeling. At this time, it is desirable that the degree of expectation is higher for the production progress in which the reception effect occurs in the silent section than in the production progress in which the reception effect does not occur in the silent section.

By the way, in the above-mentioned predetermined effect pattern, the method of outputting the BGM data (sound of "BGM reproduction") in the suppressed mode or silence is limited to the method of setting the data content (initial value of volume) itself in the suppressed mode or silence. Instead, this may be achieved by adjusting the volume from the initial value. That is, in the predetermined effect pattern, the reception effect cannot occur while the BGM data (sound of "BGM reproduction") is output in the suppressed mode or silently, and the BGM data ("BGM reproduction") Since the timing for returning to the production state in which the sound) is output in an unsuppressed manner is not indefinite but is predetermined, even if the volume is adjusted from the initial value, the above-mentioned sound deviation and the like may occur. No inconvenience occurs.

Then, as shown in FIG. 303A, if the operation valid period B corresponding to the silent reception effect occurs, the effect reception associated with the operation within the operation valid period B occurs. Until the operation valid period B ends, or until the operation valid period B ends due to the fact that the operation is not performed within the operation valid period B and the effect reception is automatically generated, for example, FIG. 292 (c). , (D), an image prompting the operation, an image showing the remaining time, and the like are displayed in the mode (or another example thereof) described with reference to (d).

Here, the silent reception effect (operation valid period B) according to this effect example is set as a period from the timing tm15 to the timing tm16 when the “time Tb” has elapsed, and the silent reception effect (operation valid period). When a production reception occurs within B), the "special production sound B" is output over a "time Td" longer than the "time Tb".

That is, in this case, even if the player operates immediately after the silent reception effect (operation valid period B) occurs at the timing tm15 and the effect reception occurs, the "special effect sound B" is , As shown in FIG. 303A, the channel is assigned to the channel and output up to the timing tm17a after the timing tm17 returned to the normal section. On the other hand, within the silent reception effect (operation valid period B), at the timing tm15a when the automatic effect function is activated (the timing when a specific time (<time Tb) has elapsed since the operation valid period B occurred). When the effect reception is automatically generated, the "special effect sound B" is assigned to the channel and output up to the more delayed timing tm17b, as shown in FIG. 303 (b).

By the way, the pachinko machine 1 according to this production example is not equipped with the setting process by the player related to the "automatic production mode", and is operated by the player when the silent reception effect (operation valid period B) occurs. If there is no such function, the "automatic effect function" is always enabled at the timing tm15a to automatically generate the effect reception. Therefore, although the silent reception effect (operation valid period B) itself occurs as a period that can be continued from the timing tm15 to the timing tm16, it is substantially continued only from the timing tm15 to the timing tm15a. It can be said that it is a period that cannot be obtained. That is, in this case, it is unlikely that the production reception will occur within the period from the timing tm15a to the timing tm16, but in the pachinko machine 1 according to this production example, such a camouflage period (timing tm15a to tm16) The silent reception effect (operation valid period B) is intentionally generated as a longer period (timing tm15 to tm16) including the above.

According to such a configuration, unlike the case of the above-mentioned normal reception effect (operation valid period A), there is a margin in both the number of free channels and the remaining time as the operation valid time B. In an atmosphere with a sense of security that looks like this, it becomes possible to give the player an operation opportunity, which makes it possible to improve the interest of the game.

In order to make it appear that there is a margin in the remaining time as the operation valid time B, the gauge amount required for the bar display indicating the remaining time of the normal reception effect (operation valid period A) is full at the timing tm15. After displaying as a tongue state, it is desirable to display so as to decrease in a mode (speed) in which the timing tm16 becomes 0 as the timing tm16 arrives. Further, in this case, since the timing tm15a arrives with the gauge amount required for the bar display remaining and the effect reception is automatically generated, the mode (or mode shown in FIGS. 292 (e) and 292 (f)) is shown. As in the alternative example), the bar display is not hidden and the output of the "special effect sound B" is started while the bar display is continuously displayed, thereby within the normal reception effect (operation valid period A). It is desirable to be able to recognize that the "automatic effect function" has been enabled. The bar display left in this way is hidden while the "special effect sound B" is in the output state.

Further, according to such a configuration, the operation effective time B can be substantially shortened from the time recognized by the player (the remaining time indicated by the bar display). For example, if there is a case where an operation is performed by a player immediately before the timing tm16 at which the silent reception effect (operation valid period B) ends, and the effect reception may occur, the “special effect sound B” may occur. Is assigned to the channel and output up to the further delayed timing tm17c, as shown in FIG. 303 (c). Then, there is a possibility that the "special production sound B" corresponding to the silent reception effect (operation valid period B) can use the channel over an extremely wide range such as timing tm15 to tm17c. It can be understood that only the free channel is lost.

In this respect, in the pachinko machine 1 according to this production example, as described above, the operation effective time B is substantially shortened with respect to the time recognized by the player (timing tm15 to tm16) (timing tm15 to tm15a). By doing so, the period during which the "special production sound B" corresponding to the silent reception effect (operation valid period B) can use the channel is shown in the range (timing tm15 to tm17c) shown in FIG. 303 (c). It becomes possible to narrow down to the range (timing tm15 to tm17b) shown in 303 (b), and it becomes possible to give a margin to an empty channel by that much.

However, in the above production example, even when the silent reception effect (operation valid period B) is regarded as a substantially shortened period (specific time from timing tm15 to timing tm15a), it is usually normal. This is set as a longer time than the time Ta set as the internal reception effect (operation valid period A). Adopting such a configuration is important for creating a secure atmosphere that seems to have a margin in both the number of free channels and the remaining time as the operation effective time B. You can say that.

Further, in the above-mentioned production example related to the silent section, "a feeling of strangeness caused by not returning the sound of" BGM reproduction "as a non-suppressed mode when the operation by the player is accepted but returning it after a predetermined time" is further enhanced. In order to make it difficult to remember, it is desirable to set the initial volume value of the special effect sound B to be larger than the initial value of BGM reproduction in the normal section. According to such a configuration, while the special effect sound B having a large initial volume value is attracting attention, the sound of BGM reproduction can be secretly shifted to the reproduction state in the normal section.

Further, in the above-mentioned production example related to the silent section, the special production sound B is generated based on the production reception, but only when the specific production conditions according to the fluctuation pattern and the result of the jackpot determination are satisfied. The special production sound B may be generated based on the reception of the production. Even if a specific effect condition is not satisfied, an operation valid period is generated at the timing tm15, and when the effect is received within the operation valid period, it is determined based on the fact that the effect is received. Play the production sound (failure production sound, etc.). Then, regardless of the timing within the operation valid period, the sound of BGM reproduction is secretly brought into the reproduction state in the normal section while the predetermined production sound (failure production sound, etc.) is in the reproduction state. It is desirable that the point of shifting to is the same as in the case of the above-mentioned production example.

However, instead of this, when a predetermined effect sound (failure effect sound, etc.) is reproduced, the reproduction time is shortened compared to the case where the special effect sound is put into the reproduction state, and the predetermined effect sound (failure effect) is reproduced. The sound of BGM reproduction may be returned to the reproduction state in the normal section when the reproduction of (sound, etc.) is completed. In this case, regardless of the timing within the operation valid period, the timing at which the BGM playback sound is returned to the playback state in the normal section is the reproduction of a predetermined production sound (failure production sound, etc.). Will be set to arrive after the end.

Alternatively, when a predetermined effect sound (failure effect sound, etc.) is reproduced, the symbol variation is stopped in a lost manner without returning the BGM reproduction sound to the reproduction state in the normal section. May be good. In this case, at the timing tm14, the allocation of the BGM reproduction sound to the channels 02 and 03 may be terminated and this may be made an empty channel.

Further, when the special effect sound B is generated, the display change and the movable effect of operating a predetermined movable body are performed together based on the effect reception so as to reduce the degree of attention to the sound of the BGM reproduction. It is desirable to secretly shift the sound of BGM reproduction to the reproduction state in the normal section. In this case, when the special effect sound A is generated, it is desirable that the display change is only generated based on the effect reception, and the movable effect for operating the predetermined movable body is not executed.

Further, in the above-mentioned production example, the sound of "BGM reproduction" is output silently in a part of the section, but the sound is not limited to this and is output in a mode suppressed more than the sound of "BGM reproduction" in other sections. Anything is fine. Here, the suppressed mode can be exemplified by a mode in which the volume is relatively lowered, a mode in which the vibration frequency of the speaker cone per unit time is reduced, and the like.

Further, in the above-mentioned production example, the sound volume of the "BGM reproduction" is set by setting the suppression mode or the time-series period in which the sound data of the "BGM reproduction" assigned to the predetermined channel is suppressed or silenced. It is possible to create a suppressed mode or a state (special period) in which the sound is output silently just by reproducing this without making any adjustments. However, it is not always necessary to set a time-series period in which the sound data of the "BGM reproduction" assigned to the predetermined channel is suppressed or silenced. For example, at the timing tm14, the sound of the "BGM reproduction" Volume adjustment may be performed to reduce the volume to a specific value (which may be muted). That is, in this case, even if the effect reception occurs at the timing tm15a, the process of raising the volume of the sound of "BGM reproduction" from the specific value (process of returning to the initial volume value) is not performed. .. Then, when a specific effect condition is satisfied, when the predetermined timing tm17 arrives, the volume of the sound of "BGM reproduction" is increased from the specific value while the special effect sound is being reproduced. Processing (processing to return to the initial volume value) will be performed. On the other hand, when a specific effect condition is not satisfied, the volume of the sound of "BGM reproduction" is specified while a predetermined effect sound (failure effect sound, etc.) is being reproduced, as in the other example described above. A process of increasing the value (processing of returning to the initial volume value) may be performed, or the volume of the sound of "BGM reproduction" is set to a specific value in a state where the reproduction of a predetermined effect sound (failure effect sound, etc.) is completed. The process of increasing from the value (processing of returning to the initial volume value) may be performed, or the symbol variation may be terminated without increasing a predetermined effect sound (failure effect sound, etc.) from a specific value. good.

Further, in the above-mentioned production example, a restriction process for making it difficult for a new sound allocation to occur for an empty channel is performed for a period from a predetermined timing before the arrival of the timing tm14 to the timing tm17. Is desirable. In addition, as such a restriction process, for example, a specific game such as a hold winning sound, a general electric effect sound, a volume adjustment sound, etc., which has nothing to do with the result of whether or not a big hit symbol appears due to a symbol fluctuation during execution. It is desirable that the sound is restricted and that the specific game sound that is restricted is not played without being newly assigned to the channel.

In addition, when it is decided to execute a specific effect pattern as a symbol variation according to the result of the jackpot determination, a specific effect sound (BGM) is used on a channel different from channels 02 and 03 before the timing tm14 arrives. (It is desirable that it is a production sound such as a sound effect or dialogue, not music) so that it does not overlap with the sound of It is desirable that the sound of is output in a suppressed mode or silently. That is, in this case, since the sound of the BGM reproduction is mixed into the specific effect sound, it becomes difficult to notice that the sound of the BGM reproduction is in the suppressed mode or the silent state. It should be noted that the reproduction state of a specific effect sound is terminated before the timing tm15 (timing tm15 or before the timing tm15) when the special effect sound B (or a predetermined effect sound) can be output. It is desirable to alleviate the anxiety that the special production sound B is not output.

In addition, when it is decided to execute a specific effect pattern as a symbol variation according to the result of the jackpot determination, the sound of BGM reproduction is emitted from the timing when the special effect sound B (or a predetermined effect sound) is output. It is desirable to output the effect sound in a plurality of channels until the timing tm17 at which the suppression mode or the state of being silenced ends. That is, in this case, since a plurality of production sounds including the special production sound B are output, it becomes possible to easily mix the sound of BGM reproduction into those production sounds, and the sound of BGM reproduction can be mixed. It becomes possible to secretly shift to the reproduction state in the normal mode.

The pachinko machine 1 according to the above-mentioned production example may also be equipped with a setting process by the player related to the “automatic production mode”. That is, in this case, when the "automatic effect mode" is set, the automatic effect function is activated and the effect reception occurs even within the normal reception effect (operation valid period A) when the predetermined timing arrives. .. On the other hand, if a silent reception effect (operation valid period B) occurs while the "automatic effect mode" is set, the automatic effect function is activated when a predetermined timing before the above timing tm15a arrives. It is desirable that it is activated so that the production reception occurs.

In the above production example, execution periods such as various advance notice effects during symbol fluctuation are set so that the number of vacant channels does not become 0 even during the execution period of the normal reception effect (operation valid period A). You may do so. In short, by making the sound of "BGM reproduction" continuously output in an unsuppressed manner, it is sufficient to provide an atmosphere in which it seems that there is no room in the free channels. On the contrary, the number of free channels may become 0 even during the execution period of the silent reception effect (operation valid period B). The point is that the sound of "BGM reproduction" may be output in a suppressed manner or silently so as to provide an atmosphere in which the free channels seem to have a margin.

In the above production example, "special production sound A" is assigned to channels "08" and "09", whereas "special production sound B" is assigned to channels "10" and "11". , These "special production sound A" and "special production sound B" may be assigned to the same channel.

In the above production example, the precursory effect for the silent reception effect (operation valid period B) is started after the timing tm14 when the silent section appears. However, the precursory effect may be started before the timing tm14 at which the silent section appears, and the timing tm14 at which the silent section appears while the precursory effect is being executed may arrive. According to such a configuration, it is possible to provide a color rendering property such as whether or not a silent section appears while the precursory effect is being performed.

In the above production example, the same operation means (for example, operation button 410) is set as the operation target for the normal reception effect (operation valid period A) and the silent reception effect (operation valid period B). In the normal reception effect (operation valid period A), the operation button 410 is executed as the operation target, whereas in the silent reception effect (operation valid period B), the sword decoration body 5001 is the operation target. It may be executed as a reception effect. In this case, different images (button image BTG, sword decoration image SYG) are displayed during the execution period of the normal reception effect (operation valid period A) and during the execution period of the silent reception effect (operation valid period B). Since it will be displayed, when the post-operation effect is started in those reception effects, the model image is hidden as in the embodiment (or another example thereof) described with reference to FIGS. 285 to 287. It is also possible to start the production after the operation while keeping this continuously displayed.

In the above production example, in the specific production pattern, the normal reception effect (operation valid period A) is generated only once when the normal section is in the normal section, but the non-automatic reception is performed when the normal section is in the normal section. The normal reception effect (operation valid period A) as the effect may be generated a plurality of times. However, in those normal reception effects, it is desirable that different post-operation effects are executed. On the other hand, in the silent section in a specific production pattern, in order to secretly output the "BGM reproduction sound" in a non-suppressed manner while the "special production sound B" is being reproduced, the reception is performed in silence. It is desirable to generate the effect (operation valid period B) only once. Then, it is desirable that the post-operation effect by the normal reception effect (operation valid period A) and the post-operation effect by the silent reception effect (operation valid period B) are different from each other.

[Movable production triggered by the establishment of conditions other than the conditions for design games]
As described above, in this pachinko machine 1 (main control MPU 1310a), when the game ball is accepted at the starting port (first starting port 2002, second starting port 2004), a determination regarding hit is made. As a result, when the jackpot is won, the jackpot game in which a large number of game balls can be acquired is executed after executing the symbol variation in which the jackpot symbol is displayed, and after the jackpot game, it is advantageous to the player. It is possible to control the game state (time saving state, probability change state). Further, while such a symbol game is performed, in the peripheral control MPU1511a, various notice effects such as a timer effect, an operation effect, a look-ahead effect, etc., in addition to the effect pattern, are produced according to the result of the determination regarding the hit. Etc.) are made feasible, and as mentioned above, the game is maintained in the interest of the game until the big hit game is performed.

However, the display change in the effect display device 1600 and the behavior of the movable decorative body (for example, the back front decoration unit 3100 and the back middle movable effect unit 3200, specific There is a concern that the decorative member SDY (sudare) and the like will become monotonous, and it will be difficult to maintain the pachinko machine 1 at a high operating rate for a long period of time.

Therefore, in this pachinko machine 1, even when another condition unrelated to the determination process related to the progress of the game and the corresponding symbol variation (start condition of the symbol game) is satisfied, the display content and movement on the effect display device 1600 are possible. It is possible to execute a process that can change the behavior of the decoration. That is, in this case, the display change and the movement of the movable body appear in a mode beyond the category of the symbol game, and the monotony is eliminated, so that the pachinko machine 1 is maintained at a high operating rate for a long period of time. Can be expected.

Here, when another condition unrelated to the determination process related to the progress of the game and the corresponding symbol variation (start condition of the symbol game) is satisfied, the display content on the effect display device 1600 and the behavior of the movable decorative body change. As a method for causing the above, for example, each method listed below can be assumed. In addition, in order to change the display contents on the effect display device 1600 and the behavior of the movable decorative body when another condition unrelated to the start condition of the symbol game is satisfied, any of the following methods is adopted. Alternatively, a method different from any of the methods listed below may be adopted, but a situation in which the symbol variation is not executed tentatively (the processing flag shown in FIG. 167 is "0" and the number of pending numbers is set. Is "0"), the above-mentioned other conditions must be satisfied, and even if the other conditions are satisfied in the situation, the display contents on the effect display device 1600 and the display contents It must be capable of causing changes in the behavior of the movable ornament.
-A method in which a production lottery that has nothing to do with symbol fluctuations is regularly executed, and the fact that a specific result is obtained in this production lottery is regarded as "the establishment of another condition" described above.-The cumulative number of operations for a specific operation means The time is measured (for example, when the power is turned on) by the calculation process in the RTC (real-time clock) function or the peripheral control MPU1511a (or the main control MPU1310a). (Measure the time from), and the above-mentioned "satisfaction of another condition" is defined as the time when the measured time reaches a predetermined time.

Generally, in pachinko machines, when the time measured by using the RTC function reaches a predetermined time, it is assumed that another condition is satisfied, and the display content on the effect display device 1600 and the behavior of the movable decorative body are changed. Is often adopted. However, regardless of which method is adopted, if the display content or the behavior of the movable body is changed when another condition unrelated to the start condition of the symbol game is satisfied, until the change timing is reached. Since it is common to take a relatively long time (at least several hours, etc.), it is possible to change the display content or the behavior of the movable ornament despite such a long time. If something that cannot be done occurs, there is a concern that the interest in the game will decline.

Therefore, in the pachinko machine 1 according to this embodiment, first, a specific state (for example, an RTC state) in which the movable body operation time for operating the movable decorative body in a specific mode is set in advance is set as a start condition of the symbol game. Can be generated based on the fact that another specific condition (for example, the measurement time by the RTC function reaches a predetermined time) is satisfied. Then, in a situation where the movable decorative body is in an abnormal state (for example, a situation in which the movable decorative body should be in the in-situ position but is not in the in-situ position) and a specific state has not occurred, the symbol changes. When the corresponding restoration operation time arrives, it is possible to start the process of causing the movable decoration to perform a predetermined restoration operation, whereas the movable decoration is in an abnormal state and a specific state occurs. In such a situation, it is possible to start a process of performing a predetermined restoration operation at a predetermined time in a specific state without starting a process of performing a predetermined restoration operation even when a predetermined restoration operation time arrives. ..

That is, in this case, in the specific state that can be generated based on the establishment of a specific condition different from the start condition of the symbol game, the process of performing a predetermined restoration operation according to the symbol change side is prohibited. Since it is possible to start the process of performing a predetermined restoration operation at a predetermined time in a specific state, a movable body abnormality can be detected by a predetermined procedure in the specific state without being affected by the execution status of the symbol change. It is expected that the movable decoration will be restored and the operation in a specific mode (the operation when another condition is satisfied) will be executed more reliably.

Hereinafter, an example of the processing content when the movable decorative body is operated when such a specific condition is satisfied will be described with reference to FIG. 304. In the example shown in FIG. 304, for convenience of explanation, "RTC state in which a display content different from the previous one appears when it is determined that the elapsed time from power-on has reached a predetermined time by using the RTC function (RTC state). It is described as "a process that can execute a process of generating a specific state) and sequentially operating three movable decorative bodies A, B, and C according to the occurrence timing of the RTC state (specific state)". As described above, the method of causing a change in the display content on the effect display device 1600 and the behavior of the movable decorative body when another condition (specific condition) unrelated to the start condition of the game is satisfied is not limited to this. As is the case, it is possible to appropriately adopt each of the techniques described below even when other methods are adopted.

Assuming that the state is before the RTC state (specific state) occurs, in the peripheral control MPU1511a, first, the remaining time until the elapsed time from the power-on reaches a predetermined time (until the RTC state occurs). The remaining time) will be updated regularly. In this regard, in the example shown in FIG. 304, at the timing Rt2, the elapsed time from the power-on reaches a predetermined time to generate the RTC state (specific state), and the RTC state (specific state) is generated. Based on the above, it is possible to execute the process of sequentially operating the three movable decorative bodies A, B, and C. In this way, the three movable decorative bodies A, B, and C are sequentially operated based on the establishment of a condition (the establishment of the second condition) that has nothing to do with the situation of the symbol change, so that the flow of the game so far can be changed. You will be able to have a sense of expectation as if it will change. At this time, the display content of the effect display device 1600 may be changed.

In order to more preferably raise the expectation when the RTC state (specific state) occurs, for example, the RTC state is made to function as an effect period limited to a predetermined time (10 minutes), and the effect is produced. If a big hit is won between the time when the period (RTC state) occurs and the time when it ends, the production progress by the production character that cannot appear when the RTC state (specific state) does not occur (normal state) It is more desirable to have a production privilege such as enabling a special production mode).

Further, in the example shown in FIG. 304, even at the timing Rt1 slightly before the timing Rt2 (for example, 5 seconds before), the condition unrelated to the state of the symbol fluctuation is satisfied. Based on the condition satisfaction (the first condition is satisfied), the pre-display indicating that the RTC state is about to occur (the second condition is satisfied) can be executed. That is, in the peripheral control MPU1511a according to this example, it is determined whether or not the timing Rt1 has arrived in addition to the timing Rt2 by periodically checking the passage of time since the power is turned on. When it is determined that the timing Rt2 has arrived, the pre-display (display change) appears, and when it is determined that the timing Rt2 has arrived, the process (behavior of the movable decoration) according to the occurrence of the RTC state is executed. .. The "pre-display" can be executed, for example, as a display such as "soon RTC state" or a countdown display toward the timing Rt2.

According to such a configuration, when the three movable decorative bodies A, B, and C are sequentially operated according to the timing Rt2 at which the RTC state (specific state) occurs, the movements of these movable bodies are the result of the jackpot determination. Since it is suggested to the player in advance that it is not based on (does not have any jackpot expectation), it is preferable to avoid a decrease in the game interest due to a recognition error by the player. You will be able to.

In particular, in the example shown in FIG. 304, at least during the period of timings Rt1 to Rt2, only the display (display not conforming to the symbol variation) that does not show any expectation as the display content on the effect display device 1600 appears. The decorative pattern (effect pattern) itself is hidden so that it is not displayed. That is, in this case, the three movable decorative bodies A, B, and C are sequentially operated while only the display (display that does not conform to the symbol variation) that does not show any degree of expectation appears as the display content on the effect display device 1600. Since the process of causing the game to be started is started, it is expected that it is more preferably avoided that the game interest is deteriorated due to the recognition error by the player.

Here, "pre-display appearing at timing Rt1" and "moving body movement appearing at timing Rt2" correspond to "display not conforming to symbol variation" and correspond to "behavior of movable decorative body not conforming to symbol variation", respectively. Is what you do. Therefore, at the timings Rt1 and Rt2, the display and the behavior of the movable body occur regardless of the execution status (including the execution status) of the symbol variation at those timings. However, depending on the execution status of the symbol change, the preparations for operating the movable decorative bodies A, B, and C are not ready (the movable decorative bodies A, B, and C are in the original positions even though the timing Rt2 has arrived). There is a concern that the movable decorative bodies A, B, and C cannot be sequentially operated even though the timing Rt2 has finally arrived.

For example, when any one of several fluctuation patterns is selected as the symbol variation according to the result of the jackpot determination, the movable decorative body A or the movable decorative body B, within the period in which the symbol variation is performed, A movable effect using the movable decorative body C may be executed, but during the execution of such a movable effect, the movable body operation time (here, when the RTC state occurs) in the above-mentioned RTC state comes. In some cases, at least the movable decorative bodies A, B, and C that are in the process of being executed cannot be used as the above-mentioned "behavior of the movable decorative body that does not conform to the symbol variation". Can be assumed.

Further, in the pachinko machine 1 (peripheral control MPU1511a) according to this embodiment, when the restoration operation time corresponding to the symbol variation arrives, not only the movable decorative bodies A, B, and C but also various movable pachinko machines 1 are provided. It is possible to perform movement abnormality determination such as whether or not the decorative body is in the original position (normal state). Then, when it is determined (abnormality determination) that there is a movable decorative body that is not in the normal state in this movable abnormality determination, a predetermined movable decorative body is determined for the movable decorative body that is the determination target, following the processing of the abnormality determination. By executing the restoration process that performs the restoration operation (movement to the original position, etc.), it is possible to quickly restore the movable decorative body in an abnormal state. Therefore, it is possible that the movable body operation time in the RTC state described above comes in the middle of executing the restoration process for causing the movable decorative body to perform a predetermined restoration operation (movement to the original position, etc.). If there is, at least the movable decorative bodies A, B, and C that are in the middle of the restoration operation cannot be used as the above-mentioned "behavior of the movable decorative body that does not conform to the symbol variation". Can be assumed.

The "restoration operation time corresponding to the symbol variation" includes, for example, the start timing of the symbol variation (the timing of acquiring the command sent from the main control MPU1310a side when the symbol variation starts) and the symbol variation. It is possible to execute (execute the restoration process based on the acquisition of the command) as at least one of the stop times (the time when the command sent from the main control MPU1310a side is acquired when the symbol fluctuation is stopped). Is.

Therefore, in the example shown in FIG. 304 (peripheral control MPU1511a), first, at least "after the timing Rt2 at which the RTC state (specific state) occurs" arrives, the movable decorative body is specified according to the operation time of the movable body in the RTC state. When it is in the period until the operation (here, the sequential operation by the three movable decorative bodies A, B, and C) is completed in the mode, the movable decorative body (movable decorative body A, movable decorative body B) used within the period is reached. , Movable decoration C) is prohibited so that it is not used as a movable effect according to the effect pattern on the symbol change side, so that the movable body movement in a specific mode in the RTC state (movable decoration that does not conform to the symbol change) It is possible to suppress the situation where the behavior of the body) cannot be performed due to the movable effect on the symbol change side.

However, at this time, even though the effect pattern corresponding to the movable effect is displayed, there is a concern that the game interest may be deteriorated if the movable effect is not executed within the effect pattern. In this regard, in the example shown in FIG. 304 (peripheral control MPU1511a), at the timing Rt1, only the display (display that does not conform to the symbol variation) that does not show any expectation as the display content on the effect display device 1600 appears. That is mentioned above.

Therefore, in the example shown in FIG. 304, when there is a symbol fluctuation (B fluctuation (loss) in the figure) that is in the middle of execution when the timing Rt2 arrives, "what kind of expectation" was displayed until then. The display that does not show the degree (display from timing Rt1) ”is not hidden at this point, and this is displayed over the period until the timing Rt2a when the symbol fluctuation (B fluctuation (loss) in the figure) is stopped. I try to maintain it.

According to such a configuration, although the RTC state (specific state) is generated at the timings Rt2 to Rt2a and the symbol is actually changed, the effect display device 1600 is decorated. The effect pattern by the design is hidden, and only the display that does not show any expectation will appear. Then, while such a display appears, the operation by the movable decorative body (here, the sequential operation by the three movable decorative bodies A, B, and C) according to the occurrence of the RTC state is advanced. It is expected that the deterioration of the game interest due to the fact that the movable effect corresponding to the effect pattern is not executed within the period of the timings Rt2 to Rt2a is preferably suppressed.

In the example shown in FIG. 304, when the symbol variation (B variation (loss) in the figure) that was in the middle of execution when the timing Rt2 arrives is terminated (stopped) (when the timing Rt2a arrives). , Even if it is within the operation period by the movable decorative body according to the occurrence of the RTC state, the "display that does not show any expectation (display from timing Rt1)" that was displayed until then is hidden at this point. Then, a specific background (for example, during the RTC state) after the occurrence of the RTC state (specific state) can appear. After that, when a new symbol variation (C variation (loss) in the figure) is started, even if it is within the operation period by the movable decorative body corresponding to the occurrence of the RTC state, the symbol variation is responded to. The display showing the degree of expectation such as the production pattern and the advance notice production is started as usual.

However, even if a new symbol change (C change (loss) in the figure) is started and the effect pattern is displayed in this way, the "RTC state (specific state) occurs timing Rt2 has arrived. At least as long as it is in the period from then until the movable decoration finishes operating in a specific mode (here, the three movable decorations A, B, and C sequentially operate) depending on the operation time of the movable body in the RTC state. Needless to say, the movable effect on the symbol variation side using any of the movable decorative body A, the movable decorative body B, and the movable decorative body C is prohibited. In this state, the movable effect on the symbol changing side is prohibited, but since the movable body movement corresponding to the occurrence of the RTC state is in the middle of execution, the game by prohibiting the movable effect on the symbol changing side. The decline in interest will be suppressed.

As such a prohibition process, it is determined whether or not the situation should be prohibited at the start of the symbol variation (C variation in the figure), and when it is determined that the situation should be prohibited, the corresponding symbol variation (figure). Among them, C variation) itself may be set as a prohibited target of the movable effect (at least the movable effect using any one of the movable decorative body A, the movable decorative body B, and the movable decorative body C). That is, in this case, after the timing Rt2 at which the RTC state (specific state) occurs is reached in the middle of the corresponding symbol change (C change in the figure), the movable decorative body is moved depending on the operation time of the movable body in the RTC state. Even if the "period until the operation in a specific mode (here, the sequential operation by the three movable decorative bodies A, B, and C) is completed" is completed, the movable effect (in this case, the movable effect (in this case, the period until the symbol variation is completed) is completed. At least, the execution of the movable effect using any one of the movable decorative body A, the movable decorative body B, and the movable decorative body C) becomes unacceptable.

By the way, in the example shown in FIG. 304, the timing for causing the specific background (for example, during the RTC state) after the occurrence of the RTC state (specific state) is set to the timing Rt2a later than the original timing Rt2. There is a concern that the number will decline. However, although the RTC state itself occurs at timing Rt2, the effect privilege due to the occurrence of the RTC state (if a big hit is won between the occurrence and the end of the RTC state, it is controlled to the special effect mode. Etc.) does not occur at timing Rt2, and only the symbol fluctuations (C and D fluctuations in the figure) after the first digested symbol fluctuation after the RTC state occurs are targeted. It can be said that it is appropriate to make a specific background (for example, in the RTC state) appear when the timing Rt2a arrives.

By the way, before the symbol fluctuation (B fluctuation (loss) in the figure) that was in the middle of execution when the timing Rt2 arrives is completed (stopped) (until the timing Rt2a arrives). ), "After the arrival of the timing Rt2 at which the RTC state (specific state) occurs, the movable decorative body operates in a specific mode depending on the operation time of the movable body in the RTC state (here, the three movable decorative bodies A, B, It can be assumed that the period until the end of the sequential operation by C) elapses. However, even in this case, as long as the timing Rt2a does not arrive, the state in which the "display without any expectation (display from the timing Rt1)" appears is maintained. This is in the example shown in FIG. 304, and the symbol variation (B variation in the figure) executed so as to straddle before and after the occurrence of the RTC state (before and after the timing Rt2) is subject to the RTC effect privilege. This is because it is not.

Furthermore, in the example shown in FIG. 304 (peripheral control MPU1511a), at least after the arrival of the timing Rt2 at which the RTC state (specific state) occurs, the movable decorative body has a specific mode depending on the operation time of the movable body in the RTC state. When it is in the period until the operation (here, the sequential operation by the three movable decorative bodies A, B, and C) is completed, even if the restoration operation time corresponding to the symbol fluctuation comes, the restoration process is triggered by this. By prohibiting this so that (a process of causing a movable decorative body in an abnormal state to perform a predetermined restoration operation) is prohibited, the movable body operation in a specific mode in the RTC state (not according to the symbol variation). The behavior of the movable decorative body) can be suppressed from being unable to be performed due to the restoration process on the symbol change side.

According to such a configuration, in the RTC state (specific state) that can be generated based on the establishment of a specific condition different from the game start condition, a predetermined restoration operation is performed according to the symbol change side. Since the process of causing the operation is prohibited and the process of performing the predetermined restoration operation at a predetermined time in the RTC state (specific state) can be executed, the influence of the execution status of the symbol change It is expected that the movable body abnormality will be restored by a predetermined procedure in the RTC state (specific state) without receiving the damage, and the movable ornament will more reliably perform the operation in the above specific mode. ..

That is, in the example shown in FIG. 304, when the game is controlled to the normal gaming state and the symbol variation (A variation (loss) in the figure) according to the jackpot determination is in the middle of the process. It is assumed that the timing Rt1 is reached. Then, as described above, first, at the timing Rt1, as a display that does not conform to the symbol variation, for example, a display such as "RTC state" appears in the background display of the effect display device 1600. Then, the symbol variation (A variation (loss) in the figure) is completed between the display such as "RTC state soon" and the arrival of the timing Rt2 at which the RTC state occurs, and a new symbol is created. Fluctuation (fluctuation B (loss)) is started. Then, the timing Rt2 arrives when the symbol change is in the middle of the process, and at the timing Rt2, three movable ornaments behave in a manner that does not conform to the symbol change. The process of operating the decorations A, B, and C in sequence is executed. The "display not conforming to the symbol variation" from the timing Rt1 is continued for a period until the new symbol variation (variation B (loss) in the figure) is stopped.

Further, as described above, in the example shown in FIG. 304, "three movable decorative bodies A, depending on the operation time of the movable body in the RTC state after the timing Rt2 at which the RTC state (specific state) occurs" has arrived. In the period until the sequential operation by B and C is completed (normal time: timing Rt2 to Rt5, abnormal time: timing Rt2 to Rt5') ", at least the movable decorative bodies A, B, among various movable decorative bodies, It is prohibited to perform both the movable effect on the symbol variation side using C and the restoration process on the symbol variation side. Therefore, in the example shown in FIG. 304, even though the symbol variation (B variation (loss) in the figure) is executed during the period of timings Rt2 to Rt2a, the effect display on the symbol variation side (the effect display on the symbol variation side (loss)). It is controlled as a period in which neither the display showing the degree of expectation, the movable effect on the symbol change side (movement of the movable body showing the degree of expectation), or the restoration process on the symbol change side is executed (No. 1). One limitation). On the other hand, in the example shown in FIG. 304, during the period from timing Rt2a to Rt5, the effect display on the symbol variation side (display showing the degree of expectation) is executed, but the movable effect on the symbol variation side (expected). The movement of the movable body whose degree is indicated) and the restoration process on the symbol change side are both controlled as a period during which they are not executed (second limitation).

It should be noted that such control at the timings Rt2 to Rt2a (neither the effect display on the symbol variation side (display showing the degree of expectation) nor the movable effect (movement of the movable body showing the degree of expectation) is executed) is the said. Even if the symbol fluctuation during the period is not a loss fluctuation but is performed based on the winning of the jackpot (big hit fluctuation), it is executed. That is, in this case, when no expected effect is executed and the sequential operation by the three movable decorative bodies A, B, and C reaches the timing Rt2a in the middle of execution, the jackpot symbol suddenly appears. Therefore, as a player who expected to be in the RTC state, he / she will be able to enjoy the fun as a surprise production that exceeds the expectation. After the jackpot symbol appears in this way, the jackpot gaming state occurs while the three movable decorative bodies A, B, and C are sequentially operating.

Further, as described above, as for the display from the timing Rt1 (only the display in which the decorative symbol is not changed and no expectation is shown), the symbol fluctuation that was in the middle of execution when the timing Rt2 arrives is present. It will be hidden at the stop timing Rt2a, and instead, a specific background (such as "in RTC state") after the RTC state has occurred will be displayed. In addition, when a symbol variation (variation pattern C in the figure) is newly started while a specific background (such as "in RTC state") is displayed, an effect display (expectation degree is shown) according to the variation pattern. Will be displayed) will be executed normally. However, regarding the movable effect on the symbol change side using the movable decorative bodies A, B, and C, unless the process of sequentially operating the three movable decorative bodies A, B, and C is completed, after the timing Rt2a arrives. Will be maintained as a prohibited state. Therefore, even if an effect pattern for performing the movable effect on the symbol variation side using any of the movable decorative bodies A, B, and C is selected based on the result of the jackpot determination, the movable effect is performed. Although the liquid crystal display, sound, lamp lighting, etc. are performed as usual, the movable decorative body is prevented from operating.

Further, as described above, in the example shown in FIG. 304, after the timing Rt2 at which the RTC state (specific state) occurs arrives, the three movable decorative bodies A and B depend on the movement time of the movable body in the RTC state. In the period until the sequential operation by C and C is completed (normal time: timing Rt2 to Rt5, abnormal time: timing Rt2 to Rt5') ", the restoration operation time corresponding to the symbol fluctuation (here, the start of the symbol fluctuation). Even if the time (time, stop time) arrives, it is prohibited to perform the restoration process (the process of causing the movable decorative body in the abnormal state to perform the predetermined restoration operation). .. Therefore, in the example shown in FIG. 304, at the timing Rt2a, the stop time (restoration operation time) of the symbol variation (B variation (loss) in the figure) and the symbol variation (C variation (loss) in the figure) )) The start time (restoration operation time) has come, but in these restoration operation times, even if there is a movable decoration in an abnormal state, it is restored to the movable decoration. No processing is performed.

However, during the period of timing Rt2 to Rt5 (when abnormal, timing Rt2 to Rt5'), instead of prohibiting the restoration process on the symbol change side in this way, first, at timing Rt2, the movable decorative body A is in an abnormal state. Judge whether or not it is. Then, in the example shown in FIG. 304 (f), it is determined that the movable decorative body A is not in an abnormal state, and based on the result of the determination, the movable decorative body A is operated in a normal operation mode. The process of operating (normal operation) will be executed. Here, the normal operation mode of the movable decorative body A is, for example, after moving the movable decorative body A in the original position to a predetermined effect position (first position), the movable decorative body A is in the predetermined effect position. It can be realized as an operation mode in which the movable decorative body A is moved to the original position.

Next, at the timing Rt3 after the normal operation by the movable decorative body A is completed, it is determined whether or not the movable decorative body B is in an abnormal state. Then, in the example shown in FIG. 304 (f), it is determined that the movable decorative body B is not in an abnormal state, and based on the result of the determination, the movable decorative body B is operated in a normal operation mode. The process of operating (normal operation) will be executed. Here, the normal operation mode of the movable decorative body B is, for example, after moving the movable decorative body B in the original position to a predetermined effect position (second position), the movable decorative body B is in the predetermined effect position. It can be realized as an operation mode in which the movable decorative body B is moved to the original position.

Then, at the timing Rt4 after the normal operation by the movable decorative body B is completed, it is determined whether or not the movable decorative body C is in an abnormal state. Then, in the example shown in FIG. 304 (f), it is determined that the movable decorative body C is not in an abnormal state, and based on the result of the determination, the movable decorative body C is operated in a normal operation mode. The process of operating (normal operation) will be executed. Here, the normal operation mode of the movable decorative body C is, for example, after moving the movable decorative body C in the original position to a predetermined effect position (third position), the movable decorative body C is in the predetermined effect position. It can be realized as an operation mode in which the movable decorative body C is moved to the original position.

Then, in the example shown in FIG. 304 (e), when the timing Rt5 after each operation by the movable decorative bodies A, B, and C is sequentially completed, the RTC state (specific state) occurs at the time of occurrence. The "behavior of the movable decorative body that does not conform to the symbol variation" is terminated, and the prohibited state for the restoration process on the symbol variation side is lifted.

On the other hand, when it is determined that the movable decorative body is in an abnormal state by any of the abnormality determinations for the movable decorative bodies A, B, and C, a process of causing the movable decorative body in the abnormal state to perform a predetermined restoration operation. Is feasible. However, while executing a series of movable body movements (here, sequential movements by the three movable decorative bodies A, B, and C) when the RTC state occurs, the movable decorative body in the abnormal state is predetermined. If the player feels that the restoration operation is being performed, it will be annoying, and there is a concern that the interest in the game will decline.

Therefore, in the pachinko machine 1 (peripheral control MPU1511a) according to this embodiment, a predetermined restoration operation for the movable decorative body in the abnormal state is performed by a series of movable body operations (here, three movable bodies) when the RTC state occurs. It is not executed independently as an operation different from the operation (sequential operation by the decorative bodies A, B, and C), but is executed as an operation of a special mode including an operation of returning the movable decorative body in an abnormal state. .. That is, in this case, the predetermined restoration operation itself for the movable decorative body in the abnormal state can be made to appear as if it is an operation incorporated as a part of the operation when the RTC state occurs. , The deterioration of the game interest when performing a predetermined restoration operation on the movable decorative body in the abnormal state can be preferably avoided.

For example, in the example shown in FIG. 304 (f), it is assumed that the movable decorative body B is determined to be in an abnormal state at the timing Rt3 after the normal operation by the movable decorative body A is completed. However, based on the result of the abnormality determination, it is not a process of operating the movable decorative body B in the normal operation mode (normal operation), but an abnormal time including an operation of returning (restoring) the movable decorative body B. It is possible to execute the process of operating (special operation) in the operation mode of. After that, the restored (restored) movable decorative body B is not re-operated (normally operated) in the normal operating mode, and the timing Rt4 (movable) shown in FIG. 304 (e) is not performed. Similar to (timing after the normal operation by the decorative body B is completed), it is determined whether or not the movable decorative body C is in an abnormal state, and when the movable decorative body C is not in an abnormal state, the movable decoration is movable. The process of operating the body C in the normal operation mode (normal operation) is executed. The time required for the normal operation by the movable decorative body B and the time required for the special operation by the movable decorative body B may or may not be the same.

According to such a configuration, even if an abnormality occurs in the movable decorative body B after the RTC state occurs (for example, during the operation of the movable decorative body A), the movable decorative body B in which the abnormality occurs Until the timing to operate is reached, it will be left in an abnormal state regardless of the situation on the symbol change side. Then, when the timing for operating the movable decorative body B arrives, the movable decorative body B is operated in a special mode including a restoration operation instead of the normal operation mode. Therefore, "three It becomes possible to restore the abnormally generated movable decorative body B while preferably maintaining the effect mode when the RTC state occurs, such as "sequential operation by the movable decorative bodies A, B, and C". That is, in this case, since it is possible to make it appear as if one of a plurality of operation modes prepared as the operation when the RTC state occurs is executed, a predetermined restoration operation is performed for the movable decorative body in the abnormal state. The deterioration of the game interest when performing the game will be preferably avoided.

The symbol variation (C variation (loss) in the figure) started at the timing Rt2a is sequentially executed by the three movable decorative bodies A, B, and C depending on the operation time of the movable body in the RTC state. It is started when it is in the middle stage and continues until after the sequential operation by the three movable decorative bodies A, B, and C is completed. Therefore, the stop time (restoration operation time) of the symbol fluctuation (C fluctuation (loss) in the figure) and the start time (restoration operation time) of the next symbol fluctuation (D fluctuation (loss) in the figure) have arrived. At that time, the prohibited state for the restoration process on the symbol change side has already been released. Therefore, when a movable decoration in an abnormal state exists at that time, the restoration process is executed for the movable decoration. The Rukoto.

Further, in the example shown in FIG. 304 (f), when the movable decorative body B is operated in the "special mode including the restoration operation", the "special mode including the restoration operation" is described in the "normal operation". The movable decorative body B may be restored (returned to the original position) by an operation mode different from the "mode", and may be, for example, the minimum operation mode required to return the movable decorative body B to the original position.

Further, in the example shown in FIG. 304, at the timing Rt1, only the display (for example, "soon RTC state" or the like) that does not show any expectation level appears as the display content on the effect display device 1600. Then, the display is maintained until the timing Rt2a arrives, but the display content is different based on the occurrence of the RTC state at the timing Rt2 (for example, "RTC preparation state"). You may switch to. However, even when the display content is switched at the timing Rt2 to make a new display appear, the display content on the effect display device 1600 does not show any expectation during the period of the timing Rt2 to Rt2a (design variation). It is important to make sure that the display does not conform to.

Further, in the example shown in FIG. 304, the case where an abnormality occurs in the movable decorative body B has been described. Instead, it is desirable to operate each in a special mode including a restoration operation.

Further, in the example shown in FIG. 304, the operation time of the movable body for operating the movable decorative body in a specific mode is set as the occurrence time of the RTC state (specific state). However, the operation time of the movable body may be set at the timing when a predetermined time has elapsed since the RTC state (specific state) occurred.

Further, in the example shown in FIG. 304, based on the arrival of the timings Rt1 and Rt2 in which the conditions are satisfied based on the function (RTC function) that does not conform to the symbol fluctuation on the peripheral control MPU1511a side, "not conforming to the symbol fluctuation". It was decided to start "display" and "behavior of movable ornaments that do not conform to pattern fluctuations". However, instead of this, based on the command transmitted based on the function that does not conform to the symbol variation on the main control MPU1310a side, "display that does not conform to the symbol variation" and "behavior of the movable decorative body that does not conform to the symbol variation". May be started.

Further, in the example shown in FIG. 304, "after the arrival of the timing Rt2 at which the RTC state (specific state) occurs, the movable decorative body operates in a specific mode depending on the movement time of the movable body in the RTC state (here, 3). This is prohibited so that the restoration process on the symbol change side is not performed when it is in the period until the end of the sequential operation by the two movable ornaments A, B, and C. The movement of the movable body in a specific mode (behavior of the movable decorative body that does not conform to the symbol variation) in the (specific state) is less likely to occur due to a conflict with the restoration process on the symbol variation side. However, if the restoration process for any of the three movable decorative bodies A, B, and C is started immediately before the occurrence of the RTC state (specific state), the restoration process is set to the execution state. In this situation, the RTC state (specific state) may occur, and eventually the movable body operation time in the RTC state (specific state) may come. That is, in this case, the restoration process started immediately before the occurrence of the RTC state (specific state) causes the movable body to move in a specific mode (behavior of the movable decorative body that does not conform to the symbol variation) in the RTC state (specific state). There is a concern that it will not be obtained. Therefore, in the example shown in FIG. 304, even during the period of timings Rt1 to Rt2, the restoration process for at least three movable decorative bodies A, B, and C among the various movable decorative bodies included in the pachinko machine 1 is performed. It is desirable to prohibit this so that it will not be executed.

FIG. 305 is a modification of the example shown in FIG. 304, in which "in the period of timings Rt1 to Rt2, at least three movable decorative bodies A, B, and C among the various movable decorative bodies included in the pachinko machine 1 It differs from the example shown in FIG. 304 in that the restoration process is not executed.

That is, in the example shown in FIG. 305, in the period from the arrival of the timing Rt1 to the occurrence of the RTC state (timings Rt1 to Rt2), an abnormality determination (or an abnormality determination) is made for at least three movable decorative bodies A, B, and C. , Restoration process) I am trying not to execute this itself. As a result, even if any of the three movable decorative bodies A, B, and C is in an abnormal state while the display does not conform to the symbol variation (such as "RTC state soon"), this is restored. There is no such thing, and it will be left in an abnormal state.

Then, in the example shown in FIG. 305, when the timing Rt2 at which the RTC state occurs arrives, first, the three movable decorative bodies A, B, and C are executed prior to executing the process related to the movement of the movable body in the RTC state. It is decided to perform an abnormality determination (first abnormality determination) as to whether or not any of the above is in an abnormal state.

As a result of the above abnormality determination, when it is determined that there is no abnormality in any of the three movable decorative bodies A, B, and C, it is assumed that the movable body operation time (second abnormality determination) in the RTC state has arrived. The above-mentioned processing (processing related to the movement of the movable body in the RTC state) will be performed with reference to. Therefore, when the three movable decorative bodies A, B, and C are operated in sequence, the abnormality determination as to whether or not an abnormality has occurred in the movable decorative body to be operated is executed again individually, indicating that there is no abnormality. When it is determined, the operation in the normal mode (see FIG. 304 (e)) appears, and when it is determined that there is an abnormality, the operation in the special mode (see FIG. 304 (f)) appears. That is, in this case, for example, in the movable decorative body B, the first abnormality determination is executed prior to the start of the process related to the movable body movement in the RTC state, and the process related to the movable body movement in the RTC state is started. Even after that, the second abnormality determination is executed prior to operating the movable decorative body B.

On the other hand, as a result of performing the above abnormality determination prior to executing the process related to the movement of the movable body in the RTC state, it is determined that there is an abnormality in any of the three movable decorative bodies A, B, and C. At that time, the restoration process for the movable decorative body in the abnormal state is executed in a form of delaying the arrival of the movable body operation time in the RTC state. That is, the situation in which the abnormality determination is made is "a situation in which the movement time of the movable body in the RTC state has not yet arrived, and the movement of the movable decorative body in a specific mode has not yet started". By restoring the movable decorative body in an abnormal state while maintaining the situation, the operation of the movable decorative body in a specific mode can be performed in the "normal mode" instead of the above-mentioned "special mode". Become so.

For example, as shown in FIG. 305 (f), at the timing Rt2 when the RTC state occurs, "the movable body operating time in the RTC state has not yet arrived, and the movable decorative body operates in a specific mode. It is assumed that it is determined that there is an abnormality in any of the three movable decorative bodies A, B, and C as a result of performing the abnormality determination when "is not yet started". Then, while maintaining the "state in which the movement time of the movable body in the RTC state has not yet arrived and the movement of the movable decoration in a specific mode has not yet started", the movable decoration determined to be abnormal has not been started yet. Will be restored.

That is, in this case, as shown in FIGS. 305 (e) and 305 (f), in the RTC state, as compared with the case where it is determined that none of the three movable decorative bodies A, B, and C is abnormal. The arrival of the movable body operation time is delayed (delay from timing Rt2 to timing Rt2b in the figure), and the period created by such a delay (timing Rt2 to Rt2b in the figure) should be used. Then, after the movable decorative body that has been determined to be abnormal is restored, the movable body operation time in the RTC state can be reached. After that, when the movable body operation time in the RTC state arrives, the processing as described above is performed with reference to FIG. 304.

In this regard, in the example shown in FIG. 305 (f), it is assumed that when the three movable decorative bodies A, B, and C are sequentially operated, it is determined that no abnormality has occurred in any of the movable decorative bodies. doing. That is, in this case, from the delayed timing Rt2b, the three movable decorative bodies A, B, and C operate in sequence in the manner described with reference to FIG. 304 (e). Then, when the timing Rt5b arrives after the three movable decorative bodies A, B, and C have been sequentially operated in the normal state mode, the "movable decorative body that does not conform to the symbol variation" at the time of the occurrence of the RTC state (specific state) is reached. Behavior ”is terminated, and the prohibited state (prohibited state over timings Rt1 to Rt5a) for the restoration process on the symbol variation side is released.

On the other hand, in the example shown in FIG. 305 (g), when it is determined that an abnormality has occurred in the movable decorative body B when the three movable decorative bodies A, B, and C are sequentially operated (timing). It is assumed that after the abnormality determination (first abnormality determination) in Rt2 is performed (or after the restoration), a new abnormality occurs in the movable decorative body B). That is, in this case, from the delayed timing Rt2b, the three movable decorative bodies A, B, and C operate in sequence in the manner described with reference to FIG. 304 (f). Then, after the three movable decorative bodies A, B, and C have been sequentially operated in a mode corresponding to each determination result (the movable decorative bodies A and C are normal modes and the movable decorative body B is a special mode). When the timing Rt5b arrives, the "behavior of the movable decorative body that does not conform to the symbol variation" at the time of the occurrence of the RTC state (specific state) is terminated, and the prohibited state for the restoration process on the symbol variation side (prohibited state over timings Rt1 to Rt5b). ) Will be canceled. That is, in this case, for example, when an abnormality has occurred in the movable decorative body B even in the first abnormality determination, the restoration process (restoration operation) according to the first abnormality determination and the second abnormality determination are performed. Each of the operations in a special mode will be executed.

According to such a configuration, even if a movement abnormality occurs during the movement of the movable body immediately before or immediately after the start of the RTC state, a series of movements of the movable body at the time of the occurrence of the RTC state (here, three). (Sequential operation by the movable decorative bodies A, B, and C) can be appropriately executed, and the expectation that the RTC state has occurred can be suitably maintained.

In the example shown in FIG. 305, when there is an abnormality in a plurality of movable decorative bodies in the abnormality determination at the timing Rt2, the restoration process for the movable decorative bodies in the abnormal state is sequentially executed, and then the RTC state is set. It is desirable to execute a series of movable body movements (here, sequential movements by the three movable decorative bodies A, B, and C) at the time of occurrence. In this case, a series of movable body movements when the RTC state occurs (here, sequential movements by the three movable decorative bodies A, B, and C) as the number of movable decorative bodies to be restored is increased. ) Will be delayed over a longer period of time, but it will be possible to perform a series of moving body movements in the normal mode when the RTC state occurs. Restoration operations for a plurality of movable ornaments may be executed in parallel. In this case, it is possible to suppress the delay time until a series of movable body operations are started when the RTC state occurs. become.

However, even in the example shown in FIG. 305, it is a pleasure for the player to feel that the movable decorative body in an abnormal state is performing a predetermined restoration operation. There is a concern that the number will decline. Therefore, in the example shown in FIGS. 305 (f) and 305 (g), when the "restoration operation" is completed, the "sequential operation by the three movable decorative bodies A, B, and C" is executed (sequentially executed). ), So that the series of movable body movements up to the timings Rt5a and Rt5b including the restoration operation appearing at the timing Rt2 can be seen as "a series of moving body movements when the RTC state occurs". It is made difficult to recognize that a predetermined restoration operation is performed on the movable decorative body in an abnormal state.

Therefore, in the pachinko machine 1, when an abnormality occurs in a situation different from these abnormality occurrence situations, it is possible to display (error code, etc.) indicating that an abnormality has occurred in the movable decorative body. In the examples shown in FIGS. 305 (f) and 305 (g) as well as the example shown in 304 (f), during the period during which the restoration operation (restoration process) is executed for the movable decorative body in the abnormal state. An abnormality occurs in the movable decoration during (during the restoration operation according to the first abnormality judgment) or during the period during which the movable decoration B is operated in the special mode (during the operation in the special mode according to the second abnormality judgment). There is no indication (error code, etc.) that indicates that the game is being played. Further, the timing at which the operation in the special mode is started after the operation in the normal mode is completed, the timing at which the operation in the normal mode is started after the operation in the special mode is completed, and further, FIG. At the timing when the three movable decorative bodies A, B, and C start the sequential operation after the restoration operation shown in f) and (g) is completed, the display content on the effect display device 1600 is triggered by the occurrence of these timings. Does not cause any change. These things also make it appear that "a series of movable body movements when the RTC state occurs" is performed, and that a predetermined restoration operation is performed on the movable decorative body in the abnormal state. It can be said that it is important to make it difficult to recognize.

In addition, in FIG. 304 and its alternative example, and in FIG. 305 and its alternative example, as the movable body operation based on the occurrence of the RTC state, the three movable decorative bodies A, B, and C are sequentially operated. The movable decorative body (one, two, or three or more, etc.) used in the movable effect on the symbol change side is based on the establishment of a specific condition different from the game start condition (starting condition). It suffices as long as it is operated in a specific mode at the time of operation of the movable body within the specific state in which it occurs.

Further, as a movable decorative body that can be operated at the time when the movable body operates in such an RTC state (specific state), a frame-side movable decorative body provided on the door frame 3 side (for example, provided so as to be movable). Operation button 410, sword decoration body 5001, etc., and board side movable decoration body provided on the game board 5 side (for example, back front decoration unit 3100, back middle movable production unit 3200, specific decoration member SDY (sudare accessory) ) Etc.) may be used respectively.

However, for example, in FIG. 304 and its alternative example, and in FIG. 305 and its alternative example, as one of the movable decorative bodies that can be operated at the movable body operation time in the RTC state (specific state), as an operating means. When the frame-side movable decoration body (operation button 410, sword decoration body 5001, etc.) that is also used is used, the frame-side movable decoration body that is also used as such an operation means even after the timing Rt2a arrives. There may be a situation in which "operations that do not conform to symbol fluctuations" are being performed.

That is, as described above, in the timing Rt2a, even if it is within the operation period by the movable decorative body corresponding to the occurrence of the RTC state, the display "display that does not show any expectation (from the timing Rt1)" that has been displayed until then. Display) ”is hidden at this point, and a specific background (for example, during the RTC state) after the occurrence of the RTC state (specific state) can appear. After that, when a new symbol variation (C variation (loss) in the figure) is started, even if it is within the operation period by the movable decorative body corresponding to the occurrence of the RTC state, the symbol variation is responded to. It was also mentioned above that the display showing the degree of expectation such as the effect pattern and the notice effect is started as usual. Therefore, during the period in which such a new symbol variation (C variation (loss) in the figure) is performed, the frame-side movable decorative body (operation button 410, sword decoration body 5001, etc.) that is also used as an operating means is used. Even though it is in a state of being subjected to a specific operation according to the occurrence of the RTC state, an operation opportunity may be given to the frame-side movable decorative body which is also used as an operation means depending on the effect pattern. A situation that causes confusion in the production can occur. In addition, in the period of timings Rt2 to Rt2a (furthermore, the period of timings Rt1 to Rt2 before that), only the display that does not conform to the symbol variation (the display that does not show any expectation) appears. Even if the symbol change (C change (loss) in the figure) is performed, the operation opportunity is not given within the period.

Therefore, even though the specific operating means (frame-side movable decorative body) is in a state of being subjected to a specific operation according to the occurrence of the RTC state, the specific operating means is subjected to the result of the jackpot determination. When it is time to give an operation opportunity, the effect display device 1600 displays a specific display (operation instruction image) for prompting the specific operation means to perform an operation. Even if a specific operating means in a state of performing a specific operation is operated, it is desirable not to accept the effect. According to such a configuration, when a specific operation corresponding to the occurrence of the RTC state is executed, the game is in a situation where an operation opportunity is originally given to the specific operation means. It is possible to make appropriate suggestions to the person. In addition, by not accepting the effect of the operation for the specific operation means, it is possible to preferably suppress the occurrence of failure or abnormality due to the operation being performed on the specific operation means in the operating state. It will be expected.

However, during the execution period of the specific operation corresponding to the occurrence of the RTC state, the operation for the specific operation means is not accepted even though the specific display prompting the operation for the specific operation means is performed. If such a thing happens frequently, the game entertainment may be reduced due to the lack of progress in the production. Therefore, among the frame-side movable decorative bodies provided on the door frame 3 side (for example, the operation button 410 provided so as to be movable, the sword decorative body 5001 and the like), the operation effect is performed within the symbol variation according to the jackpot determination. The operation means (for example, the operation button 410) having a relatively high generation rate is not used as one of the movable decorative bodies that can be operated at the time when the movable body operates in the RTC state (specific state). It is desirable to do. In this case, during the operation period of the movable decorative body corresponding to the occurrence of the RTC state, there is an operation opportunity for the operation means (for example, the operation button 410) in which the generation rate of the operation effect within the symbol variation is relatively high. When it is given, it is desirable that the display related to the operation instruction image and the effect reception (predetermined effect according to the effect reception) at the time of operation are executed as usual.

That is, among the frame-side movable decorative bodies provided on the door frame 3 side (for example, the operation button 410 provided so as to be movable (for example, vibration), the sword decorative body 5001 and the like), the symbol changes according to the jackpot determination. A movable decorative body capable of operating a specific operating means (for example, a sword decoration body 5001) having a relatively low rate of occurrence of an operation effect within the movable body at the time when the movable body operates in the RTC state (specific state). By using it as one, the movable decorative body (for example, the sword decorative body 5001) is in a state of being subjected to a specific operation according to the occurrence of the RTC state, but the movable decorative body (for example, the movable decorative body (for example)). For example, it becomes possible to suppress the occurrence of a situation in which the production time for giving an operation opportunity according to the result of the jackpot determination is reached for the sword decoration body 5001).

Further, the frame-side movable decorative body provided on the door frame 3 side (preferably a specific operating means in which the rate of occurrence of the operation effect within the symbol variation is relatively low) is a movable body in the RTC state (specific state). When it is used as one of the movable decorative bodies that can be operated at the time of operation, when the RTC state occurs, the operation is independent of the sequential operation by the above three movable decorative bodies A, B, and C. It is desirable to perform the operation by the frame-side movable decorative body (for example, the sword decorative body 5001). According to such a configuration, a special operation (see FIG. 304) or a restoration operation (see FIG. 305) is executed for any one of the above three movable decorative bodies A, B, and C. However, it becomes possible to perform an operation that does not conform to the symbol variation due to the frame-side movable decorative body (for example, the sword decorative body 5001) without being affected by (delay, etc.) due to these operations. In this case, it is desirable that all of the above three movable decorative bodies A, B, and C be used as board-side movable decorative bodies. As a result, even if any of the above three movable decorative bodies A, B, and C is in the restoration operation, the possibility of interference with the movable decorative body is eliminated, and the door frame 3 side is provided. The operation by the frame-side movable decoration can be executed in parallel.

Then, on this, after the RTC state (specific state) is generated, the frame-side movable decorative body (preferably, the specific operating means (for example, the sword decorative body) in which the occurrence rate of the operation effect within the symbol variation is relatively low is relatively low. When the time required to complete the operation that does not conform to the symbol variation according to 5001)) (the operation according to the occurrence of the RTC state) is set as the "specific time", any of the effect patterns according to the jackpot judgment is executed. Even in this case, as long as at least a "specific time" does not elapse after the symbol variation starts (the effect pattern starts), a predetermined operation opportunity grant timing in the effect pattern (here, the frame side movable decoration). It is desirable to set each effect pattern (timing for giving an operation opportunity) so that the body (for example, the operation opportunity for the sword decoration body 5001) does not arrive.

According to such a configuration, in FIG. 304 and its alternative example, and in FIG. 305 and its alternative example, even if the symbol variation having any effect pattern is started at the timing Rt2a, the symbol variation is within the symbol variation. By the time the operation opportunity is given to the frame-side movable decoration body (for example, the sword decoration body 5001), the operation by the frame-side movable decoration body (corresponding to the occurrence of the RTC state) in response to the occurrence of the RTC state. Since the operation) has already been completed and the effect can be accepted, the effect when the RTC state occurs can be enhanced without sacrificing the effect on the symbol change side.

Further, as described above, in view of the fact that the usual effect control is allowed only for the symbol variation after the symbol variation that is first digested after the RTC state occurs, the frame-side movable decorative body (for example, , The operation that does not conform to the symbol variation due to the sword decoration 5001) (the operation according to the occurrence of the RTC state) can be started based on the occurrence of the RTC state, whereas the RTC state occurs. Since the symbol variation that is first digested after that is forced to start later than this, the frame-side movable ornament (for example, the sword ornament 5001) is corresponding to the delay time (timing Rt2 to Rt2a). ) Allows a margin to complete the operation that does not conform to the symbol variation in advance.

Further, when the operation when the RTC state is generated by the frame-side movable decorative body (for example, the sword decorative body 5001) is executed as an operation independent of the sequential operation by the above three movable decorative bodies A, B, and C. In executing this, it is determined whether or not an abnormality has occurred in the frame-side movable decorative body, and when it is determined that the abnormality has occurred, a special mode including a restoration operation is performed instead of the normal mode operation. It is desirable to execute the operation by the frame-side movable decorative body (for example, the sword decorative body 5001) as the operation of the above, or to perform the operation of the normal mode after performing the restoration operation. In this case, the "special mode including the restoration operation" also restores (returns to the original position) the frame-side movable decoration body (for example, the sword decoration body 5001) by an operation mode different from the "normal operation mode". It may be, for example, the minimum operation mode required for returning to the frame-side movable decoration body (for example, the sword decoration body 5001).

Then, the operation when the RTC state is generated by the frame-side movable decorative body (for example, the sword decorative body 5001) is the "normal mode", the "special mode including the restoration operation", and the "restoration operation". Regardless of which mode of "the mode of performing the operation of the normal mode in the subsequent manner", unless the operation is completed, the frame-side movable decoration body (for example, the sword decoration body 5001) is used. It is more desirable to make settings related to each effect pattern so that the timing at which the operation opportunity is given does not come. According to such a configuration, regardless of which of the effect patterns corresponding to the jackpot determination is executed at the timing Rt2a, the RTC state is generated by the frame-side movable decorative body (for example, the sword decorative body 5001). Regardless of whether the operation is executed in the normal mode or the mode when an abnormality is determined, the frame-side movable decoration (for example, the sword decoration 5001) is provided only after the operation is completed. On the other hand, it becomes possible to give an operation opportunity.

Further, when an operation opportunity for the frame-side movable decorative body (for example, the sword decorative body 5001) is received, at least one of the above three movable decorative bodies A, B, and C is operated based on the effect reception. You may make it possible to execute a specific movable effect. However, in this case, when an operation opportunity is given to the frame-side movable decoration (for example, the sword decoration 5001) within the symbol variation started at the timing Rt2a, the operation by the frame-side movable decoration (RTC). Even if the operation according to the occurrence of the state) has already been completed, if the sequential operation by the above three movable decorative bodies A, B, and C may still be in the middle of execution, the operation opportunity is given. It will not be possible to accept productions, and there is concern that the interest in games will decline. Therefore, when the time from the timing Rt2 required to complete the sequential operation by the three movable decorative bodies A, B, and C in the normal state is set as the "special time", the jackpot determination is made. Regardless of which of the effect patterns according to the above is executed, as long as neither the above "specific time" nor the "special time" elapses after the symbol variation starts (the effect pattern starts). , Each effect pattern (inside operation opportunity grant timing) so that a predetermined operation opportunity grant timing in the effect pattern (here, an operation opportunity for the frame side movable decorative body (for example, the sword ornament 5001) does not come). It is desirable to make the settings related to.

When the frame-side movable decorative body (for example, the sword decorative body 5001) is in an abnormal state within the period of timings Rt1 to Rt2, the frame-side movable decorative body (for example, the sword decorative body 5001) is restored. It is desirable to prohibit the timing Rt2 so that the timing Rt2 arrives while maintaining the abnormal state.

On the other hand, among the above three movable decorative bodies A, B, and C, this is the case for a specific movable decorative body (for example, a movable decorative body A having a fast operation order, a movable decorative body having a long time required for a restoration operation, and the like). When an abnormal state occurs within the period of timings Rt1 to Rt2, the restoration process (restoration operation) for the movable decoration is prohibited, but the movable decoration different from the specific movable decoration (for example, the operation order is slow). For movable decorative body B (or movable decorative body C) or movable decorative body that requires a short time for restoration operation), if this is in an abnormal state within the period of timings Rt1 to Rt2, restoration for the movable decorative body is performed. The process (restoration operation) may be performed without being prohibited. For example, the restoration process (restoration operation) for the movable decoration body B (or the movable decoration body C) does not need to be completed by the timing Rt2, and the movable decoration body A moves when the RTC occurs. This is because if it can be completed during the period, the sequential operation by the above three movable decorative bodies A, B, and C can be executed in the normal state mode.

Further, the timing at which the series of operations of the above three movable decorative bodies A, B, and C are started after the RTC state is generated, and the operation of the frame-side movable decorative body (for example, the sword decorative body 5001) are started. It may be different from the timing.

[Restoration processing for movable abnormalities with less influence on movable effects]
As described above, this pachinko machine 1 (peripheral control MPU1511a) responds to symbol fluctuations when a specific movable decorative body is in an abnormal state (more accurately, a situation in which a specific state has not occurred). When the restoration operation time (for example, the start time or the stop time of the symbol variation) arrives, it is possible to execute a process of causing the specific movable decorative body to perform a predetermined restoration operation. However, if such a restoration process is executed regardless of the situation of the production, it will be a pleasure and there is a concern that the interest of the game will be deteriorated.

For example, it is assumed that the above-mentioned "start time of symbol change" is set as "restoration operation time corresponding to symbol change". Then, as shown in FIG. 306, assuming that the timing tm1 at which a new symbol variation is started has arrived in a situation where a specific movable decorative body is in an abnormal state, at least the following processes are performed in the peripheral control MPU1511a. Will be executed.
-Based on the acquisition of the command sent from the main control MPU1310a side when the symbol variation is started, the effect pattern corresponding to the symbol variation is set, and the set effect pattern is changed. Processing to advance the production ・ Based on the acquisition of the command sent from the main control MPU1310a side when the symbol variation is started (based on the arrival of the restoration operation time corresponding to the symbol variation), it is specified. Processing to perform a predetermined restoration operation on the movable decorative body of

Here, in the example shown in FIG. 306, it is assumed that "a specific effect pattern capable of operating a specific movable decorative body at a specific timing tm2 within the symbol variation" is set as the effect pattern. Therefore, when the timing tm1 arrives, the effect progress related to the "specific effect pattern in which the specific movable ornament can be operated at the specific timing tm2 within the symbol variation" and the predetermined restoration operation for the specific movable ornament are performed. A situation will appear in which the processing to be performed is parallel to each other.

In general, in the pachinko machine 1 in which such a specific effect pattern can be executed, an effect pattern (relatively expected degree) that has an effect paired relationship with the specific effect pattern. Low production pattern) is prepared. Then, in the effect pattern having a paired relationship (the effect pattern having a relatively low expectation), the specific movable decorative body is not operated at the specific timing tm2 within the symbol variation, but the specific timing tm2 is reached. It is made so that the same mode of production as in the case of "a specific effect pattern in which a specific movable decorative body can be operated at a specific timing tm2 within the symbol variation (a production pattern with a relatively high expectation)" is performed. NS. In this way, by preparing two effect patterns (an effect pattern that operates a specific movable decorative body and an effect pattern that does not operate a specific movable decorative body) that are in a paired relationship in a directing manner, the specific timing tm2 is reached. (For example, a predetermined time until the specific timing tm2 arrives) is a predetermined effect having a color rendering property as to whether or not a specific movable decorative body operates (for example, an effect display indicating whether or not the specific movable ornament operates). Will become feasible, and the game entertainment will be suitably maintained by such a color rendering index.

However, if there is a case where the process of causing the specific movable decoration to perform the predetermined restoration operation is still in the execution state even when the specific timing tm2 arrives after the symbol variation is started, the specific timing is specified. Despite the arrival of tm2, it becomes clear that the specific movable decorative body is in a situation where it cannot perform a directing operation. That is, in this case, even if the predetermined effect is performed at the specific timing tm2 within the symbol variation, the function as the predetermined effect having the effect of whether or not the specific movable decorative body operates may be lost. , There is a concern that the color rendering index will decline.

Therefore, in the example shown in FIG. 306, among the effect patterns, the effect progress related to "a specific effect pattern capable of operating a specific movable decorative body at a specific timing tm2" and a predetermined effect for the specific movable decorative body. When a situation appears in which the process of performing the restore operation (restoration process based on the restore operation time corresponding to the symbol fluctuation) is performed in parallel, "specific" is "specific" until the specific timing tm2 arrives regardless of the restore status. The process of causing the movable decorative body to perform a predetermined restoration operation "is completed. It should be noted that various methods can be adopted as the "process of causing a specific movable decorative body to perform a predetermined restoration operation", but in the following explanation, "whether the abnormal state is resolved or not" The process in which the restoration operation for a specific movable ornament is repeatedly performed until a predetermined upper limit is reached ”will be described.

More specifically, with respect to the "process of causing a specific movable decoration to perform a predetermined restoration operation", the restoration from the abnormal state is completed depending on the degree to which the specific movable decoration is abnormal. The time required for this to be done will be different. For example, when the abnormal state is resolved and the original position is restored (restored) only by executing the first restoration operation for a specific movable decoration, "a predetermined restoration for a specific movable decoration" is performed. The timing tx at which the "processing to perform the operation" is completed also arrives at a relatively early time, but the number of times this is repeated until the restoration operation for a specific movable ornament fails and is restored (restored) is performed. As the number increases, the timing tx at which the "process of causing a specific movable ornament to perform a predetermined restoration operation" is completed is postponed in a delayed manner. And at the latest, when the restoration operation for a specific movable decoration has failed and has not been restored (restored) yet, but the timing tx is exceeded when the restoration operation is executed again, the specific movable decoration By terminating the process of performing the predetermined restoration operation while keeping the body in an abnormal state, the process of performing the predetermined restoration operation until the specific timing tm arrives regardless of the restoration status is completed. Will be.

In addition, when it is assumed that x time is required to perform the restoration operation for a specific movable decorative body once, one symbol is established so that the relationship "x time x n times <time of timing tm1 to tm2" is established. The upper limit number n of repeating the predetermined restoration operation within the fluctuation is set, and the process of performing the predetermined restoration operation is terminated even if the restoration (restoration) is not performed when the upper limit number n is reached. By doing so, the process of performing a predetermined restoration operation may be completed before the arrival of the specific timing tm2 regardless of the restoration status.

According to such a configuration, the effect progress related to the specific effect pattern capable of operating the specific movable decorative body at the specific timing tm2 within the symbol variation and the predetermined restoration operation for the specific movable decorative body are performed in parallel. When a certain situation appears, the process of performing a predetermined restoration operation is completed before the arrival of the specific timing tm2 regardless of the restoration status. That is, in this case, not only when the specific movable decoration is restored before the arrival of the specific timing tm2, but also when the specific movable decoration is not restored, the specific timing tm2 is specific. Since the movable decorative body is brought into a stopped state, it is possible to suitably maintain the effectability of whether or not the specific movable decorative body operates when the specific timing tm2 arrives. become. For example, even if a specific movable decoration is stopped at a position different from the original position, some behavior may occur when the specific timing tm2 arrives, or the movable decoration does not operate. Even so, it is possible to give hope that the lamp of the movable decoration may emit light (if the lamp of the movable decoration emits light when the effect operation by the movable decoration is performed). ..

However, in reality, if a specific movable decorative body is performing a restoration operation while the above-mentioned predetermined effect is being performed, it has a color rendering property as to whether or not the specific movable decorative body operates. The function as the predetermined effect may be lost. Therefore, the timing tx at which the "process of causing a specific movable decorative body to perform a predetermined restoration operation" is completed before the predetermined effect is started regardless of the restoration status. It can be said that it is more desirable to maintain the game entertainment.

As a predetermined effect, for example, a specific movable decorative body operates when a specific display result (for example, a display result hit by an attack) appears in the super reach effect, and operates if the specific display result does not appear. When it is provided as "not", it is possible to exemplify "a display effect that appears in advance in a form that incites whether or not a specific display result appears", and a specific movable decorative body is "a display effect". When it is provided as "a thing that operates based on the fact that the effect is accepted by the operation by the player (or the effect is accepted but does not operate)", "an effect that causes a specific display that encourages the player to operate" appears. Can be exemplified.

Here, in the example shown in FIG. 306, the specific movable decoration recovers (restores) from the abnormal state at the timing tx when the "process of causing the specific movable decoration to perform a predetermined restoration operation" is completed. It is assumed that it will be in a normal state. In this way, even if the state is abnormal at the start of the fluctuation (or the "restoration operation time" such as when the previous symbol was stopped), the specific timing tm2 within the symbol variation arrives after the state is restored to the normal state. Then, it becomes possible to produce and operate a specific movable decorative body at the specific timing tm2.

On the other hand, at the timing tx when the "process of causing a specific movable decoration to perform a predetermined restoration operation" is completed, the specific movable decoration cannot recover (restore) from the abnormal state and remains in the abnormal state. When the specific timing tm2 within the symbol variation arrives, the stopped state is maintained at least from the specific timing tm2 (more accurately, the timing tx) until the symbol variation ends and the next restoration operation time arrives. It becomes. That is, in this case, although it is not possible to produce the specific movable decorative body at the specific timing tm2, it is possible to preferably maintain the effectability of whether or not the specific movable decorative body operates. When the specific effect pattern is based on the jackpot fluctuation, the jackpot symbol is stopped even though the specific movable decorative body does not perform the effect at the specific timing tm2, thereby providing a surprise effect. You will be able to do it.

However, in recent years, pachinko machines have come to be provided with movable ornaments that have a more complicated structure and perform multi-step movements, and such movable ornaments have a longer time to complete as a restoration process. It often takes time. However, on the other hand, in a specific effect pattern in which a specific movable decorative body can be operated at a specific timing tm2 within the symbol variation, or an effect pattern that is in a pair relationship with the specific effect pattern, when those effect patterns are started. Even if the specific movable decorative body is in an abnormal state, it is within a time shorter than the time required from the start of the symbol variation to the arrival of the specific timing tm2 (more preferably, the time until the predetermined effect is performed). As described above, it is required to end the process of causing a specific movable decorative body to perform a predetermined restoration operation. That is, in this case, every time a specific movable decoration becomes abnormal, it can be restored only in a simple and first-aid manner, which accelerates the deterioration of the specific movable decoration. It can also be.

Therefore, in the pachinko machine 1 (peripheral control MPU1511a) according to this embodiment, a special effect pattern (effect pattern for restoration / diagnosis) is prepared, and when the symbol variation is started, the main control MPU1310a side When the special effect pattern is selected based on the command to be sent, a specific movable state is performed while the special effect pattern is produced (while the symbol variation corresponding to the special effect pattern is performed). It is controlled so that the decorative body is not operated and a predetermined effect (for example, an effect display indicating whether or not the decorative body is operated) does not appear. Then, as shown in FIGS. 307A (a) and 307A (d), as a result of the arrival of the timing tm11 at which the symbol variation is started in the situation where the specific movable decorative body is in an abnormal state, the effect progress related to the special effect pattern. And when a situation appears in which the process of causing a specific movable decorative body to perform a predetermined restoration operation is performed in parallel, at least while a special effect pattern is being performed (the period until the symbol is stopped). Allows this to continue without terminating the restore process.

More specifically, in the restoration process started from the timing tm11, the abnormal state is resolved and the original position is restored (restored) only by executing the first restoration operation for the specific movable decorative body. Even in this case, the restoration process is not terminated at least while the special effect pattern is being performed, and the restoration process for the specific movable ornament is executed for the entire period thereof.

According to such a configuration, when the specific movable decorative body is in an abnormal state, the restoration process in a more full-scale manner (for example, normal diagnosis even after restoration) is performed aiming at the time when the above-mentioned special effect pattern is performed. Since it will be possible to perform additional operations, etc.), this special effect pattern will function as an effect pattern for restoration / diagnosis, and the player will be carefully restored in this way. You will be able to enjoy the subsequent production with peace of mind by watching the situation. In this sense, it is desirable to prepare a special production pattern so that it can be selected only when the player loses the prize in the big hit judgment. In addition, it is desirable that a unique display mode such as "This is an effect pattern for restoration / diagnosis. Please wait for a while" appears as the display content on the effect display device 1600.

Moreover, in the pachinko machine 1 (peripheral control MPU1511a) according to this embodiment, as shown in FIGS. 307A (a) and 307A (d), the timing tm11 arrives when a specific movable decorative body is in an abnormal state. When the special effect pattern is performed, the restoration process started at the timing tm11 is not terminated and is continued even after the timing tm12 at which the special effect pattern is terminated. With such a configuration, the restriction that "even though an abnormality has occurred in a specific movable decorative body, the restoration process must be executed for each unit in which the symbol changes" is eliminated. Therefore, it becomes possible to perform the restoration process in a more full-scale manner.

However, at the timing tm12 when the special effect pattern ends, if the hold digestion is not interrupted and the effect pattern corresponding to the new symbol variation is performed, the next restoration operation time (here, the next time) The time to start changing the design) will come. At this time, if the restoration process started at the timing tm11 is still being continued, it is determined that the specific movable ornament is still in an abnormal state (for example, it is not located in the original position). Will be done. Then, based on the determination, if the restoration process for a specific movable decorative body is newly started, it can be substantially completed within the time when one symbol change is performed. Since only the restoration process can be performed, the content of the process is naturally limited, and the inability to adequately deal with the abnormality may accelerate the deterioration of the specific movable decorative body. ..

In this respect, in the pachinko machine 1 (peripheral control MPU1511a) according to this embodiment, as shown in FIGS. 307A (b) and 307A (d), the restoration process for a specific movable decorative body is being executed. Occasionally, when the next restoration operation time (here, the next symbol change start time) arrives, the restoration process in the running state is not terminated and this is continued in a form that straddles the next restoration operation time. .. According to such a configuration, no matter what the situation is when the restoration process for a specific movable decoration is being executed, "despite the fact that an abnormality has occurred in the specific movable decoration". Since the restriction that "the restoration process must be executed for each unit in which the symbol changes are performed" is eliminated, it becomes possible to perform the restoration process in a more full-scale manner.

However, as shown in FIGS. 307A (c) and 307 (d), the new symbol variation is started as a result of the start of the new symbol variation while the restoration process for a specific movable decorative body is being executed. As a result, "a specific effect pattern capable of operating a specific movable decorative body at a specific timing tm2 within the symbol variation" may appear. Therefore, as shown in FIGS. 307A (a) to 307 (c), it is started from the timing tm11 regardless of the game or production status (further, restoration status, etc.) after the special production pattern is completed. With respect to the timing tx at which the "process of causing a specific movable decorative body to perform a predetermined restoration operation" is completed, the time required until the specific timing tm2 within the next symbol variation arrives (more preferably). It is desirable to finish within a time shorter than the time until the predetermined effect is performed). Even with such a configuration, in addition to the time of timing tm11 to tm12 (time required for digesting the special effect pattern), the specific movable time is relatively long until the time of timing tm12 to tx ends. It will be possible to continue the restoration process for the ornament.

If a situation appears in which the special effect pattern (restoration / diagnosis effect pattern) is continuously executed after the special effect pattern (restoration / diagnosis effect pattern) is completed, the effect is described. The restoration process is not completed within the new special effect pattern (effect pattern for restoration / diagnosis), and the restoration process is straddled three or more times (effect pattern). One restoration process may be continued in a form (the restoration process spans two or more restoration operation periods).

In the example shown in FIG. 307A, the specific movable decoration is restored (restored) from the abnormal state and is normal at the timing tx when the "process of causing the specific movable decoration to perform a predetermined restoration operation" is completed. It is assumed that it will be in a state. In this way, by continuing one restoration process across the next restoration operation period (here, the next symbol change start time), it is a serious abnormal state that could not be restored in the past. However, this can be made recoverable, and it becomes possible to produce a specific movable decorative body at a specific timing tm2.

On the other hand, despite the fact that one restoration process is continued across the next restoration operation period (here, the next symbol change start time), a specific movable ornament is abnormal at timing tx. When the state cannot be restored (restored), the stopped state is maintained until the symbol variation is completed from the timing tx and the next restoration operation time is further reached. That is, in this case, although it is not possible to produce the specific movable decorative body at the specific timing tm2, it is possible to preferably maintain the effectability of whether or not the specific movable decorative body operates. When the specific effect pattern is based on the jackpot fluctuation, the jackpot symbol is stopped even though the specific movable decorative body does not perform the effect at the specific timing tm2, thereby providing a surprise effect. You will be able to do it.

In a situation where the specific movable decorative body is in an abnormal state and the restoration process for the specific movable decorative body is not executed, the specific movable decorative body is specified each time the restoration operation time (here, the symbol change start time) comes. If the restoration process for the movable decoration is started many times, if the specific movable decoration is irreparably damaged, the specific movable decoration cannot be restored, but the specific movable decoration cannot be restored. There is a concern that the interest in the game will decline as the restoration process for the body is repeated. Therefore, even though the restoration operation time has reached a predetermined upper limit after the specific movable decoration is put into an abnormal state (the number of executions of the restoration process (specific movable decoration) reaches the predetermined upper limit). However, when it has not been restored from the abnormal state, it is desirable not to newly start the restoration process for a specific movable ornament even if a new restoration operation time comes after that.

However, on the other hand, after a specific movable decorative body is put into an abnormal state, only a special effect pattern (effect pattern for restoration / diagnosis) is continuously executed (started) for the above predetermined upper limit number of times. , When a situation appears in which an effect pattern (for example, a specific effect pattern) different from the special effect pattern (effect pattern for restoration / diagnosis) is executed, a predetermined upper limit number of special effect patterns and their One restoration process may be continued in a form straddling the next production pattern. That is, in this case, after the specific movable decorative body is put into the abnormal state, the restoration operation time has reached a predetermined upper limit number, but the restoration operation has not been performed from the abnormal state. Even when the +1 "th restoration operation time arrives, the restoration process for a specific movable ornament is continued without being completed. In this way, with respect to the mode in which one restoration process is continued across the restoration operation period, the predetermined upper limit number may be reached no matter how many times the restoration operation period arrives while the one restoration operation is continued. It is desirable that the count is treated as one restoration process so that the restoration process is not completed so that the restoration process in a more full-scale manner is not hindered.

By the way, regarding such a restoration process (a restoration process performed based on a restoration operation time corresponding to a symbol variation), a board-side movable decorative body (for example, a back front decoration unit 3100 or a back) provided on the game board 5 side is provided. In addition to the medium movable production unit 3200, the specific decorative member SDY (sudare), etc.), the frame-side movable decorative body provided on the door frame 3 side is basically executed in the same manner as described above. NS. However, among the frame-side movable decorative bodies provided on the door frame 3 side, the frame-side movable decorative bodies (for example, the operation buttons 410 provided so as to be movable, the sword decorative body 5001 and the like) that are also used as the operating means are , It is possible to restore (return) in a manner different from the case of the specific movable decorative body (board side movable decorative body) described above.

For example, in the pachinko machine 1 (peripheral control MPU1511a) according to this embodiment, as described above, a movable operation for giving an operation opportunity to give an operation opportunity to the sword decoration body 5001 is executed during the period when the symbol is changed. A system effect pattern (for example, the effect pattern shown in FIG. 252) is prepared. And, as described above, in such an operation opportunity granting effect, "a process of moving the sword decoration body 5001 from the original position to the operation position by a predetermined driving force (see FIG. 252 (f))". "Process to generate the production reception period for the sword decoration 5001 (see FIG. 252 (f))", and "display prompting the operation (character display such as" push "and bar display indicating the remaining time of the production reception period" ) (See FIG. 252 (f)) ”is performed respectively. As a result, when the sword decoration body 5001 that has been moved to the operation position is operated (here, a pushing operation) and the production is received, the "specific decoration member SDY (sudare accessory)" is received based on the production reception. ) And the process of producing a movable decorative body on the board side (see FIG. 252 (g)) and the process of causing a change in the displayed contents (see FIG. 252 (g)). Become. The board-side movable decorative body that is produced by this process may be the specific movable decorative body described with reference to FIGS. 306 and 307A.

However, among such operation opportunity granting effects, the "process of moving the sword decoration body 5001 from the original position to the operation position by a predetermined driving force" is not executed normally when the sword decoration body 5001 is in an abnormal state. While it is possible to execute when it is in the state, the sword decoration 5001 is in the normal state for the "process to generate the effect reception period for the sword decoration 5001" and the "process to display the operation prompting". It is made feasible at both a certain time and an abnormal state. Therefore, in the effect pattern of the movable operation system, even if the sword decoration body 5001 is in an abnormal state, when the player who sees the "display prompting the operation" operates the sword decoration body 5001 and receives the effect, the effect is received. "Processing for producing a movable decorative body on the board side such as a specific decorative member SDY (sudare)" and "processing for causing a change in the display content of the effect display device 1600" are performed, respectively. Not only that, in the production pattern of the movable operation system, even if the sword decoration body 5001 is in an abnormal state, the sword decoration body 5001 receives an external force by such an operation by the player and the operation part operates, so that the abnormal state is obtained. Can occur in some cases.

Therefore, in the pachinko machine 1 (peripheral control MPU1511a) according to this embodiment, a frame-side movable decorative body (for example, an operation button 410 provided so as to be movable, a sword decorative body 5001 or the like) that is also used as an operating means is used. In the embodiment described with reference to FIGS. 306 and 307A, a return process for applying a driving force for returning the frame-side movable decorative body (operating means) to the original position when an abnormal state occurs. The restoration process) is performed at each timing of "the above-mentioned restoration operation time (here, the start time of the symbol variation)" and "after the production is received by the player in the production pattern of the movable operation system". It is made feasible.

According to such a configuration, when the board-side movable decorative body is in an abnormal state, the board-side movable body can be moved by aiming at the timing at the start or stop of the symbol fluctuation (more strictly, after the start or stop). While the process of returning the decorative body is performed, when the frame-side movable decorative body is in an abnormal state, not only the timing at the start and stop of the symbol change, but also a different unique timing (during the change period). Of these, the frame-side movable decoration (operation) is aimed at the timing when an external force (operation by the player) is applied to the frame-side movable decoration (operation means) and the abnormal state may be resolved). Since the process of restoring (restoring) the means) will be performed, it is expected that the return to the original position of the frame-side movable decoration (operating means) in an abnormal state can be realized at an early stage. ..

FIG. 308 is a time chart showing an example of processing until the sword decoration body 5001 is returned to its original position when the sword decoration body 5001 is used as such a frame-side movable decoration body (operating means). be.

As shown in FIG. 308, the effect pattern of the movable operation system (the effect pattern in which the operation opportunity giving effect for giving the operation opportunity to the sword decoration 5001 is executed during the period when the design is changed) is executed. It is assumed that the "process of moving the sword decoration body 5001 from the original position to the operation position" is executed at the timing tm21. Then, when the sword decoration body 5001 is in the operation position, "a process for generating an effect reception period for the sword decoration body 5001" and "a display prompting the operation (character display such as" push "and the effect reception period". When the sword decoration body 5001 is operated by the player and the production is accepted (timing tm22) while the remaining time of the sword decoration is being executed (timing tm22), "specific decoration member SDY (sudare), etc." The "process of causing the effect operation of the movable decorative body on the board side" and the "process of causing a change in the display contents of the effect display device 1600" are performed, respectively. In the example shown in FIG. 308, the specific movable decorative body described with reference to FIGS. 306 and 307A is operated as the board-side movable decorative body based on the reception of the effect.

In this regard, in the example shown in FIG. 308, an abnormality occurs in the sword decoration body 5001 at the timing tm22 when the production reception is received, and the sword decoration body 5001 cannot be returned to the original position. It is assumed that another abnormality occurs in the body (movable decorative body on the board side) and this cannot be returned to the original position. At this time, it is determined that an abnormality has occurred in the sword decoration body 5001 and a determination that an abnormality has occurred in a specific movable decoration body, but an abnormality has occurred in the specific movable decoration body. Regarding the determination to that effect, neither the specific notification sound nor the display notification accompanying this is executed, and the specific notification sound and display are accompanied by the determination that an abnormality has occurred in the sword decoration body 5001. It is desirable that at least one of the notifications be made. This is because the sword decoration 5001 is "placed within the reach of the player (door frame 3)", and if it is notified that this has become an abnormal state, repair work from the abnormal state can be performed. While it is expected to be done by the player, the specific movable ornament is "placed out of reach of the player (game board 5)", and this has become an abnormal state. This is because, as a player, nothing can be helped by notifying the player, and simply emphasizing that the movable effect is not executed may promote a decline in the interest of the game. However, it is desirable that such notification be terminated when a predetermined time has elapsed.

Furthermore, in the example shown in FIG. 308, an abnormality is found in the specific movable decorative body while performing the "process for producing and operating the specific movable decorative body" based on the fact that the effect is received at the timing tm22. Although it will occur, by allowing this to be executed as usual for the "process that causes a change in the display content of the effect display device 1600", it is recognized that an abnormality has occurred in a specific movable decorative body. It is desirable to make it difficult. After that, the effect pattern of the movable operation system is advanced while the sword ornament 5001 and the specific movable ornament are both in an abnormal state, and the symbol variation is stopped at the timing tm23. ..

In the example shown in FIG. 308, at the timing tm23, the symbol fluctuation already in the pending state is immediately digested (started) (for example, after 0.6 seconds), and the new symbol is started. It is assumed that the specific effect pattern described with reference to FIG. 306 is executed as the effect pattern according to the fluctuation. That is, in the specific effect pattern, the specific movable decorative body is produced at the timing tm2 when a predetermined time has elapsed from the start of the symbol variation, but the restoration operation time (here, at the start of the symbol variation). The timing tx at which the "process of causing a specific movable ornament to perform a predetermined restoration operation" is completed, which is started in (), is within a time shorter than the timing tm2 (more preferably, regardless of the restoration status). As described above, it is finished by (until the predetermined production is started).

In this regard, in the pachinko machine 1 (peripheral control MPU1511a) according to this embodiment, the sword decoration body 5001 is also "specifically movable decoration" based on the arrival of the restoration operation time (here, when the symbol change starts). It is possible to execute a process of causing the body to perform a predetermined restoration operation and at least a part of the operations in parallel so as to return the operation to the original position (giving a driving force). Moreover, the timing at which such a "process for causing the sword decoration body 5001 to perform a predetermined restoration operation" is also the same, regardless of the restoration situation, within a time shorter than the timing tm2 (more preferably, a predetermined effect). It is made to end by (until it starts).

According to such a configuration, when the abnormal state of the specific movable ornament is resolved and the movable effect by the specific movable ornament is performed at the timing tm2, the restoration operation by the sword ornament 5001 is performed. Since there is no such thing as being continued, it becomes possible to avoid the occurrence of excitement when the restoration operation and the movable effect are performed in parallel.

In the example shown in FIG. 308, the timing at which the restoration process for the specific movable ornament body is started / ended is the same as the timing at which the restoration process for the sword ornament body 5001 is started / ended. However, only one of those timings may be the same, or all of those timings may be different.

Further, regarding the "process of causing a specific movable decorative body to perform a predetermined restoration operation", as described with reference to FIG. 307A, when a special effect pattern (effect pattern for restoration / diagnosis) appears. Not only can it be continued after the special effect pattern ends, but also the symbol fluctuations that are on hold after the special effect pattern ends are immediately (for example, 0.6 seconds later) digested (started). In such a situation, when the next restoration operation time (here, the next symbol change start time) is crossed, the processing (one restoration processing) can be continued without being completed. It is desirable that the process of causing the decorative body 5001 to perform a predetermined restoration operation can be performed in the same manner as this (the mode described with reference to FIG. 307A). That is, in this case, also for the "process of causing the sword decoration body 5001 to perform a predetermined restoration operation", when a special effect pattern appears, the next restoration operation time (here, the next symbol change start time) is straddled. It will be executed in the form, but it should be terminated regardless of the restoration situation between the start of the next symbol change and the elapse of the time required for the timing tm2 to arrive. Become.

In addition, after the sword decoration body 5001 is put into an abnormal state, only a special effect pattern (effect pattern for restoration / diagnosis) is continuously executed for a predetermined upper limit number of times, and then a special effect pattern (effect pattern for restoration / diagnosis) is executed. When a situation appears in which an effect pattern (for example, a specific effect pattern) different from the effect pattern for restoration / diagnosis is executed, the special effect pattern for a predetermined upper limit number and the next effect pattern are straddled. Form The restoration process for the sword ornament 5001 may be continued.

Then, in the example shown in FIG. 308, it is assumed that the restoration process for the specific movable ornament and the restoration process for the sword ornament 5001 are completed at the timing tx, but the restoration fails in both cases. Therefore, at the timing tm2, the sword decoration body 5001 and the specific movable decoration body are both in an abnormal state, and the specific production pattern is produced and advanced without performing the movable production by the specific movable decoration body. Therefore, the symbol variation is stopped at the timing tm24.

In the pachinko machine 1 (peripheral control MPU1511a) according to this embodiment, an external force (does not apply a driving force by a motor or the like) is applied to a specific movable decorative body within a period of timings tx to tm2 within a specific effect pattern. Even if it is returned to the original position (returned to the normal state) by the above, the effect operation by the specific movable decorative body is not performed at the timing tm2. That is, it can be said that an external force (without applying a driving force by a motor or the like) is applied to a specific movable decorative body within the period of timing tx to tm2, which itself is an abnormal situation. In such an unreliable situation, even if a specific movable decorative body is used for the effect, there is a high possibility that it will fail. It can be said that it is desirable to do so.

Further, when the restoration process for the sword decoration body 5001 fails and the abnormal state is restored again, it is desirable that neither the specific notification sound nor the display notification is performed. That is, if the restoration process for the sword decoration body 5001 fails and a notification is given each time the abnormal state is restored, it gives a misunderstanding as if the player is responsible for not eliminating the abnormal state. Since there is a possibility, the above-mentioned notification (at least one of the specific notification sound and the display notification) should be performed only when the first abnormality that changes from the normal state to the abnormal state occurs to encourage the player to perform the repair work. Is desirable.

Further, in the example shown in FIG. 308, the sword decoration body 5001 and the specific movable decoration body are subjected to the restoration process triggered by any restoration operation time (here, the symbol fluctuation start time) that arrives after the timing tm24. It is assumed that only a specific movable decorative body recovers from the abnormal state. Now, while only the sword decoration body 5001 is in the abnormal state, the effect pattern of the movable operation system is performed again, and as shown in FIG. 308, the sword decoration body 5001 that was in the abnormal state at the timing tm25 Assuming that the production is accepted by the operation by the player, it is possible to expect that the abnormality generated in the sword decoration body 5001 has been eliminated by such an operation.

Therefore, in the pachinko machine 1 (peripheral control MPU1511a) according to this embodiment, when the sword decoration body 5001 that was in an abnormal state at the timing tm25 is received for production by the operation by the player, the sword decoration body 5001 is subsequently used. It is possible to apply a driving force to return it to the position (retain it in the original position). At this time, in view of the fact that the movable effect by the specific movable ornament is performed based on the effect reception, the period during which the process of applying the driving force to return the sword ornament 5001 to the original position is performed (once). (Period when the return operation is successful) is generated after the movable effect by the specific movable ornament is started, and the movable effect by the specific movable ornament is finished (the specific movable ornament is returned to the original position). It is desirable to terminate the process before the process is executed in order to make it difficult to recognize that such a return process is being executed. However, in view of the fact that there is a rare chance that the sword decoration body 5001 that could not be returned by such an external force (operation by the player) has a high possibility of recovery, the sword decoration body 5001 is placed in its original position. If the process of applying the driving force to return to the sword decoration body (returning operation to the sword decoration body 5001) fails, the sword decoration body 5001 is used until the period after the movable effect by the specific movable decoration body is completed. By continuously executing the process of applying the driving force so as to return to the position (the return operation for the sword decoration body 5001 is executed again), the player can easily recognize the abnormal situation. It is desirable to encourage help. However, even if this restoration process fails, it is desirable that neither the specific notification sound nor the display notification is performed.

Then, in the example shown in FIG. 308, it is assumed that the return process (return to the original position) for the sword decoration body 5001 using such an external force (operation by the player) is successful, and after that, it is assumed. , The sword decoration body 5001 and the specific movable decoration body are both in the normal state, and the effect pattern of the movable operation system is produced and progressed, and the symbol variation is stopped at the timing tm26.

As described above, according to the example shown in FIG. 308, the frame-side movable decoration (sword decoration 5001), which is also used as the operating means, is set with respect to the board-side movable decoration (specific movable decoration). In addition to the restoration operation time (at the start of symbol fluctuation) to be performed, the restoration operation time (timing after the production is accepted) using an external force (operation by the player) is set. That is, the frame-side movable decorative body (sword decorative body 5001), which is also used as an operating means, is likely to be in an abnormal state because it may be directly contacted by the player, but even if it is in an abnormal state, it is the original. Since a large number of opportunities for returning to the position are given and various modes (a mode of returning only by applying a driving force, a mode of returning by using at least an external force) are used as the returning method, the abnormal state is eliminated. There is a high possibility that the game will be less enjoyable.

Regarding the process of applying the driving force for returning the sword decoration body 5001 to the original position after the sword decoration body 5001 in the abnormal state is received for the production by the operation by the player, the symbol variation starts. A driving force may be applied to the sword decoration body 5001 with contents (different operation modes) different from the restoration process performed when the time (for example, timing tm23) arrives. That is, since the processing is to restore the sword decoration body 5001 by using an external force (operation by the player), it is necessary to perform the processing differently from the processing when the external force is not used. It can be said that it is desirable to increase the probability. In addition, the processing will be executed in a simple manner so that the restoration processing will be completed within the symbol fluctuation regardless of the restoration status, and if the restoration fails, it will be more serious at the next restoration operation time. It is desirable to ensure that the return processing is performed properly.

Further, in the example shown in FIG. 308, the restoration operation time (here, the symbol fluctuation start time) has reached a predetermined upper limit number, and the restoration process for the sword decoration body 5001 has been executed for that number of times. Nevertheless, it is not restored from the abnormal state, and even if a new restoration operation time (here, the symbol change start time) arrives, it is movable when the restoration process for the sword ornament 5001 is not newly started. Even when the production pattern of the operation system is started and the sword decoration body 5001 in an abnormal state at the timing tm25 is received by the operation by the player, the sword decoration body 5001 is displayed after the production reception is received. It is desirable to perform a process of applying a driving force so as to return to the original position (retain in the original position). That is, as described above, the return process after the production is accepted is performed when the possibility of return of the sword decoration body 5001 that could not be returned by an external force (operation by the player) is increasing. Therefore, even in the above-mentioned situation where the return without external force is given up, it is desirable to execute the process without giving up. Therefore, "a process for generating an effect reception period for the sword decoration 5001 (see FIG. 252 (f))" and "a display prompting an operation (a character display such as" push "and a bar indicating the remaining time of the effect reception period". It is important that the process of performing the display) (see FIG. 252 (f)) ”is also performed as usual even in the above-mentioned situation where the recovery without an external force is given up.

Further, when the sword decoration body 5001 is given a first operation opportunity so as to be pushed in while being positioned at the operation position (operate to a specific detection position), and when the sword decoration body 5001 is in the original position, it is pushed (to a specific detection position). When the operation means is provided so as to give a second operation opportunity so as to operate), even if a production reception occurs at the second operation opportunity for the sword decoration body 5001 in an abnormal state. The driving force for returning to the original position is not given, but the driving force for returning to the original position is given only when the production reception occurs at the first operation opportunity for the sword decoration body 5001 in the abnormal state. It is desirable to do so. That is, even if the effect is received when the second operation opportunity is given, the amount of movement of the operation portion is relatively small, so it is expected that the possibility that the abnormal state has been resolved is naturally low.

Further, the process of applying the driving force for returning the sword decoration body 5001 to the original position after the sword decoration body 5001 in the abnormal state is received by the operation by the player is not necessarily the production reception. It does not have to be executed on the condition that it has been performed. For example, it may be executed after the production reception period ends.

In the examples shown in FIGS. 304 to 308, the symbol fluctuation start time (further, the timing after the reception of the production) is illustrated as the restoration operation timing corresponding to the symbol fluctuation, but the restoration operation timing is described. , It may be a predetermined timing that arrives on condition that the symbol change is executed at least, and may be used as at least one of the symbol change start time and the symbol change stop time, for example. When the symbol fluctuation stop timing is used as the restoration operation timing corresponding to the symbol fluctuation, the restoration process is started based on the command sent from the main control MPU1310a side when the symbol fluctuation is stopped, and this start. The restored process is terminated before the timing tm2 in the specific effect pattern that has been held and digested arrives, or is executed so as to straddle until after the end of the special effect pattern that has been reserved and digested. Each of the above-mentioned processes will be performed.

Further, the frequency of appearance of the special effect pattern (effect pattern for restoration / diagnosis) may be different depending on the state of the game. For example, when a special effect state in which the movement frequency of the movable decorative body is increased occurs, an abnormal state is more likely to occur as the operation frequency is increased. Therefore, in the special effect state, the normal effect state is generated. It is desirable to enable the game so that the appearance frequency of the special effect pattern (effect pattern for restoration / diagnosis) is higher than that in the case of.

By the way, in the pachinko machine 1 (peripheral control MPU1511a) according to this embodiment, a frame-side movable decorative body (for example, a sword decorative body 5001) or a specific movable decorative body, which is also used as an operating means, is in an abnormal state. Occasionally, when the above-mentioned special effect pattern (effect pattern for restoration / diagnosis) is performed, as shown in FIG. 307A, the abnormal state is reached for a period from the start of the effect pattern according to the next symbol variation. One restoration process for the movable ornaments in is continuously feasible. However, in this case, even if a new restoration operation time (for example, a symbol change start time) arrives while one restoration process is continuously executed, the restoration process for the movable decorative body in the abnormal state is again performed. Since it is not started and the restoration process that is already in the execution state is continued without being terminated, it is movable different from the movable decoration that is the target of the restoration process. The problem is when to start the restoration process for the other movable decorative body when the decorative body is newly in an abnormal state.

For example, in the example shown in FIG. 307A, the restoration process for a specific movable decorative body started at the timing tm11 is a new restoration operation time (next) after the arrival of the timing tm12 at which the special effect pattern ends. It is designed to be continuously executed without ending even when straddling (the start time of the symbol change). In this regard, a new abnormality has occurred in a movable decorative body other than the specific movable decorative body between the time when the timing tm11 elapses and the time when a new restoration operation time (the start time of the next symbol change) arrives. In the case, at least one of the following methods 1 to 3 or "both method 1 and method 2" or "both method 1 and method 3" is adopted to perform restoration processing on the other movable decorative body. It is desirable to execute.

Method 1: Specify at least when there is a relationship such as "a specific movable decorative body is provided as a board-side movable decorative body, whereas the other movable decorative body is provided as a frame-side movable decorative body". When a new restoration operation time (start time of the next symbol change) arrives while one restoration process for the movable ornament is continuously executed, the new restoration operation time (start time of the next symbol change) ) Has arrived, and a new restoration process for another movable decorative body (frame-side movable decorative body) is started.

According to such method 1, the new restoration operation time (the start time of the next symbol change) is treated as invalid for the restoration process for a specific movable ornament that is already in the execution state. It will be treated as effective for another movable decoration (frame side movable decoration) for which the restoration process has not yet been executed, and the other movable decoration will be triggered by the timing (new restoration operation time). It becomes possible to newly start the restoration process for the body (frame side movable decorative body). That is, in this case, a situation appears in which the restoration process for a specific movable decorative body (board-side movable decorative body) and the restoration process for another movable decorative body (frame-side movable decorative body) are executed at the same time. There is no concern that interference will occur between the movable ornaments, and early return of the movable ornaments is expected.

Method 2: If there is at least a relationship such as "a specific movable decoration and another movable decoration are provided as board-side movable decorations", one restoration process for the specific movable decoration continues. Even if a new restoration operation time (the start time of the next symbol change) arrives during execution, the restoration process for another movable decoration (board side movable decoration) is not started at that time, and a specific restoration process is performed. After waiting for one restoration process for the movable decoration to be completed, another movable decoration (board side movable decoration) is based on the arrival of the new restoration operation time (the start time of the next symbol change). The restoration process for the body) is newly started.

According to such method 2, the new restoration operation time (the start time of the next symbol change) is treated as invalid for the restoration process for a specific movable decoration that is already in the execution state. It will be treated as effective for another movable decorative body (board side movable decorative body) whose restoration process has not yet been executed. In this regard, when starting the restoration process for another movable decorative body (board-side movable decorative body), we waited for the completion of one restoration process for a specific movable decorative body. There is no concern that interference will occur between the movable ornaments, and early return of these movable ornaments is expected.

Method 3: If there is at least a relationship such as "a specific movable decoration and another movable decoration are provided as board-side movable decorations", one restoration process for the specific movable decoration continues. Even if a new restoration operation time (start time of the next symbol change) arrives during execution, another movable decorative body is triggered by the arrival of the new restoration operation time (start time of the next symbol change). The restoration process for a specific movable ornament is not executed, but another movable ornament (movable on the board side) is triggered by the restoration operation time that arrives after waiting for the restoration process for a specific movable ornament to be completed. The restoration process for the ornament) is newly started.

According to such method 3, the new restoration operation time (the start time of the next symbol change) is the restoration process for a specific movable decoration that is already in the execution state and another movable decoration that is not in the execution state yet. It will be treated as invalid for any of the restoration processing for, and unless one restoration processing for a specific movable decoration is completed, even if a new abnormality occurs in another movable decoration, the said No processing will be executed for the abnormal state. That is, in this case, even if another movable decoration becomes an abnormal state while one restoration process for a specific movable decoration is in the execution state, the movable decorations can be carefully restored one by one. As a result, it becomes possible to take sufficient measures against abnormalities, and it is expected that the rate of deterioration of these movable decorative bodies will be suppressed.

Next, with reference to FIGS. 307B and 307C, the mode (methods 1 to 3 and the like) when a new restoration operation time (start timing, end timing, etc. of symbol variation) arrives during the execution of the restoration operation. I will explain in detail.

First, in the pachinko machine 1 according to this example, for convenience of explanation, the first movable decorative body (the above-mentioned “specific movable decorative body”), the second movable decorative body, and the second movable decorative body that can perform the effect operation are the movable decorative bodies. It includes at least three movable ornaments, a fourth movable ornament, and a fifth movable ornament. When only one of the movable decorative bodies is not in the normal state, the movable decorative bodies that are not in the normal state are the "first movable decorative body", the "second movable decorative body", and the "third movable decorative body". Regardless of which of the "movable decorative body", the "fourth movable decorative body", and the "fifth movable decorative body", the movable decorative body that is not in the normal state has a restoration operation time (design) corresponding to the symbol variation. The restoration operation (restoration process) is started when the start timing or end timing of the fluctuation arrives.

However, if there are a plurality of movable ornaments that are not in the normal state when the restoration operation time corresponding to the symbol fluctuation arrives, all of the movable decorations that are not in the normal state are restored all at once with the restoration operation time as an opportunity. If (restoration processing) is started, there is a concern that it will not be possible to concentrate on the production according to the pattern fluctuation and it will be exciting.

Therefore, in the pachinko machine 1 according to this explanatory example, if there are a plurality of movable decorative bodies that are not in the normal state when the restoration operation time corresponding to the symbol variation arrives, some of the movable decorative bodies that are not in the normal state. Only the restoration operation can be started when the restoration operation time has come, thereby avoiding that all the movable ornaments that are not in the normal state start the restoration operation all at once. , The restoration operation is realized in a mode according to the situation.

For example, as shown in FIG. 307B, the timing tm32 has arrived (restoration corresponding to the symbol variation) when the symbol variation (first time) is completed (loss stop) and the next symbol variation (second time) is started. When the operation time has come), an abnormality occurs in all of the first movable ornament, the second movable ornament, the third movable ornament, the fourth movable ornament, and the fifth movable ornament. Suppose it was. The "abnormality" here means that the "abnormality" is detected by the detecting means, but it does not necessarily have to be in the situation where the "abnormality" is detected, and the movable decorative body. It may simply mean that it is in a situation where an "abnormality" has occurred (an undetected state).

Then, in the pachinko machine 1 according to this explanatory example, the restoration process for the movable decorative body in the abnormal state is executed based on the arrival of the restoration operation time (timing tm32). However, here, for the first movable decoration body, the second movable decoration body, and the fourth movable decoration body, the restoration operations are started so as to be parallel to each other, but the third movable decoration body and the fifth movable decoration body are started. As for the movable decorative body of, the restoration operation is not started and it stands by in an abnormal state. As a result, it is possible to prevent all the movable ornaments that are not in the normal state from starting the restoration operation all at once, and the restoration operation in a mode according to the situation can be realized.

In this regard, in the pachinko machine 1 according to this example, the third movable decorative body that did not start the restoration operation at the timing tm32 and was left in an abnormal state waited for the arrival of the next restoration operation time (timing tm35). Instead, the restoration operation is started based on the arrival of the timing tm34 at which the restoration process (restoration operation) for the first movable decorative body is completed. As a result, while avoiding that all the movable ornaments that are not in the normal state start the restoration operation all at once, all the movable ornaments that are not in the normal state can be restored to the normal state at a comparatively low early stage. become.

Further, in the pachinko machine 1 according to this example, with respect to the fifth movable decorative body which is left in an abnormal state without starting the restoration operation at the timing tm32, when the next restoration operation time (timing tm35) arrives. Also does not start the restoration operation, but starts the restoration operation based on the arrival of the timing tm36 at which the restoration process (restoration operation) for the third movable decoration is completed. As a result, it is possible to preferably prevent a plurality of movable decorative bodies from performing restoration operations in parallel in a combination that hinders concentration on the effect.

In the example shown in FIG. 307B, the restoration process for the second movable decorative body is completed before the timing tm34 at which the restoration process for the first movable decorative body is completed, but the second movable decorative body is completed. When the restoration process for the ornament is completed, the "third movable ornament" and the "fifth movable ornament" do not start the restoration operation. Further, in the example shown in FIG. 307B, the restoration process for the fourth movable decoration is completed after the timing tm34 at which the restoration process for the first movable decoration is completed, but the fourth movable decoration is completed. The third movable decoration does not start the restoration operation and does not maintain the standby state until the restoration processing for the body is completed, and when the restoration processing for the fourth movable decoration is completed, the "fifth" The "movable ornament" does not start the restoration operation.

That is, the third movable decorative body starts the restoration process (restoration operation) when the timing tm32 arrives unless the specific movable decorative body (here, the first movable decorative body) is in an abnormal state. If the specific movable decoration (here, the first movable decoration) is in an abnormal state, the restoration process (restoration operation) is not started when the timing tm32 arrives, and the specific movable decoration (here, the first movable decoration) is not started. The restoration process (restoration operation) is started after waiting for the restoration process (restoration operation) of the movable decorative body (1) to be completed.

Further, the fifth movable decorative body starts the restoration process (restoration operation) when the timing tm32 arrives unless the first movable decorative body and the third movable decorative body are in an abnormal state. If the movable decorative body or the third movable decorative body is in an abnormal state, the restoration process (restoration operation) is not started when the timing tm32 arrives, and each restoration process of the first movable decorative body and the third movable decorative body is performed. The restoration process (restoration operation) is started after waiting for the completion of the (restoration operation).

In this way, the restoration process is not performed in parallel for the movable ornaments of a specific combination (for example, the combination that hinders the concentration on the production) among the plurality of movable ornaments, so that the pattern can be changed. Restoration processing can be performed while appropriately maintaining an environment in which the production can be concentrated.

Further, in the example shown in FIG. 307B, although the "fifth movable decorative body" is in an abnormal state earlier than the "third movable decorative body", the "first movable decorative body" is in an abnormal state. When the restoration process for "" is completed, the restoration process for "third movable ornament" is started first. In this way, by not performing the restoration process in the order in which the abnormal state occurs, it becomes possible to preferentially restore the movable decorative body, which is highly important for the production, to the normal state, which makes the game enjoyable. It will be expected to be maintained.

Further, in the example shown in FIG. 307B, in the situation where the third movable decorative body is in the process of executing the restoration process (restoration operation), the symbol variation (second time) is completed (loss stop) and the next symbol is displayed. It is assumed that the timing tm35 (restoration operation time corresponding to the symbol fluctuation) when the fluctuation (third time) is started comes. Such a restoration operation time originally functions to newly start the restoration operation for the third movable decorative body which has not yet returned to the normal state. However, here, for the third movable decorative body, such a function as the restoration operation time is not used, and the restoration process (restoration operation) is continuously executed so as to straddle the restoration operation time (timing tm35). ing. As a result, it becomes possible to return to the normal state earlier than when the restoration process (restoration operation) is redone based on the arrival of the timing tm35. For example, when the symbol variation (third time) is to execute the movable effect using the third movable decorative body, "the movable effect using the third movable decorative body within the symbol variation (third time)". There is a high probability that the third movable ornament can be returned to the normal state before the timing at which the third movable ornament is started. That is, in this example, even if the movable decorative body is in an abnormal state at the start of the symbol variation, the movable decorative body is returned to the normal state at the time when the movable effect using the movable decorative body is started. Then, it is possible to perform the effect operation as a movable effect using the movable decorative body within the symbol variation.

Here, in the example shown in FIG. 307B, in the third movable decorative body, the timing tm32 (2nd time) when the symbol variation (first time) ends (loss stop) and the next symbol variation (second time) starts. It is assumed that an abnormality occurs at the timing tm31 before the arrival of the restoration operation time corresponding to the symbol variation). Then, as a result of the arrival of the timing tm32 (restoration operation time corresponding to the symbol variation) in the abnormal state, the restoration process (restoration operation) is started in a form delayed from the timing tm32 (timing tm34).

However, the third movable decorative body is later than the timing tm32 (restoration operation time corresponding to the symbol fluctuation), and within the period during which the first movable decorative body is executing the restoration process (restoration operation). Even if the normal state is maintained until the timing of "timing tm33" and an abnormality occurs at the timing tm33, the restoration process (restoration operation) of the first movable decorative body is performed as in the example shown in FIG. 307B. It is desirable to start the restoration process (restoration operation) based on the arrival of the timing tm34 at which) is terminated. That is, in this case, the third movable decorative body is another movable decorative body (third movable decorative body) even though the restoration operation time corresponding to the symbol variation has not yet arrived after the abnormal state is reached at the timing tm33. The restoration process (restoration operation) can be started by using the restoration operation time (timing tm32 that arrives before the timing tm33) that triggered the restoration process (restoration operation) for the movable decorative body (1). Therefore, it becomes possible to return to the normal state at an early stage. The details of the "restoration process (restoration operation) using the restoration operation timing at the timing tm32" will be described later.

At this time, if the restoration process for the first movable decorative body is prolonged and exceeds the timing tm35, it is desirable that the restoration process is continuously executed so as to straddle the timing tm35. Further, at the timing tm35, the restoration process (restoration operation) for the third movable decorative body is not started, and the restoration process for the first movable decorative body executed so as to straddle the timing tm35 is completed at the timing when the restoration process is completed. It is desirable to start the restoration process (restoration operation) for the third movable decorative body.

In this case, although the fifth movable decorative body is in an abnormal state when the timing tm32 (restoration operation time) arrives, it is in an abnormal state when the timing tm32 (restoration operation time) arrives. Since the restoration process (restoration operation) for the "third movable decoration body" that has not been completed can be started before the "fifth movable decoration body", the movable decoration with high production importance is possible. You will be able to preferentially return to normal from your body. The "fifth movable decoration body" is based on the fact that the restoration process (restoration operation) for the "third movable decoration body", which was in a normal state when the timing tm32 (restoration operation time) has arrived, has been completed. Then, the restoration process (restoration operation) using the restoration operation timing at the timing tm32 is started. The "restoration process using the restoration operation timing at the timing tm32 (restoration operation)" is a restoration process (restoration operation) for the first movable decoration in the program executed based on the arrival of the timing tm32. A mode in which a restoration process (restoration operation) for the third movable decoration body and a restoration process (restoration operation) for the fifth movable decoration body are included, and each of these restoration processes is sequentially executed. It means that it has become. For example, when it is determined whether the "third movable decorative body" is in an abnormal state when the restoration process for the "first movable decorative body" is completed, and it is determined that the "third movable decorative body" is in the abnormal state. The restoration process for the "third movable ornament" is started. When the restoration process for the "third movable decorative body" is completed, it is determined whether the "fifth movable decorative body" is in an abnormal state, and when it is determined that the "fifth movable decorative body" is in the abnormal state, the "th. The restoration process for "5 movable ornaments" is started. If the "third movable decoration" is not in an abnormal state when the restoration processing for the "first movable decoration" is completed, the restoration processing for the "third movable decoration" is not performed, and the "fifth" Determine if the "movable ornament" is in an abnormal state. As a result, when it is determined that the abnormal state is reached, the restoration process for the "fifth movable decorative body" is started. That is, in this case, when the "third movable decoration body" is in the normal state at the timing tm34, the restoration process for the "fifth movable decoration body" is started based on the arrival of the timing tm34. It becomes.

On the other hand, in the example shown in FIG. 307C, the "restoration process for the first movable decorative body" started with the start timing (restoration operation timing) of the symbol variation (first time) is "symbol variation (1). The timing tm42 when the next (second) symbol change (second time) is started after the end (loss stop) has arrived (the restoration operation time corresponding to the symbol variation has arrived), but it is not finished and is in the middle of execution. The "second movable ornament", the "third movable ornament", the "fourth movable ornament", and the "fifth movable ornament" at the time when the timing tm42 arrives. Is assumed to be in an abnormal state.

Then, in the pachinko machine 1 according to this example, first, the restoration process for the "first movable decorative body" is not restarted from the beginning based on the arrival of the timing tm42, and the timing tm42 ( It is tried to continue execution so as to straddle the restoration operation time). As a result, it becomes possible to return to the normal state earlier than when the restoration process (restoration operation) is redone based on the arrival of the timing tm42. For example, when the symbol variation (second time) is to execute the movable effect using the first movable decorative body, "the movable effect using the first movable decorative body within the symbol variation (second time)". There is a high probability that the first movable ornament can be returned to the normal state before the timing at which the first movable ornament is started. That is, in this example, even if the movable decorative body is in an abnormal state at the start of the symbol variation, the movable decorative body is returned to the normal state at the time when the movable effect using the movable decorative body is started. Then, it is possible to perform the effect operation as a movable effect using the movable decorative body within the symbol variation.

Further, in the pachinko machine 1 according to this example, the restoration process for the movable decorative body in the abnormal state is executed based on the arrival of the restoration operation time (timing tm42). However, here, with respect to the fourth movable decorative body, the restoration operation of each of the first movable decorative body in the running state is started in parallel, but the second movable decorative body, the third movable decorative body, The movable decorative body and the fifth movable decorative body do not start the restoration operation and stand by in an abnormal state. As a result, it is possible to prevent all the movable ornaments that are not in the normal state from starting the restoration operation all at once, and the restoration operation in a mode according to the situation can be realized.

In particular, regarding the second movable decorative body, as shown in FIG. 307B, when the first movable decorative body is in a situation such as "not in a normal state and the restoration process (restoration operation) is not executed", Based on the arrival of the restoration operation time (timing tm32), the restoration process (restoration operation) is started so as to be parallel to the first movable decorative body. Nevertheless, as shown in FIG. 307C, the restoration operation time (timing tm42) is when the first movable decoration is in a situation such as "not in a normal state and executing a restoration process (restoration operation)". ) Arrives, the restoration process (restoration operation) for the second movable decorative body is not started when the restoration operation time (timing tm42) arrives.

That is, the situation in which the first movable decorative body executes the restoration process (restoration operation) across the restoration operation time (timing tm42) means that the first movable decoration body returns to the normal position (return to the original position). It can be said that the player is being distracted by the "first movable decorative body" in such a state. And, in such a situation, if many movable decorative bodies start a new restoration process (restoration operation), the player cannot concentrate on the production according to the pattern change, which is a pleasure. Is a concern.

In this regard, in the pachinko machine 1 according to this example, among the movable decorative bodies (see FIG. 307B) capable of performing the restoration process (restoration operation) in parallel with the first movable decorative body, the fourth movable decorative body. With respect to, even in the situation shown in FIG. 307C, the restoration process is started in parallel with the first movable decoration body in the state of being executed. On the other hand, regarding the second movable decorative body, in the situation shown in FIG. 307C, the restoration process is not started in parallel with the first movable decorative body in the state of being executed, and the first movable decorative body is not started. It is maintained in a standby state until the restoration process for the ornament is completed. Then, in a state where the restoration process for the first movable decorative body is completed, the restoration operation time (timing tm45 in FIG. 307C) is waited for a new arrival, and based on the arrival of the timing tm45, the first is performed. The restoration process (restoration operation) for the movable decorative body of 2 is started. As a result, when the first movable decorative body is in a situation where it takes time to return to normal, many movable decorative bodies are suppressed from newly starting the restoration process (restoration operation), and the above-mentioned concerns Will be resolved.

Further, in the pachinko machine 1 according to this example, with respect to the third movable decorative body which did not start the restoration operation at the timing tm42 and was left in an abnormal state, the next restoration operation time is the same as in the example shown in FIG. 307B. Without waiting for the arrival of (timing tm45), the restoration operation is started based on the arrival of the timing tm44 at which the restoration process (restoration operation) for the first movable decorative body is completed. As a result, while avoiding that all the movable ornaments that are not in the normal state start the restoration operation all at once, all the movable ornaments that are not in the normal state can be restored to the normal state at a comparatively low early stage. become.

Further, in the pachinko machine 1 according to this example, with respect to the fifth movable decorative body which did not start the restoration operation at the timing tm42 and was left in an abnormal state, the next restoration operation time is the same as in the example shown in FIG. 307B. The restoration operation is not started even when (timing tm45) arrives, and the restoration operation is started based on the arrival of the timing tm46 at which the restoration process (restoration operation) for the third movable decoration is completed. I am trying to do it. As a result, it is preferably avoided that the plurality of movable decorative bodies perform the restoration operation in parallel in a manner that hinders the concentration on the effect.

In the example shown in FIG. 307C, the restoration process for the fourth movable decorative body is completed before the timing tm44 when the restoration process for the first movable decorative body is completed, but the fourth movable decorative body is completed. When the restoration process for the decorative body is completed, the "second movable decorative body", the "third movable decorative body", and the "fifth movable decorative body" do not start the restoration operation.

That is, the third movable decorative body starts the restoration process (restoration operation) when the timing tm42 arrives unless the specific movable decorative body (here, the first movable decorative body) is in an abnormal state. If the specific movable decoration (here, the first movable decoration) is in an abnormal state, the restoration process (restoration operation) is not started when the timing tm42 arrives, and the specific movable decoration (here, the first movable decoration) is not started. The restoration process (restoration operation) is started after waiting for the restoration process (restoration operation) of the movable decorative body (1) to be completed.

Further, the fifth movable decorative body starts the restoration process (restoration operation) when the timing tm42 arrives unless the first movable decorative body and the third movable decorative body are in an abnormal state. If the movable decorative body or the third movable decorative body is in an abnormal state, the restoration process (restoration operation) is not started when the timing tm42 arrives, and each restoration process of the first movable decorative body and the third movable decorative body is performed. The restoration process (restoration operation) is started after waiting for the completion of the (restoration operation).

In this way, the restoration process is not performed in parallel for the movable ornaments of a specific combination (for example, the combination that hinders the concentration on the production) among the plurality of movable ornaments, so that the pattern can be changed. Restoration processing can be performed while appropriately maintaining an environment in which the production can be concentrated.

Further, in the example shown in FIG. 307C, in the situation where the third movable decorative body is in the process of executing the restoration process (restoration operation), the symbol variation (second time) is completed (loss stop) and the next symbol is displayed. It is assumed that the timing tm45 (restoration operation time corresponding to the symbol fluctuation) when the fluctuation (third time) is started comes. Such a restoration operation time originally functions to newly start the restoration operation for the third movable decorative body which has not yet returned to the normal state. However, here, for the third movable decorative body, such a function as the restoration operation time is not used, and the restoration process (restoration operation) is continuously executed so as to straddle the restoration operation time (timing tm45). ing. As a result, it becomes possible to return to the normal state earlier than when the restoration process (restoration operation) is redone based on the arrival of the timing tm45. For example, when the symbol variation (third time) is to execute the movable effect using the third movable decorative body, "the movable effect using the third movable decorative body within the symbol variation (third time)". There is a high probability that the third movable ornament can be returned to the normal state before the timing at which the third movable ornament is started. That is, in this example, even if the movable decorative body is in an abnormal state at the start of the symbol variation, the movable decorative body is returned to the normal state at the time when the movable effect using the movable decorative body is started. Then, it is possible to perform the effect operation as a movable effect using the movable decorative body within the symbol variation.

Here, in the example shown in FIG. 307C, in the third movable decorative body, the timing tm42 (2nd time) when the symbol variation (first time) ends (loss stop) and the next symbol variation (second time) starts. It is assumed that an abnormality occurs at the timing tm41 before the arrival of the restoration operation time corresponding to the symbol fluctuation). Then, as a result of the arrival of the timing tm42 (restoration operation time corresponding to the symbol variation) in the abnormal state, the restoration process (restoration operation) is started in a form delayed from the timing tm42 (timing tm44).

However, the third movable decorative body is later than the timing tm42 (restoration operation time corresponding to the symbol variation), and within the period during which the first movable decorative body is executing the restoration process (restoration operation). Even if the normal state is maintained until the timing of "timing tm43" and an abnormality occurs at the timing tm43, the restoration process (restoration operation) of the first movable decorative body is performed as in the example shown in FIG. 307C. It is desirable to start the restoration process (restoration operation) based on the arrival of the timing tm44 at which) is terminated. That is, in this case, the third movable decorative body is another movable decorative body (third movable decorative body) even though the restoration operation time corresponding to the symbol variation has not yet arrived after the abnormal state is reached at the timing tm43. The restoration process (restoration operation) can be started by using the restoration operation time (timing tm42 that arrives before the timing tm43) that triggered the restoration process (restoration operation) for the movable decorative body (1). Therefore, it becomes possible to return to the normal state at an early stage. The details of the "restoration process (restoration operation) using the restoration operation time at the timing tm42" are as described in the "restoration process (restoration operation) using the restoration operation time at the timing tm32".

Further, in this case, although the fifth movable decorative body is in an abnormal state when the timing tm42 (restoration operation time) arrives, it is in an abnormal state when the timing tm42 (restoration operation time) arrives. Since the restoration process (restoration operation) for the "third movable decoration body" that has not been completed can be started before the "fifth movable decoration body", the movable decoration with high production importance is possible. You will be able to preferentially return to normal from your body. The "fifth movable decoration body" is based on the fact that the restoration process (restoration operation) for the "third movable decoration body", which was in a normal state when the timing tm42 (restoration operation time) has arrived, has been completed. Then, the restoration process (restoration operation) using the restoration operation timing at the timing tm42 is started. The "restoration process using the restoration operation timing at the timing tm42 (restoration operation)" is a restoration process (restoration operation) for the first movable decoration in the program executed based on the arrival of the timing tm42. A mode in which a restoration process (restoration operation) for the third movable decoration body and a restoration process (restoration operation) for the fifth movable decoration body are included, and each of these restoration processes is sequentially executed. It means that it has become. For example, when it is determined whether the "third movable decorative body" is in an abnormal state when the restoration process for the "first movable decorative body" is completed, and it is determined that the "third movable decorative body" is in the abnormal state. The restoration process for the "third movable ornament" is started. When the restoration process for the "third movable decorative body" is completed, it is determined whether the "fifth movable decorative body" is in an abnormal state, and when it is determined that the "fifth movable decorative body" is in the abnormal state, the "th. The restoration process for "5 movable ornaments" is started. If the "third movable decoration" is not in an abnormal state when the restoration processing for the "first movable decoration" is completed, the restoration processing for the "third movable decoration" is not performed, and the "fifth" Determine if the "movable ornament" is in an abnormal state. As a result, when it is determined that the abnormal state is reached, the restoration process for the "fifth movable decorative body" is started. That is, in this case, when the "third movable decoration body" is in the normal state at the timing tm44, the restoration process for the "fifth movable decoration body" is started based on the arrival of the timing tm44. It becomes.

According to the example shown in FIG. 307C, when the restoration operation time (timing tm42) arrives, the movable decorative body (first) that is not in the normal state (it is not in the original position even though it is not in the state to be movable). Of the movable decorative body, the second movable decorative body, the third movable decorative body, the fourth movable decorative body, and the fifth movable decorative body), the restoration operation period (design variation (design variation (design variation)) that has arrived earlier than this. For the movable decorative body (first movable decorative body) that is executing the restoration operation triggered by the start timing of the first), the restoration operation is not restarted and the restoration operation timing is ignored and the restoration operation is continuously executed. However, for the movable decorative body (fourth movable decorative body) that has not executed the restoration operation, the restoration operation can be started without ignoring the restoration operation time (timing tm42). That is, in this case, the plurality of movable decorative bodies in the abnormal state may or may not ignore the function as the restoration operation time depending on the situation in which they are placed. It will be possible to realize the restoration process suitable for the situation while the above is being performed.

Further, according to the example shown in FIG. 307C, the "first movable decorative body" performs the restoration operation when the restoration operation time corresponding to the symbol variation (the start timing of the symbol variation (first time)) has arrived. When the restoration operation time (start timing of the symbol variation (second time)) corresponding to the symbol variation arrives again during the execution, the first movable decorative body executing the restoration operation arrives again. This can be continuously executed without re-doing the restoration operation triggered by the restoration operation timing (the start timing of the symbol change (second time)). That is, in this case, it takes time to restore to normal, and as a result, even if the restoration operation time comes again while the restoration operation is being performed, this is ignored, so the state is in the middle of execution. It becomes possible to continue the restoration operation without interruption, which makes it possible to promote the early return of the movable ornament in an abnormal state.

Further, in the example shown in FIG. 307C, while the restoration process (restoration operation) for the first movable decoration body is being executed over a plurality of fluctuations, another movable decoration body (third movable decoration body) is used. When an abnormality occurs, the third movable decoration does not start the return operation when the restoration operation time (timing tm42) corresponding to the symbol variation arrives, and the third movable decoration does not start the return operation with respect to the first movable decoration in the state of being executed. The restoration process (restoration operation) is started based on the completion of the restoration process (restoration operation). That is, in this case, the restoration process (restoration operation) for the first movable decoration body is not redone when the restoration operation time comes (timing tm42), and the restoration process (restoration operation) for the third movable decoration body is performed. Restoration processing for the third movable decoration (restoration operation) immediately after the continuously executed "restoration processing for the first movable decoration (restoration operation)" is completed after not starting when the time (timing tm42) arrives. Since the restoration operation) will be started, the restoration process should not be performed in parallel for the movable decorations of a specific combination (for example, the combination that interferes with the concentration on the production) among the plurality of movable decorations. However, it becomes possible to restore a plurality of movable ornaments to normal relatively early.

Further, in the example shown in FIG. 307C, when the third movable decorative body becomes abnormal at the timing tm43, the restoration operation time of the third movable decorative body has not yet arrived after the abnormal state. The restoration process (restoration operation) is started based on the arrival of the timing tm44 (the end timing of the "restoration process (restoration operation) for the first movable decoration" executed so as to straddle the restoration operation time). ing. That is, in this case, the third movable decorative body is another movable decorative body (third movable decorative body) even though the restoration operation time corresponding to the symbol variation has not yet arrived after the abnormal state is reached at the timing tm43. The restoration process (restoration operation) can be started by using the restoration operation time (timing tm42 that arrives before the timing tm43) that triggered the restoration process (restoration operation) for the movable decorative body (1). Therefore, it becomes possible to return to the normal state at an early stage.

Further, in the pachinko machine 1 according to this example, as a result of continuously executing the restoration process (restoration operation) so as to straddle the restoration operation time, the movable decoration is movable within the symbol variation in which the movable decoration is normally restored. When the execution timing of the effect arrives, the movable effect can be executed using the movable decorative body that has just returned to normal. In such a configuration, by continuously executing the restoration process (restoration operation), the movable decoration can be restored to normal at an early stage by the timing when the movable effect is started.

In addition, even if the restoration operation period corresponding to the symbol fluctuation comes multiple times during the restoration process (restoration operation) for the movable decoration, all of them are ignored and the restoration process (restoration operation) for the movable decoration is performed. It is desirable to continue.

Further, in the pachinko machine 1 according to this example, the first movable decorative body and the second movable decorative body are in a relationship of performing a restoration process (restoration operation) in parallel as shown in FIG. 307B. be. However, as shown in FIG. 307C, if a new restoration operation time (timing tm42) arrives while only the first movable decoration body is executing the restoration operation, the second movement is performed at the timing tm42. The restoration process (restoration operation) for the ornament was not started, and each restoration operation was not performed in parallel. As a result, it is possible to prevent many movable decorations from newly starting a restoration process (restoration operation) when the first movable decoration is in a situation where it takes time to return to normal.

Then, when a new restoration operation time (timing tm45) arrives after the restoration operation of the first movable decoration is completed and the normal restoration is performed, the restoration processing (restoration operation) for the second movable decoration is performed at the timing tm45. I'm trying to get started. According to such a configuration, the restoration process (restoration operation) for the second movable decoration is not started immediately after the situation where the first movable decoration takes time to return to normal is solved. Since the restoration process (restoration operation) for the second movable decorative body is started after waiting for the arrival of a new restoration operation time (timing tm45), it is possible to concentrate on the production. It will be possible to adjust the environment appropriately.

At this time, even if the restoration process (restoration operation) for the first movable decoration is terminated due to a failure, a new restoration operation time (restoration operation period) is performed after the restoration process (restoration operation) is completed. When the timing tm45) arrives, the restoration process (restoration operation) for the second movable decorative body is started based on the arrival of the timing tm45. That is, in this case, since it becomes impossible to provide the movable effect using the first movable decorative body, the movable effect using only the second movable decorative body is restored to normal, and the movable effect using the second movable decorative body is performed. It is desirable to make it feasible.

In the example shown in FIG. 307 (C), after the restoration process (restoration operation) for the first movable decorative body is completed and the normal restoration is performed, until a new restoration operation time (timing tm45) arrives. When the first movable decorative body becomes abnormal again, the first movable decorative body and the second movable decorative body are restored when a new restoration operation time (timing tm45) arrives. It is desirable to start the processing (restoration operation) in parallel.

In the above example, even if the restoration process (restoration operation) for the first movable decoration is terminated due to a failure (does not return to the original position), the first movable decoration is restored. It is desirable to start the restoration process (restoration operation) for the third movable decoration based on the completion of the restoration process (restoration operation). Further, even if the restoration process (restoration operation) for the third movable decoration is terminated due to a failure (does not return to the original position), the restoration process (restoration) for the third movable decoration is performed. It is desirable to start the restoration process (restoration operation) for the fifth movable decoration based on the completion of the operation).

In the above example, when the restoration process (restoration operation) for the first movable decoration is completed (timing tm34, tm44) and the third movable decoration is not in an abnormal state, the first movable decoration It is desirable to start the restoration process (restoration operation) for the fifth movable decorative body based on the completion of the restoration process (restoration operation) for the body. Further, when the third movable decoration becomes a new abnormal state within the execution period of the "restoration process (restoration operation) for the fifth movable decoration" started in this way, the fifth movable decoration is subjected to the restoration process (restoration operation). When the restoration process (restoration operation) for the third movable decorative body is not performed based on the completion of the restoration process (restoration operation), and a new restoration operation time corresponding to the symbol variation has arrived. It is desirable to perform a restoration process (restoration operation) on the third movable decorative body. However, when the restoration operation (restoration operation) for the fifth movable decoration has not been completed yet and is in the execution state when a new restoration operation time corresponding to the symbol variation has arrived, the restoration operation time has arrived. When the "restoration process for the third movable decoration (restoration operation)" is not started and the restoration operation time after the "restoration process for the fifth movable decoration (restoration operation)" is completed comes. It is desirable to start the "restoration process (restoration operation) for the third movable decorative body".

Further, in the example shown in FIG. 307C, when the restoration operation time (timing tm42) corresponding to the symbol variation (second time) arrives, among the movable ornaments that are not in the normal state, the symbol variation (1) before this is reached. For the first movable decorative body that is executing the restoration process (restoration operation) triggered by the restoration operation time corresponding to the second time), the restoration operation time (timing tm42) without re-doing the restoration process (restoration operation). Is ignored and this is continuously executed, but for the fourth movable decoration that has not executed the restoration process (restoration operation), the restoration operation is performed with this as an opportunity without ignoring the restoration operation time (timing tm42). I'm trying to get started. In this regard, even the fourth movable decorative body that has started the restoration process (restoration operation) without ignoring the restoration operation time (timing tm42) is new while the restoration process (restoration operation) is being performed. When the restoration operation time (timing tm43) has arrived, it is desirable to ignore the new restoration operation time (timing tm43) and continue to execute the restoration operation so as to straddle the restoration operation time.

When there is a movable decoration that is executing the restoration process (restoration operation) and a movable decoration that is waiting to execute the restoration process (restoration operation), the effect display related to the symbol variation is displayed. Even if a specific abnormal state that is not visible (such as a state in which the entire screen is displayed as an abnormal state due to a magnetic abnormality) occurs, while the above-mentioned notification is being executed in response to the occurrence of the specific abnormal state, The restoration process (restoration operation) that is already in the execution state is continuously executed without stopping, and the movable decoration that is waiting to be executed in the restoration process (restoration operation) is also restored when the restoration operation time comes. It is desirable to start a new (restoration operation).

When there are movable decorations that are in the state of executing the restoration process (restoration operation) or movable decorations that are waiting to be executed in the restoration process (restoration operation), those movable decorations are used within the symbol variation. When the execution timing of the movable effect has arrived, the driving force for the restoration process (restoration operation) may be given to those movable ornaments, but the driving force for executing the effect should be given. It is desirable not to have (do not operate) in order to realize an early return to the normal state. However, although the driving force for executing the effect is not given to those movable decorative bodies, the light emission provided in each movable decorative body is provided so that this appears in the light emitting mode according to the movable effect. It is desirable to make the part emit light as usual. That is, in this case, the movable effect itself is not executed, but a part of the effect (light emitting effect) constituting the movable effect is properly executed, so that the degree of expectation (the rate at which the jackpot symbol appears). , "0", "100" as well), different light emission modes will appear in the "movable decorative body that is not in the normal state", and the game entertainment can be suitably maintained.

In addition, for movable ornaments that have completed the restoration process (restoration operation) due to a failure, the restoration process (restoration operation) is not performed even if the restoration operation time comes again, so at least the power is turned on. As long as it is, it can be said that the movable decorative body is not operated by the movable effect. However, even if the movable decorative body is in such a state, when the timing for executing the movable effect using the movable decorative body comes, the movable effect itself is not executed, but the movable effect is configured. It is desirable that a part of the effect (light emission effect) to be performed is properly executed. That is, in this case, a movable ornament whose light emitting mode differs depending on the degree of expectation (the rate at which the jackpot symbol appears and includes "0" and "100") is in a state where the "restoration process (restoration operation) is completed by failure". , And it will be possible to maintain the game entertainment favorably.

A movable decoration that is in the state of executing the restoration process (restoration operation), a movable decoration that is waiting to be executed in the restoration process (restoration operation), or a state in which the restoration process (restoration operation) is completed due to a failure. As for the movable decorative body in the above, the light emitting portion may be capable of emitting light as usual even when other effects are executed.

The restoration operation time may include not only the one that arrives in response to the symbol variation but also the one that arrives under different conditions. Then, when the restoration process (restoration operation) is started at a specific time that arrives under conditions different from the symbol fluctuation, the specific notification (movable body abnormality notification) corresponding to the restoration process (restoration operation) is performed, while the restoration process (recovery operation) is performed. When the restoration operation is performed at the restoration operation time corresponding to the symbol fluctuation, the restoration process (restoration operation) should be started (executed) in the non-notification state without performing the specific notification (movable body abnormality notification). Is desirable.

Further, in the example shown in FIG. 307C, when the restoration operation time (timing tm42) corresponding to the symbol variation (second time) arrives, among the movable ornaments that are not in the normal state, the symbol variation (1) before this is reached. For the first movable decorative body that is executing the restoration process (restoration operation) triggered by the restoration operation time corresponding to the second time), the restoration operation time (timing tm42) without re-doing the restoration process (restoration operation). Is ignored and this is continuously executed, but for the fourth movable decoration that has not executed the restoration process (restoration operation), the restoration operation is performed with this as an opportunity without ignoring the restoration operation time (timing tm42). I'm trying to get started. In this way, even when the first movable decorative body is in a situation where it takes time to return to normal, when the restoration operation time (timing tm42) corresponding to the symbol variation arrives, the restoration process (restoration operation) is performed without ignoring this. The "fourth movable decorative body" that will be started is used for important productions such as when the hit result is derived by the symbol variation or when the big hit game is started or executed. It is desirable to have.

In the pachinko machine 1 according to the above example, with respect to the third movable decorative body, the case where the "restoration process (restoration operation) for the first movable decorative body" succeeds in normal restoration (reference position detection) and the case where it fails (reference position). Regardless of whether it is terminated (completed) in the case of non-detection), the restoration process (restoration operation) is started based on the completion of the "restoration process (restoration operation) for the first movable decoration body". It is desirable to do so.

Further, based on the fact that the "restoration process for the first movable decoration (restoration operation)" ends with a failure to restore to normal, and the "restoration process for the first movable decoration (restoration operation)" ends. When the performed "restoration process (restoration operation) for the third movable ornament" is completed with successful restoration, the third movable ornament is abnormal again within the symbol variation in which the normal restoration is successful. When the state is reached, when the restoration operation time corresponding to the next symbol variation comes, the "restoration process for the first movable decoration (restoration operation)" is not performed and the "restoration process for the third movable decoration (restoration operation)" is performed. It is desirable to perform "restoration operation)".

However, at this time, when the restoration operation time corresponding to the next symbol variation arrives, the "fifth movable" started based on the completion of the "restoration process (restoration operation) for the third movable decorative body". When the "restoration process for the decorative body (restoration operation)" is in the execution state, the "restoration process for the first movable decoration body (restoration operation)" and the "restoration process for the third movable decoration body (restoration operation)" The "restoration process for the first movable decorative body" is triggered by the "restoration operation time corresponding to the symbol variation" that comes after the "restoration process for the fifth movable decorative body (restoration operation)" is completed. It is desirable to perform the "restoration process (restoration operation) for the third movable decorative body" without performing the "(restoration operation)".

After the "restoration process for the first movable decoration (restoration operation)" is successfully restored to normal, the "restoration process for the third movable decoration (restoration operation)" is being executed. Even if an abnormality occurs again in the first movable decorative body, the "restoration process (restoration operation) for the third movable decorative body" is executed so as to straddle the restoration operation time corresponding to the next symbol variation. In this case, it is desirable that the "restoration process (restoration operation) for the first movable decoration" is not started at the restoration operation time. That is, in this case, the "restoration process for the first movable decoration (restoration operation)" occurs at the restoration operation time that comes after the "restoration process for the third movable decoration (restoration operation)" ends with success or failure in normal restoration. Will be started.

Further, in the example shown in FIG. 307C, when the restoration operation time (timing tm42) corresponding to the symbol variation (second time) arrives, among the movable ornaments that are not in the normal state, the symbol variation (1) before this is reached. For the first movable decorative body that is executing the restoration process (restoration operation) triggered by the restoration operation time corresponding to the second time), the restoration operation time (timing tm42) without re-doing the restoration process (restoration operation). Ignore and let this continue. Further, regarding the third movable decorative body, the restoration operation time (timing tm42) is ignored, and the "restoration process (restoration operation) for the first movable decorative body" is waited for the completion, and the completion is performed. The restoration process (restoration operation) is started based on the above. In this regard, when the first movable decoration becomes abnormal again while the "restoration process (restoration operation) for the third movable decoration" started in this way is being executed, the "third movable decoration" When the "restoration process for the body (restoration operation)" is completed, the "restoration process for the first movable decorative body (restoration operation)" is not started based on the end, but the restoration operation time corresponding to the symbol variation is set. It is desirable to start the "restoration process (restoration operation) for the first movable ornament" based on the new arrival.

However, at this time, when the restoration operation time corresponding to the symbol fluctuation newly arrives, the "restoration process (restoration operation) for the third movable decorative body" is not completed and is in the middle of execution (straddling the restoration operation time). It is desirable to ignore the restoration operation time and wait for the "restoration process (restoration operation) for the third movable decoration" to be completed. Then, the "restoration process (restoration operation) for the first movable decoration body" is started at the restoration operation time corresponding to the symbol variation that arrives after the "restoration process (restoration operation) for the third movable decoration body" is completed. It is desirable to let them do it.

That is, in this case, the "first movable decorative body" and the "third movable decorative body" are restored so that the "first movable decorative body" is restored to normal in advance when both are in an abnormal state. When the restoration operation time corresponding to the symbol variation comes when the third movable decoration is not in the normal state even though the processing is performed, the first movable decoration is subjected to the restoration operation. When the restoration operation is started based on the time (when the third movable decoration is not executing the restoration process) and when the restoration operation is not started (the third movable decoration is Since there is a case where the restoration process is being executed), it becomes possible to realize the restoration process according to the situation.

The pachinko machine 1 may be provided with a setting changing means capable of changing the winning probability related to the hit determination and the selection probability related to the effect pattern. However, regardless of the setting of these probabilities, it is desirable that the restoration operation timing corresponding to the symbol fluctuation is used as the same timing (for example, at the start of the symbol fluctuation).

The first movable decoration body, the second movable decoration body, the third movable decoration body, the fourth movable decoration body, and the fifth movable decoration body are provided with movable decorations at positions where the player can contact. The body may be included. In this case, the movable decorative body provided at a position where the player can contact is most likely to be in an abnormal state, so that the restoration operation time has come regardless of the situation of the other movable decorative bodies. Then, it is desirable to provide it as a "fourth movable decorative body" that starts the restoration process (restoration operation).

A light guide plate on which the light guide pattern is displayed is provided in front of the movable decorative body, and the effect of displaying the light guide pattern is not restricted even during the restoration process (restoration operation) of the movable decorative body. It is desirable to make it feasible in order to make it difficult for the player to visually recognize the restoration process (restoration operation) for the movable decorative body.

The "first movable decorative body" and the "second movable decorative body" shown in FIGS. 307B and 307C are prepared so as to have an effect relationship in which they are in an operating state in a specific movable effect. It is desirable to do. For example, the "first movable decorative body" and the "second movable decorative body" may be decorated in a mutually related manner, or may be operated at the same time as a movable effect based on a pattern variation (effect pattern). Be prepared as a form of decoration (completion of characters and character strings, etc.). The third movable decorative body shall be prepared as a specific movable effect or one that is not used when forming one decoration. According to such a configuration, when the restoration process (restoration operation) is performed, it is possible to prevent one decoration from being formed in the same mode (operation at the same time) as the movable effect based on the symbol variation (effect pattern). As a result, the decline in the interest in games can be suppressed.

Regarding the "first movable decorative body", "second movable decorative body", "third movable decorative body", "fourth movable decorative body", and "fifth movable decorative body", the game board The one provided on the 5 side and the one provided on the door frame 3 side may be separately arranged.

In the pachinko machine 1 according to the above example, the "first movable decorative body", the "second movable decorative body", the "third movable decorative body", the "fourth movable decorative body", and the "first movable decorative body", and the "fourth movable decorative body". Although it was decided to provide "5 movable ornaments", about "second movable ornaments", "third movable ornaments", "fourth movable ornaments", and "fifth movable ornaments" Does not necessarily include all of the movable ornaments, and may include "one" of the movable ornaments and "two" or "three" as appropriate. Even with such a configuration, it has the technical features described with reference to FIGS. 307B and 307C (in what mode the restoration process is performed in relation to the "first movable decorative body"). It becomes.

[Penalty when operating the operation unit that can emit light]
As described above, in the pachinko machine 1 according to this embodiment, the player sets a value (volume setting value) regarding the volume by operating the volume adjustment button (effect selection left button 331 or effect selection right button 332). Processing can be executed (peripheral control MPU1511a). Then, normally, when the volume setting value is changed in this way, the peripheral control MPU1511a adjusts the volume applied to the effect sound based on the changed volume setting value (process of reflecting the volume setting value as the volume). Will be executed. At this time, a volume adjustment confirmation sound can be output at the adjusted volume.

Further, as described above, in the pachinko machine 1 according to this embodiment, although the illustration is omitted, the pachinko machine 1 is separated from the volume adjustment button (effect selection left button 331 and effect selection right button 332). It is equipped with a brightness adjustment button for various effect lamps (lamps controlled by the peripheral control MPU1511a), and when it is determined that the brightness adjustment button has been operated, the brightness applied to the various effect lamps is It is possible to execute a process of changing the set value (luminance set value) by the player (peripheral control MPU1511a). Then, normally, when the brightness set value is changed in this way, the peripheral control MPU1511a executes a process of adjusting the emission brightness based on the changed brightness set value (a process of reflecting the brightness set value as a light amount). It will be. At this time, the brightness adjustment confirmation sound can be output at the "volume corresponding to the volume set value" at the time when the player set value (brightness set value) related to the brightness is lowered or raised.

Regarding the change reception for such set values (volume setting value, brightness set value) and the adjustment process according to the changed set value, the symbol does not change and the symbol changes. In any of the states, it can be executed by the operation by the player.

By the way, in recent years, in the field of gaming machines, the number of operation units to be operated by a player tends to increase, but these operation units may be handled roughly, and as a result, one of those operation units is used. If any failure occurs, the operability and directability will be significantly reduced, so it is inevitable that the game will be less enjoyable.

In particular, in the pachinko machine 1 according to this embodiment, as described above, apart from the operation button 410,
-A sword decoration body in which the sword portion 5010 (sword blade portion 5011, handle portion 5012, collar portion 5013) is movable (variable) between the sword delivery position and the sword extraction position by a predetermined operation (sword extraction operation, sword delivery operation). 5001 (see FIGS. 192, 222, etc.)
Even though the operation opportunity is not given, "operation to pull out the sword part 5010 (sword part 5011, handle part 5012, collar part 5013) from the sheath part 5020 (sword removal operation)" and "sword delivery" If the "operation" is repeated, it may cause a failure.

Therefore, in the pachinko machine 1 according to this embodiment, first, the effect light emitting portion (not shown) is arranged on the blade portion 5011, the handle portion 5012, and the collar portion 5013, and the sword portion 5010 (sword blade portion) is provided. 5011, handle portion 5012, and collar portion 5013) are provided with a special detection unit (not shown) that can detect whether or not the sheath portion 5020 is in a specific position (original position) in which the sword is delivered. Then, at least when "during the period when the demo screen is displayed (a non-game state in which the game effect or symbol change according to the jackpot judgment is not executed)", the sword part 5010 is specified as a result of the detection by the special detection unit. When it is determined that the position (original position) is not present, the peripheral control MPU1511a generates a production restriction period as a penalty.

According to such a configuration, at least in a non-gaming state in which the symbol is not changed, the sword portion 5010 is subjected to a predetermined operation together with the effect light emitting portion (sword blade portion 5011, handle portion 5012, and collar portion 5013). As a result of being displaced to, if it is detected that the operation unit is not located at a specific position, an effect limiting period can occur. Therefore, it is possible to preferably suppress the operation unit from being roughly handled.

In this regard, in the peripheral control MPU1511a according to this embodiment, the above-mentioned "change of the setting value (volume setting value) related to the output volume of the effect sound" and the above-mentioned "setting value related to the emission brightness (brightness setting value)" All of the "changes" are kept in a state where they can be accepted by the operation by the player, and the above-mentioned production restriction period is generated. However, as will be described later, during this production restriction period,
-Regarding the production sound, even if the setting value (volume setting value) related to the output volume is changed, the production sound is not output at the volume corresponding to the volume setting value, and the volume is adjusted. While the confirmation sound is not output,
-As for the effect lamp, when the set value (brightness set value) related to the emission brightness is changed, the effect light emitting unit included in the sword portion 5010, which is the detection target, among the plurality of effect lamps included in the pachinko machine 1. (Sword blade portion 5011, handle portion 5012, and collar portion 5013) are provided in a portion different from the sword portion 5010 that is the detection target, although the light is not emitted with the brightness corresponding to the brightness set value. For the effect lamps (for example, various effect LEDs mounted on the decorative board of the game board 5), the effect light emission with the brightness corresponding to the set value is made ready to be executed, and so on. It can be done.

According to such a configuration, when the above-mentioned effect restriction period occurs, it is possible to accept both the setting value change related to the volume and the setting value change related to the brightness, but it is related to the volume setting. The degree of restriction will differ between the processing and the processing related to the brightness setting.

That is, although the volume setting value is secretly variable for the production sound, the production sound is not output in a form that reflects the changed volume setting value, and even the volume adjustment confirmation sound is not output. By not outputting the sound, the player feels nervous (maybe he has done something he shouldn't do).

On the other hand, regarding the brightness, even if the brightness set value is changed for the effect light emitting part (sword part 5011, handle part 5012, and collar part 5013) provided in the "sword part 5010" operated by the player. Although the effect light is not emitted in a form that reflects the changed brightness setting value, the effect lamp provided in a part different from the "sword part 5010" operated by the player has been changed. By making it possible to perform effect light emission (for example, light emission that matches the timing when a specific advance notice effect is performed) in a form that reflects the brightness set value, due to the rough handling of "sword part 5010" While warning that it is recognizable that the production restriction is imposed, it becomes possible to preferably appeal that the pachinko machine 1 as a whole intends to continue the game and the production. In this sense, with respect to the effect lamp on the game board 5 in which the game ball flows down or wins a prize, the effect emission is executed in a form that reflects the changed brightness set value as usual. Is desirable. As a result, it is possible to give a warning against handling the operation unit roughly while preferably avoiding "the player is discouraged from starting the game or urges the end of the game". become.

Moreover, as will be described later, in the pachinko machine 1 according to this embodiment, the release conditions for the respective restrictions are different depending on the restrictions on the processing related to the volume setting and the restrictions on the processing related to the brightness setting. .. In particular, the "processing related to volume setting" on the side that initially imposed relatively strict restrictions should be greatly improved to the normal state relatively early to strongly encourage the continuation of the game. On the other hand, while showing an improvement trend in the "processing related to brightness setting" on the side that initially imposed a relatively sweet restriction, the overall improvement speed was slowed down, and some They try to keep the limits, which is expected to keep the tension moderate for a long time and prevent the mishandling from being re-treated.

FIG. 309 is a time chart showing an example of restrictions on the volume setting and the brightness setting when a penalty is generated for the operation on the sword portion 5010.

Assuming that the player is in a non-game state in which the game is not executed, such as in the demo screen, and is in a normal state in which no error state or penalty has occurred, in that state, as shown in FIG. 309. It is permissible for the player to execute a process of changing the set value (volume set value) with respect to the volume. When the volume setting value is changed, a process of adjusting the volume applied to the effect sound based on the changed volume setting value (a process of reflecting the volume setting value as a volume) is executed, and the adjusted volume is executed. The volume adjustment confirmation sound will be output with.

Further, in the same state, it is also permitted to execute a process of changing the set value (luminance set value) by the player regarding the brightness. When the brightness set value is changed, the process of adjusting the emission brightness based on the changed brightness set value (process of reflecting the brightness set value as the amount of light) is executed, and the brightness adjustment confirmation sound is output. It will be.

Further, in the same state, the handle LED (the effect light emitting part in the handle part 5012), the collar LED (the effect light emitting part in the collar part 5013), the blade LED (the effect light emitting part in the blade part 5011), and the operation part outside LED (game). The effect lamps on the board 5) are all in the "normal light emission" state. The "normal light emission" state corresponds to the "state in which light emission is maintained" as long as it is provided as an effect lamp that always maintains light emission regardless of the production situation. However, if it is provided as an effect lamp that emits light when a predetermined effect condition is satisfied, "a light emission waiting state in which the light emission state is allowed when the predetermined effect condition is satisfied" (Off state) ”is also included in the concept, and it does not necessarily have to be in the light emitting state. Further, it is desirable that the sheath portion 5020 is provided so as to have translucency so that the light emitting mode of the blade LED can be confirmed even in the sword-delivered state.

However, as shown in FIG. 309, as a result of performing the predetermined operation at the timing to 1, the sword portion 5010 (sword blade portion 5011, handle portion) is in a non-gaming state in which the operation effect cannot occur. If it is detected that the sheath portion 5020) is not in the sword-delivered state (detected that it is not in the specific position (original position)), the pachinko machine 1 (peripheral control MPU1511a) according to this embodiment. Then, first, it is decided to generate the first effect suppression state.

In this first effect suppression state, as shown in FIG. 309, it is permitted to execute a process of changing the set value (volume set value) by the player regarding the volume. However, even if the volume setting value is changed, the process of adjusting the volume applied to the effect sound based on the changed volume setting value (the process of reflecting the volume setting value as the volume) is not executed, and the volume adjustment is performed. No confirmation sound is output.

Further, in the same state, it is also permitted to execute a process of changing the set value (luminance set value) by the player regarding the brightness. In this regard, when the brightness set value is changed, among the plurality of effect lamps included in the pachinko machine 1, the handle LED (effect light emitting unit in the handle 5012) in the sword portion 5010 that has been moved (displaced) by a predetermined operation. , The flange LED (the effect light emitting part in the flange part 5013), and the blade LED (the effect light emitting part in the blade part 5011), the process of adjusting the emission brightness based on the changed brightness setting value (the brightness setting value is the amount of light). However, for the operation outside LED (effect lamp in the game board 5) that has not been moved (displaced) by a predetermined operation, it is based on the changed brightness setting value. The process of adjusting the light emission brightness (the process of reflecting the brightness set value as the amount of light) is executed. Further, in the same state, although it is possible to adjust the emission brightness of some of the plurality of effect lamps (LED outside the operation unit), the brightness adjustment confirmation sound is not output even if the adjustment is performed. I am trying to do it.

According to such a configuration, in the first effect suppression state, although both the setting value change related to the volume and the setting value change related to the brightness can be accepted, it is related to the volume setting. The degree of restriction will differ between the processing and the processing related to the brightness setting.

That is, although the volume setting value is secretly variable for the production sound, the production sound is not output in a form that reflects the changed volume setting value, and even the volume adjustment confirmation sound is not output. By not outputting the sound, the player feels nervous (maybe he has done something he shouldn't do).

On the other hand, regarding the brightness, even if the brightness set value is changed for the effect light emitting part (sword part 5011, handle part 5012, and collar part 5013) provided in the "sword part 5010" operated by the player. Although the effect light is not emitted in a form that reflects the changed brightness set value, the effect lamp (operation) provided on the game board 5 that is not moved (displaced) by a predetermined operation and is played. The external LED) emits an effect light in a form that reflects the changed brightness set value (for example, if the game is started in this state and a predetermined effect condition is satisfied, a specific advance notice effect is performed. It will be possible to perform light emission according to the timing. Therefore, while warning the rough handling of the "sword portion 5010", it is possible to preferably appeal that the pachinko machine 1 as a whole intends to continue the game and the production.

More specifically, in the first effect suppression state, the handle LED (effect light emitting unit in the handle 5012) continues the light emission state (penalty light emission) in the predetermined emission brightness and light emission mode. It is controlled, and for example, even if the brightness setting value is changed in the first effect suppression state, the changed brightness setting value is not reflected, and the symbol variation is started according to the result of the jackpot determination. Even if a light emission request occurs, the light emission mode corresponding to the request does not appear.

In addition, the collar LED (effect light emitting unit in the collar 5013) can emit light as usual even in the first effect suppression state, and is a production lamp that always maintains light emission regardless of the production situation. If it is provided as an effect lamp, it is considered as "a state in which light emission is maintained", and if it is provided as an effect lamp that emits light when a predetermined effect condition is satisfied, "a predetermined effect" is provided. When the condition is satisfied, the light emitting state is allowed to be in the light emitting state. " However, even if the brightness setting value is changed in the first effect suppression state, the brim LED is designed so that the effect light is not emitted in a form that reflects the changed brightness setting value. Even within the section 5010, it is possible to warn about the rough handling of the "sword section 5010" while allowing the light emission effect to encourage the continuation of the game.

Further, the blade LED (the effect light emitting unit in the blade unit 5011) is controlled so as to continue the extinguished state in the first effect suppression state. Even if it occurs, it does not respond to it. Therefore, in the blade LED, even if the brightness set value is changed in the first effect suppression state, the effect light cannot be emitted in a form that reflects the changed brightness set value.

On the other hand, no restriction is imposed on the operation part outside LED provided outside the sword part 5010 that has been moved (displaced) by a predetermined operation, and the above-mentioned "normal light emission" state is continued. It will be. Therefore, when the brightness set value is changed in the first effect suppression state, the changed brightness set value can be reflected (if it is in the light emitting state), and the symbol variation is started to emit light according to the result of the jackpot determination. When a request arises, a light emitting mode corresponding to the request will appear.

In such a configuration, since restrictions are imposed only on the effect lamp included in the "sword portion 5010" that has been moved by a predetermined operation, the game board 5 on which the game is played is restricted. If only the gaze is focused, it seems that the emission brightness can be adjusted normally when the brightness setting value is changed, so that the first effect suppression state is occurring. There is a concern that it will not be recognized. In this regard, in the pachinko machine 1 according to this embodiment, the brightness set value is changed by the operation by the player in the first effect suppression state, and the emission brightness of a part (LED outside the operation unit) of the plurality of effect lamps is emitted. Even if the adjustment is made, the brightness adjustment confirmation sound is not output. As a result, even when the "sword part 5010" is not visually recognized, the player can be made to recognize that the production is in the restricted state, and the "sword part 5010" is returned to the original position. You will be able to urge them to do so.

Then, after the first effect suppression state is generated, the operation of positioning the sword portion 5010 to the sword delivery state is performed at the timing to 2, and it is detected (specification) that the sword portion 5010 is in the sword delivery state. Assuming that the position (original position) is detected), the pachinko machine 1 (peripheral control MPU1511a) according to this embodiment performs a process of shifting from the first effect suppression state to the second effect suppression state.

In this second effect suppression state, as shown in FIG. 309, with respect to the volume, all the restrictions when the first effect suppression state is released are released and the sound is processed normally. Not only the execution of the process of changing the volume setting value is allowed, but also the execution of the process of reflecting the volume setting value as the volume and the execution of the process of outputting the volume adjustment confirmation sound are allowed. It has become.

On the other hand, regarding the brightness, although the "restriction on the brightness adjustment confirmation sound" among the restrictions when the first effect is suppressed is released, the "partial restriction on the brightness adjustment" is not released and continues. It is supposed to be done. Therefore, in the second effect suppression state, the process of changing the brightness set value, the process of adjusting the emission brightness of the LED outside the operation unit among the plurality of effect lamps, and the brightness adjustment confirmation sound are output. Execution of the processing is permitted, but the processing for adjusting the emission brightness of the production lamp included in the sword portion 5010 among the plurality of production lamps is not permitted (restricted state). It will be maintained until then.

That is, the second effect suppressing state is a state that occurs based on "the sword part 5010 is detected to be in the sword delivery state" in the first effect suppressing state, and the sword part 5010 is already in a specific position (original). It can be said that it is located in the position) and the rough handling has been resolved. In response to this, we strongly encourage the continuation of the game by promptly and greatly improving the "processing related to volume setting" on the side that initially imposed relatively strict restrictions to the normal state. Is the main purpose.

However, if all the restrictions are immediately released by simply returning the sword portion 5010 to a specific position (original position) after the first effect suppression state occurs, the function as a penalty is insufficient. Yes, the rough treatment of "Sword 5010" may recur. In this respect, according to the above configuration, when "it is detected that the sword portion 5010 is in the sword delivery state" in the first effect suppression state, the process shifts to the second effect suppression state. As for the brightness, the "limitation on the brightness adjustment confirmation sound" among the restrictions when the first effect is suppressed is released, but the "partial restriction on the brightness adjustment" is continued without being released. I am trying to do it.

That is, in this case, since the production restriction is left for the "sword part 5010" itself, which is the target of rough treatment, the atmosphere that makes it difficult to perform further rough treatment for the "sword part 5010" ("" It will be possible to provide "maybe it will break", and eventually it will be possible to expect prevention of recurrence.

On the other hand, in the second production suppression state, since the rough handling of the "sword part 5010" has already been resolved, the player is paying close attention to the game board 5 where the game is performed ( It can be said that the situation where the game is concentrated) is already in a desirable situation. In this respect, in the second effect suppression state, the brightness set value is changed when the player is gazing at the game board 5 on which the game is performed (the situation where the sword portion 5010 is not visually recognized). Sometimes, in order to make the light emission brightness appear to be adjustable as usual (make it look like it is in a normal state), the brightness setting value is changed by the operation by the player, and some of the multiple production lamps (operation). When the emission brightness of the external LED) is adjusted, a brightness adjustment confirmation sound is output. As a result, the player is concentrated on the game, and the rough handling of the sword portion 5010 is prevented from recurring.

According to such a second production suppression state, the "processing related to the brightness setting" on the side that initially imposed a relatively sweet restriction shows an improvement tendency, but is subject to rough treatment. By intentionally leaving restrictions only on the "sword part 5010" that has become, the player can play the game while maintaining a moderate sense of tension for a long period of time and preventing mishandling from being re-handled. It will be expected to concentrate on.

Further, in the second effect suppression state, some of the effect lamps (handle LED, collar LED, blade LED) among the plurality of effect lamps are excluded from the adjustment target of the emission brightness, but other than that. When the emission brightness of the effect lamp (LED outside the operation unit) is adjusted, the brightness adjustment confirmation sound is output in the same manner as when the emission brightness is adjusted in the normal state. That is, in this case, even if the second effect suppression state occurs, it is not a situation in which the operation by the player is not accepted, but a situation in which the operation by the player can react as in the normal state. It becomes possible to appeal, and it becomes possible to preferably encourage the player to continue the game.

In particular, in the pachinko machine 1 according to this embodiment, even when the emission brightness is adjusted only for a part of the effect lamps (LEDs outside the operation unit) in the second effect suppression state, the normal state is achieved. The same brightness adjustment confirmation sound as at a certain time is assigned to the channel and output. As a result, even if the situation can be adjusted only partially, it is expected to give a sense of security as if the player has already returned to the normal state and to motivate the player to continue the game. However, when the second effect suppression state is terminated and the state shifts to the normal state, the brightness of the pattern LED is adjusted so that the brightness setting value at that time is collectively reflected. In this case, the brightness is adjusted. It is important not to output the adjustment confirmation sound in order to make it look as if it had already returned to normal.

Further, in the pachinko machine 1 (peripheral control MPU1511a) according to this embodiment, as shown in FIG. 309, whether or not a predetermined time (for example, 60 seconds) has elapsed since the second effect suppression state occurred. When it is determined that the predetermined time has elapsed (timing to 3), the process of ending the second effect suppression state and shifting to the normal state can be executed.

That is, the transition condition from the "first production suppression state in which the production restriction degree is relatively strict" to the "second production suppression state in which the production restriction degree is relatively loose" is set as "an operation by the player". This makes it possible to establish this at an early stage, which keeps the motivation to continue the game. However, the transition condition from the "second production suppression state with a relatively loose degree of production restriction" to the "normal state" shall be "a predetermined time has passed since the second production suppression state occurred". It is not allowed to establish this early. By adopting these transition conditions, it becomes possible to effectively warn against mishandling while maintaining a good motivation to continue the game, which in turn can be expected to prevent recurrence. Will be.

Moreover, in the pachinko machine 1 (peripheral control MPU1511a) according to this embodiment, as shown in FIG. Among (handle LED, collar LED, blade LED), some of the production lamps (here, collar LED, blade LED) are the case where the second production suppression state is terminated and returned to the normal state. Also, only "limited" light emission is allowed.

More specifically, with respect to the brim LED and the blade LED, although it is possible to emit light as usual, even if the brightness setting value is changed, the changed brightness setting value is reflected. It is designed so that the effect light emission can be performed only with a predetermined brightness set value. That is, in this case, especially for the brim LED, after the first effect suppression state occurs, only the effect light emission under the same restriction is continuously performed, and it is possible that a failure has occurred in a part thereof. It will be expected to raise awareness and prevent the recurrence of miscellaneous treatment of the "sword portion 5010". Alternatively, even after the production suppression state ends and becomes a normal state, it can be made to function as a history of occurrence of the production suppression state before that, and stable operation as the pachinko machine 1 is expected. You will be able to do it. The effect restrictions left on the brim LED and blade LED may be maintained in an unremovable state, but for example, due to the establishment of different conditions such as RAM clearing and power shutoff. It is desirable to be able to release it.

According to such a configuration, even after the first effect suppression state ends and the processing related to the volume adjustment is returned to normal, the processing related to the brightness adjustment is required to be further improved step by step. Therefore, it becomes possible to maintain a sense of tension for a longer period of time while maintaining the motivation to play.

Regarding the first effect suppression state (furthermore, the second effect suppression state), in addition to the non-game state (during the demo screen, etc.), the game execution state in which the game is being executed (the symbol according to the result of the jackpot determination). Even when it is in a variable state or in a jackpot game state, it can be generated based on the detection that the sword part 5010 is not in the sword delivery state (detection that it is not in the specific position (original position)). It is desirable to do. That is, even in the game state (such as when the symbol is changing according to the result of the jackpot judgment), the sword part 5010 should not be treated roughly in a state where no operation opportunity is given, and it is necessary to proceed with the game and the production. This is because it is desired that they be treated properly.

However, even if the situation is controlled to the "second effect suppression state" shown in FIG. 309, the change of the brightness set value is accepted when the game is in the game execution state (the symbol variation is in the execution state). When the brightness is adjusted accordingly, it is desirable not to output the brightness adjustment confirmation sound. That is, when the transition from the "first effect suppression state" to the "second effect suppression state" is performed, at least all the restrictions on the processing side related to the volume adjustment are released, so that the tension is well maintained. There is a concern that you will not be able to do it. On the other hand, in order to strongly encourage the continuation of the game, it is important to greatly improve the restrictions on "processing related to volume adjustment" on the side that was strict until then.

In this regard, "when the tension is not maintained well" means that the game is restarted with a lightness of the situation where the second production suppression state has occurred (the situation where the first production suppression state where the production restriction is strict has ended). It is assumed that this is the case, and conversely, it is assumed that the tension can be maintained well in the situation where the game is not restarted. Therefore, even in the second effect suppression state, when the player is in the execution state (game restart) of the symbol change, which is assumed that the tension cannot be maintained well, the brightness adjustment confirmation is intentionally not output, and the "brightness" is set. Looking only at "processing related to adjustment", it can be expected that an appropriate sense of tension will be given by making it appear that the first effect suppression state has not been improved.

In this sense, in the situation controlled to the "second effect suppression state" shown in FIG. 309, when the symbol variation is in the execution state, the change of the volume setting value is accepted and the volume is adjusted accordingly. The volume adjustment confirmation sound may not be output even when the above is performed. In addition, for such special processing (processing that does not output the volume adjustment confirmation sound, processing that does not output the brightness adjustment confirmation sound) when the symbol fluctuation is in the execution state, the second effect suppression state ends and the limitation is one. It may be applied even when the situation is returned to the normal state in the form of being left behind. That is, if the brightness adjustment confirmation sound or the volume adjustment confirmation sound is output or the brightness adjustment confirmation sound or the volume adjustment confirmation sound is not output during the game execution state, the meaning cannot be understood and the game is started. This is because there is a risk that you will not be able to concentrate.

In the above description example, the handle LED, the brim LED, and the blade LED are provided, but the sword portion 5010 may be provided with at least the handle LED as the effect lamp. Even with such a configuration, it is possible to maintain the motivation to play by showing gradual improvement while warning the rough handling of the "sword part 5010" in the first effect suppression state and the second effect suppression state. It is possible.

Further, in the above-described example, as soon as "detection that the sword portion 5010 is in the sword delivery state" is detected in the first effect suppression state, the state shifts from the "first effect suppression state" to the "second effect suppression state". The processing is not necessarily limited to this, and is based on, for example, a predetermined time (for example, 5 seconds) elapses after "detection that the sword portion 5010 is in the sword delivery state" in the first effect suppression state. The process of shifting from the "first effect suppression state" to the "second effect suppression state" may be performed. According to such a configuration, while allowing a relatively early transition from the "first effect suppression state" to the "second effect suppression state", the effect is restricted for at least a predetermined time (for example, 10 seconds). It will be possible to maintain the strict first production suppression state. The predetermined time (for example, 5 seconds) may be set as a time shorter than the predetermined time (for example, 60 seconds) required from the occurrence of the second effect suppression state to the end of the second effect suppression state. Desirable, but not necessarily limited to this.

Further, in the above-described example, the cause of the effect limitation is a predetermined operation for the operating means (sword portion 5010), but the present invention is not necessarily limited to this. For example, even if it is a specific object that is not an operation target by the player (for example, an object that can move between the first state and the second state, such as a decorative movable body or a door frame 3), this is treated roughly. If it is forcibly displaced, it may cause a failure. Therefore, based on the fact that at least "a lamp subject to production restrictions such as the above-mentioned pattern LED" is provided as an effect lamp for a specific object, and it is detected that the specific object is not in the original position. Therefore, it is desirable to generate the effect suppression state as described above. That is, in this case, regardless of whether it is in the non-game state or the game state, the first effect suppression state as described above is performed based on the detection that the specific object is not in the first state (original position). After the generation, the second effect suppression state as described above is generated based on the detection that the specific object has been returned to the first state (original position), and a predetermined time elapses from the generation. Based on this, it will be returned to the normal state (or the normal state with restrictions).

In addition, in the above explanation example, regarding the method when the volume adjustment confirmation sound and the brightness adjustment confirmation sound are not output, in addition to not assigning the volume adjustment confirmation sound and the brightness adjustment confirmation sound to the channel, the volume adjustment A confirmation sound or a brightness adjustment confirmation sound is assigned to a channel, but it can also be realized by setting the volume value to "0".

Further, in the above description example, when the change to the volume setting value is received a plurality of times in the "first effect suppression state" and then the transition to the "second effect suppression state" is performed, the "second effect suppression state" is performed. At the time of transition to the "state", the volume will be adjusted in such a way that the changes made multiple times with respect to the volume setting values up to that point are reflected in a batch. Further, when the change to the brightness set value is received a plurality of times in the "first effect suppression state" and the "second effect suppression state" and then returned to the normal state at the timing to 3, the state returns to the "normal state". At the time of transition to, the brightness of the pattern LED is adjusted in such a way that the changes made a plurality of times with respect to the brightness setting values up to that point are collectively reflected. The method of collectively adjusting such multiple setting value changes at "a certain timing" (including the presence / absence of output of the adjustment confirmation sound at that time) is described with reference to FIGS. 166 to 168. Can be realized by appropriately adopting. Further, in this case, the timing to2 in which the volume setting value can be collectively reflected and the timing to3 in which the brightness setting value can be collectively reflected are different, so that the path to return to the normal state can be shown step by step. It becomes possible to motivate the player to continue the game by making it appear as if he / she has already returned to the normal state or that he / she is recovering. Further, the predetermined time from the occurrence of the second effect suppression state to the end may be about 10 seconds.

It should be noted that the volume adjustment confirmation sound and the brightness adjustment confirmation sound are output as the same sound, and although it is not possible to confirm which "confirmation sound" was output, some "confirmation sound" must be output. Should be recognizable. That is, if various sounds are adopted as the confirmation sound, there is a possibility that the possibility of the expected production sound suggesting the degree of expectation may be conscious, and there is a concern that the interest in the game may be reduced. Because.

[Brightness adjustment at the time of abnormality notification]
As described above, in the pachinko machine 1 according to this embodiment, although not shown, various types of pachinko machines 1 include, apart from the volume adjustment buttons (effect selection left button 331 and effect selection right button 332). It is equipped with a brightness adjustment button for the production lamp (the lamp subject to production control by the peripheral control MPU1511a), and when it is determined that the brightness adjustment button has been operated, a game regarding the brightness applied to the various production lamps. It is possible to execute a process of changing a set value (luminance set value) by a person (peripheral control MPU1511a). Then, normally, if there is an effect lamp that is in a light emitting state at the time when the brightness set value is changed in this way, a process of adjusting the emission brightness of the effect lamp based on the changed brightness set value ( The process of reflecting the brightness set value as the amount of light) will be executed. At this time, the brightness adjustment confirmation sound can be output at the "volume corresponding to the volume set value" at the time when the player set value (brightness set value) related to the brightness is lowered or raised.

For the effect lamps that are not in the light emitting state when the brightness setting value is changed, the brightness corresponding to the changed brightness setting value is used when there is a light emission request based on the result of the jackpot determination. It will be in a light emitting state. More specifically, if it is provided as a production lamp that always maintains light emission regardless of the production situation, light emission according to the changed brightness setting value is received as soon as a change in the brightness setting value is received. It will be changed to the light emitting mode at the brightness, but if it is provided as an effect lamp that emits light based on the establishment of a predetermined effect condition (the effect request according to the jackpot determination), the predetermined effect. At the timing when the effect condition of the above is satisfied, the effect emission is performed as the emission brightness according to the changed brightness set value. That is, until the predetermined effect condition is satisfied, the effect is maintained in a state (light emission waiting state) in which the effect emission with the emission brightness corresponding to the changed brightness set value is possible.

Further, regarding the change acceptance related to the brightness set value and the adjustment process according to the changed brightness set value, the player can use the state in which the symbol does not change and the state in which the symbol changes. It is made possible to execute each by the operation by.

By the way, as described above, in the pachinko machine 1, when the specific abnormality detection as illustrated in FIG. 156 occurs, the abnormality notification is performed according to the abnormality type, but the hall side is cheating. If it is a type of abnormality detection that is unlikely to occur, there may be cases where the player wants the player to continue the game as it is. That is, if the gaming interest is reduced as a result of notifying the abnormality even though it is a minor abnormality that is not serious, and the player ends the game, the operating rate of the pachinko machine 1 is increased. There may be disadvantages due to the decline.

Therefore, in the peripheral control MPU1511a according to this embodiment, when it is detected that the pachinko machine 1 is in a specific state (for example, a state in which the right gate passage (abnormal game) has occurred in a non-time saving state). Of the plurality of production lamps, some of the production lamps (for example, the production lamp provided on the game board 5) are in a state where they can emit light by the production (during the production light emission or the condition of the production light emission is satisfied. It is possible to execute the abnormality notification light emission by using at least the specific effect lamp (for example, the effect lamp provided in the door frame 3) included in the other effect lamps while keeping the waiting state (off state) until. It is supposed to be.

Even during the execution period of such anomaly notification light emission, it is possible to accept the change of the brightness set value each time the operation is accepted by the player, and the light emission by the effect is left as it is possible. In some of the above-mentioned effect lamps, the emission brightness can be adjusted based on the changed brightness setting value, whereas in the above-mentioned specific effect lamp, the changed brightness can be adjusted. Regardless of the set value, the abnormality notification light emission is executed only at a predetermined brightness set value.

According to such a configuration, even if it is during the execution period of the abnormality notification light emission, the brightness setting value is changed every time the operation is accepted by the player, although it is a part of the plurality of effect lamps. Is reflected, and the effect light emission at the reflected brightness set value is executed. Therefore, it is possible to preferably encourage the player to continue the game while notifying the hall side of the abnormality.

However, as will be described later, in the pachinko machine 1 according to this embodiment, when the brightness adjustment target is during the execution period of the abnormal notification light emission limited to a part, the change of the brightness setting value is accepted. Even in this case, the brightness adjustment confirmation sound is not always output, and the brightness adjustment confirmation sound can be output again when the remaining time until the end of the period, which is limited to a part of the brightness adjustment target, is short. It is possible to suggest to the player that the abnormal notification light emission is finished and the normal light emission is expected to be allowed soon after the abnormal notification light emission is completed. I have to.

FIG. 310 is a time chart showing an example of the light emitting mode of the effect lamp during the abnormality notification period corresponding to the specific abnormality detection.

As shown in FIG. 310, in the timing tp1 when the game is not being executed, such as during the demo screen, the right gate is passed in a specific state (for example, a non-time saving state (abnormal game)). If it is detected that the state has occurred), the peripheral control MPU1511a according to this embodiment generates a lamp warning period (timing tp1 to tp3) based on the detection.

During this lamp warning period (timing tp1 to tp3), some of the production lamps (corresponding to "LED-A group" in the figure) among the plurality of production lamps included in the pachinko machine 1 emit light. While keeping it possible, the abnormality notification light emission will be performed using other production lamps (corresponding to "LED-B group" in the figure). It should be noted that the abnormality notification light emission does not necessarily have to be executed by using all the other effect lamps, and a part of the other effect lamps (for example, the specific effect lamp provided on the door frame 3). It may be executed using only.

That is, in the pachinko machine 1 according to this embodiment, even when a specific state (for example, a state in which the right gate passage (abnormal game) occurs in a non-time saving state) occurs, a part of the effect is used. The lamp (corresponding to "LED-A group" in the figure) is designed to emit light in the same manner as when the specific state does not occur, which causes an abnormality on the hall side. While notifying the player, the player is preferably encouraged to continue the game.

Therefore, in the pachinko machine 1 according to this embodiment, even when the lamp warning period (timing tp1 to tp3) is generated, the change acceptance related to the brightness set value is permitted. Then, in some of the production lamps (corresponding to "LED-A group" in the figure) that are set to "do not emit abnormal notification light", the emission brightness is the same as when the lamp warning period is not in progress. , It can be adjusted based on the changed brightness setting value (if it emits light constantly, it changes immediately, and if it emits light according to the production request, it waits for light emission at the changed brightness setting value). (Adjustment can be reflected).

On the other hand, for the other production lamps (corresponding to "LED-B group" in the figure), even if the brightness setting value is changed during the lamp warning period (timing tp1 to tp3), the change is made. The brightness setting value is not reflected, and the abnormality notification light is emitted only at the predetermined brightness setting value (adjustment cannot be reflected). That is, in this case, it is possible that some of the production lamps and the other production lamps emit light at the same time in a form that reflects different brightness setting values. It becomes possible to make it easier for the player to recognize that the abnormality notification light emission that has nothing to do with is being performed. In this sense, it is desirable that the brightness set value can be changed only in the range equal to or less than the brightness set value adopted by the abnormal notification light emission.

In this regard, in the pachinko machine 1 according to this embodiment, when the abnormality notification light emission is being executed, the brightness adjustment confirmation sound is not always heard even if the change in the brightness setting value is accepted. I am trying not to output. That is, until the timing tp2 (timing tp1 to tp2), in which the remaining time until the end of the period in which the target of the brightness adjustment is limited becomes less than the predetermined time (for example, 10 seconds), is reached, , Even if the brightness setting value is changed and the emission brightness of some of the effect lamps is actually adjusted, it is controlled so as not to output the brightness adjustment confirmation sound. Then, based on the arrival of the timing tp2, when the change in the brightness setting value is accepted (when the emission brightness of some of the production lamps is actually adjusted), the brightness adjustment confirmation sound can be output again. I am trying to generate a situation where it is done.

According to such a configuration, if the brightness adjustment confirmation sound is not output even though the brightness setting value is changed during the execution period of the abnormality notification light emission, the remaining time until the end of the period is completed. It is possible to recognize that the situation is longer than the predetermined time (for example, 10 seconds), but when the brightness adjustment confirmation sound is output when the brightness setting value is changed, the period is terminated. It becomes possible to recognize that the remaining time until is shorter than a predetermined time (for example, 10 seconds). Therefore, it is suggested to the player that even if there is no change in the mode of the abnormal notification light emission itself and this is continued, the state is internally heading toward the normal state (improvement). This makes it possible to preferably promote the motivation to continue the game even when the abnormal notification light is emitted for a relatively long time.

In particular, in the pachinko machine 1 according to this embodiment, all the effects are produced even during the execution period (timing tp2 to tp3) of the abnormality notification light emission in which the brightness set value is only partially reflected (LED-A group). The same sound as in the normal state where the brightness setting value can be reflected is output as the above brightness adjustment confirmation sound, which gives a sense of security as if it has already returned to the normal state. It is designed to suppress the deterioration of the game interest during the period when the abnormality notification light is emitted. However, in this case, as shown in FIG. 310, at the timing tp3 at which the execution period of the abnormal notification light emission ends, the brightness set value at that time even if the brightness set value has been changed a plurality of times until then. Will be reflected collectively to the other production lamps (“LED-B group” that used to emit abnormal notification light), but at this time, the brightness adjustment confirmation sound will be emitted. It is important not to output to make it look as if it has already returned to the normal state.

In the above explanation example, when the game is not being executed, such as during the demo screen, the game is set to a specific state (for example, a state in which the right gate is passed (abnormal game) in the non-time saving state). This has been described as an example of generating a lamp warning period (timing tp1 to tp3) based on the detection that the lamp warning period has occurred. However, it is detected that a specific state (for example, a state in which the right gate has passed (abnormal game) has occurred in a non-time saving state) has been reached while the game is in a game state (such as a symbol fluctuation state) in which the game is being executed. Even if this is done, the lamp warning period (timing tp1 to tp3) will be generated based on the detection.

When the lamp warning period (timing tp1 to tp3) is generated when the game is being executed in the game execution state (design fluctuation state, jackpot game state, etc.), it is basically the same as in the above description example. Is. However, in this case, the lamp warning period (timing tp1- In tp3), it is desirable not to output the brightness adjustment confirmation sound. That is, since the case of being in the game execution state means that the game is being continued by the player, it is assumed that the game is unlikely to be terminated. Therefore, even if it becomes a situation (timing tp2 to tp3) that can be returned to the normal state soon, by maintaining the control that the brightness adjustment confirmation sound is not output, "the abnormality notification light emission is still being executed. It can be said that it is more desirable to make the player recognize accurate information such as ". Further, in this case, even after the execution period (timing tp1 to tp3) of the abnormality notification light emission ends and the normal state is reached, the state in which the brightness adjustment confirmation sound is not output is maintained as long as the game execution state continues. You may do so. This is because if the brightness adjustment confirmation sound is output or the brightness adjustment confirmation sound is not output during the game execution state, the meaning cannot be understood and it may not be possible to concentrate on the game.

In the above description example, when the game is changed from the non-game state to the game execution state during the period of the timings tp2 to tp3 in which the brightness adjustment confirmation sound can be output (the symbol change starts). In such a case, the "control not to output the brightness adjustment confirmation sound (non-audible control at timings tp1 to tp2)" is re-executed based on the game execution state. Then, the "control that the brightness adjustment confirmation sound is not output" is maintained until the timing tp3 arrives, or until the game execution state ends.

Further, in the above explanatory example, for example, even when the period (timing tp2 to tp3) after the arrival of the timing tp2 in which the remaining time becomes less than the predetermined time (for example, 10 seconds) is reached, the said If it is re-detected that a specific state (for example, a state in which a right gate passage (abnormal game) has occurred in a non-time saving state) has occurred within the period, the above-mentioned is described from the time of the detection. It is desirable to redo the process related to the abnormal notification light emission (process after timing tp1). That is, in this case, even if the brightness adjustment confirmation sound is in a state where it can be output, it is returned to the state in which the brightness adjustment confirmation sound is not output again.

Further, in the above explanatory example, when the timing tp3 arrives, all the effect lamps are shifted to the normal state in which the adjustment based on the brightness set value can be received. However, during the lamp warning period (timing tp1 to tp3), a plurality of production lamps are prepared as production lamps that cannot be adjusted based on the brightness set value, and when the timing tp3 arrives, the production lamps of the production lamps are prepared. Only a part of the lamps can be adjusted based on the brightness set value, but at least for a specific effect lamp, the adjustment based on the brightness set value cannot be received even in the normal state after the timing tp3 arrives. You may do so. According to such a configuration, the limitation regarding the brightness adjustment is left for a specific effect lamp. Therefore, even after the lamp warning period ends and the normal state is reached, the lamp warning is given before that. It becomes possible to function as a history of occurrence of a period, and stable operation of the pachinko machine 1 can be expected. It should be noted that the restriction left for a specific production lamp may be maintained in an unremovable state, but can be released by, for example, clearing the RAM or shutting off the power supply. Is desirable.

As for the brightness adjustment confirmation sound, it is output as the same sound as the volume adjustment confirmation sound, and although it is not possible to confirm which "confirmation sound" was output, some "confirmation sound" is output. It is desirable to make something recognizable. That is, if various sounds are adopted as the confirmation sound, there is a possibility that the possibility of the expected production sound suggesting the degree of expectation may be conscious, and there is a concern that the interest in the game may be reduced. Because.

Further, during the execution period of the abnormality notification light emission according to the above description example, it is desirable to allow the player to accept the change of the set value related to the volume of the effect sound based on the operation acceptance by the player. In this case, the "process related to the notification sound and the volume adjustment" during the execution period of the abnormal notification light emission can be realized by appropriately adopting the contents described with reference to FIGS. 166 to 168. In this case, the "process related to the notification sound and the volume adjustment" described with reference to FIGS. 166 to 168 may be terminated (collectively reflecting the volume) when the timing tp3 arrives, but the timing may be used. It may be terminated (collective reflection of the volume) when tp2 arrives. In such a configuration, the timing tp2 at which the volume setting value can be collectively reflected and the timing tp3 at which the brightness setting value can be collectively reflected are different, so that the path to return to the normal state is shown step by step. It will be possible to motivate the player to continue the game by making it appear as if he / she has already returned to normal or is in a recovery tendency.

Further, in the above explanatory example, the specific state is illustrated as "a state in which the right gate passage (abnormal game) occurs in the non-time saving state", but the present invention is not limited to this, and FIGS. 166 to 168 are referred to. It may be the same as the case of the example described above (a state in which a door opening abnormality or a magnetic detection abnormality has occurred, etc.).

In addition, in the above explanation example, regarding the method when the volume adjustment confirmation sound and the brightness adjustment confirmation sound are not output, in addition to not assigning the volume adjustment confirmation sound and the brightness adjustment confirmation sound to the channel, the volume adjustment A confirmation sound or a brightness adjustment confirmation sound is assigned to a channel, but it can also be realized by setting the volume value to "0".

[14. Production control by scheduler]
In the gaming machine, various effects are performed during the game by sound output, lighting / blinking of lamps, display of images, etc., and various elaborate effects are being attempted in order to enhance the interest of the game. As described above, the gaming machine controls a plurality of types of effect devices by the peripheral control board 1510, which is an effect control device, based on the command output from the main control board 1310, and executes the effect according to the game state of the game. do. The main control board 1310 and the peripheral control board 1510 are connected by a unidirectional signal line that transmits signals in one direction.

In order to execute a plurality of types of effects in cooperation with each other, for example, Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 7-313649 discloses a control technique for realizing various effects displays by using scenario data. The scenario data is data in which the symbols to be displayed on the screen are sequentially defined in chronological order. By preparing a control process that realizes a general-purpose process for sequentially displaying designated symbols according to this scenario data, there is an advantage that a wide variety of effect displays can be easily realized simply by switching the scenario data. It is also possible to include the BGM designation in the scenario data. In this case, by outputting the designated BGM by the sound source IC, it is possible to output the sound corresponding to the display screen.

However, in gaming machines, more elaborate production is required. With the above-mentioned conventional technique, it has been difficult to perform various effects by interlocking a plurality of effect devices such as audio output, lamp lighting, and image display. For example, it was not possible to change the BGM while executing the image display according to the scenario data. Further, when the sound effect is output in response to the user's operation during the image display, the image display and the BGM output are stopped and the sound effect is output. When the output of the sound effect was completed, the BGM and the image display were restarted from the beginning regardless of how far the BGM was played, which gave a sense of discomfort. The lighting and blinking of the lamps are controlled by individual programs according to the game state, regardless of the content of the image display, and it is difficult to realize a wide variety of lighting and blinking linked to the image display. there were.

[18-1. Software configuration in the peripheral control unit]
In the gaming machine of the present embodiment, the peripheral control unit 1530 provided on the peripheral control board 1510 receives the main command from the main control board 1310 and executes the production of the game. In the present embodiment, each configuration for executing the effect based on the received main command is configured as software, but it may be configured as hardware. Hereinafter, the configuration and outline of the functions for realizing the effect control in the present embodiment will be described, and then the details of each function will be described.

[18-1-1. Configuration and outline of each function]
FIG. 311 is a functional block diagram illustrating a configuration and an outline of a function for executing the effect control in the present embodiment. The peripheral control unit 1530 includes an input command analysis unit 5010, an effect control unit 5020, a layer data storage unit 5030, an effect block control unit 5040, an effect block data storage unit 5050, a scheduler execution unit 5060, a scheduler data storage unit 5070, and an output module unit. It is equipped with 5080.

The input command analysis unit 5010 receives the input of the main command and analyzes the input command. The effect control unit 5020 acquires layer data from the layer data storage unit 5030 based on the analysis result of the main command, and determines the block control information (effect block number). Explaining the layers, in the present embodiment, layers are set for each effect category such as a background and a character, each effect element is drawn on each layer, and these layers are superimposed and displayed to display an image on a liquid crystal display device. Is output. Thereby, for example, if only the background is different and the display (operation) of the character is the same, it is possible to standardize the layers for displaying the character. As a result, the capacity of the production data (scheduler data) can be reduced and the development efficiency can be improved. The layer data storage unit 5030 stores information for specifying the effect for each layer.

The effect block control unit 5040 receives the block control information (effect block number) determined by the effect control unit 5020, and acquires the effect block data corresponding to the effect block number from the effect block data storage unit 5050. The effect block data includes scheduler data for executing the effect. The scheduler data stores a plurality of functions in the order in which they should be executed among a plurality of processes required according to the effect device in order to control the effect in each effect device. It is data. The effect block data includes "liquid crystal effect block data" for executing an effect to be displayed on the liquid crystal display device, "liquid crystal symbol block data" for variablely displaying the identification symbol on the liquid crystal display device, and sound (sound). There are three types, "sub-effect block data" for controlling lamps, accessories, and the like. The effect block control unit 5040 executes control according to the type of effect block data, and passes the scheduler control information including the effect block data to the scheduler execution unit 5060.

The scheduler execution unit 5060 acquires the scheduler data included in the effect block data from the scheduler data storage unit 5070. Then, the scheduler data is executed, the function corresponding to each effect device is called, and the effect device control information is transmitted to the output module unit 5080.

The output module unit 5080 receives the effect device control information from the scheduler execution unit 5060, and transmits the effect device drive data to each effect device based on the effect device control information. Each effect device performs an operation based on the effect device drive data. In the output module unit 5080, the effect control unit 5020 is configured by software by a CPU (peripheral control MPU 1511a) provided in the effect control device (peripheral control board 1530), and the CPU executes another computer program. It is realized by. It should be noted that it may be configured as hardware by being configured by the effect control unit 5020 and another arithmetic circuit.

[18-1-2. Module configuration]
Subsequently, the details of the configuration of the module or the like that realizes each of the above-mentioned functions will be described. FIG. 312 is a diagram showing an example of the configuration of a module or the like in the peripheral control unit 1530 of the gaming machine of the present embodiment. Each configuration is configured as software by a computer program executed by the peripheral control MPU1511a of the peripheral control unit 1530, but a part or all of the configuration may be configured as hardware.

In the present embodiment, the system module 5100 for driving each effect device is processed by the peripheral control unit 1530. The system module 5100 includes a command analysis module 5200, a liquid crystal module 5400, a sound module 5500, a lamp module 5600, a drive device module 5700, and the like as modules related to the effect. Further, the effect control unit 5020 for creating the effect device control information for driving each effect device based on the main command is included.

The system module 5100 includes a main command buffer 5110, a liquid crystal display list command buffer 5120, a lamp data output buffer 5130, a motor data output buffer 5140, and a serial control IC 5150. The main command buffer 5110 receives the main command transmitted from the main control board 1310 and passes it to the command analysis module 5200. In this embodiment, the main command is 3-byte one-set information, which is a command status value, a command mode value, a command status and a checksum value of a mode value in order from the first byte, and is divided into three times of 8 bits each. The main command buffer 5110 that is output receives this signal, evaluates the checksum value, and if the received command is not determined to be correct, discards the received command and sets it as the correct command. If it is determined, it is handed over to the command analysis module 5200.

The main command includes information indicating the content related to the production among the gaming state and the operating state of the gaming machine. For example, the main command can include whether or not the game ball has won a prize in the starting winning opening, the result of the special figure lottery, the fluctuation pattern (variation time) of the special symbol, and the like. Further, when this embodiment is applied to a slot machine, sensor output such as opening a door, operation of a start lever or a stop button, rotation or stop of a reel, success or failure of a combination at the time of stop, and the like can be mentioned. The commands listed here are examples, and various commands can be included depending on the model of the gaming machine and the content of the production.

The command analysis module 5200 is included in the input command analysis unit 5010, analyzes the contents of the main command, and determines whether or not the command is related to the effect. If it is determined that the command is related to the production, it is handed over to the production control unit 5020.

The effect control unit 5020 identifies the layer to be controlled by the effect from the layer data table based on the analysis result of the main command. Then, the block data number (effect block number) is acquired from the specified layer, and the block data number corresponding to each layer is transmitted to the effect block control unit 5040.

The effect block control unit 5040 includes a liquid crystal effect block control unit 5310 and a sub effect block control unit 5320. The liquid crystal effect block control unit 5310 determines the control information for executing the effect of displaying an image on the liquid crystal display device. The sub-effect block control unit 5320 determines the control information for executing the sound output, the lighting / blinking of the lamp, the operation of the accessory, and the like.

When the effect block number is determined, the liquid crystal display block control unit 5310 executes the liquid crystal display block data corresponding to the effect block number. The liquid crystal effect block data is block data for executing the liquid crystal display effect, and includes one or a plurality of drawing scheduler data. By executing the drawing scheduler data, the background, characters, identification symbols, and the like are displayed on the liquid crystal display device.

The liquid crystal display block control unit 5310 activates the scheduler execution unit 5060 according to the control (display) target, and executes the drawing scheduler data included in the block data. The liquid crystal display scheduler execution unit 5060 includes a liquid crystal display 1f drawing scheduler execution unit 5331 for displaying effect elements such as a background and a character, and a liquid crystal symbol 1f drawing scheduler execution unit 5332 for displaying an identification symbol. included.

The liquid crystal display 1f drawing scheduler execution unit 5331 and the liquid crystal symbol 1f drawing scheduler execution unit 5332 are executed in a frame cycle (1f = about 33.334 milliseconds), which is a screen update cycle. The liquid crystal display 1f drawing scheduler execution unit 5331 and the liquid crystal symbol 1f drawing scheduler execution unit 5332 drive the drawing scheduler data specified by the liquid crystal effect block data by the drawing scheduler, and the liquid crystal module 5400 generates a liquid crystal display list command. The liquid crystal display list command is passed to the effect display device (the liquid crystal display device 1600 on the game board side, the liquid crystal display device 460 on the door frame side) via the liquid crystal display list command buffer 5120.

The sound source built-in VDP1540a generates display data based on the liquid crystal display list command buffer 5120 and outputs the display data to the effect display device (the liquid crystal display device 1600 on the game board side, the liquid crystal display device 460 on the door frame side). The display data is generated, for example, by expanding the character data specified by the liquid crystal display list command to the specified position on the frame buffer.

When the effect block number is determined, the sub-effect block control unit 5320 executes the sub-effect block data corresponding to the effect block number. The sub-effect block data is block data for executing each effect of the lamp, the sound, and the motor, and includes one or a plurality of sub-effect scheduler data. By executing the sub-effect scheduler data, each effect device of the lamp, the sound, and the motor performs the operation defined in advance in the sub-effect scheduler data.

The sub-effect block control unit 5320 activates the scheduler execution unit 5060 according to the execution cycle of the various effect devices, and executes the sub-effect scheduler data included in the sub-effect block data. The scheduler execution unit 5060 for controlling various effect devices includes a sub effect 1f scheduler execution unit 5333 that controls the effect device at 1 frame intervals and a sub effect 1 ms scheduler execution unit 5334 that controls the effect devices at 1 millisecond intervals. included. In this way, by providing the scheduler execution unit according to the execution interval, it is possible to execute the effect according to the configuration of the gaming machine and the required specifications of the effect device. For example, since 1f corresponds to the update interval of drawing, it is possible to synchronize the sound output, the operation of the accessory, and the like with the liquid crystal display. Further, if the detection interval of the sensor is in units of 1 ms, it is possible to quickly respond to a problem in the operation of the accessory.

The sub-effect block control unit 5320 executes effect control other than the liquid crystal display. In the present embodiment, for example, three types of effect control: sound output, lamp lighting / blinking, and accessory operation. explain. The effect control by the sub-effect 1f scheduler execution unit 5333 and the sub-effect 1 ms scheduler execution unit 5334 will be described as being the same except for the execution cycle without any particular distinction. The outline of the control according to the type of the effect device will be described below.

First, a case of executing an effect by sound output will be described. If the sub-effect block data includes the scheduler data for sound output, the scheduler execution unit 5060 starts the scheduler for sound output and executes the scheduler data. Then, when a function for sound output (for example, SPLAY) is executed, the sound module 5500 generates sound source drive data (sound source command) based on the specified parameters. It is possible to start multiple schedulers. For example, by controlling the output of BGM and the effect sound effect with different schedulers, sound source drive data can be generated in parallel and the sound can be output at the same time. .. The sound source built-in VDP1540a reads the sound source data specified by the sound source drive data from the liquid crystal and the sound ROM 1540b, and outputs the sound source data from the speakers 921 and 573 by the audio data transmission IC 1540c.

Next, a case of executing the effect by the lamp will be described. If the sub-effect block data includes the scheduler data for lamp control, the scheduler execution unit starts the lamp scheduler and executes the scheduler data. Then, when the lamp control function (for example, HPLAY) is executed, the lamp module 5600 generates lamp drive data based on the specified parameters. As in the case of sound output, it is possible to start a plurality of schedulers, and it is possible to control a plurality of lamps and layers in parallel.

The lamp module 5600 creates lamp drive data every cycle (1 frame or 1 millisecond) and outputs the lamp data output buffer 5130. The lamp data output buffer 5130 has a double buffer structure, temporarily stores the lamp drive data generated by the lamp module 5600, and outputs the lamp data output buffer 5130 to the serial control IC 5150. By making the lamp data output buffer 5130 a double buffer, it is possible to simultaneously create and output lamp data in a single cycle. With this configuration, the output of the lamp data is output to the next operation of creating the lamp data in response to the increase in the processing time of the lamp control due to the increase in the number of lamp systems and the increase in the processing time of the lamp control due to the superposition of the lamp layers. By setting the cycle, it is sufficient that the processing related to the creation of the lamp data is completed within the processing cycle.

Specifically, when the lamp data output buffer 5130 is composed of the buffer A and the buffer B, for example, if the previously created lamp drive data is stored in the buffer A, the data for the next cycle is stored in the buffer B. Is output, the lamp drive data created last time is output from the buffer A to the serial control IC 5150 by DMA, and each lamp is turned on and blinked. In the next cycle, the buffer is switched, the lamp drive data is output from the lamp module 5600 to the buffer A, and the lamp drive data stored in the buffer B is output to the serial control IC 5150. The case of controlling the lighting / blinking of the LED is the same as that of the lamp, and the description of the control of the lamp can be replaced with the LED unless otherwise specified.

Finally, a case of controlling a driving device (for example, a motor, a solenoid) for operating an accessory will be described. If the sub-effect block data includes the scheduler data for driving device control, the scheduler execution unit activates the driving device scheduler (motor scheduler) and executes the scheduler data. Then, when the drive device control function (for example, MPLAY) is executed, the drive device module 5700 generates lamp drive data based on the specified parameters. As in the case of sound output, it is possible to start a plurality of schedulers, and it is possible to control a plurality of drive devices in parallel.

The drive device module 5700 creates motor drive data for each cycle and outputs the motor drive data to the motor data output buffer 5140. In this embodiment, motor drive data is created and output at a cycle of 1 millisecond. The motor data output buffer 5140 temporarily stores the motor drive data generated by the drive device module 5700 and outputs the motor drive data to the serial control IC 5150. The motor drive data is output from the serial port of the peripheral control MPU1511a regardless of DMA. However, the output of the latch signal for reflecting the motor data in each drive device is not the same timing as the output from the motor data output buffer 5140 to the serial control IC 5150, but the latch signal is output in the next cycle of all motor data transmission. It is outputting. This is because the output timing of the latch signal is after the serial transmission of all motor data is completed. Therefore, as the serial transmission time of the motor data becomes longer, the waiting time until the serial transmission is completed becomes an overhead, and the total processing time for each frame cycle becomes longer. This is because there is not enough. In the present embodiment, the waiting time until the completion of serial transmission is set to 0 by shifting the timing of the latch signal output corresponding to the motor data serial transmission, but a plurality of DMAs can be used depending on the CPU to be used. In this case, the motor drive data is serially transmitted using DMA, and the latch signal is output by the DMA completion interrupt, so that the waiting time until the serial transmission is completed can be set to 0 in the same manner. Further, at the same time as the output of the motor drive data, the effect drive photo information is input to the drive device module 5700 (peripheral control MPU1511a). Each effect-driven photo information is received by serial communication via a parallel serial control IC.

[18-2. Data structure]
In the present embodiment, the scheduler data can adopt various structures. For example, a call function for fetching other scheduler data as a part of the scheduler data may be provided. The scheduler execution unit 5060 sequentially executes the processes specified by the scheduler data, and at the time of executing the call function, once executes other scheduler data specified by the call function, and then continues the processing of the original scheduler data. Will be executed. By doing so, it is possible to utilize general-purpose production contents in various situations in the same way as calling a subroutine in a general program.

This function not only can reduce the load of creating scheduler data, but also has an effect peculiar to a gaming machine as shown below. In the gaming machine, various lottery and the like are performed during the game, and the development of the game changes according to the result. Some players can find subtle differences in the content of the production during the lottery and guess the lottery result. On the other hand, in the present embodiment, since the general-purpose production contents can be utilized in various situations by the call function, such a subtle difference can be eliminated and it is difficult to predict the lottery result or the like. It is possible to prevent the game from being spoiled.

As another configuration, the scheduler data may include a conditional branch function that switches the effect content according to the game state. The scheduler execution unit 5060 sequentially executes the processes specified by the scheduler data, determines the game state based on the main command when executing the conditional branch function, and executes the effect content according to the game state. .. By doing so, it becomes possible to deal with a wide variety of branching game states with one scheduler data. Examples of the gaming state used for the conditional branch include the result of a lottery performed during the game, the presence or absence of an operation of a button or the like by the player, and the like. In the rotating drum type gaming machine, the stopped state of the rotating reel may be used, and in the pachinko machine, the winning state of the starting winning opening may be used. In addition, conditional branching may be made depending on whether or not an error has occurred during the game.

Various configurations are possible for the content of the effect after the conditional branching. For example, after the conditional branching, the configuration may be completely separated into two or more processes. Further, after performing a predetermined process by conditional branching, the process may be configured to return to the process before branching. According to the latter aspect, for example, after executing a process of temporarily outputting a sound effect when a button is pressed during a game, it is possible to return to the previous effect without discomfort.

As described above, the gaming machine can include various effect devices, and as an example, a display device for displaying an image can be included. As the display device, various devices capable of displaying an image such as a liquid crystal panel, a CRT, an organic EL panel, and a plasma display can be used. The display content of the display device is controlled by the image processing device. The image processing device is a device that develops a bitmap of an image according to a predetermined display command and generates display data for displaying the image on the display device. For example, it can be configured by a combination of a VDP (Video Display Processor) and a character ROM or the like in which a character or the like to be displayed on the screen is prepared by a bitmap.

[18-3. Basic concept of production control]
FIG. 313 is an explanatory diagram showing a basic concept of effect control in the gaming machine of the present embodiment. Here, the case where the main effect control is executed by executing the scheduler data including the function will be described, and in particular, the sound output will be described as an example.

The scheduler execution unit 5060 (sub-effect scheduler execution unit 5320) activates the scheduler 5502 of the type and number according to the effect device when the effect is executed. The scheduler execution unit 5060 acquires the scheduler data specified in the sub-effect block data from the scheduler data storage unit 5070, and executes the function included in the scheduler data. The structure of the scheduler data will be described later.

Sound functions executed at the time of sound output include "SPLAY" for playing a phrase, "STOP_PH" for stopping a phrase being played, and "VOL_PH" for setting a volume level during phrase playback. These sound functions are processed by the sound module 5500, and the control specified by the parameters and the like is executed. When the sound module 5500 receives the execution of the sound function, it generates sound source drive data and outputs the sound source drive data to the sound source built-in VDP1540a.

The function processed by the sound module 5500 controls the output of the sound corresponding to the specified channel. In the gaming machine of the present embodiment, 32 channels are provided, but the number of channels will be described as 4 for easy understanding. Further, the sound output by each channel is output from the speakers [1] to [4] via the volumes 5506v [1] to [4]. The speakers [1] to [4] illustrated here schematically represent the outputs of each channel Ch1 to Ch4, and correspond to any one of the physical speakers provided in the gaming machine. It does not mean that it is.

The correspondence between the scheduler 5502 and the output channel is managed by the channel management works 5507 [1] to 5507 [4] provided in association with the channels Ch1 to Ch4. The data structure of the channel management work 5507 is illustrated in the lower right of the figure. The phrase number, stereo reproduction flag, output volume, and loop attribute are stored in the work 5507. The phrase number is information indicating which phrase is currently being played. The stereo playback flag indicates whether or not to output in stereo. The output volume is the volume for each channel. The loop attribute specifies whether or not to play repeatedly. This information is specified by the sound module 5500 based on the sound function.

As described above, FIG. 313 shows the basic concept of the effect control in the present embodiment by taking the sound output control as an example. The sub-effect scheduler execution unit starts the scheduler specified by the sub-effect block data, and executes the scheduler data on the scheduler. When the scheduler data is executed, the function that controls each effect device is called and processed by the modules (sound module 5500, lamp module 5600, drive device module 5700) corresponding to each effect device.

[18-4. Data flow in production control]
The basic concept of the module configuration and control in the production control of the gaming machine has been described above. Next, the flow of effect control from receiving the main command to acquiring the scheduler data will be described.

[18-4-1. Acquisition of data required for production control]
FIG. 314A is a diagram illustrating a configuration up to acquisition of data necessary for effect control of the gaming machine of the present embodiment. When the effect control unit 5020 receives the main command from the main control board 1310 as described with reference to FIG. 312, the effect control unit 5020 analyzes the command analysis module 5200 and notifies the effect control unit 5020 of the analysis result.

Based on the layer data table, the effect control unit 5020 provides each layer, a variable pattern layer (a layer that performs an effect related to the variable pattern), a hold layer (a layer that performs an effect related to the hold effect), and a game instruction layer (a game instruction layer). Layer to perform), communication error layer (layer to notify communication error), notification layer (layer to notify various notifications), abnormality notification layer (layer to notify abnormality) based on the analysis result by the command analysis module 5200. , Acquires and updates the corresponding effect block data numbers for each layer. Further, the acquired effect block data number is handed over to the effect block control unit 5040. For example, in the case of a variation pattern layer, the effect block number is a liquid crystal effect block data combination number table for each variation pattern, a liquid crystal symbol block data combination number table for each variation pattern, and sub-effect block data for each variation pattern based on the variation pattern number. Determined from the combination number table. The unit of dividing the effect block is divided into a predetermined unit (block) that is a common effect in a series of effects (for example, an effect executed from the start to the stop of the change of the special symbol). In addition, block data including control information such as effect content and effect time for each effect device is defined for each block. By controlling the effect in units of the effect block based on the effect block number, the effect by each effect device can be synchronized. Further, the arrangement of the layers corresponds to the layers on the liquid crystal display, and in the present embodiment, the variable pattern layer is the rearmost layer and the abnormality notification layer is the frontmost layer. It is a configuration for.

When the effect block control unit 5040 receives the block data number (effect block number) corresponding to each layer, the effect block control unit 5040 receives the scheduler control unit (liquid crystal effect block control unit 5310, liquid crystal symbol block control unit 5311, sub-effect block) corresponding to each layer. The control unit 5320) acquires the corresponding block data (liquid crystal effect block data 5051, liquid crystal symbol block data 5052, sub effect block data 5053). As described above, each block data includes scheduler data for executing the effect.

For example, when the main command is the start winning command, the hold layer is specified, and the liquid crystal effect block data 5051 for performing the hold display on the liquid crystal display screen and the sub effect block data for outputting the sound effect at the time of the start prize are output. 5053 is acquired. Further, when the fluctuation of the special symbol starts, a fluctuation start command or the like is transmitted to specify the fluctuation pattern layer. Furthermore, a command is sent to notify the occurrence of an error or a warning, and the abnormality detection layer is identified. Further, by performing the effect for each layer, it is possible to perform a plurality of effects at the same time.

When the liquid crystal display block control unit 5310 acquires the liquid crystal display block data 5051 from the liquid crystal display block data combination number table corresponding to each layer based on the liquid crystal display block data number, the liquid crystal display 1f drawing scheduler execution unit 5331 displays the liquid crystal display. Production 1f Start the scheduler. The liquid crystal display 1f drawing scheduler execution unit 5331 further acquires the liquid crystal display schedule data 5071. Then, by executing the liquid crystal display effect schedule data 5071 on the liquid crystal display effect 1f scheduler, the liquid crystal display module 5400 is instructed to process the function defined in the liquid crystal display effect schedule data 5071. The liquid crystal module 5400 processes a function instructed to be executed based on the specified scheduler data, creates a display list command necessary for driving the VDP 1540a, outputs the display list command to the VDP 1540a, and outputs the display list command to the game board. An image is drawn on the side effect display device 1600 and the door frame side effect display device 460. The processing in the liquid crystal display 1f scheduler is executed in synchronization with the screen update interval (1 frame).

Further, when the liquid crystal symbol block control unit 5311 acquires the liquid crystal symbol block data 5052 from the liquid crystal symbol block data combination number table corresponding to each layer based on the liquid crystal symbol block data number, the liquid crystal symbol 1f drawing scheduler execution unit 5332 The liquid crystal symbol 1f scheduler is started by. The liquid crystal symbol 1f drawing scheduler execution unit 5332 further acquires the liquid crystal symbol schedule data 5072. Then, by executing the liquid crystal symbol schedule data 5072 on the liquid crystal symbol 1f scheduler, the liquid crystal module 5400 is instructed to process the function defined in the liquid crystal symbol schedule data 5072. The liquid crystal module 5400 processes a function instructed to be executed based on the specified scheduler data, creates a display list command necessary for driving the VDP 1540a, outputs the display list command to the VDP 1540a, and outputs the display list command to the game board. An image is drawn on the side effect display device 1600 and the door frame side effect display device 460. The processing in the liquid crystal symbol 1f scheduler is executed in synchronization with the screen update interval (1 frame).

When the sub-effect block control unit 5320 acquires the sub-effect block data 5053, the sub-effect block control unit 5320 specifies the execution cycle (1 frame or 1 millisecond) based on the information specified in the sub-effect block data 5053. Then, when the execution cycle is 1 frame, the sub-effect 1f scheduler execution unit 5333 activates the sub-effect 1f scheduler, or when the execution cycle is 1 millisecond, the sub-effect 1ms scheduler execution unit 5334 activates the sub-effect 1ms. Start the scheduler.

Further, the sub-effect 1f scheduler execution unit 5333 or the sub-effect 1ms scheduler execution unit 5334 acquires the sub-effect schedule data 5073 and executes it on the corresponding scheduler. The sub-effect schedule data 5073 does not differ depending on the execution cycle, and all functions can be executed by the scheduler of all execution cycles. This makes it possible to create scheduler data that is commonly used by schedulers with different execution cycles, and reduces the data capacity. In addition, it is possible to quickly respond to changes in the execution cycle of the effect device. In addition, the same schedule data can be executed simultaneously by different schedulers, which enables sharing of scheduler data, prevents the same type of problems from occurring at multiple locations, and reduces data capacity. can.

Here, a specific example of executing the same schedule data simultaneously by different schedulers will be described. FIG. 314B is a diagram illustrating a liquid crystal drawing effect of the step-up notice of the present embodiment. Four types of step-up notices 1 to 4 can be executed for the step-up notice, and by executing the effect that gradually develops the effect content, the player is expected to display the variation of the symbol. Suggest degree.

In the step-up notice 1, the notice effect ends when the step-up 1 effect is executed. In the step-up notice 2, the step-up 2 effect occurs just before the end of the step-up 1 effect, and the notice effect ends after the end of the step-up 2 effect. The effects are similarly executed for the step-up notices 3 and 4, and the notice effects are completed after the step-up 3 effects and the step-up 4 effects are completed, respectively.

In the step-up notice, the sound and the lamp also perform the step-up notice in accordance with the liquid crystal display. Since different sounds are output at each stage of the step-up effect in the sound effect, four types of scheduler data from step 1 to step 4 are defined for each stage of the effect. On the other hand, in the lamp effect, since the same lamp pattern is displayed at each stage of the step-up effect, one type of common lamp scheduler data may be defined.

When the liquid crystal display of the step-up notice develops to the next stage, the next step-up notice is started just before the end of the step-up notice at the current stage, so that a plurality of step-up notices are temporarily performed at the same time. There is a period of time. As described above, in the lamp effect, it is necessary to execute the same scheduler data for the subsequent step-up effect, but in the present embodiment, the same scheduler data can be executed simultaneously by a plurality of schedulers. It has become. Therefore, when the same effect is executed at each stage, one type of common scheduler data may be defined even if the execution periods of the effect overlap.

Specifically, when the step-up notice lamp scheduler data (SCH_LMP_STEP) is executed by the lamp scheduler (LMP_SCH01) in the step-up 1 effect, the same step-up occurs when the step-up 2 effect that starts just before the end of the step-up 1 effect occurs. The warning lamp scheduler data (SCH_LMP_STEP) is executed by another lamp scheduler (LMP_SCH02). By configuring in this way, the same scheduler data is executed at the same time (duplicate) without defining the same scheduler data in duplicate, so that the same pattern of effects can be produced in parallel in a series of effects. It is realized to execute.

The sub-effect 1f scheduler execution unit 5333 or the sub-effect 1ms scheduler execution unit 5334 calls the modules (sound module 5500, lamp module 5600, drive device module 5700) corresponding to the effect device to be controlled, and defines them in the sub-effect schedule data 5073. Instructs the processing of the function. Each module processes the function instructed to execute based on the specified scheduler data, creates the data necessary for driving the effect device, and outputs the drive data to the effect device.

[18-4-2. Outline of execution of scheduler data]
FIG. 315 is a diagram illustrating a flow at the time of execution of the scheduler data of the present embodiment. The effect control unit 5020 determines the effect content based on the analysis result of the main (main board) command by the command analysis module 5200, and uses the sound source built-in VDP1540a, the sound module 5500, the lamp module 5600, and the drive device module 5700 to control various effect devices. Control. FIG. 315 shows the structure of scheduler data 5401 referenced to set this command.

In the present embodiment, the scheduler data 5401 is prepared for each effect number designated by the effect block control unit 5040 and stored in the peripheral control ROM 1530b. The correspondence between the scheduler data 5401 and the effect number is defined in the effect management table. As shown on the left side of the figure, the effect management table includes an effect management pointer indicating the storage address of the scheduler data. Although the number of effect management pointers corresponding to the effect number is prepared, only five are illustrated here. In the example of the figure, for example, the effect management pointer [1] initially stores the start address A1 of the scheduler data 5401. As the processing of the scheduler data is executed, the value of the effect management pointer [1] sequentially shifts to A1 and A2.

In the present embodiment, the effect number uses the address value of the effect management pointer. In the example of FIG. 315, the effect numbers 01H, 02H, and the like represent storage addresses of the effect management pointers [1], [2], and the like, respectively. The effect number is not limited to the address value, and any identification information can be used. In this case, the effect management table may be configured so that the effect number and the effect management pointer are associated with each other, and the scheduler execution unit 5060 searches for the effect management pointer using the effect number as a key, and then obtains the scheduler data. The process may be performed. Further, if the address value of the effect management pointer is used as the effect number, the amount of data in the effect management table can be reduced, and the above-mentioned search becomes unnecessary, so that the load required for processing the scheduler data can be reduced.

As shown in FIG. 315, each command constituting the scheduler data 5401 is composed of a function and a parameter in principle. As described above, the function is an instruction for controlling the effect device, for example, for instructing each module to operate the effect device. The parameter is a variable that specifically indicates the processing content of the function. A function that does not need to specify parameters may be provided.

Functions are grouped into groups such as sequence control, lamps, sounds, motors (driving devices) and users. The sequence control is a basic function for performing the effect control, and the lamp, the sound, and the motor are functions for controlling each effect device. The user is a function that does not belong to these groups. A specific description of the function will be described later with reference to FIGS. 318 to 320.

In the example shown in FIG. 315, a "call" function is specified at address A2. The "call" function belongs to the sequence control group, saves the pointer value of the next function, and then sets the address specified by the parameter to the effect management pointer. The scheduler execution unit 5060 can temporarily move to the address specified by the parameter to process the scheduler data, and then return to the previous processing based on the above-mentioned saved pointer value.

The scheduler execution unit 5060 executes the address A31 specified by the parameter of the "call" function after the address A2. A liquid crystal command is set at the address A31, a voice operation number is set at A32, a lamp operation number is set at A33, and a return is made at A3n. When the effect command finishes these processes, the "call" returns to the designated address A2 and proceeds to the process of the next address A3.

In this way, by utilizing the "call" function, it is possible to incorporate the contents of the series of blocks BL3 specified by the addresses A31 to A3n into various parts of the scheduler data. By doing so, the capacity of the scheduler data can be reduced and the creation load thereof can be reduced. In gaming machines such as pachinko machines and slot machines, various lottery and the like are held during the game, and the development of the game changes according to the result. Some players can find subtle differences in the content of the production during the lottery and guess the lottery result. On the other hand, in the present invention, since general-purpose production contents can be utilized in various situations by calling, such a subtle difference can be eliminated and it is possible to make it difficult to predict the lottery result or the like. , It is possible to suppress the loss of interest in the game.

Although it is possible to use the "call" function in this way, the scheduler data 5401 of this embodiment is different from the interpreter program. As described above, the main function used in the scheduler data 5401 is to set the instruction contents to other schedulers such as "feature operation number set", "voice operation number set", and "ramp operation number set". This is because it merely specifically indicates a very limited function that can be realized by the scheduler execution unit 5060.

In the example shown in FIG. 315, NOP (wait) is then executed at address A3. In the "NOP" function, the process of the scheduler data is continued after waiting for the specified number of frames. Here, the processing of the scheduler data is waited until the time specified by the parameter Prm [031] elapses. As will be described later, in the present embodiment, the process is repeatedly executed by the timer interrupt. Therefore, in the "NOP" function, the scheduler execution unit 5060 temporarily ends the processing of the scheduler data without performing the subsequent processing unless the value of the parameter Prm [031] is 0, and if this value is 0, the scheduler execution unit 5060 temporarily ends the processing of the scheduler data. , Performs the process of moving to the function of the next address.

In the present embodiment, the voice operation number and the like are specified by using the work of the same format as the work area 5301 shown in FIG. 314A. The work area 5301 used by the system event and the work used by the scheduler execution unit 5060 are prepared separately, and the scheduler execution unit 5060 stores the voice operation number and the like in the work according to the designation of the scheduler data. Further, the layer designated by the effect control unit 5020 is also provided separately from the layer for the system module (see FIG. 314A). Also in the work for each module, a plurality of voice operation numbers and lamp operation numbers can be specified in parallel from these layers.

Similarly, the scheduler data is defined by the function and the parameter after the conditional branch address A11. In the example shown in FIG. 315, the conditional branch is not provided from the address A11 of the conditional branch to the end of the effect (address An). Since this range is the block BL2 different from the block BL1 described above, the accessory command (address A22), the voice operation number (address A21), and the like can be specified without considering the conflict with the block BL1. .. Instead of these settings, the block BL3 and the like may be captured by the "call" function.

In the scheduler data, conditional branching and a "call" function may be used in combination. For example, a random number for switching the effect content may be generated, and different addresses may be called according to the value of the random number. In the example shown in FIG. 315, if the condition "random value value ≤ Th1?" Is added to the address A2, the effects of the addresses A31 to A3n are executed when this condition is satisfied. Further, if the address A41 (not shown) is called with the condition "Th1 <random number value ≤ Th2?" Next to the address A2 (address A2 + 1), the address A31 or later is assigned according to the random number value. Will perform different effects. In this way, if different addresses are called by conditional branching according to a random number, the production content can be randomly switched by the random number, and it is possible to enhance the fun of the game. Hereinafter, switching the production contents in this way is referred to as a "production lottery" in the present specification.

In the production lottery, the display, sound, lamp, and drive device may all be switched, or only a part of them may be switched. To switch all, specify all the display, sound, and lamp contents in the scheduler data called by the "call" function. When switching only a part, specify only the part to be switched in the scheduler data called by the "call" function, and specify the other parts uniformly after returning from the "call" function. do it.

Further, in the scheduler data, it may be specified that different scheduler data is called according to the random number for the effect lottery by using the conditional branch and the "call" function. In this case, as a result of the display, the sound, the lamp, and the driving device independently performing the effect lottery, the effect mode realized by the combination becomes very diverse, and there is an advantage that the interest can be further enhanced.

However, regardless of the results of the display, sound, lamp, and drive device effect lottery, it is preferable that these effects are completed at the same time in order to realize a natural effect. Therefore, in the present embodiment, the scheduler data to be selected in the effect lottery has the content that the effect is completed at the same time. It should be noted that it is not an indispensable requirement that the production is completed at the same time, and these production times do not have to be the same.

The effect lottery using the scheduler data has the advantage that the effect content can be varied and the lottery mode can be switched according to the display, sound, lamp, and output status of the drive device. For example, when the drive device is executing the figure-eight distribution operation at the time when the effect lottery is instructed and other operations are restricted, the drive device module 5700 prohibits the effect lottery related to the drive device. You may. Similarly, with respect to the display, sound, and lamp, the production lottery may be prohibited depending on the situation when the production lottery is instructed. Further, in the production lottery prohibition, the production lottery may be partially prohibited by prohibiting the selection of some scheduler data.

As described above, in the effect lottery, the effect content is switched by the control process of the peripheral control board 1510, and does not affect the game itself. However, by enabling the effect lottery in this way, it is possible to realize a variety of effects than the types of commands output from the main control board 1310, and it is possible to further enhance the interest.

[18-4-3. Overview of sound output control]
Next, the function of the sound module that controls the sound output will be described. FIG. 316 is an explanatory diagram showing the functions of the sound module 5500 of the present embodiment. The sound module 5500 receives an instruction from the scheduler execution unit 5060, executes a process specified for a function included in the scheduler data, and outputs audio. The sound module 5500 can receive requests from a plurality of schedulers 5502 and perform processing. Each scheduler 5502 is provided in association with a sound layer for voice. Further, each scheduler 5502 is provided with a work 5507 for operation management. The contents of the work 5507 will be described later.

When the scheduler execution unit 5060 specifies the voice operation number based on the scheduler control information, the scheduler execution unit 5060 refers to the voice operation number table and specifies the scheduler data 5505 to be executed. The voice operation number table is a table in which a sound pointer and a sound layer are associated with a voice operation number. In the present embodiment, the voice operation number corresponds to the storage address of the voice operation number table. Arbitrary identification information can be used for the voice operation number, but as in the case of the effect number described above, it is better to correspond to the storage address to reduce the capacity of the voice operation number table and reduce the processing load when referring to the table. Has the advantage of enabling.

The sound pointer specifies the storage address of the scheduler data 5505. In the present embodiment, the address SA1 is stored in the sound pointer [1].

The scheduler data 5505 is composed of functions and parameters. The functions used in the scheduler data 5505 for controlling the sound output will be described later with reference to FIGS. 319 and 320.

In the example shown in FIG. 316, a "call" function is defined at address SA2. The scheduler execution unit 5060 executes a series of blocks after the address SA31 (not shown), and then processes the address SA3 next to the address SA2.

At address SA3, phrase reproduction is specified. The scheduler execution unit 5060 reads the phrase data 5508 corresponding to the phrase number 00H specified by the parameter and reproduces the phrase data 5508.

Further, a structural example of the phrase data 5508 is shown on the right side of FIG. 316. The phrase number is identification information attached to each phrase data. In the present embodiment, arbitrary identification information can be used, but the storage address of the phrase data 5508 may be used as the phrase number. In this case, the phrase number can be omitted from the phrase data 5508.

The channel is the output channel specified during phrase playback. The left / right pan pot and the top / bottom pan pot are the left / right / top / bottom output balance of each speaker provided in the gaming machine. The volume is an output volume. The song number is an identification number of the sound to be played. When the song number is notified to the sound source built-in VDP1540a, the sound source built-in VDP1540a reads the sound source data corresponding to the song number from the liquid crystal and the sound ROM 1540b, and reproduces the sound. The loop specifies whether or not to repeatedly play the sound. Stereo is a specification of whether or not to output in stereo.

A work 5507 for operation management is associated with each scheduler 5502. Various information shown in the figure is stored in the work 5507. The operating state indicates whether or not each layer is operating. The voice number represents the number of the scheduler data 5505 in operation. In this embodiment, the start address of the scheduler data 5505 is used. The sound pointer is the address of the scheduler data 5505 being executed by the scheduler 5502. In the example shown in FIG. 316, as the processing progresses, the value of the sound pointer sequentially shifts to SA2 and SA3. The timer value represents the waiting time until the next function is executed. It is set when the waiting time is specified in the scheduler data 5505, and is sequentially subtracted with the passage of time. The sound module 5500 executes the next function when this value becomes 0.

The number of call nests and the number of loop nests represent the number of nests of calls and loops that are multiplely specified by the scheduler data 5505 and the phrase number. That is, for example, in the processing after the address SA31 called by the "call" function (first call) of the address SA2, when the scheduler data 5505 of another address is further called by the "call" function (second call), the call nesting is performed. The number is 2. After finishing the second call and returning to the first call, the number of call nests is reduced to 1. The same is true for loops. The call return address is a return address from the call destination and is provided according to the number of call nests. The loop start address is the start address of the loop range, and the loop count is the loop repeat count. The loop start address and the like are provided according to the number of loop nests.

[18-4-4. Overview of lamp output control]
Next, the function of the lamp module that controls the output of the lamp will be described. FIG. 317 is an explanatory diagram showing the functions of the lamp module 5600 of the present embodiment. The lamp module 5600 receives an instruction from the scheduler execution unit 5060, executes a process specified for a function included in the scheduler data, and performs lamp output, that is, lamp lighting / blinking control. Like the sound module 5500, the lamp module 5600 can also receive requests from a plurality of schedulers 5602 and perform processing. Each scheduler 5602 is provided in association with a lamp layer for a lamp. Further, each scheduler 5602 is provided with a work 5603 for operation management. The contents of the work 5603 will be described later.

When the scheduler execution unit 5060 specifies the lamp operation number based on the scheduler control information, the scheduler execution unit 5060 refers to the lamp operation number table and specifies the scheduler data 5601 to be executed. The lamp operation number table is a table in which a lamp pointer and a lamp layer are associated with a lamp operation number. In the present embodiment, the lamp operation number corresponds to the storage address of the lamp operation number table. Arbitrary identification information can be used for the lamp operation number, but as in the case of the effect number described above, using the storage address reduces the capacity of the lamp operation number table and reduces the processing load when referring to the table. It has the advantage of making it possible.

The lamp pointer specifies the storage address of the scheduler data 5601. In the present embodiment, the address LA1 is stored in the lamp pointer [1].

The scheduler data 5505 is composed of functions and parameters as in the production data (FIG. 315). The function used in the scheduler data 5505 for controlling the lamp will be described later with reference to FIG. 319.

In the example shown in FIG. 317, a "call" function is defined at address LA2. The scheduler execution unit 5060 executes a series of blocks after the address LA31 (not shown), and then processes the address LA3 next to the address LA2.

The address LA3 defines the gradation pattern setting. The scheduler execution unit 5060 sets the gradation pattern data 5606 stored at the address LA11 specified by the parameter. Each of the lamp schedulers 5602 is provided with a gradation scheduler 5604 in association with each other. The lamp is turned on with the designated gradation data 1, and when the time specified by the timer value elapses, the lamp with the gradation data 2 is used. Turn on. Here, an example in which two types of gradation data are specified is shown, but even when three or more are specified, the lamp is turned on while sequentially switching the gradation data at the time interval of the timer value. By preparing a plurality of gradation pattern settings after the address LA12, it is possible to light the lamp with various gradation patterns while changing the switching timer value between the gradation data. It is also possible to provide a loop in the gradation pattern data. When the gradation scheduler 5604 executes a series of processes of addresses LA11 to LA1n, the lamp ends lighting. The lamp scheduler 5602 returns to the processing of the address LA3 of the scheduler data 5601, and executes the processing of the next address until it is stopped (address LAN).

A work 5603 for operation management is associated with each scheduler 5602. Various information shown in the figure is stored in the work 5603. The scheduler status indicates whether the scheduler is running or not. The operation pattern number represents the number of the scheduler data 5601 in operation. In this embodiment, the start address of the scheduler data 5601 is used. The scheduler timer represents the waiting time until the next function is executed. It is set when the waiting time is specified in the scheduler data, and is subtracted sequentially with the passage of time. The ramp executes the next function when this value reaches zero. The gradation data timer represents the waiting time until the next gradation data is executed when the gradation pattern data 5606 is executed. In the example shown in FIG. 317, when the gradation data defined at the address LA11 is executed, when the timer value set in the gradation data timer becomes 0, the gradation data 1 shifts to the gradation data 2. Then, when the timer value becomes 0 again, the processing of the address LA11 is terminated and the process proceeds to the processing of the address LA12.

The ramp pointer is the address of the scheduler data 5601 being executed by the scheduler 5602. In the example shown in FIG. 317, as the processing progresses, the value of the lamp pointer sequentially shifts to LA1, LA2, and LA3. The gradation data pointer is the address of the gradation pattern data 5606 executed by the gradation scheduler 5604. In the example in the figure, as the processing progresses, the value of the gradation data pointer sequentially shifts to LA11 and LA12. The number of loops is the number of times the loop is repeated, and the loop start address is the start address of the loop range. As with sounds, loops may be allowed to nest.

[18-4-5. Overview of drive unit control]
Subsequently, the function of the drive device module 5700 that controls the operation of the drive device will be described. The drive device is, for example, a stepping motor. Since the control is the same as that of the lamp module 5600, the illustration is omitted. The drive unit module 5700 receives an instruction from the scheduler execution unit 5060, executes a process specified for a function included in the scheduler data, and controls the operation of the drive unit. The drive unit module 5700 can also receive requests from a plurality of schedulers and perform processing.

The control items of the drive device include, for example, the amount of movement (rotational step angle of the stepping motor), the movement time, the movement speed (rotational speed of the motor), the excitation method, the trapezoidal drive, and the rotation direction. In addition, an instruction to execute a return operation to return to the origin position and an instruction to stop the mechanical end (when the movable range of the drive device is mechanically limited, stop it while being urged to the limit position of the movable range). included. In the trapezoidal drive, the rotation speed is changed by a predetermined angular acceleration instead of changing the speed in a step function at the start and stop of rotation.

Scheduler data is composed of functions and parameters. The functions used in the scheduler data to control the drive device will be described later with reference to FIG. 320.

[18-5. function]
The example of using the function in the module used for the effect control has been described above. Here, other functions will be described. 318 to 320 are diagrams showing an example of a function in the effect control of the gaming machine of the present embodiment. As mentioned above, the functions are divided into groups of sequence control, lamps, sounds, motors and users. Hereinafter, the functions belonging to each group will be described.

[18-5-1. Function details (sequence control)]
Functions belonging to the sequence control group are mainly functions for controlling the flow of production. FIG. 318 gives an example of a sequence control function. The outline of each function will be described below.

"STOP" is a function representing the end of scheduler data. "NOP" is a weight function that waits for a time corresponding to the number of executions by designating the number of executions as a parameter. The time according to the number of executions differs depending on the processing cycle in which the "NOP" function is executed. If the "NOP" function is executed in a frame cycle, one frame is about 33.334 milliseconds in this embodiment, so that the number of executions is If 30 is specified, it will wait for about 1 second, and if it is executed in a 1 ms cycle, if the number of executions is also specified as 30, it will wait for about 30 ms. "NOP_F_VALUE" has the number of executions (number of frames), scheduler memory number, mask value and comparison value as parameters, and when the conditions based on the scheduler memory number, mask value and comparison value are satisfied, the "NOP_F_VALUE" function is terminated and the condition is changed. If it is not satisfied, it is a conditional weight function that waits for a time corresponding to the number of executions.

"MEMW" is a function that writes a specified value in the corresponding scheduler work area with the target scheduler work number and value as parameters. "LOOPST" is a function for performing iterative processing (loop), specifies the beginning of the loop, and sets the number of loops as a parameter. When "0" is set for the number of loops, an infinite loop occurs. "LOOP" is a function for designating the end of iterative processing (loop).

"RET" is a function for returning the process to the calling block (function data). The pointer value saved by the "call" function is set in the effect management table. "CALL" is the above-mentioned "call" function, which executes processing from a designated address (block), and sets information for specifying a call destination such as an address value or a label as a parameter. In "CALL", the pointer value of the function to be executed next is saved, and the address of the callee is set in the effect management pointer. Then, after executing the process of the callee, the address saved by the above-mentioned "RET" function is set in the effect management pointer, and the process returns to the previous process.

The "SUBC" selects a process to be called (block to be executed) using the scheduler work number value as an index based on the target scheduler work number and the branch table specified in the parameter, and executes the selected process. That is, it executes the "call" function based on the specified conditions. A specific example using "SUBC" will be described later with reference to FIG. 323. When the process of the callee is completed by the "SUBC" function, the process returns to the process of the caller (the next process of the "SUBC" function).

"SUBJ" selects the process to be called (block to be executed) using the scheduler work number value as an index based on the target scheduler work number and the table specified in the parameter, and executes the selected process. That is, the "JUMP" function described later is executed based on the specified conditions. A specific example using "SUBJ" will be described later with reference to FIG. 324. The process of the caller who executed the "SUBJ" function is not returned, and the process of the callee is continued as it is. "JUMP" sets the address specified by the parameter in the effect management pointer, and continues processing from the specified address and label.

"REF" is a function for invoking another scheduler specified by a parameter. A specific example using "REF" will be described later with reference to FIG. 325. Like "REF", "REF" is a function for starting another scheduler specified by the parameter, and other scheduler data is overwritten until the overwrite prohibition time specified by the parameter elapses. It is prohibited to start. In "REF", control by a plurality of scheduler data can be executed in parallel. On the other hand, "REFF" can execute the processing of the scheduler data to be executed independently for a specified period. For example, in the case of initialization of the accessory, other scheduler data for operating the accessory is executed and controlled. It is possible to prevent it from becoming impossible.

[18-5-2. Function details (lamp)]
Functions belonging to the group of lamps are functions for controlling the flow of lamp effects. FIG. 319 gives an example of a function related to lamp control, and an outline of each function will be described.

"HPLAY" is a function for executing a lamp gradation data reproduction process for lighting a lamp based on the gradation data specified by a parameter. In "HPLAY", even if the lamp is being reproduced with the same gradation data, the lamp is reset and the reproduction of the lamp is started from the beginning when the function is executed. The gradation data is specified by setting the gradation pattern data address, and the execution of the gradation data is instructed by clearing the gradation data timer in the work 5603.

Similar to "HPLAY", "KPLAY" is a function for executing a lamp gradation data reproduction process for lighting a lamp based on gradation data specified by a parameter. In "KPLAY", when the lamp is reproduced with the same gradation data, the reproduction of the running lamp is continued without resetting.

"HPLAY2" is a function that executes a lamp gradation data reproduction process by designating a layer in addition to the gradation data by a parameter. The processing is the same as that of "HPLAY". Similar to "HPLAY2", "KPLAY2" is a function that executes a lamp gradation data reproduction process by designating a layer in addition to gradation data by a parameter. The processing is the same as that of "KPLAY".

“HPLAY” and “KPLAY” execute the designated lamp gradation data reproduction process for reproducing the lamp gradation data specified in the parameter. If the lamp gradation data has already been reproduced, the reproduction of the lamp gradation data is interrupted and the same lamp gradation data is reproduced from the beginning at the time of reproduction by "HPLAY", and the lamp gradation data is reproduced at the time of reproduction by "KPLAY". Continue playing without interruption. That is, even if the gradation data of the same lamp is executed by using "KPLAY" while the lamp gradation data is being reproduced, no particular processing is executed.

The processing of "HPLAY2" is the same as that of "HPLAY" except that, in addition to the above-mentioned "HPLAY" function, the layer for reproducing the lamp gradation data is specified by the parameter and the layer is specified by the parameter.

The processing of "KPLAY2" is the same as that of "KPLAY" except that, in addition to the above-mentioned "KPLAY" function, the layer for reproducing the lamp gradation data is specified by the parameter and the layer is specified by the parameter.

[18-5-3. Function details (sound)]
Functions belonging to the group of sounds (sounds) are functions for controlling the sound output. An example of a function related to sound control is given in FIGS. 319 and 320, and an outline of each function will be described.

"SPLAY" is a function for executing a phrase reproduction process that outputs a sound based on a phrase number specified by a parameter. In "SPLAY", even if the sound having the same phrase number is being reproduced, the sound is reset and the sound reproduction is started from the beginning when the function is executed. Like "SPLAY", "SXPLAY" is a function for executing a phrase reproduction process that outputs a sound based on a phrase number specified by a parameter. In "SXPLAY", when the sound of the same phrase number is reproduced, the reproduction of the sound is continued without resetting. "STOP_PH" is a function for executing a phrase stop process for stopping the reproduction of the sound based on the phrase number specified by the parameter.

"PAN_PH" uses the transition time and panpot end coordinate position specified by the parameter from the audio output coordinate position at the start of execution of the "PAN_PH" function for the playing phrase specified by the parameter, and panpot ends. This is a function for moving the audio output coordinate position to the coordinate position at the specified transition time. In addition to the function of the "PAN_PH" function, "PAN_PH2" can also specify the panpot start coordinate position with a parameter, and like the "PAN_PH" function, the audio output coordinates of the target phrase at the start of function execution. This is a function for moving the audio output coordinate position from the panpot start coordinate position whose position is specified by the parameter to the panpot end coordinate position at the specified transition time.

"VOL_FADE_PH" is specified from the volume value at the start of execution of the "VOL_FADE_PH" function to the fade end volume value using the transition time and fade end volume value also specified by the parameter. This is a function for increasing / decreasing the volume value at the transition time. In addition to the function of the "VOL_FADE_PH" function, "VOL_FADE_PH2" can also specify the fade start volume value with a parameter, and like the "VOL_FADE_PH" function, the volume value of the target phrase is a parameter at the start of function execution. This is a function for increasing / decreasing the volume value at the specified transition time from the fade start volume value specified in.

"VOL_PH" is a function that increases or decreases the volume value of the phrase being played, which is specified by the parameter, with the volume value specified by the parameter. "VOL_MUTE_ON_PH" is a function that mutes the volume of the phrase specified by the parameter. "VOL_MUTE_OFF_PH" is a function for canceling mute of the volume of the phrase specified by the parameter.

"SCPLAY" and "SXCPLAY" execute a designated channel song reproduction process for reproducing the phrase corresponding to the phrase number specified in the parameter on the specified channel. If the same phrase has already been played, the playback of the phrase is interrupted and the same phrase is played from the beginning during playback by "SCPLAY", and the playback of the phrase is continued without interruption during playback by "SXCPLAY". That is, even if the same phrase is executed by using "SXCPLAY" while the phrase is being played, no particular process is executed.

In "PAN_CH", the above-mentioned "PAN_PH" performs a panpot for a phrase, whereas a panpot for a ch (channel) is performed. Ch is specified by a parameter and the phrase is changed to ch. Other than that, the processing is the same as "PAN_PH". Regarding "PAN_CH2", the above-mentioned "PAN_PH2" performs a panpot for a phrase, whereas a panpot for ch is performed, except that ch is specified by a parameter and the phrase is changed to ch "PAN_PH2". The process does not change.

"VOL_FADE_CH" is "VOL_FADE_PH" except that the above-mentioned "VOL_FADE_PH" fades for a phrase, whereas ch fades for ch. Ch is specified by a parameter and the phrase changes to ch. The process does not change. Regarding "VOL_FADE_CH2", while the above-mentioned "VOL_FADE_PH2" fades for a phrase, it fades for ch. Ch is specified by a parameter and the phrase is changed to ch. The process does not change.

In "VOL_CH", the above-mentioned "VOL_PH" increases / decreases the volume value for the phrase, whereas the volume value increases / decreases for ch. Ch is specified by a parameter and the phrase changes to ch. Other than that, the processing is the same as "VOL_PH". Regarding "VOL_MUTE_ON_CH", the above-mentioned "VOL_MUTE_ON_PH" mutes (mute) the phrase, whereas mute the ch, ch is specified by a parameter and the phrase changes to ch. Other than that, the processing is the same as "VOL_MUTE_ON_PH". Regarding "VOL_MUTE_OFF_CH", the above-mentioned "VOL_MUTE_OFF_PH" cancels the mute (mute) for the phrase, whereas the mute (mute) for the ch is canceled. The process is the same as "VOL_MUTE_OFF_PH" except that is changed to ch.

[18-5-4. Function details (motor)]
Functions belonging to the group of motors are functions for controlling the output of motors and solenoids. FIG. 320 shows an example of a function related to motor control, and an outline of each function will be described.

"MPLAY" executes a motor regeneration process that causes the motor to reproduce an operation based on the motor data number specified in the parameter. The "MMPLAY" executes a motor regeneration process that causes the motor specified in the parameter to reproduce the operation based on the motor data number. “SOL_ON” executes a solenoid ON process that causes the solenoid to execute an operation based on the solenoid data number specified in the parameter. “SOL_OFF” executes a solenoid OFF process that causes the solenoid to stop the operation based on the solenoid data number specified in the parameter.

[18-5-5. Function details (user)]
The function belonging to the user's group is a function for executing the control not belonging to the group described above. An example of these functions is given in FIG. 320, and an outline of each function will be described.

"MBUF_SET" executes the motor output buffer scheduler work value setting process that sets the scheduler work value in the motor output buffer. “COMMAND” and “COMMAND0” are processes for issuing a command from within the scheduler. In "COMMAND", a command is issued to VDP1540a with a built-in sound source. For example, a command for starting drawing is issued to the liquid crystal display device. On the other hand, the command issued by "COMMAND0" is analyzed by the command analysis module 5200 and performs the same operation as the main command. The "MEMC" executes a scheduler memory copy process that copies the contents of the work area of the scheduler being executed to the work area of another scheduler.

[18-6. Scheduler]
Next, a scheduler that calls each function will be described. The scheduler is used to execute scheduler data, which is a data string that defines the functions required to execute a series of processes in the order of execution. One or more schedulers are provided for each purpose for management purposes, but all functions can be executed by all schedulers, and functions related to lamps can be executed by the sound scheduler, or by the accessory scheduler. There is no difference other than the processing cycle (frame or 1 ms) in the schedulers provided for each purpose, which can execute the functions for sound, and it is also possible to execute all the functions in a mixed manner. In addition, there is no limit to the number of schedulers that can be executed, and multiple registered schedulers can be executed at the same time.

FIG. 321 is a diagram showing an example of the scheduler definition of the present embodiment. The scheduler can be conveniently classified according to the state transition and the device to be controlled. The outline of typical types of schedulers will be described below.

First, an example of a scheduler related to state transitions will be described. There are special figure state schedulers (special figure state SCH, TOK_SCH) for executing main state transition scheduler data that controls the transition of the game state of the entire game. In the effect control on the peripheral control board 1510, the transition of the gaming state is controlled based on the command received from the main control board 1310. The processing cycle of the special figure state scheduler is 1f (frame).

Further, there are sub-state schedulers (sub-state SCH, SUB_SCH) for executing sub-state scheduler data that controls the transition of the internal state (sub-internal state) in the peripheral control board 1510. The internal state transitions to another state when a predetermined condition is satisfied, for example, when a player operates an effect button, wins a lottery for executing an effect, or when a predetermined time elapses from the start of fluctuation. do. The processing cycle of the sub-state scheduler is 1f (frame).

The scheduler for sound includes a background that controls the output of the sound that is output along with the background display and the variable display of the symbol, a scheduler (SND_SCH01) for executing the symbol sound scheduler data, and is output when the advance notice effect is executed. There is a scheduler (SND_SCH02, 03) that controls the output of the sound, and a scheduler (SND_SCH04) that controls the output of the sound when the advance notice is executed by the accessory. The processing cycle of the scheduler for sound is 1f (frame).

Similar to the sound-related scheduler, the related scheduler for the lamp includes the background that controls the lighting and blinking of the lamp according to the background display and the fluctuation display of the symbol, and the scheduler for executing the symbol lamp scheduler data (LMP_SCH01). ), A scheduler (LMP_SCH02, 03) that controls the lighting / blinking of the lamp when the notice effect is executed, and a scheduler (LMP_SCH04) that controls the lighting / blinking of the lamp when the advance notice is executed by the accessory. The processing cycle of the scheduler for the lamp is 1f (frame).

In addition, a scheduler that controls the sound and the lamp in conjunction with each other is also defined. Such a scheduler has a sound / lamp notification layer that outputs sound and lights / blinks lamps in order to notify the outside of notifications such as ball burnout and ball jamming and alarms due to abnormality detection by magnetic sensors. There is a scheduler (INF_SCH01 to 03) for executing scheduler data for each layer. In addition, there is a sound / lamp general-purpose scheduler (SNDLMP_SCH01-05) that is generally used to execute an effect in which sound output and lamp lighting / blinking are linked. The processing cycle of these schedulers is 1f (frame).

The scheduler for the motor includes a scheduler (MOTSYS_SCH) for executing motor system scheduler data for executing system operation, and a scheduler for executing motorram clear scheduler data for setting when clearing RAM (MOTSYS_SCH). MOTRAM_SCH), motor accessory initialization scheduler data for initializing the arrangement of accessories, etc. (MOTINI_SCH), motor accessory correction scheduler data for executing the position correction of accessories There is a scheduler (MOTHOS_SCH) of the above, and a scheduler (MOT_SCH) for executing the operation of the accessory by the production and the like.

The scheduler for executing the operation of the accessory by the production or the like is a general-purpose scheduler (MOT_SCH01-05) for controlling the operation of a specific accessory or a general-purpose scheduler used regardless of the type of the accessory. There is a scheduler (MOT_SCH05-10).

The processing cycle of the scheduler targeting the motor is 1 ms (millisecond), which is shorter than the processing cycle of the scheduler targeting the management of the gaming state and the sound and lamp (1f of the present embodiment = about 33.334 ms). It has become.

Although the number of schedulers that control each target device is fixed in the present embodiment, the number of schedulers may be controlled to be dynamically increased or decreased according to the gaming state or the advance notice. As a result, it is possible to start each scheduler independently of the number of characters and the like provided in the gaming machine and the number of effects, and it is possible to reduce the restrictions for executing the effects.

[18-7. Application example of scheduler data (Production 1)]
The functions used in the production control and the types and functions of the scheduler that perform a series of control by combining these functions have been described above. However, the scheduler data and specific application examples of the functions will be described below with reference to the drawings. explain.

[18-7-1. Outline of production]
FIG. 322A is a diagram showing an example of the operation of the accessory controlled by using the scheduler data of the present embodiment. As shown in FIG. 322A, the game board 5 of the present embodiment includes a logo accessory 5001, a star accessory 5002 (left star accessory 5002a, a middle star accessory 5002b, a right star accessory 5002c), and a hatchet accessory 5003. Is placed.

The logo accessory 5001 is arranged at the upper left of the game area. When the logo accessory 5001 operates, it falls (moves) from the initial position (upper stage position) to the intermediate position, and returns to the initial position after the production is completed. Further, the logo accessory 5001 can move in the vertical direction as well as vibrate in the vertical and horizontal directions before and after the movement.

The star accessory 5002 is arranged above the game area, the left star accessory 5002a is arranged on the left side, the middle star accessory 5002b is arranged in the center, and the right star accessory 5002c is arranged on the right side. Each star accessory 5002 can operate independently, and one or a plurality of star accessories 5002 operate at predetermined timings depending on the content of the effect.

The left star accessory 5002a moves to the lower left, and can move to a position slightly lower left in the center of the game area. Further, the middle star accessory 5002b moves downward, and can move to a position slightly above the center of the game area. The right star accessory 5002c moves to the lower right and can be moved to a position slightly lower right in the center of the game area. Each star accessory 5002 may be stopped before moving to the final arrival position, or may be returned to an intermediate position and stopped after reaching the final arrival position.

The hatchet 5003 is arranged above the center of the game area. The hatchet 5003 can be dropped (moved) from the initial position (upper stage position) to the intermediate position and the lower stage position. Depending on the operation of the production button by the player and the lottery result of the hatchet notice production, it moves from the initial position to the intermediate position and stops temporarily, then moves to the lower position or moves from the initial position to the lower position at once. The operation mode to do is set. Similar to the logo accessory 5001, the hatchet accessory 5003 can also be produced to vibrate up, down, left and right before and after movement.

Next, the flow of the advance notice effect executed by one symbol change will be described. First, with reference to FIG. 322B, a step-up notice, a button (BTN) cut-in notice, a group notice, a star character notice, and a button (BTN) logo character fall notice will be described. The flow of the advance notice effect including the hatchet advance notice effect will be described with reference to FIG. 332.

FIG. 322B shows an example of the execution timing of the advance notice effect executed in the series of fluctuation display from the start to the stop of the fluctuation of the special symbol in the present embodiment, and is a diagram for explaining the scheduler and the scheduler data used at this time. be. In the series of fluctuation displays shown in FIG. 322B, a step-up notice and a button (BTN) cut-in notice are executed in the first half of the fluctuation. After that, a reach occurs, and in the latter half of the fluctuation, a group notice, a star character notice, and a button (BTN) logo character fall notice are executed. In each notice effect, scheduler data for controlling lighting of a lamp, sound output, image output, operation of an accessory, and the like is executed.

Hereinafter, a part of the scheduler data for executing each notice effect will be extracted, and the functions controlled and configured by the scheduler data will be described. Specifically, the scheduler data "SCH_LMP_YKK_STP" (Fig. 323) that controls the lamp in the step-up notice, the scheduler data "SCH_LMP_YKK_CUT" (Fig. 324) that controls the lamp in the button cut-in notice, and the star character in the star character notice. The motor scheduler data "SCH_MOT_YKK_HYA1" (FIGS. 325 to 327) for controlling the operation of the 5002 and the motor scheduler data "SCH_MOT_YKK_LGO" (FIG. 328) for controlling the operation of the logo accessory 5001 in the button logo accessory fall notice will be described.

[18-7-2. Lamp control in step-up notice]
In the step-up notice of the present embodiment, the lighting mode of a predetermined lamp is controlled to change stepwise according to the degree of expectation (lottery result value of the step-up notice). As shown in FIG. 322B, the step-up notice lamp scheduler data "SCH_LMP_YKK_STP" belongs to the notice group 01 and is driven by the notice group 01 lamp scheduler data scheduler (lamp SCH notice 01) "LMP_SCH02".

FIG. 323 is a diagram for explaining the contents of the scheduler data “SCH_LMP_YKK_STP” that controls the lighting / blinking of the lamp in the step-up notice of the present embodiment.

When the scheduler data "SCH_LMP_YKK_STP" is started, the function "SUBC: YKK_STP: TBL_LMP_STP" is first executed. This function is a scheduler work area index branch call "SUBC", and is executed with the target scheduler work number "YKK_STP" and the step-up advance notice branch call address table "TBL_LMP_STP" as parameters.

The scheduler execution unit 5060 refers to the designated step-up notice branch call address table "TBL_LMP_STP" and specifies the address of the scheduler data to be the branch destination based on the contents of the step-up notice work area "YKK_STP". The step-up notice work area "YKK_STP" stores the lottery result value of the step-up notice, and corresponds to the index (address) of each record of the step-up notice branch call address table "TBL_LMP_STP".

The step-up notice branch call address table "TBL_LMP_STP" stores the address of the step-up notice lamp scheduler data. Specifically, SUBC_NON, SUBC_LMP_STP1, SUBC_LMP_STP2, SUBC_LMP_STP3, and SUBC_LMP_STP4 indicating the address of the scheduler data are stored. Note that SUBC_NON is an address for a dummy call indicating that nothing is processed, and by preparing an address for the dummy call, it is possible to turn off the lamp when the advance notice is not won. .. SUBC_LMP_STP1, SUBC_LMP_STP2, SUBC_LMP_STP3, and SUBC_LMP_STP4 are the addresses of scheduler data for executing the step-up notice corresponding to the number of step-ups (1 to 4).

In the present embodiment, the step-up notice work area "YKK_STP" stores the lottery result value corresponding to the step-up notice having the number of step-ups of 4, and the scheduler data "SUBC_LMP_STP4" is executed. The scheduler data "SUBC_LMP_STP4" specifies the gradation pattern data (PTA_STP_PT1 to 4) corresponding to each step, executes the lamp gradation data reproduction process (KPLAY), and waits 90 frames (about 3 seconds) for each step. Execute the process. As a result, in each step, the lamp is turned on and blinked in the corresponding gradation pattern for 3 seconds. At this time, the scheduler data "SUBC_LMP_STP4" is driven by using the background and symbol lamp scheduler data scheduler "LMP_SCH01".

After that, when the function "RET" is executed in the scheduler data "SUBC_LMP_STP4", the process returns to the processing of the caller (scheduler data "SUBC_LMP_YKK_STP"). Further, the function "STOP" is executed, and the scheduler data "SUBC_LMP_YKK_STP" is terminated.

In the present embodiment, the step-up notice work area "YKK_STP" stores the lottery result value corresponding to the step-up notice having the number of step-ups of 4, and the scheduler data "SUBC_LMP_STP4" is executed. The scheduler data "SUBC_LMP_STP4" specifies the lamp gradation pattern data (PTA_STP_PT1 to 4) corresponding to each step-up and executes the lamp gradation data reproduction process (KPLAY), and 90 frames (about 3 seconds) for each step. Wait processing is executed. As a result, in each step, the lamp is turned on and blinked in the corresponding lamp gradation pattern for 3 seconds. At this time, the scheduler data "SUBC_LMP_STP4" is driven by using the advance notice group 01 lamp scheduler data scheduler "LMP_SCH02".

After that, when the function "RET" is executed in the scheduler data "SUBC_LMP_STP4", the process returns to the next processing of the caller (scheduler data "SUBC_LMP_YKK_STP"). Further, the function "STOP" is executed, and the scheduler data "SCH_LMP_YKK_STP" is terminated.

The step-up notice has been described above, but here, the functions that can be realized by the scheduler work area index branch call "SUBC" will be described. The first is that it is possible to call the scheduler data for a lottery result with one action for a plurality of lottery results based on the dynamically rewritten work memory contents (preliminary lottery result value in this embodiment). be. Depending on the content of the notice, the range of the lottery result value may be several hundreds, and in the case of two branches such as the IF statement, the number of scheduler data for the judgment becomes too complicated and it becomes difficult to manage corrections and the like. On the other hand, in "SUBC", the above problem is easily solved by indexing the contents of the work memory. Further, in the present embodiment, the number of the work memory and the number of call address tables for branching are one each other, but a complicated conditional branch may be processed by one action by making both of them a plurality. Secondly, since it takes the form of "CALL", it is possible to execute common scheduler data after executing the "SUBC" function, and it is not necessary to describe the scheduler data after branching for the number of branches, which is only. By describing one scheduler data, the same process can be executed after all branches. Further, in order to deal with a problem in the program, if the value of the work memory exceeds the number of elements in the call address table for branching, the branching process may not be performed and the "SUBC" function may be terminated.

That is, the function "SUBC" can select the scheduler data of the branch destination based on the value stored in the work area from the branch destination held in the table format in advance, and call the selected scheduler data. In simple conditional branching, it is necessary to define conditions according to the number of branches and set the scheduler data of the branch destination, but in the function "SUBC", it is possible to easily add or delete branch destinations. , It is possible to easily add / change the production contents and improve the development efficiency.

[18-7-3. Lamp control in button cut-in notice]
The button cut-in notice of the present embodiment is started in the first half of the fluctuation, and the notice is executed until the end by accepting the operation input of the effect button by the player within a predetermined period. Further, similarly to the step-up notice, the lighting mode of a predetermined lamp is controlled according to the degree of expectation (lottery result value of the button cut-in notice).

The button cut-in notice belongs to the notice group 02, and the lamp scheduler data "SCH_LMP_YKK_CUT" is driven by the notice group 02 lamp scheduler data scheduler (lamp SCH notice 02) "LMP_SCH03" as shown in FIG. 322B. Since it belongs to a notice group different from the step-up notice and the scheduler data is driven by another scheduler, it is possible to execute the notice in parallel.

FIG. 324 is a diagram for explaining the contents of the scheduler data “SCH_LMP_YKK_CUT” that controls the lamp in the button cut-in notice of the present embodiment.

When the scheduler data "SCH_LMP_YKK_CUT" is started, first, the function "KPLAY: LMP_SCH03: PTA_CUT_STA" is executed, and then the weight processing "NOP: 30" for 30 frames (about 1 second) is executed. As a result, the designated lamp lights (blinks) for 1 second based on the gradation pattern data "PTA_CUT_STA". At this time, the lamp scheduler "LMP_SCH03" is used.

Subsequently, a loop process for 3 seconds is executed in order to receive the input of the effect button from the player. Specifically, the function "LOOPST" is executed with the number of parameter loops set to 90. Since one frame corresponds to one loop, 90 loops correspond to 3 seconds. In the loop processing, the functions from "LOOPST" indicating the start of the loop to the function "LOOP" indicating the end of the loop are executed up to a specified number of times. Therefore, the function "SUBC: YKK_BTN: TBL_LMP_CUB" is executed up to 90 times.

Explaining the function "SUBC: YKK_BTN: TBL_LMP_CUB", the scheduler work area index branch call "SUBC" is executed with the target scheduler work number "YKK_BTN" and the button cut-in advance notice branch call address table "TBL_LMP_CUB" as parameters.

The scheduler execution unit 5060 refers to the button cut-in advance notice branch call address table "TBL_LMP_CUB" and specifies the start address of the scheduler data to be the branch destination based on the contents of the button ON_OFF work area "YKK_BTN". Button ON_OFF The operation state of the effect button is stored in the work area "YKK_BTN", "0: button OFF" when the effect button is not operated, and "1: button ON" when the effect button is operated. Is set. The operation state of the effect button corresponds to the index (address) of each record of the button cut-in advance notice branch call address table "TBL_LMP_CUB". Further, the contents of the button ON_OFF work area "YKK_BTN" are rewritten by a program for button processing outside the scheduler data.

While "0: Button OFF" is set in the button ON_OFF work area "YKK_BTN", the lamp scheduler data "SUBC_LMP_CUT_BTNOFF" when the button cut-in notice button is OFF is selected in the button cut-in notice branch call address table "TBL_LMP_CUB". NS. The content of the scheduler data "SUBC_LMP_CUT_BTNOFF" is only the function "RET", and returns immediately after the function "SUBC: YKK_BTN: TBL_LMP_CUB" of the calling scheduler data "SCH_LMP_YKK_CUT" (function "LOOP"). Therefore, if the input of the effect button is not detected during the 90 loop processes, the loop process is exited, the function "STOP" is executed, and the scheduler data "SCH_LMP_YKK_CUT" ends.

On the other hand, when "1: Button ON" is set in the button ON_OFF work area "YKK_BTN", the lamp scheduler data "SUBC_LMP_CUT_BTNON" when the button cut-in notice button is ON in the button cut-in notice branch call address table "TBL_LMP_CUB". Is selected. The content of the scheduler data "SUBC_LMP_CUT_BTNON" is the function "SUBJ: YKK_CUT: TBL_LMP_CUT", and the scheduler work area index branch jump "SUBJ" has the target scheduler work number "YKK_CUT" and the button cut-in notice branch jump address table "TBL_LMP". Is executed as a parameter.

The button cut-in notice branch jump address table "TBL_LMP_CUT" stores the address of the button cut-in notice lamp scheduler data. Specifically, SUBJ_NON, SUBJ_LMP_CUT1, SUBJ_LMP_CUT2, SUBJ_LMP_CUT3, and SUBJ_LMP_CUT4 indicating the address of the scheduler data are stored. Note that SUBJ_NON is an address for a dummy call indicating that nothing is processed, and by preparing an address for the dummy call, it is possible to turn off the lamp when the advance notice is not won. .. SUBJ_LMP_CUT1, SUBJ_LMP_CUT2, SUBJ_LMP_CUT3, and SUBJ_LMP_CUT4 are the addresses of the scheduler data for executing the lamp lighting pattern (color, lighting time) corresponding to the lottery result value of the button cut-in notice.

In the present embodiment, the button cut-in notice work area "YKK_CUT" stores the lottery result value indicating the button cut-in notice pattern (PTN) 4, and the scheduler data "SUBJ_LMP_CUT4" is executed. In the scheduler data "SUBJ_LMP_CUT4", first, the lamp is turned on in red (gradation data pattern "PTA_CUT_RED") by the lamp gradation data reproduction processing (KPLAY), and then the wait processing of 150 frames is executed to continue for 5 seconds. Let me. At this time, the lamp scheduler "LMP_SCH03" is used to drive the scheduler data. At this time, the scheduler data "SUBC_LMP_STP4" is driven by using the advance notice group 02 lamp scheduler data scheduler "LMP_SCH03".

Since the call of the button cut-in notice lamp scheduler data "SUBJ_LMP_CUT4" is not CALL but JUMP, the execution of the button cut-in notice lamp scheduler data ends with the function "STOP" and returns to the calling scheduler "SUBC_LMP_YKK_CUT". do not. Therefore, there are two types of termination of the scheduler "SCH_LMP_YKK_CUT": when the "STOP" function included in "SCH_LMP_YKK_CUT" is executed, and when the "STOP" function included in "SUBJ_LMP_CUT4" is executed from the scheduler "SUBJ_LMP_CUT1". There is.

The button cut-in notice has been described above, but here, the functions that can be realized by the scheduler work area index branch jump "SUBJ" will be described. The first is that it is possible to call the scheduler data for a lottery result with one action for a plurality of lottery results based on the dynamically rewritten work memory contents (preliminary lottery result value in this embodiment). Depending on the content of the notice, the range of the lottery result value may be several hundreds, and in the case of two branches such as the IF statement, the number of scheduler data for judgment becomes too complicated and it becomes impossible to manage corrections. .. In "SUBJ", the above problem is easily solved by indexing the contents of the working memory. Further, in the present embodiment, the number of the work memory and the number of call address tables for branching are one each other, but a complicated conditional branch may be processed by one action by making both of them a plurality. Secondly, since it takes the form of "JUMP", it is possible to execute different processes for each branched scheduler data after executing the "SUBJ" function. Further, as in the case of "SUBC", in order to deal with a program defect, if the value of the work memory exceeds the number of elements in the call address table for branching, the branching process is not performed and the "SUBC" function is terminated. You may do so.

That is, the function "SUBJ" selects the scheduler data of the branch destination based on the value stored in the work area from the branch destination held in advance in the table format, like the function "SUBJ", and the selected scheduler data. It is possible to shift the process to, and the same effect as that of the function "SUBC" can be obtained.

Further, unlike the function "SUBJ", the function "SUBJ" continuously executes the processing of the schedule data of the callee and does not return to the processing of the caller, so it is suitable for selectively executing the processing. ing. For example, when the content of the effect to be executed differs depending on whether or not the effect button is operated, it is possible to prevent duplicate effects from being executed by using the function "SUBJ". On the other hand, since the function "SUBC" returns to the processing by the scheduler data of the caller, it is possible to execute the common post-processing after the processing of the callee is executed, and the processing can be simplified.

Therefore, by using the function "SUBC" and the function "SUBJ", it is possible to simplify the structure of the scheduler data and to flexibly support processing branching. Furthermore, since it becomes easy to respond to additions and changes simply by changing the branch destination of the table format, it becomes easy to improve the development efficiency and to respond to the specification change of the gaming machine.

[18-7-4. Motor control in star character notice]
Next, the control of the star character advance notice executed in the latter half of the fluctuation in the present embodiment will be described. When a reach occurs in the variable display of the special symbol and the transition to the latter half of the fluctuation occurs, a group notice is generated, and the star character notice is executed independently of the group notice. As for the star character notice, a plurality of types of star character 5002 (in this embodiment, three types of left star character 5002a, middle star character 5002b, and right star character 5002c) that can be operated by a driving body (motor) are used. By operating, the expected degree of symbol fluctuation is notified. Specifically, the higher the number of star characters 5002 appearing, the higher the degree of expectation.

As shown in FIG. 322B, the star character advance notice of the present embodiment is executed by driving the star character advance notice motor scheduler data "SCH_MOT_YKK_HYA1" with the motor scheduler "MOT_SCH02" (scheduler for left star character scheduler data). Will be done. In the gaming machine of the present embodiment, a dedicated scheduler (MOT_SCH02 to 04) for operating the star accessory 5002 is provided in advance, but a general-purpose scheduler (MOT_SCH05-09) can also be used. ..

FIGS. 325 to 327 are diagrams for explaining the contents of the scheduler data for controlling the motor in the star character advance notice of the present embodiment. FIG. 325 is the scheduler data “SCH_MOT_YKK_HYA1” that controls the overall flow and the left star accessory 5002a, FIG. 326 is the scheduler data “SCH_MOT_YKK_HYA2” that controls the right star accessory 5002c, and FIG. 327 is the scheduler that controls the middle star accessory 5002b. It is a figure explaining data "SCH_MOT_YKK_HYA3".

When the scheduler data "SCH_MOT_YKK_HYA1" is started, the function "SUBC: YKK_HYA: TBL_MOT_HYA" is executed first. This function is a scheduler work area index branch call "SUBC", and is executed with the target scheduler work number "YKK_HYA" and the star accessory advance notice branch call address table "TBL_MOT_HYA" as parameters.

The scheduler execution unit 5060 refers to the designated star accessory advance notice branch call address table "TBL_MOT_HYA" and specifies the address of the scheduler data to be the branch destination based on the contents of the star accessory advance notice work area "YKK_HYA". .. The lottery result value of the star character notice branch is stored in the star character notice work area "YKK_HYA", and corresponds to the index (address) of each record of the star character notice branch call address table "TBL_MOT_HYA".

The address of the star character appearance scheduler data is stored in the star character advance notice branch call address table "TBL_MOT_HYA". Specifically, SUBC_NON, SUBC_MOT_HYA1, SUBC_MOT_HYA2, and SUBC_MOT_HYA3 indicating the address of the scheduler data are stored. In addition, SUBC_NON is an address for a dummy call indicating that nothing is processed, and by preparing an address for the dummy call, it is possible to make the accessory inoperable when the advance notice is not won. There is. SUBC_MOT_HYA1, SUBC_MOT_HYA2, SUBC_MOT_HYA3 are the addresses of the scheduler data for executing the star character advance notice. Specifically, SUBC_MOT_HYA1 is the left star character 5002a only, and SUBC_MOT_HYA2 is the left star character 5002a SUBC_MOT_HYA3 is scheduler data for operating all three types of star characters 5002.

In the present embodiment, a lottery result value indicating that the star character advance notice for causing the left star character 5002a, the middle star character 5002b, and the right star character 5002c to appear in the star character advance notice work area "YKK_HYA" is executed. "3" is stored, and the scheduler data "SUBC_MOT_HYA3" is executed. In addition, when only the left star character 5002a is operated, the lottery result value of the star character notice is "1", and when the left star character 5002a and the right star character 5002c are operated, the lottery of the star character notice is drawn. "2" is set in the result value.

The scheduler data "SUBC_MOT_HYA3" first specifies the parameter "PTA_HYA_LEF" indicating the appearance operation pattern of the left star accessory 5002a, and executes the function "MPLAY" corresponding to the motor regeneration process. At this time, the function "MPLAY" is executed by the motor scheduler "MOT_SHC02" in which the scheduler data "SCH_MOT_YKK_HYA1" is executed.

Next, the scheduler execution unit 5060 executes the right star accessory 5002c appearance scheduler data "SCH_MOT_YKK_HYA2" by the function "RQ". The function "REF" is a function for executing the scheduler data specified by the parameter by the scheduler also specified by the parameter. Here, the right star accessory 5002c appearance scheduler data "SCH_MOT_YKK_HYA2" is executed using the right star accessory 5002c scheduler data scheduler "MOT_SHC03". Similarly, the function "RQ" executes the middle star accessory 5002b appearance scheduler data "SCH_MOT_YKK_HYA2" using the middle star accessory 5002b scheduler data scheduler "MOT_SHC04". In the present embodiment, the motor regeneration process (function "MPLAY") for operating the right star accessory 5002c and the middle star accessory 5002b is executed in the same frame as the motor regeneration process for the left star accessory 5002a. ing. As described above, by executing the scheduler data for operating each star accessory 5002 with different schedulers, each star accessory 5002 can be controlled in parallel.

Subsequently, the scheduler execution unit 5060 executes the weight processing "NOP: 300" for 300 frames (10 seconds). During this weight time, the left star accessory 5002a operates in the specified mode. After the weight processing is completed, the function "RET" is executed, the caller's star character advance notice motor scheduler data "SCH_MOT_YKK_HYA1" is returned, and the execution of the scheduler data "SCH_MOT_YKK_HYA1" is completed by the function "Stop".

Next, the control of the right star accessory 5002c will be described with reference to FIG. 326. The right star accessory 5002c appearance scheduler data "SCH_MOT_YKK_HYA2" is executed using the right star accessory 5002c scheduler data scheduler "MOT_SHC03" specified at the time of execution by the function "RQ".

When the scheduler data "SCH_MOT_YKK_HYA2" is started, as shown in FIG. 326, the motor regeneration process "MPLAY" is executed by designating the parameter "PTA_HYA_RGT" indicating the appearance operation mode (pattern) of the right star accessory 5002c. .. Subsequently, the weight processing "NOP: 300" of 300 frames (10 seconds) is executed. This weight time is the operating time of the right star accessory 5002c. After the weight processing is completed, the processing is terminated by executing the function "STOP" without returning to the processing of the scheduler data of the caller.

Finally, the control of the middle star accessory 5002b will be described with reference to FIG. 327. The middle star accessory 5002b appearance scheduler data "SCH_MOT_YKK_HYA3" is executed using the middle star accessory 5002b scheduler data scheduler "MOT_SHC04" specified at the time of execution by the function "RQ".

When the scheduler data "SCH_MOT_YKK_HYA3" is started, as shown in FIG. 327, the motor regeneration process "MPLAY" is executed by designating the parameter "PTA_HYA_MID" indicating the appearance operation mode (pattern) of the middle star accessory 5002b. .. Subsequently, the weight processing "NOP: 300" of 300 frames (10 seconds) is executed. This weight time is the operating time of the middle star accessory 5002b. After the weight processing is completed, the processing is terminated by executing the function "STOP" without returning to the processing of the scheduler data of the caller.

As described above, in the present embodiment, in the scheduler data for operating the left star accessory 5002a, the scheduler data for operating the right star accessory 5002c and the scheduler data for operating the middle star accessory 5002b are combined with the function "RQ". By executing using, it is possible to operate each accessory in parallel. That is, the operations of each accessory can be executed in parallel without any special control by executing the scheduler data defined individually as needed. The advantage of executing scheduler data in parallel is that a single accessory operation can be described without being aware of other schedulers. Furthermore, when performing multiple operations corresponding to the notice pattern with one scheduler, the number of combinations becomes enormous, the scheduler data becomes complicated, and the number of data becomes enormous. By calling the scheduler data in parallel, the minimum number of scheduler data can be created and called for easy control. In the present embodiment, an example in which three types of accessories are operated in parallel has been described, but it is possible to execute more accessories in parallel as long as the operation of the accessories is not hindered. From the above, according to the present embodiment, it is possible to operate a plurality of accessories in parallel without requiring complicated control, and it is possible to easily realize a variety of effects.

[18-7-5. Motor control for logo accessory fall notice]
Subsequently, the control of the logo accessory fall notice executed in the latter half of the variation in the present embodiment will be described. The logo character fall notice is executed independently of the group notice and the star character notice. The logo accessory fall notice is a notice effect in which the logo accessory 5001 imitating the logo of the gaming machine operates so as to fall vertically in front of the game board side effect display device 1600, and the probability of occurrence of a jackpot is higher than usual. Indicates that is high.

As shown in FIG. 322B, the logo accessory fall notice of the present embodiment is obtained by driving the logo accessory fall notice motor scheduler data "SCH_MOT_YKK_LGO" with the motor scheduler "MOT_SCH01" (logo accessory scheduler data scheduler). Will be executed. It is also possible to operate the logo accessory 5001 with a general-purpose scheduler (MOT_SCH05-09).

FIG. 328 is a diagram illustrating the contents of the scheduler data “SCH_MOT_YKK_LGO” that controls the motor in the logo accessory fall notice of the present embodiment.

When the scheduler data "SCH_MOT_YKK_LGO" is started, the function "MPLAY: PTA_LGO_GAT" is first executed, and then the weight processing "NOP: 30" for 30 frames (about 1 second) is executed. As a result, the designated operation is performed for 1 second based on the operation pattern data "PTA_LGO_GAT". Specifically, the logo accessory 5001 rattles. At this time, the motor scheduler "MOT_SCH01" is used.

Subsequently, a loop process for 3 seconds is executed in order to receive the input of the effect button from the player. Specifically, the function "LOOPST" is executed with the number of parameter loops set to 90. As described above, in the loop processing, the function between "LOOPST" and "LOOP" is repeatedly executed. Therefore, the function "SUBC: YKK_LGO: TBL_YKK_LGO" is executed up to 90 times.

Explaining the function "SUBC: YKK_LGO: TBL_YKK_LGO", the scheduler work area index branch call "SUBC" is executed with the target scheduler work number "YKK_LGO" and the button logo accessory fall notice lottery result branch call table "TBL_YKK_LGO" as parameters. NS.

The scheduler execution unit 5060 refers to the button logo accessory fall notice lottery result branch call table "TBL_YKK_LGO", and based on the contents of the button logo accessory notice work area "YKK_LGO", sets the start address of the scheduler data to be the branch destination. Identify. The button logo character fall notice execution lottery result is stored in the button logo character fall notice work area "YKK_LGO", and if the button logo character fall notice execution lottery is missed, "0: not executed", button Execution of logo fall notice If the lottery is won, "1: Logo fall notice execution" is set. The result of the execution lottery of the button logo accessory fall notice corresponds to the index (address) of each record of the button logo accessory fall notice lottery result branch call table "TBL_YKK_LGO".

While "0: Not executed" is set in the button logo character notice work area "YKK_LGO", in the button logo character fall notice lottery result branch call table "TBL_YKK_LGO", the logo character fall notice unexecuted motor scheduler The data "SUBC_YKK_LGO_NON" is selected. The content of the scheduler data "SUBC_YKK_LGO_NON" is only the function "RET", and returns immediately after the function "SUBC: YKK_LGO: TBL_YKK_LGO" of the calling scheduler "SCH_MOT_YKK_LGO" (function "LOOP"). Therefore, if the button logo accessory fall notice execution lottery is missed, the loop processing is executed 90 times, the loop processing is exited, the function "STOP" is executed, and the scheduler data "SCH_MOT_YKK_LGO" ends. ..

On the other hand, when "1: Logo fall notice execution" is set in the button logo character notice work area "YKK_LGO", that is, when the button logo character fall notice execution lottery is won, the button logo character falls. In the notice lottery result branch call table "TBL_YKK_LGO", the motor scheduler data "SUBC_YKK_LGO_DOWN" at the time of executing the logo accessory fall notice is selected. The content of the scheduler data "SUBC_YKK_LGO_DOWN" is the function "SUBC: YKK_BTN: TBL_MOT_LGO", and the scheduler work area index branch call "SUBC" is the target scheduler work number "YKK_BTN" and the button logo accessory fall notice button branch call address table. It is executed with "TBL_MOT_LGO" as a parameter.

The scheduler execution unit 5060 refers to the button logo accessory fall warning button branch call address table "TBL_MOT_LGO" and specifies the start address of the scheduler data to be the branch destination based on the contents of the button ON_OFF work area "YKK_BTN". As in the case of the button cut-in notice, the operation state of the effect button is stored in the button ON_OFF work area "YKK_BTN", and if the effect button is not operated, "0: button OFF" and the effect button are operated. If so, "1: Button ON" is set. The operation state of the effect button corresponds to the index (address) of each record of the button logo accessory fall notice branch call address table "TBL_MOT_LGO".

While "0: Button OFF" is set in the button ON_OFF work area "YKK_BTN", in the button branch call address table "TBL_MOT_LGO", the motor scheduler data "SUBC_MOT_LGO_BTNOFF" when the logo character fall warning button is OFF. Is selected. The content of the scheduler data "SUBC_MOT_LGO_BTNOFF" is only the function "RET", and returns immediately after the function "SUBC: YKK_BTN: TBL_MOT_LGO" of the calling scheduler data "SUBC_YKK_LGO_DOWN" (function "RET"). This further returns to the function "LOOP" of the scheduler data "SCH_MOT_YKK_LGO". Therefore, even if the execution lottery for the button logo accessory fall notice is won, if the input of the effect button is not detected during the 90 loop processing, the function "STOP" is released from the loop processing. It is executed and the scheduler data "SCH_MOT_YKK_LGO" ends.

On the other hand, when "1: Button ON" is set in the button ON_OFF work area "YKK_BTN", the motor scheduler when the logo character fall notice button is ON in the button logo character fall notice button branch call address table "TBL_MOT_LGO". The data "SUBC_MOT_LGO_BTNON" is selected. As for the contents of the scheduler data "SUBC_MOT_LGO_BTNON", first, the function "COMMAND: COM_LGO_ON" is executed. The function "COMMAND" is a function for issuing a command when executing scheduler data. Here, the command "COM_LGO_ON" is issued. The command "COM_LGO_ON" is a command for causing the game board side effect display device 1600 to start drawing the effect when the logo accessory 5001 is dropped, and is issued to the effect control unit 5020.

Further, the scheduler execution unit 5060 executes the function "MPLAY: PTA_LGO_DOWN" within the same frame as the issuance of the command "COM_LGO_ON". The parameter "PTA_LGO_DOWN" is pattern data for performing an operation of dropping the logo accessory 5001. Further, the function "NOP: 120" executes weight processing for 120 frames (about 4 seconds). At this time, the logo accessory 5001 performs a falling operation for 3 seconds, and stops at the falling position for the remaining 1 second.

Further, by executing the function "MPLAY: PTA_LGO_INI", the logo accessory 5001 is moved from the drop position to the initial position. Subsequently, the function "NOP: 90" executes weight processing for 90 frames (about 3 seconds), during which the logo accessory 5001 is returned to the initial position. After the weight processing is completed, the execution of the logo character drop operation is completed, so the function "MEMW: YKK_LGO: 0" is executed, the button logo character notice lottery result is rewritten to "0: not executed", and the caller's scheduler It returns to immediately after the function "SUBC: YKK_BTN: TBL_MOT_LGO" of the data "SUBC_YKK_LGO_DOWN" (function "RET"). This further returns to the function "LOOP" of the scheduler data "SCH_MOT_YKK_LGO". It returns to the function "LOOP" of the scheduler data "SCH_MOT_YKK_LGO", but since the button logo character notice lottery result is rewritten to "0: not executed", the scheduler data "PTA_LGO_DOWN" that drops the button logo character is executed. The remaining number of loops is processed, and the execution of the scheduler data "SCH_MOT_YKK_LGO" is terminated by the function "STOP".

As described above, by internally issuing a command when dropping the logo accessory 5001, the effect can be displayed on the liquid crystal display only when the logo accessory 5001 is dropped and at the timing when the logo accessory 5001 is dropped. realizable. In the present embodiment, by using the function "COMMAND", it is possible to link a plurality of types of production devices and execute them as needed at an appropriate timing, and it is possible to execute a more interesting production. ..

In this embodiment, the function "COMMAND" is used to display the effect on the liquid crystal on the VDP1540a with a built-in sound source. However, by processing the command issued by the function "COMMAND" on the program side, the control can be changed from the scheduler to the program. By returning once, performing complicated processing that cannot be handled by function commands, and writing the processing results to the work area used by the subsequent scheduler, it is possible to perform processing that cannot be controlled by function commands. In addition, the merit of issuing a command in the scheduler data is that the command issuance timing is used as the processing timing as it is, so that time management and execution judgment by a program are not required. In addition, it is possible to interactively process external inputs (buttons, jog dials, touchpads) by the user that are not determined in advance at the start of fluctuation, issue commands using the function "COMMAND", and perform the processing.

Further, in the present embodiment, the function "COMMAND" has a function of transmitting a fixed value command, but a work area is specified instead of a fixed value, and the contents of the work area are transmitted as a command. You may.

[18-8. Scheduler data application example (when the power is turned on)]
Subsequently, the scheduler data executed on the peripheral control board 1510 when the power of the gaming machine is turned on will be described. Here, the control from the power-on of the gaming machine to the start of the game and the start of the first variation display will be described.

[18-8-1. Outline of processing]
FIG. 329 is a drawing illustrating scheduler data executed when the power of the gaming machine of the present embodiment is turned on. In the gaming machine of the present embodiment, when the power of the gaming machine is turned on, a power-on command is output from the main control board 1310 to the peripheral control board 1510.

When the scheduler execution unit 5060 receives the power-on command, the sub-state scheduler "SUB_SCH" drives the scheduler data "SCH_STS_POWERON".

When the scheduler data "SCH_STS_POWERON" is executed, the sub-internal state transition scheduler is executed in a predetermined order, and the scheduler data corresponding to the sub-game state (sub-internal state) is started. As the scheduler data "SCH_STS_POWERON" progresses, the liquid crystal display screen displays a screen corresponding to the sub-internal state, for example, a standby screen, a maker demo screen, a model demo title screen, a goto prevention screen, etc., as shown in FIG. 329. Will be done. At this time, the main game state is the standby state. When the waiting state ends, the game is started, and when the game ball wins the starting winning opening, the main game state and the sub internal state transition to the changing state.

[18-8-2. Power-on control]
Next, a configuration for processing various commands and scheduler data will be described. FIG. 330 is a diagram illustrating a configuration for processing commands and scheduler data on the peripheral control board 1510 of the gaming machine of the present embodiment and the relationship between these configurations.

As described above, when the power of the gaming machine is turned on or when a predetermined event occurs in the game control on the main control board 1310, the main command is transmitted from the main control board 1310 and received by the peripheral control board 1510. NS. As described with reference to FIG. 312, the main command is stored in the main command buffer 5110 of the system module 5100, and is analyzed by the main command analysis process in the command analysis module. The command analysis module identifies the type of event generated by the main command analysis process, starts the corresponding scheduler, and executes the scheduler data.

Further, when the function "COMMAND0" (FIG. 319) is executed and a command is output from the scheduler, the output command is stored in the main command buffer 5110 and analyzed by the main command analysis process in the same manner as the main command. Will be done.

When the main command or the command output by the function "COMMAND0" is received, the command for executing the control on the peripheral control board 1510 is generated by the main command analysis process. The generated commands include commands for starting the scheduler and commands for controlling various production devices (commands for sub-internal output).

The command to start the scheduler includes, for example, the scheduler data for performing control corresponding to the change in the gaming state on the main control board 1310 and the change in the sub-internal state due to the progress of control on the peripheral control board 1510, and the main control board such as the start winning prize. The scheduler data for executing the effect corresponding to the event notified from 1310, the scheduler data defined so that the various effect devices operate in a series of modes, and the like are executed. In the present embodiment, in addition to starting the scheduler directly from the command, it is possible to start another scheduler by the function "RQ" included in the scheduler data.

On the other hand, the command for controlling the effect device (sub-internal output command) is, for example, a liquid crystal command for displaying a predetermined image on the liquid crystal display device. The command to control the effect device is output by the function "COMMAND" included in the scheduler data, in addition to the case where it is output based on the result of analyzing the main command. The commands that control the effect device are temporarily stored in the sub-internal output command buffer, and are processed in the order in which they are stored from the beginning of the buffer.

As described above, in the present embodiment, by further invoking another scheduler from the scheduler, it is possible to execute a plurality of schedulers in a hierarchical combination by receiving one main command. This makes it possible to integrate various controls on the peripheral control board 1510 into parts for each scheduler data, and by combining schedulers, it is possible to implement multiple types of effects in parallel while realizing various effect controls. It is possible to improve the development efficiency of gaming machines, such as streamlining debugging work.

Further, in the present embodiment, the command analysis process can be standardized by the command output by the function "COMMAND0". This makes it possible to standardize the scheduler data selection logic and function parameter determination logic by command analysis, which causes problems such as the need to manage a huge number of scheduler data combinations in a table. Can be suppressed.

Subsequently, the activation of the scheduler and the execution of the scheduler data when a command at power-on is received from the main control board 1310 will be described. FIG. 331 is a diagram illustrating a process of executing scheduler data when the power of the present embodiment is turned on.

As described with reference to FIG. 330, when the power is turned on to the gaming machine and the peripheral control board 1510 receives the power-on command transmitted from the main control board 1310, the power-on command is analyzed by the main command analysis process and the scheduler. The sub-state scheduler is started by the start process, and the corresponding scheduler data is executed in sequence. In executing each scheduler data, the function "COMMAND0" is executed and a command is issued to create a sub-internal state, and if necessary, a lamp or sound is output corresponding to the sub-internal state. ..

To specifically explain the scheduler to be executed, first, the sub-state scheduler "SUB_SCH" is used to execute the state power-on scheduler data "SCH_STS_POWERON". State power-on In the scheduler data "SCH_STS_POWERON", the function "COMMANDO" issues a command "COM_STS_TAIKI" to transition to the next internal state, and stops the scheduler.

The command "COM_STS_TAIKI" is processed by the "main command analysis process", and the state standby scheduler data "SCH_STS_TAKI" corresponding to the next sub-internal state is executed.

Subsequently, when the state standby scheduler data "SCH_STS_TAKI" is executed using the sub-state scheduler "SUB_SCH", the function "KPLAY: PTA_LAMP_TAIKI" is executed. As a result, the lighting of the lamp is started based on the lamp lighting pattern "PTA_LAMP_TAIKI" in the standby state. After that, by executing the function "NOP: 900", the standby state is set for 900 frames (30 seconds). After the standby state ends, the function "COMMANDO" issues the command "COM_STS_MDEMO" to transition to the next internal state, and stops the scheduler.

The command "COM_STS_MDEMO" is processed by the "main command analysis process", and the state maker demo scheduler data "SCH_STS_MDEMO" corresponding to the next sub-internal state is executed.

Subsequently, when the state maker demo scheduler data "SCH_STS_MDEMO" is executed using the sub state scheduler "SUB_SCH", the function "KPLAY: PTA_LAMP_MDEMO" is executed. As a result, the lamp lighting is started based on the lamp lighting pattern "PTA_LAMP_MDEMO" in the manufacturer demo state. After that, by executing the function "NOP: 300", the standby state is set for 300 frames (10 seconds). After the standby state ends, the function "COMMANDO" issues the command "COM_STS_KDEMO" to transition to the next internal state, and stops the scheduler.

The command "COM_STS_KDEMO" is processed by the "main command analysis process", and the state model demo scheduler data "SCH_STS_KDEMO" corresponding to the next sub-internal state is executed.

Subsequently, when the state maker demo scheduler data "SCH_STS_KDEMO" is executed using the sub-state scheduler "SUB_SCH", the function "KPLAY: PTA_LAMP_KDEMO" is executed. As a result, the lamp lighting is started based on the lamp lighting pattern "PTA_LAMP_KDEMO" in the model demo state. After that, by executing the function "NOP: 900", the standby state is set for 900 frames (30 seconds). After the standby state ends, the function "COMMANDO" issues a command "COM_STS_GOTO" to transition to the next internal state, and stops the scheduler.

The command "COM_STS_KDEMO" is processed by the "main command analysis process", and the state goto prevention scheduler data "SCH_STS_GOTO" corresponding to the next sub-internal state is executed.

Subsequently, when the state goto prevention scheduler data "SCH_STS_GOTO" is executed using the sub-state scheduler "SUB_SCH", the function "KPLAY: PTA_LAMP_GOTO" is executed. As a result, the lighting of the lamp is started based on the lighting pattern of the lamp data "PTA_LAMP_GOTO" in the anti-goto state. Further, by executing the function "SPLAY: PTA_SND_GOTO", sound reproduction is started based on the sound data "PTA_SND_GOTO" in the anti-goto state. After that, by executing the function "NOP: 450", the standby state is set for 450 frames (15 seconds). After the standby state ends, the function "COMMANDO" issues a command "COM_STS_TAIKI" that transitions to the next internal state, and stops the scheduler.

The command "COM_STS_TAIKI" is processed by the "main command analysis process", and the state standby scheduler data "SCH_STS_TAKI" corresponding to the next sub-internal state is executed. The gaming machine is in a playable state at this stage, and loops in this standby state until the game is started and the gaming ball wins a prize.

As described above, in the present embodiment, it is possible to set the internal state of the peripheral control board 1510 only by receiving the power-on command transmitted from the main control board. Specifically, the function "COMMAND0" can be controlled as if the main control board 1310 issued a command. For example, the initialization command at power-on may have a fixed parameter value, and is transmitted from the main control board 1310 by outputting the command with the function "COMMAND0" instead of the main command from the main control board 1310. It is possible to reduce the number of main commands. This makes it possible to reduce the capacity of the game control program of the main control board 1310, which is particularly effective when the capacity of the game control program is limited.

[18-9. Application example of scheduler data (effect 2)]
Next, an example of executing the hatchet accessory fall notice instead of the button cut-in notice and the button logo accessory fall notice will be described. The hatchet fall notice is divided into the first half and the second half, and the first half notice and the second half notice are executed in cooperation with each other. At this time, the control different from the control described so far is performed in that the parameters used for the first half notice are taken over to the second half notice.

[18-9-1. Outline of production]
FIG. 332 is a diagram showing an example of a notice effect in a series of variation display from the start to the stop of the variation of the special symbol in the present embodiment, and FIG. 332 is an effect executed from the start to the end of the variation and the effect. The scheduler data for executing the effect and the scheduler to be executed are shown, and (B) is a diagram for explaining the position of the hatchet accessory 5003 in the hatchet accessory fall notice.

In the series of fluctuation displays shown in FIG. 332 (A), the step-up notice and the button (BTN) hatchet first half fall notice, which is the first half of the hatchet fall notice, are executed in the first half of the fluctuation. After that, a reach occurs, a group notice is executed in the latter half of the fluctuation, and a hatchet character second half fall notice is executed following the button hatchet character first half fall notice that has been continued from the first half. In each notice effect, scheduler data for controlling lighting of a lamp, sound output, image output, operation of an accessory, and the like is executed. The content of the step-up notice is as described above.

Next, the contents of the hatchet fall notice will be described with reference to FIG. 332 (B). As described above, the hatchet fall notice is divided into a button (BTN) hatchet first half fall notice and a hatchet second half fall notice.

In the first half of the button hatchet accessory fall notice, which is the first half, the notice effect proceeds by operating the effect button. Therefore, even if the execution lottery for the first half of the button hatchet accessory fall notice is won, the drop effect of the hatchet accessory 5003 is not executed unless the effect button is operated. On the other hand, in the latter half of the hatchet accessory fall notice, the effect is executed based on the result of the execution lottery of the hatchet accessory second half fall notice, regardless of the operation of the effect button.

When the execution lottery for the first half of the button hatchet accessory fall notice is won and the effect button is operated at a predetermined timing, the hatchet accessory 5003 falls to the middle position. Further, if the hatchet accessory 5003 is dropped to the middle position and the execution lottery for the second half fall notice of the hatchet accessory is won, the hatchet accessory 5003 is dropped to the lower position. That is, the hatchet accessory 5003 falls from the upper part (upper stage position, initial position) to the center (middle stage position) in the first half of the hatchet accessory fall notice, and falls to the lower part (lower stage position) in the latter half. In addition, if the execution lottery of the hatchet accessory second half fall notice is won, the hatchet accessory 5003 will fall to the lower part regardless of the position. Further, when the hatchet accessory fall notice is completed, the hatchet accessory 5003 returns to the upper part (initial position).

Therefore, as shown in FIG. 332 (B), the hatchet accessory fall notice is produced in six different patterns. Specifically, if the result of the lottery for executing the first half of the button hatchet fall notice is non-winning, it does not depend on the operation of the production button, so that the second half of the hatchet role fall notice is not won (Pattern 1). And there is a case of winning (Pattern 2). In the case of the pattern 1, since the button hatchet accessory first half fall notice and the hatchet accessory second half fall notice are not won, the hatchet accessory 5003 does not fall and is maintained without moving from the upper part. In the case of pattern 2, the hatchet accessory 5003 is located at the upper part without falling in the hatchet accessory fall notice, while the hatchet accessory 5003 is located from the top to the bottom because the execution lottery was won in the hatchet accessory second half fall notice. It falls at a stretch.

Execution of the button hatchet first half fall notice When the lottery is won, the effect mode of the button hatchet first half fall notice differs depending on whether or not the effect button is operated. Therefore, the hatchet accessory fall notice can be executed in four patterns depending on whether or not the effect button is operated and the result of the execution lottery for the hatchet accessory fall notice.

If you win the execution lottery for the first half of the button hatchet and do not operate the production button, and if the result of the execution lottery for the second half of the hatchet is not won, the hatchet 5003 will not fall. It remains located at the top (Pattern 3). If the result of the execution lottery for the first half of the button hatchet accessory fall notice is won and the effect button is operated, and the result of the execution lottery for the second half of the hatchet accessory fall notice is not won, the hatchet accessory 5003 is operated when the effect button is operated. Drops from the top to the middle and remains in the middle until the hatchet fall notice ends (Pattern 4).

If you win the execution lottery for the first half of the button hatchet and do not operate the production button, and if you win the lottery for the second half of the hatchet fall notice, you have not operated the production button, so the hatchet role The hatchet accessory 5003 is located at the upper part without falling until the second half fall notice of the object is started, and falls from the upper part to the lower part in the second half fall notice of the hatchet accessory (pattern 5). If you win the execution lottery for the first half of the button hatchet, operate the production button, and then win the execution lottery for the second half of the hatchet, the hatchet 5003 will start from the top when you operate the production button. It falls to the middle, and further falls from the top to the bottom in the notice of the fall of the hatchet in the second half (Pattern 6).

As described above, in the hatchet accessory fall notice of the present embodiment, six patterns of effect modes can appear, and the scheduler data for controlling the operation of the hatchet accessory 5003 in the hatchet accessory fall notice will be described below. Specifically, in the button hatchet first half fall notice shown in FIG. 332 (A), the button hatchet first half fall notice motor scheduler data "SCH_MOT_YKK_NTA1" that controls the operation of the hatchet accessory 5003 and the hatchet accessory second half The latter half of the hatchet accessory fall advance notice motor scheduler data "SCH_MOT_YKK_NTA2" that controls the operation of the hatchet accessory 5003 in the fall notice will be described.

[18-9-2. Various controls for hatchet fall notice]
FIG. 333 is a diagram for explaining the contents of the button hatchet first half fall notice scheduler data “SCH_MOT_YKK_NTA1” that controls the motor in the button hatchet first half fall notice, which is the first half of the hatchet accessory fall notice of the present embodiment. .. As described above, when the execution lottery of the first half fall notice of the button hatchet accessory is won, the operation of the effect button is accepted for 3 seconds by the function "LOOP", and the hatchet accessory 5003 is operated when the effect button is operated. Perform the production to make. Execution of the first half of the button hatchet accessory fall notice If the lottery is not won, and the effect button is not operated even if the lottery is won, the hatchet accessory 5003 ends without operating. The motor scheduler "MOT_SCH01" is used to execute the scheduler data "SCH_MOT_YKK_NTA1" for the first half of the button hatchet.

When the scheduler data "SCH_MOT_YKK_NTA1" is started, first, the function "COMMAND: COM_NTA1_STA" is executed, and the drawing of the effect when the hatchet accessory 5003 is rattled on the game board side effect display device 1600 is started. After that, the function "MPLAY: PTA_NTA_GAT" is executed, and then the weight processing "NOP: 30" for 30 frames (about 1 second) is executed. As a result, the designated operation is performed for 1 second based on the operation pattern data "PTA_NTA_GAT". Specifically, the hatchet accessory 5003 rattles.

Subsequently, a loop process for 3 seconds is executed in order to receive the input of the effect button from the player. Specifically, the function "LOOPST" is executed with the number of parameter loops set to 90. As described above, in the loop processing, the function between "LOOPST" and "LOOP" is repeatedly executed. Therefore, the function "SUBC: YKK_NTA1: TBL_YKK_NTA1" is executed up to 90 times.

Explaining the function "SUBC: YKK_NTA1: TBL_YKK_NTA1", the scheduler work area index branch call "SUBC" uses the target scheduler work number "YKK_NTA1" and the button hatchet first half fall notice lottery result branch call address table "TBL_YKK_NTA1" as parameters. Will be executed.

The scheduler execution unit 5060 refers to the button hatchet first half fall notice lottery result branch call address table "TBL_YKK_NTA1", and based on the contents of the button hatchet first half fall notice work area "YKK_NTA1", the scheduler data to be the branch destination. Identify the start address of. Button hatchet first half fall notice The work area "YKK_NTA1" stores the result of the execution lottery for the button hatchet first half fall notice, and if the lottery for the button hatchet first half fall notice is not won, "0:: "Non-winning", "1st half of the hatchet character fall notice execution" is set when the lottery is won. Execution of the button hatchet first half fall notice The result of the lottery corresponds to the index (address) of each record of the button hatchet first half fall notice lottery result branch call address table "TBL_YKK_NTA1".

Button hatchet first half fall notice When "0: Non-winning" is set in the work area "YKK_NTA1", the button hatchet first half fall notice lottery result branch call address table "TBL_YKK_NTA1" The motor scheduler data "SUBC_YKK_NTA1_NON" is selected when the first half fall notice is not executed. The content of the scheduler data "SUBC_YKK_NTA1_NON" is only the function "STOP", and the result of the button hatchet first half fall notice lottery is "non-winning". End the execution of.

On the other hand, when "1: Hatchet first half fall notice execution" is set in the button hatchet first half fall notice work area "YKK_NTA1", that is, when the button hatchet first half fall notice execution lottery is won. , Button hatchet first half fall notice Lottery result In the branch call table "TBL_YKK_NTA1", the motor scheduler data "SUBC_YKK_NTA1_DOWN" at the time of executing the hatchet fall notice is selected. The content of the scheduler data "SUBC_YKK_NTA1_DOWN" is the function "SUBC: YKK_BTN: TBL_MOT_NTA1", and the scheduler work area index branch call "SUBC" is the target scheduler work number "YKK_BTN" and the button hatchet first half drop notice button branch address. It is executed with the table "TBL_MOT_NTA1" as a parameter.

The scheduler execution unit 5060 refers to the button branch call address table "TBL_MOT_NTA1" for the first half of the button hatchet, and specifies the start address of the scheduler data to be the branch destination based on the contents of the button ON_OFF work area "YKK_BTN". .. As in the case of the button cut-in notice and the button logo accessory fall notice, the operation state of the effect button is stored in the button ON_OFF work area "YKK_BTN", and when the effect button is not operated, "0: button OFF". , "1: Button ON" is set when the effect button is operated. The operation state of the effect button corresponds to the index (address) of each record of the button hatchet first half fall notice branch call address table "TBL_MOT_NTA1".

Button ON_OFF While "0: Button OFF" is set in the work area "YKK_BTN", the button hatchet first half fall notice button branch call address table "TBL_MOT_NTA1", the button hatchet first half fall notice Button OFF motor scheduler The data "SUBC_MOT_NTA1_BTNOFF" is selected. The content of the scheduler data "SUBC_MOT_NTA1_BTNOFF" is only the function "RET", and returns immediately after the function "SUBC: YKK_BTN: TBL_MOT_NTA1" of the calling scheduler data "SUBC_YKK_NTA1_DOWN" (function "RET"). This further returns to the function "LOOP" of the scheduler data "SCH_MOT_YKK_NTA1". Therefore, even if the execution lottery for the first half fall notice of the button hatchet is won, if the input of the effect button is not detected during the 90 loop processing, the function "STOP" is exited from the loop processing. Is executed, and the scheduler data "SCH_MOT_YKK_NTA1" ends.

On the other hand, when "1: Button ON" is set in the button ON_OFF work area "YKK_BTN", the button hatchet first half fall notice button is turned ON in the button branch call address table "TBL_MOT_NTA1". The hour motor scheduler data "SUBC_MOT_NTA1_BTNON" is selected. As for the contents of the scheduler data "SUBC_MOT_NTA1_BTNON", first, the function "COMMAND: COM_NTA_STA-MID" is executed, and the command "COM_NTA_STA-MID" is issued. The command "COM_NTA_STA-MID" is a command for causing the game board side effect display device 1600 to start drawing the effect when the hatchet is dropped, and is issued to the effect control unit 5020.

Further, the scheduler execution unit 5060 executes the function "MPLAY: PTA_NTA_STA-MID" within the same frame as the issuance of the command "COM_NTA_STA-MID". The parameter "PTA_NTA_STA-MID" is pattern data for performing an operation of dropping the hatchet 5003 to an intermediate position. Further, the function "NOP: 120" executes weight processing for 120 frames (about 4 seconds), during which the hatchet 5003 falls to an intermediate position.

Finally, by executing the function "MEMW: SCH_MEM_NTA: 1", "1" is written in the hatchet position information work area "SCH_MEM_NTA" for the scheduler, and it is recorded that the hatchet accessory 5003 has moved to the intermediate position. After that, the execution of the scheduler data "SCH_MOT_YKK_NTA1" is terminated by the function "STOP".

Button, which is the first half of the hatchet character fall notice When the hatchet character first half fall notice is completed, the hatchet character second half fall notice, which is the second half, is started. 334 and 335 are diagrams for explaining the contents of the hatchet second half fall notice scheduler data "SCH_MOT_YKK_NTA2" that controls the motor in the hatchet second half fall notice, which is the latter half of the hatchet fall notice of the present embodiment. be. The motor scheduler "MOT_SCH01" is used to execute the hatchet character second half fall notice scheduler data "SCH_MOT_YKK_NTA2" in the same manner as the button hatchet character first half fall notice scheduler data "SCH_MOT_YKK_NTA1".

When the scheduler data "SCH_MOT_YKK_NTA2" is started, first, the function "COMMAND: COM_NTA2_STA" is executed to start drawing an effect suggesting whether or not the hatchet 5003 will fall on the game board side effect display device 1600. .. After that, the weight processing "NOP: 90" of 90 frames (about 3 seconds) is executed. Since the expectation of a big hit increases when the hatchet 5003 falls, the player's expectation is increased by drawing the effect for 3 seconds.

Subsequently, the scheduler execution unit 5060 executes the function "SUBC: YKK_NTA2: TBL_YKK_NTA2". In the function "SUBC: YKK_NTA2: TBL_YKK_NTA2", the scheduler work area index branch call "SUBC" is executed with the target scheduler work number "YKK_NTA2" and the hatchet second half fall notice lottery result branch call address table "TBL_YKK_NTA2" as parameters. ..

The scheduler execution unit 5060 refers to the hatchet second half fall notice lottery result branch call address table "TBL_YKK_NTA2", and based on the contents of the hatchet second half fall notice 2 work area "YKK_NTA2", the scheduler data to be the branch destination. Identify the start address. The result of the execution lottery for the hatchet second half fall notice is stored in the work area "YKK_NTA2". If the lottery is won, "1: Execution of the hatchet second half fall notice" is set. The result of the execution lottery for the hatchet second half fall notice corresponds to the index (address) of each record of the hatchet second half fall notice lottery result branch call address table "TBL_YKK_NTA2".

Hatchet second half fall notice 2 When "0: Non-winning" is set in the work area "YKK_NTA2", the hatchet second half fall notice lottery result branch call address table "TBL_YKK_NTA2", the hatchet second half fall When the notice is not executed, the motor scheduler data "SUBC_YKK_NTA2_NON" is selected. In the scheduler data "SUBC_YKK_NTA2_NON", the function "SUBC: SCH_MEM_NTA: TBL_YKK_NTA2NON" is executed, and the value of the hatchet position information work area "SCH_MEM_NTA" for the scheduler and the hatchet second half fall notice lottery result Branch based on.

When "0: Initial position" is set in the hatchet position information work area "SCH_MEM_NTA" for the scheduler, the hatchet second half fall notice is not announced in the branch call address table "TBL_YKK_NTA2NON". The run-time motor scheduler data "SUBC_MOT_NTA1_NON_NTA2_NON" is selected. In the scheduler data "SUBC_MOT_NTA1_NON_NTA2_NON", the function "RET" is executed to return to the scheduler data "SCH_MOT_YKK_NTA2".

When "0: initial position" is set, the motor scheduler data "SUBC_MOT_NTA1_NON_NTA2_NON" is selected when the hatchet second half fall notice is not executed in the branch call address table "TBL_YKK_NTA2NON". NS. In the scheduler data "SUBC_MOT_NTA1_NON_NTA2_NON", the function "RET" is executed to return to the scheduler data "SCH_MOT_YKK_NTA2". After that, the value of the hatchet position information work area "SCH_MEM_NTA" for the scheduler is overwritten with "0: initial position", and the scheduler data "SCH_MOT_YKK_NTA2" is terminated.

On the other hand, when "1: Intermediate position" is set in the hatchet position information work area "SCH_MEM_NTA" for the scheduler, the hatchet second half drop notice lottery result branch call address table "TBL_YKK_NTA2NON" shows the hatchet first half drop. The motor scheduler data "SUBC_MOT_NTA1_DOWN_NTA2_NON" is selected when the advance notice is executed and the second half fall notice is not won.

In the motor scheduler data "SUBC_MOT_NTA1_DOWN_NTA2_NON" when the hatchet first half fall notice is executed and the second half fall notice is not won, the weight process "NOP: 120" of 120 frames (about 4 seconds) is first executed. In the weight processing executed here, as will be described later, when the hatchet accessory 5003 is in the lower position, it becomes a waiting time for returning to the intermediate position. Here, since the hatchet accessory 5003 is originally in the intermediate position, it waits for 4 seconds.

After the weight processing is completed, the function "MPLAY: PTA_NTA_INIT_MID-TOP" is executed to return the hatchet 5003 from the intermediate position to the initial position. Further, in order to secure the operation time of the hatchet 5003, the weight processing "NOP: 120" of 120 frames (about 4 seconds) is executed, and the scheduler data "SCH_MOT_YKK_NTA2" is restored by the function "RET".

In addition, when "1: hatchet second half fall notice" is set in the hatchet second half fall notice 2 work area "YKK_NTA2", the hatchet second half fall notice lottery result branch call address table "TBL_YKK_NTA2" Motor scheduler data "SUBC_YKK_NTA2_DOWN" is selected at the time of winning the second half fall notice of the accessory. In the scheduler data "SUBC_YKK_NTA2_DOWN", the function "SUBC: SCH_MEM_NTA: TBL_YKK_NTA2DOWN" is executed, and the value of the hatchet position information work area "SCH_MEM_NTA" for the scheduler and the value of the hatchet position information work area "SCH_MEM_NTA" and the hatchet fall notice 2 branch call address table "TBL_ ..

When "0: Initial position" is set in the hatchet position information work area "SCH_MEM_NTA" for the scheduler, the hatchet second half fall notice lottery result branch call address table "TBL_YKK_NTA2DOWN" has not been announced. Execution / Second half drop notice At the time of winning, the motor scheduler data "SUBC_MOT_NTA1_NON_NTA2_DOWN" is selected.

In the scheduler data "SUBC_MOT_NTA1_NON_NTA2_DOWN" (FIG. 335), first, the function "COMMAND: COM_NTA_STA-END" is executed and the command "COM_NTA_STA-END" is issued. The command "COM_NTA_STA-END" is a command for starting the drawing of the effect that the hatchet 5003 falls from the initial position to the lower position on the game board side effect display device 1600.

Further, the scheduler execution unit 5060 executes the function "MPLAY: PTA_NTA_STA-END" within the same frame as the issuance of the command "COM_NTA_STA-END". The parameter "PTA_NTA_STA-END" is pattern data for performing an operation of dropping the hatchet 5003 to the lower position. Further, the function "NOP: 240" executes a weight process of 240 frames (about 8 seconds), during which the hatchet 5003 is dropped from the initial position to the lower position.

Then, at the timing when the hatchet 5003 moves to the lower position, the function "COMMAND: COM_NTA_END" is executed and the command "COM_NTA_END" is issued. The command "COM_NTA_END" is a command for starting the drawing of the effect that the hatchet 5003 has reached the lower position on the game board side effect display device 1600. Further, the function "NOP: 90" executes weight processing for 90 frames (about 3 seconds), and continues drawing the effect on the game board side effect display device 1600.

After that, the function "MPLAY: PTA_NTA_INIT_END-MID" is executed. The parameter "PTA_NTA_INIT_END-MID" is pattern data for performing an operation of returning the hatchet 5003 from the lower position to the intermediate position.

Subsequently, the function "CALL: SUBC_MOT_NTA1_DOWN_NTA2_NON" is executed, and the scheduler data "SUBC_MOT_NTA1_DOWN_NTA2_NON" described above is called to return the hatchet 5003 from the middle position to the initial position. After that, the function "RET" returns to the scheduler data "SCH_MOT_YKK_NTA2".

On the other hand, when "1: Intermediate position" is set in the hatchet position information work area "SCH_MEM_NTA" for the scheduler, the hatchet second half drop notice lottery result branch call address table "TBL_YKK_NTA2DOWN" shows the hatchet first half drop. Notice execution / second half fall notice At the time of winning, the motor scheduler data "SUBC_MOT_NTA1_DOWN_NTA2_DOWN" is selected.

In the scheduler data "SUBC_MOT_NTA1_DOWN_NTA2_DOWN" (FIG. 335), first, the function "COMMAND: COM_NTA_MID-END" is executed and the command "COM_NTA_MID-END" is issued. The command "COM_NTA_MID-END" is a command for starting the drawing of the effect that the hatchet 5003 falls from the intermediate position to the lower position on the game board side effect display device 1600.

Further, the scheduler execution unit 5060 executes the function "MPLAY: PTA_NTA_STA-END" within the same frame as the issuance of the command "COM_NTA_STA-END". The parameter "PTA_NTA_STA-END" is pattern data for performing an operation of dropping the hatchet 5003 to the lower position. Further, the function "NOP: 120" executes weight processing for 120 frames (about 4 seconds), during which the hatchet 5003 is dropped from the intermediate position to the lower position.

Then, at the timing when the hatchet 5003 moves to the lower position, the function "COMMAND: COM_NTA_END" is executed and the command "COM_NTA_END" is issued. The command "COM_NTA_END" is a command for starting the drawing of the effect that the hatchet 5003 has reached the lower position on the game board side effect display device 1600. Further, the function "NOP: 90" executes weight processing for 90 frames (about 3 seconds), and continues drawing the effect on the game board side effect display device 1600.

Here, in order to match the timing when the hatchet accessory 5003 falls from the initial position to the lower position and the operation to start the operation of returning the hatchet accessory 5003 to the initial position, 120 frames (about 120 frames) are used by the function "NOP: 120". Weight processing for 4 seconds) is executed. This time is the time until the hatchet accessory 5003 moves from the initial position to the intermediate position.

After that, the function "MPLAY: PTA_NTA_INIT_END-MID" is executed in the same manner as in the case of "SUBC_MOT_NTA1_NON_NTA2_DOWN" to return the hatchet 5003 from the lower position to the intermediate position. Further, the function "CALL: SUBC_MOT_NTA1_DOWN_NTA2_NON" is executed to return the hatchet 5003 from the middle position to the initial position. After that, the function "RET" returns to the scheduler data "SCH_MOT_YKK_NTA2".

When the hatchet 5003 returns to the initial position and returns to the scheduler data "SCH_MOT_YKK_NTA2", the function "MEMW: SCH_MEM_NTA: 0" is executed, and the value of the hatchet position information work area "SCH_MEM_NTA" for the scheduler is set to "0: initial position". And terminates the scheduler data "SCH_MOT_YKK_NTA2".

In the hatchet fall notice, the scheduler data is divided into the first half and the second half, and the operation of the hatchet 5003 in the second half differs depending on whether or not the player operates the effect button in the first half. Therefore, it is possible to specify the position of the hatchet accessory 5003 by writing the position of the hatchet accessory 5003 using the function "MEMW" in the first half and acquiring the position information written in the second half. .. As a result, the amount of movement of the motor can be determined for each position of the hatchet accessory 5003, and it is possible to execute the effect according to the operation result of the effect button by calling the corresponding scheduler data.

Further, even in the return operation to the initial position after the operation of the hatchet 5003, the common scheduler data is called by moving from the intermediate position to the initial position, so that the entire scheduler data can be simplified.

The function "MEMW" can refer to a common value by writing a fixed value in a predetermined area when executing the scheduler data and referencing it when executing other scheduler data. As a result, it is possible to specify a value indicating a state that changes due to the execution of a plurality of scheduler data at the time of executing each scheduler data. The process can be completed only by defining the scheduler data without creating scheduler data in. As a result, even if the scheduler data requires different processing depending on the state, the required number can be suppressed to the minimum, the creation and debugging of the scheduler data can be made more efficient, and the management can be facilitated. Further, in the present embodiment, the function is to write a fixed value, but by specifying the work name as a function parameter instead of the fixed value, data can be passed from the program side and processing based on command information can be performed. Can be performed on the scheduler, and more complicated processing can be performed on the scheduler. A peculiar feature of the function "MEMW" is that even information that has not been determined at the start of execution of scheduler data including the function "MEMW" can be processed if the information is determined by the time the function "MEMW" is executed. This enables control of the effective time and interactive control.

[18-10. Scheduler data configuration example (variation pattern)]
The flow of executing a series of advance notice effects has been described above. The execution content of such a series of advance notice effects is drawn by lottery based on the variation pattern command transmitted from the main control board 1310. Furthermore, specific production contents are drawn for each notice production.

Hereinafter, the procedure for controlling the execution of a series of advance notice effects based on the variation pattern command transmitted from the main control board 1310, and the basic effects related to these series of advance notice effects and variation patterns (regardless of the lottery other than the advance notice effects). The structure of the scheduler data for executing the background effect and the effect related to the pattern effect, which are produced and are one-to-one with the variable pattern, will be described.

In the present embodiment, the period from the start of the change of the special symbol to the stop of the change is managed in block units (effect sections) divided into predetermined constituent units. The block is, for example, from the start of the symbol fluctuation to the occurrence of reach, or until the symbol stops when no reach occurs (first half fluctuation), and from the occurrence of reach to the stop of the symbol (second half fluctuation). ), From the stop of the symbol to the end of the change. In addition, a time corresponding to the fluctuation pattern is assigned to each block, and the execution timing and execution time of the advance notice effect within the allotted time are defined. The time corresponding to each block and the data related to the basic effect to be executed are combined to form block data.

In addition, the block division rule divides the same basic effect part as common block data and the part with a difference in the basic effect of the liquid crystal display as block data when comparing the basic effects related to fluctuations in a plurality of fluctuation patterns. do. With reference to FIG. 336A, in the liquid crystal display block data combination number table (LCD_CTL_BLOCKDATA_NO) for each fluctuation pattern that stores the combination of the liquid crystal effect block data corresponding to the fluctuation pattern command in the present embodiment, the fluctuation pattern "10H01H" is normally changed for 6 seconds. It is a loss, and the normal fluctuation is performed for 6 seconds, and then the design of the loss is produced. Since the 6-second effect of normal fluctuation and the loss stop effect are also used in other fluctuation patterns, they are divided into the 6-second liquid crystal effect block data (LCD01_BLK) of normal fluctuation and the liquid crystal effect block data (LCD02_BLK) of stop loss.

The fluctuation pattern "10H02H" is a normal fluctuation of 12 seconds, and the normal fluctuation is performed for 12 seconds, and then the design of the loss is produced. Since the 12-second effect of normal fluctuation is also used for other fluctuation patterns, it is divided as the 12-second liquid crystal display block data (LCD03_BLK) of normal fluctuation, and the pattern effect of loss is exactly the same as the variation pattern "10H01H". As the liquid crystal display block data for stopping the loss, the liquid crystal display block data (LCD02_BLK) for stopping the loss, which is divided into liquid crystal display blocks according to the fluctuation pattern "10H01H", is commonly used. Similarly, for other fluctuation patterns, the parts that have already been converted into block data for the basic effect are used in common, and the parts that are different are newly converted into block data.

As described above, by blocking, the common basic effect part becomes a unique number of block data, and for all fluctuation patterns and basic effects such as jackpots other than fluctuations, by combining unique LCD effect block data. , It is possible to realize basic effects such as all fluctuation patterns and jackpots other than fluctuations. It is also important that the total amount of production data to be created is significantly reduced, but the main purpose of blocking is a liquid crystal display that includes a specific basic effect when there is a change in a specific basic effect. The change is reflected in all fluctuation patterns that use block data.

Regarding the liquid crystal display in this embodiment, since the VDP1540a with a built-in sound source is controlled, the format and function are completely different from the scheduler data of sound, lamp, and accessory in this embodiment, but the basics are for each block data. The configuration in which the drawing scheduler data for the effect and the drawing scheduler data for the advance notice effect are combined is the same as the sub-effect block data that controls the sound, the lamp, the accessory, and the like. In addition, the drawing scheduler data for liquid crystal display includes frame information, still image and video material IDs, display position information, enlargement / reduction information, rotation angle information, and colors related to the effects related to pictures and movies displayed in the background and patterns. It is composed of functions that can specify control information for generating a display list command for the VDP1540a with a built-in sound source, such as information and alpha information, and also indicates the type and execution timing of the effect related to the advance notice effect that occurs in the block data. Information to be shown is embedded.

Further, in the present embodiment, the block data for variablely displaying the identification symbol on the liquid crystal display device is defined as the liquid crystal symbol block data separately from the block data for performing other liquid crystal effects. This makes it possible to make the control for variable display of the identification symbol independent of the control of other liquid crystal displays. For example, even when the shape of the identification symbol is differently displayed in a variable manner, a common notice effect can be obtained. It can be executed on a liquid crystal display device. The drawing scheduler data for displaying the symbol has the same format and function as the drawing scheduler data for the liquid crystal display. Further, the configuration in which the drawing scheduler data for the basic effect and the drawing scheduler data for the advance notice effect related to the design are combined for each block data has the same configuration as the sub-effect block data and the liquid crystal effect block data described above. The drawing scheduler data for symbol display has the same configuration and function as the drawing scheduler data for liquid crystal display, and in addition, information for specifying the mode of variable display of the identification symbol is embedded.

FIG. 336A is a diagram illustrating a liquid crystal display effect block data combination number table (LCD_CTL_BLOCKDATA_NO) for each variation pattern, which stores combinations of liquid crystal effect block data corresponding to the variation pattern command in the present embodiment. FIG. 336B is a diagram illustrating a liquid crystal symbol block data combination number (ZUG_CTL_BLOCKDATA_NO) for each variable pattern that stores a combination of liquid crystal symbol block data corresponding to the variable pattern command in the present embodiment. FIG. 337 is a diagram illustrating a variation pattern-specific sub-effect block data combination number table (SCH_CTL_BLOCKDATA_NO) that stores combinations of sub-effect block data corresponding to the variation pattern command in the present embodiment.

The liquid crystal display block data combination number table (LCD_CTL_BLOCKDATA_NO) for each fluctuation pattern is a table that holds information indicating a combination of liquid crystal effect block data for each fluctuation pattern. For example, with respect to the variable pattern number, unique numbers that specify the constituent liquid crystal display block data are held in chronological order. For example, when the fluctuation pattern number is "10H03H", it is composed of "LCD03_BLK" indicating a normal fluctuation for 12 seconds in the first half fluctuation, "LCD04_BLK" indicating a normal short reach in the second half fluctuation, and "LCD02_BLK" indicating a stoppage. Will be done. At this time, "LCD03_BLK", "LCD04_BLK", and "LCD02_BLK" are stored in this order. In this way, the configurations of the basic effect and the advance notice effect can be defined (realized) by connecting the liquid crystal effect block data for each variation pattern.

Further, as shown in FIG. 435, the same liquid crystal display block data is used in the same effect section. For example, when the first half fluctuation is a normal fluctuation of 12 seconds, "LCD03_BLK" is used regardless of the content of the advance notice effect actually executed. As a result, the number of liquid crystal display block data can be realized by a unique number corresponding to the type of fluctuation, and the liquid crystal display block data can be uniquely specified for each fluctuation pattern.

As shown in FIG. 336B, the LCD symbol block data combination number table for each variation pattern (ZUG_CTL_BLOCKDATA_NO) holds information indicating the combination of block data for each variation pattern, similarly to the LCD effect block data combination number table for each variation pattern. .. Further, the sub-effect block data corresponding to the variation pattern number is defined with a configuration (same combination, same effect time) corresponding to the liquid crystal effect block data of the same variation pattern number on a one-to-one basis.

Further, as shown in FIG. 337, the sub-effect block data combination number table (SCH_CTL_BLOCKDATA_NO) for each fluctuation pattern provides information indicating the combination of block data for each fluctuation pattern, similarly to the liquid crystal display block data combination number table for each fluctuation pattern. Hold. Further, the sub-effect block data corresponding to the variation pattern number is defined with a configuration (same combination, same effect time) corresponding to the liquid crystal display block data and the liquid crystal symbol block data having the same variation pattern number on a one-to-one basis.

Next, the procedure for executing the advance notice effect based on the scheduler data corresponding to the fluctuation pattern will be described. Here, the execution procedure of the basic effect and the advance notice effect based on the effect scheduler data corresponding to the fluctuation pattern “10H03H” will be described. First, the outline of the procedure for executing the effect control based on the liquid crystal effect block data, the effect control based on the liquid crystal symbol block data, and the effect control based on the sub effect block data will be described. FIG. 338 is a diagram illustrating an outline of effect control of the first half variation (normal variation 12 seconds) of the variation pattern “10H03H” in the present embodiment.

When the fluctuation pattern command (main fluctuation-related command) "10H03H" is received from the main control board 1310, the fluctuation pattern number "10H03H" is specified by analyzing the command received by the command analysis module 5200, and the effect control unit 5020 is notified. Notice.

As described with reference to FIG. 314A, the effect control unit 5020 determines the layer to be used, determines the block data number corresponding to the layer, and sets each variation pattern number “10H03H” based on the determined block number. The corresponding block data number is acquired from the liquid crystal effect block data combination number table (LCD_CTL_BLOCKDATA_NO) for each variation pattern, the liquid crystal symbol block data combination number table (ZUG_CTL_BLOCKDATA_NO) for each variation pattern, and the sub-effect block data combination number table (SCH_CTL_BLOCKDATA_NO) for each variation pattern. do. By setting all the block data numbers corresponding to each effect device to the same number, it is possible to execute all the effects of each effect device in synchronization.

Then, the effect control unit 5020 transmits block data numbers for the total number of layers to the liquid crystal display block control unit 5310, the liquid crystal symbol block control unit 5311, and the sub-effect block control unit 5320.

After that, the liquid crystal effect block control unit 5310 is the liquid crystal effect 1f drawing scheduler execution unit 5331, the liquid crystal symbol block control unit 5311 is the liquid crystal symbol 1f drawing scheduler execution unit 5332, and the sub effect block control unit 5320 is the sub effect 1f (1 ms) scheduler execution unit. According to 5333 (5334), the block data corresponding to the transmitted block data number is executed in chronological order. Specifically, the liquid crystal effect 1f drawing scheduler execution unit 5331 has a normal fluctuation 12-second liquid crystal effect block data "LCD03_BLK" corresponding to the first half fluctuation, and the liquid crystal symbol 1f drawing scheduler execution unit 5332 has a normal fluctuation 12-second liquid crystal symbol block data "ZUG03_BLK". , The sub-effect 1f (1 ms) scheduler execution unit 5333 (5334) executes the normally variable 12-second sub-effect block data "SCH03_BLK".

When the processing of the liquid crystal display block data is started, one or a plurality of liquid crystal display 1f schedulers corresponding to the liquid crystal display block data are activated, and the drawing scheduler data specified according to the effect content is executed. The drawing scheduler data includes liquid crystal function information for displaying an image on the liquid crystal display device, specifies parameters according to the content of the effect, and transmits the liquid crystal function information to the liquid crystal module 5400 in a predetermined order. The liquid crystal module 5400 analyzes and executes the received liquid crystal function information, and transmits a DISPLAY list to the VDP1540a with a built-in sound source to draw a drawing on the liquid crystal display device.

Further, when processing the liquid crystal symbol block data, the liquid crystal symbol 1f scheduler is activated, and the drawing scheduler data according to the variation display mode of the identification symbol is executed. The procedure for drawing on the liquid crystal display device is the same as that for processing the liquid crystal effect block data.

On the other hand, when the processing of the sub-effect block data is started, one or a plurality of sub-effect 1f (1 ms) schedulers corresponding to the sub-effect block data are started, and the scheduler data specified according to the effect content is executed. The scheduler may be prepared according to the execution cycle, or may be shared and the execution cycle may be set at startup.

As described above, the scheduler data includes an effect data designation function for controlling an effect device such as a lamp (“KPLAY”), a speaker (“SPLAY”), and an accessory (“MPLAY”). It is configured to execute the specified effect by sequentially executing the effect data specification functions in the defined order. The effect data designation function is transmitted to modules (lamp module 5600, sound module 5500, drive device (motor) module 5700, etc.) corresponding to the effect device to be controlled, and each module executes the effect by various effect devices.

It is also possible to call other scheduler data from the scheduler data by the function "REF, EQUF". It is possible to control various effect devices by executing the effect data designation function in the scheduler data called at this time. Further, by using the command transmission function "COMMAND" or "COMMAND0", it is possible to control by a command instead of a function. For example, by transmitting a liquid crystal command to the liquid crystal module 5400 at the timing of executing the effect data designation function that controls the operation of the accessory, the operation and drawing of the accessory are linked as in the above-mentioned hatchet accessory fall notice effect. It is possible to execute the effect.

Here, a procedure for executing the effect control using the sub-effect block data will be described. FIG. 339 is a flowchart showing the procedure of the sub-effect block data control start processing for each variation pattern related to the variation pattern layer of the present embodiment.

The effect block control unit 5040 selects a variation pattern layer in the effect control unit 5020 based on the variation pattern number notified from the command analysis module 5200, and changes the control of the block data number for each variation pattern corresponding to the variation pattern. Control is started using the pattern-specific sub-effect block data combination number table (FIG. 337). The row position of the sub-effect block data combination number table for each variation pattern (FIG. 337) is set in the row index of the sub-effect block data combination number table for each variation pattern (step S7001). For example, in the table shown in FIG. 337, if the fluctuation pattern number is "10H01H", "0" is set in the sub-effect block data combination number table row index for each fluctuation pattern, and the fluctuation pattern number is "10H03H". For example, since it is the third row, "2" (row-1) is set in the sub-effect block data combination number table row index for each variation pattern.

Next, the effect block control unit 5040 initializes the sub-effect block data combination number table column index for each variation pattern with “0” (step S7002). It starts from the sub-effect block data corresponding to the first column of the specified row (sub-effect block data combination number table row index for each variation pattern). Finally, the effect block control unit 5040 executes the sub-effect block data control scheduler activation process for each variation pattern by the scheduler execution unit 5060 (step S7003). As a result, the scheduler for executing the sub-effect block data for each fluctuation pattern is started, and the scheduler data included in the sub-effect block data is executed.

FIG. 340 is a flowchart showing the procedure of the sub-effect block data control activation process for each variation pattern of the present embodiment.

First, the scheduler execution unit 5060 acquires the number of the sub-effect block data number table for each variation pattern from the variation pattern sub-effect block data combination number table based on the row and column indexes (step S7011). Further, the sub-effect block data number table row index is initialized with "0" (step S7012). As a result, the processing is started from the first record of the sub-effect block data number table for each variation pattern specified from the sub-effect block data combination number table for each variation pattern.

Subsequently, the scheduler execution unit 5060 activates the scheduler data registered in the sub-effect block data for each variation pattern (step S7013). The scheduler data is registered in the sub-effect block data corresponding to each effect registered in the sub-effect block data number table (FIG. 342 (B)) for each variation pattern. Specifically, based on the sub-effect block data number table row index, the sub-effect block data corresponding to each effect (background sub-effect block data, sub-effect block data corresponding to the notice) is obtained from the sub-effect block data number table. get. One or more scheduler data is registered in the sub-effect block data corresponding to each effect (background sub-effect block data, sub-effect block data corresponding to the notice), and the scheduler corresponding to each scheduler data is defined. ing. When a plurality of scheduler data are registered, one or a plurality of scheduler data are associated with each other based on the lottery result of the advance notice.

Further, the scheduler execution unit 5060 updates the sub-effect block data number table row index when all the scheduler data defined in the sub-effect block data has been started, and the sub-effect block data number table row index has a fluctuation pattern. It is determined whether or not the number of elements in the row of the separate sub-effect block data number table has been exceeded (step S7014). When the number of elements in the row of the sub-effect block data number table for each variation pattern is exceeded (the result of step S7014 is “YES”), the sub-effect block data control activation process is terminated. On the other hand, if the number of sub-effect block data number table row elements for each variation pattern is not exceeded (the result of step S7014 is "NO"), the next sub-effect block data is processed.

FIG. 341 is a flowchart showing the procedure of the sub-effect block data control update process for each variation pattern of the present embodiment. In the sub-effect block data control update process for each fluctuation pattern, the sub-effect block data corresponding to each effect (background sub-effect block data, sub-effect block data corresponding to the notice) constituting the sub-effect block data number table for each fluctuation pattern is included. This is a process for executing the next sub-effect block data for each fluctuation pattern when the execution of all the scheduler data of is completed. The sub-effect block data control update process for each variation pattern is executed periodically, and the execution status of the sub-effect block data for each variation pattern is monitored.

First, the scheduler execution unit 5060 acquires the number of the sub-effect block data number table for each variation pattern from the sub-effect block data combination number table for each variation pattern by using the row and column indexes of the sub-effect block data combination number table for each variation pattern. (Step S7021). As a result, the sub-effect block data corresponding to each effect (background sub-effect block data, sub-effect block data corresponding to the notice) constituting the sub-effect block data number table for each variation pattern is specified and defined in the sub-effect block data. It is determined whether or not the scheduler being executed is being executed (step S7022). If it is being executed (the result of step S7022 is "YES"), the execution of the scheduler is continued as it is, and the sub-effect block data control update process is terminated.

Next, the scheduler execution unit 5060 operates all the schedulers of the sub-effect block data corresponding to each effect (background sub-effect block data, sub-effect block data corresponding to the notice) defined in the sub-effect block data for each variation pattern. When is completed (the result of step S7022 is “NO”), the sub-effect block data combination number table column index for each fluctuation pattern is incremented, and whether or not the next column data is the end data (“DATA_END”). Is determined (step S7023). If it is end data (the result of step S7023 is "YES"), since a series of effects have been completed, the sub-effect block data control update process for each variation pattern is terminated.

On the other hand, when the next column data is not the end data (the result of step S7023 is "NO"), the scheduler execution unit 5060 starts executing the sub-effect block data for each variation pattern corresponding to the next column data. , Sub-effect data block control scheduler activation processing for each fluctuation pattern is executed (step S7024).

As described with reference to FIGS. 336A, 336B, and 337, the sub-effect block data for each variation pattern is defined in association with the liquid crystal effect block data and the liquid crystal symbol block data, and the corresponding block data is executed at the same timing. By making the execution time of each block data the same, it is possible to synchronize the effect control by the drawing scheduler, the effect control by the sub effect scheduler, and the effect control by a plurality of schedulers. In addition, by blocking, if the fluctuation pattern is the same, the number of activations of the effect block and the scheduler defined in the effect block will always be the same regardless of the combination of effects and the appearance of the effect, and the program The complexity of the can be reduced and, as a result, the quality can be improved.

As described above, in the present embodiment, by synchronizing the effect control by one or more drawing schedulers and sub-effect schedulers, it is possible to link the operations of various effect devices, and various effects without discomfort are executed. can do. In addition, since scheduler data having the same execution time can be executed in parallel, scheduler data that controls various production devices should be independently developed and operation confirmed for each production device and block data. Is possible, and development efficiency can be improved.

FIG. 342 is a diagram illustrating a procedure for executing the basic effect and the advance notice effect of the variation display corresponding to the variation pattern “10H03H” of the present embodiment, and FIG. 342 is a diagram showing the timing of executing the basic effect and the advance notice effect and the said. The execution time of the advance notice effect, (B), shows the structure of the sub-effect block data for each fluctuation pattern. The sub-effect block data for each variation pattern includes background sub-effect block data and advance notice sub-effect block data for executing background effect and notice effect. In FIG. 342 (B), two types of sub-effect block data, background block data and advance notice block data, are combined, but the number of sub-effect block data can be varied.

As shown in FIG. 342, the sub-effect block data for each fluctuation pattern constituting the fluctuation display of the fluctuation pattern “10H03H” are “SCH03_BLK” (normal fluctuation 12 seconds), “SCH04_BLK” (normal short reach), and “SCH02_BLK” ( Loss stop). The sub-effect block data "SCH03_BLK" for each fluctuation pattern corresponds to 12 seconds from the start of fluctuation to the stop of the left symbol and the right symbol. The sub-effect block data "SCH04_BLK" for each variation pattern corresponds to the period in which the left symbol and the right symbol stop at the same identification symbol and the normal short reach is executed. The sub-effect block data "SCH02_BLK" for each variation pattern corresponds to the period in which the middle symbol is stopped, the result of the variation display is confirmed as a loss, and the confirmed symbol is displayed.

In the sub-effect block data "SCH03_BLK" for each fluctuation pattern, as shown in FIG. 342 (A), the sub-effect block data related to the step-up notice, the BTN logo accessory fall notice, and the symbol stop notice notice, and the sub-effect related to the background. Block data is defined. Further, in the sub-effect block data "SCH04_BLK", the sub-effect block data of the cut-in notice and the group notice and the sub-effect block data related to the background are defined. Further, in the sub-effect block "SCH02_BLK", the advance notice effect sub-effect block data is not defined, but the sub-effect block data related to the background is defined. In the figure, the execution of the advance notice effect is not duplicated, but a plurality of advance notice block data may be defined and executed so that a plurality of advance notice effects are duplicated. The contents of each notice effect shown in FIG. 342 are as described above.

Hereinafter, the effect control by each sub-effect block data will be described. As shown in FIG. 342 (B), two types of sub-effect block data in the variation display of the variation pattern “10H03H” are executed in parallel. First, the sub-effect block data "SCH03_BLK" for each fluctuation pattern will be described.

As the sub-effect scheduler data related to the background, the background sub-effect block data of 12 seconds of normal fluctuation is defined. The sub-effect scheduler number and the sub-effect scheduler data related to the normal fluctuation 12-second background are defined in the normal fluctuation 12-second background sub-effect block data. Since the background sub-effect block data with a normal fluctuation of 12 seconds is scheduler data related to the background, the effect time is the same as that of the sub-effect block data "SCH03_BLK". Therefore, it is continuously executed until the sub-effect block data "SCH03_BLK" is completed.

The sub-effect scheduler data related to the notice defines the function "NOP", the step-up notice sub-effect block data, the BTN logo accessory fall notice sub-effect block data, and the symbol stop notice sub-effect block data. The function "NOP" serves as a weight for synchronizing with the liquid crystal display scheduler, and is defined to perform a sub-effect according to the liquid crystal display. In the step-up notice sub-effect block data, the sub-effect scheduler number and the sub-effect scheduler data related to the step-up notice are defined. The step-up notice sub-effect block data has the same production time as the step-up notice liquid crystal display block data. The BTN logo accessory fall notice sub-effect block data defines the sub-effect scheduler number and the sub-effect scheduler data related to the BTN logo accessory fall notice. The BTN logo accessory fall notice sub-effect block data has the same production time as the BTN logo accessory fall notice LCD effect block data. As the symbol stop notice sub-effect block data, the sub-effect scheduler number and the sub-effect scheduler data related to the symbol stop notice are defined. The symbol stop notice sub-effect block data has the same effect time as the symbol stop notice LCD effect block data. The sub-effect block data "SCH03_BLK" for each variation pattern is configured by combining and executing the above-mentioned sub-effect block data.

By executing the above sub-effect block data in synchronization with the liquid crystal effect block data, the scheduler data of each sound, lamp, and motor defined in the sub-effect block data is executed in synchronization with the liquid crystal effect. It will be.

At this time, from the start of fluctuation to the start of the first liquid crystal effect block data (step-up notice), the liquid crystal effect block data corresponding to the next liquid crystal notice effect from the end of the liquid crystal effect block data corresponding to each liquid crystal notice effect. Function until the start of "NOP" is executed and waits for the specified time. In this way, by controlling the appearance timing of the sub-effect scheduler data corresponding to each liquid crystal effect block data in the scheduler block for each fluctuation pattern by the function "NOP", the scheduler is sequentially executed at the execution timing of each advance notice effect by a program or the like. If the corresponding scheduler data is started without instructing the execution of the data, it is possible to execute the effect of each effect device corresponding to the liquid crystal notice effect at the designated timing. Further, it is assumed that the last function "NOP" of each scheduler data in the sub-effect block data for each fluctuation pattern does not have to be.

The execution time of the advance notice effect set by the scheduler data that controls the effect device such as the lamp, the sound, and the accessory is defined as a common time for each advance notice effect. As a result, the time from the start of the control by the sub-effect block data to the execution of each advance notice effect is uniquely determined, so that the control timing of each effect device can be synchronized.

Further, the time information at the time of executing the sub-effect block data for each fluctuation pattern is managed as a relative value from the start of executing the sub-effect block data for each fluctuation pattern, not from the start of the fluctuation. As a result, when the same sub-effect block data for each variation pattern is used in a plurality of variation patterns, each effect in the sub-effect block data for each variation pattern has an effect start time from the start of the variation for each variation pattern. Although it will be different, since the time value is relatively managed in the sub-effect block data for each fluctuation pattern, it can be processed without any problem. Similarly, in the case of the liquid crystal effect block data for each fluctuation pattern, the relative value from the start of execution of the liquid crystal effect block data for each fluctuation pattern is managed, and in the case of the liquid crystal symbol block data for each fluctuation pattern, the liquid crystal symbol block for each fluctuation pattern is also similarly managed. It is managed by the relative value from the start of data execution.

Next, the sub-effect block data “SCH04_BLK” for each variation pattern will be described. The sub-effect block data "SCH04_BLK" for each variation pattern corresponds to the normal short reach, but at this time, two types of sub-effect block data are executed in parallel.

Normal short reach background sub-effect block data is defined in the sub-effect scheduler data related to the background. In the normal short reach background sub-effect block data, the sub-effect scheduler number and the sub-effect scheduler data related to the normal short reach background are defined. Since the normal short reach background sub-effect block data is scheduler data related to the background, the effect time is the same as the sub-effect block data "SCH04_BLK" for each variation pattern. Therefore, it is continuously executed until the sub-effect block data "SCH04_BLK" for each variation pattern is completed.

The function "NOP", the cut-in notice sub-effect block data, and the group notice sub-effect block data are defined in the sub-effect scheduler data related to the notice. The function "NOP" serves as a weight for synchronizing with the liquid crystal display effect scheduler, and is defined to execute a sub effect in accordance with the liquid crystal effect. In the cut-in notice sub-effect block data, the sub-effect scheduler number and the sub-effect scheduler data related to the cut-in notice are defined. The cut-in notice sub-effect block data has the same production time as the cut-in notice liquid crystal display block data. In the group notice sub-effect block data, the sub-effect scheduler number and the sub-effect scheduler data related to the group notice are defined. The group notice sub-effect block data has the same production time as the group notification liquid crystal display block data. The sub-effect block data "SCH04_BLK" for each variation pattern is configured by combining and executing the above-mentioned sub-effect block data.

By executing the above sub-effect block data in synchronization with the liquid crystal effect block data, the scheduler data of each sound, lamp, and motor defined in the sub-effect block data is executed in synchronization with the liquid crystal effect. It will be.

Further, the sub-effect block data "SCH04_BLK" for each variation pattern has the same number of sub-effect block data columns as the sub-effect block data "SCH03_BLK" for each variation pattern, but the number of sub-effect block data columns may increase or decrease. no problem.

Finally, in the sub-effect block data "SCH02_BLK" for each variation pattern, since the effect related to the advance notice is not performed, only the loss stop background sub-effect block data is executed. Loss stop background sub-effect block data is defined in the sub-effect scheduler data related to the background. The sub-effect scheduler number and the sub-effect scheduler data related to the normally fluctuating 12-second background are defined in the loss stop background sub-effect block data. Since the loss stop background sub-effect block data is scheduler data related to the background, the effect time is the same as that of the sub-effect block data “SCH02_BLK”. Therefore, it is continuously executed until the sub-effect block data "SCH02_BLK" is completed.

FIG. 343 is a diagram illustrating the relationship between the liquid crystal display effect block data for each variation pattern and the liquid crystal symbol block data for each variation pattern according to the present embodiment. The liquid crystal effect block data for each variation pattern and the liquid crystal symbol block data for each variation pattern differ only in the function executed in the scheduler data in the liquid crystal effect scheduler data from the function executed in the scheduler data in the sub-effect block data. Since the data format and the control method are common to each other, the description thereof will be omitted.

Subsequently, the configuration of the sub-effect block data will be described by taking the step-up effect described with reference to FIG. 314B as an example. First, an outline of creating liquid crystal display scheduler data for step-up notice will be described. FIG. 344 is a diagram showing an image of creating a drawing data file for each step-up effect unit (step-up 1 effect to 4 effect) by using a video composition / motion creation graphic tool for the step-up notice for the liquid crystal display of the present embodiment. be.

The drawing data file is created in units of step-up effects, and is composed of a series of effects that combine still images and moving images. Further, as shown in FIG. 344, the drawing data file is converted into the liquid crystal display effect scheduler data in the present embodiment by the tool in step-up effect units.

The reason why the drawing data file is not created one-to-one with the liquid crystal notice effect (step-up notices 1 to 4) is that, for example, when only the step-up 1 effect is changed, four types of step-up notices as in the present embodiment are used. If is feasible, it is necessary to change the drawing data files for 4 lines, and considering the work time required for the change and the risk of omission of correction, the drawing data files are created in a unique number for each step. This is because it is more efficient to realize the notice in combination.

FIG. 345 is a diagram illustrating the configuration of the effect block data of the step-up notice of the present embodiment. (A) shows the structure of the step-up notice liquid crystal display block data, and (B) shows the structure of the step-up notice sub-effect block data. As described above, four types of step-up notices can be executed in the present embodiment, but step-up notices 1 and 2 are shown in (A) and (B). In the step-up notices 3 and 4, the step-up 3 effect and the step-up 4 effect are executed at predetermined timings.

Explaining the step-up notice LCD effect block data, first, it is decided whether to execute any of the step-up notices 1 to 4 based on the lottery result value of the step-up notice acquired at the start of the fluctuation. NS. If the lottery result value of the step-up notice is not won, the step-up notice LCD effect block data is not executed, so that the step-up notice is not executed and drawing is not performed on the liquid crystal display device.

On the other hand, if the lottery result value of the step-up notice is the step-up notice 1, the step-up notice 1 of the step-up notice LCD effect block data is selected, and if the lottery result value of the step-up notice is the step-up notice 2. Step-up notice Step-up notice 2 of the liquid crystal effect block data is selected, and the corresponding effect block data is selected. The effect block data of the step-up notice 2 operates in the liquid crystal scheduler LCD_SCH01 for executing the step-up 1 liquid crystal effect scheduler data and the liquid crystal scheduler LCD_SCH02 for executing the step-up 2 liquid crystal effect scheduler data in parallel.

In the liquid crystal scheduler LCD_SCH01, when the step-up 1 liquid crystal effect scheduler data is executed, the operation in the liquid crystal scheduler LCD_SCH01 is terminated because the data to be executed next is "DATA_END".

Further, the function "NOP" is executed by the liquid crystal scheduler LCD_SCH02, the weight is performed for the time specified by the parameter, and then the step-up 2 liquid crystal effect scheduler data is executed. Step-up 2 After the liquid crystal display scheduler data execution is completed, the next data to be executed is "DATA_END", so the operation of the liquid crystal scheduler LCD_SCH02 is terminated.

As described above, by combining the effect scheduler data of the advance notice in the minimum configuration unit, it is possible to realize a plurality of variations of a single advance notice.

Subsequently, the step-up notice sub-effect block data will be described with reference to FIG. 345 (B). The step-up notice sub-effect block data is configured such that the step-up notice liquid crystal display block data has a one-to-one correspondence with the block configuration and the execution time. As a result, it is possible to dynamically synchronize all the effect devices with respect to the combination of the fluctuation pattern and the lottery result of the advance notice, and it is possible to realize the effect with a sense of unity.

The step-up notice sub-effect block data differs from the step-up notice liquid crystal effect block data only in the function executed by the liquid crystal effect scheduler data and the function executed by the sub-effect scheduler data. Since the data format and control method are common, the description thereof will be omitted.

As described above, in the present embodiment, when the fluctuation pattern command is received from the main control board 1310, the sub-effect block data stored in the data access order is acquired from the sub-effect block data combination table "SCH_CTL_BLOCKDATA_NO" for each fluctuation pattern. Then, by executing the scheduler data included in the acquired sub-effect block data according to the data access order, it is possible to execute the basic effect and the advance notice effect defined in a predetermined order and at a predetermined timing. ..

Therefore, according to the present embodiment, the scheduler data that controls various effect devices can be executed in parallel, and the scheduler data that is executed at the same timing is defined at the same execution time, so that the various effect devices can be used. The production can be synchronized. Further, when the execution of the scheduler data is started, a predetermined operation is subsequently performed at the timing set in the scheduler data. As a result, only by executing the corresponding block data based on the information that identifies the effect content such as the fluctuation pattern, the scheduler data defined in a layered manner is automatically acquired, and the effect is executed at the defined timing. It is possible to do.

Further, according to the present embodiment, since a plurality of schedulers can be started and schedule data can be executed independently by each scheduler, it is possible to develop a plurality of types of scheduler data in parallel, which greatly improves development efficiency. Can be improved.

Further, according to the present embodiment, the scheduler is configured to analyze the scheduler data described in a predetermined format and control the effect device. Therefore, even if the control mechanism of the gaming machine (for example, the peripheral control board 1510 or the arithmetic unit included in the peripheral control board 1510) is updated, a common schedule can be obtained by installing a scheduler corresponding to the new gaming machine. Data can be used. That is, the scheduler has a function as middleware for executing common schedule data on different platforms, and it is possible to utilize software assets related to production control of gaming machines for a long period of time.

The scheduler in this embodiment may be realized by software or hardware. When the scheduler is realized by software, the scheduler started when the scheduler data is executed may be stopped after use to free up the used area of the memory. Memory usage can be reduced by stopping the scheduler. For example, it may be released when a predetermined time has elapsed after the execution of the schedule data is completed, or it may be stopped except for the minimum scheduler when the gaming machine is in the waiting state for customers.

[19. LCD production scheduler data production control]
Subsequently, the details of the liquid crystal display scheduler data constituting the liquid crystal display effect block data will be described. The liquid crystal display effect scheduler data is composed of a combination of functions that control the effect target, like the sub effect block data. In the sub-effect block data, sound output, lamp lighting, operation of the drive device, etc. were controlled targets, but in the liquid crystal effect scheduler data, drawing on the liquid crystal display device is controlled.

[19-1. Scheduler function for LCD production]
First, a function (liquid crystal display scheduler function) that constitutes liquid crystal display scheduler data will be described. The liquid crystal display scheduler function is a command (function, command) for effect control described in the liquid crystal display scheduler data constituting the liquid crystal display block data described above, and a command is sent to the sound source built-in VDP1540a by the liquid crystal display scheduler function. Send and perform the production. In addition, when executing the liquid crystal display scheduler function, the attributes of the displayed object (for example, color, shape, operation content, etc.) can be changed by specifying parameters.

[19-1-1. Scheduler function for LCD production]
FIG. 346 is a diagram showing an example of the liquid crystal display scheduler function of the present embodiment. The outline of each liquid crystal display scheduler function will be described below.

Each liquid crystal display scheduler function is managed for each group. In this embodiment, there are groups of coordinate setting, scale setting, rotation angle setting, α setting, frame setting, Z index setting, effect SW setting, and subscheduler setting.

First, the functions belonging to the coordinate setting group will be described. The function belonging to the coordinate setting group is for setting the liquid crystal display object by designating the coordinates of the display area of the liquid crystal display device, for example. This makes it possible to specify and display the position of the liquid crystal display object.

The functions "LCD_FUNC_TYPE_POSX", "LCD_FUNC_TYPE_POSY", and "LCD_FUNC_TYPE_POSZ" specify the X-axis coordinate position, the Y-axis coordinate position, and the Z-axis coordinate position, respectively, and set the display position of the liquid crystal display object.

The function "LCD_FUNC_TYPE_ANCHORX" specifies the X-axis coordinate position, and the function "LCD_FUNC_TYPE_ANCHORY" specifies the Y-axis coordinate position to set the liquid crystal display target anchor point position. The function "LCD_FUNC_TYPE_ANCHORXY" specifies the X-axis and Y-axis coordinate positions and sets the liquid crystal display target anchor point position. The liquid crystal display target anchor point position is the center position of the liquid crystal display target object.

Next, the group to which the function for scaling (scale setting) the display target (still image, moving image) belongs will be described. Scaling is, for example, setting the center of a designated display area to be enlarged or reduced when displaying on a liquid crystal display device from the size of a still image or moving image stored on the CGROM, or converting the unit of coordinates. It is to do. By setting an appropriate coordinate system in the display area and performing the drawing process, the liquid crystal display object can be displayed at an appropriate position and size.

The functions "LCD_FUNC_TYPE_SCALE", "LCD_FUNC_TYPE_SCALEX", "LCD_FUNC_TYPE_SCALEY", "LCD_FUNC_TYPE_SCALEZ", "LCD_FUNC_TYPE_SCALEXY", and "LCD_FUNC_TYPE_SCALEXYZ" belong to the scale setting group. The function "LCD_FUNC_TYPE_SCALE" specifies the X-axis and Y-axis values and sets the enlargement or reduction ratio of the liquid crystal display object. The function "LCD_FUNC_TYPE_SCALEX" specifies the X-axis value and sets the coordinates of the liquid crystal display object. The function "LCD_FUNC_TYPE_SCALEY" specifies the Y-axis value and sets the enlargement or reduction ratio of the liquid crystal display object. The function "LCD_FUNC_TYPE_SCALEZ" specifies the Z-axis value and sets the enlargement or reduction ratio of the liquid crystal display object. The function "LCD_FUNC_TYPE_SCALEXY" specifies the X-axis and Y-axis values and sets the enlargement or reduction ratio of the liquid crystal display object. The function "LCD_FUNC_TYPE_SCALEXYZ" specifies the X-axis, Y-axis, and Z-axis values to set the enlargement or reduction ratio of the liquid crystal display object.

Next, the group to which the function for setting the angle when rotating and displaying the liquid crystal display object belongs will be described. By storing only the reference liquid crystal display object in the CGROM and displaying it by specifying the angle, it is not necessary to store a plurality of the rotated liquid crystal display objects, and the increase in storage capacity can be suppressed. can.

The functions "LCD_FUNC_TYPE_ANGLEX", "LCD_FUNC_TYPE_ANGLEY", "LCD_FUNC_TYPE_ANGLEZ", and "LCD_FUNC_TYPE_ANGLEXYZ" belong to the rotation angle setting group. The function "LCD_FUNC_TYPE_ANGLEX" specifies the X-axis value, the function "LCD_FUNC_TYPE_ANGLEY" specifies the Y-axis value, and the function "LCD_FUNC_TYPE_ANGLEZ" specifies the Z-axis value to rotate the liquid crystal display object. Further, the function "LCD_FUNC_TYPE_ANGLEXYZ" specifies an X-axis value, a Y-axis value, and a Z-axis value to rotate the liquid crystal display object.

Next, other functions will be described. The function "LCD_FUNC_TYPE_ALPHA" is an α setting process, and specifically, the α value is specified to set the transparency of the liquid crystal display object. The α value is a numerical value indicating transparency, and can be set from transparent (colorless) that completely transmits the background color to completely opaque that does not allow the background color to pass through at all.

The function "LCD_FUNC_TYPE_FRAME" is a frame setting process, and specifically, a frame value which is a drawing update interval of a liquid crystal display object is set. The frame value is a numerical value indicating an interval for redrawing the liquid crystal display object during animation processing.

The function "LCD_FUNC_TYPE_ZINDEX" sets the Z index of the liquid crystal display object. The Z-index is a hierarchy for displaying the liquid crystal display object, and by setting this, the liquid crystal display object can be displayed on the front side or moved to the back side on the screen. For example, when the liquid crystal display object is the background, the Z index is set so that it is drawn on the backmost surface.

The functions "LCD_FUNC_TYPE_LCDSW", "LCD_FUNC_TYPE_FRAMELCDSW", and "LCD_FUNC_TYPE_KICKLCDSW" belong to the effect SW setting group for setting information about the effect SW. Although the details will be described later, the effect SW is information incorporated in the control information for drawing (image, moving image), and by detecting this information, a predetermined process is called back and the effect content is switched. , Perform another production. The function "LCD_FUNC_TYPE_LCDSW" sets the effect SW information in the still image index number on the CGROM and the moving image index number on the CGROM in the liquid crystal effect scheduler data. The function "LCD_FUNC_TYPE_FRAMELCDSW" sets the frame effect SW information for the entire LCD effect scheduler data. The function "LCD_FUNC_TYPE_KICKLCDSW" sets the SW information that defines the special control information described later in the liquid crystal effect scheduler data.

The function "LCD_FUNC_TYPE_SUBSCH" is a function for calling the subscheduler. By defining highly versatile processing as a subscheduler and calling back at a predetermined timing, it is possible to simplify the processing and improve the development efficiency.

[19-1-2. Scheduler function parameters for LCD production]
The example of the liquid crystal display scheduler function used in the gaming machine of the present embodiment has been described above. Next, the parameters specified when the scheduler function for liquid crystal display is executed will be described with an example. 347 and 348 are diagrams showing an example of parameters for the liquid crystal display scheduler function in the present embodiment.

The parameters of the liquid crystal display scheduler function are managed for each group in the same manner as the liquid crystal display scheduler function. The liquid crystal display scheduler function group and the parameter group are divided into different groups. The parameter group includes sequence control, effect SW, footage setting, symbol replacement related, sub-effect scheduler function, and the like.

The sequence control parameter groups include "AAD_FRAME", "AAD_POS", "AAD_POS2", "AAD_POS3", "AAD_ALPHA", "AAD_ANGLE", "AAD_ENTRY", "AAD_ENTRY_B", "AAD_SKIP", "AAD_SKIP_B", "AAD_SCALE", "AAD_SCALE", "AAD_SCALE", and "AAD_SCALE". ] Etc. are included. Hereinafter, each parameter will be described.

"AAD_FRAME" is a parameter for specifying a frame value and has a length of 16 bits. "AAD_POS" is a parameter for specifying the X-axis coordinate position and has a length of 16 bits. "AAD_POS2" is a parameter for setting the X-axis and Y-axis coordinate positions, each having a length of 16 bits. "AAD_POS3" is a parameter for setting the X-axis, Y-axis, and Z-axis coordinate positions, each having a length of 16 bits.

"AAD_ALPHA" is a parameter for designating the α value which is the transparency of the liquid crystal display object, and has a length of 8 bits. "AAD_ANGLE" is a parameter for designating the rotation angle of the liquid crystal display object, and has a length of 16 bits. "AAD_ENTRY" is a parameter that specifies the total number of data of the parameter to be set, and has a length of 16 bits. "AAD_ENTRY_B" is a parameter that specifies the total number of data of the parameter to be set, and is two parameters divided into 8-bit lengths.

"AAD_SKIP" is a parameter that specifies the number of frames to be skipped, and has a length of 16 bits. "AAD_SKIP_B" is a parameter that specifies the number of frames to be skipped during the liquid crystal display, and is two parameters divided into 8-bit lengths.

"AAD_SCALE" is a parameter that specifies a scale value when the coordinate system of the display area is one axis, and has a length of 16 bits. "AAD_SCALE2" is a parameter that specifies the enlargement or reduction ratio when the coordinate system of the display area has two axes, and each has a length of 16 bits. "AAD_SCALE3" is a parameter that specifies the enlargement or reduction ratio when the coordinate system of the display area has three axes, and each has a length of 16 bits. "AAD_SIZE" is a parameter that specifies the size of the liquid crystal display object on the XY2 axes, and each has a length of 16 bits.

The parameter group of the effect SW includes "AAD_LCDSWENTRY", "AAD_LCDSW", "AAD_LCDSW_PARAM", "AAD_KICKLCDSWENTRY", "AAD_KICKLCDSW", "AAD_FRAMELCDSWENTRY", "AAD_FRAMELCDSW_PARAM" and the like.

"AAD_LCDSWENTRY" is a parameter that specifies the total number of registered production SWs, and has a length of 16 bits. "AAD_LCDSW" is a parameter for designating the number of the effect SW, and specifies two 16-bit length numerical values. "AAD_LCDSW_PARAM" is a parameter for passing the effect SW number, and has a length of 16 bits.

"AAD_KICKLCDSWENTRY" is a parameter that specifies the total number of registered kick effect SWs, and has a length of 16 bits. "AAD_KICKLCDSW" is a parameter that specifies the number of the kick effect SW, and specifies two 16-bit length numerical values. "AAD_FRAMELCDSWENTRY" is a parameter that specifies the total number of registered frame effect SWs, and has a length of 16 bits. "AAD_FRAMELCDSW_PARAM" is a parameter for passing the frame effect SW number, and has a length of 16 bits.

The group of footage setting parameters includes "AAD_SEQFOOTENTRY", "AAD_SEQFOOT" and the like. "AAD_SEQFOOTENTRY" is a parameter that specifies the number of still images to be registered in a predetermined area, and has a length of 16 bits. "AAD_SEQFOOT" is a parameter that specifies the index number of the still image stored in the CGROM, and has a length of 16 bits.

The group of parameters related to symbol replacement includes "AAD_ZUGARA" and the like. "AAD_ZUGARA" is a parameter for designating the symbol index number and has a length of 16 bits.

The parameter group of the sub-effect scheduler function includes "AAD_SUBENTRY", "AAD_SUB", and the like. "AAD_SUBENTRY" is a parameter that specifies the number of subscheduler function parameters and has a length of 16 bits. "AAD_SUB" is a parameter that specifies the subscheduler function number and has a length of 16 bits.

[20. Callback control based on image information]
Conventionally, the effect control in a gaming machine has been realized by executing a combination of a program for individually controlling various effect devices and a program for linking a plurality of effect devices. These programs were described by program codes representing the operation contents and control procedures of the effect device for each content of the notice in addition to the commands related to the fluctuation pattern, and were created by a programmer having advanced technology. In the liquid crystal drawing, each effect drawing data is called in the frame in which the effect is executed, and a plurality of effect drawings (background, pattern, notice, hold, etc.) are combined.

However, in recent game machines, in order to improve the performance of hardware and the interest of the game machine, it is required to execute a wide variety of productions, and it is necessary to realize complicated production control. As a result, advanced technology is required for individual programmers, development man-hours increase, and it becomes difficult to secure the necessary personnel (programmers) both qualitatively and quantitatively. Further, as the total amount of the program code of the effect control program increases, the man-hours required for the test for the purpose of confirming the operation of the gaming machine and improving the quality also increase.

Therefore, in order to solve the above-mentioned problems, in the gaming machine of the present embodiment, in order to shorten the development period and improve the quality, it may be possible to realize the effect executed in cooperation with the liquid crystal drawing (image display) by the program code. Instead, the program data for the game machine is output by the tool that creates the liquid crystal drawing effect, and the effect is controlled based on the output program data, thereby shortening the development period and improving the quality.

Specifically, a tool capable of creating data for executing a liquid crystal drawing effect is used by allocating images and moving images displayed on the liquid crystal display device in chronological order. In this tool, a single production drawing data (notice, background, design, hold, etc.) is defined as one production block, and the production blocks are grouped according to the state such as fluctuation pattern and big hit to create a production common block. By combining multiple production common blocks, a series of production drawing such as fluctuation patterns and big hits is realized.

However, due to the configuration of the gaming machine, the display or non-display of the effect related to the lottery, the replacement of the effect and the design, and the interactive effect for the external input by the player occur, so the combined effect common block is simply executed as it is. Then, it is impossible to realize all the productions.

Therefore, in the present embodiment, when the effect common block is created by the above-mentioned tool, the effect switch (effect SW) for calling a program for executing the effect at a predetermined timing or executing a predetermined control is performed. ) Can be set (embedded). The effect SW is a flag on the RAM and is set to ON or OFF. When the effect SW set in the effect data for drawing is set, a callback always occurs regardless of whether the effect SW is "ON" or "OFF". Further, when the effect SW is ON in the function of the callback destination, predetermined control is performed based on the defined effect SW information corresponding to the effect SW. The effect SW is set to ON by a command issued inside the main control board 1310 or the peripheral control board 1510. The effect SW is set for each display target, still image, and moving image in the liquid crystal layer table, the liquid crystal effect common block, the liquid crystal effect block, the liquid crystal effect scheduler data, and the liquid crystal effect scheduler data.

When the liquid crystal effect block control unit 5310 executes and analyzes the effect block included in the effect common block at the time of drawing the liquid crystal and detects the incorporated effect SW, the program function is dynamically called based on the detected effect SW (callback). do). Then, a display list command can be created based on the information processed by the called back program function, and the effect display can be turned ON / OFF and the effect can be replaced. In addition, in the program function called by the callback, it is also possible to execute an effect other than the liquid crystal effect (for example, sound output, lighting of a lamp, operation of an accessory, etc.). In addition, it is possible to perform processing such as setting information necessary for subsequent effect control, such as setting a flag and updating data in a predetermined area. As described above, by calling the program function by detecting the effect SW, it is possible to display or hide the drawing by a plurality of effect blocks, replace the effect and the symbol, and realize an interactive effect for the external input by the player. ..

The program function for turning on / off the liquid crystal display and replacing the effect called by the callback is built in the peripheral control unit 1530 in advance, and does not need to be newly created. Therefore, designers and planners who do not have advanced program knowledge can set the production SW so that they call the predefined program functions while setting the production elements such as images and videos at the time of production design. It is possible to realize complicated production specifications. Furthermore, by creating a production block (LCD production scheduler data) for each production configuration unit using the production creation tool, it is possible to significantly shorten the development period, and in addition, the production content is based on random lottery results. By performing the test using the effect SW without performing the test, the test process can be simplified and the time required for the test can be significantly reduced.

[20-1. Composition of production switch]
Subsequently, the configuration of the effect switch (SW) will be described. FIG. 349 is a diagram illustrating a configuration of an effect switch according to the present embodiment. The effect SW is uniquely identified by the effect SW number, and is associated with information necessary for replacing the effect, a program function called by a callback, and the like.

The effect SW group ID, the effect SW reset group ID, the effect SW attribute, the effect SW start command address, the effect replacement information table address, and the like are associated with the effect SW number.

The effect SW group is a set of effect SWs grouped according to the execution mode of the effect, and the effect SW group ID is an identifier of the effect SW group and defines which effect SW group it belongs to. The effect SW reset group has the same configuration as the effect SW group, and by specifying the effect SW reset group ID, the effect SW group belonging to the effect SW reset group is set to OFF, and the effects belonging to the effect SW group are collectively set to OFF. Can be hidden. The effect SW reset group ID is an identifier of the effect SW reset group. Since the effect SW group ID and the effect SW reset group ID have a bit configuration, a plurality of effect SW groups can be specified.

FIG. 350 is a diagram showing an example of the configuration of the effect SW group of the present embodiment. Further, as described above, there are active and passive effect SWs, and the effect SW group is composed of one or a plurality of active effect SWs and passive effect SWs. Specifically, the head group number and the number of active effect SWs of the active effect SW belonging to the effect SW group, and the head group number and the number of passive effect SWs of the passive effect SW are included.

The effect SW attribute is information indicating the attribute of the effect SW, and specifically, includes liquid crystal display SW full reset information, replacement information, special control information, passive / active information, and the like. The liquid crystal display SW full reset information is information that specifies whether or not to set the effect SW belonging to the effect group designated at the time of evaluation of the effect SW to OFF. The replacement information is information that specifies whether or not to call the callback function for effect replacement when evaluating the effect SW. The special control information (special control behavior) is information that specifies whether or not to call a default callback function when evaluating the effect SW. The passive / active information indicates a method of evaluating the effect SW. Passive evaluates the effect SW statically, and active evaluates the effect SW dynamically.

The effect SW start command address is the address of the effect SW start command table. The effect SW start command is a command sequence for setting the effect SW to ON, and a command for setting the effect SW to ON is defined in the effect SW start command table. FIG. 351 is a diagram showing an example of the effect SW activation command table of the present embodiment. FIG. 351 illustrates the effect SW start command table “lcdsw_cmd_en_ykk_b051_crs_charenge_suc” and the effect SW start command table “lcdsw_cmd_act_b056_cmc_su3_out_red”. Each table is composed of data for the number of commands and the number of judgment commands.

[20-2. Control by production switch in step-up notice production]
Next, the effect control using the effect switch will be described by taking a step-up notice effect as an example. FIG. 352 is a diagram showing an example of a step-up notice in the present embodiment, (A) shows a stage in which the step-up notice effect is executed, and (B) is a screen displayed on the liquid crystal display device at each stage. An example is shown.

As shown in FIG. 352 (A), the step-up notice of the present embodiment can be executed in up to four stages, and at the end of the step-up notice of each stage, the development effect to the next stage is executed. .. If the step-up notice develops, the next step-up notice effect is continuously executed, and if it does not develop, the step-up notice ends as it is.

Here, variations of the step-up notice production at each stage will be described. In the step-up notice 1, which is the first stage after the start of the step-up notice effect, the effect that the display screen is filled with ink is executed. At this time, the degree of expectation is suggested by the color of the ink and the pattern of filling. For example, when the color of black ink is black, the degree of expectation is low, and the degree of expectation is high in the order of white, red, and rainbow color. Further, as the filling pattern, the higher the number of positions where the filling is started, the higher the expectation, and the higher the expectation may be, the higher the expectation is at the position where the filling is started. For example, if the fill is started from only one place on the lower left, the expectation is low, if the fill is started from two places on the lower left and upper left, or if the fill is started from three places on the lower left, upper left and upper right. Expectations are higher in order, and highest when filling is started from the four corners.

Further, as described above, at the end of the step-up notice of each stage, the development effect to the step-up notice of the next stage is executed. In the development production, the production is performed in a common manner halfway in order to raise the expectation of the player regardless of whether or not it actually develops to the next stage. Explaining the case of the step-up notice 1, first, the liquid crystal display screen is filled with the combination of the black color and the fill pattern determined by the lottery. After that, when the screen is completely filled, the ink gradually fades (becomes lighter), and the characters to be displayed in the step-up notice 2 emerge. When the step-up notice 2 is developed, the ink is applied as it is and the characters are displayed darker, and the production is continued. On the other hand, if the development effect fails, the characters are not displayed darkly and are inked and hidden.

In the step-up notice 2, characters are displayed according to the degree of expectation. Expectations for the character pattern increase in the order of "change," "pushing," "spirit," "continuation," and "one-shot deadly." In the effect mode of the step-up notice 2, first, the screen is filled while expanding the area to be filled with the combination of the black color and the fill variation in the step-up notice 1 in the state where the characters are displayed. After that, when the screen is completely filled with ink, the process proceeds to step-up notice 3. On the other hand, if the development effect fails, the ink is gradually removed before the screen is completely filled with ink, and finally the ink is completely removed and the displayed characters disappear. It will end up.

In the step-up notice 3, the liquid crystal display screen is filled with black ink by the step-up notice 2, and the effect of gradually removing the black ink is executed from this state. At this time, the degree of expectation is suggested according to the pattern of ink sticking. For example, if the ink is applied from only one place on the lower left, the expectation is low, and if the ink is applied from two places on the lower left and upper left, the ink is applied from three places on the lower left, upper left, and upper right. The degree of expectation is higher in the order of going, and the degree of expectation is highest when the ink is drawn from the four corners. If the characters are displayed in the process of removing the ink and the characters are displayed on the liquid crystal display screen after all the characters are removed, the development effect is successful and the process shifts to the step-up notice 4. On the other hand, if no characters are displayed on the liquid crystal display screen after all the ink has been removed, it means that the development effect has failed.

The step-up notice 4 is the final stage of the step-up notice, and the degree of expectation is suggested by the content (pattern) and color of the characters displayed on the liquid crystal display screen. For example, the character pattern has higher expectations in the order of "game", "opportunity", "development", "enthusiastic fight", "fierce heat", and "happiness". In addition, the character color is expected to be higher in the order of black, white, red, and rainbow. In the effect mode of the step-up notice 4, an animation or the like in which the displayed characters are enlarged is executed.

Subsequently, a procedure for executing the step-up notice described above by the effect SW will be described. FIGS. 353 to 355 are diagrams for explaining the execution procedure of the step-up notice using the effect SW in the present embodiment. FIG. 353 is a diagram showing the correspondence between all the effect contents and the effect SW in the step-up notice 1. FIG. 354 (A) is a step-up notice 1 for executing the step-up notice 1 to be filled with black ink from four directions of the screen. Step-up notice 1 for executing the step-up notice 1 to be filled with. The liquid crystal effect scheduler data and the drawing image are shown. FIG. 355 is a diagram showing the relationship between the effect SW for replacing the effect related to the step-up notice 1 and the effect.

FIG. 353 shows all the effects produced in the step-up notice 1, and is divided into each drawing (lower left of ink drawing, upper left of ink drawing, lower right of ink drawing, upper right of ink drawing, character failure, character success). The name of the effect SW and the content of the effect are described in correspondence with each category. The total number of step-up effects shown in the figure is a total of 16 effects with 4 effects for each of the lower left, upper left, lower right, and upper right drawing categories, and a total of 10 effects with 5 effects for each of the character failure and character success drawing categories, for a total of 26 effects. It has become. In addition, only one effect can be executed at the same time in each drawing category, and only one of the drawing categories "character failure" and "character success" is executed. Therefore, the maximum effect to be executed at the same time in step-up notice 1. The number is 5 effects in total, including the drawing category "lower left", the drawing category "upper left", the drawing category "lower right", the drawing category "upper right", and the drawing category "character failure" or the drawing category "character success".

In addition, a method for determining the effect of each drawing category will be specifically described according to the advance notice lottery result value of the step-up notice 1. First, a lottery for step-up notice 1 is performed to determine the content of the effect related to ink drawing. Specifically, the production contents related to ink drawing are the selection of the position where the ink appears from the drawing divisions "lower left, upper left, lower right, upper right", and the color of the ink appearing from the selected ink appearance place. Become. In addition, it is either the drawing category "character failure" or the drawing category "character success" and the content of the character displayed at this time.

Next, the configuration of the step-up notice 1 liquid crystal display effect scheduler data and the step-up notice 1 liquid crystal display effect scheduler data when the liquid crystal display effect scheduler data is executed without any control will be described with reference to FIG. 354 (A). .. As mentioned above, the total number of effects of step-up notice 1 is 26, but the step-up notice 1 LCD effect scheduler data includes one for each drawing category of lower left, upper left, lower right, upper right, character failure, and character success. Only the production data of is defined. When the step-up notice 1 liquid crystal effect scheduler data is executed without any control, that is, when all the step-up notice 1 liquid crystal effect scheduler data are executed at the same time, as shown in the figure of the step-up notice 1 drawing image. Black ink spreads from the lower left, upper left, lower right, and upper right of the screen at the same time, and the characters "change" are displayed lightly in the drawing category "character failure" and the drawing category "character success", and then the drawing category "character". "Failure" erases the "change" character, and at the same time, the "change" character is clearly displayed in the drawing category "character success".

Further, in FIG. 354 (B), according to the lottery result of the step-up notice 1, the drawing category "lower left" is "red", the drawing category "upper left" is "none", the drawing category "lower right" is "none", and drawing. Issue a command with the category "upper right" being "red", the drawing category "character failure" being "spirit", and the drawing category "character success" being "none". As a result, in the drawing image, red ink spreads from the drawing category "lower left", red ink spreads from the drawing category "upper right", and the characters "spirit" are displayed lightly in the drawing category "character failure". , The character of "Ki" is deleted in the drawing category "Character failure".

At this time, the effect SW corresponding to the corresponding effect is set to ON according to the content of each issued lottery command. Specifically, the step-up notice 1 lottery command drawing category "lower left" is set to "red", "LEDSW_LEFDW_S1_RED" is set to ON, and the step-up notice 1 lottery command drawing category "upper right" is set to "red". Then, "LEDSW_RIGUP_S1_RED" is set to ON, and "LEDSW_MOJI_NGS1_KIA" is set to ON for the step-up notice 1 lottery command drawing category "character failure is enthusiastic". On the other hand, the step-up notice 1 lottery command drawing category "upper left" is "none", the step-up notice 1 lottery command drawing category "lower right" is "none", and the step-up notice 1 lottery command drawing category "character success" is "none". Since the command "" is not produced, none of the effect SWs is set to ON and is set to OFF.

As a result, red ink spreads from the drawing category "lower left" and red ink spreads from the drawing category "upper right" from all the effects of step-up notice 1, and the drawing category "character failure" is "spirit". It is realized that the effect SW corresponding to the case of displaying characters is set to ON according to the command based on the lottery result of the step-up notice 1.

Subsequently, with reference to FIG. 355, the step-up notice 1 liquid crystal display effect scheduler data of FIG. 354 (A) is used to perform an effect according to the lottery result of the step-up notice 1 of FIG. 355 (B). The mechanism for replacing the production will be explained.

FIG. 355 is a diagram for explaining the master data defined on the liquid crystal effect scheduler data for each drawing category in the present embodiment and the effect SW corresponding to the replacement data to be replaced with the master data. More specifically with reference to the lower left ink effect replacement group of FIG. 355, the effect SW corresponding to the master data of the step-up notice 1 liquid crystal effect scheduler data is the index number on the CGROM of the moving image in which black ink spreads from the lower left. It becomes the effect SW "LEDSW_LEFDW_S1_BLK" corresponding to. On the other hand, the effect SW corresponding to the replacement data corresponds to the index number on the CGROM of the video in which white ink spreads from the lower left, the corresponding effect SW "LEDSW_LEFDW_S1_WHI", and the index number on the CGROM of the video in which red ink spreads from the lower left. The effect SW "LEDSW_LEFDW_S1_RED" and the effect SW "LEDSW_LEFDW_S1_REI" corresponding to the index number on the CGROM of the moving image in which the rainbow ink spreads from the lower left. The replacement data is not defined in the step-up notice 1 liquid crystal display effect scheduler data, but is separately defined in the lower left ink effect replacement table. Further, the effect SW "LEDSW_LEFDW_S1_BLK" corresponding to the index number on the CGROM of the moving image in which black ink spreads from the lower left of the master data is defined in both the step-up notice 1 liquid crystal effect scheduler data and the lower left ink effect replacement table.

The liquid crystal effect 1f drawing scheduler execution unit 5331 analyzes and executes the step-up notice 1 liquid crystal effect scheduler data in the process of creating a display list command to draw the effect, and is defined in the step-up notice 1 liquid crystal effect scheduler data. Using the effect SW "LEDSW_LEFDW_S1_BLK" as a trigger (when detected), a callback is generated, and control is transferred from the liquid crystal effect 1f drawing scheduler execution unit 5331 to a program function for effect replacement.

In the replacement program function called by the callback, the lower left ink effect replacement table is referred to, all the effect SWs registered in the lower left ink effect replacement table are determined, and the effect SW set to ON is specified. do. In the present embodiment, the step-up notice 1 lottery command drawing category "lower left" is "red", and the effect SW "LEDSW_LEFDW_S1_RED" is set to ON. The moving image number on the CGROM of "red ink" is specified.

The replacement program function called by the callback delivers the moving image number on the red black CGROM from the specified lower left to the liquid crystal effect 1f drawing scheduler execution unit 5331 and ends the execution. When the control returns to the liquid crystal effect 1f drawing scheduler execution unit 5331 again, the liquid crystal effect 1f drawing scheduler execution unit 5331 corresponds to the moving image in which black ink appears from the lower left defined in the step-up notice 1 liquid crystal effect scheduler data. Instead of creating a display list command using the above video number, use the video number on the CGROM corresponding to the video in which red ink appears from the lower left handed over from the replacement program function to use the display list command. create.

The features of the replacement of the effect by the callback of the present embodiment are the low-level control structure (in this embodiment, the liquid crystal effect scheduler data, the data structure that is easy to change and suitable for tooling) to the high-level control structure (the present embodiment). By calling a program function for replacement, a program function that is unsuitable for change but enables complicated processing) by callback, it is possible to separate the detection of the timing of replacement and the replacement control, which is simple. It is possible to perform complicated processing using the liquid crystal effect scheduler data, which is a data structure.

Further, in the present embodiment, the process is always executed by the callback regardless of the identifier for the callback (ON / OFF setting value of the effect SW in the present embodiment). Instead of executing the same control as the effect control of this embodiment by calling back, a structure for performing complicated control on the liquid crystal display effect scheduler data side is incorporated, and the liquid crystal display 1f drawing scheduler execution unit side has a complicated liquid crystal display effect scheduler. When the effect control is realized by analyzing and executing the data, the complexity of the program code processed on the LCD 1f drawing scheduler execution unit side increases, and when adding a new function or changing the function, be sure to do so. It is necessary to change the LCD effect scheduler data. In this case, it is necessary to change both the program code and the data, and not only the problem occurs due to the control change, but also the function that was operating normally before the change is affected and a new problem occurs. There is a risk that it will end up.

On the other hand, in the present embodiment, the execution of the callback is always executed by the callback regardless of the identifier for calling back (ON / OFF setting value of the effect SW), and a plurality of times executed by the callback are executed. Judge whether execution is possible or the processing content in the callback function of. By creating the corresponding callback function to realize a single function, it is not necessary to change the LCD effect scheduler data structure even when adding a new function or changing the function, and the call corresponding to the new function This can be achieved by creating a back function or modifying an existing callback function. Therefore, the range of influence due to the change or addition of the function is limited to the callback function to be newly added or changed, and the possibility of affecting other callback functions and causing a malfunction is reduced. Also, compared to the case where the execution analysis of the liquid crystal effect scheduler data is centrally executed by a single large program, the person who performs the execution analysis by using multiple callback functions and the liquid crystal effect scheduler data to realize each function. However, the structure and structure of the program can be simplified.

In the present embodiment, the description is focused on the replacement of the effect, but the control mechanism by the callback of the present embodiment is not only the replacement of the effect, but also the replacement of the symbol, the control of the display or non-display of the effect, and the drawing target. It can also be applied to conversion of drawing data, execution of scheduler data of other effect display devices, and conversion of scheduler data.

Here, about the purpose of defining the effect SW "LEDSW_LEFDW_S1_BLK" corresponding to the index number on the CGROM of the video in which black ink spreads from the lower left of the master data in both the LCD effect scheduler data and the lower left ink effect replacement table. explain. If the index number on the CGROM corresponding to the master effect SW is not defined in the effect replacement table, the relationship between the master and the replacement target, that is, the index number on the CGROM corresponding to the master effect SW is always the LCD effect scheduler. It exists only on the data, and the replacement effect SW corresponding to the master and the index number on the corresponding CGROM exist only in the effect replacement table. In the gaming machine of the present embodiment, the effect replacement table and the effect SW are each defined in the thousands. Consistency between the index number of the video (image) on the CGROM and the production SW under the circumstances where the game specifications are frequently changed or the game specifications are added between the planning and development of the game machine and the introduction to the market. Is extremely difficult to maintain.

Regarding the relationship between the index number on the CGROM and the effect SW, the index number on the CGROM corresponding to the master effect SW may be erroneously defined in the effect replacement table, or conversely, the CGROM corresponding to the replacement effect SW. It is possible that the above index number is mistakenly registered in the LCD effect scheduler data. In this case, there is a difference between the command value of the effect lottery and the number of data of the effect SW on the replacement table and the index number on the corresponding CGROM, and the effect is replaced with an effect different from the effect selected in the effect lottery. .. Since the degree of expectation is set for each production, it is possible that a production dedicated to big hits that does not appear due to fluctuations in the deviation may appear, which is a fatal problem for a gaming machine. By defining the effect replacement table including the master effect SW and the index number on the corresponding CGROM as in the present embodiment, it is possible to confirm the consistency by comparing the total number of effects with the replacement table. Become. Further, in the liquid crystal display effect scheduler data, any data in the replacement table can be defined without any problem, so that the control method is extremely unlikely to cause a problem. In the present embodiment, even if the master effect defined on the liquid crystal display effect scheduler data is drawn as a result of the effect lottery, the index number on the CGROM of the master on the liquid crystal effect scheduler data is not used and is always replaced. A display list command is created using the index number on the master CGROM defined in the table, and the effect is drawn.

In the step-up notice 3, as described above, the black ink is gradually erased from a part or all of the vertices of the display area from the filled state, and the characters emerge when the development effect is successful. On the other hand, when the development effect fails, the characters are not displayed and the ink is completely erased, and the step-up notice ends as it is. Since the effect of gradually erasing the ink from the vertices of the display area is executed regardless of whether it is successful or unsuccessful, the effect SW flags for four types of drawing patterns that gradually erase the ink for each vertex are executed. (Layer) is defined. In addition, two types of effect SW flags (layers) corresponding to the result of the development effect are defined.

The composition and control method of the upper left ink replacement group, the lower right ink replacement group, the upper right ink replacement group, the character failure effect replacement group, and the character success effect replacement group other than the lower left ink replacement group shown in FIG. 355 are the same as those of the lower left ink replacement group. Is.

In the step-up notice 4, since the step-up notice is not continuously executed thereafter, the effect SW flag (layer) may be defined according to the mode in the animation of the displayed characters, or one type of effect SW flag ( Only the layer) may be defined, and the type of character animation may be set by the parameter.

As described above, in the present embodiment, different types of effects can be produced by individually defining the drawing effect patterns for each ink appearance position or character content and setting the effect SW flag corresponding to the effect to be executed to ON. It can be executed or a combination of effects can be executed. Since switching and combining the effects only requires individual switching of the effect SW flag settings, the planners who configure the effects do not need techniques such as creating a new program, and the planners who configure the effects simply set the parameters with the tool. It is possible to realize various variations of production. For example, in step-up notice 1, it is possible to realize dozens of drawing patterns simply by combining four types of drawing patterns depending on the appearance position of black ink and two types of display patterns as a result of development effect. As a result, the types of programs to be developed can be minimized, the development efficiency of the production control program of the gaming machine can be improved, and the inspection of the developed production control program can be made more efficient to improve the quality. Can be done.

[20-3. Overview of control based on production switch]
Next, an outline of control based on the effect switch will be described. FIG. 356 is a diagram for explaining the control procedure by the effect switch of the present embodiment, and in particular, shows the evaluation procedure for setting the effect SW to ON. In the present embodiment, first, when a main command (main control command) that triggers the start of production is received from the main control board 1310, the peripheral control unit 1530 issues a peripheral control internal to the configuration in the peripheral control board 1510. The issue command is generated. The peripheral control internal issuance command is a command for executing a notice lottery or executing an effect by the peripheral control unit 1530.

The effect SW command analysis module of the peripheral control board 1510 evaluates the analyzed main control command and the received sub-internally issued command, and sets the corresponding effect SW to ON. Specifically, it is compared with the effect SW determination data stored in the peripheral control ROM 1530b, and it is determined whether or not the data matching the received command is registered. It is determined whether or not data matching the received command is registered in the command sequence of the effect SW determination data, and if there is matching data, peripheral control is performed based on the effect SW number corresponding to the command sequence. The effect SW flag stored in the RAM 1530c is set to ON.

The effect SW determination data is composed of two types of information, and the first information is an effect SW determination command sequence for turning on the effect SW. The effect SW judgment command sequence is not a fixed length, and it is possible to combine multiple command values, main control command values and sub-internal command values, and peripheral control internal issuance command values and peripheral control internal command values. .. For example, the fluctuation start specification command value and the probability state specification command value transmitted from the main control board 1310 are defined side by side, or the background specification command of the peripheral control internal issuance command value and the command value of the lottery result of the mini character notice are defined side by side. It is possible.

By defining multiple commands side by side, for example, if the mini characters that are produced and displayed for each background are different even for the same mini character notice, the background command value is determined, and after the background is specified, the mini character command value is determined. For the first time, it will be possible to identify the production of the mini character corresponding to the background, but it will be necessary to make multiple judgments for the number of commands. On the other hand, as in the present embodiment, by defining the background designation command and the command value of the lottery result of the mini character notice side by side, the effect SW corresponding to the command value can be a mini character corresponding to the background. It is not necessary to judge a plurality of times, and even for an effect defined by a combination of a plurality of commands, a corresponding effect can be specified in the same manner as an effect defined by a single command. Further, since it is possible to define a plurality of effect SWs for the same command value, it is possible to activate a plurality of effect SWs at the same time with a single command value.

The second information of the effect SW determination data is the effect SW number, which is the index number of the effect SW flag array. The effect SW determination data is registered for all the effect SWs by the combination of the effect SW determination command value and the effect SW number.

From the above, as shown in FIG. 356, when the command "0x103001" is received, the effect SW number 100 "LCDSW_LEFDW_S1" is registered in the effect SW determination data, so that the effect SW flag stored in the RAM is stored. Set lcdsw_flg [LCDSW_LEFDW_S1] to ON.

As described above, by setting the effect SW flag corresponding to the command, as shown in FIGS. 353 to 355, a predetermined process is called when the liquid crystal display effect scheduler data for executing the corresponding advance notice effect is executed. Is done.

Further, in the effect SW command analysis module, a function for executing an effect based on the effect SW is defined. An example of these functions will be described below. FIG. 357 is a diagram illustrating an example of a function defined in the effect SW command analysis module of the present embodiment. Each function takes an effect SW number (LEDSW number) as an argument.

LEDSW_TST is a function that determines whether or not the effect SW number is ON from a steady-state program or a called-back program. LEDSW_SET is a function for turning on the effect SW from a steady program or a called back program, instead of activating the effect SW by a command.

LEDSW_OFF is a function that turns off the effect SW from a steady-state program or a callback program. Further, when the attribute of "all reset" is defined in the attribute of the effect SW, the reset target effect SW is based on the "reset target effect SW group ID" of the "effect SW information table" corresponding to the effect SW number. Set all effect SWs belonging to the group to OFF.

LEDSW_GET is a function that acquires the attribute information of the target effect SW from the steady-state program or the called back program. LCDSW_ATIMER is a function that acquires the frame time from the activation of the active effect SW from the steady-state program or the called back program.

[20-4. Implementation example of production switch]
Next, an implementation example of control using the effect switch will be described. FIGS. 358 to 363 are diagrams showing a part of the program code for executing the control using the effect switch in the present embodiment. The program code shown in each figure is written in C language.

As described above, the effect SW is set for each display target, still image, and moving image in the liquid crystal layer table, the liquid crystal effect common block, the liquid crystal effect block, the liquid crystal effect scheduler data, and the liquid crystal effect scheduler data. Since the effect SW is set for all the effect blocks, the process based on the effect SW is always called back when the effect block is executed. Even if it is not necessary to execute a specific process, the callback is executed, the judgment that the specific process is not performed is made in the callback function, and the callback function is terminated.

FIG. 358 is a diagram for explaining the details of the configuration of the effect SW information table of the present embodiment, (A) is an example of a program code for defining the effect SW information table, and (B) is a bit assignment of the effect SW control information. , (C) is a diagram showing an example of the production SW group.

The effect SW information table is configured based on the effect SW information table management structure shown in (A), and is an effect SW group ID, an effect SW group ID to be reset, an effect SW control information (effect SW attribute), and an effect SW. Includes command information address and effect replacement information table information.

The effect SW group ID is identification information of the effect SW group to which the corresponding effect SW belongs. The production SW group is grouped by functions such as a production SW for performing the same (similar) notice production, a production SW for hold display, and a production SW for notification. ing. The effect SW group ID is represented by bits, and one effect SW can belong to a plurality of effect SW groups.

The reset target effect SW group ID is identification information for designating the effect SW group for setting the effect SW to OFF when "reset all effect SW" is specified in the "attrib bit assignment" described later. As a result, it is possible to collectively specify the effect SWs that cancel (reset) the processing at the same time when the effect SWs are switched. The effect SW group ID to be reset is represented by bits like the effect SW group ID, and it is possible to specify a plurality of groups.

The effect SW control information is information that defines the function of the effect SW, and specifically includes liquid crystal effect SW full reset information, replacement information, special control information, and passive / active information. Further, the effect SW control information is composed of 16 bits, and each bit defines the function of the effect SW. The bits corresponding to the function of the effect SW are as shown in FIG. 358 (B), and the contents will be described below.

The passive (PASSIVE) / active (ACTIVE) information indicates an evaluation method of the effect SW, and when the bit is "0", it is "PASSIVE", and when it is "1", it is "ACTIVE". In the passive mode, even if the command to activate the effect switch is received multiple times during the period in which the effect switch is defined, the drawing effect corresponding to the effect switch is performed only once, and in the active mode, the effect is produced in the period in which the effect switch is defined. When the command to activate the SW is received multiple times, the effect is re-executed for the number of times the corresponding effect is received. Active is used when the drawing effect corresponding to the button press is displayed when the button is pressed multiple times within the button validity period.

The special control information (special control behavior) is information that specifies whether or not to call a default callback function when evaluating the effect SW. When the bit is set to "1", the callback function on the user side is called instead of the callback function on the system side.

The replacement information is information that calls a callback function for effect replacement when evaluating the effect SW. When the bit is set to "1", the predefined replacement callback function is called at the time of the effect SW evaluation defined for each display target, still image, and moving image in the liquid crystal effect scheduler data. Is done.

The liquid crystal display SW full reset information is information that specifies whether or not to set the effect SW belonging to the effect group designated at the time of evaluation of the effect SW to OFF. When the bit is set to "1", the effect SWs belonging to all the groups set in the "reset target effect SW group ID" are set to OFF at the time of the effect SW evaluation.

Here, the description returns to FIG. 358 (A). As the effect SW command information address, the defined command information is output when the effect SW is set to ON at the time of the effect SW evaluation. The output command is stored in the reference destination of the effect SW command information address, and the output command executes the control or effect of a new effect SW.

The effect SW replacement table information is a replacement table in which the data to be replaced is defined when "1" is set in the replacement information bit of the effect SW control information (when "with replacement" is specified). Address is stored. Details of the replacement table will be described later with reference to FIG. 361.

Next, the effect SW group will be described. In the present embodiment, it is managed as an effect group, such as when a plurality of related effect SWs are set. The effect group includes an effect SW group ID, an active effect SW head ID, an active effect SW number, a passive effect SW head ID, and a passive effect SW number.

The effect SW group ID is an identifier of the effect SW group. In the effect SW group, the active effect SW and the passive effect SW are stored in a continuous area. The active effect SW head ID is identification information of the effect SW located at the head of the active effect SW belonging to the effect SW group. The number of active effect SWs is the number of active effect SWs arranged from the effect SWs corresponding to the active effect SW head ID. The passive effect SW head ID is identification information of the effect SW located at the head of the passive effect SW belonging to the effect SW group. The number of passive effect SWs is the number of passive effect SWs arranged from the effect SWs corresponding to the passive effect SW head ID. As described above, by defining the effect SW group ID as the effect SW group ID to be reset, when "effect SW full reset" is specified in the "attrib bit assignment", the continuous effect belonging to the effect SW group ID. It is possible to set a plurality of passive effect SWs and a plurality of continuous active effect SWs to OFF at the same time.

FIG. 359 is a diagram showing an example of a program code that defines an effect SW number corresponding to the effect SW in the present embodiment. In the program code shown in FIG. 359, a specific numerical value is defined for the effect SW number by using an enumeration type (enum). In the present embodiment, the work area and the effect information table can be referred to by using the effect SW number as an index.

By defining the effect SW number as an enumeration type in this way, it is not necessary to directly handle the effect SW number as a numerical value when setting or referring to the effect SW number in the program, and the readability of the program can be improved.

Next, the effect SW flag and the effect SW information table will be described. FIG. 360 is a diagram showing an example of program data that defines the effect SW flag and the effect SW information table of the present embodiment, (A) shows the effect SW flag, and (B) shows the effect SW information table.

The effect SW flag is a flag indicating whether or not (ON / OFF) the processing based on the corresponding effect SW is executed on the callback function side that has called back. As shown in (A), the effect SW flag is stored in a byte-type array variable, and the index of the array corresponds to the effect SW number. “1” (ON) is set when the effect SW corresponding to the effect SW number is executed, and “0” (OFF) is set when the effect SW is not executed.

The effect SW information table is defined by the effect SW information table management structure shown in FIG. 358 (A), and each element of the effect SW information table is read at the time of program execution and is not updated unless the program data is changed. It has become. Further, the effect SW information table is stored in an array indexed by the effect SW number as in the effect SW flag, and data corresponding to all the effect SWs is stored.

Subsequently, the effect SW replacement table information and the effect SW replacement table for performing the effect replacement will be described. The effect SW replacement table information is included in the effect SW information table as shown in FIG. 358 (A). FIG. 361 is a diagram showing an example of the effect SW replacement table information included in the effect SW information table of the present embodiment and the program data defining the effect SW replacement table, and FIG. 361 shows the effect SW replacement table information, (B). ) Indicates the effect SW replacement table.

FIG. 361 (A) is program data showing the configuration of the effect SW replacement table information “lcdsw_cchanege_info_lefdw_s1”. The effect SW replacement table information stores the address of the effect SW replacement table, the effect SW master data, and the effect SW replacement data. The address of the effect SW replacement table is the address of the table in which the actual replacement material number is stored.

The effect SW master data is the effect SW data defined in the liquid crystal effect scheduler data, and in the case of "lcdsw_cchanege_info_lefdw_s1", the case where the black color is black corresponds to this (LCDSW_LEFDW_S1_BLK). The replacement data is information indicating the material to be replaced from the master data. For example, there is a case where the ink color is replaced with white (LCDSW_LEFDW_S1_WHI), and the material information is replaced with the corresponding replacement data by evaluating the effect SW.

FIG. 361 (B) is program data showing the configuration of the effect SW replacement table “lcdsw_cchanege_lefdw_s1”. In the effect SW replacement table, first, the number of columns and the number of rows of the material number defined in the replacement table are defined, and in the present embodiment, the number of columns is 1 and the number of rows is 4. After defining the number of columns and the number of rows, information indicating the replacement material is stored. In the present embodiment, the replacement information has a one-dimensional table structure, but there is no problem with a two-dimensional or three-dimensional table structure.

As a specific replacement method, first, the effect SW replacement table information is referred to, and all the effect SW effect switch master data and the effect SW replacement data defined in the effect SW replacement table information are evaluated. At this time, one of the effect SWs defined in the effect SW replacement table information is set to ON by the command issued as a result of the effect lottery. Here, it is assumed that the effect SW replacement data (LCDSW_LEFDW_S1_WHI) is set to ON. The same row of the effect SW replacement table is specified by using the number of rows of the effect SW set to ON in the effect SW replacement table information as an index. The material number (CG_MOVE_LEFDW_S1_WHI) corresponds to the line of the production SW replacement data (LCDSW_LEFDW_S1_WHI) in the production replacement data, and the material number to be replaced is specified. The material number is an index number that identifies a still image or moving image on the CGROM.

[21. Layer configuration]
Next, the layer for displaying images and moving images will be described. The layer can be used for general purposes by dividing the liquid crystal display object into a plurality of areas (layers, layers) and drawing the layer. For example, by separating the background layer, it is possible to draw in a common method even if the displayed character is changed.

In the present embodiment, by individually storing and managing a table (layer information table) for storing layer information, it is configured so that even if a part of the layer is changed, the other layers are not affected. Can be done.

FIG. 362 is a diagram showing an example of program data defining the layer information table of the present embodiment, (A) is a list storing addresses for storing each layer information table, and (B) is a layer information table (background). For). The above-mentioned effect SW is also defined in the layer information table, and the callback function is called with the effect SW as a trigger, and whether or not to execute the corresponding liquid crystal layer table based on the information of the effect SW in the callback function is determined. decide. For example, when the effect SW (LEDSW_BG_RIV) is ON, the river background layer table (direct_layer01_common0002) is executed. Further, FIG. 363 is a diagram showing an example of program data defining the layer information table of the present embodiment, (A) is the content of the layer information table (first half of the notice 1), and (B) is the layer information table (notice). The contents of the first half 2) are shown. Both the layer information tables 1 and 2 in the first half of the notice determine the layer table to be executed by the effect SW, like the layer information table for the background.

In the present embodiment, as shown in FIG. 362 (A), a layer information table for a background, a symbol display, a first half notice, a big hit effect, an accessory operation, a hold display, and the like is defined.

Further, FIG. 362 (B) shows a layer information table for the background, and in the production in the present embodiment, the sea background, the mountain background, and the river background are defined, and further, the background according to the game state (time reduction). Medium background, high accuracy medium background) are also defined. Further, it is possible to add variations such as changing a part of the background color by the effect SW.

FIG. 363 (A) shows a layer information table for the first half of the notice 1, in which a roulette notice, a blackout notice, and a window notice are defined, and a command for clearing the notice is also defined. FIG. 363 (B) shows a layer information table for the first half of the notice 1, and a step-up notice, a button mini character notice, and a conversation notice are defined, and as in the case of the first half of the notice 1, the layer table for clearing the notice is defined. Is also defined. The layer table for clearing the notice is used to end the drawing of the notice executed in the layer table of each notice defined in the layer information table of each notice. Specifically, the effect SW group ID of the notice layer is defined in the effect SW group ID to be reset of the effect SW control information of the effect SW described above, and the “effect SW full reset” is defined in the “attrib bit assignment”. Then, when the effect SW (LEDSW_YKK_CLR) is set to ON, all the advance notice effect SWs belonging to the effect SW group ID defined in the effect SW group ID to be reset are set to OFF, and the drawing corresponding to the effect SW is set. Is closed and hidden. The layer table for clearing the notice is empty data because it does not produce anything.

A record for termination judgment is stored at the end of the area allocated to the list for storing the layer table and the table for storing layer information, and when the record for termination judgment is detected, it is determined that the data reading has been completed. It becomes possible to do. This makes it possible to dynamically change the amount of data (number of records) without setting the number of elements for each list or table in advance.

[22. Implementation example of step-up notice]
Subsequently, an implementation example of the advance notice effect using the liquid crystal effect block data (common block) will be described by taking a step-up advance notice effect as an example.

[22-1. Production layer table / LCD production block data]
FIG. 364 is a diagram showing an example of program data defining the liquid crystal layer table and the liquid crystal display common block in the present embodiment, (A) is the liquid crystal layer table of the step-up notice effect, and (B) is the liquid crystal display common block. The configuration of is shown.

As shown in FIG. 364 (A), in the liquid crystal layer table corresponding to the step-up notice effect, the number of liquid crystal display common blocks registered in the liquid crystal layer table and the number of liquid crystal display common blocks are the same as the number of liquid crystal display common blocks. It is defined as a pair with the total number of drawing frames and the effect SW. In this embodiment, the total number of drawing frames (580) frames, the effect SW “LCDSW_STEPUP”, and the common block “LCD_COMMONBLK_STEPUP” are defined. It is determined whether or not to execute the callback based on the effect SW "LCDSW_STEPUP" and execute the common block "LCD_COMMONBLK_STEPUP" based on the information of the effect SW "LCDSW_STEPUP" in the callback function.

The liquid crystal display common block "LCD_COMMONBLK_STEPUP" is defined in the order of the effect SW, the total number of drawing frames, the loop start frame position, the playback time, and the liquid crystal effect block. As shown in FIG. 364 (B), when there are a plurality of liquid crystal display blocks, a plurality of lines are defined in the same format. After the step-up notice 4, a terminal is set so that the number of steps can be increased or decreased by adding or deleting the liquid crystal display block. For example, when adding the step-up notice 5, data corresponding to the step-up notice 5 may be added between the step-up notice 4 and the end.

The effect SW controls whether or not the corresponding liquid crystal effect block can be executed based on the set value, similarly to the effect SW defined in the layer table. The total number of drawing frames defines the total number of production frames of the liquid crystal display block. Explaining using the step-up notice 1 on the first line, it is defined that the liquid crystal display block of the step-up notice 1 is reproduced in (150) frames. The loop start frame position is a frame position for determining which display data frame to return to after the reproduction of the liquid crystal display block “LCD_YKK_STEPUP_SU1” on the first line is completed.

The playback time is the playback time of the liquid crystal display block "LCD_YKK_STEPUP_SU1". The relationship between the total playback time, the loop start frame position, and the playback time is that the playback time is the playback time of the LCD effect block "LCD_YKK_STEPUP_SU1". When loop playback is performed from the beginning or the middle of, the number of frames to be looped is added to the playback time, and the added number of frames is defined as the total playback time. Step-up notice 1 Since the playback time of the LCD production block of "LCD_YKK_STEPUP_SU1" is (150) frames, if the latter 50 frames are looped twice after the playback of the LCD production block "LCD_YKK_STEPUP_SU1" is completed, it will be played back at the total playback time. This can be achieved by defining (250) frames of time (150) frames + loop playback time (50 × 2) frames and defining (100) frames at the loop start frame position. By using the loop playback function, it is possible to achieve an effect in which the symbol is not fixed and fluctuates during a pseudo-continuous effect.

Further, the reason why the loop start frame is defined as the frame immediately before the end of playback even though the total playback time and the playback time of the liquid crystal display block "LCD_YKK_STEPUP_SU1" of the present embodiment are the same is due to some problem. If the next production common block is not executed, the drawing will not be updated, and in order to prevent the LCD screen from stopping, drawing is repeated based on the loop start point when the total playback time is exceeded.

In the present embodiment, when the effects from step-up notice 1 to step-up notice 3 are executed, the control by the liquid crystal display common block "LCD_COMMONBLK_STEPUP" is performed by stepping up after executing the lottery of the notice related to the effect on the peripheral control board 1530. Peripheral control internal commands related to the notice production, step-up notice 1 command, step-up notice 2 command, and step-up notice 3 command are issued. Subsequently, the step-up 1 effect SW “LEDSW_YKK_STEP_SU1”, the step-up 2 effect SW “LEDSW_YKK_STEP_SU2”, and the step-up 3 effect SW “LEDSW_YKK_STEP_SU3” are set to ON in response to the issued command. On the other hand, the step-up 4 effect SW "LEDSW_YKK_STEP_SU4" remains set to OFF because the step-up notice 4 command has not been issued.

After setting the effect SW, the callback is executed based on all the effect SWs defined in the liquid crystal effect common block "LCD_COMMONBLK_STEPUP", and the callback function is called. In the called callback function, it is determined whether or not each effect SW is set to ON, and the liquid crystal display block corresponding to the effect SW set to ON is executed. In the LCD production common block "LCD_COMMONBLK_STEPUP", "LEDSW_YKK_STEP_SU1", "LEDSW_YKK_STEP_SU2", and "LEDSW_YKK_STEP_SU3" are set to ON, so the LCD production blocks "LCD_YKK_STEPUP_SU1" and "LCD_YKK_STEP_SU1" and "LCD_YKK_STEP_SU2" are executed, respectively. On the other hand, since "LEDSW_YKK_STEP_SU4" is set to OFF, "LCD_YKK_STEPUP_SU4" is not executed. As described above, since it is possible to define a plurality of liquid crystal display blocks in the common block for liquid crystal display and control whether or not to execute the liquid crystal display block by using the effect SW, it is possible to execute a combination of a plurality of notices. In addition, it is possible to switch the display / non-display of each effect.

Next, the contents of the liquid crystal display block of each step in the step-up notice will be described. FIG. 365 is a diagram showing an example of program data that defines the liquid crystal display blocks (LCD_YKK_STEPUP_SU1 to 4) of each step of the step-up notice.

As for the contents of the liquid crystal display block, first, the total number of data defined in the liquid crystal display block is defined. The number of execution frames, the function, or the liquid crystal display effect scheduler data The functions used in the liquid crystal display effect block are two types, "LCD_NOP" and "LCD_NULL", and the liquid crystal display effect scheduler data. "LCD_NOP" is a function that waits for the number of execution frames, and "LCD_NULL" is a function that indicates the end of the liquid crystal effect block.

Subsequently, the liquid crystal display block will be specifically described. Explaining with reference to the liquid crystal display block "LCD_YKK_STEPUP_SU2", the first (3) indicates that "LCD_YKK_STEPUP_SU2" is composed of three lines of data (the number of steps is three). In the next line, since the number of execution frames (120) is specified as "LCD_NOP", weights are given from the start of execution of the liquid crystal display block to (120) frames. (120) After waiting between frames, the liquid crystal display scheduler data "LCD_DIR_STEPUP_SU2" is executed for the number of frames corresponding to the number of execution frames (175). After that, "LCD_NULL" for which the number of execution frames (1) is specified is executed, and the execution of the liquid crystal display block "LCD_YKK_STEPUP_SU2" is completed.

As explained in FIG. 352, at the end of the step-up notice of each stage of the step-up notice, it is realized by using the weight of "LCD_NOP" to realize the execution of the development effect to the step-up notice of the next stage. doing.

Specifically, the liquid crystal display effect block "LCD_DIR_STEPUP_SU1" does not perform weighting, and starts executing the liquid crystal display effect scheduler data "LCD_DIR_STEPUP_SU1". The liquid crystal display effect block "LCD_DIR_STEPUP_SU2" executes the weight by "LCD_NOP", waits for (120) frames, and then starts the execution of the liquid crystal effect scheduler data "LCD_DIR_STEPUP_SU2", so that the liquid crystal display effect scheduler data "LCD_DIR_STEPUP_SU1" is released. The liquid crystal display scheduler data "LCD_DIR_STEPUP_SU2" starts execution when (120) frames have elapsed since the execution was started. As a result, at the end of the step-up notice 1, it is possible to repeatedly execute the development effect to the step-up notice 2 of the next stage.

Further, it is possible to define a plurality of liquid crystal effect scheduler data in the liquid crystal effect block in chronological order, and when the liquid crystal effect scheduler data is continuously defined, the liquid crystal effect scheduler data corresponding to the period of the number of execution frames. Is executed, and the LCD effect scheduler data of the next line is executed.

In the effect scheduler data of the step-up notice effect 2, after the total number of functions is defined, the function NOP for waiting while executing the step-up notice effect 1, the function LCD_YKK_STEPUP_SU2 for executing the step-up notice effect 2, Finally, the function LCD_NULL that indicates the end of scheduler data is defined. The step-up notice 3 and the step-up notice 4 are also described in the same manner.

[23. Implementation example of button mini character production]
The liquid crystal display scheduler data for the step-up notice effect has been explained above. Subsequently, an effect in which a mini character appears on the liquid crystal display screen by prompting the operation of the effect button during the fluctuation of the design and operating the effect button within a predetermined period will be described.

[23-1. Button mini character production mode]
FIG. 366 is a diagram illustrating an outline of the button mini character effect of the present embodiment. The button mini character effect is executed when an execution lottery is performed when the main command is received or when the fluctuation starts, and when the winner is won. In the button mini character production, when the production button is operated during the reception period of the button operation input, a predetermined character (mini character) is displayed on the liquid crystal display screen. In addition, the first half valid period and the second half valid period are set as the button operation input acceptance period, and the mini characters are displayed in different modes.

To explain further, when the execution lottery for the button mini character production is won and 90 frames (f) have passed from the start of the fluctuation, the first half of the button mini character is valid. The valid period of the first half of the button mini character is 90 frames, and an image (moving image) prompting the button to be pressed is displayed on the liquid crystal display screen at the start of the valid period of the first half of the button mini character. Button mini character If you operate the button during the first half of the validity period, the mini character will be displayed. Specifically, as will be described later, when the button is operated during the valid period of the first half of the button mini character, the effect SW for displaying the mini character is set to ON, and the corresponding liquid crystal effect block is executed by the callback.

If you operate the button during the second half of the button mini character validity period, the mini character will be displayed in the same way as the first half of the second half of the button mini character. In FIG. 308, the character is displayed in a mode different from the case where the button is operated during the first half valid period of the button mini character, but it may be displayed in the same mode, or when the button is operated during the first half valid period of the button mini character. The characters may be displayed in different modes as long as possible.

If you operate the button during the second half of the button mini character validity period, the mini character will be displayed in the same way as the first half of the button mini character. In FIG. 366, the character is displayed in a mode different from the case where the button is operated during the first half valid period of the button mini character, but the character may be displayed in the same mode, or when the button is operated during the first half valid period of the button mini character. The characters may be displayed in different modes as long as possible.

[23-2. LCD production common block]
FIG. 367 is a diagram showing an example of program data that defines a liquid crystal layer table corresponding to the button mini character effect in the present embodiment.

As shown in FIG. 367, the liquid crystal layer table "direct_layer05_common0002" corresponding to the button mini character effect has the number of liquid crystal effect common blocks registered in the liquid crystal layer table and the number of liquid crystal effect common blocks as the total drawing frame of the liquid crystal effect common block. It is defined as a pair with the number and the production SW. In this embodiment, the total number of drawing frames (180) frames, the effect SW "LCDSW_BTN_MINIBEF", and the liquid crystal effect common block "LCD_COMMONBLK_MINIBEF" are defined. Subsequently, the total number of drawing frames (150) frames, the effect SW "LCDSW_BTN_MINIAFT", and the liquid crystal effect common block "LCD_COMMONBLK_MINIAFT" are defined. In the liquid crystal layer table "direct_layer05_common0002", first, the liquid crystal display common block "LCD_COMMONBLK_MINIBEF" is executed during the (180) frame. After that, during the (150) frame, the liquid crystal display common block "LCD_COMMONBLK_MINIAFT" is executed, and the execution of the liquid crystal layer table "direct_layer05_common0002" is completed.

Next, the configuration of the common block for each liquid crystal display of the button mini character effect will be described. FIG. 368 is a diagram showing an example of program data that defines individual common blocks for the button mini character effect in the present embodiment.

The configuration and control method of the liquid crystal display common blocks “LCD_COMMONBLK_MINIBEF” and “LCD_COMMONBLK_MINIAFT” of FIG. 368 are the same as those of the effect layer table and the liquid crystal effect block data described in FIG. 364. The effect SW "LEDSW_YKK_MINIBEF" and "LEDSW_YKK_MINIAFT" that call the callback function to determine whether to execute the liquid crystal effect block data "LCD_YKK_MINIBEF" and "LCD_YKK_MINIAFT" are active effects that define the active attribute in the effect SW control information. It becomes SW. Therefore, the drawing effect (effect block) corresponding to the effect SW is executed as many times as the number of times the button is operated.

[23-3. LCD production block data]
FIG. 369 is a diagram showing an example of program data that defines liquid crystal display effect block data for executing the button mini character effect in the present embodiment.

The configuration and control method of the liquid crystal display block data “LCD_YKK_MINIBEF” and “LCD_YKK_MINIAFT” shown in FIG. 369 are the same as those of the liquid crystal display block data described above. Explaining the processing by each liquid crystal effect block data, first, in the first half of the effect, "LCD_NOP" defined at the beginning of the liquid crystal effect block data "LCD_YKK_MINIBEF" is executed, and the weight is waited for (90) frames from the start of fluctuation. .. Subsequently, the liquid crystal display scheduler data "LCD_DIR_MINIBEF" corresponding to the valid period of the first half of the button mini character is executed for (90) frames, and the execution of the liquid crystal display block data "LCD_YKK_MINIBEF" is completed. In the latter half of the production, the "LCD_NOP" defined at the beginning of the liquid crystal display block data "LCD_YKK_MINIAFT" corresponding to the latter half of the button mini character is executed, and the weight is waited for (30) frames from the start of the fluctuation. After that, the liquid crystal display scheduler data "LCD_DIR_MINIAFT" corresponding to the latter half valid period of the button mini character is executed for (120) frames, and the execution of the liquid crystal display block data "LCD_YKK_MINIAFT" is completed.

As described above, since the production SWs "LEDSW_YKK_MINIBEF" and "LEDSW_YKK_MINIAFT" are active production SWs, the production SWs "LEDSW_YKK_MINIBEF" and "LEDSW_YKK_MINIAFT" are set to ON while the liquid crystal production scheduler data "LCD_DIR_MINIBEF" and "LCD_DIR_MINIAFT" are being executed. When the command to be executed is issued multiple times, the drawing effects corresponding to the effect SWs "LEDSW_YKK_MINIBEF" and "LEDSW_YKK_MINIAFT" are executed as many times as they are issued. In addition, the effect SW always generates a callback every frame, and the corresponding callback function is called. The control when the button is pressed is executed in the called callback function, and the callback is executed every frame even after the button press control is completed until the liquid crystal display scheduler data execution is completed. Control that the period during which the callback is executed is set as the button validity period without separately determining the button validity period by creating the LCD effect scheduler data that draws the effect during the button validity period and controlling it with the active effect SW. Is possible. For example, by repeatedly hitting a button, the number of times of repeated hits can be counted, and an effect corresponding to the number of times can be executed. In addition, the lamp can be turned on in response to a button operation by calling the sub-effect scheduler data including the function that controls the lamp in the callback function. Further, by calling the sub-effect scheduler data including the function that controls the accessory, it is possible to execute the scheduler data that operates according to the number of button operations and returns to the initial position after the button operation valid period ends. The procedure for returning the accessory to the initial position is, for example, to wait by "LCD_NOP" until the button operation valid period ends, and then execute an effect block including a function to return the accessory to the initial position.

[24. LCD production scheduler for designs]
As described above, in the present embodiment, when the notice effect is executed, it is possible to replace the drawing contents according to the game state and the expected degree of the variable display game to be the notice target. Similarly, it is also possible to replace the identification symbol to be variablely displayed in the variable display game when a predetermined condition such as a gaming state is satisfied. The outline of the procedure for replacing the identification symbol will be described below.

In the gaming machine of the present embodiment, the variable display of the identification symbols is stopped in the order of the left symbol, the right symbol, and the middle symbol, and reels in which the identification symbols are arranged in a predetermined order are assigned to each row. An identification symbol is drawn on each reel in a mode corresponding to the game state, and each reel is defined for each mode. The variable display of the identification symbol is realized by sequentially displaying the identification symbol drawn on each reel together with the background image.

The display of the identification symbol is updated for each frame and the effect SW is assigned, as in the case of the advance notice effect. In the liquid crystal display effect scheduler data for displaying the identification symbol, the index number on the CGROM of the still image or moving image for displaying the identification symbol and the effect SW corresponding to the index number on the CGROM are defined as master data. .. A reel number is defined in the effect SW for replacing the identification symbol. The reel number represents a unique identification number displayed for each game status and effect. For example, if the identification symbols displayed on the mountain background, river background, and sea background are different, the left symbol of the mountain background is R0, the middle symbol is R1, the right symbol is R2, and the left symbol of the river background is R3, the middle symbol. Is R4, the right symbol is R5, the left symbol of the mountain background is R6, the middle symbol is R7, and the right symbol is R8. By using the reel number, it is possible to individually correspond to the game state and the effect, and it is also possible to specify the display position of the identification symbol.

In addition, the reel number includes a reel index number. The reel index number is defined for each number of reels of the identification symbol. The reel arrangement is the design of the identification symbol and the identification symbol when the identification symbols are displayed in the order of 1,2,3,4,5,6,7,8,9,0 and then returned to 1 after 0. The reel index defines the total number and the display order of the identification symbols. Multiple reel indexes can also be defined.

Further, the table for replacing the identification symbol includes a replacement table for the identification symbol corresponding to the reel number and the reel index number corresponding to the reel number, and a reel replacement work number table for reel replacement. In the replacement table of the identification symbol, the index number on the CGROM of the still image or the moving image corresponding to the reel arrangement is defined for each reel index.

The identification symbol is replaced by using the reel index replacement work number table in addition to the identification symbol replacement table. In the reel index replacement work number table, work numbers for reel replacement on one or more RAMs corresponding to each reel index are defined. It is displayed on the reel replacement work when it can be recognized that the identification symbol is stopped or stopped by the player, such as the temporary stop symbol number value of the identification symbol related to the pseudo-continuous fluctuation and the finalized symbol number value of the identification symbol. The identification symbol number value is stored in advance by the peripheral control program at the start of fluctuation according to the effect content.

Explaining the specification of the data for replacing the identification symbol, when the callback is executed based on the effect SW for replacing the identification symbol, the reel index number corresponding to the reel number is set in the callback function for replacing the identification symbol. Based on this, the target reel index replacement work number is specified from the reel index replacement work number table. Further, the identification symbol number value stored in the reel index replacement work is taken out, and the reel index replacement work number is corrected based on the display number of the identification symbols produced in the liquid crystal display effect scheduler data. Similarly, based on the reel index number corresponding to the reel number, the corresponding replacement table is specified in the replacement table of the identification symbol, and the index number on the CGROM of the still image or moving image to be replaced in the specified table is corrected. Specify using the index replacement work number.

Further, in the replacement of the identification symbol, the index number on the CGROM of the master on the liquid crystal display scheduler data is not used even if the master effect defined on the liquid crystal effect scheduler data is selected in the same manner as the effect replacement. , The display list command is always created using the index number on the master CGROM defined in the replacement table, and the effect content is drawn.

Further, by replacing the identification symbol every frame, it is possible to immediately return to the normal display even if an erroneous identification symbol is displayed due to the generation of noise or the like. In addition, by setting the reel according to the game state, the player can grasp the game state regardless of the content of the identification symbol even if a problem occurs in the replacement of the identification symbol due to an error. , It is possible to suppress the deterioration of the player's interest.

[25. Callback Timing]
Subsequently, the timing of occurrence of the callback when the effect SW is detected will be described. In the present embodiment, the drawing division can be determined by the parameters passed to the function in the callback function to be called back.

FIG. 370 is a diagram showing an example of a drawing division that can be determined in the callback function at the time of executing the callback by the effect SW of the present embodiment.

"LCD_EFF_BEF_LCD_A" causes a callback before the liquid crystal A drawing starts, and "LCD_EFF_AFT_LCD_A" causes a callback after the liquid crystal A drawing starts. Further, "LCD_EFF_BEF_LCD_B" causes a callback before the liquid crystal B drawing starts, and "LCD_EFF_AFT_LCD_B" causes a callback after the liquid crystal B drawing starts. The liquid crystal A and the liquid crystal B are separate liquid crystals, and by making it possible to determine the completion of drawing before the start of drawing of each liquid crystal, drawing is performed on the liquid crystal B when the drawing of the liquid crystal A is completed, or the drawing of the liquid crystal B is completed. With this as an opportunity, it becomes possible to draw on the liquid crystal A.

"LCD_EFF_BEF_ANIM" causes a callback before all drawing is started, and "LCD_EFF_AFT_ANIM" causes a callback after all drawing is completed. By making a judgment before the start of drawing, the frame buffer can be initialized with the required background color before drawing, and by making a judgment at the end of drawing, it is possible to instruct other production devices to execute the production when the drawing is completed. It will be possible.

"LCD_EFF_BEF_ANIM" causes a callback before the drawing of the corresponding layer starts, and "LCD_EFF_AFT_ANIM" causes a callback after the drawing of the corresponding layer is completed. A predetermined process can be executed before or after the drawing of a specific layer is started or completed. For example, if a plurality of notifications are generated at the time of drawing the notification layer by performing the determination before the start of layer drawing, the display of the notification having a high priority can be enlarged and drawn. In addition, by making a judgment after the start of layer drawing, the effect is drawn around the symbol drawn at the timing when the symbol with high expectation stops before the symbol layer drawing starts, so that the symbol with high expectation is drawn. It is possible to display the effect around the symbol only when is stopped.

As described above, the drawing division can be specified and a predetermined process can be executed before or after the drawing is started or completed. It is also possible to generate a callback for each common block. As shown in FIG. 370, "LCD_EFF_BEF_COMBLK" can generate a callback before the start of drawing the common block, and "LCD_EFF_AFT_COMBLK" can generate a callback after the completion of drawing the common block. By making a judgment before the start of drawing the common block, the execution of a specific liquid crystal display block corresponding to a single effect constituting the liquid crystal display common block can be stopped to stop drawing the effect, or the liquid crystal display common block can be stopped. By making a determination after the drawing is completed, it is possible to execute a liquid crystal display common block different from the liquid crystal display common block scheduled to be executed in advance at the start of the fluctuation.

In addition, "LCD_EFF_BEF_DIR" generates a callback before the start of drawing the liquid crystal display block in the common block for the liquid crystal display, and "LCD_EFF_AFT_DIR" generates a callback after the drawing of the liquid crystal display block is completed. Liquid crystal display block It is possible to change the liquid crystal display block to be executed based on the result of external input by the player by making a determination before the start of drawing. Further, by making a determination after the start of drawing the liquid crystal display block, it is possible to add a new drawing to the content drawn by the liquid crystal display block based on the drawing content of the liquid crystal display block that draws a single effect. Further, "LCD_EFF_BEF_CAST" can generate a callback before the start of drawing the still image and the moving image in the liquid crystal display scheduler data, and "LCD_EFF_AFT_CAST" can generate the callback after the drawing of the still image and the moving image is completed. Various effects can be replaced by making a judgment before the start of drawing a still image or a moving image. Further, by making a determination after the drawing of the still image or the moving image is completed, it is possible to add the drawing of the effect according to the replacement contents of the various effects.

As described above, since the control that can be realized differs depending on the drawing division, it is very important to determine the drawing division in the various callback functions that have been called back.

[26. Production switch group management]
As described above, in the present embodiment, a plurality of procedures (functions) are managed by the liquid crystal display schedule data for each liquid crystal display block, and an image or a moving image is drawn for each layer based on the state of the gaming machine and the classification of the effect. Will be done. Further, as described above, one or a plurality of effect SWs are set for each layer.

When the effect is executed, an image or the like is drawn in parallel on a plurality of layers, and a plurality of liquid crystal display scheduler data are executed in parallel. For example, in the step-up notice effect, when the step-up notice 1 is executed, the background layer background is drawn, and the identification symbol is drawn on the symbol layer. Further, the advance notice layer (notice_first half 1 layer) is drawn by the step-up notice 1. FIG. 371 is a diagram showing an example of drawing results of individual layers and drawing results of all layers at the time of executing the advance notice effect of the present embodiment.

At this time, one or a plurality of effect SWs are set for each layer, but if it is attempted to manage these effect SWs individually, the processing may become complicated. Therefore, in the present embodiment, the effect SWs are grouped and managed for each layer, the state of the gaming machine, and the division of the effect.

For example, the effect SW assigned to each layer is grouped. Specifically, as shown in FIG. 371, the effect SW group background, the effect SW group symbol, and the effect SW group notice are configured corresponding to the background layer, the symbol layer, and the notice layer. These effect SW groups may be further grouped and managed, and the effect SW may be managed for each state of the gaming machine and the division of the effect.

By grouping and managing the effect SWs in this way, individual effect elements can be collectively controlled. For example, when changing the currently displayed background and the symbol display and hold display according to the background to another background when a new fluctuation is started, the background layer, the symbol layer, and the hold layer are divided according to the background. The effect SWs are grouped, and the effect SWs belonging to the group are collectively set to OFF in the callback function using the callback. This makes it possible to hide the symbol display and hold display according to the current background together with the background, and by performing the symbol display and hold display according to the new background in the corresponding layers, a plurality of patterns can be displayed. It is possible to switch the drawing only for the necessary effect display from the plurality of effect displays displayed by superimposing the layers.

In addition, in the effect that spans the game state, for example, in the big hit effect from the start of the change to the end of the change, the symbol is hidden and the background is changed to the big hit effect. It is also possible to display continuously. In such control, the effect group to be hidden is defined in the reset target effect SW group ID, and the effect SW for which all the effect SW resets are specified is set to the liquid crystal display common block at the start of fluctuation. It can be realized by defining it as a block common to the liquid crystal display at the start of the big hit effect.

[27. Exception common block]
In the present embodiment described so far, in order to enhance the interest of the player, in order to improve the efficiency of controlling the complicated game production, all the productions are managed as common blocks in block units of a certain length. As a result, the production block is selected according to the fluctuation pattern and the result of the advance notice lottery, and by drawing based on the selected production block, a series of productions such as a variable display of the symbol and a big hit are realized, and complicated control is performed. The control to synchronize the drawing contents with the sub-effects such as the characters, lamps, and sound output was realized without doing so. In the common block, a period divided at a predetermined timing is set from the start of the symbol fluctuation to the finalization of the symbol, and these periods are assigned to the fluctuation pattern, for example, corresponding to the first half fluctuation and the second half fluctuation. It was set according to the fluctuation time of the symbol.

With this configuration, the common block can be used for general purposes in a plurality of types of fluctuation patterns. Furthermore, by ensuring the independence between the advance notice effect executed in the first half variation and the advance notice effect executed in the second half variation, the degree of freedom in combining common blocks can be increased.

However, since the common blocks are separated by a predetermined period as described above, it is difficult to realize an effect that continues from the start of the fluctuation to the end of the change simply by combining the effect blocks of a certain length. When executing such an effect that spans a plurality of periods, in addition to the fact that the preceding common block and the succeeding common block are associated with each other and the versatility is reduced, each common block is executed independently. Therefore, there is a possibility that the control becomes complicated in order to maintain the continuity of the production. Therefore, in order to realize such an effect, it is necessary to individually create and control the program code instead of setting the program data.

Therefore, in order to solve the above-mentioned problems, in the present embodiment, not only the variable display of the symbol and the series of big hits are performed by combining the effect blocks of a certain length in all the effects, but also the length of the effect blocks. Is exceptionally configured to allow the production block length according to the production period, not a fixed length. Further, by making it possible to draw a combination of effect blocks having different effect times and drawing an effect block that straddles the combined effect blocks at the same time, it is possible to realize a drawing effect that continues from the start of the fluctuation to the end of the fluctuation.

An effect that spans a plurality of periods includes, for example, a countdown effect that counts down a number when the symbol starts to fluctuate and continues the countdown display from the first half fluctuation to the second half fluctuation. FIG. 372 is a diagram illustrating an example of a common block spanning a plurality of periods of the present embodiment, in which (A) is a symbol display and execution timing of a notice effect, and (B) is a liquid crystal display notice effect block by the common block, and , The configuration of the liquid crystal notice effect block by the common block spanning a plurality of periods is shown.

In the example shown in FIG. 372, the first half fluctuation is "normal fluctuation 12 seconds" and the second half fluctuation is "normal short reach" corresponding to the fluctuation pattern "10H03H". As shown in FIG. 372 (A), in the first half variation, the step-up notice and the BTN logo accessory fall notice are executed, and in the second half variation, the cut-in notice and the group notice are executed. The contents of each notice production are as described above. In addition, the countdown notice is executed from the start of the step-up notice to the end of the group notice.

In FIG. 372 (B), the liquid crystal display block data of the notice effect (step-up notice, BTN logo character fall notice, cut-in notice, and group notice) using the common block, and the group notice from the start of the step-up notice. It shows the structure of the production block of the countdown notice that is executed until the end. The block data corresponding to the common block is as described above.

The effect block of the countdown notice is composed of a function NOP that waits until the liquid crystal effect notice block data starts, a liquid crystal effect notice block data, and a function NOP that waits until the latter half fluctuation ends after the end of the liquid crystal effect notice block data. .. The function NOP that waits until the LCD production notice block data starts is the NOP that is executed before the step-up notice starts, and the function NOP that waits until the second half fluctuation ends is the NOP that is executed after the group notice ends. The same waiting time is set.

As described above, by making it possible to set an exception in the execution period of the effect block, it is possible to operate the common block more flexibly. Further, by setting the waiting time before and after the start of the effect, it is possible to minimize the influence of the execution timing of other effect blocks being shifted due to the exception setting. Note that the control of the exception common block is also controlled by the callback function using the effect SW in the same manner as the other common blocks.

[28. Image conversion]
For the purpose of enhancing the interest of the game and shortening the processing time related to drawing, the drawing data for one screen of the liquid crystal display is taken out from the frame buffer and stored in the storage area for capture of the VDP1540a with a built-in sound source separately from the frame buffer. So, processing processing such as reuse of images and transformation / additional drawing was performed. In this way, by temporarily storing the drawing data in another area and using it for drawing the next frame, various production expressions have been efficiently realized.

FIG. 373 is a diagram illustrating a conventional configuration in which an image is written in the frame buffer by writing the image written in each layer. As shown in FIG. 373, conventionally, the image drawn on each layer is superimposed on the frame buffer and written, and then output to the display device.

Specifically, first, the moving image or still image displayed on the background layer is written on the frame buffer by using the display list command. Next, the moving image or still image displayed on the symbol layer is overwritten on the frame buffer by using the display list command. Furthermore, the moving image or still image displayed on the preview layer is overwritten on the frame buffer by using the display list command. Finally, the moving image or still image related to the reserved layer is overwritten on the frame buffer by using the display list command, and the drawing data for one frame is created.

After that, the peripheral control board 1530 copies the drawing data for one frame to be displayed created in the frame buffer to the capture buffer separately allocated to the RAM of the sound source built-in VDP1540a. After adding a new effect around the pattern to the drawing data stored in the capture buffer, it is written back to the frame buffer to create drawing data for one frame for the next display.

By doing so, it is possible to easily create the drawing data to be displayed in the next frame simply by adding an effect to the created drawing data. However, in such image conversion by the prior art, only image conversion for one frame of drawing data can be realized, and in addition to the addition of new drawing elements for one frame of the liquid crystal drawing screen, one frame of drawing data can be realized. It is limited to enlarging or reducing the entire LCD drawing screen. It is not possible to perform image conversion on the drawing elements drawn on each layer on the capture buffer or each drawing element in the layer.

The reason why the image conversion cannot be performed for each drawing element is that the drawing elements in each effect, such as the background, the pattern, and the notice, are overwritten on the frame buffer in the layer order. It will be overwritten by the drawing element of the layer drawn from. Also, since the drawing element is a set of colored dots (dots) when it is drawn on the frame buffer, even if you try to take out the drawing element with a rectangle, it will be overwritten by another drawing element. This is because the data of the drawing element of the overwritten part is lost.

Nowadays, due to the improvement of VDP processing capacity, it is less necessary to reuse the image data for one screen of the drawn liquid crystal display, but the expression of the production is diversified for the purpose of improving the interest of the game. Therefore, it was expected that the load would increase in order to execute the complicated drawing process.

In the present embodiment, in order to solve the above-mentioned problems and perform a more diverse effect, the image data for one screen of the liquid crystal display of the created frame buffer is captured, and the captured image is deformed or newly drawn. When drawing new image data for one screen of the liquid crystal display instead of adding, the image can be dynamically changed during drawing for each effect display unit that constitutes the image data for one screen of the liquid crystal display. A complex production expression is realized by adding a new drawing.

Specifically, a single effect drawing data (notice, background, design, hold, etc.) is defined as one effect block, and the effect SW is included in the liquid crystal effect scheduler data for displaying by the effect block. Incorporate. Then, the liquid crystal effect scheduler data is executed and analyzed at the time of drawing the liquid crystal, and the process (program function) is dynamically called (callback) based on the information of the effect SW incorporated in the liquid crystal effect scheduler data.

When changing the image, instead of drawing the corresponding effect block in the liquid crystal effect scheduler data and the recalled program function on the frame buffer, it was assigned to the RAM of the sound source built-in VDP1540a separately from the frame buffer. Draws on the off-screen buffer (temporary storage of image display information). Then, after changing the image or adding a new image to the image on the off-screen buffer, the image is written back to the frame buffer. By configuring in this way, in addition to changing the image only for a specific notice, adding a new image, and replacing the effect only for the background, the image can be changed for the image in which multiple effects are superimposed, and the new image can be changed. Additions can be realized.

Hereinafter, a configuration in which the image drawn in each layer is stored in the off-screen buffer, the image stored in the off-screen buffer is converted, and the image is written in the frame buffer will be specifically described. FIG. 374 is a diagram illustrating a procedure of converting an image file stored in the off-screen buffer and then writing it to the frame buffer in the present embodiment.

As described above, one or a plurality of image conversion buffers called off-screen buffers, which are different from the frame buffer, are allocated to the RAM of the sound source built-in VDP1540a. Then, image conversion is performed by the image conversion buffer, and complicated image conversion is possible by combining the image converted on one or a plurality of off-screen buffers and the image drawn on the frame buffer.

Further explaining, the effect SW is embedded in the liquid crystal effect block data constituting each layer corresponding to the effect and each liquid crystal effect scheduler data constituting the liquid crystal effect block data, and is embedded when creating the display list command at the time of liquid crystal drawing. The callback function is called by the callback based on the effect SW, and the image conversion is performed in the callback function.

In FIG. 374, first, before starting drawing of the background layer, the drawing target is switched from the frame buffer to the off-screen buffer A in the function called back based on the effect SW. Next, at the drawing timing of each effect element of the background layer, a display list command for enlarging each effect element of the background layer is created and transmitted to the off-screen buffer A in the function called back based on the effect SW. By doing so, each enlarged background is drawn on the off-screen buffer A.

Subsequently, before starting the drawing of the symbol layer, the drawing target is switched from the frame buffer to the off-screen buffer A and drawn in the function called back based on the effect SW. Next, at the drawing timing of each effect element of the symbol layer, an effect is added to the symbol drawn on the background drawn on the off-screen buffer A in the function called back based on the effect SW. Create a display list command. By transmitting this display list command, an effect can be added to the background and the pattern drawn in the off-screen buffer A, and the image drawn in the off-screen buffer A is overwritten in the frame buffer.

Subsequently, before starting the drawing of the notice layer, the drawing target is switched from the frame buffer to the off-screen buffer B and drawn in the function called back based on the effect SW. Next, at the timing when the drawing of all the effect elements related to the advance notice layer is completed, the display list command for rotating the advance notice drawing of each effect element of the advance notice layer is executed in the function called back based on the effect SW. create. By transmitting this display list command, each notice rotated in the off-screen buffer B is drawn, and the image drawn in the off-screen buffer B is overwritten in the frame buffer.

Finally, all the effect elements of the hold layer are written to the frame buffer, and a liquid crystal drawing screen for one frame to be displayed this time is created.

By the above procedure, unlike the conventional image conversion described above, the image conversion is not performed on the entire screen, but on each layer drawing unit, the drawing element unit constituting the layer, and the image conversion regardless of the order of drawing in the frame buffer. It can be performed.

The present embodiment is characterized in that a callback based on the same effect SW is performed a plurality of times at each drawing timing within the period from the start of drawing of the liquid crystal screen for one frame to the end of drawing. The details of the types of drawing timing are as described with reference to FIG. 370 described above.

Further, by performing image conversion by callback, it is not necessary to determine or monitor whether or not the image being drawn is the target of image conversion. Furthermore, instead of starting a series of fluctuation-related drawing, the image is based on the lottery result value of the advance notice lottery and the result of the interactive operation by the user's external input at the timing of creating the display list command that draws the image to be converted. It becomes possible to determine the conversion method.

[29. RAMless transfer]
Conventionally, a display list command is created based on the animation data stored in the CGROM, and the created display list command is processed by the VDP1540a with a built-in sound source to perform drawing at the time of executing the game production. At this time, the display list command created while analyzing the animation data stored in the CGROM is stored in the buffer allocated to the peripheral control RAM 1530c, and after the display list command creation for one screen is completed, the external request DMA (transfer means) Was used to send the contents of the buffer to the VDP.

However, at present, as the production specifications become complicated and the processing load increases, the processing time such as the advance notice lottery processing at the start of fluctuation increases, while the lamp lighting data layer synthesis processing due to the increase in the number of lamp systems and the motor system The processing time of the motor data creation process due to the increase in the number is also increasing. Since the processing time of peripheral control such as production is executed in a predetermined cycle, if the above-mentioned high-load processing is executed in duplicate, there is a possibility that the processing cannot be completed within the cycle. ..

Exceptionally, if the processing cannot be completed within the cycle, if the processing cannot be completed within the cycle steadily, the game control by the main control device and the effect control by the peripheral control device should be synchronized based on the processing cycle. There was a risk that the progress of the game and the production of the game by each production device would be separated from each other, and the interest of the game would be significantly reduced.

Therefore, it is necessary to shorten the processing time of the peripheral control processing by reducing the time required for the processing having a high load in the peripheral control processing such as the effect. Therefore, in the present embodiment, the drawing process having a relatively high load in the peripheral control process, particularly the above-mentioned processing time for analyzing the animation data on the CGROM and creating a native display list command that can be processed by the VDP1540a with a built-in sound source, is set. A means for reducing the processing time and shortening the processing time of the entire peripheral control processing will be described.

First, a conventional procedure for transferring a display list command group for displaying an image on a liquid crystal display device to a VDP1540a with a built-in sound source will be described. FIG. 375 is a diagram illustrating a procedure for temporarily storing the display list command group in the peripheral control RAM 1530c and then transferring the display list command group to the sound source built-in VDP1540a.

In the procedure shown in FIG. 375, first, various liquid crystal effect scheduler data are acquired from the peripheral control ROM 1530b by the liquid crystal effect scheduler display list control module, and the liquid crystal effect scheduler data is analyzed and converted into a VDP native display list command group. The purpose of converting the liquid crystal effect scheduler data to the VDP native display list command group is that the liquid crystal effect scheduler data includes information (parameter values corresponding to the VDP register number and register number) related to the display list command to be transmitted to the VDP1540a with a built-in sound source. Therefore, it is necessary to convert the liquid crystal effect scheduler data into a VDP native display list command that can be executed by the VDP1540a with a built-in sound source. The converted VDP native display list command group is temporarily stored in the peripheral control RAM 1530c. Further, when the callback function called by the effect SW is executed when the liquid crystal effect scheduler data is executed, the liquid crystal effect scheduler data is analyzed and converted into a VDP native display list command group as necessary, and stored in the peripheral control RAM 1530c.

Then, in the process of processing the liquid crystal display effect scheduler data, the peripheral control MPU1511a sets the display list transfer to the external request DMA. As a result, the VDP native display list command group stored in the peripheral control RAM 1530c is acquired from the peripheral control RAM 1530c by the external request DMA and transferred to the sound source built-in VDP 1540a.

When the VDP1540a with a built-in sound source receives the transferred VDP native display list command, it temporarily stores it in the display list FIFO. The sound source built-in VDP1540a processes the display list stored in the display list FIFO from the beginning, and outputs an image (moving image) to the liquid crystal display device.

As described above, the display list command group for one frame is stored in the buffer of the peripheral control RAM 1530c, and the display list command group is changed from the buffer to VDP1540a by using the external request DMA in the next processing cycle in which the display list command group is created. Drawing is realized by sending. However, the process of analyzing and converting the enormous amount of liquid crystal display scheduler data for one screen into the VDP native display list command group is a heavy processing load. If a single gaming machine is configured to have multiple VDPs from different manufacturers, the liquid crystal effect scheduler data, which is an intermediate data format, is analyzed and converted into a VDP native display list command group corresponding to the VDP of each manufacturer. It becomes possible.

Therefore, in the present embodiment, a configuration is applied in which a part or all of the display list command group can be transferred to the sound source built-in VDP1540a without being stored in the peripheral control RAM 1530c. FIG. 376 is a diagram illustrating a procedure for transferring the display list command group in the present embodiment to the sound source built-in VDP1540a without storing it in the peripheral control RAM 1530c.

In the procedure shown in FIG. 376, first, the display list transfer setting is set to the external request DMA by the liquid crystal display effect scheduler display list selection management module. The external request DMA acquires the set display list command group not from the peripheral control RAM 1530c but from the peripheral control ROM 1530b.

The peripheral control ROM 1530b stores the liquid crystal effect scheduler data in the same manner as when the display list command group is temporarily stored in the peripheral control RAM 1530c, but each liquid crystal effect scheduler data is the converted VDP native display list command group. And it is composed of the interrupt display list command.

The external request DMA acquires the designated liquid crystal effect scheduler data from the peripheral control ROM 1530b and transfers it to the sound source built-in VDP1540a based on the transfer setting by the liquid crystal display scheduler display list selection management module. The sound source built-in VDP1540a temporarily stores the transferred VDP native display list command and interrupt display list command in the display list FIFO.

The sound source built-in VDP1540a extracts the VDP native display list command from the display list FIFO, analyzes and executes the extracted VDP native display list command, and writes an image to the frame buffer. Further, the analysis of the display list is interrupted when the interrupt display list command transferred together with the VDP native display list command group is analyzed and executed, and a transfer interruption request is generated for the external request DMA. After that, an interrupt is generated for the peripheral control MPU1511a.

When the peripheral control MPU1511a detects an interrupt from the VDP1540a with a built-in sound source, the interrupt processing module determines that the interrupt factor is an interrupt by an interrupt display list command, and executes a callback. In the callback function, the display is replaced and the symbol is replaced by referring to the callback information table corresponding to the liquid crystal display scheduler data. The method of replacing the effect is the same as the description using FIG. 361 and the like described above, and the method of replacing the symbol is also the same as the description using FIG. 361 and the like described above. In the callback information table corresponding to the liquid crystal effect scheduler data, the number of interrupt display list commands defined in the liquid crystal effect scheduler data and the corresponding effect SW are defined. The replacement information is confirmed by the callback function, a display list command is created based on the confirmed replacement information, and the command is transmitted to the sound source built-in VDP1540a. After that, the peripheral control MPU1511a transmits a displaylist command for resuming displaylist analysis to the VDP1540a with a built-in sound source. The sound source built-in VDP1540a analyzes the display list command for restarting the display list analysis, generates a transfer restart request for the external request DMA, and restarts the analysis of the display list command.

By processing only the replacement part of the effect using the callback function as described above, the peripheral control RAM 1530c (temporary storage means) can be used without any conversion of the VDP native display list related to all the effects other than the replacement. Instead, it is possible to transfer from the peripheral control ROM 1530b to the sound source built-in VDP1540a using an external request DMA (transfer means).

With the above configuration, the VDP native display list command group can be transferred to the sound source built-in VDP1540a without being stored in the peripheral control RAM 1530c. As a result, it is possible to reduce the load on the peripheral control MPU1511a associated with the display of the image, and it is possible to speed up the image processing. Further, since the used area of the peripheral control RAM 1530c can be saved, the storage area can be effectively used.

The peripheral control ROM 1530b may store only the frequently used VDP native display list command group, and the infrequently used VDP native display list command group may be processed by the conventional procedure. As a result, the processing of the frequently used display list command can be shortened, so that the processing speed can be increased as a whole and the increase in the capacity of the peripheral control ROM 1530b can be suppressed. In addition, the display list command corresponding to a highly versatile image (video) is stored in the peripheral control ROM 1530b, and the development efficiency is improved by processing different images depending on the model and version by the conventional procedure. Is also possible.

[30. Alignment adjustment]
The processors (CPU, MPU) used in the game control and peripheral control (effect control) of the gaming machine can basically handle integer type and floating point type data types. The integer types that can be used in a 32-bit CPU are char (character, character) type, int (integer) type, and long (long integer) type, each of which has a size of 1 byte, 2 bytes, and 4 bytes. .. The floating-point type is a float (single precision) type and a double (double precision) type, and has sizes of 4 bytes and 8 bytes, respectively.

Regardless of whether the processor used for peripheral control of the game machine is a CISC processor or a RISC processor, the data stored in the memory (ROM, RAM) in 1-byte units can be read and written at all addresses. It is a machine. The address for reading and writing multiple bytes of data is not limited to this. When the processor reads a plurality of bytes of data, the data is always read from the byte boundary, and an alignment violation occurs when the access is made so as to cross the byte boundary. The behavior when an alignment violation occurs depends on the processor, but for example, program execution is delayed due to multiple memory accesses instead of being able to continue processing, or processing is interrupted due to the occurrence of a runtime exception. Relax.

However, in the current development of game machines, when a program that controls a game is executed, a data structure composed of a plurality of pieces of information on a memory (ROM, RAM) is created without being aware of alignment. There were many things. Therefore, an alignment violation may occur during program execution, and the program execution speed may decrease. In the peripheral control of the gaming machine, it is necessary to complete all the processes within a predetermined processing cycle, so that the decrease in the execution speed of the program may become a big problem. In particular, since the production of a gaming machine is composed of a plurality of elements, it is necessary to collectively manage various information related to each element, and various information is stored in different types of data types. The data structure is adopted.

In order to solve the above problems, in the game machine according to the present embodiment, in the data structure composed of a plurality of information used for game control, each information is stored in the memory when the data corresponding to the data structure is stored. Explicitly embed empty data between or at the end of the area that stores. This adjusts the data access start position by the processor and arranges the information so that the processor always accesses from the byte boundary address to prevent alignment violations and prevent the program execution speed from slowing down. Can be done. Adjusting the alignment for the data structures on all ROMs and RAMs is a huge task, so the load on the processor is heavy and the processing time is long. It is desirable to adjust the alignment with the data structure on the ROM and RAM related to the conversion process, the control process related to the drawing of the liquid crystal, the lamp control process, and the like. In addition, there is no problem in adjusting the alignment other than the above-mentioned processing.

[Help image to promote understanding of production]
As described with reference to FIG. 118, in the pachinko machine 1 (peripheral control MPU1511a) according to this embodiment, the effect pattern determination as to which of the plurality of effect patterns is to be executed is executed based on the result of the jackpot determination. It is possible. Then, when one effect pattern is selected as a result of the effect pattern determination, any one of a plurality of expected effects (notice effect, etc.) prepared corresponding to the type of the selected effect pattern is selected. It is possible to execute a notice effect determination as to whether or not the expected effect (s) are selectively displayed. Depending on the result of this advance notice effect determination, all of the plurality of expected effects (notice effect, etc.) prepared corresponding to the type of the above-selected effect pattern may be executed in sequence. It is possible that none of the plurality of expected effects (such as a notice effect) will be executed.

Then, when such an effect pattern determination or a notice effect determination is performed, the effect content according to the result of the determination is controlled to be displayed on the effect display device 1600, so that the decorative symbol varies according to the result of the jackpot determination. The production will be executed together with the expected production (notice production) related to the background depiction (background notice) and the movement of the movable body (character production). As a result, as a result of the variable effect by the decorative symbol being executed together with the expected effect related to the background depiction and the movement of the movable body, when the jackpot symbol is stopped and displayed, the jackpot game as a privilege is executed for the player. It will be possible.

In such a configuration, the variable effect by the decorative pattern is provided as an effect having "a function of deterministically indicating whether or not a big hit is obtained as a result of the big hit determination", and the background description and movement thereof are provided. Expected effects related to body movements and the like will be provided as effects having "a function that suggests the degree of expectation (including 0% and 100%) that a big hit has been obtained". That is, the player enjoys the game through these effects.

However, when such an expected effect is realized as a background depiction (background notice), it basically has a degree of effect such as "how much value should be set to make an image with a high degree of expectation appear". Only letting you do it. Therefore, the fundamental problem such as "it will be difficult to have a sense of expectation for a big hit unless an image with a high degree of expectation (expected production) appears" has not been solved yet.

Therefore, in the pachinko machine 1 (peripheral control MPU1511a) according to this embodiment, first, when it is determined that a special effect is to be performed as a result of the advance notice effect determination (when a predetermined effect condition is satisfied), at least the background is depicted. It is possible to execute a process of displaying the background image used in the above in a special mode different from the original image data, and when the background image is displayed in the special mode, the degree of expectation is higher than when the background image is not displayed in the special mode ( It is possible to suggest that the rate at which jackpot symbols appear) is high.

Here, as the "process of displaying in a special mode", for example,
-Processing to display the original image data as rotation processing data rotated by a predetermined angle (rotation around any (or an appropriate combination) of the x, y, z axes in the display area, etc.)
-It is possible to exemplify processing such as displaying the original image data as mosaic processing data with a predetermined degree of "blurring".

That is, in the pachinko machine 1 (peripheral control MPU1511a) according to this embodiment, when a predetermined effect condition is satisfied, the original image data is slightly processed (rotation processing, mosaic processing, etc.) and then performed. A special effect is intentionally performed to display this (displayed in a special mode). With such a configuration, it becomes difficult for the player to definitively detect and recognize the fact even if a special effect is performed in which the original image data is slightly processed. However, in exchange for this, even if the special production is not performed, it is possible to memorize the feeling / illusion that "maybe the special production is being executed". Therefore, even if the state in which the image with high expectation (special effect) does not appear is continued, it is expected that the expectation for the big hit is maintained suitably.

However, if there is no clue for the player to recognize the implementation status of such "processing to be displayed in a special mode", it will be difficult to recognize even the possibility of a high expectation situation. In the end, the meaning of performing a special production may be lost.

In this regard, the pachinko machine 1 (peripheral control MPU1511a) according to this embodiment displays a help image as to whether or not the "process of displaying in a special mode" is being executed in response to an operation by the player. It is possible to execute the process of making it. According to such a configuration, since the help image can be displayed according to the operation by the player, it is not possible to recognize whether or not the "process of displaying in a special mode" is being executed. It is expected that the decrease in the amount of the image will be suppressed, and that the expectation will be maintained favorably.

However, the "help image" according to this explanatory example does not clearly indicate whether or not the "process to be displayed in a special mode" is being executed, but intentionally includes recognition difficulty. ing. It is hoped that it is not possible to be sure even if it does not seem that the "processing to display in a special mode" is being executed because it is intentionally made to have such recognition difficulty. Will be left behind, and it will be possible to maintain a sense of expectation.

FIG. 377 shows a display example in the effect display device 1600 when the state shifts between the non-game state in which the game is not executed (during the demo screen, etc.) and the game execution state in which the game is executed. ..

FIG. 377 (a) shows a display example in the effect display device 1600 when the game is not being executed and is in a non-game state (during a demo screen, etc.). As shown in FIG. 377 (a), the effect display device 1600 in the non-gaming state is useful for checking "whether a special effect is being executed" (here, character image PG (here, in this case). A guide image AG suggesting that a penguins-like character) can be made to appear by operating a predetermined operation means (operation button 410, etc.) is displayed. In this explanatory example, the explanatory text and the character image PG are displayed as the guide image AG, respectively.

When the start prize is generated and the game (variation of the special symbol according to the jackpot determination) is started in the situation shown in FIG. 377 (a), the effect display device 1600 first obtains FIG. 377 (b). The guide image AG is hidden as shown in. At the same time, the variable effect by the decorative pattern SZ is executed together with the expected effect (notice effect) related to the background depiction (background notice) and the movement of the movable body (character effect). In this way, by automatically hiding the guide image AG when the game is started, it is possible to avoid adversely affecting the color rendering index when the game is in the execution state. The existence of the character image PG (here, a character imitating a penguins) can be suitably appealed.

FIG. 377 (c) shows a display example in the effect display device 1600 when the variation effect by the decorative symbol SZ shown in FIG. 377 (b) is completed (stop display).

If the hold information remains in the situation shown in FIG. 377 (c), the guide image AG is hidden by digesting the hold information and newly starting the variation effect by the decorative symbol SZ. The production situation shown in FIG. 377 (b) will reappear in the same state. On the other hand, if the hold information does not remain in the situation shown in FIG. 377 (c), the state is again shifted to the non-gaming state (during the demo screen, etc.). That is, in this case, the guide image AG is based on the fact that the state in which the game is not newly started continues for a predetermined time after the variation effect by the decorative symbol SZ shown in FIG. 377 (b) is completed (stop display). The displayed situation (the situation shown in FIG. 377 (a)) will reappear. In the effect display device 1600 when the guide image AG is displayed, the decorative symbol SZ may be left stopped and displayed, or the decorative symbol SZ itself may be hidden.

Then, the "process of displaying in a special mode" according to this effect example is a state in which the variation effect by the decorative symbol SZ is executed in the "specific effect pattern" (when a predetermined determination result is obtained in the effect determination). It can be executed when it is within the period in which the specific effect image appears (predetermined timing in the specific effect pattern).

FIG. 378 shows an expected effect in which the variation effect by the decorative symbol SZ is executed in the "specific effect pattern", and the princess character (specific effect image) is displayed in a large size as the background image. A display example of the effect display device 1600 in the state of being in the state is shown.

That is, in this production example, at least when "expected production in which a princess character (specific production image) is displayed in a large size as a background image" is performed, a predetermined production condition is satisfied. It has become possible to execute a process of slightly rotating each original image data of the decorative pattern SZ and its background image (princess character) and then displaying them (processing of displaying them in a special mode). There is. When the princess character (specific effect image) for which the "process to be displayed in a special mode" has been executed is displayed, the princess character (specific effect image) for which the "process to be displayed in a special mode" has not been executed is displayed. The rate at which the jackpot symbol appears is higher than when it is displayed.

More specifically, in the situation shown in FIG. 378 (a), the "process of displaying in a special mode" is not executed, and the decorative symbol SZ and its background image (princess character) are the original image data. It is displayed up to. On the other hand, in the situation shown in FIG. 378 (b), each original image data of the decorative symbol SZ and its background image (princess character) is rotated to the left three times and then displayed. The process (the process of displaying in a special mode) is executed, and in the situation shown in FIG. 378 (c), it is 6 degrees to the left with respect to each original image data of the decorative symbol SZ and its background image (princess character). The process of displaying these (the process of displaying in a special mode) is being executed after the rotation processing of the above is performed.

As is clear from FIGS. 378 (a) to 378 (c), each original image data of the decorative symbol SZ and its background image (princess character) even when the "process of displaying in a special mode" is performed. Only a small amount of rotation is applied to the image. In particular, in the figure, it is possible to compare and see between FIGS. 378 (a) and 378 (c), but in the actual production, FIG. 378 (a) according to the result of the production determination. ) To (c) are displayed, and comparisons cannot be made between them. Therefore, even when FIGS. 378 (b) and 378 (c) appear, it is difficult to be sure that the state is displayed in the special mode, but the state is displayed in the special mode. It is expected that the player will be aware of a certain possibility (possibility of high expectation), and even if FIG. 378 (a) appears, it is not displayed in a special mode. It is difficult to be sure, and it will be expected to leave hope (maintain a sense of expectation) such as "may be in a state of being displayed in a special mode".

It should be noted that the processing of rotating each original image data of the decorative pattern SZ and its background image (princess character) 3 degrees (or 6 degrees) to the left and then displaying them (processing of displaying them in a special mode). ) May be executed as a process of separately performing rotation processing on each original image data and then displaying the original image data, or after converting each original image data into one image. It may be executed as a process of rotating and displaying the image of.

Regarding FIGS. 378 (b) and 378 (c), when the image shown in FIG. 378 (c) is displayed, the rate at which the jackpot symbol appears more than when the image shown in FIG. 378 (b) is displayed. It may be possible to have a relationship that increases. Alternatively, when the "process of displaying in a special mode" is executed, after displaying FIG. 378 (a) once, it is displayed as a moving image whose inclination changes every moment in the order of FIGS. 378 (b) and 378 (c). You may let it. Alternatively, both FIGS. 378 (b) and (c) do not necessarily have to be prepared, and only one of FIGS. 378 (b) and (c) may be displayed.

However, as described above, if there is no clue for the player to judge the implementation status of such "processing to be displayed in a special mode", the meaning of performing such a special effect is lost. It could be. Therefore, in the pachinko machine 1 (peripheral control MPU1511a) according to this embodiment, at least when the "expected effect in which the princess character (specific effect image) is displayed in a large size as the background image" is performed, the operation button 410 is performed. It is possible to execute a process of displaying a help image as to whether or not the "process of displaying in a special mode" is being executed by an operation for a predetermined operation means such as.

In FIG. 379, the help image is displayed based on the fact that the operation by the player is accepted in the state where the “expected effect in which the princess character (specific effect image) is displayed large as the background image” is performed. A display example of the time effect display device 1600 is shown.

That is, in this production example, at least when the "expected effect in which the princess character (specific production image) is displayed large as the background image" is performed (see FIG. 378), the operation (operation button) by the player is performed. When 410 etc. is performed, a character image PG (here, a character imitating a penguin) that is useful for checking "whether a special effect (here, a tilt effect) is being executed" is used as a help image. It is supposed to be displayed.

More specifically, when an operation (operation button 410, etc.) is performed by the player in the situation shown in FIG. 378 (a), the situation shown in FIG. 379 (a) appears, and the situation shown in FIG. 378 (a) appears. If an operation (operation button 410, etc.) is performed by the player in the situation shown in b), the situation shown in FIG. 379 (b) will appear, and the situation shown in FIG. 378 (c) will appear. When an operation (operation button 410, etc.) is performed by the player, the situation shown in FIG. 379 (c) appears.

However, as is clear from FIGS. 379 (a) to 379, when the character image PG (help image) is displayed, it can be useful whether the "process of displaying in a special mode" is executed. , It is not specified whether or not the "process of displaying in a special mode" is being executed. It is because we dare to have such recognition difficulty, if it seems that "processing to display in a special mode" is being executed, we can be strongly aware of the possibility. Even if it seems that the "process to be displayed in a special mode" is not being executed, it cannot be assured that hope for the feasibility of the process can be left and the expectation can be maintained. It will be possible.

Here, whether or not the character image PG (help image) according to this production example is in a state in which the "process of displaying in a special mode" is executed as shown in FIGS. 379 (a) to 379 (c). Regardless of the mode of execution, the display is possible only in one mode in which the character is held at a predetermined position and the ruler is held in the horizontal direction. In this way, an image (here, a ruler) that is not affected by the "processing to be displayed in a special mode" and is displayed so as to extend in the horizontal direction is made to appear by the operation of the player. (Here, a ruler) can be made to function as a guide image (help image) as to whether or not a "special effect (here, a tilt effect) is being executed".

In particular, in this production example, the position overlapping with the image (princess character) to be executed in the "process to be displayed in a special mode" is not affected by the "process to be displayed in a special mode" and is in the horizontal direction. A guide image (here, a ruler) that is displayed so as to extend to appears. Therefore, by checking the degree of overlap with the image (princess character) to which the special processing is executed, it can be further useful for determining whether the special processing is being executed. become.

That is, in such an effect example, the special effect to which the "process of displaying in a special mode" is applied is a slightly tilted effect, and when the tilted effect is performed, the tilted effect is performed. Expectations are higher than if not done. Therefore, the player operates a predetermined operation means (operation button 410, etc.) in order to determine whether or not the tilting effect is being performed, but even if the operation is performed, " It is intentionally made to have a recognition difficulty that does not definitively notify whether or not the "process of displaying in a special mode" is being executed. As a result, it is expected that the player will be aware of the possibility of high expectations when the tilting effect appears to be executed, and even if the tilting effect does not appear to be executed. It is expected to leave hope (maintain a sense of expectation) such as "may be in a state where a tilting effect is being executed".

Furthermore, the guideline image (here, a ruler) of whether or not the "special effect (here, the tilt effect) is being executed" is subject to the "process of displaying in a special mode". One effect is to display at least a part of the image (decorative pattern SZ, background image) in a form that overlaps it. ), And it becomes possible to provide an interesting effect such that the function is exhibited for the first time by comparing with the effect image (here, the princess character) that is already displayed.

In addition, according to such a configuration, it becomes possible to advance the production without displaying the guideline image (here, the ruler) depending on the player's selection (depending on the operation). When you are not confident that you are in a state where the production (here, tilt production) is being executed, you can enjoy various ways of playing, such as not intentionally performing operations by the player. Become.

In this production example, the "process of displaying in a special mode" is executed as the "process of displaying the original image data after being rotated", but the present invention is not necessarily limited to this. For example, instead of the original image data, the image data created based on the original image data may be subjected to rotation processing and then displayed. Further, the image data may not be subjected to rotation processing, but may be subjected to other processing or conversion. In short, it is possible to execute a special process that converts an image into an image having a mode different from the normal mode and displays it, and when the special process can be executed, the player operates the image to make it the target of the special process. As long as it is possible to display a guideline image that does not become, it is possible to exert the above-mentioned effects.

By the way, in the above-mentioned production example, the "process of displaying in a special mode" can be executed when the "expected production in which the princess character (specific production image) is displayed in a large size as the background image" is performed. However, depending on the result of the effect determination, it may be possible to execute the decorative symbol SZ a plurality of times within the period from the start of fluctuation to the stop of fluctuation. At this time, when the "process of displaying in a special mode" is executed many times, it is desirable that the rate at which the jackpot symbol appears is higher than when the number of times is small.

Also, regarding the character image PG (particularly, the ruler here), not only when the "expected effect that the princess character (specific effect image) is displayed large as the background image" is performed, but also the decorative pattern SZ It may be possible to make it displayable by an operation by the player over the entire period from the start of the fluctuation to the stop of the fluctuation. Further, even when the decorative symbol SZ is in the stopped state, it may be possible to display it by an operation by the player.

That is, in this case, no matter what background image is displayed on the effect display device 1600, if there is an operation by the player, a process of causing the character image PG (particularly, a ruler in this case) to appear is executed. It becomes. However, considering that the character image PG (particularly, a ruler in this case) is a "comparison reference image (reference image) with respect to the background image", the preferred display position for displaying the character image PG is the background image each time. It is clear that it depends on the type of. On the other hand, if the display position and display form of the character image PG (especially the ruler in this case) are changed according to the type of the background image each time, the character image PG will be used as a comparison reference. The essential function as an image (reference image) may be lost, and there is a concern that the suspicion of lack of reliability may reduce the interest in the game. That is, the character image PG as the comparison reference image (reference image) is required to be displayed as an invariant and absolute image regardless of the production situation.

Therefore, it is desirable that the display position of the character image PG can be changed between a plurality of predetermined display positions according to the operation by the player (operation button 410, etc.). .. However, it is important that the display form is the same regardless of the display position.

FIG. 380 shows a display example when the character image PG is displayed so as to change the display position by an operation by the player.

FIG. 380 (a) shows an effect situation in which a specific background image is displayed in the reach state. Now, in this production situation, the player has a suspicion that "the process of displaying in a special mode has been executed", and performs an operation for displaying the comparison reference image (reference image). If so, the character image PG as the comparison reference image (reference image) is displayed at any of a plurality of predetermined display positions (see FIGS. 380 (b) to (d)) according to the mode of operation. Processing is performed.

For example, when the operation button 410 is operated only once within a predetermined short time, the character image PG as a comparison reference image (reference image) is located at the left side position (FIG. 380 (b)) in the display area. Is displayed. On the other hand, when the operation button 410 is operated twice within a predetermined short time, the character image as the comparison reference image (reference image) is located at the center position (FIG. 380 (c)) in the display area. When the process of displaying the PG is performed and the operation button 410 is operated three times within a predetermined short time, the comparison reference image (reference image) is placed at the right position (FIG. 380 (d)) in the display area. ) To display the character image PG.

As is clear from FIGS. 380 (b) to 380 (d), the character image PG (particularly, the ruler here) itself has the same form regardless of the display position. , Since the positional relationship between the background image (or decorative pattern) and the character image PG (particularly, the ruler here) that can be the target of the "processing to be displayed in a special mode" is different, "display in a special mode". The ease of determining whether or not the "processing to cause" is being executed will naturally differ.

For example, when the character image PG (particularly, the ruler here) is displayed at the position (center position in the display area) shown in FIG. 380 (c), the character image PG (particularly, the ruler here) is the comparison target. When the character image PG (particularly, a ruler here) is displayed at the position shown in FIG. 380 (d) (the right position in the display area), the image is displayed so as not to overlap with the background image. Since the character image PG (particularly, a ruler in this case) is displayed so as to hide almost the entire background image (standing tag) although it overlaps with the background image to be compared, "displayed in a special mode". It can be said that it is relatively difficult to judge whether or not the process of making the image is being executed.

According to such a configuration, the character image PG (particularly, the ruler in this case) as the comparison reference image (reference image) is placed in a "display position suitable for comparison" that differs depending on the type of background image each time. Since it becomes possible to display the image by an operation by a person, it becomes possible to suitably provide a material for determining whether or not the "process of displaying in a special mode" is being executed.

In this production example, the display position of the character image PG (particularly, the ruler here) as the comparison reference image (reference image) is made variable according to the number of operations for the operation button 410 within the predetermined time. However, this is not always the case. For example, the display position may be made variable according to the length of the long press time with respect to the operation button 410, or a plurality of operation means different from the operation button 410 may be provided, and any of the operation means is operated. The character image PG may be displayed at a predetermined display position corresponding to the operated operation means. When the character image PG is displayed by an operation for an operation means different from that of the operation button 410, the character image PG is displayed even in a situation (reception period) in which an operation opportunity is given to the operation button 410. Will be possible.

Further, since the character image PG (particularly, the ruler here) as the comparison reference image (reference image) cannot function as an effect (expectation degree) by itself, it is necessary to compare and judge with the background image. After a sufficient time (for example, 3 seconds) has passed, the expected effect (background image) becomes a worthless image that makes it difficult to see. Therefore, when a predetermined time (for example, 3 seconds) has elapsed from the time when the display is performed by the player, it is desirable that the display is automatically hidden without requiring any operation.

However, depending on the relationship between the position where the character image PG (especially the ruler in this case) is displayed as the comparison reference image (reference image) and the type of the background image, "processing to display in a special mode" is executed. In some cases, the predetermined time (for example, 3 seconds) is not enough to compare / determine whether or not the character is in the state of being in the state. Therefore, in the above-mentioned production example, while the character image PG as the comparison reference image (reference image) is displayed (within 3 seconds), the predetermined operating means operated to make the character image PG appear is re-operated. If so, the time for which the character image PG is continuously displayed is extended. For example, each time a predetermined operating means is re-operated, it is hidden after a predetermined time (for example, after 3 seconds) based on the operated timing, so that the display is intermittent until the player is satisfied. It becomes possible to maintain the display state of the character image PG by performing various operations, and it becomes possible to make a careful comparison and judgment.

However, if such endless continuous display as a comparison reference image (character image PG) is simply allowed, it may be extremely easy to determine whether or not special processing is being executed. .. That is, the player may always get a confident conclusion that "the special process is being executed" or "the special process is not being executed", which is a "special aspect". It does not clearly indicate whether or not the process to be displayed in is being executed, and the above-mentioned purpose of making it difficult to recognize is overthrown.

Therefore, when the predetermined operating means is re-operated while the character image PG is displayed (within 3 seconds), in exchange for extending the time during which the character image PG (ruler) is continuously displayed, The size (display area) of the comparison reference image (character image PG) as a whole is reduced by shortening the length (longitudinal direction) of the ruler held by the character image PG by a predetermined unit (for example, 1 cm). It is desirable to add difficulty to the comparison with the background image. That is, in this case, in exchange for extending the time until the comparison reference image (character image PG) is hidden each time the predetermined operation means is re-operated while the character image PG is displayed. , The comparison reference image (character image PG) Since the display area as a whole gradually becomes smaller (here, the ruler gradually becomes shorter), the display time of the comparison reference image (character image PG) It becomes possible to suitably maintain the difficulty of recognizing whether or not the process of displaying in a special mode is being executed, while making it possible to extend the image.

However, if the comparison reference image (character image PG) is displayed too small (the length of the ruler is displayed too short), it cannot be used for comparison with the background image, which reduces the interest of the game. It can be connected. Therefore, regarding the size (display area) of the comparison reference image (character image PG) as a whole, the minimum size (here, the length of the shortest ruler) is set in advance, and the minimum size is set. When the size is reduced to the size of, the time until the comparison reference image (character image PG) is hidden is not extended even if the predetermined operating means is re-operated in the state. It is desirable that the display area of the comparison reference image (character image PG) as a whole is not further reduced.

Further, it is desirable that the size (display area) of the comparison reference image (character image PG) as a whole is carried over even after the comparison reference image (character image PG) is hidden. .. That is, in this case, each time a predetermined operation means is operated to make the comparison reference image (character image PG) appear (or extend the display time), the display area of the comparison reference image (character image PG) as a whole. Is getting smaller (here, the ruler is getting shorter), and finally it doesn't even appear, so when you really want to know if the "process to display in a special mode" is being executed. It will be possible to encourage only the operation, and other than that, it will be expected to concentrate on the original production content.

The size (display area) of the comparison reference image (character image PG) as a whole may be carried over even after the variation effect is completed and the next variation effect is started. According to such a configuration, a comparison reference image (character image PG) can be given as an extremely valuable production opportunity, and basically, just by looking at the background image or the decorative pattern SZ, a "special aspect" is provided. It becomes possible to provide a color rendering index (see FIG. 378) for predicting whether or not the "process to be displayed in" is being executed.

Incidentally, the comparison reference image (character image PG) shown in FIGS. 379 and 380 is in a state when it is first displayed by an operation with a predetermined operating means after the power is turned on (or the RAM is cleared). After that, each time an operation is performed on a predetermined operation means, the display area of the comparison reference image as a whole gradually becomes smaller (here, the ruler gradually becomes shorter), and finally it does not even appear. .. However, when a specific detection is made or when a specific condition is satisfied, the comparison reference image (if it appears at multiple positions, only the comparison reference image corresponding to any one of those positions). It is also possible to prepare a process for displaying the display area as a whole by increasing the display area (here, the ruler is lengthened). According to such a configuration, it is possible to recover the remaining number of times that the comparison reference image (character image PG) can appear by operating the predetermined operating means.

Further, as described above, when a plurality of operating means for which the display positions of the comparison reference image (character image PG) are set to be different are prepared, the operation is performed according to which of the operating means is operated. The character image PG is displayed at a predetermined display position corresponding to the operation means. In this case, the remaining number of times (the number of operations until the minimum unit is reached) at which the comparison reference image (character image PG) can appear is set for each operation means (display position), and the specific operation means. When an operation is performed on the above, it is desirable that only the comparison reference image (character image PG) displayed at the position corresponding to the specific operating means is displayed small (the ruler is displayed short).

For example, in the case of the effect example described with reference to FIG. 380, when the first operating means is operated in the effect situation shown in FIG. 380 (a), the effect situation shown in FIG. 380 (b) appears. It becomes. In the production situation shown in FIG. 380 (b), when the first operating means is re-operated, this is in exchange for extending the display time of the comparison reference image (character image PG) in the display state. As mentioned above, it is displayed smaller (the ruler is shorter). However, after that, even when the second operating means is operated, only the effect situation shown in FIG. 380 (c) appears, and the comparison standard accompanying the re-operation of the first operating means The reduced display as an image (character image PG) is not taken over by the comparison reference image (character image PG) displayed at the center position by the operation with respect to the second operating means. Similarly, when the third operating means is operated, only the effect situation shown in FIG. 380 (d) appears, and the comparison reference image (character image PG) accompanying the re-operation of the first operating means. The reduced display as is not taken over by the comparison reference image (character image PG) displayed at the right side position by the operation with respect to the third operating means.

In this respect, while the comparison reference image (character image PG) is displayed at a specific position (for example, the center position shown in FIG. 380 (c)) (within 3 seconds), it corresponds to the specific position (center position). When another operating means (for example, the first operating means) is operated, the comparison reference image (character image PG) already displayed at the specific position (center position) is maintained in the displayed state. Therefore, it is desirable to newly display the comparison reference image (character image PG) at another position (left side position) corresponding to the other operation means (first operation means).

That is, in this case, even if the comparison reference image (character image PG) appears at a position where it is difficult to compare with the background image by the operation with the predetermined operation means, it is different from the predetermined operation means. By operating the operation means of the above, it becomes possible to newly display the comparison reference image (character image PG) at another display position. This makes it possible to add an interest in searching for a position at which the comparison reference image (character image PG) should be displayed in order to improve the ease of comparison.

Moreover, in the above configuration, even when the comparison reference image (character image PG) is newly displayed at a different display position, the comparison reference image (character image PG) that has already been displayed is not displayed. It is not displayed, but the display state is maintained. According to such a configuration, a plurality of comparison reference images (character image PG) can be displayed at the same time, and the comparison material with the background image is increased by that amount (here, two rulers are lined up). As a result, the horizontal length can be substantially increased), so a background image that is difficult to compare appears, but the "process to display in a special mode" is being executed. It will be possible to give an opportunity to greatly improve the ease of comparison at the timing when you really want to know if there is one. However, this consumes two "remaining number of times that the comparison reference image (character image PG) can appear (number of operations until the minimum unit)" set for each of the plurality of operation means at the same time. Since it can be generated in exchange for this, it can be said that the cost of greatly improving the ease of comparison is also great.

Further, as described above, since the comparison reference image (character image PG) is hidden after a predetermined time (3 seconds) from the time when it is displayed by the operation by the player, a plurality of comparison reference images (character images) are hidden. In order to lengthen the time during which PG) is displayed at the same time, it is required to operate the second operating means as soon as possible after operating the first operating means. That is, in this case, whether or not it is judged whether or not the "special processing is being executed" is determined only by the comparison reference image (character image PG) that appears by the operation on the first operating means, or the price is increased. Even so, it is necessary to make a quick decision as to whether the second operation means is to be further operated to greatly improve the ease of comparison, and the delay in the decision causes a disadvantage on the player side. Since it will be expanded, it becomes possible to maintain a favorable feeling of tension.

Further, according to such a configuration, even when a plurality of comparison reference images (character image PG) are displayed at the same time, the timing at which the comparison reference images (character image PG) are hidden is different. The size (length of the ruler) of each comparison reference image (character image PG) also becomes different from each other depending on the operation situation. Furthermore, depending on the operation status (remaining number of times) in each operation means, "the comparison reference image (character image PG) is not displayed even if a specific operation means is operated, but the comparison reference image is displayed when another operation means is operated. (Character image PG) is displayed ”, so which operation means should be used for the comparison reference image (character image PG) to appear. It becomes possible to provide even more fun by adding a judgment element other than the type of the background image to be compared to the judgment.

As described above, the comparison reference image (character image PG) is hidden after a predetermined time (3 seconds) from the time when it is displayed by the operation by the player, but the predetermined time elapses. It is desirable that when the symbol variation (decorative symbol SZ) is stopped due to a loss before that, it is hidden as a trigger. That is, as shown in FIGS. 379 and 380, when the comparison reference image (character image PG) is displayed, it becomes difficult to visually recognize the effect content in the display area, and by comparison with the background image or the like, it becomes difficult to see. It will be difficult to concentrate on the content of the production. And as a result, if you do not notice that it has been stopped due to loss, the purpose as a character image PG to be useful for production will be lost, so it will be stopped due to loss. When this happens, it is desirable to hide the character image PG with this as an opportunity.

However, when the character image PG is stopped due to a big hit, the character image PG may not be hidden and may be continued in the displayed state until a predetermined time elapses. That is, when the character image PG is stopped due to a big hit, the big hit game is started even if it is not noticed, so that it is a surprise when the character image PG is hidden after a predetermined time has passed. It will be expected to function as a production.

Further, when the comparison reference image (character image PG) is displayed, it is desirable that the specific sound related to the comparison reference image (character image PG) can be output. Even in the situation of gazing, it becomes possible to easily recognize that the comparison reference image (character image PG) is displayed. However, when such a specific sound is output, the following It is more desirable to adopt such a method in order to maintain the interest of the game.

That is, although the remaining number of times (the number of operations until the minimum unit is reached) at which the comparison reference image (character image PG) can appear is set for each operation means (display position), the remaining number of times is set. If the comparison reference image (character image PG) is frequently displayed during the period until the number of times is consumed, it is difficult to visually recognize the effect content in the display area, and the original effect is concentrated. Will be difficult. Therefore, when the character image PG is displayed, a specific sound (for example, a penguin's bark) can be output as a sound, while this specific sound (for example, a penguin's bark) is displayed in a "special mode". Make the sound output acceptable only when is not being executed. In this way, regarding the execution of the "processing to be displayed in a special mode", the specific sound (for example, the barking of a penguins) is not used as a definite suggestion on the affirmative side, but only as a definite suggestion on the negative side (for example). , Penguins' bark), so that players who dislike such specific sounds can concentrate on the original production and the possibility of "displaying in a special mode" is high. It is expected that the comparison reference image (character image PG) will appear only at a certain time.

However, for a specific sound (for example, a penguin's bark), a comparison reference image (character image PG) is displayed by an operation by the player when the "processing to display in a special mode" is not executed. Even in the case of, it is desirable that the sound output is not always allowed. That is, in this case, the comparison reference image (character image PG) is newly displayed (or the size of the comparison reference image already displayed is changed (the length of the ruler is short)) by the operation by the player. When a specific sound (for example, a penguin's bark) is output, it is definitely recognized that the "processing to display in a special mode" is not executed, but the specific sound (for example, the bark of a penguins) For example, when the penguins' bark) is not output, there are cases where the "process to display in a special mode" is executed and the "process to display in a special mode" is not executed. It becomes possible to maintain the fun when a specific sound (for example, a penguin's bark) is not output.

The specific sound (for example, the barking of a penguins) may be output under the above-mentioned predetermined conditions regardless of which of the plurality of operating means having different display positions is operated. However, if a specific sound can be output under the above-mentioned predetermined conditions only when a specific operation means is operated among a plurality of operation means, the specific sound may be output. A comparative reference image (character image PG) that is useful for determining whether or not the "process of displaying in a special mode" is being executed is displayed, or a specific sound is not likely to be output. It becomes possible for the player to select whether to make a comparison reference image (character image PG) appear, which is useful for determining whether or not the process of displaying in is being executed.

Further, in the above-mentioned production example, in exchange for extending the display time of the comparison reference image (character image PG) in the display state, the comparison reference image (character image PG) is displayed in a small size (the ruler is short) in a special manner. The difficulty of recognizing whether or not the process is being executed is preferably maintained. In this regard, when a specific sound (for example, penguin bark) is output when the comparison reference image (character image PG) is relatively small, the specific sound (for example, when the comparison reference image (character image PG) is relatively large) is output. For example, if the volume is made lower than when the penguin's bark) is output, the recognition difficulty when the display time of the comparison reference image (character image PG) in the display state is extended is to some extent. It will be expected to be maintained.

Further, the size of the comparison reference image (character image PG) and its display position so that the comparison reference image (character image PG) does not overlap each other when the comparison reference image (character image PG) is simultaneously displayed at a plurality of display positions (see FIG. 380). It is desirable to set each of. The comparison material with the background image can be increased by the amount that each comparison reference image (character image PG) is displayed without overlapping.

Further, the comparison reference image (character image PG) may be displayed as a transparent image. According to such a configuration, even if most of the background image and the comparison reference image (character image PG) overlap, the comparison is performed between the background image and the background image that can be seen through the comparison reference image (character image PG). It becomes possible to perform favorably.

Further, in the above-mentioned production example, the comparison reference image (character image PG) is displayed in a small size (shortening the ruler) each time a predetermined operation means is operated, but the present invention is not limited to this, and the point is that it is special. Any aspect may be used as long as it enhances the difficulty in recognizing whether or not the process of displaying in the mode is being executed. For example, each time a predetermined operation means is operated, the shape and size of the comparison reference image (character image PG) itself remains the same, but the portion where the transparency is relatively high is gradually enlarged. It may be. That is, when the comparison reference image (character image PG) is "displayed with a specific transmittance", the portion of the comparison reference image (character image PG) displayed with the specific transparency is made small (specific among the rulers). It is important to display the part that is displayed with transparency (shorter), and the part that is no longer displayed with specific transparency may be hidden, or with a transparency higher than the specific transparency. It may be displayed to increase the difficulty in visibility.

Further, as described above, the "process of displaying in a special mode" is shown in FIG. 378 (c), for example, from the display state shown in FIG. 378 (a) to the display state shown in FIG. 378 (b). It may be a dynamic depiction process that changes the display state. When the "process of displaying in a special mode" is realized as such a dynamic depiction process, when the "process of displaying in a special mode" is terminated, for example, from the display state shown in FIG. 378 (c), FIG. After the display state shown in 378 (b), the display state is returned to the display state shown in FIG. 378 (a).

In this respect, as described above, the comparison reference image (character image PG) is hidden after a predetermined time (3 seconds) after being displayed, but as a dynamic depiction process. It is desirable that the "process of displaying in a special mode" is performed in a time shorter than a predetermined time (3 seconds). That is, in this case, if the comparison reference image (character image PG) can be made to appear by the operation by the player while the "process of displaying in a special mode" as the dynamic depiction process is being executed, the said. While the comparison reference image (character image PG) is maintaining the display state (within 3 seconds), "from the display state shown in FIG. 378 (c) to the display state shown in FIG. 378 (b), the figure is shown. Since the movement such as "returning to the display state shown in 378 (a)" will always appear, it is possible to facilitate comparison / judgment as to whether or not the process of displaying in a special mode is being executed. become able to.

However, the "process of displaying in a special mode" as the dynamic depiction process may be performed in a time longer than a predetermined time (3 seconds). That is, in this case, it is assumed that the comparison reference image (character image PG) can be made to appear by the operation by the player while the "process of displaying in a special mode" as the dynamic depiction process is being executed. Also, while the comparison reference image (character image PG) is maintaining the display state (within 3 seconds), the display state shown in FIG. 378 (b) is changed from the display state shown in FIG. 378 (c). After that, the movement such as "returning to the display state shown in FIG. 378 (a)" does not always appear, so it is difficult to compare / determine whether or not the process of displaying in a special mode is being executed. It will be possible to make it. In addition, the strategic nature of being able to extend the display time of the comparison reference image (character image PG) will be added.

Further, the "process of displaying in a special mode" as the dynamic depiction process may be performed in a time shorter than the predetermined time (3 seconds) or from the predetermined time (3 seconds) depending on the result of the effect determination. May be done for a long time. In addition, "process to display in a special mode" as a dynamic depiction process performed in a time shorter than a predetermined time (3 seconds) within the period from the start of fluctuation of the decorative symbol SZ to the stop of fluctuation. The "process of displaying in a special mode" as the dynamic depiction process performed for a time longer than a predetermined time (3 seconds) may be performed at predetermined timings different from each other.

Further, the comparison reference image (character image PG) is hidden after a predetermined time (3 seconds) after being displayed, but when the comparison reference image (character image PG) is displayed. For a specific sound that can be output (for example, a penguin's bark), the sound output should be interrupted for a time significantly shorter than a predetermined time (for example, 0.5 seconds, which is less than half the time). Is desirable. That is, in this case, even if the comparison reference image (character image PG) is displayed immediately before the "process of displaying in the special mode" is executed, the specific sound is sounded until after the "process of displaying in the special mode" is executed. Since the output of (for example, penguin bark) is suppressed from being maintained, a specific sound (for example, a specific sound (for example, a process of displaying in a special mode) is being executed. , Penguins' bark) makes it difficult to generate a production situation as if it were denied.

In this case, the display state of the comparison reference image (character image PG) is maintained (for 3 seconds) from before the "processing to be displayed in a special mode" is executed to after the execution. Become. Therefore, when the "process of displaying in a special mode" as the dynamic depiction process is executed, for example, the display shown in FIG. 378 (a) is displayed while the comparison reference image (character image PG) is displayed. The state changes from the state to the display state shown in FIG. 378 (c) through the display state shown in FIG. 378 (b).

Although the comparison reference image (character image PG) is composed of a penguins-like character and a ruler, only one of the penguins-like character and the ruler may be displayed. In short, a comparison reference image (character image PG) that is not subject to the "process of displaying in a special mode" may be able to appear by an operation by the player. However, if a guide image (ruler) showing the unit of length in the horizontal direction is displayed, it is possible to facilitate the judgment as to whether or not the "process of displaying in a special mode" is executed. It is possible.

The guide image AG in the demo screen shown in FIG. 377 does not necessarily have to be displayed.

In addition, in the above explanation example, regarding the method when the volume adjustment confirmation sound and the brightness adjustment confirmation sound are not output, in addition to not assigning the volume adjustment confirmation sound and the brightness adjustment confirmation sound to the channel, the volume adjustment A confirmation sound or a brightness adjustment confirmation sound is assigned to a channel, but it can also be realized by setting the volume value to "0".

It should be noted that the volume adjustment confirmation sound and the brightness adjustment confirmation sound are output as the same sound, and although it is not possible to confirm which "confirmation sound" was output, some "confirmation sound" must be output. Should be recognizable. That is, if various sounds are adopted as the confirmation sound, there is a possibility that the possibility of the expected production sound suggesting the degree of expectation may be conscious, and there is a concern that the interest in the game may be reduced. Because.

[Prevention of mischief against multiple operating means]
As described with reference to FIG. 118, in the pachinko machine 1 (peripheral control MPU1511a) according to this embodiment, the effect pattern determination as to which of the plurality of effect patterns is to be executed is executed based on the result of the jackpot determination. It is possible. Then, when one effect pattern is selected as a result of the effect pattern determination, any one of a plurality of expected effects (notice effect, etc.) prepared corresponding to the type of the selected effect pattern is selected. It is possible to execute a notice effect determination as to whether or not the expected effect (s) are selectively displayed. Depending on the result of this advance notice effect determination, all of the plurality of expected effects (notice effect, etc.) prepared corresponding to the type of the above-selected effect pattern may be executed in sequence. It is possible that none of the plurality of expected effects (such as a notice effect) will be executed.

Then, when such an effect determination (effect pattern determination, advance notice effect determination) is performed, the effect content according to the result of the effect determination is controlled to be displayed on the effect display device 1600, so that the result of the jackpot determination can be obtained. The variable effect of the decorative pattern will be executed together with the expected effect (notice effect) related to the background depiction (background notice) and the movement of the movable body (character effect). As a result, as a result of the variable effect by the decorative symbol being executed together with the expected effect related to the background depiction and the movement of the movable body, when the jackpot symbol is stopped and displayed, the jackpot game as a privilege is executed for the player. It will be possible.

In such a configuration, the variable effect by the decorative pattern is provided as an effect having "a function of deterministically indicating whether or not a big hit is obtained as a result of the big hit determination", and the background description and movement thereof are provided. Expected effects related to body movements and the like will be provided as effects having "a function that suggests the degree of expectation (including 0% and 100%) that a big hit has been obtained". That is, the player enjoys the game through these effects.

Further, as described above, in the pachinko machine 1 according to this embodiment, the player sets a value (volume setting value) regarding the volume by operating the volume adjustment button (effect selection left button 331 or effect selection right button 332). It is possible to execute the process of changing (peripheral control MPU1511a). Then, normally, when the volume setting value is changed in this way, the peripheral control MPU1511a adjusts the volume applied to the effect sound based on the changed volume setting value (process of reflecting the volume setting value as the volume). Will be executed. At this time, a volume adjustment confirmation sound can be output at the adjusted volume.

Further, as described above, in the pachinko machine 1 according to this embodiment, although the illustration is omitted, the pachinko machine 1 is separated from the volume adjustment button (effect selection left button 331 and effect selection right button 332). It is equipped with a brightness adjustment button for various effect lamps (lamps controlled by the peripheral control MPU1511a), and when it is determined that the brightness adjustment button has been operated, the brightness applied to the various effect lamps is It is possible to execute a process of changing the set value (luminance set value) by the player (peripheral control MPU1511a). Then, normally, when the brightness set value is changed in this way, the peripheral control MPU1511a executes a process of adjusting the emission brightness based on the changed brightness set value (a process of reflecting the brightness set value as a light amount). It will be. At this time, the brightness adjustment confirmation sound can be output at the "volume corresponding to the volume set value" at the time when the player set value (brightness set value) related to the brightness is lowered or raised.

Regarding the change reception for such set values (volume setting value, brightness set value) and the adjustment process according to the changed set value, the symbol does not change and the symbol changes. In any of the states, it can be executed by the operation by the player.

Further, as described with reference to FIGS. 189 and 190, in the pachinko machine 1 according to this embodiment, many operating means (operation button 410, sword portion 5010, effect selection left button 331) are targeted for operation by the player. , The effect selection right button 332, the brightness adjustment button (not shown), etc.) are provided. Then, when a predetermined effect condition is satisfied, an operation opportunity is given to the player while the variable effect is performed by the decorative pattern, and the game entertainment hobby is given through such an operation effect. I try to maintain.

However, if a large number of operating means are provided in this way, the existence of these operating means becomes conspicuous, so that the player is likely to be the target of mischief. Then, as a result of being treated roughly, if an abnormality or failure occurs in even one of these operating means, the operability and the effectability will be significantly deteriorated, and it is inevitable that the game interest will be deteriorated.

Therefore, the pachinko machine 1 (peripheral control MPU1511a) according to this embodiment is in a non-game state (a state in which the above-mentioned operation effect cannot occur) in which the game effect according to the jackpot determination is not executed. If there is a high possibility that the operation is detected by multiple operation means and mischievous, a production restriction period (function restriction period) is generated, which suppresses the operation means from being handled roughly. I am trying to do it.

More specifically, among the plurality of operating means included in the pachinko machine 1 in a state where the game is not started (non-gaming state), some predetermined operating means (which should not be required to be operated) ( Here, when the operation for the operation button 410 and the sword portion 5010) is detected within a predetermined continuous operation detection time, the detection is used as an opportunity.
-The effect display device 1600 displays (plays) a specific moving image (warning image) that cannot appear when the game effect according to the jackpot determination is being executed.
-Even if there is an operation on the volume adjustment button, the change of the volume setting value related to the output volume of the production sound is not accepted, and the current volume setting value is not displayed.
-Even if there is an operation on the brightness adjustment button, the change of the brightness setting value related to the brightness of the production lamp is not accepted, and the current brightness setting value is not displayed. Control is performed to generate the period) over a predetermined time (for example, 5 minutes). When a predetermined time (for example, 5 minutes) has elapsed from the time when the production restriction period (function restriction period) occurs, the specific moving image is hidden, and the operation reception regarding the volume is allowed and the volume is increased. The adjustment confirmation sound will also be output, and the operation reception regarding the brightness will be allowed, and the brightness adjustment confirmation sound will also be output, and the normal state as a non-gaming state will be returned.

In the production restriction period (function restriction period) according to this embodiment, "even if there is an operation on the volume adjustment button, the change of the volume setting value related to the output volume of the production sound is not accepted, and the current volume is not accepted. "The setting value is not displayed" and "Even if there is an operation on the brightness adjustment button, the change of the brightness setting value related to the brightness of the effect lamp is not accepted and the current brightness setting value is not displayed". However, only one of the process related to volume adjustment and the process related to brightness adjustment may be restricted.

Further, in the pachinko machine 1 (peripheral control MPU1511a) according to this embodiment, a plurality of operation modes (operation patterns) that trigger the generation of such an effect restriction period (function restriction period) are prepared. As a result, it is expected that the conditions for generating the production restriction period will be complicated and a sense of tension will be given, such as "Isn't the mischievous act actually monitored by the hall side?"

FIG. 381 is a time chart for explaining an example of processing when a production restriction period is generated based on the establishment of a predetermined production restriction condition in a non-gaming state (during a demo screen, etc.). be.

Now, the game is controlled to the state where the game is not started (non-game state), and the standby display is being performed on the effect display device 1600 (the situation where the decorative symbol is displayed in the stopped state, and the demo screen. Is displayed, etc.). As described above, in such a situation, when the volume adjustment button (effect selection left button 331 or effect selection right button 332) is operated, the volume setting value is changed, and some effect sound is output during the operation. If it is in the state, the process of adjusting the volume (the process of reflecting the volume setting value as the volume) will be executed. At this time, a volume adjustment confirmation sound can be output at the adjusted volume. Similarly, when the brightness adjustment button is operated, the brightness setting value is changed, and if a predetermined effect lamp is in the light emitting state at the time of the operation, the brightness is adjusted (the brightness setting value is used as the amount of light). Processing to reflect) will be executed. At this time, a brightness adjustment confirmation sound may be output.

In this way, in the non-gaming state, when the player starts the game, the volume adjustment button and the brightness adjustment button are operated so that the volume and brightness can be set to suit his / her taste. Reception is allowed. Then, when the operation is accepted, it is expected that the player is encouraged to start the game by changing the volume setting value and the brightness setting value accordingly.

However, as described above, in the non-gaming state, an operation for mischief may be performed on a plurality of operation means including such a volume adjustment button and a brightness adjustment button. As a result, if an abnormality or failure occurs in even one of these operating means, the operability and the effectability will be significantly deteriorated, and it is inevitable that the game interest will be deteriorated.

Therefore, in the pachinko machine 1 (peripheral control MPU1511a) according to this embodiment, some operation patterns (detection patterns) to be recognized as mischief detection are prepared, and in the non-gaming state, any of these operation patterns can be used. Based on the detection that the operation has been performed, it is possible to execute a process of generating a production restriction period (function restriction period) in which a penalty is imposed for a predetermined time (for example, 5 minutes).

In the pachinko machine 1 (peripheral control MPU1511a) according to this embodiment, it is determined that the condition related to the effect restriction is satisfied when any of the following operation patterns (detection patterns) is detected in the non-gaming state. It is said.
a. The operation detection for the operation button 410 is newly generated before the first timer time (for example, 3 seconds) is started to be timed with the operation detection for the sword portion 5010 and the time is finished for the first timer time. Further, the operation detection for the sword portion 5010 is performed from the start of timing the second timer time (for example, 3 seconds) triggered by the operation detection for the newly generated operation button 410 until the timing of the second timer time is completed. Operation pattern (detection pattern) in which detection conditions such as occurrence again are set
b. The operation detection for the sword portion 5010 is newly generated until the third timer time (for example, 3 seconds) is started to be timed with the operation detection for the operation button 410 and the time is finished for the third timer time. Further, the operation detection for the operation button 410 is performed from the start of timing the fourth timer time (for example, 3 seconds) triggered by the operation detection for the newly generated sword portion 5010 until the operation detection for the fourth timer time is completed. Operation pattern (detection pattern) in which detection conditions such as occurrence again are set

It should be noted that these operation patterns a and b are merely examples, and the effect restriction period (function restriction period) may be generated when the detection conditions related to the other operation patterns are satisfied, or the detection may be performed. It is not always necessary to prepare a plurality of target operation patterns, and only one of them may be used. Further, the first to fourth timer times may be the same time or different times. Further, the same timer may be used for timing, or different timers may be used for timing.

Here, "long press on the operation button 410" and "continuous hit operation on the operation button 410 (multiple operations)" are also modes that are not required in the state where the game is not started (non-game state). It can be said. However, since these modes can be instructed to be operated in the operation effect in the game execution state, the player has some purpose (for example, wishing or rehearsal) when starting the game even in the non-game state. It is assumed that these operations can be performed in, and it is relatively well confirmed that such a situation actually occurs. Therefore, for the "operation combination for a plurality of operation means (for example, the operation in the order of" sword part 5010-> operation button 410-> sword part 5010 ")" to be detected for the purpose of mischief, the game execution state is set. It can be said that it is important to avoid erroneous detection by setting the operation effect so that the operation is not instructed at a certain time. As a result, it is possible to avoid that the production restriction period occurs relatively frequently and the operating rate of the pachinko machine 1 is significantly reduced.

In particular, in the pachinko machine 1 according to this embodiment, operations for other operating means (for example, sword portion 5010) are performed before and after the operation for the specific operating means (for example, the operation button 410). As a condition, the detection condition related to the above operation pattern (detection pattern) is satisfied and the effect restriction period (function restriction period) is generated only when the operations for a plurality of operation means are mixed within a relatively short time. I have to. Therefore, players and the like who have only touched once due to their rarity, not the intention of mischief, can be excluded from the penalty, and the production restriction period occurs relatively frequently, and the pachinko machine 1 It is possible to more preferably avoid a large decrease in the operating rate of the machine.

The stricter detection conditions in this way are to prevent the production restriction period from occurring relatively frequently and the operating rate of the pachinko machine 1 to drop significantly, and to make it confusing due to mischief. This is because it is expected that various combinations will be used when the machine is operated, and even if the detection conditions are tightened, there is a high possibility that the detection conditions will be satisfied in the future.

In the example shown in FIG. 381, first, the operation on the sword portion 5010 is detected at the timing tq1 in the non-gaming state. Then, in the peripheral control MPU1511a, the first timer time (for example, 3 seconds) is generated based on the detection, and whether or not the second stage detection condition is satisfied before the first timer time is completely digested. It will be in the state of judging whether or not (the state of the first stage).

That is, as described above, in the "operation pattern (detection pattern) a", three conditions (sword part 5010 → operation button 410 → sword part 5010) are imposed as conditions for generating the effect restriction period, and these conditions are imposed. Each time is satisfied one by one, the stairs for generating the production restriction period are to be climbed one step at a time.

At the timing tq1, the first staircase of the three stairs until the production restriction period is generated is climbed. The state of the first stage can be continued until the first timer time (for example, 3 seconds) is exhausted, and the detection condition of the second stage (here, the operation for the operation button 410) is not satisfied. When the first timer time has been exhausted, it is returned to the original state (the state of the 0th stage after going down one staircase) in which all the above three conditions are not satisfied.

In this regard, in the example shown in FIG. 381, the operation for the operation button 410 is detected at the timing tq2 when the first timer time is in the state where the digestion is not completed (the state of the first stage), and the operation pattern. (Detection pattern) Of the three conditions of a, the "second stage detection condition" is satisfied. Then, in the peripheral control MPU1511a, the second timer time (for example, 3 seconds) is generated based on the detection, and the detection condition of the third stage (here, the last) until the second timer time is completely digested. (Detection condition) is set to a state (second stage state) for determining whether or not the condition is satisfied.

That is, at the timing tq2, the second staircase of the three stairs until the effect restriction period is generated is climbed. The state of the second stage can be continued until the second timer time (for example, 3 seconds) is completely digested, and the detection condition of the third stage (here, the operation on the sword portion 5010) is not satisfied. When the second timer time has been exhausted, it is returned to the original state (the state of the 0th stage after going down two stairs) in which all of the above three conditions are not satisfied.

In the example shown in FIG. 381, the operation for the operation button 410 is detected again at the timing tq3 when the second timer time is in the state where the digestion is not completed (the second stage state), and the operation pattern (detection) is detected. Of the three conditions of the pattern) a, the "third-stage detection condition (final detection condition)" is satisfied. Therefore, in the peripheral control MPU 1511a, based on the detection, the effect display device 1600 displays (reproduces) the specific moving image (warning moving image) that cannot appear in the state where the game effect according to the jackpot determination is being executed. Let's get started. At the same time, even if there is an operation on the volume adjustment button, the change of the volume setting value related to the output volume of the production sound is not accepted, the current volume setting value is not displayed, and of course the volume adjustment confirmation sound is not output. Furthermore, even if there is an operation on the brightness adjustment button, the change in the brightness setting value related to the brightness of the production lamp is not accepted, the current brightness setting value is not displayed, and of course the brightness adjustment confirmation sound is not output. , Generates production restrictions. Then, the production restriction period (function restriction period) in which such a penalty is imposed is continued from the timing tq3 for a predetermined time (for example, 5 minutes).

According to such a configuration, when a plurality of operations are operated in a mixed manner, an effect restriction period is generated, so that the operation by mischief can be suppressed.

Also, in order to generate the production restriction period, it is necessary to clear the conditions one by one and raise the state level (go up the stairs), but when the time runs out in the middle of the road, until then I am trying to cancel all the state levels and return to the original state. As a result, even if the game is ended with the state level raised, it is also preferable that the production restriction period is unintentionally generated when a new player tries to start the game. Can be avoided.

In addition, in the process of raising the state level (up the stairs) in this way, the "volume adjustment button" and "brightness" which are the operation means to be restricted when the production restriction period occurs. It can be assumed that the "adjustment button" is operated. However, these operation means (volume adjustment button, brightness adjustment button) can be set to a volume and brightness that suits the player's taste when the player starts the game. It is acceptable. Therefore, no matter how much these operation means (volume adjustment button, brightness adjustment button) are operated in the process of raising the state level (up the stairs), the state is triggered by this. It is desirable not to cause a change in the level or affect the first timer time, the second timer time, or the like.

That is, in this case, no matter how much the volume adjustment button and the brightness adjustment button are targeted for operation by mischief, the production restriction period cannot be generated with this as an opportunity. However, at least the already raised state level does not decrease due to these operations, and once the production restriction period occurs, the target of the production restriction is the "volume adjustment button" or "brightness adjustment button". Since the operations for these will be invalidated at all, the mischief for the "volume adjustment button" and the "brightness adjustment button", which are not the targets of detection of the operation by the mischief, will be appropriately suppressed. Will be expected to do.

Further, as an operation pattern (detection pattern) used for mischief detection, it is sandwiched between "two operations (timing tq1, tq3 in FIG. 381) for another operation means (for example, sword portion 5010)". The "operation (timing tq2 in FIG. 381)" in the form of "specific operation means (for example, operation button 410)" is required to be operated not once but a predetermined number of times. Is more desirable.

That is, in this case, for example, in the case of the above-mentioned "operation pattern (detection pattern) a", the operation on the sword portion 5010 is detected, and the operation is performed within the fifth timer time (for example, 3 seconds) corresponding to the detection. The operation on the button 410 is detected, the operation on the operation button 410 is detected again within the 6th timer time (for example, 3 seconds) corresponding to the detection, and the 7th timer time (for example, 3 seconds) corresponding to the detection is detected again. When the operation on the sword portion 5010 is detected again, the detection condition related to the "operation pattern (detection pattern) a" is satisfied and the effect restriction period is generated. Further, the 5th to 7th timer times may be the same time or different times. Further, the same timer may be used for timing, or different timers may be used for timing.

When the operation on the operation button 410 is not detected again within the sixth timer time (for example, 3 seconds) and the operation on the sword portion 5010 is detected again, the sixth timer time (for example, 3 seconds) is reset. , It is more desirable that the detection conditions related to the operation pattern (detection pattern) are not satisfied and the effect restriction period is not generated. Further, within the 7th timer time (for example, 3 seconds), the operation on the operation button 410, not the operation on the sword portion 5010, is detected again (here, 2 times), which is a specific number of times (here). Then, even when the detection) is performed (3rd time), the 7th timer time (for example, 3 seconds) is reset so that the detection condition related to the operation pattern (detection pattern) is not satisfied and the effect restriction period is not generated. Is more desirable.

According to such a configuration, when the operation button 410 is operated n times (here, twice) in succession at the timing between the operations of the sword portion 5010 twice, the operation pattern (detection pattern) is applied. The detection condition is satisfied and the production restriction period occurs. That is, when the operation button 410 is operated only m times (<n times) or the operation button 410 is operated l times (> n times) during the two operations on the sword portion 5010, the effect restriction period is set. Since it will not occur, it is expected that the conditions for the production restriction period will be complicated and that the hall side will actually monitor the mischief. Become.

In order to make such a complexity, when the operation button 410 is operated only m times (<n times) and the operation on the sword portion 5010 is performed again within the timer time, or when the operation button 410 is operated again, the operation button 410 is operated. When the operation is performed within each timer time over times (> n times), it is desirable to control the state to a state different from the original state (the state may be different between m times and l times). .. Therefore, even if the operation is performed according to the above-mentioned "operation pattern (detection pattern) a" in the state controlled by these different states, the effect restriction period does not occur.

Furthermore, when the operation button 410 is operated l times (> n times) during the two operations on the sword portion 5010, the effect restriction period is not generated, but when the operation button 410 is operated k times (> l times). If the production restriction period can be generated (similar to when it is operated n times), the conditions for generating the production restriction period will be made more complicated, and "the mischief act is not actually monitored by the hall side. It is expected that a feeling of tension such as "ka" will be given more favorably. In this case as well, it goes without saying that each time the operation button 410 is operated, a timer time is generated and the next operation detection is required within the timer time. Even with such a configuration, a plurality of "predetermined operation modes (operation patterns (detection patterns))" that trigger the generation of the effect restriction period will be prepared.

However, such mischief is very different from cheating such as magnet goto, and taking too strict measures may lead to disadvantages on the hall side. Therefore, for the specific video that appears during the production restriction period, rather than displaying a strong warning content, the content should be such that it explains the proper handling method related to the game and the production, and the deterioration of the game interest is suppressed. Is desirable.

As described above, when a predetermined time (for example, 5 minutes) elapses from the time when the production restriction period (function restriction period) occurs, the specific video is hidden, and "operation reception regarding volume is permitted. Then, the volume adjustment confirmation sound is also output, the operation reception regarding the brightness is allowed, and the brightness adjustment confirmation sound is also output. ”It will be returned to the normal state as a non-gaming state.

On the other hand, as shown in FIG. 382, the player starts the game at the timing tq4 before the predetermined time (for example, 5 minutes) elapses from the time when the production restriction period (function restriction period) occurs. It is conceivable that the start winning prize may be generated to shift to the game execution state in which the decorative symbol is displayed in a variable manner. In such a case, since the above-mentioned intended purpose of quitting the mischievous act and starting the game has been achieved, the predetermined time (for example, 5 minutes) has not yet passed. End the production restriction period (function restriction period) of something.

However, if the game is started without waiting for the lapse of a predetermined time (for example, 5 minutes), there is a possibility of insufficient reflection, so at least the change of the decorative pattern that triggered the end of the production restriction period. Until the display is finished, each reception of volume adjustment and brightness adjustment is allowed, but "Even if the volume is adjusted, the current volume setting value is displayed but the volume adjustment confirmation sound is not output and the brightness. Even if it is adjusted, it is desirable to control it as a partial restriction period such as "The current brightness setting value is displayed but the brightness adjustment confirmation sound is not output."

As shown in FIG. 382, when the game execution state is entered in this way, the detection for the above-mentioned "operation pattern (detection pattern)" is invalidated regardless of whether or not the game is controlled during the partial time limit period. Become so. Therefore, even if the sword portion 5010 is operated or the operation button 410 is operated, the first timer time and the second timer time are not timed by these triggers, and the production restriction period may occur. No.

According to such a configuration, when the game is shifted to the game execution state without waiting for the original duration as the production restriction period, the game is left in a form in which a part of the restriction contents during the production restriction period is left. Since it will be shifted to the execution state, it will be possible to encourage reflection on the mischievous act without hindering the progress of the game production.

Regarding the partial restriction period, not only until the variable display of the decorative symbol that triggered the end of the production restriction period is completed, but also the decorative symbol is stopped when the number of reservations is 0. It may be continued at least until (until it becomes non-gaming state).

Further, at the timing when the game execution state ends and the game shifts to the non-game state (for example, the timing tq5 shown in FIG. 382), a predetermined safe time is set and until the predetermined safe time elapses. Is desirable to continue the state in which the detection for the above-mentioned "operation pattern (detection pattern)" is invalidated even though it is in the non-gaming state. That is, it is assumed that the excitement of the player has not cooled down in the situation where the game execution state has just ended, and the operations for the plurality of operating means are excessively performed. This is because imposing a penalty may lead to immediate cancellation of the game. Therefore, it is desirable that the safe time is always set when the game execution state ends and the game shifts to the non-game state.

In addition, when the game is shifted to the non-gaming state while being controlled as the above-mentioned partial restriction period, there is a possibility that the reflection on the mischief act is still insufficient, so the partial restriction is performed until the safe time elapses. The period may be continued. At this time, the detection for the above-mentioned "operation pattern (detection pattern)" is allowed again when the safe time elapses.

In addition, the safe time is set as a time value longer than the shortest time value among a plurality of time values that can be selected as the symbol variation time from the start to the stop of the variation display of the decorative symbol. It is desirable to do. According to such a configuration, even if the variable display of the decorative pattern is terminated immediately, the above-mentioned "operation pattern (detection pattern)" can be detected at least until the safe time is terminated. It will be possible to continue the invalidated state or to continue the partial time limit.

In addition, when the variation display of the decorative symbol is started in the form of ending the production restriction period (function restriction period), the symbol variation time longer than the safe time is always selected, and only the selected symbol variation time is selected. It is desirable that the decorative pattern is displayed in a variable manner. With such a configuration, the above-mentioned partial restriction period can be continued for a relatively long time.

Further, in the above-described example, even if the detection approaching the occurrence of the effect restriction period is performed within the detection period for the above-mentioned operation pattern (detection pattern) (the portion where fine dots are provided in FIG. 381), no matter what. The behavior of is also not appearing. However, instead of this, by outputting a specific sound every time the timer time is set in the above operation pattern (detection pattern) (every time going up the stairs where the penalty occurs), it is urged to stop the operation due to mischief. You may do so. This specific sound may be output as a different sound depending on the type of the operating means to be detected. Similarly to this, each time the timer time is set in the above-mentioned operation pattern (detection pattern) (every time the penalty is generated up the stairs), the display content on the effect display device 1600 is changed. May be good.

In addition, in the above explanation example, regarding the method when the volume adjustment confirmation sound and the brightness adjustment confirmation sound are not output, in addition to not assigning the volume adjustment confirmation sound and the brightness adjustment confirmation sound to the channel, the volume adjustment A confirmation sound or a brightness adjustment confirmation sound is assigned to a channel, but it can also be realized by setting the volume value to "0".

It should be noted that the volume adjustment confirmation sound and the brightness adjustment confirmation sound are output as the same sound, and although it is not possible to confirm which "confirmation sound" was output, some "confirmation sound" must be output. Should be recognizable. That is, if various sounds are adopted as the confirmation sound, there is a possibility that the possibility of the expected production sound suggesting the degree of expectation may be conscious, and there is a concern that the interest in the game may be reduced. Because.

[Noise prevention by adjustment confirmation sound at the time of opening]
As described with reference to FIG. 118, in the pachinko machine 1 (peripheral control MPU1511a) according to this embodiment, the effect pattern determination as to which of the plurality of effect patterns is to be executed is executed based on the result of the jackpot determination. It is possible. Then, when one effect pattern is selected as a result of the effect pattern determination, any one of a plurality of expected effects (notice effect, etc.) prepared corresponding to the type of the selected effect pattern is selected. It is possible to execute a notice effect determination as to whether or not the expected effect (s) are selectively displayed. Depending on the result of this advance notice effect determination, all of the plurality of expected effects (notice effect, etc.) prepared corresponding to the type of the above-selected effect pattern may be executed in sequence. It is possible that none of the plurality of expected effects (such as a notice effect) will be executed.

Then, when such an effect determination (effect pattern determination, advance notice effect determination) is performed, the effect content according to the result of the effect determination is controlled to be displayed on the effect display device 1600, so that the result of the jackpot determination can be obtained. The variable effect of the decorative pattern will be executed together with the expected effect (notice effect) related to the background depiction (background notice) and the movement of the movable body (character effect). As a result, as a result of the variable effect by the decorative symbol being executed together with the expected effect related to the background depiction and the movement of the movable body, when the jackpot symbol is stopped and displayed, the jackpot game as a privilege is executed for the player. It will be possible.

In such a configuration, the variable effect by the decorative pattern is provided as an effect having "a function of deterministically indicating whether or not a big hit is obtained as a result of the big hit determination", and the background description and movement thereof are provided. Expected effects related to body movements and the like will be provided as effects having "a function that suggests the degree of expectation (including 0% and 100%) that a big hit has been obtained". That is, the player enjoys the game through these effects.

Further, as described above, in the pachinko machine 1 according to this embodiment, the player sets a value (volume setting value) regarding the volume by operating the volume adjustment button (effect selection left button 331 or effect selection right button 332). It is possible to execute the process of changing (peripheral control MPU1511a). Then, normally, when the volume setting value is changed in this way, the peripheral control MPU1511a adjusts the volume applied to the effect sound based on the changed volume setting value (process of reflecting the volume setting value as the volume). Will be executed. At this time, a volume adjustment confirmation sound can be output at the adjusted volume.

Further, as described above, in the pachinko machine 1 according to this embodiment, although the illustration is omitted, the pachinko machine 1 is separated from the volume adjustment button (effect selection left button 331 and effect selection right button 332). It is equipped with a brightness adjustment button for various effect lamps (lamps controlled by the peripheral control MPU1511a), and when it is determined that the brightness adjustment button has been operated, the brightness applied to the various effect lamps is It is possible to execute a process of changing the set value (luminance set value) by the player (peripheral control MPU1511a). Then, normally, when the brightness set value is changed in this way, the peripheral control MPU1511a executes a process of adjusting the emission brightness based on the changed brightness set value (a process of reflecting the brightness set value as a light amount). It will be. At this time, the brightness adjustment confirmation sound can be output at the "volume corresponding to the volume set value" at the time when the player set value (brightness set value) related to the brightness is lowered or raised.

Regarding the change reception for such set values (volume setting value, brightness set value) and the adjustment process according to the changed set value, the symbol does not change and the symbol changes. In any of the states, it can be executed by the operation by the player.

By the way, since there are only new customers who are trying to start the game for a while after the hall opens, the volume adjustment and the brightness adjustment can be frequently performed so that the game can be started with a set value that suits one's taste. However, in this case, if the volume adjustment confirmation sound or the brightness adjustment confirmation sound is output each time the volume adjustment or brightness adjustment is performed, the adjustment confirmation sound reverberates in the hall, ruining the atmosphere. It's a pleasure.

Therefore, the pachinko machine 1 (peripheral control MPU1511a) according to this embodiment does not allow the player to perform an operation related to volume adjustment or an operation reception related to brightness adjustment from the time the power is turned on until the predetermined condition is satisfied. However, when the predetermined conditions are satisfied, the volume setting value and the brightness setting value are set to the respective "predetermined specific values", and the acceptance of changes in the volume setting value and the brightness setting value can be permitted. It is supposed to be.

According to such a configuration, when a predetermined condition is satisfied after the power is turned on, the set value (volume setting value) and the brightness set value related to the output volume of the effect sound are set to the respective "predetermined specific values". It will be set automatically. That is, in this case, by adopting the automatically set "specific value" as the setting value of the volume that many players tend to like, many games are played in the time zone when the hall is just opened. It can be expected that it will be difficult for a person to adjust to a volume setting value or a brightness setting value that suits his / her taste. The establishment of the predetermined condition may mean that a certain time elapses after the power is turned on, a predetermined command from the main control MPU 1310a may be received, or the peripheral control MPU 1511a may be satisfied. The specific process may be completed.

In this regard, in the pachinko machine 1 (peripheral control MPU1511a) according to this embodiment, the volume setting value and the volume setting value are set based on the fact that the predetermined condition is satisfied or the predetermined timing after the predetermined condition is satisfied. Allows acceptance of changes in brightness setting values, but does not output volume adjustment confirmation sound or brightness adjustment confirmation sound even if changes in those setting values are accepted. First, generate it. Then, after the end of such a special period (opening-only period), when the change of those set values is accepted, a period (normal business period) in which the volume adjustment confirmation sound and the brightness adjustment confirmation sound can be output is generated. There is. As a result, for a while after the hall opens (until the time required for all the adjustments by new customers to be completed has elapsed), the state in which various adjustment confirmation completion sounds are not output remains maintained. Then, it becomes possible to give an opportunity to adjust the volume and the brightness to start the game with the set value that suits one's taste.

FIG. 383 is a time chart showing an example of the processing related to the special period (opening-only period).

Now, as shown in FIG. 383, assuming that the power is turned on at the timing tr0, in the pachinko machine 1 (peripheral control MPU1511a) according to this embodiment, the volume by the player until the predetermined condition is satisfied. It is controlled as a state in which the operation related to the adjustment and the reception of the operation related to the brightness adjustment are not allowed. In such a situation, detection (main control side) related to the game such as a start prize is not allowed, and the game cannot be started. In the effect display device 1600, a dedicated display (preparation screen) during power restoration appears, or no display output is performed, and the standby screen (design stop display, demo screen, etc.) is still displayed. Do not show.

After that, when the timing tr1 in which the predetermined condition (for example, the predetermined command is transmitted from the main control MPU 1310a) is satisfied, the detection related to the game such as the start winning is allowed, and the game start waiting state (for example, the game start waiting state ( It will be controlled as a state of waiting for a start prize). The effect display device 1600 also displays the stop symbol (standby screen), and can recognize that the symbol is in the change waiting state.

At this time, under the condition that the volume setting value and the brightness setting value are set to the respective "predetermined specific values", "acceptance of changes in the volume setting value and the brightness setting value is permitted, but they are Even if the change of the set value is accepted, a special period (opening-only period) in which the volume adjustment confirmation sound and the brightness adjustment confirmation sound are not output is generated. Such a store opening-only period can be continued until the arrival of the timing tr2 when a predetermined time (for example, 1 hour) has elapsed from the occurrence of the period, and when the period ends at the timing tr2, the volume is increased. When a change in the set value or the brightness set value is accepted, a period (normal business period) in which the volume adjustment confirmation sound or the brightness adjustment confirmation sound can be output is generated. In the effect display device 1600, even after the timing tr2 arrives, the state in which the stopped symbol is displayed (waiting state for symbol change) is maintained, and the decorative symbol in the stopped state and its back are maintained. Various background images (static display or dynamic display) displayed on the side (images whose priority in the layer is lower than the decorative pattern) are displayed when the store opening period is changed to the normal business period. It won't change.

According to such a configuration, even after the state in which the stop symbol is displayed (standby screen) appears and the game starts in the waiting state, until the timing tr2 arrives (until the opening period ends). During), the adjustment confirmation sound is maintained in a state where it is not output, so that it is possible to preferably avoid the adjustment sound reverberating immediately after the store opens. On the other hand, when the timing tr2 arrives (when the time required for various adjustments by new customers has elapsed), the adjustment confirmation sound is automatically shifted to a state where it can be output. By the time various adjustments by new customers have settled down, finer adjustments will be allowed while checking the adjustment sound according to the volume setting value. Moreover, since the state where the stop symbol is displayed (standby screen) is maintained and the adjustment confirmation sound is automatically shifted to the normal business period, a predetermined time has passed since the store opened. Until this is done, it will be possible for the player to make it difficult for the player to notice that the adjustment sound is controlled during the opening-only period when the adjustment sound is not output.

After the predetermined condition is satisfied and the game is in the waiting state for starting the game (timing tr1 or later), when the change of the volume setting value or the brightness setting value is accepted, it corresponds to the changed setting value in the effect display device 1600. Parameter display (parameter display on the volume side, parameter display on the brightness side) is performed. Therefore, by checking such a parameter display, it is possible to adjust the set value according to one's preference.

However, even if the output related to the adjustment confirmation sound is not output during the period immediately after the store opens (the store opening period), changes in the volume setting value and brightness setting value will be reflected as the volume and light intensity. In the end, the atmosphere in the hall may be dyed in one color, and there is a concern that the atmosphere will be ruined and it will be a sensation. Therefore, as long as the game start waiting state is maintained, even if the volume setting value is changed before the timing tr2 arrives, the changed volume setting value is reflected as the effect sound. It is desirable not to. Similarly, regarding the brightness, as long as the game start waiting state is maintained, even if the change in the brightness setting value is accepted before the timing tr2 arrives, the changed brightness setting value is used as the amount of light. It is desirable not to be reflected. In such a configuration, during the period immediately after the opening of the store (the period dedicated to opening the store), each player adjusts the set value according to his / her preference while checking the parameter display on the effect display device 1600. That is, in this case, while giving an opportunity to adjust the set value according to one's taste, the atmosphere in the hall is not affected by the sound or light around the pachinko machine 1. It becomes possible to maintain it suitably.

It should be noted that only the brightness of the volume and the brightness may be maintained in a state in which the changed brightness setting value is not reflected as the amount of light even after the timing tr2 arrives. That is, it should be avoided to reflect the adjustment to the side where the power consumption increases due to the operation by mischief until the game is started, and the brightness whose power consumption is large compared to the volume is that while the game is not started. It is desirable that the adjustment is not reflected. Further, unlike the volume adjustment sound, the brightness adjustment sound may not necessarily be output because the degree of adjustment cannot be confirmed.

However, even when the timing tr2 has not yet arrived (the time for the opening period has not been exhausted), the symbol variation (variation display by decorative symbol) starts based on the start prize. After that, the volume adjustment and the brightness adjustment by the player have been completed, and it is expected that the frequency of these adjustments will be greatly reduced. Therefore, in the pachinko machine 1 (peripheral control MPU1511a) according to this embodiment, if the start prize is detected after the timing tr1 and before the timing tr2 arrives, the opening-only period ends early based on the detection. It is possible to execute the process of shifting to the normal business period.

However, during the variable display period of the decorative symbol due to the start winning, which ended the store opening period early, changes in the volume setting value and brightness setting value are accepted, and the adjustment confirmation sound accompanying the change is output. If this happens, it is assumed that many players will adjust the volume and brightness after the opening-only period ends early, which may lead to a fall.

Therefore, in the pachinko machine 1 (peripheral control MPU1511a) according to this embodiment, when the start prize is detected after the timing tr1 and before the timing tr2 arrives, the opening-only period is terminated early and the normal business period However, the output of various adjustment confirmation sounds is not allowed at least until the fluctuation state of the decorative pattern generated by this is completed (suppression processing during fluctuation).

FIG. 384 is a time chart showing an example of processing when a game is started while the store opening period (special period) is set.

For example, as shown in FIG. 384, it is assumed that the start winning prize is detected at the timing tr3 in which the time as a special period has not yet been digested. Then, the pachinko machine 1 (peripheral control MPU1511a) according to this embodiment ends the processing related to the opening-only period and shifts to the normal business period, and starts the fluctuation suppression process in the normal business period. This fluctuation suppression process allows the change of the volume setting value and the brightness setting value to be accepted while the fluctuation display related to the decorative symbol is being performed, and the change of these setting values is the effect sound in the output state. It is possible to execute the process of reflecting the volume and the amount of light of the production lamp in the light emitting state, but the process of not outputting the volume adjustment confirmation sound or the brightness adjustment confirmation sound even if the volume setting value or the brightness setting value is changed. " The difference from the "processing required for the store opening period" is whether or not the decorative pattern is displayed in a variable manner, and the change in the set value is reflected as the volume and light intensity. Whether or not it is performed, the suppression content for various adjustment confirmation sounds remains the same.

In the pachinko machine 1 (peripheral control MPU1511a) according to this embodiment, such a fluctuation suppression process is performed in a non-gaming state (a state in which the number of holdings is 0 and the decorative symbol is stopped and displayed). Unless it is migrated to, it will continue to run.

On the other hand, as shown in FIG. 384, only the shortest time that can be selected as the symbol variation time is controlled to the game execution state (the symbol variation with the short variation time is executed only once), and the non-game state is set at the timing tr4. If it is immediately returned to (the number of holds is 0 and the decorative design is stopped and displayed) (for example, one hour has not passed since the early termination of the store opening period). Even in the state immediately after the store opens), the special period (the period dedicated to the opening of the store) will not occur again.

That is, in this case, in the non-gaming state after the timing tr4, as a period (normal business period) in which the volume adjustment confirmation sound and the brightness adjustment confirmation sound can be output when the change of the volume setting value or the brightness setting value is accepted. It will be controlled. During the normal business period when the fluctuation suppression process is not executed, the changed volume setting value is reflected at least as the volume adjustment confirmation sound, and the changed brightness setting value is also the light intensity of the effect lamp in the light emitting state. It is supposed to be reflected as. Further, in the effect display device 1600, the stop symbol (standby screen) is displayed, and it becomes possible to recognize that the symbol is in the change waiting state.

A player who creates a situation such as "the opening period (special period) is terminated early and then the game execution state is also terminated immediately" is not convinced by the adjustment contents made while the adjustment sound is not output, so it starts once. Since it is assumed that the person has a desire to make finer adjustments until the game is interrupted, a special period (opening-only period) even if the store has just opened less than an hour after the power is turned on. ) Is not generated again, and it is desirable to allow the output of the volume adjustment confirmation sound and the brightness adjustment confirmation sound.

In the above description example, the time (timing tr1 to tr2) for the opening-only period (special period) to continue may be a fixed time after the opening-only period (special period) occurs. , It may be the time until the specific process in the peripheral control MPU 1511a is completed.

Further, the timing for setting the volume setting value and the brightness setting value to the respective "predetermined specific values" may be timing tr1 or may be a predetermined timing before the timing tr1. ..

Further, in the above-mentioned explanatory example, there is a technical feature in the configuration regarding the opening-only period (special period) that occurs after the timing tr1, and the processing in the period before the timing tr1 is different from the above-mentioned contents. It may be realized as a different process.

Further, in the above explanatory example, in the timing tr2, the decorative symbol and the background image in the effect display device 1600 are not changed, but the display change is such that an image different from the decorative symbol and the background image is additionally displayed. If so, it may be done.

In addition, in the above explanation example, regarding the method when the volume adjustment confirmation sound and the brightness adjustment confirmation sound are not output, in addition to not assigning the volume adjustment confirmation sound and the brightness adjustment confirmation sound to the channel, the volume adjustment A confirmation sound or a brightness adjustment confirmation sound is assigned to a channel, but it can also be realized by setting the volume value to "0".

It should be noted that the volume adjustment confirmation sound and the brightness adjustment confirmation sound are output as the same sound, and although it is not possible to confirm which "confirmation sound" was output, some "confirmation sound" must be output. Should be recognizable. That is, if various sounds are adopted as the confirmation sound, there is a possibility that the possibility of the expected production sound suggesting the degree of expectation may be conscious, and there is a concern that the interest in the game may be reduced. Because.

Further, in the above description example, only one of the set values of the volume and the brightness may be changed.

[Control over volume adjustment confirmation sound according to the importance of production]
As described with reference to FIG. 118, in the pachinko machine 1 (peripheral control MPU1511a) according to this embodiment, the effect pattern determination as to which of the plurality of effect patterns is to be executed is executed based on the result of the jackpot determination. It is possible. Then, when one effect pattern is selected as a result of the effect pattern determination, any one of a plurality of expected effects (notice effect, etc.) prepared corresponding to the type of the selected effect pattern is selected. It is possible to execute a notice effect determination as to whether or not the expected effect (s) are selectively displayed. Depending on the result of this advance notice effect determination, all of the plurality of expected effects (notice effect, etc.) prepared corresponding to the type of the above-selected effect pattern may be executed in sequence. It is possible that none of the plurality of expected effects (such as a notice effect) will be executed.

Then, when such an effect determination (effect pattern determination, advance notice effect determination) is performed, the effect content according to the result of the effect determination is controlled to be displayed on the effect display device 1600, so that the result of the jackpot determination can be obtained. The variable effect of the decorative pattern will be executed together with the expected effect (notice effect) related to the background depiction (background notice) and the movement of the movable body (character effect). As a result, as a result of the variable effect by the decorative symbol being executed together with the expected effect related to the background depiction and the movement of the movable body, when the jackpot symbol is stopped and displayed, the jackpot game as a privilege is executed for the player. It will be possible.

In such a configuration, the variable effect by the decorative pattern is provided as an effect having "a function of deterministically indicating whether or not a big hit is obtained as a result of the big hit determination", and the background description and movement thereof are provided. Expected effects related to body movements and the like will be provided as effects having "a function that suggests the degree of expectation (including 0% and 100%) that a big hit has been obtained". That is, the player enjoys the game through these effects.

Further, as described above, in the pachinko machine 1 according to this embodiment, the player sets a value (volume setting value) regarding the volume by operating the volume adjustment button (effect selection left button 331 or effect selection right button 332). It is possible to execute the process of changing (peripheral control MPU1511a). Then, normally, when the volume setting value is changed in this way, the peripheral control MPU1511a adjusts the volume applied to the effect sound based on the changed volume setting value (process of reflecting the volume setting value as the volume). Will be executed. At this time, a volume adjustment confirmation sound can be output at the adjusted volume.

Further, as described above, in the pachinko machine 1 according to this embodiment, although the illustration is omitted, the pachinko machine 1 is separated from the volume adjustment button (effect selection left button 331 and effect selection right button 332). It is equipped with a brightness adjustment button for various effect lamps (lamps controlled by the peripheral control MPU1511a), and when it is determined that the brightness adjustment button has been operated, the brightness applied to the various effect lamps is It is possible to execute a process of changing the set value (luminance set value) by the player (peripheral control MPU1511a). Then, normally, when the brightness set value is changed in this way, the peripheral control MPU1511a executes a process of adjusting the emission brightness based on the changed brightness set value (a process of reflecting the brightness set value as a light amount). It will be. At this time, the brightness adjustment confirmation sound can be output at the "volume corresponding to the volume set value" at the time when the player set value (brightness set value) related to the brightness is lowered or raised.

Regarding the change reception for such set values (volume setting value, brightness set value) and the adjustment process according to the changed set value, the symbol does not change and the symbol changes. In any of the states, it can be executed by the operation by the player.

Further, as described above, in the pachinko machine 1 according to this embodiment, the case where the first hit determination is made according to the acceptance of the game ball at the first start port 2002 and the case where the second start port 2004 is performed. Regardless of whether the second hit determination is made according to the acceptance of the game ball, the symbol variation (first symbol variation, second symbol variation) is performed according to the hit determination. After that, a privilege (big hit game) that is advantageous to the player can be given. However, the expected value for those benefits is set so that the second hit determination (second symbol variation) is higher than the first hit determination (first symbol variation).

In the above-mentioned example, in the big hit related to the first special symbol, the opening / closing pattern of opening the big winning opening 2103 for a long time (for example, 28.5 seconds) is repeated eight times, and only about 1000 game balls are paid out. On the other hand, in the big hit related to the second special symbol, it is possible to pay out about 2000 game balls by repeating the opening and closing pattern of opening the big winning opening 2103 for a long time (for example, 28.5 seconds) 16 times. ing.

In this regard, in the pachinko machine 1 according to this embodiment, the acceptance of the change of the volume setting value is "a game start waiting state in which neither the first symbol variation nor the second symbol variation is executed", ". The first-side execution state in which the first symbol change is executed and the second symbol change is not executed, and the second symbol change is not executed and the second symbol change is executed. It is possible to allow it in any of the "second-side execution states", and the numerical range in which the change of the volume setting value is allowed is the same in any of these states.

According to such a configuration, the sound can be adjusted without being restricted by the setting range or the like regardless of which state (game start waiting state, first side execution state, second side execution state). Therefore, it becomes possible to suitably maintain the game entertainment through sound adjustment according to each state.

Further, in the pachinko machine 1 according to this embodiment, when the above-mentioned "game start waiting state" and "first side execution state" are present, the set value (volume setting value) related to the output volume of the effect sound is changed. When this is done, the volume adjustment confirmation sound is output, but in the above-mentioned "second side execution state", it is controlled so that the volume adjustment confirmation sound is not output even if the volume setting value is changed.

That is, in the "game start waiting state", since the game is not being executed, the effect sound is not output, and if the volume adjustment confirmation sound is not output when the volume setting value is changed, the change is made. It is not possible to confirm the volume of the later volume as an audible sound. Therefore, it is desirable to output the volume adjustment confirmation sound when the set value (volume setting value) related to the output volume of the effect sound is changed in the "game start waiting state".

Further, in the "first side execution state", although there is a situation in which the effect sound corresponding to the first hit determination is output, the situation is a low probability game in which the probability of obtaining a big hit is relatively low. It is often controlled to a state (low probability non-time saving game state), so there is not much expectation for the production. In recent years, it has been confirmed that a player plays a game while paying close attention to a mobile device such as a smartphone when the player is in such a low-expected gaming state. Therefore, when the volume setting value is changed in the "first side execution state", the volume adjustment confirmation sound is used to surely notify the player of the change and the volume level after the change. It is desirable to output.

On the other hand, in the "second side execution state", the effect sound corresponding to the second hit determination is output, and the high probability game state (high probability time short game state) in which the probability of obtaining a big hit is relatively high. ) Is often controlled. In such a situation, since the expectation for the production is high, the volume adjustment tends to be performed to enjoy the production. Therefore, it is recommended to output the volume adjustment confirmation sound when the volume setting value is changed. It may be difficult to hear the directing sound and BGM according to the 2-hit judgment, which may reduce the interest in the game. Therefore, in the "second side execution state", it is controlled so that the volume adjustment confirmation sound is not output even if the volume setting value is changed, thereby clearing the production sound and BGM according to the second hit judgment. It is desirable to give an opportunity to adjust the volume in an environment where the sound can be heard so that the game entertainment can be maintained appropriately.

However, in the "second side execution state", the degree of expectation for the production is increasing, and even after the second symbol fluctuation is stopped and displayed in the lost mode, the player may change it again to the jackpot mode. It can be said that it is important to secure the time (afterglow) to make people aware of the game in order to maintain the interest of the game. In this regard, if the normal processing when the game is in the "game start waiting state" is performed immediately after the transition to the "game start waiting state", the processing related to the "second side execution state" is performed. It becomes possible for the player to easily detect that the game has been terminated in a lost manner and the state has been shifted to the “waiting for the start of the game” state, and there is a concern that the interest in the game may be reduced.

Therefore, when the process related to the "second side execution state" is completed and the state is shifted to the "game start waiting state", a predetermined time (for example, 3 seconds) after the transition to the "game start waiting state" is performed. Controls so that normal processing (processing that allows a change in the volume setting value and outputs a volume adjustment confirmation sound when the volume setting value is changed) is not performed during the "game start waiting state". It is desirable to do. For example, for a predetermined time (for example, 3 seconds) after the transition from the "second side execution state" to the "game start waiting state", "the volume setting value is allowed to be changed, but the volume setting value is changed. Even so, it is desirable to perform "processing that does not output the volume adjustment confirmation sound" and "processing that does not allow the change of the volume setting value itself". However, it is more positive that the "second side execution state" may still be continued for a predetermined time (for example, 3 seconds) after the transition from the "second side execution state" to the "game start waiting state". As in the case of the "second side execution state", "a process that allows a change in the volume setting value but does not output a volume adjustment confirmation sound even if the volume setting value is changed" It is more desirable to do so.

On the other hand, in the "first side execution state", the degree of expectation for the effect is not increased, and basically, the first symbol variation is stopped and displayed in a lost mode. Therefore, when the process related to the "first side execution state" is completed and the state shifts to the "game start waiting state", the "first side execution state" is different from the case of the above-mentioned "second side execution state". The above-mentioned normal processing (processing that allows a change in the volume setting value and outputs a volume adjustment confirmation sound when the volume setting value is changed), which is also performed even when in the "state", should be continued as it is. It is desirable to.

By the way, in the situation controlled to the "first side execution state", the mischievous operation is performed so that the operations for a plurality of operation means are mixed and performed within a relatively short time due to the stress that the big hit is hard to win. Is a concern. That is, as a result of being treated roughly, if an abnormality or failure occurs in even one of these operating means, the operability and the effectability will be significantly reduced, and further deterioration of the game entertainment will be unavoidable.

Therefore, there is a possibility that operation detection has occurred by a plurality of operation means and mischief has occurred not only when the game is controlled to the "game start waiting state" but also when the game is controlled to the "first side execution state". When the situation becomes high, the effect restriction period (function restriction period) in the above-described example of "preventing mischief against a plurality of operating means (see FIGS. 381 and 382)" may be generated.

That is, in this case, some predetermined operations among the plurality of operating means included in the pachinko machine 1 in any of the "game start waiting state (non-gaming state)" and "first side execution state". When an operation on the means (here, the operation button 410 and the sword portion 5010) is detected within a predetermined continuous operation detection time, the detection is used as an opportunity.
-The effect display device 1600 displays (plays) a specific moving image (warning image) that cannot appear when the game effect according to the jackpot determination is being executed.
-Even if there is an operation on the volume adjustment button, the change of the volume setting value related to the output volume of the production sound is not accepted, and the current volume setting value is not displayed.
-Even if there is an operation on the brightness adjustment button, the change of the brightness setting value related to the brightness of the production lamp is not accepted, and the current brightness setting value is not displayed. Control is performed to generate the period) over a predetermined time (for example, 5 minutes). The specific moving image in the effect display device 1600 will be displayed even if the image related to the "first side execution state" has appeared before that. When a predetermined time (for example, 5 minutes) has elapsed from the time when the production restriction period (function restriction period) occurs, the specific moving image is hidden, and the operation reception regarding the volume is allowed and the volume is increased. The normal state as "game start waiting state" or "first side execution state" such that the adjustment confirmation sound is also output, the operation reception related to the brightness is allowed, and the brightness adjustment confirmation sound is also output. Will be returned to.

As for the detailed contents and other examples regarding such a production restriction period (function restriction period), it is possible to appropriately adopt each content in the explanation example of "prevention of mischief for a plurality of operating means". However, in this case, the production restriction period (function restriction period) is not terminated early even if the transition from the "game start waiting state" to the "first side execution state" is performed while the production restriction period (function restriction period) is in effect. Various processes related to the production restriction period will be continued as they are under the same conditions as when the game is in the "waiting for game start state". As a result, it is expected that the mischief operation when controlled to the "first side execution state" with a low degree of expectation will be suppressed.

On the other hand, when the state is changed from the "game start waiting state" to the "second side execution state" while in the effect restriction period (function restriction period), the above-mentioned "effect restriction period (effect restriction period) is referred to with reference to FIG. 382. "Processing related to early termination of the function restriction period)" and its modified examples will be appropriately adopted and executed. As a result, the atmosphere when the highly anticipated "second-side execution state" is finally executed is maintained, and it is expected that the game entertainment will be maintained favorably.

In addition, in the above explanation example, regarding the method when the volume adjustment confirmation sound and the brightness adjustment confirmation sound are not output, in addition to not assigning the volume adjustment confirmation sound and the brightness adjustment confirmation sound to the channel, the volume adjustment A confirmation sound or a brightness adjustment confirmation sound is assigned to a channel, but it can also be realized by setting the volume value to "0".

It should be noted that the volume adjustment confirmation sound and the brightness adjustment confirmation sound are output as the same sound, and although it is not possible to confirm which "confirmation sound" was output, some "confirmation sound" must be output. Should be recognizable. That is, if various sounds are adopted as the confirmation sound, there is a possibility that the possibility of the expected production sound suggesting the degree of expectation may be conscious, and there is a concern that the interest in the game may be reduced. Because.

Further, in the above description example, only one of the set values of the volume and the brightness may be changed.

[Period of permissible operation reception (validity period), its own color rendering index]
As described with reference to FIG. 118, in the pachinko machine 1 according to this embodiment, it is possible to execute the fluctuation pattern determination as to which of the plurality of fluctuation patterns is to be executed based on the result of the jackpot determination. Then, when one variation pattern is selected as a result of the variation pattern determination, the peripheral control MPU1511a has a plurality of expected effects (notice effect) prepared corresponding to the type of the selected variation pattern. It is possible to execute an effect determination (notice determination, etc.) as to which of the expected effects (s) are selectively displayed. Depending on the result of this effect determination, all of the plurality of expected effects (notice effect, etc.) prepared corresponding to the type of the above-selected fluctuation pattern may be sequentially executed. It is possible that none of the plurality of expected effects (such as a notice effect) will be executed.

Then, when such an effect determination (effect pattern determination, notice determination, etc.) is performed, the effect content according to the result of the effect determination is controlled to be displayed on the effect display device 1600, so that the result of the jackpot determination is obtained. The variation effect by the corresponding decorative pattern will be executed together with the expected effect (notice effect) related to the background depiction (background notice) and the movement of the movable body (role effect). As a result, as a result of the variable effect by the decorative symbol being executed together with the expected effect related to the background depiction and the movement of the movable body, when the jackpot symbol is stopped and displayed, the jackpot game as a privilege is executed for the player. It will be possible.

In such a configuration, the variation effect by the above decorative pattern is provided as an effect having "a function of indicating whether or not a big hit is obtained as a result of the big hit determination", and the background description, the movement of the movable body, etc. The expected effect will be provided as an effect having "a function that suggests the degree of expectation (including 0% and 100%) that a big hit has been obtained". That is, the player enjoys the game through these effects.

Then, in the pachinko machine 1 according to this embodiment, when the first fluctuation pattern is selected as a result of the above-mentioned fluctuation pattern determination, the first fluctuation pattern is set regardless of the result of the advance notice effect determination. It is possible to generate an operation reception effect (“intrinsic reception effect” described later) in which the effect reception is permitted when the design effect based on the pattern progresses to a specific timing. Further, even when the second fluctuation pattern is selected as a result of performing the fluctuation pattern determination, when a special result is obtained in the advance notice effect determination corresponding to the second fluctuation pattern, the first variation pattern is determined. It is possible to generate an operation reception effect (“additional reception effect” described later) in which the effect reception is permitted when the symbol effect based on the fluctuation pattern of 2 progresses to a predetermined timing. However, in the second variation pattern, if a special result is not obtained in the advance notice effect determination, the operation reception effect (effective) that allows the effect reception even if the symbol effect based on the second variation pattern progresses to a predetermined timing. Period) does not occur. A plurality of first variation patterns that generate an "intrinsic reception effect" and a second variation pattern that can generate an "additional reception effect" may be prepared. Alternatively, the first variation pattern may be prepared so that the "intrinsic reception effect" and the "additional reception effect" can be generated in sequence.

However, the operation reception effect (valid period) that can occur under these conditions is a predetermined change (effect) for the effect member to be produced as long as the operation is detected within the valid period. Since only the post-operation effect that generates the display change in the display device 1600, the effect sound change in the speaker, the light emission change by the lamp, and the effect operation by the movable decorative body) is executed, the operation reception effect (effective). (Period) The effect of the game itself is poor, and there is a concern that the game will be less enjoyable until the effect is executed after the operation.

Therefore, in the pachinko machine 1 according to this embodiment,
-When an operation by the player is detected, the first operation effect means capable of executing the post-operation effect in which the execution state is continued until a predetermined timing in the symbol effect based on the fluctuation pattern arrives, and
-When an operation by the player is detected, a second operation effect means capable of performing a post-operation effect in such a way that the elapsed time from the timing at which the detection is made reaches a predetermined time value. I will prepare.

According to such a configuration, there are cases where the operation reception effect by the first operation effect means is executed and the operation reception effect by the second operation effect means is executed, and the operation reception effect (valid period) itself. Since different color rendering properties will be provided to the game, it is expected that the game will be more enjoyable until the post-operation effect is executed.

That is, in the operation reception effect by the first operation effect means, the post-operation effect is executed up to a predetermined timing regardless of whether the operation is performed at an early stage or a late stage within the valid period. Therefore, it can be said that it is advantageous to operate immediately after the valid period occurs in order to maintain the execution state as the post-operation effect for a long time and enjoy the effect.

On the other hand, in the operation reception effect by the second operation effect means, regardless of the timing within the valid period, the elapsed time from the operation timing is continued until a predetermined time value is reached. After the operation, the effect is executed. Therefore, by not operating for a while after the validity period occurs and operating at a later time, the overall production time from the start of the validity period to the end of the post-operation effect can be maintained for a long time. It can be said that it is advantageous for enjoying the production.

In this case, the effect generation conditions of the operation reception effect by the first operation effect means and the operation reception effect by the second operation effect means are different. For example, in the operation reception effect by the first operation effect means, the first variation pattern is selected as a result of the variation pattern determination, and the symbol effect (effect pattern) based on the first variation pattern progresses to a specific timing. In the operation reception effect by the second operation effect means, the second variation pattern is selected as a result of the variation pattern determination, and the advance notice effect determination corresponding to the second variation pattern is performed. A special result can be obtained in the above, and it can be realized as occurring when the symbol effect (effect pattern) based on the second fluctuation pattern progresses to a predetermined timing. Alternatively, the operation reception effect by the first operation effect means occurs when the first variation pattern is selected as a result of the variation pattern determination and the symbol effect based on the first variation pattern progresses to a specific timing. In the operation reception effect by the second operation effect means, the first variation pattern is selected as a result of the variation pattern determination, and the symbol effect based on the first variation pattern is different from the specific timing. It may be realized as it occurs when the timing is reached.

FIG. 385 shows the first post-operation effect in which the post-operation effect is executed in such a way that it is continued until a predetermined timing in the effect pattern is reached, regardless of the length of time required from the occurrence of the valid period to the detection. It is a time chart which shows an example about the operation reception production.

Now, assuming that the first effect condition required for the occurrence of the "first operation reception effect that allows the effect reception" is satisfied, the design effect (effect pattern) based on the fluctuation pattern has progressed to the timing tr1. The first operation reception effect (valid period) is generated based on the progress to the timing tr1. This first operation reception effect (valid period) ends without executing the post-operation effect when the timing tr3 when the predetermined set time elapses without the effect reception being performed. First operation reception that allows production reception During the execution period of the production, an image display that imitates the operation means to be operated and a gauge display that shows how much effective time remains is displayed to encourage the player to operate. Operation promotion effect is performed.

When the first operation reception effect (valid period) is started, a reception allowance sound suggesting that the effect reception is in the permitted state (or the effect reception is in the permitted state) is output. .. However, as will be described later, the peripheral control MPU 1511a according to this embodiment does not continue the output state of the reception allowable sound for the above-mentioned predetermined set time, and the above-mentioned predetermined set time has not yet elapsed in the middle stage. At a certain timing tr2, it is set to a non-output state so that it cannot be heard.

In addition, "the reception allowable sound is output" here means that "sound data including the reception allowable sound" is newly assigned to the channel at the timing tr1, and the channel is already assigned. It is a concept including the arrival of the "reproduction period of the acceptable sound for acceptance" in the sound data in accordance with the timing tr1. Alternatively, the "acceptable reception sound" may be output from before the timing tr1 to after the timing tr1 so as to straddle the timing tr1. Further, "setting to a non-output state" here means not only canceling the assigned state of the "sound data including the acceptable sound for acceptance" to the channel, but also maintaining the assigned state of the sound data to the channel. However, the concept includes that the "reproduction period of the acceptable sound for acceptance" in the sound data is terminated and the period after that (including the silent data) is reproduced.

As described above, in such a first operation reception effect, "operation-induced processing using the first effect member" is performed as a post-operation effect based on the fact that the operation by the player is detected and the effect reception is performed. Although it is started, the post-operation effect (operation-induced processing using the first effect member) started in this way is based on the fluctuation pattern regardless of the timing of the effect reception within the valid period. It is set to end when the predetermined timing tr4 in the design effect (effect pattern) arrives. The "operation-induced processing using the first effect member" can be executed, for example, as a process for causing the first decorative movable body to perform an effect operation based on the reception of the effect.

For example, as shown in FIG. 385, assuming that the effect reception is performed at a relatively early timing tr1a within the valid period (timing tr1 to tr3), the post-operation effect (operation-induced processing using the first effect member) is performed. It is executed for a relatively long time from the timing tr1a to the timing tr4. On the other hand, as shown in FIG. 385, assuming that the effect reception is performed at a relatively late timing tr2a within the valid period (timing tr1 to tr3), the post-operation effect (operation-induced processing using the first effect member). Will be executed only for a relatively short time from the timing tr2a to the timing tr4.

According to such a first operation reception effect, it is an execution state as a post-operation effect that the operation is performed immediately after the valid period occurs (execution state of operation-induced processing using the first effect member). Will be maintained for a long time, and it will be possible to provide a directing property that is advantageous for enjoying the directing.

As will be described later, in the first operation reception effect, the effect reception is performed when the reception allowable sound is in the output state, and the post-operation effect (operation-induced processing using the first effect member) is executed based on the effect reception. Even if this is done, the output state of the reception allowable sound is not released, and the output state is maintained until the predetermined timing tr2.

FIG. 386 is a time chart showing an example of a second operation reception effect in which the post-operation effect is executed in such a way that the elapsed time from the timing at which the detection is made reaches a predetermined time value.

Now, assuming that the second effect condition required for the occurrence of the "second operation reception effect that allows the effect reception" is satisfied, the design effect (effect pattern) based on the fluctuation pattern has progressed to the timing tr11. The second operation reception effect (valid period) is generated based on the progress to the timing tr11. In this second operation reception effect (valid period), as in the case of the first operation reception effect, when the timing tr13 when the predetermined set time elapses without the effect reception being performed, the post-operation effect is not executed. It is supposed to end. A time value different from the predetermined set time in the first operation reception effect and the predetermined set time in the second operation reception effect may be set. Second operation reception that allows production reception Even during the execution period of the production, an image display that imitates the operation means to be operated and a gauge display that shows how much effective time remains is displayed to encourage the player to operate. Operation promotion effect is performed.

Even when the second operation reception effect (valid period) is started, a reception allowance sound suggesting that the effect reception is in the permitted state (or the effect reception is in the permitted state) is output. NS. However, as will be described later, the peripheral control MPU1511a according to this embodiment does not continue the output state of the reception allowable sound for the predetermined set time, and the predetermined set time has not yet elapsed. At the timing tr12, which is the timing tr12, the output is set so that the sound cannot be heard.

As for "the acceptance allowable sound is output" here, in addition to newly assigning the "sound data including the acceptance allowable sound" to the channel at the timing tr11, it is already assigned to the channel. It is a concept including the arrival of the "reproduction period of the acceptable sound for acceptance" in the sound data in accordance with the timing tr11. Alternatively, the "acceptable reception sound" may be output from before the timing tr11 to after the timing tr11 so as to straddle the timing tr11. In addition, the "non-output state" here also cancels the allocation state of the "sound data including the acceptable sound for acceptance" to the channel, and the allocation state of the sound data to the channel is maintained. The "reproduction period of acceptable sound for acceptance" in the sound data is a concept including a transition to a period in which sounds (including silent data) after that are reproduced.

As described above, in such a second operation reception effect, "operation-induced processing using the second effect member" is performed as a post-operation effect based on the fact that the operation by the player is detected and the effect reception is performed. Although it is started, with respect to the post-operation effect (operation-induced processing using the second effect member) started in this way, the effect reception is performed regardless of the timing of the effect reception within the valid period. It is made to continue until the elapsed time from the time when it is made reaches a predetermined time value (for example, a set time longer than the above-mentioned predetermined set time as a valid period). The "operation-induced processing using the second effect member" can be executed, for example, as a process for causing the second decorative movable body to perform an effect operation based on the reception of the effect.

For example, as shown in FIG. 386, assuming that the effect reception is performed at a relatively early timing tr11a within the valid period (timing tr11 to tr13), the post-operation effect (operation-induced processing using the second effect member) is performed. It is executed from the timing tr11a to the timing tr14 when a predetermined time value has elapsed. On the other hand, as shown in FIG. 386, assuming that the effect reception is performed at a relatively late timing tr12a within the valid period (timing tr11 to tr13), the post-operation effect (operation-induced processing using the second effect member). Is executed from the timing tr12a to the timing tr15 (the timing that arrives after the timing tr14) when the predetermined time value has elapsed.

According to such a second operation reception effect, it is possible to operate at a later time without operating for a while after the valid period occurs, from the start of the valid period to the end of the post-operation effect. It becomes possible to provide a color rendering property that is advantageous in enjoying the production by maintaining the production time as a whole for a long time.

As will be described later, also in the second operation reception effect, the effect reception is performed when the reception allowable sound is in the output state, and the post-operation effect (operation-induced processing using the second effect member) is performed based on the effect reception. Even if it is executed, the output state of the reception allowable sound is not released, and the output state is maintained until the predetermined timing tr12.

As described with reference to FIGS. 385 and 386, the first and second operation reception effects (valid period) are given different effects to each other, and the operation reception effects (valid period) are different from each other. By generating it based on the establishment of the conditions, it is expected that the game entertainment interest from the occurrence of the operation reception effect (valid period) to the post-operation effect is suitably maintained.

However, the following problems remain just by adopting the configuration related to the first and second operation reception effects (valid period). That is, in these operation reception effects (valid period), it is advantageous to operate at an early stage within the valid period to enjoy the effect, and it is advantageous to operate at a late time within the valid period to enjoy the effect. Since the preferred operation timing for enjoying the production is determined, such as when there is, there is still a poor aspect of the performance within the valid period, and there is a concern that the game interest will decline. Therefore, it is more desirable that the operation reception effect is executed as a special operation reception effect having the aspect described below.

FIG. 387 is a time chart showing an example of the special operation reception effect.
Now, if the design effect (effect pattern) based on the fluctuation pattern progresses to the timing tr21 while the special effect condition required for the generation of the special operation reception effect is satisfied, it is special based on the progress to the timing tr21. Generates an operation reception effect (valid period). As will be described later, this special operation reception effect (valid period) is different from the case of the first and second operation reception effects, and the timing tr23 arrives after a predetermined set time elapses without the effect reception being performed. This is not the case, and even if there is no operation, the production reception is always generated within the valid period, and the post-operation production described later is executed. As will be described later, the predetermined set time in the special operation reception effect is set to be longer than the predetermined set time in the first operation reception effect and the predetermined set time in the second operation reception effect.

In addition, even when the special operation reception effect (valid period) is started, a reception allowance sound indicating that the effect reception is allowed (or the effect reception is allowed) is output. Will be done. However, as will be described later, in the peripheral control MPU 1511a according to this embodiment, the reception allowable sound (FIG. 387) is generated in response to the first and second operation reception effects (FIGS. 385 and 386). The output state is maintained for a longer period of time. In this explanatory example, the reception allowable sound shown in FIG. 387 is also set to a non-output state at the timing tr22, which is an intermediate stage in which the predetermined set time has not yet elapsed, so that it cannot be heard. However, the reception allowable sound shown in FIG. 387 may be such that the output state can be continued until the timing tr23 arrives.

As for "the acceptance allowable sound is output" here, in addition to newly assigning the "sound data including the acceptance allowable sound" to the channel at the timing tr21, it is already assigned to the channel. It is a concept including the arrival of the "reproduction period of the acceptable sound for acceptance" in the sound data in accordance with the timing tr21. Alternatively, the "acceptable reception sound" may be output from before the timing tr21 to after the timing tr21 so as to straddle the timing tr21. In addition, the "non-output state" here also cancels the allocation state of the "sound data including the acceptable sound for acceptance" to the channel, and the allocation state of the sound data to the channel is maintained. The "reproduction period of acceptable sound for acceptance" in the sound data is a concept including a transition to a period in which sounds (including silent data) after that are reproduced.

In this regard, in the special operation reception effect, when the operation by the player is detected within the valid period and the effect reception is performed, the "first movable" shown in FIG. 385 is based on the fact that the effect reception is performed. "Operation-induced processing using the decorative body (first effect member)" and "operation-induced processing using the second movable decorative body (second effect member)" shown in FIG. 386 are started in parallel. It is supposed to be done. Therefore, the "operation-induced processing using the first effect member" is started, but the "operation-induced processing using the first effect member" started in this way is performed at any timing within the valid period. Even if the production is accepted, it will be terminated when the predetermined timing tr24 in the design production (effect pattern) based on the fluctuation pattern arrives, and "operation using the second production member" The "caused processing" is started, but with regard to the "operation-caused processing using the second effect member" started in this way, the effect reception is performed regardless of the timing of the effect reception within the valid period. It will continue until the elapsed time from the time when is reached reaches a predetermined time value (for example, a set time longer than the above-mentioned predetermined set time as a valid period).

For example, as shown in FIG. 387, assuming that the effect reception is performed at a relatively early timing tr21a within the valid period (timing tr21 to tr23), among the post-operation effects, "operation-induced processing using the first effect member". Is executed over a relatively long period from the timing tr21a to the timing tr24, but in the post-operation effect, the "operation-induced processing using the second effect member" has a predetermined time value from the timing tr21a. It ends at the elapsed timing tr25. On the other hand, as shown in FIG. 387, if the effect reception is performed at a relatively late timing tr22a within the valid period (timing tr21 to tr23), the post-operation effect "caused by the operation using the first effect member". The "process" is executed only for a relatively short time from the timing tr22a to the timing tr24, but among the post-operation effects, the "operation-induced process using the second effect member" is predetermined from the timing tr22a. It will be executed until the timing tr26 (the timing that arrives after the timing tr25) when the time value has elapsed.

As described above, the special operation reception effect according to this embodiment occurs when a specific effect pattern is executed based on the result of the jackpot determination and the effect content as the specific effect pattern progresses to a specific timing. When the production reception is performed within the special operation reception production (valid period), "the first production member whose execution state is continued until a predetermined timing in the production pattern arrives is used. "Operation-induced processing" and "operation-induced processing using the second effect member, which is continued until the elapsed time from the timing at which the effect is received reaches a predetermined time value" are executed, respectively.

According to such a special operation reception effect, if the operation is performed immediately after the valid period occurs, the execution state of the "operation-induced processing using the first effect member" among the post-operation effects can be maintained for a long time. As a compensation, the end timing of the "operation-induced processing using the second effect member" among the post-operation effects will arrive at a relatively early stage. On the other hand, if you do not operate for a while after the validity period occurs and operate it at a later time, this will be applied to the end timing of "operation-induced processing using the second effect member" in the post-operation effect. Although it can be made to arrive at a relatively late stage, there is a demerit that it is not possible to maintain the execution state of the "operation-induced processing using the first effect member" among the post-operation effects for a long time.

In other words, in the special operation reception production, there is no most desirable operation timing to excite the production.
-In exchange for shortening the time until the "operation-induced processing using the second effect member" is completed, the execution state of the "operation-induced processing using the first effect member" is lengthened and enjoyed. (Whether to operate at an early stage within the validity period), or
-In exchange for shortening the execution state of the "operation-induced processing using the first effect member", do you enjoy extending the time until the "operation-induced processing using the second effect member" is completed? (Do you operate at a later stage within the validity period?) Or
-The time until the "operation-induced processing using the first effect member" is maintained as the execution state and the time until the "operation-induced processing using the second effect member" is completed are sacrificed little by little, and the whole (Is it operated at a timing that is neither early nor late within the valid period?)
It is now possible to give the special operation reception effect itself such a strategic operation effect, which makes it possible to select the operation timing according to the mood of the player, and provides an operation reception effect that does not cause tiredness. You will be able to.

As will be described later, in the special operation reception effect, when the effect reception is performed while the reception allowable sound is in the output state, the post-operation effect (operation-induced processing using the first effect member) is performed based on the effect reception. The operation-induced processing using the second effect member) is executed, and the output state of the reception allowable sound is released at this point.

Here, in the above explanatory example, when the production reception is performed in the special operation reception production (FIG. 387), "the first production member whose execution state is continued until a predetermined timing in the production pattern arrives is provided. It was decided to execute "the operation-induced processing used" and "the operation-induced processing using the second effect member, which is continued until the elapsed time from the timing at which the effect was received reaches a predetermined time value". .. However, even when a special operation reception effect occurs, when the predetermined effect conditions are not satisfied (for example, when the jackpot judgment is lost or when the predetermined effect judgment is lost). In the case where the production reception is performed in the special operation reception production, the "operation-induced processing using the first production member" is not performed, and the predetermined production conditions are satisfied (FIG. 387). It is more desirable that the "operation-induced processing using the second effect member" in which the "predetermined time value" is set to be relatively short is performed in a different effect mode.

According to such a configuration, even when the special operation reception effect occurs, when the predetermined effect condition is not satisfied, the execution state continues until the predetermined timing in the effect pattern arrives. "Operation-induced processing using the first effect member to be performed" and "operation-induced processing using the second effect member that is continued until the elapsed time from the timing at which the effect is received reaches a predetermined time value" Since the production content is the same as the operation reception effect (first and second operation reception effects) in which only one of them is executed, the tension when the special operation reception effect occurs by giving such an effect risk. The feeling can be maintained favorably. In this sense, in the special operation reception effect, "operation-induced processing using the first effect member whose execution state is continued until a predetermined timing in the effect pattern arrives" and "from the timing when the effect is received" When the post-operation effect is executed in parallel with the "operation-induced processing using the second effect member" that continues until the elapsed time of is reached a predetermined time value, the first operation reception effect or the second operation It is desirable that the rate at which the jackpot symbol appears is higher than when the post-operation effect appears in the reception effect.

However, this may not be detected well (detection error) even though the operation is performed in the special operation reception effect, and the effect may not be accepted. As a result, the validity period ends without the effect being accepted. In such a case, the player who saw that the "operation-induced processing using the first effect member" was not performed even though the operation was performed, misunderstood that the operation reception effect was reduced to only one of them. Therefore, there is a concern that the interest in games will decline. Therefore, regarding the special operation reception effect, as described above, even if there is no operation by the player within the valid period, the operation reception is automatically generated (automatic reception) within the valid period, and "predetermined in the effect pattern". The first operation-induced processing using the first effect member, in which the execution state is continued until the set timing arrives, and the second, which is continued until the elapsed time from the timing in which the effect is received reaches a predetermined time value. It is desirable that "2 operation-induced processing using the effect member" is executed respectively. As a method for automatically generating (automatically accepting) operation reception and a production mode related to this, any one of the examples described with reference to FIGS. 289 to 300, an appropriate combination, and further written contents. Can be used.

In the above explanatory example, when the first operation reception effect, the second operation reception effect, and the special operation reception effect occur, it is decided to output the reception allowance sound suggesting that the effect reception is in the permitted state. In this regard, in the pachinko machine 1 according to this embodiment, as shown in FIGS. 385 to 387, the reception allowable sound output when the special operation reception effect is generated is the first operation reception effect and the second operation reception effect. It is used as a production sound whose playback state can be continued for a longer time than the reception allowable sound output when the production is generated.

According to such a configuration, when the production reception is allowed (when an image display that imitates the operation means to be operated or a gauge display indicating how much effective time remains is displayed). By confirming how long the permissible reception sound, which is the output state from, is continued, the operation reception effect is "the first execution state is continued until a predetermined timing in the effect pattern is reached. "Operation-induced processing using the effect member" and "operation-induced processing using the second effect member that are continued until the elapsed time from the timing at which the effect is received reaches a predetermined time value" are executed, respectively. It becomes possible to recognize whether or not it is a special operation reception effect. However, this can be done in exchange for reducing the remaining time during which the "operation-induced processing using the first effect member" can be maintained in the execution state (delaying the timing at which the effect reception is performed). Therefore, by the time the player recognizes whether or not the operation reception effect is a "special operation reception effect", there is a demerit that the effectary strategy that the player can select is narrowed.

However, even when it is recognized whether or not it is a special operation reception effect, it is important that the effect strategy remains to some extent. Therefore, regarding the output time (timing tr1 to tr2, tr11 to tr12) of the reception allowable sound output when the first operation reception effect and the second operation reception effect are generated, "predetermined as the special operation reception effect (valid period)". It is desirable to execute the operation assuming that the output is set to a non-output state when a specific time, which is less than half of the set time (timing tr21 to tr23) of the above, has elapsed. According to such a configuration, the reception allowable sound is set to the non-output state when a specific time less than half of the "predetermined set time (timing tr21 to tr23) as the special operation reception effect (valid period)" has elapsed. As long as the output state is maintained, it will be possible to recognize that the special operation reception effect is being executed. Therefore, the predetermined set time as the "special operation reception effect (valid period)" ( It becomes possible to provide a dramatic strategy in a state where more than half of the time of "timing tr21 to tr23)" is left.

Further, as described above, in the pachinko machine 1 according to this embodiment, the production reception is performed when the reception allowable sound output when the first operation reception effect and the second operation reception effect are generated is in the output state. Even if it is, the output state is maintained, but for the reception allowable sound that is output when the special operation reception effect is generated, the output state is forcibly terminated when the effect reception is made while the output state is in effect. I have to. That is, in this case, when the production reception is performed in a situation where it is not recognized whether or not it is a special operation reception production (a situation in which the above-mentioned specific time has not elapsed since the reception allowable sound is output), the operation reception production is performed. It is important to consider whether was the "special operation reception effect" and whether a more promising aspect appeared as the post-operation effect, but one of them (the operation reception effect is the "special operation reception effect"). Whether or not there was) can be easily recognized only by confirming whether or not the output state of the reception allowable sound has been terminated with the reception of the production as an opportunity. For example, even if it is recognized that the output state of the reception allowable sound is not terminated and the first operation reception effect or the second operation reception effect is generated as a result, the feeling is changed and "more expected as a post-operation effect". It will be expected to concentrate on "whether a high degree of aspect has appeared". In this case, "when a mode with a higher degree of expectation appears as a post-operation effect, the effect is designed so that the rate of new special operation reception effect increases before the symbol is stopped. Is desirable.

Further, as described above, in the first operation reception effect, the second operation reception effect, and the special operation reception effect, an image display that imitates the operation means used as an operation target in each operation reception effect and how long the effective time is. A gauge display of whether or not it remains is displayed, and an operation promotion effect is performed to encourage the player to operate. In this regard, at least in the special operation reception effect, when the effect is received, the gauge display remains (displayed), and the "execution state is continued until a predetermined timing in the effect pattern arrives. "Operation-induced processing using the effect member" and "operation-induced processing using the second effect member that are continued until the elapsed time from the timing at which the effect is received reaches a predetermined time value" are started, respectively. Is desirable. According to such a configuration, it is possible to recognize which timing within the valid period the production reception is performed after the production reception based on the remaining gauge remaining as a display. As a result, it becomes possible to predict whether or not the execution state related to the operation-induced processing using the first effect member will end immediately. As a method of starting the effect after the operation while leaving the gauge display (bar display) in this way, it is possible to use any one of the examples described with reference to FIGS. 292 to 296, or an appropriate combination. It is possible.

In the special operation reception effect, if it is possible to operate immediately after the special operation reception effect occurs by executing the operation-related display (precursor effect) that suggests the occurrence of the effect reception before the effect reception is allowed. It is desirable to squeeze. According to such a configuration, it is expected that the player preferably enjoys the dramatic strategy over the entire period within the special operation reception effect (valid period). On the other hand, in the first operation reception effect and the second operation reception effect, it is desirable to execute the operation-related display (precursor effect) that suggests the occurrence of the effect reception before the effect reception is allowed. It is expected that the operation-related display will be executed as a "short-time precursor effect inferior to the timing suggestion function" as compared with the case where a special operation reception effect with a high degree of expectation occurs. It is desirable not to have it.

Here, as an operation-related display (a short-time precursor effect lacking a timing suggestion function) performed by the effect display device 1600 prior to the occurrence of the valid period of the first operation reception effect and the second operation reception effect, For example, it is possible to realize an image displayed in a fade-in state (white image or the like) when the "image display imitating the operating means" appears in a fade-in manner.

FIG. 388 is a time chart showing an example of the processing related to the operation-related display when the first operation reception effect and the second operation reception effect are performed, and the process related to the channel allocation of the sound data including the reception allowable sound. be.

That is, from an ergonomic point of view, when the validity period occurs, it is only necessary to display the suggestion image (operation-related display) from several frames (for example, 0.2 seconds) before the validity period occurs. It is known that it is possible to operate so that the production reception is performed at an unprecedented timing. However, even if it is for several frames, if the "image display that imitates the operating means" is displayed in the normal mode even though the validity period has not occurred, the "operating means" There may be a situation in which the production is not accepted even though the operation is performed while the "image display imitating" is displayed, and there is a concern that the interest in the game may be reduced.

Therefore, in the pachinko machine 1 according to this embodiment, as shown in FIG. 388, the timing trA arrives several frames before the valid period of the first operation reception effect and the second operation reception effect occurs. The operation-related display is started based on the above, but in the situation where the validity period has not occurred, the "image display imitating the operation means" is not displayed in the normal mode.

More specifically, in the timing trA, "allowable" that can be realized as a fade-in image in which "an image display imitating an operating means" is displayed in a fade-in manner, a predetermined effect image, or the like. Start "Previous operation related display". Then, when the timing tr1 (or timing tr11) arrives while the "permissible pre-operation related display" is displayed, the "image imitating the operating means" is displayed from the "permissible pre-operation related display". The "display" will be shifted to the state of being displayed in the normal mode.

In this respect, as described above, the pachinko machine 1 according to this embodiment outputs a reception permissible sound suggesting that the production reception is in a permissible state when the valid period occurs. As shown in FIG. 388, the output of this permissible reception sound is not started at the timing trA, but is started at the timing tr1 (or the timing tr11).

In other words, in order to make it possible to operate so that the production reception is performed at the timing when the validity period has just occurred, the reception allowable sound is also output from several frames before the validity period occurs. I think it would be desirable to let them do it. However, if the reception allowable sound is output several frames before the valid period occurs, the output timing will be different from the appearance timing of the "image display imitating the operating means". As a result, it may give a sense of discomfort as if a sound shift has occurred, and there is a concern that the interest in the game may be reduced. On the other hand, in the period of timing trA to tr1 (timing trA to tr11), it is also possible to output a sound related to the pre-allowable operation different from the permissible reception sound. However, if the permissible pre-operation related sound is output in such a short period of time, the permissible pre-operation related sound may be heard integrally with the reception permissible sound instead of an independent production sound. In the end, there is a concern that it may cause a sense of discomfort as if a sound gap had occurred.

Therefore, in the pachinko machine 1 according to this embodiment, prior to the occurrence of the valid period of the first operation reception effect and the second operation reception effect, the operation-related display (pre-allowable operation-related display) is displayed for several frames. While trying to start from the front, this is not intentionally executed for operation-related sounds (allowable pre-operation-related sounds), and only the reception allowable sound is output when the validity period occurs. That is, in this case, as shown in FIG. 388, the reception allowable sound is output by assigning the "sound data including the reception allowable sound" to the channel based on the arrival of the timing tr1.

In the example shown in FIG. 388, when the timing tr2 arrives, the reception allowable sound is set to the non-output state by ending the allocation state of the “sound data including the reception allowable sound” to the channel. There is. However, the "sound data including the acceptable sound for acceptance" itself may be such that the allocation state for the channel is continued even after the timing tr2, for example, the allocation state for the channel is continued until the timing tr3 arrives. It may be. That is, in this case, the sound data itself is left assigned to the channel, but the "reproduction period of the acceptable accepted sound" in the sound data ends at the timing tr2.

Further, in the example shown in FIG. 388, when the effect reception is performed between timing tr1 to tr2 (timing tr11 to tr12), the state in which the effect reception is permitted is terminated and "an image display imitating the operation means" is displayed. Is hidden. On the other hand, as for the "sound data including the reception allowable sound", the assigned state to the channel is maintained, and the reception allowable sound is not forcibly terminated in the middle as described above.

FIG. 389 is a time chart showing an example of a process related to an operation-related display when a special operation reception effect is performed and a process related to channel allocation of sound data including a reception allowable sound.

As shown in FIG. 389, even in the special operation reception effect, the operation-related display (allowable pre-operation-related display) is performed from the time when the timing trB before the timing tr21 in which the valid period occurs occurs. However, the "period of timing trB to tr21" has a length more than twice (more preferably 10 times) with respect to the "period of timing trA to tr1" shown in FIG. 388, whereby the period is concerned. In the permissible pre-operation related display displayed in, "the degree of expectation as to whether the post-operation effect performed when the effect is accepted is performed in a manner with high expectation" or "the degree of expectation that a jackpot symbol will appear" is displayed. As suggested, any one of a plurality of production modes can be selectively displayed. It should be noted that, in the situation where the valid period has not occurred, the "image display imitating the operating means" is not displayed in the normal mode, which is the same as the case of the example shown in FIG. 388.

For example, the content of the "pre-allowable operation-related display" started at the timing trB is different from the "allowable pre-operation-related display" shown in FIG. Explained with reference to FIGS. 241 to 259, which is a slightly story-like precursor effect such as repeatedly moving and displaying a plurality of effect images toward the portion displayed at the timing tr21) and hiding the effect image at that location. Any aspect of the above-mentioned "specific operation-related effect" may be applied). At this time, any one of a plurality of modes can be displayed as the effect image, and the degree of expectation is suggested by which of these modes is displayed. Then, when the timing tr21 arrives while the "allowable pre-operation related display" is displayed in this way, the "image display imitating the operating means" is performed in the normal mode from the state where the "allowable pre-operation related display" is displayed. It will be shifted to the displayed state.

In this regard, as described above, the special operation reception effect also outputs a reception allowance sound suggesting that the effect reception is in an permitted state when the valid period occurs. As shown in FIG. 389, the sound is output from the timing tr21 as a production sound to be reproduced in a part of the sound data assigned to the channel at the timing trB.

That is, as described above, in the special operation reception production, it is significantly larger than the "minimum time required ergonomically to enable the operation immediately after the valid period occurs" before the valid period occurs. A long time (timing trB to tr21) is used to perform "allowable pre-operation display" with high color rendering. Therefore, in order to further enhance the effectability in such an effect period (timing trB to tr21), an effect sound (permissible pre-operation related sound) corresponding to the "allowable pre-operation related display" displayed within the same period is output. It is desirable to let them do it. Further, since the production period (timing trB to tr21) has a sufficient length for performing the production, even if the production sound (sound related to the permissible pre-operation) is output within the period, acceptance is permitted. There can be no inconvenience that can be heard as a sound integrated with the sound.

Therefore, in the pachinko machine 1 according to this embodiment, when the timing trB arrives, the permissible pre-operation related display is displayed by the effect display device 1600 and the permissible pre-operation related sound is output, and these output states are set to the timing tr21. I try to continue until. Then, when the timing tr21 arrives, the state in which the "permissible pre-operation related display" is displayed is shifted to the state in which the "image display imitating the operating means" is displayed in the normal mode, and the "permissible pre-operation related display" is displayed. The state in which "sound" is output is shifted to the state in which "acceptable sound" is output.

In this regard, in the example shown in FIG. 389, one sound data including the reproduction section of the "acceptable pre-operation related sound" and the reproduction section of the "acceptance allowable sound" is set to the channel based on the arrival of the timing trB. By allocating to the above, the above-mentioned effect sound output in the period from timing trB to tr22 is realized.

According to such a configuration, in the special operation reception effect, the reception allowable sound output when the valid period occurs is a part of the sound data assigned to the channel in the form of extending from the precursor effect to the special operation reception effect. It will be output as a production sound that is reproduced during the period. That is, in this case, only one sound data is assigned to the channel before the special operation reception effect is generated (when the precursor effect is generated, etc.), and the first half is the effect according to the precursor effect (allowable pre-operation related display). It is possible to suggest the timing of the special operation reception effect by playing the sound (sound related to the pre-allowable operation), and after the validity period occurs, the channel allocation is based on the effect reception. Since it can be canceled as appropriate, it becomes possible for the player to recognize that the special operation reception effect has been executed even after the effect reception has been performed. As an output method for "one sound data" including a reproduction section of "acceptable pre-operation related sound" and a reproduction section of "acceptance allowable sound", first, the degree of expectation (when the symbol fluctuation is stopped) After preparing a plurality of sound data having different jackpot symbols (ratio of appearance of jackpot symbols), one of the sound data (one sound data) is used as the result of jackpot judgment (or production judgment (notice judgment, etc.)). It is desirable to realize the above-mentioned effect sound output in the period from timing trB to tr22 by selectively allocating to the channel based on the above. In this case, the same effect sound is output to the plurality of sound data in the reproduction section of the "allowable pre-operation related sound (precursor effect)", but different in the reproduction section of the "acceptable pre-operation sound (operation reception effect)". It is more desirable to include the first sound data and the second sound data configured to output the effect sound.

That is, in the special operation reception effect, when the effect reception is performed between the timings tr21 to tr22, the state in which the effect reception is permitted is terminated and the "image display imitating the operation means" is hidden. In addition to this, the allocation state for the channel is also terminated for "sound data including acceptable acceptable sound", and the output related to the acceptable acceptable sound is forcibly terminated in the middle of the process. As described above. Therefore, by confirming whether the reception allowable sound is forcibly turned off when the production reception is performed, the player can confirm that the special operation reception production was executed even after the production reception was performed. Will be able to recognize.

Even if it is one sound data (timing trB to tr22), the section (first half part) of the production sound (permissible pre-operation related sound) corresponding to the precursor effect (permissible pre-operation related display) is in the playback state. In the situation (timing trB to tr21), even if the operation by the player is performed, this is not forcibly terminated. The allocation state to the channel is released based on the operation by the player only in the situation (timing tr21 to tr22) in which the section (second half) of the effect sound (acceptable reception sound) corresponding to the valid period is in the playback state. It becomes.

The one sound data (sound data including the permissible pre-operation related sound and the reception permissible sound) is assigned before the timing trB, and is already in the assigned state at the timing trB. May be good. Further, as described above, the allocation state for the channel may be continued after the timing tr22, and for example, the allocation state for the channel may be continued until the timing tr23 arrives. That is, in this case, the sound data itself is left assigned to the channel, but the "reproduction period of the acceptable accepted sound" in the sound data ends at the timing tr22.

In the example shown in FIG. 388, when the timing tr2 arrives, the reception allowable sound is set to the non-output state by ending the allocation state of the “sound data including the reception allowable sound” to the channel. There is. However, the "sound data including the acceptable sound for acceptance" itself may be such that the allocation state for the channel is continued even after the timing tr2, for example, the allocation state for the channel is continued until the timing tr3 arrives. It may be. That is, in this case, the sound data itself is left assigned to the channel, but the "reproduction period of the acceptable accepted sound" in the sound data ends at the timing tr2.

In the configuration shown in FIGS. 385 to 389, "a plurality of allowable reception sounds having different lengths for maintaining the output state" are prepared as reception allowable sounds accompanying the occurrence of the operation reception effect, and the production reception is performed. The special operation reception effect and the first operation reception effect (or the second operation reception effect), which have different effects after the operation, generate different reception allowable sounds. Therefore, if it is confirmed how long the output state of the reception allowable sound is continued, there is a demerit that the above-mentioned directing strategy is narrowed, but the special operation reception effect and the first operation reception effect (or the first operation reception effect) It becomes possible to recognize which of the two operation reception effects) is occurring.

Moreover, the plurality of reception allowable sounds include the first reception allowable sound (special operation reception production) whose output state is terminated when the operation by the player is received, and the output state continues. The second reception allowable sound (first and second operation reception production) to be performed is included. Therefore, when the operation is performed so that the production reception is performed while the reception permissible sound is in the output state, the special operation reception is performed by confirming whether the reception permissible sound output state is terminated when the production reception is performed. It becomes possible to immediately recognize which of the effect and the first operation reception effect (or the second operation reception effect) has occurred.

However, the acceptable reception sound should be in the non-output state when the valid period ends, and the output state is maintained when the post-operation production is started. If there is, it may interfere with the production. In this regard, in the above description example, the reception production sound whose output state is terminated when the production reception is performed is the first reception allowable sound on the side where the time setting value for maintaining the output state is relatively long ( It is used as a special operation reception production).

That is, in this case, when the production reception is performed in the output state of the "second reception allowable sound on the side where the time setting value for maintaining the output state is relatively short", the output state is maintained. However, since the time setting value for maintaining the output state of the second reception allowable sound is short in the first place, it will soon be in the non-output state, and it can be said that it does not interfere with the production. On the other hand, when the production reception is performed in the output state of "the first reception allowable sound on the side where the time setting value for maintaining the output state is relatively long", the original time setting for maintaining the output state is performed. Even if the value remains, the output state is terminated, so it does not interfere with the production.

Moreover, by confirming how long the output state of the reception allowable sound is continued, it is recognized whether the special operation reception effect or the first operation reception effect (or the second operation reception effect) is occurring. Even if there is a player who wants to use the sound, if the output state of the reception allowable sound is maintained at the stage when the time setting value for the second reception allowable sound has elapsed, the first reception allowable sound is not the second reception allowable sound. It is possible to predict that is in the output situation. In this regard, even if it is not confirmed that the output state of the first reception allowable sound is terminated, it is possible to confirm that the first reception allowable sound is set to the non-output state when the production reception is generated. It will be possible to confirm at an early stage whether the prediction that the special operation reception effect is occurring is correct.

Further, in the configuration shown in FIGS. 385 to 389, when the valid period of the operation reception effect occurs, the pre-allowable operation-related display suggesting that the valid period will soon occur is performed, but the pre-allowed operation-related display is performed. The operation-related display includes a first permissible pre-operation-related display (see FIG. 388) having a short display time and a second permissible pre-operation-related display (see FIG. 389) having a long display time. In this regard, when the first permissible pre-operation related display with a short display time is performed, the "sound data including the acceptable pre-acceptance sound" is not assigned to the channel, and " By assigning "sound data including the reception allowable sound" to the channel, the reception allowable sound is put into the output state. That is, in this case, the effect sound corresponding to the first permissible pre-operation related display is not output, but the operation from the time when the valid period occurs can be promoted without causing a sense of discomfort as if a sound shift has occurred. become able to.

On the other hand, when the second permissible pre-operation related display having a long display time is performed, "sound data including the accepted permissible sound" is transmitted to the channel from the time when the second permissible pre-operation related display is performed. The reception allowable sound is set to the output state by setting the allocation state and ensuring that the reproduction section of the reception allowable sound arrives at the timing when the valid period occurs. According to such a configuration, only one sound data is assigned to the channel before the special operation reception effect occurs (when the precursor effect occurs, etc.), and the first half part is the precursor effect (allowable pre-operation related display). It is possible to suggest the timing of the special operation reception effect by playing the effect sound (sound related to the pre-allowable operation) according to the above, and after the validity period occurs, it is based on the effect reception. Since the channel allocation can be appropriately released, it becomes possible for the player to recognize that the special operation reception effect has been executed even after the effect reception has been performed.

That is, in the permissible pre-operation related display shown in FIG. 389, the permissible pre-operation related sound corresponding to the permissible pre-operation related sound is output, and the reception permissible sound is further output when the valid period occurs, but the permissible pre-operation related sound shown in FIG. 388 is output. In the display, the corresponding pre-allowable operation-related sound is not output, and the acceptable pre-allowance sound is output when the valid period occurs.

In the above explanatory example shown in FIGS. 385 to 389, as the "effect member", the effect display device 1600, the speaker, the effect lamp, the movable decorative body, and the like can be used. Further, as the "first effect member", any one of the effect display device 1600, the speaker, the effect lamp, and the movable decorative body can be adopted, and as the "second effect member", any one of them can be adopted. It is possible to adopt any one of the effect display device 1600, the speaker, the effect lamp, and the movable decorative body, which is different from the "first effect member".

Further, in the above explanatory example, the operation means to be operated may not necessarily be the same or may be different between the special operation reception effect and the first operation reception effect (or the second operation reception effect). When the operating means to be operated is different, the images displayed within each valid period will be different.

In the first operation reception effect, it was decided to execute "operation-induced processing using the first effect member whose execution state is continued until a predetermined timing in the effect pattern arrives" as a post-operation effect. "Operation-induced processing using the first effect member that continues the execution state until the predetermined timing in the effect pattern arrives" and "The execution state continues until the predetermined timing in the effect pattern arrives" The operation-induced processing using the second effect member to be performed ”may be executed as the post-operation effect, respectively. Further, the operation-induced processing using the first effect member and the effect member different from the second effect member may be further executed, but in the post-operation effect according to the first operation reception effect, any operation is performed. The cause processing is also executed assuming that the execution state is continued until a predetermined timing in the effect pattern arrives.

In the second operation reception effect, "operation-induced processing using the second effect member, which is continued until the elapsed time from the timing at which the effect is received reaches a predetermined time value" is executed as the post-operation effect. However, "operation-induced processing using the first effect member, which is continued until the elapsed time from the timing when the effect is received reaches a predetermined time value" and "a predetermined timing in the effect pattern has arrived". The "operation-induced processing using the second effect member", in which the execution state is continued until the operation is performed, may be executed as the post-operation effect. Further, the operation-induced processing using the first effect member and the effect member different from the second effect member may be further executed, but in the post-operation effect according to the second operation reception effect, any operation is performed. The causal process is also executed assuming that the elapsed time from the timing at which the effect is received is continued until a predetermined time value is reached.

In the special operation reception effect, "operation-induced processing using the first effect member whose execution state is continued until a predetermined timing in the effect pattern arrives" and "elapsed time from the timing when the effect is received" are in advance. It was decided to execute "operation-induced processing using the second effect member", which is continued until the specified time value is reached, as the post-operation effect, but an effect member different from the first effect member and the second effect member is used. The operation-caused processing used may be further executed. In the special operation reception effect, the operation-induced processing that is executed assuming that the execution state is continued until the predetermined timing in the effect pattern arrives, and the elapsed time from the effect reception timing are predetermined times. It may be a mixture of operation-based processing that is executed as being continued until the value is reached.

Further, in the above explanatory example shown in FIGS. 385 to 389, the valid period of the special operation reception effect is set as a time value longer than the valid period of the first operation reception effect (or the second operation reception effect). I am trying to do it. By setting such a long time, it becomes possible to enjoy the above-mentioned effective period with the dramatic strategy.

In the first permissible pre-operation related display (see FIG. 388), which has a short display time, "expectation degree as to whether the post-operation production performed when the production reception is performed is performed in a highly expected manner" or "big hit". Although "expectation that the symbol appears" is not suggested, in the second permissible pre-operation related display (see FIG. 389), which has a long display time, "expectation of the post-operation effect performed when the effect is accepted" is not suggested. It is desirable to be able to suggest "the degree of expectation that the game will be performed in a high manner" or "the degree of expectation that a jackpot symbol will appear".

In the "valid period of the special operation reception effect" set as a relatively long time value, by making one of a plurality of display modes having different expectations appear, "after the operation performed when the effect reception is performed" It is desirable to be able to suggest "the degree of expectation as to whether the production is performed in a highly expected manner" or "the degree of expectation that a jackpot symbol will appear".

Further, in the special operation reception production, regardless of the timing of the production reception within the valid period, the "production by the first production member generated by the production reception" is "due to the production reception". In order to make the player recognize that the content of the effect is the same as the effect after the operation, so that the execution state is terminated earlier than "the effect by the second effect member generated". desirable.

In the above explanatory example shown in FIGS. 385 to 389, as the pachinko machine 1, the first operation reception effect, the second operation reception effect, and the special operation reception effect can be generated based on the establishment of different effect conditions. However, this does not occur because the first operation reception effect is not installed, and the second operation reception effect and the special operation reception effect may be allowed to occur based on the establishment of different effect conditions. Alternatively, the second operation reception effect may not occur because it is not installed, and the first operation reception effect and the special operation reception effect may be generated based on the establishment of different effect conditions. Alternatively, the first operation reception effect and the second operation reception effect may not be generated as they are not installed, and the special operation reception effect may be generated based on the establishment of a predetermined effect condition. ..

The special operation reception effect shown in the above explanatory example shown in FIGS. 385 to 389 outputs specific effect sound data (for example, BGM effect sound data) assigned to the channel in a suppressed mode or silently. Among them, it may generate a state in which production reception is permitted.

[More detailed color rendering of acceptable sound]
As described with reference to FIG. 118, in the pachinko machine 1 according to this embodiment, it is possible to execute the fluctuation pattern determination as to which of the plurality of fluctuation patterns is to be executed based on the result of the jackpot determination. Then, when one variation pattern is selected as a result of the variation pattern determination, the peripheral control MPU1511a has a plurality of expected effects (notice effect, etc.) prepared corresponding to the selected variation pattern. Of these, it is possible to execute an effect determination (notice determination, etc.) as to which of the expected effects (notice effect, etc.) is selectively to appear. Depending on the result of this effect determination, all of the plurality of expected effects (preliminary effects, etc.) prepared corresponding to the above-selected fluctuation pattern may be sequentially executed, and a plurality of expected effects may be executed in sequence. It is possible that none of the expected effects (such as notice effects) will be executed.

Then, when such an effect determination (effect pattern determination, notice determination, etc.) is performed, the effect content according to the result of the effect determination is controlled to be displayed on the effect display device 1600, so that the result of the jackpot determination can be obtained. The variable effect of the decorative pattern will be executed together with the expected effect (notice effect) related to the background depiction (background notice) and the movement of the movable body (character effect). As a result, as a result of the variable effect by the decorative symbol being executed together with the expected effect related to the background depiction and the movement of the movable body, when the jackpot symbol is stopped and displayed, the jackpot game as a privilege is executed for the player. It will be possible.

In such a configuration, the variation effect by the above decorative pattern is provided as an effect having "a function of indicating whether or not a big hit is obtained as a result of the big hit determination", and the background description, the movement of the movable body, etc. The expected effect will be provided as an effect having "a function that suggests the degree of expectation (including 0% and 100%) that a big hit has been obtained". That is, the player enjoys the game through these effects.

For example, in the pachinko machine 1 according to this embodiment, the high-expected fluctuation pattern (SP reach fluctuation pattern) that develops into SP reach (reach effect accompanied by background change, etc.) as a result of the above fluctuation pattern determination is specified. When the fluctuation pattern of is selected, no matter which result is obtained as the production judgment (notice judgment, etc.), when the design production based on the specific fluctuation pattern progresses to a specific timing during SP reach, the production reception is accepted. It is possible to generate an operation reception effect (valid period) that allows. However, as will be described later, the mode of the reception allowable sound output when the operation reception effect is generated is changed according to the result of the effect determination, whereby the post-operation effect is executed in a highly expected manner. It is intended to suggest the rate at which the jackpot symbol is stopped and the rate at which the jackpot symbol is stopped.

Further, in the pachinko machine 1 according to this embodiment, when a predetermined fluctuation pattern is selected from the low expected fluctuation patterns (non-reach fluctuation patterns) in which even the reach state is not formed as a result of the above fluctuation pattern determination. Even if there is, when a special result is obtained in the production judgment (notice judgment, etc.) corresponding to the predetermined fluctuation pattern, when the design production based on the predetermined fluctuation pattern progresses to the predetermined timing, the operation reception is permitted. Reception production (valid period) can be generated. However, when a predetermined fluctuation pattern is selected, the operation reception effect (valid period) does not occur even if the symbol effect based on the predetermined variation pattern is advanced to the predetermined timing unless a special result is obtained in the effect determination. .. Further, the operation reception effect (valid period) that occurs in a predetermined fluctuation pattern is different from the operation reception effect (valid period) that occurs when the symbol effect based on the specific variation pattern progresses to a specific timing during SP reach. It is executed as a production.

In addition to the above "specific variation pattern", the variation pattern that generates the operation reception effect (valid period) at a predetermined timing during SP reach regardless of the result obtained as the advance notice effect determination. May also be provided. However, the low-expected fluctuation pattern (non-reach fluctuation pattern) includes the fluctuation pattern that generates the operation reception effect (valid period) at a predetermined timing regardless of which result is obtained as the advance notice effect determination. It is desirable not to do so, or to reduce the selection ratio.

By the way, the operation reception effect (valid period) that can occur under these conditions and the like is predetermined for the effect member to be produced as long as the operation is detected within the set time (valid period). Since only the post-operation effect that causes the change (display change in the effect display device 1600, effect sound change in the speaker, light emission change by the lamp, and at least one effect operation by the movable decorative body) is executed, the operation is performed. Reception production (valid period) The production performance of itself is poor, and there is a concern that the entertainment interest of the game will decline until the production is executed after the operation.

Therefore, in the pachinko machine 1 according to this embodiment, first, as an operation reception effect,
-During the execution period of the symbol effect (effect pattern) based on the low expected fluctuation pattern (predetermined fluctuation pattern), "BGM reproduction (specific type of effect sound)" corresponding to the fluctuation pattern (effect pattern) is performed in a non-suppressed mode. During the execution period of the low-expected non-suppressed reception effect that gives an operation opportunity in the output and the pattern effect (effect pattern) based on the high-expected fluctuation pattern (specific variation pattern), the variation pattern (effect pattern) is used. Corresponding "BGM playback (specific type of production sound)" is output in a suppressed mode or silent, or in a non-output state (the playback period in which the audible sound of the sound data is recorded has expired, or channel allocation It is possible to at least generate a high-expectation suppression reception effect that gives an operation opportunity while it is set to (such as the end of).

In such a configuration, when the output in the non-suppressed mode of "BGM reproduction (specific type of effect sound)" is maintained when the operation opportunity is given (low expectation unsuppressed reception effect), "BGM reproduction" (Specific type of production sound) ”is output in a suppressed mode or silently, or is put in a non-output state (suppressed operation reception effect), and the mode related to those operation reception effects (low expectation non-suppression reception). Since the ratio of winning big hits (expectation level) will differ depending on the production and high expectation suppression reception production), the performance when the operation opportunity is given (when the operation opportunity is given, " BGM reproduction (directing sound of a specific type) ”can be suppressed or not, and the game entertainment can be improved.

However, in the high-expectation suppression reception production, "BGM reproduction (specific type of production sound)" is output in a suppression mode or silently when an operation opportunity is given, so that the high-expectation suppression reception production is compared with the low-expectation non-suppression reception production. There is concern that the production will be poor.

In this regard, in the pachinko machine 1 according to this embodiment, as will be described later, when the high expectation suppression reception effect is generated, a specific sound that is not output when the low expectation non-suppression reception effect is generated is a reception allowable sound. It is possible to output as. As a result, it becomes possible to preferably suppress the poor performance when the high expectation suppression reception effect occurs.

Moreover, in the pachinko machine 1 according to this embodiment, as will be described later, the reception permissible sound output when the high expectation suppression reception effect is generated is larger than the reception permissible sound output when the low expectation non-suppression reception effect is generated. It is used as a sound whose output state is maintained for a long period of time, and this also preferably suppresses the poor performance when the high expectation suppression reception effect occurs.

On the other hand, in the high-expectation suppression reception effect, when the operation opportunity is given, the "BGM reproduction (specific type of effect sound)" is output in the suppression mode or silently, or is set to the non-output state. There is also an aspect that when a post-production occurs, it becomes possible to make the production sound corresponding to it stand out, and in this respect, it can be said that it is useful for improving the game entertainment. Therefore, in the pachinko machine 1 according to this embodiment, as will be described later, with respect to the reception allowable sound output when the high expectation suppression reception effect is generated, the effect reception is performed when the reception allowable sound is in the output state. And, the output state is terminated based on the fact that the production reception has been made. As a result, it becomes possible to make the effect sound according to the effect after the operation stand out without being disturbed by the reception allowable sound.

Further, in the pachinko machine 1 according to this embodiment, the operation reception effect is set to "If the operation is not detected within the set time allowed for the effect reception, the post-operation effect does not occur and the set time ends. Not only can it be generated by the non-automatic reception mode that is performed, but also the automatic reception mode that can generate the post-operation effect even if the operation is not detected within the set time allowed for the effect reception. It can also be generated by.

That is, when the operation reception effect is generated by the automatic reception mode, even if the operation is not detected within the set time allowed for the effect reception, the same post-operation effect as when the operation is detected is executed. Therefore, it is possible to suppress the occurrence of a situation in which the player does not perform the operation, and as a result, the effect cannot be confirmed after the operation. However, as will be described later, more strictly speaking, the output time required for the effect sound in the post-operation effect is the same as when the operation is detected, but the output time required for the liquid crystal display in the post-operation effect is detected by the operation. It is designed to be shorter than when it was done.

Further, in the automatic reception mode (operation reception effect) according to this embodiment, as will be described later, when the operation is not detected, the effect reception is automatically generated at a specific timing within the set time (automatic button function is enabled). Then, the post-operation effect is executed based on the automatically generated effect reception. That is, in this case, since the production reception will always occur by the time the specific timing within the set time arrives at the latest, the production reception may be performed within the set time after the specific timing. It will disappear, and the length of the valid period for which the production reception is allowed will be substantially shortened. As a result, unlike the case where the effect is started after the operation after the set time has expired, the automatic button function is enabled by accelerating the effect tempo instead of causing an effect delay. It will be possible to realize it.

In addition, if the automatic button function is enabled within the set time in this way, the operation opportunity will be substantially lost even though the set time has not expired. It is expected that the player will be afraid of this and will actively operate at an earlier stage within the set time, or will play with a sense of tension in the production.

In order to obtain such effects, the "gauge display of how much effective time remains" displayed on the effect display device 1600 is until the specific timing when the automatic button function is enabled. It is desirable to display it as suggesting the remaining time until the set time elapses, not suggesting the remaining time. When such a display method is adopted, in the operation reception effect executed in the automatic reception mode, the effect reception is always performed before the remaining time of the gauge display becomes "0".

Moreover, in the pachinko machine 1 according to this embodiment, as will be described later, not only the operation reception effect executed in the non-automatic reception mode but also the operation reception effect executed in the automatic reception mode is generated. It is possible to output a reception permissible sound that suggests that the production reception is in an acceptable state or that the production reception is in an acceptable state. As a result, it is possible to suitably suppress a situation in which the production reception is automatically generated due to forgetting to operate and the production reception cannot be generated by one's own operation.

Furthermore, in the pachinko machine 1 according to this embodiment, when the operation reception effect executed in the automatic reception mode is generated, it is not output when the operation reception effect is generated in the non-automatic reception mode. Since the sound can be output as the reception allowable sound, by confirming the type of the reception allowable sound, an operation reception effect executed in the automatic reception mode instead of the non-automatic reception mode is generated. You will be able to recognize that you are.

On the other hand, in the post-operation effect, there is usually a risk of the effect being executed in a mode with a low degree of expectation. Therefore, it is not always good to operate the post-operation effect so as to improve the game entertainment. There is also an aspect that is not always the case. Therefore, in the non-automatic reception mode according to this embodiment, as will be described later, if the reception allowable sound is output for a sufficient time to suggest that the production reception is permitted, the reception allowable sound in the output state is output. By ending it relatively early, we are trying to create "a time when we can think about whether or not to generate the production reception" while the reception allowable sound is not output.

However, even in the operation reception production executed in the automatic reception mode, if the reception allowable sound is terminated early, there is a concern that it may lead to a misunderstanding that "the production reception is no longer permitted due to the function of the automatic button". Occurs. Therefore, in the automatic reception mode according to this embodiment, the output state of the reception allowable sound is maintained for a relatively long time, whereby the automatic button is not yet functioning and the production reception is permitted. It is designed to suggest that it is in a state, and by extension, it becomes possible to encourage the player to operate it with a sense of security that "the automatic button is not yet functioning".

Then, in the pachinko machine 1 according to this embodiment, as the operation reception effect, the "BGM reproduction (specific type of effect sound)" is output in a suppressed mode or silently, or is set to a non-output state. The operation opportunity is given while the suppression reception effect (here, high expectation suppression reception effect) and "BGM reproduction (specific type of effect sound)" are output in a non-suppression mode. While the non-suppressed reception effect (here, low-expected non-suppressed reception effect) can be generated in the automatic reception mode or the non-automatic reception mode, the effect reception is now permitted, or the effect reception. There is a technical feature in that each of the acceptable reception sounds, which suggests that is in an acceptable state, is generated in a form that further enhances their unique directing performance.

Hereinafter, such technical features will be described. In explaining the technical features, if the "acceptable sound for reception" is explained again, the "allowable sound for reception" means that the production reception is permitted. It suggests that the output is started within the set time and the production reception is allowed, or the output is started before the set time when the production reception is allowed and the production reception is allowed. It suggests that the sound will be in a certain state, and is output as a directing sound such as "Pickin". However, if the output state is set before the set time that allows the production reception occurs, the output state of the "acceptable sound for reception" must be maintained across the timing when the set time occurs ( It is required to be in the output state even within the set time (within the period when the production reception is allowed), and it is more than the time from when the "reception allowable sound" is put into the output state until the set time occurs. It is desirable to set so that the time from the occurrence of the set time to the end of the output state of the "acceptable sound" is longer. In this sense, the "acceptable sound" means that the sound can be output only when the set time (valid period) occurs, and is in the output state within the set time (valid period). On the other hand, it can be said that it is an output sound within a set time that can be shifted to a non-output state (inaudible state) according to an operation by a player or with the passage of an output time.

Further, the "acceptable reception sound" may be assigned to a channel and output as a single production sound data (see FIG. 388), or another production sound (for example, a set time (valid period)). ) Is executed before the occurrence of), and the production sound that is output in accordance with the above-mentioned "specific operation-related production" etc.) is assigned to the channel and output as one production sound data. (See FIG. 389), and the method for realizing the method may be appropriately adopted.

FIG. 390 is a time chart showing an example of the content of the effect when the low expectation non-suppressed reception effect is executed in the non-automatic reception mode.

Now, as a result of the start condition being established (pending digestion) in the normal gaming state (non-probability change / non-time reduction) and the fluctuation pattern determination being performed, the "predetermined fluctuation" of the "low expected fluctuation pattern in which even the reach state is not formed" Assuming that "Pattern" is selected, the peripheral control MPU1511a first performs an effect determination (preliminary determination or the like) corresponding to the predetermined fluctuation pattern. After that, the variation effect of the decorative pattern (the effect description according to the predetermined variation pattern, the sound output of the BGM reproduction according to the predetermined variation pattern, etc.) is started, and the advance notice effect is performed within the execution period of the variation effect. The effect (notice effect) according to the result of the determination is additionally executed with respect to the effect (effect pattern) related to the above-selected "predetermined variation pattern". Including each effect example described below, the effect pattern determination (sub control side) is performed based on the result of the fluctuation pattern determination (main control side), and the advance notice determination (sub) is performed based on the result of the effect pattern determination. When performing the control side), regarding the processing related to the advance notice effect, the "variation pattern determination" may be replaced with the "effect pattern determination" and the "variation pattern" may be replaced with the "effect pattern".

Then, as described above, when a special result is obtained in the effect determination (notice determination, etc.) corresponding to the predetermined variation pattern, in the peripheral control MPU1511a, as shown in FIG. 390 (b), the variation effect of the decorative symbol is performed. When the timing tr32, which has passed a predetermined time from the start, arrives, an operation reception effect (valid period) in which the effect reception is permitted is generated. However, in the pachinko machine 1 according to this embodiment, the operation reception effect (valid period) generated during the execution period of the effect related to the low expected fluctuation pattern (predetermined fluctuation pattern) is
-"Non-suppressed reception effect (Fig.)" That sets the set time at which the effect reception is allowed while the "BGM playback sound" corresponding to the fluctuation pattern (effect pattern) maintains the output state in the non-suppressed mode. 390 (a), (b)) ”, and ・ If the operation is not detected within the set time (timing tr32 to tr33) where the effect reception is allowed, the post-operation effect does not occur and the effect is concerned. "Non-automatic reception mode (see FIG. 390 (j))" at which the set time ends
It is designed to be generated as a "non-suppressive / non-automatic reception effect" executed by.

According to such a configuration, during the execution period of the effect (effect pattern) related to the low expected fluctuation pattern (predetermined fluctuation pattern), the "BGM reproduction sound" is suppressed, so that the operation reception effect is generated. Since the set time (valid period) that allows the reception of the production is suddenly set without any effect such as suggesting (non-suppressed reception production), the player is surprised. It becomes a form of sagging, and delays are likely to occur at the beginning of movement when trying to operate. Nevertheless, if the operation is not detected within the set time (timing tr32 to tr33), the set time is terminated without any post-operation effect (non-automatic reception). Aspect), by making people aware of the risk of missing the opportunity to generate the effect after operation, it is preferable to feel the tension when the effect (effect pattern) related to the low expected fluctuation pattern (predetermined fluctuation pattern) is being executed. You will be able to maintain it.

However, although it is executed as such a "non-suppressed / non-automatic reception effect", the set time (timing tr32 to tr33) is terminated without the post-operation effect occurring, contrary to the player's intention. If such a thing happens frequently, there is a concern that the interest in the game will decline. Therefore, in the peripheral control MPU1511a according to this embodiment, as shown in FIGS. 390 (b), (c), and (g), the set time (timing tr32 to tr33) at which the effect reception is allowed occurs. When the timing tr31 arrives a little earlier, the output of the "acceptable sound" is started, and the output state is maintained so as to straddle the timing tr32. As a result, it becomes possible to recognize that the production reception is permitted at the timing tr31 slightly before the set time (timing tr32 to tr33) occurs, and "contrary to the player's intention, after the operation. It is expected that it will be difficult for the set time (timing tr32 to tr33) to end frequently without producing an effect. However, as described above, the "acceptable sound" does not necessarily have to be generated before the set time (timing tr32 to tr33) occurs, and for example, it is adjusted to the generation timing of the set time generation timing tr32. May be generated.

As will be described later, in the pachinko machine 1 (peripheral control MPU1511a) according to this embodiment, as the "acceptance allowable sound", the first allowable sound output as a sound effect such as "Pickin!" And "press!" A second permissible sound that is output as a message sound such as is prepared. However, as shown in FIGS. 390 (d) and 390 (h), in the operation reception effect (valid period) generated during the execution period of the effect (effect pattern) related to the low expected fluctuation pattern (predetermined fluctuation pattern), The second permissible sound (message sound) is not output, and only the first permissible sound (sound effect) is output. It is designed so that a delay is likely to occur at the beginning of movement when a person tries to operate it.

By the way, during the execution period of the effect (effect pattern) related to the low expected fluctuation pattern (predetermined fluctuation pattern), as a countermeasure against the sudden setting of the set time (valid period) or the execution as a non-automatic reception mode. It is thought that some players may try not to miss the opportunity to generate the effect after the operation by repeatedly hitting the operation means (here, the operation button 410) from the state where the effect reception is not allowed. Be done. However, in this case, since the post-operation production is started immediately after the production reception is permitted, the started production is "the one performed according to the production reception (post-operation production)". It becomes difficult to recognize whether it is "automatically generated as a mere notice production that has nothing to do with the production reception", and there is a concern that the interest in the game will decline.

Therefore, as shown in FIG. 390 (particularly, FIG. 390 (c)), in the low expectation non-suppression reception effect, the “acceptance allowable sound (first allowable sound)” is generated after the set time (valid period) occurs. When the production reception is performed at the timing tr32a in the output state, the set time (valid period) itself is terminated, while the "acceptance allowable sound (first allowable sound)" is not terminated halfway, and the first 1 The output state is maintained until the timing when the output as the allowable sound ends (the same timing as when there is no operation (FIG. 390 (g)). As a result, the started production is "according to the production reception". It is possible to suppress the occurrence of a situation in which it becomes difficult to recognize whether it is "what is being performed (effect after operation)" or "what is automatically generated as a mere advance notice effect that has nothing to do with the effect reception". become able to.

Further, in the effect example shown in FIG. 390, when the effect is received within the set time (valid period) (timing tr32a in the figure), the effect display device 1600 (No. 1) is used as a post-operation effect according to the effect reception. At least the post-operation display effect (liquid crystal display) in the 1 effect member) and the post-operation effect sound output (effect sound) by the speaker (second effect member) are generated. In the figure, the post-operation display effect (liquid crystal display) and the post-operation effect sound output (effect sound) by the speaker are maintained in the execution state for the same period of time, but the present invention is not necessarily limited to this. For example, the post-operation display effect (liquid crystal display) is hidden at a predetermined timing that arrives after the timing tr33, regardless of the timing of the effect reception within the set time (valid period). On the other hand, the output of the effect sound (effect sound) after the operation may be maintained in the output state for a predetermined time from the timing when the effect reception is performed. However, regardless of the timing at which the effect is received, both the post-operation display effect (liquid crystal display) and the post-operation effect sound output (effect sound) are in a state where the timing tr33 has not been completed. It is required to maintain the output state.

In the effect example shown in FIG. 390, when the timing tr32 for which the set time (valid period) is set arrives, the effect display device 1600 displays the operation means that is the operation target in the low expectation non-suppression reception effect. Along with displaying the imitated image, a gauge display suggesting the remaining time until the set time elapses is displayed. As a display method for the image or gauge display, for example, the method shown in FIG. 208 (J2) can be adopted, and the display images (image, gauge display) have been accepted for production. Based on this, it will be hidden (both will be hidden at the same timing).

However, the pachinko machine 1 according to this embodiment is equipped with a "special effect mode (automatic button effect state)" that enables the automatic button function for all operation reception effects for which operation instructions are given. , It may be possible to set and cancel the setting to the "special effect mode" by the operation by the player. That is, in this case, even if the operation reception effect occurs during the execution period of the effect (effect pattern) related to the low expected fluctuation pattern (predetermined fluctuation pattern), the operation reception effect is set to the "special effect mode". , "Non-suppressed reception effect" and will be executed in the above-mentioned "automatic reception mode", and only when it is not set to "special effect mode", "non-suppressed / non-automatic reception effect" Will occur as. However, in the specification (particularly, "more detailed color rendering properties for acceptable sound reception" and related descriptions), unless otherwise specified, the "special production mode" is not set. In some cases, the pachinko machine 1 is described as an example of production when the "special production mode" is not installed.

FIGS. 391 and 392 are time charts showing an example of the content of the effect when the high expectation suppression reception effect is executed in the automatic reception mode.

Now, as a result of the start condition being established (holding digestion) in the normal game state (non-probability change / non-time saving) and the fluctuation pattern judgment being performed, it is highly expected that it will develop into "SP reach (reach production with background change, etc.)". Assuming that the "specific fluctuation pattern" is selected from the "variation pattern", the peripheral control MPU1511a first performs an effect determination (preliminary determination or the like) corresponding to the specific variation pattern. After that, the variation effect of the decorative pattern (the effect description according to the specific variation pattern, the sound output of the BGM reproduction according to the specific variation pattern, etc.) is started, and the effect determination is made within the execution period of the variation effect. The effect (preliminary effect) according to the result of the above is additionally executed with respect to the effect (effect pattern) related to the above-selected "specific fluctuation pattern".

However, as described above, in the effect (effect pattern) related to the "specific fluctuation pattern", as shown in FIG. 391 (b), regardless of which result is obtained as the effect determination (notice determination). In addition, when the timing tr42 (timing within the SP reach state) in which a specific time has elapsed since the start of the variation effect of the decorative symbol arrives, the operation reception effect (valid period) in which the effect reception is permitted is generated.

In this regard, in the pachinko machine 1 according to this embodiment, the operation reception effect (valid period) generated at the timing tr42 within the specific fluctuation pattern is described.
-A "suppression reception effect (FIG. 391 (a)) that sets a set time during which the effect reception is allowed while the" BGM reproduction sound "corresponding to the fluctuation pattern (effect pattern) is output in a suppression mode or silently. , (B)) ”, and ・ Even if the operation for the operation means targeted for operation is not detected within the set time (timing tr42 to tr43) where the production reception is allowed. When the timing tr42A within the set time arrives, the effect reception is automatically generated internally (the automatic button function is enabled), and the post-operation effect is started based on the effect reception being performed. Aspect (see FIG. 391 (j)) "
It is designed to be generated as a "suppression / automatic reception effect" executed by. As a method of outputting the "BGM reproduction sound" in a suppressed mode or in silence, a method of presetting a silence section (suppression section) in the data of the "BGM reproduction sound" itself or the "BGM reproduction sound" itself. A method of changing the setting of the volume value for the channel to which "BGM reproduction sound" is assigned to a suppression value (for example, "0"), a combination thereof, or the like can be adopted. As will be described later, this "suppression / automatic reception effect" is also referred to as a "second suppression operation reception effect", and the suppression mode here is also referred to as a "strong suppression mode".

According to such a configuration, the "BGM reproduction sound" is suppressed during the execution period of the effect (effect pattern) related to the highly expected fluctuation pattern (SP reach state in the effect (effect pattern) related to the specific fluctuation pattern). Since the set time (valid period) at which the production reception is allowed is set with the effect of suggesting the occurrence of the operation reception production by outputting in a mode or silence (suppression reception). (Direction), from the player's point of view, it becomes easier to perform the operation immediately after the operation reception effect is generated. In addition to this, even if the operation is not detected within the set time (timing tr42 to tr43), the post-operation effect is automatically generated when the timing tr42A within the set time arrives at the latest. Because of this (automatic reception mode), it becomes possible to enjoy the operation with a sense of security that the post-operation effect that occurs in the operation reception effect at the time of high expectation is not overlooked.

Moreover, in the peripheral control MPU1511a according to this embodiment, even in the "suppression / automatic reception effect", as in the above-mentioned "non-suppression / non-automatic reception effect", FIGS. 391 (b), (c), and (g) As shown in, when the timing tr41 arrives a little before the set time (timing tr42 to tr43) that allows the production reception occurs, the output of the "acceptance allowable sound" is started and the timing tr42 is straddled. Is trying to maintain the output state. As a result, even if the player does not recognize that the "BGM reproduction sound" is being output in a suppressed mode or silently, a state in which the production reception is permitted at the timing tr41 will soon occur. It is expected that it will be possible to recognize what to do, and it will be difficult to frequently say that "contrary to the player's intention, the production reception is done by enabling the automatic button function instead of the player's own operation". Become so. However, as described above, the "acceptable sound" does not necessarily have to be generated before the set time (timing tr42 to tr43) occurs, and is generated in accordance with the generation timing tr42 of the set time, for example. You may do so.

However, with respect to the timing tr40 at which the "BGM reproduction sound" is shifted from the state of being output in the non-suppressed mode to the state of being output in the suppressed mode or silent (or the non-output state), the above-mentioned action is performed. In order to preferably obtain the effect (suppression reception effect), as shown in FIGS. 391 (a) to 391 (c), a relationship such as "length of timing tr40 to tr41> length of timing tr41 to tr42". It can be said that it is important to set the sound so that it arrives well before the "output start timing tr41 of the above-mentioned reception allowable sound that occurs in advance of the set time" so as to have the property.

Further, in the "suppression / automatic reception effect" according to this embodiment, as shown in FIGS. 391 (c), (d), (g), and (h), the above-mentioned "non-suppression / non-automatic reception effect" As a "reception allowable sound", not only the first allowable sound output as a sound effect such as "Pickin!" But also the second allowable sound output as a message sound such as "press!" Also, when the timing tr41 arrives, the output is started at the same time, and the output state is maintained in the form of straddling the timing tr42.

According to such a configuration, the effect display device 1600 determines which of the plurality of operation means (operation button 410, sword decoration body 5001, etc.) included in the pachinko machine 1 should be operated. Since there is a possibility that the image of the operation means to be operated can be recognized from the time when the image is not yet displayed (timing tr41 to tr42), the operation reception effect is immediately generated. It becomes easier to operate. That is, as will be described later, in the "suppression / automatic reception effect" according to this embodiment, "when the operation button 410 is selected as the operation target" and "the sword decoration 5001 as the operation target" are selected based on the result of the advance notice effect determination. When there is a "selection" and the operation button 410 is the operation target, a message sound such as "press!" Is output as the second allowable sound (message sound), and the sword decoration 5001 is the operation target. In this case, a message sound such as "Deliver the sword!" Is output as the second allowable sound (message sound).

In the production example shown in FIG. 391, the output of the first permissible sound and the second permissible sound is started at the same time, but the timing at which the first permissible sound and the second permissible sound are started to be output is different from each other. The output state may be sequentially set. In this case, the output of only one of the first permissible sound and the second permissible sound may be started from a state in which the set time (valid period) has not yet occurred.

Further, in this production example, as shown in FIGS. 391 (g) and 391 (h), the "first permissible sound" is adopted as the production sound that is output for a relatively short time, and the "second permissible sound" is adopted. Is adopted as the effect sound that is output over a relatively long time, but the long-short relationship of these permissible sounds may be reversed.

However, as shown in FIGS. 391 (g) and 391 (h), it is assumed that the output states of the "first permissible sound" and the "second permissible sound" are maintained for different times from each other, and their outputs are output. It is desirable that the time when the state ends (the time when the state is made inaudible) arrives at different timings before the timing tr42A when the automatic button function is activated. According to such a configuration, it is estimated how much time is left until the timing tr42A at which the automatic button function is activated arrives, depending on which of the following situations the "acceptable sound for reception" is in. It will be possible to do so, and it will be expected that it will be difficult to frequently say that "contrary to the player's intention, the production reception is done by enabling the automatic button function instead of the player's own operation".
-First situation in which both the "first permissible sound" and the "second permissible sound" maintain the output state-The output state of one of the "first permissible sound" and the "second permissible sound" is maintained. However, the other is ending the output state (being in an inaudible state). Second situation-Both the "first permissible sound" and the "second permissible sound" are finished in the output state. Third situation (which is inaudible)

Further, in the pachinko machine 1 according to this embodiment, the "non-suppressed / non-automatic reception effect" in the effect example shown in FIG. 390 and the "suppression / automatic reception effect" in the effect example shown in FIG. The same production sound (for example, "Pickin!") Is output as the "first permissible sound". That is, in this case, the message sound (second permissible sound) among the reception permissible sounds is output as a production sound that is not output by the "non-suppressed / non-automatic reception effect", but the effect sound (second permissible sound) among the reception permissible sounds. Regarding the first permissible sound), since it can be output as a production sound that is also output in the "non-suppressed / non-automatic reception effect", when the "BGM reproduction sound" is suppressed. It becomes possible to more easily recognize that the production reception is in a permissible state while maintaining the effectability appropriately (second permissible sound) (first permissible sound).

It should be noted that the timing tr41 to tr42 (or the timing tr31 to tr32) when the reception allowable sound (first allowable sound, second allowable sound) is output in advance of the set time (valid period) or the image display. The time may be the minimum time (for example, one frame) in the control (processing) unit, or may be two or more frames. That is, if the set time (valid period) and the image display can be output even a little earlier, the player is in a state where the production reception is permitted and the operation means targeted for operation. Since there is a possibility that it will be possible to recognize which one is earlier by the preceding time, the period until the set time ends or the timing when the automatic button function is enabled is It will be expected to prevent people from forgetting to operate within the period until the arrival.

By the way, as described above, in the operation reception effect executed in the automatic button mode, the operation opportunity may be lost by enabling the automatic button function (timing tr42A) even within the set time (valid period). Is. Therefore, in the production example shown in FIGS. 391 (c) and 391 (d), unlike the case of the production example shown in FIG. 390 (c), the reception permissible sound (at least one of the first permissible sound and the second permissible sound) If the production reception is made while the one) is in the output state, the output state is terminated based on the fact that the production reception is made. That is, in this case, when the operation by the player is performed, the output of the reception allowable sound (first allowable sound, second allowable sound) is interrupted at that time, and the production reception is permitted by this (the production reception is permitted). Since it becomes possible to recognize that the validity period) has expired, "a state in which the production reception has not yet occurred and the automatic button function can be enabled (a state in which the operation opportunity can be lost)". It becomes possible to avoid the misunderstanding that it is in. If the operation is performed and the production is accepted before the timing tr42A when the automatic button function is activated within the set time (valid period), the production is performed when the production is accepted. It goes without saying that the automatic button function is not enabled even if the timing tr42A arrives because the state in which the reception is permitted is terminated.

Further, also in the effect example shown in FIG. 391, when the effect is received within the set time (valid period) (timing tr42a in the figure), the effect display device 1600 (as a post-operation effect according to the effect reception) At least the post-operation display effect (liquid crystal display) in the first effect member) and the post-operation effect sound output (effect sound) by the speaker (second effect member) are generated. More specifically, regarding the post-operation display effect (liquid crystal display), regardless of the timing within the set time (valid period), the effect is received at a specific timing that arrives after the timing tr43. While it is hidden (invisible), the post-operation effect sound output (effect sound) is maintained in the output state for a predetermined time from the timing when the effect is received. ing.

However, as shown in FIG. 391, regardless of the timing within the set time (valid period), the effect sound output (effect sound) after the operation is "BGM playback sound". It is desirable to set so that the output state is maintained at the time when the timing tr44 for returning the output from the suppressed state (silence state) to the output in the non-suppressed mode arrives. On the other hand, regarding the post-operation display effect (liquid crystal display), in the effect example shown in FIG. 391, the output state is terminated at the timing tr44 when the "BGM reproduction sound" is returned to the output in the non-suppressed mode. ing. That is, in this case, at the timing tr44, both the "BGM reproduction sound" is returned to the output in the non-suppressed mode and the content related to the display effect is switched, so that the effectability is improved. It will be expected to be significantly changed to improve the color rendering index. The "BGM reproduction sound" may be gradually returned by a method such as fade-in when returning to the output in the non-suppressed mode. Further, regarding the post-operation display effect (liquid crystal display), the output state may be terminated at a specific timing after the timing tr44 instead of the timing tr44.

Further, also in the effect example shown in FIG. 391, when the timing tr42 for which the set time (valid period) is set arrives, the effect display device 1600 displays the operation means that is the operation target in the high expectation suppression reception effect. Along with displaying the imitated image, a gauge display suggesting the remaining time until the set time elapses is displayed. In this respect, in the operation reception effect executed in the automatic reception mode, in view of the fact that a message sound (for example, "press!") As the second allowable sound is output, the effect display device 1600 also has a non-automatic reception mode. A message display (for example, "press!") That does not appear in the operation reception effect executed in is displayed. As the display method of the image, the gauge display, and the message display, for example, the methods shown in FIGS. 206 (Z3) and 220 (R2) can be adopted, and these display images (image, R2) can be adopted. The gauge display and message display) will be hidden (both are hidden at the same timing) when the set time has not yet elapsed based on the occurrence of the production reception. The message display does not necessarily have to exactly match the content of the message sound, and may be any one that prompts the operation.

In this respect, in the pachinko machine 1 according to this embodiment, as shown in FIGS. 391 (g) to 391 (i), before the timing tr42A when the automatic button function is activated within the set time (valid period). While the output state of the message sound is terminated (in an inaudible state), the message display is designed to maintain the display state even at the timing tr42A when the automatic button function is enabled, and further. After the automatic button function is enabled, it is not hidden (invisible) at least until the timing tr43 at which the set time ends arrives. The display state may be maintained after that. Since the set time (valid period) is terminated when the effect reception is performed, it is actually terminated at the latest when the timing tr42A at which the automatic button is activated arrives. Therefore, "timing tr43 at which the set time ends" means, strictly speaking, the timing at which the set time ends when the set time is supposed to continue, and the time set at the timing tr42 is set. It is a timing that arrives when the timing tr42 has passed.

According to such a configuration, when the production is accepted by enabling the automatic button function, the output state of the message sound (second permissible sound) may be terminated halfway (non-audible state). Since the message display will not be hidden in the middle of the set time, the production is accepted by the message sound (second permissible sound) or the operation detection for the operation target prompted by the message display. You will be able to suggest to the player that you are not in the situation. That is, in this case, even if the operation means on the side that is not prompted to operate by the message sound or the message display is erroneously operated, it can be suggested that the effect reception due to the operation has not occurred. become able to.

Further, in the pachinko machine 1 according to this embodiment, both the operation reception effect (FIG. 390) that is not executed in the automatic button mode and the operation reception effect (FIG. 391) that is executed in the automatic button mode are described. Within the set time (valid period), the remaining time display (gauge display) suggesting the remaining time until the end of the state in which the production reception is allowed ends can be performed. Then, in the operation reception effect (FIG. 390) that is not executed in the automatic button mode, the remaining time display (gauge display) is dynamically displayed based on the time until the set time elapses. That is, in this case, the gauge amount decreases as the time until the set time elapses decreases, and when this time becomes "0", the gauge amount is dynamically displayed so as to become "0".

On the other hand, in the operation reception effect (FIG. 391) executed in the automatic button mode, when the specific timing tr42A within the set time arrives without the operation being detected, the automatic button function is enabled and the effect reception is automatically performed. As described above, the production reception is not allowed even if the set time has not yet elapsed after the arrival of the specific timing tr42A. Therefore, if the "remaining time display (gauge display) suggesting the remaining time until the end of the state in which the production reception is allowed ends" is performed within the set time of the operation reception effect (FIG. 391), it is normal. Is conceivable to dynamically display the remaining time display (gauge display) based on the time until the specific timing tr42A arrives.

In this respect, in the pachinko machine 1 (peripheral control MPU1511a) according to this embodiment, in the operation reception effect (FIG. 391) executed in the automatic button mode, the effect reception is permitted after the specific timing tr42A arrives. Despite the disappearance, the remaining time display (gauge display) is dynamically changed based on the time until the set time elapses, not the time until the specific timing tr42A arrives. I am trying to display it. That is, in this case, the gauge amount decreases as the time until the set time elapses decreases, and when the set time reaches "0", the gauge amount is dynamically displayed so as to become "0". However, here, since the production reception is always shifted to the state where the production reception is not allowed before the set time becomes "0", the production reception is not allowed with the gauge amount remaining. It will be transferred to the state.

According to such a configuration, when the production reception is performed by enabling the automatic button function, the gauge amount in the remaining time display (gauge display) is intentionally left, so that the player's intention On the contrary, it is possible to suggest that there is a risk of "loss of operation opportunity", which makes it possible to operate at an early stage regardless of the remaining gauge amount in the set time (valid period) from the next time onward. You will be able to encourage them to do.

Moreover, in the operation reception effect (FIG. 391) executed in the automatic button mode according to this embodiment, when the effect reception occurs due to the operation detection, the remaining time is displayed before the set time elapses (FIG. 391). Gauge display) can be hidden (invisible). On the other hand, when the effect reception occurs by enabling the automatic button function (specific timing tr42A), the remaining time display (gauge display) is not hidden in the state where the set time has not elapsed, and at least the setting is performed. Until the end of the time, the "dynamic display mode in which the suggested remaining time (gauge amount) gradually decreases" is maintained.

According to such a configuration, when the production is accepted by enabling the automatic button function, the remaining time display (gauge display) continues to be dynamically displayed at least until the set time has elapsed. Therefore, it becomes possible to suggest to the player that the production reception is not performed by the operation detection for the operation target for which the operation is prompted by the message sound or the message display. That is, in this case, even if the operation means on the side that is not prompted to operate by the message sound or the message display is erroneously operated, it can be suggested that the effect reception due to the operation has not occurred. become able to.

As described above, in the operation reception effect generated at the timing tr42 in FIG. 391, "when the operation button 410 is selected as the operation target" and "the sword decoration body 5001 is selected as the operation target" based on the result of the advance notice effect determination. There is a case. That is, in this case, since there is a possibility of confusion as to which operation means is the operation target after the set time (valid period) in which the production reception is allowed occurs, the set time is 5 seconds or the like. It is desirable to set a relatively long time. On the other hand, in the operation reception effect generated at the timing tr32 in FIG. 390, there is no "when the sword decoration body 5001 is selected as the operation target", and the operation button 410 is always used as the operation target. It is desirable to set a relatively short time such as 3 seconds as the set time. At this time, it is possible to set the timing tr42A at which the automatic button function is activated after the timing when 3 seconds have elapsed since the set time (valid period) has occurred, contrary to the player's intention. It is desirable to control the occurrence of situations where opportunities are lost.

Further, in the operation reception effect generated at the timing tr42 in FIG. 391, when the operation means on the side that is not the operation target is operated, the side that is the operation target while maintaining the erroneous operation state. Even when the operation means of is operated, it is desirable that the effect reception is performed and the effect is executed after the operation. That is, if a situation appears in which the production is not accepted even though the operation means is operated, the player may be confused, and in such a situation, it is appropriate to interrupt the erroneous operation state. Since it is harsh to request further operations on the operating means on the side, even if an erroneous operating state is maintained, the production is accepted when the operating means on the operating target side is operated. It is desirable to do.

Further, in the production example shown in FIG. 391, the matters described in the above-mentioned “suppressed operation sound output processing (FIG. 178)” and other examples thereof can be appropriately adopted. That is, in this case, the timings tr40, tr42, tr42a, tr43, and tr44 in the production example shown in FIG. 391 correspond to the timings ts12, ts13, ts14, ts15, and ts16 in the production example shown in FIG. 178, respectively. Become.

However, as described above, in the suppressed operation reception effect, when an operation opportunity is given, a specific type of effect sound is output in a suppressed mode or silence, so that the effect is poor compared to the non-suppressed operation reception effect. Is a concern. In this respect, in the pachinko machine 1 (peripheral control MPU1511a) according to this embodiment, the reception permissible sound output when the suppression operation reception effect is generated is larger than the reception permissible sound output when the non-suppression operation reception effect is generated. It is possible to output as a sound whose output state is maintained for a long time.

That is, in the pachinko machine 1 according to this embodiment, as the first allowable sound, a plurality of modes (for example, a plurality of modes including the first mode, the second mode, and the third mode) in which the output state is maintained for different times are provided. It is prepared, and any one of the plurality of modes is selectively output as the first allowable sound based on the result of the advance notice effect determination. Here, the "first mode" as the first permissible sound is the mode shown in FIGS. 390 (c) and (g) and 391 (c) and (g), and is the "time maintained as an output state". Is set as the shortest aspect of the above-mentioned plurality of aspects. Further, it is desirable that the rate (expectation degree) at which the jackpot symbol appears when the symbol variation is stopped differs depending on which of the above-mentioned plurality of modes the first permissible sound is output.

It should be noted that "which of the plurality of modes is output as the first allowable sound" and "which of the plurality of operating means is used as the operation target" are obtained as separate determination results within the above-mentioned advance notice effect determination. Alternatively, one determination result may be obtained within the above-mentioned advance notice effect determination. However, for at least the first aspect of the plurality of aspects, the first permissible case is in either case where the "operation button 410" is the operation target or the "sword decoration body 5001" is the operation target. It is desirable to be able to select it as a sound. Further, also in the second aspect and the third aspect, it is possible to select either the case where the "operation button 410" is the operation target or the case where the "sword decoration body 5001" is the operation target. You may do so.

FIG. 392 is a time chart showing an example of the production content when the second mode is used as the first reception allowable sound when the high expectation suppression reception effect is executed in the automatic reception mode.

As shown in FIG. 392, this effect example is basically the same as the case of the above effect example described with reference to FIG. 391, including the generation conditions and the effect contents (further, description of another example thereof, etc.). Is the same. However, in this effect example, as a result of the advance notice effect determination, the first allowable sound is output in the second mode, which is longer than the first mode, in the timing tr41, instead of the first mode. The difference is that the output state of the first permissible sound is maintained for a longer time than that of the second permissible sound.

According to such a configuration, the reception allowable sound output when the suppression operation reception effect is generated is output in a longer time than the reception tolerance sound (first mode) output when the non-suppression operation reception effect is generated. Since it is possible to output as a sound to be maintained, the color rendering property is suitably maintained even in a situation where "BGM reproduction (specific type of production sound)" is output in a suppressed mode or silently when an operation opportunity is given. You will be able to.

Further, in order to improve the effectability in the suppression operation reception effect, as the first allowable sound output in the second aspect, a sound that is not output as the reception allowable sound in the operation reception effect shown in FIG. 390 should be used. It is desirable to do.

On the other hand, in FIGS. 391 and 392, there are "a case where the operation button 410 is selected as the operation target" and "a case where the sword decoration body 5001 is selected as the operation target" based on the result of the advance notice effect determination. It is assumed that the same operation means (operation button 410) is targeted for operation. Therefore, also in this production example, the second allowable sound is output in the same manner as in the production example shown in FIG. 391 (for example, "press!"). In this respect, in the pachinko machine 1 (peripheral control MPU1511a) according to this embodiment, as shown in FIGS. 392 (c) and 392 (g), the first permissible sound is output in the second mode. However, by ending the output state of the first permissible sound (inaudible state) before the timing tr42A when the automatic button function is enabled, the automatic button function can be used in this production example as well. It is possible to estimate how much time is left until the activation timing tr42A arrives from the output status of the reception allowable sound.

In particular, in this production example, the output state of the first permissible sound is maintained even after the output state of the "second permissible sound" output in the production example shown in FIG. 391 is completed. By confirming this, it is possible to estimate in more detail how much time is left until the timing tr42A when the automatic button function is activated arrives, as compared with the case of the production example of FIG. 391. become. Further, by outputting only the first permissible sound out of the first permissible sound and the second permissible sound in a longer alternative mode (second mode), the player side first uses the second permissible sound in common. 2 Based on the timing at which the output state of the permissible sound ends, the "remaining time until the timing tr42A arrives" is estimated, and the first permissible sound is selected with a sense of security that the estimation is performed as usual. Since it becomes possible to make more detailed guesses in a challenging manner by using it, it is expected that the game entertainment will be maintained favorably.

In the production example shown in FIG. 392, other matters are the same as in the production example shown in FIG. 391. For example, when the production reception is performed when the reception allowable sound is in the output state, the output is output. The point that the state is terminated halfway is also the same as in the case of the effect example shown in FIG. 391.

In addition, when the high expectation suppression reception effect (FIGS. 391 and 392) occurs in the state set to the above-mentioned "special effect mode", the timing at which the automatic button function is activated is set within the set time. It is desirable to set the timing earlier than the timing tr42A. However, in this case, since the automatic button function can be enabled at the player's will, the message is displayed even when the production is accepted by enabling the automatic button function. The output state is not maintained until the timing tr43, and it is desirable that the output state is hidden before the timing tr43 (the timing when the effect reception is made or the timing delayed by the above-mentioned time). At this time, regarding the timing at which the automatic button function is enabled, when the first permissible sound is output in the first mode, it does not arrive in the output state, but the first permissible sound is output in the second mode. When it is done, it is desirable that it arrives in the output state and functions so as to terminate the first allowable sound output in the second aspect in the middle.

Further, there are cases where the first permissible sound (sound effect as the reception permissible sound) is output in the first mode and the case where the first permissible sound (sound effect as the reception permissible sound) is output in the second mode. , Not only the time for which the output state is maintained is different from each other, but also different production sounds may be used. For example, when the first permissible sound (sound effect as the reception permissible sound) is output in the first mode, a production sound such as "pickin" is output, and the first permissible sound (sound effect as the reception permissible sound) is the second. When outputting in a mode, it is possible to output a sound effect such as "gaogao".

In the above explanatory example, the low expectation fluctuation pattern is defined as "a fluctuation pattern in which even the reach state is not formed", but it is defined as "a fluctuation pattern in which the symbol is stopped without entering the SP reach state", and the low expectation is defined. When a predetermined variation pattern is selected from the variation patterns, the effect example shown in FIG. 390 may be performed.

Further, it is desirable that the "suppression / automatic reception effect" illustrated in the above explanatory example cannot appear in the low expected fluctuation pattern (corresponding effect pattern) in the normal gaming state, but the above The "non-suppressed / non-automatic reception effect" illustrated in the explanatory example may also appear in the highly expected variation pattern (corresponding effect pattern) including the above "specific variation pattern" in the normal gaming state. .. That is, even if it is a high-expected fluctuation pattern (corresponding to a high-expected fluctuation pattern), it basically corresponds to a low-expected fluctuation pattern (corresponding to a low-expected fluctuation pattern) within a period before the production progresses to the SP reach state such as a non-reach state. Since the effect that appears in the effect pattern) is also executed, the “non-suppressed / non-automatic reception effect” illustrated in FIG. 390 can also appear within the period. Even with such a configuration, when "suppression / automatic reception effect" appears (high expectation fluctuation pattern), when "non-suppression / non-automatic reception effect" appears (low expectation fluctuation pattern or high expectation fluctuation). It can be said that the rate (expectation) at which the jackpot symbol appears when the symbol fluctuation is stopped is higher than that of the pattern).

In the low expected fluctuation pattern (corresponding to the effect pattern) that occurs in the normal gaming state, "BGM reproduction (specific type of effect sound)" is output in a suppressed mode or silence when giving an operation opportunity. It is desirable that the low expectation non-suppressive reception effect is not executed in the automatic reception mode. This is a case where the "special effect mode" is not set, or the pachinko machine 1 is not equipped with the "special effect mode".

Further, regarding the length of time from "timing tr42A at which the automatic button function is enabled" to "timing tr43 at which the set time elapses after the production reception is allowed", the minimum time in the control (processing) unit ( For example, it may be 1 frame), or it may be 2 frames or more. For example, the message display is visible at "timing tr42A when the automatic button function is enabled", and such a visible state is at least "timing tr43 where the set time elapses after the production reception is allowed". If it continues until it arrives, it will be possible to suggest the original length as the set time (validity period), and there is a possibility that it can be recognized that the operation by the player was not performed. You will be able to do it. In the operation reception effect executed in the automatic reception mode, a message sound (second allowable sound) or a message display is output for the "timing when the automatic button function is activated" within the set time in any operation reception effect. It is desirable to output with the above-mentioned relationships (see FIGS. 391 (h) and (i) and FIGS. 392 (h) and (i)).

Further, in the pachinko machine 1 according to this embodiment, in FIGS. 391 (i) and 392 (i), "the time for which the message display is left after the production reception is made (in the example in the figure, the timings tr42A to tr43). (Time minutes) ”is also appearing when the production reception occurs at other timings (Fig. 390 (e), Fig. 391 (e), etc.) due to the standardization of the program, but they are separate. By using the program of, it may occur only when the automatic button function is enabled. That is, in this case, in the example shown in FIG. 390 (e), the operation-related display is hidden at the timing tr32a, and in the example shown in FIG. 391 (e), the operation-related display is hidden at the timing tr42a. Become.

Further, in the above explanatory example (FIGS. 390 to 392), the post-operation display effect (liquid crystal display) in the effect display device 1600 (first effect member) and the post-operation effect sound output (effect) by the speaker (second effect member). Although the sound) is started at the same time, the post-operation effect may be performed so as to shift the start time of those effects. For example, in a situation where the post-operation effect sound output (effect sound) by the speaker (second effect member) is started at the timing tr42, the effect display device 1600 (first effect member) displays the post-operation display effect (liquid crystal display). The display effect (liquid crystal display) after the operation is displayed according to the timing when the operation-related display shown in FIGS. 390 to 392 is hidden (or the timing when the fade-out process is started), which has not been displayed yet. If it is started, the display effect can be switched smoothly.

As described in the above-mentioned "Suppressed operation sound output processing (FIG. 178)", even in the production examples shown in FIGS. The effect (for example, the above-mentioned "specific operation-related effect" or the like) may be performed. In this case, it is desirable to prepare a plurality of modes having different expectations for the appearance of the jackpot symbol as the precursor effect, and to perform the precursor effect in any of these modes. Further, in this case, a plurality of modes are prepared as the precursor sound produced during the period in which the precursor sound is performed, and which of the plurality of modes is output as the precursor sound depends on the execution mode of the precursor sound. It is desirable to make a selection. On the other hand, regarding the first permissible sound, the first mode and the second mode are displayed in the image to be operated, the gauge display suggesting the remaining time, and the message display of "press!". It is output in any of a plurality of modes including the mode.

In the effect example shown in FIGS. 390 to 392, when the operation reception effect shown in FIGS. 391 and 392 is generated, a specific sound (second) that is not output when the operation reception effect shown in FIG. 390 is generated. Since the first permissible sound and the second permissible sound of the embodiment can be output as the reception permissible sound, it is possible to preferably suppress the poor performance when the suppression operation reception effect occurs. Will be able to. Further, by confirming the type of the reception allowable sound, it becomes possible to recognize that the operation reception effect is occurring in the automatic reception mode instead of the non-automatic reception mode.

Regarding the reception permissible sound of the non-suppressed operation reception effect (FIG. 390), the first permissible sound that outputs the reception permissible sound as a sound effect and the second permissible sound that outputs the reception permissible sound as a message sound. Of these, the second permissible sound is not prepared and only the first permissible sound is output, whereas the reception permissible sound of the suppression operation reception effect (FIGS. 391 and 392) is the first permissible sound and the first permissible sound. 2 Both allowable sounds are output. As a result, it becomes possible to suitably maintain the effectability when the suppression operation reception effect is being performed.

Further, in the above-mentioned production example, the same production sound is output as the first allowable sound in the non-suppression operation reception effect (FIG. 390) and the suppression operation reception effect (FIGS. 391 and 392) (FIGS. 390 and 391). ) And a case where a different production sound is output as the first allowable sound (FIGS. 390 and 392).

That is, if the reception allowable sound different from the normal time is output, it becomes difficult to recognize that the production reception is permitted, and the operation opportunity may be lost. Therefore, the second permissible sound (message sound) is output as a sound that is not normally output, while the first permissible sound (sound effect) is output as a sound that is also output during normal times. Is desirable. Then, while the reception allowable sound is output in such a mode, the first allowable sound (sound effect) is also output as a production sound (second mode) that is not normally output with a predetermined probability. If the rate (expectation) at which the jackpot symbol appears is higher than when it is output in the first aspect, the "BGM reproduction (specification)" is made to recognize that the production reception is permitted. It becomes possible to suitably maintain the effectability when the "type of effect sound)" is output in a suppressed mode or in silence. In order to obtain such an action effect, when the suppression operation reception effect is generated (a specific fluctuation pattern is generated), the first aspect is output as the first reception allowable sound in the effect determination such as the advance notice effect determination. It is desirable that the ratio for determining the effect is higher than the ratio for determining that the second aspect is output.

In the effect example shown in FIGS. 390 to 392, not only the operation reception effect (FIG. 390) executed in the non-automatic reception mode, but also the operation reception effect (FIGS. 391 and 392) executed in the automatic reception mode. , When it occurs, the production reception is automatically accepted if you forget to operate it because the reception allowable sound suggesting that the production reception is in the allowable state or the production reception is in the allowable state can be output. It is possible to preferably suppress the occurrence of a situation in which the operation opportunity is lost as a result of the occurrence.

Further, in the production example shown in FIGS. 391 and 392, a predetermined time (for example, 5 seconds) is set when the timing tr41 arrives, and the specific timing tr42A arrives within this set time (valid period). It is determined whether or not the effect is received, and the effect reception is automatically generated when the specific timing tr42A arrives without the effect reception being performed in response to the operation detection. According to such a configuration, it is possible to start the post-operation effect within a preset period (set time) regardless of whether or not there is an operation. It will be possible to make it an automatic button without making the flow of the subsequent production different from the case without it, or causing a delay in the production.

Further, in the above-mentioned production example, a "message sound (second permissible sound) prompting an operation" may be output as a reception permissible sound, and the message sound (second permissible sound) must be operated. It is not output in the "operation reception effect executed in the non-automatic reception mode" that is not accepted, and can be output only in the "operation reception effect executed in the automatic reception mode" that is received without any operation. There is.

That is, only in the operation reception effect executed in the non-automatic reception mode, a message sound (second permissible sound) that directly expresses the operation should be output, and many types of reception permissible sounds (first permissible sound, the first permissible sound) are output. It is conceivable that the second permissible sound) should be output, but since there is a risk that the post-operation effect is usually executed in a mode with a low degree of expectation, the post-operation effect should be performed. It is not always good to operate it in order to improve the interest of the game. In this respect, the "operation reception effect executed in the non-automatic reception mode" is an effect in which it is permissible to make a selection such as "do not dare to generate the effect after the operation", and therefore the operation should be performed in such an effect. Avoiding direct expression as a message (second permissible sound), do not output the message sound (second permissible sound), and do not have the right to choose whether or not to generate a post-operation effect. It is desirable to output a message sound (second permissible sound) or output more types of permissible reception sounds only in the "operation reception effect executed in the mode". In addition, in the "operation reception effect executed in the non-automatic reception mode", if the set time ends without the effect reception being performed, the post-operation effect and the related effect will not be performed, so it is expected. The production will progress without suggesting the degree. In the non-moving reception effect, no message sound is output in any of the operation reception effects, but in the "operation reception effect executed in the automatic reception mode", the message sound is not output. The operation reception effect may be included.

Further, as described above, in this pachinko machine 1, a plurality of modes (“press!” And “sword deliver!”) Are prepared as message sounds (second permissible sounds), and the effects shown in FIGS. 391 and 392 are shown. In the example, one of the plurality of modes is selectively selected depending on which of the operation button 410 and the sword decoration 5001 is given the operation opportunity (based on the result of the advance notice effect determination). I am trying to output. In this case, when the target to which the operation opportunity is given is the operation button 410 and a message sound (“press!”) Corresponding to the operation button 410 is output, the target to which the operation opportunity is given is the sword decoration body 5001. Compared to when the message sound corresponding to ("Sword delivery!") Is output, it is suggested that the jackpot symbol appears when the symbol fluctuation is stopped in the post-operation effect according to the effect reception. The ratio (expectation level) at which the production mode appears is low. The ratio (expectation degree) at which the effect mode appears may be 0% or 100%.

On the other hand, in the production example shown in FIG. 390, the message sound (second permissible sound) is not output, and when the message sound (second permissible sound) is not output, the operation target is Is not the sword decoration body 5001, but the operation button 410 is used as the operation target, and the operation reception effect executed in the non-automatic reception mode is generated. Moreover, at least in the normal game state, it is suggested that the post-operation effect executed when the effect reception is performed in the operation reception effect in which the message sound is not output "the jackpot symbol appears when the symbol fluctuation is stopped". The rate (expectation level) at which the effect mode appears is the post-operation effect that is executed when the effect reception is performed in the operation reception effect in which the message sound is output. It is set to be lower than the rate (expectation level) at which the production mode suggesting that "" appears. The ratio (expectation degree) at which the above-mentioned effect mode appears may be 0% or 100%.

According to such a configuration, when the operation reception effect is generated, first, "whether the message sound (second allowable sound) is output" becomes a turning point for knowing the high or low degree of expectation, and the message sound (the message sound (2nd allowable sound) is output). When the second permissible sound) is output, it becomes possible to know the high or low degree of expectation depending on the mode. Further, even when the operation button 410 is used as the operation target, when the message sound (second permissible sound) is output, the post-operation effect can be enjoyed with relatively high expectations. become. Therefore, when the message sound (second permissible sound) is output, it is desirable to prevent the post-operation effect from being overlooked by executing the post-operation effect in the automatic reception mode. On the other hand, when the message sound (second permissible sound) is not output, the degree of expectation is relatively low, and the "sword decoration 5001" which is used only when the degree of expectation is high is the operation target. Will disappear. That is, in this case, it is desirable to give the player the option of whether to generate the post-operation effect by executing the post-operation effect in the non-automatic reception mode.

Further, in the operation reception effect executed in FIGS. 391 and 392, when the set time (valid period) occurs, a message sound is output and a message display is displayed. In this regard, as shown in FIGS. 391 (g) to (i) and 392 (g) to (i), the timing at which the automatic button function is enabled within the set time (valid period) for the message sound. While the output state ends (becomes inaudible) before tr42A, the message display is maintained even at the timing tr42A when the automatic button function is enabled. Furthermore, after the automatic button function is enabled, it is not hidden (invisible) at least until the timing tr43 at which the set time ends arrives. That is, in this case, when the effect reception is performed by the operation by the player within the set time, the message display may be hidden at the stage when the set time has not elapsed according to the effect reception, but within the set time. When the automatic button function is enabled, the message display ("Press!" Or "Deliver!") Will continue to be displayed until at least the set time ends.

According to such a configuration, when the production is accepted by enabling the automatic button function, the output state of the message sound (second permissible sound) may be terminated halfway (non-audible state). Since the message display will not be hidden in the middle of the set time, the production is accepted by the message sound (second permissible sound) or the operation detection for the operation target prompted by the message display. You will be able to suggest to the player that you are not in the situation. That is, in this case, even if the operation means on the side that is not prompted to operate by the message sound or the message display is erroneously operated, it can be suggested that the effect reception due to the operation has not occurred. become able to.

Further, in the operation reception effect (FIGS. 391 and 392) in which the automatic button function is enabled, the remaining time is displayed (gauge display) when the effect is received due to the activation of the automatic button function at the timing tr42A. Since the gauge amount in the above is intentionally left, it is possible to suggest that there is a risk of "losing the operation opportunity" against the intention of the player, and this makes it possible to suggest that there is a risk of "losing the operation opportunity" from the next time onward. At the set time (valid period), it becomes possible to encourage the operation to be performed at an early stage regardless of the remaining gauge.

Further, in the operation reception effect (FIGS. 391 and 392) in which the automatic button function is enabled, when the effect reception is performed by enabling the automatic button function, the remaining time display (gauge display) is at least set. The dynamic display is continued until the time elapses. Therefore, it is possible to suggest to the player that the production reception is not performed by the operation detection for the operation target for which the operation is prompted by the message sound or the message display. That is, in this case, even if the operation means on the side that is not prompted to operate by the message sound or the message display is erroneously operated, it can be suggested that the effect reception due to the operation has not occurred. become able to.

Further, since the operation reception effect shown in FIG. 390 and the operation reception effect shown in FIG. 391 are designed to output the same effect sound (first allowable sound of the first aspect) as the reception allowable sound, eventually. Even when the operation reception effect of is generated, it becomes possible to appropriately convey to the player that the operation opportunity is given. Moreover, in the operation reception effect shown in FIG. 391, the second allowable sound, which is not output in the operation reception effect shown in FIG. 390, is also output. Therefore, which of these operation reception effects is generated? Will also be possible to recognize. Furthermore, in the operation reception effect executed in the automatic reception mode in the specific fluctuation pattern (corresponding to the effect pattern), the ratio of execution in the mode shown in FIG. 391 is relatively high, and FIG. 392 shows. The rate of execution in the mode shown is relatively low, and the rate of being stopped by the jackpot symbol is relatively high when executed in the mode shown in FIG. 392. That is, in this case, the first allowable sound is not the "first mode" but the "second mode" which is not used in the operation reception effect shown in FIG. 390, while avoiding overlooking the post-operation effect. Since it will be output at, it will be possible to improve the interest of the game.

Further, in the effect example shown in FIGS. 391 and 392, the output state of the reception allowable sound (first allowable sound) is maintained for a long time as compared with the case of the effect example shown in FIG. Since it is sometimes used as FIG. 392), it is possible to suitably maintain the effectability when "BGM reproduction (specific type of effect sound)" is output in a suppressed mode or silently. become able to.

Further, in the production example (suppression operation reception production) shown in FIGS. 391 and 392, the reception allowable sound (first allowable sound) is not necessarily used as the production sound (second mode) in which the output state is maintained for a long time. , The same reception permissible sound (first permissible sound of the first aspect) as when the non-suppressed operation reception effect (FIG. 390) is generated can also be generated. On top of this, when the first allowable sound is output as the effect sound (second mode) in which the output state is maintained for a long time (FIG. 392), the effect sound (first) in which the output state is maintained only for a short time. A new effect is added by setting the rate at which the symbol is stopped by the jackpot symbol to be higher than when the first permissible sound is output in (aspect) (FIG. 391). This makes it possible to recognize that the production reception is in an permitted state, and at the same time, the color rendering property when the "BGM reproduction (specific type of production sound)" is output in a suppressed mode or silently. It becomes possible to maintain it favorably.

Further, in the effect example shown in FIGS. 390 to 392, when the first permissible sound is output as the effect sound (second aspect) in which the output state is maintained for a long time (FIG. 392), the first permissible sound is obtained. If the production is accepted during the period when the sound is being output, it is set to a non-output (non-audible) state even in the middle of the output (see FIG. 392 (c)). .. On the other hand, when the first permissible sound is output as the effect sound (first aspect) in which the output state is maintained for a short time (FIGS. 390 and 391), the first permissible sound is the "suppression operation reception effect". Only when it is output in "Operation reception effect executed in the automatic reception mode" (Fig. 391), if the production reception is done in the middle of the output, it is in a non-output (non-audible) state at that point. (See FIG. 390 (c) and FIG. 391 (c)). That is, in this case, in the operation reception effect shown in FIG. 390, even if the effect reception is performed when the first allowable sound is in the output state, the output state is maintained until the end of the reproduced data as the first allowable sound. The Rukoto. Although the first permissible sound is in the output state during the period of timing tr41 to tr42, the production reception is not performed even if the operation is detected within the period, so that the first permissible sound is of the first permissible sound. It goes without saying that the output state is not interrupted.

That is, as described above, in the non-suppressed operation reception effect, unlike the suppressed operation reception effect, the operation reception effect is generated without suppressing the "BGM reproduction (specific type of effect sound)", so that the post-operation effect is overlooked. The possibility is relatively high, and when the operation reception mode is executed in the non-automatic reception mode, there is a possibility that the post-operation effect cannot be generated unlike the case where the operation reception mode is executed in the automatic reception mode. Therefore, when these operation reception effects occur, it is assumed that some players repeatedly hit the sounds before the set time occurs. However, in this case, if the operation is detected by repeated hits, it may be difficult to understand whether the effect is a post-operation effect or a notice effect that has nothing to do with the operation. It is desirable to eliminate such concerns by maintaining the output state until the end of the reproduced data of (Fig. 390). On the other hand, in the suppression operation reception effect and the non-automatic reception effect, it is not necessary to repeatedly hit the sound. Therefore, in order to suppress the game due to the continuous hit, the first allowable sound is the first mode and the second mode. It is desirable to make it difficult to recognize which of the above is output (output is stopped in the middle).

Even if the production is accepted by the player's operation within the set time, the message display is within the set time only when the operation detection is slow, such as immediately before the automatic button function is activated. It may be displayed continuously until the end timing of, or the remaining time display (gauge display) may be continuously displayed until the end timing within the set time (described above). Commonization of programs, etc.).

Further, as described above, since there is usually a risk of the post-operation effect being executed in a mode with a low degree of expectation, it is necessary to operate the post-operation effect so as to improve the game entertainment. Not always good. In this regard, in the production example (non-automatic reception production) shown in FIG. 390, it is relatively early if the reception allowable sound (first allowable sound) is output for a sufficient time to indicate that the production reception is permitted. By using the mode (first mode) that ends in, "time for determining whether or not to generate the production reception" is created while the reception permissible sound is not output. On the other hand, in the automatic reception effect (FIGS. 391 and 392), since it is not necessary to create such a time, the reception allowable sound (first allowable sound) is output in the same mode (first mode). In addition to the case, the reception allowable sound (first allowable sound) may be output in a longer mode (second mode), suggesting that the degree of expectation differs depending on the mode. .. In addition, by maintaining the output state of the reception allowable sound for a relatively long period of time, it becomes possible to suggest that the automatic button function is not yet enabled, which in turn gives a sense of security. Among them, it becomes possible to encourage the operation by the player.

Further, in the automatic reception effect (FIGS. 391 and 392), the automatic button function is enabled even when the reception allowable sound (first allowable sound) is output in a long mode (second mode) (FIG. 392). Timing to be performed Before the arrival of tr42A, the reception permissible sound (first permissible sound) is made inaudible, and the two reception permissible sounds (first permissible sound and second permissible sound) are set at different timings. I'm trying to finish it.

As a result, it becomes possible to recognize that the timing tr42 at which the automatic button function is enabled does not arrive until the reception allowable sound (first allowable sound, second allowable sound) becomes inaudible. When it becomes inaudible, it can be suggested that the automatic button function can be activated soon if it is not operated quickly. At this time, in at least the longer side mode (second mode) and the second permissible sound in which the output state is maintained longer than the first permissible sound of the first mode, the loudness and pitch of the sound correspond to the passage of time. It is desirable to change at least one of them in order to make it easier to recognize how much time has passed.

Further, in the operation reception effect shown in FIGS. 391 and 392, when an operation opportunity is given, "BGM reproduction (specific type effect sound)" is output in a suppressed mode or silent, thereby generating a post-operation effect. When this happens, we will devise a production method so that the production sound corresponding to this can be heard conspicuously. In this regard, the reception allowable sound output when such a suppression operation reception effect is generated is based on the fact that the effect reception is performed when the effect reception is performed while the reception allowable sound is in the output state. Since the output state is terminated, it is possible to make the effect sound according to the effect after the operation stand out without being disturbed by the reception allowable sound.

In the above production example, when "non-suppressed / non-automatic reception production" occurs, even if the production reception is performed while the reception allowable sound is in the output state, this is not interrupted and the output state is maintained. And said. However, instead of this, the degree of expectation is relatively high, for example, when the "non-suppressed / non-automatic reception effect" occurs in the SP reach state within the high expected fluctuation pattern (the effect pattern corresponding to). Only when there is a situation, in order to encourage concentration on the production, the reception allowable sound (even if the same production sound (first mode) is output as the first allowable sound) is produced when it is in the output state. This may be interrupted when the reception is made.

In the production examples shown in FIGS. 391 and 392, the case where "suppression / automatic reception effect" occurs has been described, but "non-suppression / automatic reception effect" and "suppression / non-automatic reception effect" also occur. It may be possible to make the production progress in the same manner when the "non-suppressed / automatic reception effect" or the "suppressed / non-automatic reception effect" occurs.

Further, when the high expectation suppression reception effect is generated, it is possible to output the third mode in which the output time is maintained for a longer time than the first mode (FIG. 391) and the second mode (FIG. 392) as the first allowable sound. When the third aspect is output, it is desirable that the rate at which the jackpot symbol appears when the symbol variation is stopped is higher than when the first and second aspects are output. According to such a configuration, it becomes possible to recognize the degree of expectation by paying attention to how long the output time of the first permissible sound continues, and the set time (effective) in which the production reception is allowed. It will be possible to more favorably maintain the game entertainment within the period).

At this time, with respect to the third aspect, it is desirable to maintain the output state until the timing tr42A at which the automatic button function is activated arrives. That is, in this case, in paying attention to how long the output time of the first allowable sound continues, it is necessary to confirm that the output time is not the first mode or the second mode but the third mode. The longer the time required, the higher the risk that the automatic button function will be activated. Therefore, it is possible to preferably maintain a sense of tension within the set time (valid period) for which the production reception is allowed. Will be. Other matters when the third aspect is output, such as the point that the production reception is interrupted when the third aspect is in the output state, are the same as those described in FIGS. 391 and 392. be.

The automatic button function may be enabled whenever the timing tr42A in the specific fluctuation pattern (corresponding to the effect pattern) arrives, or the specific fluctuation may be obtained when a big hit is obtained. It is activated when the timing tr42A in the pattern (corresponding effect pattern) arrives, but when the timing tr42A in the specific fluctuation pattern (corresponding effect pattern) arrives when the big hit is not obtained. It may not be activated.

Multiple types of effects are prepared as non-automatic reception effects in which the automatic button is not activated within the set time (valid period), and some of these effects allow reception sound (first) when the set time (valid period) occurs. The permissible sound, the second permissible sound) may not be output. That is, in this case, when the set time (valid period) in which the production reception is permitted occurs, the number of allowable reception sounds is "0" and the number of allowable reception sounds is "1" (first allowable sound). ) And the case where the number of acceptable reception sounds is "2" (first allowable sound, second allowable sound), suggesting to what extent the pachinko machine 1 is "promoting operation". You will be able to.

As a method of hiding the message display and the remaining time display (gauge display), a method of starting the fade-out when the timing of hiding may come may be adopted.

In the production example shown in FIGS. 391 and 392, "BGM reproduction (specific type of production sound)" is output in a suppressed mode or silently during the period from timing tr40 to tr44. It may be set to the output state (the playback period in which the audible sound is recorded in the sound data has ended, the channel allocation has ended, etc.). That is, in this case, "BGM reproduction (specific type of effect sound)" as new data is assigned to the channel at the timing tr44 and is put into the output state.

By the way, in the pachinko machine 1 according to the above-mentioned production example, as described above, as described above, a highly expected fluctuation pattern (SP reach fluctuation pattern) that develops into SP reach (reach production accompanied by a background change) as a result of the fluctuation pattern determination is performed. When a specific fluctuation pattern is selected, regardless of the result of the production judgment (notice judgment, etc.), when the production of the specific fluctuation pattern progresses to a specific timing during SP reach, the production is accepted. The operation reception effect (valid period) that is allowed
-The "suppression reception effect" (FIGS. 391 (a) and 391 (b)) for setting the set time at which the effect reception is allowed while the "BGM reproduction sound" corresponding to the fluctuation pattern is output in the suppression mode or silently. (See FIGS. 392 (a) and 392 (b)) ”, and ・ The operation for the operation means targeted for operation is not detected within the set time (timing tr42 to tr43) where the effect reception is allowed. Even in such a case, when the timing tr42A within the set time arrives, the effect reception is automatically generated internally (the automatic button function is enabled), and the post-operation effect is produced based on the effect reception. "Automatic reception mode (see FIG. 391 (j) and FIG. 392 (j))"
It is designed to be generated as a "suppression / automatic reception effect" executed by.

At this time, based on the result of the effect determination (notice effect determination), which of the plurality of modes including the first mode and the second mode is to output the sound effect (first permissible sound) among the reception allowable sounds. , It is determined whether the message sound (second permissible sound) is output as "press!" Or "deliver the sword!" As described above, the permissible sound and the second permissible sound are output, respectively (FIGS. 391 and 392). And, as described above, when the second mode is output as the first permissible sound, the degree of expectation is higher than when the first mode is output, and as the second permissible sound, "Deliver the sword!" Is output, the expectation is higher than when "Press!" Is output. At this time, the order of high expectations is "2nd mode & sword delivery!", "2nd mode & push!", "1st mode & sword delivery!", "1st mode & push!". Is desirable in order to maintain the game entertainment when the operation button 410 is selected as the operation means.

And, as described above, in the "suppression / automatic reception effect" according to the above-mentioned production example, the first permissible sound is in the output state regardless of which of the plurality of modes is output as the first permissible sound. Occasionally, when a production reception is made, this is interrupted (see FIGS. 391 and 392). Also, regarding the second permissible sound, regardless of whether it is output by "press!" Or "deliver the sword!", When the second permissible sound is in the output state, the production is accepted. Was decided to be interrupted.

However, instead of this, if the production reception is performed when the first allowable sound is in the output state in a mode different from the first mode among the plurality of modes, the output state is changed based on the fact that the production reception is performed. Although it is terminated, when the effect reception is performed while the first allowable sound is in the output state in the first aspect, the output state may be maintained without being terminated. That is, in this case, in the "suppression / automatic reception effect", the output state of the first allowable sound is interrupted in the middle, and even if the expected degree cannot be recognized, the first aspect having the lowest expected degree among the plurality of aspects. Since it is possible to recognize that this is not the case, it is expected that the decline in the interest in games will be suppressed. In addition, even if a mode with a low expectation appears in the post-operation effect, if the output state of the first permissible sound having the lowest expectation among the plurality of modes is maintained, the post-operation effect can be used. By re-recognizing that the production state was difficult to expect in the first place, it becomes easier to accept the result that appears as the production after the operation, and it is expected that the game entertainment will not be significantly reduced.

Even in the case of adopting such a modified example, if the above-mentioned "non-suppressing / non-automatic reception effect" occurs within the above-mentioned predetermined fluctuation pattern, it is as described with reference to FIG. 390. When the first permissible sound of the "suppression / automatic reception effect" is output in the second mode within a specific fluctuation pattern, it is as described with reference to FIG. 392. That is, among the above-mentioned production examples, the “effect mode shown in FIG. 391” when the first allowable sound is output in the first mode in the “suppression / automatic reception effect” that appears within a specific fluctuation pattern is shown in FIG. It will be executed instead of the "effect mode shown in 393".

As shown in FIG. 393, the "effect mode shown in FIG. 393" is basically the same as the content described in the "effect mode shown in FIG. 391" and the content described in another example thereof. be. However, in the "effect mode shown in FIG. 393", even if the production reception is performed at the timing tr42a in which the first allowable sound is in the output state in the first mode, the output state is interrupted with the production reception as a trigger. The output state is maintained until the end of the reproduced data as the first allowable sound. On the other hand, even when the "suppression / automatic reception effect" occurs within a specific fluctuation pattern, the first allowable sound is different from the first mode, which has the lowest expectation among the plurality of modes (for example,). (For example, FIG. 392 (c)), when the effect reception is performed at the timing tr42a, the output state is interrupted based on the effect reception.

According to such a configuration, when "suppression / automatic reception effect" occurs within a specific fluctuation pattern, the effect reception is performed at an early timing so that it is difficult to confirm which mode is the first allowable sound. Even if it is done, the degree of expectation can be recognized by confirming whether or not the output state of the first permissible sound is terminated with this as an opportunity. In particular, in this production example (FIG. 391, FIG. 393, etc.), the first allowable sound is output from the timing tr41 before the occurrence of the set time (valid period) to the timing tr42 in which the set time is set. Since the first permissible sound is not interrupted regardless of the mode from the output state at the timing tr41 to the arrival of the timing tr42, the first permissible sound is set as the first permissible sound. It becomes possible to function as a time for "distinguishing" which mode is.

In this regard, in the modification shown in FIG. 393, the first mode in which the output state is not interrupted is prepared so that the output state is maintained for a shorter period of time than any other mode in which the output state is interrupted. It is said. As a result, even if the post-operation effect is started when the first permissible sound is being output in the first aspect, the effect sound as the post-operation effect and the first permissible sound are combined. It becomes possible to shorten the time when each output state overlaps, and it becomes possible to suppress the deterioration of the game interest.

Further, in the modified example shown in FIG. 393, the first allowable sound output in the first aspect can also be output in the production example shown in FIG. 390 (see FIG. 390 (c)). Even in the production example, the production reception is not interrupted, and the output state is maintained until the end of the reproduced data as the first allowable sound. Therefore, the first allowable sound is produced. Even if a situation that is not interrupted by the production reception appears, it will be possible to provide it as a production that does not feel strange.

However, regarding the second permissible sound, if the production reception is performed while the output state is in the output state, the production reception is based on the fact that the production reception is performed regardless of which mode is output as the first permissible sound. The output state is interrupted (see FIGS. 392 (d) and 393 (d)). That is, in this case, the first permissible sound has a function of suggesting the degree of expectation when the production reception is performed early, while the second permissible sound is in a situation where the production reception is performed by operation detection ( It will play a function that suggests whether or not it is in a situation where the operation opportunity can be lost due to the automatic button function), and by giving these different functions to the reception allowable sound, when the operation reception effect occurs It will be possible to maintain the game entertainment of.

On the other hand, the reception allowable sound that is output when the operation reception effect shown in FIG. 390 is generated may be always output in the first mode, or may be output in a special mode. However, it is desirable to maintain the output state without ending it even if the effect reception is performed when the output is performed in a special mode. When the output is performed in the special mode, it is desirable that the ratio of the big hit symbol appearing when the symbol is stopped is higher than that in the case of the output in the first mode. This ratio may be 100%. It may be output in a mode different from the first mode and the special mode.

That is, in the operation reception effect shown in FIG. 390, the "BGM reproduction (specific type of effect sound)" maintains the output state in an unsuppressed mode, and there is a problem that the effect is poor. Therefore, it is more desirable to be able to confirm the mode as the first permissible sound and to recognize the degree of expectation even in the situation where the post-operation effect is started.

In addition, in the "suppression operation reception effect that gives an operation opportunity while the specific type of production sound is output in the suppression mode or silently, or is in the non-output state", the specific type of production sound is suppressed or It goes without saying that other sounds can be output in an unsuppressed manner even in a non-audible state.

Further, as described above, in the pachinko machine 1 according to the above-mentioned production example, "suppression that gives an operation opportunity while the production sound of a specific type is output in a suppression mode or silently, or is in a non-output state. In the operation reception effect (FIGS. 391 to 393), the reception allowable sound output when the set time (valid period) occurs is one of "a plurality of modes in which the length of time maintained as the output state is different". It is possible to output according to the non-suppressed mode, and the degree of expectation (the rate at which the jackpot symbol appears) differs depending on the output mode. In this regard, the reception permissible sound (first permissible sound) is also used in the "non-suppressive operation reception effect that gives an operation opportunity while a specific type of effect sound (for example, BGM reproduction) is output in a non-suppressed mode". In addition to the case where the output is performed in the non-suppressed mode in the first mode (FIG. 390), the reception permissible sound (first permissible sound) is different from the first mode (the length is different, the effect sound itself is different, etc.). ) May be output depending on the non-suppressed mode, and the degree of expectation (the rate at which the jackpot symbol appears) may differ depending on the output mode. According to such a configuration, both the reception allowable sound output when the "unsuppressed operation reception effect" is generated and the reception allowable sound output when the "suppress operation reception effect" is generated are "output states". Since it is possible to output in any of "plurality modes in which the length of time to be maintained is different", and further, the degree of expectation differs depending on the output mode, "non-suppressive operation reception effect". In any of the above and the "suppression operation reception production", it becomes possible to suitably maintain the game entertainment until the production reception is performed.

FIG. 394 is a time chart showing an example of an effect in which the first permissible sound is output in a specific mode when the “non-suppressed operation reception effect (here, the non-suppressed / non-automatic reception effect)” is generated.

As shown in FIG. 394, in this production example as well, the parts not otherwise noted are basically the same as in the production example shown in FIG. 390. However, in the non-suppressed / non-automatic reception effect (timing tr31 to tr33) according to this effect example, when the effect is generated, the effect determination as to which of the plurality of modes the first allowable sound is to be output (for example, at the start of the symbol variation) (Preliminary effect determination) is performed, and as a result of the effect determination, as shown in FIGS. 394 (c) and 394 (g), a "specific aspect" is performed instead of the "first aspect". It is assumed that the jackpot symbol appears when the symbol variation is stopped, as compared with the case where the output is performed in the "first mode". The specific aspect is output for a longer time than the first aspect.

Here, in both the "non-suppressed / non-automatic reception effect" and the "suppressed / automatic reception effect", the first allowable sound can be output according to the first aspect when the operation reception effect is generated. That is mentioned above (see FIG. 390 and FIG. 391 (or FIG. 393)). That is, in this case, in both the "non-suppressed / non-automatic reception effect" and the "suppressed / automatic reception effect", the same effect sound is output as the first allowable sound for the same time when the operation reception effect is generated. The Rukoto.

On the other hand, when the first allowable sound is output in a specific mode when the "non-suppressed / non-automatic reception effect" is generated (FIG. 394), the first allowable sound is the first when the "suppressed / automatic reception effect" is generated. In the case where the two modes are output (FIG. 392), different production sounds are output as the first allowable sound over different times. In this production example, when the first permissible sound is output by the second aspect, it is output for a longer time than when the first permissible sound is output by the specific aspect.

However, on the other hand, the degree of expectation (ratio at which the jackpot symbol appears) in the case where the same effect sound is output as the first allowable sound for the same time (see the first aspect (see FIG. 390 and FIG. 391 (or FIG. 393))). Is the "first aspect" output when the "non-suppressed / non-automatic reception effect (FIG. 390)" occurs, or the "suppression / automatic reception effect (FIG. 391 (or FIG. 393)"". It depends on whether it was output when As for the degree of expectation (ratio) suggesting that the jackpot symbol appears in the post-operation effect according to the above, the "first mode" appeared when the "suppression / automatic reception effect (Fig. 391 (or Fig. 393))" occurred. In some cases, it is lower than the expectation (ratio) that the jackpot symbol appears in the post-operation effect according to the effect reception. The expectation (ratio) may be 0% or 100%. ..

On the other hand, the degree of expectation in the case where different production sounds are output as the first allowable sound for different times (when the "second mode (FIG. 392)" or the "specific mode (FIG. 394)" appears) ( The rate at which the jackpot symbol appears) is set to be the same as the predetermined value regardless of whether the output occurs when the “non-suppressed / non-automatic reception effect” or the “suppressed / automatic reception effect” occurs. The degree of expectation (ratio) may also be 0% or 100%.

According to such a configuration, even if the same effect sound is output as the first allowable sound for the same time, either "non-suppressed / non-automatic reception effect" or "suppression / automatic reception effect" occurs. Expectations will not always be the same depending on whether or not they are. Further, even when the "non-suppressed / non-automatic reception effect" occurs, when the specific mode is output as the first permissible sound, the "suppressed / non-automatic reception effect" is output when the second mode is output as the first permissible sound. The same degree of expectation as "automatic reception production" will be suggested.

That is, in this case, with respect to the "non-suppressed / non-automatic reception effect" and the "suppressed / automatic reception effect", even if the first allowable sound is output in the same mode (first mode), the expectations are different from each other. In addition, since the first allowable sound may be output in different modes (second mode, specific mode), it is possible to make it appear that there is no directing relationship with each other. .. However, in reality, when the first permissible sound is output in the second mode or the specific mode, the expected degree is the same even though the production sounds are different from each other and the output times are different. You will be able to have a secret relationship. For example, when the set time (valid period) in which the production reception is allowed occurs, the case where the "BGM reproduction" is suppressed and the case where the "BGM reproduction" is not suppressed are usually (the reception allowable sound is the first aspect). (When output as), by starting different post-operation effects (different expectations) when the effect is received, it appears that the effects are not related to each other. However, when the reception allowable sound is output as the second mode or the specific mode, the operation when the production reception is performed while making it appear as if a different production is performed depending on whether or not "BGM reproduction" is suppressed. As a post-production, it is expected that the same content (same degree of expectation) can be made to appear, and that a surprise-like production can be provided by secretly having a production relationship.

In this case, in both the "non-suppressed / non-automatic reception effect" and the "suppressed / automatic reception effect", a plurality of modes are prepared as the first allowable sound, but the commonly used "first mode" is used. It is desirable that the output time is set as the shortest mode among the plurality of modes in any of the operation reception effects. Further, the "second mode" as the first allowable sound is set as the mode having the longest output time among the plurality of modes that can be output when the "suppression / automatic reception effect" is generated. The "specific mode" as the first permissible sound is set as the mode having the longest output time among the plurality of modes that can be output when the "non-suppressed / non-automatic reception effect" occurs, but each other. It is desirable that the output times of the above are different (for example, "output time of a specific mode" <"output time of the second mode") in order to make it appear that there is no directing relationship with each other.

Further, in the "non-suppressed / non-automatic reception effect", even if the first allowable sound is output in either the first mode or the specific mode, the output is not terminated in the middle stage regardless of whether or not the effect reception is performed. It is desirable to be able to maintain the output state. That is, in this case, since the output of the first allowable sound can be left even after the post-operation effect is started, the "non-suppressed / non-automatic reception effect" with a relatively low expectation is executed. Even though the first permissible sound is output in the "specific mode" that pushes up to the same expected level as the "suppression / automatic reception production", which has a relatively high expectation, I miss this. It will be possible to eliminate the possibility of losing. On the other hand, whether or not the output state of the first permissible sound is interrupted when the effect reception is performed by the "suppression / automatic reception effect" is as described with reference to FIGS. 391 to 393.

In the above-mentioned production example, when the second mode is output as the first allowable sound in the "suppression / automatic reception effect" (FIG. 392), it is used as the first allowable sound in the "non-suppression / non-automatic reception effect". The degree of expectation is the same as when a specific mode is output (Fig. 394). However, in the "suppression / automatic reception effect", as the first allowable sound, the output time is maintained for a longer time than in the "first aspect (FIG. 391)" and "second aspect (FIG. 392)". When the "third aspect" of the above is to be output, the "third aspect" is output as the first allowable sound in the "suppression / automatic reception effect", and the "third aspect" is output instead of the above "second aspect". It is set so that the degree of expectation is the same as when the "specific mode" is output as the first allowable sound in the "non-suppressed / non-automatic reception effect". The "third aspect" is as described above.

Further, in the effect example shown in FIG. 394, when the effect is received within the set time (valid period) (timing tr32a in the figure), the effect display device 1600 (No. 1) is used as a post-operation effect according to the effect reception. At least the post-operation display effect (liquid crystal display) in the 1 effect member) and the post-operation effect sound output (effect sound) by the speaker (second effect member) are generated. In the figure, the post-operation display effect (liquid crystal display) and the post-operation effect sound output (effect sound) by the speaker are maintained in the execution state for the same period of time, but the present invention is not necessarily limited to this. For example, the post-operation display effect (liquid crystal display) is hidden at a predetermined timing that arrives after the timing tr33, regardless of the timing of the effect reception within the set time (valid period). On the other hand, the output of the effect sound (effect sound) after the operation may be maintained in the output state for a predetermined time from the timing when the effect reception is performed. However, regardless of the timing at which the effect is received, both the post-operation display effect (liquid crystal display) and the post-operation effect sound output (effect sound) are in a state where the timing tr33 has not been completed. It is required to maintain the output state.

Further, in the above-mentioned production example, the length of time required for "time for which the acceptable sound for acceptance is output" is not the length of time required for "time for the sound data of the allowable sound for reception to be assigned to the channel", but ". It means the length of time it takes to output as audible sound.

Further, in the above-mentioned production example, in order to make it appear that the "non-suppressing / non-automatic reception production" and the "suppressed / automatic reception production" do not have a directing relationship with each other, the "second mode" and the "third mode" Regarding "aspect", it is assumed that output is possible only with "suppression / automatic reception effect" out of "suppression / automatic reception effect" and "non-suppression / non-automatic reception effect", and for "specific aspect", "suppression". -It is desirable that output is possible only with "non-suppressed / non-automatic reception effect" out of "automatic reception effect" and "non-suppressed / non-automatic reception effect". If the "second mode" and the "third mode" are prepared as output candidates in the "suppression / automatic reception effect", the "suppression / automatic reception effect" has its own unique reception allowable sound (second mode). Even if the mode (third mode) is output, the expected degree is not necessarily the same as when the "non-suppressed / non-automatic reception effect" unique reception permissible sound (specific mode) is output. It becomes possible to more preferably improve the effectability as a reception allowable sound output when the "suppression / automatic reception effect" occurs.

Further, the non-suppressed / non-automatic reception effect (timing tr31 to tr33) does not have to occur as an effect related to the low expected fluctuation pattern (non-reach fluctuation pattern). As described above, among the effects related to the expected fluctuation pattern (for example, a specific fluctuation pattern), the effects may occur within the effect period before the SP reach state is developed.

By the way, in the above-mentioned production example, regarding the "suppression operation reception production" in which a specific type of production sound (for example, the production sound of BGM reproduction) can be suppressed, the "weak suppression mode (first)" in which the degree of suppression is relatively low. A plurality of modes including at least a "suppression operation reception effect)" and a "strong suppression mode (second suppression operation reception effect)" in which the degree of suppression is relatively high or are in a non-output state are prepared. May be good. When a specific type of effect sound is output with a relatively high degree of suppression, the volume may be set to "0".

According to such a configuration, it is possible to have a color rendering property as to how much the production sound of the specific type is suppressed when the set time (valid period) in which the production reception is allowed occurs. Become.

Here, in order to preferably obtain the above-mentioned action and effect, the degree of expectation depends on which of the "weak suppression mode (first suppression operation reception effect)" and the "strong suppression mode (second suppression operation reception effect)" occurs. It is desirable that the (ratio of jackpot symbols appearing) be different. Here, the degree of expectation (ratio) that suggests that a jackpot symbol will appear in the "post-operation effect according to the effect reception" when the "weak suppression mode (first suppression operation reception effect)" occurs is ". It is lower than the expectation (ratio) that it is suggested that the jackpot symbol appears in the "post-operation effect according to the effect reception" when the "strong suppression mode (second suppression operation reception effect)" occurs. The degree of expectation (ratio) may be 0% or 100%.

In addition, regarding the "weak suppression mode (first suppression operation reception effect)", an effect corresponding to a high expected fluctuation pattern that develops into SP reach (reach effect accompanied by a background change, etc.) and a reach state are not formed (or even a reach state is not formed). A reach state can be formed, but it does not develop into SP reach.) While it is possible to appear in any of the effects according to the low expected fluctuation pattern, the "strong suppression mode (second suppression operation reception effect)" ) ”Does not occur in the low-expected effect pattern, but may occur as an effect according to the high-expected fluctuation pattern. Even with such a configuration, the degree of expectation when the "weak suppression mode (first suppression operation reception effect)" occurs is the expectation when the "strong suppression mode (second suppression operation reception effect)" occurs. It can be said that it is lower than the degree.

Further, in order to obtain the above-mentioned effects more preferably, it is possible to generate a "special effect state" that can be transferred based on the satisfaction of the special effect conditions, and in the "special effect state", the player Each time a production reception is made during the set time (valid period) when an operation promotion image (such as a copy image or gauge display) is displayed, a specific type of production sound (for example, a production sound for BGM playback) is displayed. ) Is suppressed, it is desirable that the post-operation effect corresponding to the effect reception is executed (started). According to such a "special effect state", how much a specific type of effect sound (for example, a BGM reproduction effect sound) is suppressed each time a set time (valid period) for which the effect reception is allowed occurs. It has become possible to provide a directing effect on the sound, and apart from the expected degree suggested by the post-operation effect, the expected degree is also suggested by such a directing property (how much it is suppressed). As a result, it is expected that the game entertainment will be further improved when the reception of production is permitted.

In addition, an effect pattern (for example, high expected variation) in which the "weak suppression mode (first suppression operation reception effect)" and the "strong suppression mode (second suppression operation reception effect)" can be sequentially executed within the symbol variation. An effect corresponding to a specific fluctuation pattern among the patterns) may be prepared. That is, in this case, even if the "weak suppression mode (first suppression operation reception effect)" on the side with a relatively low expectation occurs, the "strong suppression mode (second suppression operation)" on the side with a relatively high expectation occurs. Since there is a possibility that "reception effect)" will occur, it is necessary to suppress the deterioration of the game interest when the player recognizes that the degree of suppression for the specific type of effect sound is small (weak suppression mode). Will be able to.

In addition, in order to more preferably suppress the deterioration of the game interest when the "weak suppression mode (first suppression operation reception effect)" occurs, the "strong suppression mode (second suppression operation reception effect)" is described.
-If a specific variation pattern is selected from the highly expected variation patterns (SP reach variation patterns) that develop into SP reach (reach effect with background change, etc.) as a result of the above variation pattern determination, the effect determination is made. Regardless of which result is obtained as (notice judgment, etc.), it is assumed that the effect of the specific fluctuation pattern progresses to a specific timing during SP reach, whereas "weak suppression mode (first suppression)" Operation reception production) ”
-Even if the above specific fluctuation pattern is selected, if a special result is not obtained in the production judgment (notice judgment, etc.), the production of the specific fluctuation pattern does not occur even if it progresses to a predetermined timing. , When a special result is obtained in the effect determination (notice determination, etc.), it shall occur when the effect of the specific fluctuation pattern progresses to a predetermined timing. Then, when the "weak suppression mode (first suppression operation reception effect)" occurs in the effect according to the specific fluctuation pattern, the "weak suppression mode (first suppression operation reception effect)" is produced according to the specific variation pattern. When the production is accepted in the "strong suppression mode (second suppression operation reception production)", the ratio of the post-operation effect being executed in the highly expected mode is higher than when "" does not occur. It is desirable to.

In such a configuration, the "strong suppression mode (second suppression operation reception effect)" always occurs in the effect according to a specific fluctuation pattern, whereas the "weak suppression mode (first suppression operation reception effect)" is generated. "Is not always generated, and when the" weak suppression mode (first suppression operation reception effect) "occurs, the" strong suppression mode (second suppression operation reception effect) "is a highly expected post-operation effect. As the ratio of execution of It becomes possible to improve the game entertainment when the "first suppression operation reception production)" occurs.

FIGS. 395 to 397 show the “weak suppression mode (first suppression operation reception effect)” and the “strong suppression mode (second suppression operation reception effect)” in the production according to the high expected fluctuation pattern (for example, a specific fluctuation pattern). ) ”Is shown in a time chart showing an example of the effect when the occurrences occur in sequence. FIG. 395 shows an example of the effect when the operation is detected at a relatively early stage after the set time (valid period) occurs, and FIG. 396 shows the comparison after the set time (valid period) occurs. An example of the effect when the operation is detected at a later stage is shown, and FIG. 397 shows an example of the effect when the operation is not detected within the set time (valid period).

Now, among the "highly expected fluctuation patterns that develop into SP reach (reach production with background change, etc.)" as a result of the start condition being established (pending digestion) and the fluctuation pattern determination being performed, the "specific fluctuation pattern" If is selected, the peripheral control MPU1511a first performs an effect determination (preliminary determination or the like) corresponding to the specific fluctuation pattern. After that, the variation effect of the decorative pattern (the effect description according to the specific variation pattern, the sound output of the BGM reproduction according to the specific variation pattern, etc.) is started, and the effect determination is made within the execution period of the variation effect. An effect (notice effect, etc.) according to the result of (notice determination, etc.) is additionally executed for the effect (effect pattern) of the selected "specific fluctuation pattern" itself.

However, regarding the content of the effect that appears after the arrival of the timing tr40 (timing within the SP reach state) in which a predetermined time has elapsed since the start of the variation effect of the decorative symbol in the "specific variation pattern". Is the same as in the case of the effect example described with reference to FIGS. 391 and 392. That is, first, when the timing tr40 arrives, regardless of which result is obtained as the advance notice effect determination, "a state in which a specific type of effect sound (BGM reproduction sound) is output in a suppressed mode or silence". (Or, it is set to a non-output state). Here, the state related to the suppression is referred to as a "strong suppression mode", and while the "strong suppression mode" appears in this way, the timing tr42 (decorative symbol) When a specific time has passed since the start of the variable effect, the timing within the SP reach state) arrives, the operation reception is permitted regardless of which result is obtained as the advance notice effect judgment. A production (valid period) is generated. Here, the operation reception effect generated while the "strong suppression mode" appears is referred to as a "second suppression operation reception effect".

On the other hand, in the "specific variation pattern", when the timing tr51 (timing before the development of the SP reach state) arrives when a predetermined time has passed since the variation effect of the decorative symbol was started, the advance notice effect determination is performed. On condition that a special result is obtained, an operation reception effect (valid period) in which the effect reception is permitted is additionally generated for the design effect (effect pattern) based on the variation pattern. However, as will be described later, the operation reception effect (valid period) generated at the timing tr51 is different from the case of the operation reception effect (non-suppression / non-automatic reception effect) shown in FIG. Although the degree of suppression is lower than that of the "effect (strong suppression mode)", a process of suppressing the volume of the "specific type of production sound (BGM reproduction sound)" can be performed under predetermined conditions.

According to such a configuration, even if the effect corresponding to the "specific fluctuation pattern" is executed, when a special result is not obtained as the effect determination (notice determination, etc.), FIG. The effect example shown in FIG. 392 appears, that is, the "weak suppression mode (first suppression operation reception effect)" does not occur in the effect according to the fluctuation pattern, and the "strong suppression mode (second suppression)" does not occur. Operation reception production) ”will only occur. On the other hand, when a special result is obtained as an effect determination (notice determination, etc.), as shown in FIGS. "Reception effect)" first occurs, and then the second suppression operation reception effect (strong suppression mode) shown in FIGS. 391 and 392 is further generated.

In the production example shown in FIGS. 395 to 397, the production content after the arrival of the timing tr40 is as described with reference to FIG. 391, and thus the description is omitted here. In this case, regarding the second suppression operation reception effect (strong suppression mode), the first permissible sound is not the first mode shown in FIGS. 391 and 395 to 397 depending on the result of the effect determination (notice determination, etc.). , The related effects of the effect contents shown in FIG. 391, such as the case where the output is performed in the second aspect shown in FIG. Needless to say, it is appropriately applied to the production content (strong suppression mode (second suppression operation reception production)) after the timing tr40 among the production examples.

Then, as described above, in the effect example shown in FIGS. 395 to 397, the timing tr51 (developed into the SP reach state) in which a predetermined time has elapsed since the variation effect of the decorative symbol (the effect according to a specific variation pattern) was started. When the timing (timing before) arrives, the operation reception effect (valid period) in which the effect reception is permitted is generated as the "weak suppression mode (first suppression operation reception effect)".

In this regard, in the pachinko machine 1 according to this embodiment, the "weak suppression mode (first suppression operation reception effect)" generated at the timing tr51 in the variation effect according to the specific variation pattern is described.
-While the "BGM playback sound" corresponding to the fluctuation pattern is output in a non-suppressed manner, the set time (valid period) at which the production reception is allowed is set, but within the set time (valid period). When the production reception is performed, the “conditional suppression reception production” (FIG. 395) that changes the “BGM reproduction sound” from the non-suppression mode to the weak suppression mode (mode in which the degree of suppression is relatively low) triggered by the production reception. (A), (b)) ”, and ・ If the operation for the operation means targeted for operation is not detected within the set time (timing tr51 to tr52) at which the production reception is allowed, The production reception is not performed, and as a result, each process triggered by the production reception (process of changing the "BGM reproduction sound" from the non-suppressed mode to the weakly suppressed mode, and the post-operation effect (liquid crystal display, effect). "Non-automatic reception mode (see FIGS. 397 (a), (b), (f))" in which the set time (valid period) ends without the sound being executed.
It is designed to be generated as "conditional suppression (weak suppression mode) / non-automatic reception effect" executed by. As a method of outputting the "BGM reproduction sound" in the weak suppression mode, the volume value for the channel to which the "BGM reproduction sound" is assigned is set in the strong suppression mode (for example, the volume value (audible volume)). ) Is set to a weak suppression value (for example, the volume value (audible volume) is “10”), which is lower than “0”).

According to such "conditional suppression (weak suppression mode) / non-automatic reception production (first suppression operation reception production)", unless the production reception is performed by the operation by the player, the "specific type of production sound (1st suppression operation reception production)" Since the "sound of BGM reproduction) is not shifted to the" state of being output in the suppressed mode ", it can be seen that the" unsuppressed reception effect "shown in FIGS. 390 and 394 is occurring. Will be. That is, in this case, it is recognized for the first time that it is not a "suppression reception effect" by changing to a "state in which a specific type of effect sound (BGM reproduction sound) is output in a suppression mode" when the player operates it. Since it will be possible to get rid of it, it will be possible to improve the taste of the game by creating a surprise effect.

In order to obtain such an action effect, "conditional suppression (weak suppression mode) / non-automatic reception effect (FIGS. 395 to 397)" can be generated depending on the result of the effect determination (notice determination, etc.). The fluctuation pattern should be selectable only when it is in a special effect state (for example, a look-ahead effect zone), and when it is in the special effect state, it is "non-suppressed / non-automatic reception effect (for example, non-automatic reception effect). A variation pattern that can be generated depending on the result of the effect determination (notice determination, etc.) of "FIG. 390, FIG. 394)" can be selected. It is desirable to increase the ratio (expectation). According to such a configuration, when "conditional suppression / non-automatic reception effect" appears, the degree of expectation is higher than when "non-suppression / non-automatic reception effect (Fig. 390, Fig. 394)" appears. In combination with the above-mentioned surprise-like production elements, it becomes possible to improve the game entertainment.

Furthermore, in order to obtain the above-mentioned effects more preferably, the "strong suppression mode (second suppression operation reception effect)" can occur in both the "normal effect state" and the "special effect state". In the "normal production state", "non-suppressive / non-automatic reception production (figure)" within the production according to one fluctuation pattern (one fluctuation pattern that is paired in the winning). "390, Fig. 394)" and "Suppression (strong suppression mode) / automatic reception effect (Fig. 391, Fig. 392)" can occur in sequence, and in the "special effect state", one fluctuation pattern (winning) "Conditional suppression (weak suppression mode) / non-automatic reception production (Figs. 395-397)" and "suppression (strong suppression mode) / automatic reception" in the production according to the paired fluctuation pattern) It is desirable that "effects (FIGS. 391 and 392)" can occur in sequence.

Moreover, in the "conditional suppression (weak suppression mode) / non-automatic reception production", when the set time (valid period) elapses without the production reception being performed, the "specific type of production sound (BGM reproduction sound)" is completed. ) Is output in a weakly suppressed mode ”, and the production progresses to the subsequent stage (Fig. 397). That is, in this case, which of the "non-suppressed / non-automatic reception effect" and the "conditional suppression / non-automatic reception effect" occurred, and by extension, the "normal effect state" and the "special effect state". It is difficult to recognize which situation it is in, and since the subsequent productions will be progressed, it is said that the degree of expectation is relatively low. Even when the operation reception effect (valid period) in the game occurs, it becomes possible to more positively encourage the player to operate the game.

Further, in the pachinko machine 1 according to this embodiment, there are cases where "conditional suppression (weak suppression mode) / non-automatic reception effect (FIGS. 395 to 397)" occurs and "non-suppression / non-automatic reception effect (FIG. 395-FIG. 397)". In the case where "FIG. 390)" occurs, the same production sound (first mode) is output as the reception allowable sound (first allowable sound) for the same time, and this also causes "conditional suppression (weak)". Suppression mode) / non-automatic reception effect (FIGS. 395 to 397) ”and“ non-suppression / non-automatic reception effect (FIG. 390) ”are hard to recognize.

Further, in the "conditional suppression (weak suppression mode) / non-automatic reception effect (FIGS. 395 to 397)", the same as when the "non-suppression / non-automatic reception effect (FIG. 390)" occurs.
-When the timing tr50 arrives shortly before the set time occurs, the output of the "acceptance allowable sound (first allowable sound)" is started, and the output state is maintained in a form straddling the timing tr51. point,
-The second permissible sound (for example, message sound) is not output, only the first permissible sound (for example, sound effect) is output.-The set time (valid period) is set. When the timing tr51 arrives, the effect display device 1600 displays a model image of the operation means targeted by the operation reception effect, and suggests the remaining time until the set time elapses. Each configuration, such as the point where gauge display is performed, is also adopted, and even with this, "conditional suppression (weak suppression mode), non-automatic reception effect (Figs. 395 to 397)" and "non-suppression," It is made difficult to recognize which of "non-automatic reception effect (Fig. 390)" is occurring. Therefore, as the display method of the simulated image and the gauge display, for example, the method shown in FIG. 208 (J2) is adopted as in the case where the “non-suppressed / non-automatic reception effect (FIG. 390)” occurs. It is desirable, and the same mode as that of the production example shown in FIG. 390 may be adopted for the timing at which those display images (model image, gauge display) are hidden based on the occurrence of the production reception. desirable.

Moreover, in the "conditional suppression (weak suppression mode) / non-automatic reception effect (FIGS. 395 to 397)" according to this embodiment, the set time (effective) is also the same as in the case of the effect example shown in FIG. 390. When the production reception is performed at the timings tr51a and tr52a (FIGS. 395 (c) and 396 (c)) in which the "acceptable sound (first allowable sound)" is in the output state after the occurrence of the period), the setting is made. The time (valid period) itself is terminated, but the "acceptable sound (first allowable sound)" is not terminated halfway, and the timing at which the output is completed as the first allowable sound (same as when there is no operation). The output state is maintained until the timing (FIG. 397 (c)).

According to such a configuration, even after the production reception is performed by the operation by the player, simply listening to the reception allowable sound (first allowable sound) is "conditional suppression (weak suppression mode) / non-automatic reception". It becomes possible to make it difficult to recognize which of the "effect (FIGS. 395 to 397)" and the "non-suppressed / non-automatic reception effect (FIG. 390)" is occurring. That is, while the output state (non-suppressed mode) of the reception allowable sound (first permissible sound) is maintained, the state becomes "a state in which a specific type of production sound (BGM reproduction sound) is output in a weakly suppressed mode". Since it becomes necessary to distinguish whether or not the transition has been made, it is expected that the tension will be maintained favorably each time the production is accepted.

Further, also in the "conditional suppression (weak suppression mode) / non-automatic reception production (FIGS. 395 to 397)", if the production reception is performed within the set time (valid period) (in the figure, timing tr51a, 51b). ), Post-operation display effect (liquid crystal display) on the effect display device 1600 (first effect member) and post-operation effect sound output (effect sound) by the speaker (second effect member) as post-operation effects according to the effect reception. And at least are supposed to occur. In the figure, the post-operation display effect (liquid crystal display) and the post-operation effect sound output (effect sound) by the speaker are maintained in the execution state for the same period of time, but the present invention is not necessarily limited to this. For example, the post-operation display effect (liquid crystal display) is hidden at a predetermined timing that arrives after the timing tr52, regardless of the timing of the effect reception within the set time (valid period). On the other hand, the output of the effect sound (effect sound) after the operation may be maintained in the output state for a predetermined time from the timing when the effect reception is performed. However, regardless of the timing at which the effect is received, both the post-operation display effect (liquid crystal display) and the post-operation effect sound output (effect sound) are in the state where the timing tr52 has not been completed. It is required to be set to maintain the output state.

In addition, for the reception allowable sound and the operation-related display appearing in the "conditional suppression / non-automatic reception effect (FIGS. 395 to 397)", another example or modification example with respect to the effect example shown in FIG. 390 shall be appropriately adopted. Is possible, and it is desirable to use the same method for each other.

Further, in the pachinko machine 1 according to this embodiment, the "first suppression operation reception effect (conditional suppression / non-automatic reception effect)" generated at the timing tr51 in the effect according to a specific fluctuation pattern is produced. The process of outputting the "BGM reproduction sound" in a weakly suppressed mode (a mode in which the degree of suppression is relatively low) is performed for a predetermined fixed time from the timing when the reception is made.

According to such a configuration, when the production reception is performed at a relatively early timing tr51a after the set time (valid period) occurs (FIG. 395), the “BGM reproduction sound” is in a weak suppression mode (suppression degree). The timing tr53a for returning from the relatively low mode to the non-suppressed mode also arrives relatively early, and as a result, the period during which the "BGM reproduction sound" is changed to the weak suppression mode and the "BGM reproduction sound". There will be a relatively long interval (timing tr53a to tr40) between the period in which the sound is set to the strong suppression mode. On the other hand, when the production reception is performed at a relatively late timing tr51b after the set time (valid period) occurs (FIG. 396), the timing at which the "BGM reproduction sound" is returned from the weakly suppressed mode to the non-suppressed mode. tr53b also arrives relatively late, and as a result, a comparison is made between the period when the "BGM reproduction sound" is in the weak suppression mode and the period when the "BGM reproduction sound" is in the strong suppression mode. Only short intervals (timing tr53b to tr40) will be provided.

That is, in this case, the later the timing at which the player operates in the first suppression operation reception effect (the closer to the timing tr52), the more "the sound of BGM reproduction" is set to the weak suppression mode, and then " The time until the period in which the "sound of BGM reproduction" is set to the strongly suppressed mode is started will be shortened. As a result, depending on whether the operation performed by the player in the first suppression operation reception effect is early or late, the timing at which the strong suppression mode appears after the weak suppression mode is completed arrives relatively early and is continuous. It is possible to make it appear as if the suppression effect (weak suppression mode → strong suppression mode) is being executed, or the timing at which the strong suppression mode appears after the weak suppression mode is completed arrives relatively late, and the “strong suppression mode” You will be able to feel anxiety such as "may not appear", so you will be able to improve your game interests.

In this production example, the length of time (predetermined fixed time) at which the "BGM reproduction sound" is output in a weakly suppressed mode is determined by the post-operation effect (liquid crystal display, effect sound). It is set to be the same as the execution time, but it is not necessarily limited to this. However, the length of time that the "BGM reproduction sound" is output in the weakly suppressed mode is set to be the same as or longer than the execution time of the post-operation effect (liquid crystal display, effect sound). It is desirable to make the post-operation production stand out when the production reception is done. Furthermore, even if the production reception is performed at the latest timing tr52 of the set time (valid period) of the "first suppression operation reception effect (conditional suppression / non-automatic reception effect)", the weak suppression mode is set. It is desirable to set the length of time during which the "BGM reproduction sound" is output in the weak suppression mode so that the end timing arrives before the timing tr40 for starting the strong suppression mode. In this production example, the time of timing tr51a to 53a and the time of timing tr51b to 53b are the same.

As shown in FIGS. 395 to 397, in the pachinko machine 1 according to this embodiment, within the effect corresponding to one fluctuation pattern,
-The period from the first suppression operation reception effect (timing tr50 to the end of the post-operation effect) that suppresses a specific type of effect sound (for example, the effect sound of BGM reproduction) with a relatively low degree of suppression (weak suppression mode). ), And ・ The second suppression operation reception effect (timing tr40 ends the post-operation effect) that suppresses a specific type of effect sound (for example, the effect sound of BGM reproduction) with a relatively high degree of suppression (strong suppression mode). Period until)
Can be generated in sequence. As described above, the second suppression operation reception effect is a variation pattern in which the effect mode (type of acceptable sound for reception, operation target, etc.) may change depending on the result of the effect determination, but it is not executed. While it is executed as a "design effect based on", the first suppression operation reception effect can occur on condition that a special result is obtained in the effect determination (notice determination, etc.). ing.

Further, as described above, the first suppression operation reception effect is a production determination (preliminary determination, etc.) even in the production according to the low expected fluctuation pattern (predetermined fluctuation pattern) that does not generate the second suppression operation reception effect. Since it is possible to appear when a special result is obtained, during the symbol change, only one of the first suppression operation reception effect and the second suppression operation reception effect occurs, and the first suppression operation reception effect and the first 2 Suppression operation reception effects may occur in sequence.

In this regard, in the pachinko machine 1 according to this embodiment, the production reception is performed by the first suppression operation reception effect during the period from the "timing at which the weak suppression mode ends" to the "timing at which the strong suppression mode starts". Since it is set as a variable period that is variable according to the timing performed, after the first suppression operation reception effect (weak suppression mode) is completed, the second suppression operation reception effect (strong suppression mode) is further performed. It becomes possible to give a directing effect as to whether or not it occurs, which makes it possible to improve the interest of the game. When the first suppression operation reception effect (weak suppression mode) and the second suppression operation reception effect (strong suppression mode) occur in sequence, the second suppression operation reception effect (strong suppression mode) does not occur. The degree of expectation (ratio of stopping at the jackpot symbol) is higher than when only the first suppression operation reception effect (weak suppression mode) occurs. Further, in the variation pattern that generates the second suppression operation reception effect (strong suppression mode), the first suppression operation reception effect (weak suppression mode) precedes the second suppression operation reception effect (strong suppression mode). When it occurs, the second suppression operation reception effect has a higher expectation than the case where the first suppression operation reception effect (weak suppression mode) does not occur (for example, the first allowable sound is output in the second aspect). The rate of execution is high.

By the way, when an operation reception effect that can suppress a specific type of effect sound (for example, a BGM reproduction effect sound) occurs, the degree of suppression is high (second suppression operation reception effect in the strong suppression mode) or low (weak suppression). As described above, the degree of expectation differs depending on whether the mode is the first suppression operation reception effect). However, even if an attempt is made to infer whether the degree of suppression is high or low (whether it is a strong suppression mode or a weak suppression mode) when a specific type of production sound (for example, a production sound for BGM reproduction) is suppressed. In reality, it is difficult to infer whether the degree of suppression is high (strong suppression mode) or low (weak suppression mode) without comparison. In particular, it is even more so when the volume value when suppressed is not so large between the strong suppression mode and the weak suppression mode, and this causes a feeling of tension when the operation reception effect is generated. Can be suitably maintained and the player can be attracted to the effect.

In this regard, in the effect example shown in FIGS. 395 to 397, the first suppression operation reception effect and the second suppression operation reception effect are output when the set time (valid period) at which the effect reception is allowed occurs. The first permissible sound is output as the same production sound for the same time (in the figure, it is output in the "first mode"). That is, in this case, even if the first permissible sound is confirmed, it becomes possible to make it difficult to guess whether the degree of suppression is high or low (whether it is a strong suppression mode or a weak suppression mode). As a result, the tension for the production can be maintained more favorably, and the player can be more and more attracted to the production.

However, in reality, if it is not possible to infer whether the mode is a strong suppression mode or a weak suppression mode, there is a concern that the game interest will decline. Therefore, in the pachinko machine 1 according to this embodiment, the effect elements useful for estimating whether the mode is the strong suppression mode or the weak suppression mode are provided within the period from the start to the end of the operation reception effect. It will be prepared as follows in the form of being scattered in chronological order.

In the pachinko machine 1 according to this embodiment, first, in the case where the above-mentioned situation appears in which the first allowable sound can be output as the same production sound for the same time (in the figure, it is output in the “first aspect”). Even if there is, it is possible to estimate whether it is a strong suppression mode or a weak suppression mode based on the first allowable sound.

That is, the first permissible sound output when the first suppression operation reception effect is generated is output for a predetermined time without ending the output halfway even if the effect reception is performed while the output state is in effect. On the other hand, the first permissible sound output when the second suppression operation reception effect is generated is based on the effect reception when the effect reception is performed while the output state is in effect. The output is terminated halfway (see FIGS. 395 and 396). In such a configuration, the same mode can be output as the first allowable sound in both the first suppression operation reception effect and the second suppression operation reception effect, and it is a strong suppression mode or a weak suppression mode. While making it difficult to guess, the first permissible sound itself has a function useful for guessing whether it is a strong suppression mode or a weak suppression mode. Since this is done, it becomes possible to suppress the deterioration of the game interest due to the inability to make such a guess.

In addition to the first aspect, the first allowable sound output when the second suppression operation reception effect is generated cannot be output when the first suppression operation reception effect is generated (second aspect, third aspect, etc.). ) Is also possible. That is, in this case, depending on the mode in which the first permissible sound is output, it may be a strong suppression mode or a weak suppression mode even if the effect reception is not performed when the first permissible sound is in the output state. It becomes possible to easily guess whether or not the game is, and it is expected that the game entertainment will be maintained favorably. However, in order to maintain a sense of tension with respect to the effect, the output in the mode (second mode, third mode, etc.) that cannot be output when the first suppression operation reception effect is generated is larger than the output in the first mode. It is desirable that the execution rate is low.

Further, in the pachinko machine 1 according to this embodiment, when the second suppression operation reception effect is generated, the second allowable sound is output in addition to the first allowable sound. Therefore, the second allowable sound is output. By confirming whether or not the permissible sound is output, it is possible to estimate whether the mode is a strong suppression mode or a weak suppression mode. However, the second permissible sound does not necessarily have to be prepared, and only the first permissible sound may be output in both the first suppression operation reception effect and the second suppression operation reception effect.

Further, in the pachinko machine 1 according to this embodiment, the operation-related display (display prompting the operation) that appears within the set time (valid period) in which the effect reception is allowed is also the first suppression operation reception effect and the second suppression. Since the operation reception effect is different from that of the operation reception effect, it is possible to infer whether the mode is a strong suppression mode or a weak suppression mode by checking the operation-related display. However, regarding the operation-related display, in addition to appearing later than the reception allowable sound, there is only a partial difference between the first suppression operation reception effect and the second suppression operation reception effect. Therefore, it is possible to maintain a sense of tension in the production by leaving some difficulty in guessing whether the mode is a strong suppression mode or a weak suppression mode.

Moreover, in the pachinko machine 1 according to this embodiment, it is assumed that it is not possible to estimate whether the pachinko machine 1 is in the strong suppression mode or the weak suppression mode when the output of the reception allowable sound and the operation-related display is completed. However, by confirming the execution mode of the post-operation effect, it is possible to infer whether the mode is a strong suppression mode or a weak suppression mode. That is, in the post-operation effect according to the first suppression operation reception effect, both the "effect by the liquid crystal display" and the "effect by the effect sound" are "performed for a certain period of time from the time when the effect is received". On the other hand, in the post-operation production according to the second suppression operation reception production, the "production by the production sound" is "the one that is performed for a certain period of time from the time when the production reception is received", but the "liquid crystal display". "Direction by" is "the one that ends when the predetermined timing tr44 arrives". That is, in this case, in the post-operation effect corresponding to the second suppression operation reception effect, the time from the end of the "effect by the liquid crystal display" to the end of the "effect by the effect sound" is determined by the timing when the effect is received. Will be variable and a large deviation will occur. Therefore, by confirming such a deviation, it becomes possible to infer whether the mode is a strong suppression mode or a weak suppression mode. ..

However, even if the production elements that are useful for guessing are prepared in such a form that they are scattered in chronological order, some players do not notice them, and as a result, it is a strong suppression mode or a weak suppression mode. In the end, if there is something that cannot be guessed, the interest in the game may decline.

Therefore, in the pachinko machine 1 according to this embodiment, in the first suppression operation reception effect (weak suppression mode), the effect sound of BGM reproduction is produced based on the fact that the effect reception is performed within the set time (valid period). In a weakly suppressed mode. On the other hand, in the second suppression operation reception effect (strong suppression mode), the production sound of BGM reproduction is set to the strong suppression mode from the time when the set time (valid period) has not yet occurred, and the strong suppression mode is used. A set time (valid period) occurs during the process so that the production can be accepted. According to such a configuration, the first suppression operation reception effect (weak suppression mode) and the second suppression operation reception effect (strong suppression mode) suppress a specific type of effect sound (for example, a BGM reproduction effect sound). Since the timing of causing the sound is different, it is possible to infer whether the mode is a strong suppression mode or a weak suppression mode by confirming the timing.

Moreover, in the first suppression operation reception effect (weak suppression mode) according to this embodiment, unlike the case of the second suppression operation reception effect (strong suppression mode), no operation is detected within the set time (valid period). At that time, the set time has elapsed without being automatically generated (see FIG. 397). That is, in this case, if the operation is not detected within the set time (valid period), the suppression process (weak suppression mode) itself triggered by the reception of the production for the specific type of production sound (for example, the production sound of BGM reproduction) is also performed. Although there is a price that the effect cannot be confirmed after the operation, it becomes possible to recognize that the mode is not the strong suppression mode but the weak suppression mode.

Further, in the second suppression operation reception effect (strong suppression mode) according to this embodiment, the timing at which the process of changing the “BGM reproduction effect sound” to the strong suppression mode is terminated is the same as the end timing of the post-operation effect. Or, it is set as the timing before that. Therefore, in the first suppression operation reception effect (weak suppression mode), the timing at which the process of changing the "BGM reproduction effect sound" to the weak suppression mode is set is set after the end timing of the post-operation effect. For example, by confirming the timing at which the "BGM reproduction effect sound" is returned to the non-suppressed mode, it is possible to infer whether the mode is the strong suppressed mode or the weak suppressed mode.

Further, as described above, in the first suppression operation reception effect according to the above effect example, the effect display device 1600 (first effect member) is used regardless of the timing of the effect reception within the set time (valid period). The length of the period during which the post-operation display effect (liquid crystal display) and the post-operation effect sound output (effect sound) by the speaker (second effect member) are performed in parallel is invariant (see FIGS. 395 and 396). ). On the other hand, in the second suppression operation reception effect, the post-operation display effect (liquid crystal display) on the effect display device 1600 (first effect member) depends on the timing of the effect reception within the set time (valid period). And the length of the period during which the post-operation effect sound output (effect sound) by the speaker (second effect member) is performed in parallel (see FIGS. 395 and 396).

According to such a configuration, the color rendering property is generated in "when to perform the production reception (operation)", and the game entertainment until the production reception (operation) is performed can be suitably maintained. Become.

Further, in the above configuration, the first permissibility is made so that it is difficult to distinguish which of the first suppression operation reception effect and the second suppression operation reception effect, in which the execution mode of the post-operation effect is different, is occurring. The sounds are output as the same production sound for the same time, and the production elements that are useful for distinguishing them are prepared so as to be scattered in chronological order. As a result, it is expected that the decline in the interest in the game will be suppressed while maintaining a sense of tension in the production.

Further, in the above configuration, the first suppression operation reception effect and the second suppression operation reception effect, which have different execution modes of the post-operation effect, can be intentionally mixed in the effect according to one variation pattern. Therefore, every time the operation reception effect is generated, it becomes possible to suitably maintain a feeling of tension about "when to perform the effect reception (operation)". In order to obtain such an action effect, in addition to the mode in which the first suppression operation reception effect and the second suppression operation reception effect are mixed in the effect according to one variation pattern, the effect according to one variation pattern is obtained. It is desirable that the mode in which only the second suppression operation reception effect (or the first suppression operation reception effect) appears a plurality of times is feasible.

If the purpose is to obtain only the effect of the effect of "when to perform the effect reception (operation)", a specific type of effect is produced in the first suppression operation reception effect and the second suppression operation reception effect. The sound (the production sound of BGM reproduction) may not be suppressed, and the output in the non-suppressed mode may be maintained.

In addition, regardless of when the effect is received within the set time (valid period), the post-operation display effect (liquid crystal display) and the speaker (second effect member) of the effect display device 1600 (first effect member) ) Is performed in parallel with the post-operation effect sound output (effect sound). For the operation reception effect, the condition is that a special result is obtained in the effect judgment (notice judgment, etc.). It is desirable that it can be generated in the above and that it cannot appear as a pattern effect (effect pattern) based on a fluctuation pattern.

That is, in this case, by confirming the execution mode of the post-operation effect, it can be inferred that a special result has been obtained in the advance notice effect determination (a state in which the degree of expectation is relatively high). Therefore, unlike the fluctuation pattern itself (design production) that always occurs regardless of the result of the advance notice production judgment, it is expected to improve the game entertainment when it is recognized that it has been additionally performed. Will be. It should be noted that the post-operation display effect (liquid crystal display) on the effect display device 1600 (first effect member) and the speaker (second effect member) depend on the timing of the effect reception within the set time (valid period). The second suppression operation reception effect, in which the length of the period during which the post-operation effect sound output (effect sound) is performed in parallel, changes, may occur only as the effect (design effect) of the fluctuation pattern itself. Alternatively, there may be both a case where the fluctuation pattern itself occurs as an effect (design effect) and a case where it occurs under the condition that a special result is obtained in the effect determination (notice determination, etc.).

It should be noted that the weak suppression mode in which the "BGM reproduction effect sound" is output at a lower suppression degree than the strong suppression mode can appear even when the operation opportunity is not given (when the first suppression operation reception effect does not occur). You may do it. That is, in this case, after the "BGM reproduction effect sound" is set to the weakly suppressed mode for a predetermined time, the weakly suppressed mode is returned to the non-suppressed mode without being given an operation opportunity. Then, as the number of times the weak suppression mode appears in the production according to one fluctuation pattern, including the first suppression operation reception effect, the degree of suppression is further increased until the symbol fluctuation is stopped ( If the ratio of the second suppression operation reception effect to be further executed) is increased, the effectability can be further improved through the suppression state for the "effect sound of BGM reproduction". Further, when the production is accepted within the set time (valid period) generated while the "BGM reproduction effect sound" is not set to the suppression mode, "whether or not the number of times the weak suppression mode appears increases or not (Fig.) It becomes possible to add further fun to the effectability of "the aspect shown in 390 or the aspect shown in FIG. 395)".

Further, the strong suppression mode for the "BGM reproduction effect sound" may also appear even when the operation opportunity is not given (when the second suppression operation reception effect does not occur). That is, in this case, after the "BGM reproduction effect sound" is set to the strongly suppressed mode for a predetermined time, the strongly suppressed mode is returned to the non-suppressed mode without being given an operation opportunity. According to such a configuration, it is possible to provide a color rendering index as to whether or not an operation opportunity is given when a strong suppression mode appears.

Further, in the effect example shown in FIGS. 395 to 397, when the first suppression operation reception effect occurs, the “BGM reproduction effect sound” is produced based on the fact that the effect reception is performed within the set time (valid period). The suppression mode (weak suppression mode) was set. However, instead of this, even when the first suppression operation reception effect occurs, as in the case where the second suppression operation reception effect occurs, the "BGM reproduction effect sound" is performed before the set time occurs. May be set to the suppression mode (weak suppression mode), and a set time (valid period) in which the effect reception is allowed may be generated in the suppression mode (weak suppression mode). In this case, even if the same fluctuation pattern is selected, the "BGM reproduction effect sound" is produced when a predetermined timing is reached, depending on whether or not a special result is obtained in the effect determination (notice determination, etc.). Since the suppression mode (weak suppression mode) is set or the suppression mode (weak suppression mode) is not set, the range of effectability can be expanded. In the first suppression operation reception effect, the timing at which the "BGM reproduction effect sound" is returned from the suppression mode (weak suppression mode) to the non-suppression mode is the same as or after the timing at which the post-operation effect ends. It is desirable to make it arrive.

Further, in the effect examples shown in FIGS. 391 to 393 and 395 to 397, in the second suppression operation reception effect (strong suppression mode), the “BGM reproduction effect sound” is set to the strong suppression mode (suppression mode or mode). The process of making the output silent or non-output) is made to end at the same timing as or earlier than the end timing of the post-operation effect, but the end timing of the post-operation effect has arrived. You may end it later. Further, in this case, at least as long as the special symbol (decorative symbol) is changing (unless the symbol fluctuation is stopped), even if the "BGM reproduction effect sound" is not returned from the strongly suppressed mode to the non-suppressed mode. good.

As described above, the reception allowable sound does not have to be generated a little before the set time (valid period), and may be output based on the occurrence of the set time (valid period).

In the operation reception effect (second suppression operation reception effect) in the strong suppression mode shown in FIGS. 391 to 393 and 395 to 397, the post-operation display effect (liquid crystal display) on the effect display device 1600 (first effect member). ) Is terminated at a predetermined timing tr44 in the production according to the fluctuation pattern, while the production reception is performed for the post-operation effect sound output (effect sound) by the speaker (second production member). It was decided to end when a certain amount of time had passed. However, instead of this, both the post-operation display effect (liquid crystal display) in the effect display device 1600 (first effect member) and the post-operation effect sound output (effect sound) by the speaker (second effect member) are changed. Each of them may be terminated at a predetermined timing in the effect according to the pattern, or the post-operation display effect (liquid crystal display) and the speaker (second effect member) in the effect display device 1600 (first effect member). Both the output of the effect sound (effect sound) after the operation by the above may be terminated when a certain time has elapsed from the time when the effect reception is performed.

The specific type of effect sound to be suppressed (the effect sound of BGM reproduction) is the timing at which the effect is switched within the effect according to the symbol variation or the variation pattern (for example, the SP reach effect is started). It is output when the timing etc. arrives. On the other hand, the post-operation effect is started from an indefinite timing (the mining to be operated) within the set time.

The specific variation pattern described in the effect example shown in FIGS. 391 and 392 and the specific variation pattern described in the effect example shown in FIGS. 395 to 397 may be different or the same. It may be a variation pattern. Further, the special effect state may not be a look-ahead effect zone, but may be an effect state when the jackpot probability for the jackpot determination is relatively high.

Further, in the weak suppression mode, the volume value (audible volume) of the "specific type of production sound" is set to a specific suppression value (a number larger than 0) lower than that in the non-suppression mode, and the sound is output in an audible state. That is, even if the strong suppression mode is to set the "specific type of production sound" to a non-audible state (output in silence (audible volume is 0) or non-output (end channel allocation)). good.

Further, in each of the production examples shown in FIGS. 395 to 397, it is assumed that the same operation means (operation button 410) is the operation target and the operation opportunity is given in the same operation mode. In this regard, in the "first suppression operation reception effect", the operation button 410 is only used as the operation target (first operation mode), but in the "second suppression operation reception effect", see FIGS. 391 and 392. However, as described above, based on the result of the advance notice effect determination, "when the operation button 410 is selected as the operation target (first operation mode)" and "when the sword decoration body 5001 is selected as the operation target (second operation mode)". ) ”. Therefore, when the sword decoration body 5001 is selected as the operation target (second operation mode), it becomes possible to easily recognize that it is not a weak suppression mode but a strong suppression mode. It should be noted that the production reception was performed in "when the operation button 410 is selected as the operation target (first operation mode)" and "when the sword decoration body 5001 is selected as the operation target (second operation mode)". The corresponding post-operation production has the same content.

That is, as described above, in the pachinko machine 1 according to this embodiment, the operating means to be operated is
-The first operation mode in which the operation receiving part (the part touched by the player when operating) is not moved when the set time (valid period) occurs, and-The operation receiving part is moved by the driving force when the set time (valid period) occurs. An operation opportunity can be given in any of a plurality of modes including the second operation mode of moving to a specific position. Here, the "first operation mode" assumes a case where an operation opportunity is given to the operation button 410, and the "second operation mode" gives an operation opportunity to the sword decoration body 5001. It is assumed that the sword decoration body 5001 is "a device that can give a player an operation opportunity while moving to a specific position", see FIG. 198 (A3) and the like. However, it is as described above. However, one operating means (one operating receiving unit) may be provided with a "first operating mode" and a "second operating mode", respectively, and an operating opportunity may be provided by any of these modes.

Then, as described above, in the pachinko machine 1 according to this embodiment, as an operation reception effect,
-While outputting a specific type of effect sound (BGM playback effect sound) in a non-suppressed mode, the non-suppressed operation reception effect in which the set time (valid period) is generated and the post-operation effect is executed. -A suppression operation reception effect is prepared to output a specific type of production sound (BGM playback production sound) in a suppression mode or in a silent state, or in a non-output state. Furthermore, as a suppression operation reception effect,
-The first suppression operation reception effect (for example, the above-mentioned "conditional suppression / non-automatic reception effect") that suppresses a specific type of effect sound (for example, the effect sound of BGM reproduction) with a relatively low degree of suppression (weak suppression mode). ”), And ・ A second suppression operation reception effect (for example,“ suppression / automatic reception Directing ")
Is prepared.

However, here, as the second suppression operation reception production, further
-While the production sound of a specific type is suppressed in the strongly suppressed mode (while it is output in the suppressed mode or silently, or in the non-output state), the first operation mode described above with respect to the operating means. (Here, the operation button 410) is given an operation opportunity under suppression, and while the production sound of a specific type is suppressed in the strong suppression mode (output in the suppression mode or silence). (While it is in a non-output state), the operation means is given an operation opportunity in the second operation mode (here, the sword decoration body 5001 is pulled out). By preparing it, the effectability when the operation opportunity is given is further improved.

FIG. 398 shows an example of an effect (movement under restraint reception effect) that appears in the second suppression operation reception effect (suppression / automatic reception effect) when the sword decoration body 5001 is selected as the operation target (second operation mode). It is a time chart which shows. Regarding the effect example (non-moving reception effect under suppression) that appears in "when the operation button 410 is selected as the operation target (first operation mode)" in the second suppression operation reception effect (suppression / automatic reception effect), This is as described with reference to FIGS. 391 and 395 (the period from the timing tr40 to the end of the post-operation effect).

As shown in FIG. 398, the second suppression operation reception is also performed in the second suppression operation reception effect (suppression / automatic reception effect) when the sword decoration body 5001 is selected as the operation target (second operation mode). In the production (suppression / automatic reception production), the parts that are not specifically stated as "when the operation button 410 is selected as the operation target (first operation mode)" are basically the same (FIGS. 391, 392, FIGS. 395 to 397), the above-mentioned related effects, other examples, and modified examples can be appropriately adopted.

However, when the second suppression operation reception effect (suppression / automatic reception effect) is executed in the second operation mode, a process of moving the operation receiving unit to a specific position by a driving force when a set time (valid period) occurs is performed. Although it is required to perform the processing, there is a problem as to when the processing is performed.

In this regard, in the pachinko machine 1 according to this embodiment, at least in a specific gaming state (normal gaming state or short-term gaming state with probability variation time), as shown in FIGS. 398 (c) and 398 (h), first, Unless the timing tr40 at which the production sound of a specific type (the production sound of BGM reproduction) is set to the strong suppression mode arrives, the process of moving the operation receiving unit to the specific position is not performed. Therefore, for example, when a specific type of effect sound (effect sound of BGM reproduction) is in the non-suppressed mode or the weakly suppressed mode, the operation opportunity in the second operation mode occurs even if the set time for which the effect reception is allowed occurs. Is not given, and only the operation opportunity in the first operation mode is given. That is, in this case, unless the production sound of a specific type (the production sound of BGM reproduction) is in the strong suppression mode, this is not the second operation mode even if the operation opportunity is given, so that the player It becomes possible to suppress that the operation is performed in the operation mode on the wrong side.

On the other hand, when a specific type of production sound (BGM reproduction production sound) is set to the strong suppression mode (timing tr40), an operation opportunity is given in the first operation mode under the strong suppression mode. There is a possibility of both the case where the operation is performed and the case where the operation opportunity is given in the second operation mode. However, the player is asked "Which of the first operation mode and the second operation mode is given the operation opportunity" when the specific type of production sound (the production sound of BGM reproduction) becomes the strongly suppressed mode. Since it becomes possible to concentrate on ", it becomes possible to suppress the occurrence of an operation error between them.

On the other hand, in the pachinko machine 1 according to this embodiment, which of the first operation mode and the second operation mode is given until just before the operation opportunity is given is kept secret from the timing tr40. We try to maintain a sense of tension and a sense of entertainment from the reception of the production to the start of the production after the operation. More specifically, as shown in FIGS. 398 (c) and 398 (h), when the timing tr42 at which the set time (valid period) occurs arrives, the operation receiving unit starts moving to a specific position. I'm going to let you. Here, when the operation opportunity is given in the second operation mode, the degree of expectation (the rate at which the jackpot symbol appears when the symbol fluctuation is stopped) is higher than when the operation opportunity is given in the first operation mode. The advance notice production judgment is performed so as to be.

However, in this case, the production reception itself is in a permissible state for a short time after the set time (valid period) occurs (until the movement to the specific position by the operation receiving unit is completed). Nevertheless, since it is difficult to properly operate the operation receiving unit, the length of the set time (valid period) is substantially reduced, which may reduce the enjoyment of the game. Therefore, in the pachinko machine 1 according to this embodiment, as shown in FIGS. 398 (c) and 398 (d), the reception allowable sound is obtained for the time required to move the operation receiving unit from the original position to the specific position. The first aspect, which has the shortest output time among (first permissible sounds), is set as a time shorter than the time until the output is completed. As a result, regardless of which mode (in addition to the first mode, the above-mentioned second mode, third mode, etc.) is output as the reception permissible sound (first permissible sound), the production reception is performed in the middle of the output state. (It is possible to end the output in the middle), and even if the second operation mode appears, it is unlikely that a directing inconvenience will occur.

Further, as will be described later, in this embodiment, the time required to move the operation receiving portion from the original position to the specific position by the driving force is such that there is no operation on the operation receiving portion and the operation receiving portion is moved to the specific position by the driving force. It is moved at a faster speed so that it takes a shorter time than the time required to move from the to the original position (see FIG. 398 (h)). According to such a movement mode, it becomes possible to appeal that the time for which the set time (validity period) is substantially reduced is reduced, and the game due to the reduction of the time. It will be expected to suppress the dissatisfaction of the person.

Further, in order to more preferably suppress such dissatisfaction, when the second suppression operation reception effect (suppression / automatic reception effect) is generated, the non-suppression shown in FIG. 390 is set as the set time (valid period). "Operation reception" for the set time (valid period) of the operation reception effect (from timing tr31 to post-operation effect) of the mode and the operation reception effect (from timing tr50 to post-operation effect) of the weak suppression mode shown in FIG. 395. It is desirable to set a time value having a length longer than the sum of "the time required to move the part from the original position to a specific position". According to such a configuration, when the second suppression operation reception effect (suppression / automatic reception effect) is executed in the second operation mode, a longer time value that more than substantially compensates for the time to be cut is obtained. Since the set time (validity period) is generated, it becomes possible to suitably maintain the game entertainment. In this case, in order to standardize the program, it is possible to set a set time having the same length even when the second suppression operation reception effect (suppression / automatic reception effect) is executed in the first operation mode. desirable.

However, as described above, the time from the timing tr42A to tr43 after the automatic button function is activated is not substantially accepted for production, and the set time (validity period) is substantially reduced. In view of this, when the second suppression operation reception effect (suppression / automatic reception effect) is generated, the operation reception effect (from timing tr31 to the post-operation effect) in the non-suppression mode shown in FIG. 390 is set as the set time (valid period). ) And the set time (valid period) of the operation reception effect (from the timing tr50 to the post-operation effect) of the weak suppression mode shown in FIG. It can be said that it is more desirable to set a time value having a length equal to or longer than the sum of "time" and "time of timing tr42A to tr43 after the automatic button function is activated". Also in this case, in order to standardize the program, a set time having the same length should be set even when the second suppression operation reception effect (suppression / automatic reception effect) is executed in the first operation mode. Is desirable.

Further, as described above, when the second suppression operation reception effect (suppression / automatic reception effect) is being executed in the second operation mode and there is no operation on the operation receiving unit within the set time, the figure is shown in the figure. As shown in 398 (a), (h) to (l), the effect reception is automatically generated at the timing tr42A, and the post-operation display effect on the effect display device 1600 (first effect member) is based on the effect reception. (Liquid crystal display) and post-operation effect sound output (effect sound) by the speaker (second effect member) are at least executed as post-operation effect. However, in this case, as is clear from the comparison in FIGS. 398 (g) and 398 (l), the execution time of the post-operation display effect (liquid crystal display) on the effect display device 1600 (first effect member) is shortened. Therefore, there is a concern that the interest in games will decline.

In this regard, in the pachinko machine 1 according to this embodiment, as shown in FIG. 398 (h), the second suppression operation reception effect (suppression / automatic reception effect) is executed in the second operation mode. If there is no operation on the operation receiving part within the set time, the "speed when the operation receiving part is moved from the specific position to the original position by the driving force" is changed to "the original position is moved to the specific position". It is intentionally slower than "the speed of time", which allows it to remain in motion for a relatively long period of time. According to such a configuration, in exchange for shortening the execution time of the post-operation display effect (liquid crystal display) in the effect display device 1600 (first effect member), the operation receiving unit has a movable effect (post-operation effect). Since it can be expected to function as a part of), the game entertainment can be preferably maintained.

In the production example shown in FIG. 398 (h), the "movement effect from a specific position to the original position" by the operation receiving unit is performed after the operation corresponding to the automatic generation of the effect reception (automatic button function). Although it is set to start when a predetermined timing in the middle of executing the effect arrives, it may be started at the timing tr42A at which the effect reception is automatically generated, as in the post-operation effect.

However, no matter how slow the "movement from a specific position to the original position" is performed, it is not possible to earn enough time as a movable effect by this alone, and there is a concern that it is difficult to maintain the interest of the game. Therefore, in the effect example shown in FIG. 398 (h), after the operation receiving portion is moved from the specific position to the original position (or a position in the vicinity thereof), the operation receiving portion is vibrated to perform a vibration effect. Therefore, the period from the start of movement from the specific position to the original position (or the position in the vicinity thereof) to the end of the vibration of the operation receiving unit is determined by the "operation receiving unit not operated by the player". It is designed to function as a movable production period. As a result, it becomes possible to suitably realize a movable effect using the "operation receiving unit that has not been operated by the player", and as a result of the automatic generation of the effect reception, the effect display device 1600 (first effect member). It is expected that the effectability when the execution time of the post-operation display effect (liquid crystal display) in the above operation is shortened is preferably maintained. In this case, it is more preferable that the operation receiving portion is used as a movable effect if the operation receiving portion is made to emit light in a state where the operation receiving portion is moved from the specific position to the original position. It is possible to appeal to.

Here, regarding the movable effect period (movement time from the specific position to the original position, vibration time) by the "operation receiving portion not operated by the player", is it when the timing tr44 at which the strong suppression mode ends arrives? , It is desirable to end before the timing tr44. As a result, the effect sound of a specific type is returned from the strongly suppressed mode to the non-suppressed mode, and the progress (switching of the effect) in the effect content corresponding to this can be smoothly promoted.

Another difference from the case where the second suppression operation reception effect (suppression / automatic reception effect) is executed in the first operation mode is that a message sound such as "Deliver the sword!" Is used as the second allowable sound (message sound). It may be output, or a message display such as "push" and a copy image by "sword decoration image SYG" may be displayed as operation-related displays, so that operation errors are less likely to occur. become.

Further, as described above, in the first suppression operation reception effect (weak suppression mode), the operation opportunity is not given in such a second operation mode, but the "specific type of effect sound" is set to the weak suppression mode. If the operation opportunity is given based on the above, the operation error may be promoted when the recognition of which of the weak suppression mode and the strong suppression mode appears is mistaken. In this regard, in the production example shown in FIGS. 395 to 397, when the first suppression operation reception effect (weak suppression mode) occurs, the operation opportunity is set to the weak suppression mode of the "specific type of effect sound". Since the weak suppression mode appears based on the fact that the production reception is done without giving it, there is a sense of unnecessary tension and expectation that "an operation opportunity in the second operation mode may be given". It will be possible to provide a production without having it.

In the above-mentioned production example (second operation mode), even if there is an operation on the operation receiving unit within the set time, as in the case where there is no operation on the operation receiving unit within the set time, FIG. 398 (2) As shown in c), when a predetermined timing (same timing) within the period in which the post-operation effect is executed arrives, the operation receiving portion is vibrated to perform the vibration effect. According to such a configuration, regardless of the timing at which the post-operation effect occurs, the vibration effect is performed when a predetermined timing before the timing tr44 at which the strong suppression mode ends arrives. Therefore, it can be suggested that the strong suppression mode will be terminated soon and a new production progress will appear.

However, if there is an operation on the operation receiving unit within the set time, the vibration effect is started early based on the fact that the effect is received by the operation, so that the post-operation effect is performed during the period. You may try to further improve the game entertainment. That is, in this case, if there is an operation on the operation receiving unit within the set time, the vibration effect is performed for a longer time than when there is no operation on the operation receiving unit within the set time.

Further, in the above-mentioned production example, the process of moving the operation receiving unit to the specific position is not performed unless the specific type of production sound (the production sound of BGM reproduction) is in the strong suppression mode. However, instead of this, if the production reception is permitted when the specific type of production sound (BGM reproduction production sound) is in the strong suppression mode, the specific type of production sound (BGM reproduction production sound) is in the non-suppression mode. The rate at which the operation opportunity in the second operation mode is given (0) than when the effect reception is permitted when the effect sound is in the weak suppression mode or when the effect sound of a specific type (the effect sound of BGM reproduction) is in the weak suppression mode. Or 100) may be higher.

In each of the above-mentioned production examples (FIGS. 192 to 398), in the operation reception effect in which the automatic button function can be enabled, the operation reception effect in which the automatic button function is not enabled is set as the set time (valid period). It is desirable to set a time value with a length longer than the set time (validity period) plus the "time from when the automatic button function is activated until the set time elapses". .. According to such a configuration, a set time (valid period) having a longer time value is generated, which is more than enough to compensate for the time that is substantially cut as the period for which the production reception is allowed. , It becomes possible to maintain the game entertainment favorably.

By the way, as described above, in the pachinko machine 1 according to this embodiment, as an operation reception effect that can occur when in a normal gaming state,
-The operation reception effect (intrinsic reception effect) executed as the effect of the variation pattern itself (design effect) based on the result of the variation pattern judgment, and-The fact that a special result was obtained in the effect judgment (notice judgment, etc.) As a condition, the operation reception effect (additional reception effect) executed as an additional effect to the effect (effect pattern) of the variable pattern itself.
Is to be prepared at least.

That is, in the "intrinsic reception effect", when a special result is obtained by the variation pattern determination (determination as to which variation pattern is used to execute the symbol effect) based on the result of the jackpot determination (a special variation pattern is selected). Then, it is confirmed that the execution is performed within the effect according to the determined fluctuation pattern. On the other hand, in the "additional reception effect", even if "a predetermined result capable of generating the additional reception effect" is obtained in the variation pattern determination (even if the predetermined variation pattern is selected), the said. It is not always executed unless the result of generating the "additional reception effect" is further obtained in the effect determination (notice determination, etc.) according to the selected fluctuation pattern. Therefore, once the production according to the fluctuation pattern is started, the production judgment is made rather than the occurrence of the "intrinsic reception production" that is linked to the fluctuation pattern (effect pattern) and whose occurrence is confirmed. It is more beneficial for the player to generate an "additional reception effect" that is allowed to occur depending on the result of (notice judgment, etc.), and it can be said that it is more important to enhance the interest of the game. Even if the same effect content (effect pattern) appears as an effect according to the fluctuation pattern, if an "additional reception effect" occurs in the effect, an "additional reception effect" is generated in the effect. The rate at which the jackpot symbol appears when the symbol fluctuation is stopped (expectation) is higher than when "" does not occur.

In this respect, in the pachinko machine 1 according to this embodiment, in the intrinsic reception effect that can occur when in the normal gaming state, a specific type of effect sound (the effect sound of "BGM reproduction") is suppressed or When the production reception is permitted while the output is silent or in the non-output state, and when the production sound of a specific type (the production sound of "BGM reproduction") is output in a non-suppressed mode. In some cases, the reception of production is allowed. On the other hand, in the additional reception effect that can occur in the normal gaming state, the effect reception is not allowed while the output is suppressed or silent, or the output is not output. The reception of production is permitted while the production sound of a specific type is output in a non-suppressed mode. That is, in this case, in the normal game state, when the production reception is permitted, it is added by paying attention to whether the production sound of a specific type is output in a suppressed mode or in silence or in a non-output state. It will be possible to recognize the possibility that reception effects will occur, and it will be expected that the game will be maintained.

Further, in the pachinko machine 1 according to this embodiment, the intrinsic reception effect that can occur in the normal gaming state is operated even if the operation is not detected within the set time in which the effect reception is allowed. Non-automatic that the post-operation effect does not occur and the set time ends when the operation is not detected within the set time allowed for the effect reception. It may be executed in the reception mode. On the other hand, the additional reception effect that can occur in the normal gaming state is not executed in the automatic reception mode, but is executed in the non-automatic reception mode. That is, in this case, in the normal game state, it is possible to recognize the possibility that the additional reception effect is generated by paying attention to whether the effect reception is automatically performed (automatic button function) within the set time. It is expected that the game will be maintained until the production is accepted.

FIG. 399 is a time chart showing the effect content that appears when the fluctuation pattern 1 is selected in the fluctuation pattern determination.

As shown in FIG. 399, when the variation pattern 1 is selected as the result of the variation pattern determination, first, in the effect determination (preliminary determination according to the variation pattern 1) performed at the start of the symbol variation, the advance notice effect is performed. At least a determination is made as to whether or not to execute A. As a result of this effect determination, when it is determined that the advance notice effect A is to be executed, the advance notice effect A is applied to the symbol effect (effect pattern) when the timing tr61 in the symbol effect based on the variation pattern 1 arrives. It will be additionally executed (timing tr61 to tr62), and when it is not determined to execute the advance notice effect A, the advance notice effect A does not appear even if the timing tr61 in the symbol effect based on the fluctuation pattern 1 arrives. The symbol effect (effect pattern) based on the variation pattern 1 is only executed.

Here, when it is determined that the advance notice effect A is to be executed as a result of the effect determination, not only the display effect but also the effect sound and the lamp effect change when the timing tr61 arrives. It is additionally executed for the production). It should be noted that "additionally executed" can be realized, for example, by displaying the notice effect A on a layer having a higher priority than the layer in which the display effect of the variation pattern 1 itself appears. be. At this time, the notice effect A may be displayed by covering all of the symbol effect based on the variation pattern 1 so that it cannot be seen, or covering only a part of the symbol effect based on the variation pattern 1. The notice effect A may be displayed. On the other hand, in the case of the lamp effect, the mode of "lamp effect according to the occurrence of the notice effect A" is given priority over the "lamp effect based on the fluctuation pattern 1 (effect pattern)". Further, in the case of the effect sound, by assigning the "effect sound according to the advance notice effect A" to a channel different from the "effect sound based on the variation pattern 1", the effect sound is based on the "variation pattern 1 (effect pattern)". The "directing sound according to the advance notice production A" is additionally output to the "directing sound".

FIG. 400 is a time chart showing the effect content that appears when the fluctuation pattern 2 is selected in the fluctuation pattern determination.

As shown in FIG. 400, when the variation pattern 2 is selected as the result of the variation pattern determination, first, in the effect determination (preliminary determination according to the variation pattern 2) performed at the start of the symbol variation, "addition" is added. At least it is determined whether or not to execute the "target reception effect". Here, the variation pattern 2 according to this production example is the same as the “predetermined variation pattern shown in FIG. 390”. Therefore, as a result of this effect determination, when it is determined that the "additional reception effect" is to be executed, the "additional reception effect" is subjected to the symbol effect based on the variation pattern 2 (predetermined variation pattern shown in FIG. 390). When the timing tr31 in the above arrives, it will be additionally executed for the symbol effect (effect pattern) (from the timing tr31 until the post-operation effect is completed), and the "additional reception effect" will be executed. When it is not determined, even if the timing tr31 in the symbol effect based on the variation pattern 2 arrives, the "additional reception effect" does not appear and the symbol effect (effect pattern) based on the variation pattern 2 is only executed. Become.

Here, with respect to the operation reception effect (additional reception effect) shown in FIG. 400, the effect sound of "BGM reproduction" based on the variation pattern 2 (predetermined variation pattern) maintains the output state in the non-suppressed mode. In the meantime, the first permissible sound is output at the timing tr31, the set time (valid period) occurs at the timing tr32, and the set time ends without the automatic button function being enabled at the timing tr33. , These are as described above with reference to FIG. 390 and the like, and thus the description thereof will be omitted. That is, the operation reception effect (additional reception effect) shown in FIG. 400 is not particularly disclaimed as "the content of the effect when the low expectation non-suppressed reception effect is executed in the non-automatic reception mode" shown in FIG. 390. The parts are basically the same, and the above-mentioned related effects, other examples, and modified examples can be appropriately adopted.

However, in the operation reception effect (additional reception effect) related to this effect example, as shown in FIG. 400, an example in which the post-operation effect corresponding to the effect reception is executed in the mode of the above-described alternative example in FIG. 390. It is described as. Therefore, in the operation reception effect (additional reception effect) shown in FIG. 400, when the effect reception is performed within the set time (valid period) (timing tr32a in the figure), the effect reception is based on the fact that the effect reception is performed. Then, "post-operation display effect (liquid crystal display) in the effect display device 1600 (first effect member)" and "post-operation effect sound output (effect sound) by the speaker (second effect member)" are used as post-operation effects. At least it will be generated, but for the post-operation effect,
-While the "post-operation display effect (liquid crystal display) in the effect display device 1600 (first effect member)" is terminated at a predetermined timing that arrives after the timing tr33 regardless of the timing when the effect reception is performed. ,
-The "post-operation effect sound output (effect sound) by the speaker (second effect member)" is executed in such a manner that it ends when a predetermined fixed time elapses from the timing when the effect reception is performed. It will be.

FIG. 401 is a time chart showing the effect content that appears when the fluctuation pattern 3 is selected in the fluctuation pattern determination.

As shown in FIG. 401, when the variation pattern 3 is selected as the result of the variation pattern determination, any result is obtained in the effect determination (notice determination according to the variation pattern 3, etc.) performed at the start of the symbol variation. Regardless of whether or not it is performed, at the timing tr40 in the symbol effect based on the fluctuation pattern 3, the process of changing the effect sound of the "BGM reproduction" to the above-mentioned "strong suppression mode" is performed, and the "strong suppression mode" is performed. At the timing tr41 that arrives while the above appears, an "intrinsic reception effect" is generated as a symbol effect based on the fluctuation pattern 3 (from the timing tr41 to the end of the post-operation effect).

Here, the variation pattern 3 according to this production example is the same as the “specific variation pattern shown in FIGS. 391 to 393, or FIGS. 395 to 398”. Therefore, with respect to the operation reception effect (intrinsic reception effect) shown in FIG. 401, the effect sound of "BGM reproduction" based on the variation pattern 3 (specific variation pattern) is strongly suppressed (for example, silence (volume 0)). When the timing tr41 arrives, the first permissible sound is output, the set time (valid period) occurs at the timing tr42, and the set time is set. When the "timing tr42A" before the elapsed timing tr43 arrives without the production reception, the above-mentioned automatic button function is enabled. Regarding these, "FIGS. 391 to 393 or FIG. Since it is as described above with reference to "395 to FIG. 398" and the like, the description thereof will be omitted. That is, the operation reception effect (intrinsic reception effect) shown in FIG. 401 is the same as the effect content of the “suppression / automatic reception effect” shown in FIG. (Fig. 393, Fig. 395, Fig. 398, etc.) can also be appropriately adopted.

In this regard, in the pachinko machine 1 according to this embodiment, at least in the normal gaming state, during the period in which the effect sound of "BGM reproduction" is set to the strongly suppressed mode, "intrinsic reception" is performed as a pattern effect based on the fluctuation pattern. Although "effect" may occur, "additional reception effect" that is additionally executed for the pattern effect based on the fluctuation pattern does not occur, whereas "BGM reproduction" occurs. During the period when the effect sound of "" is set to the non-suppressed mode, "intrinsic reception effect" which is a symbol effect based on the fluctuation pattern may occur, and additionally to the symbol effect based on the fluctuation pattern. In some cases, an "additional reception effect" to be executed may occur.

That is, in this case, when the operation reception effect occurs while the effect sound of the "BGM reproduction" based on the fluctuation pattern is set to the strong suppression mode, the possibility that the operation reception effect is the "additional reception effect" is excluded. Therefore, it becomes possible to generate a set time (valid period) in which the effect reception is allowed while an environment is formed in which the operation reception effect is executed in which mode. .. On the other hand, when the operation reception effect occurs while the effect sound of "BGM reproduction" is output in the non-suppressed mode, it can be recognized that the additional reception effect may have occurred. It is expected that the game will be maintained.

In order to preferably obtain such an action effect, in addition to the case where the "additional reception effect" and the "intrinsic reception effect" appear in separate variation patterns 2 and 3, one variation pattern (for example, , It is desirable that the "additional reception effect" and the "intrinsic reception effect" can appear in sequence even within the effect according to the specific variation pattern (variation pattern 3)). It is desirable that the "additional reception effect" occurs at a timing prior to the "intrinsic reception effect".

More preferably, in the production corresponding to one fluctuation pattern (specific fluctuation pattern), the production sound of "BGM reproduction" is set to the non-suppressed mode, and the "additional reception production" and the "intrinsic reception production" are performed. "Is made possible to appear in sequence, and while the effect sound of" BGM reproduction "is in a strongly suppressed mode, the" intrinsic reception effect "is made possible to appear further. According to such a configuration, when it is possible to grasp whether "additional reception effect" or "intrinsic reception effect" is generated depending on the situation of the suppression mode (strong suppression mode). , When it is difficult to grasp which of "additional reception effect" and "intrinsic reception effect" is occurring (non-suppressed mode), a suppressed mode for the effect sound of "BGM reproduction" appears. Through this, it will be possible to improve the taste of games.

Furthermore, if an operation reception effect (intrinsic reception effect) occurs while the effect sound of "BGM reproduction" is set to a strong suppression mode in the symbol effect according to a specific fluctuation pattern, the internal reception effect is present. It is desirable that the "additional reception effect" does not occur within the period from the end of the reception effect to the stop of the symbol variation. According to such a configuration, there is a possibility that the operation reception effect is an "additional reception effect" when the operation reception effect occurs while the effect sound of the "BGM reproduction" is set to the strong suppression mode. Not only will it be excluded, but even the possibility that an "additional reception effect" will appear before the symbol change is stopped will be eliminated, so that an "additional reception effect" will occur. On the other hand, in which mode (acceptable reception sound, type of operation means, mode of post-operation effect, etc.) the generated "intrinsic reception effect" is executed without giving any expectation. You will be able to concentrate.

In addition, when the "additional reception effect" occurs, the "intrinsic reception effect (both non-suppressed mode and strongly suppressed mode)" occurs after the "additional reception effect" does not occur. As described above, it is desirable to increase the ratio of execution in a mode with a high degree of expectation (acceptable reception sound, type of operation means, mode of post-operation effect, etc.).

Further, as described above, when the effect sound of "BGM reproduction" is set to the strong suppression mode, the operation reception effect (intrinsic reception effect) is always generated during the period in which the strong suppression mode is set. You may. In this case, among the plurality of fluctuation patterns that are candidates for selection in the fluctuation pattern determination, "a strong suppression mode is set, but an operation reception effect (intrinsic reception effect) is performed during the period of the strong suppression mode. The "variation pattern that does not occur" is not included, and the "variation pattern that generates the operation reception effect (intrinsic reception effect) during the period of the strong suppression mode" is included. .. Alternatively, even if the effect sound of "BGM reproduction" is set to the strong suppression mode, the period in which the operation reception effect (intrinsic reception effect) is set to the strong suppression mode may end without being generated. It may be. In this case, among the plurality of fluctuation patterns that are candidates for selection in the fluctuation pattern determination, "a strong suppression mode is set, but an operation reception effect (intrinsic reception effect) is performed during the period of the strong suppression mode. A variation pattern that does not occur and a variation pattern that generates an operation reception effect (intrinsic reception effect) during the period of the strong suppression mode when the strong suppression mode is set are included. ..

Further, in the pachinko machine 1 according to this embodiment, if an operation reception effect (intrinsic reception effect) occurs while the effect sound of "BGM reproduction" is in the "strong suppression mode", the "strong" effect is generated. Even if the player does not notice that the mode is "suppressed", it is possible to recognize that the possibility that "additional reception effect" is occurring is excluded based on the following effect elements.

That is, when the "intrinsic reception effect" occurs while the effect sound of the "BGM reproduction" is in the "strong suppression mode", first, even when the first allowable sound is the "additional reception effect". Even if the production sound that can be output is output for the same time (in the figure, it is output in the "first mode"), based on the first permissible sound, it is not an "additional reception production" but a "" It makes it possible to recognize that "intrinsic reception production" is occurring. More specifically, the first permissible sound (see FIG. 400) output when the "additional reception effect" is generated ends halfway through the output even if the effect reception is performed while in the output state. While it is output over a predetermined time without letting it, it is output when the "intrinsic reception effect" occurs while the effect sound of "BGM playback" is in the "strong suppression mode". When the effect reception is performed while the first permissible sound (see FIG. 401) is in the output state, the output is terminated halfway based on the effect reception.

Further, in the pachinko machine 1 according to this embodiment, in addition to the first allowable sound, when the "intrinsic reception effect" is generated while the effect sound of the "BGM reproduction" is in the "strong suppression mode", in addition to the first allowable sound, Since the second permissible sound is also output, the possibility that "additional reception effect" is generated is eliminated by confirming whether or not the second permissible sound is output. It is also possible to recognize that. However, as described above, the second permissible sound does not necessarily have to be prepared.

Further, in the pachinko machine 1 according to this embodiment, as shown in FIGS. 400 and 401, the operation-related display (display prompting the operation) that appears within the set time (valid period) in which the production reception is allowed is also provided. , When "intrinsic reception effect" is occurring (with message display) while the effect sound of "BGM playback" is in "strong suppression mode", "additional reception effect" is occurring. It is designed to be different depending on the case (no message is displayed), and it is possible to recognize that the possibility that the "additional reception effect" is generated is excluded by this as well.

Further, in the "intrinsic reception effect" generated while the effect sound of the "BGM reproduction" is in the "strong suppression mode", the above-mentioned automatic button function can be enabled, whereas the above-mentioned automatic button function can be enabled. In the "additional reception effect", the above-mentioned automatic button function is not enabled, and this also excludes the possibility that the "additional reception effect" is occurring. It is possible to recognize.

In this way, when the "intrinsic reception effect" occurs while the effect sound of the "BGM reproduction" is in the "strong suppression mode", various effects other than the effect elements related to the "suppression mode" are produced. It is relatively excluded that the possibility that "additional reception effect" is occurring is excluded because the element has a different aspect from that when "additional reception effect" is occurring. It can be easily recognized, and it becomes possible to promote concentration on the "intrinsic reception production".

On the other hand, if the "intrinsic reception effect" occurs while the effect sound of the "BGM playback" is in the "non-suppressed mode", the "additional reception effect" and various production elements have something in common. By making it difficult to recognize which of the "intrinsic reception effect" and the "additional reception effect" is occurring, the "additional reception effect" is generated. We are trying to provide a directing effect that makes us aware of the possibility of being present.

FIG. 402 is a time chart showing the content of the effect that appears when the “intrinsic reception effect” as the pattern effect based on the fluctuation pattern is generated while the effect sound of the “BGM reproduction” is set to the “non-suppressed mode”. Is. The "intrinsic reception effect" shown in FIG. 402 corresponds to the variation pattern when a variation pattern different from the "variation pattern capable of generating the operation reception effect shown in FIGS. 400 and 401" is selected. It may be generated as a design effect. However, here, it is assumed that when the same variation pattern (specific variation pattern) as the operation reception effect shown in FIGS. 400 and 401 is selected, it occurs as a symbol effect corresponding to the specific variation pattern. ..

As shown in FIG. 402, the “intrinsic reception effect” that occurs in the “non-suppressive mode” is also the “intrinsic” that occurs in the “strongly suppressed mode”. Similar to the "target reception effect", regardless of which result is obtained in the effect determination (notice determination), it always occurs when a predetermined timing (here, timing tr71) in the symbol effect arrives. It has become an immanence.

However, the first permissible sound (first aspect) output when the "intrinsic reception effect" shown in FIG. 402 is generated is the first permissible sound output when the "additional reception effect" shown in FIG. 400 occurs. Similar to the sound (first aspect), even if the production reception is performed while the output state is in effect, the output is not terminated halfway and is output over a predetermined time (timing tr72a). .. Therefore, when the first permissible sound is output in the first aspect, it is difficult to distinguish whether the "intrinsic reception effect" or the "additional reception effect" is generated based on the first allowable sound. ..

Further, in the "intrinsic reception effect" shown in FIG. 402, the second allowable sound is not output together with the output of the first allowable sound (first aspect), and this point is also shown in FIG. 400. It is the same as "additional reception production".

Further, in the "intrinsic reception effect" shown in FIG. 402, the operation means to be operated is also used as the operation-related display (display prompting the operation) that appears within the set time (valid period) in which the effect reception is allowed. Only the imitated image and the gauge display suggesting the remaining time are displayed, and the message display is not displayed. In this respect as well, the same as the "additional reception effect" shown in FIG. 400. It has become.

Further, in the "intrinsic reception effect" shown in FIG. 402, the target to which the operation opportunity is given is limited to the "operation button 410", and the "sword decoration body 5001" is not the target to be operated. This point is also the same as the "additional reception effect" shown in FIG. 400.

Further, in the "intrinsic reception effect" shown in FIG. 402, if the operation is not detected within the set time (valid period), the above-mentioned automatic button function is not enabled, and the post-operation effect is performed. The timing tr73 at which the set time (valid period) ends without occurring has arrived, and this point is also the same as the "additional reception effect" shown in FIG. 400.

In this way, when the "intrinsic reception effect" occurs while the effect sound of the "BGM reproduction" is in the "non-suppressed mode", the effect sound of the "BGM reproduction" is set to the "strong suppression mode". Unlike the case where "intrinsic reception effect" occurs, various production elements are common to the time when "additional reception effect" occurs, and "additional reception effect" may occur. You will be able to be sexually aware.

However, in the pachinko machine 1 according to this embodiment, while the effect sound of "BGM reproduction" is in the "non-suppressed mode", "intrinsic reception effect (intrinsic reception effect in which the automatic button function is not enabled)". When "" occurs, there are cases where the reception allowable sound (first allowable sound) is output, and there are cases where the set time is generated without outputting the reception allowable sound (first allowable sound) itself. .. On the other hand, when the "additional reception effect" occurs while the effect sound of the "BGM reproduction" is in the "non-suppressed mode", the reception allowable sound (first allowable sound) itself is not output. The set time is not generated, and the reception allowable sound (first allowable sound) is always output.

According to such a configuration, when the production reception is permitted while the production sound of "BGM reproduction" is in the "non-suppressed mode", when the reception allowable sound is output, the "intrinsic reception production" is performed. While it is difficult to recognize which of "additional reception effect" and "additional reception effect" is occurring, when the reception allowable sound is not output, "internal reception effect" is displayed instead of "additional reception effect". You will be able to recognize that you are in a state of occurrence. Regarding whether or not the reception allowable sound (first allowable sound) is output when the "intrinsic reception production" is generated while the production sound of the "BGM reproduction" is in the "non-suppressed mode". , It is desirable that it is determined according to the type of fluctuation pattern, not according to the effect judgment. "Internal reception effect" in the non-suppressed mode in which the reception allowable sound (first allowable sound) is output, and "intrinsic reception effect" in the non-suppressed mode in which the reception allowable sound (first allowable sound) is not output. May be sequentially executed within the same symbol effect (for example, a symbol effect based on a specific fluctuation pattern).

Further, according to the above configuration, when an operation reception effect in which the automatic button function is not enabled appears, and when the reception allowable sound (first allowable sound) is output, "intrinsic reception effect" and "additional reception effect" While it is difficult to recognize which of the above is occurring, when the reception allowable sound (first allowable sound) is not output, it is possible to recognize that the operation reception effect is an "intrinsic reception effect". Will be.

In the "additional reception effect", it has been described that the first allowable sound can be output in a mode different from the first aspect based on the result of the effect determination (notice determination). When the "intrinsic reception effect" occurs while the effect sound of the "BGM reproduction" is in the "non-suppressed mode", it may not be output (for example, the "specification" shown in FIG. 394. Aspect "). However, for the different modes, it is desirable that the first permissible sound is generated at a lower rate than that of the first permissible sound being output in the first mode.

Regarding the "intrinsic reception effect" shown in FIG. 402, another example or modification of the operation reception effect shown in FIG. 390 may be appropriately used for a portion not otherwise specified.

In the production examples shown in FIGS. 399 and 400, for convenience of explanation, it is shown as if the production determination is performed while the symbol production is being performed, but the production determination is actually performed. Is performed at the start of the symbol change.

In addition, in the production example shown in FIGS. It may be different from. For example, when a big hit is obtained by the big hit judgment, it is as shown in the production example shown in FIGS. 390 to 402, whereas when the big hit is lost by the big hit judgment, FIGS. The post-operation effect may be performed in a mode different from the effect example shown in 402.

As described above, the effect control on the peripheral control board 1510 has been conventionally realized by executing a combination of a program for individually controlling various effect devices and a program for linking a plurality of effect devices. These programs were described by program codes representing the operation contents and control procedures of the effect device for each content of the notice in addition to the commands related to the fluctuation pattern, and were created by a programmer having advanced technology. In the liquid crystal drawing, each effect drawing data is called in the frame in which the effect is executed, and a plurality of effect drawings (background, pattern, notice, hold, etc.) are combined.

However, in recent game machines, in order to improve the performance of hardware and the interest of the game machine, it is required to execute a wide variety of productions, and it is necessary to realize complicated production control. As a result, advanced technology is required for individual programmers, development man-hours increase, and it becomes difficult to secure the necessary personnel (programmers) both qualitatively and quantitatively. Further, as the total amount of the program code of the effect control program increases, the man-hours required for the test for the purpose of confirming the operation of the gaming machine and improving the quality also increase.

Therefore, as described above, the peripheral control board 1510 of the present embodiment may realize the effect executed in cooperation with the liquid crystal drawing (image display) by the program code in order to shorten the development period and improve the quality. Instead, the program data for the game machine is output by the tool that creates the liquid crystal drawing effect, and various effects are executed based on the output program data, thereby shortening the development period and improving the quality. I try to do it.

More specifically, the peripheral control board 1510 prepares scenario data configured as a combination of a plurality of blocks, each of which indicates the content of the effect. Each of the blocks is attached with a flag (availability information) indicating whether or not the effect based on the block can be executed. This flag (availability information) is stored as, for example, rewritable information on the RAM.

The scenario data is configured as, for example, a time-series combination of blocks for the number of effects prepared as candidates that can be executed based on the result of the effect determination. That is, when the start condition for starting the symbol variation is satisfied, first, an effect determination is made as to which type of effect is to be generated among those effects, and when the result is obtained, the effect is determined. Based on the obtained result, the flag (availability information) is set to the on state for the block corresponding to the effect type for which the judgment result to be executed is obtained, and the judgment result to be executed is obtained. For blocks corresponding to the production type that could not be performed, the flag (availability information) is maintained in the off state. As a result, after the symbol fluctuation (fluctuation pattern) is started, the scenario data is processed (analyzed) in chronological order (every unit time (1 frame)) to correspond to the block set in the on state. Only the type of effect will be selectively executed.

Here, as for the scenario data, different data may be prepared for each type of fluctuation pattern, or data may be prepared independently of the fluctuation pattern. If different data are prepared for each type of fluctuation pattern, only the blocks corresponding to the production types that may occur separately for each fluctuation pattern will be configured as scenario data combined in chronological order. Of those blocks, only the flag (availability information) of the block determined to be executed is operated in the ON state. On the other hand, when it is prepared as data commonly prepared for each fluctuation pattern, blocks corresponding to all production types (numbers corresponding to blocks) are configured as scenario data stored by a table structure or the like. Therefore, it may be realized by operating only the flag (availability information) of the block determined as the execution target among those blocks in the ON state. Further, the scenario data prepared without depending on the fluctuation pattern may be prepared according to the type of processing read during the processing (analysis) of the block (described later in "" "Scenario data related to post-operation production" etc.), in this case, scenario data corresponding to the type of fluctuation pattern and scenario data not corresponding to the type of fluctuation pattern will be prepared respectively, and correspond to the type of fluctuation pattern. Since the scenario data that is not used can be commonly used in a plurality of types of fluctuation patterns, the processing load and storage capacity can be suitably suppressed.

However, due to the configuration of the gaming machine, display or non-display of effects related to the lottery, replacement of effects and symbols, interactive effects for external input by the player, etc. occur, so each block operated in the ON state is executed. It is impossible to realize all the productions by itself.

Therefore, in the peripheral control board 1510 according to the present embodiment, the processing identification information (effect SW) for calling the program for executing the effect at a predetermined timing or executing the predetermined control is in the block or in the block. It can be set (embedded) in the liquid crystal display scheduler data associated with. Here, the processing identification information (effect SW) is prepared for each type of the program to be called, and each of them is set to the on state or the off state. Alternatively, processing identification information (effect SW) that can always function as an on state may be prepared. As a result, when the processing identification information is acquired (detected) at a predetermined timing while processing (analyzing) the scenario data, the block, the liquid crystal display effect scheduler data, etc., it depends on the type of the acquired processing identification information. The processing of the contents will be called, and the called processing will be executed. The processing identification information may indicate the number of the program function to be called, or may indicate the number in the table in which the number of the program function to be called is stored. It may be.

When the peripheral control board 1510 acquires (detects) the embedded processing identification information in the execution analysis of scenario data, blocks, liquid crystal effect scheduler data, etc., the peripheral control board 1510 is a program function according to the type of the acquired processing identification information. Dynamically call (call back). Depending on the type (processing content) of the program function called by the callback, it is possible to execute effects other than the liquid crystal effect (for example, sound output, lamp lighting, operation of the accessory, etc.), and the flag It is also possible to perform processing such as setting information necessary for subsequent production control, such as setting and updating data in a predetermined area. In this way, by calling the program function based on the processing identification information, it is possible to realize the display or non-display of the drawing by a plurality of blocks, the effect and the replacement of the symbol, and the interactive effect for the external input by the player.

The program function called by the callback is built in the peripheral control unit 1530 in advance, and it is not necessary to newly create it for each model of the gaming machine. Therefore, even designers and planners who do not have advanced program knowledge need only produce and design various production contents, and otherwise set process identification information that calls a predefined program function. As a result, it is possible to easily realize this even with complicated production specifications. Furthermore, by creating a production block (LCD production scheduler data) for each production configuration unit using the production creation tool, it is possible to significantly shorten the development period, and in addition, the production content is based on random lottery results. By performing a test using flags (availability information) and processing identification information without performing a test, it is possible to simplify the test process and significantly reduce the time required for the test.

As described above, in the pachinko machine 1 according to this embodiment, the game control means (main control) capable of determining the jackpot and giving a privilege based on the determination result (winning of the jackpot) obtained. The image data is displayed in the display area based on the substrate 1310), the effect control means (peripheral control unit 1511) capable of executing processing related to various effects based on the fluctuation pattern according to the determination, and the processing performed by the effect control means. An image control means (liquid crystal display control unit 1512) for outputting to the image control means is provided, and the effect control means reads out time-series image information (the above-mentioned scenario data, blocks, liquid crystal effect scheduler data, etc.), and the time-series image information. It is provided with an image information processing means capable of executing a process for displaying an image based on the above.

Further, in the time-series image information (the above-mentioned scenario data, block, liquid crystal effect scheduler data, etc.) according to this embodiment, at least a part thereof may include processing identification information, and the image The information processing means can acquire processing identification information from time-series image information and call processing according to the type of the acquired processing identification information. As a result, while the processing related to the image is performed every unit time (for example, one frame), the processing related to the effect elements (lamps, sounds, movable bodies, etc.) different from the image is performed based on the schedule for displaying the image. Therefore, when different production elements collaborate to realize one production, it is possible to prevent the start time from shifting between those production elements. Become.

In this respect, as will be described later, in the pachinko machine 1 according to this embodiment, processing identification information is acquired for each unit time in the time-series image information read when the specific fluctuation pattern is executed as the fluctuation pattern. The section can be included. In such a configuration, when the time-series image information itself, which is the data for specifying the "process for displaying the image" in time series, includes the process identification information, which is the data for specifying to read the process. Since the time-series image information read when the specific fluctuation pattern is executed as the fluctuation pattern can include a section in which the processing identification information is acquired for each unit time, fine timing is provided. Even when it is necessary to perform the effect processing in the above, it is possible to suppress the occurrence of a deviation from the effect of the displayed image.

Further, as described above, in the pachinko machine 1 according to this embodiment, the production reception is performed while the production sound (BGM reproduction) of a specific type is output in a suppressed mode or silently, or is in a non-output state. It is said that the permissible special operation reception effect can be executed. This point will also be described later, but in the pachinko machine 1 according to this embodiment, the production reception is permitted by the permissible pre-operation related display performed when such a special operation reception effect occurs and the special operation reception effect. The display related to the allowed operation, which is performed when the player is in the operating state, is displayed based on time-series image information (scenario data or block described above, liquid crystal display effect scheduler data, etc.) different from each other. That is, in the special operation reception effect related to the above configuration, the effect reception is permitted while the specific type of effect sound is output in a suppressed mode or silently, or is in a non-output state. It will be expected to concentrate on. However, in exchange for this, there is a concern that the color rendering property will be poor as much as the production sound of a specific type is suppressed. In this regard, in the above configuration, the permissible pre-operation related display that is performed when the special operation reception effect is generated and the permissible operation-related display that is performed when the effect reception is permitted in the special operation reception effect are Since the images are displayed based on time-series image information that is different from each other, it is possible to realize various color rendering properties with respect to the display effect, and it is possible to suppress the deterioration of the game interest.

Further, as described above, in the pachinko machine 1 according to this embodiment, even if the operation is not detected within the period in which the effect reception is permitted, the special operation reception effect capable of generating the post-operation effect is executed. It is possible. This point will also be described later, but in the pachinko machine 1 according to this embodiment, the production reception is permitted by the permissible pre-operation related display performed when such a special operation reception effect occurs and the special operation reception effect. The display related to the allowed operation, which is performed when the player is in the operating state, is displayed based on time-series image information (scenario data or block described above, liquid crystal display effect scheduler data, etc.) different from each other. That is, in such a special operation reception effect, even if the operation is not detected within the period in which the effect reception is allowed, the post-operation effect can be generated. Therefore, it is possible to suppress the occurrence of a situation in which the player does not perform the operation, and as a result, the effect cannot be confirmed after the operation. Moreover, in the above configuration, the permissible pre-operation related display that is performed when the special operation reception effect is generated and the permissible operation-related display that is performed when the effect reception is permitted in the special operation reception effect are Since the images are displayed based on time-series image information that is different from each other, it is possible to realize a variety of color rendering properties for the display effect, and it is possible to suppress the deterioration of the game interest.

Further, as described above, the peripheral control unit 1511 according to this embodiment reads out the information corresponding to the image data to be displayed from the liquid crystal display scheduler data associated with the blocks, and controls the liquid crystal display by reading the read information. It is possible to output to unit 1512. This point will be described later, but as blocks, the first type block read after the wait time (wait processing period) required until a predetermined timing arrives and the block are read without the wait time (wait processing period). It is decided to prepare a type 2 block.

More specifically, the type 1 block is a predetermined wait time (wait processing period) until the availability information is set to the ON state at the start of the fluctuation pattern and the timing for starting the production arrives. It is possible to configure it as being read after a while. Regarding the type 2 block, for example, availability information corresponding to the type 2 block in the process called based on the process identification information acquired from the liquid crystal display effect scheduler data associated with the type 1 block. Is set to the on state, so that it can be configured to be read without a wait time (wait processing period).

That is, in this case, the type 2 block does not depend on the set value for the wait time (wait processing period), and can be used as data shared between a plurality of timings and a plurality of fluctuation patterns. As a result, it is expected that the processing load and the memory capacity will be reduced, and it will be possible to facilitate the production design and the production change.

Further, as will be described later, in the pachinko machine 1 according to this embodiment, among the time-series image information (block or liquid crystal effect scheduler data), the first time-series image information (first block or first liquid crystal effect) is produced. The second time-series image information (second block or second liquid crystal effect scheduler data) can be read while the process based on the scheduler data) is in the execution state, and the second time-series image information is read out. Then, the process based on the second time-series image information is changed to the execution state in place of the process based on the first time-series image information in the state of being executed. That is, in this case, it becomes possible to save the trouble of terminating the processing based on the first time-series image information in the middle, and it is expected that the processing load and the memory capacity will be reduced.

Hereinafter, such technical features will be described. In explaining the technical features, the "block" according to this embodiment will be described again. The "block" is the effect display device 1600. When the image displayed in is composed of "plurality of image elements (plurality of layers)", it is prepared separately for those image elements (layers), and the image elements are displayed. The image control means (liquid crystal display control unit 1512) is used for processing to read out information (image number) corresponding to image data (moving image or still image) to be output.

Here, the process for reading out the information (image number) corresponding to the image data (process in the peripheral control unit 1511) is executed in the "peripheral control unit steady process (FIG. 95)" started every frame. For each frame, it is determined whether there is information (image number) corresponding to the image data to be displayed at present based on the "block", and if there is such information, it is read out and each A drawing list is created based on the information read separately for each frame and transmitted to the image control means (liquid crystal display control unit 1512). As a result, the image control means (liquid crystal display control unit 1512) reads out the image data based on the drawing list, creates a display image, and then outputs the display image to the display area to display the effect display device 1600. The production will be realized.

Here, the "block" itself may be configured as a data structure for designating "information (image number) corresponding to image data" for each unit time. In this case, the above-mentioned "liquid crystal" Since it has a function as "effect scheduler data", it is not necessary to prepare "liquid crystal production scheduler data" separately from "block", and it is possible to omit this.

However, the "block" according to this explanatory example specifies the type of "liquid crystal display effect scheduler data", and is currently displayed based on the "liquid crystal display effect scheduler data" associated with the "block". It is determined whether there is information (image number) corresponding to the image data to be made, and if there is such information, it is read out and transmitted to the image control means (liquid crystal display control unit 1512). A plurality of "liquid crystal display effect scheduler data" may be associated with one "block". In this case, the "liquid crystal display effect scheduler data" may be executed in a predetermined order. Alternatively, any one of those "liquid crystal display effect scheduler data" will be selectively executed.

Further, in the "block" according to this explanatory example, the "liquid crystal effect" in which the schedule for each frame regarding the information (image number) corresponding to the "image data in the image control means (liquid crystal display control unit 1512)" is described. In addition to "scheduler data", information on which one to execute as "process related to lamp emission", information on which one to execute as "process related to moving body movement", and which one to execute as "process related to sound output". It also includes information about whether to execute it. That is, in this case, assuming that a "block" for realizing a specific advance notice effect is read out, "image processing in the effect display device 1600" and "image processing in the effect display device 1600" related to the specific advance notice effect are based on the "block". Since the "process related to lamp light emission", the "process related to the operation of the movable body", and the "process related to the sound output" are read and executed respectively, different production elements (image, lamp, movable body, sound) are read and executed. ) Collaborate to realize one effect (specific notice effect), it is possible to prevent the start time from being shifted between the effect elements.

As described above, the "block" constitutes one scenario data together with other blocks or by itself, and among the scenario data, the availability information is turned on. By selectively executing (analyzing) only the effect, the effect is executed in a mode according to the result of the effect determination.

However, regarding the scenario data and blocks, it is sufficient as long as the scenario data has a relationship such as "each of the scenario data can be configured as a combination of a plurality of blocks indicating the contents of the production", and is separate from the "block". The detailed implementation method is not limited, including the provision of "liquid crystal display effect scheduler data".

FIG. 403 conceptually shows an example of a processing procedure for realizing various display effects using "scenario data" and "blocks" when a specific fluctuation pattern is selected based on the result of a jackpot determination. It is a time chart. In FIG. 403, the "liquid crystal display effect scheduler data" is described as an "animation list", but these are synonymous.

As shown in FIG. 403, in the peripheral control unit 1511 according to this explanatory example, scenario data is prepared for each layer. For example, in the scenario data of “Layer 2”, a plurality of pieces indicating the content of the symbol effect are shown. The blocks (design block A, symbol block B, symbol block C, and symbol block D) are combined in chronological order. However, in this embodiment, scenario data such as layer 1 and layer 5 scenario data, in which only one block is prepared as a block indicating the content of the effect, is also included.

Further, as will be described later, the scenario data according to this explanatory example also includes "a block that is configured so that any one of the plurality of associated blocks can be selectively executed". , In this case, multiple blocks are operated by turning on only the unavailable information corresponding to the selected block among multiple blocks, and leaving the unavailable information corresponding to other blocks in the off state. Any one of them can be selectively executed. Alternatively, the block according to this explanatory example also includes "a block configured so that any one of the plurality of associated liquid crystal display effect scheduler data can be selectively executed". In this case, only the unavailability information corresponding to the selected LCD effect scheduler data is operated in the on state among the plurality of LCD effect scheduler data, and the unavailability information corresponding to the other LCD effect scheduler data remains in the off state. By setting the data, any one of the plurality of liquid crystal display effect scheduler data may be selectively executed.

Assuming that the starting condition for the symbol variation (holding digestion) is satisfied, the peripheral control unit 1511 first acquires information related to the results of various determinations from the main control board 1310. The information acquired in this way also includes information on the fluctuation pattern, and the peripheral control unit 1511 reads out the scenario data corresponding to the information (fluctuation pattern) and associates it with the scenario data as a candidate for execution target. It is determined which block (effect) is to be executed among the plurality of blocks (block corresponding to the notice effect). Then, among the plurality of blocks (effects) associated with the scenario data, for the block (effect) for which the effect determination to be executed is made, the availability information is operated (set) in the ON state and executed. For the block (effect) for which the effect judgment to be performed is not made, the availability information is left in the off state.

It should be noted that the availability information associated with each block (effect) is operated (set) in the off state when the symbol effect (variable effect by the decorative pattern) is started, such as when the scenario data is read out. ing. Then, based on the scenario data read in this way, the above-mentioned processing regarding which block availability information is to be operated (set) in the ON state is performed.

Here, for the "block" whose availability information is operated (set) in the ON state when the symbol effect is started, it is executed (analyzed) immediately after the symbol effect is started based on the scenario data, or the scenario. It is executed (analyzed) following other blocks (effects) started based on the data, or it is executed at the timing after a predetermined wait time (wait processing period) for the scenario data or block ( It will be analyzed). However, the block (effect) also includes "things that may be executed at a plurality of timings within one fluctuation pattern" and "things that may be executed in a plurality of fluctuation patterns". That is, when the symbol effect is started, if the mechanism is such that the availability information of all the blocks executed within the fluctuation is operated (set) in the on state, "even in the effect mode in which the same content appears". , It is necessary to prepare scenario data (or blocks) in which different wait times (wait processing periods) are set just because the execution timings are different. " That is, in this case, although the content of the effect is the same, another data is prepared and the effect is executed based on the data, so that there is a concern that the processing load and the memory capacity may be adversely affected.

Therefore, in the peripheral control unit 1511 according to this embodiment, when a specific fluctuation pattern is selected, a specific block (specific effect) is always executed, but when the symbol effect is executed, the specific block (specific effect) is executed. ) Is not operated (set) in the on state, and the design effect can be started in the off state. As such a specific block (specific effect), in FIG. 403, "appearance EF block E", "operation waiting block E", "post-operation block E", and the like correspond to these blocks. Will be described later. Of these, the "post-operation block E" is executed as an effect (an effect in which an effect content dedicated to the jackpot is prepared) that clearly indicates whether the jackpot has been won or lost.

Further, in the peripheral control unit 1511 according to this embodiment, even if the block (effect) for which the result of execution is obtained as a result of the effect determination is obtained, this is executed at another fluctuation pattern or at another timing. When there is a possibility that the symbol effect is executed, it is possible to start the symbol effect in the off state without operating (setting) the availability information in the on state when executing the symbol effect. Such blocks correspond to "operation waiting block A" and "appearance EF & operation waiting block D" in FIG. 403, but these blocks will also be described later.

In the example shown in FIG. 403, it is assumed that the start condition is satisfied at the timing ts1. Therefore, at the timing ts1, the scenario data predetermined for each layer is read out in a form corresponding to the type of the fluctuation pattern. Next, an effect determination is made as to which of the block associated with the scenario data read in this way and the availability information attached to the liquid crystal effect scheduler data is to be operated (set) in the ON state. Then, the operation (setting) for the availability information is performed based on the result of the effect determination. Then, the scenario data is executed (analyzed) for each layer after the operation (setting) for the availability information is performed in this way, so that the effect progresses in a manner according to the result of the effect determination.

However, instead of this, even if the effect determination according to the type of fluctuation pattern is performed before the scenario data predetermined for each layer is read out in a form corresponding to the type of fluctuation pattern. good. That is, in this case, the result of the effect determination in which the block associated with the read scenario data and the availability information attached to the liquid crystal effect scheduler data are executed before the scenario data is read. It will be operated based on.

Here, in "Layer 1" among the plurality of layers, regarding the "background image" that is displayed from the time when the symbol effect is not executed (the symbol is stopped and displayed and the game is not executed). It corresponds to the block of scenario data (block for normal background). Therefore, in "Layer 1", a new block is not read when the timing ts1 arrives, and the block (normal background block) that is already in the execution state is continuously executed (the block for the normal background). It will be analyzed).

More specifically, in the normal background block, which image data should be output as "image data for background image" stored in the liquid crystal display control unit 1512 at "which timing"? "LCD effect scheduler data for normal background", which is information about (time-series image information), is associated with the data. That is, the peripheral control unit 1511 executes (analyzes) the "liquid crystal effect scheduler data for the normal background" every unit time (1 frame), and as a result, "image data (moving image or moving image" for the background image or Each time the information corresponding to "still image)" is acquired, the information is transmitted to the liquid crystal display control unit 1512. At this time, one piece of information (drawing list) may be created together with the information obtained from other frames, and may be transmitted to the liquid crystal display control unit 1512 as the drawing list. As a result, the background depiction (normal background) according to the schedule defined in the "liquid crystal display scheduler data for the normal background" is displayed on the effect display device 1600. Regarding the blocks and scenario data associated with this "LCD production scheduler data for normal background", the timing when the power-on processing is completed and the corresponding production state (normal production state, high-accuracy production state, special production mode, etc.) It is desirable that the data be read at the timing of entering), and the background image (background moving image) having the same content is set as time-series image information to be displayed in a loop at predetermined time intervals. In addition, the liquid crystal display control unit 1512 does not create one piece of information (drawing list) together with the information obtained from other frames, but displays the information corresponding to the "image data (moving image or still image) for the background image". It may be sent to. In short, the information corresponding to the "image data (moving image or still image) for the background image" may be transmitted to the liquid crystal display control unit 1512 in any mode.

The normal background image displayed on "Layer 1" based on the normal background block is SP on "Layer 3" based on the "SP reach background block" and "SP ending background block" described later. When the background image at the time of reach is displayed, the background image on the "layer 3" is preferentially displayed and is hidden in the effect display device 1600. However, as an internal image processing, even if the background image at the time of SP reach is displayed on "Layer 3", "LCD effect scheduler data for normal background" is displayed on "Layer 1". The processing related to the normal background image based on the above is continuously executed, and it will not be in the non-execution state depending on the processing status of the SP background image on "Layer 3". It has become. Therefore, as shown in FIG. 403, in the period X after the scenario data corresponding to the background image at the time of SP reach ends, the normal background is displayed again, and thus the normal background is displayed. Originally, the "symbol block D" for displaying the stopped symbol is executed. As a result, when the jackpot symbol appears, it becomes possible to easily recognize in which production state the winner was won, and it becomes possible to preferably promote understanding of the game.

On the other hand, the "layer 2" corresponds to a block of scenario data (a block for a symbol) relating to a "effect symbol (a symbol displayed on the effect display device 1600)". Since the specific fluctuation pattern shown in FIG. 403 develops to the SP reach effect, the scenario data of "Layer 2" is associated with the "liquid crystal display effect scheduler data for pre-reach variation". "Symbol block A" is associated with "LCD effect scheduler data for normal reach variation", and "Symbol block B" is associated with "LCD effect scheduler data for SP reach variation". It is stipulated that the "block C" and the "design block D" associated with the "liquid crystal display effect scheduler data for the stop symbol" are sequentially executed (analyzed).

However, in recent years, during the period when the SP reach background is displayed, the "effect symbol" is often displayed small in the effect display device 1600, and further, after the SP reach background is displayed, it is temporarily displayed on the normal background. The production progress may be made such as "returned, and then the SP reach background is displayed again". That is, in this case, there is a concern that a deviation may occur when some abnormality occurs only by executing (analyzing) the display schedule related to the "directed symbol" and the display schedule related to the "SP reach background" for each layer. Therefore, the "design block C" associated with the "liquid crystal display effect scheduler data for SP reach variation" may be executed based on the display schedule related to the "SP reach background". In this case, the processing related to the background image functions to manage the schedule of the effect symbol.

For example, in order to call the "process of turning on the availability information of the symbol block C" at a predetermined timing in the "LCD effect scheduler data for the SP reach background" corresponding to the "SP reach background block" described later. By adding the processing identification information, it is possible to execute the "design block C" and the "design block D" based on the display schedule related to the "SP reach background". In this case, with respect to the "design block C" and the "design block D", the availability information of the "design block C" and the "design block D" is left in the off state when the symbol production is started, and the "design block A" is of course left in the off state. ] And "Symbol block B" are not included in the scenario data, and are configured as separate scenario data.

Further, in "Layer 3", it corresponds to a block of scenario data (SP reach background block, SP ending background block) regarding "background image after the SP reach effect is started". In this regard, the "background image after the SP reach effect is started" should not be displayed at the time when the symbol effect is started, but should be started from the middle timing of the symbol effect. Therefore, in the scenario data of "Layer 3", a wait time (wait processing period) that functions so as not to execute the block of "background image after the start of SP reach effect" is set until the corresponding timing is reached. There is. As a result, the "SP reach background block" and the "SP ending background block" are sequentially executed (analyzed) after a predetermined wait time (wait processing period) has passed since the symbol production was started, and the corresponding weight processing period is passed. Since the information can be read out for each frame, the background image of the SP reach effect appears on the effect display device 1600.

That is, in this case, the blocks include a first-class block (a block corresponding to layers 3 and 4 shown in FIG. 403, etc.) that is read after a wait time (wait processing period) until a predetermined timing arrives. The second type block (block corresponding to layer 1, layer 2, layer 5 to 7 shown in FIG. 403, etc.) that is read out without passing through the wait time (wait processing period) is included. Since the type 2 block does not depend on the set value for the wait time (wait processing period) and can be used as common data at all production timings, it promotes reduction of processing load and memory capacity. Not only is it expected, but it will also be possible to facilitate production design and production changes.

In this regard, in the SP reach production, the production content for the jackpot (for example, the production content for the character to win) and the production content for the loss are in the middle of the production after starting the display production with the same content regardless of whether the jackpot is successful or not. It is often configured to suggest a jackpot determination result by branching to one of the production contents (for example, the production content in which the character is defeated). At this time, even though the display effect of the same content is executed regardless of the hit of the big hit until the middle stage of the SP reach effect, they are divided into different blocks (block for big hit, block for loss). ) Or image data, there is a concern that the processing load and memory capacity will be adversely affected.

Therefore, in the pachinko machine 1 according to this embodiment, the scenario data related to the SP reach effect includes a block corresponding to the image data that can be shared between the big hit and the lost (SP reach background block) and the big hit. It is divided into blocks (SP ending background blocks) corresponding to different image data at the time of loss, and these are sequentially executed. As a result, it becomes possible to execute the SP reach effect while suppressing the processing load and the memory capacity.

By the way, in the scenario data related to the SP reach effect, the "SP reach background block" is read out after a predetermined wait time (wait processing period). Next, the "LCD effect scheduler data for the SP reach background" corresponding to the "SP reach background block" is read out. These processes are executed (analyzed) every unit time, but in the "LCD effect scheduler data for SP reach background", there is a section in which the same process identification information is acquired every unit time (1 frame). It is set so that the effect reception period (valid period) is generated by managing each frame of the liquid crystal effect scheduler data instead of managing the time by a timer or the like.

For example, in the "LCD effect scheduler data for SP reach background" shown in FIG. 403, the "LCD effect scheduler data for SP reach background" is executed (analyzed) separately from the information corresponding to the image data to be displayed at present. ) Immediately after the timing ts31, the processing identification information of "X1" is attached so as to be lined up for each frame. Each time the process identification information of the "X1" is read, the following "process X1" is read and executed.
Processing X1. Based on the operation detection information for a specific operation means (for example, the operation button 410), a process of determining whether to generate the post-operation effect corresponding to the "post-operation block C" is performed.

That is, in the pachinko machine 1 according to this embodiment, the section to which such processing identification information (here, “X1”) is attached for each unit time is the “effect reception period (in which production reception can be performed by operation). It functions as "valid period)", and in the "process X1", when the effect determination is made, the availability information of the "post-operation block C" associated with the "layer 6" is turned on. It is operated (set) to. As a result, the "post-operation block C" is read out every unit time for the corresponding time, and the "post-operation liquid crystal display effect scheduler" associated with the "post-operation block C" is read. In addition to the fact that "data C" is executed (analyzed) every unit time, "process related to lamp light emission" and "process related to movable body operation" associated with the "post-operation block C". , "Processing related to sound output" and the like are started to be executed, so that the post-operation effect corresponding to the "post-operation block C" can be generated.

In addition, even in the next frame in which each process associated with the "post-operation block C" is started to be executed in this way, the "SP reach background liquid crystal display scheduler" corresponding to the above "SP reach background block" is also executed. "Data" is executed (analyzed). Therefore, when the production reception is performed in the middle of the section (production reception period) to which the processing identification information (here, "X1") is attached every unit time, the "SP reach background" is also used in the next frame. The process identification information (here, "X1") is read from the "liquid crystal display effect scheduler data", and the above-mentioned "process X1" corresponding to the process identification information is executed. However, the "process X1" also includes a determination process as to whether or not each process associated with the "post-operation block C" has been started to be executed. By determining that the execution has been started, the "process X1" is terminated without performing any further processing based on the operation detection information.

For example, in the example shown in FIG. 403, four of the same processing identification information (here, “X1”) are arranged from the timing ts31, but they are read from the second processing identification information (here, “X1”). The production was accepted in the "processing X1", and the "post-operation liquid crystal display effect scheduler data C" associated with the "post-operation block C" was executed (analyzed) in the "layer 6". I'm assuming a case. In this case, although it is no longer necessary to read the third and fourth processing identification information (here, "X1") that is filled in in the figure, the "LCD effect scheduler for SP reach background" is lost. It will be read out naturally while executing "data" every unit time. However, each time it is read out in this way, a process such as "the post-operation effect has been executed, so the process X1 is terminated" is executed in the above "process X1" corresponding to the process identification information (here, "X1"). As a result, the processing related to the effect determination is substantially invalidated (the effect reception is not allowed).

On the other hand, when the effect determination is not made in the "process X1" (the determination that the post-operation effect is not executed is made), the "post-operation block C" associated with the "layer 6" is used. The process X1 is terminated with the availability information turned off. Then, until the section in which the same processing identification information (“X1” in this case) is acquired for each unit time (1 frame) is completed, the “LCD effect scheduler for SP reach background” is used for each unit time (1 frame). The process identification information (here, "X1") is read from the "data", and the corresponding "process X1" is executed. In the example shown in FIG. 403, since the above section ends at the fourth processing identification information (here, “X1”), the fourth processing identification information is read out and responds accordingly. When the effect determination is not made in the process X1, the post-operation effect corresponding to the "post-operation block C" is not executed, and the subsequent effects are advanced.

According to such a configuration, even after the post-operation effect is executed (even after the effect determination is made in the process X1 read from the second process identification information (X1)), "for SP reach background". The same process identification information (X1) for reading out "process X1 that can generate post-operation effect" from "liquid crystal display effect scheduler data" is acquired. However, since it becomes possible to substantially function as the production reception period (valid period) only by analyzing such information, it is possible to preferably facilitate and standardize the production design. Become.

Note that FIG. 403 merely shows such a process as a concept, and in reality, the process identification information is not acquired only over four frames. If it functions as an effect reception period, it is usually set as a section in which the same processing identification information is acquired over a period of about 90 frames. This is not limited to the production reception period that occurs at the timing ts31, and the same can be said for the production reception period that occurs at other timings. Further, as described above, such processing identification information may be attached to the block side instead of the liquid crystal display effect scheduler data side, or the liquid crystal display effect scheduler data and the block may be provided as one data. good.

Moreover, in the "liquid crystal display effect scheduler data for the SP reach background" shown in FIG. 403, the processing identification information (here, "1") related to the operation effect is attached even at the timing ts41. However, the process identification information of the "1" does not read the "process in which the effect determination as to whether to generate the effect after the operation is performed", but the following "process 1" is read and executed. It has become.
Process 1. For the player, there is a precursory effect (appearance effect display, etc.) that suggests that the "effect acceptance period (valid period) in which the effect can be accepted by operation" will occur soon, and the effect acceptance period is occurring. A process for operating (setting) the availability information attached to the "appearance EF & operation waiting block D" for performing the operation waiting effect (such as the above-mentioned image and gauge display) that prompts the operation.

According to such a configuration, it is necessary to prepare "appearance EF & operation waiting block D (appearance EF & liquid crystal effect scheduler data D for operation waiting)" in addition to "LCD effect scheduler data for SP reach background". However, the "appearance EF & operation waiting block D" can be started to be executed at an appropriate timing (here, timing ts41) defined by the "LCD effect scheduler data for SP reach background". become. That is, in this case, the "appearance EF & operation waiting block D" may be started to be executed at any timing in the "LCD effect scheduler data for SP reach background" or at a plurality of timings, or the "LCD for SP reach background" may be started. Since it is easy to start the execution of the "appearance EF & operation waiting block D" from the "LCD production scheduler data" in a fluctuation pattern different from the production scheduler data, the production design is facilitated and standardized. Can be suitably measured.

Here, when the "appearance EF & operation waiting block D" is executed (analyzed), the "appearance EF & operation waiting LCD effect scheduler data D" corresponding to the "appearance EF & operation waiting block D" is read out. .. These processes will be executed (analyzed) every unit time, but in "Appearance EF & LCD production scheduler data for waiting for operation", first of all, while production reception is not allowed, "Production reception by operation" There is a section in which image information (moving image or still image) corresponding to a precursory effect (appearance effect display, etc.) suggesting that an effect reception period (valid period) that can be performed is soon to occur.

However, in the "appearance EF & LCD effect scheduler data for waiting for operation", the effect for waiting for operation (the above-mentioned image and gauge) that prompts the player to operate while the effect acceptance period has occurred from the middle of the process. A section in which image information (video or still image) corresponding to (display, etc.) is acquired appears, and in this section, the same processing identification information is acquired every unit time (1 frame). It has become.

That is, in the "appearance EF & LCD effect scheduler data for waiting for operation" executed (analyzed) from the timing ts41, "Y3" is set for each frame from the timing ts42, in addition to the information corresponding to the image data to be displayed at present. The processing identification information of is attached so as to be lined up. Each time the process identification information of the "Y3" is read, the following "process Y3" is read and executed.
Processing Y3. Based on the operation detection information for a specific operation means (for example, the operation button 410), a process of determining whether to generate the post-operation effect corresponding to the "post-operation block D" is performed.

In the pachinko machine 1 according to this embodiment, the section to which such processing identification information (here, “Y3”) is attached for each unit time is the “effect reception period (valid period) in which the production reception can be performed by the operation”. ) ”. Moreover, in the "processing Y3", when the effect determination is made, the "appearance EF & operation waiting block D (appearance EF & liquid crystal display effect scheduler data D for operation waiting)" which is the basis for reading the "processing Y3". The availability information of the "post-operation block D" associated with the same "layer 6" as above is operated (set) in the ON state.

That is, in this case, when the "post-operation block D" is read, various processes including the "post-operation liquid crystal display effect scheduler data D" associated with the "post-operation block D" are executed. By doing so, a post-operation effect corresponding to the "post-operation block D" is generated. In addition to this, the newly read "post-operation block D (post-operation LCD effect scheduler data)" is the "appearance EF & operation waiting block D (appearing EF & operation waiting)" that was in the middle of execution. In place of "LCD effect scheduler data D)", the execution state is set in "Layer 6".

According to such a configuration, only by reading the "post-operation block D", it is no longer necessary to read the "appearance EF & operation waiting block D" (appearance EF & operation waiting liquid crystal display) because the effect determination is made. Since it becomes possible to substantially invalidate (make the production reception unacceptable) the processing identification information of "Y3" for reading "Production scheduler data D)" and further "Processing Y3". , It becomes possible to favorably facilitate and standardize the production design, such as eliminating the need to separately perform determination and processing for terminating these. In the example shown in FIG. 403, it is read from the second processing identification information (here, “Y3”) in the “appearance EF & operation waiting block D (appearance EF & LCD effect scheduler data D for operation waiting)”. The production is accepted in the processed "processing Y3", and the "post-operation liquid crystal display effect scheduler data D" associated with the "post-operation block D" in the same "layer 6" is executed (analyzed). It is assumed that it is done. Therefore, in the example shown in FIG. 403, the “ray portion” in the “appearance EF & operation waiting block D (appearance EF & LCD effect scheduler data D for operation waiting)” is erased by overwriting (substantially). It corresponds to the invalidated section).

That is, it is also possible to attach the processing identification information of "Y3" to the "LCD effect scheduler data for SP reach background (block for SP reach background)" as in the effect reception period generated from the timing ts31. However, the "appearance EF & LCD effect scheduler data for operation waiting (appearance EF & operation waiting block D)" associated with the same layer as the "post-operation block D (post-operation LCD effect scheduler data D)" It can be said that it is possible to achieve such an excellent effect by attaching it to the ")" side.

However, in the peripheral control unit 1511 according to this embodiment, in the effect reception period generated from the timing ts42, as the process identification information for reading the process related to the operation effect: In addition to the above-mentioned "Y3" processing identification information included in "Appearance EF & Operation Waiting Block D)"
-The processing identification information of "Y2" included in the "LCD effect scheduler data for SP reach background (block for SP reach background)" is prepared.

That is, as described above, the “appearance EF & LCD effect scheduler data for operation waiting (appearance EF & operation waiting block D)” is the same “layer 6” as the “post-operation block D (post-operation LCD effect scheduler data)”. When the process identification information of "Y3" is attached to this, when the "post-operation block D (post-operation liquid crystal display effect scheduler data)" is executed. It is beneficial in that it will be erased (invalidated) by itself. However, the "appearance EF & LCD effect scheduler data for operation waiting (appearance EF & operation waiting block D)" is included in the "LCD effect scheduler data for SP reach background (SP reach background block)". It is executed (analyzed) by operating the availability information in the ON state based on the processing identification information of "". Therefore, if the frame processing to which the processing identification information of "1" is attached may be skipped when the processing load is high, the "appearance EF & LCD effect scheduler data for waiting for operation (appearance EF & operation) may be skipped. "Waiting block D)" itself will not be executed, and as a result, the production acceptance period (valid period) based on the processing identification information of "Y3" may not occur.

Therefore, the peripheral control unit 1511 according to this embodiment uses the process identification information for reading the process related to the operation effect (the process of determining whether to generate the post-operation effect based on the operation detection information). Prepare the processing identification information of "Y2" and the processing identification information of "Y3", and put the processing identification information of "Y2" on the "LCD effect scheduler data for SP reach background (SP reach background block)" side. The processing identification information of "Y3" is attached to the "appearance EF & LCD effect scheduler data for operation waiting (appearance EF & operation waiting block D)" side. In this way, as the process identification information for reading the process related to the operation effect, the availability information is set to the ON state at the start of the variation pattern, and the predetermined wait time (wait process) until the timing for starting the effect arrives. The wait time (wait process) is set by setting the availability information to the on state in the process executed based on the type 1 block that is associated with the type 1 block that is read after the period). By preparing both the ones that are associated with the type 2 block that is read out without the period), the above-mentioned risk that the production reception period (validity period) does not occur can be reduced. Will be able to.

Here, in the "process Y3" executed based on the process identification information of the "Y3", when the effect determination is made, the availability information of the above-mentioned "post-operation block D" is operated in the ON state. , The display effect after the operation (post-operation effect) in the effect display device 1600 is executed. On the other hand, in the "process Y2" executed based on the process identification information of the "Y2", when the effect determination is made, the "process related to lamp light emission", the "process related to the movement of the movable body", and the "process related to the sound output" are related. "Processing" is started for each. Therefore, even if the processing identification information of "Y3" is not read out, it is possible to realize the post-operation effect by the lamp light emission, the movement of the movable body, and the sound output by the processing identification information of "Y2". Has been done. The "process Y2" and the "process Y3" may be any as long as they can generate post-operation effects different from each other.

In the example shown in FIG. 403, three same process identification information (here, “Y2”) are arranged from the timing ts42, but they are read from the second process identification information (here, “Y2”). It is assumed that the effect reception is performed in the "processing Y2", and the post-operation effect by the lamp light emission, the movable body operation, and the sound output is executed by this. In this case, although it is no longer necessary to read out the third processing identification information (here, “Y2”) that is filled in in the figure, “LCD effect scheduler data for SP reach background”. Will be read out naturally while executing every unit time. However, each time it is read in this way, a process such as "the post-operation effect has been executed, so the process Y2 is terminated" is executed in the above "process Y2" corresponding to the process identification information (here, "Y2"). As a result, the processing related to the effect determination is substantially invalidated (the effect reception is not allowed).

By the way, in the pachinko machine 1 according to this embodiment, as described above,
-The "first special operation that allows production reception based on operation detection information" that occurs when a specific type of production sound (BGM playback) is output in a suppressed mode or silently, or is in a non-output state. Reception production (production reception period) "and
-The second special operation reception effect (effect reception period) that can generate a post-operation effect regardless of the effect state (effect mode) even if the operation is not detected.
Etc. can be executed as described above (see, for example, FIG. 178, FIG. 390 to FIG. 402, and the like).

In the first special operation reception effect, since the effect reception is permitted while the effect sound of a specific type is output in a suppressed mode or silently, or is in a non-output state, it is necessary to concentrate on the operation effect. Will be expected. However, in exchange for this, there is a concern that the color rendering property will be poor as much as the specific type of production sound (BGM reproduction) is suppressed.

Therefore, in the pachinko machine 1 according to this embodiment, the display related to the permissible pre-operation (precursor effect) performed when the first special operation reception effect is generated and the effect reception are permitted in the first special operation reception effect. The permissible operation-related display (such as the above-mentioned image and gauge display) performed when (during the valid period) is displayed based on blocks (liquid crystal display scheduler data) that are different from each other. As a result, it becomes possible to realize various color rendering properties with respect to the display effect, and it becomes possible to suppress the deterioration of the game interest.

Further, in the pachinko machine 1 according to this embodiment, the display related to the permissible pre-operation (precursor effect) performed when the second special operation reception effect is generated and the effect reception are permitted in the second special operation reception effect. The permissible operation-related display (such as the above-mentioned image and gauge display) that is performed when (during the valid period) is also displayed based on blocks (liquid crystal display scheduler data) that are different from each other. As a result, it becomes possible to realize various color rendering properties with respect to the display effect, and it becomes possible to suppress the deterioration of the game interest.

More specifically, in the "liquid crystal display effect scheduler data for SP reach background" shown in FIG. 403, the effect reception is permitted while the effect sound (BGM reproduction) of a specific type is output in the suppression mode. Moreover, even if the operation is not detected, it is possible to generate a special operation reception effect (first special operation reception effect or second special operation reception effect) that generates a post-operation effect, and when the timing ts51 is reached, the special operation reception effect is generated. The process identification information of "2" is read out in order to start the process related to the special operation reception effect. However, the process identification information of "2" does not read "process in which the effect determination as to whether to generate the effect after the operation is performed", but reads and executes the following "process 2". ..
Process 2. Availability attached to "Appearance EF block E" for performing precursory effects (appearance effect display, etc.) that suggests that an "effect reception period (valid period) in which production reception can be performed by operation" will occur soon Processing to operate (set) information in the on state

According to such a configuration, apart from the "SP reach background block (LCD effect scheduler data for SP reach background)", the permissible pre-operation related display (precursor effect) and the dedicated block (appearance EF block E). And, although it is necessary to prepare the liquid crystal display effect scheduler data (liquid crystal display effect scheduler data E for appearance EF) corresponding to the block, regarding the "block E for appearance EF", "liquid crystal display effect for SP reach background". The execution can be started from an appropriate timing (here, timing ts51) defined by the "scheduler data". That is, in this case, the execution of the "appearance EF block E" may be started at any timing in the "SP reach background liquid crystal display effect scheduler data" or at a plurality of timings, or the "SP reach background liquid crystal display effect scheduler data" may be started. Since it is easy to start the execution of the "appearance EF block E" from the "liquid crystal display effect scheduler data" in the fluctuation pattern different from the "data", it is preferable to facilitate and standardize the effect design. You will be able to do it.

Further, according to such a configuration, a plurality of modes having different expectations (expectations for the jackpot symbol to appear) are separately prepared for the permissible pre-operation-related display (precursor effect) and the permissible pre-operation-related display. Since it will be possible to appropriately combine them as to which combination to execute, it will be possible to make various variations as a production, and it will be possible to suppress the decline in the game interest. Become. In addition, even when adopted in other fluctuation patterns, it is possible to realize an effect such that the permissible pre-operation related display (precursor effect) is executed in a common mode, but the permissible operation related display is executed in a unique mode that is not shared. It will also be possible.

Here, when the "appearance EF block E" is executed (analyzed), the "appearance EF liquid crystal display effect scheduler data E" corresponding to the "appearance EF block E" is read out and executed (analysis). Will be done. When this "LCD effect scheduler data E for appearance EF" is executed (analyzed), the effect by the predetermined effect display (display related to the operation before the permissible operation) is performed from the "section where the effect reception is not allowed" to the "effect reception". Image information (moving image or still image) for execution is acquired in a form straddling the "permissible section".

However, in order to execute "a process that can make an effect determination to generate a post-operation effect based on the operation detection information" in the "appearance EF block E" and the "appearance EF liquid crystal effect scheduler data E". Since the processing identification information of is not attached, the effect reception period does not occur based on the block or scheduler data.

That is, in the peripheral control unit 1511 according to this embodiment, when the timing ts52 is reached in the “SP reach background block (liquid crystal display effect scheduler data for SP reach background)”, “3” is generated in order to generate the effect reception period. The processing identification information of is read out. The process identification information of "3" does not correspond to "process in which an effect determination to generate a post-operation effect is made based on the operation detection information", but is data associated with the following "process 3". ..
Process 3. "Availability information of" operation waiting block E "for performing an operation waiting effect (such as the above-mentioned image and gauge display) that prompts the player to operate while the effect acceptance period has occurred Processing to operate (set) to the on state

According to such a configuration, apart from the "SP reach background block (LCD effect scheduler data for SP reach background)" and the "appearance EF block E (LCD effect scheduler data E for appearance EF)", Allowed operation-related display (such as the above-mentioned image and gauge display) A block dedicated to this (block E for waiting for operation) and liquid crystal effect scheduler data (liquid crystal display scheduler data E for waiting for operation) corresponding to the block. Although it is necessary to prepare, the execution of the "operation waiting block E" may be started at an appropriate timing (here, timing ts52) defined by the "LCD effect scheduler data for SP reach background". become able to. That is, in this case, the execution of the "operation waiting block E" may be started at any timing in the "liquid crystal display effect scheduler data for the SP reach background" or at a plurality of timings, or the "liquid crystal display effect scheduler for the SP reach background" may be started. Since it is easy to start the execution of the "operation waiting block E" from the "liquid crystal display effect scheduler data" in the fluctuation pattern different from the "data", it is preferable to facilitate and standardize the effect design. You will be able to do it.

Here, with respect to the production reception period generated at the timing ts52, the same processing identification information (X1, Y3, etc.) is attached for each frame as in the production reception period in which the production reception is permitted at the timings ts31 and ts42. It may be configured as an effect section to be performed. However, in the example shown in FIG. 403, this is realized by a method different from the production reception period generated at the timings ts31 and ts42, and the other production reception periods are also configured by the method described below. It may be.

That is, regarding the effect reception period that occurs at the timing ts52, depending on the state operation (off state, on state) of the operation state flag, the effect reception is not allowed (off state) and the effect reception is allowed (on state). ) And will be adopted. When this method is adopted, the effect is based on the operation detection information every unit time (every frame) in the "peripheral control unit steady processing" shown in FIG. 95, not in the processing called based on the processing identification information. It is desirable to make a judgment.

For example, each time the "peripheral control unit steady processing" is performed, the operation status flag is confirmed, and the operation detection information is provided on condition that the operation status flag is turned on (provided that it is in the effect reception period). Based on the above, it is possible to make an effect determination to generate an effect after the operation. When the effect determination is made, the availability information of the block corresponding to the type of post-operation effect corresponding to the operation state flag that is in the ON state (here, "post-operation block E") is turned on ("Post-operation block E"). It will be set).

That is, in this case, only the types of post-operation effects are prepared for the operation state flags, and after determining which type of the operation state flags that are turned on, the post-operation effects are performed accordingly. The availability information of the corresponding block is operated (set) in the ON state. The process of turning off the operation status flag may be executed within the process of operating (setting) the availability information of the block corresponding to the post-operation effect to the on state, or the availability information may be turned on. It may be executed in the process called based on the process identification information attached to the block (liquid crystal display effect scheduler data) operated in the state.

The processing procedure when such a method is adopted will be explained again from the point where the processing identification information of the above "3" is read out at the timing ts52 and the above "processing 3" is executed. "Block E (liquid crystal display effect scheduler data E for waiting for operation)" is read and executed (analyzed).

The process of turning on the operation status flag may be performed in the above "process 3", but in the example shown in FIG. 403, the above "operation waiting block E (liquid crystal display effect scheduler for operation waiting)" At the first frame (processing timing) when "data E)" is executed (analyzed), the processing identification information of "Z1" associated with the following "processing Z1" is read out.
Processing Z1. Of the operation status flags, the process of turning on the operation status flag of the type associated with "post-operation block E".

As a result, the operation state flag corresponding to the "post-operation block E" is operated (set) to the on state at the timing ts52, and the determination based on the operation detection information is performed in the above-mentioned "peripheral control unit steady processing". By performing the process, the period during which the operation state flag is maintained in the ON state can be made to function as the "effect reception period". Further, while the operation status flag is maintained in the ON state in this way, the permissible operation-related display based on the execution (analysis) of the "operation waiting block E (liquid crystal display effect scheduler data E for operation waiting)" (described above). (Image, gauge display, etc.) will be executed. In the example shown in FIG. 403, the permissible pre-operation related display (block E for appearance EF (liquid crystal display effect scheduler data E for appearance EF)) associated with layer 7 and the permissible associated with layer 6 The display related to the middle operation (block E for waiting for operation (liquid crystal display effect scheduler data E for waiting for operation)) is executed so that the display periods partially overlap each other.

Here, the permissible pre-operation related display associated with the layer 7 is displayed on the front side of the permissible pre-operation related display associated with the layer 6, and is displayed preferentially. It has become so. Therefore, the effect reception is permitted from the time when at least a part of the permissible pre-operation related display is difficult to see due to the permissible pre-operation related display, and thereby, any degree of expectation as the permissible pre-operation related display. It is designed to provide a color rendering property such that it is possible to accept the production while it is difficult to visually recognize whether or not the mode with the above is appearing.

In this respect, when the production reception is performed at the timing ts53, which is an intermediate stage in which the production reception period has not yet ended, the same layer as the "operation waiting block E (liquid crystal production scheduler data E for operation waiting)". The process of operating (setting) the availability information of the "post-operation block E" associated with 6 in the ON state is executed in the above-mentioned "peripheral control unit steady process". As a result, each process (lamp, movable body, sound, etc.) including the "post-operation LCD effect scheduler data E" associated with the "post-operation block E" is executed. .. At this time, in layer 6, the "post-operation liquid crystal display effect scheduler data E" associated with the "post-operation block E" is associated with the "operation waiting block E" in the "waiting for operation". Since it is executed in place of the "liquid crystal display effect scheduler data E" for, it is not necessary to perform a special process for terminating the "operation waiting block E" halfway. At this time, the processing identification information of "Z3", which will be described later, included in the "operation waiting block E (liquid crystal display effect scheduler data E for operation waiting)" can be naturally deleted (disabled). Become.

Regarding the process of turning off the operation status flag, when performing the process of operating (setting) the availability information of the "post-operation block E" in the on state in the above-mentioned "peripheral control unit steady process". However, in the example shown in FIG. 403, the first frame when the above "post-operation block E (post-operation liquid crystal display effect scheduler data E)" is executed (analyzed) ( By reading the processing identification information of "Z2" and executing the following "processing Z2" corresponding to this at the processing timing), the processing based on the "post-operation block E" is executed after the production reception period is terminated. I try to do it.
Processing Z2. Of the operation status flags, the process of turning off the operation status flag of the type associated with "post-operation block E"

However, in the example shown in FIG. 403, the permissible pre-operation related display (block E for appearance EF (liquid crystal display effect scheduler data E for appearance EF)) is left in the screen (displayed state). As mentioned above, the production reception may be done. Therefore, in the "process Z2", it is determined whether the appearance EF block E (the liquid crystal display effect scheduler data E for the appearance EF) is in the execution state, and if it is in the execution state, the process of terminating it halfway is also performed. It is desirable to. However, after the "appearance EF block E (liquid crystal display effect scheduler data E for the appearance EF)" is continued without being terminated halfway, the image display based on the "post-operation block E" is displayed for the "appearance EF". Priority execution (displayed on the front side of the image display (layer) based on the appearance EF block E) is performed in a range (for example, the entire screen) that includes at least the entire range in which the image display based on the block E is performed. As a result, the image display based on the appearance EF block E may be hidden.

Further, in the "operation waiting block E (liquid crystal display effect scheduler data E for operation waiting)", when the process at the timing ts54 is executed (analyzed), the "process Z3" is supported in order to end the effect reception period. The processing identification information of the attached "Z3" is read out. Here, when the "operation waiting block E (liquid crystal display effect scheduler data E for operation waiting)" is executed (analyzed) at the timing ts54, the "post-operation block E (after operation) corresponding to the same layer 6 is executed. It means that the "operation waiting block E (liquid crystal display effect scheduler data E for operation waiting)" is not overwritten by the "liquid crystal display effect scheduler data E)", that is, the timing ts54 arrives. It means that the production reception is not done until. However, the production reception period generated from the timing ts52 is the same as when the production reception is performed, even if the production reception is not performed between the timing ts52 and the timing ts54. It functions as the above-mentioned "second special operation reception effect" for operating (setting) the availability information in the on state (the above-mentioned "automatic button function").

Therefore, in the "operation waiting block E (liquid crystal display effect scheduler data E for operation waiting)", the following processing is executed in the "processing Z3" executed based on the processing identification information of the "Z3" read at the timing ts54. It is supposed to be done.
Processing Z3. Among the operation status flags, the operation status flag of the type associated with the "post-operation block E" is turned off, and the availability information of the "post-operation block E" is turned on. The process of operating (setting) is performed

According to such a configuration, in the effect reception period generated from the timing ts52, the same block as when the effect was received is read even if the effect is not received within that period, and the block is read. Since the post-operation effect associated with is executed, it is possible to suppress a decrease in the game interest when the player forgets to operate. Further, the post-operation effect is not executed after the effect reception period (timing ts51 to ts52) is completed, but the "effect" is performed within the final frame (process of the timing ts52) of the process related to the effect reception period (timing ts51 to ts52). Since the process for reading the same block as when the reception was made is performed, it is possible to realize smooth production progress without causing a difference between when there is an operation and when there is no operation. become able to.

Further, according to such a configuration, the display image (model image or gauge display) based on the "operation waiting block E (liquid crystal display effect scheduler data E for operation waiting)" can be produced by the player's operation. A process of hiding the effect based on the fact that the effect has been received, regardless of whether the effect is received or the effect is received by enabling the automatic button function (here, "operation". Since the "rear block E") will be executed, even if the player forgets to operate it, the production can be advanced in the same manner, and the deterioration of the game interest can be suppressed. It will be expected.

Further, as shown in FIG. 403, the effect reception period generated from the timing ts52 is executed while the specific type of effect sound (BGM reproduction) is output in the suppressed mode at the time of the generation. It also functions as a "special operation reception effect". Even in the "first special operation reception effect" shown in FIG. 403, when the effect reception is performed, the specific type of effect sound (BGM reproduction) is not returned to the non-suppressed mode and the output in the suppressed mode is continued. Then, within the period during which the post-operation effect is being executed, it is set to return the effect sound (BGM reproduction) of a specific type to the output in the non-suppressed mode.

The "specific type of production sound" means the sound of "BGM reproduction" (BGM reproduction for normal background or SP background), but here, in particular, it corresponds to "SP reach background block". It corresponds to the sound (BGM reproduced sound for SP reach) output by executing the attached "process related to sound output". As for the suppression mode and method, the above-mentioned mode and method can be appropriately adopted.

In the above configuration, the operation reception effect (timing ts52 to ts54) is generated (or even if the effect reception is not performed) while the specific type of effect sound (BGM reproduction) is suppressed. When an operation reception effect is generated in which the same post-operation effect is executed as when Regarding E), they are executed based on blocks (liquid crystal display effect scheduler data) different from each other. As a result, it becomes possible to realize various color rendering properties with respect to the display effect, and it becomes possible to suppress the deterioration of the game interest.

Further, in the operation reception effect (first special operation reception effect, second special operation reception effect) at such timings ts52 to ts54, images displayed by blocks (liquid crystal display scheduler data) different from each other (permissible pre-operation related display). , Allowed operation related display) is displayed so that there are overlapping periods in time. Therefore, it becomes possible to realize the color rendering index (such as the above-mentioned visual difficulty) that is entwined between the "permissible pre-operation related display" and the "permissible operation related display", and the deterioration of the game interest can be suppressed. become.

On the other hand, an operation reception effect (or a post-operation effect occurs when the effect reception is not performed) that occurs when the "specific type of effect sound" is not suppressed, such as the operation reception effect generated at the timing ts41. In the operation reception effect), the permissible pre-operation related display and the permissible operation related display are displayed by the same block (liquid crystal display effect scheduler data). That is, such an operation reception effect is different from the operation reception effect at the timings ts52 to ts54 (the operation reception effect that suggests a big hit by the post-operation effect), and occurs according to the result of the effect determination (notice determination). Since it may or may not occur, the permissible pre-operation related display and the permissible operation related display should be displayed by the same block (liquid crystal display effect scheduler data), and the handling according to the judgment result should be facilitated. It can be said that it is more beneficial to make it.

However, even when the permissible pre-operation related display and the permissible pre-operation related display are displayed by the same block (liquid crystal display effect scheduler data) in this way, although it is on one layer, the permissible pre-operation related display There are times when both the display and the allowed operation-related display appear to overlap in time (both the allowed pre-operation related display and the allowed operation related display are displayed, for example, one of the allowed operation related displays. It is desirable to perform those effects (so that the parts are difficult to see).

Regarding the block of the operation-related display during the allowable operation (block E for waiting for the operation), the processing identification information read based on the block of the display related to the operation before the allowable operation (block E for the appearance EF (liquid crystal display scheduler data E for the appearance EF)). The availability information may be operated in the ON state within the processing according to the above.

The operation reception effect in which the effect reception is permitted at the timings ts52 to ts54 may be executed as at least one of the above-mentioned first special operation reception effect and the above-mentioned second special operation reception effect, for example. , 1978, 390, 393, 395, 398, 401, etc., and is executed as one of the above-mentioned operation reception effects (operation reception effects under BGM suppression). May be good. In this case, regarding the other operation reception effects among the operation reception effects shown in FIG. 403, for example, the above-mentioned operation reception effects (operation reception under non-BGM suppression) are referred to with reference to FIGS. 394, 400, 402, and the like. It may be executed as one of the production). In addition, each of these different examples of the operation reception effect, which will be described later, may be appropriately adopted.

For example, the operation reception effect (operation waiting block E) generated at the timing ts52 and the operation reception effect (appearance EF & operation waiting block D) generated at the timing ts42 use different blocks, but those operations are performed. In the reception production, the same reception allowable sound may be output when the production reception is performed (the first allowable sound shown in FIGS. 390 to 402).

In addition, in the operation reception effect (operation waiting block E) generated at the timing ts52, if the effect reception is performed during the output of the reception allowable sound, the output state is terminated halfway, but the operation reception effect (operation reception effect) generated at the timing ts42. In the operation waiting block E), various configurations are appropriately provided, such as maintaining the output state even if the production reception is performed during the output of the reception allowable sound (the first allowable sound shown in FIGS. 390 to 402). It is possible to adopt it.

By the way, regarding the scenario data related to the SP reach effect, a block corresponding to the image data that can be shared between the big hit and the lost (SP reach background block) and a block corresponding to the different image data between the big hit and the lost. As described above, these are divided into (SP ending background block) and executed in sequence. In this regard, in the peripheral control unit 1511 according to this embodiment, the timing ts55 for shifting from the “SP reach background block” to the “SP ending background block” is within the period during which the post-operation effect is executed. It is set to be sure to arrive at.

That is, in the operation reception effect in which the effect reception is permitted at the timing ts52, the effect reception (including the above-mentioned automatic button function) is performed at any timing within the effect reception period (timing ts52 to ts54). However, the predetermined time from the timing ts54 is set as the period during which the post-operation effect is always executed (the time required to execute the post-operation effect). Then, during the period in which the post-operation effect is always executed, the display based on the post-operation liquid crystal display scheduler data E corresponding to the “post-operation block E” (post-operation display effect on the effect display device 1600 (after operation). The effect)) is executed over the entire display area of the effect display device 1600, and is prioritized over the display based on the liquid crystal effect scheduler data for the SP end corresponding to the "SP end background block". (It is displayed on the front side of the image display based on the SP reach background block and the SP ending background block). Further, in this case, the display time of the image executed based on the post-operation block E is set as a longer time than the display time of the image executed based on the operation waiting block E, which is a long time. Minutes will function as "the period during which the post-operation effect is always executed".

Within the period during which the display effect (post-operation effect) corresponding to such "post-operation block E" is being executed, the "SP reach background block" should be shifted to the "SP ending background block". By doing so, the atmosphere of "display of SP reach background block (block shared by winning)" and "display of SP ending background block (block used only in winning)" will be completely different. Even if the production is designed so as to be, the sense of incongruity is not felt, so that the deterioration of the game interest can be suppressed.

Further, the scenario data of "Layer 4" and "Layer 5" is not related to any image, and is a block (liquid crystal display effect scheduler data) that functions only as time-series data for calling processing at a certain timing. It corresponds to. That is, the block (liquid crystal effect scheduler data) itself does not contain information corresponding to the image data to be displayed, and is not involved in any image display. A data structure (empty time-series image information) that can be said to be "data" is adopted. Even if such a block (liquid crystal display effect scheduler data) is executed (analyzed), no image is displayed on the layers 4 and 5 associated with the block (liquid crystal effect scheduler data).

There are two types of such data call blocks (liquid crystal effect scheduler data for data call). First, in the scenario data corresponding to "Layer 4", the timing ts21 to call the process at the start of the symbol variation. A wait time (wait processing period) that functions so as not to execute the data call block B (liquid crystal effect scheduler data for data call) is set until the arrival of. Then, when the timing ts21 arrives after such a wait time (wait processing period), the "data call block B" is executed (analyzed), and as a result, the "data call block B" corresponding to the "data call block B" is executed (analyzed). The liquid crystal effect scheduler data B for data recall is executed (analyzed).

Here, the processing identification information of "X2" is attached to the "data call block B" or the "data call LCD effect scheduler data B" corresponding to the "data call block B" for each unit time. The following "process X2" is executed each time the process identification information of the "X2" is read out.
Processing X2. Based on the operation detection information for a specific operation means (for example, the operation button 410), a process of determining whether or not to generate the post-operation effect corresponding to the "post-operation block B" is performed.

In this "data call block B (liquid crystal display effect scheduler data B for data call)", the section to which the processing identification information of "X2" is attached every unit time is "the effect reception that can be performed by the operation". It is designed to function as a "period (valid period)", and in the above "process X2", the availability information of the "post-operation block B" associated with the "layer 6" is turned on when the effect determination is made. The state is manipulated (set). As a result, the "post-operation block B" is executed (analyzed), and the "post-operation liquid crystal display effect scheduler data B" associated with the "post-operation block B" is executed (for each unit time). In addition to being analyzed), "processing related to lamp light emission", "processing related to moving body movement", "processing related to sound output", etc. associated with the "post-operation block B" are performed, respectively. When the execution is started, the post-operation effect corresponding to the "post-operation block C" can be generated.

In addition, even in the next frame in which each process associated with the "post-operation block B" is started to be executed, the above "data call block B (liquid crystal display effect scheduler data B for data call)" is still present. It is executed (analyzed). Therefore, when the production reception is performed in the middle of the section (effect reception period) to which the processing identification information (here, “X2”) is attached every unit time, the “data call block B” is also set in the next frame. (LCD effect scheduler data B for data recall) ”is read out from the process identification information (here,“ X2 ”), and the above“ process X2 ”corresponding to the process identification information is executed. However, the "process X2" also includes a determination process as to whether or not each process associated with the "post-operation block B" has been started to be executed. By determining that the execution has been started, the "process X2" is terminated without further performing the process based on the operation detection information, which will be described in the above-mentioned "process X1". That's right.

On the other hand, when the effect determination is not made in the "process X2" (the determination that the post-operation effect is not executed is made), the "post-operation block B" associated with the "layer 6" is used. The process X2 is terminated with the availability information turned off. Then, until the section in which the same processing identification information (“X2” in this case) is acquired for each unit time (1 frame) is completed, “data call block B (data call”) is used for each unit time (1 frame). The processing identification information (here, “X2”) is read from the “LCD effect scheduler data B)”, and the corresponding “processing X2” is executed. In the example shown in FIG. 403, since the above section ends with the sixth processing identification information (here, “X2”), the sixth processing identification information is read out and responds accordingly. When the effect determination is not made in the processed process X2, the subsequent effect is advanced without executing the post-operation effect according to the “post-operation block B”.

According to such a configuration, even after the post-operation effect is executed (even after the effect determination is made in the process X2 read from the third process identification information (X2)), the "data call block B" The same process identification information (X2) for reading out "process X2 that can generate post-operation effect" from "(LCD effect scheduler data B for data recall)" is acquired. However, since it becomes possible to substantially function as the production reception period (valid period) only by analyzing such information, it is possible to preferably facilitate and standardize the production design. Become.

Here, the block corresponding to the "layer 4" (liquid crystal display effect scheduler data) does not include the information corresponding to the image data to be displayed, and the "process X2" read from the process identification information of the "X2". Also, the "block waiting for operation" is not read out. Therefore, in the operation reception effect generated at the timing ts21, the effect reception is allowed in a state where the model image and the gauge display are not performed, and such an operation reception effect is described as the above-mentioned "empty time series image information". It is realized by.

According to such a configuration, the "data call block B (liquid crystal display effect scheduler data B for data call)" can be shared even when another fluctuation pattern is selected. By preparing scenario data with different wait time (wait processing period) setting values, it will be possible to make them appear at different timings.

On the other hand, in the scenario data corresponding to "Layer 5", the data call block A (liquid crystal effect scheduler data A for data call) is executed without passing the wait time (wait processing period). A substantial wait function is activated in the call block A (liquid crystal effect scheduler data A for data call). That is, in the data calling block A (liquid crystal display effect scheduler data A for data calling), no image information or processing identification information is read until the timing ts11 arrives, and when the timing ts11 arrives, "4" The processing identification information of is read out. However, the process identification information of the "4" does not read the "process in which the effect determination as to whether to generate the effect after the operation is performed", but the following "process 4" is read and executed. It has become.
Processing 4. For the player, there is a precursory effect (appearance effect display, etc.) that suggests that the "effect acceptance period (valid period) in which the effect can be accepted by operation" will occur soon, and the effect acceptance period is occurring. A process for operating (setting) the availability information attached to the "appearance EF & operation waiting block A" for performing the operation waiting effect (such as the above-mentioned image and gauge display) that prompts the operation.

According to such a configuration, although it is necessary to prepare a data call block A (liquid crystal effect scheduler data A for data call) in addition to the "appearance EF & operation waiting block A", the "appearance EF & operation" is required. Regarding the "waiting block A", the processing identification information of "4" is added from a block (liquid crystal effect scheduler data) different from the "data calling block A (data calling liquid crystal effect scheduler data A)". Since it becomes possible to call it appropriately only by itself, it becomes possible to preferably facilitate and standardize the production design.

Here, when the "appearance EF & operation waiting block A" is executed (analyzed), the "appearance EF & operation waiting LCD effect scheduler data A" corresponding to the "appearance EF & operation waiting block A" is read out. .. These processes are executed (analyzed) every unit time, but in "Appearance EF & LCD production scheduler data A for waiting for operation", first of all, while the production reception is not allowed, "Production by operation" A section is provided in which image information (video or still image) corresponding to a precursory effect (appearance effect display, etc.) suggesting that an effect reception period (valid period) that can be accepted will soon occur is acquired.

However, in the "appearance EF & LCD effect scheduler data A for waiting for operation", the effect for waiting for operation (the above-mentioned image and the above-mentioned image) that prompts the player to operate while the effect acceptance period is occurring from the middle of the process. A section in which image information (video or still image) corresponding to (gauge display, etc.) is acquired appears, and in this section, the same processing identification information is acquired every unit time (1 frame). It has become.

That is, in the "appearance EF & LCD effect scheduler data A for waiting for operation" executed (analyzed) from the timing ts11, "Y1" is performed every frame from the timing ts12, in addition to the information corresponding to the image data to be displayed at present. The processing identification information of "" is attached so as to be lined up. Each time the process identification information of the "Y1" is read, the following "process Y1" is read and executed.
Processing Y1. Based on the operation detection information for a specific operation means (for example, the operation button 410), a process of determining whether to generate the post-operation effect corresponding to the "post-operation block A" is performed.

In the pachinko machine 1 according to this embodiment, the section to which such processing identification information (here, “Y1”) is attached for each unit time is the “effect reception period (valid period) in which the production reception can be performed by the operation”. ) ”. Moreover, in the "processing Y1", when the effect determination is made, the "appearance EF & operation waiting block A (appearance EF & liquid crystal display effect scheduler data A for operation waiting)" which is the basis for reading the "processing Y1". The availability information of the "post-operation block A" associated with the same "layer 6" as above is operated (set) in the ON state.

That is, in this case, when the "post-operation block A" is read, various processes including the "post-operation liquid crystal display effect scheduler data A" associated with the "post-operation block A" are executed. By doing so, a post-operation effect corresponding to the "post-operation block A" is generated. In addition to this, the newly read "post-operation block A (post-operation LCD effect scheduler data A)" is the "appearance EF & operation waiting block A (appearance EF & operation waiting)" that was in the middle of execution. In place of "LCD effect scheduler data A)", the execution state is set in "Layer 6".

According to such a configuration, it is no longer necessary to read the "appearance EF & operation waiting block A" (appearance EF & operation waiting liquid crystal display) because the effect determination is made only by reading the "post-operation block A". Since it becomes possible to substantially invalidate (make the production reception unacceptable) the processing identification information of "Y1" for reading "Production scheduler data A)" and further "Processing Y1". , It becomes possible to favorably facilitate and standardize the production design, such as eliminating the need to separately perform determination and processing for terminating these. In the example shown in FIG. 403, it is read from the second processing identification information (here, “Y1”) in the “appearance EF & operation waiting block A (appearance EF & LCD effect scheduler data A for operation waiting)”. The production is accepted in the processed "processing Y1", and the "post-operation liquid crystal display effect scheduler data A" associated with the "post-operation block A" in the same "layer 6" is executed (analyzed). It is assumed that it has been done. Therefore, in the example shown in FIG. 403, the "ray portion" in the "appearance EF & operation waiting block A (appearance EF & LCD effect scheduler data A for operation waiting)" is erased by overwriting (substantially). It corresponds to the invalidated section).

In "Layer 4", it is decided to set an effect section in which processing identification information is attached to each frame on the "data call block B (liquid crystal display effect scheduler data B for data call)" side. However, the effect section may be set in the block read from the "data calling block" such as "layer 5". Further, also in "Layer 4", as shown in "Layer 5", this is realized by activating a substantial wait function in the data calling block (liquid crystal display effect scheduler data for data calling). May be good.

Further, in "Layer 5", an effect section in which processing identification information is attached to each frame is set on the block side read from "Data call block A (liquid crystal display effect scheduler data A for data call)". bottom. However, the effect section may be set in the "data call block A (liquid crystal display effect scheduler data A for data call)" as in "layer 4". Further, also in "Layer 5", as shown in "Layer 4", the data call block (liquid crystal display effect scheduler data for data call) itself is set to wait by setting a weight to realize this. May be good.

Further, in the example shown in FIG. 403, it is suggested that when the processing identification information of "1" or "4" is acquired, the "effect reception period (valid period) in which the production reception can be performed by the operation" will soon occur. To perform a precursor effect (display of appearance effect, etc.) and an operation waiting effect (such as the above-mentioned image and gauge display) that prompts the player to operate while the effect reception period has occurred. It was decided to execute the process of operating (setting) the availability information attached to the "appearance EF & operation waiting block" in the ON state. However, it is not always necessary to execute the precursor effect (appearance effect display, etc.), and the operation waiting effect (the above-mentioned image and gauge) that prompts the player to operate while the effect acceptance period has occurred. It is also possible to execute a process of operating (setting) the availability information attached to the "operation waiting block" for performing (display, etc.) in the ON state. That is, in this case, as soon as the "operation waiting block" is read out, the process identification information associated with the "process in which the effect determination can be made" is acquired.

Further, as described above, the effect reception period generated at the timings ts12, ts21, ts31, and ts42 may be realized by setting the operation state flag as in the effect reception period generated at the timing ts51.

Further, in the example shown in FIG. 403, the processing identification information of "Y2" and the processing identification information of "Y3" are set to be read at the same timing, but are read at different timings. You may set it.

Further, as described above, in the example shown in FIG. 403, the block and the corresponding liquid crystal display effect scheduler data are separately provided, but these may be configured as one data.

Further, regarding the liquid crystal display effect scheduler data (block) in which the information corresponding to the image data is acquired every unit time (every frame), all of the liquid crystal display effect scheduler data (block) is obtained at the first processing timing (frame). It may be configured so that information corresponding to the moving image data over a period can be acquired. In this case, the information corresponding to the image data is acquired only at the first processing timing (frame), and after that, although it is analyzed every unit time (every frame), the information corresponding to the image data is obtained. It is not acquired, and the corresponding process is executed only when the process identification information is attached.

For the block (LCD effect scheduler data) for which the availability information is set to the on state, the availability information may be executed (analyzed) within the processing timing set to the on state, or the availability information may be turned on. It may be executed (analyzed) at the processing timing one after the processing timing set in.

In addition, about "appearance EF & operation waiting block A (appearance EF & LCD effect scheduler data A for operation waiting)" and "appearance EF & operation waiting block D (appearance EF & LCD effect scheduler data D for operation waiting)". Although different processing identification information (Y1, Y3) is acquired, the same information may be acquired as "information corresponding to the image data". Further, the length as a block (liquid crystal display effect scheduler data) and the length as a valid period may be set to be the same. That is, in this case, the same image and the gauge display will be displayed for the same time.

Further, in the example shown in FIG. 403, when a specific fluctuation pattern is selected and a background display effect for a specific reach (SP reach background block, SP ending background block) is executed, a big hit (predetermined determination result) is performed. ) Is obtained and the display data is shared between the case where the display data is obtained and the case where the display data is shared (SP reach background block), and the case where the big hit (predetermined judgment result) is obtained and the case where the display data is not obtained. It is executed in the form of being divided into an effect section (SP ending background block) in which display data different from the case is used. In such a configuration, when performing a background display effect for a specific reach, different display data is not used for the entire period depending on whether a predetermined determination result is obtained or not, but is in the middle of the process. Since the display data is shared up to the section (timing ts55) and the winning (judgment result) is shown using different display data only in the remaining period, the processing load and memory capacity can be expected to be reduced. Become.

Moreover, in the example shown in FIG. 403, in the "layer 6" different from the "layer 3" in which the background display effect for the specific reach is executed, the post-operation effect (including) so as to straddle (include) the timing ts55. The post-operation block E) is executed. In particular, the post-operation effect (layer 6) is executed over the entire display area of the effect display device 1600, and has priority display (SP) over the background display effect (layer 3) for specific reach. By making it displayed on the front side of the image display based on the reach background block and the SP ending background block), it is obtained that the "big hit (predetermined judgment result)" in layer 3 is obtained. "Switching from the production section where the display data is shared depending on whether there is no display data to the production section where different display data is used depending on whether the jackpot (predetermined judgment result) is obtained or not" is hidden. (Or make it difficult to see). As a result, "a production section in which display data is shared between the case where a big hit (predetermined judgment result) is obtained and the case where it is not obtained" and "when a big hit (predetermined judgment result) is obtained". Even if there is a case where the production design does not work well for the production connection in the production section where different display data is used depending on the case where it is not obtained, it can be hidden (deceived) by the production after the operation. This makes it possible to facilitate the production design. In this sense, it is desirable that the process of moving the movable body to the front of the display screen is also executed in the post-operation effect.

Further, regarding the post-operation effect (post-operation block E) executed so as to straddle (including) the timing ts55, even if the operation is not detected within the effect reception period, it is automatically performed regardless of the effect mode. Since it was configured to be executed in a specific manner, "a production section in which display data is shared between cases where a jackpot (predetermined judgment result) is obtained and cases where a jackpot (predetermined judgment result) is not obtained" and "big hit (predetermined)" It becomes possible to surely conceal the connection with the "effect section" in which different display data is used depending on whether the determination result) is obtained or not.

In order to obtain such an effect, the timing ts55 at which the switching of the effect section occurs is after the timing ts54 (including the timing ts54), and the post-operation effect (liquid crystal display) is hidden. The post-operation effect (liquid crystal display) is displayed when the effect is received at the earliest timing in the operation reception effect that occurs at timing ts52 if the end time of the post-operation effect is different depending on the operation timing. It will be required to set within the period before the timing of hiding. In such a configuration, the processing related to the display (SP reach background block, SP ending background block) is executed in "Layer 3", but a display section that does not appear as a liquid crystal display is provided. ..

However, "the production section where the display data is shared between the case where the big hit (predetermined judgment result) is obtained and the case where it is not obtained" and the case where the "big hit (predetermined judgment result) is obtained" Regarding the configuration that hides the background display effect (layer 3) at the switching timing with the "effect section where different display data is used depending on the case where it is not obtained", it should be possible to execute it when the big hit is won. And it may not be executed when the big hit is not won. For example, the post-operation effect (for loss) is executed even when the jackpot is not won, but the post-operation effect is not executed over the entire display area of the effect display device 1600, and a partial effect display or the like is performed. It is possible to maintain the display state of the background display effect (layer 3) by executing as.

By the way, in the example shown in FIG. 403, as one of a plurality of blocks corresponding to a specific fluctuation pattern, the “post-operation block E” is read out based on the fact that the production reception is performed within the period of the timing ts52 to ts54. Is to be prepared. Regarding the "post-operation block E", even when the operation is not detected within the period of timing ts52 to ts54, the effect reception is automatically performed (the same program as when the operation is detected is automatically generated). Since it is generated (by executing it), it becomes possible to provide an interesting color rendering that has never existed before.

In this respect, although not shown, the "post-operation block E" can be executed even when the first fluctuation pattern or the second fluctuation pattern different from the specific fluctuation pattern is executed. May be good.

For example, in the first fluctuation pattern, the “SP reach background block” and the “SP ending background block” of the effect contents corresponding to the first fluctuation pattern are sequentially executed, and are shown in FIG. 403. Similar to the specific fluctuation pattern, the process identification information of "2" and the process identification information of "3" are read out based on the "SP reach background block (liquid crystal display effect scheduler data)". That is, in the first fluctuation pattern, although the effect content of the SP reach background (“information about image data” acquired from the liquid crystal effect scheduler data) is different, the same permissible pre-operation related display (precursor effect) as the specific variation pattern. ) And the permissible operation-related display (image, gauge display, etc.) are executed, and the same "post-operation effect" is used as the post-operation effect when the effect is received in the operation reception effect generated in this way. "Block E" is to be executed.

Further, in the first variation pattern, even if the operation is not detected in the operation reception effect, the effect reception is automatically performed, and the "SP reach background block" and the "SP ending background block" are used. It is the same as the specific fluctuation pattern in that the switching of the background effect is hidden by executing the effect after the operation so as to straddle (including) the switching timing with.

In addition, "a production section in which display data is shared depending on whether a jackpot (predetermined judgment result) is obtained or not" and "a jackpot (predetermined judgment result) is obtained" Regarding the configuration in which the background display effect (layer 3) is hidden at the switching timing with the "effect section in which different display data is used depending on the case where it is not obtained", the first variation pattern is the same as the specific variation pattern. , It is possible to execute when the jackpot is won, and it may not be executed when the jackpot is not won. According to such a configuration, although different background effects (SP reach effects) are executed for the specific variation pattern and the first variation pattern, the different background effects are hidden when the jackpot is won. The same effect (effect after operation) will always appear in the form of a game, which makes it possible to recognize that the jackpot has been won. On the other hand, when the jackpot is not won, it is recognized that the jackpot was lost at the timing when the background effect (SP ending background block) with different contents in the specific fluctuation pattern and the first fluctuation pattern appears. Will be able to. That is, in this case, when a big hit is won, it is possible to intuitively recognize that the big hit has been won by hiding the "background effect" whose production content differs depending on the fluctuation pattern and making sure that one production content appears. On the other hand, when a big hit is lost, it is difficult to intuitively recognize that the big hit was lost by displaying the "background effect" whose production content differs depending on the fluctuation pattern without hiding it. You will be able to do it, and you will be able to maintain your intuition.

On the other hand, also in the second variation pattern, the "SP reach background block" and the "SP ending background block" of the effect contents corresponding to the second variation pattern are sequentially executed. However, the "SP reach background block (liquid crystal display effect scheduler data)" in the second variation pattern may have the processing identification information of "1", but the processing identification information of "2" and the processing identification information of "3". The process identification information is not included, and immediately before the transition to the "SP ending background block", the operation reception effect that can generate the post-operation effect that straddles the transition timing does not occur. ..

In this regard, in the "SP reach background block (liquid crystal display effect scheduler data)" related to the second fluctuation pattern, the process identification information of "5" (not shown) is acquired at a predetermined timing while the effect reception is not allowed. Based on the acquisition of the process identification information of "5", the process (process 5) of operating the availability information of the post-operation block E in the ON state is executed. It has become like.

Then, by turning on the availability information of the "post-operation block E" in this way, even in the second fluctuation pattern, the "operation" is performed in the same manner as the above-mentioned "specific fluctuation pattern" and "first fluctuation pattern". The same post-operation effect based on "Post-operation block E (LCD effect scheduler data for post-operation)" straddles (including) the switching timing between "SP reach background block" and "SP ending background block". Will be executed on another layer.

In such a configuration, when a second variation pattern different from a specific variation pattern is executed, the period in which the effect reception is allowed is allowed, although the effect should be designed as a display related to the background effect. Since "block E for post-operation" is intentionally executed as a block different from the block for the background image at a predetermined timing in the production section where it has not occurred, the image and gauge are not displayed and the operation is performed. The post-operation effect (post-operation block E) suddenly appears when the effect is accepted in another variation pattern, even though the effect is not accepted and even the effect reception is not allowed. , It will be expected to improve the game entertainment.

According to such a configuration, even in the second fluctuation pattern, "a production section in which display data is shared depending on whether a jackpot (predetermined determination result) is obtained or not" and "big hit" Even if there is a case where it is not possible to design a production connection well in the production section where different display data is used depending on whether the (predetermined judgment result) is obtained or not. It becomes possible to hide (fake) and facilitate the production design.

In addition, "a production section in which display data is shared depending on whether a jackpot (predetermined judgment result) is obtained or not" and "a jackpot (predetermined judgment result) is obtained" Regarding the configuration in which the background display effect (layer 3) is hidden at the switching timing with the "effect section in which different display data is used depending on the case where the display data is not obtained", the second variation pattern also includes a specific variation pattern and the first variation pattern. As in the case of the 1-variation pattern, it may be possible to execute when the jackpot is won, and it may not be executed when the jackpot is not won. According to such a configuration, although the background effect (SP reach effect) different from the specific variation pattern or the first variation pattern is executed, the different background effect is hidden when the jackpot is won. The same effect (effect after operation) will always appear in the form of a game, which makes it possible to recognize that the jackpot has been won. On the other hand, when the jackpot is not won, it is recognized that the jackpot was lost at the timing when the background effect (SP ending background block) with different contents from the specific fluctuation pattern or the first fluctuation pattern appears. Will be able to. That is, in this case, when a big hit is won, it is possible to intuitively recognize that the big hit has been won by hiding the "background effect" whose production content differs depending on the fluctuation pattern and making sure that one production content appears. On the other hand, when a big hit is lost, it is difficult to intuitively recognize that the big hit was lost by displaying the "background effect" whose production content differs depending on the fluctuation pattern without hiding it. You will be able to do it, and you will be able to maintain your intuition.

In the example shown in FIG. 403 and another example thereof, the operation reception effect is executed based on various processing identification information attached to the SP reach background block (liquid crystal display effect scheduler data for SP reach). , These processing identification information may not be attached to the SP reach background block (liquid crystal display effect scheduler data for SP reach), for example, a symbol block (liquid crystal display effect scheduler data for the design). ), A calling block (liquid crystal display effect scheduler data for calling), or the like, which may be read from another block (liquid crystal display effect scheduler data).

Further, in the example shown in FIG. 403 or another example thereof, a line is executed in the process read based on the process identification information such as "X1", "X2", "Y1", "Y2", and "Y3". In the effect determination, the effect determination based on the operation detection information for a specific operation means (operation button 410) is illustrated. However, the specific operating means is not limited to the operating button 410, and may be another operating means. In addition, a plurality of operation means (operation button 410, operation button 410,) may be used for all or part of the above-mentioned effect determination based on the processing identification information such as "X1", "X2", "Y1", "Y2", and "Y3". It is determined which of the sword effect operation unit 5000, etc. is in the state where the operation opportunity is given, and whether or not the operation means on the side to which the operation opportunity is given has been operated (effect determination). Will be done). According to such a configuration, it is determined which of the plurality of operation means (operation button 410, sword effect operation unit 5000, etc.) is to be given an operation opportunity, and the operation means on the side corresponding to the determination is determined. In order to realize the operation reception effect in which the operation opportunity is given only to the user, the processing identification information, the liquid crystal display effect scheduler, the block, etc. are shared regardless of which operation means is given the operation opportunity. You will be able to make it. Alternatively, an operation opportunity may be given to both of the different operation means, and the post-operation effect based on the processing identification information may be executed based on the fact that one of the previously operated operation means has received the effect. ..

Further, in the example shown in FIG. 403 and other examples thereof, a plurality of permissible pre-operation related displays in the appearance EF block E may be provided. For example, a normal appearance EF block E1 without movement of the operation button 410 (vibration, protrusion, rotation, etc.) and a special appearance EF block E2 with movement of the operation button 410 (vibration, protrusion, rotation, etc.). Is provided, and one of them can be executed (analyzed) according to the fluctuation pattern. In this case, if the blocks following the appearance EF block E1 and the appearance EF block E2 (both or one of the operation waiting block E and the operation post-operation block E) are used in common, the blocks can be saved. Will be.

In the example shown in FIG. 403 and other examples thereof, based on the processing identification information (“X1”, “X2”, “Y1”, “Y2”, “Y3”, etc.) attached to the block or the liquid crystal display effect scheduler data. By executing the read process, it is possible to accept an operation for a specific operating means. However, in addition to this, for a predetermined operation means different from the specific operation means, in a process (for example, peripheral control unit steady process) that has nothing to do with the process identification information attached to the block or the liquid crystal display effect scheduler data. The operation may be received at, and a change corresponding to the reception may be caused for the effect being executed. According to such a configuration, even if an error occurs in the production progress due to the block or the liquid crystal display effect scheduler data, the operation for the predetermined operation means can be properly accepted. It becomes possible to maintain it suitably.

In addition, the block itself is prevented from appearing by a player operation different from the process of performing the effect determination based on each process identification information of "X1", "X2", "Y1", "Y2", and "Y3". Therefore, all the effect elements (display, sound, movable) related to the target block may be disabled. In such a configuration, it is possible to save layers.

In addition, the period of the effect determination is such that a part of each process identification information of "X1", "X2", "Y1", "Y2", and "Y3" is converted into other process identification information by the player operation. Or the opportunity may be changed.

A specific layer may be scheduled to be used before the start of the target fluctuation, and may be used across a plurality of fluctuations.

The block may be used not only during the fluctuation but also during the hit game. Further, a block straddling from the fluctuation to the hit game or a block straddling from the hit game to the probability change may be provided, and the processing identification information is also provided in these blocks and the liquid crystal display effect scheduler data corresponding to the block. It may be attached.

Further, the type of processing identification information to be read may be changed according to the gaming state, such as "Y3" being attached only to the block (or the liquid crystal display effect scheduler data) executed during the probability change state.

In addition, during error notification (abnormal notification), it is desirable not to delete any block or process identification information during execution, although an error image is displayed or an error sound is output. As a result, the effect can be appropriately restored after the error is cleared.

Further, among the examples shown in FIG. 403 and the inventions inherent in other examples thereof, the described effects are exhibited without necessarily using a technique such as a block (liquid crystal display effect scheduler data) or processing identification information. If it can be done, it may be realized by another method.

[Production judgment based on operation detection information before the validity period occurs]
In general, when the production reception period (valid period) in which the production reception is allowed occurs, the above-mentioned "image" or "gauge display (bar display)" is displayed according to the timing of the occurrence. In this regard, if the player plays for a long time or plays many times, it becomes possible to predict at which timing in the fluctuation pattern the "image" or "gauge display" will be displayed. Then, some players cannot wait for the operation and operate it aiming at the timing in anticipation that the "image" or "gauge display" will be displayed. At this time, if the operation is performed immediately before the "image" or "gauge display" is displayed (immediately before the production reception period occurs), the "image" or "gauge display" is displayed. It is misunderstood as if the operation was performed in the state of being (the state where the production reception period has occurred), and as a result, the re-operation within the production reception period (valid period) is delayed, and the production is accepted. In some cases, the production reception period (valid period) would end without fail.

In this regard, in the special operation reception effect (for example, the effect reception period generated at the timing ts42 shown in FIG. 403) according to this embodiment, the effect reception period (valid period) starts from a predetermined timing in the m-th frame after the start of fluctuation. ) Occurs, as described above, even if the operation is not performed within the effect reception period, the effect is determined by the automatic button function and the post-operation effect can be generated. According to such a configuration, even if the re-operation within the production reception period (valid period) is delayed in the above-mentioned situation, it is possible to suppress the occurrence of a situation in which the production cannot be confirmed after the operation. become able to.

However, in this case, even if the post-operation effect can be confirmed, it is not possible to feel that the post-operation effect is generated due to the operation by the player, so there is a concern that the interest in the game will be reduced. Therefore, as will be described later, the peripheral control unit 1511 according to this embodiment allows the effect determination to generate the effect after the operation only within the effect acceptance period (valid period), but detects the operation state. Even if the effect is made within the period (immediately before) before the effect acceptance period (valid period) occurs, it is intentionally used as the target (determination material) of the effect determination. According to such a configuration, even if the operation is performed immediately before the production reception period (validity period) in anticipation of the occurrence, the operation is performed within the production reception period (validity period). After the operation, the production will be executed as if it were a new one. That is, in this case, the player also feels that the post-operation effect is generated due to the operation, so that the game entertainment can be preferably maintained.

On the other hand, as will be described later, even if the operation state is detected within the period (immediately before) before the production reception period (valid period) occurs, the operation state exceeds the specific time. When the production reception period (valid period) occurs while maintaining the above, it is not determined that the production reception will be performed within the m-th frame. With such a configuration, it becomes possible to fairly give the player the conditions for accepting the production, and it is expected that the deterioration of the game interest will be suppressed.

Further, as will be described later, at least in the predetermined operation reception effect, when the effect reception period (valid period) occurs from a predetermined timing within the mth frame after the start of the fluctuation, when the mth frame is started, In the display area of the effect display device 1600, the "image of the operating means (or the gauge display suggesting the remaining time)" is not yet displayed. That is, in this case, since the period in which the production reception is permitted internally occurs from the time when the image (or gauge display) is not yet displayed, the player takes the lead. As a result, even if the operation is performed just before the image (or gauge display) is displayed, the production will be accepted and the production cannot be confirmed after the operation. It will be possible to suppress it.

Hereinafter, such technical features will be described, but in explaining the technical features, the "directing reception period (valid period)" according to this embodiment will be described again. (Validity period) "means" the period from the start of the process of generating the state in which the effect reception is permitted to the end of the process ". Here, the details of the "process for generating a state in which the production reception is permitted" differ depending on the method for realizing the "production reception period (valid period)", but for example, the "operation state flag (see FIG. 403)". Corresponds to "a process of turning on", "a process of setting a timer", "a process of calling an effect reception determination process based on process identification information (see FIG. 403)", and the like. That is, the "production reception period (valid period)" corresponds to the "production section (period) from the execution of the process for generating the state in which the production reception is permitted until the lapse of a predetermined time". This predetermined time is the "time until the operation status flag is turned off" or the "time until the timer is timed up", and the "effect section to which the same processing identification information is attached in each frame ends". It corresponds to "time until it is done". Then, within such an "effect reception period (valid period)", a determination process as to whether or not the production reception is performed is performed at predetermined time intervals (for example, every frame) based on the detection of the operation state. However, in the "determination process of whether or not the production reception is performed" according to this embodiment, not only the "operation state detection" performed within the "production reception period (valid period)" but also the said The feature is that it also targets the "operation state detection" performed before the "production reception period (valid period)" occurs. As such a "directing reception period (valid period)", for example, it is generally created as a period of about 100 frames.

FIGS. 404 to 409 are flowcharts showing an example of the procedure for the processing performed before and after the effect reception period (valid period) occurs. In each of the examples described below, the case where the image is displayed using the "block" and the "liquid crystal display scheduler data" described with reference to FIG. 403 is shown, but the display method is not limited to this. As long as it is a general one that controls the image in units of frames, the realization method does not matter. In addition, "process to generate a state in which production reception is allowed" is also exemplified as "process to turn on the operation state flag", but the present invention is not limited to this, and "process to set a timer" and "process to set a timer" and "process" Other methods such as "a process of calling the process of determining the reception of the effect based on the process identification information" may be used.

FIG. 404 is a flowchart showing an example of processing when no operation is detected before and after the effect reception period (valid period).

Now, when a special operation reception effect (for example, an effect reception period that occurs at the timing ts42 shown in FIG. 403) occurs in a specific variation pattern, the "effect" is set within the "m" th frame after the symbol variation is started. It is assumed that the operation status flag is operated (set) in the ON state as "a process for generating a state in which reception is permitted". Note that the operation status flag is operated (set) to the on state at the halfway "timing t1 (m)" in the "m" th frame by "operating (setting) the operation status flag to the on state". Even if the "process" itself is executed based on the arrival of the "m" th frame, more strictly speaking, the start timing of the "m" th frame is related to the execution of other processes. It is impossible to execute all of the various processes including the relevant process, and while the various processes are executed in a predetermined order, they are executed later than the "frame start timing". Because it is always the case.

When the operation state flag is operated in the ON state in this way, an effect section (effect acceptance period) in which the effect reception is permitted occurs, and within the effect reception period, at predetermined time intervals, based on the operation detection information. "Determination processing for whether to generate an effect after operation" is performed.

The effect reception period according to this example is described as "special operation reception effect" shown in FIG. 403. Therefore, regarding the "determination process for generating the post-operation effect", as described above, "peripheral control unit steady state" regardless of whether the effect acceptance period has occurred (whether the operation state flag is on). It is executed as "effect determination based on operation detection information" for each unit time (every frame) in "processing". Then, by continuing this after the production reception period, even within the production reception period, "determination processing as to whether or not to generate the post-operation effect" is performed at predetermined time intervals based on the operation detection information. (In the figure, it is executed at "timing t2 (m)", "timing t2 (m + 1)", "timing t2 (m + 2)", and "timing t2 (m + 3)", respectively). That is, in this case, the "determination process for generating the post-operation effect" is executed even in the frame before the "m" th frame, but the operation state flag is off. As mentioned above, this is effectively invalidated in the situation, so it will be omitted in the figure.

Further, in this example, the order of various processes performed when a new frame arrives is "after the operation" rather than the order in which the "process of operating (setting) the operation state flag to the on state" is executed. The order in which the "judgment process for whether to generate the effect" is executed is set later, and the effect is produced within the same frame (mth frame) in which the operation state flag is operated (set) to the on state. The reception (judgment that the production will be generated after the operation) can be made. However, regarding the order, it is not always necessary to execute the "process of operating (setting) the operation state flag to the on state" first, and conversely, "whether to generate the post-operation effect". The order in which the "determination process" is executed may be set first. In this case, within the same frame (mth frame) in which the operation state flag is operated (set) to the on state, the "judgment process for whether to generate the effect after the operation" itself is not performed, so the effect is produced. The reception (judgment that the effect will be generated after the operation) will not be made.

Then, conventionally, at the timing t1 (m) in the "m" th frame, "a process of generating a state in which the effect reception is allowed (here," a process of operating the operation state flag to the on state ")" is executed. If so, "whether to generate the post-operation effect" is based on the operation detection information acquired within the period after the process is executed (here, "the period during which the operation state flag is on"). The "judgment process" was to be executed. For example, in the case of the example shown in FIG. 404, at the timing t2 (m), it is determined based on the operation detection information whether or not the operation was performed within the period of the timings t1 (m) to t2 (m), and the operation is performed. When it is determined that there is, the post-operation effect is executed, and when it is not determined that the operation was performed (or, the operation state was detected, but the length of time maintained as the operation state is not sufficient. When it is determined that it is sufficient), the post-operation effect is not executed, and at the timing t2 (m + 1) in the next frame, whether or not the operation was performed within the period of the timing t2 (m) to t2 (m + 1) is operated. The process of making a judgment again based on the detection information was executed for each frame.

However, with this, if there is a person who can not wait for the operation and operates aiming at the timing in anticipation that the production reception period will occur, the production reception period will not be accepted. As mentioned above, there is a concern that the (validity period) will end. Therefore, as described above, the peripheral control unit 1511 according to this embodiment allows the "effect determination to generate the post-operation effect" only within the effect reception period (valid period), but the "operation". Regarding the "state detection" itself, even if it is performed within the period (immediately before) before the production acceptance period (valid period) occurs, this is used as the target (judgment material) of the operation detection determination. I dare to use it.

For example, in such an operation detection determination, it is usually used as a determination condition that "the operation state is maintained for a predetermined time (for example, 3 ms) or more" in order to avoid erroneous detection due to chattering or the like. Be done. In this regard, the peripheral control unit 1511 according to this embodiment also uses the operation detection information before the timing t1 (m) arrives, and within the period of the timing t1 (m) to t2 (m). "Even if the operating means (for example, the operation button 410) is not maintained in the operating state for a predetermined time (for example, 3 ms) or more, the predetermined time (for example, 3 ms) or more is performed before the timing t1 (m). If the operation means (for example, the operation button 410) is maintained in the operation state for the time of, it is determined that the operation has been performed, and the effect after the operation is executed.

According to such a configuration, even if the operation is performed immediately before the production reception period (validity period) in anticipation of the occurrence, the operation is performed within the production reception period (validity period). After the operation, the production will be executed as if it were a new one. That is, in this case, the player also feels that the post-operation effect is generated due to the operation, so that the game entertainment can be preferably maintained.

Which one is used as a more specific configuration for such operation detection information is not particularly limited. In this regard, the peripheral control unit 1511 according to this embodiment determines whether or not the operating state is maintained (continued) for a predetermined time (for example, 3 ms) or more on a frame-by-frame basis. A frame whose operation state has been maintained (continued) for a time (for example, 3 ms) or more is left as an "ON frame", and a frame having no history as an "ON frame" is treated as an "OFF frame". I have to. The history may be left at the end of a frame or at the start of the next frame, or the history as an "ON frame" is left when the operating state is maintained for a predetermined time (for example, 3 ms). It may be.

Then, as will be described later, in the "determination process for generating the post-operation effect" according to this embodiment, three frames in which the history as "OFF frame", "ON frame", and "ON frame" is left. When the operation detection information is obtained in the manner in which the above are arranged, the effect reception (determination that the operation has been performed) is made so that the post-operation effect can be executed.

Since the peripheral control unit 1511 according to this embodiment determines whether the frame is an "ON frame" or an "OFF frame" at the end of the frame and records the history, FIG. 404. In the "determination process for generating the post-operation effect" performed at the timing t2 (m) shown in the above, the "m" th frame including the timing t2 (m) is not used as the determination material. That is, in this case, the "m-3" th frame, the "m-2" th frame, and the "m-1" th frame are used as determination materials, and these are the "OFF frame", "ON frame", and "ON". It is determined whether or not the history is left as a "frame". On the other hand, when the history as the "ON frame" is left when the operation state is maintained for a predetermined time (for example, 3 ms), the "operation" performed at the timing t2 (m) shown in FIG. 404. In the "determination process of whether to generate the post-effect", the "m" th frame including the timing t2 (m) is also used as the determination material. That is, in this case, the "m-2" th frame, the "m-1" th frame, and the "m" th frame are used as determination materials, and these are the "OFF frame", "ON frame", and "ON frame". It will be determined whether or not the history is left as.

In this regard, in the example shown in FIG. 404, the case where the operation is not detected before and after the effect reception period (valid period) is shown. Therefore, at the determination timing (timing t2 (m), t2 (m + 1), t2 (m + 2), t2 (m + 3) in the figure) in each frame after the effect reception period (valid period) occurs, It will be determined that the history as "OFF frame", "OFF frame", and "OFF frame" is left, and the effect will not be accepted (determination that there was an operation), and the post-operation effect will be performed. Not executed.

By the way, with respect to the image displayed by the effect display device 1600, there is a delay of 2 frames (or 1 frame) from the start of the processing related to the display by the peripheral control unit 1511 until the image appears as an image. It has been known. This delay requires one frame for processing in the peripheral control unit 1511 (processing of determining which image to use as an image according to various determinations and creating a drawing list in response to the determination). Processing in the image control means (liquid crystal display control unit 1512) that received the processing result (information about the image such as the drawing list) on the peripheral control unit 1511 side (preparation buffer (buffer in the hidden state) among so-called double buffering). This occurs because one frame is also required for the drawing process on the) side.

Therefore, conventionally, regarding the processing related to the "effect during the valid period (operation waiting block E)" by the peripheral control unit 1511, the frame two frames before the "m" th frame in which the effect reception period (valid period) occurs. (The "m-2" th frame) is set to start, so that the effect is displayed on the effect display device 1600 from the "m" th frame during the valid period.

However, as described above, in the pachinko machine 1 according to this embodiment, "the effect during the valid period (block for operation waiting)" is still displayed in the display area of the effect display device 1600 when the m-th frame is started. One of the features is to make it absent, and the period up to the "m-1" th frame immediately before the production acceptance period (validity period) occurs is "pre-validation period production (effect production, etc.)". "Processing period for" Appearance EF block E ")", and the period from the "m" th frame in which the production reception period (valid period) occurs is "Production during the valid period (image, gauge display, etc." The processing period for the operation waiting block E ")" is set. As shown in FIG. 403, the "processing period for the effect before the valid period ("block E for appearance EF "such as the effect effect)" is set to be continued after the "m" th frame, and is "effective". It may overlap with the "processing period for the effect during the period (" operation waiting block E" such as an image or gauge display) ".

More specifically, in the predetermined period until the "m" th frame arrives (or the period after that), the drawing list is created based on the information corresponding to the "pre-validation effect (effect effect, etc.)". It is created and transmitted to the image control means (liquid crystal display control unit 1512). On the other hand, the predetermined period (the period during which the effect is performed during the valid period) after the arrival of the "m" th frame is drawn based on the information corresponding to the "effect during the valid period (image, gauge display, etc.)". A list is created and transmitted to the image control means (liquid crystal display control unit 1512).

According to such a configuration, as shown in FIG. 404, in the peripheral control unit 1511, up to the "m-1" th frame (or even after that), "pre-validation effect (block E for appearance EF)". Is executed, and after the "m" th frame, the process related to "effect during the valid period (operation waiting block E)" is executed. However, in the effect display device 1600, in the "m" th frame, the process is executed. "Pre-validation effect (display based on block E for appearance EF)" is still in the middle of execution, and "effect during validity period (display based on block E waiting for operation)" finally starts in the "m + 2" th frame. Will be done. That is, in this case, the production is received internally from the time when the "effect during the valid period (display based on the operation waiting block E)" is not yet displayed ("m" th frame, "m + 1" th frame). Will occur for a period of time, so the player will take the lead, and as a result, the operation will be performed just before the "production during the valid period (display based on the operation waiting block E)" is displayed. Even in such a case, the production will be accepted, and it will be possible to suppress the occurrence of a situation in which the production cannot be confirmed after the operation.

In the example shown in FIG. 404, the process related to the "pre-validation period effect (display based on the appearance EF block E)" and the process related to the "valid period effect (display based on the appearance EF block E)" are performed. For convenience of explanation, it is determined to be executed for each frame in the peripheral control unit 1511. However, when these effects are displayed by moving image data, it is sufficient to create a drawing list based on "information corresponding to the moving image" at the start frame of the processing in the peripheral control unit 1511. That is, in this case, in each subsequent frame, the image control means (liquid crystal display control unit 1512) side automatically reads out the image data and displays the image data. Therefore, the peripheral control is performed for each of the above processes. It may not always be performed frame by frame in the unit 1511.

FIG. 405 is a flowchart showing an example of processing when the operation is started in the “m + 1” th frame in the effect reception period (valid period) shown in FIG. 404.

As described above, in the "determination process for generating the post-operation effect" according to this embodiment, three frames in which the history as "OFF frame", "ON frame", and "ON frame" is left are When the operation detection information in the line-up mode is obtained, the effect reception (determination that the operation has been performed) is made so that the post-operation effect can be executed.

In this regard, in the example shown in FIG. 405, it is assumed that the operation is started at a timing before the timing t2 (m + 1) in the "m + 1" th frame (timing before the judgment timing of the production reception). The "m + 1" th frame itself itself has a history as an "ON frame" at the end of the frame. However, at the timing t2 (m + 1) in the frame, all of the three frames (“m-2” th frame, “m-1” th frame, and “m” th frame) to be determined are all. Since it is an "OFF frame", the production reception (determination that the operation has been performed) is not performed.

Even at the timing t2 (m + 2) in the next frame "m + 2" th frame, the three frames ("m-1" th frame, "m" th frame, "m + 1" th frame) to be judged are Since the history as "OFF frame", "OFF frame", and "ON frame" is left, respectively, the production reception (determination that the operation has been performed) is not performed.

Further, when the timing t2 (m + 3) in the next frame "m + 3" th frame is reached, the three frames ("m" th frame, "m + 1" th frame, "m + 2" th frame) to be judged are changed. The history as "OFF frame", "ON frame", and "ON frame" is left in each state, and the production reception (determination that the operation has been performed) is performed by this.

According to such a configuration, since the "m + 1" th frame and the "m + 2" th frame are "ON frames", the operation state is set for a predetermined time or more over two frames within the production reception period (valid period). It can be determined that the situation is maintained (for example, 3 ms). Further, since the "m" th frame is the "OFF frame", it is possible to determine that the operation has been started within the effect reception period (valid period). That is, in this case, it means that the operation is properly performed within the period in which the production reception is permitted. Therefore, in the example shown in FIG. 405, the production reception period (valid period) is the same as before. ) (Here, timing t2 (m + 3)), the effect reception is performed, and the post-operation effect (here, "post-operation block E") corresponding to this is executed (started). In this example, the process of turning off the operation status flag is executed when the production is accepted, but the operation status flag may be turned off at the end of the frame, etc. By executing the process of turning off the operation state flag based on the fact that the effect reception has been performed, the operation determination process may not be (substantially) performed in the next frame.

In this regard, in the peripheral control unit 1511 according to this embodiment, when the effect reception is performed at the timing t2 (m + 3), the post-operation effect (operation) is started from the frame (“m + 3” th frame) for which the effect reception is performed. The processing related to "Post-block E)" is to be performed. Therefore, in the effect display device 1600, the post-operation effect (display corresponding to the post-operation block E) is displayed from the "m + 5" th frame (not shown) two frames later.

FIG. 406 is a flowchart showing an example of processing when the operation is started in the “m-2” th frame in the effect reception period (valid period) shown in FIG. 404.

As described above, in the "determination process for generating the post-operation effect" according to this embodiment, three frames in which the history as "OFF frame", "ON frame", and "ON frame" is left are When the operation detection information in the line-up mode is obtained, the effect reception (determination that the operation has been performed) is made so that the post-operation effect can be executed.

Further, as described above, the peripheral control unit 1511 according to this embodiment allows "the effect determination to generate the effect after the operation" only within the effect acceptance period (valid period), but "the operation". Regarding the "state detection" itself, even if it is performed within the period (several frames immediately before) before the production reception period (valid period) occurs, this is the target (judgment) of the operation detection judgment. I dare to use it as a material).

In this regard, in the example shown in FIG. 406, it is assumed that the operation is started in the "m-2" th frame two frames before the "m" th frame in which the production reception period (valid period) occurs. ing. Conventionally, the information obtained by the operation at such a timing is not used in the determination related to the production reception. However, as described above, in the pachinko machine 1 according to this embodiment, when the production acceptance period (valid period) occurs at the timing t1 (m) in the "m" th frame, the timing t2 in the "m" th frame occurs. In (m), the operation detection information acquired in the three frames prior to this (“m-3” th frame, “m-2” th frame, “m-1” th frame) is sent to the production reception. It is supposed to be used in such a judgment. And in this example, these frames ("m-3" th frame, "m-2" th frame, "m-1" th frame) are "OFF frame", "ON frame", and "ON frame", respectively. The history of the above is left, and the production reception (determination that the operation has been performed) is made by this.

According to such a configuration, the "m-3" th frame is an "OFF frame", and the "m-2" th frame and the "m-1" th frame are "ON frames". By doing so, it is possible to determine that the operation state is maintained for a predetermined time or more (for example, 3 ms) for two frames immediately before the occurrence of the effect reception period (valid period). That is, in this case, it means that the operation is started in the "m-2" th frame two frames before the "m" th frame in which the production reception period (valid period) occurs. In the example shown in FIG. 406, the production is received within the production reception period (valid period) (here, the timing t2 (m)), and the post-operation effect (here, "post-operation block E") corresponding to the reception is performed. ) Will be executed (started). When such a configuration is adopted, as shown in FIG. 406, the production reception period (valid period) itself is ended in an extremely short time in which even one frame is not continued, but the production reception period (valid). Even if the operation is started immediately before the occurrence of the period), it is considered that the operation was performed within the production reception period (valid period), and the post-operation effect is generated. You will be able to make it. That is, in this case, the player also feels that the post-operation effect is generated due to the operation, so that the game entertainment can be preferably maintained.

However, if the production reception in such a manner is frequently performed, the significance of the production reception period (valid period) itself may be impaired, and there is a concern that the interest in the game may be reduced. Therefore, in the peripheral control unit 1511 according to this embodiment, the effect reception is performed based on the operation detection information acquired before the occurrence of the effect reception period (valid period) at the timing t2 (m) in the "m" th frame. When this is done, the post-operation effect is executed without displaying the image or gauge display. That is, in this case, since it becomes possible to raise some doubts as to whether or not the "post-operation effect" was caused by being given an operation opportunity, the effect acceptance period (effective). It can be expected to suppress the start of the operation before the period) occurs.

It should be noted that the method of realizing "the post-operation effect is executed without displaying the image or gauge display" is not particularly limited. In the pachinko machine 1 according to this embodiment, as described above, the processing related to the “effect during the valid period (operation waiting block E)” is performed from the “m” th frame without considering the delay of two frames. Then, when the production reception is performed at the timing t2 (m), the processing related to the "post-operation effect (post-operation block E)" is performed from the frame ("m" th frame) for which the production reception was performed. I am trying to do it. As a result, as shown in FIG. 406, the process related to the "post-operation effect (post-operation block E)" is executed without executing the process related to the "effective period effect (operation waiting block E)". Therefore, the post-operation effect will be executed without displaying the image or gauge display.

Further, in the example shown in FIG. 406, it is assumed that the operation (operation state) started from the “m-2” th frame is maintained so as to straddle the timing t2 (m) in the “m” th frame. Therefore, it was decided to explain what kind of determination is made based on the assumption and how the effect according to the determination is executed. However, as shown in FIG. 407, the operation (operation state) started from the "m-2" th frame is not maintained so as to straddle the timing t2 (m) in the "m" th frame, and "m". Even if it ends within the -1 "th frame, if the" m-2 "th frame and the" m-1 "th frame each leave a history as an" ON frame "(respectively). If the operating state is maintained for 3 ms or more), the same determination is made at the timing as described with reference to FIG. 406, and the same effect is executed according to the determination.

That is, in this case, as shown in FIG. 406, the operation by the player is not detected at all after the production reception period occurs, and is performed only within the period before the production reception period occurs. Although it is not the case, the judgment conditions ("m-3" th frame, "m-2" th frame, and "m-1" th frame are "OFF frames", respectively, for the reception of the production at the timing t2 (m). , "ON frame", "ON frame" history is left) is satisfied, even if the operation state is not maintained at the timing t2 (m), the production is accepted and the operation is performed. The post-production will be executed.

The same can be said for such a configuration when the operation is performed within the production reception period (valid period). For example, in the example shown in FIG. 405, the operating state is not maintained at the time of timing t2 (m + 3), and the timing is earlier than the timing t2 (m + 3) in the "m + 3" th frame, or "m + 2". Even if the operation state is completed within the second frame, the judgment conditions ("m" th frame, "m + 1" th frame, and "m + 2" th frame related to the reception of the production at the timing t2 (m + 3) are "m + 2", respectively. As long as the history as "OFF frame", "ON frame", and "ON frame" is satisfied), even if the operation state is not maintained at the timing t2 (m + 3), FIG. 405 shows. The production will be accepted as shown, and the production will be executed after the operation.

That is, in the pachinko machine 1 according to this embodiment, it does not matter whether or not the operation state is maintained at the timing when the "determination regarding the production reception" is performed, and the timing when the "determination regarding the production reception" is performed. When the operating state is maintained for a predetermined time or longer within a period prior to that (in this embodiment, when the operating state is maintained for a predetermined time or longer in each of the two frames), the operation targeted for operation. The production is accepted on the assumption that the operation has been properly performed on the means, and the production after the operation is executed.

Here, the operation detection information obtained before the production reception period (valid period) occurs is used in the "judgment process related to the production reception" performed after the production reception period (valid period) occurs. If it is simply used as a judgment material, for example, it is operated from a situation where even a precursor effect (appearance effect) is not executed and there is no sign that an effect acceptance period (valid period) will occur. By maintaining the state, there is a concern that some people will be able to accept the production. That is, if the operation in such a mode is permitted, the significance of the production reception period (valid period) itself may be impaired, and there is a concern that the interest in the game may be reduced.

Therefore, as described above, the peripheral control unit 1511 according to this embodiment detects whether or not the "OFF frame" and the "ON frame" exist, instead of targeting only the "ON frame" as the determination target. This is intended to eliminate the above concerns. In this embodiment, ON / OFF is determined for each frame, but the present invention is not limited to this. For example, "the timing at which the operation is started is determined by detecting the rise and fall of the sensor signal, and the operation is determined. A method such as "the production reception is performed on the condition that the operation state is maintained for a predetermined time or longer from the timing" may be adopted. Even in such a case, it is possible to determine how long before the occurrence of the production reception period (valid period) that the timing of the rise and fall of the sensor signal occurred, and the time during which the operation state is maintained. It is possible to solve the above problem by determining how long it continues.

FIG. 408 is a flowchart showing an example of processing when the operation is started from the “m-3” th frame in the effect reception period (valid period) shown in FIG. 404.

As shown in FIG. 408, in this example, the operation started in the "m-3" th frame three frames before the "m" th frame in which the effect reception period (valid period) occurs is the effect. It is assumed that the process is continued until the "m + 2" th frame within the reception period (valid period). Also in this example, when the production reception period occurs, first, the "judgment regarding the production reception" is performed at the timing t2 (m) in the "m" th frame, and in the determination, the production reception period occurs. The previously acquired operation detection information (here, the operation detection information acquired in the "m-3" th frame, "m-2" th frame, and "m-1" th frame) is used as the judgment material. It is supposed to be.

However, in this example, the history of the "m-3" th frame, "m-2" th frame, and "m-1" th frame as "ON frame", "ON frame", and "ON frame" remains, respectively. Since it is in the state of being performed, the effect reception (determination that the operation has been performed) is not performed as a result of the "determination related to the effect reception" at the above timing t2 (m). Not only that, even in the "judgment related to the production reception" performed after the next frame such as timing t2 (m + 1), the three frames to be judged are "ON frame", "ON frame", and "ON". Since only the history as a "frame" is left, as long as the operation state from the "m-3" th frame is maintained, the production is performed as a result of the "judgment regarding the production reception" performed in each frame. No reception (judgment that there was an operation) will be made.

That is, in this case, if the operation state maintained from the "m-3" th frame is temporarily terminated, a frame in which the history as the "OFF frame" is left is created, and then the operation is not performed again, the production reception is accepted. It is possible to prevent (determination that an operation has been performed) from being made. As a result, even if the operation state is maintained from the time when the precursor effect (appearance effect) is not executed and there is no sign that the effect acceptance period (valid period) will occur, based on this. It becomes possible to preferably avoid the reception of production.

As described above, in the example shown in FIGS. 405 to 408, when the effect is received at the timing t2 (m) in the "m" th frame, the post-operation effect is performed without displaying the image or gauge display. It will be done (see in particular Figure 406). However, in this case, it is not possible to feel that the post-operation production has occurred due to the operation, and there is a concern that the interest in the game will decline. However, the production may be advanced so that the model image and the gauge display are always displayed. In this case, regarding the feature that "at the time when the m-th frame is started, the" effect during the valid period (block for operation waiting) "is not yet displayed in the display area of the effect display device 1600". It is not always necessary to leave this, but it is more desirable to leave it.

The method for realizing such a configuration is not particularly limited, but for example, the timing at which the "process of operating (setting) the operation state flag to the on state" is performed in the frame and the "determination related to the production reception". This can be achieved by setting the timing at which the "processing" is performed so as to be opposite to the case of the example shown in FIG. 404.

FIG. 409 shows an effect reception period (effective) when the timing of performing the “process of operating (setting) the operation state flag to the on state” in the frame is performed after the “determination process related to the effect reception”. It is a flowchart which shows an example about the period).

As shown in FIG. 409, assuming that the "m" th frame has arrived, first, at the timing t12 (m) in the frame, the process of operating (setting) the operation state flag to the on state is performed. Will be done. As a result, the production reception period (valid period) is generated, but in the "m" th frame, the "judgment processing related to the production reception" is performed after the production reception period (valid period) occurs. There is no such thing.

That is, although the illustration is omitted, in the "m" th frame, the timing at which the "determination process related to the production reception" is performed comes before the timing t12 (m). At this time, either the "judgment process related to the production reception" itself is not performed, or the "judgment process related to the production reception" is performed, but the production reception period (valid period) has not occurred. If there is, it will be judged that the production reception will not be made.

According to such a configuration, it is possible to prevent the production reception from being performed in the frame (here, the "m" th frame) in which the production reception period (valid period) occurs. Therefore, in the frame in which the effect acceptance period (valid period) occurs (here, the "m" th frame), regardless of the operation status, the peripheral control unit 1511 "produces during the valid period (operation waiting block E). ) ”Is always performed, and the display image (effect during the valid period) corresponding to the process can be made to appear on the effect display device 1600 in the“ m + 2 ”th frame after 2 frames. become.

That is, in this case, the production reception is performed after the production reception period has occurred, at the earliest, the "m-2" th frame, the "m-1" th frame, and the "m" th frame are "OFF frames", respectively. , "ON frame", When the timing t11 (m + 1) in the "m + 1" th frame arrives in the state where the history as "ON frame" is left. At this time, the peripheral control unit 1511 will perform the process related to the "post-operation effect (post-operation block E)" based on the reception of the effect. At this time, in the image control means (liquid crystal display control unit 1512), the preparation buffer (preparation buffer) of the double buffering is based on the processing result related to the "effect during the valid period" processed in the peripheral control unit 1511 in the "m" th frame. The drawing process is already performed on the hidden buffer side (see “Processing in the image control means” in FIG. 409).

Therefore, according to the method shown in FIG. 409, even if the production reception is performed at the shortest time after the production reception period occurs, in the production display device 1600, the “m + 2” th frame is used for the “effect period production”. Is displayed, and the display related to "Post-operation effect" is displayed in the "m + 3" th frame, so that the post-operation effect can be started after displaying the image or gauge display. become.

However, the method of starting the post-operation effect after displaying the model image or the gauge display is not limited to the method shown in FIG. 409. For example, as in the case shown in FIG. 404, the production reception can be performed at the timing t2 (m) even in the frame (here, the "m" th frame) in which the production reception period (valid period) occurs. Then, even when the effect is received at the timing t2 (m), at the timing t2 (m), the process related to the "effect during the valid period (operation waiting block E)" is performed in the peripheral control unit 1511. It may be done.

That is, in this case, the frame for performing the processing related to the "post-operation effect (post-operation block E)" in the peripheral control unit 1511 based on the effect reception is one frame for the frame for which the effect reception is performed. Will be delayed only. Therefore, even if the effect is received at the timing t2 (m) in the "m" th frame, in the "m" th frame, the peripheral control unit 1511 "produces during the valid period (waiting for operation). The processing related to "block E)" will be performed, and in the next frame "m + 1" th frame, the processing related to "post-operation effect (post-operation block E)" will be performed in the peripheral control unit 1511. .. Such a "delay" is not limited to the frame in which the production reception period (valid period) occurs (here, the "m" th frame), and occurs regardless of the frame in which the production reception is performed. .. Even with such a method, even if the production reception is done in the shortest time after the production reception period occurs, it is possible to start the production after the operation after displaying the image or gauge display. Become.

As described above, according to the examples shown in FIGS. 404 to 409 and other examples thereof, in the "determination process for the production reception" performed at a predetermined timing in the m-th frame, the m-th frame is started rather than being started. The "detection information from the operation detection means" acquired in the previous "m-1" th frame will also be used as the determination material for the effect reception. In particular, according to the examples shown in FIGS. 404 to 409 and other examples thereof, the "operation detection means" acquired in the "m-1" th frame before the "mth" frame is started. Both the "detection information" and the "detection information from the operation detection means" acquired in the "m-2" th frame are used as the determination material for the effect reception. That is, in this case, even if the operation is performed immediately before the production reception period (validity period) occurs (within an extremely short time of about 33 ms to 66 ms before the validity period occurs), this is produced. Since the post-operation effect will be executed assuming that the operation was performed within the reception period (valid period), the player side also feels that the post-operation effect has occurred due to the operation. You will be able to remember.

Moreover, even if the operation state is not maintained at the time when the "determination process for the effect reception" in the m-th frame is performed, the "operation detection means" acquired in the frame before the m-th frame. The production reception can be done based on the "detection information from". That is, in this case, even if the operation state is maintained only immediately before the production reception period (validity period) occurs (within an extremely short time of about 33 ms to 66 ms before the validity period occurs). Since this is regarded as the operation being performed within the effect reception period (valid period) and the post-operation effect is executed, the player side can also perform the post-operation effect due to the operation. You will be able to feel the feeling that has occurred.

However, as described above, instead of operating (setting) the frame to the "ON frame" at the end of the frame, the frame is set to the "ON frame" when a predetermined time (3 ms) has elapsed in the frame. It may be operated (set). In this case, the operation detection information (detection information from the operation detection means) acquired between the start of the m-th frame and the occurrence of the effect reception period (valid period) is also used as the determination material for the effect reception. It will be used. That is, in this case, the operation is performed in the "m-1" th frame and the "m" th frame, respectively (for example, the operation state is maintained for 3 ms or more), and the operation is performed in the "m-2" th frame. When it is determined that the operation has not been performed (for example, the operation state is less than 3 ms), the effect reception is performed. According to such a configuration, the time until the operation by the player is used as the determination material is shortened, so that it is possible to provide a post-operation effect having high immediate responsiveness.

Further, in the examples shown in FIGS. 404 to 408 and other examples thereof, when the effect reception period (valid period) occurs, the image and the gauge display are not yet displayed in the display area. ing. Then, when the effect is received within the m-th frame, the effect is executed after the operation without displaying (creating) the button image or the gauge display. That is, in this case, even if the operation state is maintained only immediately before the production reception period (validity period) occurs (within an extremely short time of about 33 ms to 66 ms before the validity period occurs). , While assuming that the operation was performed within the production reception period (valid period) and executing the post-operation effect, "when the post-operation effect is generated in such a manner" It becomes possible to give a dramatic demerit such as "the button image and the gauge display are not displayed", and it becomes possible to promote proper operation within the production reception period (valid period). For example, when the button image or the gauge display is displayed in any of a plurality of modes, it is not possible to visually recognize which of these modes is displayed, which is suggested by the mode. There will be a dramatic demerit such as not being able to grasp the degree of expectation.

Further, in the examples shown in FIGS. 404 to 409 and other examples thereof, when the effect acceptance period (valid period) occurs while the operation state is maintained for a long time, the effect is not accepted. It will be possible to encourage the operation in an appropriate manner for the production reception period.

However, on the other hand, when the production reception period (valid period) occurs while the operation state is maintained for a time shorter than a specific time instead of a long time, the production reception is performed. Even if the operation is performed immediately before the period (valid period) in anticipation of the occurrence, it is considered that the operation was performed within the production reception period (valid period), and the post-operation production is performed. Will be executed, so that the player will also feel that the post-operation effect is generated due to the operation.

Moreover, in order for the production reception to be performed, it is not enough to maintain the operating state for a time shorter than a specific time, but it is also required to maintain the operating state for a time longer than a predetermined time. Therefore, false detection due to chattering or the like can be preferably avoided.

Further, in the example shown in FIG. 409 and another example thereof, in the process in the "mth" frame in which the effect acceptance period is started, no matter what operation detection information is obtained, the process related to the post-operation effect ( Of the display processing in the effect display device 1600, the process related to lamp light emission, the process related to sound output, and the process related to the operation of the movable body), at least the display process in the effect display device 1600 is "information corresponding to the image data of the effect after operation. , The process of reading out in the peripheral control unit 1511 "is not executed, and the process when the effect is not accepted (the process of reading out the information corresponding to the image data waiting for operation in the peripheral control unit 1511) is performed. I decided to do it. According to such a configuration, no matter what kind of operation information is obtained in the m-th frame at which the production reception period starts, in the m-th frame, the processing (effect) when the production reception is not performed. At least a part (display processing in the effect display device 1600) of the display processing in the display device 1600, the processing related to lamp light emission, the processing related to sound output, and the processing related to the operation of the movable body is always performed. That is, in this case, with respect to the display on the effect display device 1600, the process corresponding to the reception of the effect (the process of reading the information corresponding to the image data of the effect after the operation in the peripheral control unit 1511) is started with a delay. Before that, the process when the production is not accepted (the process of reading the information corresponding to the image data waiting for operation in the peripheral control unit 1511) is always executed. Therefore, it becomes possible to recognize that the "post-operation effect" is an effect started due to the operation by the player.

As another example of the example shown in FIG. 409, the effect is described above, but the effect can be determined based on the operation detection information even in the "mth" frame when the effect reception period starts. In the frame in which the determination is made, "the process of reading out the information corresponding to the image data of the post-operation effect in the peripheral control unit 1511" is not executed, and in the next frame, "the information corresponding to the image data of the post-operation effect" is displayed. , The process of reading in the peripheral control unit 1511 "may be executed. That is, in this case, among the processes related to the post-operation effect (display process in the effect display device 1600, process related to lamp light emission, process related to sound output, process related to the operation of the movable body), at least the display process in the effect display device 1600 is the effect determination. In the frame in which the effect is formed, a process (a process of reading information corresponding to the image data waiting for operation in the peripheral control unit 1511) is executed when the effect reception is not performed. However, at this time, among the processes related to the post-operation effect (display process in the effect display device 1600, process related to lamp light emission, process related to sound output, process related to movable body operation), for example, "process related to lamp light emission" and "process related to sound output". Regarding the "process", a process of reading "information on the light emitting mode after the operation" and "information on the sound output after the operation" may be performed in the frame for which the effect determination is made. That is, in this case, the lamp and the sound are started to be output in the post-operation mode based on the read information in the frame in which the effect determination is made or in the next frame.

Further, as shown in FIG. 403, in the case of adopting the method of displaying the effect image by the block, when the effect is received by the operation, the "post-operation block" for executing the post-operation effect In addition, "Disappearance EF block (LCD production scheduler data for extinction EF)" for displaying the extinction effect image until the operation promotion image such as the copy image and gauge display that was displayed until then is hidden. You may want to do it. According to such an "disappearing EF block (liquid crystal display scheduler data for extinguishing EF)", for example, an image or an image in which the gauge display fades out when the production is received (an image that is gradually hidden). Will be able to be displayed. Further, such "disappearing EF block (liquid crystal display effect scheduler data for extinction EF)" may be executed when the effect acceptance period ends without performing the post-operation effect. The "disappearing EF block (LCD effect scheduler data for extinction EF)" is also attached to the background block (LCD effect scheduler data for the background) and the operation waiting block (LCD effect scheduler data for operation waiting). It is possible to configure the process to be executed by operating the availability information in the ON state in the process read based on the process identification information.

Regarding the "process of generating a state in which the effect reception is permitted (process of operating (setting) the operation state flag to the on state)" described with reference to FIGS. 404 to 409, the scheduler after the symbol change is started. It may be executed based on (elapsed time) or the like, and may not necessarily be executed triggered by a frame.

Further, the "image" and the "gauge display" may be displayed as a pre-validation effect (display based on the appearance EF block E). However, regarding the display mode when the pre-validation effect (display based on the appearance EF block E) is performed, it should be displayed semi-transparently or hazy by other effect display. It is required to display the "image" and the "gauge display" in a manner different from that when the "effect during the valid period (display based on the operation waiting block E)" is performed. At this time, in the pre-validation effect (display based on the appearance EF block E), one of the "image" and the "gauge display" may be displayed, and the effect may be advanced without displaying one. ..

[Further color rendering of image display]
As described with reference to FIG. 118, in the pachinko machine 1 according to this embodiment, it is possible to execute the fluctuation pattern determination as to which of the plurality of fluctuation patterns is to be executed based on the result of the jackpot determination. Then, when one variation pattern is selected as a result of the variation pattern determination, the peripheral control MPU1511a has a plurality of expected effects (notice effect, etc.) prepared corresponding to the selected variation pattern. Of these, it is possible to execute an effect determination (notice determination, etc.) as to which of the expected effects (notice effect, etc.) is selectively to appear. Depending on the result of this effect determination, all of the plurality of expected effects (preliminary effects, etc.) prepared corresponding to the above-selected fluctuation pattern may be sequentially executed, and a plurality of expected effects may be executed in sequence. It is possible that none of the expected effects (such as notice effects) will be executed.

Then, when such an effect determination (effect pattern determination, notice determination, etc.) is performed, the effect content according to the result of the effect determination is controlled to be displayed on the effect display device 1600, so that the result of the jackpot determination can be obtained. The variable effect of the decorative pattern will be executed together with the expected effect (notice effect) related to the background depiction (background notice) and the movement of the movable body (character effect). As a result, as a result of the variable effect by the decorative symbol being executed together with the expected effect related to the background depiction and the movement of the movable body, when the jackpot symbol is stopped and displayed, the jackpot game as a privilege is executed for the player. It will be possible.

In such a configuration, the variation effect by the above decorative pattern is provided as an effect having "a function of indicating whether or not a big hit is obtained as a result of the big hit determination", and the background description, the movement of the movable body, etc. The expected effect will be provided as an effect having "a function that suggests the degree of expectation (including 0% and 100%) that a big hit has been obtained". That is, the player enjoys the game through these effects.

For example, in the pachinko machine 1 according to this embodiment, the high-expected fluctuation pattern (SP reach fluctuation pattern) that develops into SP reach (reach effect accompanied by background change, etc.) as a result of the above fluctuation pattern determination is specified. When the fluctuation pattern of is selected, no matter which result is obtained as the production judgment (notice judgment, etc.), when the design production based on the specific fluctuation pattern progresses to a specific timing during SP reach, the production reception is accepted. It is possible to generate an operation reception effect (valid period) that allows. However, as will be described later, the mode of the reception allowable sound output when the operation reception effect is generated is changed according to the result of the effect determination, whereby the post-operation effect is executed in a highly expected manner. It is intended to suggest the rate at which the jackpot symbol is stopped and the rate at which the jackpot symbol is stopped.

Further, in the pachinko machine 1 according to this embodiment, when a predetermined fluctuation pattern is selected from the low expected fluctuation patterns (non-reach fluctuation patterns) in which even the reach state is not formed as a result of the above fluctuation pattern determination. Even if there is, when a special result is obtained in the production judgment (notice judgment, etc.) corresponding to the predetermined fluctuation pattern, when the design production based on the predetermined fluctuation pattern progresses to the predetermined timing, the operation reception is permitted. Reception production (valid period) can be generated. However, when a predetermined fluctuation pattern is selected, the operation reception effect (valid period) does not occur even if the symbol effect based on the predetermined variation pattern is advanced to the predetermined timing unless a special result is obtained in the effect determination. .. Further, the operation reception effect (valid period) that occurs in a predetermined fluctuation pattern is different from the operation reception effect (valid period) that occurs when the symbol effect based on the specific variation pattern progresses to a specific timing during SP reach. It is executed as a production.

In addition to the above "specific variation pattern", the variation pattern that generates the operation reception effect (valid period) at a predetermined timing during SP reach regardless of the result obtained as the advance notice effect determination. May also be provided. However, the low-expected fluctuation pattern (non-reach fluctuation pattern) includes the fluctuation pattern that generates the operation reception effect (valid period) at a predetermined timing regardless of which result is obtained as the advance notice effect determination. It is desirable not to do so, or to reduce the selection ratio.

By the way, the operation reception effect (valid period) that can occur under these conditions and the like is predetermined for the effect member to be produced as long as the operation is detected within the set time (valid period). Since only the post-operation effect that causes the change (display change in the effect display device 1600, effect sound change in the speaker, light emission change by the lamp, and at least one effect operation by the movable decorative body) is executed, the operation is performed. Reception production (valid period) The production performance of itself is poor, and there is a concern that the entertainment interest of the game will decline until the production is executed after the operation.

Therefore, in the pachinko machine 1 according to this embodiment, as an operation reception effect,
-During the execution period of the symbol production (effect pattern) based on the low expected fluctuation pattern (predetermined fluctuation pattern), "BGM reproduction (specific type of production sound)" corresponding to the fluctuation pattern (effect pattern) is performed in a non-suppressed mode. During the execution period of the low-expected non-suppressed reception effect that gives an operation opportunity in the output and the pattern effect (effect pattern) based on the high-expected fluctuation pattern (specific variation pattern), the variation pattern (effect pattern) is used. Corresponding "BGM playback (specific type of production sound)" is output in a suppressed mode or silent, or in a non-output state (the playback period in which the audible sound of the sound data is recorded has expired, or channel allocation As mentioned above, various measures are taken, such as making it possible to at least generate a high-expectation suppression reception effect that gives an operation opportunity while the operation is completed (Fig. 190, etc.). -Fig. 303, Fig. 385-Fig. 409).

In this regard, in the pachinko machine 1 according to this embodiment, the model image displayed in the operation reception effect is further displayed as an integrated image integrated with the peripheral decoration image that decorates the peripheral edge of the image. By doing so, we are trying to improve the game entertainment when the operation reception effect (valid period) occurs. For such an integrated image, an operation reception effect (valid period) that occurs when a symbol effect based on a specific variation pattern progresses to a specific timing during SP reach, and an operation that occurs in the above-mentioned predetermined variation pattern. It is desirable that it is displayed in both the reception effect (valid period), and it is desirable that it is displayed in both the expected non-suppressed reception effect and the high expectation suppressed reception effect. Further, also in each of the above-mentioned production examples (FIGS. 190 to 303, FIGS. 385 to 409), the display mode of the illustrated image is replaced with any of the integrated images described below. It is desirable to improve the game entertainment.

Hereinafter, a case where the image is displayed as an “integrated image” will be described.
First, to explain the "image" again, the operation means to which the operation opportunity is given in the operation reception production includes the "operation receiving part" that receives the operation by the player and the peripheral edge of the operation receiving part. There is a "peripheral decoration" to decorate. In this respect, the "imitation image" means an image in which the "operation receiving portion" is imitated among such operation means. The "operation receiving portion" is usually provided so as to be displaced by an operation by the player, and the "peripheral decoration portion" is often provided as a non-movable member. For example, in the operation means (effect operation unit 400) illustrated in FIGS. 39 and 40, the "operation receiving portion" corresponds to the button lens 411 (operation button 410), and the "peripheral decoration portion" is the frame unit 415. Will be equivalent to. Further, in the case of the operating means (sword decoration body 5001) exemplified in FIGS. 192 and 222, the "operation receiving portion" corresponds to the sword portion 5010, and the "peripheral decoration portion" corresponds to the sheath portion 5020. Become.

FIG. 410 shows an "integrated image" displayed when an operation reception effect (valid period) is generated for an operation means provided with an "operation receiving unit" that receives a "pressing operation" by a player. It is a figure which shows an example.

In this explanatory example, for convenience of explanation, it is assumed that a push-type handle button 5014 is provided as an "operation receiving portion" on the upper surface of the handle portion 5012 of the sword decoration body 5001. That is, when the handle button 5014 is "pressed" by the player, it is pushed into the handle portion 5012 and detected by a predetermined sensor (detection means), and the detection information is produced (trigger for execution of post-operation effect, etc.). ). According to such a configuration, the sword decoration body 5001 as an operation unit has a "handle button 5014" capable of operating (moving up and down) with respect to the handle portion 5012 and an operation (moving up and down) with respect to the sheath portion 5020. Two operation receiving portions with a possible "handle portion 5012" will be provided.

FIG. 410 describes an “integrated image” when a specific operation reception effect (valid period) in which an operation opportunity is given to the handle button 5014 occurs when a predetermined fluctuation pattern progresses to a predetermined timing. I decided to. However, in the example described below including FIG. 410, the "integrated image" when giving an operation opportunity to the handle button 5014 is operated not with the handle button 5014 but with the operation button 410. It may be applied as an "integrated image" when an operation reception effect (valid period) that gives an opportunity occurs. That is, in this case, the "image of the operation button 410" illustrated in each of the above-mentioned production examples (FIGS. 190 to 303, 385 to 409) is referred to as the "integrated image" described below. It can be replaced, and in this case, the handle button 5014 is not provided and is omitted as a member.

As shown in FIGS. 410 (a) to 410 (d), in the pachinko machine 1 according to this embodiment, a specific operation reception desk in which an operation opportunity is given to the handle button 5014 (or the operation button 410). When the effect (validity period) is generated, in the effect display device 1600, the button image BMG imitating the pattern button 5014 (or the operation button 410) is integrated with the peripheral decorative image SSG that decorates the peripheral edge thereof. It is displayed as an integrated image IGa to IGd. In the examples shown in FIGS. 410 (a) to 410 (d), the button-shaped image BMG and the peripheral decoration image SSG are not individually prepared as image data, and one image data (integral) in which they are integrated. It is displayed only as a simulated image (IGa to IGd). Further, when the integrated images IGa to IGd are displayed, operation promotion displays such as "press" and "down arrow" are also displayed, but they are omitted here for convenience of explanation.

In the pachinko machine 1 according to this embodiment, the "first effect mode with relatively low expectation" and "relative" are the post-operation effects to be executed when the operation is received in a specific operation reception effect (valid period). A plurality of production modes including "a second production mode with a high degree of expectation" are prepared, and one of these production modes is executed based on the result of the jackpot determination (production determination). .. In this regard, in the examples shown in FIGS. 410 (a) to 410 (d),
-Aspect shown in FIG. 410 (b) (integrated image IGb) rather than when the mode (integrated image IGa) shown in FIG. 410 (a) appears in a specific operation reception effect (valid period). When appears, the appearance rate of the "second production mode with relatively high expectations" is higher as the post-operation effect.
-Aspect shown in FIG. 410 (c) (integrated image IGc) rather than when the mode (integrated image IGb) shown in FIG. 410 (b) appears in a specific operation reception effect (valid period). When is displayed, the appearance rate of the "second production mode with relatively high expectations" is higher as the post-operation effect.
The mode (integrated image IGd) shown in FIG. 410 (d) is higher than the mode (integrated image IGc) shown in FIG. 410 (c) in a specific operation reception effect (valid period). Based on the result of the jackpot judgment (effect judgment), the relationship is established such that the appearance rate of the "second production mode with relatively high expectation" is higher as the post-operation effect when Any of the simulated images IGa to IGd is displayed.

It is not always necessary to prepare all of the four aspects shown as the integrated images IGa to IGd. It is possible to suggest the degree of expectation as a post-operation effect within the valid period only by preparing at least two modes. Further, a mode different from the above four modes (integrated image IGa to IGd) may be further prepared, and any of the prepared modes may be displayed.

As described above, in the pachinko machine 1 according to this embodiment,
An operating means (sword decoration 5001,) having an operation receiving portion (handle button 5014 or operation button 410) that is displaced by an operation by the player, and a peripheral decoration portion (handle portion 5012, frame unit 415) provided on the periphery thereof. Production operation unit 400) and
An integrated image display means for displaying the image obtained by imitating the operation receiving portion as an integrated image IGa to IGd integrated with the peripheral decorative image that decorates the peripheral edge of the image.
-It is equipped with an operation reception execution means that can cause a display change (post-operation effect) when an operation is performed by the player and a predetermined displacement occurs in the operation receiving portion while the integrated image is displayed. The integrated image can be displayed in any of a plurality of modes (integrated image IGa to IGd).

Details of the "integrated image" shown in FIGS. 410 (a) to 410 (d) will be described separately for each of these modes (integrated image IGa to IGd).

First, the "integrated image IGa" shown in FIG. 410 (a) includes a normal button image BMGa and a normal peripheral decorative image SSGa that decorates the peripheral edge thereof. However, in the "integrated image IGa", the normal button image BMGa is displayed as "an image of the pattern button 5014 (or the operation button 410) to which the operation opportunity is given". On the other hand, the peripheral decoration image SSGa usually has a peripheral decoration portion (handle portion 5012, or frame) actually provided on the peripheral edge of the handle button 5014 (or operation button 410) to which an operation opportunity is given. The unit 415) is not imitated, and the peripheral edge of the normal button image BMGa is decorated as a virtual decoration on the display effect on the effect display device 1600.

According to such a configuration, first, even when a plurality of operating means are provided, which of the operating means is given the operating opportunity is determined by the operating means (the operating means which is the operation target). It can be easily recognized by visually recognizing the normal button image BMGa that imitates a part of). Moreover, the normal button image BMGa itself is not an actual peripheral decoration part, but a luxurious and large image (integrated image IGa) integrated with a peripheral decoration image that is preferable for improving decorativeness and color rendering. ), The directing impact when the normal button image BMGa is displayed is increased, and it is expected that the game entertainment will be improved. In addition, there is no need to worry about the cost and installation space for making the existing peripheral decoration part luxurious, and it is possible to realize a highly flexible effect regardless of the shape of the actual peripheral decoration part. become.

In the "integrated image IGa" shown in FIG. 410 (a), the normal peripheral decoration image SSGa is expressed as a pedestal for installing a button (normal button image BMGa), and the upper surface thereof has a pedestal. It is decorated with a certain decoration to warn that it is a high-risk button. As described above, these "pedestals" and "predetermined decorations" have a shape different from that of the actual peripheral decoration portion and are expressed as different decorations.

In this regard, in the "integrated image IGa" according to this embodiment, a display target area of the gauge image (predetermined image) GG is provided for such a normal peripheral decoration image SSGa. As will be described later with reference to FIG. 411 and the like, the gauge image (predetermined image) GG can be displayed so as to reduce the display area in the display target area with the passage of time. More specifically, the gauge image (predetermined image) GG has a predetermined minimum value (including "0") from a predetermined maximum value display area when the operation is not accepted within the valid period. It is displayed so that it decreases with the passage of time until it reaches the display area of. That is, in this case, the peripheral decorative image SSGa usually has a function of suggesting the operation means to be operated, and also suggests the remaining time until the state (valid period) in which the operation reception is permitted ends. It will also play a function of suggesting the remaining time.

In the normal peripheral decoration image SSGa shown in FIG. 410 (a), a partition image KG that partitions the display target area of the gauge image (predetermined image) GG from other areas in the normal peripheral decoration image SSGa is provided. .. The area surrounded by the section image KG functions as the "display target area of the gauge image (predetermined image) GG". However, the section image KG does not necessarily have to be displayed, and a predetermined range in the normal peripheral decoration image SSGa may be set as a “display target area of the gauge image (predetermined image) GG”.

Further, in the example shown in FIG. 410 (a), a predetermined decoration (here, "white and black striped pattern") is applied in the display target area of the gauge image (predetermined image) GG. , A gauge image having a predetermined transmittance (here, a “gray” gauge image) GG is displayed so as to overlap with the display target area to which the predetermined decoration is applied. According to such a configuration, the predetermined decoration is not hidden and can be visually recognized even in the portion where the gauge image (predetermined image) GG is displayed. Therefore, the gauge image GG is full. It will be possible to maintain the game entertainment favorably for the entire period until it becomes empty.

In addition, when realizing such a display mode in the display target area of the gauge image (predetermined image) GG, the gauge image GG having a predetermined transmittance is superimposed on the display target area to which the predetermined decoration is applied. In addition to the method of displaying the image, a method of changing the color of the display target area itself with the predetermined decoration between the portion with the gauge and the portion without the gauge may be adopted. In this case, the gauge image GG itself does not exist as image data by itself, and the gauge image GG can be expressed only by changing the color of a predetermined decoration in the display target area.

Further, in the example shown in FIG. 410 (a), the predetermined decoration (here, "white and black striped pattern") applied in the display target area of the gauge image (predetermined image) GG is the normal peripheral decoration. Since it is designed so as to straddle other areas in the image SSGa, the integrated decorativeness of the display target area itself of the gauge image (predetermined image) GG can be further enhanced. Therefore, it is more preferably expected that the game entertainment will be improved when the "integrated image IGa" is displayed.

Further, as shown in FIG. 410 (a), when a specific operation reception effect (valid period) in which the "integrated image IGa" is displayed occurs in the effect display device 1600, the pattern button to be operated is used. The 5014 (or the operation button 410) is made to emit light in the same color (for example, "blue") as the normal button image BMGa in the "integrated image IGa". That is, as will be described later, a plurality of modes having different expectations are prepared for the button-shaped image BMG, and a normal button-shaped image BMGa is displayed as one of these modes. Such a light emitting mode. If the above is adopted, the mode (expectation degree) as the button-shaped image BMG can be recognized only by checking the handle button 5014, which is the operation target, without visually recognizing the normal button-shaped image BMGa.

Regarding the "button image BMGa (FIG. 410 (a))", the pattern button 5014 (or the operation button 410) to be operated does not necessarily have to be accurately imitated. In short, the operation target is Any operation means may be displayed with a copying level (deformation, etc.) that can be recognized.

On the other hand, the "integrated image IGb" shown in FIG. 410 (b) is basically the same as the above-mentioned "integrated image IGa", and is the same as the button image BMG that imitates the operation target. , The peripheral decoration image SSG that decorates the peripheral edge is configured as an integrated image. However, in the "integrated image IGb", the peripheral decoration image SSG is displayed as the same as the above-mentioned "normal peripheral decoration image SSGa", but the button image BMG is displayed as the above-mentioned "button image". Instead of "BMGa", it is displayed as "special button image BMGb" having a different shape.

More specifically, in the "integrated image IGb" shown in FIG. 410 (b), the special button image BMGb imitates the pattern button 5014 (or the operation button 410) to be operated. It is displayed as an image having a shape different from that of the "button image BMGa (FIG. 410 (a))" in which the handle button 5014 (or the operation button 410) is imitated. However, if such a display method is simply adopted, there is a concern that it becomes difficult to recognize which of the plurality of operating means is the operation target when the "integrated image IGb" is displayed.

However, as described above, in the "integrated image IGa", the "button image BMGa" that imitates the pattern button 5014 (or the operation button 410) that is the operation target is displayed integrally with the "normal peripheral decoration image SSGa". Therefore, the "normal peripheral decoration image SSGa" itself has a function of suggesting that the pattern button 5014 (or the operation button 410) is the operation target. In this regard, in the "integrated image IGb", the "special button image BMGb" is integrated with such a "normal peripheral decoration image SSGa" and displayed, so that the "special button image" is displayed. Even if the "BMGb" does not properly imitate the operation target, it may be suggested that the handle button 5014 (or the operation button 410) is the operation target as a whole of the "integrated image IGb". become able to. In order to preferably obtain such an action effect (a function suggesting an operation target by the normal peripheral decoration image SSGa), the "normal peripheral decoration image SSGa" is an operation means different from the pattern button 5014 (or the operation button 410). It can be said that it is important not to display when (handle portion 5012, etc.) is the operation target.

According to such a configuration, the button image BMG that imitates the operation receiving portion and the peripheral decorative image SSG that decorates the peripheral edge thereof are displayed as an integrated image. The button image BMG, which is only a part of the image, can be displayed in a more flexible expression method that is not necessarily limited to the shape of the operation means to be operated, which makes it more prominent. It is expected that the game will be improved by its sexuality and decorativeness.

In the "special button image BMGb" illustrated in FIG. 410 (b), the button has a streamlined shape and is depicted in a more stylish design than the "button image BMGa", and on the top thereof. Words such as "DANGER" are applied. The appearance of a non-existent "special button image BMGb" as a part of such a pachinko machine 1 makes it easier for the player to feel a premium feeling, and the "button image BMGa" has appeared. It is expected that people will instinctively feel that their expectations are higher than they sometimes are.

Further, as shown in FIG. 410 (b), even when a specific operation reception effect (valid period) in which the "integrated image IGb" is displayed occurs in the effect display device 1600, the operation target is set. The handle button 5014 (or the operation button 410) is made to emit light in the same color (for example, "red") as the special button image BMGb in the "integrated image IGb". That is, the handle button 5014 (or the operation button 410) to be operated is capable of emitting light in a manner corresponding to the type of the button image BMG in the "integrated image IG". Even if the image BMG is not visually recognized, the mode (expected degree) of the button-shaped image BMG can be recognized only by checking the handle button 5014 which is the operation target.

On the other hand, the "integrated image IGc" shown in FIG. 410 (c) is basically the same as the above-mentioned "integrated image IGa". It is configured as an image integrated with the peripheral decoration image SSG that decorates the peripheral edge. However, in the "integrated image IGc", the button image BMG is displayed as the same as the above-mentioned "normal button image BMGa", but the peripheral decoration image SSG is displayed as the above-mentioned "normal peripheral decoration". Instead of "image SSGa", it is displayed as "special peripheral decoration image SSGb" having a different shape.

However, the "special peripheral decoration image SSGb" is also the same as the "normal peripheral decoration image SSGa" in each of the following points.
-"The peripheral decoration portion (handle portion 5012 or frame unit 415) actually provided on the peripheral edge of the handle button 5014 (or operation button 410) to which the operation opportunity is given is not imitated, and the effect display is performed. The peripheral edge of the button image BMG is decorated as a virtual decoration on the display effect on the device 1600.
A display target area for a gauge image (predetermined image) GG is provided.

According to such an "integrated image IGc (FIG. 410 (c))", any operating means is operated based on the "integrated image IGa (FIG. 410 (a))". It is possible to significantly change the shape of the "integrated image IGc (Fig. 410 (c))" as a whole without causing a shape change in the "button image BMG" that suggests whether an opportunity is given. become able to. As a result, it becomes possible to realize a highly flexible decorativeness / directing property by causing a shape change without sacrificing the suggestion function of the operation target.

Further, in the "special peripheral decoration image SSGb (FIG. 410 (c))" according to this embodiment, at least a part thereof is an image having the same decoration as the "normal peripheral decoration image SSGa (FIG. 410 (a))". Is displayed as. Therefore, the same post-operation effect is targeted when the "integrated image IGa (FIG. 410 (a))" appears and when the "integrated image IGc (FIG. 410 (c))" appears. It becomes possible to suggest that it is a specific operation reception effect (valid period).

In particular, in the "special peripheral decoration image SSGb (FIG. 410 (c))" according to this embodiment, a separate member having a special decoration is added to the "normal peripheral decorative image SSGa (FIG. 410 (a))". The whole image is displayed as an enlarged image in the form of being expanded. Therefore, it becomes easier to recognize that the "special peripheral decoration image SSGb" is displayed as an advanced version of the "normal peripheral decoration image SSGa", and the degree of expectation is higher than when the "button image BMGa" appears. It is expected that people will instinctively feel that it is expensive.

Further, the "special peripheral decoration image SSGb (FIG. 410 (c))" has a different shape and decoration from the "normal peripheral decorative image SSGa (FIG. 410 (a))", but is a gauge image (predetermined image). No change is made in the display target area itself of the GG.

That is, when a part of such an integrated image IG is used as a display target area of the gauge image GG, is the display target area or the gauge image only "a part of decoration" or "remaining"? It is difficult for the player to distinguish whether it is a part having a function of suggesting time. In this regard, the "normal peripheral decoration image SSGa (Fig. 410 (a))" and the "special peripheral decoration image SSGb (Fig. 410 (c))" have an important function such as "suggesting the remaining time". Since the shape of the display target area of the image (predetermined image) GG is not changed and the shape is changed in other parts, the shape can be changed without sacrificing the suggestion function of the remaining time. It becomes possible to realize a high degree of freedom in decorativeness and directivity by causing it.

Further, as shown in FIG. 410 (c), even when a specific operation reception effect (valid period) in which the "integrated image IGc" is displayed occurs in the effect display device 1600, the operation target is set. The handle button 5014 (or the operation button 410) is made to emit light in the same color (for example, "blue") as the normal button image BMGa in the "integrated image IGc". That is, the handle button 5014 (or the operation button 410) to be operated is capable of emitting light in a manner corresponding to the type of the button image BMG in the "integrated image IG". Even if the image BMG is not visually recognized, the mode (expected degree) of the button-shaped image BMG can be recognized only by checking the handle button 5014 which is the operation target. However, the normal button image BMGa when the "integrated image IGc" is displayed should be displayed in a different color (for example, "green") than when the "integrated image IGa" is displayed. It may be. In this case, the handle button 5014 (or the operation button 410) also emits green light.

On the other hand, the "integrated image IGd" shown in FIG. 410 (d) is basically the same as the above-mentioned "integrated image IGa". It is configured as an image integrated with the peripheral decoration image SSG that decorates the peripheral edge. However, in the "integrated image IGd", the button image BMG is displayed as a "special button image BMGb" having a different shape from the above-mentioned "normal button image BMG". Therefore, the peripheral decoration image SSG is also displayed as a "special peripheral decoration image SSGb" having a different shape from the above-mentioned "normal peripheral decoration image SSGa".

That is, in the "integrated image IGd (FIG. 410 (d))", the "special button image BMGb" used in the "integrated image IGb (FIG. 410 (b))" and the "integrated image IGc" (Fig. 410 (c)) ”is displayed as an integrated image with the“ special peripheral decoration image SSGb ”. According to such a configuration, the action and effect exerted by the above-mentioned "special button image BMGb" with respect to the "integrated image IGb (FIG. 410 (b))" and the "integrated image IGc (FIG. 410 (Fig. 410))". With respect to "c))", not only the effects and effects produced by the above-mentioned "special peripheral decoration image SSGb" can be obtained, but also when "integrated image IGa (FIG. 410 (a))" is used as a reference, Since the modes of both the button image BMG and the peripheral decoration image SSG will be changed, it is expected that the expectation is high instinctively.

On the other hand, while both the button-shaped image BMG and the peripheral decoration image SSG change their modes, the same decoration and shape appear in a part of the peripheral decoration image SSG. Specific targeting the same post-operation effect depending on whether the "integrated image IGa (Fig. 410 (a))" appears or the "integrated image IGd (Fig. 410 (d))" appears. It becomes possible to suggest that it is an operation reception effect (valid period) of.

Further, as shown in FIG. 410 (d), when a specific operation reception effect (valid period) in which the "integrated image IGd" is displayed occurs in the effect display device 1600, the operation target is also set. The handle button 5014 (or the operation button 410) is made to emit light in the same color (for example, "red") as the special button image BMGb in the "integrated image IGd". That is, the handle button 5014 (or the operation button 410) to be operated is capable of emitting light in a manner corresponding to the type of the button image BMG in the "integrated image IG". Even if the image BMG is not visually recognized, the mode (expected degree) of the button-shaped image BMG can be recognized only by checking the handle button 5014 which is the operation target. However, the special button image BMGb when the "integrated image IGd" is displayed is displayed in a color different from that when the "integrated image IGb" is displayed (for example, "rainbow color"). You may do so. In this case, the handle button 5014 (or the operation button 410) also emits light in a rainbow color.

As shown in FIGS. 410 (a) to 410 (d), in the pachinko machine 1 according to this embodiment, the symbol effect based on the predetermined fluctuation pattern progresses to a predetermined timing, and the predetermined operation reception effect (valid period). When is generated, the integrated image IG in which the button image BMG and the peripheral decoration image SSG are integrated is displayed, but one side of the button image BMG and the peripheral decorative image SSG is displayed in one mode. The other side can be displayed in any of a plurality of modes. For example, when the button image BMG is displayed as the "normal button image BMG", the peripheral decorative image SSG can be displayed as either the "normal peripheral decorative image SSGa" or the "special peripheral decorative image SSGb" ( FIGS. 410 (a) and 410 (c)). Further, when the button image BMG is displayed as the "special button image BMGb", the peripheral decoration image SSG can be displayed as either "normal peripheral decoration image SSGa" or "special peripheral decoration image SSGb" ( FIGS. 410 (b) and 410 (d)). Further, when the peripheral decoration image SSG is displayed as "normal peripheral decoration image SSG", the button image BMG can be displayed as either "normal button image BMGa" or "special button image BMGb" ( FIGS. 410 (a) and 410 (b)). Further, when the peripheral decoration image SSG is displayed as the "special peripheral decoration image SSGb", the button image BMG can be displayed as either the "normal button image BMGa" or the "special button image BMGb" ( FIGS. 410 (a) and 410 (b)).

According to such a configuration, although the button-shaped image BMG and the peripheral decoration image SSG are displayed in an integrated manner, when the mode changes, only one side thereof is displayed. Therefore, by looking at one side where the mode has not changed, it is possible to easily recognize that a predetermined operation reception effect (validity period) has occurred regardless of which mode the other side is displayed. However, by looking at the other side where the mode is changing, it becomes possible to preferably recognize the degree of expectation. It should be noted that the mode of one side of the button-shaped image BMG and the peripheral decoration image SSG may not be changed, and the mode may be changed only on the other side.

Further, in the integrated image IG shown in FIGS. 410 (a) to 410 (d), the peripheral decoration image SSG includes a display target area of the gauge image (predetermined image) GG. Then, when the integrated image IG is displayed in the operation reception effect (valid period), the gauge image (predetermined image) GG is displayed so as to reduce the display area in the display target area with the passage of time. It is possible. That is, in this case, the "peripheral decoration image SSG" is responsible for the remaining time suggestion function that suggests the remaining time until the state in which the operation reception is permitted ends, and which operation means is the operation target. By displaying it as an integrated image IG integrated with the "button image BMG" that has the suggestive function, it is possible to recognize which of the multiple modes has appeared while grasping the remaining time and the operation target. It is expected that the game entertainment when the operation reception effect (valid period) is occurring, such as being able to play the game, can be maintained.

Further, in the integrated image IG shown in FIGS. 410 (a) to 410 (d), the peripheral decoration image SSG includes a display target area of the gauge image (predetermined image) GG and the gauge image (predetermined image) GG. The non-display area of is included (there is both a part having a remaining time suggesting function and a part not having a remaining time suggesting function). That is, the peripheral decoration image SSG is not only intended to suggest the remaining time of the operation reception effect (valid period), and in the portion where the gauge image (predetermined image) GG is not displayed, the "decoration of the button image BMG" is used. Since it is possible to positively adopt a display mode aimed at "improving the character", while suggesting the remaining time, the effectability when the operation reception effect, which is an important effect, occurs. It will be possible to improve significantly. In order to obtain such an effect, it is more desirable that the non-display area of the gauge image (predetermined image) GG is displayed as a larger area than the display target area of the gauge image (predetermined image) GG. It can be said that.

Further, in the integrated image IG shown in FIGS. 410 (a) to 410 (d), when the peripheral decoration image SSG is displayed in one mode, the button image BMG can be displayed in any of a plurality of modes. However, as an entity, when the "handle portion 5012" which is the peripheral decoration portion is one aspect, the handle button 5014 (or the operation button 410) which is the operation receiving portion has a plurality of aspects (plural emission colors). ) Is changed to one of them. Therefore, when the button copy image BMG changes, it can be confirmed only by confirming the pattern button 5014 (or the operation button 410) which is the copy target.

Further, in the integrated image IG shown in FIGS. 410 (a) to 410 (d), when the button image BMG is displayed in one mode, the peripheral decoration image SSG can be displayed in any of a plurality of modes. However, as an entity, the "handle portion 5012", which is the peripheral decorative portion, does not change to any of the plurality of modes. That is, as described above, the peripheral decoration image SSG decorates the peripheral edge of the button-shaped image BMG as a virtual decoration that does not actually exist as a part of the pachinko machine 1. Therefore, it is not necessary for the peripheral decoration image SSG to match the mode of the "pattern portion 5012" which is the peripheral decoration portion, and it is possible to perform a variety of depictions that are preferable for enlivening the effect. The peripheral decorative portion "handle portion 5012" may be provided so as not to change in a plurality of modes in the first place, such as non-emission.

Further, in the integrated image IG shown in FIGS. 410 (a) to 410 (d), both modes of the button image BMG and the peripheral decoration image SSG may change (FIG. 410 (d)). However, as an entity, it is desirable that both the button-shaped image BMG and the peripheral decoration image SSG change in one aspect when the peripheral decorative portion "handle portion 5012" is in one aspect.

Different aspects appear in the peripheral decoration portion "handle portion 5012" depending on whether the peripheral decoration image SSG is the "normal peripheral decoration image SSG" or the peripheral decoration image SSG is the "special peripheral decoration image SSGb". You may do so. However, while the shape of the peripheral decoration image SSG is at least different between the case where the peripheral decoration image SSG is the "normal peripheral decoration image SSG" and the case where the peripheral decoration image SSG is the "special peripheral decoration image SSGb", the peripheral decoration portion In the "handle portion 5012", it is desirable to only cause a mode change (for example, a change in the light emitting mode) that does not accompany the shape change. It can be said that it is desirable to provide the peripheral decoration portion so that the shape cannot be changed in the first place in order to emphasize the virtual effect function by the peripheral decoration image SSG.

Further, as will be described later, in the pachinko machine 1 according to this embodiment, the model image includes the button image BMG that imitates the handle button 5014 (or the operation button 410) and the pattern image that imitates the handle 5012. A TMG is prepared, and the form of the peripheral decorative image SSG is different depending on which of the simulated images is displayed. That is, in this case, the peripheral decorative images SSGa and b that decorate the peripheral edge of the button image BMG cannot be displayed when a different image different from the button image BMG is displayed. The decorative images SSGa, b itself can be expected to have a "function suggesting which operation means the operation target is".

If the form of the peripheral decoration image SSG differs depending on the form of the image (button image BMG, pattern image TMG), the gauge image (predetermined image) included in the peripheral decoration image has a form (thickness) as GG. , Length) should also be different. The operation reception effect in which the button image BMG is displayed and the operation reception effect in which the pattern image TMG is displayed are effects that occur at the same timing within the same fluctuation pattern (select which one occurs depending on the effect judgment). It may be an effect that occurs at different fluctuation patterns or different timings. The peripheral decoration image SSG that appears when the button image is BMG is not a model of the peripheral decoration, and the peripheral decoration image SSG that appears when the pattern image TMG is a model of the peripheral decoration. You may. However, it is desirable that the set time as the operation reception effect (valid period) may be the same even if the form (thickness, length) of the gauge image (predetermined image) GG is different.

Further, in the integrated image IG shown in FIGS. 410 (a) to 410 (d), the display target area of the gauge image (predetermined image) GG and the other area in the peripheral decoration image SSG are those areas. A predetermined decoration (here, "striped pattern") straddling the predetermined decoration is applied, and the gauge image (predetermined image) GG is displayed so as to overlap the predetermined decoration. That is, in this case, as the display area of the gauge image (predetermined image) GG decreases, the display area of the exposed predetermined decoration increases, so that the game entertainment can be improved. become able to.

In particular, in this embodiment, a gauge image having a predetermined transmittance (here, a “gray” gauge image) GG is displayed in a form of being superimposed on a display target area to which a predetermined decoration is applied. ing. According to such a configuration, the predetermined decoration is not hidden and can be visually recognized even in the portion where the gauge image (predetermined image) GG is displayed. Therefore, the gauge image GG is full. It will be possible to maintain the game entertainment favorably for the entire period until it becomes empty.

However, the predetermined decoration does not necessarily have to be displayed in the display target area of the gauge image (predetermined image) GG. Further, the gauge image (predetermined image) GG itself may have (also serve as) a predetermined decoration. In this case, the display area of the predetermined decoration as the display area of the gauge image (predetermined image) GG decreases. Since the number of images will decrease, players who dislike the decrease of predetermined decorations will be encouraged to perform operations at an early stage.

Further, in the integrated image IG shown in FIGS. 410 (a) to 410 (d), the peripheral decorative image SSG is the peripheral edge of the operation receiving portion (handle button 5014 or operation button 410) to be operated. The peripheral decoration portion (handle portion 5012 or frame unit 415) provided in the above is not imitated, and the image represents an insubstantial object as a gaming machine part. Therefore, it becomes possible to realize a more flexible decorativeness and directability that is not bound by the substance as a gaming machine part.

Further, in the integrated image IG shown in FIGS. 410 (a) to 410 (d), at least the peripheral decorative image SSG has a plurality of shapes among the button image BMG and the peripheral decorative image SSG. That is, in this case, since it is possible to change the shape of only the peripheral decoration image SSG expressing an insubstantial object without changing the shape of the button image BMG, any of the plurality of operating means can be used as the operation target. It will be possible to realize a display with higher color rendering and decorativeness by changing the shape of the integrated image IG while properly suggesting whether or not it is.

Regarding the peripheral decoration image SSG, when the button-shaped image BMG is in one aspect, the shape may not necessarily be changed, but only the color may be changed. However, the shape change is allowed because the peripheral decoration image SSG represents an insubstantial object and the peripheral decoration image SSG is displayed as an image integrated with the button-shaped image BMG. That is why, in this sense, it can be said that changing the shape of the peripheral decorative image SSG has great technical value.

In the integrated image IG shown in FIGS. 410 (a) to 410 (d), the peripheral decorative image SSG is changed in a form of increasing its size. As will be described later, as a method of such a form change, either a method of increasing the number of objects expressed as an image (number of decorations, etc.) or a plurality of modes having different contour shapes (rectangular parallelepiped, sphere, etc.) It is possible to adopt a method of expanding the display target range of a predetermined object expressed as an image or an object displayed by. Further, as will be described later, regarding the morphological change of the peripheral decoration image SSG, as a precursory effect, an effect of gradually changing the form from a low expectation form to a high expectation form is executed, and then finally. The operation reception in the operation reception effect may be allowed while the changed form is maintained.

Further, in the integrated image IG shown in FIGS. 410 (a) to 410 (d), regardless of the form in which the peripheral decorative image SSG is displayed, the gauge image included in the peripheral decorative image SSG ( Predetermined image) The display target area of the GG is not changed (at least the shape is changed) and is displayed as the same form. Therefore, even if the form of the peripheral decorative image SSG changes, it is possible to preferably maintain the suggestion function of how much remaining time remains, and thus this is the important function. It becomes possible to suggest the degree of expectation by the shape change in a region different from the display target region of the gauge image (predetermined image) GG while holding the above.

Depending on which of the above-mentioned actions and effects is intended to be achieved, the peripheral decoration image SSG does not necessarily represent an insubstantial object, and the peripheral decoration provided on the peripheral edge of the operation receiving portion is provided. It may be displayed as an image in which the part is imitated.

Further, the integrated image IG shown in FIGS. 410 (a) to 410 (d) can be dynamically displayed during the "valid period in which operation reception is allowed" such as a predetermined operation reception effect. This encourages the player to operate.

However, in the integrated image IG according to this embodiment, although the button image BMG and the peripheral decoration image SSG are displayed in an integrated manner, the button image BMG and the peripheral decorative image SSG are displayed. Only one side is dynamically displayed, and the other side is displayed so as not to move. According to such a configuration, one side is displayed so as to stay in place while the other side contributes to improving the effectability when a button effect, which is an important effect, is generated by dynamic expression. As a result, the integrated image IG is not moved and displayed when viewed as a whole, so that visibility can be suitably ensured.

In the integrated image IG shown in FIGS. 410 (a) to 410 (d), the button image BMG is dynamically moved so that the operation receiving portion to which the operation opportunity is given is displaced within the movable range. It is displayed, and the peripheral decoration image SSG is not dynamically displayed. Then, a display target area of the gauge image (predetermined image) GG is provided on the side that is not dynamically displayed (peripheral decoration image SSG), and when the integrated image IG is displayed, the gauge image (predetermined image) GG is displayed. Can be displayed so that the display area in the display target area is reduced with the passage of time.

In this way, the display target area of the gauge image (predetermined image) GG is included in the side (peripheral decorative image SSG that is not dynamically displayed) of the integrated image IG that ensures suitable visibility. By doing so, the color rendering index when the operation reception effect, which is an important effect, is improved by the dynamic display by the button image BMG, but how much time is left for the effect reception to be allowed. Can be easily recognized.

Further, on the side of the integrated image IG that ensures suitable visibility (peripheral decorative image SSG that is not dynamically displayed), in addition to the display target area of the gauge image (predetermined image) GG, the gauge image ( Predetermined image) The area where GG is not displayed is also included. That is, in this case, when performing an effect suggesting the degree of expectation on the side of the integrated image IG that secures suitable visibility, the effect is performed in an area where the gauge image (predetermined image) GG is not displayed. This makes it possible to prevent the gauge image (predetermined image) GG from having an adverse effect on the display target area.

The peripheral decoration image SSG has a region different from the display target area of the gauge image (predetermined image) GG, the shape of the peripheral decoration image SSG itself, and the button image BMG have a plurality of modes having different expectations. One of the modes is displayed based on the result of the jackpot determination (effect determination), but the display target area of the gauge image (predetermined image) GG and the expected degree of the gauge image (predetermined image) GG itself are different. A plurality of modes may be provided, and one of these modes may be displayed based on the result of the jackpot determination (effect determination).

By the way, as shown in FIGS. 410 (a) to 410 (d), the button image BMG is displayed as an integrated image IG integrated with the peripheral decorative image SSG that decorates the peripheral edge thereof. Moreover, when the peripheral decoration image SSG includes the display target area of the gauge image (predetermined image) GG, is the gauge image (predetermined image) GG merely a decoration or pattern in the peripheral decoration image SSG? , Or it may be difficult to grasp whether it has a function of suggesting the remaining time. In addition, there is a concern that the interest in the game may be reduced due to the difficulty in grasping to what position the gauge image (predetermined image) GG is reduced due to the mixture with the decorations and patterns applied to the peripheral decoration image SSG. ..

Therefore, in the pachinko machine 1 (peripheral control unit 1511) according to this embodiment, when at least the display area of the gauge image (predetermined image) GG is reduced (within the valid period), the gauge image (within the valid period) In the display target area where the gauge image (predetermined image) GG can be displayed, an image different from the gauge image (predetermined image) GG or an image in which the mode of the gauge image (predetermined image) GG is partially changed can be displayed.

More specifically, "a specific image different from the gauge image (predetermined image) GG, or a specific image in which the aspect of the gauge image (predetermined image) GG is partially changed" is referred to as a gauge image (predetermined image) GG. It is displayed at or near the end of the gauge image (predetermined image) GG in the display target area. Then, in accordance with the displacement of the end portion of the gauge image (predetermined image) GG when the display area of the gauge image (predetermined image) GG decreases, "a specific image different from the gauge image (predetermined image) GG, or a specific image different from the gauge image (predetermined image) GG" The display position of the "specific image in which the mode of the gauge image (predetermined image) GG is partially changed" is also displayed so as to be displaced in the same manner.

According to such a configuration, "a specific image different from the gauge image (predetermined image) GG, or a specific image in which the mode of the gauge image (predetermined image) GG is partially changed" is displaced to a predetermined position. Then, since the valid period ends, even if it is not possible to recognize whether the gauge image (predetermined image) GG itself is a mere decoration or an indication of the remaining time, the position of the "specific image". By checking, you will be able to recognize the remaining time. In this sense, when displaying such a "specific image", it can be said that the gauge image (predetermined image) GG does not necessarily have to be displayed.

FIG. 411 is a diagram showing a display example of the integrated image IG from the start to the end of the valid period in which the operation reception is allowed.

As shown in FIG. 411, assuming that the timing A0 at which the valid period (predetermined operation reception effect) at which the operation reception is allowed is started within the predetermined fluctuation pattern has arrived, the effect display device 1600 will use the effect display device 1600. , Integrated image IG and operation promotion images such as "press!" And "down arrow" are displayed.

In this example, the mode (integrated image IGa) shown in FIG. 410 (a) is displayed as the integrated image IG, but FIGS. 410 (b) to (d) are based on the result of the effect determination. ) May be displayed in any of the modes shown in). Regardless of which mode the integrated image IG is displayed, the display of the gauge image (predetermined image) GG within the valid period, the display of the gauge image (predetermined image) GG, the specific image different from the gauge image (predetermined image) GG, or The display of the "specific image in which the mode of the gauge image (predetermined image) GG is partially changed" causes a change in the mode described below with the passage of time.

As shown in FIG. 411 (a), first, in the integrated image IG when the timing is A0 (the start timing of the valid period), the gauge image (predetermined image) GG is displayed in the entire display target area. Will be done. By displaying the gauge image (predetermined image) GG in such a full tank mode, it becomes possible to recognize that the valid period has just started.

In this regard, in the example shown in FIG. 411 (a), at the timing A0, which is the start timing of the valid period, "a specific image different from the gauge image (predetermined image) GG, or the gauge image (predetermined image) GG. The "specific image whose mode is partially changed" is not displayed in the display target area of the gauge image (predetermined image) GG. According to such a configuration, whether or not "a specific image different from the gauge image (predetermined image) GG or a specific image in which the mode of the gauge image (predetermined image) GG is partially changed" is displayed. Just by checking, it becomes possible to easily grasp whether or not the predetermined time has already passed since the operation reception was permitted (the remaining crotch is decreasing).

However, "a specific image different from the gauge image (predetermined image) GG, or a specific image in which the mode of the gauge image (predetermined image) GG is partially changed" is first started from timing A0 (start timing of the valid period). Gauge image (predetermined image) GG in a mode such as "the display area increases by the amount corresponding to the elapsed time" until the predetermined time (the time required for the entire image of the specific image to finish appearing) elapses. It is displayed in the display target area of.

For example, in the integrated image IG when a little time has passed from the timing A0 (the start timing of the valid period), the “gauge image (predetermined image) GG” is shown in FIG. 411 (b). A "specific image TG" as a "specific image" different from the specific image or a specific image in which the mode of the gauge image (predetermined image) GG is partially changed appears to the extent that about half of the image is visible. It can be seen that the display area is in the stage of increasing with the passage of time.

In the integrated image IG at the timings A2 and A3 when a large amount of time has passed, as shown in FIGS. 411 (c) and 411 (d), "a specific image different from the gauge image (predetermined image) GG, or a specific image different from the gauge image (predetermined image) GG" The "specific image TG" as the "specific image in which the mode of the gauge image (predetermined image) GG is partially changed" is in a situation where the whole picture has already appeared, and the gauge image without increasing the display area. (Predetermined image) It can be seen that the GG is in a state of being displaced in the display target area.

That is, as described above, the "specific image TG" is the gauge image (predetermined) that is displaced when the display area of the gauge image (predetermined image) GG is reduced in the display target area of the gauge image (predetermined image) GG. Image) What is displayed at or near the end of the GG, and what is displayed so that the display position is displaced (in a continuous manner) according to the displacement of the end of the gauge image (predetermined image) GG. It has become.

The "specific image TG" according to this embodiment is displayed at a position connected to the end portion of the gauge image (predetermined image) GG as an image in which a star-shaped mark is given in a white square space. It has become a thing. However, the "specific image TG" does not have to be displayed as a separate image at a position connected to the end of the gauge image (predetermined image) GG. For example, the end of the gauge image (predetermined image) GG. The end portion of the gauge image (predetermined image) GG may be displayed in a partially changed manner, such as an image in which the image gradually fades over a predetermined length. Alternatively, it may be displayed as an effect image appearing at or near the end of the gauge image (predetermined image) GG.

In any case, the "specific image TG" originally functions as a part of the gauge image (predetermined image) GG that suggests that the remaining time is exhausted when the display area becomes the minimum value ("0" in this case). Therefore, even when the remaining time runs out (when the validity period ends), at least a part (may be all) is not hidden and the display state is maintained.

In the pachinko machine 1 (peripheral control unit 1511) according to this embodiment, as shown in FIG. 411 (e), in the integrated image IG when the timing A4 is the end timing of the valid period, the gauge is used. The display area of the image (predetermined image) GG is "0", and about half of the display area of the "specific image TG" is left. Then, when the operation is not accepted until this state is reached, the period in which the operation acceptance is allowed ends in this state, and the integrated image IG is hidden.

However, as described above, the "specific image TG" does not originally function as a part of the gauge image (predetermined image) GG. Therefore, in the integrated image IG at the timing A4, which is the end timing of the valid period, it is most desirable to display so that the entire display area of the "specific image TG" is left, and such a configuration is used. You may try to do it.

However, it is difficult to realize a display in which the display area of the gauge image (predetermined image) GG becomes exactly "0" at the end of the valid period. In this regard, in the pachinko machine 1 (peripheral control unit 1511) according to this embodiment, the "specific image TG" is aligned with the displacement of the end portion of the gauge image (predetermined image) GG (in a continuous manner) and its display position. Since the image is displayed so as to be displaced, when viewed from the player side, how many images of the images displayed in the display target area of the gauge image (predetermined image) GG are the gauge image (the gauge image (predetermined image). Predetermined image) It becomes possible to make it ambiguous whether it is GG.

That is, although the "specific image TG" is not hidden at the end of the valid period and most of the display area (more than half or all) is left, from the player side. When viewed, it also appears to be part of a gauge image (predetermined image) GG whose display area is set to the minimum value (hidden here) when the validity period ends. According to such a configuration, it is possible to make the gauge image (predetermined image) GG appear to be a longer image than it actually is, so that it can be made to appear that the validity period remains longer than it actually is. Therefore, it becomes possible to suitably maintain the game entertainment while the operation reception effect is being performed.

On the other hand, when the valid period of the operation reception effect ends, at least a part of the "specific image TG" is left and ends, so that the gauge image (predetermined image) GG is hidden. Even if the period does not end immediately after becoming, it is possible to display the "specific image TG" so that the display area is reduced, and thereby the gauge image (predetermined image) GG is not displayed. It becomes possible to make it difficult to cause a sense of discomfort due to a gap between the display timing and the end timing of the valid period. That is, in this case, the "specific image TG" can be expected to play a role as a buffer capable of absorbing such a time lag.

By the way, in the example shown in FIG. 411, at the timing A0 which is the start timing of the valid period, "a specific image different from the gauge image (predetermined image) GG, or a mode of the gauge image (predetermined image) GG is partially changed. The "specific image" is not displayed in the display target area of the gauge image (predetermined image) GG. However, at timing A0, which is the start timing of the valid period, "a specific image different from the gauge image (predetermined image) GG, or a specific image in which the mode of the gauge image (predetermined image) GG is partially changed" is gauged. The image (predetermined image) may be displayed within the display target area of the GG.

According to such a configuration, "a specific image different from the gauge image (predetermined image) GG, or a specific image in which the mode of the gauge image (predetermined image) GG is partially changed" is a part of the gauge image GG. Since it becomes possible to make it look positive as if it were, it becomes as if a longer time than it looks is set as the validity period, and when the validity period occurs, it becomes a game entertainment hobby. It will be expected to improve.

FIG. 412 is a diagram showing another display example of the integrated image IG from the start to the end of the valid period in which the operation reception is allowed.

Now, assuming that the timing A0 at which the valid period (predetermined operation reception effect) at which the operation reception is allowed starts within the predetermined fluctuation pattern has arrived, even in the example shown in FIG. 412, the effect display device 1600 , Integrated image IG and operation promotion images such as "press!" And "down arrow" are displayed.

Also in this example, the mode (integrated image IGa) shown in FIG. 410 (a) is displayed as the integrated image IG, but FIGS. 410 (b) to (1) based on the result of the effect determination. It may be displayed in any of the aspects shown in d). Regardless of which mode the integrated image IG is displayed, the display of the gauge image (predetermined image) GG within the valid period, the display of the gauge image (predetermined image) GG, the specific image different from the gauge image (predetermined image) GG, or The display of the "specific image in which the mode of the gauge image (predetermined image) GG is partially changed" causes a change in the mode shown in FIGS. 412 (a) to 412 (d) with the passage of time. ..

In this regard, in the example shown in FIG. 412 (a), in the integrated image IG when the timing is A0 (the start timing of the valid period), the gauge image (predetermined image) GG covers the entire display target area. It is not displayed, and the "gauge image (predetermined image) GG" and the "specific image TG" are displayed, respectively. When the timing A0 (the start timing of the valid period) is set, only a part of the "specific image TG" may be displayed, but the whole is displayed here. With such a configuration, it seems that a longer time than it looks is left because the "specific image TG" can be made to appear as if it functions as a part of the "gauge image GG". It is possible to make it.

The "specific image TG" according to this example is an image expressing the "eraser", and cannot fit in the area surrounded by the section image KG (the display target area of the gauge image GG) and other areas (of the peripheral decoration image SSG). , Areas where the mode can change depending on the degree of expectation, etc.) are displayed with a size that spans them. With such a configuration, it becomes possible to make the "specific image TG" stand out more than the "gauge image GG", and it is possible to suppress the occurrence of a situation in which it is not possible to recognize how much time is left. Be expected.

Further, in this example, when the time elapses from the timing A0 and the timings A2 and A3 are reached and the "specific image TG" is displaced, the "specific image TG" is shown in FIGS. 412 (b) and 412 (c). The part that "" has passed through changes to a "white area" as if it had been erased by an eraser. According to such a configuration, the display area of the "gauge image GG" expressed in multiple colors (including similar colors and glossy expression) is reduced by the amount corresponding to the displacement amount of the "specific image TG". Occasionally, the reduced area was expressed in only one color, so the contrast with the "specific image TG" as the boundary became conspicuous, suggesting how much time was left. It becomes possible to make it easier for the player to recognize that the depiction is to be performed. It is desirable that the color appearing in the reduced region is a color not used in the "gauge image GG".

Also in the example shown in FIG. 412, the “specific image TG” is one of the gauge image (predetermined image) GG suggesting that the remaining time has disappeared when the display area becomes the minimum value (“0” in this case). Since it does not function as a part, at least a part (may be all) is not hidden and the display state is maintained even when the remaining time runs out (when the validity period ends). Become.

In this example, as shown in FIG. 412 (d), the display area of the gauge image (predetermined image) GG is "0" in the integrated image IG when the timing A4 is the end timing of the valid period. The display area of the "specific image TG" is completely left. Then, when the operation is not accepted until this state is reached, the period in which the operation acceptance is allowed ends in this state, and the integrated image IG is hidden.

However, also in this example, a part of the display area of the "specific image TG" is hidden and a part is left in the integrated image IG when it is at the timing A4 which is the end timing of the valid period. It may be displayed as.

Even in this example, the "specific image TG" is displayed so as to be displaced (in a continuous manner) according to the displacement of the end portion of the gauge image (predetermined image) GG. When viewed from the player side, it is possible to obscure how many images displayed in the display target area of the gauge image (predetermined image) GG are the gauge image (predetermined image) GG. Will be.

That is, although the "specific image TG" is not hidden at the end of the valid period and most of the display area (more than half or all) is left, from the player side. When viewed, it also appears to be part of a gauge image (predetermined image) GG whose display area is set to the minimum value (hidden here) when the validity period ends. According to such a configuration, it is possible to make the gauge image (predetermined image) GG appear to be a longer image than it actually is, so that it can be made to appear that the validity period remains longer than it actually is. Therefore, it becomes possible to suitably maintain the game entertainment while the operation reception effect is being performed.

On the other hand, when the valid period of the operation reception effect ends, at least a part of the "specific image TG" is left and ends, so that the gauge image (predetermined image) GG is hidden. Even if the period does not end immediately after becoming, it is possible to display the "specific image TG" so that the display area is reduced, and thereby the gauge image (predetermined image) GG is not displayed. It becomes possible to make it difficult to cause a sense of discomfort due to a gap between the display timing and the end timing of the valid period. That is, in this case, the "specific image TG" can be expected to play a role as a buffer capable of absorbing such a time lag.

In the example shown in FIG. 412, the images of the "gauge image GG" and the "specific image TG" are made different from the case of the example shown in FIG. 411, but the same image may be used. On the contrary, in the example shown in FIG. 411, the same image as in the case of the example shown in FIG. 412 may be used. Further, the valid period in which the images of the "gauge image GG" and the "specific image TG" are displayed in the mode shown in FIG. 411, and the images of the "gauge image GG" and the "specific image TG" in the mode shown in FIG. 412. May occur under different conditions from the validity period in which is displayed. In this case, the shape of the integrated image IG itself and at least the shape of the display target area of the gauge image GG are mutually different between the effective period in which the aspect shown in FIG. 411 appears and the effective period in which the aspect shown in FIG. 412 appears. It is desirable to make them different.

As described above, the integrated image IG is dynamic during the valid period of the predetermined operation reception effect, as shown in FIGS. 411 (a) to (e) and 412 (a) to (d). It can be displayed, which prompts the player to operate it. However, as described above, the button image BMG is dynamically displayed so that the operation receiving portion to which the operation opportunity is given is displaced within the movable range, whereas the peripheral decoration image SSG is used. Prevents this from being displayed dynamically. Then, in the peripheral decoration image SSG on the side that does not perform such dynamic display, a display target area of the gauge image (predetermined image) GG is provided, and in the display target area, the specific image TG and the gauge image ( Since the predetermined image) GG is changed, it is easy to recognize how much time is left until the expiration date even in the dynamically displayed integrated image IG. You will be able to do it.

The "gauge image (predetermined image) GG" and the "specific image TG" may be displayed as one image data or may be displayed as separate image data.

According to the configuration shown in FIGS. 411 and 412, the "specific image TG" has a display area of the "gauge image (predetermined image) GG" in the display target area of the "gauge image (predetermined image) GG". It is displayed at or near the end of the "gauge image (predetermined image) GG" that is displaced when it is reduced, and its display position is displaced according to the displacement of the end of the "gauge image (predetermined image) GG". Is displayed. Therefore, when viewed from the player side, it is ambiguous as to how many images displayed in the display target area of the gauge image (predetermined image) GG are the gauge image (predetermined image) GG. Will be able to.

Further, the "specific image TG" shown in FIG. 411 is not displayed when the display area of the "gauge image (predetermined image) GG" is at the maximum value, and the predetermined time has passed since the operation reception was allowed. Until the elapse (until the entire specific image TG appears), the display area of the "specific image TG" is compensated for by the decrease in the display area of the "gauge image (predetermined image) GG". I am trying to increase. According to such a configuration, it seems that the remaining time suggested by the "gauge image (predetermined image) GG" does not decrease at the beginning from the start of the valid period until the predetermined time elapses. Since it becomes possible to have a good image, it becomes possible to maintain a good game interest.

In the examples shown in FIGS. 411 and 412, the integrated image IG is displayed in any of a plurality of modes (FIGS. 410 (a) to (e)) based on the result of the jackpot determination (effect determination). However, regardless of which of these modes is displayed, the display shapes of the "gauge image (predetermined image) GG" and the "specific image TG" are the same. It is desirable to. Regarding each aspect (pattern, color, etc.) of the "gauge image (predetermined image) GG" and the "specific image TG", they may be changed according to the degree of expectation, but a function of suggesting the remaining time is provided. In order to maintain it suitably, it is desirable that even if one aspect of the "gauge image (predetermined image) GG" and the "specific image TG" is changed, the other aspect is not changed. For example, if the mark attached to the "specific image TG" shown in FIG. 411 is not a star shape but a double circle, it is suggested that the degree of expectation is high. As the "image) GG" is reduced, the degree of expectation (double circle) will gradually become visible, and it is expected that the interest in the game will be improved.

Further, in the examples shown in FIGS. 411 and 412, at least a part (or all) of the "specific image TG" is not included even when the valid period ends without any operation by the player. The display state is maintained without being displayed. However, with respect to the operation reception effect shown in FIGS. 411 and 412, when the timing A4 arrives without the player performing the operation, the operation reception is internally performed and the post-operation display and the post-operation sound output (for example, the operation) are performed. It is desirable to make it function as the above-mentioned "automatic reception effect" in which only sound is output according to the reception). In this case, the timing A4 may be the timing at which the valid period ends, or may be set as a timing before or after the timing. In any case, the timing A4 is after the "gauge image (predetermined image) GG" is hidden (timing when it is hidden or later), and is of the "specific image TG". It is desirable to set it as the timing of arrival when at least a part of it is displayed.

According to such a configuration, even if an operation is performed by the player immediately after the operation reception is no longer allowed, even immediately before the post-operation display or the post-operation sound output is performed, " Since the "specific image TG" is displayed, it is possible to make it appear as if the post-operation display or the post-operation sound output is started in response to the operation reception by the player in time. become able to. The "specific image TG" may be displayed even when the post-operation display or the post-operation sound output is started (for example, by fading out after the post-operation display or the post-operation sound output is started). Things that are gradually hidden).

When the valid period for which such automatic reception is performed is the first valid period generated by the establishment of the first condition, the pachinko machine 1 according to this embodiment has a second valid period different from the first condition. When the conditions are met, it is possible to generate a second validity period in which automatic reception is not performed. Even in the second validity period, the button image BMG is displayed as an integrated image IG integrated with the peripheral decorative image SSG that decorates the peripheral edge thereof, and the gauge image (predetermined image) is displayed on the peripheral decorative image SSG. ) The display target area of GG is included. However, within the second valid period generated by the satisfaction of the second condition, the "gauge image (predetermined image) GG" is displayed in the display target area of the gauge image (predetermined image) GG, but the "specific image TG". Is not displayed. The integrated image IG displayed within the first valid period and the integrated image IG displayed within the second valid period are displayed as the same image except that the "specific image TG" is not displayed. Can be done.

That is, in the second valid period generated by the fulfillment of the second condition, unlike the first valid period generated by the fulfillment of the first condition, if the set time elapses without being operated by the player, The second validity period ends in such a way that the automatic reception does not function and the display after the operation and / or the sound output after the operation are not generated. Therefore, if the display of "specific image TG" is left at the time when the reception for the operation by the player is not allowed, the validity period ends even though the remaining time has not been exhausted. It may cause a misunderstanding as if it was done, and eventually the game entertainment may be reduced. Therefore, in the second valid period, it is desirable that the "specific image TG" is not displayed for the entire period from the start to the end.

In this case, it is desirable that the length of the set time (time from the acceptance of the operation reception to the end) differs between the first validity period and the second validity period. In addition, it is desirable that the display changes (post-operation display) and sound output (post-operation sound output) that occur when the operation is accepted have different contents.

Further, in addition to the first valid period that occurs when the first condition is satisfied, a third valid period in which automatic reception is performed may be generated (for example, it occurs when the third condition is satisfied). In addition to the second valid period that occurs when the second condition is satisfied, a fourth valid period in which automatic reception is not performed may be generated (for example, it occurs when the fourth condition is satisfied). The point is that the valid period for automatic reception (valid period with different occurrence conditions) includes at least the first valid period for processing the display and sound in the above-mentioned manner, and automatic reception is performed. It suffices that at least the second valid period in which the processing related to the display and the sound is performed in the above-described manner is included in the valid period in which the display and the sound are not performed (valid periods in which the generation conditions are different from each other).

In addition, the "first validity period" here is
-It does not mean that the display after operation or the sound output after operation is output regardless of the presence or absence of operation within the valid period only when the special effect state (automatic reception mode) is set.
-It means that the display after the operation and the sound output after the operation are output regardless of the presence or absence of the operation within the valid period regardless of the effect state. In the first place, it is not always necessary to prepare a "special production state (automatic reception mode)" or a "plurality of production state" as the production state. In addition, if the "second validity period" occurs while the "special production state (automatic reception mode) is set", either one may be adopted as to whether or not the automatic reception is enabled. (For example, "automatic reception is not always enabled regardless of the production state"), and has nothing to do with the configuration related to the technical features described here.

Further, in the pachinko machine 1 (peripheral control unit 1511) according to this embodiment, the gauge image (predetermined image) GG is displayed as an image having a specific non-linear shape. More specifically, when the valid period of the operation reception effect occurs, the integrated image IG (peripheral decorative image SSG) is displayed, and one of the areas forming the integrated image IG (peripheral decorative image SSG). In the non-linear region of the portion, the display area of the gauge image (predetermined image) GG is reduced according to the passage of time. According to such a configuration, the depiction itself that reduces the display area of the gauge image (predetermined image) GG with the passage of time becomes decorative, so that the remaining time as an effective period is digested. It will be possible to maintain the amusement interest in the game.

Further, as described above, in the pachinko machine 1 (peripheral control unit 1511) according to this embodiment, a gauge image having a predetermined transmittance is provided with a specific pattern on the display target area of the gauge image (predetermined image) GG. (Predetermined image) The GG is displayed in a form of being superimposed on this, or the gauge image (predetermined image) GG itself is provided with a specific pattern, so that the gauge image (predetermined image) changes with the passage of time. It becomes possible to improve the decorativeness of the depiction itself that reduces the display area of the GG. Moreover, in this embodiment, since the specific pattern is applied so as to extend beyond the display target area of the gauge image (predetermined image) GG, the gauge image (predetermined image) is applied according to the passage of time. It becomes possible to further improve the decorativeness of the depiction itself that reduces the display area of the GG.

As will be described later, in the pachinko machine 1 (peripheral control unit 1511) according to this embodiment, the display target area of the non-linear specific shape shown in FIGS. 411 and 412 is designated as the “first display target area”. When the second display target area has a shape (non-similar shape) different from the specific shape of the non-straight line, and the distance from the start to the end of the reduction of the display area of the gauge image (predetermined image) GG is different. The operation reception effect (valid period) in which is displayed can be generated under different conditions. The operation reception effect (valid period) in which the first display target area is displayed is terminated when the first set time elapses without being operated by the player, or by the player. The operation reception effect (valid period) in which the second display target area is displayed, while at least there is a case where the operation is terminated when the second set time elapses without being performed. May be terminated when the first set time elapses without being operated by the player, but when the second set time elapses without being operated by the player. I try not to end it.

In this regard, the operation target to which the operation opportunity is given by the operation reception effect (valid period) in which the first display target area is displayed and the operation reception effect (valid period) in which the second display target area is displayed. If the (operation receiving unit) is different, it becomes difficult to recognize whether or not the set times are the same when the operation targets are different, and the operation targets are different. Coupled with being there, it will be possible to encourage people to enjoy the operation reception production with a fresher feeling. In this case, the operation reception effect (valid period) in which the first display target area is displayed and the operation reception effect (valid period) in which the second display target area is displayed are different from each other. The model image will be displayed in a form integrated with the peripheral decoration image. As for the peripheral decoration image, an image depicting different decorations between the operation reception effect (valid period) in which the first display target area is displayed and the operation reception effect (valid period) in which the second display target area is displayed. However, in any case, a display target area of the gauge image (predetermined image) GG is provided in a part of the display target area. The gauge image (predetermined image) GG may be displayed as having different display shapes.

Further, in order to obtain the above-mentioned effects, the case where the gauge image (predetermined image) GG is displayed in the display target area of the "non-linear specific shape" and the case where the "different shape (non-similar shape)" is displayed. In the case where the gauge image (predetermined image) GG is displayed in the display target area, even if the same time (first set time) is set for each other, the display after the operation and the sound output after the operation are "big hits". It is desirable that the rate at which the "mode suggesting that" appears is different. The ratio may be "0%" or "100%".

The operation reception effect (valid period) in which the first display target area is displayed and the operation reception effect (valid period) in which the second display target area is displayed have the same set time (first set time). Sometimes it is desirable to be given the opportunity to accept operations regarding the same post-operation display and post-operation sound output. When the set time is different, it is desirable to give an opportunity to accept the operation regarding the display after the operation and the sound output after the operation.

Further, in the examples shown in FIGS. 411 and 412, the operation-related display such as "press!" Or "down arrow" is superimposed on the integrated image IG to be combined with the integrated image IG. When I look at these, I try to express more strongly that I am in a situation to operate. However, here, the operation-related display such as "press!" Or "down arrow" may be displayed overlapping with the button image BMG (at any timing of dynamic display) that suggests the target to be operated. It does not overlap with the gauge image (predetermined image) GG or the specific image TG that suggests the remaining time.

In such a configuration, operations such as "press!" Or "down arrow" are performed while avoiding important information such as button image BMG, gauge image (predetermined image) GG, and specific image TG among the integrated image IG. Since the related display is superimposed on the integrated image IG, it is possible to strongly encourage the player to operate while appropriately transmitting important information. Needless to say, this is because the button image BMG is displayed as an integrated image IG integrated with the peripheral decoration image SSG.

By the way, as described above, in the pachinko machine 1 (peripheral control unit 1511) according to this embodiment, the post-operation display performed when the operation reception is performed within the valid period as the valid period for which the operation reception is permitted. There are multiple (types) of valid periods with different contents of sound output after operation. The conditions for generating these validity periods are different from each other, and when any of the conditions for occurrence is satisfied, the corresponding type of validity period is generated.

In this regard, in the pachinko machine 1 (peripheral control unit 1511) according to this embodiment, "specific image TG" is displayed within the valid period of a plurality of types (first valid period). And, at least those in which the "specific image TG" is not displayed within the valid period (second valid period) are included. Hereinafter, in this example, these "first validity period" and "second validity period" are referred to as the above-mentioned "first validity period" in which automatic reception is performed and the above-mentioned "second validity period" in which automatic reception is not performed. Although it is described as the same as the "validity period of", it may be applied as a different validity period.

That is, in the pachinko machine 1 (peripheral control unit 1511) according to this embodiment, in performing the precursory effect (specific display) suggesting that the operation reception is permitted, the precursory effect (specific display) is subjected to the operation reception. Is sometimes executed in a form that straddles before and after the occurrence timing of the permissible validity period. According to such a precursor effect (specific display), a valid period will occur while the flashy effect is being performed. Therefore, it is possible to improve the game entertainment when the valid period occurs. become able to.

However, when the precursor effect (specific display) is executed in such a mode, the precursor effect (specific display) is preferentially displayed on the integrated image IG, so that it is integrated when the validity period is started. Even if the simulated image IG is displayed (internal layer display), the part overlapping the precursor effect (specific display) does not appear on the screen (it is not visible). Alternatively, even if a predetermined transmittance is set for the precursor effect (specific display), the portion of the integrated image IG that overlaps with the precursor effect (specific display) is difficult to see. In any case, the gauge image (predetermined image) GG will start to reduce its display area under such a situation where visibility is difficult.

That is, in this case, the precursor effect (specific display) is hidden, or the part that overlaps with the precursor effect (specific display) disappears and the entire integrated image IG (or the gauge image (predetermined image) GG is displayed. By the time the visibility of the entire area) is improved, the display area of the gauge image (predetermined image) GG has already decreased, so from the player's point of view, the valid period (set time). Can give the impression that is substantially shorter.

On the other hand, the above-mentioned "specific image TG" can be expected to function as a "pseudo gauge" that appears to be a part of the gauge image (predetermined image) GG when viewed from the player side. .. Therefore, in the pachinko machine 1 (peripheral control unit 1511) according to this embodiment, "precursor effect (specific display) is not executed or precursor effect (specific display) is executed among a plurality of types of valid periods. In the "second valid period in which the display area of the gauge image (predetermined image) GG is not reduced at the time when the precursor effect (specific display) is completed", from the occurrence of the second valid period to the end. Make sure that no "specific image TG" is displayed between. On the other hand, among the multiple (types) of valid periods, the gauge image is "when it occurs during the execution of the precursor effect (specific display) and the entire integrated image IG becomes visible (or easy to see). (Predetermined image) In the "first valid period in which the display area of the GG is reduced", the "specific image TG" is displayed within the first valid period.

According to such a configuration, the gauge image (predetermined image) is the gauge image (predetermined image) in the first valid period in which the display area of the gauge image (predetermined image) GG is reduced when the precursor effect (specific display) is hidden. Since the "specific image TG" is displayed in the display target area of the GG, the gauge image becomes visible when the entire integrated image IG (or the display target area of the gauge image GG) becomes visible. It becomes possible to make it appear that the display area of the GG has not decreased so much, and the deterioration of the game interest can be suppressed.

On the other hand, when the precursor effect (specific display) is hidden, the display area of the gauge image (predetermined image) GG is not reduced, or the precursor effect (specific display) is not performed for a second valid period. When the "specific image TG" is displayed in, for example, in the display mode of FIG. 411, the "specific image TG" is not displayed when the valid period occurs, and the valid period occurs. It may be discovered that this does not function as a gauge image (predetermined image) GG when the appearance of the "specific image TG" gradually appears with the passage of time from. That is, in this case, since there is a concern that the interest in the game may be reduced due to the exaggerated expression of the length of the remaining time, the "specific image TG" is displayed during such a second validity period. It is desirable not to do so in order to suppress the deterioration of the game interest.

In addition to the second validity period, in addition to the second validity period, "the precursor effect (specific display) is not executed, or the precursor effect (specific display) is executed but the precursor effect (specific display) is executed. ) Is completed, the gauge image (predetermined image) GG display area is not reduced in the valid period (fifth valid period) ”may be prepared under different generation conditions, or the first valid period In addition, the display area of the gauge image (predetermined image) GG decreases by the time it occurs during the execution of the precursor effect (specific display) and the entire integrated image IG becomes visible (or easy to see). The valid period (sixth valid period) "may be prepared under different generation conditions, and whether or not the above-mentioned" specific image TG "is displayed at this time may be appropriately set. good. In short, the plurality (types) of valid periods include at least the above-mentioned second valid period in which the "specific image TG" is not displayed and the above-mentioned first valid period in which the "specific image TG" is displayed. If so, at least when those effective periods occur, the above-mentioned effects will be exhibited in relation to the precursory effect (specific display).

In each of the following examples, the gauge image GG and the specific image TG are displayed in the mode shown in FIG. 411, but at least one of the gauge image GG and the specific image TG is replaced with the mode shown in FIG. 412. You may want to do it.

FIG. 413 is a diagram showing an example of the progress of the production when the first valid period occurs among the first valid period and the second valid period.

FIG. 413 (a) shows the effect display device 1600 in which the variation display of the decorative symbol SZ (special symbol) is a specific effect pattern (variation pattern) according to the result of the jackpot determination when the number of reservations is 0 in the normal game state. It shows the production situation being performed at.

FIG. 413 (b) shows the effect status in which the precursor effect (specific display TH) is started by the effect display device 1600 during the execution of the variable display of the decorative symbol SZ shown in FIG. 413 (a).

Here, in the example shown in FIG. 413 (b), it can be seen that at least in the effect display device 1600, the integrated image IG has not yet appeared. However, from the time when the precursor effect (specific display TH) is started, the integrated image IG is internally displayed, and the precursor effect (specific display TH) is preferentially displayed, so that the integration is performed. The entire image IG may be invisible (or may be difficult to see due to a predetermined transmittance). That is, in this case, the operation reception is permitted (the validity period is started) from the time when the precursor effect (specific display) is started.

In FIG. 413 (c), as a result of the advancement of the precursor effect (specific display TH) shown in FIG. 413 (b) and the reduction of the display area of the precursor effect (specific display TH), the integrated image IG is displayed. A portion that does not overlap with the precursor effect (specific display) appears, indicating a situation in which the portion is displayed in a state of good visibility.

That is, the integrated image IG is the timing (including the timing shown in FIG. 413 (b)) that arrives after the situation shown in FIG. 413 (b) appears, and is shown in FIG. 413 (c). When the "specific timing (timing when the validity period starts)", which is the timing that arrives before the appearance of the situation, is reached, the display (display on the layer process) is executed at least internally. It has become. Therefore, at the time shown in FIG. 413 (c), at least a part of the gauge image (predetermined image) GG and the specific image TG cannot be visually recognized (or visually recognized) because they overlap with the priority display precursor effect (specific display TH). Although it is difficult), the reduction of the display area of the "gauge image (predetermined image) GG" has already started (progressed), and the displacement of the "specific image TG" has already started (progressed). In this example, the entire specific image TG is set to overlap with the precursor effect (specific display TH).

According to such a configuration, the precursor effect (specific display TH) is performed so as to straddle the occurrence timing (specific timing) of the valid period, and the predetermined time after the valid period is generated is the precursor effect. (Specific display TH) makes it difficult or impossible to see at least a part of the integrated image IG. That is, in this case, since the whole picture of the integrated image IG is gradually exposed within the valid period, the degree of expectation suggested by the aspect of the integrated image IG (aspect of the peripheral decorative image). ) And the operation target (the mode of the button image) can be maintained for a predetermined time after the validity period is started.

In the example shown in FIG. 413 (c), it is difficult to visually recognize the button-shaped image that imitates the operation target, but the peripheral decoration image that decorates the peripheral edge is described in the "special peripheral decoration image SSGb". It is in a state where it can be recognized that it is a "normal peripheral decorative image SSGa". Further, in the example shown in FIG. 413 (c), since the "specific image TG" is in a state where it is difficult to see, the type in which the "specific image TG" is displayed in the first place when the valid period is started ( (See FIG. 412), or the type in which the "specific image TG" is not displayed at the start of the validity period and gradually appears after that (see FIG. 411). There is. That is, in the case of the type shown in FIG. 412, it is easy to detect that the "specific image TG" cannot function as a gauge image (predetermined image) GG. When adopted, it can be said that it is particularly effective to execute the precursory effect in the above-described manner in order to suppress the deterioration of the game interest.

In FIG. 413 (d), as a result of further progress of the precursor effect (specific display TH) shown in FIG. 413 (b), the portion overlapping with the integrated image IG (or the display target area of the gauge image GG) disappears. (Here, the precursory effect is hidden).

As shown in FIG. 413 (d), when the entire integrated image IG (or the display target area of the gauge image GG) is in a good visibility state, the gauge image (predetermined image) GG is displayed. The area has already decreased, and the displacement of the "specific image TG" has already started (here, the entire "specific image TG" has finished appearing). That is, in this case, since the "specific image TG" also appears to be a part of the "gauge image (predetermined image) GG", the display area larger than the actual display area applied to the gauge image (predetermined image) GG is large. It is left behind, and it is possible to make it seem as if the display area has not decreased so much. As a result, it can be expected that the deterioration of the game interest due to the fact that the display area of the gauge image (predetermined image) GG has already decreased when the precursor effect (specific display TH) is completed can be suppressed.

In FIG. 413 (e), the operation is not accepted until the display area of the gauge image (predetermined image) GG reaches the minimum value (here, “0”), and the valid period ends (or the valid period ends). An example of an image appearing in the effect display device 1600 is shown.

As shown in FIG. 413 (e), at least a part (or all of them) of the "specific image TG" is displayed even at the end of the valid period. In this regard, in the first valid period, as described above, even if the player does not perform the operation within the period, the same post-operation display and post-operation sound output as when the operation is performed are performed (FIG. 413). (F).

According to such a configuration (automatic reception effect), even if an operation is performed by the player immediately after the validity period ends (operation reception is no longer allowed), the display is displayed after the operation. Since the "specific image TG" is displayed even immediately before the sound output after the operation is performed, the display and the operation after the operation are performed according to the operation reception that accompanies the operation by the player in time. It will be possible to make it appear as if the after-sound output has started. In particular, when the precursor effect (pre-display) is performed in such an manner, the gauge image (predetermined) is reached when the entire image of the integrated image IG (or the display target area of the gauge image GG) is visually good. Image) The display area of GG has already decreased, and the displacement of "specific image TG" has already started. That is, in this case, it is highly likely that the operation by the player will not be in time, so even if there is no operation by the player within the valid period, the "specific image TG" is displayed after the operation. It can be said that it is particularly effective to suppress the deterioration of the game interest by outputting the sound after the operation.

Regarding the production progress in the mode shown in FIG. 413, there are cases where the "specific image TG" is displayed in the mode shown in FIG. 411 and cases where the "specific image TG" is displayed in the mode shown in FIG. 412. It may be applied to any of the above.

Further, in the example shown in FIG. 413, the precursor effect (specific display TH) and the integrated image IG are displayed on a separate layer, and the precursor effect (specific display TH) is preferentially displayed to appear in FIG. 413. It was decided to realize the production progress in the aspect. However, the present invention is not necessarily limited to this, and for example, the effect progress in the mode shown in FIG. 413 may be stored as one moving image data, and this may be realized by reproducing the moving image data. The method is also applicable to each of the examples described below.

In the example shown in FIG. 413, the embodiment (integrated image IGa) shown in FIG. 410 (a) is made to appear as the integrated image IG. However, as described above, the integrated image IG may appear in any of a plurality of modes (modes shown in FIGS. 410 (a) to (d)) based on the result of the jackpot determination (effect determination). .. When such a method is adopted, it is more desirable to execute the precursory effect in the manner shown in FIGS. 414 to 416 in order to improve the interest of the game.

FIGS. 414 to 416 are diagrams showing a modified example of the effect progress when the first valid period occurs among the first valid period and the second valid period described above.

FIG. 414 (a) shows an effect display device in which the variation display of the decorative symbol SZ (special symbol) is the first effect pattern (variation pattern) according to the result of the jackpot determination in the normal game state when the number of holdings is 0. It shows the production situation performed at 1600.

FIG. 414 (b) shows an effect in which the first precursor effect (first specific display TH1) is started by the effect display device 1600 during the execution of the variable display of the decorative symbol SZ shown in FIG. 414 (a). It shows the situation.

This first precursor effect (first specific display TH1) occurs when the first effect pattern (fluctuation pattern) progresses to the first timing, and suggests that an operation-related effect is performed. It functions as a directing effect.

In the pachinko machine 1 (peripheral control unit 1511) according to this embodiment, after the first precursor effect (first specific display TH1) is performed, based on the result of the jackpot determination (effect determination), " Either "the image shown in FIG. 415 (c)" or "the image shown in FIG. 416 (d)" is displayed, whereby the "normal button image BMG" and "special" are displayed as the button image BMG. It is intended to suggest which of the "button image BMGb" is more likely to appear.

Here, when the "image shown in FIG. 415 (c)" is displayed, there is a high possibility that the "normal button image BMG" is displayed as the button image BMG (here, "100%"). Will be suggested.

The "image shown in FIG. 415 (c)" according to this example is in a mode (here, translucent) in which the "integrated image IGa" is different from the normal state (the mode shown in FIG. 410 (a)). It is displayed as the expressed image IGa'. However, the present invention is not necessarily limited to this, and for example, for the “image shown in FIG. 415 (c)”, the “integrated image IGa” may be displayed in the same manner as shown in FIG. 410 (a). Alternatively, the "normal button image BMGa" may not be integrated with the "normal peripheral decoration image SSGa" and may be displayed as a single image. When the "normal button image BMGa" is displayed as a single image, it may be displayed in the normal state (the mode shown in FIG. 410 (a)) or in the normal time (FIG. 410 (a)). ) May be displayed as an image expressed in a mode different from the mode (here, translucent).

In any case, in the situation shown in FIG. 415 (c), it is approximated to the extent that the "normal button image BMGa" itself shown in FIG. 410 (a) or the "normal button image BMGa" is reminiscent. At least the image BMGa'with the (simulated) outer shape will be displayed. As a result, the "normal button image BMGa" is displayed as the "integrated image IGa (Fig. 410 (a))" integrated with the "normal peripheral decoration image SSGa", or the "special peripheral decoration" is displayed. It becomes possible to suggest that a valid period displayed as "integrated image IGc (FIG. 410 (a))" integrated with "image SSGb" occurs.

After the image IGa'(image BMGa') shown in FIG. 415 (c) is displayed, the image IGa'(image BMGa') is not the "integrated image IGa' (image 410 (a))". , An effect suggesting (reminding) that the image may be displayed as "integrated image IGc (FIG. 410 (c))" is executed.

In the example shown in FIG. 415 (d), the "special peripheral decoration image SSGb is expressed" with respect to the "image IGa'representing the integrated image IGa (or the image BMGa'expressing the normal button image BMGa)". It is described as a production that gradually brings the image SSGb'" closer. As a result of such an effect, the "special peripheral decoration image SSGb is expressed" with respect to the "image IGa'expressing the integrated image IGa (or the image BMGa'expressing the normal button image BMGa')". When the "image SSGb'" is added and integrated, the valid period in which the "integrated image IGc (FIG. 410 (c))" appears will occur. On the other hand, "image SSGb'expressing the special peripheral decoration image SSGb" is added to "image IGa'expressing the integrated image IGa (or image BMGa'expressing the normal button image BMGa')". If the images are not integrated, a valid period in which the “integrated image IGa (FIG. 410 (a))” appears will occur.

FIG. 415 (e) shows an effect situation in which the second precursor effect (second specific display TH2) is started on the effect display device 1600 after the effect shown in FIG. 415 (d) is performed. There is.

This second precursor effect (second specific display TH2) occurs when the first effect pattern (fluctuation pattern) progresses to the second timing, and suggests that operation reception is permitted. It is executed as a production. The second precursor effect (second specific display TH2) according to this example is for "image IGa'representing the integrated image IGa (or image BMGa'expressing the normal button image BMGa)". The "image SSGb'expressing the special peripheral decoration image SSGb" is started while gradually approaching, and at the time of the start, the "image IGa'expressing the integrated image IGa'( Alternatively, it is unclear whether or not the "image BMGa') expressing the normal button image BMGa" and the "image SSGb'expressing the special peripheral decoration image SSGb" are integrated.

When the effect shown in FIG. 415 (e) progresses, either the "image shown in FIG. 415 (f)" or the "image shown in FIG. 415 (h)" is obtained based on the result of the jackpot determination (effect determination). Is displayed.

The situations and image contents shown in FIGS. 415 (f) and 415 (h) are basically the same as the above-mentioned "situations and image contents shown in FIG. 413 (c)", and FIG. 415 (e) As a result of the progress of the second precursor effect (second specific display TH2) shown in (1) and the reduction of the display area of the second precursor effect (second specific display TH2), the integrated image IG is formed. , A part that does not overlap with the precursor effect (specific display) appears, and indicates a situation or image content in which the part is displayed in a state of good visibility.

That is, the integrated image IG is the timing (including the timing shown in FIG. 415 (e)) that arrives after the situation shown in FIG. 415 (e) appears, and is the timing shown in FIG. 415 (f) or FIG. When the "specific timing (timing when the validity period starts)", which is the timing that arrives before the situation shown in 415 (h) appears, is displayed at least internally (display on layer processing). ) Is to be executed. Therefore, at the time shown in FIGS. 415 (f) and 415 (h), at least a part of the gauge image (predetermined image) GG and the specific image TG is preferentially displayed with the second precursor effect (specific display TH2). Although it is not visible (or difficult to see) due to overlapping, the reduction of the display area of the "gauge image (predetermined image) GG" has already started (progressed), and the displacement of the "specific image TG" has already started (). It is in progress). In this example, the entire specific image TG is set to overlap with the second precursor effect (second specific display TH2).

According to such a configuration, the second precursor effect (second specific display TH2) is performed so as to straddle the generation timing (specific timing) of the valid period, and after the valid period is generated. During the predetermined time, at least a part of the integrated image IG is invisible or difficult to see by the second precursor effect (second specific display TH2). That is, in this case, since the whole picture of the integrated image IG is gradually exposed within the valid period, the degree of expectation suggested by the aspect of the integrated image IG (aspect of the peripheral decorative image). ) And the operation target (the mode of the button image) can be maintained for a predetermined time after the validity period is started.

In this regard, when the situation shown in FIG. 415 (f) appears, the peripheral decoration image SSG included in the integrated image IG is not the “special peripheral decoration image SSGb” but the “normal peripheral decoration image SSGa”. As a result of the effects shown in FIGS. 415 (d) and 415 (e), "the image IGa'(or the normal button image BMGa) expressing the integrated image IGa was expressed. It is recognizable that "image BMGa')" failed to be associated with "image SSGb'representing the special peripheral decoration image SSGb". That is, in this case, when the second precursor effect (second specific display TH2) is hidden, as shown in FIG. 415 (g), the integrated image IGa (see FIG. 410 (a)). The whole picture of is to appear. Since the subsequent progress of the production is as described above with reference to FIGS. 413 (d) to 413 (f), it will be omitted.

On the other hand, when the situation shown in FIG. 415 (h) appears, it is in a state where it can be recognized that the peripheral decoration image SSG included in the integrated image IG is the "special peripheral decoration image SSGb". As a result of the effect shown in FIG. 415 (d), the "image IGa'representing the integrated image IGa (or the image BMGa'expressing the normal button image BMGa')" was changed to the "special peripheral decoration image SSGb." It is recognizable that it succeeded in connecting with the image SSGb'representing. That is, in this case, when the second precursor effect (second specific display TH2) is hidden, as shown in FIG. 415 (i), the integrated image IGc (see FIG. 410 (c)). The whole picture will appear. Since then, the production progress has only been that the integrated image IGa (see FIG. 410 (a)) has been replaced with the integrated image IGc (see FIG. 410 (c)), and FIGS. 413 (d) to Since it is as described above with reference to (f), it will be omitted.

On the other hand, when the "image shown in FIG. 416 (j)" is displayed, there is a high possibility that the "special button image BMGb" is displayed as the button image BMG (here, "100%"). Will be suggested.

The "image shown in FIG. 416 (j)" according to this example is in a mode (here, translucent) in which the "integrated image IGb" is different from the normal state (the mode shown in FIG. 410 (b)). It is displayed as the expressed image IGb'. However, the present invention is not necessarily limited to this, and for example, for the “image shown in FIG. 416 (j)”, the “integrated image IGb” may be displayed in the same manner as shown in FIG. 410 (b). Alternatively, the "special button image BMGb" may not be integrated with the "normal peripheral decoration image SSGa" and may be displayed as a single image. When the "special button image BMGb" is displayed as a single image, it may be displayed in the normal state (the mode shown in FIG. 410 (b)) or in the normal time (FIG. 410 (b)). ) May be displayed as an image expressed in a mode different from the mode (here, translucent).

In any case, in the situation shown in FIG. 416 (j), it is approximated to the extent that the "special button image BMGb" itself shown in FIG. 410 (b) or the "special button image BMGb" is reminiscent. At least the image BMGb'with the (simulated) outer shape will be displayed. As a result, the "special button image BMGb" is displayed as the "integrated image IGb (Fig. 410 (b))" integrated with the "normal peripheral decoration image SSGa", or the "special peripheral decoration" is displayed. It becomes possible to suggest that a valid period displayed as "integrated image IGd (FIG. 410 (d))" integrated with "image SSGb" occurs.

After the image IGb'(image BMGb') shown in FIG. 416 (j) is displayed, the image IGb'(image BMGb') is not the "integrated image IGb (FIG. 410 (b))". , An effect suggesting (reminding) that the image may be displayed as "integrated image IGd (FIG. 410 (d))" is executed.

In the example shown in FIG. 415 (k), the "special peripheral decoration image SSGb is expressed" with respect to the "image IGb'representing the integrated image IGb (or the image BMGb'expressing the special button image BMGb)". It is described as a production that gradually brings the image SSGb'" closer. As a result of such an effect, the "special peripheral decoration image SSGb is expressed" with respect to the "image IGb'representing the integrated image IGb (or the image BMGb'expressing the special button image BMGb)". When the "image SSGb'" is added and integrated, the valid period in which the "integrated image IGd (FIG. 410 (d))" appears will occur. On the other hand, "image SSGb'expressing the special peripheral decoration image SSGb" is added to "image IGb'representing the integrated image IGb (or image BMGb'expressing the special button image BMGb)". If the images are not integrated, the valid period in which the "integrated image IGb (FIG. 410 (b))" appears will occur.

FIG. 416 (l) shows an effect situation in which the second precursor effect (second specific display TH2) is started on the effect display device 1600 after the effect shown in FIG. 416 (k) is performed. There is. Instead of the second precursor effect (second specific display TH2), it may be executed as a third precursor effect (third specific display) different from this.

As described above, this second precursor effect (second specific display TH2) occurs when the first effect pattern (fluctuation pattern) progresses to the second timing, and operation acceptance is permitted. It is executed as a production that suggests that. The second precursor effect (second specific display TH2) according to this example is for "image IGb'representing the integrated image IGb (or image BMGb'expressing the special button image BMGb)". The "image SSGb'expressing the special peripheral decoration image SSGb" is started while gradually approaching, and at the time of the start, the "image IGb'expressing the integrated image IGb'( Alternatively, it is unclear whether or not the "image BMGb') expressing the special button image BMGb" and the "image SSGb' expressing the special peripheral decoration image SSGb" are integrated.

When the effect shown in FIG. 416 (l) progresses, either the "image shown in FIG. 416 (m)" or the "image shown in FIG. 416 (o)" is based on the result of the jackpot determination (effect determination). Is displayed.

The situations and image contents shown in FIGS. 416 (m) and 416 (o) are basically the same as the above-mentioned "situations and image contents shown in FIG. 413 (c)", and FIG. 416 (l) As a result of the progress of the second precursor effect (second specific display TH2) shown in (1) and the reduction of the display area of the second precursor effect (second specific display TH2), the integrated image IG is formed. , A part that does not overlap with the precursor effect (specific display) appears, and indicates a situation or image content in which the part is displayed in a state of good visibility.

That is, the integrated image IG is the timing (including the timing shown in FIG. 416 (l)) that arrives after the situation shown in FIG. 416 (l) appears, and is the timing shown in FIG. 416 (m) or FIG. When the "specific timing (timing when the validity period starts)", which is the timing that arrives before the situation shown in 416 (o) appears, is displayed at least internally (display on layer processing). ) Is to be executed. Therefore, at the time shown in FIGS. 416 (m) and 416 (o), at least a part of the gauge image (predetermined image) GG and the specific image TG is preferentially displayed with the second precursor effect (specific display TH2). Although it is not visible (or difficult to see) due to overlapping, the reduction of the display area of the "gauge image (predetermined image) GG" has already started (progressed), and the displacement of the "specific image TG" has already started (). It is in progress). In this example, the entire specific image TG is set to overlap with the second precursor effect (second specific display TH2).

According to such a configuration, the second precursor effect (second specific display TH2) is performed so as to straddle the generation timing (specific timing) of the valid period, and after the valid period is generated. During the predetermined time, at least a part of the integrated image IG is invisible or difficult to see by the second precursor effect (second specific display TH2). That is, in this case, since the whole picture of the integrated image IG is gradually exposed within the valid period, the degree of expectation suggested by the aspect of the integrated image IG (aspect of the peripheral decorative image). ) And the operation target (the mode of the button image) can be maintained for a predetermined time after the validity period is started.

In this regard, when the situation shown in FIG. 416 (m) appears, the peripheral decoration image SSG included in the integrated image IG is not the “special peripheral decoration image SSGb” but the “normal peripheral decoration image SSGa”. As a result of the effects shown in FIGS. 416 (k) and 416 (l), "the image IGb'(or the special button image BMGb) expressing the integrated image IGb was expressed. It is recognizable that "image BMGb')" failed to be associated with "image SSGb'representing the special peripheral decoration image SSGb". That is, in this case, when the second precursor effect (second specific display TH2) is hidden, as shown in FIG. 416 (n), the integrated image IGb (see FIG. 410 (b)). The whole picture will appear. Since then, the production progress has only been that the integrated image IGa (see FIG. 410 (a)) has been replaced with the integrated image IGb (see FIG. 410 (b)), and FIGS. 413 (d) to Since it is as described above with reference to (f), it will be omitted.

On the other hand, when the situation shown in FIG. 416 (o) appears, it is in a state where it can be recognized that the peripheral decoration image SSG included in the integrated image IG is the "special peripheral decoration image SSGb". As a result of the effect shown in FIG. 416 (k), the "image IGb'representing the integrated image IGb (or the image BMGb'representing the special button image BMGb)" is changed to the "special peripheral decoration image SSGb". It is recognizable that it succeeded in connecting with the image SSGb'representing. That is, in this case, when the second precursor effect (second specific display TH2) is hidden, as shown in FIG. 416 (p), the integrated image IGd (see FIG. 410 (d)). The whole picture of is to appear. Since then, the production progress has only been that the integrated image IGa (see FIG. 410 (a)) has been replaced with the integrated image IGd (see FIG. 410 (d)), and FIGS. 413 (d) to Since it is as described above with reference to (f), it will be omitted.

In the examples shown in FIGS. 414 to 416, when FIG. 415 (c) appears, the probability that the "special button image BMGb" appears as the button image BMG is set to "0%", but as the button image BMG. The probability that the "special button image BMGb" appears may be slightly increased. That is, in this case, after the effect shown in FIG. 415 (e) is performed, in addition to FIG. 415 (f) → (g), (h) → (i), FIG. 416 (m) → (n), ( There is a possibility that the production progress will be executed in the form of o) → (p).

According to such a configuration, at the time when FIGS. 415 (f) and 415 (h) and 416 (m) and 416 (o) appear, it is not possible to determine in which mode the peripheral decoration image SSG is displayed. Although it can be recognized, it becomes impossible to recognize in which mode the button-shaped image BMG is displayed. That is, in this case, the degree of expectation is gradually suggested according to the situation related to the progress of the second precursor effect (second specific display TH2), and it becomes possible to improve the game interest. .. In particular, when the button image BMG can suggest any of a plurality of operation means having different operation targets depending on the display mode, the validity period has been started and the operation-related expectation is also suggested. In spite of the situation where the operation target is being set, a state in which it is not possible to recognize which operation target is used will occur, so that the degree of attention to the effect can be significantly improved.

However, even in the situation where FIGS. 415 (f) and 415 (h) and 416 (m) and (o) appear, the button is used in the operation means (operation receiving unit) that is the target of operation by the player. It is desirable that the light is emitted in a manner corresponding to the type displayed as the image BMG (for example, the light is emitted from the time when the valid period occurs). According to such a configuration, a person who has a high motivation to operate and tends to directly see the operation means (operation receiving unit) can quickly recognize the "type displayed as the button image BMG". Therefore, it becomes possible to encourage the player to operate.

In the examples shown in FIGS. 414 to 416, the first precursor effect (first specific display TH1) does not necessarily have to be executed. For example, the situation shown in FIG. 414 (a) may be shifted to the situation shown in FIGS. 415 (c) and 416 (j).

Further, in the examples shown in FIGS. 414 to 416, the second precursor effect (second specific display TH2) does not necessarily have to be executed. For example, even if the situation shown in FIGS. 415 (d) and 416 (k) is shifted to the situation shown in FIGS. 415 (g), (i) and 416 (n), (p). good. That is, in this case, the effect shown in FIGS. 415 (d) and 416 (k) functions as a precursor effect. At the time of transition, the display area of the gauge image (predetermined image) GG may have already decreased, or the display area of the gauge image (predetermined image) GG may not have decreased. If the display area of the gauge image (predetermined image) GG is already reduced at the time of the transition, the gauge image is in the situation shown in FIGS. 415 (d) and 416 (k). (Predetermined image) GG will start to reduce its display area.

Further, with respect to the effects of FIGS. 414 to 416, a part thereof may be omitted depending on the mode prepared as the integrated image IG. For example, when the modes shown in FIGS. 410 (b) and 410 (d) are not prepared as the integrated image IG, it is possible to omit all of the series of effects shown in FIG. 416. At this time, FIG. 415 (c) may also be omitted.

In the production of FIGS. 414 to 416, the image BMG'(or the button displacement image BMG itself) expressing the button displacement image BMG before the operation reception is allowed (before the valid period occurs) Good) is displayed (FIG. 415 (d), FIG. 416 (k)), but in that situation (before the expiration date), the image BMG'(or the button image BMG) representing the button image BMG). Is not dynamically displayed as if it were displaced within the movable range of the operation receiving part. According to such a configuration, even if the button-shaped image BMG and the image BMG'expressing the button image BMG'are displayed prior to the occurrence of the valid period, the valid period has not yet occurred. By being able to implicitly suggest, the player will be able to concentrate on the production without worrying about the remaining time of the validity period. Since the reception of the effect is permitted when the second precursor effect (second specific display TH2) is being performed, it is difficult or impossible to see by the second precursor effect (second specific display TH2). The dynamic display of the button image BMG will be performed.

FIGS. 417 to 421 are diagrams showing an example of the progress of the production when the second valid period occurs among the first valid period and the second valid period described above.

That is, in FIGS. 413 to 416, an effective period (first effective period) in which the display area of the gauge image (predetermined image) GG is reduced at the time when the precursor effect (specific display) is hidden is generated. For the case, an example of the progress of the production was explained. On the other hand, in FIGS. 417 to 421, when the precursor effect (specific display) is hidden, the display area of the gauge image (predetermined image) GG is not reduced, or the precursor effect (specific display) is lined up. An example of the progress of the production will be described in the case where the valid period (second valid period) occurs without being affected.

The pachinko machine 1 (peripheral control unit 1511) according to this embodiment basically performs a predetermined precursor effect (precursor display) when an effective period in which operation reception is allowed occurs. However, the pachinko machine 1 (peripheral control unit 1511) according to this embodiment can execute the "display mode in which the movement of the gauge image (predetermined image) GG is characterized" within the valid period. When performing the production, in order to make the feature stand out, the predetermined precursor effect (precursor display) itself is not performed when the valid period occurs, or even if the predetermined precursor effect (precursor display) is performed, the gauge image (predetermined image) GG When the entire display target area of the above is made good for visibility, the display area of the gauge image (predetermined image) GG has not been reduced yet and has reached the maximum value.

Here, as the "display mode in which the movement of the gauge image GG is characterized" (see FIGS. 411 to 416 and the like), the gauge image GG is usually displayed when the operation is not performed within the valid period. When the valid period ends when the area reaches a predetermined minimum value (here, "0"), "the operation is not performed within the valid period, and post-operation display and post-operation sound output are performed. However, at the end of the valid period, the display area of the gauge image GG has not reached a predetermined minimum value (here, "0") and has a predetermined display area. It is possible to mention "the first display mode". According to such a configuration, even in a situation where it seems that a lot of time is left until the display area of the gauge image GG reaches a predetermined minimum value (here, “0”), the player Becomes aware of the possibility that the validity period will be abruptly terminated, so that the tension during the validity period can be preferably maintained.

Further, as a "display mode in which the movement of the gauge image GG is characterized" (see FIGS. 411 to 416 and the like), the gauge image GG usually reduces the display area every unit time within the valid period. However, it is possible to mention "a second display mode in which the display area of the gauge image GG is not reduced even though it is within the valid period". According to such a configuration, even if it seems that there is little time left until the display area of the gauge image GG reaches a predetermined minimum value (here, "0"), the player can gauge the gauge. It comes to be aware of the possibility that the display area of the image GG will be reduced, and the deterioration of the game interest will be suppressed.

That is, in the example described below, "a display mode in which the movement of the gauge image GG is characterized" by using at least one of such "first display mode" and "second display mode". A display example is shown for the case of executing.

First, in FIG. 417 (a), in the normal game state, when the number of holdings is 0, the variation display of the decorative symbol SZ (special symbol) is produced by the second effect pattern (variation pattern) according to the result of the jackpot determination. It shows the production status performed by the display device 1600.

In FIG. 417 (b), during the execution of the variable display of the decorative symbol SZ shown in FIG. The integrated image IG is displayed to show the production status. As shown in FIG. 417 (b), at the time when the integrated image IG is displayed, the display area of the gauge image GG has reached a predetermined maximum value and has not been reduced yet. ..

Further, when the "display mode in which the movement of the gauge image GG is characterized" is executed within the valid period, the time (set time) set for the valid period (second valid period) is ". The time (set time) set for the valid period (first valid period) in which the "display mode in which the movement of the gauge image GG is characterized" is not executed is made longer. This means that if an attempt is made to execute a display mode in which the movement of the gauge image GG is characterized within the valid period, it takes time to execute the display mode. However, in the pachinko machine 1 (peripheral control unit 1511) according to this embodiment, the first valid period in which the "display mode in which the movement of the gauge image GG is characterized" is not executed and the "movement of the gauge image GG" Even though the set time until the end of the validity period is different from the second validity period in which the "display mode with features" is executed, is the integrated image IG itself the same? The images are displayed in a similar manner (in this example, the integrated image IG itself is the same, and the gauge image GG (display target area of the gauge image GG) has the same display area). According to such a configuration, at first glance, the "display mode in which the movement of the gauge image GG is characterized" is not executed, and the first validity period and the "movement of the gauge image GG are characterized". It is difficult to recognize that the set time is different from the second valid period in which the "display mode" is executed, but when a situation appears in which the display area of the gauge image GG is not reduced, the amount of time in the situation where the display area is not reduced appears. By adding, it becomes possible to estimate that the set time is longer than it looks.

When the effect situation shown in FIG. 417 (b) occurs, a precursor effect suggesting the occurrence may be performed. However, when the entire integrated image IG (at least the "display target area of the gauge image GG" included in the integrated image IG) is displayed without overlapping the precursor effect, the display area of the gauge image GG. Is the maximum value, and it is required that the situation has not been reduced yet.

That is, as described above, in this example, the display area of the gauge image (predetermined image) GG is reduced in the state where the operation reception regarding the predetermined post-operation display and the predetermined post-operation sound output is permitted (within the valid period). When a predetermined time elapses from the production situation shown in FIG. 417 (b) and the production situation shown in FIG. 417 (c) appears, the gauge image GG is displayed up to that point. The display area is maintained in a state where the display area is reduced according to the elapsed time (predetermined time), and the "period in which the display area of the gauge image GG is not reduced" is started.

As shown in FIGS. 417 (c) and 417 (d), such a "period during which the display area of the gauge image GG is not reduced" is such that it is continued for a predetermined time after the period occurs. It has become. However, even in the "period during which the display area of the gauge image GG is not reduced", the operation reception is maintained in an allowable state, and when an operation is performed on the operation means to which the operation opportunity is given, the valid period. Is terminated, and along with this, the integrated image IG is hidden, and the post-operation display and the post-operation sound output based on the operation reception are executed (see FIG. 417 (g)).

According to such a configuration, "a state in which the display area of the gauge image GG is not reduced" appears within the valid period. Therefore, compared with the case where the display area of the gauge image GG continues to be reduced at a constant speed. Therefore, it becomes possible to suggest that there is a margin in the remaining time until the expiration date.

In addition, although the display area of the gauge image GG is not reduced, the operation reception itself is maintained as an acceptable state, so that it is possible to give an image as if the validity period has been extended. , It will be expected to improve the game entertainment when the valid period has occurred.

Further, in the examples shown in FIGS. 417 (c) and 417 (d), the decorative symbol SZ that has been displayed up to that point is hidden or difficult to see in the "period during which the display area of the gauge image GG is not reduced". The state is set so that the attention to the "display mode in which the movement of the gauge image GG is characterized" is promoted.

However, if a state in which the display area of the gauge image GG is not reduced occurs, the player may be misunderstood that a so-called "freeze effect" in which the image in the display screen suddenly becomes a stationary state has occurred. That is, since the "freeze effect" is generally known as a display mode in which no reaction is shown for a predetermined time and the state cannot be released, it is erroneously recognized that the operation reception is no longer allowed. It is feared that the player's willingness to operate the game will be lost, and the game's interest will be reduced. In particular, in this example, since the decorative symbol SZ is hidden or difficult to see, it may lead to a false recognition that the operation reception is no longer allowed.

In this respect, in the pachinko machine 1 (peripheral control unit 1511) according to this embodiment, the integrated image IG itself is not made stationary in a state where the display area of the gauge image GG is not reduced, but the integrated image itself. The gauge image GG included in the IG is kept stationary, while the button image BMG included in the integrated image IG is dynamically displayed (displacement within the movable range of the operation receiving part is depicted. Display) is continued.

According to such a configuration, while the dynamic display of the button image BMG is continued, the display area of the gauge image GG is not reduced, so that the operation reception is not allowed ( It becomes possible to suppress the possibility of being erroneously recognized as (a freeze effect has occurred), and it is expected that the player's willingness to operate is appropriately maintained.

Here, the dynamic display by the button-shaped image BMG is executed as a display in which a predetermined operation (such as an operation of reciprocating within the movable range of the operation receiving portion) is repeated. In this regard, during the valid period (first valid period shown in FIGS. 413 to 416) in which the display area of the gauge image GG is reduced when the precursor effect (specific display) is hidden, the setting is set. While the button-shaped image BMG is executed as a display that repeats a predetermined operation n times by the end of the time, the precursor effect (specific display) is not executed or the precursor effect (specific display) is executed but not displayed. During the valid period (the second valid period shown in FIGS. 417 to 421) in which the display area of the gauge image GG is not reduced at the time of setting, "the display area of the gauge image GG is reduced" in the set time. It is desirable that the predetermined operation by the button-shaped image BMG can be executed as a display that repeats m (> n) times even within the "period during which it is not performed".

According to such a configuration, when a state in which the display area of the gauge image GG is not reduced appears, the display area of the gauge image GG is reduced for a time longer than the first valid period shown in FIGS. 413 to 416 and the like. Since the state of not being performed will continue, even if you are surprised at the occurrence of the state and it takes time to grasp the situation, you will have enough time to operate it. , It is expected that the game entertainment will be maintained favorably. It should be noted that the effective period in which the display area of the gauge image GG is reduced at the time when the precursor effect (specific display) is hidden is different from the first effective period shown in FIGS. 413 to 416. If a period (one that generates another post-operation display or post-operation sound output) is prepared, it is longer than the longest of each time (set time) set for those valid periods. Of the second valid period shown in FIGS. 417 to 421, it is desirable that the number of predetermined operations by the button image BMG is larger in the "period during which the display area of the gauge image GG is not reduced". ..

As described above, at the time when such a second validity period occurs, the gauge image GG is in a state where its visibility is well secured, and its display area is set as a predetermined maximum value. It is designed to be displayed (FIG. 417 (b)). However, at this time, as illustrated in FIG. 412, if the specific image TG is displayed in the display target area of the gauge image GG in a state of good visibility, the specific image TG is displayed. However, it may appear that the display area of the gauge image GG is decreasing, and there is a concern that the game interest will be reduced. Further, as illustrated in FIG. 411, when the display area of the gauge image GG is reduced from the maximum value, the specific image TG may appear in a state of good visibility, the specific image TG may appear. It becomes clear that it does not function as a part of the gauge image GG, and there is a concern that the game interest will be reduced by exaggerating the length of the remaining time as the valid period.

Therefore, in the pachinko machine 1 (peripheral control unit 1511) according to this embodiment, the specific image TG itself is not displayed during the second valid period. Therefore, even if the reduction of the display area of the gauge image GG is started from the situation shown in FIG. 417 (b), the specific image TG does not appear, and the display area of the gauge image GG is not displayed. When is reduced to a predetermined value, a "period in which the display area of the gauge image GG is not reduced" occurs over a predetermined time (FIGS. 417 (c) and 417 (d)).

In this example, when the "period in which the display area of the gauge image GG is not reduced" ends without the operation being accepted by the operation by the player, the gauge image GG reduces the display area again. In this state, the decorative symbol SZ is displayed again or is made easy to see. After that, when the display area of the gauge image GG reaches a predetermined value (minimum value) (FIG. 417 (e)), the time (set time) set for the second valid period is timed up. As the second validity period ends, the operation-related images including the integrated image IG are hidden (FIG. 417 (f)). Here, when the display area of the gauge image GG is "0", that is, when it is hidden (FIG. 417 (e)), the time (set time) set for the second valid period is timed up. As the second validity period ends, the operation-related image including the integrated image IG is hidden (FIG. 417 (f)).

As described above, in the second valid period, when the set time elapses without the operation being accepted (FIG. 417 (f)), the same operation as when the operation is accepted within the second valid period. The post-display and post-operation sound output are not executed (automatic reception effect functions), and this point is also different from the first validity period. However, instead, in the second valid period, the gauge image GG is displayed in the stopped state for a longer time than the set time for the first valid period, and operation acceptance is permitted even in the displayed period in the stopped state. As described above, it can be said that the situation itself in which the operation until the gauge image GG reaches a predetermined value (minimum value) cannot be performed in time is unlikely to occur. ..

In the example shown in FIG. 417, the gauge image GG is usually predetermined (see FIGS. 411 to 416 and the like) as a "display mode in which the movement of the gauge image GG is characterized". A case where the display area is reduced at a constant speed and the "second display mode in which the display area of the gauge image GG is not reduced even though it is within the valid period" is applied has been described. However, as described above, as a "display mode in which the movement of the gauge image GG is characterized", usually (see FIGS. 411 to 416, etc.), when the operation is not performed within the valid period, the gauge image GG is displayed. When the valid period ends when the display area reaches a predetermined minimum value (here, "0"), "the operation is not performed within the valid period, and post-operation display and post-operation sound output are performed. Even though this is not the case, at the end of the valid period, the display area of the gauge image GG has not reached a predetermined minimum value (here, "0") and has a predetermined display area. The "first display mode" may be further applied. When such a method is adopted, it is necessary to execute it in either the mode shown in FIGS. 418 and 419 or the mode shown in FIGS. 420 and 421 in order to improve the interest of the game. More desirable.

FIGS. 418 and 419 are diagrams showing an example of the progress of the production when the second valid period occurs among the first valid period and the second valid period described above.

The situations shown in FIGS. 418 (a) to 418 (d) are the same as those described above and other examples thereof with reference to FIGS. 417 (a) to 417 (d). Therefore, also in this example, a "period in which the display area of the gauge image GG is not reduced" occurs in the middle of the second valid period, and the period including the period is within the second valid period. When the operation reception is made in, the post-operation display and the post-operation sound output based on the operation reception are executed (see FIG. 419 (g)).

However, in this example, even if the "period in which the display area of the gauge image GG is not reduced" ends without the operation being accepted by the operation by the player, the gauge image GG reduces the display area again. It will not be displayed. In this example, the "period in which the display area of the gauge image GG is not reduced" is continued until the time (set time) set for the second valid period elapses. Therefore, when the "period in which the display area of the gauge image GG is not reduced" ends, the display area of the gauge image GG is left as it is (predetermined value) as shown in FIGS. 418 (d) and 419 (e). In this state, the operation-related images including the integrated image IG are hidden. In this state, the decorative symbol SZ is displayed again or is made easy to see.

As described above, in the second valid period according to this example, when the set time elapses without the operation being accepted (FIG. 419 (e)), the operation is accepted within the second valid period. The same post-operation display and post-operation sound output are not executed (automatic reception effect is functioning). However, instead, in the second valid period according to this example, the gauge image GG is displayed in the stopped state for a time longer than the set time for the first valid period, and the operation is also performed during the display period in the stopped state. As mentioned above, reception is permitted.

However, in this example, the display area of the gauge image GG is not reduced until it reaches a predetermined value (here, "0"), and the second validity period is set with the display area of the predetermined value left. Since the game is terminated, the player may not be able to operate the game even though he / she intends to operate the game, and the second validity period may end, which reduces the interest of the game. There are concerns. Therefore, in this example, after the second validity period ends without any operation by the player, a specific condition (for example, the symbol is stopped or the symbol is not stopped 10 seconds before the symbol is stopped) is satisfied. While not, the same operation means (handle button 5014 or operation button 410) as the operation means to which the operation opportunity is given within the second valid period is given an operation opportunity, and the operation means is given an operation opportunity. When the operation is accepted, the second validity period can be generated again based on this. In this sense, when the second validity period ends without any operation by the player, a special validity period for regenerating the second validity period will be generated from the end of the second validity period. It can be said that

According to such a configuration, even when the second valid period ends as a result of the elapse of a predetermined set time without being operated by the player, the operation by the player causes FIG. 419 (g). ) Will be able to generate an operation reception for outputting the post-operation display and post-operation sound output. More specifically, in the situation shown in FIG. 419 (e), when the player operates the handle button 5014 (or the operation button 410), the second operation is accepted based on the fact that the operation is accepted. The validity period is started from the initial state (Fig. 419 (f)). After that, the contents as described above are repeated again with reference to FIGS. 418 (b) to (d), FIGS. 419 (e), and (g). Therefore, even if the operation reception is performed within the second valid period regenerated in this way, the post-operation display and the post-operation sound output based on the operation reception are executed (see FIG. 419 (g)). ).

When the operation is accepted during the special validity period shown in FIG. 419 (e), the image shown in FIG. 419 (f) (same as the image shown in FIG. 418 (b)) appears as a post-operation display. It will be. Such an image is different from the post-operation display executed based on the fact that the operation is accepted during the second validity period (FIGS. 418 (b) to (d), FIG. 419 (f), etc.). It's different. Similarly, the post-operation sound output executed based on the fact that the operation is accepted during the special valid period shown in FIG. 419 (e) also has the second valid period (FIGS. 418 (b) to (d) and FIGS. The output sound is different from the post-operation sound output executed based on the reception of the operation in 419 (f) and the like).

FIGS. 420 and 421 are diagrams showing a modified example of the effect progress when the second valid period occurs among the first valid period and the second valid period described above.

The situation shown in FIG. 420 (a) is the same as the above-described contents and other examples with reference to FIGS. 417 (a) and 418 (a). However, in this example, when the second valid period occurs and the integrated image IG is displayed on the effect display device 1600 during the execution of the variable display of the decorative symbol SZ shown in FIG. 420 (a), the said. From the time when the integrated image IG is displayed, a "period in which the display area of the gauge image GG is not reduced" occurs over a predetermined time (FIGS. 420 (b) and (c)). In this example, since the display area of the gauge image GG is at a predetermined maximum value at the time when the integrated image IG is displayed, the gauge image GG sets the display area to the maximum value. It will be maintained as it is.

It should be noted that the operation reception is permitted even during the period when the specific image TG is not displayed in the display target area of the gauge image GG and the display area of the gauge image GG is not reduced. The configuration and progress within the "period during which the display area of the gauge image GG is not reduced", such as the execution of the after-sound output, are the same as those described above and other examples with reference to FIGS. 417 to 419. ..

Further, also in this example, as in the examples shown in FIGS. 418 and 419, "the display area of the gauge image GG is reduced" until the time (set time) set for the second valid period elapses. The "period that is not done" is to be continued. Therefore, when the "period in which the display area of the gauge image GG is not reduced" ends, the display area of the gauge image GG remains as it is (maximum value) as shown in FIGS. 420 (c) and 421 (d). In this state, the operation-related images including the integrated image IG are hidden. In this state, the decorative symbol SZ is displayed again or is made easy to see.

As described above, in the second valid period according to this example, when the set time elapses without the operation being accepted (FIG. 421 (d)), the operation is accepted within the second valid period. The same post-operation display and post-operation sound output are not executed (automatic reception effect is functioning). However, instead, in the second valid period according to this example, the gauge image GG is displayed in the stopped state for a time longer than the set time for the first valid period, and the operation is also performed during the display period in the stopped state. As mentioned above, reception is permitted.

However, also in this example, the display area of the gauge image GG is not reduced until it reaches a predetermined value (here, “0”), and the display area for the maximum value is left as the second valid period. Since the player is trying to terminate the game, the player may not be able to operate the game even though he / she intends to operate the game, and the second validity period may end. There is a concern. Therefore, also in this example, after the second validity period ends without any operation by the player, specific conditions (for example, symbol stop, 10 seconds before the symbol stop, etc.) are satisfied. While not, the operation opportunity is given to the same operation means (handle button 5014 or operation button 410) to which the operation opportunity is given within the second valid period, and the operation means is given. When the operation for is accepted, the second validity period can be generated again based on this. In this sense, it can be said that when the second valid period ends without any operation by the player, a special valid period for regenerating the second valid period is generated.

According to such a configuration, even when the second valid period ends as a result of the elapse of a predetermined set time without being operated by the player, the operation by the player causes FIG. 421 (f). ) Will be able to generate an operation reception for outputting the post-operation display and post-operation sound output. More specifically, in the situation shown in FIG. 421 (d), when the player operates the handle button 5014 (or the operation button 410), the second operation is accepted based on the fact that the operation is accepted. The validity period is started from the initial state (Fig. 421 (e)). After that, the contents as described above will be repeated again with reference to FIGS. 420 (b), (c), 421 (d), and (f). Therefore, even if the operation reception is performed within the second valid period regenerated in this way, the post-operation display and the post-operation sound output based on the operation reception are executed (see FIG. 421 (f)). ).

However, in this example, even when the second valid period reoccurs in this way, a "period in which the display area of the gauge image GG is not reduced" occurs from the time of the reoccurrence. Therefore, FIG. 421 (e) In the situation shown in, the decorative symbol SZ is either hidden or hard to see.

That is, the "image shown in FIG. 421 (e)" that appears as a post-operation display when the operation is accepted during the special validity period shown in FIG. 421 (d) is the "image shown in FIG. 420 (b)". Is the same as. Such an image is displayed after the operation (FIG. 421 (f)), which is executed based on the fact that the operation is accepted during the second validity period (FIGS. 420 (b), (c), FIG. 421 (d), etc.). )) Is different from the image display. Further, the sound output after the operation, which is executed based on the reception of the operation during the special validity period shown in FIG. 421 (d), also has the second validity period (FIGS. 420 (b), (c) and FIGS. The output sound is different from the post-operation sound output (FIG. 421 (f)) executed based on the reception of the operation in 421 (d) and the like).

As described above, in the examples shown in FIGS. 420 and 421, the entire period from the start to the end of the second valid period functions as a "period in which the display area of the gauge image GG is not reduced". Therefore, the display area of the gauge image GG is not reduced in any of the situations.

In the situation (special valid period) shown in FIGS. 419 (e) and 421 (d), the integrated image IG may be displayed as in the second valid period. However, the second validity period and the special are so that it is easy to recognize that the post-operation display and the post-operation sound output generated according to the operation have different validity periods (second validity period, special validity period). It is desirable that at least one of the display position and size of the integrated image IG is different from the validity period. That is, in this case, at the end of the second validity period, the integrated image IG in the mode corresponding to the second validity period is hidden, and the integrated image IG in the mode corresponding to the special validity period is newly added. Will be displayed in. When displaying the integrated image IG in the special valid period, a "period in which the display area of the gauge image is not reduced" may be generated within the valid period, or a "period in which the display area of the gauge image is not reduced" may be generated. May not be generated.

The "display mode in which the movement of the gauge image GG is characterized" shown in FIGS. 417 to 421 can be executed when the integrated image IGa is displayed among the integrated images IGa to IGd. It is desirable that the integrated images IGa to IGd are not executed when the integrated images IGb to IGd are displayed. That is, the integrated image IGa is displayed as the mode with the lowest expectation, but when the integrated image IGa is displayed, the "movement of the gauge image GG" shown in FIGS. 417 to 421. Since there is a possibility that a "display mode with features" will appear, it will be possible to suppress a decline in the enjoyment of the game.

According to the examples shown in FIGS. 418 to 421, when the operation-related image (integrated image IG, etc.) is displayed in the "display mode in which the movement of the gauge image GG is characterized", it depends on the player. Even if a situation appears in which the operation-related image is hidden as a result of the elapse of a predetermined set period (second valid period) without performing the operation, an operation reception occurs and the display changes (or , Sound output after operation) will be able to be generated. More specifically, even when the predetermined set period (second valid period) has expired, when the operation receiving unit (operating means) whose operation has been prompted by the integrated image IG is operated. It is possible to regenerate a predetermined set period (second valid period), and operation acceptance is allowed during the regenerated predetermined set period (second valid period) (Fig.). 419 (e), (f) and FIGS. 421 (d), (e)). According to such a configuration, even if the predetermined set period (second valid period) ends without understanding the "display mode in which the movement of the gauge image GG is characterized". Since the predetermined set period (second valid period) can be regenerated, the deterioration of the game interest can be suppressed.

On the other hand, during a predetermined set period (first valid period) in which the operation-related image (integrated image IG, etc.) is not displayed in the "display mode in which the movement of the gauge image GG is characterized", the operation reception is performed. Even if the operation receiving unit (operating means) whose operation has been promoted by the integrated image IG is operated after the predetermined setting period (first valid period) ends without being performed, the predetermined setting period (Second validity period) will not be reoccurred (FIGS. 413 to 416).

It should be noted that the predetermined set period (second valid period) in which the operation-related image (integrated image IG, etc.) is displayed in the "display mode in which the movement of the gauge image GG is characterized" does not necessarily change the symbol. It does not have to occur during the execution period of. For example, it may be a period generated by using the RTC function regardless of the presence or absence of the symbol change, or a "period during which the big hit game is not executed, a period before the big hit game is started, or the like". It may occur in.

Further, according to the example shown in FIGS. 413 to 421, a longer time is set in the second valid period (FIGS. 417 to 421) than in the first valid period (FIGS. 413 to 416). In spite of this, the integrated image IG itself is displayed in the same or similar relationship between the first valid period and the second valid period (in the above example, the integrated image IG itself is displayed. The simulated image IG itself is the same, and the gauge image GG (display target area of the gauge image GG) has the same display area). When the integrated image IG is displayed in a similar manner, the size ratio of the gauge image GG (display target area) to the button image is the same, so that the set time (set time) is set. It is expected that the lengths of the will appear to be the same. According to such a configuration, at first glance, the "display mode in which the movement of the gauge image GG is characterized" is not executed, and the first validity period and the "movement of the gauge image GG are characterized". It is difficult to recognize that the set time is different from the second valid period in which the "display mode" is executed, but when a situation appears in which the display area of the gauge image GG is not reduced, the amount of time in the situation where the display area is not reduced appears. By adding, it becomes possible to estimate that the set time is longer than it looks.

When displaying the integrated image IG in a manner having a similar relationship between the first valid period (FIGS. 413 to 416) and the second valid period (FIGS. 417 to 421), "gauge image" is used. It is desirable that the integrated image IG smaller than the first valid period is displayed in the second valid period in which the "display mode in which the movement of the GG is characterized" appears.

Further, according to the example shown in FIGS. 413 to 421, in the first valid period (FIGS. 413 to 416), if there is no operation reception, the display area of the predetermined image (gauge) is a specific value (here, "" It ends when it reaches 0 "), but in the second valid period (FIGS. 417 to 421), if there is no operation reception, the display area of the predetermined image (gauge) is displayed with a value larger than the specific value. It is terminated in the state of. That is, if the time (set time) set for the valid period is long, the tension during the valid period tends to decrease, but the display area of the predetermined image (gauge) is a specific value (here, "" By giving the possibility that the validity period can end even if it does not become 0 "), it is expected that the tension is preferably maintained.

Further, according to the above-mentioned example, when the integrated image IG is displayed so that the display area of the gauge image GG is reduced while the precursor effect is being performed (first valid period), the precursor When the integrated image IG is displayed so that the display area of the gauge image GG is not reduced while the effect is not performed or the precursor effect is performed but at least while the precursor effect is performed (second effective). The image displayed in the display target area of the gauge image GG is different from that of the period). In this case, the modes of the gauge image GG itself may be different from each other. "The precursory effect is performed, but the display area of the gauge image GG is not reduced at least while the precursory effect is being performed," says the gauge image over the entire valid period, as illustrated in FIGS. 420 and 421. This means that the display area of the GG is not reduced.

In this regard, according to the above-mentioned example, in the first valid period (FIGS. 413 to 416), the specific image TG is displayed, and the specific image TG is displayed in a state where the set time elapses without any operation being performed. In the second valid period (FIGS. 418 to 421), the specific image TG is not displayed, and the gauge image GG (display) is displayed in a state where the set time elapses without any operation being performed. The target area) is displayed. According to such a configuration, in the first valid period, it is possible to make the valid period look longer by the amount that the specific image TG is displayed at the end of the valid period, and in the second valid period. By leaving the gauge image GG (display target area) at the end of the valid period, it is possible to maintain a sense of tension by making it appear that the valid period ends earlier than expected by the player. In order to preferably obtain such an action effect, in the second effective period, a large amount of the display area (at least more than half of the maximum value) of the gauge image GG (display target area) is left at the end of the effective period. It is desirable to do so.

Further, according to the above-mentioned example, the gauge image GG is displayed in such a manner that the display area is reduced every unit time during the first valid period (FIGS. 413 to 416). However, in the second valid period (FIGS. 417 to 421), the display area is not reduced. Therefore, it becomes possible to make it difficult to recognize the remaining time only by the size of the display area when the gauge image GG appears, and it is expected that the tension is preferably maintained.

Further, according to the above-mentioned example, the button-shaped image BMG is dynamically displayed so as to depict how the operation receiving portion is displaced in both the first valid period and the second valid period. However, the gauge image GG is displayed in the first mode (a mode in which the display area is reduced) in the first valid period, whereas the first mode is in the second valid period. It is designed to be displayed in a different second mode (a mode in which the display area is not reduced). That is, in the above-mentioned example, although the button image BMG is displayed as one image (integrated image IG) integrated with the gauge image GG (peripheral decorative image SSG). , When the button image BMG of the integrated image IG is dynamically displayed, when the gauge image GG is in a reduced state and when the gauge image GG is not decreased. I am trying to have. Therefore, even if the gauge image GG is not reduced, it is preferable as the integrated image IG that the operation reception is permitted by dynamically displaying the button image BMG. You will be able to suggest.

Further, according to the above-mentioned example, only when the normal button image BMGa and the special button image BMGb are displayed as the normal button image BMGa, "the movement of the gauge image (predetermined image) GG is characteristic. It is possible to display the "display mode provided". Further, when the normal button image BMGa is displayed, "a display mode in which the movement of the gauge image (predetermined image) GG is characterized" may be displayed, and "gauge image (predetermined image)" may be displayed. ) The gauge image (predetermined image) GG may be displayed in a mode (normal mode) that appears even when the special button image BMGb is displayed without displaying "a display mode in which the movement of the GG is characterized". I made it. Therefore, it is expected that the deterioration of the game interest when the normal button image BMGa, which has a lower expectation than the special button image BMGb, is displayed, is suppressed.

In particular, in the second valid period shown in FIGS. 420 and 421, the display area of the gauge image (predetermined image) GG is not reduced at all, and the display mode (color, etc.) of the gauge image (predetermined image) GG is displayed. However, only one aspect is displayed. That is, in this case, the display target area of the gauge image GG is displayed even though the remaining time suggestion function and the expectation degree suggestion function by the gauge image GG itself are lost and no information can be obtained from the gauge image GG. The integrated image IG on which the is formed is intentionally displayed, and the gauge image GG is statically displayed (in an area-invariant manner) in the integrated image IG. According to such a configuration, the gauge image GG displayed within the second valid period is not an image suggesting the remaining time or the degree of expectation, but functions only as a decorative image in the integrated image IG. Therefore, the function can be significantly different from that of the gauge image GG displayed within the first valid period, and the variety of expressions as the gauge image GG will improve the game entertainment. Will be expected.

Regarding the first validity period and the second validity period, it is sufficient that the conditions for their occurrence are different from each other. For example, it may occur at different timings within one symbol variation period. Further, the first valid period means a period during which the operation reception regarding the first post-operation display and the first post-operation sound output is permitted, and the second valid period is the first valid period. It means the period during which operation acceptance for the second post-operation sound output different from the second post-operation display and the second post-operation sound output different from the first post-operation sound output is permitted, and within each of these periods. The reactions (display change, sound output) that appear when the operation is accepted in are different from each other.

In addition, regarding the integrated image IG,
-After the precursor effect (specific display TH) is started to be displayed, the display area of the gauge image GG is displayed every unit time from the time when the precursor effect in the display state and the "integrated image IG" overlap. Aspects to be reduced (FIGS. 413-416) and
-The display area of the gauge image GG is not reduced when the precursor effect is not displayed, or even if the precursor effect is started to be displayed, at least when the precursor effect in the display state and the "integrated image IG" overlap. Aspects (FIGS. 417 to 421)
I made it so that there was. According to such a configuration, as a result of the precursory effect, the display area has already been reduced by the time the visibility of the gauge image GG is secured, and whether or not the precursory effect has been performed. When the entire gauge image GG is made visible, the display area of the gauge image GG may not be reduced, and the visibility of the gauge image GG is used to provide an interesting effect. You will be able to do it.

In particular, when an aspect (FIGS. 417 to 421) in which the display area of the gauge image GG is not reduced when the entire gauge image GG is visible regardless of whether or not the precursor effect is performed is adopted. As long as it is within the valid period, the display mode in which the display area of the gauge image GG is not reduced can be further displayed, so that the attention to the gauge image GG can be further enhanced.

It should be noted that the display area of the gauge image GG is reduced when the precursor effect is not displayed, or even if the precursor effect is started to be displayed, at least when the precursor effect in the display state and the "integrated image IG" overlap. In the case of adopting the mode not (FIGS. 417 to 421), in addition to the case where the display area of the gauge image GG is not reduced within the valid period (FIGS. 417 to 421), the gauge image GG is used. The display mode in which the display area is not reduced may not appear in some cases. However, in this case, when the generation condition of the second valid period (FIGS. 417 to 421) in which the display mode in which the display area of the gauge image GG is not reduced appears is the second condition, the display area of the gauge image GG is not reduced. The condition for generating a specific validity period in which the aspect does not appear is set as a specific condition different from the second condition.

In the above example, during the period when the button image BMG is displayed, the display area of the gauge image GG may be reduced according to the passage of time, or the display may not be performed. bottom. If the display is not performed, the gauge image GG itself may not be displayed and may be hidden within the valid period. Nevertheless, regarding the display target area of the gauge image GG, not only the first valid period in which the display area is reduced with the passage of time, but also the display area is not reduced with the passage of time. Since it is displayed even during the valid period, it is expected to preferably suggest that the reception of the production is permitted.

In the above example, the time (set time) set for the valid period (second valid period) elapses without displaying the display area to be reduced according to the passage of time by the gauge image GG. When the validity period ends, the automatic reception function will not be activated. That is, if the automatic reception function is enabled, the tension due to the gauge image GG not suggesting the remaining time may be completely lost. Therefore, the validity period (second validity period) ), It is desirable that the automatic reception function is not enabled (in any production mode). On the other hand, it is desirable that the automatic reception function is enabled (in any effect mode) for the first validity period described above.

In addition, when the button-shaped image BMG and the gauge GG are displayed separately and a display method that pursues only the gauge function (remaining time suggestion function) is adopted, a method that does not reduce the display area of the gauge image GG is adopted. Then, despite the gauge image GG, the fact that the remaining time suggestion function is not exhibited causes a great sense of discomfort. In this respect, in the above configuration, the button-shaped image BMG is displayed as an image IG integrated with the peripheral decoration image SSG including the display target area of the gauge GG. That is, in this case, even when the gauge image GG is displayed, the pattern can be seen on the back side of the gauge image GG, or the gauge image GG itself can have a plurality of colors. Since this itself has a decorative property in the integrated image IG, it is expected to suppress a sense of discomfort when a situation in which the remaining time suggestion function by the gauge image GG is not exhibited appears. become.

By the way, in the examples shown in FIGS. 414 to 416, prior to the occurrence of the first valid period, the "button image BMG" has a low expectation (normal button image BMG) and a high expectation. Color rendering of which of (special button image BMGb) appears, and as "peripheral decoration image SSG", a mode with low expectation (normal peripheral decoration image SSGa) and a mode with high expectation (special peripheral decoration image) The effect of which of SSGb) and SSGb) appears is made to appear step by step. However, such a directing property can also be made to appear by the method described below.

FIG. 422 is a diagram illustrating a modified example of the effect of stepwise suggesting the degree of expectation of the integrated image IG.

First, in FIG. 422 (a), in the normal game state, when the number of holdings is 0, the variation display of the decorative symbol SZ (special symbol) is produced by the first effect pattern (variation pattern) according to the result of the jackpot determination. It shows the production status performed by the display device 1600.

In FIG. 422 (b), during the execution of the variable display of the decorative symbol SZ shown in FIG. The button image BMG is displayed to indicate the production status.

However, in the situation shown in FIG. 422 (b), the button image BMG is not displayed as an image integrated with the "peripheral decoration image SGG", and is only displayed as a single image. ing. That is, at the timing shown in FIG. 422 (b), the button image BMG is displayed in either a mode with a low expectation (normal button image BMGa) or a mode with a high expectation (special button image BMGb). It provides a directing effect as to whether or not the image is to be performed, and in the figure, an example is shown in which a mode with a high degree of expectation (special button image BMGb) appears. Which of these modes is to be displayed is selected based on the result of the jackpot determination (effect determination).

FIG. 422 (c) shows an effect situation in which the special button image BMGb shown in FIG. 422 (b) is displayed as an image IG integrated with the peripheral decoration image SSG.

However, the production progress from the situation shown in FIG. 422 (b) to the situation shown in FIG. 422 (c) may not necessarily be performed. For example, the button image BMG (normal button image BMG, special button image BMGb) shown in FIG. 422 (b) is valid without being integrated with the peripheral decoration image SSG (first valid period). ) Is prepared, it is effective after the production progresses from the situation shown in FIG. 422 (b) to the situation shown in FIG. 422 (c) and becomes an integrated image IG. Does the period (first valid period) occur, or the valid period (first valid period) occurs without the production progress to the situation shown in FIG. 422 (c) and the integrated image IG does not occur? You will be able to provide fun about what to do. When the valid period (first valid period) occurs without becoming the integrated image IG, the gauge image GG will be displayed as an image different from the button image BMG, for example, a rod shape (straight line shape). ), The display area of the gauge image GG is reduced. In this case, it is desirable that the specific image TG is not displayed.

In addition, when the valid period occurs after the button-shaped image BMG is integrated with the peripheral decorative image SSG, it is expected to be stopped at the jackpot symbol than when the valid period occurs without being integrated with the peripheral decorative image SSG. It is desirable to increase the degree (ratio). Further, when the special button image BMGb is displayed in the situation shown in FIG. 422 (b), the normal button image BMGa is displayed in the situation shown in FIG. 422 (b) as compared with the case where the normal button image BMGa is displayed. ), And it is desirable that the ratio of integration with the peripheral decorative image SSG increases. The ratio may include "100%" and "0%".

Further, at the timing shown in FIG. 422 (c), the button-shaped image BMG is a peripheral decoration image in a mode with low expectation (normal peripheral decoration image BMGa) and a peripheral decoration image in a mode with high expectation (special peripheral decoration). It provides a directing effect as to which of the images BMGb) is integrated with, and in the figure, a case where a highly expected aspect (special peripheral decoration image BMGb) appears is illustrated. .. Which of these modes is to be displayed is selected based on the result of the jackpot determination (effect determination).

The peripheral decorative image BMG (normal peripheral decorative image BMGa, special peripheral decorative image BMGb) according to this example has an image type different from that shown in each of the above examples (FIGS. 410 to 422) for convenience of explanation. Although they are different, they are basically displayed as having the same function. The peripheral decoration image BMG according to this example has a box shape for storing the button-shaped image BMG, and the peripheral decoration image BMG usually has a heart pattern (not shown). On the other hand, in the special peripheral decoration image BMGb, a check pattern is applied. Then, among the areas where these patterns are applied, the "area from the upper right to the lower left" is displayed as the display target area of the gauge image GG.

The image shown in FIG. 422 (c) functions as an image (integrated image) IGd in which the special button image BMGb and the special peripheral decoration image BMGb are integrated. It is the same as 410 (d).

FIG. 422 (d) shows an effect situation in which the first additional decoration HS1 is added to the integrated image IGd shown in FIG. 422 (c).

However, the production progress from the situation shown in FIG. 422 (c) to the situation shown in FIG. 422 (d) may not necessarily be performed. For example, the valid period (first valid period) without the first additional decorative HS1 being added to the integrated image IG (integrated image IGa to IGd) shown in FIG. 422 (c). If the mode in which the above occurs is prepared, it is effective after the production progresses from the situation shown in FIG. 422 (c) to the situation shown in FIG. 422 (d) and the first additional decoration HS1 is added. Validity period (first validity period), whether a period (first validity period) occurs, or the production progress to the situation shown in FIG. 422 (d) is not performed and the first additional decoration HS1 is not added. Will be able to provide fun about what happens.

When the valid period occurs after the first additional decoration HS1 is added to the integrated image IG, the valid period occurs without the first additional decoration HS1 being added to the integrated image IG. It is desirable that the degree of expectation (ratio) of stopping at the jackpot symbol is higher than in the case. Further, when the special button image BMGb is displayed in the situation shown in FIG. 422 (b) or the special peripheral decoration image BMGb is displayed in the situation shown in FIG. 422 (c), FIG. 422 (b) The situation progresses to the situation shown in FIG. 422 (d) as compared with the case where the normal button image BMGa is displayed in the situation shown in FIG. It is desirable that the ratio of the first additional decorative HS1 being added is high. The ratio may include "100%" and "0%".

Further, at the timing shown in FIG. 422 (d), the first additional decoration HS1 provides a color rendering property as to whether the first additional decoration HS1 is added in a mode with a low degree of expectation or a mode with a high degree of expectation. You may try to do it.

FIG. 422 (e) shows an effect situation in which the second additional decoration HS2 is added to the integrated image IGd shown in FIG. 422 (d).

However, the production progress from the situation shown in FIG. 422 (d) to the situation shown in FIG. 422 (e) may not necessarily be performed. For example, the valid period (first valid period) without the second additional decorative HS2 being added to the integrated image IG (integrated image IGa to IGd) shown in FIG. 422 (d). If the mode in which the above occurs is prepared, it is effective after the production progresses from the situation shown in FIG. 422 (d) to the situation shown in FIG. 422 (e) and the first additional decoration HS1 is added. Validity period (first validity period), whether a period (first validity period) occurs, or the production progress to the situation shown in FIG. 422 (e) is not performed and the second additional decoration HS2 is not added. Will be able to provide fun about what happens.

When the valid period occurs after the second additional decoration HS2 is added to the integrated image IG, the valid period occurs without the second additional decoration HS2 being added to the integrated image IG. It is desirable that the degree of expectation (ratio) of stopping at the jackpot symbol is higher than in the case. Further, when the special button image BMGb is displayed in the situation shown in FIG. 422 (b) or the special peripheral decoration image BMGb is displayed in the situation shown in FIG. 422 (c), FIG. 422 (b) The situation progresses to the situation shown in FIG. 422 (e) as compared with the case where the normal button image BMGa is displayed in the situation shown in FIG. It is desirable that the second additional decorative HS2 is added at a high rate. The ratio may include "100%" and "0%".

Further, at the timing shown in FIG. 422 (e), the second additional decoration HS2 provides a color rendering property as to whether the second additional decoration HS2 is added in a mode with a low degree of expectation or a mode with a high degree of expectation. You may try to do it.

FIG. 422 (f) shows an effect situation in which a valid period (first valid period) occurs in a state where the integrated image IGd shown in FIG. 422 (e) is displayed.

As shown in FIG. 422 (f), when the valid period (first valid period) occurs, operation instruction images such as "press" and "down arrow" are displayed. In addition to this, the above-mentioned specific image TG is displayed in the display target area of the gauge image GG, and the operation reception is permitted by confirming the specific image TG. You will be able to recognize that. The specific image TG according to this example has a different image type from that shown in each of the above examples (FIGS. 410 to 422) for convenience of explanation, but is basically the same. Displayed as having a function. The specific image TG according to this example depicts a frog character, and the character is displaced according to the "end of the gauge image GG" which is displaced when the display area of the gauge image GG decreases. Will be done.

The specific image TG according to this example should be displayed by the same method as the example shown in FIG. 411 (a method that is not displayed at the start of the valid period but is gradually displayed with the passage of time). Alternatively, the display may be performed by a method similar to the example shown in FIG. 412 (a method in which the entire image is displayed when the validity period starts).

Further, at the timing shown in FIG. 422 (f), the specific image TG is displayed in either a mode with low expectation (snail character) or a mode with high expectation (frog character), which is omitted from the illustration. It provides a directing effect as to whether or not it is to be performed, and in the figure, a case where a mode with a high degree of expectation appears is illustrated. The specific image TG is displayed in a more promising manner when the validity period occurs in the situation shown in FIG. 422 (d) than when the validity period occurs in the situation shown in FIG. 422 (c). The ratio is high, and the expectation is higher when the validity period occurs in the situation shown in FIG. 422 (e) than when the validity period occurs in the situation shown in FIG. 422 (d). It is desirable that the ratio of displaying the specific image TG is high. The ratio may include "100%" and "0%".

According to such a configuration, it is possible to provide a color rendering index as to how much the operation-related image can be developed into a highly expected mode before the validity period occurs. Therefore, it becomes possible to improve the game fun related to the operation in a state where the validity period has not yet occurred. In addition, while the operation-related images (button image BMG, peripheral decoration image SGG, additional decoration HS1, 2) suggest the degree of expectation before the validity period occurs, after the validity period occurs, Since the expectation level is further suggested by another image (specific image TG), it is possible to preferably improve the interest in the period from before the effective period to after it occurs. Become.

In the example shown in FIG. 422, the timing of whether or not the production progresses from FIG. 422 (b) to FIG. 422 (c) and the production progresses from FIG. 422 (c) to FIG. 422 (d). At the timing of whether or not to perform, and the timing of whether or not the production progresses from FIG. 422 (d) to FIG. 422 (e), operation-related images (button image, peripheral decoration image, additional decoration, etc.) are displayed. You may hide it once. That is, in this case, when the operation-related image (button image, peripheral decoration image, additional decoration, etc.) is displayed again, it is necessary to provide the fun of whether the production has progressed or the validity period has expired. Will be able to.

Further, in the example shown in FIG. 422, the button image, the peripheral decoration image, the additional decoration, etc. are displayed in the same manner as during the validity period before the validity period occurs, but the mode is different from this. It may be displayed as (blinking, translucent, etc.).

Further, in the example shown in FIG. 422, it is desirable that the time required to gradually suggest the degree of expectation by the operation-related image before the occurrence of the validity period is longer than the set time for the validity period. ..

Although the present invention has been described above with reference to several embodiments, the present invention is not limited to these embodiments, and as shown below, various embodiments are made without departing from the gist of the present invention. It is possible to improve and change the design.

For example, in each of the above-mentioned production examples related to the automatic effect function, a display such as "auto button is being set" may be displayed, but the display may not necessarily be performed. In particular, when it is realized as a pachinko machine 1 in which the automatic effect function can always be enabled and the process itself such as "setting to the effect state" is not installed, instead of the pachinko machine 1 set in the automatic effect mode. It is desirable not to display "Auto button is being set". In the pachinko machine 1 that is not equipped with the process itself such as "setting to the effect state", the valid period in which the automatic effect function is played and the automatic effect function are set according to the type of operation reception effect that the player is allowed to operate. There may be a valid period that is not played.

Further, in each of the above-mentioned production examples, the "model image" may be an image that urges the player to operate, and is not necessarily an operation target, for example, an arrow image that points downward and moves up and down. It does not have to be displayed as an image that imitates the operating means.

In addition, when the automatic effect function is adopted in each of the above-mentioned production examples, the timing for automatically generating (automatically accepting) the operation reception within the operation valid period is set to any timing as long as it is within the operation valid period. It may be. In order to appropriately give the player an operation opportunity, the operation is performed when the operation is not detected until a predetermined timing that arrives after half or more of the operation validity period has elapsed. It is desirable that the reception is automatically generated (automatic reception), and the post-operation effect is started based on the automatically generated operation reception. In this sense, when the operation is not detected until the remaining time within the operation valid period reaches one frame, the operation reception is automatically generated (automatic reception), and the post-operation effect is produced based on the automatically generated operation reception. It is most desirable to get started. In addition, in each of the above-mentioned production examples related to the automatic effect function, if the bar display is not hidden and maintained even after the valid period ends, the operation is targeted at the timing when the valid period ends. It is desirable to perform an effect that changes the mode of the means (for example, vibration, turning off the LED, etc.). This is expected to prevent erroneous recognition by the player, such as "Is the validity period continuing?", Even if the bar display is not hidden and is displayed continuously. Become so.

In each of the effect examples described with reference to FIGS. 285 to 303 and the effect examples described with reference to FIG. 387, the model image (or bar display) is not hidden and is maintained after the operation. When starting the production, "the time from the timing when the operation is detected to the timing when the simulated image (or bar display) is hidden (the period of timing tf2 to tf4, the period of timing tg3 to tg5, and the timing) For "th3 to th4 period, etc.)", there may be at least several frames (for example, 2 frames) of time. Alternatively, there may be only one frame of time. Even if there is such a time, the period in which the image (or bar display) is displayed and the period after the post-operation production is started overlap, and some players can recognize it. In some cases.

In the effect example related to the above-mentioned "improvement of effect by using the automatic effect function (see FIG. 300)", the automatic effect function is not enabled in the state where the hold display on the effect display device 1600 is hidden. The automatic reception effect and the automatic reception effect in which the automatic effect function is enabled may be generated respectively. According to such a configuration, it is possible to generate a reception effect in a state where the number of holds is large or small, that is, it is difficult to grasp the ease with which the automatic effect function is enabled. Become. Furthermore, for example, when the non-automatic reception effect occurs while the hold display is hidden, the subsequent symbol fluctuations are stopped as compared with the case where the non-automatic reception effect occurs while the hold display is displayed. If the rate at which the automatic reception effect is generated is increased by the time it is performed, the hold display will be hidden and the automatic effect function will be enabled, making it difficult to grasp the ease of the effect. You will be able to add fun.

In addition, in the explanation example of the "help image that promotes understanding of the production", the ruler is illustrated as the "reference image showing the length unit in the horizontal direction", but other images should be used. You may. The point is that when the player operates it, a display image that is depicted without being affected by the special effect may appear. For example, it is not an image intended to promote understanding of the effect, but other functions. A display image intended to be played (for example, an image suggesting the degree of expectation, an image suggesting the current production state, an image suggesting the state related to the production setting, etc.) is drawn so as to extend in the horizontal direction. It may be displayed as an image. It should be noted that such an image does not necessarily have to be drawn by one, and may be drawn so as to extend in the horizontal direction as a whole by arranging a plurality of images side by side.

In addition, in the explanation example of "preventing mischief against multiple operating means", mischief is very different from cheating such as magnet goto, and it is not possible for the hall side to take too strict measures. It can also lead to profits. Therefore, images that appear based on the detection of operations by the player (including images that appear in the process of making a specific video appear) should be realized as having nothing to do with mischief prevention. May be good. The point is that when the player operates the plurality of operating means in a predetermined pattern (predetermined procedure), "the effect display device 1600 executes the game effect according to the jackpot determination." Display (play) a specific video that cannot appear in the state where it is played (a video with content that has nothing to do with mischief prevention (for example, shifting to a state in which a predetermined movie is played)) is displayed (played). ), "Even if there is an operation on the volume adjustment button, the change in the volume setting value related to the output volume of the production sound is not accepted, and the current volume setting value is not displayed.", "For brightness adjustment Even if there is an operation on the button, the change of the brightness setting value related to the brightness of the production lamp is not accepted, and the current brightness setting value is not displayed. " All you need is. In this case, the player can also voluntarily generate a function restriction period in which the above-mentioned specific moving image is played by operating the plurality of operating means in a predetermined pattern (procedure). Is.

Further, in the explanatory example of "prevention of mischief against a plurality of operating means", in the state where the decorative symbol is variablely displayed, it may be always controlled as the partial restriction period.

In addition, regarding the explanation example of "noise prevention by adjustment confirmation sound at the time of opening", the point is to control to the normal state where volume adjustment confirmation sound and brightness adjustment confirmation sound can be output immediately after the power is turned on. It is a gaming machine that is controlled to the normal state after passing through the restricted state in which the volume adjustment confirmation sound and the brightness adjustment confirmation sound cannot be output, and if the game is started in the restricted state, the restricted state is terminated early. It suffices as long as it is controlled to the normal state, and the length of time maintained as the restricted state may be set appropriately (set to any of several seconds to several hours). good. If the length of time maintained as the restricted state is set too short, the above-mentioned effects during the game period immediately after the store opens will not be exhibited, but the noise when the hall side sets the volume immediately after the power is turned on. It is possible to suppress this.

Further, in the explanatory example of "control over the volume adjustment confirmation sound according to the importance of the effect", the conditions are advantageous depending on whether the first special symbol is changing or the second special symbol is changing. The volume adjustment confirmation sound and the brightness adjustment confirmation sound are not output during the change of the second special symbol on the side where the game is possible, but during the change of the first special symbol on the side where the game is possible under unfavorable conditions. The case where the volume adjustment confirmation sound and the brightness adjustment confirmation sound are output is illustrated. However, it is also possible to adopt the technology for game machines that are not equipped with the second special symbol. For example, a specific symbol is prepared in which a lottery is performed under more disadvantageous conditions than the first special symbol. However, the volume adjustment confirmation sound and the brightness adjustment confirmation sound are not output during the fluctuation of the first special symbol (special symbol) on the side that can be played under favorable conditions, but the side that can be played under unfavorable conditions. The volume adjustment confirmation sound and the brightness adjustment confirmation sound may be output during the fluctuation of the specific symbol of.

Further, in the explanation example of "the period during which the operation reception is permitted (valid period) itself, the effectability", the reception allowable sound accompanying the occurrence of the special operation reception effect and the occurrence of the first and second operation reception effects are accompanied. It may be a production sound different from the reception allowable sound. Further, in FIG. 388, the reception allowable sound is output from the timing tr1 (tr11), but as "one sound data" straddling the timing tr1 (tr11), for example, it is assigned to the channel from the timing trA. It may be output.

Even if the image of the operation receiving part that receives the operation and the peripheral decoration image that decorates the periphery are prepared individually as image data and each of these image data is combined and displayed as an integrated image. good.

In the example shown in FIG. 410, when "normal button image BMGa" is displayed when an operation opportunity is given to one operation means (FIGS. 410 (a) and 410 (c)), and this case. In some cases, "special button image BMGb" having a different shape is displayed (FIGS. 410 (b) and (d)). However, when the "normal button image BMGa" is displayed (FIGS. 410 (a) and (c)), an operation opportunity is given to the first operation means (first operation receiving unit), and the "special button" is displayed. When the "image BMGb" is displayed (FIGS. 410 (b) and (d)), the second operating means (second operating receiving section) different from the first operating means (first operating receiving section) is displayed. An operation opportunity may be given.

In each of the above-mentioned explanatory examples, the members (operation means) prepared as the operation target include those that require a pressing operation (buttons, etc.), those that require an insertion / removal operation (sword decoration, etc.), and non-contact. It may be realized as something that requires operation by touch or touch (proximity sensor, etc.).

Peripheral decoration image SSG does not imitate the peripheral decoration part actually provided on the peripheral edge of the "operation receiving part to which the operation opportunity is given", but at least a part imitates the peripheral decoration part. It does not have to be, and there may be a part imitating the peripheral decoration part.

The second validity period in which the operation-related image (integrated image IG, etc.) is displayed in the "display mode in which the movement of the gauge image GG is characterized" is a finite one in which a predetermined set time is set. Instead, it may be continued indefinitely as long as a predetermined condition unrelated to the passage of time is not satisfied.

When displaying the specific image TG within the valid period, the gauge image GG does not necessarily have to be displayed.

For the "automatic reception effect" described in FIGS. 410 and later, any of the realization methods related to the "automatic reception effect" exemplified earlier may be adopted. Any of the above-mentioned realization methods may be adopted for how the model image and the gauge image are displayed when the automatic reception effect is produced.

That is, in the embodiment, the one applied to the pachinko machine 1 as a gaming machine is shown, but the present invention is not limited to this, and is applied to a pachislot machine or a gaming machine obtained by fusing a pachinko machine and a pachislot machine. In this case as well, the same effect can be obtained.

1 Pachinko machine 2 Outer frame 3 Door frame 4 Main body frame 5 Game board 5a Game area 1402 Normal symbol display 1403 First special symbol display 1404 First special hold number indicator 1405 Second special symbol display 1406 Second special hold Number indicator 1407 Round indicator 1500 Peripheral control unit 1510 Peripheral control board 2001 General winning port 2002 First starting port 2003 Gate part 2004 Second starting port 2005 Large winning port

Claims (1)

Judgment means to make a judgment and
A privilege granting means capable of granting a privilege to a player based on a predetermined result obtained by the determination by the determination means, and a privilege granting means.
It is equipped with a reception production execution means that generates a reception production that allows production reception.
As the reception effect, at least the first reception effect and the second reception effect are prepared.
The first reception production is
If the operation in a set time that effect accepted is permitted is not detected, which do not generate the same effect as the reception after effect that appears when there is said detection,
The second reception production is
Even if the operation is not detected within the set time allowed for the production reception , the same effect as the post-reception effect that appears when the effect is detected is generated.
Of the first reception effect and the second reception effect, in the first reception effect, a message is not displayed as character information indicating that the operation should be performed, but the second reception effect is performed. In, a message is displayed as text information to the effect that the operation should be performed.
When the effect reception is performed based on the fact that the operation is detected within the set time, the message display is not displayed at the stage where the set time has not yet elapsed based on the effect reception. Although it can be displayed, if the post-acceptance effect is started without the operation being detected within the set time, the effect reception is not allowed and the post-acceptance effect is started. Is not hidden and is displayed without causing any display change triggered by the elapse of the set time.
Moreover,
When the reception effect occurs, an allowable sound output means capable of outputting a reception allowable sound suggesting that the effect reception is in an acceptable state or the effect reception is in an acceptable state is provided.
As the reception allowable sound, a message sound that utters a word to the player to operate and a non-message sound that does not utter any word are prepared.
When the first reception effect occurs, the message sound may not be audibly output and the non-message sound may be audibly output as the reception allowable sound corresponding to the first reception effect, but the second reception When an effect occurs, not only the message sound but also the non-message sound can be audibly output as the reception allowable sound corresponding to the second reception effect.
Moreover,
It is possible to display a simulated image display that imitates the target of the operation, and at least the first mode and the second mode are prepared as modes for displaying the simulated image display.
When the image display is displayed in the first aspect within the set time that allows the reception of the effect, the post-acceptance effect that appears when the operation is detected even if the operation is not detected as the reception effect. There is always a type of reception effect that produces the same effect as
When the pachinko image display is displayed in the second aspect within the set time in which the effect reception is allowed, the post-reception effect that appears when the operation is detected even if the operation is not detected as the reception effect. There are cases where a reception effect of the type that generates the same effect as is occurring, and a type of reception effect that does not generate the same effect as the post-reception effect that appears when the operation is not detected. A gaming machine characterized by both being in a situation where it is occurring.

Images